JP7740461B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a predetermined bonus is awarded to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853

Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of game presentation in gaming machines such as those exemplified above.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing game presentations in an optimal manner .

The first invention of the present application is
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
an attachment determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game operation is started based on the execution of the award determination by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, with a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination being given;
A reserve notification means for executing a reserve notification by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved games before execution;
a destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes a target of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes a target of the grant determination;
A specific mode means for making the notification mode of the hold notification a specific mode different from a normal mode based on the determination result of the destination determination means;
Equipped with
The specific mode is set to a plurality of types of modes with different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
a means for determining which of the plurality of types of notification modes should be used as the notification mode for the hold notification based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means;
a means for storing, in a predetermined storage area, predetermined information that can identify which of the plurality of types of notification modes the notification mode of the hold notification is, for the hold notification of the specific mode;
Equipped with
In a situation where the notification mode of a predetermined hold notification is set to the specific mode in the first performance state, a second performance state can be set in which the hold notification according to the specific mode or the hold notification is not executed for at least the predetermined hold notification,
an execution means for executing, after the second presentation state has ended, at least the predetermined hold notification in the same notification mode as the notification mode before the second presentation state was entered, among the plurality of types of modes, based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area, without executing the determination based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means;
The transition from the first presentation state to the second presentation state can be executed without the intervention of a player's operation,
The execution means can be configured to execute, after the second performance state ends, the predetermined hold notification in the normal mode without executing the hold notification in the normal mode, and to execute the hold notification in the same mode as the notification mode before the second performance state is entered,
The special information acquired in the second performance state is identified by the destination identification means in the second performance state,
a means for enabling a predetermined notification corresponding to the number of reserved calls to be executed, the predetermined notification being different from the reserved call notification;
With respect to the hold notification of the special information acquired in the second performance state, a means for making the hold notification or the hold notification according to the specific mode not be executed in the second performance state;
The present invention is characterized by the following features.
The second invention of the present application is:
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
an attachment determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game operation is started based on the execution of the award determination by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, with a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination being given;
a means for executing a hold display by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means, the hold display being capable of displaying a display that allows a player to recognize the number of reserved game turns before execution and a display that allows a player to recognize the execution of a reserved game turn;
a destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes a target of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes a target of the grant determination;
A specific mode means that can change the display mode of the hold display to a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the identification result of the destination identification means;
Equipped with
The specific mode is set to a plurality of types of modes with different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
A means for determining which of the plurality of types of display modes the hold display should be based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means;
A means for storing, in a predetermined storage area, predetermined information that can identify which of the plurality of types of display modes the display mode of the hold display of the specific mode is;
Equipped with
In a situation where the display mode of a predetermined hold display is set to the specific mode in the first performance state, a second performance state can be set in which at least the predetermined hold display is set to the hold display according to the specific mode or the hold display is not executed,
After the second performance state ends, an execution means is provided for executing the hold display in the same display mode as the display mode before the second performance state is entered among the plurality of modes based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area without executing the determination based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means,
The transition from the first presentation state to the second presentation state can be executed without the intervention of a player's operation,
The execution means can be configured to execute, after the second performance state ends, the predetermined reserved display in the same display mode as the display mode before the second performance state is entered, without executing the reserved display in the normal mode,
The special information acquired in the second performance state is identified by the destination identification means in the second performance state,
A means for enabling a predetermined notification corresponding to the number of reservations to be executed, which is different from the reservation display;
With respect to the reserved display of the special information acquired in the second performance state, a means for making the reserved display or the reserved display according to the specific mode not be executed in the second performance state;
The present invention is characterized by the following features.

According to the present invention, it is possible to perform game presentations in an optimal manner .

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. 1A is a schematic diagram of the second operating port in a closed state, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the second operating port in an open state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device when it is in a closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device when it is in an open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a second special symbol. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a jackpot, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a miss. 10 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 10 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a reserved read-ahead process. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command response process. A diagram showing the configuration of a hold memory area. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the hold notice effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold change points during a game round. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting process for hold notice. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a presentation mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a performance scenario lottery table. 1A is a flowchart showing the first execution process of the hold notice, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the configuration of the display mode memory area. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the change suggestion effect. 10A is a flowchart showing a shift command response process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining a shift process of a reserved image. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. 10 is a flowchart showing the second execution process of the hold notice. 10 is a flowchart showing the third execution process of the hold notice. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for promoting a pending notice. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a promotion determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process according to a first modification of the first embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 10 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for hold notice. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes relating to variant example 2 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a return determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table relating to variant example 3 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting process for hold notice. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for an opening/closing execution mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a return determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 10A is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process according to a fourth modified example of the first embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a pending command setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing the first reserved read-ahead processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for an opening/closing execution mode. 10 is a flowchart showing the second reserved read-ahead processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an upper limit display mode table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to a fifth modified example of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing in the MPU of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for restoring a hold notice. 10 is a flowchart showing a display mode setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. A flowchart showing the fourth execution process of the hold notice. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for promoting a pending notice. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 10A is a flowchart showing main processing according to a sixth modified example of the first embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing normal processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a display mode setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes relating to variant example 7 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a mode switching determination process. A figure showing how switching between presentation modes is restricted. A figure showing the switching manner of the presentation mode in variant example 8 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 10 is a flowchart showing a pending command response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for hold notice. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in winning/losing lotteries, etc. in the second embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a low probability mode, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a high probability mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special chart, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special chart, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a second time-saving game state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table for the low frequency support mode, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table for the high frequency support mode, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a device opening and closing game. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 10 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a high-probability mode update/termination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update/end process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state. 10A is a flowchart showing a process for starting a final display, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a process for ending a final display. 10 is a flowchart showing the general game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of starting normal map fluctuations. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. This is a flowchart showing the opening and closing process of the role-playing device. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a second transition performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 10A is a flowchart showing the process for updating the remaining number of times displayed, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the process for updating the number of times displayed when the player has lost. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-shortened game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-shortened game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-shortened game state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-shortened game state in variant example 1 of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. A figure for explaining the second time-shortened gaming state in variant example 2 of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-shortened game state. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special misses, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a third time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a final display. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for starting fluctuations. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the third time-shortened game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the third time-shortened game state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow of the regular game round in the final game round. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 4 of the second embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of a type table for a jackpot, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a third time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 10A is a flowchart showing the first transition effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a game play effect for the first time-shortened game state. 10A is a flowchart showing the process of setting the third transition effect, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the effect for the third time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for starting the fluctuation, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the fluctuation display pattern and the performance for each game. This is a diagram showing examples of specific effects A to E. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 5 of the second embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of a type table for a jackpot, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a third time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 6 of the second embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a type table for jackpots, (c) is a figure showing an example of a second time-shortened game state, and (d) is a figure showing an example of a third time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode ending process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a final display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process according to the seventh modified example of the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special misses in variant 8 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a third time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process B for determining transition to the third time-shortened gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process B for determining a transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process according to a ninth modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process according to a tenth modification of the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal according to a modification 11 of the second embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal according to a twelfth modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal. 1A is a diagram for explaining connection terminals, and FIG. 1B is a diagram for explaining characteristics of external signals. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in winning/losing lotteries, etc. in the third embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a low probability mode, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a high probability mode. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a second special symbol. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a type of special miss result, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a type of sudden time-saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 10 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 10A is a flowchart showing the process for determining whether to suddenly enter a time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the configuration of a RAM. 10 is a flowchart showing a reservation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. This is a diagram to explain the special reach miss A effect and the special reach miss B effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode ending process. 10 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. A flowchart showing the second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing the general game play control processing. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of starting normal map fluctuations, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation display time. 1A is a flowchart showing the processing for supporting electric roles, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a game mode in which the device is opened and closed. This is a flowchart showing the opening and closing process of the role-playing device. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 10A is a flowchart showing the second transition effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the display of the pattern display device. 10A is a flowchart showing the process of setting a performance for reservation, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display of an image for reservation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10A is a flowchart showing the process of setting the final effect, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the display of the pattern display device. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to a sudden time-shortened gaming state in a first variant example of the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a reserved update process. 10A is a flowchart showing the effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the reservation image update process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-shortening game state according to variant example 2 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a priority information storage area. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a normal game in a sudden time-saving game state, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a game in which a special device is opened and closed. 10 is a flowchart showing a reserved update process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-shortened gaming state according to variant 3 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a counter area for the time-shortened gaming state. 10A is a flowchart showing the process for determining whether a game has suddenly entered a time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an occurrence order information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing a reservation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 10 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. A flowchart showing the second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. A diagram showing the state of the counter area for time-saving game mode. 10A is a diagram showing a counter area for a time-shortened gaming state according to a fourth modified example of the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an occurrence order information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing a reservation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. A flowchart showing the second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10A is a diagram showing a counter area for time-shortening game states according to a fifth variant of the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the priority of each time-shortening game state. 10A is a flowchart showing the process for determining whether or not a game state has suddenly shifted to a time-shortened game state, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the state of the counter area for the time-shortened game state. 10A is a flowchart showing the reservation process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the state of the counter area for the time-shortened game mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 10 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. 10A is a flowchart showing the second transition process for the sudden time-shortened gaming state, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the state of the counter area for the time-shortened gaming state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. A diagram showing the state of the counter area for time-saving game mode. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a time-shortening game state according to a sixth modified example of the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the priority of each time-shortening game state. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a normal game in a time-saving game mode, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a game in which a special device is opened and closed. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether to suddenly transition to a time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 10 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling time-saving game state relating to variant example 7 of the third embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a type of time-saving game state, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the priority of each time-saving game state. 10A is a flowchart showing the process of starting fluctuations, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the process of controlling the number of times a special game is played. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for determining transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. A flowchart showing the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-saving game state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when the number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number of plays during the time-saving play state or when a special miss result occurs. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a win/lose table for a low probability mode relating to variant 8 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a special loss result. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special miss result. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether to suddenly transition to a time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a reservation release process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reservation display section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in winning/losing lotteries, etc. in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a low probability mode, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a high probability mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special chart, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special chart, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a normal winning type table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a low-prize opening and closing game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a high-prize opening and closing game. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 10 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether to suddenly transition to a time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode ending process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. 10A is a flowchart showing the normal game play control process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the confirmed display time. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of starting normal map fluctuations. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the stop result for a normal winning bid, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the variable display time. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. 10A is a flowchart showing the opening count setting process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the upper limit opening time setting process. This is a flowchart showing the opening and closing process of the role-playing device. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 10A is a flowchart showing the second transition effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the display of the pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying map changes. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the general map display area. A diagram to explain the variable display in the general map display area. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop result setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for changing a stop result. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for special light emission effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special light-emitting effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a start timing setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the start timing of the special light-emitting effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a high prize device opening and closing game according to variant example 1 of the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the opening and closing process of the role-playing device. 10A is a flowchart showing an upper limit opening time setting process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a closing time setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a high prize device opening and closing game relating to variant example 2 of the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the opening and closing process of the role-playing device. 10 is a flowchart showing an opening count change process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching the operation mode of the normal side game. A figure showing the configuration of the special image display unit in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a low probability mode, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a high probability mode. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a second special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a type of special miss result, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-shortened game state, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling time-shortened game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 10 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. This is a diagram showing an example of a stop result table for a jackpot corresponding to the second special chart. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a stop result table for a jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a stop result table for a special miss. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a stop result table for a normal miss corresponding to the second special pattern, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a stop result table for a normal miss corresponding to the first special pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for determining transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a priority process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether to suddenly transition to a time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode ending process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing the general game play control processing. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of starting normal map changes, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of normal map change display time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a device opening and closing game. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for electric utility support. This is a flowchart showing the opening and closing process of the role-playing device. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a remaining number of times process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for starting fluctuations. 10 is a flowchart showing the first setting process for the game presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing the second setting process for the game play presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing the third setting process for the game play presentation. A flowchart showing the fourth setting process for the game play presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the display of the number of misses. 10A is a flowchart showing the second transition effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the display of the pattern display device. 10A is a flowchart showing a third transition effect setting process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing an end effect setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of play during the time-saving play state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of play during the time-saving play state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of play during the time-saving play state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. A figure showing an example of display of a pattern display device related to variant example 1 of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop result setting process for a special miss. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a stop result table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of play during the time-saving play state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a special image display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration for discharging game balls that have flowed down the game area in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the notification display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of programs and data in a main ROM. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in the main RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing in the MPU of the main control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a setting value update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special chart special power control process. 10 is a flowchart showing the special chart change start process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration for inputting the detection results of the ball entry detection sensor. 10 is a flowchart showing a ball scoring detection process. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a dispensing control device and various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the dispensing control device. 10 is a flowchart showing base value and difference pitch count processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an execution process for a base value and a difference in the number of balls. 10 is a flowchart showing a base value calculation process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting manner of each area in a work area for non-specific control. 10 is a flowchart showing an excess determination process. 10A is a flowchart showing a display setting process, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the value of a display type counter and the display type. 10 is a flowchart showing a notification display process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the notification display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether to stop playing a game. 10A is a flowchart showing an excess start-up process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a partial clear process. 10 is a flowchart showing a partial clearing execution process. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing flow in a game restriction that uses the difference in ball count, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the change in the difference in ball count. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the mode of the game stop state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the mode of the initialization process when power is restored. A figure showing the change in the number of balls difference in variant example 1 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of a work area for non-specific control, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lowest point determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an excess determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing a process for clearing when power is interrupted. 10 is a flowchart showing a clearing execution process when power is interrupted. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in winning/losing lotteries, etc. in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special chart, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special chart, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 10 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 10 is a flowchart showing the special game play control processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the large prize opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 10 is a flowchart showing a high-probability mode update process. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. (a) A flowchart showing the process for determining whether to suddenly transition to a time-saving game state, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the game state when a special miss result occurs and whether or not to suddenly transition to a time-saving game state. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the corresponding variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a high-probability mode ending process. 10 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode ending process. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. 10 is a flowchart showing the general game play control processing. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of starting normal map fluctuations, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation display time. 1A is a flowchart showing the processing for supporting electric roles, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a game mode in which the device is opened and closed. This is a flowchart showing the opening and closing process of the role-playing device. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying special chart changes. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for starting the fluctuation, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the fluctuation display pattern and the performance for each game. 10 is a flowchart showing a second transition performance setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. A figure showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special chart in variant example 1 of the seventh embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to a sudden time-shortened game state in a variant example 2 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for executing guide performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that for convenience, the components within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to this outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is made up of plate materials connected on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may also be attached to the island equipment in the amusement hall.

The gaming machine main body 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state that allows it to be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connecting portion of the upper and left frame portions of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connecting portion of the lower and left frame portions of the outer frame 11. These upper support brackets 17 and lower support brackets 18 form a support mechanism that allows the gaming machine main body 12 to rotate toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11, with the left side being the base end and the right side being the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see Figures 2 and 3).

As shown in Figure 2, the gaming machine main body 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side being the base end of rotation and the right side being the tip end of rotation.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. A rear pack unit 15 is also rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front (see Figure 3).

Next, we will explain the front door frame 14. As shown in Figure 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose external shape is approximately the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20, allowing almost the entire play area PE (described below) to be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the back side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder has a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, with the two glass panels 23 facing each other from the front and rear across the partition. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 double-cover the play area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder; each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is optional, and may be one, three or more. However, from the perspective of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels, with each glass panel facing each other at a specified gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of a glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, various light-emitting devices such as lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, a lamp portion (annular illumination portion) 26 incorporating a light-emitting device such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window portion 21. The lamp portion 26 lights up or flashes in response to changes in the game status, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp portion 27 that lights up in the event of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the lamp portion 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and prize ball lamp portions 28 that light up when prize balls are being paid out are provided on the left and right sides of that. In addition, speaker portions 29 that output sound effects and other sounds according to the game status are provided near the left and right prize ball lamp portions 28.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32, which bulge toward the front, are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33, which opens upward, is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34, which also opens upward, is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device (described below) and guiding them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism (described below). The lower tray 34 also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

In addition, the top surface of the upper bulge 31 is provided with a presentation operation unit 36 (more specifically, a push button) that can be manually operated by the player. For example, by manually operating the presentation operation unit 36 in accordance with suggestions displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 (described below), the presentation content on the display screen G, etc., will change to a predetermined presentation content corresponding to that operation.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32, protruding toward the front. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism, which will be described later.

As shown in Figure 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. The passage forming unit 45 has a receiving port that protrudes rearward and opens upward at its upper corner, and by dividing this receiving port into left and right halves with a partition wall, the entrance to the front door side upper tray passage and the entrance to the front door side lower tray passage are separated. Gaming balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and gaming balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

Protruding shafts are provided at the upper and lower ends of the rear surface of the front door frame 14, near the base end of the pivot. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 2, multiple rearward-extending hooks 49 are arranged in a vertical line at the tip of the pivot on the rear surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is primarily composed of a resin base 50, which has a generally rectangular outer shape similar to the outer frame 11. The height of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, leaving a small gap between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A panel is attached to the outer frame 11 to close this gap. The panel is positioned below the resin base 50 (more specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 rests on the panel.

Support brackets 51, 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the resin base 50, near the pivot base end. Axial holes are formed in the support brackets 51, 52, and the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these axle holes, thereby supporting the front door frame 14 rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

The front of the resin base 50 has insertion holes at the pivot tip end for inserting the hooks 49 provided on the back of the front door frame 14. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3 , the locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 is hidden behind the back of the inner frame 13. Therefore, when the hooks 49 engage with the locking device 55 (more specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion holes, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 55 also has multiple inner frame hook members 57 extending rearward from the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 engage with the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main body 12 is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50 to unlock the locking device 55. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and the locking device 55 is configured so that when a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned counterclockwise, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A roughly oval window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is blocked from the rear by the game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 is made of wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front surface of the plywood, with its front surface exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A play area PE through which game balls flow down is formed in this exposed area, i.e., the front surface of the game board 60. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (particularly the various components arranged in the play area PE) will be explained below with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

The game board 60 has multiple large and small openings that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, etc.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating opening 62, or the second operating opening 63, it is detected by a winning sensor (detection sensor), and based on the detection result, the player is awarded a bonus, such as the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls. In this case, if a ball enters the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and if a ball enters the variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out. Furthermore, if a ball enters the first operating opening 62, 3 game balls are paid out, and if a ball enters the second operating opening 63, 1 game ball is paid out. Incidentally, if a ball enters the through gate 64, no game balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls can be any number; for example, the number of prize balls associated with the first actuation port 62 may be the same as the number of prize balls associated with the second actuation port 63, or the number of prize balls associated with the second actuation port 63 may be greater than the number of prize balls associated with the first actuation port 62. The number of prize balls associated with the variable prize winning device 65 may also be the same as or less than the number of prize balls associated with other actuation ports. A predetermined number of game balls may also be paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64.

An outlet 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60, and game balls that do not enter any of the various entry ports are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "entering" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening position, and includes not only situations in which a game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through that opening position, but also situations in which a game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through an opening position. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 68, balls entering the general entry port 61, operating ports 62, 63, variable entry device 65, or through gate 64 will also be referred to as "winning."

The game board 60 is also fitted with numerous nails 69 to appropriately distribute and adjust the path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also installed. These nails 69, windmills, and other components diversify the flow of game balls, and are adjusted to ensure that winnings into the general winning slots 61 and the like mentioned above occur with an appropriate probability.

The variable display unit 67 is located in the center of the gaming board 60. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back side of the gaming board 60 (Figure 3), and its display screen G can be viewed through an opening provided in the center of the gaming board 60. A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front of the gaming board 60, corresponding to the periphery of the opening.

The center frame 76 protrudes forward from the front of the game board 60, and the gap between the front of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents game balls flowing down the game area PE from entering the inner area of the center frame 76 and coming into contact with the display screen G. The center frame 76 also distributes the flow paths of game balls as they flow down the game area PE to the left and right, forming a left route that passes through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route that passes through the right side.

Whether the game ball flows down (passes through) the left or right route is determined by the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, i.e., the launch force of the game ball. The launched game ball enters the play area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, so the stronger the launch force of the game ball, the more likely it is to flow down the right route.

More specifically, when a player rotates the game ball launch handle 41 as a first launch operation by a rotation amount within a first range that is equal to or greater than a predetermined rotation amount but less than a reference rotation amount, the launched game ball flows down the left route. When a player rotates the game ball launch handle 41 as a second launch operation by a rotation amount within a second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the launched game ball flows down the right route. The predetermined rotation amount is the rotation amount that allows the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 (described below) and enter the play area PE, and the reference rotation amount is the rotation amount that launches the game ball with enough force to reach the top of the center frame 76.

A first actuation port 62 that opens upward is located below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The first actuation port 62 is located in the center of the gaming board 60, but game components such as nails 69 are arranged to prevent game balls flowing down the right route from entering the first actuation port 62. In other words, only game balls flowing down the left route can enter the first actuation port 62. Therefore, when a player aims to enter the first actuation port 62, they will play by firing the game ball so that it flows down the left route. A first actuation port entry sensor 62a (Figure 7) is provided in the first actuation port 62, and this entry sensor 62a detects game balls that enter the first actuation port 62.

The second actuation port 63 is located to the right of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second actuation port 63 will be explained with reference to Figure 5.

The second operating port 63 is provided with a normal power attachment 63a (variable receiving means) that serves as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces, which are supported so as to be rotatable in the left and right directions, are positioned so as to sandwich the opening serving as the second operating port 63 from both the left and right.

The rotation of each of the movable pieces allows the opening to be switched between a closed state (non-support state or non-guiding state) shown in FIG. 5(a) and an open state (support state or guiding state) shown in FIG. 5(b). Specifically, a protrusion 63d is provided at the top of the second actuation opening 63 so as to protrude forward. When the movable pieces are in an upright position as shown in FIG. 5(a), the gap between each movable piece and the protrusion 63d is less than the diameter of the game ball, preventing the game ball from entering the second actuation opening 63. On the other hand, when the movable pieces are rotated so as to tilt outward as shown in FIG. 5(b), an opening large enough for the game ball to pass through is formed between the movable pieces and the protrusion 63d, allowing the game ball to enter the second actuation opening 63. A second actuation opening winning sensor 63c is provided at the second actuation opening 63, and the winning sensor 63c detects a game ball that has entered the second actuation opening 63.

The normal power mechanism 63a is also provided with a drive unit 63b that drives each movable piece. Each movable piece is driven by the drive unit 63b through a link mechanism (not shown), thereby switching between an open state (inclined position) and a closed state (upright position). Incidentally, the first operating port 62 is not provided with a normal power mechanism (opening/closing structure).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to enter the second operating port 63 when it is closed, but it may be possible to enter. In other words, it may be possible to enter the second operating port 63 when it is closed, but it may be more difficult to enter (win) than when it is open. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of entering the second operating port 63 differs between the open and closed states, and the degree of closure or openness is arbitrary. Furthermore, the configuration of the normal power device 63a is not limited to the above, and it may be possible, for example, for the second operating port 63 to be opened and closed by a movable piece that rotates back and forth or slides back and forth or left and right.

As shown in Figure 4, a through gate 64 is located above (upstream of) the second operating port 63 on the right route. The through gate 64 has a through hole (not shown) that runs vertically, and a game ball that enters the through gate 64 passes through the through gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, a game ball that enters the through gate 64 can also enter the second operating port 63. A through entry sensor 64a (Figure 7) is provided on the through gate 64, and this entry sensor 64a detects a game ball that enters the through gate 64.

The through gate 64 serves as a trigger for opening the normal power device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a prize is won through the through gate 64, and if the result of the internal lottery is an opening result (support win), the normal power device 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a device opening/closing game (support execution mode) is executed in which the normal power device 63a is returned to the closed state.

On the right route, a variable winning device 65 is located below (downstream of) the second operating port 63. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 6.

The variable prize-winning device 65 is equipped with a large prize opening 65a that opens to the front and an opening/closing door 65b that opens and closes the large prize opening 65a. The large prize opening 65a is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow multiple game balls to enter at the same time. The large prize opening 65a is connected to a guide passage 65e located on the back side of the game board 60, and is configured so that all game balls that enter the large prize opening 65a are guided to the guide passage 65e. A large prize opening entry sensor 65c is located in the guide passage 65e, and the entry sensor 65c detects game balls that enter the large prize opening 65a.

The variable winning device 65 is also provided with a drive unit 65d that drives the opening/closing door 65b. The opening/closing door 65b is driven by the drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between a closed state (Figure 6(a)) in which game balls cannot enter the large prize opening 65a, and an open state (Figure 6(b)) in which game balls can enter the large prize opening 65a. Specifically, the opening/closing door 65b is normally in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when an internal lottery is won to transition to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game).

The opening and closing execution mode is a mode that is entered when a jackpot is won. This opening and closing execution mode will be explained in detail later. In the event of a jackpot, the variable winning device 65 may be opened repeatedly for up to a maximum of multiple rounds (e.g., 10 rounds), with one round consisting of the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10 prizes).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to win a prize through the large prize opening 65a when it is closed, but it may be possible to win a prize. In other words, it may be possible to win a prize through the large prize opening 65a when it is closed, but it may be more difficult to win (make it more difficult to win) than when it is open. In short, as long as the ease of winning a prize through the large prize opening 65a differs between the open and closed states, the degree of closure or openness is arbitrary.

Here, only game balls that flow down the right route can win the second operating port 63, through gate 64, and variable winning device 65. Therefore, when a player aims to win the second operating port 63, through gate 64, or variable winning device 65, they will play by firing the game ball so that it flows down the right route.

As shown in Figure 4, a main display unit 81 is provided below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the play area PE and protrudes forward from the front of the play board 60. The front of the main display unit 81 is provided with a special symbol display section 43 and a regular symbol display section 44, which display predetermined images, etc. Each of these display sections 43, 44 is visible from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14. The gap dimension between the front of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of a game ball. This prevents the game ball from passing in front of the main display unit 81, ensuring the visibility of the various display sections 43, 44.

The special symbol display unit 43 is provided with a first special symbol display unit AS that displays the results of a lottery based on winning the first operating port 62, and a second special symbol display unit BS that displays the results of a lottery based on winning the second operating port 63.

In the first special symbol display unit AS, a winning entry into the first operating port 62 triggers a changing display of the image, and the result of the changing display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the first operating port 62. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the first operating port 62 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the changing display in the first special symbol display unit AS stops, and after the specified image is displayed as the stopping result, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode described above.

In the second special symbol display unit BS, a winning entry into the second operating port 63 triggers a changing display of the image, and the result of the changing display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the second operating port 63. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the second operating port 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the changing display in the second special symbol display unit BS stops, and after the specified image is displayed as the stopping result, the system transitions to the opening/closing execution mode described above.

In the following, to distinguish between the image that changes and is displayed in response to a winning entry into the first operating port 62 and the image that changes and is displayed in response to a winning entry into the second operating port 63, the former will be referred to as the first special image or first special design, and the latter will be referred to as the second special image or second special design.

Here, based on a win in either operating port 62, 63, a variable display is initiated in the corresponding special symbol display unit AS, BS, and one play session in the special symbol display unit AS, BS occurs when the specified stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. However, one play session is not limited to the above. For example, in a configuration where a single display area is provided and the variable display is displayed in that single display area regardless of which operating port 62, 63 a win occurs, one play session is considered to be when the variable display is initiated in that single display area and the variable display is stopped with the specified stop result displayed.

The main display unit 81 is also provided with a special symbol reserve count display unit AM. The number of times a game ball has entered the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved up to four times, and the special symbol reserve count display unit AM can display the number of reserved first special symbols (first actuation port 62) and the number of reserved second special symbols (second actuation port 63) separately.

The normal map display unit 44 is a display unit for displaying the results of the internal lottery conducted based on winning at the through gate 64. In this case, the normal map display unit 44 displays a changing pattern triggered by winning at the through gate 64, and as a result of the display stopping, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on winning at the through gate 64 is displayed clearly. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning at the through gate 64 is a winning result that corresponds to a transition to a support state that opens the normal power device 63a, the normal map display unit 44 displays a predetermined stop result, the display stops, and then the system transitions to the support state. Note that the pattern that is displayed in a changing manner triggered by winning at the through gate 64 is sometimes called a normal pattern or a normal map.

Here, based on a win at the through gate 64, the variable display begins on the regular map display unit 44, and the period from when the specified stop result is displayed until the variable display stops corresponds to one play time on the regular map display unit 44. In the following, to distinguish between play times on the regular map display unit 44 and play times on the special map display units AS and BS, the former will sometimes be referred to as a regular map play time, and the latter as a special map play time.

The normal map display unit 44 also has a normal map reserve number display unit FM. A game ball can be reserved up to four times after entering the through gate 64, and the normal map reserve number display unit FM can display the number of reserved normal maps (through gate 64).

The special map display unit 43 and the regular map display unit 44 are configured as segment display devices with multiple segments, but are not limited to this and may be configured as other display devices such as liquid crystal display devices.

In addition, although not shown, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display section for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode. The round display section begins displaying the number of rounds when the opening and closing execution mode is started or has started. This display continues without changing the display content while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, and ends when the opening and closing execution mode is ended or has ended.

Next, we will explain the variable display unit 67. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a pattern display device 75 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches between) a pattern, which is a type of picture.

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described below. Note that the pattern display device 75 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The pattern display device 75 displays patterns arranged, for example, at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are displayed in a changing manner by scrolling left and right. In this case, the changing display on the pattern display device 75 is initiated based on a win in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. In other words, when a changing display is performed on the special symbol display unit 43, a changing display is also performed on the pattern display device 75 accordingly. Then, when the variable winning device 65 transitions to a jackpot game state (open/close execution mode) in which it is opened, a predetermined pattern combination is displayed stopped on a preset pay line on the pattern display device 75.

The pattern display device 75 also displays a hold indication corresponding to the first special symbol display area AS and the second special symbol display area BS. This hold indication displays a predetermined hold image, and the number of images displayed indicates the number of reserved items in each operating port 63, 64. The number of reserved items is not limited to that indicated by the hold images, but may also be indicated by a numerical display. Furthermore, the number may not be limited to the pattern display device 75, but may instead be indicated by a display unit (a display unit separate from the hold number display units AM, FM of the main display unit 81) or a light-emitting unit (hold lamp unit) provided on the game board 60.

The configuration of the inner frame 13 will now be described with reference again to Figure 2. Provided below the area on the resin base 50 where the game board 60 is mounted is a game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches game balls toward the play area PE based on operation of the game ball launch handle 41. The game ball launching mechanism 110 primarily comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls positioned at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball transport device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch standby position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111-113 are mounted. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, thereby integrating the game ball launching mechanism 110 with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 at an angle so that it slopes upward toward the game board 60. A ball stopper is provided near the downstream end (i.e., the bottom end) of the launch rail 112, which stops game balls supplied from the ball delivery device 113 in the above-mentioned launch standby position. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the electrical signal output from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the gaming ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the gaming board 60, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the gaming board 60.

As shown in Figure 4, the guide rail 100 defines the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged facing each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and these two rails 101, 102 define a single guide passage 103. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion).

Furthermore, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the game board 60 at the end of the exit section, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide path 103, thereby preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

As shown in Figure 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the bottom edge of the gaming board 60. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the bottom edge of the gaming board 60. This brings the rails 100, 112 close to the bottom edge of the gaming board 60, while creating a predetermined gap between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is located below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is molded integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and instead returns as a foul ball through the guide passage 103, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. The foul ball passage 46 leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage 46 are discharged into the lower tray 34. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball launched, and allows the foul ball to be returned to the player.

A through-hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-to-rear direction is formed to the left of the launch rail 112 in the resin base 50 (more specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14), and a passageway forming member 121 is disposed in this through-hole. The passageway forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper tray passage and a main body side lower tray passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage and main body side lower tray passage lead to the game ball distribution section, which will be described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passageway forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 fits below the passageway forming member 121, and the front door side upper tray passage is disposed below the main body side upper tray passage, and the front door side upper tray passage is disposed below the main body side lower tray passage.

Attached to the resin base 50 below the passage-forming member 121 is an opening/closing member 124 that opens and closes the upper tray passage and the lower tray passage. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft at its lower end so that it can rotate forward and backward. A biasing member is also provided that biases it forward to close the upper tray passage and the lower tray passage. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown, closing the upper tray passage and the lower tray passage. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out if the front door frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the upper tray passage or the lower tray passage. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving port provided in the passage-forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage on the main body side and the upper tray passage on the front door side are connected, and the lower tray passage on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the front door side are also connected.

Next, the back structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be explained based on Figure 3.

On the rear surface of the resin base 50, on the rotation base end side, bearing fittings 132 are arranged side by side, one above the other. The bearing fittings 132 have bearing portions formed spaced apart from each other above and below, and these bearing portions allow the rear pack unit 15 to be rotatably attached to the inner frame 13.

Multiple locking fittings are provided on the back of the resin base 50, and these locking fittings attach the game board 60 to the resin base 50. Here, we will explain the configuration of the back of the game board 60.

A display control device (not shown) is attached to the variable display unit 67, which is located in the center of the game board 60, so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind. A performance control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a performance control device 143 and a mounting base 144, with the performance control device 143 attached to the mounting base 144.

The performance control device 143 is equipped with a performance control board that controls audio, lamp displays, and the display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device (described below). The performance control board is housed in a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in Figure 3, a collection board 150 is provided on the back of the game board 60 below the variable display unit 67. The collection board 150 is equipped with a game ball recovery mechanism that recovers game balls that have entered the various winning holes, and a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into the various winning holes, etc.

Explaining the game ball recovery mechanism, the collection board 150 has recovery passages that correspond to each of the various ball entry sections, such as the general winning opening 61. These recovery passages run from the entry sections down along the back of the game board 60, defining the path along which the game balls fall. The recovery passages converge near the bottom of the game board 60, and all game balls that pass through an entry section, such as the general winning opening 61, collect at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery passage. The outlet of each recovery passage is open downward, and a discharge passage is provided at the end (more specifically, below the game board 60). Game balls that collect below the game board 60 via the recovery passage are discharged to the discharge passage. The outlet 68 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not enter any of the winning openings are also discharged to the discharge passage via the outlet 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with winning sensors (detection sensors) that individually correspond to the various ball entry sections, such as the general winning opening 61. These winning sensors are positioned midway along each recovery passageway leading to the ball entry sections, such as the general winning opening 61, and detect the passage of a game ball when the game ball's fall path is defined along the recovery passageway. In other words, when a game ball passes through a detection area located midway along each recovery passageway, the ball's entry into a ball entry section, such as the general winning opening 61, is detected. The winning sensors are composed of, for example, magnetic sensors that detect changes in the magnetic field that occur when a game ball passes through the detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to a main control unit 160 (more specifically, the main control unit) located on the back side of the gaming board 60, and detection signals from these winning sensors are output to the main control unit. The main control unit 160 and its associated components are described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly board 150 from the rear, and is composed of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has the function of mainly controlling the game (main control circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The board box 163 comprises a roughly rectangular box base (front case body) and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a sealing unit that serves as a sealing means, thereby sealing the board box 163. Multiple sealing units are provided on the long sides of the board box 163, and at least one of these is used to perform the sealing process.

The sealing section can be configured in any way so long as it securely connects the box base and box cover. This structure, however, secures the connection by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole that makes up the sealing section. The sealing process using the sealing section prevents unauthorized opening after sealing and allows early and easy detection of any unauthorized openings. Even after opening, the box can be resealed. Specifically, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the multiple sealing sections. When opening the board box 163, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection between the sealing section with the locking claw inserted and the other sealing sections is severed. This separates the box base and box cover of the board box 163, allowing the main control board inside to be removed. To reseal the box, a locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing section. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

One short side of the base box 163 has multiple connecting pieces that protrude outward. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one with the multiple connectable pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the connecting pieces and connectable pieces form a seal between the base box 163 and the mounting base 161.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained with reference to Figures 2 and 3.

As shown in Figure 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the rear pack unit 15. The rear pack unit 15 includes a rear pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism 202, a discharge passage panel 203, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in Figure 3, has a base 211 to which the payout mechanism 202 and other components are attached, and a protective cover 212 that protrudes from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, with only the bottom open, and is large enough to enclose at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 has an external output terminal 213 on its upper right side. The external output terminal 213 has various output terminals, and various signals are output via these output terminals to the hall computer HC (management control device) at the gaming hall. The base portion 211 also has a pair of upper and lower latching pins on its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The latching pins are inserted into bearing fittings 132 (more specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13, thereby rotatably supporting the back pack unit 15 relative to the inner frame 13. The pivot tip of the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener for fastening to a fastening hole provided on the inner frame 13. The fastener is fitted into the fastening hole to secure the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13.

A payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211, bypassing the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is located at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and gaming balls supplied from the island equipment of the gaming hall are sequentially replenished into the tank 221. A tank rail that gently slopes downstream is connected below the tank 221, and a case rail that extends vertically is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail. Gaming balls paid out by the payout device 222 are supplied to a gaming ball distribution unit provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution unit has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is configured so that the inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the upper tray passage on the main body side and the upper tray passage on the front door side described above, and the outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the lower tray passage on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the front door side.

As shown in Figure 3, the discharge passage panel 203 and the control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel 203 has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to island equipment or the like in the gaming hall, and game balls that have been guided into the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like pass through the discharge passage and are discharged outside the pachinko machine 10.

The control device aggregate unit 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base on which the payout control device 181 and the power supply and firing control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and firing control device 191 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 181 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board that controls the payout device 222 is housed within a board box, and a status return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, if a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, pressing the status return switch will clear the ball jam.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, which generates and outputs the required power for various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41.

The power supply and firing control device 191 is equipped with a power outage monitoring unit (power outage monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power supply and detects the occurrence of a power outage or other power outage. The pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and retain various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained and the state at the time of the power outage can be restored when the power is restored. For example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. The power supply and firing control device 191 is also equipped with a RAM erase switch. When the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 311 of the main control unit 162 is equipped with an MPU 312. The MPU 312 contains a ROM 313 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 312, a RAM 314 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 313 are executed, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits that function as random number generators, and other built-in circuits.

RAM 314 is configured to retain (back up) data using backup voltage from the power supply and firing control device 191 even after a power outage occurs, and RAM 314 has a backup area separate from areas for temporarily storing various data, etc. The backup area is an area for storing the stack pointer, values of each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power outage in the event of a power outage. When recovering from the power outage (when power is restored), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

In the configuration shown in Figure 7, ROM 313 and RAM 314 are integrated into a single chip for MPU 312, but this is not limited to this and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 162.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. In addition, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. The various sensors include a general prize entry sensor 61a, a first prize entry sensor 62a, a second prize entry sensor 63c, a through prize entry sensor 64a, and a large prize entry sensor 65c, which detect entries into the general prize entry port 61, the first actuation port 62, the second actuation port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable prize entry device 65. The MPU 312 performs a prize entry determination (ball entry determination) for each entry section based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, and 65c. Additionally, the MPU 312 conducts various lotteries based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62, the second actuation port 63, and the through gate 64.

The output side of the MPU 312 is connected to the payout control device 181, the presentation control device 143, etc. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181, for example, based on the result of the winning determination for the prize ball entry section corresponding to the payout of a prize ball.

Various commands, such as a change start command, type command, change end command, opening command, and ending command, are output to the performance control device 143. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is composed of information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of this predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, various drive units, such as drive unit 63b for the normal power device 63a and drive unit 65d for the variable winning device 65, are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 311, and the MPU 312 controls the drive of the various drive units through these driver circuits. Specifically, when a transition to the open/close execution mode occurs, the MPU 312 controls the drive of drive unit 65d so that the opening/closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65 is driven. In addition, when a transition to the support state occurs, the MPU 312 controls the drive of drive unit 63b so that each movable piece of the normal power device 63a is driven. In addition, during each special symbol game, display control is performed on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS in the special symbol display unit 43. In addition, during a normal symbol game, display control is performed on the normal symbol display unit 44.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and information regarding ball entries into various entry areas and lottery results such as jackpots is output to the hall computer HC via this external output terminal 213. This allows the hall computer HC to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) at, for example, an amusement facility. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 311, payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power.

The power supply and firing control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring unit 315, which monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage output from the power supply and firing control device 191. When the output voltage from the power supply and firing control device 191 falls below 22 volts, the power outage monitoring unit 315 determines that a power outage (power shutdown) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) provided on the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. This causes the main control device 162 to recognize the occurrence of a power outage and immediately execute NMI interrupt processing, and then execute power outage processing based on this. Incidentally, the power supply and firing control device 191 is provided with a power outage power supply unit, such as a backup capacitor, and in the event of a power outage or when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, power for memory retention is supplied from the power outage power supply unit to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. In addition, the power supply and launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

Based on various commands input from the main control unit 162, the performance control unit 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, and controls the display control unit 350. The display control unit 350 controls the display of the pattern display unit 75 based on commands input from the performance control unit 143. In this case, based on various commands input from the main control unit 162, the performance control unit 143 determines the time for which the patterns on the pattern display unit 75 will be displayed and the type of pattern combination that will ultimately be displayed as a stopped pattern, as well as whether or not a reach will occur and the content of the reach performance.

Here, the display content of the pattern display device 75 will be explained based on Figures 8 to 10.

As shown in Figures 8(a) to (j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in Figure 9(a), the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 has three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up on the upper, middle, and lower rows. Each symbol column Z1-Z3 is configured with main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper symbol column Z1 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-symbol between each main symbol. The lower symbol column Z3 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-symbol between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 are configured with 18 symbols. In contrast, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a "4" main symbol additionally arranged between the "9" main symbol and the "1" main symbol, with one sub-symbol between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle symbol column Z2 alone has 10 main symbols arranged, for a total of 20 symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of these symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclical manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9(b), on the display screen G, three symbols are displayed in a static fashion for each symbol column, resulting in a total of nine symbols (3 x 3).

Five active lines are set on the display screen G: left line L1, middle line L2, right line L3, downward right line L4, and upward right line L5. The display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1, lower symbol row Z3, and middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all symbol rows Z1-Z3 ends with a combination of symbols with the same number on any active line, a jackpot animation will be displayed, indicating the occurrence of a regular 4R jackpot result or a 10R special jackpot result, as described below.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols," and when a 10R special jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols is displayed. Furthermore, main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols," and when a regular 4R special jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is displayed.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the variable display of each symbol column with reference to Figure 10. When a game round begins, a high-speed variable display begins for all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is impossible or difficult to recognize which symbol column is being displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 10(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol column Z1 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display, which allows the player to recognize the variable displayed symbol. Then, as shown in Figure 10(b), the variable display mode of the lower symbol column Z3 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display as the variable display of the upper symbol column Z1 ends. Then, as shown in Figure 10(c), the variable display of the lower symbol column Z3 ends. After the variable display of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 ends, a static display period is set in which the static display is maintained and the player waits for a predetermined period of time.

In gaming machines, when symbols are displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device 75, it is common to stop the symbols in the final stop row (middle symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) gradually while slowing down the speed of the variable display, rather than stopping them suddenly. In this case, if the symbols in middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are configured to start stopping in time with the start of the stopped display on the special symbol display unit 43, the time required for the symbols to decelerate to stop on the symbol display device 75 is shortened, resulting in a reduction in the effective stopped display time.

Therefore, before the special symbol display unit 43 starts displaying the symbols, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, including the final symbol sequence, are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then, in accordance with the timing when the special symbol display unit 43 starts displaying the symbols, the temporarily stopped symbols are permanently stopped (determined display). The display mode of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop state is different from that in the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 may move gently back and forth slightly, or at least part of the characters (Figure 8) such as an octopus that make up the main symbol and sub-symbol may move. In other words, while the temporary stop may appear to be stationary at first glance, it is performed so that the symbols remain in an incompletely stopped state (stationary display). In contrast, the final display is performed so that the symbols are completely stopped without the slight back and forth movement or character movement.

The provisional stop display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may begin with a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then transition directly to a final display. Alternatively, the display may temporarily stop with a stop result that does not correspond to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then the display may change again to a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery, etc., after which the display may transition to a final display.

By the way, in special symbol game times executed by the special symbol display unit 43, the symbols are not temporarily displayed as still symbols, but the variable symbols are suddenly stopped as the variable display time elapses, and this state (the symbol is displayed as still symbols) is maintained until the fixed display time elapses. In other words, the symbol's still display on the special symbol display unit 43 becomes a fixed display. This is also true for regular symbol game times executed by the regular symbol display unit 44.

The manner in which the pattern display device 75 displays the changing patterns is not limited to the above and can be arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction in which the changing patterns are displayed in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, and the combinations of patterns corresponding to jackpots and misses can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in Figure 9(b), a hold display section 200 is provided at the bottom of the display screen G for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of holds in the previous game, and the player can recognize the number of holds by visually checking the hold display section 200. The hold display section 200 has a first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first special symbol and a second hold display area Gb corresponding to the second special symbol.

In the first hold display area Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, the same number as the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62, are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, and corresponding to this, the first hold display area Ga1, second unit hold display area Ga2, third unit hold display area Ga3, and fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set in the first hold display area Ga.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is one, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Ga1, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

In addition, the second hold display area Gb is partitioned so that unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4, the same number as the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the second actuation port 63, are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the second actuation port 63 is four, and corresponding to this, the second hold display area Gb is set with a first unit hold display area Gb1, a second unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is one, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Gb1, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is four, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Gb4.

In addition, an execution display area D is set up so that it is sandwiched between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. A hold image corresponding to the game turn to be executed (currently being executed) is displayed in the execution display area D. For example, when a game turn ends and the next game turn begins, the hold image that was displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This allows the player to recognize that the game turn that was on hold will be executed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

During play, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform the jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display for the special symbol display section 43, and set the display for the regular symbol display section 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used to perform the jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type such as a special jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS which determines the fluctuation display time for each special symbol display section AS, BS in the special symbol display section 43. Furthermore, it uses a regular symbol random number counter C3 used to perform the lottery to determine whether or not to place the regular electric device 63a of the second operating port 63 in the support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a, which is set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special symbol reserved area Ra and a second special symbol reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of these areas as reserved information according to the winning history for the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. This reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first to fourth areas in the order of first area → second area → third area → fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b has a total reserved number storage area, and this total reserved number storage area stores information for specifying the number of winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Regarding each counter in more detail, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 199, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 199). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314, and when a gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63, it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314.

The random number value that results in a jackpot win is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 313a, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in ROM 313. The contents of the win/loss table will now be explained using Figure 12.

In the win/loss table, address information consisting of binary information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information. Specifically, there are five types of address information expressed in decimal, "1" to "5," and five types of jackpot numerical information expressed in decimal, "7," "17," "27," "37," and "47," with a one-to-one correspondence between this address information and jackpot numerical information. The value of each jackpot numerical information is within the range of "0" to "199," which is the range of random number information that can be updated by the jackpot random number counter C1.

In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery mode for the win/loss lottery means is set to a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state). The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low-probability mode differs from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high-probability mode, with the former being fewer than the latter. Specifically, in the low-probability mode, only jackpot numerical information with address information equal to "1" is referenced when determining whether a win or loss occurs, while in the high-probability mode, jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced when determining whether a win or loss occurs. In other words, in the low-probability mode, there is one numerical information that results in a jackpot win, while in the high-probability mode, there are five, which is more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability mode is 1/200, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability mode is 1/40, making the high-probability mode more likely to result in a jackpot win than the low-probability mode. In each lottery mode, the lottery results in a loss for any random number value other than the one that results in a jackpot win. The number and value of the random numbers that result in a win are arbitrary, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game results for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313. The jackpot type table will now be explained with reference to Figure 13.

The jackpot type table includes a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Figure 13(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Figure 13(b)). If a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in Figure 13(a), the jackpot type table for the first special symbol sets the selectable jackpot types as a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result. Both of these jackpot results in four rounds of play being executed. Here, a round of play is defined as at least one execution of variable winning control, which changes the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state and then back to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once per round of play.

A 4R probability jackpot result is one in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode for the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode begins). Incidentally, while the opening/closing execution mode is running, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

Here, the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode control the drive mode of the normal power device 63a so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared under conditions in which game balls are continuously being fired into the game area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power lottery using the normal power lottery random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the normal power device 63a opens when the normal power lottery is won is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the duration of each opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in low-frequency support mode. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than that into the second actuation port 63, but in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than that into the first actuation port 62. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of winning the normal lottery may be the same in both modes, and the number of times the normal electric device 63a opens or the duration of each opening may be given higher priority in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winning at the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the configuration may be such that the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set by varying one or any combination of the conditions for the normal lottery, number of openings, and duration of openings.

A 4R normal jackpot result is one in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of play cycles after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 100 cycles). When the upper limit is reached, the high frequency support mode ends, and the lottery mode remains in low probability mode, while the support mode switches to low frequency support mode. In other words, the game transitions to a game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, a value of "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and a value of "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in Figure 13(b), the jackpot type table for the second special symbol has a 10R probability variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result set as selectable jackpot types. A 10R probability variable jackpot result results in 10 rounds of play being executed. Furthermore, a 10R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

The 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special design is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the first special design. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result is triggered by entry into the second operating port 63, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode, and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode, and this state continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 100 times).

In this embodiment, a value between "0" and "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 10R special jackpot result, and a value between "65" and "99" corresponds to a 4R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

As such, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is the same regardless of whether the type table for the first special symbol display section or the type table for the second special symbol display section is selected. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table for the second special symbol display section results in a 16R jackpot result, while the type table for the first special symbol display section results in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the second actuation port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode will be greater than if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the first actuation port 62, and it is possible to expect a greater payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is awarded through the second actuation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is awarded through the first actuation port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, players will play in the hope of winning through the second actuation port 63, out of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, and as a result, players will pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning through the second actuation port 63.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS when the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple data sets for the stop results in the event of a jackpot (the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS) that correspond to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data set for the multiple stop results that corresponds to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine both the stop result and the jackpot type, so the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special symbol display section AS and second special symbol display section BS of the special symbol display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313. The variable display time table will now be explained with reference to Figure 14.

The variable display time table includes a variable display time table for jackpots (Figure 14(a)) and a variable display time table for losses (Figure 14(b)). If the result of the lottery based on winning through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is a jackpot, the variable display time table for jackpots is referenced, and if the result of the lottery based on winning through each of the actuation ports 62, 63 is a loss, the variable display time table for losses is referenced.

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS is set in correspondence with fluctuation pattern information. Note that in Figure 14, fluctuation display time information is listed along with the fluctuation pattern to make it easier to understand, but the fluctuation display time information is stored in ROM 313 separately from the fluctuation display time table as time information corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 14 (a), the variable display time table for jackpots has variable pattern 1A (15 seconds), variable pattern 2A (60 seconds), variable pattern 3A (60 seconds), variable pattern 4A (120 seconds), and variable pattern 5A (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the image variable display is performed in the first special symbol display section AS or the second special symbol display section BS for the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern.

Furthermore, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, it controls the display control device 350 so that the variation display of each of the above-mentioned pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the patterns on the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS.

Furthermore, each variation pattern corresponds to game play effects such as reach effects performed on the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning effect, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) A winning effect, variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SP reach B winning effect, variation pattern 4A corresponds to an SPSP reach A winning effect, and variation pattern 5A corresponds to an SPSP reach B winning effect. In other words, when the effect control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game play effect corresponding to that variation pattern is performed on the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects described above, after a reach-winning display is made, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, reach-winning display (reach state) refers to a display state intended to make the player believe that the state is likely to result in a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the changing display is a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of changing (or variable) displaying symbols (pictures), between the start of the changing (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, this is a display state in which symbols in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are displayed as still symbols, thereby displaying a reach symbol combination that has the potential to form a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the display of varying symbols is terminated, when the symbols in the final symbol row are displayed as varying symbols, a reach line is formed by displaying symbols in symbol rows other than the final symbol row as still symbols on an active line on the display screen G in a manner that forms a jackpot symbol combination.

A normal reach hit effect is one in which the above-mentioned reach display occurs and then symbols stop and display in the jackpot symbol combination. An SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than a normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after a reach line is formed, and after this predetermined effect, symbols stop and display in the jackpot symbol combination. Note that the content of the above-mentioned predetermined effect after the reach line is formed differs between the SP reach A effect and the SP reach B effect. An SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than an SP reach effect, in which after a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed, symbols stop and display in the jackpot symbol combination. An SPSP reach A effect develops from an SP reach A effect, and an SPSP reach B effect develops from a reach B effect.

Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 14(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in Figure 14 (b), the variable display time table for losing wins has variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 seconds), variable pattern 3H (60 seconds), variable pattern 4H (60 seconds), variable pattern 5A (120 seconds), and variable pattern 6H (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. Similar to the variable display time table for jackpot wins, a variable display time is set for each variable pattern, but the variable display time for variable pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special symbols at that time. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are two or fewer reserved symbols, the variable display time is 8 seconds; if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are three or more reserved symbols, the variable display time is 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss, variation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach A miss, variation pattern 4H corresponds to an SP reach B miss, variation pattern 5H corresponds to an SPSP reach A miss, and variation pattern 6H corresponds to an SPSP reach B miss.

A complete miss effect is when symbols stop and display in a miss combination without a reach display. Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects is when, after a reach display is made, the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stop and display in a reach miss combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot in combination with the reach symbols). The SP reach A miss effect corresponds to the SP reach A hit effect, and after a predetermined effect similar to the SP reach A hit effect is made, symbols stop and display in a reach miss combination. Furthermore, the SP reach B miss effect, SPSP reach A miss effect, and SPSP reach B miss effect correspond to the SP reach B hit effect, SPSP reach A hit effect, and SPSP reach B hit effect, respectively.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, "13" to "28" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for losses, "0" to "59" on the fluctuation type counter CS correspond to fluctuation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "80" to "89" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" correspond to fluctuation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 6H.

If the result of the win/loss lottery based on the entry into actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot, variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach B effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed in the event of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the event of a loss, and therefore functions as the highest level reach effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 5A and fluctuation pattern 6H, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to higher-ranking reach effects are more likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and less likely to be selected in the event of a miss. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach A effect < SP reach B effect < SPSP reach A effect.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 250). The normal winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal winning random number reserve area 314c of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 64. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held based on the value of the stored normal winning random number counter C3 to determine whether or not to control the normal power device 63a to an open state. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the normal power device 63a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the normal power device 63a is not controlled to an open state.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, we will explain each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. The processes of the MPU 312 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to progress the game, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing, and then explain the main processing and normal processing.

<NMI interrupt processing>
The NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 15. This process is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and firing control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process.

In NMI interrupt processing, first in step Sa11, the data in the usage registers provided in MPU 312 is saved to the backup area of RAM 314. In step Sa12, a power outage flag (information indicating a power outage) is set in the backup area. In step Sa13, the data saved in the backup area is restored to the usage registers of MPU 312, and then the NMI interrupt processing ends. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the usage registers of MPU 312, steps Sa11 and Sa13 can be omitted.

After the NMI interrupt process is executed, the power outage process is executed by confirming that the power outage flag is set during normal processing, which will be described later. This process will be explained later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 16. This process is initiated by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sa101, the system executes a process for reading the various winning sensors. That is, it reads the status of the various winning sensors connected to the main control unit 162, and determines the status of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors) and saves the detection information (winning detection information). For example, if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If it is determined that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Furthermore, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

In step Sa102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sa103, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sa104, a winning process for through-gate 64 is executed in response to a win. In the winning process for through-gate, it is determined whether a winning detection flag for through-gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and if this flag is stored, the value of the normal winning random number counter C3 updated in step Sa103 is stored in the normal map holding area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role devices stored in the normal map holding area 314c is less than four. Furthermore, if a winning detection flag for through-gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through-gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step Sa104, proceed to step Sa105, execute the winning process for the actuation port associated with winning at actuation ports 62 and 63, and then end this timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for operating port>
The winning process for the operating port in step Sa105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa201, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sa202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three gaming balls.

In step Sa203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sa204, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Then, in step Sa205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sa201 (no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sa206, where it is determined whether a gaming ball has won (initial winning) in the second actuation port 63 based on the detection state of the second actuation port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that a gaming ball has won in the second actuation port 63, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sa207 to pay out one gaming ball.

In step Sa208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sa209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Then, in step Sa205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sa206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sa202 or step Sa207 above is sent to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sa205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 18.

First, in step Sa301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sa204 or step Sa209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process ends. If it is less than the upper limit, in step Sa302, the start pending memory count N for the corresponding special chart hold area Ra, Rb is incremented by 1. In step Sa303, the value stored in the total hold count memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold count CRN) is incremented by 1.

In step Sa304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the corresponding reserved area for the special chart display section, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step Sa302 above.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the first special symbol holding area Ra, i.e., the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol incremented by 1 in step Sa302 above.

In addition, if the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the holding area Rb for the second special symbol, i.e., the holding area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol incremented by 1 in step Sa302 above.

In step Sa305, a hold preview process is executed to execute the hold preview effect described below. Details of the hold preview process will be described later. After step Sa305 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 19. The main processing is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while an external power source is being supplied, or when an external power source is supplied while the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is in the on state).

First, in step Sa2001, initial setting processing is performed when the power is turned on. Specifically, a wait process is performed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control device (such as the dispensing control device 181) to become operational. In the following step Sa2002, access to RAM 314 is permitted.

In step Sa2003, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch of the power supply and launch control device 191 is on, and in the following step Sa2004, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. In step Sa2005, a RAM judgment value is calculated, and in step Sa2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal. Specifically, the RAM judgment value calculated in step Sa2005 is compared with the RAM judgment value saved when the power outage occurred, and it is determined whether the two match. If the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored in RAM 314 is recognized as valid. Conversely, if the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be abnormal, and the data stored in RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. It is also possible to determine the validity of stored data by determining whether a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 314 is saved correctly.

If the RAM judgment value is normal, proceed to step Sa2007, write the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area to the stack pointer of MPU 312, and restore the state of the stack to the state before power was cut off. In step Sa2008, output a power restoration command to restore the sub-side control device (payout control device 181, etc.) to the gaming state before power was cut off. In step Sa2009, erase the power outage flag stored in the backup area. Then, in step Sa2010, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa2003 (if the RAM erase switch is pressed) or a negative judgment is made in step Sa2006 (if the RAM judgment value is not normal), the process proceeds to step Sa2011, where an initialization command is output to initialize the sub-side control device (dispensing control device 181, etc.). In step Sa2012, the used area of RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa2013, initialization processing of RAM 314 is executed. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step Sa2010, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 20. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and in normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sa401 to Sa408 is executed as periodic processing in a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing of steps Sa409 and Sa410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, external signal output processing is first executed in step Sa401. In the external signal output processing in step Sa401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sa402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sa403, a game round control process is executed to control the game for each game round. This game round control process performs jackpot determination and display control of the special symbol display unit 43, etc.

In step Sa404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the game count control process in step Sa403 and the game state transition process in step Sa404 will be described later.

In step Sa405, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal power role 63a provided in the second operating port 63. In this electric role support process, a normal role win/loss lottery is performed to determine whether the normal power role 63a will be opened or closed using numerical information obtained from the normal role win random number counter C3 stored in the normal role hold area 314c of RAM 314, and if a win is determined, the normal power role 63a is opened or closed. In addition, display control is performed on the normal role display unit 44 to display the results of the normal role win/loss lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the normal power device 63a is set to either a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of these support modes is made during the game state transition process described below. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, the high-frequency support mode is selected; if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is selected.

The electric role support process determines whether or not the high-frequency support mode is active by determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. When the high-frequency support mode is active, the number of times the normal electric role 63a opens when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer. Also, when the high-frequency support mode is active, if the electric role open state is selected and the normal electric role 63a opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

In step Sa406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In step Sa407, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process (Figure 15) that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (no power interruption has occurred), step Sa408 determines whether the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

In other words, in step Sa409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314. Also, in step Sa410, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314.

Here, the execution time for each process in steps Sa401 to Sa408 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated in the same way.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa407 (if the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa411, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sa412, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of RAM 314, and in step Sa413, the power outage flag is set in the backup area.

In step Sa414, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sa415, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after power is completely cut off, power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to maintain data storage in RAM 314, so the information stored in RAM 314 before power was cut off is retained in its original state for a predetermined period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Game Play Control Processing>
The game play control process of step Sa403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa501, it is determined whether the game is in the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening and closing execution mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is transitioned to the opening and closing execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and is erased when the opening and closing execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If the opening/closing execution mode is active, the game turn control process ends without executing any of the processes from step Sa502 onwards, i.e., the game turn start process from step Sa502 to step Sa505, the game turn progress process from step Sa506 to step Sa507, or the game turn end process from step Sa508 to step Sa509. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is active, the special game turn will not be started regardless of whether a win has occurred in the operating ports 62, 63.

In addition, game turns (normal game turns) based on a win/lose lottery triggered by winning through gate 64 will be executed regardless of whether the opening/closing execution mode is active or inactive. In other words, while the execution of special game turns is restricted during the opening/closing execution mode, normal game turns will be executed in the same way as when the opening/closing execution mode is not active. Therefore, if the result of the normal game turn lottery during the opening/closing execution mode is a win, the second operating port 63 (normal electric device 63a) will be opened.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, step Sa502 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is currently displaying a variable. Specifically, it determines whether either the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is currently displaying a variable. This determination is made by determining whether a variable display in progress flag is stored (memorized) in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. The variable display in progress flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS, and is cleared when the variable display ends.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable symbol, proceed to step Sa503 and determine whether the common hold number CRN is "0." If the common hold number CRN is "0," this means that the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, the game play control process ends.

If the common reserve number CRN is not "0", step Sa504 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra or the second special symbol reserve area Rb for variable display, and then step Sa505 executes a variable start process to start the variable display in the special symbol display unit 43 and the variable display in the symbol display device 75, after which the game turn control process is terminated.

The data setting process in step Sa504 and the fluctuation start process in step Sa505 are now described in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 22.

First, in step Sa601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is "0." If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0," data setting processing for the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) is performed in steps Sa602 to Sa608. If the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0," data setting processing for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) is performed in steps Sa609 to Sa615.

As already explained, data setting processing is performed when the common reserve number CRN is 1 or greater. The situation in which data setting processing is performed means that at least one of the first start reserve memory number RaN and the second start reserve memory number RbN is 1 or greater. In this case, the data setting processing is configured to first determine whether the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," and then execute processing related to the reserve information for the first special symbol if the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," i.e., if there is no reserve information for the second special symbol. Therefore, if reserve information is stored in both the first special symbol reserve area Ra and the second special symbol reserve area Rb, the reserve information for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is processed first.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first in step Sa602, the first start hold memory number RaN in the first special symbol holding area Ra is decremented by 1. In step Sa603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa604, the data stored in the first area of the first special symbol holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra. This process clears the data in the first area and sequentially moves the data in the second to fourth areas to the lower areas.

In step Sa606, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second special symbol flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If a second special symbol flag is stored, the second special symbol flag is cleared in step Sa607.

After execution of step Sa607 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa606 (the second special symbol flag is not stored), proceed to step Sa608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first special symbol reserved area Ra, i.e., information that it corresponds to the first actuation port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sa608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 of normal processing (Figure 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first hold display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of holds.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step Sa609, the second start hold memory number RbN in the second special symbol holding area Rb is decremented by 1. In step Sa610, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa611, the data stored in the first area of the second special symbol holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb. In step Sa613, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sa614.

After execution of step Sa614 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), proceed to step Sa615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information that causes the sub-control device, the performance control device 143, to recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that was the target of this data shift corresponds to the second special symbol reserved area Rb, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second actuation port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sa613 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 of normal processing (Figure 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second hold display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23.

First, in step Sa701, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high probability mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The high probability mode flag is used by MPU 312 to determine that the mode is high probability mode, and is set when transitioning to high probability mode.

If the mode is not high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made in step Sa702 by referring to the win/loss table for low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win for low probability mode (e.g., "7"). On the other hand, if the mode is high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made in step Sa703 by referring to the win/loss table for high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win for high probability mode (e.g., "7", "17", "27", "37", "47").

After execution of step Sa702 or step Sa703, step Sa704 determines whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sa702 or step Sa703 indicates a jackpot win. If a jackpot win is determined, step Sa705 determines whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, step Sa706 determines the jackpot type by referencing the type table for the first special symbol display unit (Figure 13(a)). Specifically, it determines whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range for a 4R special jackpot result or the numerical range for a 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, step Sa707 refers to the type table for the second special symbol (Figure 13(b)) to determine the jackpot type. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range for a 10R special jackpot result or the numerical range for a 4R normal jackpot result.

After step Sa706 or step Sa707 is executed, in step Sa708, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by lottery in step Sa706 or step Sa707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 10R probability jackpot, a 10R probability jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sa709, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa704 (if a jackpot has not occurred), the process proceeds to step Sa710, where a stop result for a loss is set. In this embodiment, only one stop result for a loss is provided, and that stop result is set in step Sa710.

After execution of step Sa709 or step Sa710, in step Sa711, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

Here, the process for setting the variable display time will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 24.

First, in step Sa801, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sa802, where the variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 14(a)) is obtained as a table for drawing the variable display time (variation pattern). On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot but a miss, the process proceeds to step Sa803, where the variable display time table for a miss (Figure 14(b)) is obtained.

After step Sa802 or step Sa803 is executed, in step Sa804, the fluctuation display time table obtained in step Sa802 or step Sa803 is used to execute a lottery process for the fluctuation display time (fluctuation pattern). Specifically, from the group of fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation display time table, one fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Sa805, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sa804 above is set as the variable display time for the current game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area above as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 16) is started. After step Sa805 is executed, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Figure 23), after execution of step Sa711, in step Sa712, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set. The fluctuation start command contains information about the fluctuation pattern. Since fluctuation patterns are set separately for jackpots and losses (Figure 14), the performance control device 143 can determine the result of the hit/miss judgment made by the main control device 162 by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command. In other words, the fluctuation start command contains not only information about the fluctuation display time, but also information about the result of the hit/miss judgment. Furthermore, the type command contains information about the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step Sa712 are sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sa401 of normal processing (Figure 20). The presentation control device 143 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. The content of this presentation includes the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 75, and this determined variable display mode of the patterns is output from the presentation control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. The display control device 350 controls the display of the pattern display device 75 so that the variable display of the patterns corresponding to each game round is performed based on the display content command received from the presentation control device 143.

In step Sa713, the variable display of the special symbol display section 43 is started. At that time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced, and if the second special symbol flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special symbol and the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed variable. On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is not stored, the current game round corresponds to the first special symbol and the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed variable. After step Sa713 is executed, this variable display start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (Figure 21), if a positive judgment is made in step Sa502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable), the process proceeds to step Sa506, where it is determined whether the variable display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of RAM 314 has reached "0."

If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step Sa507. In the variable display processing, the display of the special chart display section for the current game round is controlled (each display segment is controlled to emit light) so that each display segment in the special chart display section for the current game round lights up and goes out in a predetermined order. After step Sa507 is executed, this game round control processing is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, variable end processing is executed in step Sa508. In the variable end processing, each special image display unit AS, BS is controlled so that the variable displayed image is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step Sa709 or step Sa710 above.

In step Sa509, a variation end command is set, and then this game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step Sa509 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sa401 of the normal process (Figure 20). The presentation control device 143 sends the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information format. Upon receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a confirmed display (final stop display).

<Game status transition processing>
The game state transition process of step Sa404 (FIG. 20) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa901, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step Sa902, where it is determined whether the variable display in each special chart display section AS, BS has ended (the final display has ended). If the variable display has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is time for the variable display to end, step Sa903 determines whether the game result of this round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot determination is made by checking whether a type flag (step Sa708 in Figure 23) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the game result of this round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa903 (if the game result of the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa904, where the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. In addition, an opening period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains in a closed state while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if a high probability mode flag or high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the process is executed to erase these flags.

In step Sa905, the process for starting the round display is executed to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. In this step, the type of jackpot that has occurred is determined based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sa906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R regular jackpot result, in step Sa907, the round counter area RC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sa908, the round counter area RC is set to "10".

After step Sa907 or step Sa908 is executed, in step Sa909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the opening. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 of normal processing (Figure 20).

In step Sa910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to that management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa901 above (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa911, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening/closing process is executed in step Sa912.

Here, the process for opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 26.

First, in step Sa1001, it is determined whether the special prize opening 65a is open. This determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 65d. If the special prize opening 65a is not open, it is determined in step Sa1002 whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, it is determined in step Sa1003 whether the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process determines whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T is "0," proceed to step Sa1004, where "15000" is set in the timer area T as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 16) is started. In step Sa1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter area 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sa1006, the variable prize drive unit 32c is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sa1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 of the normal process (Figure 20).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1002 (the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or a negative judgment is made in step Sa1003 (the value of the timer area T is not 0), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sa1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sa1008, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sa1004 has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T is not "0," proceed to step Sa1009, where a determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value in the prize counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step Sa1010, and then a determination is made as to whether or not the value in the prize counter area PC is "0" in step Sa1011. If the value in the prize counter area PC is not "0," the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1008 (if the value of the timer area T is 0) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step Sa1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sa1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step Sa1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sa1015 and set "1000" in the timer area T as a value corresponding to the period (2 seconds) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sa1016, a close command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sa401 of the normal processing (Figure 20).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1014 above (the value of the round counter area RC is 0), that is, if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, proceed to step Sa1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sa1018, an ending command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sa401 of the normal processing (Figure 20).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 25), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sa912, step Sa913 determines whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0," the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", proceed to step Sa914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, proceed to step Sa915 to execute the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 27.

First, in step Sa1101, the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot. If it is, in step Sa1102, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and in step Sa1103, a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to a gaming state in which the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (a so-called guaranteed jackpot gaming state with electric support). This gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs. After step Sa1103 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed.

If step Sa1101 returns a negative result (the current jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot), i.e., if the current jackpot is a regular jackpot, proceed to step Sa1104, where the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the current jackpot is a regular jackpot, the high-probability mode flag is not set, and step Sa1104 is processed to transition to a game state in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode (a so-called time-saving game state). In the following step Sa1105, the number-of-plays counter area in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is set to "100." This set value is decremented by one each time a special game is played in the time-saving game state. When the value in the number-of-plays counter area reaches "0," the high-frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is erased. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state ends after 100 games have been played, and then the game state transitions to a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. After step Sa1105 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 25), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sa915 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Sa916. In this process, the round display section in the special symbol display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sa917, the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, and then the game state transition process is terminated. The opening and closing execution mode termination process executes a process to erase the type flag and opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e.

<Hold-ahead read processing>
The reserved information read-ahead process of step Sa305 (Fig. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 28. This process is executed when reserved information is acquired based on a win in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, and for the acquired reserved information, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the variation pattern prior to executing the variation start process (Fig. 23) corresponding to the reserved information.

First, in step Sa1201, the start reserve memory numbers RaN, RbN stored in each reserve area Ra, Rb of the reserve ball storage area 314b and the common reserve number CRN stored in the total reserve number memory area of the same reserve ball storage area 314b are read, and this information is stored in a register of the MPU 312.

In step Sa1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random number value for determining whether or not a win has occurred) contained in the pending information acquired in step Sa304 (Figure 18) is determined based on the current winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. In step Sa1203, a win/loss determination is made using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step Sa1202. At this time, if the lottery mode when the pending information was acquired was the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and if the lottery mode when the pending information was acquired was the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referenced to make the win/loss determination.

In step Sa1204, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sa1202 indicates a jackpot win. If a jackpot win is determined, in step Sa1205, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (a random number used to draw the jackpot type) contained in the pending information obtained based on the current win at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is determined.

In step Sa1206, a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained in step Sa1205. If the pending information is based on a win in the first operating port 62, the type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 13(a)) is referenced; if the pending information is based on a win in the second operating port 63, the type table for the second special symbol (FIG. 13(b)) is referenced to identify the type of jackpot corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Note that steps Sa1203 to Sa1206 are similar to steps Sa701 to Sa707 in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step Sa1207, jackpot information indicating a jackpot and type information indicating the jackpot type selected in step Sa1206 are stored in a register of MPU312.

After step Sa1207 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1204 (if the jackpot has not been won), in step Sa1208, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS included in the pending information acquired based on the current winning at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is determined. In step Sa1209, a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) is determined by lottery using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS determined in step Sa1208. At this time, if the acquired pending information corresponds to a jackpot, the fluctuation display time table for jackpots (Figure 14(a)) is referenced; if the acquired pending information corresponds to a loss, the fluctuation display time table for losses (Figure 14(b)) is referenced to identify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Note that the processing in this step is similar to steps Sa801 to Sa804 in the processing for setting the fluctuation display time.

In step Sa1210, fluctuation pattern information indicating the fluctuation pattern selected in step Sa1209 is stored in a register of the MPU 312. In step Sa1211, a hold command is set as the output target for the performance control device 143, and then the hold pre-read processing is terminated. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special design, as well as various information stored in the register (information on the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN, information on the common hold number CRN, jackpot information, type information, and fluctuation pattern information). As already explained, since the presence or absence of a jackpot can be determined from the fluctuation pattern, the hold command may be set so as not to include jackpot information. The hold command set in step Sa1211 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 of normal processing (FIG. 20).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 contains a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 343 are executed, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control unit 162, it receives various commands, such as hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game number control commands such as fluctuation start commands, type commands and fluctuation end commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. Based on the detection information, the MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 equipped with an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 374 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 372. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device that serves as the LCD driver built into the pattern display device 75. Because VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its true nature is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 adjusts the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and so on.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc., separately. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 30. The effect setting process is initiated by the MPU 342 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sa1301, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. The hold command received from the main control device 162 is stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands stored earlier. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly.

When making the judgment in step Sa1301, it is determined whether a hold command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If a hold command is stored (if a hold command has been received), in step Sa1302, hold command response processing is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 (Figure 9(b)) of the display screen G. Details of the hold command response processing will be described later.

After execution of step Sa1302, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1301 (a hold command has not been received), step Sa1303 determines whether a shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a shift command has been received, step Sa1304 executes a shift command response process to shift the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200. Details of the shift command response process will be described later.

After execution of step Sa1304, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1303 (if a shift command has not been received), in step Sa1305, special pattern change display processing is executed to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display processing will be described later.

In step Sa1306, processing for the opening and closing execution mode is executed to perform effects during the opening and closing execution mode. In the opening and closing execution mode processing, processing is executed to perform round effects during the opening and closing execution mode, as well as opening and ending effects, and winning effects when a win occurs in the variable winning device 65.

In step Sa1307, a rendering mode switching process is executed to switch the rendering mode. Details of the rendering mode switching process will be described later.

In step Sa1308, other processing is performed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Other processing includes displaying a demo screen if a starting winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time, and switching to a power-saving mode that stops video display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption.

<Pending command response processing>
The command response process in step Sa1302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa1401, the hold command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and hold information (jackpot information, type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the hold memory area 344c of RAM 344.

As shown in Figure 32, the reserved memory area 344c has a first special symbol reserved area SRa and a second special symbol reserved area SRb that correspond to the reserved ball storage area 314b on the main control device 162 side. Each reserved area SRa, SRb has four memory areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. In addition, the reserved memory area 344c has an execution area SAE that corresponds to the execution area AE on the main control device 162 side.

In step Sa1401, based on the hold command, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special symbol, and which number of the corresponding special symbol the hold information is, and the fluctuation pattern information (and, in the case of a jackpot, jackpot information and type information) is stored in the corresponding memory area of the hold memory area 344c. For example, if the current hold information is the second hold information corresponding to the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern information, etc. is stored in the second memory area of the hold area SRa for the first special symbol.

After execution of step Sa1401, in step Sa1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1. The various counter area 344b is provided with a hold number counter for the first special symbol and a hold number counter for the second special symbol, and in step Sa1402, the start hold memory number SN for the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1403, a setting process for the hold notification is executed to execute the hold notification effect. Here, the hold notification effect will be explained with reference to Figure 33.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G is used to perform a hold preview effect that notifies or suggests the likelihood of a jackpot occurring in the game round to which the hold image corresponds. The display mode of the hold image is set to a normal display mode when no hold preview effect is performed, and a specific display mode when a hold preview effect is performed, and furthermore, multiple display modes are set for the specific display mode.

In this embodiment, the display color (hue) of the pending image indicates the degree of expectation. Specifically, as shown in Figure 33(a), a normal display mode HMa is set as the normal display mode, in which the main display color is a normal color (e.g., white), and four specific display modes are set: a blue display mode HMb, in which the main display color is blue; a green display mode HMc, in which the main display color is green; a red display mode HMd, in which the main display color is red; and a rainbow display mode HMe, in which the main display color is rainbow. Note that in Figure 33(a), different hatching is used to indicate the different display colors.

Of the specific display modes, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest probability of a jackpot, followed by the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow display mode HMe, in that order. The rainbow display mode HMe indicates a jackpot.

In addition, each specific display mode also suggests the effect that will be performed in the game turn to which the reserved image corresponds. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb suggests that a reach effect (either a normal reach effect, SP reach effect, or SPSP reach effect) of a higher rank than a normal reach effect will be performed in the game turn to which the reserved image corresponds, the green display mode HMc suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than an SP reach effect will be performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed.

The above-mentioned hold preview effect using the hold image is performed using at least a portion of the period from the start to the end of the display of the hold image that is the target of the effect; in other words, the period from the occurrence of hold information to the end of the game round for that hold information. There are multiple timings set for the execution of the hold preview effect during the period (hold period) when the hold image is displayed in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb, such as when the hold image starts to be displayed or when it shifts. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 33(b), multiple timings for the execution of the hold preview effect during the execution of a game round are set as hold change points. Each hold change point is set to coincide with, for example, the start of a game round (change start timing), the start timing of various reach effects, the development timing of reach effects, etc.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command response processing (Figure 31), the hold notification setting processing in step Sa1403 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a hold notification effect for the current hold information, and executes processing to set the display mode of the hold image if a hold notification effect is executed. Details of the hold notification setting processing will be described later.

In step Sa1404, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed to execute the hold notice performance. In the first execution process of the hold notice, the execution of the hold notice performance is controlled based on the setting results of step Sa1403. Details of the first execution process of the hold notice will be described later.

In step Sa1405, processing is performed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. Specifically, a hold display command is created so that a hold image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area in each hold display area Ga, Gb, and this command is set as the target for output to the display control device 350. The hold display command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special chart, and information indicating which number the hold information is. After step Sa1405 is executed, the hold command response processing is terminated.

<Setting process for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 34.

First, in step Sa1501, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern, etc. (prediction results) of the current pending information. In step Sa1502, based on the fluctuation pattern, etc. determined in step Sa1501, it is determined whether the current pending information corresponds to a jackpot.

If the information does not correspond to a jackpot, i.e., if the pending information corresponds to a miss, proceed to step Sa1503 and determine whether the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss). If a negative judgment is made in step Sa1503 (if the fluctuation pattern is other than fluctuation pattern 1H) or a positive judgment is made in step Sa1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), the current presentation mode is determined in step Sa1504.

Now, the presentation modes will be explained with reference to Figure 35. In this embodiment, presentation mode A and presentation mode B are set as presentation modes for game presentations executed on display screen G. Presentation mode A and presentation mode B are distinguishable from the player's eyes; for example, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the background image 401 displayed at the back of the hold display section 200 are different in both presentation modes.

These presentation modes can be manually switched by the player; specifically, they can be switched by performing a specified operation on the presentation operation unit 36 (Figure 1) during the valid mode switching period. For example, if a specified operation is performed on the presentation operation unit 36 when the presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation mode will switch to presentation mode B, and if a specified operation is performed on the presentation operation unit 36 when the presentation mode is B, the presentation mode will switch to presentation mode A.

Furthermore, the frequency with which the above-mentioned hold notice effect occurs differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and is configured so that the frequency with which the hold notice effect occurs in presentation mode A is higher than that in presentation mode B. The configuration for differentiating the frequency with which the hold notice effect occurs is not particularly limited, but one possible configuration is to execute the hold notice effect via an execution lottery in both presentation modes, and then lower the probability of winning the execution lottery in presentation mode B when the hold information corresponds to a miss compared to presentation mode A.

In this case, in presentation mode B, the proportion of hold preview effects that correspond to predictions of jackpots is higher than in presentation mode A, so the likelihood of a jackpot being expected when a hold preview effect is executed is higher. In other words, presentation mode A functions as a mode in which hold preview effects are more likely to be executed and are easier to enjoy, while presentation mode B functions as a mode in which hold preview effects are less likely to be executed but have a higher likelihood of a jackpot being expected when they are executed.

Although not shown in Figure 35, the base image of the reserved image may be different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B. For example, a reserved image resembling a game ball may be displayed in presentation mode A, while a reserved image resembling a star may be displayed in presentation mode B.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for hold notice (Figure 34), after the current presentation mode is determined in step Sa1504, the corresponding hold notice execution lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343 in step Sa1505. Multiple hold notice execution lottery tables are set to correspond to the presence or absence of a jackpot and the presentation mode. For example, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the current hold information being a jackpot is set to have a higher probability of winning than the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the current hold information being a miss. Furthermore, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to presentation mode A and the current hold information being a miss is set to have a higher probability of winning than the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to presentation mode B and the current hold information being a miss.

In step Sa1506, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice performance based on the hold notice execution lottery table obtained in step Sa1505 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sa1506 is a winning result.

If the result of the lottery is an execution win, proceed to step Sa1508 and determine the corresponding reserved number. In this step, reference is made to the reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344 to determine whether the current reserved information corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the reserved number of the corresponding special symbol. In this case, the reserved number includes the current reserved information. For example, if the current reserved information is stored in the third area of the first special symbol reserve area SRa in the reserve memory area 344c, it is determined that the reserved information corresponds to the first special symbol and that the reserved number is 3. Note that if the current reserved information is stored in the first area of the first special symbol reserve area SRa (if this is the first reserved information), and reserved information is stored in the execution area SAE (a game round is being played), the reserved number is determined to be 1; if no reserved information is stored in the execution area SAE (a game round is not being played), the reserved number is determined to be 0.

In step Sa1509, a final display mode lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is not only changed once to perform the reserved preview effect, but the display mode of the reserved image may also be changed multiple times to perform the reserved preview effect. The final display mode lottery table is a table used to select the final display mode of the reserved image in the reserved preview effect.

As shown in Figure 36, the final display mode lottery table sets the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability for each display mode for each variation pattern. Note that in Figure 36, the "Notes (Performance Mode)" item, which indicates the game play performance corresponding to each variation pattern, is added for convenience and is not set in the final display mode lottery table.

The final display mode lottery table also includes a final display mode lottery table for big wins (Figure 36(a)) and a final display mode lottery table for losses (Figure 36(b)). Each lottery table has a different selection range for the final display mode according to each variation pattern and a different selection probability for each option.

In the final display mode lottery table for jackpots, the range of final display modes for the pending image in the pending preview performance is set as follows: if the current pending information is variation pattern 1A (normal reach hit), blue display mode HMb and rainbow display mode HMe; if the current pending information is variation pattern 2A (SP reach A hit) or variation pattern 3A (SP reach B hit), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc and rainbow display mode HMe; and if the current pending information is variation pattern 4A (SPSP reach A hit) or variation pattern 5A (SPSP reach B hit), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd and rainbow display mode HMe. Therefore, when a hold image in blue display mode HMb is displayed as a hold notice effect, it suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than a normal reach effect will be performed in the game turn corresponding to that hold image (the game turn of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect), when a hold image in green display mode HMc is displayed it suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than an SP reach effect will be performed, and when a hold image in red display mode HMd is displayed it suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed.

Furthermore, even in the final display mode lottery table for losing, when a reserve image in blue display mode HMb is displayed as a reserve preview effect, it indicates that a reach effect of a rank higher than a normal reach effect will occur in the game corresponding to that reserve image; when a reserve image in green display mode HMc is displayed, it indicates that a reach effect of a rank higher than an SP reach effect will occur; and when a reserve image in red display mode HMd is displayed, it indicates that an SPSP reach effect will occur. Therefore, when a reserve preview effect is performed and a reserve image in blue, green, or red is displayed, the player can predict what level of reach effect will occur. However, it cannot determine whether or not a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in the final display mode lottery table for losing, the rainbow display mode HMe is not set as an option for the final display mode, and the reserved image of the rainbow display mode HMe is only displayed in the event of a jackpot. Therefore, the reserved image of the rainbow display mode HMe suggests a jackpot, and when this reserved image is displayed, the player can predict that a jackpot will occur in the game corresponding to that reserved image.

In the final display mode lottery table for jackpots, the probability of selecting the rainbow display mode HMe is kept to a small probability (for example, 5%) for all variation patterns. This is to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as increasing the probability of selecting the rainbow display mode HMe, which could lead to players frequently recognizing a jackpot before a game is played, and potentially losing interest in the game's presentation. The selection probability for other options is such that higher-ranked display modes are more likely to be selected than lower-ranked display modes in each variation pattern. For example, in the case of variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode lottery table for losing wins, it is more difficult to select a higher-ranking display mode than in the final display mode lottery table for jackpot wins. For example, in the variation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP Reach A presentation in the final display mode lottery table for jackpot wins, the probability of selecting the red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas in the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP Reach B presentation in the final display mode lottery table for losing wins, the probability of selecting the red display mode HMd is only 10%.

By setting the display mode selection trends as described above in the final display mode lottery tables for both jackpots and losses, even if the type of reach effect performed in a game is the same, the likelihood of a jackpot increases when a higher-ranked display mode is displayed as the pending image corresponding to that game.

In this embodiment, a common table is used for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B as the final display mode lottery table for a jackpot and a final display mode lottery table for a loss, but a different table may also be set for each presentation mode.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (Figure 34), in step Sa1509, a final display mode lottery table corresponding to whether or not the hold information indicates a jackpot is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern, etc., determined in step Sa1501. In step Sa1510, the final display mode for this hold notice performance is selected by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step Sa1501, the final display mode lottery table obtained in step Sa1509, and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

The counter for the lottery is acquired when a hold command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when hold information that is the subject of lottery processing occurs. The same applies to the counters (random number values) used for other lottery processing executed by the performance control device 143.

In step Sa1511, a performance scenario lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The performance scenario lottery table is a table used to select a performance scenario for the pending preview performance.

As shown in Figure 37, the presentation scenario lottery table has multiple presentation scenarios set in correspondence with the number of reserved items and the final display mode of the reserved item preview presentation. In more detail, groups are set from presentation scenario 0, which corresponds to the number of reserved items = 0, to presentation scenario 4, which corresponds to the number of reserved items = 4. Furthermore, within each group, presentation scenario groups for each color are set in correspondence with the final display modes of blue, green, red, and rainbow. A random number value between 0 and 99 is assigned to each presentation scenario group for one color. For example, if the number of reserved items is 0 and the final display mode is the blue display mode HMb, presentation scenario 0 blue (1) and presentation scenario 0 blue (2) are available as presentation scenarios, and the one corresponding to the random number value is selected from these.

Each performance scenario specifies the timing and display mode in which the reserved image will be displayed during the reserved preview performance in which the final display mode has been determined. Taking performance scenario 4Red (1), which is the selection target when a preview of the reserved information corresponding to the first special symbol is performed, the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol at that time is four, and the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, as an example, this scenario specifies that after the reserved image is displayed in the blue display mode HMb in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 of the first reserved display area Ga (Figure 9(b)), the reserved image will change to the green display mode HMc when moved and displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2, and then will change to the red display mode HMd while the reserved image is displayed in the execution display area D (during the execution of the game round corresponding to that reserved image).

Although not shown in Figure 37, presentation scenarios that stipulate changing the display mode of the reserved image in the execution display area D also stipulate the timing (reserved change point) at which the display mode will be changed during a game. There are also presentation scenarios that change the display mode multiple times during a game. For example, presentation scenario 0 Green (2) stipulates that the reserved image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb at an earlier reserve change point during a game, and then further changed to the green display mode HMc at a later reserve change point.

In addition, "G4 (Hold 4)" to "G1 (Hold 1)" in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" in Figure 37 indicate the display mode when a reserve image is displayed in each unit reserve display area of the reserve display unit 200. Also, "D (During Play)" indicates the display mode when a reserve image is shifted from the first unit reserve display area to the execution display area D, or the display mode during the period when a reserve image is displayed in the execution display area D. Incidentally, the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column are added for convenience and are not set in the performance scenario lottery table.

Furthermore, the presentation scenario lottery table includes a presentation scenario lottery table for a jackpot and a presentation scenario lottery table for a loss. In this embodiment, a common table is used for presentation mode A and presentation mode B as the presentation scenario lottery table for a jackpot and a loss, but a different table may also be set for each presentation mode. Note that Figure 37 shows an example of a presentation scenario lottery table for a jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (Figure 34), in step Sa1511, a presentation scenario lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the hold information is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern, etc., determined in step Sa1501. In step Sa1512, a presentation scenario for this hold notice presentation is selected by lottery based on the number of holds determined in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the presentation scenario lottery table obtained in step Sa1511, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step Sa1513, the performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected in step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice is terminated. The hold notice flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that a hold notice performance should be executed.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sa1503 (if the fluctuation pattern of the hold information is fluctuation pattern 1H (complete miss)) or a negative judgment is made in step Sa1507 (if the execution lottery for the hold notice effect is a miss), proceed to step Sa1515 and set the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa. Then, the setting process for the hold notice ends.

<First execution process of hold notice>
The first execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 38(a).

First, in step Sa1601, it is determined whether a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If a hold notice flag is not stored, i.e., if the situation does not warrant the execution of a hold notice effect, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored and the situation is such that the hold notice effect should be executed, proceed to step Sa1602, where it is determined whether it is time to change the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect. In other words, it is determined whether the hold image should be displayed in a specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above determination is made by referring to the setting results of the display scenario for the hold notice effect set in step Sa1513 (Figure 34) above. If it is not time to change the display mode, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is the timing for a change in the display mode, a lottery is held in step Sa1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect. A change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the pending image (rank up). The form of the change suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is executed in the form shown in Figure 39. First, as shown in Figure 39(a), a predetermined character image 402 is displayed near the pending display unit 200 at a predetermined timing before the pending image changes. Note that, when a change suggestion effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the occurrence of pending information, the pending image is first displayed in the normal display mode, and immediately after that, or simultaneously, the character image 402 is displayed. Thereafter, a video of the character performing a predetermined action is displayed, and the display mode of the pending image is changed to a higher display mode, as shown in Figure 39(b). Note that the character image 402 is erased after the display mode of the pending image has been changed.

In step Sa1603, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a change suggestion effect will be executed based on the lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the execution lottery tables stored in the various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343. In step Sa1604, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step Sa1603 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a winning result, in step Sa1605, the change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Specifically, a command to execute a change suggestion effect is set as an output target to the display control device 350.

In this embodiment, the change suggestion effect can only be executed when the display mode of the pending image is changed, but the change suggestion effect may also be executed when the display mode of the pending image is not changed. In other words, the change suggestion effect may be executed by lottery even when the display mode of the pending image is not changed.

In such cases, a possible change suggestion effect would be, for example, as shown in Figure 39(a), where a specific character image 402 is displayed, and then the character does not perform a specific action or performs an action different from the specific action, and then the character image 402 is erased without changing the display mode of the pending image, maintaining the display mode that it was in before the character image 402 was displayed. However, if such false effects occur frequently, it could dampen the player's anticipation for the change suggestion effect, so it is advisable to keep their frequency low. Specifically, the probability of a change suggestion effect being executed when the display mode is not changed should be lower than when the display mode is changed; in other words, it should be made so that the frequency with which the display mode of the pending image does not change when character image 402 is displayed is lower than the frequency with which it does change.

After step Sa1605 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (if the lottery to execute the change suggestion effect is not won), proceed to step Sa1606, where the display mode to be changed to in this change process is determined based on the setting results of the effect scenario. Specifically, it is determined in which specific display mode the pending image will be displayed: blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the hold image is set to change to the display mode determined in step Sa1606 above. Note that if this process is performed when a hold command is received (when an additional hold image is displayed), the initial display mode of the additional hold image is set to the display mode determined in step Sa1606 above.

In this case, if a change suggestion effect is not to be executed, the hold image is set to be displayed in one of the specific display modes indicated by the effect scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, if a change suggestion effect is to be executed, the image is set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then change to the specific display mode indicated by the effect scenario. If the setting process of step Sa1607 is executed, in step Sa1405 of the hold command response process (Figure 31), the hold display command to the display control device 350 is set so that the command includes information on the display mode set in step Sa1607.

In step Sa1608, information indicating the display mode of the current reserved image is stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. As shown in FIG. 38(b), the display mode memory area 344e has areas corresponding to the reserved information (reserved image) for each special symbol and the reserved information currently being played, and each area can store the display mode of the reserved image. For example, when a blue display mode HMb is displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 of the first reserved display area Ga, the display mode memory area 344e stores information indicating that the second area for the first special symbol (the area corresponding to the second reserved information) will be displayed in blue display mode HMb. Incidentally, when a change suggestion effect is executed, information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. Note that the display mode memory area 344e may not be provided, and the display mode information may be stored in the corresponding area of the reserved memory area 344c. After step Sa1608 is executed, the first execution process of the reserved notice is terminated.

<Shift command processing>
The shift command response process in step Sa1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa1701, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed. This process changes the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect when the hold image shifts. The process of this step is essentially the same as the first execution process of the hold notice (Fig. 38(a)) in step Sa1404 (Fig. 31).

To explain with reference to Figure 38(a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701, a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and if the situation is such that a hold notice performance should be executed, step Sa1602 determines whether the current shift timing is the timing to change the display mode (display color) of the hold image (hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. This determination is made based on the setting result of the performance scenario for the hold notice performance set in step Sa1513 (Figure 34).

If it is time to change the display mode, a lottery is held in step Sa1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, step Sa1605 sets the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to execute a change suggestion effect. After step Sa1605 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (if the lottery to execute a change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, where the display mode to be changed to in this change process is determined based on the results of the effect scenario settings.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to change to the display mode determined in step Sa1606. Specifically, the output command to the display control device 350 includes information indicating which reserved image's display mode should be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to, and a command is set to change the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing. As a result, the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing is changed to the display mode determined by the setting results of the performance scenario.

In step Sa1608, for the pending image whose display mode is to be changed, information on the changed display mode is stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. For example, if a pending image in blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit pending display area Ga2 of the first pending display area Ga is changed to green display mode HMc when shifted to the first unit pending display area Ga1, the blue display information stored in the second area for the first special image (the area corresponding to the second pending information) in the display mode memory area 344e is erased, and then the green display information is stored in the same area.

Returning to the explanation of the shift command response processing (Figure 40), after executing the processing of step Sa1701, the second execution processing of the hold notice is executed in step Sa1702. This processing is related to the presentation mode switching processing of step Sa1307 (Figure 30), and will be described in detail after explaining that switching processing.

In step Sa1703, the value of the hold count counter (start hold memory count SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is decremented by 1. The various counter area 344b is provided with a hold count counter for the first special design and a hold count counter for the second special design, and in this step the start hold memory count SN for the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1704, a shift process is executed to shift the display of the reserved image, and then this shift command response process is terminated. In the shift process, the reserved information stored in the first area of the reserved storage area 344c of RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the reserved information stored in the second to fourth areas is shifted sequentially to the lower areas. At this time, the display mode information stored in each area of the display mode storage area 344e is also shifted sequentially to the lower areas.

In addition, the shift process controls the display control device 350 to change the display position of the hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G to the lower unit hold display area. For example, if, prior to this control, hold images are displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga, as shown in FIG. 40 (b1), then this control changes the display positions of those hold images to the execution display area D and the first unit hold display area Ga1, as shown in FIG. 40 (b2). Note that if a setting is made to change the display mode of the hold image in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701, the change in display position and the change in display mode are performed simultaneously.

<Special chart change display processing>
The processing for displaying special chart variations in step Sa1305 (FIG. 30) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa1801, it is determined whether a game round is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a game round of either the first special design or the second special design is currently being played. If neither game round is currently being played, the process proceeds to step Sa1802, where it is determined whether a variation start command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. The variation start command contains information about the variation pattern selected by lottery in the variation display time setting process (Figure 24) in the main control unit 162.

By referencing this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to determine at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Furthermore, as already explained, because fluctuation patterns for jackpots and losses are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the win/loss judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If a fluctuation start command has not been received, the special chart fluctuation display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has been received, the processing proceeds to step Sa1803, where fluctuation start processing is executed to start the performance for the game round, and then the special chart fluctuation display processing is terminated.

The fluctuation start process analyzes the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 and identifies the fluctuation pattern for the current special game round. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game round is determined based on the identified fluctuation pattern. A presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The fluctuation display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the fluctuation display time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (Figure 14) in the main control device 162, and a common fluctuation display time is assigned to one fluctuation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 1A, the corresponding fluctuation display time is 15 seconds in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. The fluctuation start process references the presentation pattern table to identify the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command, and sets this as the fluctuation display time for the current special game round.

The presentation pattern table also associates presentation patterns for each game round with each variation pattern. These presentation patterns include the normal reach hit, SP reach A hit, SP reach B hit, SPSP reach A hit, SPSP reach B hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach A miss, SP reach B miss, SPSP reach A miss, and SPSP reach B miss, as described in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between variation patterns and presentation patterns has already been described with reference to Figure 14, so further explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the variable start process, if the result of the win/loss determination for the current special symbol game round is a jackpot, the jackpot type is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a probability jackpot, the stop result for the probability jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are determined randomly by lottery, etc.

Furthermore, if the result of the hit/miss judgment for this special game turn is a miss, the stopping symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be determined randomly. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols will be determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result for this turn will be the one that results in a combination of miss reach symbols on one active line L1 to L5.

In the variation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command containing information on the current stopped symbol and presentation pattern is set as the output target to the display control device 350. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 so that the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 stop according to the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or so that a game round presentation is performed according to the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

If step Sa1801 returns a positive result (a game round is currently being played), the process proceeds to step Sa1804, where it is determined whether a change end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time for this special game round has not yet elapsed. In this case, step Sa1805 executes a change in progress process. The change in progress process executes processes to continue the change display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach effect.

In step Sa1806, it is determined whether the current special symbol play is the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice display. If it is not the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice display, the special symbol change display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice display, the first execution processing of the hold notice is executed in step Sa1807. This processing is intended to change the display mode of the reserved image of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice display during the execution of the play of that reserved information. The processing in this step is basically the same as the first execution processing of the hold notice (Fig. 38(a)) in step Sa1404 (Fig. 31).

Referring to Figure 38(a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807, if a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344 and a situation exists in which a hold notice performance should be executed, step Sa1602 determines whether it is time to change the display mode of the hold image (the hold image displayed in execution display area D) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. This determination is made based on the setting results of the performance scenario for the hold notice performance set in step Sa1513 (Figure 34).

If it is time to change the display mode, a lottery is held in step Sa1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, step Sa1605 sets the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to execute a change suggestion effect. After step Sa1605 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (if the lottery to execute a change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, where the display mode to be changed to in this change process is determined based on the results of the effect scenario settings.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to change to the display mode determined in step Sa1606. As a result, at a predetermined reserved change point during a game round, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting results of the presentation scenario. In the following step Sa1608, information on the changed display mode is stored in an area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of RAM 344.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (Figure 41), after executing the process of step Sa1807, the third execution process of the pending notice is executed in step Sa1808. This process is related to the presentation mode switching process of step Sa1307 (Figure 30), and will be described in detail after explaining that switching process. After executing step Sa1808, the special chart change display process ends.

If step Sa1804 returns a positive result (if a variation end command has been received), it means that the variation display time has elapsed. In this case, proceed to step Sa1809 and execute variation end processing. The variation end processing ends the variation display of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 and the currently running effects (stops the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3).

In step Sa1810, it is determined whether the current special symbol play time is the play time of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice display. If it is not the play time of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice display, the special symbol change display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the play time of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice display, it is determined in step Sa1811 whether a hold notice flag or a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Details of the return standby flag will be described later.

If either the hold notice flag or the return standby flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step Sa1812. After step Sa1812 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1811 (if neither the hold notice flag nor the return standby flag is stored), the special chart change display processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, whether the variable display time has elapsed is determined based on whether a variable end command has been received from the main control device 162. However, since the variable display time can be determined from the variable start command sent at the start of the variable in the performance control device 143, it may also be determined whether the variable display time for the currently running game has elapsed based on the determined variable display time. In this case, the main control device 162 may not be configured to send a variable end command.

<Rendering mode switching process>
The rendering mode switching process of step Sa1307 (Fig. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 42. The rendering mode switching process is for switching between rendering mode A and rendering mode B, which have already been described.

First, in step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not the display mode switching is currently in an effective period. In this embodiment, the period during which the SP reach display or SPSP reach display is being executed in a special symbol game round, or the period during which the open/close execution mode is being executed, is considered an invalid period during which the display mode cannot be switched. All other periods, including the period during which the special symbol game round is being executed, are effective periods for display mode switching. In step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not the current timing falls within the above-mentioned effective period. If the display mode switching is not currently in an effective period, the display mode switching process is terminated.

If the effect mode switching period is valid, proceed to step Sa1902, where it is determined whether a predetermined operation for switching the effect mode has been performed on the effect operation unit 36. If the predetermined operation has not been performed, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

If a predetermined operation is performed, the process proceeds to step Sa1903, where a switching process is performed to switch the presentation mode. For example, if the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B. The presentation mode may be switched in accordance with the timing when the predetermined operation is performed, or when the next special game round begins.

In step Sa1904, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the presentation mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. In this embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to presentation mode A and presentation mode B, respectively. For example, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the mode A flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d.

In step Sa1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag will be described later.

If the return standby flag is not stored, proceed to step Sa1906 and determine whether a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the hold notice flag is not stored, the presentation mode switching process ends.

On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, i.e., if the hold notice effect is being executed or is in a standby state, proceed to step Sa1907 and clear the hold notice flag. As a result, if the hold notice effect was being executed before the mode was switched, the continuation of the hold notice effect is canceled. Also, if the hold notice effect was in a standby state, the execution of the hold notice effect that was on standby is canceled.

In step Sa1908, it is determined whether a hold preview effect is being executed, i.e., whether there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the hold images displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb are displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. If there is no hold image displayed in a specific display mode, the effect mode switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode (if a pending preview performance is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sa1909, and information indicating the specific display mode in which the pending image is being displayed is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. In the return area 344f, areas are set corresponding to the pending display areas Ga1-Ga4, Gb1-Gb4 and execution display area D of each special chart, and it is possible to store the display mode of the pending image in each area.

In step Sa1909, the display mode information currently stored in the display mode storage area 344e is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time step Sa1909 is processed, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

The display mode information may be identification information indicating the display mode, or identification information indicating the display color. Essentially, it is sufficient if the display mode of the pending image can be identified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and it is sufficient if it corresponds to the display mode of the pending image.

By performing the above process, by referring to the return area 344f after switching presentation modes, it is possible to determine which pending image was displayed in which display mode before switching presentation modes. Note that when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (Figure 40) is executed while display mode information is stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the display mode information stored in each area of the return area 344f is shifted sequentially toward the lower areas.

In step Sa1910, processing is performed to cancel the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched. The switch to the normal display mode HMa is performed in accordance with the timing of the presentation mode switch. For example, if the presentation mode is switched when the above-mentioned specified operation is performed, the reserved image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and if the presentation mode is switched at the start of the next special game round, the reserved image is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa at that timing.

In addition, the cancellation process of step Sa1910 executes a process to clear the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e. Therefore, at the time of processing of step Sa1910, display mode information is stored only in the return area 344f. Furthermore, the cancellation process of step Sa1910 also executes a process to erase the performance scenario data set in step Sa1513 of the setting process for the hold notice (Figure 34).

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is switched, the system is configured to restrict re-entry of execution lotteries for pending information that has already been acquired, in other words, pending information for which an execution lottery for the pending notice presentation (setting process for the pending notice in Figure 34) has already been held. Specifically, a new execution lottery for the pending notice presentation is not held, and execution lotteries are not held twice for the same pending information (pending image) before and after the presentation mode is switched.

In step Sa1911, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In this embodiment, if the presentation mode is switched and then switched back to the original presentation mode, the display mode of the pending image is restored to a specific display mode. The return standby flag is a flag indicating that the return process is on standby. After step Sa1911 is executed, the presentation mode switching process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1905 above (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa1912, where processing is performed to clear the return standby flag. A positive judgment in step Sa1905 here means that the initial display mode switch is performed while a hold preview effect is being executed, and then the mode switch operation is performed again, resulting in a return to the original display mode. For example, this is a situation in which the display mode is switched from display mode A to display mode B while one of the hold images is being displayed in a specific display mode, and then the display mode is switched back to display mode A. In this case, during the previous mode switch (from display mode A to display mode B), the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa and the hold preview effect is canceled. Therefore, the hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode in display mode A will continue to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa while in display mode B.

It should be noted that after switching to presentation mode B, the game for that pending image (pending information) may end before switching to presentation mode A. In this case, the return standby flag is cleared in steps Sa1811 and Sa1812 of the special chart change display process (Figure 41), resulting in a negative determination in step Sa1905 above.

After step Sa1912 is executed, step Sa1913 executes a setting process for preview return to return the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode. Then, the presentation mode switching process ends.

<Changing the display mode of the reserved image by switching the presentation mode>
As already explained, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is changed while the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode, the presentation mode of the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the reserved notice presentation is canceled. In this case, by switching the display state of not only the background image 401 but also the reserved display unit 200, it is possible to make the change of presentation mode easily apparent to the player.

Furthermore, if switching presentation modes were merely a change in the displayed image, it would be difficult to impress upon the player the differences between the modes. However, in this embodiment, the frequency with which the hold preview presentation is executed differs between modes, making the differences between presentation modes more noticeable. However, in a configuration in which the frequency with which the hold preview presentation is executed differs between modes, even if the display mode of the hold image in which the hold preview presentation is executed is the same, the jackpot expectation suggested by this display mode may differ depending on the type of presentation mode. For this reason, if the display mode before the mode switch is maintained after the mode switch, even though the actual expectation of the hold information corresponds to the presentation mode before the switch, it will be displayed as if suggesting the expectation corresponding to the presentation mode after the switch, which could lead to a mismatch between the expectation suggested by the hold preview presentation and the actual expectation. In this regard, by changing the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched, such inconsistencies in expectation can be effectively avoided.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the hold preview effect when the presentation mode is switched, it is possible to make the change in presentation mode easier to understand and avoid inconsistencies in the level of expectation suggested by the hold preview effect. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that some players may mistakenly believe that the cancellation of the hold preview effect means that the chance suggested by the hold preview effect has also disappeared, leading to disappointment.

In this embodiment, therefore, a setting process for restoring the preview in step Sa1913, a second execution process for the hold preview in step Sa1702, and a third execution process for the hold preview in step Sa1808 are provided, and the display mode of the hold image is restored when the original presentation mode is returned to by switching again after the presentation mode has been switched. The processing of each of the above steps is explained in detail below.

<Setting process for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step Sa1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa2101, the display status of the reserved images displayed in each reserved display area Ga, Gb and execution display area D before the specific display mode is released and the normal display mode HMa is recognized. For example, if the fourth reserved image for the first special chart (the reserved image in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and then switched back to presentation mode A, it is recognized that the reserved image was displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

In this case, if, after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the number of plays has been played and the reserved image has shifted to the lower area, it is determined that the reserved image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 at the time of the mode switch was displayed in blue display mode HMb before the release process. For example, if two plays have been played after switching to presentation mode B, it is determined that the reserved image displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 was displayed in blue display mode HMb at the time of the mode switch. This determination is made by referring to the return area 344f of RAM 344.

In step Sa2102, it is determined whether a game turn of the reserved image (target reserved image) that was displayed in a specific display mode is currently being played. In other words, after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, it is determined whether a game turn has been played and the game has progressed to the game turn of the target reserved image. If a game turn is not currently being played, it proceeds to step Sa2103 and determines the number of reserved information before the target reserved image (number of reserved items). For example, if the target reserved image is the third reserved information, the number of reserved items before that is determined to be two. Note that reserved information that is currently being played is not included in the number of reserved items. The number of reserved items is determined separately for the first special design and the second special design.

In step Sa2104, it is determined whether the number of reserved items determined in step Sa2103 above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 1). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step Sa2105, where a lottery process for a return scenario is executed. The return scenario determines at what shift timing the target reserved image will be returned to its original specific display mode.

The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a restoration scenario table that determines when the display mode of the reserved image is restored to its original state, corresponding to the number of reserved items and the original specific display mode. For example, in the restoration scenario table, when the number of reserved items is two, the restoration timing for the display mode can be selected from the first shift (shift to the second unit reserved display area Ga2), the second shift (shift to the first unit reserved display area Ga1), and the third shift (shift to the execution display area D).

In addition, in the restoration scenario table, if the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, it is possible to select whether to restore the original specific display mode directly from the normal display mode HMa, or to restore the original specific display mode in stages. Therefore, a single hold change display may restore the specific display mode before release, or multiple hold change displays may be required to restore the specific display mode before release.

In step Sa2105, the timing and mode of return of the display mode of the pending image are determined by lottery based on the return scenario table and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

After step Sa2105 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2104 (if the number of reserved items is less than one), a return scenario setting process is performed in step Sa2106. If a return scenario lottery process is performed in step Sa2105, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be restored using the selected return scenario, and if the number of reserved items is less than one, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be restored when shifting to the execution display area D.

After step Sa2106 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa2102 (if a game round of the target reserved image is being played), in step Sa2107, a notice return flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that processing should be performed to restore the display mode of the reserved image to its original state. After step Sa2107 is executed, the setting process for notice return is terminated.

<Second execution process of hold notice>
The second execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1702 (FIG. 40(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 44. This process is performed as part of the shift command response process, in other words, it is a process that is executed at the shift timing of the hold image.

First, in step Sa2201, it is determined whether a notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If a notice return flag is not stored, the second execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the notice return flag is stored, proceed to step Sa2202, where the return scenario set in step Sa2106 of the notice return setting process is determined. In step Sa2203, based on the setting result of the return scenario determined in step Sa2202, it is determined whether the current shift timing is the timing to return the display mode of the target hold image. If it is not the timing to return, the second execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If it is time to return, proceed to step Sa2204 and determine the display mode to which you will change based on the settings of the return scenario. For example, if the display mode before the target pending image is released is the green display mode HMc, and the display mode defined by the return scenario is the green display mode HMc, then the green display mode HMc is determined as the display mode to which you will change. Also, if the display mode defined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is the precursor to the green display mode HMc, then the blue display mode HMb is determined as the display mode to which you will change.

In step Sa2205, the display mode of the target hold image is set to change to the display mode determined in step Sa2204. Specifically, the output command to the display control device 350 includes information indicating the hold image whose display mode is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to, and a command is set to change the display mode of the hold image at the current shift timing. After step Sa2205 is executed, the second execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Third execution process of pending notice>
The third execution process of the reserved notice in step Sa1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45. This process is performed as part of the special chart change display process, in other words, it is a process performed during the execution of a game round.

First, in step Sa2301, it is determined whether a notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If a notice return flag is not stored, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the notice return flag is stored, proceed to step Sa2302 and determine whether a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Promotion flags will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, proceed to step Sa2303 and determine whether the current display mode of the target reserved image is the normal display mode HMa. Note that the current display mode of the target reserved image is the normal display mode HMa when a switch operation to the original presentation mode is performed during the execution of a game of the target reserved image.

If the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, proceed to step Sa2304 and determine whether any reserved change points remain in the current game round. For example, if the presentation mode of the target reserved image is changed towards the end of the game round, and there are no reserved change points remaining, proceed to step Sa2314 and erase the preview return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d. This cancels the process of restoring the reserved preview presentation, and the target reserved image (the reserved image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa for that game round.

If a hold change point remains, in step Sa2305, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the specific display mode of the target hold image before release, and this is determined as the display mode to which it will be changed. In step Sa2306, the display mode of the hold image is set to change to the display mode determined in step Sa2305. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the hold image is set as an output command to the display control device 350, including information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to. As a result, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (returned) to the specific display mode before release at the most recent hold change point.

After step Sa2306 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2303 (if the current display mode of the target hold image is not the normal display mode HMa), step Sa2307 determines whether a judgment-completed flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Note that if the current display mode of the target hold image (the hold image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa, this means that the display mode of the hold image has already been changed to the specific display mode before release.

If it is determined in step Sa2307 that the judged flag is stored, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated. On the other hand, if the judged flag is not stored, the process for promoting the pending notice is executed in step Sa2308.

Here, the process for promoting the pending notice in step Sa2308 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 46.

In the promotion process, first in step Sa2401, the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image is identified. This is done based on the fluctuation start command (step Sa712 in Figure 23) sent from the main control unit 162 at the start of the game round (the game round currently being played) of the target reserved image.

In step Sa2402, a determination is made as to whether the hold notification effect will be upgraded based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step Sa2401 and the upgrade determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The upgrade determination determines whether it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image (the hold image displayed in the execution display area D) to a higher-level specific display mode (a display mode higher than the display mode before release).

As shown in Figure 47, the promotion determination table defines an upper limit for the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, for variation pattern 5H, which corresponds to a missed SPSP Reach A, a change up to the red display mode HMd is permitted. Incidentally, for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, a change up to the rainbow display mode HMe is permitted for all variation patterns 1A to 5A.

The promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in Figure 47, and may have other configurations, such as a different upper limit display mode for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot. Essentially, it is sufficient that the upper limit display mode is determined to correspond to the jackpot expectation for that number of plays (variation pattern) (in other words, to be consistent with the jackpot expectation).

In step Sa2402, the promotion determination table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern identified in step Sa2401, and a determination is made as to whether the current display mode of the target pending image is lower than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the current display mode is lower than the upper limit display mode, the display mode is allowed to be promoted; otherwise, promotion is not permitted. Note that if a change in the display mode has been set in step Sa2306, a determination is made as to whether the changed display mode is lower than the identified upper limit display mode, and based on the result, a determination is made as to whether promotion is possible.

After step Sa2402 is executed, in step Sa2403, a judged flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The judged flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a promotion judgment has already been performed; in other words, it is used to avoid duplicate promotion judgments.

In step Sa2404, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step Sa2402 above allows the display mode to be promoted. If promotion is not allowed, the process exits the pending notification promotion process and proceeds to step Sa2314 (Figure 45), where the notification return flag is cleared and the third execution process of the pending notification is terminated.

If promotion is permitted, proceed to step Sa2405, where a lottery process for a promotion scenario is executed. The promotion scenario determines the timing (hold change point) and display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D to be changed to. A promotion scenario lottery table for drawing promotion scenarios is stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. This promotion scenario lottery table contains information for the execution lottery to draw whether or not to execute a promotion effect, as well as multiple promotion scenarios corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the pending preview effect. In step Sa2405, an execution lottery for whether or not to promote the display mode and a scenario lottery for promotion are executed based on the promotion scenario lottery table and lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step Sa2406, it is determined whether the result of the lottery processing in step Sa2405 is to upgrade the display mode. If not, the pending notice upgrade processing is exited and the process proceeds to step Sa2314 (Figure 45), where the notice return flag is cleared and the pending notice third execution processing is terminated.

If a promotion is to be performed, proceed to step Sa2407, where promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected in step Sa2405 is executed. After step Sa2407 is executed, processing related to the change suggestion effect is executed in steps Sa2408 to Sa2410. These processes are similar to steps Sa1603 to Sa1605 in the first execution process of the hold notice (Figure 38(a)), so explanation is omitted.

After step Sa2410 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2409, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step Sa2411, and then the process for promoting the hold notice is terminated. The promotion flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the display mode of the target hold image should be promoted.

Returning to the explanation of the third execution process of the pending notice (Figure 45), after the pending notice promotion process in step Sa2308 is executed, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa2302 above (if the promotion flag is stored), proceed to step Sa2309 to determine whether it is time to promote the display mode. This judgment is made based on the promotion scenario setting results in step Sa2407. If it is not time to promote, the third execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If it is time to promote, proceed to step Sa2310, where the display mode to which this change will be made (higher-level display mode) is determined based on the promotion scenario settings. In the following step Sa2311, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to change to the display mode determined in step Sa2310. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set so as to include information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350.

In step Sa2312, it is determined whether the display mode determined in step Sa2310 or the display mode set as the destination in step Sa2311 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if the promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages through multiple change processes and the current change process is an intermediate process, this step is determined to be negative as it is not the final display mode, and the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If this is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is cleared in step Sa2313. In the following step Sa2314, the preview return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is cleared, and then the third execution process for the pending preview is terminated.

<Flow of display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The flow of display modes of pending images when the presentation mode is switched will be explained with reference to Figures 48 to 50.

When three reserved information for the first special symbol have been acquired and a win occurs in the first actuation port 62, and the fourth reserved information (reserved image HW) is acquired, the main control unit 162 executes a reserved pre-read process (step Sa305) for the acquired reserved information. Here, it is assumed that the result is a miss, and that the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 6H (SPSP Reach B miss).

The effect control device 143 also executes a setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) based on the results of the pre-read in the main control device 162, and performs a lottery to determine the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold image HW, a lottery to determine the final display mode, a lottery to determine the effect scenario, etc. As a result of these lotteries, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and the effect scenario is selected to initially display in the green display mode HMc and change to the red display mode HMd at a later shift timing. In this case, as shown in Figure 48 (a), the hold image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. At that time, as shown in Figure 48 (b), the display mode of the pending image HW, which was in the green display mode HMc in presentation mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, the presentation control device 143 stores information indicating the display mode of the pending image HW before the mode switch (green display mode HMc) in the return area 344f of RAM 344. Note that Figure 48 (b) shows a case where the presentation mode switches during a game round in which pending information for the pending image HW was obtained.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the presentation mode switches from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the presentation control device 143 executes the setting process for the preview return (step Sa1913) based on the information stored in the return area 344f, determines the original display mode (green display mode HMc), draws a lottery for a return scenario, etc. As a result of the scenario draw, it is assumed that a scenario is selected in which the display is initially in the normal display mode HMa, and then changes to the original display mode, green display mode HMc, at the timing of a subsequent change.

In this case, as shown in Figure 49(a), at the time of switching to presentation mode A, the hold image HW is displayed in the normal display mode HMa. If the selected return scenario changes the display mode of the hold image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and then to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing, then, as shown in Figure 49(b), at the time the hold image HW is shifted to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the hold image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc. As a result, the display mode of the hold image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa when switching to presentation mode B, is returned to the display mode before switching to presentation mode B.

Furthermore, after switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the execution lottery for the change suggestion presentation (Figure 39) that suggests a change in the display mode of the reserved image (rank up) will not be held until the game play of the reserved image HW begins. For this reason, the change suggestion presentation will not be held when the display mode changes to the blue display mode HMb or the green display mode HMc.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when a play of the reserved image HW begins, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step Sa1808), and performs the following operations: determining the fluctuation pattern of the reserved image HW, determining the upper limit display mode corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern, and determining whether to promote it to a higher display mode.

The fluctuation pattern of the pending image HW is fluctuation pattern 6H, and in this case the upper limit display mode is the red display mode HMd (Figure 47). Therefore, in the promotion determination, the display mode is allowed to be promoted based on the fact that the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is a mode lower than the upper limit display mode. As a result, as shown in Figure 50 (b), at a predetermined pending change point in the play of the pending image HW, the display mode of the pending image HW displayed in the execution display area D is changed to the red display mode HMd, i.e., a mode higher than the original display mode. At that time, if the execution lottery for the change suggestion effect is won, the change suggestion effect is performed and then the change to the red display mode HMd is made.

The red display mode HMd suggests that an SPSP Reach effect will be performed in the play of the reserved image. Here, the fluctuation pattern of the reserved image HW is fluctuation pattern 6H, which corresponds to the SPSP Reach B miss effect, so that an SPSP Reach B effect will be performed in the play of the reserved image HW, and the suggestion by the reserved image HW and the actual play effect are consistent.

In addition, after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the game round for the reserved image HW may end without switching back to presentation mode A. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image HW will remain in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the display mode of the target hold image HW is then restored to the original specific display mode by transitioning back to the original effect mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the results of the reserved image read-ahead process, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation of a jackpot result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, multiple types of specific display modes are set with different jackpot expectancies, allowing the expectancy to be indicated by assigning a high or low level, resulting in an advantageous configuration for stimulating the player's anticipation. Furthermore, mode switching between presentation mode A and presentation mode B allows the player to change their mood during play and prevent boredom from building up. In this configuration, there is a concern that switching presentation modes while a reserved image preview is being executed (a presentation in which the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode) could cause the player to mistakenly believe that the expectancy level indicated or suggested by the presentation has disappeared, leading to anxiety. In this case, it is conceivable to restrict presentation mode switching while the reserved image preview is being executed, but this could result in a situation in which the frequency of presentation mode switching decreases, undermining the purpose of providing multiple presentation modes.

In this regard, with this configuration, if the execution of the hold notification effect is canceled by switching the presentation mode and then the original presentation mode is switched back to, the target hold image HW, which has been changed to the normal display mode HMa, is returned to the original specific display mode, making it possible to notify the player of the expectation level again. This allows the player to know that the expectation level has not been lost, and the hold notification effect can be executed without imposing any restrictions on switching presentation modes. In other words, it is possible to optimally achieve both the execution of the hold notification effect and the switching of presentation modes.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when a hold notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344, and when the original effect mode is restored, the notification mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the return area 344f of RAM 344. This makes it possible to appropriately restore the display mode of the hold image, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, to the original specific display mode when the original effect mode is restored.

When setting the above, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, regardless of the results of the pending pre-read process performed on the target pending image.

For example, when transitioning from presentation mode A to presentation mode B and then back to presentation mode A, if the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the results of the hold pre-read performed in the previous presentation mode A, it is expected that it will be set to a mode different from the display mode in the previous presentation mode A. In this case, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the later presentation mode A will not match the display mode in the previous presentation mode A, making it difficult for the player to tell that the released hold notice effect has returned. In particular, in a configuration that can gradually change the display mode of the hold image, even with the same pre-read result, differences can occur in the display mode of the hold image (hold notice effect) at the time of switching presentation modes depending on the timing of the switch. Therefore, if the display mode in the later presentation mode A is set based on the results of the hold pre-read processing, it is likely that a mode different from the display mode in the previous presentation mode A will be set.

In this regard, with this configuration, the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, rather than the results of the hold preview process, so when transitioning to the later presentation mode A, it can be set to the same display mode as the one actually displayed in the earlier presentation mode A. This allows for optimal alignment between the display mode in the earlier presentation mode A and the display mode in the later presentation mode B, making it easier for the player to recognize that the display mode (hold preview presentation) has returned.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW is to be restored to the original specific display mode by transitioning to a later display mode A, the display scenario (return scenario) is reset to change the display mode of the target hold image HW from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode.

When the target hold image HW is returned to its original specific display mode in the subsequent presentation mode A, the period from when the mode switches to the subsequent presentation mode A until the end of the game round for the target hold image HW, i.e., the remaining period for which the target hold image HW continues to be displayed, is expected to vary depending on the length of time spent in the immediately preceding presentation mode B. In this regard, with this configuration, the presentation scenario is reset when the target hold image HW is returned to its original specific display mode, so the target hold image HW can be suitably changed to its original specific display mode even when the remaining period varies.

In the above case, the number of pending entries before the target pending image HW is determined, and the performance scenario is reset based on the results.

In this case, the presentation scenario can be reset after properly understanding the remaining period, and the target pending image HW can be suitably changed to its original specific display mode regardless of the length of stay in presentation mode B.

In subsequent performance mode A, the target pending image HW can be restored to its original specific display mode, and then promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of display modes (suggested expectation levels) in the later presentation mode A is limited to the display mode in the earlier presentation mode A, preventing the range of suggestible expectation levels from narrowing. In this case, if a higher-level specific display mode is suddenly used, it may be difficult to see the correspondence with the hold notice effect used in the earlier presentation mode A, and the effect may become difficult to understand. In this regard, with this configuration, it is possible to first return to the original specific display mode and then change to a higher-level display mode, making it easy to see that the display mode of the target hold image HW has returned (the released hold notice effect has returned), preventing player confusion.

In the above case, rather than simply upgrading the display mode of the target hold image HW, a promotion determination is made as to whether or not to promote it to a higher display mode based on the fluctuation pattern of the target hold image HW, and based on the result, it is decided whether or not to promote it to a higher mode. This makes it possible to promote the display mode of the target hold image HW while aligning it with the game play effects (reach effects, etc.) that are actually performed in the game play of the target hold image HW.

It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the pending image will change to a higher mode, and it is configured to restrict the execution of the change suggestion effect if the display mode of the target pending image HW is to be restored to the original specific display mode by transitioning to the original display mode.

The change suggestion effect suggests a change to a higher-level display mode, creating anticipation for the change to a higher-level mode and increasing the player's attention to the reserved image. In this configuration, for example, if the target reserved image HW is in the green display mode HMc in a previous presentation mode A and then changes from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc in a subsequent presentation mode A, when a change suggestion effect is performed, it is possible that the player will associate a higher-level display mode (such as the red display mode HMd or the rainbow display mode HMe) with the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in the previous presentation mode A that they remember, even though the image actually returns to the original specific display mode. In this case, the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) of the target reserved image HW will be lower-level than the mode associated with it, potentially leaving the player with an unpleasant impression. In this regard, with this configuration, even if a change to a higher-level display mode occurs, if the change simply reverts to the display mode in the previous display mode A, the change suggestion effect is not executed, which prevents the player from associating the display mode with a higher-level display mode than the actual display mode, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

The likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In this configuration, switching presentation modes changes presentation characteristics related to the likelihood of winning, making a stronger impression on the player than when only appearance changes occur, such as by changing the background image or character image. However, on the other hand, if the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW remains in the specific display mode (while the ongoing hold preview presentation continues), there is a risk that the likelihood of winning suggested by the target hold image HW will differ before and after the presentation mode is switched. In this case, canceling the execution of the hold preview presentation upon switching presentation modes can prevent such inconsistencies in likelihood, but this raises concerns that the player may be confused or anxious, thinking that the likelihood of winning suggested by the specific display mode has disappeared. By applying this embodiment to such a configuration (e.g., a configuration in which the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode upon switching to the original presentation mode), these features can be effectively utilized, and the above-mentioned effects can be optimally achieved.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, when a reserved image in a specific display mode is present and switching is performed from one of presentation mode A and presentation mode B to the other, the display mode of the reserved image before the switching is stored, and the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode. If the display mode is then switched back to the original presentation mode (one of the presentation modes) before the end of the game round for the reserved image, a restoration process is performed for the display mode of the reserved image based on the display mode information stored at the time of the previous switching (switching to the other presentation mode), and the reserved image is changed to the original specific display mode or to a higher specific display mode.

During the period between the first switch and the second switch (re-switching to the original presentation mode), i.e., the period while the display mode restoration process is pending, the player is playing, so new pending information may be generated. In this modified example, the handling of the pending notification presentation for this new pending information differs from the first embodiment described above. This modified example will be explained below with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Note that in these figures, components similar to those in the first embodiment described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and their explanation will be omitted.

<Pending command response processing>
The hold command response processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 51. This processing is executed when the performance control device 143 receives a hold command (when hold information occurs), and is executed in place of the hold command response processing of Fig. 31. In Fig. 51, the same steps as in Fig. 31 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, the value of the hold count counter (start hold memory count SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1. In step Sa2601, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The return standby flag is used by MPU 342 to determine whether the game is waiting for the return process (a process for returning the display mode of the hold image to the original specific display mode), and is stored in the various flag storage area 344d during the standby period for the return process. The standby period for the return process includes the period from when presentation mode A or presentation mode B is switched to the other and when it is switched back to the original presentation mode (the period of stay in the other presentation mode), as well as the period from when it is switched to the other presentation mode until the end of the play of the target hold image (the hold image that is the target of the display mode restoration process) without being switched back to the original presentation mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa2601 (the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa1403, where the hold notification setting process (Figure 34) is executed. In the hold notification setting process, settings are made to execute the hold notification performance for the generated hold information.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa2601 (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa2602 without executing the hold notification setting process of step Sa1403, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the generated hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, in this modified example, if new hold information occurs during the standby period for the return process, the execution of the hold notification effect for that hold information is restricted.

The hold information is read ahead by the main control unit 162's hold read ahead process (Figure 26), just like other hold information. Therefore, although the performance control unit 143 forcibly sets the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the read ahead results, such as the variation pattern, are still obtained by the hold command from the main control unit 162.

In step Sa2603, the information generated during the limit period is stored in association with the pending information that has occurred. The information generated during the limit period indicates that the pending information occurred during the limit period. The processing of step Sa2603 is performed, for example, by storing the information generated during the limit period along with pending information such as fluctuation patterns in areas 1 to 4 (Figure 32) of the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift processing of step Sa1704 in the shift command response processing (Figure 40) is performed, the information generated during the limit period is shifted to the lower area along with the pending information. This makes it possible to determine which pending image occurred during the limit period, even when the shift processing is performed and the display area of the pending image is shifted. Note that the information generated during the limit period may be stored in a memory area other than the pending memory area 344c, provided that it is possible to identify which pending information it is.

After step Sa2603 is executed, step Sa1405 executes processing to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of display screen G. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa2602, hold images for hold information that occurs during the restricted period are displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

If the judgment in step Sa2601 above is negative (if the call is not within the restricted period) and the process proceeds to step Sa1405 via the hold notice setting process in step Sa1403 and the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1404, the hold image will be displayed in the display format set in those processes.

<Rendering mode switching process>
The rendering mode switching process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 52. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30) in the rendering control device 143, and is executed in place of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42. In Fig. 52, the same steps as in Fig. 42 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the presentation mode switching process in step Sa1903, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set in step Sa1904. In the following step Sa1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. Note that when the switching process in step Sa1903 is executed, a situation in which a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d means that after the presentation mode switching (previous switching), a re-switch to the original presentation mode has occurred. Conversely, a situation in which a return standby flag is not stored means that the previous switching has occurred (a situation in which a re-switch to the original presentation mode has not yet occurred).

If it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is not stored (the previous switch has been performed), proceed to step Sa1906 and execute the processing of steps Sa1906 to Sa1911 as in the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is stored (if re-switching has occurred), the process proceeds to step Sa1912, where the return standby flag is cleared from the various flag storage area 344d. This releases the hold notification effect restriction. Therefore, for hold information that occurs after this release, the hold notification effect setting process (step Sa1403) and the like are executed when the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step Sa1913, the setting process for the advance notice return is executed, and in the following step Sa2701, it is determined whether there is any hold information that occurred during the restricted period. This determination is made based on the information that occurred during the restricted period stored in step Sa2603 of the hold response command processing (Figure 51).

If there is no pending information generated during the restricted period, the presentation mode switching process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is pending information generated during the restricted period, the second setting process for the pending notification is executed in step Sa2702, and then the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for hold notice in step Sa2702 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 53.

First, in step Sa2801, the pending information that occurred during the restricted period is identified. That is, based on the information generated during the restricted period, it is determined which of the pending information that exists at that time occurred during the restricted period.

After executing the processing of step Sa2801, the processing of step Sa2802 and subsequent steps is executed for the pending transactions that occurred during the identified restricted period. Note that since much of the processing of step Sa2802 and subsequent steps is similar to the processing in the pending notification setting processing (Figure 34) of step Sa1403 (Figure 51), the explanation of the common processing will be simplified and the different processing will be explained in detail.

In steps Sa2802 to Sa2804, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern of pending occurrences during the limited period and to determine whether a jackpot has been won. In step Sa2805, the presentation mode after the switch is determined. For example, if the re-switch is from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, presentation mode A is determined as the presentation mode after the switch.

In steps Sa2806 to Sa2808, the hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the switched presentation mode identified in step Sa2805 is obtained, and a lottery is held to determine whether to execute the hold notice presentation. If the execution lottery is won, steps Sa2809 to Sa2814 determine the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice presentation, and the process (presentation scenario) leading up to the final display mode is determined.

At that time, if the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode or the presentation scenario lottery table for drawing the presentation scenario differs for each presentation mode, the table corresponding to the switched presentation mode identified in step Sa2805 is obtained and the lottery is performed. Although the hold that occurred during the restricted period occurred in the presentation mode before the switch, the lottery for executing the hold notice presentation and the lottery for the final display mode are performed according to the conditions set for the switched presentation mode.

In step Sa2815, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this way, a process is executed to change the display mode of the hold notice to a specific display mode in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command response process (Figure 38(a)) or the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807 in the special chart change display process (Figure 41). In other words, the hold notice presentation for the hold information that occurred before the mode switch will be performed in the presentation mode after the switch.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart variable display process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 54. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30) in the performance control device 143, and is executed instead of the special chart variable display process in Fig. 41. In Fig. 54, the same process as in Fig. 41 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

This process is designed to deal with the situation when the play for the target reserved image (the reserved image that is the target of the display mode restoration process) ends without switching back to the original presentation mode.

After executing the variable end processing in step Sa1809, step Sa1810 determines whether the current special chart play is the play of the pending information (the pending image that is the target of the display mode return processing) that triggered the pending notice performance. If it is the play of the pending information that triggered the pending notice performance, step Sa1811 determines whether a pending notice flag or a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If either a pending notice flag or a return standby flag is stored, step Sa1812 erases the stored flag. This cancels the return processing and releases the restricted state of the pending notice performance.

In step Sa2901, it is determined whether any pending information has occurred during the restricted period. If any pending information has occurred during the restricted period, the process proceeds to step Sa2902, where it is determined which pending information occurred during the restricted period. The processes in steps Sa2901 and Sa2902 are performed based on the pending information stored in step Sa2603 of the pending command processing (Figure 51).

In step Sa2903, setting processing for hold notice is performed for holds occurring during the restricted period identified in step Sa2902. This processing is similar to the setting processing for hold notice (Fig. 34) in step Sa1403 (Fig. 51), and performs setting processing to execute hold notice presentations corresponding to the current presentation mode.

In other words, if the restricted state is released without switching back to the original presentation mode, the conditions set for the presentation mode currently in use will be applied to the lottery for executing the pending preview presentation and the lottery for the final display mode. For example, if the previous switch was from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the conditions set for presentation mode B will be applied to the lottery for executing the pending preview presentation, etc. After step Sa2903 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2902 (if there is no pending information that occurred during the restricted period), the special chart variation display processing will be terminated.

<Display flow of pending images corresponding to pending occurrences during the restriction period>
The flow of display modes of pending images corresponding to pending occurrences during a restricted period will be explained with reference to Figure 55.

When the fourth hold information for the first special chart occurs in a situation where presentation mode A is selected, the main control unit 162 performs a hold advance read process (step Sa305), and the presentation control unit 143 performs a hold notice setting process (step Sa1403). As a result, if a hold notice presentation with the display mode set to the green display mode HMc is executed, a hold image HA with the display mode set to the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga, as shown in Figure 55 (a).

When a player performs a mode switching operation during a game in which hold information corresponding to the hold image HA has been acquired, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. At this time, as shown in Figure 55 (b), the display mode of the hold image HA changes from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

Let's assume that while the presentation mode remains in presentation mode B, two new pieces of hold information are generated during the period until the hold image HA is shifted to the second unit hold display area Ga2. For these newly generated hold information pieces, the presentation control device 143 does not perform the hold notice setting process, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, since the execution of the hold notice presentation is restricted, the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the newly generated hold information are displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4, respectively, with their display mode set to the normal display mode HMa, as shown in Figure 55 (c).

The main control unit 162 performs a hold pre-read process for the hold information of these hold images HB1 and HB2 at the timing of acquisition of the hold information, just like other hold information. The results of this pre-read are notified to the performance control unit 143 via a hold command, so although the performance control unit 143 is not yet performing the setting process for hold notices, it has already acquired the pre-read results for the hold information.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the presentation mode switches from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the presentation control device 143 executes the second setting process for the hold notice (step Sa2702) for the hold images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process for the hold notice involves drawing lots for the execution of the hold notice presentation, drawing lots for the final display mode, drawing lots for the presentation scenario, etc., based on the pre-reading results notified by the main control device 162 when the hold information is acquired. When conducting these draws, the lottery table used corresponds to presentation mode A, which is the presentation mode after the switch. In other words, although the hold information for hold images HB1 and HB2 was acquired in presentation mode B, the lottery for the hold notice presentation for these images applies the draw conditions set for presentation mode A, which is the mode in which the hold notice presentation is executed.

If the result of the above lottery is, for example, that the hold preview effect will not be executed for hold image HB1, and that the hold preview effect will be executed for hold image HB2 with the display mode set to blue display mode HMb, then as shown in Figure 55 (d), the display mode of hold image HB1 will be maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of hold image HB2 will be changed to blue display mode HMb.

In addition, the hold image HA corresponding to the hold information acquired in presentation mode A before transitioning to presentation mode B is changed to the original display mode, the green display mode HMc, by the presentation control device 143 performing a setting process for the return of the notice (step Sa1913) and a second execution process for the hold notice (step Sa1702).

Furthermore, unlike when switching to presentation mode A as described above, if presentation mode B is maintained after the state shown in Figure 55(c) is reached and the play round for hold image HA (the play round for the final hold information acquired in the previous presentation mode A) ends, the restricted state will end with the end of that play round. In this case, the second setting process for hold notice targeting hold images HB1 and HB2 is executed at the end of that play round. At this time, various lotteries such as the lottery for executing the hold notice presentation, the lottery for the final display mode, and the lottery for the presentation scenario are carried out using a lottery table corresponding to presentation mode B. In other words, different lottery conditions are applied than in the case of Figure 55(d).

If, as a result of the above lottery, for example, a hold preview effect is executed for hold image HB1 with the display mode set to blue display mode HMb, and a hold preview effect is not executed for hold image HB2, then, as shown in Figure 55 (e), the display mode of hold image HB1 is changed to blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of hold image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

For hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to hold information acquired during a restricted state in which the execution of hold preview effects is restricted, the display mode after the restricted state ends is set based on the results of the hold preview processing executed during the restricted state.

In this modified example, if the presentation mode is switched while a pending notification presentation is being executed, the execution of the pending notification presentation is restricted until the presentation mode is switched back to the original mode. If new pending information is acquired in this restricted state, and such pending information is not changed to a specific display mode, there is a concern that it may not be possible to arouse the player's anticipation regarding the pending information acquired during the restricted state.

In this regard, with this configuration, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific display mode after the restricted state ends, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation for the hold information acquired during the restricted state. In this case, the change to the specific display mode after the restricted state (execution of the hold notice effect) is performed based on the results of the hold look-ahead processing performed during the restricted state, so the hold look-ahead processing can be performed in the same way as when the restricted state is not in effect. In other words, because there is no need to change the configuration of the hold look-ahead processing, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while minimizing the complexity of the configuration.

The system is configured so that the hold pre-reading process for acquired hold information is performed in accordance with the timing of acquisition of the hold information, regardless of whether the system is in a restricted state or not.

In this case, the hold read-ahead process can be performed in accordance with the timing of hold information acquisition whether the restricted state is in effect or not, so there is no need to distinguish between the hold read-ahead process in the former and latter cases. This makes it possible to execute a hold preview performance triggered by hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state has been entered, while minimizing the complexity of the configuration.

The display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restricted state is set (hold notification effect setting) and is executed when the restricted state ends.

For example, if the display mode after the restricted state is set based on the results of a reserve read-ahead process executed during the restricted state, it is possible that the setting cannot be executed during the restricted state. However, if a play of the reserved images HB1 and HB2 for which the display mode has been set is executed during the restricted state, the display period of the reserved images may end without the display mode setting being reflected, and the setting may be wasted. In this regard, with this configuration, the display mode is set when the restricted state ends, preventing such waste and enabling efficient processing.

When hold information is acquired during a restricted state, restricted occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during a restricted state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of RAM 344.

With the above configuration, it is possible to determine after the restricted state that the pending information was acquired during the restricted state based on the information generated during the restricted state stored in the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344. Therefore, even if pending information acquired before the restricted state and pending information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the restricted state ends, it is possible to easily identify the pending information acquired during the restricted state. This makes it possible, when setting the display mode of each pending image after the restricted state, to distinguish between pending information acquired during the restricted state and other pending information, and to process only the pending information acquired during the restricted state.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the display mode of the hold image is restored by distinguishing between when switching from a presentation mode with a high frequency of occurrence of the hold notice presentation (presentation mode A) to a presentation mode with a low frequency of occurrence of the hold notice presentation (presentation mode B) and when switching from a presentation mode with a low frequency of occurrence to a presentation mode with a high frequency of occurrence of the hold notice presentation. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 56 to 58. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched while a reserved image in a specific display mode is present, and the reserved image is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then switched back to the original presentation mode, the display mode is restored for the reserved image. However, in this modified example, the display mode is restored for the reserved image even if the presentation mode is not switched back to the original mode. Incidentally, the frequency of occurrence of the reserved preview presentation in presentation mode A (the probability of the reserved preview presentation being executed when the prediction result is incorrect) is higher than that in presentation mode B. In other words, the probability of a jackpot being expected in presentation mode A for a specific display mode of the same display color is lower than that in presentation mode B, which is the same as in the first embodiment described above.

<Rendering mode switching process>
The rendering mode switching process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 56. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30) in the rendering control device 143, and is executed in place of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42. In Fig. 56, the same steps as in Fig. 42 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the rendering mode switching process in step Sa1903, in step Sa1904, the rendering mode flag corresponding to the switched rendering mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The rendering mode flag is used by MPU 342 to grasp the switched rendering mode before the rendering mode is switched, and the current rendering mode after the rendering mode is switched.

In step Sa3101, it is determined whether a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The hold notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine whether a hold notice performance should be executed or whether a hold notice performance is currently being executed.

If the hold notice flag is not stored, the effect mode switching process ends. On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, proceed to step Sa3102 and clear the hold notice flag. As a result, if a hold notice effect was being executed before the mode switch, the continuation of the hold notice effect being executed is canceled, and if the hold notice effect was in standby mode, the standby (execution reservation) of the hold notice effect is canceled.

In step Sa3103, it is determined whether or not there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is any pending image being displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb that is being displayed in any of the following modes: blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. If there is no pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

If there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step Sa3104 and determine whether the current mode switch is a switch from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. In other words, determine whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a higher frequency of occurrence of pending preview effects to a presentation mode with a lower frequency (in other words, whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a lower probability of winning the pending preview effects to a presentation mode with a higher frequency). If the switch is to presentation mode B, step Sa3105 refers to the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 to determine the change pattern of the pending image being displayed in a specific display mode.

In step Sa3106, a return determination is made based on the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sa3105 and the return determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The return determination determines whether or not the pending image displayed in a specific display mode can be returned to the specific display mode again after the presentation mode is switched.

As shown in Figure 57, the reversion determination table defines an upper limit for the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, for variation pattern 5H, which corresponds to a missed SPSP Reach A, a reversion (change) up to the green display mode HMc is permitted. When a hold notice effect is executed while in effect mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to variation pattern 5H is the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the reversion determination table is limited to the lower green display mode HMc. This is also true for other missed variation patterns such as variation pattern 3H and variation pattern 4H. Incidentally, for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, a change up to the rainbow display mode HMe is permitted for all variation patterns 1A to 5A. The reversion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in Figure 57 and may have other configurations, such as different upper limit display modes for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot.

In step Sa3106, the return determination table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sa3105, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target pending image is equal to or lower than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the current display mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode, the display mode is allowed to return; otherwise, return is not permitted.

In step Sa3107, it is determined whether the result of the return determination in step Sa3106 above allows the display mode to be returned. If return is not allowed, the process proceeds to step Sa3108, where processing is performed to cancel the display of the hold image displayed in a specific display mode. In other words, the hold image displayed in a specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched. In addition, the cancellation processing in step Sa3108 also executes processing to erase the display mode information stored in the display mode memory area 344e and the presentation scenario data set in step Sa1513 of the hold notice setting processing (Figure 34). After step Sa3108 is executed, the presentation mode switching processing ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa3107 above (if the return of the display mode is allowed), in step Sa3109, the display mode information for each pending image stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344 is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. In step Sa3110, similar to step Sa3108 above, processing is performed to cancel the display of pending images displayed in a specific display mode in that specific display mode.

In step Sa3111, the setting process for preview return is executed, and then the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated. The setting process for preview return in step Sa3111 is the same as the setting process for preview return (Fig. 43) in step Sa1913 of the processing for switching presentation modes (Fig. 42) according to the first embodiment described above. In the setting process for preview return, setting processes are performed such as when to return (change) the display mode of the pending image after switching to presentation mode B, and how to return (whether to return in a single change or in gradual changes).

When the setting process for preview return is performed as described above, the display mode of the target preview image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the reserved preview in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)) and the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the reserved preview in step Sa1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41). In this case, the second execution process of the reserved preview executes processing to return the display mode of the target preview image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before switching to performance mode B).

In addition, in the third execution process of the hold notification, the current display mode of the target hold image during the play of that target hold image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of that target hold image, and a determination is made as to whether a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. If such a change is possible, a promotion determination and promotion lottery are conducted, and the display mode is promoted.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referenced is the one set for presentation mode B (conforming to the conditions for the hold notice presentation in presentation mode B). Therefore, even if the reversible display mode is limited to a lower upper limit display mode determined by the reversion determination table at the time of reversion to presentation mode B, the display mode of the target hold image can ultimately be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for presentation mode B.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sa3104 (when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A), the processing of steps Sa3105 to Sa3107 is skipped and processing proceeds to step Sa3109. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a lower frequency of occurrence of hold notice presentations, to presentation mode A, which has a higher frequency, the display style in presentation mode B is reflected as is in presentation mode A after the mode switch.

<Flow of display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The flow of display modes of the hold image when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Fig. 58. Here, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described. As already explained, presentation mode A is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice presentation is relatively high, and presentation mode B is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice presentation is relatively low.

When the third hold information (hold image HW) for the first special symbol occurs in a situation where presentation mode A is selected, the main control unit 162 executes a hold pre-read process (step Sa305) for the hold information that has occurred. Here, it is assumed that the result of this pre-read is that the win/loss judgment is a miss and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 4H (SP Reach B miss).

The effect control device 143 also executes a setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) based on the results of the pre-reading by the main control device 162, and performs a lottery to determine the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold image HW, a lottery to determine the final display mode, a lottery to determine the effect scenario, etc. As a result of these lotteries, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and the effect scenario is selected to initially display in the blue display mode HMb and change to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing. In this case, as shown in Figure 58 (a1), the hold image HW in the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the display mode of the pending image HW is set to the blue display mode HMb and the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and the display mode of the pending image HW changes to the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2).

Furthermore, when switching to presentation mode B, the presentation control device 143 performs a return determination as to whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to a specific display mode (step Sa3106). In the return determination, the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW is identified, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to that fluctuation pattern is determined based on the return determination table (Figure 57), and it is determined whether the display mode of the hold image HW before switching to presentation mode B is equal to or lower than the determined upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of variation pattern 4H, which is the variation pattern of the hold image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and since the display mode of the hold image HW before switching to presentation mode B is the blue display mode HMb, the display mode of the hold image HW before switching to presentation mode B will be a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set in the setting process for the preview return (step Sa3111).

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in Figure 58 (a3), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the hold image HW will change from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Then, the display position of the reserved image HW in blue display mode HMb shifts to the execution display area D, and when the play of the reserved image HW begins, the presentation control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step Sa1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. In this case, the promotion determination is made by applying the determination conditions of presentation mode B.

For example, if the upper limit display mode of variation pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb, which is lower than in presentation mode A, promotion of the reserved image HW is not permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. Also, if the upper limit display mode of variation pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to the green display mode HMc, the same as in presentation mode A, promotion is permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc at a predetermined reservation change point in the play of the reserved image HW.

Next, we will explain what happens when the presentation mode is switched when the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in presentation mode A.

As shown in Figure 58 (a1), a hold image HW in blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the display position of the hold image HW shifts to the second unit hold display area Ga2 without switching the presentation mode, and as shown in Figure 58 (b1), the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc.

In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and the display mode of the pending image HW changes to the normal display mode HMa, as shown in Figure 58 (b2).

At this time, the performance control device 143 makes a return determination, but the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to performance mode B becomes a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa for the period until it is shifted to the execution display area D.

Then, the display position of the hold image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play of the hold image HW begins, the presentation control device 143 executes the third execution process of the hold notice and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of variable pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb, promotion to the blue display mode HMb is permitted, and if it is set to the green display mode HMc, promotion to the green display mode HMc is permitted. Figure 58 (b3) shows the case where the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted to the blue display mode HMb.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the presentation mode is switched while the reserved image is in a specific display mode (when the reserved image preview presentation is being executed), the system is configured to determine whether the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the presentation mode after the switch will be the same as the display mode in the presentation mode before the switch.

In this modified example, switching between presentation mode A and presentation mode B allows players to change their mood during play and prevents them from becoming bored with the game. In this case, presentation mode B is set as a presentation mode in which the hold notification presentation is less likely to be executed than presentation mode A. In this configuration, switching between presentation modes changes the presentation characteristics related to the likelihood of a jackpot, so the difference between presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the only change is in appearance, such as by changing the background image or character image.

However, on the other hand, if the conditions for switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B are met when the reserved image is in a specific display mode, and the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target reserved image HW is maintained, there is a concern that the corresponding expectation level will change even though there is no change in the display mode. For example, even with the same specific display mode of green display mode HMc, the expectation level in presentation mode B is higher than that in presentation mode A. Therefore, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW remains in the green display mode HMc and the presentation mode is switched from A to B, if a player understands the expectation level of the green display mode HMc based on the expectation level in presentation mode B after the mode switch, they may associate it with a higher expectation level than the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) that actually takes place in the game round.

In this regard, with this configuration, when the presentation mode is switched while the reserved image is in a specific display mode, a determination is made as to whether the display mode of the target reserved image HW should be the same as the display mode in the presentation mode before the switch. This prevents inconsistencies in expectation levels from occurring, and enables the reserved image to be displayed appropriately after switching to presentation mode B.

The display mode of the target pending image HW upon transition to presentation mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set for presentation mode B, and based on the results, a determination is made as to whether the display mode of the target pending image HW should be the same as the display mode before the mode switch.

In the above configuration, the display mode at the time of transition to presentation mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set for presentation mode B to determine whether or not to use the same display mode as in presentation mode A. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to use the same display mode in presentation mode B based on the corresponding expectation level for each mode (blue display mode HMb, etc.), making it possible to optimally display the pending image after transitioning to presentation mode B.

In the above case, multiple upper limit display modes in presentation mode B are set corresponding to each variation pattern, and the above judgment is made by applying the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern predicted for the target hold image HW. This makes it possible to determine whether to use the same mode or not based on the prediction result of the target hold image HW, that is, the win/loss result actually announced in the play round for that target hold image HW, and the play round presentation (reach presentation, etc.) performed in that play round.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW in presentation mode B is to be the same as the display mode in presentation mode A before the mode switch, the target hold image HW is first set to the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the same mode.

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is to be the same as before the mode change, it is possible to first change it to the normal display mode HMa and then change it to the specific display mode. This configuration allows the display mode of the target hold image HW to be switched to the normal display mode HMa when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, whether the display mode is to be the same as before the mode change or not. This reduces the unnaturalness that occurs when the specific display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa due to a determination that the display mode should not be the same. Furthermore, by changing to the normal display mode HMa and then to the specific display mode, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the hold image, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, will be changed to the specific display mode after switching to presentation mode B, even when it is determined that the display mode should not be the same, and it is possible to maintain anticipation for the hold image (hold information).

When switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the above determination is not made, and the display mode of the target pending image in presentation mode A after the mode switch is set to the same mode as the display mode in presentation mode A before the mode switch.

In the above configuration, when switching modes from a high to a low expectation level for the hold preview effect, no determination is made as to whether to maintain the same mode. This prevents excessive restrictions on the continuation of the hold preview effect (maintaining the specific display mode of the hold image), and also reduces the processing load.

<Modification 3>
While the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above are directed to the display mode of the reserved image before and after switching between performance modes, this modified example is directed to the display mode of the reserved image before and after switching between the open/close execution modes. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 59 to 67. Note that in these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, and their description will be omitted.

In this modified example, the variable display time table for the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high probability game state) and the variable display time table for the low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state) are set separately from the variable display time table for the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (normal game state) (Figure 14).

In the variable display time table for high probability game play, settings are made for jackpots and misses, as shown in Figures 59(a) and (b). In the variable display time table for jackpots, variable pattern 11A corresponding to an SPSP Reach A hit and variable pattern 12A corresponding to an SPSP Reach B hit are set in accordance with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In addition, in the variation display time table for losses, variation pattern 11H corresponding to a complete loss, variation pattern 12H corresponding to an SPSP reach A loss, and variation pattern 13H corresponding to an SPSP reach B loss are set in accordance with the value of the variation type counter CS. When the value of the variation type counter CS is within the range of 0 to 79, in normal gaming mode, it corresponds to either a complete loss (variation pattern 1H) or a normal reach loss (variation pattern 2H) (Figure 14 (b)), but in high probability gaming mode, it corresponds only to a complete loss (variation pattern 11H) (Figure 59 (b)). In other words, even if the variation type counter CS has the same value, different game cycle presentations can be implemented in normal gaming mode and high probability gaming mode.

In the variable display time table for the time-saving game mode, settings are made for both jackpots and misses, as shown in Figures 59 (c) and (d). In the variable display time table for jackpots, variation pattern 21A corresponding to an SP Reach A hit, variation pattern 22A corresponding to an SP Reach B hit, variation pattern 23A corresponding to an SPSP Reach A hit, and variation pattern 24A corresponding to an SPSP Reach B hit are set in accordance with the value of the variation type counter CS.

In addition, in the variable display time table for losses, variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete loss, variable pattern 22H corresponding to an SP Reach A loss, variable pattern 23H corresponding to an SP Reach B loss, variable pattern 24H corresponding to an SPSP Reach A loss, and variable pattern 25H corresponding to an SPSP Reach B loss are set in accordance with the value of the variable type counter CS. Even in the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, when compared with the same value of the variable type counter CS, different game cycle effects can be implemented in the normal game state and the high-probability game state. In the variable display time table for losses corresponding to the time-saving game state, the rate of complete losses is lower than in other game states. This is because increasing the frequency of reach effects prevents the time-saving game state from ending without a reach effect occurring.

Note that the number of types of fluctuation patterns in each fluctuation display time table shown in Figure 59 and the corresponding relationship with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS are merely examples, and other configurations are possible as long as they are set to different contents in the normal game state, high probability game state, and time-saving game state.

<Setting process for hold notice>
The setting process for hold notice according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 60. This process is executed when the performance control device 143 receives a hold command from the main control device 162. This process is executed in step Sa1403 of the hold command response process (Fig. 31), and is executed in place of the setting process for hold notice in Fig. 34. In Fig. 60, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Fig. 34, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa1501, fluctuation pattern information, etc. for the current pending information is determined based on the pending information stored in step Sa1401 of the pending command response process (Figure 31). In step Sa1502, it is determined whether the current pending information corresponds to a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern information, etc. determined in step Sa1501.

If the information does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the pending information corresponds to a miss, proceed to step Sa3301 and determine whether the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in normal game mode), fluctuation pattern 11H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in high-probability game mode), or fluctuation pattern 21H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in time-limited game mode). If a negative determination is made in step Sa3301 (if the information is not fluctuation pattern 1H, 11H, or 21H) or a positive determination is made in step Sa1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), the current game state is determined in step Sa3302. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game state is normal game mode, high-probability game mode, or time-limited game mode.

In step Sa3303, the corresponding reserve notice execution lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. Multiple reserve notice execution lottery tables are set to correspond to the presence or absence of a jackpot and the game state. For example, the reserve notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the current reserve information is a jackpot is set to have a higher winning probability than the reserve notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the current reserve information is a miss. Furthermore, in the reserve notice execution lottery table corresponding to the high probability game state and the case where the current reserve information is a miss, the winning probability is set to be lower than the reserve notice execution lottery table corresponding to the normal game state or the time-limited game state and the case where the current reserve information is a miss, in order to suppress the occurrence of false effects in the high probability game state.

It is not necessary to vary the probability of the hold preview effect depending on the game state; the probability of the hold preview effect being executed may be the same for the three states above or for any two of those states.

In step Sa1506, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notification performance based on the hold notification execution lottery table obtained in step Sa3303 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step Sa1506 is a winning result. If the result of this lottery is an execution winning result, proceed to step Sa1508, and the corresponding number of holds is determined.

In step Sa3304, a final display mode lottery table corresponding to the current game state is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The final display mode lottery table sets the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. In this modified example, since different variation patterns are set depending on the game state, a final display mode lottery table corresponding to each game state is also set separately.

Figure 61 shows a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss as examples of final display mode lottery tables in a high-probability game state. Also, Figure 62 shows a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss as examples of final display mode lottery tables in a time-saving game state.

In step Sa1510, the final display mode for this hold preview performance is selected by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step Sa1501, the final display mode selection table obtained in step Sa3304, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step Sa1511, the performance scenario selection table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. In step Sa1512, the performance scenario for this hold preview performance is selected by lottery based on the number of holds determined in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the performance scenario selection table obtained in step Sa1511, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step Sa1513, the performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected in step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice is terminated. The hold notice flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that a hold notice performance should be executed.

When the setting process for the hold notice is performed as described above, the display mode of the target hold image is changed based on the setting result of step Sa1513 in the first execution process (Fig. 38) of the hold notice in step Sa1404 of the hold command response process (Fig. 31), step Sa1701 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40), and step Sa1807 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41).

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sa3301 (the change pattern of the hold information is a complete miss change pattern), proceed to step Sa1515 and set the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa. Then, the setting process for the hold notification ends.

<Open/close execution mode processing>
The opening/closing execution mode process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 63. This process is executed in step Sa1306 of the effect setting process (Fig. 30).

First, in step Sa3401, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode is currently being executed. If the opening and closing execution mode is not currently being executed, in step Sa3402 it is determined whether an opening command (step Sa909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main control unit 162, i.e., whether it is time to start the opening and closing execution mode. If an opening command has not been received, the opening and closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If an opening command has been received, proceed to step Sa3403 and execute opening processing. In the opening processing, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a specified opening effect is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, etc.

In step Sa3404, it is determined whether the number of reserved items (total number of special 1 reserved items and special 2 reserved items) is 0, i.e., whether there are any reserved items. If the number of reserved items is 0 (no reserved items), the opening and closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved items is not 0 and there are reserved items, proceed to step Sa3405, where it is determined whether a reserved notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If a reserved notice flag is stored, the reserved notice flag is cleared in step Sa3406. As a result, if a reserved notice effect was being executed before the opening/closing execution mode was started, the continuation of the reserved notice effect being executed is canceled, and if the reserved notice effect was in standby state, the standby (execution reservation) of the reserved notice effect is canceled.

In step Sa3407, it is determined whether there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether any pending image displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb is displayed in any of the following modes: blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344.

If there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step Sa3408, where information indicating the specific display mode in which the pending image is being displayed is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. In the following step Sa3409, information indicating the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is stored in RAM 344. For example, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode was the normal game state, information corresponding to the normal game state is stored in a specified area of RAM 344. Note that this information is stored in a separate memory area from the state flag indicating the current game state to distinguish it from that flag.

In step Sa3410, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the system is waiting for a return process to return the display mode of the pending image to its original specific display mode. In the following step Sa3411, a process is executed to erase the pending image from the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. In other words, in this modified example, the pending image displayed on the pending display unit 200 is erased upon initiation of the open/close execution mode. After execution of step Sa3411, the open/close execution mode process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sa3405 (if the hold notice flag is not stored) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa3407 (if a hold image of a specific display mode does not exist), the process proceeds to step Sa3411, where the hold image deletion process is performed. In other words, even if the hold notice performance is not currently being executed, the hold image in the hold display unit 200 is deleted when the open/close execution mode is started.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa3401 above (if the game is in the opening and closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa3412, where it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance. If not, processing for the opening and closing execution mode is executed in step Sa3413, and then the processing for the opening and closing execution mode is terminated. In the processing for the opening and closing execution mode, a transmission command is set to the display control device 350 so that a predetermined round performance, a winning performance, an ending performance, etc. is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, etc.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa3412 (if a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending performance), the process proceeds to step Sa3414, where it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If a return standby flag is not stored, the opening/closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If the return standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa3415, where a process is executed to clear the return standby flag. Here, a situation in which a positive determination is made in step Sa3414 means that the open/close execution mode is executed while the hold preview effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is cleared. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa3416, where a preview return setting process is executed to return the display mode of the hold image to a specific display mode. Details of this process will be described later.

After step Sa3416 is executed, step Sa3417 is performed to set the hold image to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa. In other words, when returning the display mode of the hold image to the specific display mode, immediately after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display of the hold image is resumed in the normal display mode HMa. After step Sa3417 is executed, the opening and closing execution mode processing ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa3414 above (the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa3418, where it is determined whether the number of reserved items (total number of special 1 reserved items and special 2 reserved items) is 0. If the number of reserved items is 0 and there are no reserved items, the process for the open/close execution mode ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved items is not 0 and there are reserved items, the reserved images for those reserved items are displayed in the normal display mode HMa in step Sa3417.

<Setting process for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step Sa3416 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa3501, the game status before the opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made based on the information stored in step Sa3409 (Figure 63). In step Sa3502, the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made based on the pending information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step Sa3503, a display mode restoration determination is made based on the game state before the opening and closing execution mode determined in step Sa3501, the jackpot type determined in step Sa3502, and the restoration determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The restoration determination determines whether or not the reserved image, which was in a specific display mode in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode, should be restored to its original display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reversion determination table determines whether or not the display mode is allowed to revert, depending on the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the game state is the same before and after the opening/closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode was a time-saving game state and the jackpot type was a regular jackpot, or when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode was a high-probability game state and the jackpot type was a special jackpot, the reversion of the display mode is restricted if the game state is different before and after the opening/closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode was a time-saving game state and the jackpot type was a special jackpot, or when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode was a high-probability game state and the jackpot type was a regular jackpot, or when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode was a regular game state and the jackpot type was a time-saving game state.

However, if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode was the normal game state and the jackpot type was a probability jackpot, the pre-read result of the target reserved image is referenced to determine whether or not a return is possible. Specifically, if the pre-read result of the target reserved image is a result other than a normal jackpot, the return of the above display mode is restricted, while if the pre-read result of the target reserved image is a normal jackpot, the return of the above display mode is permitted. This is to prevent the high probability game state from ending before the player is able to fully enjoy playing in the high probability game state.

In other words, if the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, the game mode will switch from the first special symbol game (left-hand play state) to the second special symbol game (right-hand play state) via the opening/closing execution mode. However, if a normal jackpot is present in the reserve for the first special symbol and that reserve is consumed, the state will end prematurely, even though the transition to the high probability game state was successfully achieved. Therefore, if there is a risk of this happening, the display mode of the reserve image for the first special symbol is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player and encourage them to quickly enter the second activation port 63 (starting port for the second special symbol).

In this modified example, the return of the above display mode is restricted if the result of the preview of the target reserved image is a guaranteed jackpot, but this may also be permitted.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for preview return (Figure 64), after step Sa3503 is executed, step Sa3504 determines whether the result of the determination process in step Sa3503 was to allow the display mode to return. If the result was to not allow the return, the setting process for preview return ends. In other words, the display mode of the target pending image after the opening/closing execution mode remains the normal display mode HMa.

If return is permitted, in step Sa3505, the return area 344f in RAM 344 is referenced to determine the display state of the target pending image before the open/close execution mode. After step Sa3505 is executed, steps Sa3506 to Sa3510 are executed.

This processing is similar to steps Sa2103 to Sa2107 in Figure 43, and determines when the display mode of the target hold image will be restored to its original display mode, corresponding to the number of reserved items prior to the target hold image. That is, in step Sa3506, the number of reserved items prior to the target hold image is determined, and if the determined number of reserved items is 1 or more, in step Sa3508, a restoration scenario for changing to the display mode determined in step Sa3505 is drawn by lottery. In step Sa3509, restoration scenario data is set so that the selected restoration scenario is executed, and in step Sa3510, a notice restoration flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344. The notice restoration flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that processing should be executed to restore the display mode of the hold image to its original state.

When the setting process for restoring the preview is performed as described above, the display mode of the target reserved image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the reserved preview in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)) and the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the reserved preview in step Sa1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41). In this case, the second execution process of the reserved preview executes processing to restore the display mode of the target reserved image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the hold notification, the current display mode of the target hold image during the play of that target hold image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of that target hold image, and a determination is made as to whether a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. If such a change is possible, a promotion determination and promotion lottery are conducted, and the display mode is promoted.

<Display mode of pending images before and after opening/closing execution mode>
The display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode will be explained. Here, we will explain the case where a normal jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the game state transitions to the time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and the case where a probability variable jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the game state transitions to the probability variable game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

First, with reference to Figure 66, we will explain the case where a normal jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is in the time-saving game state, and the game state transitions to the time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the third hold information for the second special symbol occurs during a time-saving game state, the main control unit 162 performs a hold pre-read process (step Sa305), and the effect control unit 143 performs a hold notice setting process (step Sa1403). As a result, if a hold notice effect is executed in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, a hold image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb, as shown in FIG. 66(a).

When a normal jackpot occurs in the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, are erased, as shown in Figure 66 (b). This state is maintained until a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending presentation, the presentation control device 143 executes a setting process for preview return (step Sa3416) and performs a return determination as to whether or not to return the display mode of the pending image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. The return determination compares the game state before the opening and closing execution mode with the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and determines whether the two match. If a normal jackpot result occurs in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode becomes the time-saving game state, and the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode match. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a lottery for a return scenario is held.

As a result, if a scenario is drawn that returns to the green display mode HMc at the second shift timing after the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in Figure 66 (c), at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of each pending image HW will resume with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa.

Then, at the first shift from the third unit hold display area Gb3 to the second unit hold display area Gb2, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, as shown in Figure 66 (d). Then, at the second shift from the second unit hold display area Gb2 to the first unit hold display area Gb1, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, with reference to Figure 67, we will explain what happens when a special jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is in the time-limited game state, and the game transitions to the special jackpot game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the third hold information for the second special symbol occurs during a time-saving game state, the main control unit 162 performs a hold pre-read process (step Sa305), and the effect control unit 143 performs a hold notice setting process (step Sa1403). As a result, if a hold notice effect is executed in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, a hold image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb, as shown in FIG. 67(a).

When a guaranteed jackpot occurs during the game in which the reserved image HW was acquired and the game transitions to open/close execution mode, all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, are erased, as shown in Figure 67(b).

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending presentation, the presentation control device 143 executes the setting process for the preview return (step Sa3416) to make a return determination. If a jackpot result occurs during the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode becomes a high-probability game state, and the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode do not match. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, and the return process is not executed.

As shown in Figure 67 (c), at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the display of each hold image HW resumes with the display mode of the hold image HW set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa for the period until the hold image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. In other words, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the hold preview effect performed before the opening and closing execution mode is basically canceled, and the hold preview effect for the same hold image HW is not performed after the opening and closing execution mode.

After that, as shown in Figure 67(d), the display position of the hold image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play of the hold image HW begins, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process of the hold notice (step Sa1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, as shown in Figure 67(e). Note that Figure 67(e) shows the case where the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, we will explain what happens when a special jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is normal, and the game state transitions to a high probability state after the opening and closing execution mode.

In this case, the game state before the opening and closing execution mode does not match the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, so applying the above example, the display mode of the reserved image HW will not be restored after the opening and closing execution mode. However, when switching from a low-probability game state (left-hand play) aiming for a win in the first actuation port 62 to a high-probability game state (right-hand play) aiming for a win in the second actuation port 63, whether or not to restore the display mode is switched based on the results of the advance read of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW.

Specifically, if the result of the pre-read of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reserved image HW is restored after the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, if there is reserved information in the first special chart that results in a normal jackpot result, and a play cycle of that reserved information is executed, even though the player has successfully transitioned to a high probability game state, that state will end prematurely. Therefore, to encourage a win in the second operating port 63, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode.

In this case, rather than changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the reserved image HW may be displayed in the specific display mode from the beginning. By using a different display mode than when the display mode is restored when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode matches the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, it is expected that the player will be more aware of the situation. In addition, displaying in the specific display mode from the beginning has the advantage of making it easier for the player to quickly realize that there is reserved information on the first special chart that will result in a normal jackpot, making it easier for them to respond.

On the other hand, if the result of the pre-read of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a result other than a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reserved image HW will not be restored after the opening/closing execution mode, as per the general rule.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When switching to the open/close execution mode while the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (when the reserved notification effect is being executed), if the game state before the open/close execution mode differs from the game state after the open/close execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the open/close execution mode will be configured to differ from the display mode before the open/close execution mode.

In this modified example, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process, which can arouse the player's anticipation of a jackpot result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, multiple game states are set as game states, and when a jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is executed, the player will transition to one of these multiple game states. In a configuration with multiple game states like this, even if the reserved information used to determine whether a win or loss is true is the same, differences may occur in the win/loss result and the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) performed in a game round depending on the game state.

In this regard, with this configuration, if the game state before and after the execution of the opening and closing execution mode differs for the target reserve image HW that was in a specific display mode before the execution of the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode will be different from the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, even if the award determination result or game number presentation changes due to differences in the game state, the target reserve image HW is prevented from misleading the player, and it is possible to appropriately display the reserve image in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When switching to the open/close execution mode while the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (when the reserved notification effect is being executed), the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the open/close execution mode is configured to differ depending on whether the game state before the open/close execution mode is the same as the game state after the open/close execution mode or not.

As mentioned above, in a configuration with multiple game states, even if the reserved information used to determine whether a game has been won or lost is the same, differences may occur in the win/lose result and the game round presentation (such as reach presentation) performed in a game round depending on the game state. In this regard, with this configuration, for the target reserved image HW that was in a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode was executed, the display mode in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is changed depending on whether the game state before and after the opening/closing execution mode is the same. This makes it possible to set the display mode based on the win/lose determination result and changes in game round presentation due to differences in the game state, making it possible to optimally display the reserved image in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode.

If the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserve image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

The above configuration effectively prevents the display of a pending image that does not match the actual expectation level after the opening/closing execution mode, which can lead to misunderstandings among players. Furthermore, by uniformly using the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for detailed adjustments to the display mode in response to changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

If the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, a determination is then made as to whether or not to promote the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a higher-level display mode (specific display mode), and the display mode of the target reserved image HW is changed based on the result of the determination.

If the game state before the opening/closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, changing the display mode of the target reserve image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa can absorb fluctuations in the win/lose judgment results and game number presentation due to changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may not be possible to notify or indicate the expected level of the reserve information corresponding to the target reserve image HW. In this regard, with this configuration, the target reserve image HW that has been set to the normal display mode HMa is given the opportunity to change to the specific display mode afterwards. Therefore, even if the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa, it can be upgraded to the specific display mode afterwards, making it possible to notify the expected level, etc.

In the above case, when play has progressed to the play count of the target reserved image HW set to the normal display mode HMa, a determination is made as to whether or not to upgrade the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode, and the upgrade is carried out based on the result of the determination.

By upgrading the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the game turn of the target reserved image HW has begun, the upgrade determination can be made using the win/loss determination information acquired and transmitted at the start of the game turn and information about the game turn presentation. Because this information corresponds to the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the above upgrade can be made in a mode appropriate for the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, making it possible to change the display mode of the target reserved image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa after the opening and closing execution mode, to a specific display mode without giving the player any misunderstandings about the player's expectations, etc.

In particular, by determining whether the target reserved image HW will be promoted to a specific display mode based on the variation pattern identified by the execution of a hit/miss determination (start of a game round) in the main control unit 162, it is possible to determine whether promotion is possible using the same information used to select the game round presentation in the game round of the target reserved image HW. As a result, when the game state before the opening/closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting to the game round presentation that will actually be performed in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, the above configuration avoids the need to add a dedicated process for transmitting a variation pattern (the result of the win/lose determination and information about the game presentation) corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, solely for the purpose of determining whether to promote the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode has ended. In other words, when a game round of the target reserved image HW is played in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, a variation start command must be sent from the main control unit 162 to the presentation control unit 143 to synchronize the display of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 with the special symbol game round on the special symbol display unit 43. However, by using this variation start command to perform the promotion determination, it is no longer necessary for the main control unit 162 to notify the presentation control unit 143 of the variation pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode using a dedicated command separate from the variation start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 does not need to be equipped with processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received, which prevents the processing configuration from becoming too complicated.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when a hold notice effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344, and if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the results of the reserved image read-ahead process performed before the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that it will be set to a display mode different from the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In this regard, with this configuration, if the opening and closing execution mode is executed in a situation where a reserved image with a specific display mode exists, information on the display mode at that time is stored, and the report display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on that stored information, making it possible to preferably restore the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode to the original mode before the opening and closing execution mode.

By restoring the display to its original state before the opening and closing execution mode in this way, the target reserved image HW (reserved information), which aroused the player's anticipation by changing to a specific display state before the opening and closing execution mode, can arouse the same anticipation even after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, if the display mode of the target reserve image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is to be the same as the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to first set it to the normal display mode HMa and then change it to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state before the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserve image HW can be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa when the opening and closing execution mode is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness that occurs when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a difference in the game state. Furthermore, by causing an event in which the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the reserve image that has been set to the normal display mode HMa will change to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, including when the game state is different, and it is possible to maintain anticipation for the reserve image (reserve information).

A determination of whether the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same is made at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be quickly adjusted after the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, even if there are few holds before the target hold image HW after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be appropriately adjusted.

The pending image will no longer be displayed when the open/close execution mode is running.

When changing the display mode of the target reserve image HW upon the end of the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that if the target reserve image HW that had been displayed up until that point is suddenly changed to a different display mode at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the player may feel unnatural. In particular, downgrading to the normal display mode HMa is likely to be noticeable to the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, with this configuration, the reserve image is hidden in the opening and closing execution mode, so when changing the display mode of the target reserve image HW, a period can be inserted during which the reserve image itself, including other reserve images, is not displayed. This prevents the change in display mode from being too noticeable, making it less unnatural. Another advantage is that hiding the reserve image makes it easier for the player to focus on the effects for the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game effects).

<Modification 4>
In the third variation of the first embodiment, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode for reserved images that were set to a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode was determined based on the relationship between the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. However, in this variation, a pre-reading process is performed again after the opening and closing execution mode for reserved images that were set to a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved images is determined based on the results of the pre-reading process. This variation will be described below with reference to Figures 68 to 76. Note that in these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the first embodiment and each variation, and their description will be omitted.

This section explains the processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162.

<Information acquisition process>
The information acquisition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 68(a). This process is executed when a prize is won at the actuation ports 62, 63 (executed in step Sa205 of the prize winning process for the actuation ports (Figure 17)), and is executed in place of the information acquisition process of Figure 18. In Figure 68(a), the same steps as those in Figure 18 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the corresponding reserve areas for the special chart display section, and then in step Sa4101, the reserve command setting process is executed. After step Sa4101 is executed, the information acquisition process ends. Here, the reserve command setting process in step Sa4101 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 68 (b).

First, in step Sa4201, the start hold memory numbers RaN, RbN stored in each hold area Ra, Rb of the hold ball storage area 314b and the common hold number CRN stored in the total hold number memory area of the same hold ball storage area 314b are read, and this information is stored in a register of the MPU 312. In steps Sa4202 to Sa4204, based on the current winning entry into the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random number value for determining whether or not a win has occurred), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (random number for drawing the jackpot type), and the value of the variation type counter CS (random number for drawing the variation pattern) contained in the hold information obtained in step Sa304 (Figure 68(a)) are determined. Note that the processing in steps Sa4201 to Sa4204 is similar to the processing in steps Sa1202, Sa1205, and Sa1208 in the reserved read-ahead processing (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment described above.

In the following step Sa4205, a hold command is set as an output target to the performance control device 143, and then the hold command setting process is terminated. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special chart, as well as information indicating the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS determined in steps Sa4202 to Sa4204 above.

In other words, in the first embodiment described above, the hold look-ahead process (Figure 28) performs a win/lose determination process and a lottery process for variation patterns based on the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped, and the results are included in the hold command and sent to the performance control device 143. However, in this modified example, instead of the results of the win/lose determination process or the lottery process for variation patterns, the information on the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped (random number information used in the win/lose determination process and the lottery process for variation patterns) is included in the hold command and sent to the performance control device 143.

This section explains the processing performed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143.

<Pending command response processing>
The hold command response processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 69. This processing is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step Sa1302 of the performance setting processing (Fig. 30)), and is executed in place of the hold command response processing of Fig. 31. In Fig. 69, processing that is the same as that in Fig. 31 is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sa4301, where the first hold pre-read process is executed. The first hold pre-read process is a hold pre-read process performed by the performance control device 143, and it pre-reads the results of the win/lose judgment for the hold information obtained when a start win occurs, based on the information of the various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the hold command from the main control device 162. Here, the first hold pre-read process of step Sa4301 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 70.

First, in step Sa4401, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability game state, or the time-limited game state. In step Sa4402, the hold command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the current hold information is determined. In step Sa4403, a win/loss determination table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a in the ROM 343.

In this modified example, the same table data as the win/loss determination table stored in the ROM 313 (win/loss table storage area 313a) of the main control device 162 is stored as the win/loss determination table for the presentation control device 143. The same table data as the jackpot type table (Figure 13) and variable display time table (Figures 14, 59) stored in the ROM 313 of the main control device 162 is also stored for the jackpot type table used to draw the jackpot type and the variable display time table used to draw the variable pattern. Therefore, even if the presentation control device 143 performs these lottery processes separately from the win/loss lottery and variable pattern lottery in the main control device 162, the same lottery results will be obtained if the random number values used for the lottery are the same.

The win/loss determination table is set up separately for low-probability mode (normal game mode, time-saving game mode) and high-probability mode (high-probability game mode), so in step Sa4403, the table corresponding to the game mode identified in step Sa4401 is obtained.

In step Sa4404, a pre-reading process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won is performed by determining whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step Sa4402 and the win/loss determination table obtained in step Sa4403, and determining the win/loss result. In step Sa4405, it is determined whether or not the win/loss result determined in step Sa4404 is a jackpot win. If a jackpot win has been won, in step Sa4406, the hold command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the current hold information is determined.

In step Sa4407, as a jackpot type read-ahead process, a lottery is conducted to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 determined in step Sa4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343, and the result of the type lottery is determined. At this time, if the pending information is based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if the pending information is based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

In step Sa4408, jackpot information indicating the jackpot result determined in step Sa4404 and type information indicating the jackpot type result determined in step Sa4407 are stored. These pieces of information are stored in the corresponding areas in the reserved memory area 344c (Figure 32) of RAM 344.

In this modified example, the results of the jackpot type prediction are not reflected in the pending preview performance, so steps Sa4406 and Sa4407 may be omitted.

After step Sa4408 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa4405 (if the jackpot has not been won), in step Sa4409, the hold command from main control unit 162 is analyzed and the value of the variable type counter CS in the current hold information is determined. In step Sa4410, based on the game status determined in step Sa4401 and the result of the win/lose lottery determined in step Sa4404, the corresponding variable display time table is obtained from various table storage area 343a in ROM 343. For example, if the current game status is a time-saving game status and the result determined in step Sa4404 is a loss result, the loss variable display time table for the time-saving game status (Figure 59 (d)) is obtained.

In step Sa4411, as a fluctuation pattern pre-reading process, a fluctuation pattern lottery process is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS determined in step Sa4409 and the fluctuation display time table obtained in step Sa4410, and the result is determined. In step Sa4412, information indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in step Sa4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the above-mentioned reserved memory area 344c. After step Sa4412 is executed, the first reserved pre-reading process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command response processing (Figure 69), after the first hold pre-read processing is executed in step Sa4301, the hold notice setting processing is executed in step Sa1403 using the processing result of step Sa4301. The hold notice setting processing is a setting processing for executing the hold notice performance.

<Open/close execution mode processing>
The opening and closing execution mode processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 71. This processing is executed in step Sa1306 of the effect setting processing (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the opening and closing execution mode processing of Fig. 63. In Fig. 71, the same steps as in Fig. 63 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After the hold notice flag is cleared in step Sa3406, step Sa3407 determines whether there are any hold images displayed in a specific display mode. That is, at the start of the opening and closing execution mode, it determines whether any of the hold images displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb are displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe.

If there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step Sa3408, and information indicating the specific display mode in which the pending image is being displayed is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. After step Sa3408 is executed, the process of step Sa3409 (Figure 63) is not performed, and a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344 in step Sa3410. In other words, while in the above-mentioned variant 4, the process of storing the game status before the opening/closing execution mode was performed in step Sa3409, this process is not performed in this variant.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sa3414 (if it is determined that the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344), processing is executed in step Sa3415 to clear the return standby flag.

Here, a situation in which a positive judgment is made in step Sa3414 means that the open/close execution mode is performed while the hold preview effect is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, step Sa4501 executes a second hold preview process to perform a new hold preview. In the following step Sa4502, a preview return setting process is executed to return the display mode of the hold image to a specific display mode. Details of the second hold preview process in step Sa4501 and the preview return setting process in step Sa4502 will be described later.

After step Sa4502 is executed, step Sa3417 executes processing to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa, and then the processing for the open/close execution mode ends. In other words, in this modified example, the pending image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the open/close execution mode ends.

<Second reserved read-ahead processing>
The second reserved read-ahead processing of step Sa4501 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 72.

First, in step Sa4601, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made by referring to the type of jackpot for the current jackpot that triggered the opening and closing execution mode. For example, if the current jackpot is a special jackpot result, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined to be a special jackpot game state; if it is a regular jackpot result, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined to be a time-limited game state.

In step Sa4602, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each pending information stored in that memory area 344c is determined. Note that this process may be performed on all pending information stored in the pending memory area 344c, or on only the pending information that is the target of the return process (the pending information for the pending image that was displayed in a specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

In step Sa4603, a hit/miss determination table corresponding to the game status determined in step Sa4601 is obtained. In step Sa4604, a hit/miss lottery is conducted based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step Sa4602 and the hit/miss determination table obtained in step Sa4603 as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and the hit/miss result is determined. Note that the processing in step Sa4604 is performed on the pending information obtained from the jackpot random number counter C1 in step Sa4602. The same applies to the processing in steps Sa4605 and onwards.

Here, steps Sa4603 and Sa4604 are the same as steps Sa4403 and Sa4404 of the first reserve read-ahead process (Figure 70) performed at the time of initial winning (when hold information is acquired). However, if the lottery mode changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high-probability game state, the win/loss determination table acquired in step Sa4603 will be different, and a different lottery result may be obtained than in the first reserve read-ahead process. For example, if a probability jackpot result is won under normal game state and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the reserved hold information is "17," the first reserve read-ahead process before the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the probability jackpot result is executed will read a miss result, but the second reserve read-ahead process, which assumes the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, will read a win result (Figure 12).

In step Sa4605, it is determined whether the result determined in step Sa4604 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sa4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined by referring to the reserved memory area 344c. In step Sa4607, as a jackpot type pre-reading process, a lottery is conducted to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 determined in step Sa4606 and the type table stored in the various table memory area 343a of ROM 343, and the result of the type lottery is determined.

In step Sa4608, the jackpot information indicating the jackpot result determined in step Sa4604 and the type information indicating the jackpot type result determined in step Sa4607 are stored in the corresponding memory areas of the reserved memory area 344c.

In step Sa4609, the value of the variable type counter CS is determined by referring to the pending memory area 344c. In step Sa4610, based on the game state determined in step Sa4601 and the result of the win/lose lottery determined in step Sa4604, the corresponding variable display time table is obtained from the various table memory area 343a in ROM 343. For example, if the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability game state and the result determined in step Sa4604 is a loss result, the loss variable display time table for the high probability game state (Figure 59 (b)) is obtained.

In step Sa4611, as a process for predicting the fluctuation pattern, a lottery process for the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS determined in step Sa4609 and the fluctuation display time table obtained in step Sa4610, and the result is determined. The process in step Sa4611 is similar to step Sa4411 of the first reserve predictive process performed at the time of initial winning (when reserve information is obtained), but if the game status changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, the fluctuation display time table obtained in step Sa4610 will be different, and a different lottery result may be obtained from the first reserve predictive process.

In step Sa4612, information indicating the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sa4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the above-mentioned reserved storage area 344c, and then the second reserved read-ahead process is terminated.

<Setting process for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step Sa4502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 73.

First, in step Sa4701, the hold memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the change pattern of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image (the hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode). The change pattern determined in this case is the change pattern determined in the second hold pre-read process described above.

In step Sa4702, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sa4701 is fluctuation pattern 1H, fluctuation pattern 11H, or fluctuation pattern 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to a complete miss (Figures 14 and 59), and if it is one of these, the setting process for the predicted return is terminated.

If the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sa4701 is not fluctuation pattern 1H, fluctuation pattern 11H, or fluctuation pattern 21H, proceed to step Sa4703, where the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sa4701 (the fluctuation pattern predicted in the second reserved predictive read process) is identified. An upper limit display mode table is stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. As shown in FIG. 74, the upper limit display mode table defines an upper limit for the display mode corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. For example, for fluctuation pattern 12H, which corresponds to a missed SPSP Reach A in a high-probability gaming state, the red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit for the specific display mode. In step Sa4703, the upper limit display mode table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the gaming state after the open/close execution mode.

In step Sa4704, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the display mode of the target reserved image before the opening and closing execution mode. In step Sa4705, a return determination process is performed to determine whether or not the display mode of the target reserved image should be returned to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode during play after the opening and closing execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode determined in step Sa4703 is compared with the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode determined in step Sa4704, and if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is of the same rank as or lower than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that return is permitted. If the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is of a higher rank than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that return is not permitted.

In step Sa4706, it is determined whether the result of the return determination in step Sa4705 is that return is permitted. If the determination result is that return is not permitted, the setting process for the advance return is terminated.

If the determination result is that return is permitted, the processing of steps Sa4707 to Sa4711 is executed. These processes are similar to steps Sa2103 to Sa2107 in Figure 43, and set the timing at which the display mode of the target hold image will return to its original display mode, corresponding to the number of hold images before the target hold image. That is, in step Sa4707, the number of hold images before the target hold image is determined, and if the determined number of hold images is 1 or more, a lottery process for a return scenario is executed in step Sa4709. In step Sa4710, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed.

Note that because the second reserve read-ahead process (step Sa4501) is executed when the opening and closing execution mode ends, it is possible to start displaying the reserve image in a specific display mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends. However, in this modified example, the normal display mode HMa is used uniformly immediately after the opening and closing execution mode ends (step Sa3417). That is, even if the target reserve image is set to a specific display mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, it is first displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode afterwards. This configuration takes into account the fact that immediately after the opening and closing execution mode ends, it is highly likely that payout of game balls is still ongoing, and the player may be responding by ejecting game balls from the lower tray 34, etc., which may lead to a decrease in attention to the reserve image. By avoiding the display of the specific display mode at such times, it is possible to prevent the specific display mode from being changed without the player's knowledge.

After step Sa4710 is executed, in step Sa4711, a notice return flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that processing should be performed to restore the display mode of the pending image to its original state.

After step Sa4711 is executed, the setting process for the notice return is terminated. Then, as shown in FIG. 71, in step Sa3417, the hold images for all holds that exist at the time of the end of the opening and closing execution mode, including the target hold image, are set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa. In other words, even if the return process is performed, the target hold image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the hold notice in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)), or in the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the hold notice in step Sa1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. In this case, in the second execution process of the hold notice, processing is performed to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the hold notification, the current display mode of the target hold image during the play of that target hold image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of that target hold image, and a determination is made as to whether a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. If such a change is possible, a promotion determination and promotion lottery are conducted, and the display mode is promoted.

<Display flow of pending images before and after the opening/closing execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode will be explained. First, the case where the result of the prediction of the success/failure judgment does not change before and after the opening and closing execution mode, but the result of the prediction of the fluctuation pattern changes will be explained with reference to FIG.

As shown in Figure 75(a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) for the second special symbol occurs in a high probability game state, the main control unit 162 executes the information acquisition process (Figure 68(a)). As a result, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired as 25, and the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired as 80.

The performance control device 143 also executes the first reserved read-ahead process (step Sa4301) based on the results of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. In the first reserved read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using the game state at that time, i.e., the hit/miss determination table and the fluctuation display time table for the high probability game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 12H (Figure 59 (b)), the result of the first reserved read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 12H. Fluctuation pattern 12H is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a miss in an SPSP reach A.

Furthermore, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) based on the results of the first hold preview process, and performs a lottery to determine the execution of the hold notice effect for the hold image HW, a lottery to determine the final display mode, a lottery to determine the effect scenario, etc. The selection range for the final display mode corresponding to variation pattern 12H is blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, and red display mode HMd (Figure 61 (b)). Here, as a result of the above various lotteries, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and an effect scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the hold image HW with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot occurs in the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, are erased, just as in Variation 4 above. This state is maintained until a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending presentation, the presentation control device 143 executes the second reserve read-ahead process (step Sa4501) based on the hold information stored in the hold memory area 344c. Normally, when a jackpot result is achieved, the game state after the open/close execution mode becomes the time-limited game state. However, in the second reserve read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using a hit/miss determination table and a variable display time table for the time-limited game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 23H (Figure 59 (d)), the result of the second reserve read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 23H. Fluctuation pattern 23H is not a miss for an SPSP reach A, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a miss for an SP reach B, which is lower in rank than the reach presentation.

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for preview return (step Sa4502) based on the results of the second hold pre-read process, and makes a return determination as to whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In the return determination, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-read process is determined based on the upper limit display mode table (Figure 74), and it is determined whether the display mode of the hold image HW before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the determined upper limit display mode.

Here, since the upper limit display mode for fluctuation pattern 23H predicted by the second reserved prediction process is the green display mode HMc (Figure 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in Figure 75 (b), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode will change from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, even if the display mode of the hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-read process, so after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the hold image HW will change from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

In contrast to these, if the display mode of the hold image HW is the red display mode HMd when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-read process. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. In other words, whether or not a return to the specific display mode occurs depends on the display mode of the hold image HW when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated.

If a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will remain in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D after the open/close execution mode ends (Figure 75 (c)).

Then, the display position of the hold image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play of the hold image HW begins, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process of the hold notice (step Sa1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of variation pattern 23H in the promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted within the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, we will explain, with reference to Figure 76, what happens when the results of the pre-reading of the pass/fail judgment change before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in Figure 76 (a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) for the second special symbol occurs in a high probability game state, the main control unit 162 executes an information acquisition process. As a result, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired as 17, and the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired as 45.

In addition, the presentation control device 143 executes the first reserved read-ahead process based on the results of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. The win/loss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 in the high probability game state is a win result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 12A (Figure 59 (a)), so the result of the first reserved read-ahead process is a win and fluctuation pattern 12A. Fluctuation pattern 12A is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach B win.

Furthermore, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for the hold notice based on the results of the first hold pre-read process. The selection range for the final display mode corresponding to variation pattern 12A is blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow display mode HMe (Figure 61 (a)). Here, as a result of the above-mentioned various lotteries, the rainbow display mode HMe is selected as the final display mode, and an effect scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, a hold image HW with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot occurs during the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to open/close execution mode, all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, are erased. This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending presentation, the presentation control device 143 executes a second reserve read-ahead process based on the reserve information stored in the reserve memory area 344c. In the second reserve read-ahead process, a win/loss determination table and a variable display time table for the time-saving game state are used to execute the read-ahead process. Since the win/loss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 22H (Figure 59 (d)), the result of the second reserve read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 22H. Fluctuation pattern 22H is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach win, but rather a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach miss (SP reach A miss).

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for preview return based on the results of the second hold pre-read process, and makes a return determination as to whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 22H predicted by the second hold pre-read process is the green display mode HMc (Figure 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in Figure 76 (b), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode will change from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, even if the display mode of the hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second hold pre-read process, so after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the hold image HW will change from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

In contrast to these, if the display mode of the pending image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow display mode HMe when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-read process. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. In other words, even if the win/loss changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, whether or not the specific display mode is restored will depend on the display mode of the pending image HW when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated.

If a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will remain in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D after the open/close execution mode ends (Figure 76 (c)).

Then, the display position of the reserved image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play of the reserved image HW begins, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Note that depending on the value of the variation type counter CS of the reserved image HW, even if the result of the first reserved pre-read process in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode was a hit and a variation pattern of at least a reach effect, the result of the second reserved pre-read process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode may change to a miss and a variation pattern corresponding to a complete miss (for example, when a normal jackpot result occurs in the high probability game state as described above and the game transitions to the time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved information of the reserved image HW is 17 and the value of the variation type counter CS is 10). In such cases, the display mode restoration process is not performed in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If the system transitions to the open/close execution mode while the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (while the reserved notification effect is being executed), the system executes another reserved read-ahead process (second reserved read-ahead process) after the open/close execution mode, and sets the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode based on the result.

In this modified example, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process, which can arouse the player's anticipation of a jackpot result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, multiple game states are set as game states, and when a jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is executed, the player will transition to one of these multiple game states. In a configuration with multiple game states like this, even if the reserved information used to determine whether a win or loss is true is the same, differences may occur in the win/loss result and the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) performed in a game round depending on the game state.

In this regard, with this configuration, if the system switches to open/close execution mode while a hold notification effect is being executed, the system executes a new look-ahead process after the open/close execution mode for the hold information that triggered the hold notification effect, and sets the display mode of the target hold image HW (the hold image for the hold information that triggered the hold notification effect) based on the results. Therefore, for the target hold image HW for which a hold notification effect was being executed before the open/close execution mode, the display mode after the open/close execution mode can be adjusted to be appropriate for the game state after the open/close execution mode, making it possible to optimally display the hold image after the open/close execution mode.

When the reserved ball pre-read process is performed again after the open/close execution mode, the pre-read is performed by applying the win/lose determination conditions and effect selection conditions that correspond to the game state after the open/close execution mode. This makes it possible to adjust the display mode of the reserved ball image HW while aligning it with the win/lose result actually notified in the game round of the reserved ball image HW that is performed after the open/close execution mode and the game round effects that are actually performed in that game round.

The display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result of the reserved image pre-read process performed again after the opening and closing execution mode and the display mode of the target reserved image HW before the opening and closing execution mode.

For example, if the display mode of the reserved image changes frequently upon transition to the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, with this configuration, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set taking into account not only the results of the second look-ahead, but also the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. For example, if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the results of the second look-ahead, and there is no problem with using the same display mode after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode can be retained. This prevents excessive changes in the display mode of the reserved image at the boundary of the opening and closing execution mode, making it possible to display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode in a natural manner.

Multiple upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of each game state, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second look-ahead process after the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Based on the results, the display mode of the target reserve image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set. More specifically, if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target reserve image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the same mode as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode.

In this modified example, multiple types of display modes (notification modes in the hold preview performance) for the reserved image are set with different jackpot expectations. In this configuration where expectations are set in stages and multiple display modes are provided, the range of expectations corresponding to one display mode is narrow. Therefore, if the reserved image after the open/close execution mode is displayed in the display mode before the open/close execution mode, there is likely to be a difference in the expected expectations suggested before and after the open/close execution mode. In this regard, with this configuration, even in situations where multiple display modes are set, it is possible to align the expected expectations and appropriately display the reserved image after the open/close execution mode.

If the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is higher than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. This prevents the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode from exceeding the expected level corresponding to the game state before the opening and closing execution mode, making it possible to optimally display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, a determination is made as to whether or not to upgrade the display mode to a specific display mode during the game of the target reserved image HW, and the upgrade is carried out based on the result of the determination.

If the game state before the opening/closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, changing the display mode of the target reserve image HW in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa can absorb fluctuations in the win/lose judgment results and game round presentation due to changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may not be possible to notify or indicate the expected level of the reserve information corresponding to the target reserve image HW. In this regard, with this configuration, for a target reserve image HW that has been set to the normal display mode HMa, an opportunity is given to change it to a specific display mode as play progresses to the game round for that target reserve image HW. Therefore, even if the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be upgraded to the specific display mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expected level, etc.

In the above case, the determination of whether the target pending image HW will be promoted to a specific display mode is made based on the variation pattern identified by the main control unit 162 executing a win/loss determination (at the start of a game round).

In this case, the possibility of promotion is determined using the same information used to select the game presentation in the game round of the target reserved image HW. Therefore, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting to the game presentation that will actually be performed in the game round after the opening and closing execution mode.

Furthermore, the above configuration avoids the need to add a dedicated process for transmitting a variation pattern (the result of the win/lose determination and information about the game presentation) corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, solely for the purpose of determining whether to promote the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode has ended. In other words, when a game round of the target reserved image HW is played in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, a variation start command must be sent from the main control unit 162 to the presentation control unit 143 to synchronize the display of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 with the special symbol game round on the special symbol display unit 43. However, by using this variation start command to perform the promotion determination, it is no longer necessary for the main control unit 162 to notify the presentation control unit 143 of the variation pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode using a dedicated command separate from the variation start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 does not need to be equipped with processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received, which prevents the processing configuration from becoming too complicated.

When the display mode of the target reserve image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is to be the same as the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to first change to the normal display mode HMa and then change to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the same mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa as the opening and closing execution mode is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness that would occur if the display mode were changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination not to restore the same mode. Furthermore, by causing an event in which the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the hold image that has been set to the normal display mode HMa may be changed to a specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, including when it is determined not to restore the same mode, and it is possible to maintain anticipation for the hold image (hold information).

The pending image will no longer be displayed when the open/close execution mode is running.

When changing the display mode of the target reserve image HW upon the end of the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that if the target reserve image HW that had been displayed up until that point is suddenly changed to a different display mode at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the player may feel unnatural. In particular, downgrading to the normal display mode HMa is likely to be noticeable to the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, with this configuration, the reserve image is hidden in the opening and closing execution mode, so when changing the display mode of the target reserve image HW, a period can be inserted during which the reserve image itself, including other reserve images, is not displayed. This prevents the change in display mode from being too noticeable, making it less unnatural. Another advantage is that hiding the reserve image makes it easier for the player to focus on the effects for the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game effects).

<Modification 5>
This modification deals with the display mode of the hold image before the occurrence of a power outage and the display mode of the hold image when the power is restored from the power outage. This modification will be described below with reference to Figures 77 to 86. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modification, and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a power outage is detected by the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191, a power outage flag (information about the occurrence of a power outage) is set in a backup area provided in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and power for use in the event of a power outage is supplied to the RAM 314 from the backup power supply unit 316 of the power supply and launch control device 191. In other words, when a power outage occurs, power is supplied to the RAM 314, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up so that the special and regular game rounds on the main display unit 81 that were in progress when the power outage occurred, and the pending information stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 when the power outage occurred, etc. can be retained. In this modified example, the data stored in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143 is also backed up.

However, because the performance control device 143 handles a larger amount of data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 installed in the performance control device 143 is larger and has a larger capacity than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. For this reason, if an attempt were made to back up all of the data stored in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143 as is, power consumption would increase in a power outage. As a result, there is a concern that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 will be consumed in a short period of time, shortening the data retention period (backup period) or requiring a backup power supply unit 316 with a larger power storage capacity, resulting in increased costs.

In this modified example, instead of backing up the entire data stored in RAM 344, only a portion of the data is backed up, including information about hold images, such as hold information, stored in the hold memory area 344c. The electrical configuration for this purpose will be explained with reference to Figure 77.

The performance control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a dedicated backup storage medium, separate from the RAM 344. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, and is sufficient to store information related to images for reservation. Note that the backup RAM 345 may be integrated into a single chip with the MPU 342, as with the RAM 344, or may be integrated into a chip separate from the MPU 342 and RAM 344.

RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 are supplied with power during power outage from backup power supply unit 316. In this modified example, when a power outage occurs, information relating to hold images among the data stored in RAM 344 is stored (copied) to backup RAM 345, and the supply of power during power outage to RAM 344 is intended to provide the power necessary to read the information relating to hold images stored in RAM 344. Therefore, after the read process (writing process to backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power during power outage to RAM 344 is stopped.

On the other hand, power continues to be supplied to the backup RAM 345 during power outages even after the process of writing information about the reserved image has finished. In this way, in the event of a power outage, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power is supplied to that storage medium during power outages. This reduces the amount of power consumed to retain data. This prevents the data retention period from becoming shorter and prevents the need for a backup power supply unit 316 with a large storage capacity.

Although not shown in the figure, the power supply and launch control device 191 or the performance control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) that switches the state of power supply to RAM 344 during power outages. The switching unit supplies power during power outages from the backup power supply unit 316 to RAM 344 at least while information about the reserved image is being read from RAM 344 and written to backup RAM 345, and operates to stop the supply of power during power outages to RAM 344 after writing of information about the reserved image to backup RAM 345 has finished.

The performance control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal, just like the main control device 162, and a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 in the power supply and launch control device 191 is output to this NMI terminal. In other words, in this modified example, when a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315, power outage processing is executed in both the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143.

Next, we will explain the control processes executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143. The processes of this MPU 342 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, normal processing for performance control, and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Of these, the NMI interrupt processing is nearly identical to the NMI interrupt processing in the main control device 162 (Figure 15), so we will explain it using Figure 15.

<NMI interrupt processing>
15, in the NMI interrupt process, first in step Sa11, data in the usage registers provided in the MPU 342 is saved to a predetermined storage area in the RAM 344 or to the backup RAM 345. In step Sa12, a power outage flag is set in the backup RAM 345. In step Sa13, the saved data is restored to the usage registers of the MPU 342, and then the NMI interrupt process ends. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the usage registers of the MPU 342, the processes of steps Sa11 and Sa13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 78. The main processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while an external power source is being supplied, or when an external power source is supplied while the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is in the on state).

In step Sa5101, initial setting processing is performed upon power-on, and in step Sa5102, access to RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is permitted. In step Sa5103, the used area of RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa5104, initialization processing of RAM 344 is performed. After that, the main processing ends and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa5201, a power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process issues a power-on notification in response to the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10.

If a power outage occurs when no game is being played (i.e., before the power is turned on), a message such as "Power has been turned on" will be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 to notify the user that power has been turned on. This message will remain displayed for a predetermined period of time, after which a predetermined demo video will be displayed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a game round and the game continues after power is turned on (after power is restored), a message such as "The screen will return shortly" will be displayed on the display screen G to notify the player that power has been turned on. At that time, the main display unit 81 will enter a state where the next game round will be played, but the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will not be displayed on the display screen G, and no variable display will be made based on them. Such variable display will not be made until the start of the next game round (the game round that starts after power is turned on) after power is turned on (after power is restored). The message display will be erased when the next game round ends (when the next game round starts).

In addition, whether a power outage occurs when a game round is not being played or when a power outage occurs during a game round, no sound is output from the speaker unit 29 and silence is maintained while the power-on notification is being made. Sound is output from the start of the game round that begins after power is turned on (or the start of the next game round if a subsequent game round is being played when power is restored). This configuration makes it possible to prevent sounds from being output simultaneously from each pachinko machine 10, which would otherwise become noisy, when the power supply to a hall to which multiple pachinko machines 10 are connected is turned on and the pachinko machines 10 are started up simultaneously, such as when preparing for business at an amusement hall.

In step Sa5202, a process for restoring the hold notification is executed to display the hold image in the display format before the power outage. Details of this process will be described later. Note that the processes of steps Sa5201 and Sa5202 are executed only when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After step Sa5202 is executed, external signal output processing is executed in step Sa5203. During external signal output processing, commands set in the previous normal processing are sent to the display control device 350, and control signals for driving and controlling the various lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 are sent. In step Sa5204, counter update processing is executed to update the counter values stored in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344.

In step Sa5205, a command reception process is executed to receive commands from the main control unit 162. As already explained, the commands received by the command reception process are stored in the command storage area 344a of RAM 344. In step Sa5206, the effect setting process explained with reference to Figure 30 is executed.

In step Sa5207, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not set, i.e., if a power outage has not occurred, it proceeds to step Sa5208, where it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this modified example) has elapsed since the start of this normal processing.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step Sa5203 and executes the processing from step Sa5203 onwards. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the remaining time may be used to update the values of various counters, as in normal processing by the main control unit 162 (Figure 20).

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sa5207 above (if the power outage flag is set), this means that a power outage has occurred. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa5209, where hold image information is created that indicates the display mode in which each hold image was displayed before (immediately before) the power outage occurred. In this step, the process references the performance scenario data for the hold notice performance stored in RAM 344 to determine whether there are any hold images displayed in a specific display mode, and if such hold images exist, in what mode they are displayed, and creates hold image information based on the results of this determination.

In step Sa5210, information regarding the reserved image is stored in backup RAM 345. At this time, in addition to the reserved image information created in step Sa5209 above, the information stored in reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344 is also stored in backup RAM 345, and this information is stored and retained as information for displaying the reserved image when power is restored. The information stored in reserved memory area 344c includes the reserved information stored in each area set for the first and second special designs (such as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS), as well as information indicating the number of reserved items.

Note that the storage process for the pending image information created in step Sa5209 and the storage process for the information stored in the pending storage area 344c do not necessarily have to be performed in the same step; one of the storage processes may be performed first, followed by the other storage process.

In step Sa5211, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in backup RAM 345. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value of information related to the reserved image stored in backup RAM 345. In step Sa5212, access to RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be performed.

<Processing for restoring pending notice>
The process for restoring the pending notice in step Sa5202 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 80.

First, in step Sa5301, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345. If a power outage flag is not stored, this means that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 has run out and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 has been lost. In this case, the process for restoring the hold notice is terminated.

If a power outage flag is stored, proceed to step Sa5302 and calculate a RAM judgment value. In the following step Sa5303, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal. Specifically, the RAM judgment value calculated in step Sa5302 is compared with the RAM judgment value saved when the power outage occurred (step Sa5211), and it is determined whether the two match.

If the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is deemed abnormal, and the data stored in backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the process for restoring the hold notice is terminated. The validity of the data stored in backup RAM 345 can also be determined by checking whether the keywords written in a specified area of backup RAM 345 are correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored in backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, proceed to step Sa5304, refer to the data stored in backup RAM 345, and determine the number of items on hold at the time of the power outage.

In step Sa5305, it is determined whether the number of reserved items identified in step Sa5304 is 0. If the number of reserved items is 0, i.e., if a power outage occurred when there are no reserved items, the process for restoring the reserved call notification is terminated.

If the number of pending items is not 0, proceed to step Sa5306 and execute the display mode setting process. This process is for setting the display mode of the pending image to be displayed after power is restored. The display mode setting process of step Sa5306 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 81.

In step Sa5401, the data stored in backup RAM 345 is referenced to determine the display mode of each hold image before (immediately before) the power outage occurred. In step Sa5402, based on the determination results of step Sa5401, it is determined whether there are any hold images that were displayed in a specific display mode. If there are no hold images that were displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa5403, where the display mode of all hold images is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a hold image that was being displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step Sa5404, where it is determined whether the display mode of that hold image (target hold image) is equal to or greater than a predetermined display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd). If the display mode of the target hold image is lower than the predetermined display mode (e.g., green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb), proceed to step Sa5405, where the display mode of that hold image is set to the specific display mode before the power outage. In step Sa5406, the display mode of hold images other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or greater than the predetermined display mode (for example, the red display mode HMd or the rainbow display mode HMe), proceed to step Sa5407, and set the display mode of the hold image to a display mode lower than the predetermined display mode (for example, the green display mode HMc). In other words, if the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or greater than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target hold image upon power restoration is limited to a mode lower than the specific display mode before the power outage.

In step Sa5408, the display mode of hold images other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa5409, a return notice flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the hold notice restoration process (Figure 80), after executing the display mode setting process of step Sa5306, in step Sa5307, the display control device 350 is controlled so that each hold image is displayed in the display mode set in step Sa5306. In step Sa5308, the hold information, etc. stored in backup RAM 345 is stored (restored) in the corresponding area of RAM 344. In step Sa5309, the power outage flag stored in backup RAM 345 is erased, and then the hold notice restoration process is terminated.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart variable display process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 82. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed instead of the special chart variable display process of Fig. 41. In Fig. 82, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Fig. 41, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified. For convenience, in Fig. 82, descriptions of the first execution process of the pending notice, etc. are omitted.

If step Sa1804 determines that the display is changing, processing for the display in progress is executed in step Sa1805. In step Sa5501, it is determined whether the current special symbol play is a play of the reserved image (target reserved image) that was displayed in a specific display mode before the power was cut off. If the current special symbol play is not a play of the target reserved image, the processing for the special symbol change display is terminated.

If it is the play count of the target reserved image, the fourth execution process of the reserved notice is performed in step Sa5502, and then the special chart change display process is terminated. The fourth execution process of the reserved notice is intended to promote the display mode of the reserved image to a higher mode during the play count of the target reserved image.

<Fourth execution process of pending notice>
The fourth execution process of the pending notice in step Sa5502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 83.

First, in step Sa5601, it is determined whether a recovery notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The recovery notice flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that, when power is restored, a process should be executed to change the display mode of a hold image that is set to a lower display mode than the specific display mode before the power outage to a higher display mode. If a recovery notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If a return notice flag is stored, proceed to step Sa5602 and determine whether a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the display mode of the target pending image should be promoted, and is similar to the promotion flag in the first embodiment described above.

If the promotion flag is not stored, step Sa5603 determines whether a determination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If a determination flag is stored, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If the determined flag is not stored, proceed to step Sa5604 and determine whether any reserved change points remain in the current game. If there are no reserved change points remaining, proceed to step Sa5611 and erase the return notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d, and then terminate the fourth execution process of the reserved notification.

If there are any pending change points remaining, proceed to step Sa5605 to execute the pending notice promotion process, and then terminate the fourth pending notice execution process. Here, the pending notice promotion process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84.

In the promotion process, first in step Sa5701, the current display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is determined. Note that the current display mode is the display mode set in step Sa5407 of the display mode setting process (Figure 81).

In step Sa5702, the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image is identified. This is done based on the fluctuation start command (step Sa712 in Figure 23) sent from the main control unit 162 at the start of the game round (the game round currently being played) of the target reserved image.

In step Sa5703, a decision is made to upgrade the hold notification effect based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step Sa5701, the current display mode determined in step Sa5702, and the upgrade decision table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The upgrade decision determines whether it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D to a specific display mode that is higher than the current mode.

In the promotion determination table, an upper limit for the display mode is set for each fluctuation pattern, similar to the promotion determination table (Figure 47) in the first embodiment described above. In step Sa5703, the promotion determination table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and it is determined whether the current display mode is a lower-level display mode than the identified upper limit display mode. If the result is a lower-level display mode, the display mode is allowed to be promoted; if not, promotion is not permitted.

After step Sa5703 is executed, a determination completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step Sa5704. The determination completion flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a promotion determination has been made.

In step Sa5705, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step Sa5703 above allows the display mode to be promoted. If promotion is not allowed, the process exits the promotion process for the hold notice and proceeds to step Sa5611 (Figure 83), where the return notice flag is cleared and the fourth execution process for the hold notice is terminated.

If promotion is permitted, proceed to step Sa5706 and execute the promotion scenario lottery process. The promotion scenario determines the timing (hold change point) and display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D to be changed to. As with step Sa2405 (Figure 46) in the first embodiment, the promotion scenario lottery is performed based on the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343 and the lottery counter values (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step Sa5707, promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected in step Sa5706 is executed. In step Sa5708, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the pending notice promotion processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the fourth execution process of the hold notice (Figure 83), if a positive judgment is made in step Sa5602 (if the promotion flag is stored), proceed to step Sa5606 to determine whether it is time to promote the display mode. This judgment is made based on the results of the promotion scenario setting in step Sa5707. If it is not time to promote, the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If it is time to promote, proceed to step Sa5607, where the display mode to which the current change process will be made (higher-level display mode) is determined based on the results of the promotion scenario settings. In the following step Sa5608, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to change to the display mode determined in step Sa5607. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set so as to include information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350.

In step Sa5609, it is determined whether the display mode determined in step Sa5607 above or the display mode set as the destination in step Sa5608 above is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if the promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages through multiple change processes and the current change process is an intermediate step, this step is determined to be negative as it is not the final display mode, and the fourth execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If this is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is cleared in step Sa5610. In the following step Sa5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is cleared, and then the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Display mode of pending images before and after power outage>
The display mode of the hold image before and after the power outage will be described below. First, a case where a hold image in the green display mode HMc exists before the power outage occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

As shown in Figure 85(a), when a game round of the first special symbol is being played, there are three reserved information pieces for the first special symbol, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in green display mode HMc. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off, and the display on the display screen G disappears. As a result, all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, are no longer displayed.

At this time, the performance control device 143 stores information about the reserved image in the backup RAM 345. Since the backup RAM 345 receives power for data retention during power outage from the power supply and launch control device 191, information about the reserved image stored in the backup RAM 345 is retained even during a power outage.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the main control unit 162 executes the power restoration process (steps Sa2004 to Sa2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored in RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game session (the game session of the first special symbol) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special symbol display unit 43.

When power is restored, the performance control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step Sa5201) to notify the user that power has been turned on. As a result, a text message 461 such as "Screen will be restored shortly" is displayed on the display screen G.

The performance control device 143 also executes a hold notification restoration process (step Sa5202) to restore the display of hold images. In the hold notification restoration process, the number of hold images and the display mode of each hold image before the power outage are determined based on information about the hold images stored in the backup RAM 345, and a determination is made as to whether any of the determined hold images were displayed in a specific display mode. If any hold images were displayed in a specific display mode, a determination is made as to whether the display mode is equal to or exceeds a predetermined display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd), and the display mode to be used when power is restored is set based on the result of the determination.

In this case, the display mode before the power outage occurred was the green display mode HMc, which is a lower level than the specified display mode, so the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the display mode before the power outage occurred. As a result, as shown in Figure 85 (b), each hold image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power outage occurred.

Note that, since information regarding the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. For this reason, the text display 461 as a power-on notification and each pending image restored based on information about pending images stored in the backup RAM 345 are displayed on a power-recovery background 462 that is different from the background used when the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed. The power-recovery background 462 is, for example, a monochrome background displayed in a predetermined display color (e.g., black).

After that, when the resumed next round of play ends, each reserved image is shifted to the lower unit reserved display area, as shown in Figure 85 (c). As the next round of play begins, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a changing manner on display screen G, and the screen returns to normal.

Next, we will explain, with reference to Figure 86, what happens if a hold image in red display mode HMd existed before the power outage occurred.

As shown in Figure 86 (a), when a game round of the first special symbol is being played, there are three reserved information pieces for the first special symbol, and the reserved image HW displayed in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in red HMd. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off, and the display on the display screen G disappears.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the continuation of the game round (the game round of the first special symbol) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special symbol display unit 43. The effect control device 143 also executes a process for restoring the hold notice and determines whether the specific display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage occurred is equal to or exceeds the predetermined display mode.

In this case, the display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage was the red display mode HMd, which is higher than the predetermined display mode, so when power is restored, the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, which is lower than the display mode before the power outage. As a result, as shown in Figure 86 (b), the display of each hold image is restored with the display mode of the hold image HW set to the green display mode HMc.

After that, when it is time to start playing the pending image HW, the effect control device 143 determines the change pattern of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW based on the change start command sent from the main control device 162. Then, based on that change pattern, it determines whether to promote the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

In other words, if the display mode before the power outage is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, it is temporarily restored to a lower display mode than the display mode before the power outage, and the display mode of the pending image HW is reset based on the fluctuation start command sent at the start of the game round. As a result, if it is determined that the image will be upgraded to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode), the display mode of the pending image HW in the execution display area D is changed from the green display mode HMc to the red display mode HMd, as shown in Figure 86 (c). Note that the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) implemented in the game round of the pending image HW is determined based on the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command, and therefore the display mode of the pending image HW that is determined to be upgraded based on that fluctuation pattern will be consistent with the game round presentation.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If a power outage occurs while the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (while the hold notification effect is being executed), and the power outage is subsequently resolved and power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage, and the hold notification effect is executed again.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the results of the hold preview process, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation of a jackpot result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, multiple types of specific display modes are set with different jackpot expectancies, allowing the expectancy to be indicated by assigning a high or low level, resulting in an advantageous configuration for stimulating the player's anticipation. Under this configuration, if a power outage occurs while a hold preview effect is being executed and then power is restored, the hold preview effect that was being executed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. This allows the hold preview effect to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, preventing the hold preview effect from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. In this case, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the display mode before the abnormality occurred, making it possible to optimally restore the hold preview effect that was being executed before the power outage.

In the event of a power outage, information regarding the hold image is stored in backup RAM 345, allowing information corresponding to the display mode of the hold image to be retained even after a power outage occurs.

With the above configuration, even if a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, causing control over the hold image to be suspended, the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage can be determined by referencing the information stored in the backup RAM 345 after power is restored. This makes it possible to appropriately restore the display mode of the target hold image HW to the display mode before the power outage when the hold notification performance is re-executed after power is restored.

If the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage is a notification mode higher than the specified mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is limited to the specified mode or lower.

For example, if a power outage causes a change in the reserved ball information stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, an inconsistency will arise between the results of the reserved ball readout made before the power outage and the results of the win/loss judgment and the selection of the game round presentation made in the game round after power is restored. In such a case, if the reserved ball advance presentation before the power outage suggested a high level of expectation, and this is then re-executed after power is restored, the results of the announcement in the game round (the results of the win/loss judgment) and the game round presentation made in the game round will be inconsistent with the level of expectation suggested by the reserved ball advance presentation, which could give the player an unpleasant impression.

In this regard, with the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was in effect when the power outage occurred was a predetermined or higher mode and suggested a certain level of expectation, the hold notification effect is re-executed, limited to a lower level of display mode. This prevents the hold notification effect from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results for the current game round, making it possible to effectively prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher level during the play of the target reserved image HW, and promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

With the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, the target pending image HW will be promoted to a higher display mode by playing it, thereby preventing the suggested expectation from remaining low.

In the above cases, the decision on whether to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the results of the win/loss judgment made at the time of the game and the result of the selected variation pattern.

In the above configuration, the results of the win/loss judgment and the selection of game round presentation after power is restored are used as a basis for determining whether or not to upgrade the display mode of the target pending image HW. This allows the above upgrade to be performed while being consistent with the notification results that will actually be produced in the game round after power is restored.

When power is restored after a power outage, the power restoration process is executed, which involves a setting process (hold notification restoration process) to re-execute the hold notification effect.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and restored, the hold notification effect can be quickly re-executed. This means that if a power outage occurs during a game session and there is a period after power is restored during which no pattern changes are displayed on the display screen G, the hold notification effect can be re-executed before the pattern changes are restored.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the performance control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345, but in this modification, this is not provided, and the performance control device 143 does not have a backup function. This modification will be described below with reference to Figures 87 to 91. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components that are the same as those in the first embodiment and each modification, and their description will be omitted.

The performance control device 143 of this modified example has the same electrical configuration as the performance control device 143 of the first embodiment, but is not provided with a backup RAM 345. It also does not have a function for backing up data stored in RAM 344. Therefore, if a power outage occurs while a hold exists (a hold image is displayed on the hold display unit 200), the hold information and other data held by the performance control device 143 will be lost.

In this modified example, the signal line that transmits the power outage signal output from the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the performance control device 143, and the power outage signal is not input to the performance control device 143.

In addition, in this modified example, the results of the reserved ball read-ahead process (Figure 28) of the main control unit 162 (the results of the read-ahead process, such as the variation pattern lottery) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b (Figure 11) of RAM 314. That is, each area set in the reserved ball storage area 314b stores reserved information (the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variation type counter CS), as well as the results of the reserved ball read-ahead process performed on that reserved information.

Information regarding the results of the read-ahead processing stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b remains stored in RAM 314 without being erased, even after the information is sent to the performance control device 143. This configuration is designed to ensure that, in the event of a power outage and subsequent restoration, the results of the reserved ball read-ahead processing performed before the power outage can be ascertained.

In other words, in a typical pachinko machine, after the main control unit 162 executes the hold look-ahead process and sends the results to the performance control unit 143 as hold commands or the like, the look-ahead results are not used in the control processes on the main control unit 162 side, so there is no need to keep the information on the main control unit 162 side. For this reason, after sending to the performance control unit 143, it is common to free up the area in which the information regarding the look-ahead results was stored, and erase the information by overwriting it with the look-ahead results for the subsequent hold information, etc.

In contrast, in this modified example, information regarding the read-ahead results is stored in RAM 314 even after it is sent to the performance control device 143. In the event of a power outage, power for use during power outage is supplied to RAM 314 from the power supply and launch control device 191, and the information in RAM 314 is retained without being erased. Therefore, by using a configuration such as this modified example, it is possible to retain information regarding the read-ahead results in the event of a power outage, and when power is restored after the power outage, it becomes possible to know the results of the pending read-ahead processing that was performed before the power outage occurred.

Note that the information about the look-ahead results stored in RAM 314 is not permanently stored, but is erased when the reserved information is erased. In other words, the information about the look-ahead results stored in RAM 314 is erased when a play round of the reserved information that was the subject of the reserved look-ahead process is executed.

Incidentally, the reason that the storage area for information related to the look-ahead results is reserved ball storage area 314b is to allow for convenience in determining which reserved information the information related to the look-ahead results corresponds to, and in allocating storage areas so that other information is not inadvertently overwritten. Therefore, the storage area for this information does not necessarily have to be reserved ball storage area 314b, but may be another storage area in RAM 314.

This section explains the processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162.

<Main processing>
The main processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 87(a). This processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main processing in Figure 19. In Figure 87(a), the same steps as in Figure 19 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa2003 (the RAM clear switch has not been pressed), step Sa2004 determines whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. If a power outage flag is stored, i.e., if power is restored after a power outage occurs and data is still stored in RAM 314, step Sa2005 calculates a RAM judgment value.

In step Sa2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal, and if it is normal, the stack pointer is restored in step Sa2007. In step Sa2008, a power recovery command is output.

In step Sa6101, a power restoration hold command is set based on the information stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314, and output to the performance control device 143. The power restoration hold command includes information indicating the number of reserved balls at the time of the power outage, information indicating the results of the hold look-ahead performed before the power outage occurred, and the like. After step Sa6101 is executed, step Sa2009 (clearing the power outage flag) is executed.

This section explains the processing performed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 87(b). This processing is executed in place of the normal processing of Fig. 79. As shown in Fig. 87(b), the normal processing according to this modification does not include a backup process for hold information in the event of a power outage.

Specifically, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 relating to the above-mentioned Variation 5, step Sa5207 checks whether a power outage flag is stored in backup RAM 345 to determine whether a power outage has occurred, and if a power outage flag is stored (a power outage has occurred), steps Sa5209 to Sa5212 are executed. However, in the normal processing of FIG. 87(b) relating to this Variation, these steps are not included. Also, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 relating to Variation 5 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, step Sa5202 is executed to restore the hold notice. However, in the normal processing of FIG. 87(b) relating to this Variation, such steps are not included, and instead, after power-on notification processing of step Sa5201 is executed, external output processing of step Sa5203 is executed.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 88. This process is executed in step Sa5206 of the normal process (Fig. 87(b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of Fig. 30. In Fig. 88, the same steps as those in Fig. 30 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa6201, it is determined whether a power recovery hold command has been received from the main control unit 162. The power recovery hold command is output when power is restored from a power outage (step Sa6101 in Figure 87(a)), and this command includes information indicating the number of items on hold at the time the power outage occurred, information indicating the results of the hold look-ahead performed before the power outage occurred, etc.

If a power recovery hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sa6202, where the number of items on hold at the time of the power outage is determined based on the power recovery hold command from the main control unit 162. In step Sa6203, it is determined whether the number of items on hold determined in step Sa6202 is 0. If the number of items on hold is not 0, the process proceeds to step Sa6204, where a display mode setting process is executed to set the display mode of the hold image after power is restored. The display mode setting process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 89.

First, in step Sa6301, the fluctuation pattern of each pending information is determined based on the power recovery pending command from the main control unit 162. This fluctuation pattern was read in advance by the pending information read-ahead process (Figure 28) of the main control unit 162 before the power outage occurred. The power recovery pending command contains information on fluctuation patterns for the number of pending items determined in step Sa6202, so in this step, all of these fluctuation patterns are determined.

Note that when sending a power recovery hold command that includes information on the fluctuation patterns for the number of held items, it is expected that the amount of data will be large or that the fluctuation pattern information may not be able to fit in all the data. Therefore, the information may be sent in multiple parts. Specifically, a power recovery hold command may first be sent in a format that does not include fluctuation pattern information, and then the fluctuation pattern information for each held item may be sent sequentially following the command.

In step Sa6302, based on the results of step Sa6301, it is determined whether pending information for a jackpot exists. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the fluctuation patterns determined in step Sa6301 include a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, and it is determined whether pending information predicting a jackpot exists before the power outage occurs.

If there is pending information about a jackpot, proceed to step Sa6303, where the display mode of the pending image corresponding to that pending information is set to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when a jackpot is predicted in advance, such as the green display mode HMc.

In step Sa6304, a return notification flag is set corresponding to the reserved image (target reserved image). The return notification flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a process (promotion process) should be executed to change the display mode of the reserved image in the play count of the target reserved image. The return notification flag may be stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, or may be stored in the corresponding area (the area to which the target reserved image corresponds) in the reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344 so that it is shifted together with the reserved information of the target reserved image.

After step Sa6304 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6302 (there is no pending information for a jackpot), step Sa6305 determines whether or not any of the fluctuation patterns identified in step Sa6301 includes a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach effect. Specifically, it determines whether or not any of fluctuation patterns 5H, 6H, 12H, 13H, 24H, or 25H exists. This step determines whether or not the pending information for which the pre-read result before the power outage was incorrect includes any that corresponds to a reach effect with a ranking of jackpot expectation equal to or higher than a predetermined level.

If a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect exists, proceed to step Sa6306, and set the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information for which that variation pattern has been predicted to the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower in level than the first specific display mode, for example, the blue display mode HMb. In step Sa6307, a return notice flag is set corresponding to that pending image.

After step Sa6307 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6305 (if there is no fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect), step Sa6308 determines whether there is any pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be determined in step Sa6301. Possible cases in which a fluctuation pattern cannot be determined include when a power outage occurs and some of the information indicating the look-ahead results is corrupted, or when some of the data is corrupted due to noise or other factors when the power recovery hold command is sent.

If there is pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be determined, proceed to step Sa6309, where the display mode of the pending image corresponding to that pending information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa6310, a return notice flag is set corresponding to that pending image.

After step Sa6310 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6308 (if there is no pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped), in step Sa6311, the display mode of the remaining pending images (pending images whose display mode has not been set in steps Sa6302 to Sa6310) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (Figure 88), after the display mode setting process of step Sa6204 is executed, in step Sa6205 the display control device 350 is controlled so that the hold image of the display mode set in that setting process is displayed on the display screen G. After executing step Sa6205, the process proceeds to step Sa1301, and thereafter the processes of steps Sa1301 to Sa1308 are executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa6201 (if the power recovery hold command has not been received), steps Sa6202 to Sa6205 are skipped and the process proceeds to step Sa1301. If a negative judgment is made in step Sa6203 (if the number of held items is 0), steps Sa6204 and Sa6205 are skipped and the process proceeds to step Sa1301.

As a result of the above processing, when power is restored after a power outage, the hold image for the hold information in which a jackpot result was predicted is displayed in the first specific display mode, and the hold image for the hold information in which a miss result corresponding to a reach effect with a high probability of winning is predicted is displayed in the second specific display mode. Thereafter, the fourth execution process for the hold notice in step Sa5502 of the specific variation display process (Figure 82) is performed, thereby upgrading the display mode of the target hold image. In other words, the display mode of the target hold image is reset based on the variation start command sent after power is restored. The fourth execution process for the hold notice is the same as in Variation 5 above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<Display mode of pending images before and after power outage>
The display mode of the reserved image before and after the power outage will be described. First, a case where the jackpot result was predicted before the power outage occurred will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

As shown in Figure 90(a), when a game round of the first special symbol is being played, there are three other reserved information items for the first special symbol, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in red display mode HMd. The preview result of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a jackpot result, and the preview results of the reserved information corresponding to the other reserved images are all miss results (complete misses).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off and the display on the display screen G disappears. As a result, all pending images, including the pending image HW, are no longer displayed.

At this time, RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 is supplied with power for data retention during power outage from the power supply and launch control unit 191, so the data stored in RAM 314 is retained even during the power outage. The data stored in RAM 314 includes the results of the hold pre-read process (step Sa305) performed on the hold information for each of the hold images before the power outage occurred.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the main control unit 162 executes the power restoration process (steps Sa2004 to Sa2010) based on the data stored in RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game session (the game session of the first special symbol) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special symbol display unit 43.

Furthermore, when power is restored, the main control unit 162 reads out information from the data stored in RAM 314, such as information indicating the number of reserved items, information indicating whether each reserved item corresponds to the first or second special design, and information on the results of the reserve read-ahead processing for each reserved item (variation pattern), and transmits this information to the performance control unit 143 as a power-restore reserve command (step Sa6101).

The performance control device 143 executes processing to restore the display of the pending image based on the various information transmitted from the main control device 162 (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). In this processing, the display mode of the pending image HW for which the jackpot result was predicted is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa. At this time, if there is pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be determined, the display mode of the pending image corresponding to that pending information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in Figure 90 (b), the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other hold images is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the display of each hold image is restored. When power is restored, the performance control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step Sa5201) to issue a power-on notification, and a text display 461 such as "The screen will be restored shortly" is displayed on the display screen G. Therefore, each hold image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the above-mentioned text display 461.

After that, when it is time to start playing the pending image HW, the effect control device 143 determines the change pattern of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW based on the change start command sent from the main control device 162. Then, based on that change pattern, it determines whether to promote the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

In other words, the pending image HW of pending information for which the jackpot result was predicted before the power outage occurred is temporarily displayed in a display mode below a predetermined level (first specific display mode), and the display mode of the pending image HW is reset based on the variation start command sent at the start of the game. As a result, if it is determined that the pending image HW should be upgraded to a higher level display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow display mode HMe), the display mode of the pending image HW in the execution display area D is changed to the higher level mode (e.g., red display mode HMd) as shown in Figure 90 (c).

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern determined from the fluctuation start command sent at the start of a game of the pending image HW does not correspond to a jackpot, i.e., if a jackpot has not been announced for that game, promotion to a higher display mode is not permitted, and the display mode of the pending image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, we will explain, with reference to Figure 91, what happens when the SP out-of-reach result and SPSP out-of-reach result are predicted in advance before a power outage occurs.

As shown in Figure 91(a), when a game play of the first special symbol is being executed, there are three separate reserved information items for the first special symbol, and the reserved image HW1 in the first unit reserved display area Ga1 is displayed in blue display mode HMb, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in green display mode HMc.

The predicted result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW1 is variation pattern 3H (SP reach A miss), and the predicted result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW2 is variation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B miss). Furthermore, the predicted result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image in the second unit hold display area Ga2 is variation pattern 1H (complete miss).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 will turn off and the display on the display screen G will disappear. When the power outage is subsequently resolved and power is restored, the game that was interrupted when the power outage occurred (the game of the first special symbol) will resume on the special symbol display unit 43.

The performance control device 143 also executes processing to restore the display of the hold image based on the power recovery hold command sent from the main control device 162 (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). At this time, for the hold image HW1 for which a variation pattern corresponding to an SP reach miss (variation pattern 3H) has been pre-read, its display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and for the hold image HW2 for which a variation pattern corresponding to a higher-ranked SPSP reach miss (variation pattern 6H) has been pre-read, its display mode is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in Figure 91 (b), the display of each hold image is restored with the display mode of hold image HW1 set to the normal display mode HMa and the display mode of hold image HW2 set to the blue display mode HMb. In other words, hold images for hold information corresponding to reach-miss effects lower than the specified rank are displayed in the normal display mode HMa regardless of whether they were displayed in the specific display mode before the power outage occurred, and hold images for hold information corresponding to reach effects higher than the specified rank are displayed in a display mode lower than the specified rank (second specific display mode).

When a play round of the pending image HW2 is executed, a determination is made as to whether to upgrade to a higher display mode, as this is the same as when the jackpot result is predicted in advance as described with reference to Figure 90, so further explanation will be omitted.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If a power outage occurs while the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (while the hold notification effect is being executed), and the power outage is subsequently resolved and power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the results of the hold preview process performed before the power outage, and the hold notification effect is executed again.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the results of the hold preview process, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation of a jackpot result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, multiple types of specific display modes are set with different jackpot expectancies, allowing the expectancy to be indicated by assigning a high or low level, resulting in an advantageous configuration for stimulating the player's anticipation. Under this configuration, if a power outage occurs while a hold preview effect is being executed and then power is restored, the hold preview effect that was being executed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. This allows the hold preview effect to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, preventing the hold preview effect from being lost due to the occurrence of an abnormality. In this case, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the results of the hold preview process before the abnormality occurred, making it possible to optimally re-execute the hold preview effect after power is restored.

By storing the win/loss results and fluctuation patterns predicted by the reserved ball pre-reading process in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314, information corresponding to the above pre-read results can be retained even after a power outage occurs.

With the above configuration, in the event of a power outage, information corresponding to the pre-read results is not lost but is retained. Therefore, after power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be determined based on the information retained in RAM 314, making it possible to optimally re-execute the hold notification effect after power is restored.

When a hold notification effect is executed after power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to a specified mode (green display mode HMc) or below.

For example, if a power outage causes a change in the reserved ball information stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, an inconsistency will arise between the results of the reserved ball readout performed before the power outage and the results of the win/loss determination and the selection of the game round presentation performed in the game round after power is restored. In such a case, if the reserved ball preview presentation before the power outage suggested a high level of expectation, and the presentation is then replayed as is after power is restored, the notification results for the game round (the results of the win/loss determination) and the game round presentation performed in the game round may not match the level of expectation suggested by the reserved ball preview presentation, which could give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, with the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode in effect at the time of the power outage was a predetermined level or higher and suggested a certain level of expectation, the reserved ball preview presentation is replayed with a lower display mode limit. This prevents the reserved ball preview presentation from suggesting a level of expectation that does not match the notification results for the game round, making it possible to effectively prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher level during the play of the target reserved image HW, and promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

With the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, the target pending image HW will be promoted to a higher display mode by playing it, thereby preventing the suggested expectation from remaining low.

In the above cases, the decision on whether to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the results of the win/loss judgment made at the time of the game and the result of the selected variation pattern.

In the above configuration, the results of the win/loss judgment and the selection of game round presentation after power is restored are used as a basis for determining whether or not to upgrade the display mode of the target pending image HW. This allows the above upgrade to be performed while being consistent with the notification results that will actually be produced in the game round after power is restored.

After power is restored, if the results of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage cannot be determined, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if the results of the hold preview process performed before the power outage cannot be determined for some hold images, ceasing the display of those hold images could raise concerns that the player may not be properly notified of the number of holds. Furthermore, if the hold preview effect is re-executed for a hold image for which the results of the hold preview process can be determined (the display mode of that hold image is set to a specific display mode), the display of the hold image for which the results of the hold preview process cannot be determined may be lost, causing a discrepancy between the order of play and the hold image set to a specific display mode, potentially resulting in the expectation being suggested as corresponding to a different play time. In this regard, this configuration distinguishes between hold images for which the results of the hold preview process performed before the power outage can be determined and hold images for which the results cannot be determined, and re-displays the latter in the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to properly notify the player of the number of holds while optimally performing the hold preview effect for other hold images.

When power is restored after a power outage, the main control unit 162 outputs a power restoration hold command to the performance control unit 143, and upon receiving the power restoration hold command, the performance control unit 143 executes a setting process (display mode setting process) to re-execute the hold notice performance.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and restored, the hold notification effect can be quickly re-executed. This means that if a power outage occurs during a game session and there is a period after power is restored during which no pattern changes are displayed on the display screen G, the hold notification effect can be re-executed before the pattern changes are restored.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the switching of the presentation mode is restricted when the hold image is displayed in a specific display mode. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 92 to 94. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode was configured to be switched by manual operation, but in this modified example, the presentation mode is configured to be switched automatically without operating the presentation operation unit 36. The presentation modes include presentation mode A and presentation mode B, which, like the first embodiment described above, differ in the frequency with which the hold preview presentation occurs. Specifically, presentation mode A is configured to function as a mode in which the hold preview presentation is likely to be executed and makes it easy to enjoy the presentation, while presentation mode B is configured to function as a mode in which the hold preview presentation is unlikely to be executed but has a high chance of resulting in a jackpot when it is executed.

<Rendering mode switching process>
The rendering mode switching process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 92. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42.

First, in step Sa7101, it is determined whether it is time to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes. In this modified example, the period in which a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state in which a presentation spanning multiple game rounds, such as continuous presentations, is not being performed) is defined as the effective period for switching presentation modes, and during this effective period, a lottery to switch presentation modes is held at a predetermined timing in each game round (for example, the start of a game round). In this step, it is determined whether it is time to hold the lottery. If it is not time to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes, the presentation mode switching process is terminated to maintain the current presentation mode.

If it is time to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes, proceed to step Sa7102 and execute a first mode switching lottery to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes. In this step, the lottery is executed based on the lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table used to draw whether or not to switch presentation modes. Note that this table may have a common winning probability regardless of the type of presentation mode currently in use, or the winning probability may vary depending on the presentation mode currently in use.

In step Sa7103, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step Sa7102 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a losing result, the presentation mode switching process is terminated to maintain the current presentation mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, proceed to step Sa7104 and execute mode switching determination processing. The mode switching determination processing determines whether or not switching of the presentation mode is permitted. The mode switching determination processing of step Sa7104 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 93.

First, in step Sa7201, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the current number of pending items. In step Sa7202, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step Sa7201 is 0. If the number of pending items is 0, in step Sa7203 it is determined that switching of the presentation mode is permitted, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated.

If the number of reserved images is not 0, the current display mode of each reserved image is determined in step Sa7204. In the following step Sa7205, based on the determination result of step Sa7204, it is determined whether there are any reserved images displayed in a specific display mode (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe). If there are no reserved images in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa7203, where it is determined that switching of the presentation mode is permitted.

If a hold image of a specific display mode is present, step Sa7206 determines whether the current mode switch is a switch from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. In other words, it determines whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a higher frequency of occurrence of hold preview effects to a presentation mode with a lower frequency of occurrence (in other words, whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a lower probability of jackpot for hold preview effects to a presentation mode with a higher probability of occurrence).

If the switch to presentation mode B is desired, proceed to step Sa7207, where a determination is made as to whether the pre-read result for the reserved information of the reserved image displayed in a specific display mode is a jackpot result. If the pre-read result is not a jackpot result, a determination is made in step Sa7208 that the presentation mode switch is not permitted, and then the mode switch determination process is terminated. Generally, in a win/loss determination, the probability of a miss is far higher than the probability of a win (jackpot probability), and most reserved pre-read results are misses. Therefore, the majority of determinations in step Sa7207 above will be negative, and the presentation mode switch will not be permitted. In other words, if the switch to presentation mode B is desired and a reserved image in a specific display mode is present, the presentation mode switch is generally not permitted and is restricted.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa7207 above (if the pre-read result is a jackpot result), proceed to step Sa7209, where a second mode switching lottery is executed to re-draw the mode switching. In this step, the lottery is executed based on the lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. Like the first mode switching lottery table, the second mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to switch the presentation mode. The winning probability in the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as or different from the winning probability in the first mode switching lottery table.

In step Sa7210, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step Sa7209 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a losing result, it proceeds to step Sa7208 and determines that switching of the presentation mode is not permitted.

If the lottery result is a winning result, proceed to step Sa7203 and determine that switching of the presentation mode is permitted. In other words, in some cases where the pre-read result is a jackpot result, switching of the presentation mode is permitted as an exception, even if a reserved image of a specific display mode is displayed.

As already explained, if there is a reserved image in a specific display format but no advance readout of a jackpot is present, switching of presentation modes is not permitted. Also, even if there is an advance readout of a jackpot, if the player loses the second mode switching lottery, switching of presentation modes is not permitted. In other words, since it is a rare case that switching of presentation modes is permitted when there is an advance readout of a jackpot image in a specific display format, the player will perceive this as a violation of the rules, and the presentation will confirm a jackpot.

If the judgment in step Sa7206 above is negative (switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A), that is, switching from a presentation mode with a lower frequency of occurrence of the hold preview presentation to a presentation mode with a higher frequency (in other words, switching from a presentation mode with a higher expected jackpot probability for the hold preview presentation to a presentation mode with a lower expected jackpot probability), then in step Sa7211 it is determined whether the display mode of the hold image displayed in a specific display mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined mode (for example, green display mode HMc).

If the display mode is lower than the predetermined mode (for example, blue display mode HMb), proceed to step Sa7203 and determine that the presentation mode switch is permitted. In other words, when switching to presentation mode A, even if a hold image in a specific display mode is displayed, the presentation mode switch is permitted as long as the display mode is lower than the predetermined mode. In this case, the presentation mode switch is performed while maintaining the specific display mode of the hold image. Note that if the form of the hold image changes depending on the presentation mode, the form is changed and the display color is set to the same color as before the mode switch.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa7211 (if the display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode), step Sa7207 determines whether the result of the advance read of the reserved information for the reserved image whose display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode is a jackpot result. Then, steps Sa7208 to Sa7210 are executed, and switching of the presentation mode is permitted on the condition that the second mode switching lottery has been won.

Returning to the explanation of the rendering mode switching process (Figure 92), after executing the mode switching determination process of step Sa7104, step Sa7105 determines whether the result of the determination process of step Sa7104 is to allow mode switching. If the result is that mode switching is not allowed, the rendering mode switching process is terminated as is to maintain the current rendering mode.

If the result indicates that mode switching is permitted, proceed to step Sa7106 and execute a switching process to switch the presentation mode. For example, if the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B. The presentation mode may be switched at the start of a game round, or during a game round.

In step Sa7107, the presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

In this modified example, the second execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1702 in the shift command response process (Figure 40), the third execution process in step Sa1808 in the special chart change display process (Figure 41), and any associated processes are not executed.

<Regarding the restrictions on switching between performance modes>
The restriction on switching between presentation modes will be described with reference to Fig. 94. First, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described with reference to Fig. 94(a).

When the time comes to switch presentation modes, if there are no pending items, or if there are pending items but no pending image in a specific display format, switching presentation modes is permitted.

When a reserved image with a specific display mode is present, switching of presentation modes is generally not permitted. In other words, when switching from presentation mode A, which has a relatively high occurrence frequency of reserved preview presentations (a presentation mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot in the reserved preview presentation is relatively low), to presentation mode B, which has a relatively low occurrence frequency (a presentation mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot in the reserved preview presentation is relatively high), switching of presentation modes is restricted, provided that a reserved image with a specific display mode is present.

However, even if there are pending images in a specific display mode, if one of them contains a jackpot result that has been predicted in advance, then exceptionally, a change in presentation mode is permitted. In this case, as already explained, a presentation inconsistency will occur and a jackpot will be confirmed. Furthermore, if there is pending information in which a jackpot result has been predicted in advance and the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, then a change in presentation mode is permitted, as it is assumed that there are no pending images in a specific display mode.

Next, we will explain how to switch from presentation mode B to presentation mode A with reference to Figure 94 (b).

When the time comes to switch presentation modes and there are no pending items, or if there are pending items but no pending image in a specific display format, switching presentation modes is permitted, just as when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B.

When a hold image in a specific display mode is present, whether or not mode switching is permitted depends on that display mode. Specifically, if the display mode of the hold image displayed in a specific display mode is a display mode lower than the specified display mode (blue display mode HMb), switching of the presentation mode is permitted. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a relatively low frequency of occurrence of hold preview presentations (a presentation mode in which the hold preview presentation has a relatively high jackpot expectation), to presentation mode A, which has a relatively high frequency of occurrence of hold preview presentations (a presentation mode in which the hold preview presentation has a relatively low jackpot expectation), switching restrictions are relaxed compared to the reverse. In this case, the display mode for the hold image is not changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the specific display mode prior to the mode switch is maintained.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the reserved image is equal to or greater than the predetermined display mode, switching of the presentation mode is not permitted unless a jackpot result has been predicted in advance. In other words, if the reserved preview presentation is informing the player of a certain degree of expectation, switching of the presentation mode is restricted.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When a hold preview effect is being performed in which the display mode of the hold image is a specific display mode, the change of effect mode is restricted.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the results of the hold preview process, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation of a jackpot result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, mode switching between presentation mode A and presentation mode B allows the player to change their mood during play and prevents them from becoming bored with the game. In this configuration, for example, if the presentation mode is switched while a hold preview effect is being executed, there is a concern that the player may be distracted by the change in presentation mode and pay less attention to the hold preview effect, or conversely, if the player is concentrating on the hold preview effect, the presentation mode may change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, this configuration restricts the switching of presentation modes when a hold preview presentation is being executed, thereby preventing the execution of the hold preview presentation and the switching of presentation modes from overlapping. This allows the execution of the hold preview presentation and the switching of presentation modes to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for players to notice, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation mode after the switch is not suitable for the currently executing hold preview presentation, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation. However, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden on the design team.

The likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

With this configuration, switching presentation modes changes the presentation characteristics related to the likelihood of winning, making it possible to leave a stronger impression on the player of the difference in presentation modes than when only appearance changes are made, such as by changing the background image or character image. However, on the other hand, switching presentation modes while the hold preview presentation is still running could result in the likelihood of the likelihood suggested by the hold preview presentation differing before and after the presentation mode switch. In this case, there is a concern that the likelihood suggested by the hold preview presentation in the switched presentation mode will differ from the actual result of the win/loss judgment, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying this modified example (a configuration that restricts switching of presentation modes when the hold preview presentation is running) to such a configuration, the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, making it possible to effectively prevent the player from feeling unpleasant.

Effect mode B is a mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than effect mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to effect mode B when the hold notice effect is being executed in effect mode A.

If the likelihood of a hold preview effect being executed in presentation mode B is lower than that in presentation mode A, there is a concern that switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold preview effect is still being executed will increase the apparent level of expectation, giving the player a higher level of expectation than actually exists. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from presentation mode A, in which the hold preview effect is more likely to be executed (the expectation corresponding to the hold preview effect is relatively low), to presentation mode B, in which the hold preview effect is less likely to be executed (the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the switch is restricted if the hold preview effect is being executed, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent a higher level of expectation than actually exists being suggested.

When a hold preview effect is being performed in effect mode A, switching to effect mode B is generally restricted, but if the hold preview effect and the result of the hold advance reading that triggered it are a jackpot result, switching to effect mode B is allowed as an exception.

In this case, even though the presentation mode would not normally be switched, the switch occurs, which breaks the rules from the player's perspective and can suggest a jackpot. In other words, the switch in presentation mode can be used as one of the effects to suggest the level of expectation.

If the conditions for switching to presentation mode A are met while a hold notice presentation is being performed in presentation mode B, whether or not to restrict switching to presentation mode A will depend on the type of specific display mode when the switching conditions are met.

If the system were configured to uniformly restrict the switching of presentation modes when a hold preview presentation is being executed, there is a risk that switching of presentation modes would be excessively restricted or that the frequency with which hold preview presentations are executed would be reduced, which could undermine the significance of providing multiple presentation modes and the significance of having a function to execute hold preview presentations. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from presentation mode B, which corresponds to a high expectation level corresponding to the hold preview presentation, to presentation mode A, which corresponds to a low expectation level corresponding to the hold preview presentation, the mode switching restrictions are relaxed and switching is permitted provided that the specific display mode when the switching condition is met is equal to or less than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). This prevents excessive restrictions on switching presentation modes and the execution of hold preview presentations, making it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted when the effect mode is switched. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 95 to 99. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and their description will be omitted.

In this modified example, a switching guidance notification is issued during the valid switching period for the presentation mode, and if the player operates the presentation operation unit 36 while this notification is being issued, the presentation mode will be switched from the next game. Here, we will explain an example of such mode switching.

As shown in Figure 95(a), during a given game round during the valid period for switching presentation modes, a switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 as a switching guide notification. This switching guide image 451 is displayed for a given period (for example, the period until the end of that game round).

Figure 95(a) shows an example of the display of the switching guide image 451, in which a caption such as "Press the effect button to switch the effect mode" is displayed above the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Note that the switching guide notification is not limited to this, and may instead be a window displaying the above text, or a specific light-emitting element corresponding to the switching guide being illuminated. Furthermore, the notification is not necessarily limited to a visual notification, and may also be an audio notification using the speaker unit 29.

In this state, if the player performs a specified operation using the presentation operation unit 36, a switch standby notification will be issued. The switch standby notification notifies the player that a switch of presentation modes is being held up. The specific form of the switch standby notification is not particularly limited, but one possible example is to display a switch standby image 452 on the display screen G, displaying text such as "Preparing for mode change," as shown in Figure 95(b).

When the game round in which the switch standby image 452 is displayed ends and the game moves to the next round, the switch standby image 452 disappears and the presentation mode changes, as shown in Figure 95 (c).

Furthermore, if the player does not operate the presentation operation unit 36 during the display period of the switching guide image 451 in Figure 95 (a), the presentation mode will not be switched and the current presentation mode will be maintained even when moving on to the next game round.

The presentation modes include presentation mode A and presentation mode B, which, like the first embodiment, differ in the frequency with which the hold preview effect occurs. Specifically, presentation mode A is configured to function as a mode in which the hold preview effect is more likely to be executed and makes it easier to enjoy the effect, while presentation mode B is configured to function as a mode in which the hold preview effect is less likely to be executed but has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot when it is executed.

<Rendering mode switching process>
The rendering mode switching process according to this modification will be described with reference to Fig. 96. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42.

First, in step Sa8101, it is determined whether or not the display mode is currently in an effective period for switching. In this modified example, as in modified example 7 above, the effective period for switching the display mode is set to a period during which a predetermined state is in effect (for example, a state in which normal gameplay is in effect and no effects spanning multiple game rounds, such as continuous effects, are being performed). If the effective period for switching the display mode is not in effect, the display mode switching process is terminated to maintain the current display mode.

If the effect mode switching period is valid, proceed to step Sa8102 and determine whether a switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The switching standby flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that a mode switch is in a standby state, in other words, that the effect mode will be switched later.

If the switch standby flag is not stored, i.e., if the mode is not in standby mode for switching, proceed to step Sa8103 and determine whether a guidance display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The guidance notification flag allows the MPU 342 to know that a switch guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, i.e., if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, proceed to step Sa8104 and determine whether it is time to execute the lottery for executing the switching guidance notification. The lottery for executing the switching guidance notification is a process of drawing lots to determine whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. The timing of the lottery for the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, but in this modified example, the start timing of a game round is set as the above lottery timing. If it is not time to draw lots, the presentation mode switching process ends.

If it is time to draw, proceed to step Sa8105, where a lottery is held to determine whether to issue a switching guidance notification. In this step, the lottery is held based on the lottery counter (random number) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the switching guidance lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. In step Sa8106, it is determined whether the lottery result of step Sa8105 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the presentation mode switching process is terminated so that the switching guidance notification will not be issued.

If the lottery result is a winning result, proceed to step Sa8107, where the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching guide image 451 as a switching guide notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching guide image 451 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, the switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. In step Sa8108, a guide notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa8103 (if the guidance notification flag is stored), i.e., if a switching guidance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8109, where it is determined whether a predetermined operation for switching the presentation mode has been performed on the presentation operation unit 36. If a predetermined operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step Sa8110, where the guidance notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is cleared.

In step Sa8111, a switch standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. This causes the system to transition to a mode switch standby state. In step Sa8112, the display control device 350 is controlled to display a switch standby image 452 as a switch standby notification. Specifically, a command to display the switch standby image 452 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. This causes the switch standby image 452 to be displayed on the display screen G. After step Sa8112 is executed, the performance mode switching process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa8109 (the specified operation has not been performed), the process proceeds to step Sa8113, where it is determined whether the display period of the switching guide image 451 (the notification period for the switching guide notification) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the presentation mode switching process is terminated so that the display of the switching guide image 451 continues.

If the display period has elapsed, proceed to step Sa8114 and clear the notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d. This ends the period for accepting the presentation mode switching operation. Also, in step Sa8114, the display control device 350 is controlled to clear the switching guide image 451. After step Sa8114 is executed, the presentation mode switching process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa8102 above (if the switching standby flag is stored), that is, if the game is in a standby state for mode switching, the program proceeds to step Sa8115, where it is determined whether it is time to switch modes. The timing for switching presentation modes is not particularly limited as long as it occurs after the game has transitioned to a standby state, but in this modified example, the start of the next game session that is performed after the game session in which the switching operation was performed ends is set as the switching timing. If it is not time to switch, the presentation mode switching process is terminated to continue the standby state for mode switching.

If it is time to switch, proceed to step Sa8116 and clear the switch standby flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d. This ends the mode switch standby state. In step Sa8117, a switching process is executed to switch the presentation mode. For example, if the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B.

In step Sa8118, the presentation mode flag corresponding to the presentation mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In step Sa8119, the second setting process for the hold notice is executed, and then the presentation mode switching process is terminated. The second setting process for the hold notice is used to set the execution of the hold notice presentation for hold information that occurs during the waiting period for mode switching. Details of this setting process will be described later.

<Pending command response processing>
The hold command response processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 97. This processing is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step Sa1302 of the performance setting processing (Fig. 30)), and is executed in place of the hold command response processing of Fig. 31. In Fig. 97, processing that is the same as that in Fig. 31 is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sa8201, where it is determined whether a switch standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If the switch standby flag is not stored, i.e., if the game is not in a standby state for mode switching, the process proceeds to step Sa1403, where the hold notification setting process (Figure 34) is executed. In the hold notification setting process, settings are made to execute the hold notification performance for the generated hold information.

If the switch standby flag is stored (the game is in a standby state for mode switching), proceed to step Sa8202, and set the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the generated hold information to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, in this modified example, if new hold information occurs during the standby period for mode switching, the execution of the hold notification effect triggered by that hold information is restricted.

Note that, like other hold information, the hold information is read ahead by the hold read-ahead process (Figure 26) of the main control unit 162. Therefore, the performance control unit 143 does not execute the hold notice setting process of step Sa1403, and forces the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa, but the read-ahead results, such as the fluctuation pattern, are still in the state obtained by the hold command from the main control unit 162.

In step Sa8203, standby-generated information indicating that the hold information occurred during the standby period is stored in correspondence with the hold information that occurred. This process is performed, for example, by storing the standby-generated information in areas 1 to 4 (Figure 32) provided in the hold memory area 344c of RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (Figure 40) is performed, the standby-generated information is shifted to the lower area along with the hold information (variation pattern information, etc.). This makes it possible to determine which hold image occurred during the standby period, even when the shift process is performed and the display area of the hold image is shifted. Note that the standby-generated information may be stored in a memory area other than the hold memory area 344c of RAM 344, as long as it is possible to identify which hold information is the target.

After step Sa8203 is executed, step Sa1405 executes processing to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of display screen G. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa8202, hold images for hold information generated during the waiting period are displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for the hold notice in step Sa8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 98. The second setting process for the hold notice is to set the execution of the hold notice performance for the hold information that occurs during the waiting period for mode switching.

First, in step Sa8301, the system identifies any pending information that occurred during the standby period for mode switching. That is, based on the information generated during standby, it determines which of the pending information currently existing is pending information that occurred during the standby period.

After executing the processing of step Sa8301, the processing of steps Sa8302 and subsequent steps is executed for the pending calls that occurred during the identified waiting period. Note that since much of the processing of step Sa8302 and subsequent steps is similar to the processing in the pending notification setting processing (Figure 34), the explanation of the common processing will be simplified and the different processing will be explained in detail.

In steps Sa8302 to Sa8304, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern of pending occurrences during the standby period and to determine whether a jackpot has been won. In step Sa8305, the presentation mode after the switch is determined. For example, if the current mode switch is from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, presentation mode B is determined as the presentation mode after the switch.

In steps Sa8306 to Sa8308, a hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the post-switch presentation mode identified in step Sa8305 is obtained, and a lottery is held to execute the hold notice presentation. If the execution lottery is won, steps Sa8309 to Sa8314 determine the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice presentation and the presentation scenario. At that time, if different tables are set for each presentation mode as the final display mode lottery table for selecting the final display mode and the presentation scenario lottery table for selecting the presentation scenario, the table corresponding to the post-switch presentation mode identified in step Sa8305 is obtained and the lottery is held.

In this way, in this modified example, for hold information that occurs during the standby period for mode switching, a hold notice effect is set (display mode setting process based on the results of advance reading) when the standby state is released. At this time, although the hold that occurred during the standby period occurred during the presentation mode before the switch, the lottery for executing the hold notice effect and the lottery for the final display mode are performed according to the conditions set for the presentation mode after the switch, and are carried out in accordance with the presentation mode after the switch.

In step Sa8315, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this way, the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command response process (Figure 38(a)) and the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807 in the special chart change display process (Figure 41) are performed to change the display mode of the hold notice image to a specific display mode. In other words, the hold notice presentation for hold information that occurs during the waiting period for mode switching is performed after the presentation mode is switched.

<Display mode of the hold image when the performance mode is switched>
The display mode of the hold image when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Figures 95 and 99. Here, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described as an example.

If the execution lottery for the switching guide notification is won during the valid switching period of the mode switch, a switching guide image 451 will be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, as shown in Figure 95(a). In this state, if the player performs a mode switch operation using the performance operation unit 36, the game will enter a standby state for mode switch (a state in which the player is aware that a mode switch will occur later), and a switching standby image 452 will be displayed on the display screen G, as shown in Figure 99(a). The standby state for mode switch will end when the mode switch timing arrives (the start timing of the next game round).

If two new hold information items occur during the standby period, the main control unit 162 executes the hold pre-reading process (step Sa305) in the same way as for hold information items that occur outside the standby period, and pre-reads the fluctuation patterns, etc., for each of the hold information items. Furthermore, the performance control unit 143 does not execute the hold notice setting process (step Sa1403) for each of the hold information items, but instead sets the display mode of the corresponding hold images HW1, HW2 to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in Figure 99 (b), the hold images HW1 and HW2 are displayed in the normal display mode HMa in the second unit hold display area Ga2 and the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga. The state in which the display mode of the hold images HW1 and HW2 is the normal display mode HMa continues at least until the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing occurs as the next game round begins, the mode switching standby state ends, and the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, as shown in Figure 99 (c). At this time, the presentation control device 143 executes the second setting process for the hold notice (step Sa8119) for the hold information (hold images HW1, HW2) that occurred during the standby period.

The second setting process for hold notices involves various lotteries (lottery for executing the hold notice effect, lottery for the final display mode, lottery for the effect scenario, etc.) to execute the hold notice effect, based on the results of the hold pre-read process executed when the hold information was acquired. These lotteries use a lottery table set for effect mode B, which is the effect mode after switching.

If the result of the second setting process for hold notice is that the hold notice effect will not be executed for the hold image HW1, and the hold image HW2 will be changed to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, then as shown in Figure 99 (d), when the hold image HW2 is shifted from the second unit hold display area Ga2 to the first unit hold display area Ga1, its display mode will be changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. In other words, the hold notice effect triggered by the hold information that occurred during the waiting period for the mode switch will be executed after the mode switch.

In some cases, if the switch notification lottery is won while the hold notification effect is being executed, the switch notification image 451 (Figure 95(a)) may be displayed while the hold notification effect is being executed. In this case, the hold notification effect is not subject to execution restrictions, and the game will transition to standby mode with the hold notification effect continuing.

In addition, hold information may occur between the time the switching guide image 451 is displayed and the time the switching operation is performed (before the transition to standby mode), and this hold information may trigger the execution of a hold notification effect. In other words, the transition to standby mode may occur with the hold image for the hold information obtained after the switching guide image 451 is displayed in a specific display mode. In this case, the hold notification effect is not subject to execution restrictions, and the transition to standby mode occurs with the hold notification effect continuing.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the conditions for switching the presentation mode are met, the game transitions to a standby state, and then switches presentation modes when the timing for switching arrives. While in standby mode, the game is configured to restrict the execution of a hold preview presentation in which the display mode of the hold image is in a specific display mode.

In this modified example, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the results of the hold preview process, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation of a jackpot result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, mode switching between presentation mode A and presentation mode B allows the player to change their mood during play and prevents them from becoming bored with the game. In this configuration, for example, if the presentation mode is switched while a hold preview effect is being executed, there is a concern that the player may be distracted by the change in presentation mode and pay less attention to the hold preview effect, or conversely, if the player is concentrating on the hold preview effect, the presentation mode may change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, when it is known that the presentation mode will switch later (standby state for mode switching), the execution of the hold notification presentation is restricted, thereby preventing the presentation mode from switching while the hold notification presentation is being executed. This allows the execution of the hold notification presentation and the presentation mode switch to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for players to notice, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation mode after the switch is not suitable for the currently executing hold notification presentation, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation; however, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden on the design process.

The system is designed to restrict the execution of hold notification effects based on hold information obtained during standby mode.

The above configuration broadens the range of special conditions that are subject to restrictions on the hold preview effect, preventing excessive restrictions on the execution of the hold preview effect. In particular, if the execution of hold preview effects is restricted for hold information acquired between the display of the switch guide image 451 and the transition to standby mode, the execution of hold preview effects will be restricted even for hold information acquired in situations where it is uncertain whether the presentation mode will actually be switched. In this case, if the player does not perform the switch operation and the presentation mode is not switched, the execution of hold preview effects will be restricted for hold information that did not need to be restricted. However, this configuration makes it possible to prevent such unnecessary restrictions.

The system is designed to restrict the execution of the hold preview effect regardless of the results of the hold pre-read process.

With the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the hold preview effect regardless of the results of the hold preview processing. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the effect mode from switching while the hold preview effect is being executed. Furthermore, because the execution restriction on the hold preview effect is not affected by the results of the hold preview processing, the hold preview processing can proceed in the same way as when the device is not in a standby state (during the hold preview effect restriction period). In other words, because there is no need to change the configuration of the hold preview processing, it is possible to restrict the execution of the hold preview effect while the configuration is not made too complicated.

The likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

With this configuration, switching presentation modes changes the presentation characteristics related to the likelihood of winning, making it possible to leave a stronger impression on the player than when only appearance changes occur, such as by changing the background image or character image. However, on the other hand, switching presentation modes while the hold preview presentation is still running could result in the likelihood of the likelihood suggested by the hold preview presentation differing before and after the presentation mode change. In this case, there is a concern that the likelihood suggested by the hold preview presentation in the switched presentation mode will differ from the actual result of the win/loss judgment, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying this modified example (a configuration that restricts the execution of the hold preview presentation when the device is in standby mode, preparing to switch presentation modes), the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, making it possible to effectively prevent the player from feeling an unpleasant impression.

Effect mode B is a mode in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed than effect mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to effect mode B when the hold notice effect is being executed in effect mode A.

If the likelihood of a hold preview effect being executed in presentation mode B is lower than that in presentation mode A, switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold preview effect is still being executed raises concerns that this will increase the apparent level of expectation, giving the player a higher level of expectation than actually exists. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from presentation mode A, in which the hold preview effect is more likely to be executed (the expectation corresponding to the hold preview effect is relatively low), to presentation mode B, in which the hold preview effect is less likely to be executed (the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the hold preview effect is restricted if preparations are underway to switch to that mode. This prevents switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold preview effect is being executed, making it possible to effectively prevent the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than actually exists.

The system is configured so that the hold notification effect corresponding to the hold information acquired during standby mode is executed after the effect mode is switched. This prevents the execution of the hold notification effect for hold information acquired during standby mode from remaining restricted, preventing the possibility of the expectation level being indicated.

In the above case, the hold notification effect after the mode switch is configured to be executed based on the results of the hold pre-read process performed during standby mode (hold pre-read process when hold information is acquired). In this case, the hold notification effect corresponding to the hold information acquired during standby mode can be executed without having to execute the hold pre-read process again after the display mode is switched. This allows the existing configuration for the hold pre-read process of the main control unit 162 to be used as is, preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

The system is configured to hold a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a hold notification effect after switching presentation modes based on hold information acquired during standby, and then apply the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) for the execution lottery that correspond to the presentation mode after the switch.

In the above configuration, when a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a hold notification effect after switching presentation modes, the lottery conditions applied are those set in accordance with the presentation mode after the switch, rather than the lottery conditions at the time the target hold information was acquired (lottery conditions set in accordance with the presentation mode before the switch). This makes it possible to execute a hold notification effect in accordance with the presentation mode after the switch, even if the hold information was acquired during standby mode (before the presentation mode was switched).

When hold information is acquired during standby, standby occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during standby is stored in the hold storage area 344c of RAM 344.

With the above configuration, it is possible to determine after the standby state that the hold information was acquired during the standby state based on the hold information generated during standby stored in the hold memory area 344c of RAM 344. Therefore, even if there is a mixture of hold information acquired before the standby state and hold information acquired during the standby state after the standby state ends, it is possible to easily identify the hold information acquired during the standby state. This makes it possible, when executing a hold notification performance after switching modes, to distinguish between hold information acquired during the standby state and hold information that was not, and to process only the hold information acquired during the standby state.

<Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described first embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the first embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following to the first embodiment and each modified example. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the first embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each of the configurations to be combined is ensured.

(1) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but this may be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(2) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but this may not be the case. Furthermore, the pending information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized over the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 in determining whether a win has occurred, but this relationship may be reversed, or the winning/losing determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(3) In the first embodiment and each modified example described above, only game balls flowing down the right route are configured to be able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63. However, it is also possible to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down the left route are able to pass through or win, or so that game balls can pass through or win from either the right or left route. However, to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right and left routes are able to win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right and left routes are able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(4) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, a hold image was displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 to notify the player of the number of holds, but the hold image may also be displayed on a display unit separate from the symbol display device 75, or hold lamp units (light-emitting units) provided in a number corresponding to the maximum number of memories may be illuminated to notify the number of holds based on the number of illuminated hold lamp units. When the hold lamp units are illuminated, a hold notice can be produced by changing the light-emitting mode (e.g., light color) to a specific light-emitting mode different from the normal light-emitting mode based on the results of the hold look-ahead processing.

(5) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the configuration is such that the transition to jackpot play (open/close execution mode) occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot result. However, as in a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the configuration may also be such that the transition to jackpot play occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit result and the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during small hit play (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a miss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award determination is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, in this invention, "a bonus can be awarded to the player based on the award-compatible result being achieved" and "the player is transitioned to a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the award-compatible result being achieved" can be interpreted as including, as mentioned above, the case where the result of the win/loss determination is a small win result and transitions to a big win game via a V win.

(6) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a hold preview effect was executed as a specific notification, in which the display mode of the hold image was set to a specific display mode. However, instead of a hold preview effect using a hold image, the configuration of each of the first embodiment and each of the modified examples may be applied to a game round effect (so-called continuous preview effect or look-ahead zone effect) that is executed over multiple game rounds based on the results of the hold look-ahead processing.

(7) In the first embodiment and each of the variants described above, a specific notification was executed across multiple game rounds. However, the specific notification does not necessarily have to span multiple game rounds, and may be executed within a single game round. For example, in the first embodiment described above, this is because it is expected that the presentation mode will be switched multiple times during a game round. In this case, the presentation executed within that single game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the results of the pending read-ahead processing, and may be based on the results of a win/loss determination performed at the start of that game round.

(8) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variably displayed patterns on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll left and right, but the patterns may be displayed in a line on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction and scrolling direction of the patterns are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more.

(9) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, an execution display area D was provided to notify the player that a reserved game has been played, but the configuration may not include an execution display area D.

(10) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a hold notification effect is executed, the effect scenario is set to include the notification period in the execution display area D. However, the effect scenario may also be set for the period before the target hold image HW is displayed in the execution display area D (the period during which the play count of the target hold image HW is on hold).

(11) In the first embodiment and each of the variants described above, when executing a hold notice effect, the settings are made in stages, such as determining the final display mode of the hold image and then setting the effect scenario. However, a configuration in which the final display mode and effect scenario are set in a single process may also be used. For example, a configuration in which both the final display mode and effect scenario are determined using a single table may also be used.

(12) In the first embodiment and each of the variants described above, information on the fluctuation pattern is transmitted when the main control unit 162 notifies the performance control unit 143 of the results of the hold-ahead processing executed by the main control unit 162. However, to prevent the data volume of the transmission command from becoming too large, it is also possible to transmit predetermined information with a smaller data volume than the fluctuation pattern (such as an identifier corresponding to the fluctuation pattern or rank information when the fluctuation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation). This also applies to the power-recovery hold command in variant 5 of the first embodiment.

(13) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the game round presentation (presentation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, but the game round presentation may also be determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1. In this case, the main control unit 162 does not perform the reserved read-ahead process, and the presentation control unit 143 performs the reserved read-ahead process (a process of reading in advance the result of the win/loss determination and the game round presentation) based on the reserved command from the main control unit 162 (information indicating the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1).

(14) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the mode of the hold notice presentation (the display mode of the hold image) is set based on the variation pattern identified by the hold pre-reading process. However, the presentation control device 143 may be configured to predict the presentation pattern (game round presentation) based on the information on the variation pattern (variation pattern identified by the hold pre-reading process) sent from the main control device 162, and set the mode of the hold notice presentation based on the results. This configuration is particularly effective, for example, when multiple types of presentation patterns (game round presentations) correspond to one variation pattern.

(15) In the first embodiment, variants 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, and variants 5 to 8, the reserved data read-ahead process is configured to be performed by the main control device 162. However, it may also be configured to be performed by the performance control device 143 or the display control device 350. When the reserved data read-ahead process is performed by the performance control device 143, as in variant 4 of the first embodiment, information corresponding to the values (obtained random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS may be transmitted from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 may read in advance the results of the win/loss determination, the lottery results for the variation pattern, etc. Furthermore, in variant 4, at least one of the first reserved data read-ahead process and the second reserved data read-ahead process may be configured to be performed by the main control device 162.

(16) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode before being promoted to a higher-level display mode. However, the display mode may be promoted to a higher-level display mode without being restored to the original specific display mode. Furthermore, the display mode may be promoted to a higher-level display mode without being restored to the original specific display mode, and the display mode may be promoted to a higher-level display mode without being restored to the original specific display mode.

(17) In the first embodiment and variations 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be restored in stages. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a gradual restoration does not occur. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is restored to the original specific display mode with a single uniform change.

(18) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the return scenario is set to include the display period in the execution display area D. However, the return scenario may be set to include only the display period in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb (without including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the promotion process for the target reserved image HW may not be executed.

(20) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment described above, the target hold image HW is restored to its original specific display mode during the period (hold period) when it is displayed in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb, and is then promoted to a higher display mode during the play count of the target hold image HW. However, promotion does not necessarily have to wait until the play count of the target hold image HW; promotion may also be performed during the hold period. When promotion processing is performed before the start of a play count, it is advisable to refer to the results of the hold pre-read processing performed on the target hold image HW (hold information) rather than the fluctuation start command sent from the main control unit 162 at the start of the fluctuation.

(21) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, when the target reserved image HW is promoted to a higher display mode during a play count, the change start command sent from the main control device 162 at the start of the change is referenced. However, the promotion may also be performed based on the results of a reserve read-ahead process performed on the target reserved image HW (reserved information).

(22) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the presentation mode is switched by a player's operation (manually). However, as in variant 7 above, the presentation mode may be switched automatically without a player's operation.

(23) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the presentation mode is switched during a game round. However, the presentation mode may be switched via the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game). For example, the configurations of the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment may be applied to a configuration in which multiple presentation modes are set as presentation modes for a high-probability game state, and the player can select which presentation mode to play in the opening and closing execution mode immediately before that.

For example, when applying the configuration according to the first embodiment, the following configuration can be used. In presentation mode A during a high-probability game state, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to a specific display mode, and if a probability jackpot occurs in a game play with reserved information prior to the target reserved image HW, resulting in a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and if presentation mode B different from presentation mode A is selected during the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa in presentation mode B (high-probability game state) after the opening and closing execution mode. Then, if a probability jackpot occurs again in a game play with reserved information prior to the target reserved image HW, resulting in a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and presentation mode A is selected during the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the original specific display mode in presentation mode A (high-probability game state) after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, in the above configuration, the presentation mode does not necessarily have to be switched by a player's operation (manually), and the presentation mode may be switched automatically without any operation by the player.

(24) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment described above, the likelihood (probability) of the hold preview effect being executed is different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B. However, the likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed may be the same in these presentation modes.

(25) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the configuration includes two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the multiple types of presentation states. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which three or more types of presentation modes are provided. In this case, for example, in a configuration including presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed may differ among the presentation modes, such as presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, or the likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed may be the same for all presentation modes A to C. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which presentation modes with the same likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed and presentation modes with different likelihoods of execution are mixed, such as presentation mode A and presentation mode C being the same likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed, but presentation mode B being the least likely to execute the hold preview presentation.

In a configuration in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, just as when switching between different presentation modes. In other words, the configuration may not distinguish between switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution and switching between different presentation modes.

Furthermore, when switching between presentation modes that have the same likelihood of being executed, unlike when switching between different presentation modes, the display mode may not be changed to the normal display mode HMa even when the presentation mode is switched, but the specific display mode before the mode switch may be maintained. In other words, a distinction may be made between switching between presentation modes that have the same likelihood of being executed and switching between different presentation modes, and the hold notification presentation may be handled differently for both.

(26) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the hold notice effect can be executed in presentation mode B, in which the hold notice effect is unlikely to be executed. However, the hold notice effect may not be executed in presentation mode B. In other words, the "presentation state in which a specific notification is unlikely to be executed" of the present invention can be understood to include not only presentation modes in which the probability of the hold notice effect being executed is low, but also presentation modes in which the hold notice effect is not executed.

(27) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment described above, the likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B is differentiated by varying the probability of execution of the hold preview effect when the hold information corresponds to a miss. However, the likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed in these presentation modes may also be differentiated by varying the probability of execution of the hold preview effect when the hold information corresponds to a jackpot, or by varying the execution probabilities for both when the hold information corresponds to a miss and when the hold information corresponds to a hit.

(28) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment described above, when the display mode is switched during the execution of a hold notice display, the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is also changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, it is also possible to distinguish between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb and the execution display area D, and not change the hold image displayed in the execution display area D to the normal display mode HMa.

(29) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the execution of a change suggestion effect is restricted when the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored to the original specific display mode. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated effect (different from the change suggestion effect) corresponding to the restoration is executed. This configuration makes it easier for the player to distinguish between a case in which the display mode of the pending image is simply changed to a higher display mode and a case in which the pending image is restored to the original specific display mode as a result of the restoration process.

(30) In the first embodiment described above, when a transition is made from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while a hold notification effect is being executed, and then when a transition is made again to presentation mode A (when the original presentation mode in which the hold notification effect was being executed is returned to), the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode. However, for example, in a configuration having presentation modes A to C as presentation modes, if a switch is made to presentation mode B while a hold notification effect is being executed in presentation mode A, and the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then a switch is made to presentation mode C (a presentation mode different from presentation mode A) before the end of the play round of the target hold image HW, the display mode may be restored to the original specific display mode.

In the above case, it is preferable that the likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed is the same in presentation mode A and presentation mode C, or that presentation mode C is a presentation mode in which the hold preview effect is executed more easily than presentation mode A (lower expectations for the hold preview effect). However, this is not limited to these, and presentation mode C may be configured to execute the hold preview effect less easily than presentation mode A. In this case, presentation mode C may be a presentation mode in which the hold preview effect is executed more easily than presentation mode B, or a presentation mode in which it is executed less easily, or a presentation mode in which the likelihood of the hold preview effect being executed is the same as that of presentation mode B. Furthermore, presentation mode A, presentation mode B, and presentation mode C may be configured to execute the hold preview effect with the same likelihood.

(31) In the first embodiment described above, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa in both cases where there is a switch from display mode A to display mode B while a hold notice display is being executed, and where there is a switch from display mode B to display mode A while a hold notice display is being executed. However, in the latter case, i.e., when there is a switch from a display mode with high expectations corresponding to the hold notice display to a display mode with low expectations, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment described above, if the display mode switches from display mode A to display mode B while the hold notification display is being executed, and then switches back to display mode A before the end of the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notification display, the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode. However, if the display mode switches to display mode A before the start of the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notification display, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be restored to the original specific display mode. In other words, if the display mode switches to display mode A after the start of the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notification display, the display mode of the target hold image HW may not be restored to the original specific display mode.

(33) In the first embodiment described above, if the display mode switches from display mode A to display mode B while a hold notice display is being executed, and new hold information occurs while the display mode is in B, the hold notice display triggered by the hold information is not executed in display mode B. However, a lottery to execute the hold notice display may be held under conditions set in accordance with display mode B, and the hold notice display may be executed if the lottery is won.

However, if the pending image, which was in a specific display mode in presentation mode A before switching to presentation mode B, is changed to the normal display mode HMa when presentation mode B is switched to, and a pending notice presentation is performed for the pending information generated in presentation mode B, there is a concern that this may further incite the player's anxiety that the jackpot or hopes for the pending image (pending information) that was in the normal display mode HMa may have been lost. Furthermore, if presentation mode A is switched back to while a pending notice presentation that began in presentation mode B is being performed, the question arises as to how to handle the pending notice presentation, raising concerns that the overall processing may become more complicated.

In that sense, as in the first embodiment described above, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the hold preview effect for newly generated hold information while in presentation mode B (in other words, while waiting for the restoration process to restore the display mode of the target hold image HW, which was set to a specific display mode in the previous presentation mode A, to its original display mode), as in the case of the first embodiment described above. However, if the presentation mode is switched from A to B when a hold preview effect is not being executed, it is not necessary to restrict the execution of the hold preview effect triggered by newly generated hold information in presentation mode B.

(34) In the first embodiment described above, the number of pending requests including the current pending information is determined in step Sa1508, but the number of pending requests may also be determined for pending requests prior to the current pending information.

(35) In Variation 1 of the first embodiment described above, the target hold images HB1 and HB2 in the restricted state (hold images for hold information generated during the restricted state) are in the normal display mode HMa, but they may also be configured to be in a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the hold notice effect is in a restricted state; in other words, it is possible to inform the player that the display mode may change to the specific display mode when the restricted state ends.

(36) In variant 1 of the first embodiment described above, if the display mode switches from display mode A to display mode B while the hold notice display is being executed, i.e., if the hold notice display transitions to a restricted state, a notification corresponding to the restricted state but different from the hold image (for example, a predetermined display indicating that the display is in a restricted state) may be displayed.

(37) In Variant 1 of the first embodiment described above, the display of hold images may be disabled during the restricted state. More specifically, the display of not only hold image HA in a specific display mode in presentation mode A and hold images HB1 and HB2 of hold information generated in presentation mode B, but also all hold images, including other hold images, may be disabled.

In this case, to prevent the player from losing track of the number of reserved balls, the number of reserved balls may be notified by a separate display such as a number display (a separate display of the number of reserved balls from the image for reserved balls). However, since it may be difficult for the player to understand if the display suddenly switches to the separate display, it is advisable to configure the number of reserved balls to be notified by both the image for reserved balls and a separate display such as a number display, and if the display mode switches from A to B while the reserved ball notice is being executed, only the display of the image for reserved balls in mode B is erased. In this case, it is preferable not to change the location of the separate display to prevent the player from losing track of the separate display.

(38) In the first variant of the first embodiment described above, the hold notification effect triggered by hold information generated during the restricted state is configured to be set at the end of the restricted period (step Sa2702), but it may also be set during the restricted period or after the end of the restricted period.

(39) In the first variation of the first embodiment described above, when hold information is acquired during a restricted state, hold pre-read processing is executed, and after the restricted state ends, the display mode of the target hold images HB1 and HB2 is set based on the results of the hold pre-read processing executed during the restricted state. However, a hold pre-read processing for the hold information acquired during the restricted state may be executed after the restricted state, and the display mode of the target hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restricted state may be set based on the results. In this case, the hold pre-read processing may be executed by the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. Furthermore, the hold pre-read processing may be executed or not executed when hold information is acquired during a restricted state.

(40) In the second variation of the first embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during execution of the hold notification presentation, the display mode in presentation mode B is the same as that in presentation mode A. However, in cases where the notification modes of the hold images are different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, it is not necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the display mode may be changed to one that the player can recognize as being of the same rank. For example, in presentation mode A, the order of the display modes is blue display mode HMb < green display mode HMc < red display mode HMd < rainbow display mode HMe, while in presentation mode B the order of the display modes is yellow display mode < brown display mode < purple display mode < rainbow display mode. In this case, if the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the display mode of the target hold image HW in presentation mode B may be set to the brown display mode.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine that indicates the level of expectation by changing the reserved image to a specified character image, if the character's costume, pose, expression, etc. are set to differ depending on the presentation mode, when presentation mode A is switched to presentation mode B while the target reserved image HW has been changed to a character image with costume, etc. corresponding to presentation mode A (a state in which the reserved notification presentation is being executed), in presentation mode B the target reserved image HW may be restored to the same character image as in presentation mode A, while the costume, etc. may correspond to presentation mode B.

In short, it is sufficient that the display mode of the target hold image HW in presentation mode B can be recognized by the player as being of the same level as the display mode in presentation mode A. The same applies when the display mode of the target hold image HW is promoted to a higher level display mode in presentation mode B. In other words, it is sufficient that the display mode can be recognized as a higher level display mode from the player's perspective. In the above example, the display mode of the target hold image HW would be changed to a brown display mode, and then promoted to a purple display mode.

In addition, the configuration in the first embodiment and its variant 1 above, in which the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode upon returning to the original presentation mode A; the configuration in variant 3 of the first embodiment, in which if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is the same specific display mode as before the opening and closing execution mode; the configuration in variant 4 of the first embodiment, in which if the specific display mode of the target hold image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second hold pre-read process, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is the same specific display mode as before the opening and closing execution mode; and the configuration in variant 5 of the first embodiment, in which the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is the same specific display mode as the display mode at the time of power outage, are also examples of returning the display mode of the target hold image HW to a display mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank.

(41) In the second variant of the first embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during execution of the hold notice presentation, the display mode of the target hold image HW is temporarily changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, it is also possible to configure the display mode not to be changed to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, when the determination result is that the same display mode is to be displayed in presentation mode B (a positive determination is made in step Sa3107), the display mode of the target hold image HW may be configured to be the same display mode without changing it to the normal display mode HMa (without executing the processing of step Sa3110).

(42) In the second variant of the first embodiment described above, when the determination result is that a display mode of the same rank will not be displayed in presentation mode B (when a negative determination is made in step Sa3107), the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa. However, it may also be set to a specific display mode within a range that does not exceed the actual expected level. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before switching presentation modes is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the specific display mode may be set to a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before switching presentation modes).

(43) In the above-described variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, three types of game states are provided: a normal game state, a high-probability game state, and a time-saving game state. However, the configuration may include game states other than these three, such as two types of game states: a normal game state and a high-probability game state. In other words, it is sufficient if multiple types of game states are provided.

(44) In the above-described first embodiment, variations 3 and 4 are configured to not display the pending image during the opening and closing execution mode, but a pending image may also be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the pending image during the opening and closing execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. It may also be configured to be a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, the predetermined display mode may not correspond to the expected jackpot probability, etc. of each pending information (it may not suggest the expected probability, etc.).

(45) In the above-described variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, the display of the pending image is resumed during the ending period. However, the display of the pending image may be resumed before the end of the ending period, or after the end of the ending period (for example, when the first game play begins after the end of the opening/closing execution mode).

(46) In the above-described variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. However, the display mode may be changed to the specific display target without changing to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, the display of the hold image may be resumed with the display mode of the target hold image HW set to the specific display mode.

(47) In the above-described variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, a configuration in which the game state (variation pattern table) is changed via an open/close execution mode in which multiple rounds of play are executed is exemplified as an applicable configuration, but it is also possible to apply a configuration in which the variation pattern table is changed via a small win game (open/close execution mode in which one round of play is executed). Note that the change in the variation pattern table is not limited to being triggered by the result of a win/loss determination being a win or the execution of an open/close execution mode (a game state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed), but may also be triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, such as the number of play times in which the result of a win/loss determination has been a loss reaching a predetermined number.

(48) In the above-described variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, a change in the game state triggered by the opening/closing execution mode was exemplified as a configuration in which a difference occurs in the results obtained by the lottery even when the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS are the same. However, the difference may also be triggered by an event other than the opening/closing execution mode. Such an event could be, for example, the number of game plays in which the result of the win/loss judgment is a loss reaching a predetermined number, or winning some kind of lottery. In other words, the trigger can be anything, as long as the occurrence of some event results in the difference. Furthermore, the difference is not limited to being caused by a change in the game state, but could also be caused by, for example, a change in the presentation state that does not involve a change in the jackpot probability.

(49) In the third variation of the first embodiment described above, the display mode of the pending image is stored when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated, but the timing of storing the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured to store the display mode at the time of a winning game that triggers the opening and closing execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the reserved image is configured to be gradually upgraded during the reserved game preview, there is a possibility that the display mode of the reserved image will change during the execution of a winning game. Therefore, it is preferable to store the display mode once the display mode has been finalized, in other words, once the change in the display mode is restricted. Specifically, it is preferable to store the display mode when the open/close execution mode is initiated (when the winning game ends), as in Variation 3 above.

(50) In the third variation of the first embodiment described above, the return determination and return process setting (step Sa3416) are performed during the ending period, but these processes may be performed after the opening and closing execution mode has ended. They may also be performed after the opening and closing execution mode has started and before the ending period begins.

When performing the above processes during the open/close execution mode, it is best to perform them during periods when the variable winning device 65 is closed, such as the opening period, ending period, or round interval period. When the variable winning device 65 is open during the open/close execution mode, it is expected that the processing load will be relatively high, as it will be necessary to perform processing to create a winning effect based on the occurrence of a win in the variable winning device 65. If such a period is used to perform the return determination or return processing, there is a concern that this will result in an even higher load. In this regard, by configuring the above processes to be performed during the period when the variable winning device 65 is closed, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

(51) In the third variant of the first embodiment described above, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high probability game state, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored if the result of the reserved advance read process is a normal jackpot result. However, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may also be restored if the jackpot result is predicted by the reserved advance read process, regardless of whether it is a normal jackpot result or a special jackpot result.

(52) In the fourth variant of the first embodiment described above, the main control unit 162 is configured to transmit the acquired random numbers themselves, such as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS, to the performance control unit 143. However, in order to prevent the data volume of the transmission command from becoming too large, it is also possible to transmit predetermined information (such as an identifier corresponding to the random number) with a smaller data volume than the acquired random numbers.

(53) In the fourth variation of the first embodiment described above, the second reserved read-ahead process is performed at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, but it may also be configured to be performed after the opening and closing execution mode has ended. It may also be configured to be performed while the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, or before the opening and closing execution mode begins (the period from the start of a winning game round to the start of the opening and closing execution mode).

(54) In Variation 4 of the first embodiment described above, the first reserved pre-reading process and the second reserved pre-reading process are configured to pre-read a fluctuation pattern, but they may also be configured to pre-read a presentation pattern (game round presentation). This type of configuration is particularly effective when, for example, multiple types of presentation patterns (game round presentations) correspond to one fluctuation pattern.

(55) In the fourth variation of the first embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set in the upper limit display mode table in accordance with the fluctuation pattern, but the upper limit display mode may also be set in accordance with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

(56) In the fourth variant of the first embodiment described above, even if the win/loss result of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 varies between the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is configured to be a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode. However, it may also be configured not to be a specific display mode. Specifically, if the result of the first reserved advance read process is a jackpot and the result of the second reserved advance read process is a loss, it may also be configured not to be a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

(57) In the fourth variant of the first embodiment described above, the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved read-ahead process, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result of the comparison. However, the display mode may also be set based on the result of the second reserved read-ahead process without performing the above comparison (regardless of the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode).

(58) In Variation 4 of the first embodiment described above, if the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-read process, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. However, it may also be set to a specific display mode within a range that does not exceed the actual expected degree. Specifically, if the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-read process, it may also be configured to set the specific display mode to a display mode that is lower than the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode).

(59) In Variation 4 of the first embodiment described above, the second reserved game read-ahead process is executed regardless of whether the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. However, if the game states are the same, the second reserved game read-ahead process may not be executed, and the display mode of the target reserved game image HW after the opening and closing execution mode may be set based on the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode may be set to the same mode as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the display mode may be changed to the normal display mode HMa first and then to the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, or it may be displayed in the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode from the beginning.

(60) In the above-described variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, a power interruption abnormality was given as an example of a predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as a magnetic sensor abnormality or a vibration sensor abnormality may also be used. In this case, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to an abnormality that causes the game to stop, but may also cause the game to continue.

(61) In variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment described above, when the power outage abnormality is resolved and power is restored, the display of the hold image resumes with the target hold image HW in a specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa in the initial stage upon power restoration, and then changed to a specific display mode set based on the display mode before the power outage occurred or the results of the hold pre-read processing performed before the power outage.

In addition, in the initial stage after power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be set to a predetermined display target (a display mode exclusive to when power is restored, such as a purple display mode) that is different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode, and then may be changed to the display mode before the power outage occurred or the specific display mode set based on the results of the hold pre-read processing performed before the power outage. In this case, the hold image set to the predetermined display mode may be temporarily set to the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode.

(62) In Variations 5 and 6 of the first embodiment described above, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the display of the reserved images is resumed when the screen state of the pattern display device 75 is the recovery waiting screen (a screen displaying text 461 such as "The screen will return soon"). However, the display of the reserved images may not be performed in the recovery waiting screen state, and the display of the reserved images may be resumed when the screen returns (the display of the changing patterns in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 returns) (or when the screen is restored). In such a case, the display of the reserved images is resumed with the number of displayed reserved images updated (each reserved image is shifted downwards and the number of reserved images is reduced by one).

The timing of displaying the hold image may also be configured to differ depending on whether the power interruption abnormality occurs while a game round is not being played or while a game round is being played. Specifically, if the power interruption abnormality occurs while a game round is not being played, the display of the hold image may resume when the power-on screen (a screen displaying text such as "Power has been turned on") is displayed; if the power interruption abnormality occurs while a game round is being played, the hold image may not be displayed while the recovery standby screen is displayed, and the display of the hold image may resume when the screen is restored. In other words, if the power interruption abnormality occurs while a game round is not being played, the display of the hold image may resume at an earlier timing (shorter time after power supply started) than if the power interruption abnormality occurs while a game round is being played.

(63) While Variations 5 and 6 of the first embodiment above illustrate cases where a power interruption abnormality occurs during or when a game round is being played, they can also be applied to cases where a power interruption abnormality occurs during the opening and closing execution mode. In such cases, the display of the target reserved image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or the recovery waiting screen state, or the display of the reserved image may be suspended while the subsequent opening and closing execution mode is being played after power is restored, and the display of the target reserved image may be resumed in time with the start of the first game round after the opening and closing execution mode. Alternatively, the display of the reserved image may be suspended while the recovery waiting screen state is in effect, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed in time with the start of the first game round after the opening and closing execution mode. Furthermore, the display of the reserved image may be suspended while the screen is in the recovery waiting screen state, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed in time with the screen being restored.

(64) In Variations 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, the power outage monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191, but it may also be provided in the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. In this case, in Variation 5, the power outage monitoring unit 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143, or it may be provided in one of the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143, and a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 or a power outage command (a command indicating the occurrence of a power outage) from one control device may be sent to the other control device.

(65) In Modifications 5 and 6 of the first embodiment described above, the process for setting the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored (the process for restoring the hold notice in step Sa5202 and the process for setting the display mode in step Sa6204) is executed when power is restored, but it may also be executed after power is restored. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing during the period from when power is restored until the start of a play of the target hold image HW.

(66) In Variation 5 of the first embodiment described above, information indicating the display mode of the target hold image HW is backed up, and after power is restored, the display mode before the power outage is determined based on that information, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is set. In Variation 6 of the first embodiment, information indicating the look-ahead results is backed up, and after power is restored, the look-ahead results before the power outage are determined based on that information, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is set. However, the look-ahead process may be executed again after power is restored, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored may be set based on the result. In this case, the look-ahead process after power is restored may be performed by the main control unit 162 or the performance control unit 143.

In the above case, it is advisable to store change information that makes it possible to determine which hold image is in a specific display mode when multiple hold images are displayed, and to back up (store and retain) that change information even if a power outage occurs. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine which hold image was displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage after power is restored. The change information may be stored in RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or it may be stored in RAM 344 or backup RAM 345 of the performance control device 143 and backed up by the performance control device 143.

In the above cases, it is advisable to perform a pre-reading process after power is restored on pending images (pending information) that were determined to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage. In this case, even pending images that were not in a specific display mode before the power outage will be set to a specific display mode by the pre-reading process after power is restored, preventing the player from feeling unnatural. Furthermore, compared to performing pre-reading again on all pending information that exists after power is restored, the number of times the pre-reading process is executed can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load when power is restored.

Here, determining which hold images were displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage can be rephrased as determining which hold images were not displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage. Based on this determination, the display mode of hold images determined not to have been displayed in a specific display mode can be set to the normal display mode. In this case, the processing can set the display mode of hold images that were not subject to the pre-read process after power restoration to the normal display mode, or it can perform the pre-read process after power restoration on all hold images, and then for hold images determined not to have been displayed in a specific display mode, the display mode can be forcibly set to the normal display mode regardless of the results of the pre-read process.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the results of the pre-read after power is restored, the display mode may be limited to a specific display mode below a certain level (for example, the green display mode HMc or the blue display mode HMb), as in variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment.

Note that the read-ahead process after power is restored may be performed at the time of power restoration, or may be performed after power restoration, provided that it is performed before the start of a play cycle of the reserved image (reserved information) that was in a specific display mode before the power outage.

In addition, the system may be configured to not perform pre-reading processing after power is restored, and instead set the display mode of pending images that are determined to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, the blue display mode HMb).

(67) In the fifth variation of the first embodiment described above, a backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (store and retain) information related to images for reservation. However, a configuration may be adopted in which all information stored in RAM 344 is backed up without providing a backup RAM 345. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which only part of the information stored in RAM 344 (information related to images for reservation) is backed up without providing a backup RAM 345.

(68) In the fifth variation of the first embodiment described above, the power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 is transmitted to both the main control unit 162 and the performance control unit 143. However, it may be transmitted only to the main control unit 162. In such a configuration, when the power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 is input to the main control unit 162, the main control unit 162 transmits a power outage command to the performance control unit 143, and the performance control unit 143 executes power outage processing (such as the processing of steps Sa11 to Sa13) upon receiving the power outage command.

(69) In the fifth variant of the first embodiment described above, if the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc) (if a positive judgment is made in step Sa5404), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is limited to a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may also be set to the normal display mode HMa (the specific display mode may be canceled).

(70) In Variation 5 of the first embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the promotion process for the target hold image HW in the game round is executed when the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is set to a specific display mode that is lower than the specific display mode before the power outage (steps Sa5409 and Sa5601). However, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process for the target hold image HW in the game round is executed even when the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is the specific display mode before the power outage. Furthermore, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process for the game round is executed regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored.

(71) In Variation 6 of the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot result is predicted by the hold pre-read process before the power outage (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa6302), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the display mode is more likely to be set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when a jackpot result is predicted by the hold pre-read process before the power outage, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored may be set to the normal display mode HMa or a specific display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and the probability of the first specific display mode being set may be higher than the probability of these display modes being set.

In addition, without imposing restrictions such as the first specific display mode, the same setting process for the hold notification as before the power outage may be performed based on the grasped hold pre-read result (the result of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage), and a lottery may be performed to determine the execution of the hold notification effect and the display mode of the hold image.

These also apply when a highly anticipated losing result is predicted (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa6305).

(72) In Variation 6 of the first embodiment described above, the upper limit display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored is configured to differ depending on whether the pending read-ahead process before the power outage resulted in a jackpot or a miss, but such a distinction may not be made. Specifically, the upper limit display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored may be uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode regardless of whether the result is a win or a miss.

(73) In Variation 6 of the first embodiment described above, if the fluctuation pattern identified by the hold pre-read processing before the power outage cannot be grasped (if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6308), the hold image corresponding to that hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa and displayed. However, it is also possible to treat this as an error and not display the hold image. In this case, the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all hold images, including other hold images, may not be displayed.

(74) In Variation 6 of the first embodiment described above, if a jackpot result was predicted by the reserve pre-read process before the power outage (a positive determination in step Sa6302), the display mode of the target reserve image HW after power restoration is set to the first specific display mode. However, it may also be configured to be set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, if a specific display mode with a higher expectation level is set after power restoration based on the fact that a jackpot result was predicted before the power outage, it is expected that there will be a significant impact on the player if an inconsistency occurs between the reserve pre-read result and the win/loss determination result for the game round due to the influence of a power outage abnormality. In this regard, by temporarily setting the display mode of the reserve image after power restoration to the normal display mode HMa and then changing the display mode based on the fluctuation start command sent at the start of the game round, it is possible to safely set the display mode of the reserve image after power restoration. The same applies when a high-expectation loss result is predicted (a positive determination in step Sa6305).

(75) In Variation 6 of the first embodiment described above, the configuration is such that promotion processing is executed for the number of times the target reserved image HW is played when a jackpot result is predicted by the reserved pre-read processing before power is cut off, or when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach-miss effect of an SPSP reach-miss or greater is predicted (step Sa6304, step Sa6307). However, the configuration may also be such that promotion processing is executed for the number of times the target reserved image HW is played, even when other pre-read results are obtained (such as a reach-miss effect of an SP reach-miss). Furthermore, the configuration may also be such that promotion processing is executed for the number of times the game is played, regardless of the pre-read result.

(76) In Variation 6 of the first embodiment described above, it is also possible to back up not only information corresponding to the results of the hold preview process performed before the power outage, but also information corresponding to the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage, and to set the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored based on both of these pieces of information. For example, it is also possible to set multiple upper limits (upper limit display modes) for the specific display mode after power is restored corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and if the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage (backed up specific display mode) is lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read in the hold preview process before the power outage (backed up hold preview result), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored to the same mode as the specific display mode before the power outage.

(77) In Variation 6 of the first embodiment described above, the main control device 162 backs up information corresponding to the results of the hold pre-read processing performed before the power outage. However, the performance control device 143 or the display control device 350 may also back up the information. When backing up the information in the performance control device 143, as in Variation 5 of the first embodiment, the performance control device 143 may be equipped with a backup function, such as by providing a backup RAM, and information corresponding to the results of the hold pre-read processing sent from the main control device 162 may be stored in RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. In the event of a power outage, the information may be written to the backup RAM, and the information stored in RAM 344 may be retained even during the power outage. In this configuration, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the results of the hold pre-read processing performed before the power outage can be determined based on the information retained in the performance control device 143 (information corresponding to the results of the hold pre-read processing).

In the above case, the information corresponding to the results of the hold pre-read processing in the main control unit 162 may or may not be backed up. Incidentally, if both the main control unit 162 and the performance control unit 143 are configured to back up information corresponding to the results of the hold pre-read processing, a configuration may be further provided in which the normality of the information is determined based on the results of a comparison of the information backed up by both control units 162 and 143. Specifically, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the information corresponding to the results of the hold pre-read processing backed up by the main control unit 162 is sent to the performance control unit 143, and the performance control unit 143 compares the information it backs up (information corresponding to the results of the hold pre-read processing) with the information sent from the main control unit 162. If the results show that the two pieces of information correspond, the backed-up information is determined to be normal, recognized as valid, and used to set (restore) the hold notice display after power is restored. Conversely, if the two pieces of information do not correspond, the backed-up information is determined to be abnormal, the information is deemed invalid, and the hold notice display restoration process (setting up the hold notice display using that information) is not executed.

Here, correspondence between the information transmitted from the main control device 162 and the information backed up by the performance control device 143 means that the values of both pieces of information match, as well as cases where the information itself does not match, such as when the form of the information (e.g., value) is different between the two control devices 162 and 143, but the content of each piece of information essentially means the same.

In addition, the information comparison may be performed not only by the performance control device 143, but also by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350. If the comparison is performed by the main control device 162, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the information backed up by the performance control device 143 is sent to the main control device 162.

Furthermore, the information used to determine normality by comparing (collating) the results backed up by the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the results of the hold look-ahead process, but may be other information, such as the result of a success/failure judgment or information about the number of holds. Incidentally, if the information about the number of holds backed up by the main control device 162 does not correspond to the information about the number of holds backed up by the performance control device 143, an error may be issued as an abnormality, or alternatively or additionally, the number of holds may be reported based on the information backed up by the main control device 162 (priority is given to the information backed up by the main control device 162).

(78) In the above-described variants 7 and 8 of the first embodiment, the likelihood (probability) of the execution of the hold preview effect differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, but the likelihood of the execution of the hold preview effect may be the same in these presentation modes.

(79) In Variations 7 and 8 of the first embodiment, the hold notification effect can be executed in presentation mode B, where the hold notification effect is unlikely to be executed. However, the hold notification effect may not be executed in presentation mode B. In other words, the "presentation state where a specific notification is unlikely to be executed" of the present invention can be understood to include not only presentation modes where the probability of the hold notification effect being executed is low, but also presentation modes where the hold notification effect is not executed.

(80) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode is automatically switched without any player operation. However, the presentation mode may be switched manually by the player. In this case, it is preferable to disable the operation to switch the presentation mode while the pending notification presentation is being executed.

(81) In Variation 7 of the first embodiment described above, the configuration includes two presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as multiple presentation states. However, a configuration may also be provided with three or more presentation modes. In this case, for example, in a configuration including presentation modes A to C as three or more presentation states, the likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed may differ among the presentation modes, such that the hold preview presentation is less likely to be executed in the order of presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C. Alternatively, the likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed may be the same for all presentation modes A to C. Alternatively, a configuration may be provided in which presentation modes with the same likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed and presentation modes with different likelihoods of execution are mixed, such as presentation mode A and presentation mode C being equally likely to execute the hold preview presentation, but presentation mode B being less likely to execute the hold preview presentation.

In a configuration where presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold preview effect and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, the configuration may be such that switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution is restricted while the hold preview effect is being executed, just as when switching between different presentation modes, or the configuration may be such that switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution is permitted even while the hold preview effect is being executed.

(82) In Variation 7 of the first embodiment described above, when the timing for the switch lottery arrives (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa7101), a lottery for switching the presentation mode (first mode switch lottery in step Sa7102) is executed, and if the lottery is won, it is determined whether or not a pending preview presentation is being executed, and if it is being executed, the presentation mode switching process is not executed. However, it is also possible to configure the timing for the switch lottery arrives (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa7101) to determine whether or not a pending preview presentation is being executed, and if it is being executed, to not execute a lottery for switching the presentation mode and not execute the mode switch.

(83) In variant example 7 of the first embodiment described above, not only is switching from presentation mode A, in which a hold preview effect is likely to be executed, to presentation mode B, in which a hold preview effect is unlikely to be executed, but also switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is restricted while a hold preview effect is being executed. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted even while a hold preview effect is being executed.

(84) In variant 7 of the first embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, a determination is made as to whether the display mode of the target hold image HW on which the hold notice presentation is being executed is equal to or greater than a predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc), and whether or not to allow the presentation mode to be switched is determined based on the result of the determination. However, as in the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, a configuration may also be adopted in which switching of presentation modes is restricted if the hold notice presentation is being executed, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW.

(85) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the switching of presentation modes is restricted if the hold notice presentation is being executed, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW. However, as in the case of switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the configuration may be such that whether or not to allow the switching of presentation modes is determined based on the display mode of the target hold image HW.

In the above case, the specified display mode that serves as the standard (boundary) for whether or not to allow switching of presentation modes may be the same display mode as when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, or it may be a different display mode than when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A. If a different display mode is used, it is preferable that it be a higher-ranking display mode than when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A.

(86) In Variation 7 of the first embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted during execution of the hold notification presentation, the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW is maintained in the specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be changed to the normal display mode HMa upon switching of the presentation mode. In this case, the normal display mode HMa may be maintained until a play round of the target hold image HW is started or completed, or, as in the first embodiment and its Variations 1 and 2, the display mode may be changed to the specific display mode before a play round of the target hold image HW is started or completed.

(87) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, the configuration may be such that the switching of presentation modes is restricted based on the results of the reserved information read-ahead process. For example, if a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result or a miss result of an SPSP reach presentation or higher) is read in advance by the reserved information read-ahead process, the configuration may be such that the switching of presentation modes is restricted until the end of the game round for that reserved information.

For example, if a jackpot result or a highly anticipated miss result such as an SPSP reach effect is predicted, it is expected that a teasing effect (different from a hold preview effect using a hold image) such as a preview effect that stirs up the player's anticipation will be performed before the game round for that hold information begins. If the presentation mode is switched while this teasing effect is being performed, it may be difficult for the player to understand the teasing effect. In this case, if the configuration is such that the switching of presentation modes is restricted based on the results of the hold preview process that triggers the hold preview effect, regardless of whether the hold preview effect is being performed, it is possible to effectively prevent the presentation mode from being switched in the middle of a teasing effect. Furthermore, because the switching of presentation modes can be restricted before the execution of the hold preview effect, it is possible to prevent the switching of presentation modes and the execution of the hold preview effect from occurring simultaneously, even if the timing of the switching of presentation modes and the start of the hold preview effect overlap.

(88) In Variation 7 of the first embodiment described above, when the condition for switching the presentation mode is met while the hold preview presentation is being executed (when the timing for switching the presentation mode arrives and the first mode switching lottery is won), the presentation mode is allowed to be switched if the predicted result of the hold image (hold information) on which the hold preview presentation is being executed is a jackpot result. However, instead of or in addition to this, the presentation mode may be allowed to be switched if a predetermined miss result (for example, a miss result of an SPSP reach presentation or greater) is predicted. In other words, although the presentation mode cannot be switched as a general rule while the hold preview presentation is being executed, if the presentation mode is switched, it can be suggested that there is a high expectation for the hold information that is the subject of that hold preview presentation.

Note that the configuration that allows exceptional switching of presentation modes as described above is not essential, and in variant 7 of the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that, without referencing the results of the hold preview process, the decision as to whether or not to allow switching of presentation modes is determined based on whether or not a hold preview presentation is being executed and the type of specific display mode at that time.

(89) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, the configuration allows switching of the presentation mode on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won, but the configuration may also allow switching of the mode without going through such a lottery. In other words, if the condition for switching the presentation mode is met while the pending preview presentation is being executed and the result of the advance reading of the pending information is a jackpot result, the configuration may always allow switching of the presentation mode.

(90) In Variant 8 of the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode is switched by player operation (manually), but the presentation mode may also be switched automatically without player operation. Such a configuration could involve, for example, presetting the switching of the presentation mode based on a predetermined result being pre-read by the pending pre-reading process, and then automatically switching the presentation mode when the switching execution condition is met. Possible switching execution conditions include, for example, the start of a game round for the pending information in which the predetermined result was pre-read, or the start of a game round a predetermined number of times before the current game round.

(91) In Variation 8 of the first embodiment described above, the configuration includes two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as multiple types of presentation states. However, a configuration may also be provided with three or more types of presentation modes. In this case, for example, in a configuration including presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed may differ among the presentation modes, such as presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, or the likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed may be the same for all presentation modes A to C. Alternatively, a configuration may be provided in which presentation modes with the same likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed and presentation modes with different likelihoods of execution are mixed, such as presentation mode A and presentation mode C being the same likelihood of the hold preview presentation being executed, but presentation mode B being the least likely to execute the hold preview presentation.

In a configuration where presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice effect and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, the execution of the hold notice effect may be restricted while the presentation mode is in standby mode when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, just as when switching between different presentation modes. Alternatively, when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, the execution of the hold notice effect may be permitted even while the presentation mode is in standby mode.

(92) In Variation 8 of the first embodiment described above, the execution of a hold preview effect is uniformly restricted when the display mode is in standby mode for switching. However, the execution of a hold preview effect that displays a specific display mode above a predetermined level may also be restricted. For example, when the display mode is in standby mode for switching, the execution of a hold preview effect in which the display mode of the hold image is the blue display mode HMb may be permitted, while the execution of a hold preview effect in which the display mode of the hold image is the green display mode HMc or higher may not be permitted.

(93) In Variation 8 of the first embodiment described above, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted when the display mode is in standby for switching, regardless of the display mode to which the switch is made. However, the restriction may vary depending on the display mode to which the switch is made. For example, when switching from display mode B, in which the hold notice effect is difficult to execute, to display mode A, in which the hold notice effect is easy to execute, the execution of the hold notice effect is uniformly restricted when the display mode is in standby for switching, while when switching from display mode A to display mode B, the execution of the hold notice effect may be allowed even when the display mode is in standby for switching, or the execution of the hold notice effect in a specific display mode higher than a predetermined display mode (e.g., blue display mode HMb) may be restricted, but the execution of the hold notice effect in a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode may be allowed.

(94) In Variation 8 of the first embodiment described above, the display mode of the target hold image HW after the presentation mode is switched is set when the standby state ends, but it may also be set at a predetermined timing during the period after the standby state ends (after the presentation mode is switched) and before the start or end of a play round of the target hold image HW. When setting the display mode during a play round of the target hold image HW, the display mode may be set based on the results of the hold advance read processing of the target hold image HW, or the display mode may be set based on a change start command sent at the start of a play round of the target hold image HW.

(95) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, the execution of the hold notification effect is not restricted for hold information acquired before the display of the switching guide image 451. However, the execution of the hold notification effect may also be restricted. In other words, the execution of the hold notification effect may also be restricted not only during the standby state, but also before transitioning to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guide image 451 is displayed while the hold notification effect is being executed, the display mode of the hold image that is the target of the hold notification effect may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa at a predetermined timing during the period from when the switching guide image 451 is displayed until the effect mode is switched. Specific timings for changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa may include when the switching guide image 451 is displayed, when the standby state is entered, or when the effect mode is switched.

(96) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, the execution of the hold notification effect is not restricted for hold information acquired after the display of the switching guide image 451 and before the transition to the standby state. However, the execution of the hold notification effect may also be restricted.

In this case, the display of the switching guide image 451 (transition to the switching guide state) may be used to start a restriction on the execution of the hold notification effect prior to transition to the standby state. In other words, after the display of the switching guide image 451, the hold notification effect triggered by the hold information acquired before transitioning to the standby state may not be executed before transitioning to the standby state or while in the standby state.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a hold notification effect is temporarily executed before transitioning to standby mode, but the execution of the hold notification effect is canceled when transitioning to standby mode. Specifically, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, a hold notification effect triggered by the hold information acquired before transitioning to standby mode is executed before transitioning to standby mode, and then the display mode of the hold image that is the target of the hold notification effect is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. Note that specific timing for changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa may be the timing of transitioning to standby mode or the timing of switching effect modes.

(97) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, when hold information is acquired during a standby state, a hold pre-read process is executed, and after the standby state ends, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold pre-read process executed during the standby state. However, a hold pre-read process for the hold information acquired during the standby state may be executed after the standby state, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after the standby state may be set based on the result. In this case, the hold pre-read process may be executed by the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. Furthermore, the hold pre-read process may be executed or not executed when hold information is acquired during a standby state.

(98) In the above-described variant 8 of the first embodiment, the configuration according to variant 7 of the first embodiment may be applied, and a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the switching guidance state is restricted while the hold notification effect is being executed. Specifically, while the hold notification effect is being executed, the switching guidance lottery may not be executed even if it is time to execute the lottery, the switching guidance image 451 may not be displayed or the notification flag may not be set even if the lottery is won, or a configuration may be adopted in which it is not determined whether it is time to execute the switching guidance lottery.

(99) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

Second Embodiment
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

During play, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, set the display for the special symbol display section 43, and set the display for the regular symbol display section 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used to determine the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a special jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS which determines the variation display time for each special symbol display section AS, BS in the special symbol display section 43. Furthermore, it uses a regular symbol random number counter C3 used to perform the lottery for determining whether or not to place the regular symbol device 63a of the second operating port 63 in the support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a, which is set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special symbol reserved area Ra and a second special symbol reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of these areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history for the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first to fourth areas in the order of first area → second area → third area → fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b has a total reserved number storage area, and this total reserved number storage area stores information for specifying the number of winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

To go into more detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 2999, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314, and when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63, it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, and the random number value that results in a jackpot win is set in a win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 101, the win/lose table is set to a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes for the win/lose lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 101(a), the win/lose table for low probability mode has a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" set as jackpot values. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300.

As shown in Figure 101(b), the win/lose table for high probability mode has a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" set as jackpots. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60.

In each lottery mode, any random number value other than that which results in a jackpot will result in a losing lottery result. Note that the probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode, the number and value of the random number corresponding to the jackpot can be any number.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game results for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 102, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol are set as the jackpot type table. If a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in Figure 102(a), the jackpot type table for the first special design has the following selectable jackpot types: 4R variable probability jackpot result A, 4R variable probability jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being executed. Here, a round of play is defined as at least one execution of variable prize-winning control, which changes the variable prize-winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state and then back to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable prize-winning control is executed once per round of play.

4R Probable Jackpot Result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, high probability mode continues until the number of special game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit is reached, high probability mode ends and the lottery mode changes to low probability mode.

Furthermore, in the case of a 4R special jackpot result A, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the support mode for the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high-frequency support mode. In this case, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of special game plays executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a second upper limit (e.g., 1,100 times), which is greater than the first upper limit. When the second upper limit is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends and the support mode changes to low-frequency support mode.

In other words, if the jackpot type is a 4R probability variable jackpot result A, the game will enter a high probability mode and high frequency support state (high probability game state, probability variable game state) until the number of special chart game plays after the opening/closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and after reaching the first upper limit, the game will enter a low probability mode and high frequency support mode state (time-saving game state) until the second upper limit is reached. After reaching the second upper limit, the game will transition to a low probability mode and low frequency support state (normal game state).

Here, we will explain the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared under conditions in which game balls are continuously being fired into the game area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power lottery using the normal power lottery random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the normal power device 63a opens when the normal power lottery is won is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the duration of each opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in low-frequency support mode. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than that into the second actuation port 63, but in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than that into the first actuation port 62. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of winning the normal lottery may be the same in both modes, and the number of times the normal electric device 63a opens or the duration of each opening may be given higher priority in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winning at the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the configuration may be such that the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set by varying one or any combination of the conditions for the normal lottery, number of openings, and duration of openings.

4R Probable Variable Jackpot Result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, high probability mode continues until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). Also, with 4R Probable Variable Jackpot Result B, the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, high frequency support mode continues until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit. In other words, when the jackpot type is 4R Probable Variable Jackpot Result B, the game will enter a high probability game state until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and will transition to normal game state after the first upper limit is reached.

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, high frequency support mode continues until the number of special symbol game plays executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit (e.g., 1,000 plays). In other words, when the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result A, the game enters a time-saving game state until the number of special symbol game plays executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches the third upper limit, and then transitions to normal game state after the third upper limit is reached.

4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, high frequency support mode continues until the number of times special symbol play is executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 times), which is less than the third upper limit. In other words, when the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result B, the game enters a time-saving game state until the number of times special symbol play is executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches the fourth upper limit, and then transitions to normal game state after the fourth upper limit is reached.

In this embodiment, "0" to "1" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to 4R special jackpot result A, "2" to "49" corresponds to 4R special jackpot result B, "50" to "51" corresponds to 4R normal jackpot result A, and "52" to "99" corresponds to 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to 4R special jackpot result A is set to 2%, the probability of being assigned to 4R special jackpot result B is set to 48%, the probability of being assigned to 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 2%, and the probability of being assigned to 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 48%.

As shown in Figure 102(b), the jackpot type table for the second special chart sets 10R special jackpot result A and 10R special jackpot result B as selectable jackpot types. Each of these jackpot results in 10 rounds of play being executed.

10R Probable Jackpot Result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, high probability mode continues until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). Also, with 10R Probable Jackpot Result A, the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, high frequency support mode continues until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a second upper limit (e.g., 1,100 times). In other words, when the jackpot type is 10R Probable Jackpot Result A, the game will enter a high probability game state until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and then enter a time-saving game state until the second upper limit is reached.

10R Probable Jackpot Result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, high probability mode continues until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). Also, with 10R Probable Jackpot Result B, the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, high frequency support mode continues until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). In other words, when the jackpot type is 10R Probable Jackpot Result B, the game will enter a high probability game state until the number of special symbol gameplays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit, and will transition to normal game state after the first upper limit is reached.

In this embodiment, a value of "0" to "19" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 10R special jackpot result A, and a value of "20" to "99" corresponds to a 10R regular jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R regular jackpot result B is set to 80%.

In addition, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol does not set a normal jackpot result as a selectable jackpot type. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol win/loss lottery based on entry into the second actuation port 63, a special jackpot result will be selected with 100% probability after the open/close execution mode ends. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in a high-probability game state or a time-limited game state in which entry into the second actuation port 63 is possible, the game will always transition to the high-probability game state. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol win/loss lottery, the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode is greater than if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol win/loss lottery, and more game balls can be expected to be won. Therefore, a game in which a game ball is won through the second actuation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is won through the first actuation port 62.

In this way, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, players will play in the hope of winning through the second actuation port 63, out of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, and as a result, players will pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning through the second actuation port 63.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state that is triggered by a normal jackpot result, there is also a time-saving game state that is triggered by the cumulative number of special game plays (loss game plays) in which the win/loss lottery result is a loss (the so-called number of times you're stuck) reaching a predetermined ceiling number of times (for example, 1,000 times) (Fig. 102 (c)). Hereinafter, to distinguish between the time-saving game state that is triggered by a jackpot and the time-saving game state that is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, the former may be referred to as the first time-saving game state, and the latter as the second time-saving game state.

When counting the number of missing plays, if a jackpot occurs before the maximum number of plays is reached, the number of plays remaining until the maximum number of plays is reset to the initial value (e.g., 1,000 plays), and the number of missing plays up to that point is discarded. Furthermore, missing plays during the high probability play state are not counted. Therefore, to transition to the second time-saving play state, the number of missing plays after the end of the open/close execution mode must reach the maximum number of plays, and if transitioning to the high probability play state after the open/close execution mode, the number of missing plays after the end of the high probability play state must reach the maximum number of plays.

Because the trigger for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is a miss, transition to the second time-saving game state occurs without going through the open/close execution mode. In other words, after a special game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times has ended, it is possible to immediately play a special game round in the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state continues until the number of special game rounds executed since transitioning to the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (for example, 900 times). After the second time-saving game state ends, transition to the normal game state occurs.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS when the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple data sets for the stop results in the event of a jackpot (the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS) that correspond to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data set for the multiple stop results that corresponds to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine both the stop result and the jackpot type, so there is a correlation between the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS and the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special symbol display section AS and second special symbol display section BS of the special symbol display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313. Details of the variable display time table will be described later.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The normal winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the normal winning holding area 314c of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used in the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not a normal winning (support winning) has occurred. If the result is a support winning, the normal power device 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a device opening/closing game is performed at least once to return it to the closed state.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in the support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 103, the support lottery table includes a support lottery table for low-frequency support mode and a support lottery table for high-frequency support mode. When drawing the support lottery, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode is referenced, and if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 103(a), in the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode, the random number value for winning support is set to "7", for a total of one value. In other words, the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode is set to 1/100.

As shown in Figure 103(b), the support lottery table for high frequency support mode has a total of 99 numbers set from "0" to "98." In other words, the probability of winning support in high frequency support mode is set to 99/100, and most support lotteries result in a support win.

In each support mode, the lottery result will normally be a loss for any random number other than the value that results in a support win. Note that the probability of winning support in each support mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning support is higher in high-frequency support mode than in low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random number that results in a support win can be any number. Furthermore, a common support lottery table can be used for each support mode, so that the probability of winning support is equal in low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to progress the game by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but we will not explain these processes here.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 104. This process is initiated by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sb101, the various winning sensors are read. That is, the status of the various winning sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, and the status of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If it is determined that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Furthermore, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

In step Sb102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sb103, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sb104, a winning process for through gate 64 is executed. In the winning process for through gate 64, it is determined whether a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and if this flag is stored, the value of the normal winning random number counter C3 updated in step Sb103 is stored in the normal map holding area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role objects stored in the normal map holding area 314c is less than four. Furthermore, if a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

In step Sb105, the winning process for the operating port 62 or 63 is executed in response to a winning entry, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for operating port>
The winning process for the operating port in step Sb105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 105.

First, in step Sb201, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sb202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three gaming balls.

In step Sb203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sb204, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Then, in step Sb205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb201 (no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sb206, where it is determined whether a gaming ball has won (initial winning) in the second actuation port 63 based on the detection state of the second actuation port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that a gaming ball has won in the second actuation port 63, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sb207 to pay out one gaming ball.

In step Sb208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sb209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Then, in step Sb205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sb202 or step Sb207 above is sent to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sb205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 106.

First, in step Sb301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sb204 or step Sb209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process ends. If it is less than the upper limit, in step Sb302, 1 is added to the start pending memory count N for the corresponding special chart hold area Ra, Rb. In step Sb303, 1 is added to the value stored in the total hold count memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold count CRN).

In step Sb304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the corresponding reserved area for the special chart display section, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number increased by 1 in step Sb302.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the first special symbol holding area Ra, i.e., the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol added by 1 in step Sb302 above.

In addition, if the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the holding area Rb for the second special symbol, i.e., the holding area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol added by 1 in step Sb302 above.

In step Sb305, a display update process is executed for the special symbol reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. The special symbol reserved number display section AM is capable of displaying the reserved number for the first special symbol and the reserved number for the second special symbol separately. In the display update process of step Sb305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special symbol is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special symbol is updated.

In step Sb306, a hold command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special symbol is the starting winning symbol, information indicating the number of symbols on hold, etc. After step Sb306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 107. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and in normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sb401 to Sb408 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sb409 to Sb411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, external signal output processing is first executed in step Sb401. In the external signal output processing in step Sb401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sb402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sb403, a special symbol play control process is executed to control play during each special symbol play. The special symbol play control process performs jackpot determination and display control of the special symbol display unit 43. In step Sb404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the special symbol play control process in step Sb403 and the game state transition process in step Sb404 will be described later.

In step Sb405, a normal game play control process is executed to control play during a normal game play. The normal game play control process includes a support lottery (a normal game win/lose lottery) and display control of the normal game display unit 44. In step Sb406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal electric role device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Details of the normal game play control process in step Sb405 and the electric role support process in step Sb406 will be described later.

In step Sb407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), provided that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In step Sb408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage has not occurred), step Sb409 determines whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing, step Sb410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314.

In step Sb411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb409 (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), processing returns to step Sb401 and processing from step Sb401 onwards is executed.

In this way, after executing the processing of step Sb408, the remaining period until the timing for executing the next normal processing is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, the execution time of each processing of steps Sb401 to Sb408 changes depending on the state of the game, so the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can likewise be randomly updated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb408 (the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sb413, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Sb414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Sb415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sb416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after power is completely cut off, power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to maintain data storage in RAM 314, so the information stored in RAM 314 before power was cut off is retained in its original state for a predetermined period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special game play control processing>
The game play control processing of step Sb403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 108.

First, in step Sb501, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, step Sb502 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol. Specifically, it determines whether the fixed symbol display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The fixed symbol display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a fixed symbol.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed value, step Sb503 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable value. Specifically, it determines whether the variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a variable value.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, step Sb504 determines whether the common hold number CRN is "0." If the common hold number CRN is "0," this means that the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common hold number CRN is "0," there is no hold information to be executed, and the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserve number CRN is not "0", step Sb505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra or the second special symbol reserve area Rb for variable display, and then step Sb506 executes a variable start process to start variable display in the special symbol display unit 43, after which the game play control process is terminated.

The data setting process in step Sb505 and the fluctuation start process in step Sb506 are now explained in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 109.

First, in step Sb601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is "0." If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0," data setting processing for the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sb602 to Sb608. If the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0," data setting processing for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sb609 to Sb615.

As already explained, data setting processing is performed when the common reserve number CRN is 1 or greater. A situation in which data setting processing is performed means that at least one of the first start reserve memory number RaN and the second start reserve memory number RbN is 1 or greater. In this case, the data setting processing is configured to first determine whether the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," and then perform processing related to the reserve information for the first special symbol if the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," i.e., if there is no reserve information for the second special symbol. Therefore, if reserve information is stored in both the first special symbol reserve area Ra and the second special symbol reserve area Rb, the reserve information for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is processed first.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first in step Sb602, the first start hold memory number RaN in the first special symbol holding area Ra is decremented by 1. In step Sb603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sb604, the data stored in the first area of the first special symbol holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra. This process clears the data in the first area and sequentially moves the data in the second to fourth areas to the lower areas.

In step Sb606, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second special symbol flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If a second special symbol flag is stored, the second special symbol flag is cleared in step Sb607.

After step Sb607 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb606 (the second special symbol flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sb608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first special symbol reserved area Ra, i.e., information that it corresponds to the first actuation port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sb608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first hold display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step Sb609, the second start hold memory number RbN in the second special symbol holding area Rb is decremented by 1. In step Sb610, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sb611, the data stored in the first area of the second special symbol holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb. In step Sb613, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sb614.

After step Sb614 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information that causes the sub-control device, the performance control device 143, to recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second special symbol reserved area Rb, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second actuation port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sb615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second hold display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 110.

First, in step Sb701, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is in high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The high probability flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that high probability mode is in effect, and is set when transitioning to high probability mode.

If the mode is not high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made in step Sb702 by referring to the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 101(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win for low probability mode (for example, "0" to "9"). On the other hand, if the mode is high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made in step Sb703 by referring to the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 101(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win for high probability mode (for example, "0" to "49").

After step Sb702 or step Sb703 is executed, step Sb704 determines whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sb702 or step Sb703 indicates a jackpot win. If a jackpot win is determined, step Sb705 determines whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, step Sb706 refers to the type table for the first special symbol (Figure 102(a)) and draws for the jackpot type. Specifically, it determines whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to one of the numerical ranges: 4R special symbol result A, 4R special symbol result B, 4R regular jackpot result A, or 4R regular jackpot result B.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, in step Sb707, the type table for the second special symbol (Figure 102(b)) is referenced to draw a lottery for the jackpot type. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to the numerical range of 10R special symbol jackpot result A or 10R special symbol jackpot result B.

After step Sb706 or step Sb707 is executed, in step Sb708, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by lottery in step Sb706 or step Sb707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 4R special jackpot result A, a 4R special jackpot A flag is stored.

In step Sb709, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb704 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sb710, where a stop result for a loss is set. In this embodiment, only one stop result for a loss is provided, and that stop result is set in step Sb710.

After step Sb709 or step Sb710 is executed, step Sb711 executes a variable display time setting process to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

Here, the process for setting the variable display time will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 111.

First, in step Sb801, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined which of the high probability flag and high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and based on the result, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability game state, or the time-limited game state. The high frequency support flag is used by MPU 312 to determine that the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. If both the high probability flag and the high frequency support mode are set, it is determined to be in the high probability game state; if only the high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be in the time-limited game state; and if neither the high probability flag nor the high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be in the normal game state.

In step Sb802, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb803, where a jackpot variable display time table is obtained as a table for drawing the variable display time (variation pattern). At this time, a variable display time table corresponding to the current game state is obtained based on the results of step Sb801.

Here, we will explain the variable display time table with reference to Figures 112 and 113.

The variable display time tables include a variable display time table for the normal game state, a variable display time table for the high probability game state, and a variable display time table for the time-saving game state. Furthermore, the variable display time tables corresponding to each game state are set for both jackpots and losses.

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS is set in correspondence with fluctuation pattern information. Note that in Figures 112 and 113, fluctuation display time information is listed along with the fluctuation pattern to make it easier to understand, but the fluctuation display time information is stored in ROM 313 separately from the fluctuation display time table as time information corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 112 (a), the jackpot variable display time table corresponding to the normal game state has variable pattern 1A (15 seconds), variable pattern 2A (60 seconds), and variable pattern 3A (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the image variable display is performed in the first special symbol display section AS or the second special symbol display section BS for the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern.

Furthermore, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, it controls the display control device 350 so that the variation display of each of the above-mentioned pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the patterns on the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to game-round effects such as reach effects performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning effect, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning effect, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning effect. In other words, when the effect control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game-round effect corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects described above, after a reach-winning display is made, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, reach-winning display (reach state) refers to a display state intended to make the player believe that a variable display state is likely to result in a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of displaying (or varying) symbols (pictures), and in which, if the stopped display result after the variable display becomes a special display result (jackpot result), the gaming state becomes a special gaming state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player.

In other words, this is a display state in which symbols in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are displayed as still symbols, thereby displaying a reach symbol combination that has the potential to form a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the display of varying symbols is terminated, when the symbols in the final symbol row are displayed as varying symbols, a reach line is formed by displaying symbols in symbol rows other than the final symbol row as still symbols on an active line on the display screen G in a manner that forms a jackpot symbol combination.

A normal reach hit effect is one in which the above-mentioned reach display occurs and then symbols stop and display in the jackpot symbol combination. An SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than a normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears occurs after the reach line is formed, and after this predetermined effect, symbols stop and display in the jackpot symbol combination. An SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than an SP reach effect, in which a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect occurs and then symbols stop and display in the jackpot symbol combination.

Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 112(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in Figure 112 (b), the variable display time table for losses corresponding to the normal game state has variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 seconds), variable pattern 3H (60 seconds), and variable pattern 4H (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. Similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, a variable display time is set for each variable pattern, but the variable display time for variable pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special symbols at that time. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are two or fewer reserved symbols, the variable display time is 8 seconds, and if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are three or more reserved symbols, the variable display time is set to 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss effect on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss effect, variation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach miss effect, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to an SPSP reach miss effect.

A complete miss effect is one in which symbols are stopped and displayed in a miss combination without a reach display. Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects is one in which, after a reach display is made, the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a reach miss combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot in combination with the reach symbols). Furthermore, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach hit effect is made, symbols are stopped and displayed in a reach miss combination. Furthermore, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for losses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the win/loss lottery based on the entry into actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a loss, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed in the event of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the event of a loss, and therefore functions as the highest level reach effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to higher-ranking reach effects are more likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and less likely to be selected in the event of a miss. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

As shown in Figure 113(a), the jackpot variable display time table corresponding to the high probability game state has variable pattern 11A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit and variable pattern 12A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

Also, as shown in Figure 113 (b), the loss variable display time table corresponding to the high probability game state has variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss set as selectable variable patterns. In the loss variable display time table in the high probability game state, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete miss is wider than in the loss variable display time table in the normal game state, making it less likely that a reach effect will occur, allowing the game to proceed more quickly.

In addition, the variable display time for variable pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is shortened earlier than the variable display time table for misses in normal gameplay. Specifically, it is configured to be 8 seconds when there is one or fewer reserved items, and 4 seconds when there are two or more reserved items.

As shown in Figure 113 (c), the jackpot variable display time table corresponding to the time-saving game mode has variable pattern 21A (15 seconds) corresponding to a normal reach hit, variable pattern 22A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit, and variable pattern 23A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 113(d), the loss variable display time table corresponding to the time-saving game state has selectable variable patterns: variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 22H (15 seconds) corresponding to a normal reach miss, variable pattern 23H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 24H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss. The loss variable display time table for the time-saving game state has a lower rate of complete misses than the loss variable display time table for the normal game state. This is to increase the frequency of reach effects, thereby preventing the time-saving game state from ending without a reach effect occurring. Note that the variable display time for variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss is configured to be 8 seconds when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, and 4 seconds when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, just like the loss variable display time table for the high-probability game state.

Note that the fluctuation display time tables shown in Figures 112 and 113 are merely examples, and the number of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Figure 111), in step Sb803, for example, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the variable display time table for the jackpot in the normal gaming state shown in Figure 112 (a) is obtained.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb802 (if the result is not a jackpot), then in step Sb804, a variable display time table for a loss corresponding to the current game state is obtained as a table for drawing the variable display time. For example, if the current game state is a time-saving game state, the variable display time table for a loss in the time-saving game state shown in Figure 113 (d) is obtained.

After step Sb803 or step Sb804 is executed, in step Sb805, the variable display time table acquired in step Sb803 or step Sb804 is used to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variation pattern). Specifically, from the group of variation patterns set in the variable display time table, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Sb806, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sb805 above is set as the variable display time for the current special game. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area above as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 104) is activated. After step Sb806 is executed, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 110), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step Sb711, in step Sb712, a fluctuation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sb713, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The fluctuation start command contains information about the fluctuation pattern. As shown in Figs. 112 and 113, a different fluctuation pattern is set for each game state, and a different fluctuation pattern is also set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, the presentation control device 143 can grasp not only information about the fluctuation display time, but also whether or not a jackpot has occurred and the current game state. Furthermore, the type command contains information about the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is only set if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step Sb713 are sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107). The presentation control device 143 determines the content of the presentation for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. The content of this presentation includes the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 75, and this determined variable display mode of the patterns is output from the presentation control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. The display control device 350 controls the display of the pattern display device 75 so that the variable display of the patterns corresponding to each game round is performed based on the display content command received from the presentation control device 143.

In step Sb714, the variable display of the special symbol display section 43 is started. At that time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced, and if the second special symbol flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special symbol and the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed variable. On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is not stored, the current game round corresponds to the first special symbol and the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed variable. After step Sb714 is executed, this variable display start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol play count control process (Figure 108), after step Sb506 is executed, the special symbol play count control process ends. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb501 (open/close execution mode is in progress), the special symbol play count control process ends without executing the processes from step Sb502 onwards. In other words, if the open/close execution mode is in progress, no variable display will be performed on the special symbol display unit 43 even if pending information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb503 (the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable symbol), the process proceeds to step Sb507, where it is determined whether the variable symbol display time for this special symbol game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable symbol display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of RAM 314 has reached "0."

If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step Sb508. In the variable display processing, the display of the special chart display section for the current play round is controlled (each display segment is controlled to emit light) so that each display segment in the special chart display section for the current play round lights up and goes out in a predetermined order. After step Sb508 is executed, the special chart play round control processing is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, proceed to step Sb509 and clear the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed. In the high probability mode update/end processing, processing is performed to update the remaining number of times in high probability mode and to end high probability mode. In step Sb511, high frequency support mode update/end processing is executed. In the high frequency support mode update/end processing, processing is performed to update the remaining number of times in high frequency support mode and to end high frequency support mode.

In step Sb512, a process for transitioning to the second time-limited game state (Figure 102 (c)) is executed. In step Sb513, a process for starting a final display is executed to start a final display on the special symbol display unit 43, and then the special symbol game count control process is terminated. Details of each process in steps Sb510 to Sb513 will be described later.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a confirmed symbol), the process proceeds to step Sb514, where a confirmed symbol display termination process is executed to terminate the confirmed symbol display on the special symbol display unit 43. After step Sb514 is executed, the special symbol game count control process is terminated. Details of the confirmed symbol display termination process in step Sb514 will be described later.

<Game status transition processing>
The game state transition processing of step Sb404 (Figure 107) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 114.

First, in step Sb901, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not currently in the open/close execution mode, the program proceeds to step Sb902, where it is determined whether or not the special symbol game has ended (whether or not the confirmation display on the special symbol display unit 43 has ended). If the special symbol game has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the end timing of the special symbol game round, step Sb903 determines whether the game result of this special symbol game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot determination is made by checking whether a type flag (step Sb708 in FIG. 110) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the game result of this special symbol game round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb903 (if the game result of this special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb904, where the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, an opening period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains in a closed state while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if a high probability flag or high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sb905, the process for starting the round display to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is executed. In this step, the type of jackpot that has occurred is determined based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sb906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R regular jackpot result, in step Sb907, the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sb908, the round counter area RC1 is set to "10".

After step Sb907 or step Sb908 is executed, in step Sb909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the opening. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107).

In step Sb910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to that management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb911, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening/closing process is executed in step Sb912.

Here, the process for opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 115.

First, in step Sb1001, it is determined whether the special prize opening 65a is open. This determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 65d. If the special prize opening 65a is not open, it is determined in step Sb1002 whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, it is determined in step Sb1003 whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value in timer area T1 is "0," proceed to step Sb1004, where "15000" is set in timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 104) is activated. In step Sb1005, "10" is set in winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter area 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sb1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the special prize opening 65a. In step Sb1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the special prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the special prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Figure 107).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1102 (the value of the round counter area RC1 is 0) or a negative judgment is made in step Sb1103 (the value of the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening/closing process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sb1008, where it is determined whether the value in timer area T1 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sb1004 has elapsed.

If the value in timer area T1 is not "0," proceed to step Sb1009, where a determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value in prize counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Sb1010, and then a determination is made as to whether or not the value in prize counter area PC1 is "0" in step Sb1011. If the value in prize counter area PC1 is not "0," the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1008 (if the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sb1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sb1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Sb1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sb1015 and set "1000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the period (2 seconds) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sb1016, a close command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Figure 107).

If step Sb1014 returns a positive result (the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), i.e., if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sb1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed and awaits the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sb1018, an ending command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal process (Figure 107).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 114), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sb912, step Sb913 determines whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," the game state transition process is terminated immediately to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", proceed to step Sb914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, proceed to step Sb915 to execute the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 116.

First, in step Sb1101, the type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot result. If it is a variable probability jackpot result, in step Sb1102, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the probability variation counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The probability variation counter area KC is used by MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in high probability mode (the remaining number of special game times that can be played in high probability mode), and is decremented by 1 each time a special game is played in high probability mode.

In step Sb1104, a first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and setting the first support flag causes the support mode to transition to the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb1105, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is a 4R probability variable jackpot result A or a 10R probability variable jackpot result A. If it is a 4R probability variable jackpot result A or a 10R probability variable jackpot result A, proceed to step Sb1106, where a value corresponding to the second upper limit of the number of times (e.g., 1100) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. On the other hand, if the jackpot result is not a 4R probability variable jackpot result A or a 10R probability variable jackpot result A, i.e., if it is a 4R probability variable jackpot result B or a 10R probability variable jackpot result B, proceed to step Sb1107, where a value corresponding to the first upper limit of the number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC. The support counter area SC is used by MPU 312 to determine the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of special symbol game times that can be played in high-frequency support mode), and is decremented by one each time a special symbol game is played in high-frequency support mode.

After step Sb1106 or step Sb1107 is executed, in step Sb1108, a high probability gaming state start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability gaming state start command set in step Sb1108 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Figure 107). By sending the high probability gaming state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1101 (the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, where the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. As a result, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode, the support mode is set to high frequency support mode, and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode).

In step Sb1110, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is a 4R normal jackpot result A. If it is a 4R normal jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step Sb1111, where a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1000) is set in the support counter area SC. On the other hand, if the 4R normal jackpot result is not A, i.e., if it is a 4R normal jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step Sb1112, where a value corresponding to the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC.

After step Sb1111 or step Sb1112 is executed, step Sb1113 sets the first time-shortened gaming state start command as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The first time-shortened gaming state start command set in step Sb1113 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Figure 107). By sending the first time-shortened gaming state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the first time-shortened gaming state.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 114), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sb915 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Sb916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sb917, the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, and then the game state transition process is terminated. The opening and closing execution mode termination process executes a process to erase the type flag and opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e.

Next, we will explain the high probability mode update/end process of step Sb510 in Figure 108, the high frequency support mode update/end process of step Sb511, and the second time-saving game state transition process of step Sb512. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed, in other words, when the final display on the special symbol display unit 43 begins.

<High probability mode update/termination processing>
The high probability mode update and termination processing of step Sb510 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 117.

First, in step Sb1201, it is determined whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the current lottery mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sb1202, where the value of the probability variable counter area KC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability variable counter area KC is decremented by 1.

In step Sb1203, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter area KC is "0." If the value of the probability variation counter area KC is "0," that is, if the remaining number of special game plays that can be played in high probability mode is 0, in step Sb1204, the high probability flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This transitions the lottery mode to low probability mode.

At that time, if the value of the support counter area SC is 0, the support mode becomes low-frequency support mode, and the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode). If the value of the support counter area SC is not 0, the support mode remains in high-frequency support mode, and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode).

In step Sb1205, a high-probability game state end command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the high-probability mode update/end processing is terminated. The high-probability game state end command set in step Sb1204 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107). By sending the high-probability game state end command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the end of the high-probability game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1201 (the high probability flag is not set), i.e., if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the high probability mode update/termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1202 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1203 (the value of the probability change counter area KC is not "0"), the high probability mode update/termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1204 onwards in order to continue the high probability mode.

<High frequency support mode update/termination processing>
The high frequency support mode update and termination process in step Sb511 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb1301, it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If these flags are set, the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, which means that the game is in either the high-probability game state, the first time-saving game state, or the second time-saving game state.

In this case, proceed to step Sb1302 and update the value in the support counter area SC in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the value in the support counter area SC is decremented by 1.

In step Sb1303, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0." If the value of the support counter area SC is "0," that is, if the number of times high-frequency support play has been performed has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sb1304, where the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This ends the high-probability play state, the first time-saving play state, or the second time-saving play state.

In step Sb1305, the corresponding game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. At this time, if the probability variable game state or the first time-shortened game state is ending, the first time-shortened game state end command is set, and if the second time-shortened game state is ending, the second time-shortened game state end command is set.

The set game state end command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Fig. 107). When the presentation control device 143 receives the first time-shortened game state end command together with the high-probability game state end command (step Sb1205 in Fig. 117), it understands that the high-probability game state will end and that a transition to the normal game state will occur. Furthermore, when it receives only the first time-shortened game state end command, it understands that the first time-shortened game state will end, and when it receives the second time-shortened game state end command, it understands that the second time-shortened game state will end.

After step Sb1305 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update/termination processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1301 (none of the support flags are set), i.e., if the game is in normal play mode, the high-frequency support mode update/termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1302 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1303 (the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), the high-frequency support mode update/termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1304 onwards in order to continue the high-frequency support mode.

<Processing for transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The processing for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb512 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 119.

First, in step Sb1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb1402, where a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (e.g., 1000) is set in the miss counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The miss counter area HC is used by MPU 312 to keep track of the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reached. After step Sb1402 is executed, the process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1401 (the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss), the process proceeds to step Sb1403, where it is determined whether a second support flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second support flag is used by MPU 312 to determine whether the game state is the second time-saving game state.

If the second support flag is not set, i.e., if the current gaming state is not the second gaming state, step Sb1404 determines whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, proceed to step Sb1405 and update the value in the miss count counter area HC. Specifically, the value in the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether the value in the miss counter area HC is "0." If the value in the miss counter area HC is "0," that is, if the number of miss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb1407, where a second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes a transition to the second time-saving play state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode).

Here, the high-frequency support mode update/termination process in step Sb511 includes a process of subtracting the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode and a process of terminating the high-frequency support mode based on the result (Figure 118). In this embodiment, these processes are performed before the process of transitioning to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb512 is performed. Therefore, if the value of the miss count counter area HC becomes "0" in the final game turn of the first time-shortened game state, in other words, if the game turn in which the end of the first time-shortened game state is determined and the game turn in which the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined are the same game turn, the transition to the second time-shortened game state will occur after the first time-shortened game state ends during that game turn.

If the result of the win/loss judgment for the special game turn is a jackpot before the value in the miss counter area HC reaches "0," step Sb1402 is executed, and the value in the miss counter area HC is reset to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times. Therefore, after the open/close execution mode corresponding to that jackpot result ends, play will begin with the remaining number of miss times until the transition to the second time-saving game state set to the ceiling number of times.

In step Sb1408, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. In step Sb1409, a second time-shortened game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143. The set second time-shortened game state start command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Figure 107). By sending the second time-shortened game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the second time-shortened game state.

In step Sb1410, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, i.e., whether the special symbol play count that reached the ceiling number of times was a play count of the second special symbol. If the special symbol play count that reached the ceiling number of times was a play count of the second special symbol, this means that the ceiling number of times was reached in the final play count (1000th special symbol play count) of the first time-saving play state. On the other hand, if the special symbol play count that reached the ceiling number of times was a play count of the first special symbol, this means that the ceiling number of times was reached in a special symbol play count in the normal play state.

If the second special symbol flag is not set (the special symbol play round that has reached the ceiling number of times is the first special symbol play round), proceed to step Sb1411 and determine whether the regular symbol play round is currently displaying a variable value. If the regular symbol play round is currently displaying a variable value, proceed to step Sb1412 and determine whether the support lottery result for that regular symbol play round is a support winning result (regular symbol winning result).

If the result is a support win, proceed to step Sb1413, where the winning/losing result for the regular game currently being displayed is changed to a losing result. In the following step Sb1414, the stopping result for the losing result is set as the stopping result for the regular game.

After step Sb1414 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1412 (if the winning/losing result of the regular game round currently being displayed is a losing result), step Sb1415 forcibly terminates the variable display of the regular game round. In other words, the regular game display unit 44 is controlled to terminate the variable display even before the variable display time has elapsed. After that, the regular game display unit 44 displays a fixed stop result corresponding to the losing result after a predetermined fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). After step Sb1415 is executed, the processing for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1410 (if the second special symbol flag is set), the normal symbol game round will not be forcibly terminated, and the processing for transitioning to the second time-saving game state will end without executing the processing in steps Sb1411 to Sb1415.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1403 (if the game is in the second time-shortened game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb1404 (if the game is in the high probability mode), processing related to the second time-shortened game state is not executed, and the processing for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1405 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1406 (if the value of the miss counter area HC is not "0"), the processing for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1407 onwards in order to maintain the game state at that time.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1411, that is, if the variable display of the normal game number is not being displayed (including when the fixed display of the normal game number is being displayed), the processing for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1412 onwards.

<Processing for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the final display in step Sb513 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120(a).

First, in step Sb1501, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the second special symbol flag is not set, i.e., if the current special symbol play round is a first special symbol play round, it is determined in step Sb1502 whether the current special symbol play round is a miss play round in which the ceiling is reached. In other words, it is determined whether the current special symbol play round corresponds to the play round immediately before the first special symbol play round played after transitioning to the second time-saving play state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1501 (if the second special symbol flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step Sb1502 (if the game is not a losing round in which the ceiling has been reached), proceed to step Sb1503 and set the normal fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) as the fixed display time for this special symbol game.

The normal confirmation display time does not necessarily have to be one type; multiple types with different lengths may be provided, such as a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) for the low-frequency support mode (normal game state) and a second time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) for the high-frequency support mode (high-variant game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1502 (if the game is a losing round in which the ceiling has been reached), proceed to step Sb1504, and a specific confirmation display time (e.g., 0.8 seconds) different from the normal confirmation display time is set as the confirmation display time for this special game round. This specific confirmation display time is longer than the normal confirmation display time. Note that if the normal confirmation display time is set for low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode, the specific confirmation display time is set to be longer than the normal confirmation display time for low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, if the normal game round is in the middle of a variable display when the confirmation display begins for a losing game round (first special game round) where the ceiling is reached, the variable display will be forcibly terminated and the losing result will be displayed as a stopped result for the normal game round. The specific confirmation display time is longer than the confirmation display time for the normal game round at that time (0.5 seconds).

For this reason, if there is a next regular round pending when the confirmation display for the regular round ends, that next regular round will begin before the confirmation display for the special round ends when the ceiling is reached. In this case, the internal game state has already transitioned to the second time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), so that next regular round will be played in a manner corresponding to the second time-saving game state. In other words, when the number of misses reaches the ceiling, the regular round will begin playing in a manner corresponding to the second time-saving game state before the special round.

After step Sb1503 or step Sb1504 is executed, in step Sb1505, a confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The confirmation display flag is used by MPU 312 to determine that the confirmation display of the special game round is being executed.

In step Sb1506, the start process for the final display is executed. In the start process for the final display, the special image display unit 43 is controlled so that the image being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a stopped state according to the stop result set in step Sb709 (Figure 110) or step Sb710.

In step Sb1507, a variation end command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the process for starting the final display is terminated. The variation end command set in step Sb1507 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Figure 107). The presentation control device 143 transmits the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information format. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a final display (final stop display).

<Processing for ending confirmation display>
The process for ending the final display in step Sb514 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120(b).

First, in step Sb1601, it is determined whether the fixed display time set in step Sb1503 or step Sb1504 has elapsed. If the fixed display time has not elapsed, the fixed display termination process is terminated so that the stop display of the stop result in the special image display unit 43 can continue.

If the confirmed display time has elapsed, step Sb1602 clears the confirmed display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the confirmed display termination process is terminated. If the confirmed display flag is cleared in this way, a negative judgment will be made in step Sb502 of the special symbol game turn control process (Fig. 108) for the next processing turn. Therefore, if there is a next special symbol game turn pending (pending information where the game turn has not yet been executed), the variable display for that next special symbol game turn will begin. On the other hand, if there is no next special symbol game turn pending (pending information that has not yet been processed), the stop result that was displayed as confirmed will continue to be displayed until a new start win occurs and pending information is acquired.

<Regular game play control processing>
The regular game play control processing of step Sb405 (Figure 107) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 121.

First, in step Sb1701, it is determined whether a reel opening/closing game using the normal power reel 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a reel opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The reel opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a reel opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a reel opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel device is currently being opened or closed, the normal game play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel device is not currently being opened or closed, step Sb1702 determines whether a normal game play is being performed in the normal game display unit 44. In this case, a normal game play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal game display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal game display unit 44, and step Sb1702 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

In addition, during special symbol gameplay in the special symbol display unit 43, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress, but during normal symbol gameplay, variable displays are permitted even during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, during normal symbol gameplay, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the device is being opened/closed using the normal electric device 63a, but during special symbol gameplay, variable displays are permitted even during the device is being opened/closed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1702 (a normal game round is not currently being played), the process proceeds to step Sb1703, where it is determined whether the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0." If the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0," the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved normal maps FN is not "0", step Sb1704 executes a normal map data setting process to set the data stored in the electric utility reserve area Rc for variable display. In the normal map data setting process, the number of reserved normal maps FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric utility reserve area Rc is moved to the normal map execution area. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the electric utility reserve area Rc, and a normal map shift command is set, which is information that allows the performance control device 143 to recognize that a shift has been made in the data in the reserve area on the normal map side.

In step Sb1705, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the normal map game play control process is terminated. Here, the normal map fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 122.

First, in step Sb1801, it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If neither support flag is set, i.e., if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, in step Sb1802, a support lottery (normal win/loss determination) is performed by referring to the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (Figure 103(a)). On the other hand, if either support flag is set, i.e., if the current support mode is high-frequency support mode, in step Sb1803, a support lottery is performed by referring to the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode (Figure 103(b)). As already explained, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode has a higher probability of winning support than the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode, making it easier to win support.

By the way, when the ceiling is reached and the regular game is executed while the confirmation of the special game is displayed, the support lottery is conducted by referencing the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, in this case, the support lottery is more likely to result in a support win, and in a situation where the probability of winning a support is set to 95/100, as in this embodiment, there is a very high probability of a support win.

After step Sb1802 or step Sb1803 is executed, step Sb1804 determines whether the result of the lottery in step Sb1802 or step Sb1803 is a support win result (regular win result). If it is a support win result, proceed to step Sb1805, and the stop result for a regular win is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. If it is not a support win result, that is, if it is a regular loss result, proceed to step Sb1806, and the stop result for a regular loss is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313.

After step Sb1805 or step Sb1806 is executed, step Sb1807 executes a process for setting the normal map variable display time. In this setting process, the variable display time for the current normal map game is set in the normal map display unit 44. In this case, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, a relatively long variable display time is set, and if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a relatively short variable display time is set.

Specifically, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode and the result of the support lottery is a normal miss, the variable display time is set to, for example, 30 seconds; if the support mode is low-frequency support mode and the result is a support win, the variable display time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds. Also, if the support mode is high-frequency support mode and the result is a normal miss, the variable display time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds; if the support mode is high-frequency support mode and the result is a support win, the variable display time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds.

By the way, when the ceiling is reached and a regular game play is executed while the confirmation display for the special game play is displayed, the game starts in a state where the game has internally transitioned to the second time-saving game state, so the variable display time for the high-frequency support mode is applied. In other words, the regular game play is executed with a short variable display time.

Note that the above variable display times are merely examples, and other configurations are possible, such as allowing the selection of multiple times, such as 0.5 seconds or 1 second, as the variable display time when a support win occurs in high frequency support mode.

In step Sb1808, a normal map change start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map change start command includes information on the normal map change pattern (information indicating the normal map pass/fail result and the change display time). The set normal map change start command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (Figure 107).

In step Sb1809, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image on the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal game play control process (Figure 121), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb1702 (if a normal game play is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sb1706, where it is determined whether the variable display time set in step Sb1707 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sb1707, where the variable display process is executed. In the variable display process, the display of the normal game display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal game display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. The normal game play control process then ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1706 (the variable display time has elapsed), the process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Sb1708, and then the process for controlling the normal map game is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled so that the image is displayed as a stopped image based on the stop result set in step Sb1805 or step Sb1806. In this case, the confirmed display time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In addition, in the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, a normal map variable end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map variable end command includes information about the confirmed display time for this normal map game.

<Electrical support treatment>
The electric support processing of step Sb406 (FIG. 107) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb1901, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel opening/closing game is not in progress, proceed to step Sb1902 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric reel support processing ends.

If it is the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Sb1903 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support win. If it is not a support win, the electric role support processing ends.

If the result is a support win, proceed to step Sb1904, where it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If neither support flag is set, i.e., if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, in step Sb1905, the opening count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "1." The opening count counter area RC2 is used to count the number of times the normal power device 63a is opened in the device opening/closing game, and is decremented by one each time the normal power device 63a is switched from the closed state to the open state.

If the first support flag or second support flag is set, i.e., if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, step Sb1906 sets the opening count counter area RC2 to "2." That is, in low-frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power device 63a opens is set to 1, and in high-frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power device 63a opens is set to 2.

In step Sb1907, the reel opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sb1908, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric reel support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the reel opening signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the open signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1901 (if the reel opening/closing game is in progress), reel opening/closing processing is executed in step Sb1909. The reel opening/closing processing will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 124.

First, in step Sb2101, it is determined whether the normal power device 63a is currently open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power device 63a is not currently open, it is determined in step Sb2102 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," proceed to step Sb2103, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T2 in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between openings of the normal electric device 63a has elapsed when the device is opened multiple times during opening and closing play.

If the value in timer area T2 is "0," proceed to step Sb2104, where it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If neither support flag is set, i.e., if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, in step Sb2105, "50" (equivalent to 0.1 seconds) is set in the timer area T2. If either support flag is set, i.e., if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step Sb2106, "1000" (equivalent to 2 seconds) is set in the timer area T2. The value set in step Sb2105 or step Sb2106 corresponds to the upper limit opening time per opening in the opening and closing game of the reel device.

After step Sb2105 or step Sb2106 is executed, in step Sb2107, "6" is set in the winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. This value corresponds to the upper limit (6) of the number of winnings that can be won by the normal electric device 63a (second operating port 63) in the device opening and closing game.

In step Sb2108, the drive unit 63b is set to the driven state to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Sb2109, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 of the normal processing (Figure 107). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Sb2109 is executed, the reel opening/closing process ends. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2102 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Sb2103 (the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process ends without executing the processing from step Sb2104 onwards.

If step Sb2101 returns a positive result (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sb2110, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit for the open time of the normal power device 63a set in step Sb2105 or step Sb1206 has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T2 is not "0", i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal operation device 63a has not elapsed, step Sb2111 determines whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, step Sb2112 subtracts 1 from the value in the win counter area PC2. Step Sb2113 determines whether the value in the win counter area PC2 is "0", i.e., whether the number of wins into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of wins.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb2111 (no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2113 (the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends immediately to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb2110 (the value in the timer area T2 is "0" and the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2113 (the value in the prize counter area PC2 is "0" and the number of prizes entered into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit), the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state in step Sb2114 to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Sb2115, a reel close command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. The set reel close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state.

In step Sb2116, the process of updating the opening count counter area RC2 is executed. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Sb2117, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", the reel opening/closing process is terminated. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power reel 63a, in step Sb2118, the timer area T2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds), and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The value set in step Sb2118 corresponds to the waiting time for the normal power reel 63a to be closed and await the next opening.

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support processing (Figure 123), after executing the reel opening/closing processing in step Sb1909, step Sb1910 determines whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0." If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," the electric role support processing ends. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0," that is, if the reel opening/closing game has ended, step Sb1911 clears the reel opening/closing flag set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the electric role support processing ends.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and display control device 350 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 contains a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 343 are executed, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control unit 162, it receives various commands, such as hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game number control commands such as fluctuation start commands, type commands and fluctuation end commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. Based on the detection information, the MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 equipped with an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 374 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 372. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device that serves as the LCD driver built into the pattern display device 75. Because VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its true nature is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 adjusts the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and so on.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc., separately. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 126. The effect setting process is initiated by the MPU 342 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command (step Sb1018 in FIG. 115) has been received from the main control unit 162. The ending command is sent when the ending is to begin in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the result of the win/loss determination for the special game round is a jackpot.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands in order from the previously stored command. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly.

When making the judgment in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command is stored in the area of command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If an ending command is stored (if an ending command has been received), in step Sb2302, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to a transition to a high probability gaming state or a first time-saving gaming state. Details of the first transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sb2302 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2301 (if the ending command has not been received), step Sb2303 determines whether a second time-shortened game state start command (step Sb1409 in FIG. 119) has been received from the main control unit 162. The second time-shortened game state start command is sent when the transition to the second time-shortened game state is triggered by the number of losing play times in the special game play reaching the upper limit.

If a second time-shortened gaming state start command has been received, step Sb2304 executes a second transition effect setting process to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. Details of the second transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sb2304 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2303 (if the second time-shortened gaming state start command has not been received), step Sb2305 determines whether any gaming state end command has been received. Specifically, it determines whether any of the high-probability gaming state end command (step Sb1205 in FIG. 117), the first time-shortened gaming state end command, or the second time-shortened gaming state end command (step Sb1305 in FIG. 118) has been received.

If any of these commands has been received, step Sb2306 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability gaming state, the first time-limited gaming state, or the second time-limited gaming state. Details of the end effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sb2306 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2305 (if no game state end command has been received), step Sb2307 executes special pattern change display processing to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display processing will be described later.

In step Sb2308, other processing is performed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Other processing includes displaying a demo screen if a starting winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time, and switching to a power-saving mode that stops video display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption.

<First transition effect setting process>
The first transition effect setting process of step Sb2302 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 127. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the timing at which the ending of the opening/closing execution mode starts.

First, in step Sb2401, it is determined whether a transition to a high probability game state or a first time-saving game state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability game state or a first time-saving game state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control unit 162.

In addition, if there is only one jackpot type that always transitions to either the high probability gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, as in this embodiment, it is possible to omit the processing of step Sb2401.

If a transition to a high probability game state or a first time-saving game state is possible, a start effect corresponding to each game state is set in step Sb2402. For example, if a transition to a high probability game state is possible, a start effect for the high probability game state is set as the start effect. In the start effect for the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 128(a), a title image 471 corresponding to a high probability game state, such as "Lucky Time," and a remaining number of times image 472 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. The remaining number of times image 472 notifies the player of the remaining number of special symbol game times that the player can remain in the high probability game state.

In the start presentation for the first time-shortened game state where there are 100 remaining turns, as shown in FIG. 128(b), a title image 473 corresponding to a time-shortened game state with 100 remaining turns, such as "Chance Time," and a remaining turn image 472 are displayed. In this case, the remaining turn image 472 notifies the player of the remaining number of special turn turns that can be played while remaining in the first time-shortened game state.

In the start presentation for the first time-saving game state where the remaining number of plays is 1,000, as shown in FIG. 128(c), a title image 474 corresponding to a higher-level time-saving game state such as "Super Chance Time" and a remaining play count image 472 are displayed.

In addition, during the opening presentation for each time-saving game state, a miss count image 475 is displayed, announcing the number of times the special symbol hit/miss judgment has resulted in a miss. This miss count image 475 continues to be displayed during the first time-saving game state, and the displayed number is updated at the end of each miss play. Therefore, by looking at this image 475, the player can know the progress made in the process leading up to reaching the ceiling (Fig. 128 (d)). Specifically, the player can ascertain the current number of miss plays, or, if the player knows the ceiling limit, the number of plays remaining until the ceiling limit is reached.

Note that Figure 128 (d) shows the time-saving effects that are executed while in the first time-saving gaming state. The time-saving effects are performed after the start effects of Figures 128 (b) and (c) have ended and continue until the first time-saving gaming state ends. This time-saving effect is configured to be distinguishable from the normal effects, for example by having a different background image from the normal effects during the normal gaming state.

Incidentally, the miss count image 475 is not erased even when the first time-saving game state ends, and continues to be displayed even after transitioning to the normal game state. It is also possible to configure the miss count image 475 to be temporarily erased when the first time-saving game state ends, and then to be displayed again when the normal game state begins or after transitioning to the normal game state.

In step Sb2402, the various start effects described above are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, these start effects may be configured to be displayed throughout the entire ending period, or for only part of the ending period.

In step Sb2403, a predetermined value is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344. The remaining number counter area is used by MPU 342 to keep track of the remaining number of special game turns that can be played in the high probability game state or the first time-saving game state, and is decremented by one each time a special game turn is played in each of these game states. In this step, if the game state to be transitioned to is the high probability game state, values corresponding to the first upper limit number of turns (e.g., 100 turns) and the second upper limit number of turns (e.g., 1100 turns) are set as the predetermined value, respectively. If the game state to be transitioned to is the first time-saving game state, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of turns (e.g., 1000 turns) or the fourth upper limit number of turns (e.g., 100 turns) is set.

In this embodiment, the presentation control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times for each game state separately from the main control device 162, but the presentation control device 143 may also be configured to determine the remaining number of times for each game state based on the update results from the main control device 162. For example, the update results for the probability change counter area KC (step Sb1202 in FIG. 117) and the update results for the support counter area SC (step Sb1302 in FIG. 118) may be notified from the main control device 162 to the presentation control device 143 by sending a specified command, and the presentation control device 143 may analyze the command and determine the update results. In this case, the specified command may be created by including information on the update results in an existing command such as the variation end command (step Sb1506 in FIG. 120(a)), or the specified command may be configured using a dedicated command for notifying the update results.

In step Sb2404, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is set to begin. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to begin during each start effect (effect performed using the ending period) set in step Sb2402, or the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to begin after the start effect ends and the game transitions to a high probability game state, etc.

In step Sb2405, a remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine whether the remaining number of times image 472 is being displayed.

In step Sb2406, it is determined whether the gaming state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high probability gaming state. If the gaming state after the opening and closing execution mode is not a high probability gaming state, that is, if it is in the first time-saving gaming state, proceed to step Sb2407 and set to start displaying the miss count image 475. In this case, it may be set to start displaying the miss count image 475 during each start effect set in step Sb2402, or it may be set to start displaying the miss count image 475 after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the first time-saving gaming state. Note that the initial value of the miss count image 475 when display is started in step Sb2406 is 0.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2401 (if the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is the normal game state), the process proceeds to step Sb2407, where the display setting for the miss count image 475 is performed.

After step Sb2407 is executed, in step Sb2408, the miss count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The miss count display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the miss count image 475 is being displayed.

After step Sb2408 is executed, the first transition effect setting process is terminated. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2406 (if the game state after the open/close execution mode is a high probability game state), the miss count image 475 is not displayed, and the first transition effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sb2407 and Sb2408.

<Second transition effect setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sb2304 (Fig. 126) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 129. This process is executed when a second time-shortened gaming state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when the second time-shortened gaming state is started.

First, in step Sb2501, the value of the miss count counter area provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared. The miss count counter area counts the number of times the special symbol has been played as a miss, and is referenced when displaying the miss count image 475.

In step Sb2502, a process is executed to erase the number of misses image 475 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, and in step Sb2503, the number of misses display flag set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344 is cleared.

In step Sb2504, it is determined whether the first time-shortened game state will end with the current special game turn. In other words, it is determined whether the special game turn in which the second time-shortened game state start command was received is the final special game turn in the first time-shortened game state. In this step, the above determination is made by determining whether the first time-shortened game state end command was received in the same game turn.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the upper limit number of times (third upper limit number (e.g., 1000 times)) of the first time-shortened game state to which a transition occurs upon a 4R normal jackpot result A is set to the same as the ceiling number of times (e.g., 1000 times) that triggers a transition to the second time-shortened game state. In this configuration, if the number of play times consumed in the first time-shortened game state reaches the upper limit number without a jackpot being won, the number of misses will also reach the ceiling number at the same time, and a first time-shortened game state end command corresponding to the end of the first time-shortened game state and a second time-shortened game state start command corresponding to the number of misses reaching the ceiling number are transmitted in the same special game time. Note that a similar event occurs when a 4R special jackpot result A occurs, transitioning to a high-probability game state, and then transitioning to the first time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state with 1000 remaining times) after the high-probability game state ends. Step Sb2504 determines whether or not one of these cases applies.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb2504 (if the first time-shortened game state does not end in this special game round), that is, if a transition is made from the normal game state to the second time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step Sb2505, where a start effect corresponding to the second time-shortened game state is set. In the start effect for the second time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 130(a), a title image 474 corresponding to a higher time-shortened game state such as "Super Chance Time" and a remaining number of plays image 472 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75.

The start effect for the second time-saving game state may be executed in the special symbol game turn when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, or may be executed after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. In the former case, the start effect may be executed after each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in the combination resulting from a miss in the special symbol game turn when the ceiling number of misses has been reached. In this case, the start effect may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time).

When using part of the fixed display time to execute the above start effect, it is recommended to execute the start effect in the latter half of the fixed display time, except when the start effect is executed across the variable display time and the fixed display time. Specifically, it is recommended to execute the start effect after the fixed display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has begun. In this case, it is possible to notify the player of the results of the special symbol lottery using each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 before notifying them of the transition to the second time-saving play state, which is a preferable way for the player to understand both the results of the special symbol lottery and the transition to the second time-saving play state.

In step Sb2506, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344. The fifth upper limit is the number of special game plays that can be played in the second time-saving game state, for example, 900 times.

In step Sb2507, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is set to begin. In this case, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to begin during the start effect for the second time-shortened game state, or the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to begin after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the second time-shortened game state.

In step Sb2508, the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second transition effect setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb2504 (if the first time-shortened game state ends with this special game), that is, if the first time-shortened game state transitions to the second time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step Sb2509, and the remaining number of times is added to the bonus effect. This bonus effect will now be explained with reference to Figures 130(b) and (c).

To perform the above-mentioned additional effects, as shown in Figure 130(b), the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 in a combination that results in a losing outcome during the final play in the first time-saving play state. In this case, the stop display does not take a special stopping form, but rather notifies the player of a losing outcome by displaying the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in order, just like the other special symbol play in the first time-saving play state.

After each symbol row Z1-Z3 is frozen, as shown in FIG. 130(c), an additional image 476 consisting of text such as "+900 times!!" is displayed during the special symbol play round in which the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are frozen. This notifies the player that the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state has been increased. This additional image may be displayed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be displayed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the images of the frozen symbol rows Z1-Z3 may be erased before the additional image 476 is displayed, or the images of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 may not be erased and the additional image 476 may be displayed in front of the symbol rows Z1-Z3.

After step Sb2509 is executed, in step Sb2510, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit is added to the value in the remaining number counter area. As a result, during play after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, a remaining number image 472 reflecting the fifth upper limit is displayed, as shown in FIG. 130(d). After step Sb2510 is executed, the second transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end effect setting process of step Sb2306 (Fig. 126) will be described with reference to Fig. 131. This process is executed when an end command for each of the high probability game state, the first time-limited game state, and the second time-limited game state is received, or in other words, when each of these game states ends.

In step Sb2601, it is determined whether the end of the current gaming state is the end of the first time-shortened gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether a command to end the first time-shortened gaming state has been received from the main control unit 162.

If the end of the current game state is the end of the first time-saving game state, proceed to step Sb2602 and determine whether the number of misses has reached the ceiling number. In other words, determine whether the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving game state have been met.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb2602 (the number of misses has not reached the ceiling number and the game does not transition to the second time-saving game state) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2601 (the high-probability game state or the second time-saving game state has ended), an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set in step Sb2603. For example, if the high-probability game state has ended, the end effect for the high-probability game state is set to be executed.

In step Sb2604, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared (initialized), and in step Sb2605, the remaining number image 472 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is erased.

In step Sb2606, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2602 (the number of misses has reached the ceiling number of times and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state), the end effect setting process is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb2603 onwards in order to continue updating and displaying the remaining number of times.

<Special chart change display processing>
The processing for displaying special chart changes in step Sb2307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 132.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether a game turn is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a game turn of either the first special design or the second special design is currently being played. If neither game turn is currently being played, it proceeds to step Sb2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information about the fluctuation pattern selected by lottery during the fluctuation display time setting process (Fig. 111) in the main control unit 162. By referencing this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to determine at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Furthermore, as already explained, because fluctuation patterns for jackpots and losses are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the win/loss judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If a fluctuation start command has not been received, the special chart fluctuation display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has been received, the processing proceeds to step Sb2703, where fluctuation start processing is executed to start the performance for the game round.

The fluctuation start process analyzes the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 and identifies the fluctuation pattern for the current special game round. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game round is determined based on the identified fluctuation pattern. A presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The fluctuation display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the fluctuation display time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (Figures 112 and 113) in the main control device 162, and a common fluctuation display time is assigned to one fluctuation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 1A, the corresponding fluctuation display time is 15 seconds in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. The fluctuation start process references the presentation pattern table to identify the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command, and sets this as the fluctuation display time for the current special game round.

The presentation pattern table also associates each variation pattern with a presentation pattern for the game round presentation. These presentation patterns are the normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, and SPSP reach miss, as described in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between variation patterns and presentation patterns has already been described with reference to Figure 112, so further explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the variable start process, if the result of the win/loss determination for the current special symbol game round is a jackpot, the jackpot type is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a probability jackpot, the stop result for the probability jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are determined randomly by lottery, etc.

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game round is a miss, the stopping symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be determined randomly. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols will be determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result for this round will be the one that results in a combination of miss reach symbols on at least one active line L1 to L5.

In the variation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command containing information on the current stopped symbol and presentation pattern is set as the output target to the display control device 350. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 so that the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 stop according to the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or so that a game-round presentation is performed according to the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

After step Sb2703 is executed, the remaining number of times display update process is executed in step Sb2704, and then the special chart change display process is terminated. Here, the remaining number of times display update process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 133 (a).

First, in step Sb2801, it is determined whether the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, i.e., whether the remaining number of times image 472 is being displayed. Note that the remaining number of times display flag is set in the high probability gaming state, the first time-limited gaming state, or the second time-limited gaming state, so the determination process in step Sb2801 can also be said to determine whether the current gaming state is one of these gaming states.

If the remaining number of times display flag is not set, the remaining number of times display update process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times display flag is set, proceed to step Sb2802 and update the value in the remaining number of times counter area. Specifically, the value in the remaining number of times counter area is decremented by 1. In the following step Sb2803, the display content of the remaining number of times image 472 is updated by referencing the update result of step Sb2802. As a result, the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 472 is decremented by 1. After step Sb2803 is executed, the remaining number of times display update process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol variation display process (Fig. 132), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2701 (if a special symbol game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sb2705, where it is determined whether or not a variation end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a variation end command has not been received, this means that the variation display time for this special symbol game round has not yet elapsed. In this case, step Sb2706 executes the variation in progress process. The variation in progress process executes processes to continue the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the variation start process, to temporarily stop and display the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb2705 (if a variation end command has been received), the process proceeds to step Sb2707, where variation end processing is executed. In the variation end processing, the variable display of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 and the currently executed effects are terminated. In addition, step Sb2707 controls the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 to be fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

In step Sb2708, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is executed, and then the process for displaying the special pattern change is terminated. Here, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 133 (b).

First, in step Sb2901, it is determined whether the miss count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, i.e., whether the miss count image 475 is currently being displayed. Note that since the miss count display flag is set in the normal game state or the first time-saving game state, the determination process in step Sb2901 can also be said to determine whether the current game state is one of these game states.

If the miss count display flag is set, step Sb2902 determines whether the result of this special drawing is a miss. If it is a miss, proceed to step Sb2903, where the value in the miss count counter area is updated. Specifically, the value in the miss count counter area is incremented by 1. In the following step Sb2904, the display content of the miss count image 475 is updated by referencing the update result of step Sb2903. As a result, the number of misses reported by the miss count image 475 is incremented by 1.

The process of updating the miss counter in step Sb2903 is executed at the start of the final display, but in step Sb2904, the miss count image 475 is set to be updated after the final display time has elapsed. In this case, the miss count image 475 may be updated at the end of the final display, or after the start of the next special game.

After step Sb2904 is executed, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2901 (the miss count display flag is not set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2902 (the win/loss result of this special game is a jackpot), the process for updating the display of the number of misses is terminated without executing the processes from step Sb2903 onwards.

<About the transition to the second time-saving game mode>
The flow of transition to the second time-shortened gaming state will be explained below. Here, the case where a transition to the first time-shortened gaming state with the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is triggered by a 4R normal jackpot result A, and then a transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is triggered by the number of misses reaching the ceiling number of times (for example, 1000 times) will be explained with reference to FIG. 134.

When the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends at timing t1, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. This causes a transition to the first time-saving gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode (Figures 134 (a) and (b)).

Also, at timing t1, the main control unit 162 sets a third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1,000 times) in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 (Fig. 134 (c)). The value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol game play in the first time-shortened game state results in a loss (loss game play), and the first time-shortened game state ends when the value reaches "0" (Figs. 108, 118). In other words, the value of the support counter area SC corresponds to the remaining number of special symbol game play times that can be played in the first time-shortened game state.

In the effect control device 143, the remaining number of times is counted using a remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 (Fig. 133(a)). The pattern display device 75 displays a remaining number of times image 472 (Fig. 128(d)) based on the value of the remaining number of times counter area, thereby notifying the user of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state.

If a jackpot occurs during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends with a transition to the open/close execution mode, and the values in the support counter area SC and remaining number counter area are cleared.

When the confirmation display for the special game round resulting in a 4R normal jackpot result A begins, the main control unit 162 sets a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (e.g., 1,000 times) in the miss counter area HC of the various counter areas 314d (Fig. 134 (d)). The value in the miss counter area HC is decremented by 1 each time a miss game round is played after the end of the open/close execution mode (Figs. 108 and 119). This counts the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reached.

In the effect control device 143, the number of loss plays is counted by the loss counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b (Fig. 133(b)). The value in the loss counter area of the effect control device 143 is incremented by one each time a loss play is played. In other words, the value in the loss counter area of the effect control device 143 corresponds to the number of losses up to that point after a jackpot result (after the open/close execution mode has been performed). The pattern display device 75 displays a loss count image 475 based on the value in the loss counter area (Fig. 128(d)), thereby announcing the cumulative number of loss plays.

The main control unit 162 updates the miss count counter area HC when the confirmation display begins for a special game that has resulted in a miss in the win/loss judgment, but the number of misses displayed by the miss count image 475 is updated only after the confirmation display time for that special game has elapsed. However, this configuration is not required, and the miss count image 475 may be updated before the confirmation display time has elapsed. In other words, the number of misses may be updated at the start of the confirmation display or during the confirmation display.

Incidentally, in pachinko machines equipped with a function for executing a re-lottery effect (a performance in which the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are temporarily displayed as stopped symbols, then the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are changed again, and then the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are displayed as stopped symbols in a different pattern combination than when the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 were previously displayed as stopped symbols), it is expected that the player will continue to pay attention to the symbol display device 75 even after the changing display has ended and the final display has begun, hoping that the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 will change again. In order to maintain the sense of anticipation in such a configuration, it is preferable to update the miss count image 475 after the final display time has elapsed, rather than updating it at any time during the final display.

At timing t2, when the number of misses in the first time-shortened gaming state reaches the third upper limit and the value in the support counter area SC becomes "0," the first support flag is cleared and the first time-shortened gaming state ends (Fig. 134 (b) and (c)). In this embodiment, the third upper limit and the ceiling number are set to the same value, so when the support counter area SC becomes "0," the value in the miss counter area HC also becomes "0." In response, a second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and the game transitions to the second time-shortened gaming state, which is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode (Fig. 134 (e)).

At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is reset to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, the symbol display device 75 executes an additional effect (Fig. 130 (b) to (d)) in which the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is added.

In this embodiment, the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is updated before a transition decision to the second time-saving gaming state is made (Figs. 108, 118, and 119). The advantages of such a configuration will be explained with reference to Fig. 135.

To facilitate understanding, we will use a comparative example in which a determination is made to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state before updating the remaining number of times the time-shortened gaming state has been played, and explain the differences between this and the configuration of this embodiment. Furthermore, to make it easier to compare the two, we will assume that both the comparative example and the configuration of this embodiment have restrictions that prevent the first time-shortened gaming state and the second time-shortened gaming state from being played simultaneously.

As described above, when the cumulative number of unsuccessful plays reaches the ceiling number in the final play of the first time-shortened play state triggered by a jackpot, in the configuration of the comparative example, a transition determination to the second time-shortened play state is first made, and it is internally recognized that a transition to the second time-shortened play state should occur. However, because the player is still in the first time-shortened play state at that point, transition to the second time-shortened play state is restricted, and as a result, reaching the ceiling is invalidated.

To avoid invalidating such ceiling reach, one option is to set the ceiling count higher than the third upper limit so that the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling count in the special symbol game play after the final game play of the first time-saving game state. If you want to transition to the second time-saving game state immediately after the end of the first time-saving game state, you can set the ceiling count to 1001 or the third upper limit to 999, and have the cumulative number of misses reach the ceiling count in the special symbol game play after the final game play.

However, in this case, there will be a period of time in the normal game state between the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state. For example, if the remaining number of plays in the time-shortened game state is updated and the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined at the start of the confirmation display in a special game round, the first time-shortened game state will end at the start of the confirmation display in the previous special game round, and the transition to the normal game state will occur during the period when the variable display is performed in the subsequent special game round.

In that case, if the variable display for a normal game round begins during that normal game state, the variable display time for that normal game round is set to the long time for normal game state, and the probability of the win/loss judgment is also set to the low win probability for normal game state. In this case, if the win/loss judgment for that normal game round is a miss, the normal power device 63a will not be opened until the normal game round with the long variable display time ends, the next normal game round results in a support win result (normal win result), and that normal game round ends. For this reason, even if the confirmation display for the later special game round begins and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, it will take a long time for the normal power device 63a to be opened, raising concerns that there will be a delay before the player can actually enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened play state is updated first, so that in the final play of the first time-shortened play state, the reaching of the third upper limit is first recognized, ending the first time-shortened play state, and then the transition to the second time-shortened play state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of times is recognized. Therefore, switching from the first time-shortened play state to the second time-shortened play state occurs within the same special play round, without invalidating the reaching of the ceiling, and without an intervening period of time in the normal play state. In other words, when the cumulative number of losses reaches the ceiling number in the final play of the first time-shortened play state triggered by a win, a smooth transition from the first time-shortened play state to the second time-shortened play state is possible.

Next, we will explain the transition from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state with reference to Figure 136. Here, the display of the number of special game rounds in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is displayed from timing t1 to timing t3 in Figure 136, and the display of the number of normal game rounds begins at timing t3, which is an intermediate timing.

When a special symbol game round (special symbol game round for the first special symbol) begins in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling during normal gameplay, the variable display is displayed from timing t1 to timing t3. When the variable display time elapses at timing t3, the final display of the special symbol game round begins. In this case, the final display time is set to a specific final display time (e.g., 0.8 seconds) that is longer than the normal final display time (Figure 120 (a)).

Furthermore, at timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the ceiling number of plays being reached, and a transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is made (Fig. 136 (a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the fifth upper limit number of plays (e.g., 900 plays) corresponding to the duration of the second time-shortened gaming state.

The symbol display device 75 executes a start effect (Fig. 130(a)) corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving game state. This start effect is executed, for example, on the special symbol game play round when the ceiling number of times has been reached. In this case, the start effect may be executed for part or all of the fixed display time, or the start effect may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time).

On the other hand, if the normal game round starts at timing t2, which is midway through the variable display of the special game round, the game state at this point is normal game state, so the variable display time for that normal game round is set to the variable display time for normal game state (e.g., 30 seconds).

At timing t3, the confirmation display for the special symbol game round in which the ceiling has been reached begins, and when the transition to the second time-saving game state is made, the variable display for the normal symbol game round is forcibly terminated (Fig. 136 (c)). As a result, the variable display ends earlier than the variable display time set at timing t2 has elapsed. At this time, if the support judgment result for that normal symbol game round is a support win result (normal symbol winning result), the judgment result is rewritten to a loss result. Therefore, after the above-mentioned forced termination, the confirmation display is made with the stop result corresponding to the loss result.

If the support determination result is a miss, that result will be maintained and the confirmation display will be the stop result set at the start of the normal game round. Also, if the normal game round is currently being confirmed at timing t3, or if the normal powered device 63a is in the process of opening and closing the device, the forced termination will not be executed and those states will continue.

After that, when the final display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed at timing t4, the result has been rewritten to a miss as described above, so the opening and closing of the device by the normal power device 63a is not executed, and the next normal game round begins immediately. Since the game state at this point is the second time-saving game state, the variable display for that game round is performed using the short variable display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) for the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, the support determination in this case is performed under the high probability of winning for the second time-saving game state. Here, we will assume that the result of the support determination is a support win result.

Here, the final display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) for a normal game round in which the variable display is forcibly terminated due to reaching the ceiling is shorter than the final display time (e.g., 0.8 seconds) for a special game round in which the ceiling has been reached. Therefore, a game round in the second time-saving game state will be played in the normal game round earlier than the special game round (Figure 136 (c)).

When the variable display time for the normal game round has elapsed at timing t6, the fixed display is then displayed for the set fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Note that the total time (e.g., 1 second) of the variable display time for the normal game round (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is longer than the fixed display time for the special game round that has reached the ceiling (e.g., 0.8 seconds). As a result, the fixed display for the special game round ends in the middle of the fixed display for the normal game round (timing t5).

At that time, if there is pending information for the first special symbol, the next special symbol play round (the first special symbol play round) will begin. In this case, the special symbol play round will be a play round that takes place under the second time-saving play state. Incidentally, since the opening and closing of the device by the normal electric device 63a has not yet been performed at this point, no winning occurs in the second operating port 63, and the second special symbol play round will not be played.

When the confirmation display time for the normal game has elapsed at timing t7, the device opening/closing game is executed. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second operating port 63.

With the above configuration, the timing for starting the opening and closing of the special device after transitioning to the second time-saving game state can be accelerated compared to when the normal game round is not forcibly terminated or the result is not rewritten to a losing result. This accelerates the start of the period during which a win is possible in the second operating port 63, and ultimately makes it possible to obtain the reserved information for the second special game round earlier.

For example, if the timing of obtaining the reserved information for the second special symbol is delayed, it becomes more likely that the first special symbol will be played in the second time-saving play state. If the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the type determination is more favorable than in the case of the first special symbol (Fig. 102 (a) and (b)), so the more the first special symbol is played, the more disadvantageous it becomes for the player. In particular, if the variable display time for the first special symbol play is shortened in the second time-saving play state, there is a concern that the number of times the first special symbol will be played after switching to the second time-saving play state will be more likely to increase.

In this regard, according to this embodiment, the start of the period in which the hold information for the second special symbol can be generated can be accelerated, thereby preventing the number of times the first special symbol is played after transitioning to the second time-saving game state from increasing. This allows the player to play in the second time-saving game state in a manner that is preferable to them.

In this embodiment, where left-hand play is performed in normal play mode and where winning through gate 64 does not occur during left-hand play, the normal play round will generally not be in progress when transitioning from normal play mode to the second time-saving play mode. However, if a player who recognizes that the ceiling has been reached hastily switches to right-hand play, a transition to the second time-saving play mode may occur while a normal play round is in progress. In particular, in a configuration where the number of misses up to that point is notified by the miss count image 475, players tend to become aware of the transition to the second time-saving play mode from a relatively early stage, making such operational errors more likely to occur. In such cases, the longer the variable display time for normal play mode during a normal play round, the longer the timing for playing the second special play round, making this configuration effective.

In addition, if the launch strength of the game ball is too strong and the game ball flows down the right route and unintentionally passes through the through gate 64, or if the system is configured to intervene once or several times with special game turns in the normal game state between the end of the first time-saving game state and the transition to the second time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-saving game state can occur while a normal game turn is in progress. This configuration is effective in such cases as well.

In addition, in configurations where a game ball can enter the through gate 64 during left-handed play (in other words, where a ball can normally enter the through gate 64 during normal play), it is natural that a normal play round will be in progress when the game transitions from normal play to the second time-saving play state, so this configuration is also effective for such pachinko machines.

As mentioned above, when transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state, the normal game round is forcibly terminated or rewritten to a losing result, but such processing is not performed when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state. When transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the normal game round is already being played in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode before the transition, and if the variable display of the normal game round were to be terminated midway or rewritten to a losing result in such a situation, it could actually result in a delay in the start timing of the opening and closing of the device.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

During the first special game, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated before a transition to the second time-saving game state is determined.

With this configuration, if the cumulative number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number of times during the final play in the first time-shortened play state, the first time-shortened play state can be ended and the game can be transitioned to the second time-shortened play state. This prevents the transition to the second time-shortened play state from being restricted due to the first time-shortened play state, and allows for optimal control of the play state. Furthermore, because the first time-shortened play state can be ended and the transition to the second time-shortened play state can be performed within the same play time, a seamless transition from the first time-shortened play state to the second time-shortened play state can be achieved without the need for an intervening special game time in the normal play state. This creates a state equivalent to the number of remaining play times in the time-shortened play state being increased, making it possible to optimally arouse the player's enjoyment.

This embodiment can also be seen as being configured so that, in one special game session, a determination is made as to whether the first time-saving game state has ended before a determination is made as to whether to transition to the second time-saving game state. In this case, the same effect as above can be achieved.

The first time-saving game state is configured to include a predetermined first time-saving game state (a time-saving game state corresponding to a 4R special jackpot result A, and a time-saving game state corresponding to a 4R regular jackpot result A) whose upper limit number of times is set to the same number of times as the ceiling number of times.

In this case, if the specified first time-shortened game state is implemented as the first time-shortened game state, the number of losing play times will naturally reach the ceiling number of times in the final play time, allowing the first time-shortened game state to transition to the second time-shortened game state. In other words, even if the first time-shortened game state ends without a jackpot being achieved, the transition to the second time-shortened game state triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times will add to the remaining play times in the time-shortened game state, and from the player's perspective, this significantly increases the chance of achieving a jackpot in the time-shortened game state compared to when such an addition to the remaining play times is not made. This not only provides the player with the enjoyment of anticipating that the specified time-shortened game state will be selected, but it also increases the appeal (appeal to the player) of the specified time-shortened game state, making it possible to effectively stimulate their desire to play.

If a regular game round is currently being played when the transition to the second time-saving game state is made, the regular game round can be ended.

For example, if a win occurs at the through gate 64 immediately before the transition to the second time-saving game state, the resulting normal game round and feature opening/closing game will be played in an unfavorable manner corresponding to the normal game state. In this case, if the transition is made via the opening/closing execution mode, as in the conventional time-saving game state, the normal game round that occurs in such a situation can be terminated within the opening/closing execution mode, thereby preventing its impact on the second time-saving game state. However, in the case of the second time-saving game state that is transitioned to without going through the opening/closing execution mode, there is no time period to absorb the normal game round that began before the transition, raising concerns that the unfavorable normal game round that corresponds to the normal game state may continue even after the transition to the second time-saving game state. In this regard, by terminating a normal game round that is currently being played when the transition to the second time-saving game state is about to occur, it is possible to prevent the unfavorable normal game round that corresponds to the normal game state from continuing even after the transition to the second time-saving game state. This allows players to quickly enjoy the benefits of the second time-saving gaming state.

If the result of the support lottery for the regular game that was terminated was a support winning result (regular winning result), it will be changed to a losing result.

With this configuration, after a regular game round ends, the next regular game round can be started without going through the opening and closing of the reel. This allows the start timing of the advantageous regular game round or reel opening and closing game corresponding to the second time-saving game state to be accelerated, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the second time-saving game state more quickly.

If a regular game turn is in progress when a transition to the second time-saving game state is made and the confirmation display is being executed for that regular game turn, the execution of the termination process is restricted.

For example, if a confirmation display is forcibly terminated while it is being displayed, the notification period for the stop result (support lottery notification result) will be shortened. As a result, there is a concern that the visibility of the stop result will be reduced, making it difficult for players to understand the support lottery result. In this regard, by limiting the execution of a forced termination when a confirmation display is in progress, an appropriate notification period can be ensured and a reduction in the visibility of the stop result can be prevented.

Furthermore, a configuration that changes the result of the support lottery to a losing result can achieve the following effect. For example, if the result of the support lottery for a regular game round during which the confirmation display is being executed is a winning support result when a transition to the second time-saving game state is made, and the confirmation display is forcibly terminated and rewritten to a losing result in response to the transition to the second time-saving game state, the confirmation display corresponding to the winning support result that was being displayed before the transition to the second time-saving game state will first be displayed, and then the confirmation display will end due to the forced termination associated with the transition to the second time-saving game state. In other words, although the confirmation display is internally rewritten to a losing result, this is not reflected in the stop results, and the stop results corresponding to the changed losing result will not be displayed, and only the stop results corresponding to the previous winning support result will be displayed. In this case, if the device opening/closing play is not performed despite the support win result being announced, this could cause players to feel distrustful and reduce their trust in the pachinko machine and the gaming hall. In this regard, by restricting the execution of forced termination when the confirmation display is in progress, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies between the reported result and the changed support lottery result, and ultimately to prevent the occurrence of situations where the opening and closing of the device is not performed when the support winning result has been reported.

When the number of misses reaches the ceiling, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round in which the ceiling is reached.

When the confirmation display ends for a special symbol game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling, the next special symbol game round, the first special symbol game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state, begins. In this configuration, the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display for the special symbol game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling, ensuring a grace period (a period during which the game state has transitioned to the second time-saving game state, but a special symbol game round since the transition to the second time-saving game state has not yet been played) between the time the game round ends and the first special symbol game round is played. If a regular symbol game round ends in response to the transition to the second time-saving game state, and the next regular symbol game round is started during that grace period, the regular symbol game round can be started prior to the special symbol game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state. As a result, the timing at which the normal power device 63a starts opening and closing the device is accelerated, making it possible to create a situation in which winning is more likely to occur in the second operating port 63 after transitioning to the second time-saving game state.

The grace period is configured to be longer than the final display time of the regular game that was subject to termination processing.

With this configuration, the final display of the normal game round, whose variable display is terminated by the termination process, ends in the middle of the grace period, making it possible to start the next normal game round before the grace period ends. Because the next normal game round is played in the second time-saving game state, the first normal game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state can be started before the first special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. This accelerates the start timing of the opening and closing of the reels after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, making it possible to create a situation in which winning through the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur.

The process for ending a regular game session in response to a transition to the time-saving game state is configured to be performed when transitioning from the regular game state to the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state).

With this configuration, the end process for a normal game round is executed in response to the change from an unfavorable situation to an advantageous situation in which the normal game round or the opening and closing of the device is being played, making it possible to optimally demonstrate each of the above effects.

If the condition for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is met while the game is in the time-shortened game state (if the ceiling number of plays, which is the condition for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state, is reached in the final play of the first time-shortened game state), the execution of the above-mentioned termination process is restricted.

If the transition conditions to the time-saving game state are met while the game is in the time-saving game state, the normal game round and the opening and closing of the device have already been executed in a manner appropriate to the time-saving game state before the transition conditions are met. Therefore, if the termination process is performed in this situation, the normal game round will be forcibly terminated in its current state by the termination process, and the next normal game round will begin without the device opening and closing game being played. The device opening and closing game will then begin after the normal game round has ended. In other words, the start timing of the device opening and closing game may be delayed compared to when the normal game round is allowed to continue without being forcibly terminated. Therefore, by selectively using or not using the termination process when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state and when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the time-saving game state, the device opening and closing game can be started quickly in either case.

The confirmed display time for a special game in which the transition condition to the second time-saving game state (reaching the ceiling number of misses) is met is set to the specific confirmed display time, and is configured to be longer than the confirmed display time (normal confirmed display time) for other special game in which the transition condition is not met.

To allow players to smoothly begin playing in the time-saving game state, it is preferable to notify the player of the transition to the time-saving game state before the start of the first special symbol game round after the transition to the time-saving game state. In this case, if the transition is made via an opening/closing execution mode, as in conventional time-saving game states, it is possible to use the period of the opening/closing execution mode (e.g., the ending period) to issue a notification corresponding to the transition to a specific game state. However, in the case of a time-saving game state that does not transition via an opening/closing execution mode, such as the second time-saving game state of this embodiment, the first special symbol game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state is immediately played after the special symbol game round in which the transition conditions are met ends, making it difficult to ensure the execution period for such a notification. In this regard, by extending the confirmation display time for the special symbol game round in which the transition conditions to the second time-saving game state are met, the timing of the start of the first special symbol game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state can be delayed, making it possible to optimally ensure the execution period for the notification notifying the transition to the second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the configuration of lengthening the confirmation display time for a special game turn in which the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving game state are met has the advantage of ensuring that the grace period is longer than the confirmation display time for a regular game turn that is the subject of termination processing. When establishing such a relationship, it is possible to shorten the confirmation display time for a regular game turn that is the subject of termination processing compared to the normal confirmation display time. However, in this case, there is a concern that shortening the display time of the stop results will reduce their visibility, making it difficult for players to properly understand the results of the support lottery. In this regard, by lengthening the confirmation display time for a special game turn, it is possible to avoid unreasonably shortening the confirmation display time for a regular game turn, making it possible to establish the above relationship without impairing the visibility of the stop results.

When transitioning from normal play mode to time-saving play mode (second time-saving play mode), the confirmation display time for the special game mode in which the transition conditions are met is extended.

With this configuration, the longer confirmation display time in a game session in which the transition conditions are met allows the player time to prepare for the switch to the time-saving game state. In particular, in this embodiment, left-handed play is recommended in the normal game state, while right-handed play is recommended in the time-saving game state. Therefore, when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state, an operation to switch the game ball launch strength is required. With this configuration, it is possible to optimally secure time for such an operation to switch the launch strength.

<Modification 1>
A first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 138. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, when the ceiling number of play times is reached during the first special symbol play round and the game transitions to the second time-saving play state, the normal symbol play round is played before the special symbol play round. However, in this modified example, the opening and closing of the device corresponding to the second time-saving play state is played before the special symbol play round.

<About the specific confirmation display time>
In this modified example, the length of the specific fixed display time set when the ceiling number of times is reached in the first special symbol game round is longer than in the case of the second embodiment. Specifically, the specific fixed display time is set to a time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than the total period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol game round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

<About the transition to the second time-saving game mode>
The transition from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state will be described with reference to Figure 137. Here, the variable display of the special game number when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is performed from timing t1 to timing t3, and the variable display of the normal game number is started at timing t2, which is an intermediate timing.

When a special game round (special game round for the first special game round) begins in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling during normal game mode, the variable display will be displayed from timing t1 to timing t3. When the variable display time has elapsed at timing t3, the final display of the special game round will begin. In this case, the final display time will be set to the specific final display time described above (for example, 4 seconds).

Furthermore, at timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the ceiling number of plays being reached, and a transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is made (Fig. 137 (a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the fifth upper limit number of plays (e.g., 900 plays) corresponding to the duration of the second time-shortened gaming state.

On the other hand, if the normal game round starts at timing t2, which is midway through the variable display of the special game round, the game state at this point is normal game state, so the variable display time for that normal game round is set to the variable display time for normal game state (e.g., 30 seconds).

At timing t3, the confirmation display for the special game round in which the ceiling has been reached begins, and when the transition to the second time-saving game state is made, the variable display for the normal game round is forcibly terminated (Fig. 137 (c)). As a result, the variable display ends earlier than the variable display time set at timing t2 has elapsed. At this time, if the support judgment result for that normal game round is a support win result (normal win result), the judgment result is rewritten to a loss result. Therefore, after the above-mentioned forced termination, the confirmation display is made with the stop result corresponding to the loss result.

After that, when the final display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed at timing t4, the result has been rewritten to a miss as described above, so the opening and closing of the device by the normal power device 63a is not executed, and the next normal game round begins immediately. Since the game state at this point is the second time-saving game state, the variable display for that game round is performed using the short variable display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) for the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, the support determination in this case is performed under the high probability of winning for the second time-saving game state. Here, we will assume that the result of the support determination is a support win result.

When the variable display time for the normal game has elapsed at timing t5, the final display is then displayed for the set final display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Then, when that final display time has elapsed at timing t6, the normal power device 63a performs a device opening/closing game (Figure 137 (d)). This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second operating port 63.

Here, the period during which the confirmation display of the special game round that began at timing t3 continues (specific confirmation display time) is longer than the total period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the confirmation display time of the regular game round from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display time of the regular game round from timing t4 to timing t5, and the confirmation display time of the regular game round from timing t5 to timing t6. As a result, the opening and closing of the device will begin in the middle of the confirmation display of the special game round.

When the specific confirmation display time has elapsed at timing t7, the first special symbol game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is executed. As mentioned above, in this modified example, the device opening and closing game begins prior to the first special symbol game round, so a winning entry into the second operating port 63 can occur during the period before the first special symbol game round begins, ensuring a period of time for obtaining reserved information for the second special symbol. Therefore, reserved information for the second special symbol can be present at the time the first special symbol game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state begins. This makes it possible to execute a game round of the second special symbol, which is more favored than the first special symbol, as the first special symbol game round.

In the above case, in order to encourage the acquisition of reserved information for the second special symbol during the period T from timing t6 to timing t7, it is preferable to issue a predetermined notification encouraging the ball to enter the second operating port 63. The specific form of the predetermined notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. 138, it is preferable to display a right-hit notification image 477a and a target guide image 477b containing text such as "Aim for the electric chute!" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. The right-hit notification image 477a encourages the game ball to be fired in the right direction in the game area PE, and the target guide image 477b guides the player to the target where the game ball should enter.

The above-mentioned predetermined notification may be made after timing t3 when the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs, but in this case, it is preferable to make it at a predetermined timing at least before timing t7 when the confirmation display of the special game round in which the conditions for transition to the second time-saving game state are met ends. This predetermined timing may be any timing before timing t6 when the reel opening and closing game begins, or any timing between timing t6 and timing t7 (the timing when the specific confirmation display time has elapsed). Considering the operation period for the player to adjust the firing intensity, it is preferable for the above notification to be made before the reel opening and closing game begins (before the normal electric reel 63a is opened), and it is preferable to make the timing between timing t3 and timing t6 the predetermined timing.

At timing t7 when the first special symbol play round begins after transitioning to the second time-saving play state, there may be reserved information for not only the second special symbol, but also the first special symbol. In this regard, in this modified example, when reserved information for both the first and second special symbols exists, the second special symbol play round is given priority (Figure 109), so even in such cases, it is possible to play the second special symbol play round as the first special symbol play round.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The confirmation display for the first regular game turn after transitioning to the second time-saving game state can be completed before the first special game turn after transitioning to the second time-saving game state begins.

In this case, if the result of the support lottery for the first regular game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is a support win, the device opening/closing game can be started and the regular device 63a can be put into the open state before the first special game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state starts. This makes it possible to generate a winning entry into the second operating port 63 and store reserved information for the second special game before the first special game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state starts, making it possible to play the second special game as the first special game.

The system is configured to transition to the second time-saving game state in conjunction with the start of the confirmation display for the special game round for which the transition conditions have been met, and to issue a predetermined notification to encourage winning through the second operating port 63 at least before the confirmation display for the special game round ends.

By transitioning to the second time-shortened game state in conjunction with the start of the confirmation display of the special symbol game round for which the transition conditions have been met, a grace period can be secured after the transition to the second time-shortened game state until the first special symbol game round is played (a period during which the game state has transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, but the special symbol game round since the transition to the second time-shortened game state has not yet been played). In a configuration that allows the opening and closing of the device to begin before the start of the first special symbol game round after the transition to the second time-shortened game state, by issuing a notification encouraging a win through the second operating port 63 during the grace period, it becomes easier for the player to accumulate reserved information for the second special symbol before the start of the first special symbol game round.

<Modification 2>
A second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 139 to 140. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number during the first time-saving game state, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state. The specific configuration for this is explained below.

<About the second time-saving game state>
The second time-shortened game state of this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 139. In this modified example, in addition to the first time-shortened game state to which a transition is made in response to a normal jackpot result, a second time-shortened game state to which a transition is made in response to the number of misses reaching the ceiling number of times is provided.

In this modified example, the ceiling number of times in the second time-shortened game state is set to a number (e.g., 800 times) that is lower than the third upper limit number of times in the first time-shortened game state (e.g., 1,000 times). Therefore, if a 4R normal jackpot result A occurs and the game transitions to the first time-shortened game state after the end of the open/close execution mode, and if multiple misses occur in the first time-shortened game state, the cumulative number of misses will reach the ceiling number of times before reaching the number of times the first time-shortened game state ends. Note that, as with the first embodiment above, the duration of the transition to the second time-shortened game state is until the number of special game plays after the transition to the second time-shortened game state reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900 times).

<Processing for transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The second time-shortened gaming state transition processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 140. This processing is executed in step Sb512 of the special game number control processing (Fig. 108) in the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the second time-shortened gaming state transition processing in Fig. 119. In Fig. 140, processing similar to that in Fig. 119 is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1404 (the high probability flag is not set), the value in the miss count counter area HC in RAM 314 is updated in step Sb1405. Specifically, the value in the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0." If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0," that is, if the number of times the special symbol has been played as a miss has reached the ceiling number of times, it proceeds to step Sb3101, where it is determined whether the first support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. The first support flag is used by MPU 312 to determine that the first time-saving game state is in effect.

If the first support flag is set, i.e., if the first time-shortened game state is in progress, proceed to step Sb3102, where the first support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sb1407, a second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and the second time-shortened game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is initiated. In other words, in this modified example, if the value in the miss count counter area HC becomes "0" during the first time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state is switched to the second time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state is forcibly activated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3101 (the first support flag is not set), i.e., if the first time-saving game state is not in effect, the second support flag is set in step Sb1407 without executing the processing of step Sb3102.

After execution of step Sb1407, in step Sb1408, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM 314. Even if a transition to the second time-shortened game state is made during the first time-shortened game state, the same value is set as when a transition is made from the normal game state (a state that is not in the first time-shortened game state) to the second time-shortened game state. In other words, if a transition is made to the second time-shortened game state during the first time-shortened game state, regardless of the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state at that time, the remaining number of times in the subsequent high-frequency support mode is rewritten to the fifth upper limit number of times for the second time-shortened game state.

In step Sb1409, a second time-shortened game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the effect control device 143. The set second time-shortened game state start command is sent to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107). Then, the process proceeds to step Sb1410, where it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

<About the transition to the second time-saving game state>
The following describes the process of transitioning to the second time-saving game state. Here, we will explain the case where a transition to the first time-saving game state with a third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1,000 times) is triggered by a 4R normal jackpot result A, and then a transition to the second time-saving game state is triggered by the number of misses reaching a ceiling number of times (e.g., 800 times).

When the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. This causes a transition to the first time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode. At this time, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1,000 times) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM 314.

Then, when the cumulative number of miss plays in the first time-shortened game state reaches 800 and the ceiling number of plays is reached, the first support flag is cleared for the special symbol play that reached the ceiling, and the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. At this time, even though the number of plays executed in the first time-shortened game state has not yet reached the third upper limit number of plays and there are 200 remaining plays, the first time-shortened game state is switched to the second time-shortened game state. Then, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of plays (for example, 900 plays) is set in the support counter area SC.

In the symbol display device 75, as in the first embodiment described above, an additional effect (Fig. 130 (b) to (d)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is added. However, the additional number of times announced by this additional effect is the fifth upper limit number minus the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state (for example, 700 times). In other words, internally, the remaining number of times of 200 times is canceled and a new number of times of 900 is set as the duration of the high-frequency support mode, but from the player's perspective, it is presented as if 700 times have been added.

In this modified example, the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is updated before a transition decision to the second time-saving gaming state is made (Figs. 108, 118, and 140). The advantages of such a configuration will be explained with reference to Fig. 141.

To facilitate understanding, we will use a comparative example in which a decision to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is made before the remaining number of times the time-shortened gaming state is updated, and explain the differences from the configuration of this modified example. Furthermore, to make it easier to compare the two, we will assume that transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is permitted during the first time-shortened gaming state in the comparative example as well.

In the comparative example configuration, when the cumulative number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number during the first time-shortened game state, a transition determination to the second time-shortened game state is first made, switching from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state. The remaining number of plays in the time-shortened game state is then updated during the same special symbol play, so even though no special symbol play has actually been performed in the second time-shortened game state, the remaining number of plays in the second time-shortened game state is decremented by one. As a result, the number of special symbol play plays that can be played in the second time-shortened game state becomes 899, one less play.

In contrast, in this modified example, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined after the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state has been updated, so after switching from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times in the second time-shortened game state is not deducted for that special symbol game round. In other words, the remaining number of times in the second time-shortened game state is deducted after the next special symbol game round (the special symbol game round executed after the transition to the second time-shortened game state) begins, so the number of special symbol game rounds that can be played in the second time-shortened game state is 900. In other words, it is possible to optimally ensure the number of special symbol game rounds that can be played in the second time-shortened game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If the transition condition is met during the first time-shortened game state, transition to the second time-shortened game state is permitted, and the system is configured so that, during one special game round, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is updated before a transition decision to the second time-shortened game state is made.

This configuration prevents the update of the remaining number of times during a special game cycle from being executed immediately after the transition to the second time-saving game state during that special game cycle. This allows the remaining number of times after the transition to the second time-saving game state to be properly secured, enabling optimal control of the game state.

<Modification 3>
Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 142 to 156. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment and each modification will be given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the losing results in the win/lose lottery for the special game round include a normal losing result and a special losing result, and if the result of the win/lose lottery is a special losing result, the system is configured to transition to the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without transitioning to the open/close execution mode. Note that the normal losing result is the same as the losing result in the second embodiment above. Furthermore, this modified example does not have the functionality of the second time-saving game state.

<Special game winning/losing table>
In this modified example, a win/loss table for the first special symbol and a win/loss table for the second special symbol are provided as win/loss tables used in the win/loss lottery during the special symbol game. The win/loss table for the first special symbol is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the start winning of the first operating port 62 (the start port of the first special symbol), and the win/loss table for the second special symbol is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the start winning of the second operating port 63 (the start port of the second special symbol). Note that the win/loss table for the first special symbol is the same as the win/loss table (Figure 101) in the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The win/loss table for the second special design is stored in the win/loss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 142, the win/loss table for the second special design includes a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode. When drawing the win/loss lottery, if the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and if the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 142 (a), in the win/lose table for low probability mode, a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 300 values from "10" to "309" are set as the random number values that result in a special miss. In other words, the probability of a special miss result in low probability mode is set to 1/10. Other random number values are assigned to normal miss results, and the probability of a normal miss result in low probability mode is set to 2690/3000.

In addition, the win/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to the first special design does not set a special loss result as a lottery result. In other words, the special loss result can only be won when a right-hand hit is performed in a situation where a win into the second operating port 63 is possible.

As shown in Figure 142 (b), in the win/loss table for high probability mode, a total of 50 random number values ranging from "0" to "49" are set as jackpot random numbers, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the win/loss table for high probability mode, no special losing results are set as lottery results, and all values other than the random number value for the jackpot are assigned to normal losing results. The probability of a normal losing result in high probability mode is set to 59/60.

<Special game type table>
As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 143(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (FIG. 143(b)) are set.

As shown in Figure 143(a), the jackpot type table for the first special design sets the selectable jackpot types as a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being executed.

A 4R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability gaming state continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and transitions to a normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

A 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit (e.g., 100 plays). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, jackpot type counter C2 values of "0" to "64" correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, and values of "65" to "99" correspond to a 4R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in Figure 143 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special design sets the selectable jackpot types as a 10R special jackpot result and a 10R regular jackpot result. Both of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being executed.

A 10R special jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high-probability game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high-probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit (e.g., 100 plays). A 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a first time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 plays).

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 10R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

In addition, this modified example includes another type table, a type table for special losses. The type table for special losses is a type table that is referenced when the result of the lottery is a special loss, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313.

As shown in Figure 144 (a), the special loss type table sets special loss result A and special loss result B as selectable special loss types. Special loss result A is a special loss result that transitions to third time-shortened game state A, and special loss result B is a special loss result that transitions to third time-shortened game state B.

As shown in Figure 144 (b), the third time-shortened game state A is a game state in low probability mode and high frequency support mode, and continues until the number of special game turns played after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state A reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 900 turns). The third time-shortened game state B is also a game state in low probability mode and high frequency support mode, and continues until the number of special game turns played after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state B reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 100 turns), which is less than the fifth upper limit. In other words, the third time-shortened game state A is more advantageous for the player than the third time-shortened game state B.

Note that since special miss results A and B are both miss results, the opening and closing execution mode will not be executed. In other words, if these results occur, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state A or B without going through the opening and closing execution mode.

In the special miss type table, "0" to "9" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to special miss result A, and "10" to "99" correspond to special miss result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to special miss result A is set to 10%, and the probability of being assigned to special miss result B is set to 90%.

The random number value (jackpot type counter C2) used to determine the special miss type is also used to determine the stop result of the image that will stop and be displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS if the result of the win/lose lottery results in a special miss. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple data sets for the stop results (special miss images that will stop and be displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS) in the event of a special miss, corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data set corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read from among these multiple stop result data sets. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine both the stop result and the special miss type, so there is a correlation between the special miss image that stops and be displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS and the special miss type determined when that special miss occurs.

In this modified example, the special loss type is selected by lottery using the jackpot type counter C2, but a dedicated counter value (random number for selection) corresponding to the special loss result may be prepared, and the special loss type may be selected by lottery using that dedicated counter value.

The special loss type may also be determined by substituting an existing counter value other than the jackpot type counter C2, such as the fluctuation type counter CS. In this case, since the number of types of special loss results is expected to be smaller than the number of types of fluctuation patterns, etc., the above lottery may be performed using a portion (some bit value) of the fluctuation type counter CS, etc.

<Special game play control processing>
The special symbol game number control process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 145. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (Figure 107) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the special symbol game number control process in Figure 108. In Figure 145, the same process as in Figure 108 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb503 (the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable symbol), step Sb504 determines whether the common hold number CRN is "0". If the common hold number CRN is not "0", that is, if there is hold information for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, proceed to step Sb505 and execute the data setting process. In the data setting process, the hold information stored in the first special symbol hold area Ra or the second special symbol hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb3201, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special chart display unit 43. The change start process of step Sb3201 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 146. Note that in Figure 146, processes that are similar to the change start process in Figure 110 will be assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3301, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM314. The second special symbol flag is used by MPU312 to determine that the current special symbol game is a second special symbol game.

If the second special symbol flag is not set, i.e., if the current special symbol play is for the first special symbol, the win/loss table for the first special symbol (Figure 101) is referenced in step Sb3302 to determine whether it has been won or lost. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode (Figure 101(a)) is referenced, and if it is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode (Figure 101(b)) is referenced.

If the second special symbol flag is set, that is, if the current special symbol play is a special symbol play of the second special symbol, the win/loss table for the second special symbol (Figure 142) is referenced in step Sb3303 to determine whether it has been won or lost. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode (Figure 142(a)) is referenced, and if it is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode (Figure 142(b)) is referenced.

After step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is executed, step Sb3304 determines whether the result of the win/loss determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 indicates a jackpot win. If a jackpot win is determined, proceed to step Sb3305, where the corresponding jackpot type table (Figure 143) is referenced to determine the jackpot type.

In step Sb3306, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 4R special jackpot result, a 4R special jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sb3307, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3304 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, where it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment made in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special loss result. If the result is a special loss, the special loss type is determined by lottery in step Sb3309, referring to the special loss type table (Figure 144 (a)).

In step Sb3310, a special loss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The special loss flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special loss result. Multiple types of special loss flags are prepared according to the type of special loss, and in step Sb3310, the special loss flag corresponding to the type selected in step Sb3309 is set. For example, if the selected special loss type is special loss result A, special loss flag A is set.

In step Sb3311, the stop result for a special miss is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3308 (if the result is not a special loss), it means that the result of this lottery is a normal loss. In this case, proceed to step Sb3312 and set the stop result for a normal loss. In this modified example, only one type of stop result for a loss is provided, and that stop result is set in step Sb3312.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, step Sb3313 executes a variable display time setting process to set the variable display time for the current game round on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time is selected by lottery using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table. The variable display time table for this modified example will now be explained with reference to Figure 147.

In this modified example, the variable display time tables include at least a variable display time table for special misses on the second special symbol, and a variable display time table for normal misses on the second special symbol. Furthermore, each of these variable display time tables is set to one for the first time-shortened game state, and one for the normal game state in the reserved portion after the first time-shortened game state. The reserved portion here refers to the special symbol game rounds that will be played in the normal game state after the first time-shortened game state has ended, based on the reserved information for the second special symbol that exists at the end of the first time-shortened game state. Since the maximum number of reserved second special symbols is four, the reserved special symbol game rounds will be played a maximum of four times.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special symbol (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special symbol results in a special miss while in the first time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 147(a), this variable display time table is configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of special symbol game plays executed since transitioning to the first time-saving game state (in other words, since the open/close execution mode is executed). Specifically, if the number of special symbol game plays executed since transitioning to the first time-saving game state is between 1 and 99 and a special miss occurs, variable pattern Z1 (e.g., 8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected; and if the number of special symbol game plays executed since transitioning to the first time-saving game state is 100, i.e., the final game play in the first time-saving game state, variable pattern Z2 (e.g., 15 seconds) is selected.

Fluctuation pattern Z1 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and fluctuation pattern Z2 corresponds to a special reach miss effect. In other words, when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a complete miss effect as a play-round effect, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z2 is sent to the effect control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a special reach miss effect as a play-round effect. A complete miss effect is when symbols are displayed in a stop state with a miss symbol combination, without a reach display. The special reach miss effect will be described in more detail later.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special symbol (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special symbol is a normal miss while in the first time-saving game state. This variable display time table is also configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special symbol has been played since the transition to the first time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 147 (b).

Of these, if a normal miss occurs when the number of special symbol play times since transitioning to the first time-saving play state is between 1 and 99, the situation is the same as the case shown in Figure 113 (d) described in the second embodiment above, and so a description thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, if a normal miss occurs in the final play time in the first time-saving play state, variation pattern Z3 (8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS. Variation pattern Z3 corresponds to a complete miss effect.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special chart (normal play state for reserved special charts) is referenced when a special miss occurs during play of the reserved special chart. As shown in Figure 147 (c), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern Z4 (15 seconds) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern Z4 corresponds to the special reach miss effect.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special chart (normal play state for reserved special charts) is referenced when a normal miss occurs during play of the reserved special chart. As shown in Figure 147 (d), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern Z5 (8 seconds) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern Z5 corresponds to a complete miss effect.

Because each variable display time table is configured as described above, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a special miss during the final play round through the reserved play rounds, a reach effect will be executed, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a regular miss, the execution of the reach effect will be restricted. Therefore, if a reach effect is executed during the final play round through the reserved play rounds, a jackpot or special miss result will be confirmed, and the player will be able to predict that the result will not be a regular miss before the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 all stop. In other words, during these play rounds, players will play in strong anticipation of a reach effect occurring, which will greatly increase the level of attention paid to the behavior of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Each of these variable display time tables is stored in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313. Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 147 are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

In addition, a variable display time table for normal gaming (other than reserved amounts) and a variable display time table for high probability gaming are also provided, but these are similar to the cases in Figures 112 and 113 described in the second embodiment above, so their explanation will be omitted.

The variable display time table for the third time-saving game state is the same as the variable display time table for the time-saving game state shown in Figures 113(c) and (d). Note that, because right-hand play is performed in the third time-saving game state, a special miss result may occur in the lottery for the special game round. In this case, the variable display time table for misses (for time-saving game state) shown in Figure 113(d) is referenced, and the variable display time is drawn without distinguishing it from a normal miss result.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 146), the fluctuation display time setting process in step Sb3313 determines the current game status, the results of the win/lose lottery, the number of times the special game has been played, etc., and references the fluctuation display time table corresponding to these determined results to determine the fluctuation display time (fluctuation pattern). The calculated fluctuation display time is then set in the fluctuation display time counter area of RAM314 as the fluctuation display time for the current special game.

In the following step Sb712, a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a variable display for a special game round is in progress. After step Sb712 is executed, processing from step Sb713 onwards is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart play count control process (Figure 145), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb507 (the variable display time has elapsed), the process proceeds to step Sb509, where the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of times in high probability mode or to end the high probability mode.

In step Sb511, high-frequency support mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode and to end the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb3202, third time-shortened game state transition processing is executed to control the transition to the third time-shortened game state (Figure 144 (b)). In step Sb3203, confirmation display start processing is executed to start confirmation display on the special symbol display unit 43, and then the special symbol game count control processing is terminated.

<Third time-saving gaming state transition processing>
The third time-shortening gaming state transition process of step Sb3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 148. This process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update/termination process of step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM344. If the special miss flag has been set, that is, if the result of this special drawing is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, where it is determined whether a high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. The high probability flag indicates that the current game state is a high probability game state.

If the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the game is not in a high probability game state, step Sb3403 determines whether the first support flag or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag indicates that the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, and the third support flag indicates that the current game state is the third time-shortened game state.

If neither the first support flag nor the third support flag is set, i.e., if the game is not in either the first time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state, proceed to step Sb3404 and set the third support flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to the third time-shortened game state.

In step Sb3405, it is determined whether the type of the current special miss result is special miss result A. This determination is made by determining the type of special miss flag set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the result is a special miss A, proceed to step Sb3406 and set a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900) in the support counter area SC of RAM314. As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to be transitioned to is set to third time-saving gaming state A.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3405 (if the special miss result is not special miss result A), that is, if the type of special miss result is special miss result B, proceed to step Sb3407, and set a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) in the support counter area SC. As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to be transitioned to is set to third time-saving gaming state B.

After execution of step Sb3406 or step Sb3407, in step Sb3408, a third time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. At that time, if a transition to third time-shortened gaming state A is to occur, a start command corresponding to third time-shortened gaming state A is set, and if a transition to third time-shortened gaming state B is to occur, a start command corresponding to third time-shortened gaming state B is set. Each of these start commands includes information indicating the upper limit number of plays.

The set third time-shortened game state start command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107). By sending the third time-shortened game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the third time-shortened game state. After step Sb3408 is executed, the third time-shortened game state transition processing ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb3402 (if the high probability flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb3403 (if either the first support flag or the third support flag is set), the processing for transitioning to the third time-limited game state is terminated without executing the processing of steps Sb3404 to Sb3408. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation where the game is in the high probability game state, the first time-limited game state, or the third time-limited game state, transition to the third time-limited game state is restricted, and the special miss result for the current special game round is invalidated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3401 (the special miss flag is not set), the processing for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb3402 onwards, in order to continue the gaming state at that time.

<Processing for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the finalized display in step Sb3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 149. In Fig. 149, the same processes as those in the process for starting the finalized display in Fig. 120(a) are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3501, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag has been set, i.e., if the result of this special symbol win/loss lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sb3502, where the process clears the special miss flag. In the following step Sb3503, the normal fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set as the fixed display time for this special symbol game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3501 (the special miss flag is not set), that is, if the result of this special drawing is not a special miss, step Sb3504 determines whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, proceed to step Sb3503, and set the normal confirmed display time as the confirmed display time for this special drawing game.

If the result is not a jackpot, that is, if the result of this special symbol lottery is a normal miss, step Sb3505 determines whether this special symbol play is the final play (100th play) in the first time-saving play state. If it is not the final play, proceed to step Sb3503, and the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for this special symbol play.

On the other hand, if it is the final play, proceed to step Sb3506 and determine whether the normal play round is currently displaying a variable result. Note that in this case, the normal play round is one whose variable result display began before the start of the final play round display in the first time-saving play state, and for which a support lottery was conducted in the first time-saving play state (a lottery in which the winning probability was high).

If the normal game turn is currently being displayed as a variable, proceed to step Sb3507, where it is determined whether the win/loss result of the normal game turn currently being displayed as a variable is a support win result (normal win result). If it is a support win result, proceed to step Sb3508, where the win/loss result of the normal game turn currently being displayed as a variable is changed to a loss result. In the following step Sb3509, the stop result for the loss result is set as the stop result for the normal game turn.

After step Sb3509 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3507 (if the winning/losing result of the regular game currently being displayed is a losing result), the display of the regular game's winning/losing result is forcibly terminated in step Sb3510. After that, the stopping result corresponding to the losing result is displayed on the regular game display unit 44 after a predetermined display confirmation time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

After step Sb3510 is executed, step Sb3511 sets a specific fixed display time, which is longer than the normal fixed display time, as the fixed display time for the current special game. This specific fixed display time is longer than the execution period of the reel opening/closing game in the first time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) shown in FIG. 103(c) (opening time 2 sec + interval period 0.2 sec + opening time 2 sec = 4.2 sec), and more specifically, it is longer than 4.7 sec, which is the total period of the fixed display time for the normal game (e.g., 0.5 sec) and the execution period of the reel opening/closing game. In this modified example, the specific fixed display time is set to, for example, 5 sec. Note that in a configuration in which multiple types of reel opening/closing games with different opening times or opening times are provided as reel opening/closing games in the first time-saving game state, a time longer than the longest of those times is set as the specific fixed display time.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3506 (the regular game round is not currently displaying a variable display), the process proceeds to step Sb3511 without executing the processing of steps Sb3507 to Sb3510, and the specific fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for the current special game round.

After step Sb3511 or step Sb3503 is executed, in step Sb1504, a confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In step Sb1505, the special image display unit 43 is controlled to start confirmation display, and in step Sb1506, a variation end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

In step Sb3512, an external signal setting process is performed to output a game execution signal to the management control device on the amusement hall side to notify that a special game round has been played (more specifically, that the variable display has ended). The game execution signal is used by the amusement hall side to determine the number of special game rounds played, and to display the number of special game rounds played after a jackpot on a data counter on the amusement center, etc. In the external signal setting process, the game execution signal is set to remain on for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the external signal setting process in step Sb3512 performs setting processing to output a lottery result signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side to notify the result of this special winning/losing lottery. Specifically, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a jackpot, a lottery result signal corresponding to a jackpot is output; if the result is a normal loss, a lottery result signal corresponding to a normal loss is output; and if the result is a special loss, a lottery result signal corresponding to a special loss is output.

These multiple lottery result signals may be assigned a signal wiring (output terminal of external output terminal 213) for each signal, or may share a single signal wiring and be output for each of these lottery result signals. In the latter case, it is advisable to vary the signal state (output level, output period when on, output timing, etc.) of the lottery result signal transmitted over a single signal wiring for each result of the win/lose lottery. In this case, the management control device on the amusement hall side that receives the lottery result signal can determine the result of the win/lose lottery based on the difference in signal state.

Here, in this modified example, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a special miss, there are cases where a transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs afterwards, and cases where such a transition does not occur (when a positive judgment is made in step Sb3402 or step Sb3403 of the processing for transition to the third time-shortened game state (Figure 148)). In either case, the external signal setting processing in step Sb3512 is set to output a lottery result signal corresponding to a special miss.

If a transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur, it may be possible to treat this as a normal miss and output a lottery result signal in a manner corresponding to a normal miss. From the perspective of ensuring consistency with the subsequent game state (a state in which a transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur), it would be more logical to output a signal corresponding to a normal miss than to output a signal corresponding to a special miss, as in this modified example.

However, with a configuration that outputs a lottery result signal corresponding to a normal loss, the amusement hall will not be able to grasp the actual number of times a special loss result has occurred during play, raising concerns that it may be difficult to determine whether the odds of winning a special loss result are generally in line with the designed probability. In particular, because the number of special loss results notified to the amusement hall will be thinned out and less than the actual number, there is a risk that, for example, there may be a delay in discovering any activity that fraudulently increases the probability of a special loss result.

In this regard, regardless of whether a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs, by outputting an external signal for a special miss when the result of the lottery results in a special miss, the gaming hall can properly grasp the actual number of times a special miss result occurred, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 150. This process is started by the effect control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the effect setting process in Fig. 126. In Fig. 150, the same processes as those in Fig. 126 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control unit 162. If an ending command has been received, in step Sb2302, the first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the high probability gaming state or the first time-shortened gaming state.

After step Sb2302 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2301 (an ending command has not been received), step Sb2305 determines whether any game state end command has been received. If a game state end command has been received, step Sb2306 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state, the first time-limited game state, or the third time-limited game state.

After step Sb2306 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2305 (if no game state end command has been received), step Sb3601 executes special pattern change display processing to display changes in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. In step Sb2308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step Sb3601 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 151. In Fig. 151, the same process as the special chart change display processing of Fig. 132 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether a game round is currently being played. If a game round is not currently being played, it proceeds to step Sb2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

If a fluctuation start command has been received, proceed to step Sb3701 and execute fluctuation start processing to start the performance for the game round. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 152.

First, in step Sb3801, it is determined whether the current special symbol play round is the final play round in the first time-saving play state. If it is the final play round, proceed to step Sb3802 and set up so that a chance notification will be issued for the current special symbol play round. For the chance notification, as shown in FIG. 153(a), a chance notification image 478 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In the chance notification image 478, for example, a caption image with text such as "If a reach is reached, it's a chance" is displayed above the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. The chance notification begins with the final play round in the first time-saving play state and continues until the reserved special symbol play rounds for the second special symbol are completed after the first time-saving play state ends.

The chance notification may be displayed as a window displaying the above-mentioned text, or by illuminating a specific light-emitting element corresponding to the chance notification. The notification is not necessarily limited to a visual notification, and may also be an audio guide using the speaker unit 29.

After step Sb3802 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3801 (if this is not the final play in the first time-saving play state), step Sb3803 analyzes the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 and determines the fluctuation pattern for the current special play. Step Sb3804 determines whether the determined fluctuation pattern is either fluctuation pattern Z2 or fluctuation pattern Z4. Fluctuation pattern Z2 is selected if a special miss occurs in the final play in the first time-saving play state (Figure 147(b)), and fluctuation pattern Z4 is selected if a special miss occurs in the reserved special play in the normal play state (Figure 147(c)).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is either fluctuation pattern Z2 or fluctuation pattern Z4, proceed to step Sb3805 and set up the special reach miss effect to be executed as the effect for this special game round. Here, the special reach miss effect will be explained with reference to Figures 153 (b) to (d).

In the special reach-miss effect, first, as shown in Figure 153(b), the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in a reach combination on one of the active lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, resulting in a reach display. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row that stops last) is switched from a high-speed fluctuation display to a slow-speed fluctuation display, and at this time, as shown in Figure 153(c), a slow-speed fluctuation display is displayed with a special symbol 479 labeled, for example, "LUCKY," placed in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. Figure 153(c) shows an example in which a special symbol 479 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol, which is the symbol next to the "3" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Then, as shown in Figure 153(d), the slowly fluctuating special symbol 479 is displayed stopped on the reach line, and a special miss result is announced. In other words, in this modified example, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination in which the special symbol 479 of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line is the symbol combination that corresponds to the special miss result.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol fluctuation display process (FIG. 152), if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3804 (if it is neither fluctuation pattern Z2 nor fluctuation pattern Z4), step Sb3806 determines whether the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Z1, fluctuation pattern Z3, or fluctuation pattern Z5. Fluctuation pattern Z1 is selected when a special miss occurs in the first through 99th special symbol play times in the first time-saving play state (FIG. 147(a)), and fluctuation pattern Z3 is selected when a normal miss occurs in the final play time in the first time-saving play state (FIG. 147(b)). Furthermore, fluctuation pattern Z5 is selected when a normal miss occurs in the reserved special symbol play times in the normal play state (FIG. 147(d)).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Z1, fluctuation pattern Z3, or fluctuation pattern Z5, step Sb3807 sets the execution of a complete miss effect as the effect for the current special game round. Here, the execution of a complete miss effect is set not only when the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Z3 or fluctuation pattern Z5, but also when it is fluctuation pattern Z1, i.e., when the lottery result for the special game round is a special miss result. This corresponds to the fact that the effect is invalid even if a special miss result occurs during the first time-saving game state.

In other words, in the first through 99th special symbol game plays in the first time-saving game state, even if the result of the win/loss lottery is a special loss, the symbol rows Z1 through Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 75 are stopped and displayed in a complete loss combination. This notifies the player that this is simply a loss, making it impossible or difficult to identify that the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery is a special loss.

At that time, the stop result displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 corresponds to the special miss result (Figure 146). Because the symbol display device 75 displays a result that differs from the actual result of the win/lose lottery, it is expected that it will be difficult for amusement hall employees to detect cheating, even if it is occurring. However, by configuring the display mode on the special symbol display unit 43 not to reflect invalidation, it will be possible to grasp the actual lottery result by visually checking the special symbol display unit 43, making it easier to detect cheating.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3806 (if the pattern is not fluctuation pattern Z1, fluctuation pattern Z3, or fluctuation pattern Z5), the process proceeds to step Sb3808, where a game effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sb3803 is set to be executed. For example, if the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 23A (Figure 113 (c)), the process is set to execute an SPSP reach winning effect.

After step Sb3805, step Sb3807, or step Sb3808 is executed, in step Sb3809, a stop result command and a pattern command are sent to the display control device 350 as output targets. The stop result command is a command that specifies the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the pattern command is a presentation pattern command that specifies the presentation for the game round to be executed. In accordance with the received commands, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 so that the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 stop with the specified stop result, or so that the presentation for the game round is executed with the specified presentation pattern. After step Sb3809 is executed, the variation start processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (Figure 151), after the change start process in step Sb3701 is executed, the remaining number of times display update process is executed in step Sb2704. The remaining number of times display update process updates the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state, etc., and updates the display content of the remaining number of times image 472.

<About the transition to the third time-saving game state>
The flow of transition to the third time-saving gaming state in this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 154 and 155. Here, it is assumed that after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed, the game transitions to the first time-saving gaming state with 100 remaining turns.

At timing t1, if the result of the lottery on the third special symbol play after the transition to the first time-saving play state is a normal loss, the third support flag will remain in the OFF state, and the transition to the third time-saving play state will not occur (Figure 154 (d)). As shown in Figure 155, in that special symbol play, a complete loss effect will be executed on the symbol display device 75, and the player will be notified of the normal loss result.

At timing t2, if the result of the win/loss lottery on, for example, the tenth special symbol game turn after transitioning to the first time-limited game state is a special loss result, transition to the third time-limited game state is restricted based on the fact that the first time-limited game state is in effect, and the special loss result is invalidated (timing t3). As shown in Figure 155, in that special symbol game turn, a complete loss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. The complete loss effect in this case is the same as when the win/loss lottery results in a normal loss result, and the effect duration (variable display time) is also the same. For this reason, as long as you are looking at the symbol display device 75, it is indistinguishable from a normal loss result, making it difficult for the player to tell that a special loss result has occurred.

In this modified example, the probability of winning the special miss result is set relatively low (1/10), so it is expected that the special miss result will be won multiple times while playing the first time-saving game state (timing t4). In this case, too, winning the special miss result will not be reflected in the change of game state, and the transition to the third time-saving game state will be disabled (timing t5). In addition, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect, and a play-time effect will be executed without clearly indicating that a special miss result has been reached.

At timing t6, if the result of the lottery in the final play in the first time-shortened game state (the 100th special symbol play) is a special miss, the third support flag is turned on and the game transitions to the third time-shortened game state (timing t7). In other words, in this modified example, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is updated before the decision to transition to the third time-shortened game state is made (Figures 145 and 148). However, in the final play in the first time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is updated, ending the first time-shortened game state, and then the decision to transition to the third time-shortened game state is made based on the winning of the special miss.

In other words, in this modified example, even if a special miss result is drawn on a special symbol play round (1st to 99th special symbol play round) other than the final play round in the first time-saving play state, the first time-saving play state remains active and a transition to the third time-saving play state does not occur. However, if a special miss result is drawn on the final play round, the winning of the special miss result is reflected in the change of play state, and a transition to the third time-saving play state occurs. For this reason, the final play round is more advantageous to the player than the other special symbol play rounds in the first time-saving play state, and is, so to speak, a play round in a chance state.

When transitioning to the third time-saving game state as described above, the remaining number of times in the state set to low probability mode and high frequency support mode increases by the number of times remaining in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, if the type of special miss result is special miss result A, the remaining number of times increases by 900, and if the type of special miss result is special miss result B, the remaining number of times increases by 100 (Figure 144).

In this modified example, the end of the first time-shortened game state due to the number of executed game plays reaching the upper limit and the transition to the third time-shortened game state based on a win on a special miss result occur within the same game play. In other words, the transition to the third time-shortened game state can be made without the player feeling the end of the first time-shortened game state, so it is possible to essentially create a state in which an additional (top-up) number of remaining plays has occurred at the end of the first time-shortened game state. The transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the final game play (strictly speaking, immediately before the start of the confirmation display).

In the above case, during that special symbol game round, as shown in Figure 155, a special miss reach effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. This notifies the player of the special miss result. Furthermore, after the special miss reach effect is executed, an additional effect (Figure 130 (c)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is added. This additional effect may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time of the final game round, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time), or may be executed during the next special symbol game round.

If the result of the lottery in the final game round is a normal loss, the first time-saving game state ends, but there is no transition to the third time-saving game state. In other words, the low probability mode and high frequency support mode state ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). As shown in Figure 155, in that special symbol game round, a complete loss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75.

Incidentally, this modified example has a second special symbol reserve function that can store up to four reserve information items, so if the final play in the first time-saving play state results in a normal miss and the low probability mode and high frequency support mode state ends, and reserve information for the second special symbol exists, the number of play times for the second special symbol corresponding to the reserved information can be executed. Since these play times are played under normal play state, if a special miss occurs, a transition to the third time-saving play state will occur, just like the final play time in the first time-saving play state.

In other words, not only the final play in the first time-saving play state, but also the reserved play after the end of the first time-saving play state will be chance play. If a special miss result occurs in a reserved special symbol play, as shown in FIG. 155, a special miss reach effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the special miss result is announced. Also, if a normal miss result occurs in a reserved special symbol play, a complete miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75.

<About the flow of the regular game round in the final game round>
The flow of the normal game round in the final game round in the first time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figure 156. Here, it is assumed that the result of the lottery for the final game round is a normal loss result. First, with reference to Figure 156(a), we will explain the case where the normal game round is in a variable display at the start of the final game round display.

After the variable display for the normal game round begins at timing t1, and before the variable display time has elapsed, at timing t2, when the timing for the start of the confirmation display for the final game round in the first time-saving game state arrives, the variable display for the normal game round is forcibly terminated (Fig. 156 (a1), (a4), Fig. 149). The normal game round that was subject to this forced termination was the one for which a win/loss lottery was conducted in the first time-saving game state, and the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode (Fig. 103 (b)) was applied. If the result of the support lottery for this normal game round was a support win, it is changed to a loss result in accordance with the forced termination (Fig. 149).

When the variable display of the regular game round is forcibly terminated at timing t2, the losing result is then displayed in a static state on the regular game display unit 44 for a predetermined fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (timing t3). Also, at timing t2, the fixed display of the final game round (special game round) also begins, but in this case, the fixed display time is set to a specific fixed display time (e.g., 6 seconds) that is longer than the regular fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (Figure 149).

At this time, the confirmation display time for the final round of play is longer than the confirmation display time for the forcibly terminated regular round of play. Furthermore, since the result of the lottery for the forcibly terminated regular round of play is deemed a loss, the opening and closing of the device by the regular electric device 63a is not performed thereafter, and the next regular round of play begins immediately after the confirmation display for the forcibly terminated regular round of play ends. Therefore, the next regular round of play begins before timing t4, when the confirmation display time for the final round of play has elapsed (timing t3).

Since the first time-saving game state ends when the confirmation display for the final game round begins, the next normal game round is played under normal game state. Therefore, in this normal game round, the win/loss lottery is performed using the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (Figure 103 (a)), which makes it more likely to result in a loss, and the variable display time is set to a longer variable display time for low-frequency support mode (e.g., 30 seconds).

As a result, not only at time t4 when the next special symbol play (the reserved second special symbol play) begins, but also for some time thereafter, the normal electric device 63a remains closed, making it impossible or difficult to win a prize in the second operating port 63. This prevents new reserved information from being replenished even if a reserved second special symbol play is played and a vacancy occurs in the reserved number of second special symbols.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 156 (b) what happens when the device opening/closing game is in progress at the start of the confirmation display for the final game round (when the variable display for the normal game round is not in progress).

After the opening and closing of the device by the normal power device 63a has begun, let's say that before the execution period (for example, 4.2 seconds) has elapsed, the timing for starting the confirmation display for the final play round in the first time-saving play state arrives (timing t11). At this time, because the variable display for the normal play round is not in progress, forced termination is not executed, and the device opening and closing play continues.

As mentioned above, the confirmation display for the final round, which begins at timing t11, is displayed for a specific confirmation display time (e.g., 6 seconds) that is longer than the normal confirmation display time. This specific confirmation display time is longer than the execution period of the reel opening/closing game, so the reel opening/closing game ends (timing t12) before timing t13, when the confirmation display for the final round ends. In other words, even if the reel opening/closing game is being performed at the start of the confirmation display for the final round, it is absorbed within the confirmation display time for the final round, and by timing t13, when the next special symbol game (the reserved second special symbol game) begins, the reel opening/closing game has ended.

When the above-mentioned opening and closing game ends at timing t12, the next normal game round begins, but this normal game round is played under normal game conditions. This makes it more likely to result in a loss, and the variable display time is set to a longer variable display time (e.g., 30 seconds) for the low-frequency support mode.

As in the case of Figure 156(a), the normal power device 63a is maintained in a closed state not only at time t13 when the next special symbol play (the reserved second special symbol play) begins, but also for some time thereafter, making it impossible or difficult to win a prize in the second operating port 63. This prevents new reserved information from being replenished even if a reserved second special symbol play is played and a vacancy occurs in the reserved number of second special symbols.

It is also possible that the confirmation display for the regular game round is in progress when the confirmation display for the final game round begins. In that case, even if the support lottery result for that regular game round is a support win and a special device opening and closing game is then played, the specific confirmation display time for the final game round is longer than the total period of the confirmation display time for the regular game round and the execution period of the special device opening and closing game (for example, 4.7 seconds), so the special device opening and closing game can be completed before the next special game round (a game round of the reserved second special device) starts.

As described above, in this modified example, the replenishment of reserved information after the final play has ended is suppressed, so the number of play times (play times of the second special symbol) that can be executed after the first time-saving play state has been entered can be limited to the number of play times corresponding to the upper limit of reserved numbers (four play times). As already explained, the reserved play times of the second special symbol, like the final play time of the first time-saving play state, are advantageous play times that will result in a transition to the third time-saving play state if a special miss result is won; however, the above configuration prevents the player from being given an excessive advantage.

Furthermore, for example, if reserved information were allowed to be replenished after the end of the first time-saving game state, it would likely be difficult to accurately predict at the design stage of the pachinko machine how many reserved information items would be replenished during actual play. As a result, there is a concern that the amount of work required for probability design would increase, leading to an increased burden on the design work. However, with this modified example, the number of play times (play times of the second special symbol) that can be executed after the end of the first time-saving game state can be fixed, which has the advantage of reducing the burden at the time of design.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If a special miss occurs in the final play of the first time-saving play state, the game will transition to the third time-saving play state after the first time-saving play state ends. However, even if a special miss occurs in another special play in the first time-saving play state, the game will not transition to the third time-saving play state.

With this configuration, by hitting a special miss result in the final play of the first time-saving play state, the first time-saving play state transitions to the third time-saving play state, creating a state equivalent to increasing the number of remaining play times in the time-saving play state. This extends the period during which the time-saving play state can be played, increasing the chances of hitting a jackpot result while in the time-saving play state. This makes it possible to add a game in which the aim is not only to hit a jackpot result in the first time-saving play state, but also to hit a special miss result in the final play, expanding the range of ways to enjoy the game and increasing its enjoyment.

In addition, even if a special miss occurs in another special game round in the first time-shortened game state, transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted. Therefore, transitioning to the third time-shortened game state requires not only a special miss result, but also good timing. This appropriately increases the difficulty of transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, making it possible to appropriately bring out the joy and sense of accomplishment felt by the player when this transition is successfully achieved. Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to emphasize the superiority of the final game round to transition to the first time-shortened game state as a chance game round, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention paid to that game round.

If a special miss occurs in the final round of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state will end and the game will transition to the third time-saving game state within that final round.

This configuration allows switching from the first time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without the need for a special game play in the normal game state. This makes it possible to create a state similar to one in which the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state has been increased.

In this case, the symbol display device 75 will execute an additional effect, making it easier for the player to sense that the remaining number of plays has been increased.

The transition to the third time-saving game state is configured to occur without going through the opening/closing execution mode.

With the above configuration, because a jackpot result is not required to transition to the third time-shortened game state, the probability of such transition can be set independently of the probability of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to freely set the probability of transitioning to the third time-shortened game state without relying on the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, by transitioning to the third time-shortened game state without going through the open/close execution mode, it is possible to prevent a significant separation between the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state. This makes it easier for players to sense a sense of unity between the two time-shortened game states, making it easier to give the impression that the time-shortened game state has been extended.

In this case, the probability of winning a special miss result is set higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, giving the player the impression that it is easy to transition to the third time-saving game state. This makes it easier for players to feel a sense of anticipation even as they approach the final round of play in the first time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to expand the elements of enjoyment in the game by providing a way out just before the first time-saving game state ends.

The condition for transitioning to the third time-saving game mode has been changed to a special miss result in the special drawing lottery.

With this configuration, both the game of whether the result of the special symbol lottery will result in a jackpot, and the game of whether the result will be a special miss and the condition for transitioning to the third time-saving game state will be met, can be played within a single special symbol game round. This allows the final game round in which transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted to function as a chance game round (a game round that is more advantageous than other special symbol game rounds) in which both games can be played, making it possible to appropriately increase anticipation and attention for that game round.

When a special failure occurs, an external signal to notify the player is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if a special failure occurs in a special game turn other than the final turn in the first time-saving game state (if a special failure occurs in a situation where transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted), the external signal to notify the player of the special failure is also output.

With this configuration, an external signal corresponding to the special miss result is output, making it possible for the gaming hall's management control device to understand that an opportunity to transition to the third time-shortened game state has occurred. In this case, in situations where transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted, it is conceivable to configure the system so that the external signal is not output even if the result of the special chart lottery is a special miss result. Given that a transition to the third time-shortened game state will not occur after that, it would make more sense not to output an external signal than to output one.

However, with such a configuration, the gaming hall will not be able to determine the actual number of times a special miss has occurred during play, and there is a risk that, for example, there may be a delay in discovering an act of fraudulently increasing the odds of winning a special miss. In this regard, with this configuration, the external signal is output even when transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, allowing the gaming hall to properly determine the actual number of times a special miss has occurred. This makes it easier to discover when the odds of winning a special miss have been fraudulently increased, and increases the effectiveness of preventing fraud.

The output mode of the lottery result signal for notifying the jackpot result and the normal loss result is different, and an external signal corresponding to the special loss result is output.

With this configuration, an external signal corresponding to a special loss result can be output using existing terminals and wiring for notifying jackpot results, etc., which reduces the number of output terminals, etc., required on the pachinko machine 10 compared to when a dedicated signal is output. Furthermore, if the management and control device on the gaming hall side already has an input terminal, etc., for receiving notifications about jackpot results, etc., this can be used to receive the external signal corresponding to a special loss result. Even if it becomes necessary to add a function to identify (recognize) differences in the output mode of the lottery result signal, this can be achieved with a minor change to the control program alone, making it possible to keep implementation costs low.

When outputting the lottery result signal corresponding to a special miss, a common lottery result signal may be output for cases where a transition to the third time-shortened play state occurs and cases where such a transition does not occur, or separate lottery result signals may be output to distinguish between these cases. In the latter configuration, the management and control device on the gaming hall side can determine from the external signal 1 not only that a special miss result has occurred, but also whether or not a transition to the third time-shortened play state is in order. This makes it possible to immediately determine that a failure to transition to the third time-shortened play state despite a special miss result is not an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10.

If separate lottery result signals are output when a transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs and when such a transition does not occur, separate signal wiring (output terminals of external output terminal 213) may be assigned to the signal output when a transition occurs and the signal output when such a transition does not occur, or a single signal wiring may be shared. When signal wiring is shared, it is preferable to make the signal state of the lottery result signal corresponding to the special miss (output level when in the on state, output period, output timing, etc.) different depending on whether a transition occurs or does not occur.

Furthermore, in order to reduce the number of required signal wiring (output terminals of external output terminal 213), a configuration may be adopted in which an external signal corresponding to a special loss result is output using a game round execution signal output for each game round. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the signal state of the game round execution signal differs depending on the result of the win/lose lottery.

Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a game execution signal in a manner corresponding to a jackpot is output; if the result is a normal loss, a game execution signal in a manner corresponding to a normal loss is output; and if the result is a special loss, a game execution signal in a manner corresponding to a special loss is output. In this case, no dedicated signal is output as a lottery result signal.

This configuration simplifies the configuration by eliminating the need for signal terminals and signal wiring for lottery result signals, and also avoids the need to add input terminals to the management and control device on the amusement hall side. In addition, because the lottery result signal can be output simultaneously with the game execution signal, the number of signal outputs from the pachinko machine can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load required for signal exchange on both the pachinko machine and the management and control device on the amusement hall side.

In the above case, the same game execution signal may be output for both a jackpot result and a normal miss result. Even in such cases, the management control device on the gaming hall side can determine that a jackpot result has occurred by subsequently outputting an external signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode.

Possible configurations for varying the signal state of the play round execution signal for each win/lose lottery include varying the output level, output period, output timing, etc. when in the on state. Of these, from the perspective of ease of implementation and implementation, varying the output period when in the on state is preferable. For example, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot, a play round execution signal with an on period of 0.3 seconds is output; if the result is a normal loss, a play round execution signal with an on period of 0.5 seconds (or 0.3 seconds) is output; and if the result is a special loss, a play round execution signal with an on period of 0.8 seconds is output.

When outputting a game round execution signal corresponding to a special miss, similar to the above, the same game round execution signal may be output when a transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs and when such a transition does not occur, or different game round execution signals may be output.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 has the function of outputting an external signal (game round start signal) to notify the start of each game round, the game round start signal may be used to output an external signal corresponding to a special miss result, instead of or in addition to the game round execution signal. In other words, the signal state of the game round start signal may be configured to differ depending on the result of the win/lose lottery.

Furthermore, if there is an external signal other than the game round execution signal and the game round start signal that is output externally for each game round, that signal may be used to output an external signal corresponding to a special miss result.

<Modification 4>
In the third modified example, if a special miss occurs during the first time-shortened game state, transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted, but in this modified example, such transition is permitted. The configuration of this modified example will be explained below with reference to Figures 157 to 168. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate components similar to those in the second embodiment and each modified example, and their explanation will be omitted.

<Special game winning/losing table>
The hit/miss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), the hit/miss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode), and the hit/miss table for the first and second special symbols (for high probability mode) according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 157. These hit/miss tables are stored in the hit/miss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/loss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode) is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on a winning entry into the first operating port 62 when the lottery mode is low probability mode. In this win/loss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 157(a), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 10 values from "10" to "19" are set as the random number values that result in a special loss, and the probability of a special loss in low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random numbers are assigned to normal loss results, and the probability of a normal loss in low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The win/loss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode) is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on winning the second operating port 63 when the lottery mode is low probability mode. In this win/loss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 157(b), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 30 values from "10" to "39" are set as the random number values that result in a special miss. In other words, the probability of a special miss in low probability mode is set to 1/100, a different probability from that of the first special symbol. Other random numbers are assigned to normal miss results, and the probability of a normal miss in low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referenced when a win/loss lottery is held based on a win in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 when the lottery mode is high probability mode. In this win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in Figure 157 (c), a total of 50 random number values ranging from "0" to "49" are set as jackpot results, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, no special loss results are set as lottery results, and all values other than the random number values for the jackpot are assigned to normal loss results. The probability of a normal loss result is set to 59/60.

<Special game type table>
The special game round type table for this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 158.

The jackpot type table includes a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Figure 158(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Figure 158(b)).

As shown in Figure 158(a), the jackpot type table for the first special design has a 4R special jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being executed.

A 4R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability gaming state continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and transitions to a normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

A 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit (e.g., 1,000 plays). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, jackpot type counter C2 values of "0" to "64" correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, and values of "65" to "99" correspond to a 4R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in Figure 158 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special design has a 10R special jackpot result and a 10R regular jackpot result set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being executed.

A 10R special jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high-probability game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high-probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit (e.g., 100 plays). A 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a first time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 1000 plays).

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 10R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this modified example, no type table for special misses is set. In other words, there is only one type of special miss result for both the first special chart and the second special chart. However, the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) to which the player transitions upon winning the special miss result is configured to differ depending on whether the first special chart results in a special miss result or the second special chart results in a special miss result.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(c), if the first special symbol lottery results in a special miss, the game will transition to the third time-shortened game state A, and if the second special symbol lottery results in a special miss, the game will transition to the third time-shortened game state B. The third time-shortened game state A continues until the number of special symbol game turns since transitioning to the third time-shortened game state A reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 100 turns). The third time-shortened game state B continues until the number of special symbol game turns since transitioning to the third time-shortened game state B reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 10 turns), which is less than the fifth upper limit. Note that, because a special miss is a type of miss, the open/close execution mode is not executed. In other words, if a special miss results, the game will transition to the third time-shortened game state A or B without going through the open/close execution mode.

<Third time-saving gaming state transition processing>
The third time-shortened game state transition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 159. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special game count control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the third time-shortened game state transition process of FIG. 148. In FIG. 159, processes similar to those in FIG. 148 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified. Note that the third time-shortened game state transition process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update/termination process of step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag has been set, i.e., if the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, where it is determined whether a high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, step Sb4101 determines whether or not the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the third time-shortened game state is in effect. If the third support flag is not set, i.e., the game is not in the third time-shortened game state, step Sb4102 determines whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the first time-shortened game state is in effect.

If the first support flag is set, i.e., if the first time-shortened game state is active, proceed to step Sb4103 and clear the first support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. This ends the first time-shortened game state.

After step Sb4103 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4102 (the first support flag is not set and the game is not in the first time-shortened game state), the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb4104. This causes a transition to the third time-shortened game state.

In step Sb4105, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not set, i.e., if the current special miss result is a special miss result for the first special symbol, in step Sb4106, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM 314 to transition to the third time-saving gaming state A (Figure 158 (c)).

Step Sb4107 executes processing for terminating the normal game. This processing is similar to the processing of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the processing for transitioning to the second time-saving game state in FIG. 119. In this case, a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for the special game round (FIG. 149). This specific fixed display time may be longer (e.g., 0.8 seconds) than the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated, as in the second embodiment above, or it may be longer (e.g., 4 seconds) than the total period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, as in Variation 2 above.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb4105 (if the second special symbol flag is set), that is, if the current special miss result is a special miss result for the second special symbol, in order to transition to the third time-saving game state B (Figure 158 (c)), a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 10 times) is set in the support counter area SC in step Sb4108.

In this modified example, even when the first support flag is set, the third support flag is set, and if a special miss occurs during the first time-shortened game state, transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted. Furthermore, since the first time-shortened game state is a game state in which it is possible or easy to win the second operating port 63 corresponding to the second special symbol, a special miss obtained during the first time-shortened game state will be a special miss for the second special symbol. Therefore, the third time-shortened game state transitioned to during the first time-shortened game state becomes third time-shortened game state B, in which the remaining number of tries is set to the sixth upper limit number of tries (for example, 10 tries).

In this way, it is possible to transition to the third time-shortened game state B when there are still remaining plays in the first time-shortened game state. In this case, in step Sb4108, the value of the support counter area SC is rewritten to a value corresponding to the remaining plays in the third time-shortened game state B, regardless of the value at that time (the remaining plays in the first time-shortened game state). Therefore, no matter which special play in the first time-shortened game state results in a transition to the third time-shortened game state, the remaining plays thereafter will be changed to the sixth upper limit.

The sixth upper limit (e.g., 10 times) is less than the first upper limit (e.g., 1,000 times), which is the remaining number of times set at the beginning of the first time-shortened game state. Therefore, unless the game transitions to the third time-shortened game state B when the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state is less than the sixth upper limit, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state will decrease. In other words, the longer you can avoid winning the special losing result, the longer you can continue in the time-shortened game state, allowing you to play to your advantage. In other words, when comparing the cases where a special losing result occurs in the first time-shortened game state with the cases where it does not, the former is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the latter.

In this modified example, because a special miss result is also set for the first special symbol, a special miss result may occur during normal game mode. In this case, the game transitions to the third time-saving game mode A, and the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode. In other words, if a special miss result occurs during normal game mode, it is more advantageous for the player than if a special miss result does not occur.

After step Sb4107 or step Sb4108 is executed, step Sb3408 sets the third time-shortened gaming state start command as the command to be sent to the effect control device 143, and then terminates the processing for transitioning to the third time-shortened gaming state.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb4101 (if the third support flag is set), the processing for transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state is terminated without executing the processing of steps Sb4102 to Sb3408. In other words, even if a special miss occurs in the third time-saving gaming state, re-transition to the third time-saving gaming state is restricted, and the remaining number of plays at that time is maintained.

<Special chart game time variable display time table>
The special symbol game count control process and variable start process performed by the main control device 162 are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned modified example 3 (Figs. 145 and 146), but as described above, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state will be reduced, and the variable display time table is set accordingly. The variable display time table related to this modified example will be explained below with reference to Figs. 160 and 161.

In this modified example, the variable display time tables include at least a variable display time table for special misses on the first special design (for normal play state), a variable display time table for jackpots on the second special design (for first time-shortened play state), a variable display time table for normal misses on the second special design (for first time-shortened play state), a variable display time table for special misses on the second special design (for first time-shortened play state), a variable display time table for jackpots on the second special design (for third time-shortened play state B), a variable display time table for normal misses on the second special design (for third time-shortened play state B), and a variable display time table for special misses on the second special design (for third time-shortened play state B).

The variable display time table for special misses on the first special symbol (for normal gameplay) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the first special symbol is a special miss during normal gameplay. This variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern Y1 (e.g., 15 seconds), as shown in Figure 160(a). Variable pattern Y1 corresponds to a special reach miss effect. In other words, when a variable start command corresponding to variable pattern Y1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss effect as an effect for a game round. The special reach miss effect notifies the user of a special miss result, and is similar to the special reach miss effect (Figures 153(b) to (d)) related to Variation 3 above.

The variable display time table for the jackpot on the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special chart is a jackpot in the first time-saving game state. This variable display time table is configured so that, as shown in Figure 160(b), one of variable patterns 21A to 23A is selected when the value of the variable type counter CS is between "0" and "79," and variable pattern Y2 (for example, 60 seconds) is selected when the value of the variable type counter CS is between "80" and "99." Variable patterns 21A to 23A are the same as variable patterns 21A to 23A in Figure 113(c). Variable pattern Y2 corresponds to specific effect A, which is a game-time effect. Details of specific effect A will be explained later.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special chart is a normal miss while in the first time-saving game state. This variable display time table is configured so that, as shown in Figure 160(c), one of variable patterns 21H to 24H is selected when the value of the variable type counter CS is between "0" and "79," and variable pattern Y3 (e.g., 60 seconds) is selected when the value of the variable type counter CS is between "80" and "99." Variable patterns 21H to 24H are the same as variable patterns 21H to 24H in Figure 113(d). Variable pattern Y3 corresponds to specific effect B, which is a game-time effect. Details of specific effect B will be explained later.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special chart is a special miss while in the first time-saving game state. This variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern Y4 (for example, 60 seconds), as shown in Figure 160 (d). Variable pattern Y4 corresponds to specific effect C, which is an effect for a game round. Details of specific effect C will be provided later.

The variable display time table for the jackpot on the second special chart (for the third time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special chart is a jackpot in the third time-saving game state B. As shown in Figure 161(a), this variable display time table is configured so that variable pattern Y5 (for example, 60 seconds) is selected as the variable pattern. Variable pattern Y5 corresponds to specific effect D, which is an effect for a game round. Details of specific effect D will be explained later.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special symbol (for third time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special symbol is a normal miss while in third time-saving game state B. As shown in Figure 161 (b), this variable display time table is configured so that if a normal miss occurs in the first through ninth special symbol play times after transitioning to third time-saving game state B, variable display time table Y6 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and if a normal miss occurs in the final play time (tenth play) of third time-saving game state B, variable display time table Y7 (e.g., 60 sec) is selected. Variable display time table Y6 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and variable display time table Y7 corresponds to specific effect E, which is a play time effect. Details of specific effect E will be explained later.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special symbol (for third time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special symbol is a special miss while in third time-saving game state B. This variable display time table is configured so that, as shown in Figure 161 (c), if a special miss occurs in the first through ninth special symbol play rounds after transitioning to third time-saving game state B, variable display time table Y8 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and if a normal miss occurs in the final play round (tenth play round) of third time-saving game state B, variable display time table Y9 (e.g., 60 sec) is selected. Variable display time table Y8 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and variable display time table Y9 corresponds to specific effect E, which is a play round effect.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 162. This process is started by the effect control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the effect setting process in Fig. 126. In Fig. 162, the same steps as those in Fig. 126 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control unit 162. If an ending command has been received, in step Sb4201, the first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the high probability gaming state or the first time-shortened gaming state.

After step Sb4201 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2301 (an ending command has not been received), step Sb4202 determines whether a third time-shortened gaming state start command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a third time-shortened gaming state start command has been received, step Sb4203 executes a third transition effect setting process to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state.

After step Sb4203 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4202 (if the third time-shortened gaming state command has not been received), step Sb2305 determines whether any gaming state end command has been received. If a gaming state end command has been received, step Sb2306 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability gaming state, the first time-shortened gaming state, or the third time-shortened gaming state.

After step Sb2306 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2305 (if no game state end command has been received), step Sb4204 executes special pattern change display processing to display changes in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. In step Sb2308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated.

<First transition effect setting process>
The first transition performance setting process of step Sb4201 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 163 (a).

First, in step Sb4301, it is determined whether a transition to a high probability gaming state is occurring. In other words, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability gaming state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control unit 162.

If a transition to a high probability game state is possible, step Sb4302 executes a process for setting effects for the high probability game state. In this process, after the start effect for the high probability game state, similar to that shown in FIG. 128(a), for example, is executed, a game turn effect corresponding to the high probability game state is executed. The game turn effect for the high probability game state has a different form from the game turn effect for the normal game state; for example, the background image displayed behind each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set to a different display color and content from that for the normal game state.

In step Sb4303, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM 344. In step Sb4304, a setting is made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 472 (e.g., Figure 128(a)). In step Sb4305, a remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the first transition performance setting process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb4301 (the situation does not warrant a transition to the high probability gaming state), the process proceeds to step Sb4306, where it is determined whether a transition to the first time-saving gaming state is warranted. In other words, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode in which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will result in a transition to the first time-saving gaming state.

If a transition to the first time-shortened game state occurs, step Sb4307 executes a display setting process for the first time-shortened game state. In this process, after the start display for the first time-shortened game state, similar to that shown in FIG. 128(b), for example, is executed, a game-round display corresponding to the first time-shortened game state is set to be executed. The game-round display for the first time-shortened game state has a different form from the game-round display for the normal game state or the high-probability game state; for example, the background image displayed behind each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set to a different display color and content from that for the normal game state or the high-probability game state.

In addition, in the start and play effects for the first time-shortened game state in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 163(b), instead of the remaining number of times image 472, a status notification image 450 is displayed to notify players that they are in chance time (first time-shortened game state). In other words, when the first time-shortened game state is in effect, the remaining number of times is not displayed.

After step Sb4307 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4306 (if the situation does not warrant a transition to the first time-shortened gaming state), the first transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Third transition effect setting process>
The third transition performance setting process of step Sb4203 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 164 (a).

First, in step Sb4401, the effect setting process for the third time-shortened game state is executed. In this process, after the start effect for the third time-shortened game state is executed, the game round effect corresponding to the third time-shortened game state is set to be executed. The game round effect for the third time-shortened game state has a different format from the game round effect for the normal game state, the high probability game state, and the first time-shortened game state.

In step Sb4402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times to be played in the third time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM 344. Specifically, if the transition is to third time-shortened game state A, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set, and if the transition is to third time-shortened game state B, a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 10 times) is set.

In step Sb4403, the remaining number of times image 472 (e.g., FIG. 128(a)) is set to begin displaying. Note that, if the first time-shortened game state transitions to the third time-shortened game state during the first time-shortened game state, the state notification image 450 is changed to the remaining number of times image 472 in conjunction with the transition to the third time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 164(b). In other words, the remaining number of times is switched from a state in which it is not displayed to a state in which it is displayed.

In step Sb4404, the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the third transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step Sb4204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 165. In Fig. 165, the same process as the special chart change display processing of Fig. 132 will be assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether a game round is currently being played. If a game round is not currently being played, it proceeds to step Sb2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

If a fluctuation start command has been received, proceed to step Sb4501 and execute fluctuation start processing to start the game-time presentation on the symbol display device 75. The fluctuation start processing will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 166(a).

First, in step Sb4601, the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern for the current special game round is identified. In step Sb4602, the game round presentation corresponding to the identified fluctuation pattern is set to be executed. The correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the game round presentation is explained with reference to Figure 166 (b).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y1, a special reach miss effect is set to be executed. Fluctuation pattern Y1 is set when a special miss result occurs on the first special chart (when a special miss result occurs during normal game play). The special reach miss effect is the same as the special reach miss effect related to variation 3 above (Figures 153 (b) to (d)).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y2, specific effect A is set to be executed. Fluctuation pattern Y2 is set as part of the case where a jackpot result is achieved during the first time-saving gaming state. Specific effect A is an effect that notifies the result of a jackpot, and is configured, for example, so that after a reach display is displayed using upper pattern row Z1 and lower pattern row Z3, a predetermined battle effect is performed to determine whether or not the warrior character can defeat the enemy character (Figure 167 (a)). Specific effect A displays an outcome in which the warrior character wins the battle effect, and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped jackpot combination.

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y3, specific effect B is set to be executed. Fluctuation pattern Y3 is set as part of the normal miss results during the first time-saving gaming state. Specific effect B is an effect that notifies of a miss result, and is an effect related to specific effect A. In specific effect B, the above-mentioned battle effect after the reach display shows an outcome in which the warrior character and enemy character end in a draw (Figure 167 (b)), and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination that does not reach the reach.

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y4, special effect C is set to be executed. Fluctuation pattern Y4 is set when a special miss occurs during the first time-shortened game state. Special effect C is an effect that notifies the transition to the third time-shortened game state, and is related to special effects A and B. In special effect C, an ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the battle effect described above after the reach display is displayed is displayed (Figure 167 (c)), and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination that does not reach.

If the recognized variation pattern is Y5, then specific effect D is set to be executed. Variation pattern Y5 is set when a jackpot result is achieved during the third time-saving gaming state. Specific effect D is an effect that notifies the result of a jackpot, and is configured to, for example, display a reach display using upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3, followed by a revenge battle effect in which the warrior character challenges the enemy character who was defeated in specific effect C (Figure 167 (d)). Specific effect D displays an ending in which the warrior character wins the revenge battle effect, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped jackpot combination.

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y7 or fluctuation pattern Y9, specific effect E is set to be executed. Fluctuation pattern Y7 is set when a normal miss occurs in the final play round of the third time-saving game state (the 10th special symbol play round), and fluctuation pattern Y9 is set when a special miss occurs in the final play round of the third time-saving game state. Specific effect E is an effect that notifies of a miss result and the end of the third time-saving game state, and is related to specific effect D. Specific effect E displays an ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the revenge battle effect described above after the reach display (Figure 167 (d)), and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped combination that does not reach.

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y6 or fluctuation pattern Y8, a complete miss effect is set to be executed. Fluctuation pattern Y6 is set when a normal miss occurs in a play round other than the final play round of the third time-saving play state (the first through ninth special play rounds), and fluctuation pattern Y8 is set when a special miss occurs in a play round other than the final play round of the third time-saving play state.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (Fig. 166(a)), after execution of step Sb4602, in step Sb4603, a stop result command and a pattern command are sent to the display control device 350 as transmission targets. The pattern command is a presentation pattern command that specifies the game round presentation to be executed. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the pattern display device 75 so that the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 stop with the specified stop result, or so that the game round presentation is executed with the specified presentation pattern. After execution of step Sb4603, the fluctuation start processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (Fig. 165), after executing the change start process in step Sb4501, step Sb4502 determines whether the current game state is a high probability game state or a third time-saving game state. If it is a high probability game state or a third time-saving game state, step Sb2704 executes a process to update the remaining number of plays display. The remaining number of plays in the first time-saving game state, etc., is updated, and the display contents of the remaining number of plays image 472 are updated. After executing step Sb2704 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4502 (if the game state is not a high probability game state or a third time-saving game state), the special chart change display process is terminated.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of game states in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 168. First, the flow from the normal game state to the third time-shortened game state will be described with reference to Fig. 168(a).

In normal game mode, the ball is played by hitting the left hand, and the game is played mainly through a lottery to determine whether the first special symbol will win or lose, which is triggered by a win in the first operating port 62. If the result of the lottery to determine whether the first special symbol will win or lose in normal game mode is a special miss, the game transitions to the third time-saving game mode A, and the support mode switches from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode. In high-frequency support mode, winning in the second operating port 63 becomes possible or easier, allowing the player to play without losing too many balls, and the player can also participate in a type lottery that favors jackpot types. Therefore, in normal game mode, a special miss results in a transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

The upper limit number of times (fifth upper limit number of times) for the third time-shortened game state A is set to 100 times. In this modified example, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is determined after the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state has been updated, so after switching to the third time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times can be subtracted when the next special symbol game play begins. Therefore, after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state A, 100 times can be suitably secured as the number of special symbol game play times that can be played in that game state.

As described above, if a special miss occurs during normal gameplay, it is advantageous for the player, so during normal gameplay, it is possible to play while aiming not only for a jackpot but also for a special miss.

Next, the flow of game states from the first time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figure 168 (b).

In the first time-saving game state, the game is played by right-hand play, and the game is played mainly by a lottery to determine whether the second special symbol will win or lose, which is triggered by the ball entering the second operating port 63. If the result of the lottery to determine whether the second special symbol will win or lose in the first time-saving game state is a jackpot, the game will transition to open/close execution mode. In this case, the symbol display device 75 will notify the jackpot result through special effect A, and an effect will be executed in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination, along with a battle effect in which the warrior character wins against the enemy character.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the first time-shortened play state is a special miss, the first time-shortened play state will transition to the third time-shortened play state B. As a result, the number of remaining plays in the time-shortened play state will be changed to the sixth upper limit (e.g., 10 plays), which is the upper limit for the third time-shortened play state B. Because this sixth upper limit is much less than the first upper limit (e.g., 1000 plays), which is the upper limit for the first time-shortened play state, the number of remaining plays in the time-shortened play state will decrease. In other words, when initially transitioning to the first time-shortened play state, up to 1000 plays are allowed in the time-shortened play state, but if a special miss is drawn during that time, this will be reduced to 10 plays remaining. For this reason, if a special miss is drawn in the first time-shortened play state, it will be disadvantageous for the player.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the third time-shortened play state B, regardless of the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened play state at that time, the upper limit of the number of times in the third time-shortened play state is set as the number of times remaining in the subsequent time-shortened play state. As a result, regardless of how many times the special symbol play has been played since transitioning to the first time-shortened play state when the second special symbol lottery results in a special missing result, the number of times remaining in the time-shortened play state will be 10. Therefore, the later a special missing result occurs after transitioning to the first time-shortened play state, the longer the duration of the time-shortened play state can be extended. For this reason, players can play in the hope of not drawing a special missing result at all, or drawing one as late as possible.

If a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state, the symbol display device 75 will announce the special miss result through specific effect C, and will display a battle ending in which the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character, along with a display in which the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a miss-reach combination. After the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, a transition effect will be executed to a revenge battle display mode in which the player re-challenges the defeated enemy character.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol during the first time-saving game state is a normal miss, the game state will not change and the first time-saving game state will be maintained. In this case, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect, various reach miss effects, and specific effect B.

Special effect B involves a battle ending in a draw between the warrior character and the enemy character, along with a display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in a non-reach combination. This special effect B is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to distinguish from special effects A and B until the ending is displayed, and this creates a sense of anticipation that a jackpot result may occur, as well as the thrill of a special non-reach result that may reduce the number of remaining plays in the time-saving mode.

Note that while the outcome of special effect C, which is executed in the event of a special miss, is a loss, the outcome of special effect B, which is executed in the event of a normal miss, is a draw, with the former being given a more unfavorable impression than the latter, because in this modified example, a special miss in the special chart lottery result is more disadvantageous to the player than a normal miss.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the third time-saving game state B is a jackpot, the game will transition to the open/close execution mode. In this case, the symbol display device 75 will notify the player of the jackpot result through special effect D, and will display a revenge battle in which the warrior character defeats the enemy character, along with an effect in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination.

The revenge battle effect in the third time-saving game state B does not mean that the game state has been downgraded to the normal game state, but rather that the time-saving game state is still continuing, albeit with only 10 spins remaining. This configuration gives the player the impression that there is still a chance, which can alleviate discouragement and motivate them.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol on the first through ninth special symbol play in the third time-saving play state B is a normal miss or a special miss, the play state will not change and the third time-saving play state will be maintained. In this case, the symbol display device 75 will display a complete miss effect.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the final play round (the 10th special symbol play round) in the third time-limited play state is a normal miss or a special miss, the third time-limited play state ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 notifies the player of the miss result and the end of the third time-limited play state through special effect E. In special effect E, a revenge battle effect is executed in which the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in a miss combination.

Furthermore, after these effects are displayed, a count notification effect is displayed during that special symbol play round, announcing the total number of special symbol play rounds executed in the time-saving play state (the total number of special symbol play rounds executed across the first time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state). By viewing this effect, the player can grasp their performance in this time-saving play state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The system is configured to allow a transition to the third time-shortened game state if a special miss occurs while in the first time-shortened game state, and is configured so that transitioning to the third time-shortened game state is more disadvantageous to the player than continuing in the first time-shortened game state without transitioning to the third time-shortened game state.

This configuration allows players to experience the thrill of potentially being demoted to a disadvantageous state when transitioning to the first time-limited game state via the open/close execution mode, depending on the subsequent game developments. This adds excitement beyond simply aiming for a jackpot. However, while providing such thrills, there is a concern that if the player's disappointment upon being demoted to a disadvantageous state is too great, it could diminish their motivation to continue playing, which could have the opposite effect. In this regard, this configuration achieves a demotion to an disadvantageous state by transitioning to the third time-limited game state, which has fewer remaining turns, thereby preserving the chance to win a jackpot in the time-limited game state even if such a demotion occurs. This reduces player disappointment compared to transitioning to the normal game state. In particular, in a configuration in which the type determination for a jackpot result in the second special symbol lottery is more favorable than that for the first special symbol, the game period for the second special symbol is secured even if the player is demoted to a disadvantageous state, thereby effectively demonstrating the above-mentioned effects. This makes it possible to provide a game that allows players to experience the thrills described above while preventing a significant loss of motivation to play.

If a special miss occurs while in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the third time-saving game state is uniformly set to the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state, regardless of the number of times remaining in the first time-saving game state at that time.

With this configuration, the later the timing of the special miss result in the first time-saving game state, the greater the total number of times the time-saving game state can be played, which is advantageous for the player. This increases the fun of avoiding the special miss result as you play in the first time-saving game state, making the game more entertaining.

When in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of plays is not displayed.

For example, if the configuration clearly indicates the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state, the player can see how many times there were before the special miss result occurred. Therefore, if a special miss result occurs and the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is set to the upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state, the player can easily determine how many times the number of times has decreased as a result. In this regard, by not clearly indicating the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to determine the number of times remaining before the special miss result occurred. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the decrease in the remaining number of times when transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, and even if the decrease is large, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disappointed and losing their motivation to play.

In the above case, when the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of plays is clearly displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has transitioned to the third time-saving game state and the number of plays remaining in the time-saving game state since the transition to the third time-saving game state.

In this modified example, there is only one type of first time-shortened game state, but in order to conceal the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state and make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times remaining before a special miss occurs, it is preferable to provide multiple types of first time-shortened game states with different upper limit numbers. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to grasp or predict the upper limit number of times in the first time-shortened game state in the first place, and the above-mentioned effect can be more effectively exerted. In this case, the above-mentioned effect can be further strengthened by configuring each of these first time-shortened game states so that it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between them.

There are two types of losing results: special losing results and normal losing results. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special losing result, the player will be demoted to a disadvantageous state (transition to the third time-saving game state).

This configuration allows a determination to be made each time a game is played whether or not the player will be demoted to a disadvantageous state. This allows players to experience the thrill of the possibility of such a demotion occurring in each game, enhancing the enjoyment of such thrills in the game.

Even in the normal game mode, it is possible to win a special miss, and if a special miss occurs, the game will transition to the third time-saving game mode. This makes it advantageous for the player if a special miss occurs during the normal game mode, unlike when a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game mode.

This configuration adds an element of surprise, since even if the same special miss result is won, the advantage or disadvantage can be reversed depending on the game state when the result is achieved. It also prevents players from becoming fixated on simply avoiding the special miss result, making it possible to diversify the game.

In this case, the maximum number of times the player can enter the third time-saving game state, which is entered when a special miss occurs in the normal game state, is set to be higher than the maximum number of times the player can enter the third time-saving game state, which is entered when a special miss occurs in the first time-saving game state. This highlights the superiority of the third time-saving game state, which is entered from the normal game state, and makes it more fun to aim for a special miss in the normal game state.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, when a special miss occurs during the first time-shortened game state, it is determined whether to prioritize the first time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 169 to 177.

<Special game winning/losing table>
The hit/miss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), the hit/miss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode), and the hit/miss table for the first and second special symbols (for high probability mode) according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 169. These hit/miss tables are stored in the hit/miss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/loss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode) is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on winning the first operating port 62 when the lottery mode is low probability mode. In this win/loss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in Figure 169(a), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random number values are assigned to normal loss results, and the probability of a normal loss result in low probability mode is set to 2990/3000. Note that the win/loss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode) does not set a special loss result as a lottery result.

The win/loss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode) is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on winning the second operating port 63 when the lottery mode is low probability mode. In this win/loss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 169(b), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values for a jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 30 values from "10" to "39" are set as the random number values for a special miss result, and the probability of a special miss result in low probability mode is set to 1/100. Other random numbers are assigned to normal miss results, and the probability of a normal miss result in low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referenced when a win/loss lottery is held based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 when the lottery mode is high probability mode. In this win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in Figure 169 (c), a total of 50 random number values ranging from "0" to "49" are set as jackpot results, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, no special loss results are set as lottery results, and all values other than the random number values for the jackpot are assigned to normal loss results. The probability of a normal loss result is set to 59/60.

<Special game type table>
The special game round type table for this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 170.

The jackpot type table includes a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Figure 170(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Figure 170(b)).

As shown in Figure 170(a), the jackpot type table for the first special chart sets the selectable jackpot types as a 4R special jackpot result, a 4R regular jackpot result A, and a 4R regular jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being executed.

A 4R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability gaming state continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and transitions to a normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit (e.g., 70 plays). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a third upper limit (e.g., 100 plays), which is greater than the second upper limit. When the third upper limit is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, jackpot type counter C2 values of "0" to "69" correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, "70" to "89" correspond to a 4R normal jackpot result A, and "90" to "99" correspond to a 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 10%.

As shown in Figure 170 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special chart sets the selectable jackpot types as a 10R special jackpot result, a 10R regular jackpot result A, and a 10R regular jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being executed.

A 10R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 plays).

10R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 70 plays).

10R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 100 plays), which is greater than the fifth upper limit.

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, jackpot type counter C2 values of "0" to "69" correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, "70" to "89" correspond to a 10R regular jackpot result A, and "90" to "99" correspond to a 10R regular jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being assigned to a 10R regular jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R regular jackpot result B is set to 10%.

In this modified example, no type table for special misses is set. In other words, there is only one type of special miss result in the second special design. When a special miss result occurs, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without going through the open/close execution mode. As shown in Figure 170 (c), the third time-saving game state in this modified example continues until the number of times special design play has been executed since the transition to the third time-saving game state reaches the seventh upper limit (e.g., 50 times), which is less than the second upper limit (e.g., 70 times), third upper limit (e.g., 100 times), fifth upper limit (e.g., 70 times), and sixth upper limit (e.g., 100 times).

<Third time-saving gaming state transition processing>
The third time-shortened game state transition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special game count control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the third time-shortened game state transition process of FIG. 148. In FIG. 171, the same steps as those in FIG. 148 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified. Note that in this modified example, the third time-shortened game state transition process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update/termination process of step Sb511 is executed.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag has been set, i.e., if the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, where it is determined whether a high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, step Sb4801 determines whether the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the third time-shortened game state is in effect.

If the third support flag is not set, i.e., if the game is not in the third time-shortened game state, step Sb4802 determines whether the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the game is in the first time-shortened game state.

If the first support flag is set, i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state, proceed to step Sb4803, where it is determined whether the upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state, to which the game will transition upon winning a special miss result, is greater than the current remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC in RAM 314 is referenced to determine the current remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state during which the game is currently playing, and it is determined whether the upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state (seventh upper limit number of times) is greater than the determined remaining number of times. In this modified example, the seventh upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state is set to 50 times; if the value of the support counter area SC is 50 or less, this step is judged as positive, and if it is greater than 50, this step is judged as negative.

If the maximum number of times in the third time-shortened game state is greater than the current remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state, steps Sb4804 to Sb3408 are executed to apply the third time-shortened game state in preference to the current first time-shortened game state.

In step Sb4804, the first support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This ends the first time-shortened gaming state. In the following step Sb4805, the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to the third time-shortened gaming state.

In step Sb4806, a value corresponding to the seventh upper limit (for example, 50 times) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM 314. At that time, regardless of the value of the support counter area SC at that time (the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state), it is rewritten to the value corresponding to the seventh upper limit. Therefore, regardless of when the first time-shortened game state transitions to the third time-shortened game state, the number of times remaining in the time-shortened game state (low probability mode and high frequency support state) after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state will be the seventh upper limit.

In step Sb3408, a third time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the command to be sent to the effect control device 143. This notifies the effect control device 143 of the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb4803 (if the upper limit number of times in the third time-shortened gaming state is less than the current remaining number of times in the first time-shortened gaming state), the current first time-shortened gaming state is applied in preference to the third time-shortened gaming state. Specifically, the processing for transitioning to the third time-shortened gaming state is terminated without performing the processing of steps Sb4804 to Sb3408.

In this way, in this modified example, when a special miss occurs, the maximum number of times in the third time-shortened game state is compared with the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state, and the time-shortened game state with the greater number of times is prioritized. For example, if the system is configured to always transition to the third time-shortened game state, and the maximum number of times in the third time-shortened game state is less than the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state, transitioning to the third time-shortened game state will effectively reduce the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state. In other words, this transition would be disadvantageous to the player, but this modified example makes it possible to prevent such a transition to an unfavorable state.

In this modified example, the first time-shortened game state has multiple types of first time-shortened game states with different maximum number of plays, and the number of plays at which the priority of the first time-shortened game state reverses with the third time-shortened game state differs for each type of first time-shortened game state. Specifically, in the first time-shortened game state A (first time-shortened game state with a maximum number of plays of 70), which is entered upon winning a 4R normal jackpot result A, if a special miss occurs on the first through 20th special game play, priority is given to continuing the first time-shortened game state A, and from the 21st play onwards, priority is given to transitioning to the third time-shortened game state. Additionally, in the first time-saving game state B (first time-saving game state with a maximum of 100 spins), which is triggered by winning the 4R regular jackpot result B, if a special miss occurs on the first through 50th special game spin, priority is given to continuing in the first time-saving game state B, and from the 51st spin onwards, priority is given to transitioning to the third time-saving game state.

This relationship also applies to the first time-saving game state that is triggered by winning 10R regular jackpot result A, and the first time-saving game state that is triggered by winning 10R regular jackpot result B.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb4802 (the first support flag is not set), i.e., if the game is in normal play mode, processing for ending the normal game is executed in step Sb4807. This processing is the same as the processing in steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the processing for transitioning to the second time-reduced play mode in FIG. 119. In this case, for the special game round, a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time (Figure 149), and this specific fixed display time may be longer (e.g., 0.8 seconds) than the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated, as in the second embodiment above, or may be longer (e.g., 4 seconds) than the total period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game round that corresponds to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game round that corresponds to the second time-saving game state, as in variant example 2 above.

After executing step Sb4807, proceed to step Sb4805 and execute the process of setting the third support flag. Then, execute the process from step Sb4806 onwards.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb4801 (if the third support flag is set), the processing for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processing of steps Sb4802 to Sb3408. In other words, even if a special miss occurs in the third time-saving game state, re-transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the remaining number of plays at that time is maintained.

<Special chart game time variable display time table>
The special symbol game count control processing and variable start processing performed by the main control device 162 are the same as in the case of the above-mentioned modified example 3 (Figs. 145 and 146), but as described above, this modified example is configured to determine whether to prioritize continuing the first time-shortened game state or transitioning to the third time-shortened game state when a special miss occurs in the first time-shortened game state, and the variable display time table is set accordingly. The variable display time table for this modified example will be explained below with reference to Figs. 172 and 173.

In this modified example, the variable display time tables include at least a variable display time table for special misses on the second special design (for first time-shortened game state A), a variable display time table for special misses on the second special design (for first time-shortened game state B), a variable display time table for normal misses on the second special design (for first time-shortened game state A), and a variable display time table for normal misses on the second special design (for first time-shortened game state B).

The variable display time table for special misses in the second special chart (for first time-shortened game state A) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a special miss while in first time-shortened game state A (first time-shortened game state with a maximum number of tries of 70). This variable display time table is configured so that the variable pattern selection manner differs depending on whether the special miss result is a situation in which continuation of first time-shortened game state A is prioritized or a situation in which transition to the third time-shortened game state is prioritized.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172(a), variation pattern W1 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected for the first through twentieth special symbol game rounds, where continuation of the first time-saving game state A is prioritized, and variation pattern W2 (e.g., 15 sec) is selected for the 21st through 70th special symbol game rounds, where transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized. Variation pattern W1 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and variation pattern W2 corresponds to a special reach miss A effect. In other words, when a variation start command corresponding to variation pattern W1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a complete miss effect as a game round effect, and when a variation start command corresponding to variation pattern W2 is sent to the effect control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect as a game round effect.

The special reach-miss A effect is the same as the special reach-miss effect in Variation 3 described above. That is, as shown in Figures 174(a) and (b), after a reach display using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 is performed, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner while including the special pattern 479, and then the special pattern 479 is displayed stationary on the reach line. After the special reach-miss A effect is performed, an additional effect (Figure 130(c)) similar to that of the second embodiment described above is executed. The number of additional effects announced at that time is 50, which is the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state (seventh upper limit number of times).

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special symbol (for first time-shortened game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special symbol is a special miss while the game is in first time-shortened game state B (first time-shortened game state with a maximum number of plays of 100). This variable display time table is also configured so that the variable pattern selection manner differs depending on whether the special miss result is a situation in which continuation of first time-shortened game state B is prioritized or a situation in which transition to the third time-shortened game state is prioritized. Specifically, as shown in Figure 172 (b), variable pattern W1 is selected for the 1st to 50th special symbol game plays, in which continuation of first time-shortened game state B is prioritized, and variable pattern W2 is selected for the 51st to 100th special symbol game plays, in which transition to the third time-shortened game state is prioritized.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special symbol (for first time-shortened game state A) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special symbol is a normal miss while in first time-shortened game state A. As shown in Figure 173 (a), this variable display time table is configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special symbol has been played since transitioning to first time-shortened game state A.

Specifically, for the first through twentieth special symbol game plays, one of variation patterns 21H through 24H is selected. Variation patterns 21H through 24H are the same as variation patterns 21H through 24H in Figure 113(d). Furthermore, for the 21st through 60th special symbol game plays, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "79," one of variation patterns 21H through 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "80" and "99," variation pattern W3 (e.g., 14 sec) is selected.

Variation pattern W3 corresponds to the special reach miss B effect. The special reach miss B effect is a so-called false effect that pairs with the special reach miss A effect, and after building up anticipation for a special miss, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a static combination that differs from the special miss combination. Specifically, as shown in Figures 174(a) and (c), after a reach display is performed using the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner while including the special symbol 479, and then the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a static manner so that the special symbol 479 does not stop on the reach line.

For the 61st to 70th special symbol game plays, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "39," one of variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "40" and "99," variation pattern W3 is selected. Compared to the 21st to 60th special symbol game plays, the proportion of variation pattern W3 is higher. In other words, for the 61st to 70th special symbol game plays, the special reach miss B effect is more likely to be executed than for the 21st to 60th special symbol game plays, and the incentive for a special miss (third time-saving game state) is strengthened.

Note that the first through twentieth special symbol game rounds are situations in which even if a special miss occurs in the first time-shortened game state A, the game will not transition to the third time-shortened game state; the 21st through 60th rounds correspond to the middle of the first time-shortened game state A, and the 69th through 70th rounds correspond to the end of the first time-shortened game state A. Incidentally, the selectable variation patterns for the first through twentieth special symbol game rounds do not include variation pattern W3, and the special reach miss B effect is not executed in these special symbol game rounds.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special symbol (for first time-shortened game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special symbol is a normal miss while in first time-shortened game state B. This variable display time table is also configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special symbol has been played since transitioning to first time-shortened game state A, as shown in Figure 173 (b).

Of these, the selection pattern for the first through 70th special symbol play times is the same as that for the variable display time table (for first time-shortened play state A) for normal misses in the second special symbol in Figure 173(a). In other words, for the first through 70th special symbol play times in first time-shortened play state B, a variable pattern is selected using a lottery table of the same type as that for first time-shortened play state A. For this reason, the selection trend for the variable display time (play time effects) tends to be similar to that in first time-shortened play state A. This makes it difficult or impossible for the player to determine whether they are in first time-shortened play state A or first time-shortened play state B (in other words, what the maximum number of times the first time-shortened play state is during their stay) from the behavior of the variable display time and play time effects.

The selection manner of the variable patterns does not necessarily have to be completely identical, and they may have similar selection manners. For example, in the variable display time table for first time-shortened game state B, the selection rate of variable pattern W3 is high in the 61st to 70th special game rounds, so long as there is a common trend with the variable display time table for first time-shortened game state A, the detailed selection probability and target game rounds may differ.

As shown in Figure 173 (b), in the 71st to 90th special game plays, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "79," one of variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "80" and "99," variation pattern W3 is selected. Furthermore, in the 91st to 100th special game plays, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "39," one of variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "40" and "99," variation pattern W3 is selected. In other words, even in the first time-saving game state B, the special reach miss B effect is more likely to be executed in the final stages, strengthening the incentive for a special miss (third time-saving game state).

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 175, we will explain what happens when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special miss result in the first time-saving game state A (the first time-saving game state with the upper limit of 70 times).

The maximum number of times the third time-saving game state, which is entered upon winning a special miss result, is set at 50. However, for the first through 20 special game plays after entering the first time-saving game state A, the number of remaining plays in the first time-saving game state A will be greater than the maximum number of times in the third time-saving game state, and for the 21st through 70th special game plays, the maximum number of times in the third time-saving game state will be greater than the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state A.

In this modified example, if a special miss occurs during the first time-shortened game state and a transition to the third time-shortened game state is triggered, the system is configured so that, between continuing the first time-shortened game state A and transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, the option that results in more remaining plays in the time-shortened game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode state) (the option that is more advantageous to the player) takes priority. For this reason, as shown in Figures 175(a) and (b), if a special miss occurs on the first through twentieth special symbol game play, the system will continue in the first time-shortened game state A, and if a special miss occurs on the 21st through 70th special symbol game play, the system will transition to the third time-shortened game state.

When the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is changed to the remaining number of times in the third time-saving game state, regardless of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state A at that time. Therefore, for example, if a special miss occurs on the 30th special game play, the time-saving game state will be set for 50 times from that point onwards (Figures 175 (c) and (d)). Similarly, for example, if a special miss occurs on the 65th special game play, the time-saving game state will be set for 50 times from that point onwards (Figures 175 (e) and (f)). However, the total number of times played, taking into account both the first time-saving game state A and the third time-saving game state, is 80 times in the former case and 115 times in the latter case. In other words, during the 21st to 70th special symbol play times, when transition to the third time-saving play state is permitted, the later the special symbol play time that results in a special miss, the greater the total number of special symbol play times that the time-saving play state can be played, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, a maximum number of times the first time-shortened game state A can be played is set, and the opportunity to transition to the third time-shortened game state is not guaranteed indefinitely. In particular, in this modified example, when in the normal game state, winning through the second actuation port 63 is limited, resulting in a game mode in which the aim is to win the jackpot by winning through the first actuation port 62, and the result type of the first special symbol lottery, which is conducted when a symbol is won through the first actuation port 62, does not include a special miss result. Therefore, if the first time-shortened game state A ends without transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, the opportunity to transition to the third time-shortened game state will be lost. In this case, the total number of special symbol game times that the time-shortened game state can be played will be 70, which will ultimately remain fewer than if a special miss result had occurred.

In other words, the closer you get to the end of first time-saving game state A, the greater the profit you can make if you hit a special missing result, but the risk that first time-saving game state A will end without any changes and you will not be able to increase your remaining number of plays also increases. This allows you to enjoy the game as you juggle the anticipation of hitting a special missing result later rather than earlier, and the frustration of hitting a special missing result before first time-saving game state A ends, making it possible to increase the excitement of playing in first time-saving game state A.

In this modified example, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is determined after the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state has been updated. Therefore, when switching from the first time-shortened game state A to the third time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times can be deducted after the next special game play begins after the switch. Therefore, it is possible to preferably ensure that 50 times are the remaining number of times after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state.

Next, the flow of the game state taking into account the first time-saving game state B (first time-saving game state with a maximum number of plays of 100) will be explained with reference to Figures 176 and 177.

In this modified example, in addition to the first time-saving game state A described above, a first time-saving game state B is set as the type of first time-saving game state to which a transition occurs upon winning a jackpot. In this first time-saving game state B, the maximum number of plays is set to 100, which is higher than in first time-saving game state A. Therefore, the range of special game plays that will trigger a transition to the third time-saving game state in the event of a special miss is different from that of first time-saving game state A. Specifically, even if a special miss occurs on the first through 50th special game plays, the game will not transition to the third time-saving game state; however, if a special miss occurs on the 51st through 100th special game plays, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state and the remaining number of plays will be rewritten to 50 (Fig. 176 (c) and (d)).

For example, if only the first time-shortened game state A is set and the range of special game rounds that will cause a transition to the third time-shortened game state in the event of a special miss is fixed, the player will be able to know in advance when a special miss will increase their profitability, which could lead to a loss of interest in other game rounds. In this regard, with this modified example, the range of special game rounds that will cause a transition to the third time-shortened game state in the event of a special miss is diversified, so the timing at which a special miss will increase the player's profitability is no longer uniformly determined. This prevents the player's attention from concentrating on the same game round during each first time-shortened game state, making it possible to increase attention to the game throughout the entire first time-shortened game state.

Here, this modified example is configured to make it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B. Specifically, as already explained, the selection mode for the variable display time (variable display pattern) is common between first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B, and a common effect is executed as the start effect when transitioning to each of these time-shortened game states.

For example, as shown in FIG. 128(b), in a configuration in which a remaining number image 472 is displayed on the pattern display device 75 along with a title image 473 such as "Chance Time" during the start performance, the same title image 473 and remaining number image 472 are displayed in both first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B. In other words, even when the transitioned first time-shortened game state is first time-shortened game state B, the initial remaining number of times announced is the same as in first time-shortened game state A.

The remaining number of times image 472 will be displayed in the same way as in first time-shortened game state A, not only at the start of the performance, but also in subsequent special symbol game times in first time-shortened game state B. Note that when first time-shortened game state B has reached 70 special symbol game times, a specified additional performance (for example, the additional performance in Figure 130 (c)) will be executed. This notifies the user of an increase in the remaining number of times corresponding to the difference from first time-shortened game state A (30 times), and ensures consistency with the actual remaining number of times.

In addition, if the configuration is such that a background image for the first time-shortened game state that is different from that for the normal game state is set as the background image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, that background image may be common to both the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that multiple types of display modes for each symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set according to the type of game state, each symbol may be displayed in the same display mode in both the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B.

Note that to make it impossible or difficult to distinguish between first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B, it is not necessary to implement all of the above configurations; it is sufficient to implement at least one of them.

As described above, by providing multiple types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers, the range of special game rounds that will cause a transition to the third time-saving game state in the event of a special miss is not uniformly determined, making it impossible or difficult to distinguish between these first time-saving game states. This allows for a variety of ways to enjoy the game depending on the number of special game rounds played after transitioning to the first time-saving game state, as follows:

First, in zone A (Fig. 176 (e)), where the first through twentieth special symbol game rounds are played, transition to the third time-limited game state will not occur if a special miss result is won, regardless of whether the first time-limited game state entered after the open/close execution mode is first time-limited game state A or first time-limited game state B. In this zone A, the remaining number of rounds is not added, so players can enjoy the game while simply striving for a jackpot result. In line with this, the game round presentation displayed on the symbol display device 75 does not execute either the special reach miss A presentation, which notifies players of a win on a special miss result (the occurrence of an add-on), or its false presentation, the special reach miss B presentation (Figs. 172 and 173).

In Zone B (Fig. 176 (e)), where the 21st to 50th special game rounds are played, if the first time-shortened game state entered is First Time-Shortened Game State A, the player will transition to the third time-shortened game state upon winning the special miss result; if the first time-shortened game state is First Time-Shortened Game State B, the player will not transition to the third time-shortened game state even if they win the special miss result. Therefore, Zone B becomes a zone where the remaining number of rounds is added, and the first time-shortened game state A is confirmed.

As a result, from the player's perspective, the occurrence of the additional bonus means that the total number of special symbol game times that can be played in the time-shortened game state is greater than the upper limit of the first time-shortened game state A; however, conversely, the absence of the additional bonus means that the possibility of first time-shortened game state B remains, in which it is possible to aim for a greater total number of special symbol game times that can be played in the time-shortened game state. Therefore, regardless of how much the total number of bonuses has increased, players who are hoping for an increase in the total number of bonuses can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result. Furthermore, players who wish to increase the total number of bonuses even slightly can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result while avoiding a special miss result.

In Zone B, in the game-play presentation of the symbol display device 75, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a special miss, a special reach miss A presentation is executed, and in some cases where the result is a normal miss, a special reach miss B presentation is executed (Figures 172 and 173).

In Zone C (Fig. 176 (e)), where the 51st to 60th special game rounds are played, if the first time-limited game state to which the player is entered is either First Time-limited Game State A or First Time-limited Game State B, the player will transition to the third time-limited game state if they win the special miss result. However, if the player is in First Time-limited Game State B, the timing of winning the special miss result (the timing of transition to the third time-limited game state) will be earlier, and the increase in the total number of times will remain small. For this reason, players who wish to increase the total number of times even slightly will be in a state where they do not want the special miss result, and can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result while avoiding the special miss result.

Zone D (Fig. 176 (e)), where the 61st to 70th special game rounds are played, will transition to the third time-shortened game state if a special miss result is won, regardless of whether the first time-shortened game state to which the player transitions is first time-shortened game state A or first time-shortened game state B. However, if the first time-shortened game state to which the player transitions is first time-shortened game state A, the game will be at its end, increasing the likelihood that first time-shortened game state A will end. For players who want to avoid the time-shortened game state ending without any remaining rounds being added, this is an enjoyable state in which they can experience the thrill of the time-shortened game state potentially ending, while aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result.

In Zone D, if the result of the special lottery is a normal miss, the probability of the special reach miss B effect being executed is increased (Figure 173). This increases the chances for players to watch the effect in suspense, wondering whether they will win the special miss result and the remaining number of plays will be increased, or whether they will not win the special miss result and the time-saving game state will end, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

If the first time-shortened game state to which the player transitions is first time-shortened game state B, the timing of winning the special miss result would still be on the early side, and the increase in the total number of times would remain small. For this reason, players who want a larger total number of times would want the time-shortened game state not to end (the first time-shortened game state to which the player transitions is first time-shortened game state B) while avoiding a special miss result.

In Zone E (Fig. 176 (e)), where the 71st to 90th special game rounds are played, the transition to the first time-limited game state is confirmed to be first time-limited game state B. This is a state in which players can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result.

If the first time-shortened game state to which the player has transitioned is first time-shortened game state B and the 70th special game play is reached, as already mentioned, an additional effect is executed corresponding to the difference from the upper limit number of times in first time-shortened game state A. In this case, in addition to having the effect of aligning the number of times notified by the remaining number image 472 with the remaining number of times in first time-shortened game state B, there is also the advantage that players who believe that the first time-shortened game state to which the player has transitioned is first time-shortened game state A or players who are not aware of the gameplay characteristics in advance can perceive special game play from the 71st time onwards as game play with the remaining number of times added.

In this case, before the additional effect is executed, an ending effect corresponding to the end of the first time-saving gaming state may be executed. This can create a stronger impression that the first time-saving gaming state has ended.

Zone F (Figure 176 (e)), where the 91st to 100th special symbol game rounds are played, is the final stage of first time-saving game state B, and the likelihood of first time-saving game state B ending is increasing. For the player, if they can win a special miss result at this timing (if they can generate an additional round on top of the remaining rounds), they will have achieved the maximum total number of rounds, and can enjoy the thrill of first time-saving game state B coming to an end while aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result. In zone F, as in zone D, the probability of the special reach miss B effect being executed is increased if the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery is a normal miss result (Figure 173).

With the above configuration, players can enjoy playing the game by predicting whether the first time-shortened game state they have entered will be first time-shortened game state A or first time-shortened game state B, and by predicting when they can get a special miss result to increase the total number of spins, thereby making the game more entertaining.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The first time-saving game state is configured to include first time-saving game state A and first time-saving game state B, which differ in the range of special game turns that allow the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state to increase when a special miss occurs.

For example, if the number of special symbol play times that are allowed to increase the remaining number of times (transition to the third time-saving play state) when a special miss occurs is fixed, the player will be able to know in advance when the special miss result will increase the remaining number of times, which could cause them to lose interest in other special symbol play times. In this regard, multiple first time-saving play states are provided with different ranges of special symbol play times that are allowed to increase the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state when a special miss result occurs, so it is no longer possible to uniformly determine when the remaining number of times will increase when a special miss result occurs. This prevents players from focusing their attention on the same special symbol play time in each first time-saving play state, making it possible to increase attention to the game throughout the entire first time-saving play state.

The type of first time-shortened game state is not clearly indicated, making it impossible or difficult for the player to determine whether the first time-shortened game state to which they have entered is first time-shortened game state A or first time-shortened game state B.

For example, if the configuration clarifies the number of special symbol play times that are in an allowable state (a state in which an increase in the remaining number of times is allowed), even if multiple first time-saving play states are provided with different ranges of special symbol play times that result in such a state, the special symbol play times that require attention in each first time-saving play state will be clear, raising the concern that player interest will be biased toward specific play times. In this regard, by making it impossible or difficult for players to distinguish between first time-saving play state A and first time-saving play state B, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult for players to distinguish the range of special symbol play times that are in an allowable state. This allows players to enjoy playing while predicting which special symbol play times are in an allowable state in each first time-saving play state, making it possible to increase attention to the game throughout the entire first time-saving play state.

The upper limit number of times in first time-shortened game state B (e.g., 100 times) is set to be higher than the upper limit number of times in first time-shortened game state A (e.g., 70 times), and in first time-shortened game state B, an allowable state is included in special game times after the upper limit number of times in first time-shortened game state A (e.g., the 71st to 100th special game times).

In this configuration, when the number of times the special symbol has been played since the transition to the time-saving play state reaches the number of times corresponding to the upper limit of the first time-saving play state A (for example, 70 times), if the player predicts that the transition to the first time-saving play state will be first time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state will end when the upper limit is reached. On the other hand, if the player predicts that the transition will be to first time-saving play state B, the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state can be increased by a special miss result after the corresponding number of times has been reached, which is a desirable situation for the player. Therefore, when the number of times the special symbol has been played in the first time-saving play state approaches the corresponding number of times, the player can play while balancing the anxiety of the time-saving play state ending with the anticipation of winning the special miss result after the corresponding number of times has been reached, thereby efficiently increasing the remaining number of times, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase the player's interest.

In both the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, there are common special game rounds (1st to 20th rounds) in which the remaining number of rounds is not increased even if a special miss occurs.

With this configuration, in the above-mentioned common special game round, the remaining number of plays will not be added regardless of whether the transition to the time-saving game state is first time-saving game state A or first time-saving game state B. This allows the player to have a period of time to concentrate on playing in order to achieve a jackpot result, without worrying about the type of time-saving game state or whether they will win a special miss result.

In the above case, the configuration may be such that the player can distinguish between the common special symbol game round, in which the remaining number of turns is not increased even if a special miss occurs, and the other special symbol game round, in which the remaining number of turns is increased if a special miss occurs. For example, it is conceivable to use different background images on the symbol display device 75 for the common special symbol game round and the other special symbol game round.

If a special miss occurs in the first time-saving game state A or first time-saving game state B and the remaining number of turns is increased, the increase in the remaining number of turns will be limited even if a special miss occurs again in the time-saving game state after the increase.

With this configuration, the remaining number of plays based on a winning special miss result is limited to one time during the transition to the time-saving play state, which can result in a significant difference in the total number of plays that can be played in the time-saving play state depending on whether the addition occurs early or late in the transition to the time-saving play state. This increases the importance of the timing of the special miss result, making it possible to effectively highlight the effects of each of the above configurations.

If a special miss occurs in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state at that time is compared with the maximum number of times in the third time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state with the greater number of times is given priority.

With this configuration, if a special miss occurs (if the trigger for transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs), and the number of remaining spins at that time is greater, the first time-shortened game state will continue. Conversely, if the maximum number of spins in the third time-shortened game state is greater, the first time-shortened game state will be switched to the third time-shortened game state. This means that no matter when a special miss occurs, the player can always transition to the time-shortened game state that is more advantageous to them.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, it is possible to realize, with a simple configuration and simple control, a pachinko machine with multiple time-shortened game states that have different ranges of play times for which the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is allowed to increase when a special miss occurs. In other words, while using existing control methods to manage the termination of multiple time-shortened game states with different upper limit numbers (first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B), it is sufficient to simply add the above-mentioned comparison and prioritization process (step Sb4803), thereby preventing the configuration and control process from becoming too complicated.

<Modification 6>
While the second embodiment and its modifications have either the second time-shortened gaming state or the third time-shortened gaming state, this modification has both of these time-shortened gaming states. Furthermore, this modification is configured so that transition to the second time-shortened gaming state or the third time-shortened gaming state is restricted when in either of the time-shortened gaming states. The configuration of this modification will be explained below with reference to Figures 178 to 190.

<Special game winning/losing table>
In this modified example, a win/loss table for the first and second special symbols (for the low probability mode) and a win/loss table for the first and second special symbols (for the high probability mode) are provided as win/loss tables for the special symbol game. These win/loss tables are stored in the win/loss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/loss table (for low probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 when the lottery mode is low probability mode. In this win/loss table (for low probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in FIG. 178(a), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 10 values from "10" to "19" are set as the random number values that result in a special miss, and the probability of a special miss in low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random numbers are assigned to normal miss results, and the probability of a normal miss in low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referenced when a win/loss lottery is held based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 when the lottery mode is high probability mode. In this win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in Figure 178 (b), a total of 50 random number values ranging from "0" to "49" are set as jackpot results, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, no special loss results are set as lottery results, and all values other than the random number values for the jackpot are assigned to normal loss results. The probability of a normal loss result is set to 59/60.

<Special game type table>
The special game round type table for this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 179.

As jackpot type tables, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Figure 179(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Figure 179(b)) are set.

As shown in Figure 179(a), the jackpot type table for the first special design has a 4R special jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being executed.

A 4R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability gaming state continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit is reached, the high probability gaming state ends and transitions to a normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

A 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit (e.g., 100 plays). When the second upper limit is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, jackpot type counter C2 values of "0" to "64" correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, and values of "65" to "99" correspond to a 4R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in Figure 179 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special design has a 10R special jackpot result and a 10R regular jackpot result set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being executed.

A 10R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit (e.g., 100 plays).

A 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 plays).

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, jackpot type counter C2 values between "0" and "64" correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, and values between "65" and "99" correspond to a 10R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of a 10R special jackpot result is set at 65%, and the probability of a 10R regular jackpot result is set at 35%.

In this modified example, in addition to the first time-saving game state, which is triggered by a jackpot, there are also a second time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state, which are triggered by no jackpot.

Of these, the second time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is entered when the number of play times resulting in a loss (loss play times) reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 800 times). As shown in Figure 179 (c), this second time-saving game state continues until the number of special game times executed after entering the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 500 times).

In this modified example, the ceiling number of times is set to a number greater than the upper limit number of times (number of times of continuation) of the first time-saving game state, which is triggered by a 4R regular jackpot result or a 10R regular jackpot result. This prevents the number of misses during the first time-saving game state from reaching the ceiling number of times.

The third time-shortened game state is a time-shortened game state that is entered when the result of the special symbol lottery results in a special miss. As shown in FIG. 179(d), this third time-shortened game state continues until the number of special symbol game plays executed since entering the third time-shortened game state reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 300 times), which is less than the fifth upper limit. In other words, the third time-shortened game state continues for fewer times than the second time-shortened game state, making the second time-shortened game state more advantageous for the player. In this modified example, there is only one type of third time-shortened game state.

<Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends>
The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 180. This process is executed in step Sb915 of the game state transition process (Fig. 114) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in Fig. 116. In Fig. 180, the same steps as those in Fig. 116 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb1101, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot result. If it is a guaranteed jackpot result, in step Sb1102, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the probability change counter area KC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. In step Sb1104, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb5101, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. In step Sb1108, a high probability gaming state start command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1101 (the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, where the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes a transition to the first time-saving gaming state.

In step Sb5102, a value corresponding to the second upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb1113, a command to start the first time-shortened gaming state is set as the command to be sent to the effect control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated.

<Special game play control processing>
The special symbol game number control process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 181. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (Figure 107), and is executed instead of the special symbol game number control process of Figure 108. In Figure 181, the same process as in Figure 108 is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb503 (the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable symbol), step Sb504 determines whether the common hold number CRN is "0". If the common hold number CRN is not "0", that is, if there is hold information for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, proceed to step Sb505 and execute the data setting process. In the data setting process, the hold information stored in the first special symbol hold area Ra or the second special symbol hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb5201, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special symbol display unit 43, and then the special symbol play count control process is terminated. Details of the change start process in step Sb5201 will be described later.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb507 (the variable display time has elapsed), the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is cleared in step Sb509. In step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of times in high probability mode or to end high probability mode.

In the following step Sb5202, high-frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb5203, time-saving play state transition processing is executed to transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state. In step Sb5204, confirmation display start processing is executed to start confirmation display on the special symbol display unit 43, and then the special symbol play count control processing is terminated. Details of steps Sb5202 to Sb5204 will be described later.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing of step Sb5201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 182. In Fig. 182, the same steps as those in the fluctuation start processing of Fig. 146 are given the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the processing of step Sb3302 or step Sb3303, step Sb3304 determines whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 indicates a jackpot win. If a jackpot win is determined, proceed to step Sb3305, where the corresponding type table (Figure 179) is referenced to determine the jackpot type.

In step Sb3306, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In step Sb3307, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3304 (if the jackpot is not won), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, where it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment made in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special miss result. If it is a special miss result, a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb3310. In step Sb3311, a special miss stop result is set as the stop result of the image displayed in a variable manner on the special image display unit 43.

If step Sb3308 judges negative (if the result is not a special miss), it means that the result of this lottery is a normal miss. In this case, proceed to step Sb3312 and set the stop result for a normal miss.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, step Sb5301 executes high-frequency support mode update processing to update the number of special game plays in high-frequency support mode. Step Sb5302 executes second time-shortened game state transition determination processing to determine whether a transition trigger to the second time-shortened game state has occurred, and step Sb5303 executes third time-shortened game state transition determination processing to determine whether a transition trigger to the third time-shortened game state has occurred. Details of steps Sb5301 to Sb5303 will be provided later.

In step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time is selected by lottery using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table.

In this modified example, as variation patterns when the first special chart draw results in a loss (special loss result or normal loss result), in addition to variation patterns corresponding to complete loss effects and various reach loss effects when a normal loss result occurs, variation pattern R1 (e.g., 18 seconds) for when the ceiling is reached and variation pattern R2 (e.g., 15 seconds) for special loss results are set, as shown in Figure 183.

Fluctuating pattern R1 is selected in a game round in which the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the number of losses has reached the ceiling number of times. When a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern R1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a ceiling-reaching effect as an effect for that game round. In the ceiling-reaching effect, a loss result is announced by a complete loss effect using symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then an achievement notification effect is executed to announce that the ceiling number of times has been reached. Note that instead of or in addition to the achievement notification effect, at least a part of the start effect corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving game state (for example, the start effect in Figure 130 (a)) may be executed.

Variation pattern R2 is selected when the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery is a special miss result. When a variation start command corresponding to variation pattern R2 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss effect as an effect for a play round. The special reach miss effect notifies the player that a special miss result has occurred, and is the same as the special reach miss effect in Figure 153 relating to Variation 3 above.

In this modified example, even if the result of the lottery is a special miss, transition to the third time-shortened game state may be restricted. The above-mentioned variation pattern R2 is selected when a transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs in the event of a special miss, and if transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted, a variation pattern corresponding to a complete miss effect, as in the above-mentioned variation 3, is selected.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (Figure 182), after step Sb3313 is executed, in step Sb712, a fluctuation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The fluctuation display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a fluctuation display for a special game round is in progress. After step Sb712 is executed, processing from step Sb713 onwards is executed.

Next, we will explain the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sb5301, the transition determination process for the second time-saving game state in step Sb5302, and the transition determination process for the third time-saving game state in step Sb5303. These processes are executed during the fluctuation start process, or in other words, when the fluctuation display in the special game round begins.

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The frequently supported mode update process in step Sb5301 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb5401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, in step Sb5402 it is determined whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The first support flag indicates that the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, the second support flag indicates that the current game state is the second time-shortened game state, and the third support flag indicates that the current game state is the third time-shortened game state.

If these flags are set, proceed to step Sb5403 and update the value of the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times for each time-saving game state.

In step Sb5404, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0." If the value of the support counter area SC is "0," that is, if the number of times play has been performed in each time-shortened game state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sb5405, where a time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The time-shortened end flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine when each time-shortened game state should be ended.

After step Sb5405 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5401 (if a jackpot result is obtained) or a negative judgment is made in step Sb5402 (if no support flags are set), the remaining number of times for each time-saving game state is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sb5403 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5404 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is determined that each time-saving game state should not be terminated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5405.

<Processing for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining transition to the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5302 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 185.

First, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb5502, where it is determined whether the "reached" flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The "reached" flag is used by MPU 312 to determine whether the number of losing plays has reached the ceiling number of times.

If the reached flag is not set, step Sb5503 determines whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, proceed to step Sb5504 and update the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1. The miss count counter area HC is used by the MPU 312 to determine the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reached.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value in the loss counter area HC is "0." If the value in the loss counter area HC is "0," that is, if the number of loss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, where the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set. If none of the support flags is set, i.e., if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, in step Sb5508, a second time-shortening start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortening gaming state is terminated. The second time-shortening start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the second time-shortening gaming state should be made.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5507 (if any support flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5509, where it is determined whether a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If a time-saving end flag is set, this means that this is the final play in each time-saving play state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb5508, where a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In other words, if the ceiling number of plays is reached in the final play in each time-saving play state, the process proceeds to transition to the second time-saving play state.

If step Sb5509 yields a negative result (the time-saving end flag is not set), that is, if the player is currently in another time-saving game state and is not in the final round of that game, it is determined that the player should not transition to the second time-saving game state, and the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5508. This restricts transition to the second time-saving game state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5502 (if the reached flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5503 (if the high probability flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-limited gaming state is terminated without executing the processes in step Sb5504 and subsequent steps. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5505 (if the value in the miss counter area HC is not "0"), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-limited gaming state is terminated without executing the processes in step Sb5506 and subsequent steps.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5501 (a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb5510, where the value in the counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling count (e.g., 800). In step Sb5511, the process determines whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the reached flag is set, step Sb5512 executes a process to clear the reached flag. After step Sb5512 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5511 (if the reached flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state is terminated.

<Processing for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining transition to the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5303 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 186.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag has been set, i.e., if the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sb5602, where it is determined whether a high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the game is not in a high probability game state, step Sb5603 determines whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, i.e., if the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, or third time-shortened game state, step Sb5604 determines whether the time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (if no support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (if the time-saving end flag is set and this is the final game in each time-saving game state), the process proceeds to step Sb5605, where it is determined whether a second time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the second time-shortening start flag is not set, i.e., if the situation does not warrant a transition to the second time-shortening game state, in step Sb5606, the third time-shortening start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortening game state is terminated. The third time-shortening start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the third time-shortening game state should be made.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5605 (if the second time-saving start flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5606. In other words, even if a special miss result is obtained, if the state is such that a transition to the second time-saving game state should occur, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted.

For this reason, if the maximum number of times reached and the special miss result are won in the same game, the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state has a higher upper limit number of times than the third time-saving game state, making it a time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player. With the above configuration, if both transition triggers are met at the same time, it is possible to transition to the more advantageous time-saving game state.

Here, the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb5302 (Figure 185) and the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state in step Sb5303 (Figure 186) are performed when the variable display of the special game play count begins (more specifically, before the variable display time setting process in step Sb3313) (Figure 182).

Since these processes relate to the transition restriction to the second or third time-saving game state, it would be natural to perform them at the timing of the transition to each of those time-saving game states (the start timing of the confirmation display in the special game round). However, in such a configuration, if both the ceiling number of times reached and a special miss result are won in the same game round, when setting the variable display time (variation pattern) for that game round, MPU 312 will only recognize the special miss result and will not recognize that the ceiling has been reached. For this reason, the variation pattern for that game round will inevitably be variation pattern R2 (Figure 183) corresponding to the special miss result.

In the subsequent process of setting the fluctuation start command in step Sb713 (Fig. 182), a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern R2 is set, and the effect control device 143 will recognize the special reach miss A effect as the game cycle effect to be executed. In other words, even though the game state control prioritizes reaching the ceiling over a special miss result and transitions to the second time-shortened game state, the game cycle effect will not be an effect corresponding to the second time-shortened game state (an effect corresponding to reaching the ceiling), but rather an effect corresponding to transitioning to the third time-shortened game state (an effect announcing a win on the special miss result). In other words, there is a concern that an inconsistency will arise between the content of the game cycle effect and the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to, causing inconvenience such as a player misunderstanding the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to when they see the game cycle effect.

In such cases, the above-mentioned inconsistency could be resolved by using the same game cycle effects when the ceiling is reached and when a special miss result is won, but this would mean that even though multiple types of time-saving game states with different performances have been set up, they would not be utilized in the effects, which is undesirable.

In this regard, in this modified example, steps Sb5302 and Sb5303 are executed when the variable display for a special game round begins, so the variable display time can be set while the MPU 312 is aware of whether the ceiling has been reached or whether priority has been adopted. Therefore, in a game round in which both the ceiling has been reached and a special miss result have occurred, the setting of variable pattern R2 corresponding to the special miss result can be canceled, and variable pattern R1 (Fig. 183) corresponding to reaching the ceiling can be set. As a result, even if there are separate game round effects corresponding to reaching the ceiling and game round effects corresponding to a special miss result, it is possible to execute game round effects that are consistent with the actual game state to which the game is transitioning, making it possible to effectively prevent the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5601 (if the special miss flag is not set) or a positive judgment is made in step Sb5602 (if the high probability flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes from step Sb5603 onwards.

Next, we will explain the processing for ending the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5202 (Figure 181), the processing for transitioning to the time-saving game state in step Sb5203, and the processing for starting the final display in step Sb5204. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed during a special game cycle; in other words, they are executed when the final display begins during a special game cycle.

<Processing for ending high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode termination process in step Sb5202 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb5701, it is determined whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any support flag is set, that is, if the game is currently in the first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, or third time-shortened game state, it proceeds to step Sb5702, where it is determined whether the time-shortened game end flag is set. The time-shortened game end flag indicates that the current time-shortened game state should be ended; in other words, it indicates that the current special symbol game round is the final special symbol game round in the current time-shortened game state.

If the time-saving end flag is set, proceed to step Sb5703, where the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This ends the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state. In the following step Sb5704, the time-saving end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared.

In step Sb5705, the corresponding game state end command is set as the command to be sent to the effect control device 143, and then the high-frequency support mode end processing is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5702 (if the time-saving end flag is not set), the high-frequency support mode end processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb5703 onwards.

<Time-saving gaming state transition processing>
The processing for transitioning to the time-shortened game state in step Sb5203 (Figure 181) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 188.

First, in step Sb5801, it is determined whether a second time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second time-saving start flag indicates that a transition to the second time-saving game state should be made.

If the second time-saving start flag is set, in step Sb5802, the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to the second time-saving game state.

In this modified example, the high-frequency support mode termination process (processing to terminate the time-shortened game state) in step Sb5202 is executed before the time-shortened game state transition process (processing to transition to the time-shortened game state) in step Sb5203 is executed. Therefore, if the number of unsuccessful game plays reaches the ceiling number in the final play in another time-shortened game state, it is possible to transition from the preceding time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state without going through the normal game state.

In step Sb5803, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit (e.g., 500) is set in the support counter area SC in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb5804, a second time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the command to be sent to the effect control device 143. The set second time-shortened gaming state start command is sent to the effect control device 143 in step Sb401 of normal processing (Figure 107).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5801 (the second time-saving start flag is not set), the process proceeds to step Sb5805, where it is determined whether a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third time-saving start flag indicates that a transition to the third time-saving game state should be made.

If the third time-saving start flag is set, the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5806. This causes a transition to the third time-saving game state. Furthermore, if a special miss occurs in the final play in another time-saving game state, a seamless transition can be made from the preceding time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without an intervening normal game state.

In step Sb5807, a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 300) is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb5808, a third time-saving gaming state start command is set as the command to be sent to the effect control device 143.

After step Sb5804 or step Sb5808 is executed, step Sb5809 clears the time-saving start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. In step Sb5810, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the second special symbol flag is not set, that is, if the current special symbol play is the first special symbol play, and the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is from the normal play state, step Sb5811 executes the normal symbol end process. This process is the same as steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the second time-saving play state transition process in FIG. 119.

After step Sb5811 is executed, the process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5810 (if the second special symbol flag is set), the process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5811. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5805 (if the third time-shortened start flag is not set), that is, if the situation does not warrant transitioning to the time-shortened game state, the process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is terminated.

In this modified example, when controlling the termination and transition of the time-shortened game state, the process of updating the number of play times and the process of determining whether to transition to the second or third time-shortened game state are performed at the start of the variable display, while the process of actually terminating or transitioning to the time-shortened game state is performed after the variable display has ended.

If the former count update and transition determination are performed at the start of the change display, it is possible to set the timing of the latter termination process and transition process to the same timing (processing count) as the former, rather than setting it after the change has ended. From the perspective of processing efficiency, it is preferable to execute the processes together at the same time, rather than dividing the processes and distributing their execution timing.

However, if the termination process or transition process is performed at the start of the variable display, the normal game round and the normal electronic device 63a will operate in a manner corresponding to the time-limited game state before the result of the win/loss lottery is announced in the special game round, and by observing this behavior, the player may infer a transition to the second or third time-limited game state. Since the transition to the second or third time-limited game state is triggered by a loss in the win/loss lottery result, in the above case, the player will be able to grasp the loss result before the result of the win/loss lottery is announced. As a result, the expectation of a jackpot in the special game round will disappear early, which is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game round.

In this regard, according to this modified example, the transition to the second or third time-limited play state occurs after the variable display has ended, so the normal play round and normal electric device 63a can be operated in a manner corresponding to the time-limited play state after the win/loss lottery result is announced. This prevents players from determining a loss before the win/loss lottery result is announced, making it possible to maintain the anticipation of a big win in an optimal manner.

<Processing for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the finalized display in step Sb5204 (Fig. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 189. In Fig. 189, the same processes as those in the process for starting the finalized display in Fig. 149 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5901, it is determined whether the current special symbol play is a ceiling-reaching losing play. If it is not a ceiling-reaching losing play, it is determined in step Sb5902 whether a special losing flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special drawing is a special miss, step Sb5903 executes a process to clear the special miss flag. After step Sb5903 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5901 (if the game is a miss in which the ceiling has been reached), this means that a transition to the second or third time-saving game state will occur.

In this case, in step Sb5904, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is set, that is, if the current special symbol play round is a play round of the second special symbol, in step Sb5905, the normal fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set as the fixed display time for the current special symbol play round. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5902 (the special miss flag is not set), that is, if the result of this special symbol win/loss lottery is a jackpot result or a normal miss result, the process also proceeds to step Sb5905, and the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for this round.

If step Sb5904 returns a negative result (the second special symbol flag is not set), i.e., if the current special symbol play is the first special symbol play, this means that the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is a transition from the normal play state. In this case, proceed to step Sb5906, and set the specific fixed display time for the current special symbol play to be longer than the normal fixed display time. In this case, the specific fixed display time may be longer (e.g., 0.8 seconds) than the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game turn that is forcibly terminated, as in the second embodiment above, or, as in variant example 2 above, it may be longer (e.g., 4 seconds) than the total period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) of the fixed display time of the normal game turn that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game turn that corresponds to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the normal game turn that corresponds to the second time-saving game state.

After step Sb5905 or step Sb5906 is executed, in step Sb1504, a confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then steps Sb1505 and Sb1506 are executed sequentially.

In step Sb3512, an external signal setting process is performed to output to the management control device on the gaming hall a game execution signal to notify the execution of a special game round, and a lottery result signal to notify the result of the current special lottery. In this modified example, if a special miss occurs while in the time-saving game state, transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, but the external signal setting process is set so that an external signal corresponding to the special miss result is output even in such cases.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 190.

If the number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number of times during normal play (event A), the normal play state transitions to the second time-saving play state. In this case, for the special symbol play play that reaches the ceiling, a ceiling-reaching effect (Fig. 183) is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play-time effect. In the ceiling-reaching effect, a complete miss effect using symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and an achievement notification effect that notifies players that the ceiling number of plays has been reached are executed.

In this modified example, the miss counter area HC is updated (the number of misses is updated) at the start of the variable display for the special symbol game (Figs. 182 and 185), but the number of misses in the miss count image 475 (Fig. 128) is updated after the fixed display time for that special symbol game has elapsed, just like in the second embodiment above.

For example, if the number of times the miss count image 475 is displayed is updated when the miss count counter area HC is updated, the number of times the miss count image 475 is displayed will be incremented by 1 before the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are displayed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may be able to predict the miss result before the win/lose lottery result is announced by the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, making it difficult to maintain anticipation of a jackpot during that special symbol game.

In this regard, as in this modified example, by delaying the update timing of the miss count image 475 relative to the update timing of the miss count counter area HC and updating the miss count image 475 after the confirmation display time has elapsed, it is possible to have the display count of the miss count image 475 increment by 1 after the miss result is announced by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This prevents the player from predicting the miss result in advance, making it possible to maintain anticipation of a jackpot.

In the above configuration, if there is pending information corresponding to the next special symbol game, the miss count image 475 will be updated when that special symbol game starts. If there is no pending information corresponding to the next special symbol game, the miss count image 475 will be updated after the special symbol game in which the miss count counter area HC was updated has ended.

Note that the miss count image 475 does not necessarily have to be updated when the final display time has elapsed, and may be updated at other times. In other words, in order to avoid predicting the miss result in advance, it is sufficient for the miss count image 475 to be updated after the win/lose lottery result is announced by the stopped display of pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the miss count image 475 may be configured to be updated at any time during the period from the end of the variable display to the end of the final display in the special pattern game in which the miss count counter area HC has been updated.

If a special miss occurs during normal game play (event B), the game will transition from normal game play to the third time-saving game play state. In this case, during the special symbol game round in which the special miss occurs, the special reach miss effect (Figure 183) will be executed by the symbol display device 75.

If a special miss occurs in a play round other than the final play round in the first or second time-shortened play state (event C), transition to the third time-shortened play state is restricted, and the first or second time-shortened play state continues. In this case, in the special symbol play round in which the special miss occurs, a complete miss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play round effect. In addition, the special symbol display unit 43 displays a frozen image corresponding to the special miss result.

If a special miss occurs in the final play of the first or second time-shortened play state (event D), the game will transition from the first or second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state. Note that if the play that resulted in a special miss is the final play of the respective time-shortened play state, transition to the third time-shortened play state is permitted because the remaining number of plays in the high-frequency support mode is updated (high-frequency support mode update process in step Sb5301) to recognize the end of the time-shortened play state, and then transition determination processing for the third time-shortened play state is executed (third time-shortened play state transition determination processing in step Sb5303).

In the above case, in the special symbol game round that results in a special miss, a special reach miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round effect. In addition, during at least a portion of the confirmed display time in that special symbol game round, an additional effect (for example, the additional effect in Figure 130 (c)) is executed to notify that the number of remaining times in the high frequency support mode has increased. In this case, the number of additional times notified by the additional effect will be the number corresponding to the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state (for example, 300 times).

If the number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number of play times in a play time other than the final play time in the third time-saving play state (event E), transition to the second time-saving play state is restricted, and the third time-saving play state continues. In this case, in the special symbol play time in which the ceiling is reached, a complete loss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as an effect for the play time.

If the number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number of times in the final play time of the third time-saving play state (event F), the third time-saving play state transitions to the second time-saving play state. In this case, in the special symbol play time in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling-reaching effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play time effect. In addition, the above-mentioned additional effect is executed for at least a portion of the confirmed display time in that special symbol play time.

In this modified example, the upper limit of the number of times in the first time-shortened game state is set to a number lower than the ceiling number of times, so the number of losing play times will not reach the ceiling number during or in the final play time of the first time-shortened game state. However, if the upper limit of the number of times and the ceiling number of times in the first time-shortened game state are set to the same number as in the second embodiment above, a losing result in the final play time of the first time-shortened game state will result in a transition from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state.

If the ceiling is reached and a special miss occurs during the same special game turn in the normal game state (event G), the process is executed in the following order: transition determination for the second time-shortened game state (processing for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb5302) → transition determination for the third time-shortened game state (processing for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb5303), thereby prioritizing transition to the second time-shortened game state. In other words, transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is restricted when in the time-shortened game state. Therefore, if the transition determination for the second time-shortened game state determines transition to the second time-shortened game state, transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted in the subsequent transition determination for the third time-shortened game state. This allows the player to avoid transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in a special symbol game round in which both the ceiling reach and a special miss result are achieved, a ceiling reach effect is executed as a game round effect on the symbol display device 75. In addition, a symbol corresponding to the special miss result is displayed frozen on the special symbol display unit 43.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

This system has a second time-shortened game state, which is triggered when the number of losing game plays reaches the upper limit, and a third time-shortened game state, which is a time-shortened game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state and is triggered when a special losing result occurs. Even if a special losing result occurs during the second time-shortened game state, transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted, and in one special game play, a transition determination to the second time-shortened game state is made before a transition determination to the third time-shortened game state is made.

With this configuration, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won during the same special game, even if the transition condition to the second time-shortened game state is determined to be met in the transition determination for the second time-shortened game state and then the transition condition to the third time-shortened game state is determined to be met in the transition determination for the third time-shortened game state, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is avoided due to the above restriction. This allows for a transition to the advantageous second time-shortened game state, making it possible to optimally control the game state.

The transition determination for the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is performed at the start of the special game round.

In the above configuration, the transition determination to the second time-saving game state and the transition determination to the third time-saving game state are made at the start of a special game round, so these transition determinations can be made before the execution of a game round effect, such as a ceiling-reaching effect corresponding to reaching the ceiling number of times or a special reach-miss effect corresponding to a special miss result, is set. For example, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same special game round, both the ceiling-reaching effect and the special reach-miss effect will be executed as targets for the game round effect. However, with this configuration, the transition to the third time-saving game state is avoided, and the above effects can be selected with the transition to the second time-saving game state taking priority. This makes it possible to appropriately execute a game round effect that is consistent with the adjusted time-saving game state when the destination time-saving game state is adjusted to one of the two.

While the transition determination for the second time-saving game state and the transition determination for the third time-saving game state are made at the start of the special game round, the transition to each time-saving game state is made in conjunction with the start of the confirmation display.

When a transition determination for the second time-shortened game state or a transition determination for the third time-shortened game state is made and a transition to each of these time-shortened game states or a time-shortened game state to transition to is determined, all that remains to be done is to transition to the time-shortened game state in accordance with the determination result (simply set the time-shortened flag corresponding to the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314). For this reason, in a configuration in which each of these transition determinations is made at the start of a special game round, it is natural to also transition to the time-shortened game state at the start of a special game round.

However, if the transition to the time-shortened play state were to occur at the start of a special symbol play round, the player's attention would be shifted to the transition to the time-shortened play state even before the results of the special symbol win/loss lottery were announced, raising concerns that the role of the play round would not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, by waiting until the start of the confirmation display before transitioning to the time-shortened play state, even if the player notices the time-shortened play state from the behavior of the regular electric device 63a, it is possible to have the player focus their attention on the play round until the results of the special symbol win/loss lottery are announced, and then shift their attention to the transition to the time-shortened play state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a loss of attention to the play round by making each of the above transition decisions at the start of a special symbol play round, and to execute play round effects that are consistent with the adjusted time-shortened play state to which the player has transitioned.

Furthermore, the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state are both met when the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery is a loss. For this reason, if the transition to the time-saving play state were to occur at the start of a special symbol play round, there would be the inconvenience of the player being able to determine the result in advance without realizing that they are in the time-saving play state, even before the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery is announced. In this regard, by waiting until the confirmation display begins before transitioning to the time-saving play state, it is possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

The remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated before the transition to the second time-saving game state and the transition to the third time-saving game state are determined.

With this configuration, for example, if a special miss occurs in the final play of the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state can be ended in that final play and then the game can transition to the third time-saving game state. This prevents the special miss result from being invalidated, thereby restricting the transition to the third time-saving game state, and also makes it possible to switch from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without an intervening special game play in the normal game state.

In cases where there is a process (step Sb3313) for setting the execution of a special reach miss effect (announcement corresponding to a special miss result or a transition to the third time-shortened play state) based on the results of a special symbol win/loss lottery as a transition to the third time-shortened play state, and a process (step Sb5504) for updating the number of miss play times as a transition to the second time-shortened play state, the latter update process is performed before the former setting process is performed in one play time (a special symbol play time that resulted in a special miss result).

For example, if the former setting process is executed prior to the latter update process, in a special game turn in which both the ceiling count has been reached and a special miss result has been won, the pachinko machine 10 will only recognize the special miss result as having won, and will not recognize that the ceiling count has been reached, during the setting process. In this case, the setting result will inevitably be that the special reach miss effect will be executed, but the time-saving game state to which the machine actually transitions will be adjusted to the second time-saving game state, resulting in a notification that is inconsistent with the time-saving game state to which the machine is adjusted. In this regard, by executing the latter update process prior to the former setting process, the pachinko machine 10 will be able to recognize that the ceiling count has been reached during the setting process, and can cancel the execution of the special reach miss effect. This makes it possible to adjust the time-saving game state to which the machine transitions while preventing notifications that are inconsistent with the type of time-saving game state to which the machine actually transitions from being issued during the special game turn, thereby enabling optimal control of the game state.

If a special miss occurs during a special game where the cumulative number of misses has not yet reached the ceiling, the number of misses will be updated and then a special reach miss effect will be set to be executed. In other words, if only the conditions for transitioning to the third time-saving game state are met, an appropriate notification will be issued.

The pattern display device 75 displays the miss count image 475, and the display content is updated after the confirmation display time has elapsed.

In the above configuration, the display of the miss count image 475 allows the player to grasp the progress of the cumulative count and the number of times remaining until the ceiling count, and can utilize this information as useful information in subsequent gameplay. In this case, if the configuration is such that the miss count is updated prior to the setting of the notification corresponding to the special miss result, the update process is performed relatively early in the special game round. In such a case, if the display content of the miss count image 475 is updated immediately in response to the update of the miss count, there is a concern that the player may be able to determine that the result is a miss even before the result of the special game round is not notified. In this regard, by waiting until the completion of the confirmation display before updating the miss count image 475, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to determine the miss result in advance. This helps maintain anticipation of a jackpot and prevent a decrease in attention to the game round.

<Modification 7>
In the sixth modification, even if the ceiling is reached or a special miss occurs during the time-shortened game state, the transition to the second or third time-shortened game state is restricted, but in this modification, these transitions are permitted. The configuration of this modification will be explained below with reference to Figures 191 to 194. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the second embodiment and each modification, and their explanation will be omitted.

The configuration of the win/loss table and type table for special game rounds in this modified example is the same as the win/loss table and type table in modified example 6 above, shown in Figures 178 and 179. The second and third time-shortened game states are also the same as the second and third time-shortened game states in modified example 6 above, shown in Figure 179. In other words, the second time-shortened game state has a greater number of continuations than the third time-shortened game state, making the second time-shortened game state a more advantageous time-shortened game state for the player.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 191. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Figure 181), and is executed instead of the fluctuation start processing in Figure 182. In Figure 191, the same step numbers are used for processing similar to that in Figure 182, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, i.e., after the stop results corresponding to each win/lose lottery result are set, step Sb5301 executes high-frequency support mode update processing to update the number of special symbol game times in high-frequency support mode. Step Sb6101 executes third time-shortened game state transition determination processing to determine whether a transition trigger to the third time-shortened game state has occurred, and step Sb6102 executes second time-shortened game state transition determination processing to determine whether a transition trigger to the second time-shortened game state has occurred. In other words, while in the above-mentioned variant 6, the second time-shortened game state transition determination processing was executed before the third time-shortened game state transition determination processing, in this variant, the third time-shortened game state transition determination processing is executed before the second time-shortened game state transition determination processing. Details of steps Sb6101 and Sb6102 will be described later.

After step Sb6102 is executed, step Sb3313 executes a variable display time setting process to set the variable display time for the current game round on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS. In this variant, as in variant 6 above, a variable pattern R1 (e.g., 18 seconds) for when the ceiling is reached and a variable pattern R2 (e.g., 15 seconds) for a special miss result are set (Figure 183). After step Sb3313 is executed, the processes from step Sb712 onwards are executed.

<Processing for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6101 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 192. In Fig. 192, the same steps as those in the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state in Fig. 186 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, it is determined in step Sb5602 whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, step Sb6201 determines whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the first time-shortened gaming state, the second time-shortened gaming state, or the third time-shortened gaming state, step Sb6202 sets a time-shortened ending flag in the various flag storage area 314e. In other words, this modified example is configured to end the current time-shortened gaming state if a special miss occurs while the game is in the first time-shortened gaming state, the second time-shortened gaming state, or the third time-shortened gaming state.

After step Sb6202 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6201 (no support flags are set), a third time-shortening start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb6203, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortening game state is terminated. The third time-shortening start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the third time-shortening game state should be made.

<Processing for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6102 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 193. In Fig. 193, the same steps as those in the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state in Fig. 185 will be assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5503 (the high probability flag is not set), the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is updated in step Sb5504. In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value of the miss count counter area HC is "0." If the value of the miss count counter area HC is "0," that is, if the number of miss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, where the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb6301, it is determined whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, or the third time-shortened game state, in step Sb6302, a time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

After step Sb6302 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6301 (no support flags are set), step Sb6303 determines whether a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the third time-saving start flag is set, that is, if a special miss result occurs in the special game round in which the ceiling was reached, proceed to step Sb6304 and execute a process to clear the third time-saving start flag. This cancels the transition to the third time-saving game state.

After step Sb6304 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6303 (the third time-shortening start flag is not set), the second time-shortening start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb6305, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortening game state is terminated. The second time-shortening start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the second time-shortening game state should be made.

In this modified example, if both the ceiling is reached and a special miss result occur in the same game, it is first set that a transition to the third time-shortened game state should occur based on the special miss result, and then it is rewritten to a transition to the second time-shortened game state based on the ceiling being reached. The second time-shortened game state has a higher upper limit number of plays than the third time-shortened game state and is a time-shortened game state that is advantageous to the player, and the above configuration makes it possible to transition to the more advantageous time-shortened game state if both transition triggers occur simultaneously.

In addition, the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sb5301, the transition determination process to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6101, and the transition determination process to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6102 are executed prior to the variable display time setting process in step Sb3313. Therefore, in a special game cycle in which both the ceiling has been reached and a special miss result has occurred, the decision to prioritize transition to the second time-shortened game state can be reflected in the selection of the variable display time (variation pattern). Specifically, in a special game cycle in which the number of miss game cycles has reached the ceiling number and a special miss result has also occurred, variation pattern R1 (Figure 183), which corresponds to reaching the ceiling, can be set as the variation pattern for that game cycle. This makes it possible to execute a game cycle presentation that is consistent with the game state to be transitioned to.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 194. Note that events A to B are the same as events A to B in modified example 6, so their description will be omitted.

If a special miss occurs in the first or second time-shortened game state (event C), the game will transition from that state to the third time-shortened game state. In this case, in the special symbol game round in which the special miss occurs, a special reach miss effect will be executed by the symbol display device 75 as a game round effect.

If the number of unsuccessful play attempts reaches the ceiling number of attempts while in the third time-saving play state (event D), the third time-saving play state transitions to the second time-saving play state. In this case, in the special symbol play attempt where the ceiling has been reached, a ceiling-reaching effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play attempt effect.

If the ceiling is reached and a special miss occurs during the same special game turn in the normal game state (event E), the process is executed in the following order: transition determination for the third time-shortened game state (processing for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6101) → transition determination for the second time-shortened game state (processing for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6102), thereby prioritizing transition to the second time-shortened game state. In other words, if a transition trigger is established during the time-shortened game state, transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is permitted. Therefore, even if the earlier transition determination for the third time-shortened game state determines a transition to the third time-shortened game state, the later transition determination for the second time-shortened game state changes the determination result to transition to the second time-shortened game state. This allows the player to avoid transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in a special symbol game round in which both the ceiling reach and a special miss result are achieved, a ceiling reach effect is executed as a game round effect on the symbol display device 75. In addition, a symbol corresponding to the special miss result is displayed frozen on the special symbol display unit 43.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

This system has a second time-shortened game state, which is triggered when the number of losing game plays reaches the upper limit, and a third time-shortened game state, which is a time-shortened game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state and is triggered when a special losing result occurs. If a special losing result occurs during the second time-shortened game state, a transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted, and during one special game play, a transition determination to the third time-shortened game state is made before a transition determination to the second time-shortened game state is made.

With this configuration, if the ceiling number of hits is reached and a special miss result is won during the same special game, even if a transition to the third time-shortened game state is determined in the transition determination for the third time-shortened game state, a transition to the second time-shortened game state is subsequently determined in the transition determination for the second time-shortened game state, thereby canceling the result of the previous transition determination for the third time-shortened game state. This allows for a transition to the more advantageous second time-shortened game state, making it possible to optimally control the game state.

<Modification 8>
In the above-mentioned Modifications 6 and 7, the order of the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state and the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state was fixed, but in this modification, the order of these processes can be switched. The configuration of this modification will be explained below with reference to Figures 195 to 200. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modification, and their explanation will be omitted.

In this modified example, similar to the sixth modified example above, if the number of losing plays reaches the upper limit while in the time-saving play state, or if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special losing result, transition to the second or third time-saving play state is restricted.

In addition, the configuration of the win/loss table and type table for special game rounds in this modified example is the same as the win/loss table and type table for modified example 6 above, shown in Figures 178 and 179. Furthermore, the second time-saving game state to which transition occurs when the number of losing game rounds reaches the ceiling number is also the same as the second time-saving game state for modified example 6 above, shown in Figure 179.

However, in this modified example, multiple types of special miss results are set, and multiple types of third time-saving game states are also set.

<Special Miss Type Table and Third Time-Shortened Game State>
The type table for special misses and the third time-saving game state in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 195.

In this modified example, a type table for special misses (for the first special symbol) is provided as a type table separate from the type table for jackpots. The type table for special misses (for the first special symbol) is a type table that is referenced when the result of the lottery for the first special symbol results in a special miss, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313.

As shown in Figure 195 (a), the special miss type table (for the first special symbol) has special miss result A and special miss result B set as selectable special miss types. Special miss result A is a special miss result that transitions to the third time-shortened game state A, and special miss result B is a special miss result that transitions to the third time-shortened game state B.

As shown in Figure 195 (b), the third time-shortened gaming state A is a time-shortened gaming state that continues until the number of times the special game play has been executed reaches a predetermined sixth upper limit (e.g., 300 times). The sixth upper limit is less than the fifth upper limit (e.g., 500 times) of the second time-shortened gaming state, making the second time-shortened gaming state a more advantageous time-shortened gaming state for the player than the third time-shortened gaming state A.

The third time-shortened game state B is a time-shortened game state that continues until the number of times the special game play has been executed reaches a predetermined seventh upper limit (e.g., 700 times). The seventh upper limit is greater than the fifth upper limit of the second time-shortened game state, making the third time-shortened game state B a more advantageous time-shortened game state for the player than the second time-shortened game state.

In the special miss type table (for the first special chart), jackpot type counter C2 values of "0" to "89" correspond to special miss result A, and values of "90" to "99" correspond to special miss result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to special miss result A is set to 90%, and the probability of being assigned to special miss result B is set to 10%.

A special miss result is also set in the win/lose lottery for the second special design (Fig. 178 (a)), but only one type of special miss result is set for the second special design. In other words, no type table for special misses corresponding to the second special design is set. If a special miss result is obtained in the win/lose lottery for the second special design, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state A. Note that this configuration is for convenience in order to make it easier to understand and explain, and multiple types of special miss results for the second special design may be set.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 196. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Figure 181), and is executed instead of the fluctuation start processing in Figure 182. In Figure 196, the same step numbers are used for processing similar to that in Figure 182, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, i.e., after the stop results corresponding to each win/lose lottery result are set, step Sb5301 executes high frequency support mode update processing to update the number of special game plays in high frequency support mode.

In step Sb6501, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag has been set, i.e., if the result of this special chart lottery is a special miss result, it proceeds to step Sb6502, where it is determined whether the type of special miss result is special miss result B. A special miss result B triggers a transition to the third time-shortened game state B, which is a time-shortened game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

If the type of special failure result is not special failure result B, it means that it is special failure result A. Special failure result A triggers a transition to third time-shortened game state A, which is a time-shortened game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state. In this case, proceed to step Sb6503 and execute transition determination process A for the second time-shortened game state, and then execute transition determination process A for the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6504.

The transition determination process A to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6503 and the transition determination process A to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6504 are similar to the transition determination process to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb5302 (FIG. 185) and the transition determination process to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb5303 (FIG. 186) in Variation 6 above. Therefore, if the ceiling number of wins is reached and a special miss result is won in the same game round, and the type of special miss result is special miss result A, transition processing to the time-shortened game state is performed to reflect the reaching of the ceiling number of wins. In other words, transition to the third time-shortened game state A is restricted, and a decision is made to transition to the second time-shortened game state.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6501 (the special miss flag is not set), i.e., if the result of this special drawing is a normal miss, the process will proceed to step Sb6503.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb6502 (if the type of special miss result is special miss result B), step Sb6505 executes determination process B for transition to the third time-limited game state, and then step Sb6506 executes determination process B for transition to the second time-limited game state. In other words, the processing is performed in the reverse order to when a negative judgment is made in step Sb6502.

Here, the transition determination process B to the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6505 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 197. In Figure 197, processes that are similar to the transition determination process to the third time-shortened gaming state in Figure 186 will be assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in Figure 197, the transition determination process B for the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6505 is basically the same as the transition determination process for the third time-shortened game state in Figure 186, but differs in that it does not include the processing of step Sb5605. Step Sb5605 restricts transition to the third time-shortened game state when the second time-shortened game state start flag is set (when the situation calls for transition to the second time-shortened game state), but the transition determination process B for the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6505 does not execute such processing. In other words, regardless of whether the situation calls for transition to the second time-shortened game state, if the player is not currently in another time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state start flag is set, indicating that the player should transition to the third time-shortened game state.

Next, the transition determination process B to the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6506 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 198. In Figure 198, the same processes as the transition determination process to the second time-shortened gaming state in Figure 185 will be assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in Figure 198, the transition determination process B to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6506 is basically the same as the transition determination process to the second time-shortened game state in Figure 185, but differs in that it includes the processing of step Sb6601. Step Sb6601 restricts transition to the second time-shortened game state when the third time-shortened game start flag is set. Therefore, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same game round, and the type of special miss result is special miss result B, transition processing to the time-shortened game state is performed to reflect the win on the special miss result. In other words, transition to the second time-shortened game state is restricted, and a decision is made to transition to the third time-shortened game state B.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 196), after step Sb6504 or step Sb6506 is executed, step Sb3313 executes the fluctuation display time setting process. In the fluctuation display time setting process, if the number of losing plays reaches the ceiling number, fluctuation pattern R1 (FIG. 183) corresponding to reaching the ceiling is set, and if the result of the win/lose lottery is a special losing result, fluctuation pattern R2 corresponding to the special losing result is set. However, if both the ceiling number of plays and a winning special losing result occur in the same play, the fluctuation pattern is set taking into account the decision on which time-saving play state to transition to. Specifically, if it has been decided to transition to the second time-saving play state, fluctuation pattern R1 corresponding to reaching the ceiling is set, and if it has been decided to transition to third time-saving play state B, fluctuation pattern R2 corresponding to the special losing result is set. After step Sb3313 is executed, step Sb712 and subsequent steps are executed.

<Time-saving gaming state transition processing>
The time-saving game state transition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 199. This process is executed in step Sb5203 of the special game play control process (Fig. 181), and is executed in place of the time-saving game state transition process in Fig. 188. In Fig. 199, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Fig. 188, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5801 (the second time-saving start flag is not set), step Sb5805 determines whether a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the third time-saving start flag is set, step Sb5806 sets a third support flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes a transition to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb6701, it is determined whether the type of special failure result is special failure result B. If it is not special failure result B, that is, if it is special failure result A, the process proceeds to step Sb6702, where a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 300) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to be transitioned to is set to third time-saving gaming state A.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb6701 (special miss result B), the process proceeds to step Sb6703, where a value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times (e.g., 700) is set in the support counter area SC. As a result, the third time-saving gaming state to which the process will be transitioned is set to third time-saving gaming state B.

After execution of step Sb6702 or step Sb6703, in step Sb6704, a third time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. At that time, if a transition to third time-shortened gaming state A is to occur, a start command corresponding to third time-shortened gaming state A is set, and if a transition to third time-shortened gaming state B is to occur, a start command corresponding to third time-shortened gaming state B is set. Each of these start commands includes information indicating the upper limit number of plays.

After step Sb5804 or step Sb6704 is executed, step Sb5809 executes the process of clearing the time-saving start flag. Then, step Sb5810 and subsequent steps are executed.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 200. Note that, since event A is the same as event A in the modified example 6, a description thereof will be omitted.

If special miss result A or special miss result B occurs during normal game play (event B), the game will transition from the normal game state to third time-saving game state A or third time-saving game state B. In this case, in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result occurs, the special reach miss effect (Fig. 183) will be executed by the symbol display device 75 as a game round effect.

If special miss result A or special miss result B occurs in a play round other than the final play round of the first time-limited play state or the second time-limited play state (event C), transition to the third time-limited play state A or the third time-limited play state B is restricted, and the first time-limited play state or the second time-limited play state continues. In this case, in the special symbol play round in which the special miss result occurs, a complete miss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play round effect. In addition, the special symbol display unit 43 displays a frozen image corresponding to the special miss result.

If the final play in the first time-shortened play state or the second time-shortened play state results in a special miss result A or a special miss result B (event D), the game will transition from that time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state A or the third time-shortened play state B. In this case, in the special play round in which the special miss result occurs, a special reach miss effect will be executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play round effect.

If the number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number of times in a play time other than the final play time in the third time-shortened play state A or the third time-shortened play state B (event E), transition to the second time-shortened play state is restricted, and the third time-shortened play state A or the third time-shortened play state B continues. In this case, in the special symbol play time in which the ceiling has been reached, a complete loss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as an effect for the play time.

If the number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number of times in the final play of the third time-saving play state A or the third time-saving play state B (event F), the game will transition from each of the third time-saving play states to the second time-saving play state. In this case, in the special play time in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling-reaching effect will be executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play time effect.

If the ceiling is reached and special miss result A occurs during the same special symbol play in the normal game state (event G), the process is executed in the following order: transition determination for the second time-shortened game state (processing A for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6503) → transition determination for the third time-shortened game state (processing A for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6504), thereby prioritizing transition to the second time-shortened game state. In other words, transition to the second time-shortened game state or third time-shortened game state A is restricted when in the time-shortened game state. Therefore, transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined in the earlier transition determination for the second time-shortened game state, and transition to the third time-shortened game state A is restricted in the later transition determination for the third time-shortened game state. This allows the player to avoid transition to the third time-shortened game state A, which is unfavorable to the player, and transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is more favorable to the player.

In this case, in a special symbol game round in which both the ceiling reach and the special miss result are achieved, the symbol display device 75 executes a ceiling reach effect as a game round effect. Furthermore, the special symbol display unit 43 displays a static image corresponding to the special miss result A.

If the ceiling is reached and special miss result B occurs during the same special game turn in the normal game state (event H), the process executes the following order: transition determination for the third time-shortened game state (processing B for transition determination for the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6505) → transition determination for the second time-shortened game state (processing B for transition determination for the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6506), thereby prioritizing transition to the third time-shortened game state B. In other words, while in the time-shortened game state, transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state B is restricted. Therefore, if the earlier transition determination for the third time-shortened game state determines transition to the third time-shortened game state B, transition to the second time-shortened game state is restricted in the later transition determination for the second time-shortened game state. This allows the player to avoid transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is unfavorable to the player, and transition to the third time-shortened game state B, which is more favorable to the player. In this case, in a special symbol game round in which both the ceiling has been reached and a special miss result has occurred, a special reach miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round effect.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

This system has a second time-shortened game state, which is triggered when the number of losing game plays reaches the upper limit, and a third time-shortened game state B, which is a time-shortened game state more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state and is triggered when a special losing result occurs. Even if a special losing result occurs during the second time-shortened game state, transition to the third time-shortened game state B is restricted, and in one special game play, a transition decision to the third time-shortened game state B (step Sb6505) is made before a transition decision to the second time-shortened game state (step Sb6506) is made.

With this configuration, if the ceiling number of hits is reached and a special miss result is won in the same special game, even if the transition condition to the third time-shortened game state B is determined to be met in the transition determination for the third time-shortened game state B and the transition condition to the second time-shortened game state is determined to be met in the transition determination for the second time-shortened game state, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is avoided due to the above restriction. This allows for a transition to the advantageous third time-shortened game state B, making it possible to optimally control the game state.

The system has a third time-saving game state A, which is less favorable than the second time-saving game state, and a third time-saving game state B, which is more favorable than the second time-saving game state. If the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same special game round, the type of special miss result (the type of third time-saving game state to transition to) is referenced, and the order of transition determination is switched based on that result.

With this configuration, if the ceiling count is reached and a special miss result is won during the same special game, and the type of special miss result is special miss result A (a type corresponding to a transition to third time-shortened game state A, which is less favorable than the second time-shortened game state), processing is performed in the following order: transition determination for the second time-shortened game state (step Sb6503) → transition determination for third time-shortened game state A (step Sb6504). If the type of special miss result is special miss result B (a type corresponding to a transition to third time-shortened game state B, which is more favorable than the second time-shortened game state), processing is performed in the following order: transition determination for third time-shortened game state B (step Sb6505) → transition determination for the second time-shortened game state (step Sb6506). With this configuration, even in a situation where there are multiple third time-shortened game states, some of which are less favorable than the second time-shortened game state and some of which are more favorable, priority can always be given to transitioning to the more favorable time-shortened game state.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, in the special game in which the number of losing games reaches the ceiling number of times and the condition for transition to the second time-saving game state is met, the determination process of whether or not to transition to the third time-saving game state is not executed. The configuration of this modified example will be explained below with reference to Figures 201 and 202.

In this modified example, similar to the above modified example 8, if the number of losing plays reaches the upper limit while in the time-saving play state, or if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special losing result, transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is restricted.

The win/loss table for the special game round, the jackpot type table, and the second time-shortened game state in this modified example are the same as the win/loss table, jackpot type table, and second time-shortened game state in modified example 6 shown in Figures 178 and 179. Furthermore, the special loss type table and third time-shortened game state in this modified example are the same as the special loss type table and third time-shortened game state in modified example 8 shown in Figure 195. In other words, the third time-shortened game state has third time-shortened game state A and third time-shortened game state B, with third time-shortened game state A having a lower maximum number of plays than the second time-shortened game state, and third time-shortened game state B having a higher maximum number of plays than the second time-shortened game state.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 201. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Figure 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the fluctuation start processing in Figure 196. In Figure 201, the same step numbers are used for processing similar to that in Figure 196, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, i.e., after the stop results corresponding to each win/lose lottery result are set, step Sb5301 executes high frequency support mode update processing to update the number of special game plays in high frequency support mode.

In step Sb7201, a process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is executed to determine whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. This process is similar to the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state shown in FIG. 185 for Variation 6 above.

With reference to Figure 185, the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb7201 will be explained. First, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb5502, where it is determined whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reached flag is not set, step Sb5503 determines whether the high probability flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, proceed to step Sb5504 and update the value of the miss counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value in the loss counter area HC is "0." If the value in the loss counter area HC is "0," that is, if the number of loss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, where the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set. If any of the support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5509 whether a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5507 (if none of the support flags are set) or a positive judgment is made in step Sb5509 (if the time-saving end flag is set), a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5508. The second time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the second time-saving game state should occur.

Returning to the explanation of the variation start processing (FIG. 201), after executing the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb7201, step Sb7202 determines whether the second time-shortened game state start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second time-shortened game state start flag has not been set, that is, if the situation does not warrant a transition to the second time-shortened game state, step Sb7203 executes the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state. This process is similar to the process B for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state in FIG. 197 related to Variation 8 above.

With reference to Figure 197, the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state in step Sb7203 will be explained. First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the special miss flag has been set, that is, if the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss result (special miss result A or special miss result B), the process proceeds to step Sb5602, where it is determined whether a high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, step Sb5603 determines whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, step Sb5604 determines whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (if none of the support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (if the time-saving end flag is set and this is the final game in each time-saving game state), a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5606. The third time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the third time-saving game state should be made.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 201), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb7202 (if the second time-saving start flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb7204, where it is determined whether or not a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the special miss flag has been set, that is, if the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss, the process of clearing the set special miss flag is executed in step Sb7205.

After step Sb7203 and step Sb7205 are executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb7204 (the special miss flag is not set), step Sb3313 executes a variable display time setting process to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS. In this variant, as in variant 6 above, a variable pattern R1 (e.g., 18 seconds) for when the ceiling is reached and a variable pattern R2 (e.g., 15 seconds) for a special miss result are set (Figure 183). After step Sb3313 is executed, the processes from step Sb712 onwards are executed.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 202. Note that events A to F are the same as events A to F in modified example 8, and therefore their description will be omitted.

In this modified example, processing is performed in the order of the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state (step Sb7201) and the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state (step Sb7203). If the second time-shortened game start flag is set in the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state, execution of the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state is avoided. Therefore, if the ceiling is reached and special miss result A or B occurs during the same special game turn in the normal game state (event G), transition to the third time-shortened game state A or B is restricted, and the normal game state transitions to the second time-shortened game state.

In this case, in a special symbol game round in which both the ceiling reach and special miss result A or B are achieved, a ceiling reach effect is executed as a game round effect on the symbol display device 75. At this time, a symbol corresponding to the special miss result A or B is displayed frozen on the special symbol display unit 43.

Note that while the third time-shortened game state A is a time-shortened game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state B is a time-shortened game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state, and each of these third time-shortened game states has a different advantage or disadvantage in relation to the second time-shortened game state. In this modified example, regardless of such differences in advantage, priority is given to transitioning to the second time-shortened game state, regardless of the type of special miss result that occurs simultaneously with reaching the ceiling. By adopting this type of configuration, the following effects can be expected.

The second time-shortened game state is entered based on the cumulative number of unsuccessful plays, so a feature of the state is that a player can predict the transition to the second time-shortened game state before the number of unsuccessful plays reaches the limit (before the transition trigger is established). For this reason, if the transition to the second time-shortened game state is not made even though the number of unsuccessful plays has actually reached the limit and the transition trigger is established, the player will likely notice that they have not transitioned to the second time-shortened game state. In this case, there is a risk of confusion as to what happened when the limit was reached, and even if the state is transitioned to another time-shortened game state, there is a concern that it may give the impression that the state is not in the second time-shortened game state, which is unnatural.

On the other hand, the transition to the third time-limited play state is triggered by winning a special miss result, and occurs based on conditions that are met within one play session, so the player cannot predict the transition to the third time-limited play state before the transition trigger is met. For this reason, even if the player has internally won a special miss result, if this is not actively notified, the player can avoid being aware of the transition to the third time-limited play state.

For these reasons, in cases where triggers for transition to the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state occur simultaneously, leaving the player no choice but to choose one of the time-shortened game states, it is believed that restricting transition to the third time-shortened game state and prioritizing transition to the second time-shortened game state will make it less likely for the player to notice the transition restriction. Therefore, by uniformly prioritizing the second time-shortened game state regardless of whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous, as in this modified example, it is possible to adjust the time-shortened game state to which the player is transitioned without the player noticing.

In addition, even in the above-mentioned variants 6 and 7, in which the only third time-shortened game state exists that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state, if the ceiling number of plays is reached and a special miss result is won in the same play round, priority is given to transitioning to the second time-shortened game state, just like this variant, and therefore the above-mentioned effect can also be expected in the configurations of variants 6 and 7.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, in the special game in which the result of the lottery is a special miss result and the condition for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is met, the determination process of whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is not executed. The configuration of this modified example will be explained below with reference to Figures 203 to 206.

In this modified example, similar to the above modified example 8, if the number of losing plays reaches the upper limit while in the time-saving play state, or if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special losing result, transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is restricted.

The win/loss table for the special game round, the jackpot type table, and the second time-shortened game state in this modified example are the same as the win/loss table, jackpot type table, and second time-shortened game state in modified example 6 shown in Figures 178 and 179. Furthermore, the special loss type table and third time-shortened game state in this modified example are the same as the special loss type table and third time-shortened game state in modified example 8 shown in Figure 195. In other words, the third time-shortened game state has third time-shortened game state A and third time-shortened game state B, with third time-shortened game state A having a lower maximum number of plays than the second time-shortened game state, and third time-shortened game state B having a higher maximum number of plays than the second time-shortened game state.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 203. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Figure 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the fluctuation start processing in Figure 196. In Figure 203, the same step numbers are used for processing similar to that in Figure 196, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, i.e., after the stop results corresponding to each win/lose lottery result are set, step Sb5301 executes high frequency support mode update processing to update the number of special game plays in high frequency support mode.

In step Sb7501, a process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state is executed to determine whether to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state. This process is similar to the process B for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state in FIG. 197 relating to Variation 8 above.

With reference to Figure 197, the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state in step Sb7501 will be explained. First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the special miss flag has been set, that is, if the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss result (special miss result A or special miss result B), the process proceeds to step Sb5602, where it is determined whether a high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, step Sb5603 determines whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, step Sb5604 determines whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (if none of the support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (if the time-saving end flag is set and this is the final game in each time-saving game state), a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5606. The third time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the third time-saving game state should be made.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (Figure 203), after executing the processing for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb7501, processing for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state is executed in step Sb7502. Details of step Sb7502 will be described later.

In the following step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS. In this variant, as in variant 6 above, a variable pattern R1 (e.g., 18 seconds) for when the ceiling is reached and a variable pattern R2 (e.g., 15 seconds) for a special miss result are set (Figure 183). After step Sb3313 is executed, the processes from step Sb712 onwards are executed.

<Processing for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb7502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 204. In Fig. 204, the same steps as those in the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state in Fig. 185 will be assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5503 (the high probability flag is not set), step Sb7601 determines whether a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the third time-saving start flag is not set, i.e., if the situation does not warrant transitioning to the third time-saving game state, proceed to step Sb7602, where a determination is made whether a third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the third support flag is set, that is, if the current game state is the third time-saving game state, step Sb7603 determines whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the time-saving end flag is set, this means that the current special game round is the final game round in the third time-saving game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb7602 (if the third support flag is not set) or a positive judgment is made in step Sb7603 (if the time-saving end flag is set), the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is updated in step Sb7604. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1. The miss count counter area HC is used by MPU 312 to determine the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reached.

In step Sb7605, it is determined whether the value in the loss counter area HC is "0." If the value in the loss counter area HC is "0," i.e., if the number of loss plays has reached the ceiling, the process proceeds to step Sb7606, where the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb7607, it is determined whether the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the first support flag is set, that is, if the current gaming state is the first time-shortened gaming state, proceed to step Sb7608, where it is determined whether the time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the time-shortened end flag is set, this means that the current special game round is the final game round in the first time-shortened gaming state.

In this modified example, the upper limit number of times in the first time-shortened game state is set to a number (e.g., 100 times) that is lower than the ceiling number of times (e.g., 800 times), and when a jackpot occurs, the value of the miss counter area HC is reset to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (e.g., 800). As a result, the number of miss games in the first time-shortened game state will never reach the ceiling number of times, and the judgment process of step Sb7607 will always return a negative judgment. However, whether or not the upper limit number of times in the first time-shortened game state is lower than the ceiling number is optional, and it may be set to a number equal to or higher than the ceiling number. Therefore, with such a configuration, the judgment process of step Sb7607 may return both a negative judgment and a positive judgment.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb7607 (if the first support flag is not set) or a positive judgment is made in step Sb7608 (if the time-saving end flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5508, where a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The second time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the second time-saving game state should occur.

If step Sb7601 yields a positive result (the flag for starting the third time-saving mode is set), i.e., if the situation calls for a transition to the third time-saving mode, the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving mode is terminated without executing the processes from step Sb7602 onwards. In other words, the process of step Sb7604 is not executed, and the value in the miss counter area HC is not updated. Therefore, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a special miss result in a special pattern play round where the number of miss play rounds reaches the ceiling number, the update of the number of miss play rounds is limited, and reaching the ceiling number is put on hold.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb7603 (the time-saving end flag is not set), that is, if the game is in the third time-saving game state (excluding the final game round), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes from step Sb7604 onwards. In other words, even if the game is in the third time-saving game state (excluding the final game round), the value of the miss counter area HC is not updated. Therefore, while the game is in the third time-saving game state, even if the result of the special chart win/loss lottery is a miss, the number of miss game rounds is not updated, and the same value continues to be maintained.

If the third support flag is cleared and the third time-saving game state ends, a negative judgment is made in step Sb7602, and the processing of step Sb7604 is executed. In other words, the state in which the update of the number of losing games is restricted is lifted when the third time-saving game state ends.

Incidentally, a negative judgment in step Sb7602 (when it is judged that the third support flag is not set) may occur when both the third support flag and the first support flag are not set and the game state at that time is the normal game state, or when the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e and the game state at that time is the first time-saving game state. In this case, the processing of step Sb7604 is executed and the value in the miss count counter area HC is updated. In other words, when the first time-saving game state is in effect, unlike when the third time-saving game state is in effect, the number of miss game plays is updated in response to the result of the special chart win/loss lottery being a miss.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modification will be explained with reference to Figure 205.

As shown in Figure 205(a), when the game is in the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B (excluding the final game), the update of the number of unsuccessful game plays is limited. This case will be explained with reference to Figure 206. Here, we will explain the example of a 4R normal jackpot result, which causes a transition to the first time-saving game state, and then a special unsuccessful result A, which causes a transition to the third time-saving game state A.

When the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result ends at timing t1, the first support flag is set and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (Fig. 206(a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the second upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times). The miss count counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (e.g., 800 times) at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round that resulted in the 4R normal jackpot result (Fig. 206(d) and (e)).

When the value in the support counter area SC becomes "0" at timing t2, the first support flag is cleared, the first time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state. Between the start and end of the first time-saving game state (timing t1 to timing t2), the value in the loss counter area HC is updated based on whether the win/loss lottery result in each special game round is a loss result (special loss result or normal loss result) (Figure 206 (e)).

If the result of the lottery at timing t3 is special miss result A, the third support flag is set and the game transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving game state A (Figure 206 (c)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 300 times).

Furthermore, at timing t3 when the game transitions to the third time-shortened game state A, the game transitions to a restricted state in which updates to the miss count counter area HC are restricted. This restricted state continues until the third time-shortened game state A ends (Figure 206 (e)). This prevents the number of misses from reaching the ceiling during the third time-shortened game state, restricting the transition to the second time-shortened game state; in other words, it prevents the ceiling from being reached.

When the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" at timing t4, the third support flag is cleared, the third time-saving gaming state A ends, and the game transitions to the normal gaming state. Accordingly, the above-mentioned restricted state is lifted, and updating of the miss counter area HC resumes.

After that, when the value in the miss counter area HC becomes "0" at timing t5, the second support flag is set and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state (Figure 206 (f)).

In the above configuration, from timing t3 to timing t4, when updating of the miss counter area HC is restricted, the miss count image 475 displayed on the symbol display device 75 is not updated either. In other words, the miss count immediately before transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state A is maintained. At that time, as shown in Figure 206 (g), a maintenance image 481 corresponding to the maintenance of the miss count is displayed, notifying players that the update of the miss count has stopped. This maintenance image 481 is erased at timing t4, when updating of the miss counter area HC resumes.

At times t1 to t3 and t4 to t5 when the value of the miss counter area HC is updated, the miss count image 475 is displayed so that the number of times it is displayed increases as the result of the special symbol win/lose lottery results in a miss, just as in the second embodiment above. In this modified example, the miss count counter area HC is updated (the number of miss plays is updated) at the start of the special symbol play round (Figures 203 and 204), but the number of misses in the miss count image 475 is updated after the fixed display time has elapsed for that special symbol play round, just as in the second embodiment above. Note that the miss count image 475 does not necessarily have to be updated when the fixed display time has elapsed; it may also be configured so that the miss count image 475 is updated at any time during the period from the end of the variable display to the end of the fixed display for the special symbol play round in which the miss count counter area HC was updated.

Next, we will explain the flow of the game state when each of events A to E shown in Figure 205(b) occurs. Events A to D are the same as events A to D in Variation 8 above, so their explanation will be omitted.

If the result of the lottery is special miss result A or special miss result B in a special symbol game round in which the number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number (the ceiling number of plays) (event E), updates to the miss count counter area HC are restricted (step Sb7601 in Figure 204). As a result, the value of the miss count counter area HC is maintained at "1," the value immediately before reaching the ceiling, and reaching the ceiling is put on hold. Therefore, the MPU 312 recognizes only the win for the special miss result, and the game state transitions to third time-saving game state A or third time-saving game state B. In this case, in that special symbol game round, the special reach miss effect (Figure 153) is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a game round effect.

In this modified example, updates to the miss counter area HC are restricted not only in play sessions where the winning/losing lottery result is a special miss, but also when the third time-saving play state is in effect. Therefore, the value of the miss counter area HC remains set to "1" even while the third time-saving play state is in effect.

Then, when the third time-saving game state ends, the update restriction on the miss count counter area HC is lifted. In this variation, the process is executed in the following order: update process for the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (processing for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301) → update process for the number of misses (processing for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb7502). Therefore, after the process for ending the third time-saving game state is executed in the final play round of the third time-saving game state, updating of the number of misses resumes during that special game round.

In other words, the value of the miss counter area HC, which had been held at "1" until then, is decremented by one to "0" in the final play of the third time-shortened play state, and as a result, the second support flag is set and the game transitions to the second time-shortened play state. In this way, the end of the third time-shortened play state and the release of the hold state for reaching the ceiling occur within the same play state, and the game transitions from the third time-shortened play state to the second time-shortened play state without going through the normal play state. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes an additional effect (for example, the additional effect shown in Figure 130(c)) that notifies the player that the number of remaining plays in the high-frequency support mode has increased. At this time, the additional number of plays notified by the additional effect corresponds to the upper limit of the number of plays in the second time-shortened play state (for example, 500 plays).

The above-mentioned additional effects may be performed using part or all of the final display time of the final game, or may be performed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time).

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

This system has a second time-saving game state, which is triggered when the number of losing plays reaches the upper limit, and a third time-saving game state, which is triggered when a special losing result occurs. The system is configured to limit updates to the number of losing plays when in the third time-saving game state.

The third time-saving game state is entered based on the result of a special winning/losing lottery. Because the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs randomly, it is possible for the cumulative number of losing play attempts to reach the ceiling number of attempts while in the third time-saving game state. In this case, restricting the transition to the second time-saving game state and continuing the third time-saving game state can avoid multiple time-saving game states overlapping and complicating processing, but on the other hand, it can result in the repeated play attempts aimed at reaching the ceiling number of attempts being forfeited. In particular, because players can predict in advance whether they will reach the ceiling number of attempts, there is a concern that if the ceiling number of attempts is invalidated, it is easy for players to notice this and cause them an unpleasant feeling. In this regard, by restricting updates to the number of losing play attempts while in the third time-saving game state, it is possible to prevent the cumulative number of losing play attempts (as recognized by the pachinko machine 10) from reaching the ceiling number of attempts during the third time-saving game state. This prevents the ceiling number of times from being reached from being invalidated, allowing for optimal control of the game state.

The above restriction is lifted when the third time-saving game state ends. With this configuration, the update of the number of losing plays resumes when the third time-saving game state ends. This allows the player to continue playing from the point where the accumulated number of plays before the transition to the third time-saving game state continued, aiming to reach the ceiling number of plays.

If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the number of miss plays will be limited.

With this configuration, if a special miss occurs on a play where the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling, winning the special miss can be prioritized, while the ceiling number of misses is not reached and the result can be carried over. This allows the game to avoid transitioning to the second time-shortened play state and transition to the third time-shortened play state, preventing multiple time-shortened play states from overlapping. After the third time-shortened play state ends, the update of the number of misses resumes, causing the update result to automatically reach the ceiling number of misses and transition to the second time-shortened play state. In other words, if a special miss occurs on a play where the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number, the game can transition to the third time-shortened play state and then the second time-shortened play state, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of both of these time-shortened play states.

In the first game, after a transition determination to the third time-saving game state is made, the number of losing game plays is updated.

With this configuration, if a special loss occurs on a play where the cumulative number of loss plays reaches the ceiling number, it is possible to switch between updating the number of loss plays and not updating it, based on the results of the transition determination to the third time-saving play state. Therefore, this is a preferable aspect for realizing a configuration that prioritizes winning the special loss result and postpones reaching the ceiling number of plays, as described above.

The system is configured to allow the number of losing plays to be updated when in the first time-saving play state.

The first time-shortened game state, which is entered via the open/close execution mode, can be adjusted during the design stage of the pachinko machine so that the cumulative number of miss plays does not reach the ceiling number during the first time-shortened game state. Specifically, the upper limit number of plays in the first time-shortened game state can be set to a number less than the ceiling number. Taking these characteristics into consideration, while limiting updates to the number of miss plays in the third time-shortened game state, updates to the number of miss plays can be allowed during the first time-shortened game state, which makes it possible to prevent reaching the ceiling during that state. This prevents reaching the ceiling during the third time-shortened game state, which cannot be predicted in advance during the design stage, while preventing excessive stagnation in updates to the number of miss plays, which causes significant delays in the transition to the second time-shortened game state.

When updates to the number of losing plays are restricted, the display content of the losing play count image 475 is maintained in the state it was in immediately before the restriction was imposed.

In a configuration in which the update of the number of miss plays is restricted when in the third time-saving play state, a discrepancy occurs between the actual cumulative number of misses during play and the internal cumulative number of misses recognized by the pachinko machine 10. As a result, there is concern that it may be difficult for the player to grasp the internally recognized cumulative number in relation to the ceiling number of plays, and this tendency becomes more pronounced as play progresses in the third time-saving play state and the discrepancy becomes larger. In this regard, when the update of the number of plays is restricted, the miss count image 475 is displayed in a manner that maintains the state immediately prior to that, allowing the player to easily understand the internally recognized number of plays. This makes it possible to effectively reduce player confusion.

<Modification 11>
This modification differs from the third modification in the manner in which an external signal is output when a special miss result occurs.

Since conventional pachinko machines only have the first time-saving game state, which is entered via the open/close execution mode, it is assumed that the hall equipment, such as the gaming hall's hall computer (management control device) and the notification unit (data counter, etc.) installed on the game center, are also configured to support only this state. For this reason, even if a pachinko machine with a third time-saving game state (a time-saving game state entered when a special miss result occurs), which is entered without going through the open/close execution mode, is configured to output a dedicated external signal, the hall equipment will not be able to support it, raising concerns that the gaming hall will not be able to detect the occurrence of a special miss result or the third time-saving game state. In this case, it would be possible to address the issue by replacing the hall equipment, but this would place a heavy burden on the gaming hall.

This modified example has been designed with these circumstances in mind, and the configuration of this modified example will be explained below with reference to Figure 207.

First, with reference to Figure 207(a), we will explain the external signals that occur when the special drawing results in a normal jackpot and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state via the open/close execution mode. In this modified example, the external signals used in this case are the first external signal (Figure 207(a4)) and the second external signal (Figure 207(a5)). The first external signal and the second external signal are output to the outside of the gaming machine using separate output terminals in the external output terminal 213.

The first external signal is a signal output in response to the opening and closing execution mode, and is turned on during the period from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode (Fig. 207(a2)) (timing t2 to timing t3), as shown in Fig. 207(a4). The second external signal is a signal output in response to the opening and closing execution mode and the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state), and is turned on during the period from the start of the opening and closing execution mode to the end of the time-shortened game state (Fig. 207(a3)) (timing t2 to timing t4), as shown in Fig. 207(a5).

By the way, during the special game round, no direct external signal (such as a jackpot winning signal) corresponding to the jackpot result is output; only a game round execution signal indicating that the special game round has been executed is output. The game round execution signal is output at the start and end of the confirmation display during the special game round.

The hall computer, notification unit, etc., recognizes the execution (end) of a special game round by receiving a game round execution signal, and then recognizes the occurrence of a jackpot or jackpot game (open/close execution mode) by receiving a first external signal. Furthermore, after the first external signal turns off, the second external signal turns on, and thus recognizes the transition to a time-saving game state (occurrence of a time-saving game state).

Next, we will explain the external signal that occurs when the special drawing results in a special miss and the game transitions to the third time-saving game state without going through the opening/closing execution mode, with reference to Figure 207 (b).

If the special drawing result is a special miss, no direct external signal corresponding to the special miss result (such as a special miss result winning signal) will be output during the special drawing play period, and only a play round execution signal indicating that the special drawing play round has been executed will be output.

Then, the first external signal is output at the timing of transition to the third time-shortened game state (Fig. 207 (b4)). In this modified example, the transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round that resulted in a special miss, so the first external signal is output at the start of the confirmation display.

As mentioned above, the first external signal is a jackpot signal that notifies the hall equipment that it is in opening and closing execution mode. However, since opening and closing execution mode is not performed when transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state, the first external signal in Figure 207 (b4) is a pseudo-jackpot signal that does not correspond to the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, to make it possible to distinguish this from a case that actually corresponds to the opening and closing execution mode (a case in which a normal jackpot result is obtained), the signal is kept on for a shorter period than in such cases (timing t12 to timing t13).

The specific output period of the first external signal is not particularly limited as long as it can be distinguished from the first external signal that results in a normal jackpot, but it is preferably a period shorter than the minimum period for one round in the opening and closing execution mode (the game ball firing cycle x the maximum number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65). This configuration prevents the output period of the first external signal that is output when transitioning to the third time-saving game state from being longer than the output period when the opening and closing execution mode is actually performed, making it possible to appropriately distinguish between the two. In this modified example, the output period of the first external signal is set to, for example, 200 msec.

Furthermore, if a special miss occurs, a second external signal is output in response to the transition timing (Fig. 207 (b5)). This second external signal is in the ON state from the transition timing to the end of the time-saving game state (timing t12 to timing t14).

As described above, when a special miss result results in a transition to the third time-shortened game state, the same external signal (signal output from the same external terminal) is used as when a regular jackpot result results in a transition to the first time-shortened game state, so it is possible to receive the external signal when transitioning to the third time-shortened game state without having to add additional receiving terminals to the hall equipment.

In this case, if the hall equipment has a function that can distinguish the output period (difference in length) of the first external signal, it can recognize the occurrence of a special losing result by receiving a first external signal with a short output period. This makes it possible for the hall computer to manage the occurrence of a special losing result, and to issue a notification corresponding to a winning special losing result using a data counter, etc.

Even if it is not possible to distinguish between different output periods, the behavior of the external signal in the event of a special miss is the same as in the event of a regular jackpot, so the hall equipment can determine whether or not a transition to a time-limited game state has occurred. In other words, in the event of a special miss, just like in the event of a regular jackpot, the first and second external signals turn on, and then the first external signal turns off and the second external signal turns on. Therefore, even if it is difficult to distinguish between a regular jackpot and a special miss, the transition to a time-limited game state can be recognized.

In addition, depending on the type of data counter, etc., it is also possible that the configuration will produce a light-emitting effect corresponding to the open/close execution mode based on the first external signal. In this regard, in this modified example, the first external signal in the event of a special miss is output after the game has transitioned to the time-shortened game state (third time-shortened game state). Therefore, in the event of a special miss, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting effect corresponding to the open/close execution mode from being produced before the game has transitioned to the time-shortened game state.

In this case, the above-mentioned light-emitting effect may be performed when the time-saving game state begins, but because the output period of the first external signal is shortened in the event of a special miss, the light-emitting effect can be completed in a short time. This makes the light-emitting effect less noticeable, and prevents the player from feeling unnatural.

In the above explanation, the third time-saving game state, which is triggered by winning a special miss result, was given as an example of a time-saving game state to which a transition is made without going through the open/close execution mode. However, the configuration of this modified example can also be applied to the second time-saving game state, which a transition is made to when the maximum number of times has been reached. Specifically, the special symbol game times (timing t11 to timing t12) for the special miss result in Figure 207 (b1) can be replaced with the special symbol game times when the maximum number of times has been reached. In other words, when a transition to the second time-saving game state is made when the maximum number of times has been reached, the first external signal and second external signal of Figure 207 (b4) and (b5) can be output in accordance with the timing of the transition to the time-saving game state.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, the manner in which an external signal is output when a special miss result occurs differs from the modified examples 3 and 11. The configuration of this modified example will be described with reference to Figs.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 208, first external signal A, first external signal B, second external signal A, second external signal B, and third external signal can be output as external signals. Of these, first external signal A and second external signal A are the same as the first external signal and second external signal in modified example 11, so a description of them will be omitted. In other words, this modified example has a configuration in which first external signal B, second external signal B, and third external signal are added to the configuration of modified example 11.

First external signal B is a signal that is output in response to the opening and closing execution mode. If the special drawing results in a normal jackpot and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state via the opening and closing execution mode, it is turned on during the period from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode (timing t2 to timing t3), as shown in Figure 208 (e). In other words, it has the same output mode as first external signal A.

However, as shown in Figure 209 (e), if the special drawing results in a special miss and the game transitions to the third time-saving game state without going through the opening and closing execution mode, the signal is not switched to the ON state, but remains in the OFF state, corresponding to the fact that the opening and closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, when the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, first external signal A (Figure 209 (d)) is switched to the ON state for a predetermined period (from timing t12 to timing t13) as a pseudo-jackpot signal, but first external signal B does not switch to the ON state in this way.

The second external signal B is a signal that is output in response to the opening/closing execution mode and the time-shortened game state, and in the case of a transition to the first time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 208(g), it is in the ON state from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the time-shortened game state (timing t2 to timing t4). In other words, it has the same output mode as the second external signal A.

However, as shown in Figure 209 (g), when transitioning to the third time-shortened gaming state, the signal is set to the OFF state during the time-shortened gaming state. In other words, while the second external signal A (Figure 209 (f)) is set to the ON state during the time-shortened gaming state, the second external signal B does not switch to the ON state in this way.

The third external signal is a signal output in response to the time-shortened game state, and is in the ON state from the start to the end of the time-shortened game state. This is true whether the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is the first time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state (Figures 208(h) and 209(h)).

The first external signal B, second external signal B, and third external signal B are each output from a different output terminal to the outside of the gaming machine.

If a third time-saving play state (a time-saving play state that does not go through the open/close execution mode) is added as a function to pachinko machines, gaming halls may need to introduce new hall equipment (hall computers, data counters, etc.) that supports the third time-saving play state, or add functions to existing hall equipment, in order to accommodate such a function.

However, it is possible that not all gaming halls will adopt such measures, and that existing hall equipment may continue to be used. In other words, there is a possibility that hall equipment that is expected to receive external signals may be a mixture of incompatible equipment that does not support the third time-saving gaming state and compatible equipment that does support the third time-saving gaming state.

The configuration of this modified example has been devised taking into account this mixed state. Note that the compatible device is assumed to be equipped with the functionality to recognize the time-saving gaming state from the third external signal.

In order for a data counter or the like to receive external signals from the pachinko machine 10, the wiring from the data counter or the like must be connected to each terminal of the external output terminal 213 on the pachinko machine 10. In this case, in this modified example, the connection method to each terminal on the external output terminal 213 differs depending on whether the hall equipment on the gaming hall side is a non-compatible device or a compatible device.

Specifically, if the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a non-compatible equipment, as shown in FIG. 210(a), the above wiring is connected to the output terminal for the first external signal A and the output terminal for the second external signal A provided on the external output terminal 213. This puts the hall equipment in a state where it can receive the first external signal A and the second external signal B output from the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the transition to the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the manner described in Variation Example 11.

On the other hand, if the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 10 is compatible, the above wiring is connected to the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal provided on the external output terminal 213. This puts the hall equipment in a state where it can receive the first external signal B and the third external signal output from the pachinko machine 10.

As mentioned above, when transitioning to the first time-shortened game state, the first external signal B is turned on in the opening/closing execution mode, and the third external signal is turned on in the time-shortened game state (Fig. 210 (b)). In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the opening/closing execution mode and then the time-shortened game state, and is therefore able to understand that the transition to the time-shortened game state has occurred via the opening/closing execution mode, i.e., that the transition to the first time-shortened game state has occurred.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the third time-shortened gaming state, the third external signal turns on in the time-shortened gaming state without the first external signal B turning on (Fig. 210 (b)). In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the time-shortened gaming state without first recognizing the opening and closing execution mode, and is therefore able to understand that a transition to the time-shortened gaming state has occurred without going through the opening and closing execution mode, i.e., that a transition to the third time-shortened gaming state has occurred.

It is possible that a data counter or the like may be equipped with a function that automatically increments the number of jackpots when the first external signal (jackpot signal) turns ON. In this case, if the first external signal A remains ON for a predetermined period when transitioning to the third time-shortened game state (when transitioning to the time-shortened game state without passing through the open/close execution mode), this could result in an increase in the number of jackpots reported by the data counter or the like, even if a special miss occurs. In this regard, if a compatible device that can recognize the time-shortened game state from the third external signal is connected to the pachinko machine 10, the use of first external signal B, which is maintained in the OFF state, can prevent the number of jackpots reported from increasing each time a special miss occurs.

In the above explanation, the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal were given as examples of connection terminals when the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 10 is compatible equipment. However, instead, the output terminal for the second external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal may be used as connection terminals. In this case, the hall equipment can recognize a transition to the first time-shortened game state when both the second external signal B and the third external signal are in the ON state, and can recognize a transition to the third time-shortened game state when the third external signal is in the ON state with the second external signal B in the OFF state. Whether the output terminal for the first external signal B or the second external signal B to which the hall equipment is connected can be selected arbitrarily depending on the specifications of the hall equipment, etc.

Furthermore, while the third time-saving game state, which is triggered by winning a special miss result, has been exemplified as a time-saving game state to which transition is made without passing through the open/close execution mode, the configuration of this modified example can also be applied to the second time-saving game state, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times. Specifically, the special symbol game times (timing t11 to timing t12) for the special miss result in Figure 209(a) can be replaced with the special symbol game times for which the ceiling number of times has been reached.

<Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described second embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the second embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the configurations to the second embodiment and each modified example. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the second embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

(1) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but this may be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that at least one of the first actuation port 62 (first special symbol) or the second actuation port 63 (second special symbol) does not have a hold function. In particular, for variant example 3, by configuring the configuration so that there is no hold function for winning at the second actuation port 63, it becomes possible to highlight the advantage of the final play round (the special symbol play round in which the remaining number of plays is allowed to increase if a special miss result occurs).

(2) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but this differentiation may also be omitted. Furthermore, pending information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized over pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 in determining whether a win has occurred, but this relationship may be reversed, or the winning/losing determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(3) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, only game balls flowing down the right route are configured to be able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63. However, it is also possible to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down the left route are able to pass through or win, or so that game balls can pass through or win from either the right or left route. However, to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right and left routes are able to win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right and left routes are able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(4) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the configuration is such that the transition to jackpot play (open/close execution mode) occurs when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot result. However, like in so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machines, the configuration may also be such that the transition to jackpot play occurs when the result of the win/loss determination is a small win result and the game ball passes through the V entry port (V entry sensor) during small win play (a game state in which a variable entry device having a V entry port or a V entry port and a loss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award determination is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, in this invention, "a predetermined benefit can be granted to the player based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result," "a predetermined benefit can be granted to the player based on the result of the first judgment being a specific result," "a transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result," etc. can be interpreted as including, as mentioned above, the case where the result of the win/loss judgment is a small win result and the transition to a jackpot game is made via a V win.

(5) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, different support flags such as a first support flag, a second support flag, and a third support flag are associated with the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, and the third time-shortened game state. However, instead of making such distinctions, a single support flag may be provided as a flag common to each of these time-shortened game states.

In this configuration, for example, in the second embodiment described above, a support flag is set in response to a transition to the first time-shortened game state, and when the cumulative number of unsuccessful games reaches the ceiling number in the final game in the first time-shortened game state, the support flag is cleared in response to the number of games since the transition to the first time-shortened game state reaching the upper limit, and then the support flag is reset in response to a transition to the second time-shortened game state determined by a transition determination to the second time-shortened game state.

(6) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 114e of RAM 114, a transition to high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game mode) occurs, and when various support flags are erased from the various flag storage area 114e, the high-frequency support mode ends. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs when information corresponding to a first value (e.g., a support flag) is stored in a specific memory area provided in the various flag storage area 114e, and the high-frequency support mode ends when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value (e.g., a non-support flag) is stored in the specific memory area. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which information corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to the high-frequency support mode not being in the high-frequency support mode are provided, and the transition to and termination of the high-frequency support mode are controlled depending on which information is stored (set).

Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. In other words, a storage area corresponding to the high-frequency support mode being in effect and a storage area corresponding to the high-frequency support mode not being in effect may be provided, and transition to or termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which storage area the information is stored (set) in.

(7) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the transition to the time-saving game state is triggered when the cumulative number of unsuccessful plays reaches the ceiling number or when a special unsuccessful result occurs. However, the transition to the high-probability game state may also be configured. In this case, the support mode in the high-probability game state may be a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode.

Instead of transitioning to a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state, the system may transition to a specific presentation mode in which special presentations that cannot be seen in the normal game state are performed or special characters appear. It may also transition to a state in which a special lottery that is not performed in the normal game state is performed. In these cases, the player is more advantageous than in the normal game state in that they can see special presentations or take part in special lotteries. One example of a special lottery is a points lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which the system transitions to a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or an opening/closing execution mode depending on the points awarded in the point lottery or the total number of points awarded. Special presentations (for example, character costumes) may be unlocked, or behind-the-scenes stories about the development of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed.

(8) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a first time-shortened game state is provided, which is entered via an open/close execution mode, separate from the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state. However, the configuration may not include the first time-shortened game state. It may also be configured not to include a high-probability game state.

(9) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the system is configured to transition to a time-saving game state without going through the open/close execution mode when the cumulative number of unsuccessful plays reaches the ceiling number or when a special unsuccessful result occurs. However, the system may be configured to transition to the time-saving game state when an event other than these occurs triggers the transition. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the time-saving game state when a game ball enters or passes through a specific ball entry section or a specific passage section located inside the game area PE or a predetermined ball entry section. In this case, prize balls may or may not be paid out based on the ball entering or passing through.

Note that a specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism and may be a type that is always open, or it may be a variable type that has an opening/closing mechanism and can be switched between an open state in which game balls can or do enter or it is easier for the game ball to enter, and a closed state in which game balls cannot or it is harder for the game ball to enter than in the open state. This also applies to the above-mentioned predetermined ball entry sections.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific entry section or passing section is provided within a predetermined entry section, only the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section will always enter or pass through the specific entry section or passing section. Alternatively, one or more other entry sections or passing sections different from the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and gaming balls that enter the predetermined entry section may be distributed, resulting in a situation in which a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section does not enter a specific entry section or pass through a specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is established when a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters a specific entry section or passes through a specific passing section, while a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is not established even if a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters another entry section or passes through another passing section.

(10) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples above, when the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is increased, the preceding time-shortened game state is terminated and a transition to the subsequent time-shortened game state is made. However, the remaining number of times may be increased while the time-shortened game state continues. For example, as in modified example 3, if the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state increases due to a special miss result in the final play of the first time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times may be rewritten (a process of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times in the third time-shortened game state in the support counter area SC) without the process of terminating the time-shortened game state (clearing the support flag).

In addition, as described above, if the increase in the remaining number of times in the time-shortened play state does not involve ending the time-shortened play state, it is preferable to configure the support flag to be associated with a single flag common to the first time-shortened play state, second time-shortened play state, and third time-shortened play state, as described in (5) above. This configuration makes it possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the type of support flag in accordance with the rewriting of the remaining number of times.

(11) In the second embodiment and each modified example above, the fixed display time for a special game is configured to be selected separately from the variable display time, but it may also be selected as a set with the variable display time. For example, a fixed display time may be linked to each variable display time (variation pattern) in advance, and selecting the variable display time may simultaneously select the fixed display time. In this case, the selected fixed display time may be set at the start of the fixed display, or may be set at the start of the variable display together with the setting of the variable display time.

(12) In the second embodiment and the probability variable example described above, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state share the same aspects of the normal game rounds and the opening and closing of the device. However, the aspects of at least one of the normal game rounds and the opening and closing of the device may be configured to be different. For example, in the first time-saving game state, the support lottery for the normal game round may be conducted with a higher winning probability than in the normal game state, while in the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, the support lottery may be conducted with the same winning probability as in the normal game state. Furthermore, in the third time-saving game state, the opening and closing of the device may be conducted in a more advantageous manner than in the second time-saving game state, for example, by extending the opening time of the normal electric device 63a. Additionally, the third time-shortened game state may have multiple states including third time-shortened game state A and third time-shortened game state B, and in third time-shortened game state A, the opening and closing of the device may be performed in a more advantageous manner than in third time-shortened game state B.

(13) In the second embodiment and each modified example described above, only one type of ceiling number of times is set, but multiple types with different numbers may be set. Furthermore, multiple types with different upper limit numbers may be set for the second time-shortened gaming state. In this case, multiple types of ceiling number of times may be set, and a type of second time-shortened gaming state may be associated with each ceiling number, or one ceiling number may be set, and when that ceiling number is reached, a lottery may be drawn to determine which second time-shortened gaming state the game will transition to.

(14) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, causing a transition to the second time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state ends without a jackpot result, the ceiling will not be reached a second time regardless of the number of misses thereafter. However, if the second time-shortened game state ends without a jackpot result, the miss counter area HC may be reset to a value corresponding to the ceiling number, causing the ceiling to be reached a second time or later. In this case, a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 3 times) may be set for the number of times the ceiling is reached (the number of times the game transitions to the second time-shortened game state), or such an upper limit may not be set.

In addition, in a configuration where the ceiling can be reached only once, the normal game state before the ceiling is reached (before transitioning to the second time-shortened game state) and the normal game state after the second time-shortened game state ends without a jackpot result are the same game state, but the former normal game state can be said to be more advantageous than the latter normal game state in that it can transition to the second time-shortened game state. In this specification, the former normal game state and the latter normal game state are not distinguished from each other, and these states may be collectively referred to as, for example, a predetermined game state. Alternatively, the former normal game state and the latter normal game state may be distinguished from each other, and one of them may be referred to as, for example, a predetermined game state, and the other may be referred to as a game state that offers a different degree of advantage to the player from the predetermined game state.

(15) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time effects correspond one-to-one, but they may also correspond one-to-multiple. In this case, the effect control device 143 can acquire a random number for effect lottery, and use the acquired random number to select one game-time effect from among multiple game-time effects associated with one variation pattern.

(16) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a normal game round is ended in response to a transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state, the respective support flags are set and then the normal game round is ended. However, the normal game round may also be ended based on the fulfillment of the transition conditions to each time-shortened game state or the determination of the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to, and then the respective support flags are set.

(17) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the normal game round is ended when transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-shortened game state (e.g., the second embodiment), when transitioning from the normal game state to the third time-shortened game state (e.g., modified example 4, modified example 6), or when transitioning from the first time-shortened game state to the normal game state (e.g., modified example 3). However, the transition may also be made when transitioning from the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state to the normal game state.

Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the normal play round ends when transitioning from a specific time-shortened play state to another time-shortened play state, such as when transitioning from the first time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state, when transitioning from the second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state, or when transitioning from third time-shortened play state A to third time-shortened play state B. In these cases, it is expected that a configuration in which the normal play rounds and the opening and closing of the device are different in each time-shortened play state, as in (12) above, will be beneficial.

(18) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the normal game round ends at the start of the confirmation display of the special game round when the conditions for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state are met, corresponding to the timing of the transition to each time-shortened game state. However, the normal game round may also end midway through the confirmation display or at the end of the confirmation display. Note that, from the perspective of ensuring a grace period (the period during which the game state has transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, but the special game round has not yet been played since the transition to the second time-shortened game state), it is preferable for the normal game round to end before the end of the confirmation display.

(19) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the process for ending a normal game round is performed, if the result of the support lottery for the normal game round to be ended is a winning support result, it is changed to a losing result. However, the process for changing the result to a losing result may not be performed. This is because the support lottery performed in the normal game state has a high probability of resulting in a losing result, and it is expected that it will be rare for the result of the support lottery in the normal game round being performed at the time of transition to the time-saving game state to result in a winning support result.

(20) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, if the special symbol play round in which the transition condition to the second time-shortened play state or the third time-shortened play state is met is a play round for the second special symbol (if the transition condition to the second time-shortened play state or the third time-shortened play state is met in a time-shortened play state), the termination process for the normal play round is not executed. However, the termination process may be executed without distinguishing between the first and second special symbols. In other words, the termination process may also be executed when the transition condition to the second time-shortened play state or the third time-shortened play state is met in a time-shortened play state.

(21) In the second embodiment and each modified example described above, if the special symbol play round in which the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state were met was a play round of the second special symbol, the termination process for the normal play round was not executed across the board. However, a configuration is also possible in which the system identifies whether the play round of the second special symbol is a special symbol play round during the time-saving play state or a special symbol play round that is reserved after the time-saving play state has ended, and executes termination process for the normal play round if it is the latter special symbol play round. Since the play round of the second special symbol that was reserved at the end of the time-saving play state is played under normal play state, normal play rounds that are started during the execution of these special symbol play rounds are played in a manner corresponding to normal play state. By executing termination process for the normal play round in this case, it is possible to expect the same effects as those described in the second embodiment and modified example 1 described above.

(22) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, and the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is updated by subtracting one from that value each time a special game is played. However, it is also possible to update the number of times a special game has been played in the time-shortened game state by not setting a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, but by adding one to the value in the support counter area SC each time a special game is played. In this case, the time-shortened game state may be terminated when the updated count value reaches the upper limit of the number of times.

(23) In the second embodiment and each modified example described above, the display content of the miss count image 475 is updated after the fixed display time for the special symbol game has elapsed. However, the display content of the miss count image 475 may be updated after the variable display time for the special symbol game has elapsed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the display content of the miss count image 475 from being updated before the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery is announced by the stopped display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Furthermore, the display content of the miss count image 475 may be updated at the start of or after the start of the next special symbol game.

(24) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, notifications corresponding to reaching the ceiling number of hits or winning a special miss result are configured to be executed by the symbol display device 75, but they may also be executed by another notification unit. Furthermore, notifications are not limited to image displays, and may be issued using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or by operating decorative movable bodies (movable gadgets) for moving effects in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, each of the above notifications does not necessarily have to be visual notifications, and may be auditory notifications in the form of sound from the speaker unit 29. This also applies to notifications of the remaining number of time-saving hits, notifications of the number of misses, right-hit notifications, etc.

(25) In the second embodiment, variant 1, variant 2, and variants 6 to 10 (configurations including a second time-saving game state to which transition is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times), the update process for the number of miss play times (miss play counter area HC) (the process of step Sb1405 in the second embodiment) is executed after the update process for the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is executed. However, if the process of determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state (the process of step Sb1406 in the second embodiment) is executed after the update process for the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, the update process for the number of miss play times may be executed prior to the update process for the remaining number of times. One possible configuration of this type is to execute the update process for the number of miss play times at the start of a special game play. In this case, the pachinko machine can recognize that the ceiling number of times has been reached at the start of a special game play, which is effective in cases where it is desired to execute a game play effect corresponding to the above-mentioned reaching from the start of a special game play, or where it is desired to set a dedicated variable display time (variable pattern) corresponding to the above-mentioned reaching.

(26) In the second embodiment, variant 1, variant 2, and variants 6 to 10 described above, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round in which the cumulative number of losing game rounds reaches the ceiling number. However, it may also be configured to be executed after the confirmation display starts. Specifically, the transition to the second time-shortened game state may be executed during the confirmation display in the special symbol game round in which the ceiling number of game rounds has been reached, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special symbol game round. However, in order to ensure a grace period when processing the end of a normal symbol game round (the game state has transitioned to the second time-shortened game state, but the special symbol game round has not yet been played since the transition to the second time-shortened game state), it is preferable to transition to the second time-shortened game state before the confirmation display in the special symbol game round in which the ceiling number of game rounds has been reached ends.

In addition, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state at the end of the confirmation display, the end processing of the regular game round may be executed at that end.

In this case, by performing the processing for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state (step Sb512) → normal game round control processing (step Sb405) in the order of processing during normal processing (Fig. 107), it is possible to configure the first normal game round in the second time-shortened game state to start before the first special game round in the second time-shortened game state is started. In other words, during the processing round in which the transition processing to the second time-shortened game state is performed (periodic processing 1 in normal processing), after the transition to the second time-shortened game state (after the support flag is set), the normal game round control processing is executed, thereby starting the first normal game round in the second time-shortened game state, and then, during the next processing round, the first special game round in the second time-shortened game state can be started.

In addition, even in a configuration in which the processing for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is performed after the normal game round control processing, if the normal game round control processing in step Sb405 is configured to occur before the special game round control processing in step Sb403 during normal processing, it is possible to start the normal game round before the special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. In other words, in the processing round next to the transition to the second time-saving game state, processing can be performed in the order of start of change in the normal game round → start of change in the special game round, allowing the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state to start early.

(27) In the second embodiment, Variation 1, Variation 2, and Variations 6 to 10, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is based on the cumulative number of losing plays reaching a ceiling number. However, the transition to the second time-shortened game state may also be based on the total number of points in the internal point information, etc., reaching a predetermined number of points. In this case, the points may be awarded, for example, based on the number of losing plays reaching a predetermined number, or based on the result of the special chart winning/losing lottery being a losing result, or the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 or the variable type counter CS reaching a predetermined value, in which a predetermined point lottery is held and points are awarded upon winning the lottery. Furthermore, the number of points awarded may be a fixed number based on the fulfillment of an awarding trigger, or multiple points may be prepared as the number of awardable points, and a number of points selected from these may be awarded by a point lottery. The awarding of points and the number of points awarded may be notified or suggested to the player through a notification, or the player may not be notified and the awarding of points may be made in a manner that is indistinguishable or difficult for the player to distinguish.

(28) In the second embodiment, variant 1, variant 2, and variants 6 to 10 described above, the value of the miss counter area HC is set to the ceiling number of times in the special symbol game round in which the result of the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. However, it may also be set at the start or end of the opening/closing execution mode, midway through the opening/closing execution mode, or when transitioning to the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, variant 1, variant 2, and variants 6 to 10 described above, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times is updated, but instead of setting the value of the miss counter area HC to the ceiling number of times, the value of the miss counter area HC may be incremented by one each time a miss play is executed after the end of the open/close execution mode, and the game may transition to the second time-saving game state when the total value reaches the ceiling number of times. In this case, if the result of the special symbol win/lose lottery is a jackpot before the ceiling number of times is reached, the updated result of the miss result may be cleared (initialized) in that special symbol play time, open/close execution mode, etc.

(29) In the second embodiment and variant 1 described above, the miss counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling count during a special game play that results in a jackpot. However, the above setting may also be performed at the start of the opening and closing execution mode, during the opening and closing execution mode, at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, or when transitioning to the first time-saving game state. Note that, if the value of the miss counter area HC is incremented by one, as in (28) above, it is preferable to initialize the value of the miss counter area HC to 0 at the start of the opening and closing execution mode, during the opening and closing execution mode, at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, or when transitioning to the first time-saving game state.

(30) In the second embodiment, Modification 1, and Modification 2 described above, the transition determination as to whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state is performed at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round, but it may also be performed at the start of the special game round as in Modifications 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be performed at the start of the special game round, while the transition to the second time-shortened game state may be performed at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the second time-shortened game state may also be performed at the start of the special game round.

The transition determination may also be performed midway through the variable display during a special game in which the cumulative number of losing games has reached the ceiling number. Furthermore, if the transition to the second time-saving game state is to be made after the start of the confirmation display, the transition determination may be performed after the start of the confirmation display.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, as in variant example 1, a right-hit notification (a notification encouraging a win at the second operating port 63) may be provided during the final display time of a special symbol game in which the number of losing games has reached the ceiling number. In this case, the notification may be provided for the entire final display time, or for at least a portion of the final display time. Also, in variant example 1, the right-hit notification may be provided for the entire final display time.

(32) In variant example 1 of the second embodiment described above, the final display time of a special game turn in which the number of losing game turns reaches the ceiling number is set to be longer than the total period of the final display time of a normal game turn that is forcibly terminated, the variable display time of a normal game turn that corresponds to the second time-shortened game state, and the final display time of a normal game turn that corresponds to the second time-shortened game state. However, it may also be configured so that the final display time of a normal game turn that is forcibly terminated is not included, and the final display time is longer than the total period of the variable display time of a normal game turn that corresponds to the second time-shortened game state and the final display time of a normal game turn that corresponds to the second time-shortened game state. In normal game mode (left-hand play), winnings through gate 64 generally do not occur, and it is assumed that in most cases the normal game round will not be forcibly terminated. Therefore, even with the above configuration, it is believed possible to realize a configuration in which the end of the first normal game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (the start of the first opening and closing of the device after transitioning to the second time-saving game state) occurs before the start of the first special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state.

(33) In Variation 1 of the second embodiment described above, the end of the first normal game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (end of the confirmation display) occurs before the start of the first special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. However, the end of the variable display for the first normal game round may occur before the start of the first special game round. In this case, the confirmation display time for the special game round in which the number of losing game rounds reaches the ceiling number may be longer than the total period of the confirmation display time for the normal game round that is being forcibly terminated and the variable display time for the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, or may be longer than the variable display time for the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state. Even with this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the variable display for the first normal game round ends after the start of the first special game round, the first opening/closing game of the device after transitioning to the second time-saving game state begins earlier, and the effect of accelerating the timing at which the normal device 63a is opened can be expected.

(34) In Variations 3 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, a special loss result is set as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery. However, the special winning/losing lottery may only draw a lottery to determine whether the result is a jackpot or a loss, and if the result is a loss, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of loss result) may be held to determine whether the result is a special loss. In this case, the separate lottery may be held using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to drawing the type of loss result.

In addition, instead of the lottery for determining the type of losing result, a transition lottery may be held to determine whether or not the transition conditions to the third time-saving game state are met. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random number values, such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to determining whether or not the transition conditions are met.

(35) In the above-described second embodiment, variations 3 to 10 are configured to execute a special reach effect as a notification corresponding to a special failure result. However, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may also be executed by a game-play effect that does not involve a reach effect. Furthermore, the notification does not have to be executed using the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may be executed by displaying a predetermined pattern, such as a predetermined character, on the symbol display device 75.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed on the pattern display device 75 is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display unit 43 and is displayed in a smaller size than the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying the fourth pattern in a specific manner that differs from the normal manner. Furthermore, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by combining the manner in which the fourth pattern is displayed in a stopped state with at least some of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that are displayed in a stopped state.

The notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made throughout the entire special game round, or may be made during a portion of the special game round. Incidentally, the special reach effects exemplified in variants 3 to 10 of the second embodiment above are configured so that the player cannot tell whether or not a special miss result has occurred at the start of the special game round, but can tell that it is a special miss result at the end of the special game round. Therefore, it can be said that a notification corresponding to a special miss result is made during a portion of the special game round.

(36) In the above-described variants 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, an external signal corresponding to a special miss result is output when a special miss result occurs, but the external signal may not be output.

The system may also be configured to allow switching between outputting and not outputting the external signal. For example, a switching operation unit such as a selector switch may be provided on the pachinko machine 10, and the output of the external signal may be switched by operating the switching operation unit. In this case, the switching operation unit may be located in a position that can be operated when the front door frame 14 or inner frame 13 is open, such as on the back side of the front door frame 14 or the back side of the game board 60. With this configuration, switching operations are permitted only by hall employees, preventing abuse for fraudulent activities.

(37) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, an external signal corresponding to a special miss is output even when a special miss occurs in a special game turn other than the final play turn in the first time-saving game state (when a special miss occurs in a situation where transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted). However, the external signal may not be output. In this case, the external signal corresponding to the special miss may simply not be output, or an external signal corresponding to a normal miss may be output instead of an external signal corresponding to a special miss.

For example, in a configuration in which the game performance related to the special failure result (e.g., the fact that a special failure result occurred and the probability of winning the special failure result in actual play) is reported by a predetermined notification unit in the gaming hall (e.g., a data counter and its light-emitting unit installed above each pachinko machine in an amusement center) based on an external signal for the special failure result output from a pachinko machine, if an external signal for the special failure result is output in a situation in which transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, the predetermined notification unit may issue a notification corresponding to winning the special failure result even though transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur, which could lead to misunderstandings and confusion among players and hall employees. In this regard, by using the configuration (37), if a special failure result occurs in a situation in which transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, it can be prevented from being reflected in the notification by the predetermined notification unit, thereby effectively preventing misunderstandings, etc.

(38) In the above-described second embodiment, variants 3 to 10 are configured to restrict re-transition to the third time-saving game state (addition of the remaining number of turns again) when a special miss occurs while the game is in the third time-saving game state. However, a configuration may be adopted in which re-transition is permitted. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which an external signal corresponding to the special miss result that triggers the re-transition is output.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned special failure result, a transition to the third time-shortened game state may occur, but an external signal corresponding to that special failure result may not be output. By configuring in this way, the specified notification unit of the gaming hall can notify the special failure result at the first transition, but not notify the special failure result at the second transition.

(39) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, the transition to the third time-saving game state is executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round in which a special miss result is achieved, but it may also be executed after the confirmation display has begun. Specifically, the transition to the third time-saving game state may be executed during the confirmation display in the special symbol game round in which a special miss result is achieved, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special symbol game round.

In addition, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state at the end of the confirmation display, the end processing of the regular game round may be executed at that end.

In this case, by performing the processing for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state (step Sb3202) → normal game round control processing (step Sb405) in the order of processing during normal processing (Fig. 107), it is possible to configure the first normal game round in the third time-shortened game state to start before the first special game round in the third time-shortened game state is started. In other words, during the processing round in which the transition processing to the third time-shortened game state is performed (periodic processing 1 in normal processing), after the transition to the third time-shortened game state (after the support flag is set), the normal game round control processing is executed, thereby starting the first normal game round in the third time-shortened game state, and then, during the next processing round, the first special game round in the third time-shortened game state can be started.

In addition, even in a configuration in which the processing for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is performed after the normal game round control processing, if the normal game round control processing in step Sb405 is configured to occur before the special game round control processing in step Sb403 during normal processing, it is possible to start the normal game round before the special game round after transitioning to the third time-saving game state. In other words, in the processing round next to the transition to the third time-saving game state, processing can be performed in the order of start of change in the normal game round → start of change in the special game round, allowing the normal game round corresponding to the third time-saving game state to start early.

(40) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, an external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state may be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the external signal may be, for example, either an ON state or an OFF state (e.g., an ON state) when the time-shortened game state is active, and may be the other of the ON state and the OFF state (e.g., an OFF state) when the time-shortened game state is not active. Outputting the external signal allows the amusement hall's management control device to determine whether the current game state is in the time-shortened game state. Furthermore, under a configuration that restricts transition to the time-shortened game state even when the transition condition for the time-shortened game state is met in a time-shortened game state, outputting the external signal also allows the amusement hall's management control device to determine that transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted. Note that the external signal does not necessarily have to indicate the time-shortened game state (a state in which the game is in the low probability mode and high-frequency support mode), but may be a signal corresponding to the support mode being the high-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, in a configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state, if the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery in the final game round of the time-shortened game state (the special symbol game round at which the time-shortened game state ends) is a special miss result, it is preferable that the external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state is turned off, and then the external signal corresponding to the special miss result (lottery result signal or game round execution signal) is turned on.

In the above case, the special miss result triggers a transition to the subsequent time-shortened game state. However, if the processing is performed in the order of, for example, turning on the external signal corresponding to the special miss result, followed by turning off the external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state, there is a concern that the gaming hall's management and control device may recognize that a transition to the time-shortened game state has occurred, even though transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted. In this regard, by performing the processing in the order of turning off the external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state, followed by turning on the external signal corresponding to the special miss result, the management and control device can recognize that a special miss result occurred after the time-shortened game state had ended, and it is possible to prevent the transition to the time-shortened game state from being recognized as unnatural behavior.

(41) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, an external signal corresponding to a special miss result is output when the confirmation display begins in a special symbol game round, but it may also be output during the confirmation display or when the confirmation display ends. It may also be output during the variable display in a special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss result.

(42) In Modifications 3 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, when a special miss occurs in a situation where transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, the special symbol display unit 43 is configured to stop and display a stop result corresponding to the special miss. However, a stop result corresponding to a normal miss may also be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a stop result corresponding to a special miss in a situation where transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted (which corresponds to a special miss, but is different from the stop result that is stopped and displayed when a special miss occurs in a situation where the transition is not restricted) may also be stopped and displayed.

(43) In Modifications 3 to 5 of the second embodiment described above, the transition determination as to whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state is performed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round, but it may also be performed when the special symbol game round starts, as in Modifications 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be performed at the start of the special symbol game round, while the transition to the third time-shortened game state may be performed at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the third time-shortened game state may also be performed at the start of the special symbol game round.

The transition determination may also be made midway through the variable display during a special game session that resulted in a special miss. Furthermore, if the transition to the third time-saving game state is to occur after the start of the confirmation display, the transition determination may be configured to be made after the start of the confirmation display.

(44) In Variation 3 of the second embodiment described above, transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted only in the final play in the first time-shortened game state. However, transition to the third time-shortened game state may also be permitted in special symbol play rounds other than the final play round. For example, a configuration may be considered in which a permission flag is provided indicating that transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted in the event of a special miss result, and the permission flag is set in a special symbol play round other than the final play round (e.g., the 70th to 80th special symbol play round) or during a period in which a special symbol play round other than the final play round is executed (e.g., the period from transition to the first time-shortened game state until a predetermined period has elapsed). In this configuration, transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted if a special miss result occurs in a special symbol play round or period for which the permission flag is set, and transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted if a special symbol play round or period for which the permission flag is not set.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the allowable flag, a restriction flag may be provided to indicate that transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted in the event of a special miss. In this case, the restriction flag is set to enter a non-allowable state during special game rounds or periods during which transition to the third time-saving game state is not permitted even if a special miss occurs.

If transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted in a special symbol game round other than the final game round, it is recommended that the latter special symbol game rounds in the first time-shortened game state include a game round in which transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted. As the number of rounds remaining in the time-shortened game state decreases, the expected value of winning a jackpot in the time-shortened game state decreases, making it more difficult for players to maintain their sense of anticipation in the latter half of the time-shortened game state than in the first half. In such a situation, allowing a transition to the third time-shortened game state due to a special miss result makes it possible to maintain anticipation in an appropriate manner.

(45) In the third variant of the second embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which different game presentation effects are performed for the final game presentation in the first time-saving game state and the remaining reserved game presentations of the second special symbol (game presentations of the second special symbol performed in the normal game state). For example, it is conceivable to use different background images, etc., on the symbol display device 75.

(46) In the third variant of the second embodiment described above, the confirmation display time in the event of a special miss in the final play of the first time-saving play state or in the remaining reserved play of the second special symbol may be set to a time shorter than the normal confirmation display. This configuration makes it possible to quickly start play (the special symbol play) after transitioning to the third time-saving play state.

(47) In Modification 3, Modification 5, and Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, the first special symbol may have a special failure result, as in Modification 4. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have special failure results, the winning probability of the special failure result on the first special symbol may be the same as the winning probability of the special failure result on the second special symbol, or they may be different. Furthermore, the upper limit number of times the third time-saving game state to which a transition occurs when a special failure result occurs on the first special symbol may be the same as the upper limit number of times the third time-saving game state to which a transition occurs when a special failure result occurs on the second special symbol, or they may be different.

Furthermore, in variant 4 of the second embodiment described above, it may be configured so that the first special drawing does not have a special miss result, as in other variants.

(48) In Modifications 3, 4, and 6 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a special missed reach effect (fake effect) is executed, as in Modification 5.

(49) In Variation 4 of the second embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which a special miss result in the first time-shortened game state puts the player at a disadvantage, but a configuration may also be used in which a disadvantage is more likely to occur. Specifically, a third time-shortened game state with a relatively small upper limit of the number of plays (for example, a third time-shortened game state with a maximum of 10 plays) and a third time-shortened game state with a relatively large upper limit of the number of plays (for example, a third time-shortened game state with a maximum of 1000 plays) may be provided, and the former third time-shortened game state may be more likely to be selected in the event of a special miss result.

(50) In the fourth variant of the second embodiment described above, a special miss in the first time-saving game state reduces the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state. In addition to this, the normal game times and the feature opening/closing game modes in the third time-saving game state may be set to be less favorable than those in the first time-saving game state. For example, the variable display time for the normal game times may be longer, the opening time of the normal electric feature 63a may be shorter, or the number of times the normal electric feature 63a is opened in one feature opening/closing game may be reduced.

(51) In Variation 4 of the second embodiment described above, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is not displayed throughout the first time-shortened game state. However, the remaining number of times may be hidden when the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state is greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), and may be displayed when the remaining number of times falls below the predetermined number. By using such a configuration, if no special miss result is obtained until the end of the first time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times can be notified to the player before the end of the first time-shortened game state, preventing the player from feeling that the time-shortened game state has suddenly ended.

(52) In the above-described variant 5 of the second embodiment, two types of first time-shortened game states, first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B, are provided, but the number of types of first time-shortened game states may be three or more.

(53) In the fifth variant of the second embodiment described above, the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state is compared with the upper limit number of times in the third time-shortened game state, and the higher number of times is given priority, thereby providing multiple first time-shortened game states with different ranges of play times for which transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted. However, it is also possible to provide multiple first time-shortened game states with different ranges of play times for which transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted without using priority processing based on a comparison of the remaining number of times. For example, it is conceivable to provide a configuration with a permission flag indicating that transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted when a special miss occurs, and then configure each first time-shortened game state to have a different range of play times for which the permission flag is set and the permitted state is permitted.

In this case, the allowance flag is not limited to being set for a range of special symbol game times, but may also be set for one special symbol game time or multiple special symbol game times that are not contiguous as a range. For example, in first time-saving game state A, the 60th special symbol game time may be set as an allowable special symbol game time, and the 40th, 50th, and 60th special symbol game times may be set as allowable special symbol game times, while in first time-saving game state B, the 80th special symbol game time may be set as an allowable special symbol game time, and the 80th, 90th, and 100th special symbol game times may be set as allowable special symbol game times.

The tolerance flag may also be set for a period of time. For example, in first time-shortened game state A, the tolerance state is set for a first period (e.g., 5 minutes) from the start of a predetermined number of special symbol game turns (e.g., the 20th turn) after transition to the time-shortened game state, while in first time-shortened game state B, the tolerance state is set for a second period (e.g., 10 minutes) from the start of a specific number of special symbol game turns (e.g., the 20th or 25th turn) after transition to the time-shortened game state.

Even when setting the permissible state using the permissible flag as described above, the effects described in variant 5 can be achieved by configuring the system so that the permissible state in the first time-shortened game state B is included in special game turns from the 70th onwards, or by setting the special game turn or range or period of special game turns in which transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted in the first time-shortened game state and the second time-shortened game state in common, as in variant 5.

When setting the permissible state using a permissible flag, a common upper limit number may be set for first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the permissible flag, a restriction flag may be provided that indicates that transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted in the event of a special miss result.

(54) In variants 6 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, in a special symbol game in which the ceiling is reached or a special symbol game in which a special miss result is achieved, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a stopped symbol (either a temporary stop symbol or a permanent stop symbol) earlier than in other special symbol game times relative to the timing at which the variable display ends, and after the stopped symbol display, at least part of the notification corresponding to the ceiling being reached or the special miss result may be made using the remaining time until the variable display ends.

(55) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state and the transition determination as to whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state are configured to be executed at the start of a special game round, but as in the second embodiment and Modifications 1 to 5, they may also be executed at the start of the confirmation display (the timing of transition to each time-shortened game state). Furthermore, each of the transition determinations may be executed midway through the variable display in a special game round when the transition conditions to each time-shortened game state are met. Furthermore, if a transition to each time-shortened game state is made after the start of the confirmation display, the transition determination may be executed after the start of the confirmation display.

(56) In Variations 6 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, the transition determination as to whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is performed before the process for setting the variation pattern (the process for setting the effects for the game rounds). However, the transition determination may be performed after the process for setting the variation pattern, as long as it is performed before the notification corresponding to reaching the ceiling or a special miss result is issued. In such a configuration, if both the number of times the ceiling has been reached and a win on the special miss result occurs in one special game round, the notification corresponding to the special miss result is first set to be executed based on the recognition that the special miss result has been won. However, it is preferable that the notification to be executed is changed from the notification corresponding to the special miss result to the notification corresponding to reaching the ceiling based on the recognition that the number of times the ceiling has been reached in the transition determination as to whether to transition to the second time-saving game state.

(57) In Variations 6 to 10 of the second embodiment described above, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second time-shortened game state is performed before the process for setting the variation pattern. However, the transition determination may be performed after the process for setting the variation pattern, and only the process for updating the number of loss game plays may be performed before the process for setting the variation pattern. Even with this configuration, it is possible to determine that both the special loss result and the number of times the ceiling has been reached before setting the variation pattern, and to set the variation pattern so that a notification corresponding to the ceiling being reached is issued.

(58) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the advantage or disadvantage between the second time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state is determined by the size of the upper limit number of times. However, instead of or in addition to this, the advantage or disadvantage may be determined by the normal game number or the nature of the device opening and closing game in the time-shortened game state. For example, if the second time-shortened game state is more advantageous to the player than the third time-shortened game state, the variable display time of the normal game number in the second time-shortened game state may be shorter than that in the third time-shortened game state, or the number of times the normal electric device 63a is opened in one device opening and closing game in the second time-shortened game state may be greater than that in the third time-shortened game state.

(59) In Variation 7 of the second embodiment described above, the second time-shortened game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the third time-shortened game state, but the third time-shortened game state may also be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state. In this case, when a special miss result and the ceiling number of times are reached in the same special game, in order to transition to the more advantageous third time-shortened game state, it is preferable to configure the process to be executed in the following order: a transition decision on whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state → a transition decision on whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state.

(60) In variant 7 of the second embodiment described above, as in variant 5, if the conditions for transitioning to another time-shortened game state are met while in the time-shortened game state (when the ceiling number of times is reached or a special miss result is won), the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state at that time may be compared with the upper limit number of times for the other time-shortened game state to which transition is planned, and the time-shortened game state with the greater number of times may be given priority.

(61) In Variation 8 of the second embodiment described above, if a transition condition to another time-shortened game state is met while in the time-shortened game state, transition to another time-shortened game state is restricted. However, such transition may also be permitted, as in Variation 7. In this case, in order to transition to the more advantageous time-shortened game state when a special miss result and reaching the ceiling number of times occur in the same special game, it is preferable to configure the order of the transition determination as to whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state and the transition determination as to whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state to be reversed from that in Variation 8.

(62) In variant 10 of the second embodiment described above, the update of the number of misses is restricted when a special miss occurs in a special symbol game where the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times. However, such an update may be permitted. In other words, when a special miss occurs in a special symbol game where the ceiling number of times is reached, the reaching of the ceiling number of times may be invalidated, and transition to the second time-saving game state may be restricted.

(63) In variant 10 of the second embodiment described above, while the update of the number of losing plays is limited in the third time-shortened play state, the update is executed in the final play state. However, the update of the number of losing plays may also be limited in the final play state. In other words, if a special loss occurs in a special symbol play state where the number of losing plays reaches the ceiling number, the game may first transition to the third time-shortened play state, and the update of the number of losing plays may resume in the special symbol play state (the special symbol play state in the normal play state) that is played after the third time-shortened play state ends. In this case, although a special symbol play state in the normal play state intervenes, it is possible to transition to either the third time-shortened play state or the second time-shortened play state.

(64) Variation 10 of the second embodiment described above may be configured to allow updating of the number of miss plays during part of the third time-shortened game state. For example, in the third time-shortened game state, updating of the number of miss plays may be allowed until the number of miss plays reaches a predetermined value that is smaller than the ceiling number (for example, the value immediately before the ceiling number), and updating may be restricted after the predetermined value is reached. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the ceiling number is reached during the third time-shortened game state.

(65) In variant 10 of the second embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to limit the update of the number of misses is switched by referring to the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times. Specifically, if the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is less than the upper limit number of times in the third time-shortened game state, the update of the number of misses in the third time-shortened game state may be limited, and if the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is greater, the update may be allowed in the third time-shortened game state.

(66) In variant 10 of the second embodiment described above, the second time-shortened game state has a higher upper limit number of plays than the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state, making it advantageous to the player. However, the second time-shortened game state may also have a lower upper limit number of plays than the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state, making it disadvantageous to the player.

(67) In variant 10 of the second embodiment described above, the number of misses is allowed to be updated when the first time-shortened game state is active. However, the number of misses may be restricted when the first time-shortened game state is active. In this case, even if the upper limit for the first time-shortened game state is set to a number equal to or greater than the ceiling number, it is possible to prevent the ceiling number from being reached when the first time-shortened game state is active.

In addition, in a pachinko machine that has both a first time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is equal to or greater than the ceiling number of times, and a second time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is less than the ceiling number of times, the configuration may be such that updating the number of misses is restricted in the former case, and updating the number of misses is allowed in the latter case.

(68) In variant 10 of the second embodiment described above, when the update of the number of misses is restricted, the state immediately before the restriction is imposed is maintained and the number of misses image 475 is displayed. However, the number of misses image 475 may not be displayed. In this case, only the retention image 481 may be displayed, or another image related to the third time-shortened game state, such as "Chance Time in progress," may be displayed. Furthermore, the number of misses image 475 may simply be erased upon transition to the restricted state, and no other image may be displayed in the location where the number of misses image 475 is displayed.

(69) In the above-described variant 10 of the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined external signal is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when the limit on updating the number of misses is initiated or is currently being imposed. With this configuration, the management control device on the gaming hall side can be made aware that the number of miss plays has not been updated in the pachinko machine 10, and it becomes possible to immediately determine that the failure to transition to the second time-shortened play state even when the number of miss plays exceeds the upper limit is not an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10.

(70) In variant 11 of the second embodiment, the second external signal is provided, but this may be omitted. That is, if the hall machine can distinguish between differences in output periods, it can determine whether a special miss result has occurred based on the first external signal. Note that the difference in the first external signal between a normal jackpot result and a special miss result is not limited to the output period (on-state period), but may also be, for example, the output level.

(71) In Variation 11 of the second embodiment described above, the second external signal is configured to be in the ON state during the opening/closing execution mode and the time-shortened game state, but it may also be configured to be in the OFF state during the opening/closing execution mode and in the ON state during the time-shortened game state. The same applies to the second external signals A and B in Variation 12.

(72) In Modifications 11 and 12 of the second embodiment described above, the first external signal and the second external signal were turned on when a special miss occurred, but they may also be turned on before (e.g., immediately before) or after (e.g., immediately after) the transition to the time-shortened game state. The key is that these external signals should be turned on in response to the transition to the time-shortened game state.

(73) In the above-described second embodiment, variants 11 and 12, the first external signal is set to the ON state during the opening and closing execution mode in the event of a normal jackpot result. However, the first external signal may be set to the ON state before (e.g., immediately before) or after (e.g., immediately after) transition to the opening and closing execution mode. In other words, the first external signal may be set to the ON state in response to transition to the opening and closing execution mode.

(74) In the above-described variant 12 of the second embodiment, both the first external signal B and the second external signal B can be output, but it is also possible to configure the device so that one of these signals is not output.

(75) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variably displayed patterns on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll left and right, but the patterns may be displayed in a line on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction of the patterns and the scrolling direction are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more.

(76) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

Third Embodiment
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained using FIG.

During play, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, set the display for the special symbol display section 43, and set the display for the regular symbol display section 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used to determine the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a special jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS which determines the fluctuation display time for each special symbol display section AS, BS in the special symbol display section 43. Furthermore, it uses a regular symbol random number counter C3 used to perform the lottery for determining whether or not to place the regular electric device 63a of the second operating port 63 in the support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a, which is set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special symbol reserved area Ra and a second special symbol reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of these areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history for the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first to fourth areas in the order of first area → second area → third area → fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b has a total reserved number storage area, and this total reserved number storage area stores information for specifying the number of winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

To go into more detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 2999, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314, and when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63, it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, and the random number value that results in a jackpot win is set in a win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 212, the win/lose table is set to a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes for the win/lose lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 212(a), the win/lose table for low probability mode has a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" set as jackpot values. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300.

The lottery result will be a losing result for any random number value other than the jackpot winning value, but in this embodiment, the losing results include special losing results and normal losing results. In the winning/losing table for the low probability mode, a total of 20 random number values from "10" to "29" are set as special losing results, and the probability of getting a special losing result is 1/150.

As shown in Figure 212 (b), the hit/miss table for high probability mode has a total of 50 random number values between "0" and "49" set as jackpot winning values. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. The hit/miss table for high probability mode does not have any special miss results, and all values other than the random number values that result in a jackpot winning result are normal miss results.

The probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot can be any. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result in the win/lose table for low probability mode is also not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, the probability of a special miss result does not necessarily have to be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and can be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result may be lower than the probability of winning a jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game results for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 213, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol are set as the jackpot type table. If a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in Figure 213(a), the jackpot type table for the first special design has the following selectable jackpot types: 4R variable jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being executed. Here, a round of play is when variable winning control is executed at least once, changing the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then returning it to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once per round of play.

A 4R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode for the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In other words, when a 4R probability variable jackpot result occurs, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high probability game state, probability variable game state). In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode begins). Incidentally, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

In the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode, the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared under conditions in which game balls are continuously being released into the play area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a is opened more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the open period for each opening is also longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in low-frequency support mode. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than that into the second actuation port 63, but in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than that into the first actuation port 62. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

In this embodiment, the high frequency support modes are a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode. Of these, the first high frequency support mode is the mode that is entered when a 4R special jackpot result is achieved. The difference between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode will be explained later.

A 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to first high frequency support mode. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result occurs, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state).

When a 4R normal jackpot result A is achieved, the time-saving play state continues until the number of special symbol plays resulting in a miss (miss play count) reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 50 plays). In this case, the number of miss plays is counted based on the special symbol play counts after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, when a 4R normal jackpot result B is achieved, the time-saving play state continues until the number of miss plays after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit (e.g., 200 plays). When the first upper limit or the second state count is reached, the time-saving play state ends and the game transitions to the normal play state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result occurs before the respective upper limit is reached, the time-saving play state ends with a transition to the opening and closing execution mode based on that jackpot result.

In this embodiment, a value of "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, a value of "65" to "94" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result A, and a value of "95" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 30%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 5%.

As shown in Figure 213 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special chart sets the selectable jackpot types as 10R special jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B.

A 10R probability jackpot result results in 10 rounds of play being executed, and is a jackpot result in which the game state after the open/close execution mode ends is a high probability game state. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs. 4R normal jackpot results A and B are the same as 4R normal jackpot results A and B in the jackpot type table for the first special chart.

In this embodiment, a value of "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, a value of "65" to "94" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result A, and a value of "95" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 30%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 5%.

As such, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is the same regardless of whether the type table for the first special symbol display section or the type table for the second special symbol display section is selected. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table for the second special symbol display section is set to result in a 10R jackpot result, while the type table for the first special symbol display section is set to result in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the second actuation port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode will be greater than if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the first actuation port 62, and it is possible to expect a greater payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is awarded through the second actuation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is awarded through the first actuation port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, players will play in the hope of winning through the second actuation port 63, out of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, and as a result, players will pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning through the second actuation port 63.

In this embodiment, the type table of the first special symbol display unit and the type table of the second special symbol display unit have the same probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result, but they may also have different probabilities. Specifically, the type table of the second special symbol display unit may be configured to have a higher probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result than the type table of the first special symbol display unit. Even with this configuration, it is still more advantageous for the player to have the second actuation port 63 win than the first actuation port 62. In this case, it is not necessarily necessary to configure the second actuation port 63 to be more favorable than the first actuation port 62 in terms of both the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode and the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result; it may be configured so that only the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result is more favorable.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS when the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple data sets for the stop results in the event of a jackpot (the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS) that correspond to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data set for the multiple stop results that corresponds to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine both the stop result and the jackpot type, so the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state that is triggered by a normal jackpot result, there is also a time-saving game state that is triggered by a special miss result in the win/lose lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1. In this case, the time-saving game state is a state in which the lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a second high-frequency support mode.

Note that, because a special miss result is a type of miss result, the game will transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state without going through the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a special miss result occurs, the game state will transition to the time-saving game state as the special game round ends. In the following, when distinguishing between the time-saving game state triggered by a normal jackpot result and the time-saving game state triggered by a special miss result, the former will sometimes be referred to as the "normal time-saving game state" and the latter as the "sudden time-saving game state."

As shown in Figure 214 (a), there are multiple types of special failure results. Specifically, there are three types of special failure results: special failure result A to special failure result C. Each of these special failure results is associated with a value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Specifically, of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in special failure results between "10" and "29," "10" to "17" correspond to special failure result A, "18" to "27" correspond to special failure result B, and "28" to "29" correspond to special failure result C. In other words, when a special failure result occurs, the probability of special failure result A is set to 40%, the probability of special failure result B is set to 50%, and the probability of special failure result C is set to 10%.

Note that the number and values of random numbers corresponding to the various special failure results are merely examples, and the probabilities of the various special failure results and the corresponding random numbers can be set arbitrarily.

As shown in Figure 214 (b), special miss result A is a special miss result that triggers a transition to sudden time-saving game state A (low probability mode and second high-frequency support mode). Sudden time-saving game state A continues until the number of misses since transitioning to sudden time-saving game state A reaches a predetermined third upper limit (e.g., 50 times).

Special miss result B is a special miss result that triggers a transition to sudden time-saving game state B (low probability mode and second high-frequency support mode). Sudden time-saving game state B continues until the number of misses since transitioning to sudden time-saving game state B reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 times).

Special miss result C is a special miss result that triggers a transition to sudden time-saving game state C (low probability mode and second high-frequency support mode). Sudden time-saving game state C continues until the number of misses since transitioning to sudden time-saving game state C reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 200 times).

If the number of misses in the sudden time-saving game modes A to C reaches the respective upper limit, the current sudden time-saving game mode will end and the game will transition to the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). If a jackpot result occurs before the respective upper limit is reached, the respective sudden time-saving game mode will end with a transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 211, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special symbol display section AS and second special symbol display section BS of the special symbol display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313. Details of the variable display time table will be described later.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The normal winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the normal winning holding area 314c of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used in the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not a normal winning (support winning) has occurred. If the result is a support winning, the normal power device 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a device opening/closing game is executed in which the opening/closing control to return it to the closed state is performed at least once.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in the support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 215, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, a support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode, and a support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode. When drawing the support lottery, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced; if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode is referenced; and if the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 215(a), in the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode, a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" are set as support winning values, and the probability of winning support is 1/10.

As shown in Figure 215(b), the support lottery table for the first high frequency support mode has a total of 90 numbers set, ranging from "0" to "89," and the probability of winning support is 9/10. In other words, when in the first high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is a high probability mode, making it easier to win support than in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in Figure 215 (c), in the support lottery table for the second high frequency support mode, a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" are set as support winning values, and the probability of winning support is 1/10. In other words, in the second high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is set to a low probability mode, and the support lottery is held with a lower probability of winning support than in the first high frequency support mode.

In each support mode, if the random number value does not result in a support win, the lottery result will be a normal miss. In this case, the opening and closing of the device will not be performed.

The probability of winning a support ball in each support mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. For example, as long as the probability of winning a support ball is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a support ball win are arbitrary. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is the same as in the low-frequency support mode, but the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the low-frequency support mode. In that case, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode may be the same as the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be lower than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball is equal in the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode.

Incidentally, if the probability of winning support is set to be equal between the low-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, as in this embodiment, that is, if there is no variation in the probability of winning support between these modes, the support lottery table for each of these modes can be made common, and a single lottery table can be provided.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to progress the game by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but we will not explain these processes here.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 216. This process is initiated by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sc101, the system executes a process for reading the various winning sensors. That is, it reads the status of the various winning sensors connected to the main control unit 162, and determines the status of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors) and saves the detection information (winning detection information). For example, if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If it is determined that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Furthermore, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

In step Sc102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sc103, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sc104, a through winning process is executed in response to a win at the through gate 64. In the through winning process, it is determined whether a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and if this flag is stored, the value of the normal winning random number counter C3 updated in step Sc103 is stored in the normal map holding area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role devices stored in the normal map holding area 314c is less than four. Furthermore, if a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the through gate winning process is terminated.

In step Sc105, the winning process for the operating port 62 or 63 is executed in response to a winning entry into the operating port 62 or 63, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for operating port>
The winning processing for the operating port in step Sc105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 217.

First, in step Sc201, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sc202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three gaming balls.

In step Sc203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sc204, the value stored in the reserve number memory area of the first special symbol reserve area Ra is read, and the start reserve memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserve memory number RaN). Then, in step Sc205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc201 (no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sc206, where it is determined whether a gaming ball has won (initial winning) in the second actuation port 63 based on the detection state of the second actuation port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that a gaming ball has won in the second actuation port 63, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sc207 to cause one gaming ball to be paid out.

In step Sc208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sc209, the value stored in the reserve number memory area of the second special symbol reserve area Rb is read, and the start reserve memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserve memory number RbN). Then, in step Sc205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sc202 or step Sc207 above is sent to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sc205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 218.

First, in step Sc301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sc204 or step Sc209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated. If it is less than the upper limit, in step Sc302, 1 is added to the start pending memory count N for the corresponding special chart hold area Ra, Rb. In step Sc303, 1 is added to the value stored in the total hold count memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold count CRN).

In step Sc304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the corresponding reserved area for the special chart display section, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number increased by 1 in step Sc302 above.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the first special symbol holding area Ra, i.e., the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol added by 1 in step Sc302 above.

In addition, if the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the holding area Rb for the second special symbol, i.e., the holding area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol added by 1 in step Sc302 above.

In step Sc305, a display update process is performed on the special symbol reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. The special symbol reserved number display section AM is capable of displaying the reserved number for the first special symbol and the reserved number for the second special symbol separately. In the display update process of step Sc305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special symbol is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special symbol is updated.

In step Sc306, a hold command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special symbol is the starting winning symbol, information indicating the number of symbols on hold, etc. After step Sc306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 219. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and in normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sc401 to Sc408 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sc409 to Sc411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, external signal output processing is first executed in step Sc401. In the external signal output processing in step Sc401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sc402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sc403, a special symbol play control process is executed to control play during each special symbol play. The special symbol play control process performs jackpot determination and display control of the special symbol display unit 43. In step Sc404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the special symbol play control process in step Sc403 and the game state transition process in step Sc404 will be described later.

In step Sc405, a normal game play control process is executed to control play during a normal game play. The normal game play control process performs a support lottery (a normal game win/lose lottery) and displays the normal game display unit 44. In step Sc406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal electric role device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Details of the normal game play control process in step Sc405 and the electric role support process in step Sc406 will be described later.

In step Sc407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In step Sc408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage has not occurred), step Sc409 determines whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing, step Sc410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314.

In step Sc411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc409 (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), processing returns to step Sc401 and processing from step Sc401 onwards is executed.

In this way, after executing the processing of step Sc408, the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, the execution time of each process from step Sc401 to step Sc408 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can similarly be randomly updated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc408 (the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sc412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sc413, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Sc414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Sc415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sc416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after power is completely cut off, power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to maintain data storage in RAM 314, so the information stored in RAM 314 before power was cut off is retained in its original state for a predetermined period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special game play control processing>
The game play control processing of step Sc403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 220.

First, in step Sc501, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, step Sc502 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol. Specifically, it determines whether the fixed symbol display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The fixed symbol display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a fixed symbol.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed value, step Sc503 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable value. Specifically, it determines whether the variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a variable value.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, step Sc504 determines whether the common hold number CRN is "0." If the common hold number CRN is "0," this means that the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common hold number CRN is "0," there is no hold information to be executed, and the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserve number CRN is not "0", step Sc505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra or the second special symbol reserve area Rb for variable display, and then step Sc506 executes a variable start process to start variable display in the special symbol display unit 43, after which the game play control process is terminated.

The data setting process in step Sc505 and the fluctuation start process in step Sc506 are now explained in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 221.

First, in step Sc601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is "0." If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0," data setting processing for the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sc602 to Sc608. If the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0," data setting processing for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sc609 to Sc615.

As already explained, data setting processing is performed when the common reserve number CRN is 1 or greater. A situation in which data setting processing is performed means that at least one of the first start reserve memory number RaN and the second start reserve memory number RbN is 1 or greater. In this case, the data setting processing is configured to first determine whether the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," and then perform processing related to the reserve information for the first special symbol if the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," i.e., if there is no reserve information for the second special symbol. Therefore, if reserve information is stored in both the first special symbol reserve area Ra and the second special symbol reserve area Rb, the reserve information for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is processed first.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first in step Sc602, the first start hold memory number RaN in the first special symbol holding area Ra is decremented by 1. In step Sc603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sc604, the data stored in the first area of the first special symbol holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sc605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra. This process clears the data in the first area and sequentially moves the data in the second to fourth areas to the lower areas.

In step Sc606, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second special symbol flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If a second special symbol flag is stored, the second special symbol flag is cleared in step Sc607.

After step Sc607 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc606 (the second special symbol flag is not stored), proceed to step Sc608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first special symbol reserved area Ra, i.e., information that it corresponds to the first actuation port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sc608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 of normal processing (Figure 219). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first hold display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of holds.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step Sc609, the second start hold memory number RbN in the second special symbol holding area Rb is decremented by 1. In step Sc610, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sc611, the data stored in the first area of the second special symbol holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sc612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb. In step Sc613, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sc614.

After step Sc614 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), proceed to step Sc615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information that causes the sub-control device, the performance control device 143, to recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second special symbol reserved area Rb, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second actuation port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sc615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 of normal processing (Figure 219). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second hold display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 222.

First, in step Sc701, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table corresponding to the current game state. Specifically, if the current lottery mode is low probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 212 (a)), and if the current lottery mode is high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 212 (b)). In this step, a determination is made as to whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the random number for a jackpot in the win/loss table being referenced.

In step Sc702, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sc701 is a hit or miss jackpot. If a hit or miss jackpot is determined, in step Sc703, the corresponding jackpot type table is referenced to determine the jackpot type (lottery for the jackpot type). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the first special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Fig. 213(a)). If the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the second special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Fig. 213(b)). For example, if the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to one of the numerical ranges: 4R special jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, or 4R normal jackpot result B.

In step Sc704, a jackpot type flag corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sc703 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result A, the 4R normal jackpot A flag is set.

In step Sc705, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc702 (if the jackpot has not been won), proceed to step Sc706, where it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment in step Sc701 is a special loss result. If it is a special loss result, in step Sc707, a special loss type flag corresponding to the type of special loss result is set in the various flags storage area 314e. For example, if the type of special loss result is special loss result A, the special loss A flag is set.

In step Sc708, the stop result table is referenced to set the stop result for a special miss. In the stop result table, a unique stop result is set for each type of special miss result; specifically, stop results for each type of special miss result are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In this step, the stop result for a special miss corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round. As already explained, the type of special miss result corresponds to the type of sudden time-saving game state, so the stop result for a special miss result displayed on the special chart display unit 43 corresponds to the type of sudden time-saving game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc706 (if the result is not a special miss), the process proceeds to step Sc709, where the stop result for the current game is set to the stop result for a normal miss. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a normal miss is provided, and this stop result is set in step Sc709.

After step Sc705, step Sc708, or step Sc709 is executed, step Sc710 executes high-frequency support mode update processing to update the number of special game plays in high-frequency support mode. In step Sc711, sudden time-saving game state transition determination processing is executed to determine whether a transition trigger to the sudden time-saving game state has occurred. In step Sc712, variable display time setting processing is executed to draw a variable pattern and set the variable display time. Details of steps Sc710 to Sc712 will be described later.

In step Sc713, a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display for a special game is in progress.

In step Sc714, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The fluctuation start command contains information about the fluctuation pattern, and a different fluctuation pattern is set for each game state, and a different fluctuation pattern is also set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, the presentation control device 143 can grasp not only information about the fluctuation display time, but also whether or not there has been a jackpot and the current game state. Furthermore, the type command contains information about the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot.

In step Sc715, the display of the special symbol display unit 43 begins to change. At that time, if the current special symbol game is based on a win in the first operating port 62, the image in the first special symbol display unit AS is displayed in a changing manner, and if it is based on a win in the second operating port 63, the image in the second special symbol display unit BS is displayed in a changing manner. After step Sc715 is executed, the change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol play count control process (Figure 220), after step Sc506 is executed, the special symbol play count control process ends. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sc501 (open/close execution mode is in progress), the special symbol play count control process ends without executing the processes from step Sc502 onwards. In other words, if the open/close execution mode is in progress, no variable display will be made on the special symbol display unit 43 even if pending information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc503 (the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable), the process proceeds to step Sc507, where it is determined whether the variable display time for the current special symbol game has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step Sc508. In the variable display processing, the display of the special symbol display unit for the current game is controlled (the illumination of each display segment is controlled) so that each display segment in the special symbol display unit for the current game is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After step Sc508 is executed, the special symbol game control processing ends.

If the variable display time has elapsed, proceed to step Sc509 and clear the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sc510, high-frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high-frequency support mode. In step Sc511, the first transition processing for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed. The first transition processing for the sudden time-shortened game state is intended to transition the game state to the sudden time-shortened game state. Details of step Sc510 and step Sc511 will be described later.

In step Sc512, the process for starting the final display is executed, and then the special symbol game count control process is terminated. In the process for starting the final display, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to display the image as stopped based on the stop result set in step Sc705, step Sc708, or step Sc709. In addition, in step Sc512, the final display time for continuing the above-mentioned stopped display is also set.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is currently displaying a fixed symbol), the process proceeds to step Sc513, where a process for terminating the fixed symbol display is executed. In the process for terminating the fixed symbol display, it is determined whether the fixed symbol display time set in step Sc512 has elapsed, and if so, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to terminate the static symbol display. Note that if there is no next pending information when the fixed symbol display time has elapsed, the static symbol display is controlled to continue as is until a winning entry occurs in the actuation port 62, 63. After step Sc513 is completed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

<Game status transition processing>
The game state transition processing of step Sc404 (Figure 219) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 223.

First, in step Sc901, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not currently in the open/close execution mode, the program proceeds to step Sc902, where it is determined whether or not the special symbol game has ended (whether or not the confirmation display on the special symbol display unit 43 has ended). If the special symbol game has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the end of the special symbol game, step Sc903 determines whether the game result of this special symbol game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot type flag (step Sc705) is stored in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314 to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. If the game result of this special symbol game does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc903 (if the result of this special game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sc904, where the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. An opening period is also set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if the high probability flag, support flag, or reserved flag described below are set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sc905, the process for starting the round display to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is executed. In this step, the type of jackpot that has occurred is determined based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sc906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R regular jackpot result, in step Sc907, the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sc908, the round counter area RC1 is set to "10".

After step Sc907 or step Sc908 is executed, in step Sc909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the opening. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 of normal processing (Figure 219).

In step Sc910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to that management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sc911, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening/closing process is executed in step Sc912.

Here, the process for opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 224.

First, in step Sc1001, it is determined whether the special prize opening 65a is open. This determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 65d. If the special prize opening 65a is not open, in step Sc1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Sc1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process determines whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value in timer area T1 is "0," proceed to step Sc1004, where "15000" is set in timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 216) is initiated. In step Sc1005, "10" is set in winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter area 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sc1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sc1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 of the normal processing (Figure 219).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1102 (the value of the round counter area RC1 is 0) or a negative judgment is made in step Sc1103 (the value of the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sc1008, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T1 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sc1004 has elapsed.

If the value in timer area T1 is not "0," proceed to step Sc1009, where a determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value in prize counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Sc1010, and then a determination is made as to whether or not the value in prize counter area PC1 is "0" in step Sc1011. If the value in prize counter area PC1 is not "0," the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1008 (if the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sc1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sc1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Sc1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sc1015 and set "1000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the period (2 seconds) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sc1016, a close command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 of the normal processing (Figure 219).

If step Sc1014 returns a positive result (the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), i.e., if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sc1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed and awaits the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sc1018, an ending command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 of the normal process (Fig. 219).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 223), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sc912, step Sc913 determines whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", proceed to step Sc914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, proceed to step Sc915 to execute the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 225.

First, in step Sc1201, the jackpot type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot result. If it is a variable probability jackpot result, in step Sc1202, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to high probability mode.

In step Sc1203, the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The Support A flag corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode, and the processing of step Sc1203 transitions the support mode to the first high-frequency support mode.

If a jackpot result occurs when the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, the support A flag is cleared when the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to that jackpot result begins (step S904). Also, if a jackpot result occurs when the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, the high probability flag is cleared when the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to that jackpot result begins (step S904). Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. This state continues until the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In step Sc1204, a high probability game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability game state start command set in step Sc1204 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 of the normal processing (Figure 219). By sending the high probability game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the high probability game state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1201 (the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sc1205, where the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the support mode to the first high-frequency support mode.

In step Sc1206, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the current jackpot result is set. For example, if the current jackpot result is a 4R normal jackpot result A, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 50) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The support counter area SC is used by MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high frequency support mode (the remaining number of special symbol game times that can be played in high frequency support mode), and is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol game is played in high frequency support mode.

In step Sc1207, a time-shortened game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The time-shortened game state start command set in step Sc1207 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 of the normal processing (Figure 219). By sending the time-shortened game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the time-shortened game state (low probability mode and first high-frequency support mode).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 223), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sc915 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Sc916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sc917, the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, and then the game state transition process is terminated. The opening and closing execution mode termination process executes a process to erase the type flag and opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e.

Next, we will explain the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sc710 and the sudden transition to the time-saving game state determination process in step Sc711. These processes are executed during the fluctuation start process (Figure 222), or in other words, when the fluctuation display starts during a special game round.

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The frequently supported mode update process in step Sc710 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1301, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, in step Sc1302 it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the Support A flag, Support B1 flag, Support B2 flag, or Support B3 flag is set. The Support B1 flag to Support B3 flag correspond to the second high-frequency support mode (sudden time-saving game state).

If any support flag is set, i.e., if the high-frequency support mode is in effect, proceed to step Sc1303 and update the value of the support counter area SC in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times for each time-saving game state.

In step Sc1304, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0." If the value of the support counter area SC is "0," that is, if the number of times play has been performed in each time-shortened game state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1305, where a time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The time-shortened end flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that each time-shortened game state should be ended.

After step Sc1305 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1301 (if a jackpot result is obtained) or a negative judgment is made in step Sc1302 (if none of the support flags are set), the remaining number of times for each time-saving game state is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sc1303 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1304 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is determined that each time-saving game state should not be terminated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process of step Sc1305.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state in step Sc711 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 227(a).

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special loss result. Specifically, it is determined whether a special loss type flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special loss type flag is set if the win/loss determination in step Sc701 determines that the result is a special loss (step Sc707).

If the result of the special drawing lottery is not a special miss (the special miss type flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving game state is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, in step Sc1403, a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to the time-saving gaming state should occur. After step Sc1403 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving gaming state is terminated.

If step Sc1402 returns a positive result (if any support flag is set), i.e., if the current game state is the normal time-shortened game state or the sudden time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step Sc1404, where it is determined whether a reservation flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. The reservation flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the transition to the time-shortened game state is reserved. The reservation of the time-shortened game state will be explained in more detail later.

If the reservation flag is not set, this means that there is no reserved time-saving game state. In this case, proceed to step Sc1405 to execute the reservation processing, and then suddenly end the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving game state. The reservation processing is used to reserve (wait) the transition to the time-saving game state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1404 (if the reservation flag is set), step Sc1406 determines whether the reserved number for the time-saving game state has reached the reservation upper limit. In this embodiment, the reservation upper limit is set to 1. If the reserved number has not reached the reservation upper limit, proceed to step Sc1405 and execute the reservation processing. If the transition reserved number has reached the reservation upper limit, the transition determination processing for the time-saving game state is suddenly terminated without executing the processing of step Sc1405.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation processing in step Sc1405 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1501, the remaining number of times in the current time-shortened game state (current time-shortened game state) is determined. This process is performed by referencing the value in the support counter area SC. In step Sc1502, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-shortened game state (corresponding time-shortened game state) corresponding to the type of special miss result is determined. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result B, the fourth upper limit number of times for the sudden time-shortened game state B (e.g., 100 times) is determined as the upper limit number.

In step Sc1503, the difference in the number of times between the remaining number determined in step Sc1501 and the upper limit number determined in step Sc1502 is calculated. Specifically, the remaining number determined in step Sc1501 is subtracted from the upper limit number determined in step Sc1502.

In step Sc1504, it is determined whether the differential count (subtraction result) calculated in step Sc1503 is 1 or greater. In other words, it is determined whether the upper limit count determined in step Sc1502 is greater than the remaining count determined in step Sc1501. If the differential count is 1 or greater (if the upper limit count is greater than the remaining count), proceed to step Sc1505, where type information indicating the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of special miss result this time and differential count information indicating the differential count calculated in step Sc1503 are stored (saved).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 227(b), a reservation area 314f is provided in RAM 314 as a storage area for information relating to the sudden time-saving game state to which transition is reserved. In step Sc1505, the above-mentioned type information and differential number information are stored in the reservation area 314f.

In the following step Sc1506, a reservation flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. This causes the transition to the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result to be reserved (put on hold). If the transition is reserved in this way, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state that was the subject of the reservation will be executed when the reservation cancellation timing arrives. Details of this process will be explained later.

It should be noted that after the reservation flag is set, a special miss may occur again during the time-saving game state. In this case, after positive judgments are made in steps Sc1401, Sc1402, and Sc1404 of the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state (Fig. 227(a)), the process for step Sc1406 is executed. However, since the reservation upper limit value is set to 1 in this embodiment, a positive judgment is also made in step Sc1406, and the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated without performing either the process for setting the flag for starting the sudden time-saving game (step Sc1403) or the reservation process (step Sc1405).

In other words, if a special miss occurs again after a reservation has been made, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss is no longer subject to reservation, and the transition to that sudden time-saving game state is canceled (invalidated). In this way, in this embodiment, if a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state, a reservation (stock) of the sudden time-saving game state occurs, but this is configured to be limited to the first win.

In step Sc1507, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the reservation processing is terminated. The reservation command notifies that a reservation for the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command contains information indicating the type of time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state and the differential number of times. After step Sc1507 is executed, the reservation processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1504 (if the difference in the number of times is less than 1), the reservation processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps Sc1505 to Sc1507. In other words, if the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result is equal to or less than the remaining number of times in the current time-saving game state, the sudden time-saving game state is not placed in a reserved state. In this case, if another special miss result occurs in the current time-saving game state and the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that is greater than the remaining number of times at that time, the sudden time-saving game state is placed in a reserved state.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process in step Sc712 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 229.

First, in step Sc1601, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined which of the high probability flags and various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and based on the results, the current game state is determined to be either the normal game state, the high probability game state, the normal time-saving game state, or the sudden time-saving game state. In this step, if the high probability flag and the first high-frequency support mode are set, the state is determined to be the high probability game state; if only the first high-frequency support mode is set, the state is determined to be the normal time-saving game state; if only the second high-frequency support mode is set, the state is determined to be the sudden time-saving game state; and if none of the flags are set, the state is determined to be the normal game state.

In step Sc1602, it is determined whether the game state determined in step Sc1601 is a normal game state. If it is a normal game state, the process proceeds to step Sc1603, where a variable display time table for the normal game state is obtained. The variable display time table is used to select a variable display time (variation pattern) based on the value of the variation type counter CS.

Here, the variable display time table for normal game play will be explained with reference to Figure 230. The variable display time table for normal game play includes a variable display time table for jackpots (Figure 230(a)), a variable display time table for special misses (Figure 230(b)), and a variable display time table for normal misses (Figure 230(c)).

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS is set in correspondence with fluctuation pattern information. Note that in Figure 230, fluctuation display time information is listed along with the fluctuation pattern to make it easier to understand, but the fluctuation display time information is stored in ROM 313 separately from the fluctuation display time table as time information corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 230 (a), the variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to normal game play has variable pattern 1A (15 seconds), variable pattern 2A (60 seconds), and variable pattern 3A (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern is set as the variable display time of the image in the first special symbol display section AS or the second special symbol display section BS.

In addition, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. The display control device 350 is then controlled so that the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is synchronized with the variation display of the patterns on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS, and is displayed on the symbol display device 75.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to game-round effects such as reach effects performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning effect, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning effect, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning effect. In other words, when the effect control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game-round effect corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects described above, after a reach-winning display is made, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, reach-winning display (reach state) refers to a display state intended to make the player believe that the state is likely to result in a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the changing display is a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of changing (or variable) displaying symbols (pictures), between the start of the changing (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, this is a display state in which symbols in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are displayed as still symbols, thereby displaying a reach symbol combination that has the potential to form a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the display of varying symbols is terminated, when the symbols in the final symbol row are displayed as varying symbols, a reach line is formed by displaying symbols in symbol rows other than the final symbol row as still symbols on an active line on the display screen G in a manner that forms a jackpot symbol combination.

A normal reach hit effect is one in which the above-mentioned reach display is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. An SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than a normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after the reach line is formed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols in a jackpot symbol combination are displayed. An SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than an SP reach effect, in which a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the items in the "Notes (Display Mode)" column in Figure 230(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in Figure 230 (b), in the variation display time table for special misses corresponding to the normal game state, variation pattern Z1 (15 seconds) is set as a selectable variation pattern. In other words, variation pattern Z1 is always selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS. As already explained, a special miss result suddenly triggers a transition to the time-saving game state.

Fluctuating pattern Z1 corresponds to the special reach miss A effect, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect as a game-time effect. Here, the special reach miss A effect will be explained with reference to Figure 233.

In the special reach miss A presentation, first, as shown in Figure 233(a), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed as a reach combination on one of the active lines L1-L5 on the display screen G, and the reach display is executed. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row that stops last) is switched from a high-speed changing display to a slow-speed changing display. At this time, as shown in Figure 233(b), a slow-speed changing display is executed with a special symbol 511 with letters such as "LUCKY" placed in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. In this way, the changing display is executed so that the player can recognize the presence of the special symbol 511. Note that Figure 233(b) shows an example in which the special symbol 511 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol that is next to the "3" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Next, as shown in Figure 233 (c), the slowly fluctuating special symbol 511 is displayed stopped on the reach line. In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination in which the special symbol 511 of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line is a symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss result, and this notifies the player that a special miss result has occurred.

As shown in Figure 230 (c), the variable display time table for normal misses, which corresponds to the normal game state, has variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 seconds), variable pattern 3H (60 seconds), and variable pattern 4H (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. Similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, a variable display time is set for each variable pattern, but the variable display time for variable pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special symbols at that time. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are two or fewer reserved symbols, the variable display time is 8 seconds, and if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are three or more reserved symbols, the variable display time is set to 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss effect on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss effect, variation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach miss effect, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to an SPSP reach miss effect.

A complete miss effect is one in which symbols are stopped and displayed in a miss combination without a reach display. Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects is one in which, after a reach display is made, the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a reach miss combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot in combination with the reach symbols). Furthermore, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach hit effect is made, symbols are stopped and displayed in a reach miss combination. Furthermore, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for normal misses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "98" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the win/loss lottery based on the entry into actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a regular miss, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a regular miss, and therefore functions as the highest level reach effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to higher-ranking reach effects are more likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and less likely to be selected in the event of a normal miss. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 230 (c), in the variation display time table for normal misses, which corresponds to the normal game state, variation pattern Z2 is set as a selectable variation pattern. Variation pattern Z2 is selected when the value of the variation type counter is "99".

Fluctuation pattern Z2 corresponds to the special reach miss B effect, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z2 is sent to the effect control device 143, the effect control device 143 controls the symbol display device 75 to execute the special reach miss B effect. The special reach miss B effect is a so-called false effect that is paired with the special reach miss A effect, and it builds up anticipation for a special miss and then stops and displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination.

In the special reach miss B effect, as shown in Figures 233(a) and (b), after a reach display is executed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed as a slow-moving display including the special pattern 511. In other words, the pattern change effect is executed up to the middle in the same manner as the special reach miss A effect. After that, for example, the special pattern 511 passes over the reach line, and a pattern different from the special pattern 511 in the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line, as shown in Figure 233(d). In other words, while it appears as if the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result is formed, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in such a way that the combination is ultimately not formed.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Figure 229), in step Sc1603, from the various variable display time tables for normal game play, one that corresponds to the result of the current special symbol hit/miss determination (step Sc701) is obtained. Specifically, if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a jackpot result, the variable display time table for jackpots is obtained; if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a special miss result, the variable display time table for special misses is obtained; and if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a normal miss result, the variable display time table for normal misses is obtained.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1602 (not in the normal gaming state), proceed to step Sc1604, where it is determined whether the current gaming state determined in step Sc1601 is a high probability gaming state. If it is in the high probability gaming state, a variable display time table for the high probability gaming state is obtained in step Sc1605.

The variable display time table for the high probability game state will be explained with reference to Figure 231. The variable display time table for the high probability game state includes a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 231(a)) and a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 231(b)).

As shown in Figure 231 (a), the variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to a high probability game state has variable pattern 11A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit and variable pattern 12A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

Also, as shown in Figure 231 (b), the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to high probability game states has variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss set as selectable variable patterns. In the variable display time table for normal misses in high probability game states, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete miss is wider than in the variable display time table for normal misses in normal game states. In other words, reach miss effects are less likely to occur, allowing gameplay to progress more quickly.

In addition, the variable display time for variable pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is shortened earlier than the variable display time table for normal misses in normal gameplay. Specifically, it is configured to be 8 seconds when there is one or fewer reserved items, and 4 seconds when there are two or more reserved items.

In step Sc1605, the variable display time table for the high probability game state is selected from the various variable display time tables for the high probability game state, and the one that corresponds to the result of this special symbol win/loss judgment is obtained. Note that, since the win/loss table for the high probability game state does not have a special loss result set (Figure 212 (b)), the variable display time table for the high probability game state does not have a setting that corresponds to the special loss result set either.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, a variable display time table for the time-saving game state is obtained in step Sc1606.

The variable display time table for the time-saving game mode will be explained with reference to Figure 232. The variable display time table for the time-saving game mode includes a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 232(a)), a variable display time table A for a special miss (Figure 232(b)), a variable display time table B for a special miss (Figure 232(c)), and a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 232(d)).

As shown in Figure 232 (a), the variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to the time-saving game mode has variable pattern 21A (15 seconds) corresponding to a normal reach hit, variable pattern 22A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit, and variable pattern 23A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

The variable display time table A for special misses is used when the result of the current special symbol hit/miss judgment is a special miss, and there is a sudden transition to the time-limited play state, or when the time-limited play state is suddenly placed on hold. A sudden transition to the time-limited play state occurs when a special miss occurs in the normal play state, and the normal play state is suddenly switched to the time-limited play state at the end of the special symbol play round that resulted in the special miss. A sudden time-limited play state is placed on hold occurs when a special miss occurs while in the time-limited play state (normal time-limited play state or sudden time-limited play state), and the transition to the sudden time-limited play state corresponding to that special miss is placed on hold (waiting or stocked). Note that in this embodiment, since the upper limit for reservations is set to 1, a case in which a special miss occurs when there is no reservation falls under the case of a reserved state. However, if the difference in the number of times is less than 1, reservation is avoided, so this does not apply.

As shown in Figure 232 (b), in the variable display time table A for special misses corresponding to the time-saving game state, variable pattern Z1 (15 seconds) corresponding to the special reach miss A effect is set as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation where a sudden transition to the time-saving game state or a reservation occurs, the special reach miss A effect is executed and the fact that a special miss has occurred is announced.

Variable display time table B for special misses is used when the result of this special chart hit/miss judgment is a special miss result and a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is not reserved. A sudden transition to the time-saving play state is not reserved when, while in the time-saving play state (normal time-saving play state or sudden time-saving play state), a special miss result occurs when the number of reserved transitions has reached the maximum reserved number, or when the difference in the number of times is less than 1 even if the maximum reserved number has not been reached.

As shown in Figure 232 (c), in the variable display time table B for special misses corresponding to the time-shortened game state, variable pattern 21H (8 seconds or 4 seconds) corresponding to the complete miss effect and variable pattern Z2 (15 seconds) corresponding to the special reach miss effect are set as selectable variable patterns. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation where a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is not reserved, either a complete miss effect or a special reach miss effect B will be executed, and the fact that a special miss has occurred will not be announced. This makes it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize that they have won the special miss result.

As shown in Figure 232(d), the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to the time-limited game state includes selectable variable patterns: variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 22H (15 seconds) corresponding to a normal reach miss, variable pattern 23H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, variable pattern 24H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss, and variable pattern Z2 (15 seconds) corresponding to a special reach miss B effect. The variable display time table for normal misses in the time-limited game state has a lower rate of complete misses compared to the variable display time table for normal misses in the normal game state. This is to increase the frequency of reach effects, thereby preventing the time-limited game state from ending without a reach effect. Note that the variable display time for variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss is configured to be 8 seconds when the number of reserved items is one or less and 4 seconds when the number of reserved items is two or more, similar to the variable display time table for normal misses in the high-probability game state.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Figure 229), in step Sc1606, the variable display time table for the time-saving game state that corresponds to the situation at that time is obtained from the various tables. Specifically, the result of the current special symbol hit/miss determination and whether or not there is a sudden transition to the time-saving game state or whether it is reserved based on that result are referenced, and the table corresponding to these is obtained.

Note that the fluctuation display time tables shown in Figures 230 to 232 are merely examples, and the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be set arbitrarily.

After step Sc1603, step Sc1605, or step Sc1606 is executed, step Sc1607 uses the fluctuation display time table obtained in each of those steps to execute a lottery process for the fluctuation display time (fluctuation pattern). Specifically, from the group of fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation display time table, one fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Sc1608, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sc1607 above is set as the variable display time for the current special game. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area above as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 216) is started.

In step Sc1609, it is determined whether a special miss type flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss type flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc1610, where the process clears the flag. After step Sc1610 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step Sc1609 (the special miss type flag is not set), the process of setting the variable display time ends.

Next, we will explain the high-frequency support mode termination process in step Sc510 (Fig. 220) and the first transition process to the sudden time-saving game state in step Sc511. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed during a special game round; in other words, they are executed when the final display during a special game round begins.

<Processing for ending high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode termination process in step Sc510 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1701, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any support flags are set, that is, if the game is currently in either the normal time-shortened game state or the sudden time-shortened game state, it proceeds to step Sc1702, where it is determined whether a time-shortened end flag is set. The time-shortened end flag indicates that the current time-shortened game state should be ended; in other words, it indicates that the current special symbol game round is the final special symbol game round in the current time-shortened game state.

If the time-saving end flag is set, proceed to step Sc1703 and clear the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. This ends the current time-saving game state. In other words, in this embodiment, if the current special symbol game round is the final game round in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is configured to end at the start of the confirmation display for that game round.

In step Sc1704, the time-saving end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sc1705, the corresponding time-saving game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. For example, if the normal time-saving game state is ended, the time-saving game state end command corresponding to the end of the normal game state is set.

After step Sc1705 is executed, the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1702 (if the time-saving termination flag is not set), the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sc1703 onwards.

<First transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in step Sc511 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 235.

First, in step Sc1801, it is determined whether a reservation flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If a reservation flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step Sc1802, where it is determined whether a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is set in the transition determination process of step Sc711 at the start of fluctuation (step Sc1403), and indicates that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should be made.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, that is, if the situation dictates a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, proceed to step Sc1803, and the support B flag corresponding to that type is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A, the support B1 flag is set. This causes a transition to sudden time-saving game state A.

In step Sc1804, the corresponding upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 50) is set in the support counter area SC. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state).

In step Sc1805, the sudden time-shortening start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-shortening game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The sudden time-shortening game state start command is used to notify the player of a sudden transition to a time-shortening game state, and this command includes information indicating the type of sudden time-shortening game state to transition to. The sudden time-shortening game state start command set in step Sc1806 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 of normal processing (Figure 219).

After step Sc1806 is executed, the first transition process to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1802 (the sudden time-shortened start flag is not set), the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state is not executed, and the first transition process to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sc1803 onwards.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1801 (if the reservation flag is set), that is, if the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, the second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed in step Sc1807. The second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is a process for implementing a transition from the sudden time-shortened game state that has been set to a reserved state.

<Second transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in step Sc1807 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 236.

First, in step Sc1901, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed when the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, that is, when at least the current game state is a time-shortened game state. Therefore, the processing of step Sc1901 essentially determines whether the current time-shortened game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current time-saving game state has ended, step Sc1902 reads the type information stored in the reserved area 314f of RAM 314. In step Sc1903, the support B flag corresponding to the type information read in step Sc1902 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state indicated by the type information is sudden time-saving game state B, the support B2 flag is set as the corresponding flag.

In step Sc1904, the differential count information stored in the reserved area 314f is read. In step Sc1905, a value corresponding to the differential count information read in step Sc1904 is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 as the current upper limit number (the upper limit number of times to enter the sudden time-saving game state to which the transition will occur). For example, if the differential count indicated by the differential count information is 73, 73 is set in the support counter area SC.

The difference in the number of times is calculated by subtracting the remaining number of times in the current time-shortened game state from the original upper limit of the number of times for the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the type of special failure result at the time of the occurrence of the special failure result that triggered the reservation (100 times for sudden time-shortened game state B). In other words, in this embodiment, during the period when the current time-shortened game state and the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the special failure result that occurred during that time-shortened game state overlap, the current time-shortened game state (the preceding time-shortened game state) is given priority and continues, and after the time-shortened game state ends, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the special failure result that occurred during that time-shortened game state is played.

In step Sc1906, a sudden time-shortened game state start command corresponding to the sudden time-shortened game state for which the reserved state has been released is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. In step Sc1907, the reserved flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and then the second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated. By executing the processes of steps Sc1902 to Sc1907, the reserved state for the reserved sudden time-shortened game state is released, and a transition to that sudden time-shortened game state is executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1901 (if any support flag is set), the reserved state should be continued and the processing for the second transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly terminated without executing the processing from step Sc1902 onwards.

<Regular game play control processing>
The regular game play control processing of step Sc405 (Figure 219) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 237.

First, in step Sc2001, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game using the normal power feature 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special feature opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a special feature opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a special feature opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel device is currently opening and closing, the normal game play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel device is not currently opening and closing, step Sc2002 determines whether a normal game play is being performed in the normal game display unit 44. In this case, a normal game play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal game display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal game display unit 44, and step Sc2002 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

In addition, during special symbol gameplay in the special symbol display unit 43, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress, but during normal symbol gameplay, variable displays are permitted even during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, during normal symbol gameplay, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the device is being opened/closed using the normal electric device 63a, but during special symbol gameplay, variable displays are permitted even during the device is being opened/closed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2002 (a normal game round is not currently being played), the process proceeds to step Sc2003, where it is determined whether the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0." If the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0," the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved normal map memories FN is not "0", step Sc2004 executes a normal map data setting process to set the data stored in the electric utility reserve area Rc for variable display. In the normal map data setting process, the number of reserved normal map memories FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric utility reserve area Rc is moved to the normal map execution area. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the electric utility reserve area Rc, and a normal map shift command is set, which is information that allows the performance control device 143 to recognize that a shift has been made in the data in the reserve area on the normal map side.

In step Sc2005, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the normal map game play control process is terminated. Here, the normal map fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 238 (a).

First, in step Sc2101, a support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table corresponding to the current support mode. Specifically, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (Figure 215(a)); if the current support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode (Figure 215(b)); and if the current support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode (Figure 215(c)).

In step Sc2102, it is determined whether the result of the support lottery in step Sc2101 is a support winning result (a normal winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sc2103, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal winning result. If it is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a normal losing result, the process proceeds to step Sc2104, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal losing result.

After execution of step Sc2103 or step Sc2104, a process for setting the normal map variable display time is executed in step Sc2105. In this setting process, the variable display time for the current normal map game round is set in the normal map display unit 44. In this embodiment, the variable display time that can be set in step Sc2105 is a plurality of variable display times of different lengths depending on the type of support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the longest variable display time (e.g., 100 seconds) is set for the low-frequency support mode, the shortest variable display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set for the second high-frequency support mode, and a variable display time (e.g., 2 seconds) that is shorter than the low-frequency support mode and longer than the second high-frequency support mode is set for the first high-frequency support mode. In step Sc2105, the variable display time corresponding to the current support mode is set as the current variable display time.

In the above configuration, one variable display time is associated with each support mode, but multiple variable display times may be associated with at least one of the support modes. For example, if one time can be selected from multiple variable display times for each of the low-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the first high-frequency support mode, it is preferable that the expected value of the variable display time in each support mode (the sum of the variable display time x the probability of selecting that variable display time) satisfy the above-mentioned long/short relationship.

In step Sc2106, a normal map change start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map change start command includes information on the normal map change pattern (information indicating the normal map pass/fail result and the change display time). The set normal map change start command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (Figure 219).

In step Sc2107, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image in the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal game play control process (Fig. 237), if a positive judgment is made in step Sc2002 (if a normal game play is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sc2006, where it is determined whether the variable display time set in step Sc2105 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sc2007, where the variable display process is executed. In the variable display process, the display of the normal game display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal game display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. The normal game play control process then ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2006 (the variable display time has elapsed), the process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Sc2008, and then the process for controlling the normal map game is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled so that the image is displayed as a stopped image based on the stop result set in step Sc2103 or step Sc2104. At that time, the confirmed display time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In addition, in the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, a normal map variable end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map variable end command includes information about the confirmed display time for this normal map game.

<Electrical support treatment>
The electric support processing of step Sc406 (Figure 219) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 239 (a).

First, in step Sc2201, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the special feature opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel opening/closing game is not in progress, proceed to step Sc2202 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric reel support processing ends.

If it is the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Sc2203 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support win. If it is not a support win, the electric role support processing ends.

If the support win is determined, in step Sc2204, the number of openings corresponding to the type of support mode is set in the opening count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, as shown in FIG. 239(b), if the current support mode is low frequency support mode, 1 is set, and if the current support mode is first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode, 2 is set.

In step Sc2205, a special device opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In the following step Sc2206, an external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric device support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special device opening signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the open signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2201 (if the reel opening/closing game is in progress), reel opening/closing processing is executed in step Sc2207. The reel opening/closing processing will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 240.

First, in step Sc2301, it is determined whether the normal power device 63a is currently open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power device 63a is not currently open, it is determined in step Sc2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," proceed to step Sc2303, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T2 in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between openings of the normal electric device 63a has elapsed when the device is opened multiple times during a device opening/closing game.

If the value of timer area T2 is "0," step Sc2304 sets the upper limit opening time corresponding to the current support mode in timer area T2. For example, as shown in FIG. 239(b), if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the shortest opening time (e.g., 0.1 sec) is set; if the current support mode is first high-frequency support mode, the longest opening time (e.g., 2 sec) is set; and if the current support mode is second high-frequency support mode, the intermediate opening time (e.g., 1 sec) is set. Note that the value set in step Sc2304 corresponds to the upper limit opening time per opening in a reel opening/closing game.

In step Sc2305, the winning counter area PC2 in the various counter area 344b is set to "6." This value corresponds to the maximum number of winnings (6) that can be won by the normal electric device 63a (second operating port 63) in the device opening and closing game.

In step Sc2306, the drive unit 63b is driven to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Sc2307, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 of the normal processing (Figure 219). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Sc2307 is executed, the reel opening/closing process ends. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sc2302 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Sc2303 (the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process ends without executing the processing from step Sc2304 onwards.

If step Sc2301 returns a positive result (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sc2308, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit for the open time of the normal power device 63a set in step Sc2304 has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T2 is not "0", i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has not elapsed, step Sc2309 determines whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, step Sc2310 subtracts 1 from the value in the win counter area PC2. Step Sc2311 determines whether the value in the win counter area PC2 is "0", i.e., whether the number of wins into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of wins.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2309 (if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends immediately to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2308 (if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0"), the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state in step Sc2312 to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Sc2313, a reel close command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 of normal processing (Figure 219). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state.

In step Sc2314, the process of updating the opening count counter area RC2 is executed. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Sc2315, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", the reel opening/closing process is terminated. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power reel 63a, in step Sc2316, an interval time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) is set in the timer area T2, and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The value set in step Sc2316 corresponds to the waiting time for the normal power reel 63a to be closed and await the next opening.

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support processing (Fig. 239(a)), after executing the reel opening/closing processing in step Sc2207, step Sc2208 determines whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", the electric role support processing ends. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", that is, if the reel opening/closing game has ended, step Sc2208 clears the reel opening/closing flag set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the electric role support processing ends.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and display control device 350 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of Figure 241.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 contains a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 343 are executed, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control unit 162, it receives various commands, such as game play control commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, as well as opening and closing execution mode commands such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. Based on the detection information, the MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 equipped with an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 374 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 372. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device that serves as the LCD driver built into the pattern display device 75. Because VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its true nature is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 adjusts the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and so on.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc., separately. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 242. The effect setting process is initiated by the MPU 342 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sc2501, it is determined whether an ending command (step Sc1018) has been received from the main control unit 162. The ending command is sent when an ending is to be initiated in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the result of the win/loss determination for the special game round is a jackpot.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands in order from the previously stored command. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly.

When making the judgment in step Sc2501, it is determined whether an ending command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If an ending command is stored (if an ending command has been received), in step Sc2502, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state. Details of the first transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sc2502 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2501 (if the ending command has not been received), step Sc2503 executes special pattern change display processing to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display processing will be described later.

In step Sc2504, it is determined whether a sudden time-shortened game state start command (step Sc1806, step Sc1906) has been received from the main control unit 162. The sudden time-shortened game state start command notifies the presentation control unit 143 of the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state, and is transmitted at the timing of the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state. Note that in this embodiment, the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round in which the special miss result was achieved, and therefore the sudden time-shortened game state start command is transmitted at that start timing.

If a sudden time-saving game state start command has been received, step Sc2505 executes a second transition effect setting process to set a transition effect corresponding to the sudden transition to the time-saving game state. Details of the second transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sc2505 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2504 (if the command to suddenly enter the time-shortened game state has not been received), step Sc2506 determines whether a reservation command (step Sc1507) has been received from the main control unit 162. The reservation command notifies the presentation control unit 143 that a special miss has occurred in a special game turn during the time-shortened game state, and that the transition to the time-shortened game state has been suddenly reserved, and is sent when such a reservation occurs.

If a reservation command has been received, step Sc2507 executes the reservation effect setting process. The reservation effect setting process sets the reservation effect to be executed as an effect in the event that a time-saving game state is suddenly reserved. Details of the reservation effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sc2507 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2506 (a reserved command has not been received), step Sc2508 determines whether any game state end command has been received. Specifically, it determines whether either a high-probability game state end command or a time-saving game state end command (step Sc1705) has been received.

If any of these commands has been received, step Sc2509 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state or each time-limited game state. Details of the end effect setting process will be described later.

In step Sc2510, other processing is performed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Other processing includes displaying a demo screen if a starting winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time, and switching to a power-saving mode that stops video display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption.

<First transition effect setting process>
The first transition effect setting process of step Sc2502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 243. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the timing at which the ending of the opening/closing execution mode starts.

First, in step Sc2601, it is determined whether a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control unit 162.

If a transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state does not occur, the first transition effect setting process is terminated. Note that, as in this embodiment, if there are only jackpot types that always result in a transition to either the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is possible to omit the processing of step Sc2601.

If a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state occurs, a start effect corresponding to each game state is set in step Sc2602. Specifically, if a transition to a high probability game state occurs, a start effect for the high probability game state is set as the start effect, and if a transition to a normal time-limited game state occurs, a start effect for the normal time-limited game state is set as the start effect.

In the start presentation for the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 244(a), a title image 521 corresponding to the high probability game state, such as "Lucky Time," is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In addition, in the start presentation for the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 244(b), a title image 522 corresponding to the normal time-saving game state, such as "Chance Time," and a remaining number of times image 523 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 523 notifies the player of the remaining number of special symbol game times that the player can remain in the normal time-saving game state.

Note that Figure 244 (c) shows the time-saving effects that are executed while in the normal time-saving game state. The time-saving effects are performed after the start effect in Figure 244 (b) ends and until the normal time-saving game state ends. This time-saving effect is configured to be distinguishable from the normal time effects, for example, by having a different background image, etc., from the normal time effects during the normal game state.

In step Sc2602, the various start effects described above are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, these start effects may be configured to be displayed throughout the entire ending period, or for only part of the ending period.

In step Sc2603, it is determined whether the current transition is to the normal time-saving game state. If a positive determination is made in step Sc2603, in step Sc2604, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the remaining number of times counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344. The remaining number of times counter area is used by MPU 342 to grasp the remaining number of special game times that can be played while in the normal time-saving game state, and is decremented by one each time a special game time is played in each of these game states.

In this embodiment, the presentation control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times for each game state separately from the main control device 162, but the presentation control device 143 may also be configured to know the remaining number of times for each game state based on the update results from the main control device 162. For example, the main control device 162 may notify the presentation control device 143 of the update results of the support counter area SC (step Sc1303) by sending a specified command, and the presentation control device 143 may analyze the command and know the results of each update. In this case, the specified command may be created by including information on the results of each update in an existing command such as the fluctuation start command (step Sc714), or the specified command may be configured using a dedicated command for notifying the results of each update.

In step Sc2605, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 is set to begin. In this case, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to begin during each start effect (effect performed using the ending period) set in step Sc2602, or the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to begin after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sc2606, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the first transition effect setting process is terminated. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the remaining number of times image 523 is being displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2603, i.e., if the current transition is to a high probability game state, the remaining number of times image 523 is not displayed, and the first transition effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sc2604 onwards.

<Special chart change display processing>
The processing for displaying special chart changes in step Sc2503 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 245.

First, in step Sc2701, it is determined whether a special symbol game round is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a first special symbol game round or a second special symbol game round is currently being played. If neither game round is currently being played, the process proceeds to step Sc2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information about the fluctuation pattern selected by lottery during the fluctuation display time setting process in the main control unit 162. By referencing this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to determine at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Furthermore, as already explained, because fluctuation patterns for jackpots and losses are set separately, the result of the win/loss judgment can also be determined from the fluctuation pattern.

If a change start command has not been received, the special chart change display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a change start command has been received, the processing proceeds to step Sc2703, where change start processing is executed to start the performance for the game round.

The fluctuation start process analyzes the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 and identifies the fluctuation pattern for the current special game. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game is determined based on the identified fluctuation pattern. The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern.

The variable display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the variable display time corresponding to each variation pattern (Figs. 230 to 232) in the main control device 162, and a common variable display time is assigned to one variation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variable display time is 15 seconds in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start process, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is taken as the variable display time for the current special game.

The presentation pattern table also associates presentation patterns for each game round presentation with each variation pattern. These presentation patterns are the normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, SPSP reach miss, special reach miss A presentation, and special reach miss B presentation, which were mentioned in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between variation patterns and presentation patterns has already been explained with reference to Figures 230 to 232, so explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the variable start process, if the result of the win/loss determination for the current special symbol game round is a jackpot, the jackpot type is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a probability jackpot, the stop result for the probability jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are determined randomly by lottery, etc.

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game turn is a normal miss result, the stopping symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be determined randomly. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols will be determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result for this turn will be the one that results in a combination of miss reach symbols on at least one active line L1 to L5.

Also, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game turn is a special miss result, the stopping symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery, and the stopping symbols are also determined so that the special symbol 511 is displayed stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 on the reach line. In other words, the stopping result for this time is set to be the stopping result where a symbol combination for a special miss result is formed on at least one active line L1 to L5.

In the variation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command containing information on the current stopped symbol and presentation pattern is set as the output target to the display control device 350. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 so that the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 stop according to the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or so that a game-round presentation is performed according to the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

After executing step Sc2703, processing to update the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sc2704, and then the processing for displaying the special pattern change is terminated. In the processing to update the remaining number of times display, it is determined whether the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and if the remaining number of times display flag is set (if the remaining number of times image 523 is being displayed), the value of the remaining number of times counter area is updated by subtracting 1. Furthermore, the display content of the remaining number of times image 523 is updated by referring to the update result of the remaining number of times counter area. As a result, the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 523 is subtracted by 1.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2701 (if a special symbol game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sc2705, where it is determined whether a change end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time for this special symbol game round has not yet elapsed. In this case, step Sc2706 executes a change in progress process. The change in progress process executes processes to continue the change display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2705 (if a variation end command has been received), variation end processing is executed in step Sc2707, and then the special pattern variation display processing is terminated. The variation end processing terminates the variation display of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 and the currently running effects. Additionally, step Sc2707 controls the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 to be fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

<Second transition effect setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sc2505 (FIG. 242) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 246(a). This process is executed when a sudden time-shortened gaming state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when a time-shortened gaming state is suddenly started.

First, in step Sc2801, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set. In the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 246(b), a title image 525 corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state, such as "Sudden Chance Time," and a remaining number of times image 523 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 523 notifies the player of the remaining number of special game times that the player can remain in the sudden time-saving game state.

In this step, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set so that it is executed at the fixed display time in the special game round. In this case, the entire start effect may be executed at the fixed display time, or only part of the start effect may be executed at the fixed display time. Note that if part of the start effect is executed within the fixed display time, the start effect will be executed across the fixed display time and the next special game round.

In step Sc2802, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM344. Specifically, if the type of sudden time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is third time-shortened game state A, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 50 times) is set; if it is third time-shortened game state B, a value corresponding to the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set; and if it is third time-shortened game state C, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (200 times) is set.

In step Sc2803, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 is set to begin. In this case, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to begin during the start effect set in step Sc2801, or the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to begin after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sc2804, the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Reservation performance setting process>
The process for setting the reserved effect in step Sc2506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 247(a). This process is executed when a reservation command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when the transition to the time-saving gaming state is suddenly reserved.

First, in step Sc2901, the reserved command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the differential number of times derived by the reserved processing (Figure 228) of the main control unit 162 is determined. When a special miss occurs during the time-shortened game state, the differential number of times is calculated by subtracting the remaining number of times in the current time-shortened game state from the original upper limit number of times in the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to that special miss result. In other words, the differential number of times corresponds to the number remaining after the current time-shortened game state ends, assuming that the sudden time-shortened game state started at the time of the special miss result.

In step Sc2902, the display mode of the reserved image is selected by lottery. The reserved image notifies the player that the transition to the time-shortened game state has been suddenly reserved, and from the player's perspective, this signifies that the time-shortened game state has been stockpiled and will continue even after the current time-shortened game state ends (in other words, after the number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 523 reaches 0).

The reserved image is displayed in a specified area on the display screen G (for example, the lower right) so that it can be viewed by the player, and is configured to suggest or notify the player of the difference in the number of plays (the number of plays remaining when the stocked time-saving game state is activated) depending on its display mode. The display mode of the reserved image is set to a normal display mode when the difference in the number of plays is not suggested, and a specific display mode when the difference in the number of plays is suggested, and furthermore, multiple types of display modes are set for the specific display mode.

In this embodiment, the display color (hue) of the reservation image is intended to indicate the number of difference times. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 247(b), three types of display modes are set: a normal display mode SMw in which the main display color is a normal color (e.g., white); a blue display mode SMb in which the main display color is blue; a green display mode SMg in which the main display color is green; and a red display mode SMr in which the main display color is red.

Specific display modes suggest that the number of differences is greatest in the order of blue display mode SMb < green display mode SMg < red display mode SMr. In Figure 247 (b), different hatching is used to match the different display colors. Note that the number of differences can also be suggested using modes other than display color; for example, the type, shape, display size, etc. of the reserved image can be used.

The reserved image is displayed in a different manner (e.g., shape or size) from the reserved image to avoid confusion with the reserved image indicating the reserved number of special game plays. For example, if the reserved image is a spherical image, the reserved image can be displayed as a heart-shaped image.

In step Sc2902, a lottery is performed to determine whether the reservation image corresponding to this reservation will be displayed in a specific display mode, and if it will be displayed in a specific display mode, a lottery is performed to determine the type of display mode. Specifically, a lottery is performed to determine whether the image will be displayed in the normal display mode or the specific display mode using a display mode lottery table obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343 and lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. Furthermore, if the lottery results in display in a specific display mode, a lottery is performed to determine whether the image will be displayed in the blue display mode SMb, green display mode SMg, or red display mode SMr using the difference number determined in step Sc2901, the type table obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343, and lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In the type lottery table, the relationship between the number of differences and the numerical range of each display color is set so that, for example, when the number of differences is 50 or less, the blue display mode SMb is most likely to be selected, when the number of differences is more than 50 but less than 100, the green display mode SMg is most likely to be selected, and when the number of differences is more than 100, the red display mode SMr is most likely to be selected.

In step Sc2903, setting processing is performed to execute the reserved effect, and then the reserved effect setting processing is terminated. The reserved effect is executed in the special symbol game round that triggered the sudden reservation of the transition to the time-saving game state (a game round that resulted in a special miss result during the time-saving game state). Specifically, as shown in Figure 248(a), after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state with the symbol combination that results in a special miss result, as shown in Figure 248(b), a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserved image 528 are displayed on the display screen G. This notifies the player that the time-saving game state has been suddenly reserved (stocked).

After the above display is made, from the next special symbol play, a second reserved image 529, smaller than the first reserved image 528, is displayed in the corner of the display screen G, indicating that the symbol is in a reserved state (Fig. 248 (c)). The second reserved image 529 is displayed so as not to overlap with the rows of symbols Z1 to Z3 that are displayed in a variable or static manner on the display screen G, and will continue to be displayed until the current time-saving play state ends.

In step Sc2903, setting processing is performed so that the character image 527, the first reservation image 528, and the second reservation image 529 are displayed at the above-mentioned times, and processing is also performed to set the display colors of the first reservation image 528 and the second reservation image 529. At this time, settings are made so that each reservation image 528, 529 is displayed in the display mode selected in step Sc2902.

Note that when displaying in a specific display mode, it is not limited to displaying in a display mode selected from the beginning as described above, but may be configured so that after the first reserved image 528 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode during the display period of the second reserved image 529. Also, it may be configured so that initially the image is displayed in a lower-level specific display mode (for example, blue display mode SMb), and then the display mode is changed to a higher-level specific display mode (for example, green display mode SMg).

In these configurations, the final display mode of the reserved image may be selected by lottery in step Sc2902. For example, if the green display mode SMg is selected as the final display mode, a selection is made as to whether the first reserved image 528 will be displayed in the normal display mode, the blue display mode SMb, or the green display mode SMg. If it is decided that the first reserved image 528 will be displayed in the normal display mode or the blue display mode SMb, a selection is made as to when the second reserved image 529 will be promoted to a higher display mode. Such selections and decisions can be made using a scenario lottery table for selecting the performance scenario.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end effect setting process of step Sc2509 will be described with reference to Fig. 249(a). This process is executed when an end command for each of the high probability game state, normal time-limited game state, and sudden time-limited game state is received, in other words, when each of these game states ends.

In step Sc3101, it is determined whether the sudden time-saving game state is on hold. If it is not on hold, in step Sc3102, an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set. For example, if the normal time-saving game state has ended, the end effect for the normal time-saving game state is set to be executed.

In step Sc3103, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared (initialized). At this time, if the value of the remaining number counter is already 0 (initial value), it is left in that state.

In step Sc3104, the remaining number of times image 523 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is erased. In the following step Sc3105, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc3101 (stocks are being reserved), the execution of the release effect is set in step Sc3106, and then the end effect setting process is terminated. The release effect notifies the user that the reserved transition to the time-saving game state will be suddenly initiated, and is performed, for example, by displaying a text display 531 such as "Stock release!!" as shown in Figure 249 (b).

When setting up the execution of the release effect, the processing of step Sc3102 is not executed. In other words, the processing is performed so that the effect to end the time-shortened game state is not executed. Therefore, if the time-shortened game state currently in progress ends while the transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly suspended, the release effect is executed in the final play of the time-shortened game state currently in progress, and then the effect to start the time-shortened game state is executed in that final play or the next special play.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figure 250. Here, an example is shown in which a transition to a normal time-saving game state of the first upper limit number of times (for example, 50 times) is triggered by a 4R normal jackpot result A, and a special miss occurs before the time-saving game state ends.

For example, if special miss result B occurs on the 29th special symbol play (timing t1) in the above-mentioned normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (21 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) for the sudden time-saving play state B corresponding to special miss result B, and it is determined whether the result is 1 or greater. In this example, the subtraction result is 1 or greater, and in such a case, while the current normal time-saving play state continues (Fig. 250(a)), a reservation flag is set (Fig. 250(c)), and the transition to the sudden time-saving play state B that was won during the process is reserved.

In this case, in the special symbol game round that results in a special miss, a special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen G), and it is announced that a special miss has occurred (Fig. 250 (e)). Furthermore, after the special reach miss A effect ends, in the same game round, a reserve effect is executed in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed (Fig. 250 (f)). The execution of the reserve effect announces that a time-saving game state has been reserved (stocked). In these cases, the stop result corresponding to the special miss result is displayed in the special symbol display unit 43.

After the above, the second reserved image 529 will be displayed from the next special game, indicating that the time-saving game state is on hold (Fig. 250 (g)). When the first reserved image 528 and the second reserved image 529 are displayed, a lottery is held to determine whether or not each of the reserved images 528, 529 will be displayed in a specific display mode, and if they are to be displayed in a specific display mode, the above subtraction result (differential number of times) is referenced to determine the type of display mode.

If, for example, a special miss occurs again during the 40th special game (timing t2) in the normal time-saving game state, the number of reserved symbols in the time-saving game state will have reached the upper limit, and the time-saving game state will not be reserved. In other words, the transition to the time-saving game state corresponding to the re-winning special miss will be invalidated.

In this case, in the special symbol game where the player wins again on the special miss result, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect. In other words, the result will be announced as if it were a normal miss, and the player will be unable or unable to recognize that they have won on the special miss result. However, the special symbol display unit 43 will display the stop result corresponding to the special miss result. Figure 250 (h) shows the case where a complete miss effect is executed.

After that, on the 50th special symbol game, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display begins (timing t3), the normal time-saving game state that the player was in ends. As a result, the reserved state of sudden time-saving game state B is released, and a transition to that time-saving game state is made (Fig. 250 (a), (d)). At this time, the remaining number of times in sudden time-saving game state B before the transition is made is the difference number of times (79 times) corresponding to the result of the above subtraction.

In the above case, on the 50th special symbol play round (the final play round of the normal time-saving play state in which the player was staying), a release effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, followed by a sudden start effect of the time-saving play state (Fig. 250 (i), (j)). This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated. The release effect and start effect are executed using the confirmed display time of the final play round. Note that at least one of these effects may be executed after the start of the next special symbol play round (the first play round of the sudden time-saving play state).

After the sudden transition to time-saving game state B, if the result of the special symbol lottery on the 79th special symbol game turn is a normal miss, and the timing at which the confirmation display begins (timing t4) arrives, time-saving game state B suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a time-saving game state ending effect.

Incidentally, if a special miss occurs after the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B before the time-saving game state ends, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss will be reserved (stocked) again. At this time, just as in the case of timing t1 above, the special reach miss A effect or a reserved effect will be executed on the symbol display device 75, and it will be announced that a special miss has occurred.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a special miss occurs, the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, and then, when the execution conditions are met, the transition to the reserved sudden time-shortened game state is implemented. With this configuration, not only will the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occur immediately upon winning the special miss result, but there will also be cases where the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs after a delay following winning the special miss result. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs, but also whether or not the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved (stocked), thereby making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

If a special miss occurs while in the time-saving game state, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss is reserved. This configuration makes it possible to obtain multiple time-saving game states, adding to the fun of challenging yourself to obtain even more time-saving game states, greatly increasing the player's interest.

The maximum number of times a player can enter the time-shortened game state via a reserved state is set to be lower than the maximum number of times a player can enter the time-shortened game state without going through a reserved state. As mentioned above, the ability to enter the time-shortened game state multiple times is expected to increase interest, but on the other hand, the time-shortened game state tends to take up a larger portion of the game's time, which tends to give the player an advantage. In this regard, for reserved time-shortened game states, i.e., the second time-shortened game state that is acquired, the maximum number of times a player can enter the time-shortened game state is set low, preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage and achieving a balance.

In this case, the upper limit of the number of times for the time-shortened game state (reserved time-shortened game state) to which the player enters via the reserved state is set to the difference in the number of times obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times for the time-shortened game state when the special miss result occurs from the original upper limit of the number of times for that time-shortened game state (the upper limit of the number of times when the reserved state is not entered). In this case, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage, but it is also possible to demonstrate the characteristic that the upper limit of the reserved time-shortened game state can be varied depending on the timing of the special miss result. In other words, even for the same type of special miss result, the later the timing of the win, the higher the upper limit of the reserved time-shortened game state (the difference in the number of times). Therefore, players can enjoy not only whether or not a reservation occurs, but also the timing of its occurrence, further enhancing the game's enjoyment.

If a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state, a special reach miss A effect is executed to notify the player that a special miss has occurred, and a reserved image 529 is also displayed, allowing the player to clearly recognize that a time-saving game state has suddenly been reserved. In this case, the appearance of the reserved image 529 is set based on the difference in the number of times, and the difference in the number of times can be suggested by the appearance of the reserved image 529. This allows the player to refer to the reserved image 529 to guess the degree of advantage of the reserved time-saving mode.

The maximum number of reserved sudden time-saving game states is set to one. For example, if the number of reserved states becomes too large, management and control become more complicated, raising concerns about increased processing load. In this regard, this configuration limits the number of reserved time-saving game states to one, thereby suppressing the increase in processing load. Furthermore, to temporarily reserve a time-saving game state and then transition from that state, information about the target time-saving game state at the time of reservation (such as information indicating the type and maximum number of times) is stored, and this information is used at the time of transition. Therefore, it is necessary to secure storage space for this purpose. However, this configuration also reduces the amount of space required to store information about the reserved specific game state. Furthermore, by setting the maximum number of reserved states to a number less than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states (e.g., three), it is not possible to reserve all sudden time-saving game states at the same time; instead, only a limited number are reserved. This allows players to enjoy deciding which sudden time-saving game state will be reserved, increasing the game's interest.

If a special miss occurs when the number of reserved balls in the time-saving game mode has reached the upper limit, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect will be executed, and the player will not be notified that a special miss has occurred. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a special miss has occurred, and prevents the player from feeling annoyed that no reserved balls have been generated despite a special miss.

<Modification 1>
A first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 251 to 255. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs while a sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss is not subject to reservation. However, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs while a sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss is subject to reservation. Note that in this modified example, the upper limit for reservation is 1, just like in the third embodiment described above, and only one time-saving game state can be reserved. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 251. This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered in Fig. 227(a). In Fig. 251, the same process as in Fig. 227(a) is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If no support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is a normal game state, in step Sc1403, a flag for starting a sudden time-saving mode is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1402 (if any support flag is set), that is, if the current game state is a normal time-saving game state or a sudden time-saving game state, proceed to step Sc1404, where it is determined whether a reservation flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the reservation flag is not set, that is, if the time-saving game state is not reserved, reservation processing is executed in step Sc1405. The reservation processing is intended to reserve the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1404 (if the reservation flag is set), step Sc1406 determines whether the number of reserved balls in the time-saving game state has reached the reservation upper limit. In this embodiment, the reservation upper limit is set to 1. If the number of reserved balls has not reached the reservation upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1405 and reservation processing is executed.

If the number of reserved transitions has reached the upper reserved limit, the reserved transition update process is executed in step Sc3301. The reserved transition update process compares the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result with the reserved sudden time-saving game state, and determines which state to reserve. After step Sc3301 is executed, the sudden time-saving game state transition determination process ends.

<Reserved renewal processing>
The reserved update processing in step Sc3301 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc3401, the remaining number of times in the current time-saving game state is determined. This process is performed by referencing the value in the support counter area SC. In step Sc3402, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of special miss result is determined. For example, if the special miss result this time is special miss result A, the third upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state A (e.g., 50 times) is determined as the upper limit number.

In step Sc3403, the difference in the number of times between the remaining number determined in step Sc3401 and the upper limit number determined in step Sc3402 is calculated. Specifically, the remaining number determined in step Sc3401 is subtracted from the upper limit number determined in step Sc3402.

In step Sc3404, it is determined whether the differential number of times (subtraction result) calculated in step Sc3403 is 1 or greater. In other words, it is determined whether the upper limit number of times determined in step Sc3402 is greater than the remaining number of times determined in step Sc3401. If the differential number of times is 1 or greater (if the upper limit number of times is greater than the remaining number of times), proceed to step Sc3405, where the current differential number of times is compared with the differential number of times for the reserved sudden time-shortening game state (reserved time-shortening). Specifically, the differential number of times for the reserved time-shortening stored in the reserved area 314f of RAM 314 is read, and it is determined whether the current differential number derived in step Sc3403 is greater than the read differential number.

If step Sc3405 makes a positive judgment (the current differential count is greater), proceed to step Sc3406, where the type information and differential count information in the reserved area 314f are updated. Specifically, in the reserved area 314f, where the reserved time-saving type information and differential count information are stored, the type information corresponding to the current special miss result and the differential count information corresponding to the current differential count are overwritten. As a result, the previous reserved state is canceled (suspended), and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is made the new reserved state.

When the reserved time-saving mode is changed in this way, the variable display time setting process in step Sc712 (Fig. 222) references the variable display time table A for special misses (Fig. 232 (b)) to draw the variable display time (variation pattern). In other words, if a special miss occurs while a sudden time-saving game state is reserved, causing another sudden time-saving game state to be reserved, a special reach miss A effect is executed in that special game play, and it is announced that a special miss has occurred.

In step Sc3407, a reserved update command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the reserved update processing is terminated. The reserved update command is used to notify that the reserved sudden time-saving game state has been changed, and the command includes information indicating the type of the newly reserved sudden time-saving game state and the difference in the number of times.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc3404 (if the number of differences is less than 1), the reserved update process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sc3405 onwards.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc3405 (if the current difference count is less than or equal to the difference count for the reserved time reduction), the reserved time reduction will not be changed (updated), and the reserved time reduction update process will end without executing the processes from step Sc3406 onwards. If the reserved time reduction will not be changed, the variable display time setting process in step Sc712 will draw a lottery for the variable display time (variation pattern) by referring to variable display time table B for special misses (Figure 232 (c)). In other words, if the reserved sudden time reduction play state continues to be reserved even after a special miss result, a complete miss effect or special reach miss B effect will be executed in that special play round, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred will not be announced.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 253(a). This process is started by the effect control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the effect setting process in Figure 242. In Figure 253(a), the same steps as in Figure 242 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sc2506, it is determined whether a reservation command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a reservation command has been received, in step Sc2507, a reservation effect setting process is executed. In the reservation effect setting process, a reservation effect is set to be executed as an effect in the event that a time-saving game state is suddenly reserved.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2506 (if a reserve command has not been received) or after execution of step Sc2507, step Sc3501 determines whether a reserve update command has been received from the main control device 162. If a reserve update command has been received, i.e., if the reserved time-saving game state has suddenly changed, the process proceeds to step Sc3502, where the reserve image update process is executed. The reserve image update process is a process for updating the display mode of the reserve image 529 (Figure 248 (c)) displayed on the pattern display device 75 (display screen G).

Here, the reservation image update process in step Sc3502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 253 (b).

In this update process, first in step Sc3601, the difference in the number of times after the update, i.e., the difference in the number of reserved time reductions after the change, is determined. This process is performed by analyzing the received reservation update command.

In step Sc3602, the display mode of the reserved image is determined by lottery, taking into account the difference count determined in step Sc3601. This process is similar to the lottery process in step Sc2902 already explained, and involves a lottery to determine whether or not the reserved image corresponding to this reservation will be displayed in a specific display mode, and if it will be displayed in a specific display mode, a lottery to determine the type of display mode is held.

In step Sc3603, it is determined whether the display mode selected in step Sc3602 is a higher-level display mode than the current display mode (the display mode of the reservation image executed in response to the reservation time reduction before the change). For example, if the current display mode is the blue display mode SMb and the display mode selected in step Sc3602 is the green display mode SMg, this step is determined to be a higher-level display mode and a positive judgment is made.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc3603, proceed to step Sc3604 and execute a setting process to change the display mode of the displayed reserved image 529. In this step, the display mode of the reserved image 529 is set to be changed to the display mode selected in step Sc3602. The display mode is changed in the special game round that resulted in a special miss (the game round in which the above-mentioned display mode was selected), and as a result, the display mode of the reserved image 529 is upgraded, suggesting or notifying the difference in the number of reserved time-saving times after the change.

The change in display mode may not only occur in the special symbol game where a special miss occurs, but may also occur in the next special symbol game, or in a subsequent special symbol game. It may also be performed in stages over multiple times.

After step Sc3604 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc3603 (if the display mode is not higher), the reservation image update process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (Figure 253 (a)), after step Sc3502 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc3501 (a reserved update command has not been received), step Sc2508 determines whether any game state termination command has been received.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figure 254. Here, we will explain the case where a special miss occurs in the normal time-saving game state as a result A, and then a special miss occurs in the same normal time-saving game state as a result B.

For example, if special miss result A occurs on the 29th special play (timing t1) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (21 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 50 times) for the sudden time-saving play state A corresponding to special miss result A, and the difference number A (29 times) is derived. In addition, a reservation flag is set, and the sudden time-saving play state A is placed on hold (Fig. 254 (b), (c)).

In this case, during the special symbol game that results in a special miss, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss has occurred. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays a stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

Furthermore, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is reserved.

After that, for example, if special miss result B occurs on the 40th special symbol play (timing t2) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (10 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) for the sudden time-saving play state B corresponding to special miss result B, and the difference number B (90 times) is derived. The derived difference number B for this time is then compared with the difference number A corresponding to the reserved sudden time-saving play state A.

As a result, because differential number B is greater than differential number A, it is determined that the reserved time-shortened play state should be suddenly switched from time-shortened play state A to time-shortened play state B. Based on this determination, the type information and differential number information stored in the reserved area 314f of RAM 314 are updated from values corresponding to sudden time-shortened play state A to values corresponding to sudden time-shortened play state B.

By updating the reserved time reduction in this way, the number of remaining times for the sudden time-saving game state, which is implemented after the normal time-saving game state ends, increases. In this modified example, the normal game times and the opening and closing game modes of the device are the same in sudden time-saving game state A and sudden time-saving game state B, so the increase in the remaining number of times extends the state in which a winning entry into the second operating port 63 is likely to occur, which is advantageous for the player.

In a special symbol game round in which special miss result B is achieved, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has been achieved. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to special miss result B. Note that the text image 527 and the first reserved image 528 are not displayed to avoid the misunderstanding that the reserved number for the time-saving game state has been added.

In addition, during the special game play, a lottery is held to determine the display mode of the currently displayed second reserved image 529, taking into account the differential number of times B. As a result, if a display mode superior to the current display mode is selected, the display mode of the second reserved image 529 will be upgraded in the next special game play.

As shown in Figure 255(a), taking the example of a situation where the reserved image 529 is displayed in blue display mode SMb and a special miss result B occurs, and the green display mode SMg is selected in the lottery for the display mode, first, in the special symbol play round that results in special miss result B, the symbol array Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a stopped state in the combination that results in the special miss result, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is announced (Figure 255(b)). Then, using at least a portion of the confirmed display time for that special symbol play round, the display mode of the reserved image 529 is changed from blue display mode SMb to green display mode SMg (Figure 255(c)). This suggests or announces that the number of remaining plays after the transition to the reserved sudden time-saving play state has increased.

The change in display mode may be made using the remaining variable display time, or may be made across the variable display time and fixed display time. It may also be made in the next special game, or in a later special game.

After that, on the 50th special symbol game, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display begins (timing t3), the normal time-saving game state that was in effect ends, the reserved state is released, and a transition to sudden time-saving game state B is made (Fig. 254 (a), (e)). At this time, the remaining number of times in sudden time-saving game state B becomes the differential number of times B (90 times) updated at timing t2 above.

In the above case, on the 50th special symbol play (the final play in the normal time-saving play state), the symbol display device 75 executes a release effect (Fig. 249 (b)), and then suddenly executes an effect to start the time-saving play state. This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated.

After the sudden transition to time-saving game state B, if the result of the special symbol lottery on the 90th special symbol game is a normal miss, and the timing at which the confirmation display begins (timing t4) arrives, time-saving game state B suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a time-saving game state ending effect.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If a special miss occurs when the number of reserved time-saving game states has reached the upper limit, the reserved time-saving game state is updated. In other words, a time-saving game state corresponding to a win on a special miss result is reserved in place of the reserved time-saving game state, so a win on a special miss result after the upper limit has been reached can be reflected in the type of reserved time-saving game state. This allows players to play in the hope of a special miss result even after the reserved number has reached the upper limit, making it possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for a long time.

When the reserved number of times in the time-saving play state reaches the upper limit and a special miss occurs, a determination is made as to whether to update the reserved time-saving play state, and the update is then carried out. Depending on the combination of the reserved time-saving play state and the time-saving play state corresponding to the special miss result won after the upper limit is reached, there is a concern that changing (updating) the reserved time-saving play state may actually put the player at a disadvantage. In this regard, the system is configured to determine whether to execute an update by referring to the above combination, so unnecessary changes are not made and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be prevented. In particular, an update is determined to be performed if the difference in the number of times in the time-saving play state corresponding to the special miss result won during the game is greater than the difference in the number of times in the reserved time-saving play state, making it possible to update the reserved time-saving play state when the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state increases.

When the reserved time reduction is updated, the appearance of the reserved image 529 is changed based on the difference in the number of times after the update. In other words, the difference in the number of times after the update is suggested by the changed appearance of the reserved image 529, which adds to the fun of guessing whether the reserved time reduction will be upgraded (such as a change in the reserved time reduction or an increase in the number of remaining times) from the change in the image 529.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 256 to 259. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment and modification 1 are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned variant 1, if a special miss occurs while the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, the reserved time-shortened state is updated taking into account the differential number of times. However, in this variant, a priority is set for each type of sudden time-shortened game state, and if a special miss occurs while the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, the reserved time-shortened state is updated taking into account that priority. Note that in this variant, the reserved upper limit value is 1, just like in the third embodiment, and only one time-shortened game state can be reserved. The configuration of this variant is explained in detail below.

<About sudden time-saving gameplay>
The sudden time-shortening game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 256 and 257. In this modified example, as shown in Figure 256(a), the sudden time-shortening game states A to C are configured so that the expected value of winning the second operating port 63 differs. Specifically, the expected value of winning increases in the order of sudden time-shortening game state C < sudden time-shortening game state B < sudden time-shortening game state A. The configuration for achieving such a relationship between the expected values of winning is not particularly limited, but for example, the normal game times and the opening and closing game of the role device in each sudden time-shortening game state can be realized by configuring them as shown in Figure 257.

As shown in Figure 257(a), the variable display time for normal game play in sudden time-shortened game state A and sudden time-shortened game state B is set shorter than that in sudden time-shortened game state C, so that the number of support wins (number of support lotteries executed) per unit time in sudden time-shortened game state A and sudden time-shortened game state B is greater than that in sudden time-shortened game state C. Also, as shown in Figure 257(b), the opening period of the normal electric device 63a in sudden time-shortened game state A is set longer than that in sudden time-shortened game state B and sudden time-shortened game state C, so that the period during which a win is possible in the second operating port 63 when a device opening/closing game is performed is longer in sudden time-shortened game state A than in sudden time-shortened game state B and sudden time-shortened game state C.

With the above configuration, sudden time-saving game state A is most likely to occur when a ball enters the second operating port 63, and sudden time-saving game state C is least likely to occur. Furthermore, sudden time-saving game state B is intermediate in likelihood. In other words, sudden time-saving game state A is the most advantageous sudden time-saving game state for the player.

The maximum number of times each sudden time-saving game state can be played is the same, and is set to 100 times, for example (Figure 256 (a)). Furthermore, the number of times the normal electric device 63a can be opened during the device opening and closing game, and the interval period (the closed period between the first and second openings) are also the same for each sudden time-saving game state (Figure 257 (b)). However, this configuration is not limiting, and the maximum number of times and the number of times each device can be opened may be different for each sudden time-saving game state.

As shown in Figure 256(a), in this modified example, a priority is set for each sudden time-shortening game state. In Figure 256(a), the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority, and the priority is set so that the ranking is highest in the order of sudden time-shortening game state C < sudden time-shortening game state B < sudden time-shortening game state A. In this modified example, as shown in Figure 256(b), a priority information storage area 551 is provided in ROM 313, and priority information indicating the priority is stored in the priority information storage area 551 in association with the type of sudden time-shortening game state.

<Reserved renewal processing>
The reservation update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 258. This process is executed in step Sc3301 of the process for determining whether or not the time-saving game state is suddenly switched on by the main control device 162 (Fig. 251), and more specifically, is executed when a special miss occurs while the time-saving game state is suddenly switched on. This process is executed in place of the reservation update process in Fig. 252, and the same step numbers are used in Fig. 258 for processes similar to those in Fig. 252, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc3401, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during the current state is determined. In step Sc3402, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of special miss result is determined. In step Sc3403, the remaining number of times determined in step Sc3401 is subtracted from the upper limit number determined in step Sc3402 to derive the difference number of times.

In step Sc3404, it is determined whether the differential count derived in step Sc3403 is 1 or greater. If the differential count is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step Sc4101, where the priority of the sudden time-saving game state (current time-saving) corresponding to the current special miss result is determined. This process is performed by referencing the special miss type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 and the priority information stored in the priority information storage area 551 of ROM 313.

In step Sc4102, the priority of the reserved sudden time-shortened game state (reserved time-shortened game state) is determined. Specifically, the type of reserved sudden time-shortened game state is identified based on the type information stored in the reservation area 314f of RAM 314, and the priority of the identified sudden time-shortened game state is identified by referring to the priority information in the priority information storage area 551.

In step Sc4103, the priority of the current time reduction determined in step Sc4101 is compared with the priority of the reserved time reduction determined in step Sc4102, and it is determined whether the priority of the current time reduction is higher than the priority of the reserved time reduction. If a positive determination is made in step Sc4103, proceed to step Sc4104, where the type information and differential number information in the reserved area 314f are updated. Specifically, in the reserved area 314f, where the type information and differential number information of the reserved time reduction are stored, the type information corresponding to the current special miss result and the differential number information corresponding to the current differential number (the differential number derived in step Sc3403) are overwritten. As a result, the previous reserved state is canceled (suspended), and the sudden time reduction game state corresponding to the current special miss result is newly placed on hold.

When the reserved time-saving mode is changed in this way, the variable display time setting process in step Sc712 (Fig. 222) references the variable display time table A for special misses (Fig. 232 (b)) to draw the variable display time (variation pattern). In other words, if a special miss occurs while a sudden time-saving game state is reserved, causing another sudden time-saving game state to be reserved, a special reach miss A effect is executed in that special game play, and it is announced that a special miss has occurred.

In step Sc4105, a reserved update command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the reserved update processing is terminated. The reserved update command is used to notify that the reserved sudden time-saving game state has been changed, and the command includes information indicating the type of sudden time-saving game state that has been newly set as the reserved state and the difference in the number of times.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4103 (if the priority of the current time-saving is low), the previous reserved state is maintained, the reserved sudden time-saving game state is not changed, and the reservation update process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sc4104 onwards. If the reserved time-saving game state is not changed, the variable display time setting process in step Sc712 performs a lottery to determine the variable display time (variation pattern) by referring to variable display time table B for special misses (Figure 232 (c)). In other words, if the reserved sudden time-saving game state continues to be reserved even after a special miss result, a complete miss effect or special reach miss B effect is executed in that special pattern game round, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figure 259. Here, an example is shown in which special miss results occur multiple times in the order of special miss result B, special miss result C, and special miss result A during the normal time-saving game state.

For example, if special miss result B occurs on the 20th special symbol play (timing t1) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (30 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) for the sudden time-saving play state B corresponding to special miss result B, and the difference number B (70 times) is derived. In this case, since the difference number B is 1 or greater, the reservation flag is set and the sudden time-saving play state B is placed on hold (Fig. 259 (b), (c)).

In a special symbol game where special miss result B is achieved, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has been achieved. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to special miss result B.

Furthermore, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is reserved.

After that, for example, if special miss result C occurs on the 30th special symbol play (timing t2) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (20 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) for the sudden time-saving play state C corresponding to special miss result C, and the difference number C (80 times) is derived. In this case, the difference number C is 1 or more, and because the sudden time-saving play state B has been reserved, the priority of the sudden time-saving play state C and the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B are read from the priority information storage area 551 of ROM 313 and compared. Because the priority of the sudden time-saving play state C is lower than the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B, the sudden time-saving play state B is given priority as the reserved target.

In other words, the reservation of sudden time-shortened game state C is invalidated, and the reservation of sudden time-shortened game state B is maintained. This configuration prevents the reserved time-shortened game state from being switched from sudden time-shortened game state B, in which winning at the second actuation port 63 is relatively likely, to sudden time-shortened game state C, in which winning at the second actuation port 63 is relatively unlikely.

In the above case, in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result C is achieved, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss effect B. In other words, it is announced as if the result was a normal miss, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult to recognize that they have won the special miss result. However, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result C.

After that, for example, if special miss result A occurs on the 40th special symbol play (timing t3) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (10 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) for the sudden time-saving play state A corresponding to special miss result A, and the difference number A (90 times) is derived. In this case, the difference number A will be 1 or more, and because the sudden time-saving play state B has been reserved, the priority of the sudden time-saving play state A and the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B are read from the priority information storage area 551 and compared. Because the priority of the sudden time-saving play state A is higher than the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B, the sudden time-saving play state A is given priority as the reserved target.

In this case, the type information and differential number information stored in the reserved area 314f of RAM 314 are updated from values corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state B to values corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state A. Specifically, the type information in the reserved area 314f is rewritten to a value corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state A, and the differential number information is rewritten to a value corresponding to differential number A.

As a result, the reserved state of sudden time-saving game state B is canceled (suspended), and sudden time-saving game state A is newly reserved. In other words, the reserved sudden time-saving game state is switched from sudden time-saving game state B to sudden time-saving game state A, which makes it easier for a winning combination to occur in the second operating port 63, and a time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player is stocked.

In addition, the above changes to the reserved time-saving feature will increase the number of remaining times (the difference in the number of times) that the sudden time-saving game mode, which is implemented after the normal time-saving game mode ends. In other words, the period during which winning at the second actuation port 63 is more likely to occur will be extended compared to before the change, which is advantageous for the player.

In this modified example, the maximum number of plays for each sudden time-saving game state is the same, so if a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the difference in number of plays will inevitably be larger than the difference in number of plays for the reserved sudden time-saving game state. However, if the maximum number of plays is different for each sudden time-saving game state, it is possible that the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the later special miss result will have a smaller difference in number of plays than the reserved sudden time-saving game state. Even in such cases, if the priority corresponding to the later sudden time-saving game state is higher than the priority corresponding to the reserved sudden time-saving game state, the reserved time-saving game state will be changed.

In a special symbol game round in which a special miss result A is achieved, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has been achieved. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A. Note that the text image 527 and the first reserved image 528 are not displayed to avoid the misunderstanding that the reserved number for the time-saving game state has been added.

In addition, during the special game play, a lottery is held to determine the display mode of the currently displayed second reserved image 529, taking into account the differential number of times A. As a result, if a display mode superior to the current display mode is selected, the display mode of the second reserved image 529 will be upgraded in the next special game play. This suggests or notifies the remaining number of times for the reserved time reduction after the change.

The change in display mode may be made using the remaining variable display time, or may be made across the variable display time and fixed display time. It may also be made in the next special game, or in a later special game.

After that, on the 50th special symbol game, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display begins (timing t4), the normal time-saving game state that was in effect ends, the reserved state is released, and a transition to sudden time-saving game state A is made (Fig. 259 (a), (e)). At this time, the remaining number of times in sudden time-saving game state A becomes the differential number of times A (90 times) updated at timing t3 above.

In the above case, on the 50th special symbol play (the final play in the normal time-saving play state), the symbol display device 75 executes a release effect (Fig. 249 (b)), and then suddenly executes an effect to start the time-saving play state. This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated.

After the sudden transition to time-saving game state A, if the result of the special symbol lottery on the 90th special symbol game is a normal miss, and the timing at which the confirmation display begins (timing t4) arrives, time-saving game state A suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a performance to end the time-saving game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The decision on whether to update the reserved time-saving status is made based on the type of time-saving game state. In other words, whether to update (change) is determined by comparing the type of reserved time-saving game state with the type of time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result won after the upper limit is reached. This makes it possible to determine whether to change the status based on the differences in the characteristics of these two specific game states.

A priority is set in advance for each of the sudden time-saving game states A to C (multiple types of time-saving game states that can be reserved), and whether or not to update is determined based on that priority. In this case, by setting a higher priority for the sudden time-saving game state with a higher expected value of winning in the second actuation port 63 (for example, sudden time-saving game state A) than for the sudden time-saving game state with a lower expected value of winning in the second actuation port 63 (for example, sudden time-saving game state C), it is possible to prevent a switch in the direction that makes it more difficult to win in the second actuation port 63 due to an update of the reserved time-saving state. This allows players to aim for a win with a special miss result without worrying about a downgrade of the reserved time-saving state, making it easier to enjoy games that upgrade the reserved time-saving state by winning a special miss result.

It is also expected to have the effect of reducing the workload when designing gaming machines. That is, if the control program were to assume all combinations of reserved time-saving game states and time-saving game states corresponding to the special miss results won after the upper limit is reached, and, for example, not execute the reservation when special miss result B (corresponding to sudden time-saving game state B) occurs while sudden time-saving game state A is reserved, there is a concern that the control program would become more complex as the number of combinations increases, leading to an increased workload. In contrast, by using priorities to determine whether or not to update, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each time-saving game state, simplifying the control program. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete overhaul of the control program is not required, and only a change to the priority setting is sufficient. In other words, there is also the advantage that design changes can be made easily.

<Modification 3>
Modification 3 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 260 to 268. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment and each modification will be given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the upper reservation limit was set to 1, allowing for one sudden time-saving game state to be reserved, but in this modified example, it is possible for multiple sudden time-saving game states to be reserved. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

<About sudden time-saving gameplay>
The sudden time-shortening game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 260(a). In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 260(a), the sudden time-shortening game states A to C are configured so that the expected value of winning the second actuation port 63 differs. Specifically, as in the modified example 2, the expected value of winning increases in the order of sudden time-shortening game state C < sudden time-shortening game state B < sudden time-shortening game state A. Note that, as the configuration example for achieving such a relationship between the expected values of winning was described in the modified example 2, a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, this modified example is configured so that the maximum number of times is different for sudden time-saving game states A to C. Specifically, the maximum number of times increases in the following order: sudden time-saving game state C < sudden time-saving game state B < sudden time-saving game state A. Note that it is not essential to have different maximum number of times; the maximum number of times may be the same for sudden time-saving game states A to C, as in modified example 2 above.

<Regarding the various counter areas 314d>
The various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 260(b).

The various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 are set in part of the memory area of RAM 314, and are used as software counters by setting various counter values related to game control and rewriting the values so that they are decremented by one at each specified update timing. In this modified example, the counter area 314d is configured to include a counter area 560 for the time-shortened game state. This counter area 560 for the time-shortened game state is used as an area for counting the remaining number of times the time-shortened game state is active.

The time-shortening game state counter area 560 includes an execution time-shortening area 561 for counting the remaining number of times in the current time-shortening game state, and a reserved time-shortening area 562 for counting the remaining number of times in the reserved time-shortening game state. The reserved time-shortening area 562 has multiple counter areas set up, specifically, a number of counter areas corresponding to the number of types of sudden time-shortening game states. In other words, three counter areas are set up: a first reserved time-shortening area 562a, a second reserved time-shortening area 562b, and a third reserved time-shortening area 562c.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not a game state has suddenly entered the time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 261(a). This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not a game state has suddenly entered the time-saving game state in Fig. 227(a). In Fig. 261(a), the same process as in Fig. 227(a) is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If no support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is a normal game state, in step Sc1403, a flag for starting a sudden time-saving mode is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If step Sc1402 returns a positive result (if one of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, the reservation process is executed in step Sc4301, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation processing in step Sc4301 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc4401, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In this modified example, reservation flags A to C are set corresponding to the sudden time-saving game states A to C. For example, if reservation flag C is set in the various flag storage area 314e, this indicates that the sudden time-saving game state C is currently reserved.

If none of the reservation flags are set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc4402 and set the reservation flag corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result A, set reservation flag A.

In step Sc4403, a value corresponding to the maximum number of times the sudden time-saving game state can be played that corresponds to the current special miss result is set in the reserved time-saving area 562 in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. More specifically, the above value is set in the topmost area that is empty among the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the third reserved time-saving area 562c. If the processing of this step is executed in a situation where a negative judgment is made in step Sc4401 (a situation where the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved), all areas are empty, so the above value is set in the first reserved time-saving area 562a.

In step Sc4404, the order of occurrence of the current special losing result is stored. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 261(b), an order of occurrence information storage area 565 is set in RAM 314 as a storage area for storing the above-mentioned order of occurrence information. This order of occurrence information storage area 565 has multiple storage areas made up of a first area 565a, a second area 565b, and a third area 565c. These first area 565a to third area 565c correspond to the winning order of the special losing result (the order in which the reserved time reduction occurred); specifically, the first area 565a corresponds to the earliest winning order, and the third area 565c corresponds to the latest winning order.

In this step, type information corresponding to the type of the current special miss result is stored in the topmost empty area among the first area 565a to the third area 565c. If no sudden time-saving game states are reserved and the win on the current special miss result is the first win in the time-saving game state, the type information is stored in the first area 565a.

In step Sc4405, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the reservation processing is terminated. The reserved command notifies that a reservation for the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command includes information indicating the type of time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state.

If step Sc4401 returns a positive result (if any of the reservation flags is set), i.e., if a sudden time-saving game state is reserved, proceed to step Sc4406, where it is determined whether a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is reserved. This determination may be made by referencing the occurrence order information storage area 565 of RAM 314, or by referencing the reservation flag in the various flags storage area 314e. For example, when referencing the occurrence order information storage area 565, it is determined whether type information corresponding to the type of the current special miss result is stored in any of the first area 565a to third area 565c, and if such type information is stored, it is recognized that a time-saving game state of the same type is reserved.

If the same type of time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc4402, where a reservation flag corresponding to this special miss result is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sc4403, a value corresponding to the maximum number of times is set in the highest available area among the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the third reserved time-saving area 562c of the reserved time-saving area 562. For example, if the second reserved time-saving area 562b and the third reserved time-saving area 562c are available, the above value is set in the second reserved time-saving area 562b.

In step Sc4404, type information corresponding to the type of this special miss result is stored in the highest free area among the first area 565a to the third area 565c of the occurrence order information storage area 565.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4406 (if the same type of time-saving game state is currently reserved), the reservation process is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sc4402 to Sc4405. In other words, if the same type of time-saving game state is already reserved, the reservation of that time-saving game state continues, but the reservation of a sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is not executed.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 263. This process is executed in step Sc712 of the variable start process (Fig. 222), and is executed in place of the variable display time setting process in Fig. 229. In Fig. 263, the same steps as those in Fig. 229 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, step Sc4501 determines whether the result of this special drawing is a special miss result. If the result is a special miss result, proceed to step Sc4502, where it is determined whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If none of the reserved flags are set, proceed to step Sc4503, and obtain variable display time table A for special misses (Figure 232 (b)) as the variable display time table for this time. This variable display time table A has only variable pattern Z1 (special miss-at-reach A effect) set as the selectable variable pattern. In other words, if a special miss occurs when there is no reserved time reduction, a lottery process for variable display times (step Sc1607) is executed to select the variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special miss-at-reach A effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4502 (if any of the reserved flags is set), proceed to step Sc4504, and obtain variable display time table B for special misses (Figure 232 (c)) as the variable display time table for this time. This variable display time table B has variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) or variable pattern Z2 (special reach miss B effect) set as selectable variable patterns. In other words, if a special miss result occurs in a situation where reserved time reduction exists, a lottery process for variable display times (step Sc1607) is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect is selected.

Events that occur when a special miss occurs when a reserved time-saving effect exists include: a situation in which a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is not reserved, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss result is placed in a reserved state; and a situation in which a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is already reserved, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss result is not placed in a reserved state. In this modified example, in both cases, the variable display time (variation pattern) is determined by lottery using the variable display time table B described above. That is, if the first special miss result is won while in the time-saving game state, the symbol display device 75 will execute the special reach miss A effect, and a special miss result will be announced. However, for the second or subsequent wins, regardless of whether a reserve effect is present, the symbol display device 75 will execute the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect, and a special miss result will not be announced.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4501 (if the result is not a special miss), proceed to step Sc4505 and obtain the variable display time table for the corresponding time-saving game state. Specifically, if the result of this win/lose lottery is a jackpot result, the variable display time table for the jackpot (Figure 232 (a)) is obtained, and if the result of this win/lose lottery is a normal miss result, the variable display time table for the normal miss (Figure 232 (d)) is obtained.

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The high frequency support mode update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 264. This process is executed in step Sc710 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222), and is executed instead of the high frequency support mode update process in Fig. 226. In Fig. 264, the same steps as those in Fig. 226 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If step Sc1302 returns a positive result (if any support flag is set), that is, if the current game state is a time-shortened game state (normal time-shortened game state or sudden time-shortened game state), proceed to step Sc4601 and update the counter value SC in the execution time-shortened area 561 provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the counter value SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times the player is currently in the time-shortened game state. In this case, the remaining number can be considered the remaining number of special game plays that can be played while the player is in the time-shortened game state.

In step Sc4602, it is determined whether the updated counter value SC is "0." If the counter value SC is "0," that is, if the number of times the game has been played in the time-saving game state during the current stay has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1305, where a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

After step Sc1305 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc4602 (if the counter value SC is not "0"), step Sc4603 determines whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the reservation flags have been set, i.e., if the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, proceed to step Sc4604 and update the counter value YC in the reserved time-shortening area 562 provided in the various counter area 314d.

For more details about step Sc4604, the counter value YC is decremented by 1 for the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the third reserved time-saving area 562c for areas where a maximum number of plays is set (areas where the value is not "0"). For example, if the first reserved time-saving area 562a and the second reserved time-saving area 562b are areas where the counter value YC is not "0", the counter value YC for each of these areas is updated. This decrements the remaining number of plays for each reserved time-saving game state by 1.

In step Sc4605, it is determined whether any of the areas for which the counter value YC was updated in step Sc4604 has an updated value of "0." If any area has an updated value of "0," the process proceeds to step Sc4606, where the reservation flag for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that area is cleared.

For example, if a special miss result C occurs during the time-shortened game state, suddenly reserving the time-shortened game state C, and then a special miss result A occurs, suddenly reserving the time-shortened game state A, and as a result of the update process in step Sc4604, the counter value YC in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a, which sets the upper limit for the number of times the time-shortened game state C can be played, becomes "0," the reservation flag C corresponding to the sudden time-shortened game state C is cleared. This ends the reservation of the sudden time-shortened game state C. Note that, since the reserved state ends when the counter value YC becomes "0," the remaining number of reserved time-shortened games updated in step Sc4604 above can be considered the remaining number of special game plays for which the reserved state can be continued.

In step Sc4607, the order of occurrence stored in the order of occurrence information storage area 565 is updated. In the above example, the type information for sudden time-shortened game state C stored in the first area 565a is erased, and the type information for sudden time-shortened game state A stored in the second area 565b is shifted to the first area 565a. As a result, the order of occurrence of the later sudden time-shortened game state A is moved up, and it is recognized as the earliest reserved time-shortened state.

In step Sc4608, the counter values of the first reserved time-reduction area 562a to the third reserved time-reduction area 562c in the reserved time-reduction area 562 that are lower than the area for which the updated counter value YC has become "0" are shifted to the higher area. In the above example, since the counter value of the first reserved time-reduction area 562a becomes "0," the counter value of the second reserved time-reduction area 562b (the value corresponding to the remaining number of times in sudden time-reduction gaming state A) is shifted to the first reserved time-reduction area 562a. At this time, if the value of the third reserved time-reduction area 562c is not "0," the counter value of that area is shifted to the second reserved time-reduction area 562b. After step Sc4608 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4603 (no reservation flags are set), there is no need to update the reserved time-saving area, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processing from step Sc4604 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc4605 (no area has an updated value of "0"), the reservation status at that time is maintained, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processing from step Sc4606 onwards.

<First transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 265. This process is executed in step Sc511 of the special game play control process (Fig. 220), and is executed in place of the first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in Fig. 235. In Fig. 265, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Fig. 235, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc4701, it is determined whether any reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If no reservation flags have been set, i.e., if there is no reserved time reduction, it proceeds to step Sc1802, where it is determined whether a sudden time reduction start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation dictates a transition to a sudden time-saving game state, proceed to step Sc1803, and the support B flag corresponding to that type is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A, the support B1 flag is set.

In step Sc4702, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the execution time reduction area 561 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. The execution time reduction area 561 is a counter area that allows the MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state during the current game. In step Sc1805, the sudden time-shortened game state start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-shortened game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4701 (if any of the reserved flags is set), that is, if a reserved time-saving mode exists, the second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state is executed in step Sc4703. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state is a process for implementing a transition from the sudden time-saving gaming state that has been set as a reserved state.

<Second transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition processing of the sudden time-saving game state in step Sc4703 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 266.

First, in step Sc4801, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed when the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, that is, when at least the current game state is a time-shortened game state. Therefore, the processing of step Sc4801 essentially determines whether the current time-shortened game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current time-saving game state has ended, the earliest reserved time-saving state is determined in step Sc4802. Specifically, the type information stored in the first area 565a of the occurrence order storage area 565 of RAM 314 is read to determine the type of the first special losing result, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the determined type is identified.

In step Sc4803, the support B flag corresponding to the reserved time reduction identified in step Sc4802 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the earliest reserved time reduction is sudden time reduction game state B, the support B2 flag is set.

In step Sc4804, the counter value YC in the first reserved time-saving area 562a provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561. Here, the counter value YC in the first reserved time-saving area 562a is updated along with the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 561 during the current time-saving game state, and is decremented by one for each special game. Therefore, the counter value YC at the time of the shift is calculated by subtracting the remaining number of times when a special miss result is won during the current time-saving game state from the original upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state that was reserved as a result of the win. In other words, it is the same as the differential number in the third embodiment and variant 1 described above.

In step Sc4805, the values stored in the second reserved time-saving area 562b and the third reserved time-saving area 562c are shifted to the higher-order areas. That is, the value in the second reserved time-saving area 562b is shifted to the first reserved time-saving area 562a, and the value in the third reserved time-saving area 562c is shifted to the second reserved time-saving area 562b.

In step Sc4806, of the reservation flags set in the various flag storage area 314e, the reservation flag corresponding to the reserved time reduction identified in step Sc4802 is cleared. In the following step Sc4807, the occurrence order stored in the occurrence order information storage area 565 is updated. Specifically, the type information stored in the first area 565a is erased, and the type information stored in the second area 565b and the third area 565c is shifted to the first area 565a and the second area 565b, respectively.

In step Sc4808, the sudden time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the second transition process for the sudden time-shortened gaming state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4801 (if any support flag is set), that is, if the game is currently in the time-shortened game state, the transition for the reserved time-shortened game state will not be implemented, and the processing for the second transition to the time-shortened game state will suddenly end without executing the processing from step Sc4802 onwards.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figures 267 and 268. Here, an example is shown in which special miss results occur multiple times in the normal time-saving game state in the order of special miss result A, special miss result C, special miss result A, and special miss result B. For convenience, the explanation will be given assuming that the upper limit of the normal time-saving game state is 100 times.

If, during normal time-saving gameplay, the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved, and special miss result A occurs, for example, on the 30th special game turn (timing t1), the reservation flag A is set and the sudden time-saving game state A is placed on hold (Fig. 267 (b) and (c)). At this time, the type information for the special miss result A (sudden time-saving game state A) is stored in the first area 565a of the occurrence order information storage area 565, and the sudden time-saving game state A is stored as the first reserved time-saving state that occurred.

Also, as shown in Figure 268 (a), a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times (e.g., 100 times) for sudden time-shortened game state A is set in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a of the time-shortened game state counter area 560. The counter value in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a is updated each time a special game is played in the current normal time-shortened game state (Figure 267 (d)). In other words, the counter value (remaining number of reserved time-shortened games) is decremented in parallel with the counter value SC in the execution time-shortened area 561 (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the current normal time-shortened game state).

When a special symbol game play results in a special miss result A, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has occurred. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

Furthermore, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is reserved.

After that, for example, if a special miss result C occurs during the 60th special game (timing t2) in the normal time-saving game state, a reservation flag C is set and the sudden time-saving game state C is placed on hold (Fig. 267 (b), (e)). At this time, type information for the special miss result C (sudden time-saving game state C) is stored in the second area 565b of the occurrence order information storage area 565, and the sudden time-saving game state C is stored as the second reserved time-saving state that occurred.

Also, as shown in Figure 268(b), a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times (e.g., 50 times) for sudden time-saving game state C is set in the second reserved time-saving area 562b of the time-saving game state counter area 560. The counter value in the second reserved time-saving area 562b is also updated each time a special game is played in the normal time-saving game state during the current state (Figure 267(f)).

In the above case, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved in response to a win on the special miss result, but in the special symbol game turn in which the special miss result C is achieved, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss effect B. In other words, the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult for them to recognize that a new reservation has occurred. Furthermore, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result C.

Suppose that after that, for example, during the 70th special game (timing t3) in the normal time-saving game state, special miss result A occurs again. In this case, because the sudden time-saving game state A has already been reserved, the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state A corresponding to this special miss result A is invalidated. In other words, the information in the occurrence order information storage area 565 and the values stored in each reserved time-saving area 562a-562c are not rewritten.

In a special symbol game where special miss result A is won again, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred will not be made clear. The special symbol display unit 43 will stop and display the stop result corresponding to special miss result A.

After that, if a special miss result B occurs during the 85th special symbol play (timing t4) in the normal time-saving play state, the reservation flag B is set and the sudden time-saving play state B is placed on hold (Fig. 267 (b), (g)). At this time, the type information for the special miss result B (sudden time-saving play state B) is stored in the third area 565c of the occurrence order information storage area 565, and the sudden time-saving play state B is stored as the third reserved time-saving play state that occurred.

Also, as shown in Figure 268 (c), a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times (e.g., 80 times) for sudden time-saving game state B is set in the third reserved time-saving area 562c of the time-saving game state counter area 560. The counter value in the third reserved time-saving area 562c is also updated each time a special symbol game is played in the normal time-saving game state during the current state (Figure 267 (h)). In a special symbol game that results in a special miss result B, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not announced.

After that, on the 100th special symbol game, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display begins (timing t5), the support flag is cleared based on the value of the execution time-saving area 561 being "0," and the normal time-saving game state that was in effect ends. In this case, the first area 565a of the occurrence order information storage area 565 is referenced, and sudden time-saving game state A is recognized as the earliest reserved time-saving state. Then, the support B1 flag corresponding to the recognized sudden time-saving game state A is set, and a transition to sudden time-saving game state A is implemented (Fig. 267 (i)).

Also, as shown in Figure 268 (d), in the time-shortened game state counter area 560, the counter value in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a (corresponding to the remaining number of times in sudden time-shortened game state A) is shifted to the executed time-shortened area 561. As a result, the counter value in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a at the end of the normal time-shortened game state is set as the number of special game times that can be played in sudden time-shortened game state A. This value is the difference number A (30 times), obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the normal time-shortened game state at the time of winning the special miss result A (70 times) from the maximum number of times in sudden time-shortened game state A (100 times) (Figure 267 (i)).

Furthermore, in the time-shortened game state counter area 560, in conjunction with the above shift, the counter values in the second reserved time-shortening area 562b and the third reserved time-shortening area 562c are shifted to the first reserved time-shortening area 562a and the second reserved time-shortening area 562b, respectively (Figure 268 (d)). Also, in the generation order information storage area 565, the type information in the first area 565a is erased, and the type information in the second area 565b and the third area 565c is shifted to the first area 565a and the second area 565b, respectively.

In the above case, on the 100th special symbol play (the final play of the normal time-saving play state), the release effect (Fig. 249 (b)) is executed on the symbol display device 75, and then the start effect of the time-saving play state is suddenly executed. This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated.

After the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state A, at timing t6 before the end of state A, when the counter value in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a (corresponding to the remaining number of plays in the sudden time-shortened game state C) becomes "0," the reservation flag C is cleared (Fig. 267 (e) and (f)). This ends the reserved state of the sudden time-shortened game state C. In this case, because the player is currently in the sudden time-shortened game state A, the player does not suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state C. In other words, the reserved state ends without the player transitioning to the sudden time-shortened game state C. At this time, no notification corresponding to the end of the reserved state is made, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to recognize the end.

When the reserved state ends, in the time-shortened game state counter area 560, as shown in FIG. 268(e), the counter value in the second reserved time-shortened area 562b (corresponding to the remaining number of times in sudden time-shortened game state B) is shifted to the first reserved time-shortened area 562a. Also, in the occurrence sequence information storage area 565, the type information in the first area 565a (corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state C) is erased, and the type information in the second area 565a (corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state B) is shifted to the first area 565a.

When the sudden time-saving game state A ends at timing t7, the first area 565a of the occurrence order information storage area 565 is referenced, and the sudden time-saving game state B is recognized as the first reserved time-saving state. The support B2 flag corresponding to the recognized sudden time-saving game state B is then set, and a transition to the sudden time-saving game state B is implemented (Figure 267 (j)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 268(f), in the time-shortened game state counter area 560, the counter value in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a (corresponding to the remaining number of times in sudden time-shortened game state B) is shifted to the executed time-shortened area 561. As a result, the counter value in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a at the end of sudden time-shortened game state A is set as the number of special game times that can be played in sudden time-shortened game state B. This value is the difference number B (35 times), obtained by subtracting the total number of times remaining in the normal time-shortened game state at the time of winning special miss result B (15 times) and the difference number A (30 times) from the upper limit number of times in sudden time-shortened game state B (80 times).

In the above case, in the final play of the sudden time-shortened game state A, a release effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, followed by the start effect of the sudden time-shortened game state. This notifies the player that the stored time-shortened game state has been activated. Note that in this modified example, because the reservation (stock) of state B is not clearly indicated before the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state B, the end effect of the sudden time-shortened game state A may be executed instead of the release effect, and then the start effect of the sudden time-shortened game state B may be executed.

After the sudden transition to time-saving game state B, if the result of the special symbol lottery on the 35th special symbol game is a normal miss, and the timing at which the confirmation display begins (timing t8) arrives, time-saving game state B suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a time-saving game state ending effect.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

Multiple reserved time-saving areas 562a-562c are provided, allowing multiple reserved time-saving game states. When multiple reservations are made, the reserved time-saving game states are transitioned to sequentially, so the more reservations made, the more advantageous it is for the player. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not a reservation will occur, but also how many they can make, thereby ideally increasing interest.

The number of reserved time-saving areas 562a-562c corresponds to the number of types of sudden time-saving game states (time-saving game states that can be reserved), and the upper limit on the number of reserved states is set to the same number as the number of types. In this case, it is possible to reserve all sudden time-saving game states simultaneously, while preventing the number of reserved states from becoming too large, which would increase the processing load or cause storage space to become congested.

If a special miss occurs during a time-shortened game state, a counter value corresponding to the maximum number of reserved time-shortened games based on that result is set in reserved time-shortened game area 562, and each time a game is played, the counter value in reserved time-shortened game area 562 is updated along with the counter value in executed time-shortened game area 561. In this case, the remaining number of games in the active time-shortened game state and the remaining number of games in the reserved time-shortened game state can be updated in parallel, making it possible to manage the remaining number of games in both time-shortened game states simultaneously.

In particular, if multiple reservations are allowed in a configuration where the remaining number of times after transitioning to a reserved time-saving game state is used as the differential number of times, there is a concern that the transition timing for each reserved time-saving state will be different, resulting in a greater variety of differential numbers and complicating the process of deriving them. In this regard, this configuration makes it possible to easily derive the differential number of times for each reserved time-saving state.

The counter value updated in reserved time-saving area 562 becomes the end value, and when the remaining number of times reaches 0, the reserved state of the reserved time-saving corresponding to that counter value is terminated. In this case, if the remaining number of times (the original upper limit) of the reserved time-saving corresponding to the win is fewer than the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state in which the player was present when the special miss result was won, the reserved state can be automatically released without transitioning to the reserved time-saving state. Therefore, when the special miss result is won, the counter value in reserved time-saving area 562 can be set without having to compare the remaining number of times in the time-saving state with the remaining number of times in the reserved time-saving state or determine whether or not to reserve the state based on that result, simplifying the processing configuration.

The multiple reserved time-saving areas 562a-562c correspond to the order in which the special misses were won, and as the time-saving period ends, the counter value in the first reserved time-saving area 562a corresponding to the earliest winning order is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561, which manages the remaining number of times the time-saving period ends. With this configuration, when multiple reservations are made, transitions to each reserved time-saving period can be executed sequentially in the order in which the reservations were made. In other words, since the order of reservations is directly reflected in the transition order, by reserving time-saving game states with high expected win values for the second operating port 63 in the earliest order, a state in which the special winning lottery is more likely to be drawn and ball consumption is more likely to be minimized can be reached sooner, allowing the player to play advantageously. In other words, the order in which the time-saving game states are reserved affects the subsequent development of the game, so players can pay attention to the order in which the reservations are made, increasing the game's enjoyment.

If a special miss occurs while in a time-saving game state, a special reach miss A effect is executed to notify the player that a special miss has occurred, but the type of sudden time-saving game state that has been reserved is not recognizable or difficult for the player to recognize. By configuring it in this way, even if the player knows the regularity regarding the transition order, the actual transition order can be made difficult to understand, allowing the player to enjoy predicting which time-saving game state they will transition to.

If a special miss occurs without a reserved time-saving feature, a special reach miss A effect is executed to notify the player of the special miss. However, if a special miss occurs with a reserved time-saving feature, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed, and the player is not notified of the special miss. In other words, since no notification is made for the second or subsequent occurrence of a reserved feature, the player is not made aware that multiple reserved features have occurred, allowing the player to predict the number of reserved features and the order in which they will occur, allowing for enjoyment.

<Modification 4>
A fourth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 269 to 274. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned variant 3, the maximum number of reserved sudden time-shortening game states was configured to be the same as the number of types of sudden time-shortening game states, but in this variant, the number of reserved sudden time-shortening game states is configured to be greater than the number of types of sudden time-shortening game states. The configuration of this variant is explained in detail below. Note that the sudden time-shortening game state in this variant is the same as the sudden time-shortening game state in the above-mentioned variant 3.

<Regarding the various counter areas 314d>
The various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 269. As shown in Fig. 269(a), the various counter areas 314d include a time-shortened game state counter area 560 set as an area for counting the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state. The time-shortened game state counter area 560 includes an executed time-shortened area 561 for counting the remaining number of times in the currently-held time-shortened game state, and a reserved time-shortened area 562 for counting the remaining number of times in the reserved time-shortened game state.

Multiple counter areas are set in the reserved time-saving area 562. More specifically, a number of counter areas greater than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states (3) are set; specifically, 10 counter areas are set, including the first reserved time-saving area 562a through the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j. Note that the number of counter areas is not limited to 10, and may be any number greater than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states.

Also, as shown in Figure 269 (b), RAM 314 has an occurrence order information storage area 565. In the occurrence order information storage area 565, the same number of areas as the reserved time-saving area 562, first areas 565a to tenth areas 565j, are set, and these first areas 565a to tenth areas 565j correspond to the winning order of the special miss results (the order in which the reserved time-saving results occurred). Specifically, first area 565a corresponds to the earliest winning order, and tenth area 565j corresponds to the latest winning order.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 270. This process is executed in step Sc4301 of the process for determining whether or not the main control device 162 has suddenly entered the time-shortened gaming state (Fig. 261), and is executed in place of the reservation process of Fig. 262.

First, in step Sc5101, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In this modified example, reservation flags A to C are set corresponding to the sudden time-saving game states A to C. For example, if reservation flag C is set in the various flag storage area 314e, this indicates that the sudden time-saving game state C is currently reserved.

If none of the reservation flags are set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc5102 and set the reservation flag corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result A, set reservation flag A.

In step Sc5103, a value corresponding to the maximum number of times the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the current special miss result is set in the reserved time-shortened area 562 in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. More specifically, the above value is set in the topmost area of the first reserved time-shortened area 562a through the tenth reserved time-shortened area 562j that is empty. If the processing of this step is executed in a situation where a negative judgment is made in step Sc5101 (a situation where the sudden time-shortened game state is not reserved), all areas are empty, so the above value is set in the first reserved time-shortened area 562a.

In step Sc5104, the order in which the special miss results occurred is stored. In this step, type information corresponding to the type of the special miss result is stored in the highest empty area among the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j of the order of occurrence information storage area 565. If the processing of this step is executed in a situation in which a negative judgment is made in step Sc5101 (a situation in which the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved), all areas are empty, so the type information is stored in the first area 565a.

In step Sc5105, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the reservation processing is terminated. The reserved command notifies that a reservation for the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command includes information indicating the type of time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc5101 (if any of the reservation flags is set), that is, if the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, proceed to step Sc5106, where it is determined whether or not there is an area of vacant space in the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j of the reserved time-saving area 562. If there is an area of vacant space, proceed to step Sc5102, and set the reservation flag corresponding to this special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sc5103, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the highest available area among the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j. For example, if the sixth reserved time-saving area 562f to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j are available, the above value is set in the sixth reserved time-saving area 562f.

In step Sc5104, type information corresponding to the type of this special miss result is stored in the highest free area among the first area 565a to third area 565c of the occurrence order information storage area 565.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc5106 (if there is no free space area), the reservation process ends without executing the processes of steps Sc5102 to Sc5105. In other words, if the number of reserved sudden time-saving game states has already reached the upper reservation limit, the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result will not be executed.

The process for setting the variable display time in this modified example is the same as the process for setting the variable display time in modified example 3 above (Figure 263).

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The high frequency support mode update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 271. This process is executed in step Sc710 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222), and is executed instead of the high frequency support mode update process in Fig. 264. In Fig. 271, the same steps as those in Fig. 264 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4602 (if the counter value SC in the execution time-reduction area 561 is not "0") or after execution of step Sc1305 (setting the time-reduction end flag), step Sc4603 determines whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any of the reservation flags have been set, that is, if the sudden time-reduction game state is reserved, proceed to step Sc4604 and update the counter value YC in the reserved time-reduction area 562 provided in the various counter area 314d.

In step Sc4605, it is determined whether any of the areas for which the counter value YC was updated in step Sc4604 has an updated value of "0". If there is an area for which the updated value is "0", proceed to step Sc5201, where it is determined whether a time-shortened game state of the same type as the sudden time-shortened game state of the area for which the updated value is "0" is currently reserved. For example, if the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-shortened game state C is set in the fourth reserved time-shortened area 562d, and the counter value YC of that area 562d becomes "0" as a result of the update in step Sc4604, the occurrence order information storage area 565 is referenced to determine whether a reservation for the sudden time-shortened game state C exists as another reservation.

If the same type of time-saving game state is not currently reserved, proceed to step Sc4606 and clear the reservation flag for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that area. In the above example, the reservation flag C corresponding to sudden time-saving game state C is cleared. This ends the reservation of sudden time-saving game state C.

After step Sc4606 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc5201 (if the same type of time-saving game state is reserved), in step Sc4607, the information in the occurrence sequence information storage area 565 is updated so that the type information of the sudden time-saving game state whose reservation has ended is deleted. In the following step Sc4608, the counter values of areas in the reserved time-saving area 562 that are lower than the area where the updated counter value YC has become "0" are shifted to higher areas. After step Sc4608 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update processing is terminated.

<Second transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition process for the sudden time-shortened gaming state according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 272. This process is executed in step Sc4703 of the first transition process for the sudden time-shortened gaming state (Fig. 265), and is executed in place of the second transition process for the sudden time-shortened gaming state in Fig. 266. In Fig. 272, the same steps as those in Fig. 266 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc4801, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed when the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved (YES in step Sc4701). Since such a reservation occurs while the player is in the time-shortened game state, the process of step Sc4801 essentially determines whether the current time-shortened game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current time-saving game state has ended, the earliest reserved time-saving result is determined in step Sc4802. Specifically, the type information stored in the first area 565a of the occurrence order storage area 565 of RAM 314 is read to determine the type of the first special miss result, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the determined type is identified. In step Sc4803, the support B flag corresponding to the reserved time-saving result determined in step Sc4802 is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sc4804, the counter value YC of the first reserved time-saving area 562a provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561. Here, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a is updated along with the counter value SC of the execution time-saving area 561 during the current time-saving game state, and is decremented by one for each special game. Therefore, the counter value YC at the time of the shift is calculated by subtracting the remaining number of times when a special miss result is won during the current time-saving game state from the original upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state that was reserved as a result of the winning. In other words, it is the same as the differential number in the third embodiment and variant 1 described above. In step Sc4805, the counter values YC of the second reserved time-saving areas 562b to the tenth reserved time-saving areas 562j are each shifted to a higher area.

In step Sc5301, it is determined whether a time-saving game state of the same type as the reserved time-saving game state identified in step Sc4802 is currently reserved. For example, if the reserved time-saving game state identified in step Sc4802 is sudden time-saving game state B, the occurrence order information storage area 565 is referenced to determine whether a reservation for sudden time-saving game state B exists as another reservation.

If the same type of time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc4806, and clear the reservation flag set in the various flag storage area 314e that corresponds to the reserved time-saving game state identified in step Sc4802.

After step Sc4806 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc5301 (if the same type of time-saving game state is reserved), in step Sc4807, the information in the generation sequence information storage area 565 is updated. Specifically, the type information in the first area 565a is deleted, and the type information in the second area 565b and thereafter is shifted to the higher-ranked area.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end effect setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 273. This process is executed in step Sc2509 of the effect setting process (Fig. 242) by the effect control device 143, and is executed in place of the end effect setting process in Fig. 249(a). In Fig. 273, the same processes as those in Fig. 249(a) are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

The end effect setting process is executed when a time-saving game state end command is received from the main control unit 162, and is executed in conjunction with the end of the time-saving game state.

In step Sc3101, it is determined whether a sudden time-shortened game state is currently on hold. If a time-shortened game state is currently on hold, the process proceeds to step Sc5401, where it is determined whether the current time-shortened game state to be ended (ending time-shortened game state) and the next time-shortened game state to be transitioned to (transition time-shortened game state) are the same type of time-shortened game state. For example, if the current time-shortened game state for which the termination process is executed by the main control unit 162 is sudden time-shortened game state A, it is determined whether the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to as the earliest reserved time-shortened game state is sudden time-shortened game state A. This determination can be made, for example, by referencing the time-shortened game state end command and the time-shortened game state type information included in the reservation command from the main control unit 162.

If the end time reduction and transition time reduction are the same type of time-saving game state, proceed to step Sc5402 and set it to execute an additional effect for the remaining number of times. Here, this additional effect will be explained with reference to Figure 274.

To perform the above-mentioned additional effects, as shown in FIG. 274(a), the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination that results in a miss on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 during the final play of the time-saving period. In this case, the stop display does not take a special stop form, but rather notifies the player of a miss by displaying the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in order, just like the other special symbol play times during the time-saving period.

After each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a stopped state, as shown in FIG. 274(b), an additional image 581, consisting of text such as "+30 times!!", is displayed during the special symbol play time when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state. This notifies the player that the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state has been added. Note that the number of times added notified by the additional image 581 is the number corresponding to the difference in the number of times (for example, 30 times).

The added-on image 581 may be displayed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be displayed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the images of the statically displayed symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be erased before the added-on image 581 is displayed, or the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and the added-on image 581 may be displayed in front of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After step Sc5402 is executed, in step Sc5403, a value corresponding to the difference in the number of times is added to the value in the remaining number counter area. As a result, during play after the transition to the next sudden time-saving game state, the remaining number of times image 523 reflecting the added amount is displayed, as shown in Figure 274 (c).

After step Sc5403 is executed, the end effect setting process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc5401 (the end time reduction and transition time reduction are not the same type of time-saving game state), the release effect setting process is executed in step Sc3106, and then the end effect setting process is terminated.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The following explains the process when a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state. In this modified example, the number of reserved sudden time-saving game states is set to be greater than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states. Therefore, if the same type of special miss occurs multiple times while in the time-saving game state, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to each win is reserved. In other words, multiple sudden time-saving game states of the same type can be reserved.

In addition, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs during the time-shortened game state, information is stored in the occurrence order information storage area 565 so that the type and winning order can be recognized, and when a transition to the reserved time-shortened game state is implemented, the transition is implemented according to the stored winning order (the order in which the reserved time-shortened game state occurred). Therefore, when the time-shortened game state currently in effect ends, it is possible that the type of the time-shortened game state that is ending and the type of the reserved time-shortened game state to which the transition will be implemented immediately thereafter will be the same. In such a case, the symbol display device 75 executes an additional effect (Fig. 274). This gives the player the impression that the time-shortened game state currently in effect has been extended.

If the types of the end time reduction and transition time reduction are different, a release effect is executed, as in the third embodiment and variant 1 above. After that, a sudden start effect for the time-saving game state is executed, and the activation of the stored time-saving game state is announced.

<Modification 5>
A fifth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 275 to 282. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned variants 3 and 4, transitions were made in an order corresponding to the order in which multiple reserved time reductions occurred during the time-shortened game state, but in this variant, transitions are made in a different order. Note that, as with variant 3 above, the upper limit on the number of reserved sudden time-shortened game states is set to the same number as the number of types of sudden time-shortened game states. The configuration of this variant is explained in detail below.

<About sudden time-saving gameplay>
The sudden time-shortening gaming state according to this modified example is the same as the sudden time-shortening gaming state according to the modified example 2 (FIG. 256(a)). Explaining this with reference to FIG. 256(a), the sudden time-shortening gaming states A to C according to this modified example have different expected winning values for the second operating port 63, and specifically, the expected winning values are configured to increase in the order of sudden time-shortening gaming state C < sudden time-shortening gaming state B < sudden time-shortening gaming state A. Note that an example of a configuration for achieving such a relationship between the expected winning values has been described in the modified example 2 above, and therefore will not be described here.

In addition, the maximum number of times for sudden time-saving game states A to C is the same, and is set to 100 times, for example. It is not essential to have a common maximum number of times; the maximum number of times for sudden time-saving game states A to C may be different, as in Variation 3 above.

<Regarding the various counter areas 314d>
The various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 275. As shown in Fig. 275(a), the various counter areas 314d include a time-shortened game state counter area 610 set as an area for counting the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state. This time-shortened game state counter area 610 includes an executed time-shortened area 611 for counting the remaining number of times in the currently-held time-shortened game state, and a reserved time-shortened area 612 for counting the remaining number of times in the reserved time-shortened game state.

Multiple counter areas are set up in the reserved time-saving area 612, and specifically, the number of counter areas is set up to correspond to the number of types of sudden time-saving game states. In other words, three counter areas are set up: a first reserved time-saving area 612a, a second reserved time-saving area 612b, and a third reserved time-saving area 612c.

As shown in FIG. 275(b), each of these reserved time-saving areas 612a-612c is associated with a type of sudden time-saving game state. Specifically, the first reserved time-saving area 612a is a counter area for sudden time-saving game state A, the second reserved time-saving area 612b is a counter area for sudden time-saving game state B, and the third reserved time-saving area 612c is a counter area for sudden time-saving game state C.

In addition, a priority is set for each reserved time-shortening area 612a-612c. In Figure 275(b), the smaller the number, the higher the priority, and the priority is set in the following order: third reserved time-shortening area 612c for sudden time-shortening game state C < second reserved time-shortening area 612b for sudden time-shortening game state B < first reserved time-shortening area 612a for sudden time-shortening game state A.

The configuration for associating the types of time-saving game states and setting priorities for each reserved time-saving area 612a-612c is not particularly limited, but can be done, for example, by storing such association and priority information in a specified area of ROM 313 or by incorporating it into the control program.

The above configuration sets priorities for the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c (storage areas of the various counter areas 314d). However, since each of these areas corresponds one-to-one with the type of sudden time-saving game state, it can also be said that priorities are set for sudden time-saving game states A to C.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not a game state has suddenly entered the time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 276(a). This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not a game state has suddenly entered the time-saving game state in Fig. 227(a). In Fig. 276(a), the same process as in Fig. 227(a) is assigned the same step number, and its description will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If no support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is a normal game state, in step Sc1403, a flag for starting a sudden time-saving mode is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If step Sc1402 returns a positive result (if one of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, the reservation process is executed in step Sc6101, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation processing in step Sc6101 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 277(a).

First, in step Sc6201, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In this modified example, reservation flags A to C are set corresponding to the sudden time-saving game states A to C, and for example, when reservation flag C is set in the various flag storage area 314e, it indicates that the sudden time-saving game state C is on hold.

If no reservation flags are set, i.e., if there are no reserved time reductions, proceed to step Sc6202 and set the reservation flag corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result A, set reservation flag A.

In step Sc6203, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the current special miss result is set in the reserved time-shortened area 612 in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the above value is set in the area for the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the current special miss result, among the first reserved time-shortened area 612a to the third reserved time-shortened area 612c. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result C, as shown in FIG. 276(b), a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times the sudden time-shortened game state C can be played (e.g., 100 times) is set in the third reserved time-shortened area 612c for the sudden time-shortened game state C.

In step Sc6204, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the reservation processing is terminated. The reserved command notifies that a reservation for the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command includes information indicating the type of time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state.

If step Sc6201 returns a positive result (if any of the reservation flags are set), i.e., if a reserved time-saving mode exists, proceed to step Sc6205, where it is determined whether a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is currently reserved. In this step, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced, and if a reservation flag corresponding to the type of the current special miss result has already been set, it is recognized that a time-saving game state of the same type is currently reserved.

If the same type of time-saving game state is not reserved, the processing of steps Sc6202 to Sc6204 is executed. That is, a reservation flag corresponding to this special miss result is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of sudden time-saving game states corresponding to this special miss result is set in the corresponding area among the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c.

If step Sc6205 returns a positive result (if the same type of time-saving game state is reserved), proceed to step Sc6206, where the value in the corresponding reserved time-saving area 612 is rewritten. That is, the counter value in the corresponding reserved time-saving area 612 is reset to a value corresponding to the maximum number of times. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state C is reserved and the current special miss result is special miss result C, as shown in Figures 277 (b1) and (b2), the counter value in the third reserved time-saving area 612c is changed to a value corresponding to the maximum number of times. This increases the remaining number of times for the reserved sudden time-saving game state C; in other words, the period for which the sudden time-saving game state C can be reserved is extended. After step Sc6206 is executed, the reservation processing ends.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process in this modified example is the same as the variable display time setting process in the above modified example 3. Explained with reference to FIG. 263, when no reservation flags are set (when a negative judgment is made in step Sc4502), that is, when a special miss result occurs when the time-saving game state is not suddenly reserved, variable display time table A for special miss (FIG. 232(b)) is acquired as the variable display time table for this time. Only variable pattern Z1 (special reach miss A effect) is set as a selectable variable pattern in this variable display time table A, and a lottery process (step Sc1607) for the variable display time is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special reach miss A effect is selected.

Furthermore, if any of the reservation flags is set (if a positive judgment is made in step Sc4502), that is, if a special miss result occurs while the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved, the special miss variable display time table B (Figure 232 (c)) is obtained as the current variable display time table. This variable display time table B has variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) or variable pattern Z2 (special reach miss B effect) set as selectable variable patterns, and a lottery process for the variable display time (step Sc1607) is executed so that the variable pattern corresponding to the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect is selected.

If a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, there are two possibilities: a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is not reserved, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss result is reserved; or a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result has already been reserved, and a value corresponding to the upper limit number of plays is reset in the corresponding reserved time-saving area 612. In this modified example, in either case, the variable display time table B is used to draw the variable display time (variable pattern). That is, for the first win with a special miss result while in the time-saving game state, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, clearly indicating that a special miss result has occurred; however, for the second or subsequent wins, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect, and the special miss result is not clearly indicated.

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The high frequency support mode update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 278. This process is executed in step Sc710 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222), and is executed instead of the high frequency support mode update process in Fig. 226. In Fig. 278, the same steps as those in Fig. 226 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If step Sc1302 returns a positive result (if one of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is a time-shortened game state (normal time-shortened game state or sudden time-shortened game state), proceed to step Sc6301 and update the counter value SC in the execution time-shortened area 561 provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the counter value SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times the player is currently in the time-shortened game state. In this case, the remaining number can be considered the remaining number of special game plays that can be played while the player is in the time-shortened game state.

In step Sc6302, it is determined whether the updated counter value SC is "0." If the counter value SC is "0," that is, if the number of times the game has been played in the time-saving game state during the current stay has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1305, where a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

After step Sc1305 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc6302 (if the counter value SC is not "0"), step Sc6303 determines whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the reservation flags have been set, i.e., if the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, proceed to step Sc6304 and update the counter value YC in the reserved time-shortening area 612 provided in the various counter area 314d.

For more information on step Sc6304, the counter value YC is decremented by 1 for the first reserved time-shortening area 612a to the third reserved time-shortening area 612c for areas where a maximum number of plays is set (areas where the value is not "0"). For example, if the first reserved time-shortening area 612a and the second reserved time-shortening area 612b are areas where the counter value YC is not "0", the counter value YC is updated for each of those areas. This decrements the remaining number of plays for each reserved time-shortening game state. Note that for areas where the counter value is already "0" when step Sc6304 is executed (third reserved time-shortening area 612c in the above example), the counter value YC remains at "0".

In step Sc6305, it is determined whether any of the areas for which the counter value YC was updated in step Sc6304 has an updated value of "0." If any area has an updated value of "0," the process proceeds to step Sc6306, where the reservation flag for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that area is cleared.

For example, if the counter value in the first reserved time-saving area 562a is updated and the value becomes "0," the reservation flag A corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A is cleared. This ends the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state A. Note that, since the reserved state ends when the counter value YC becomes "0," the counter value YC (remaining number of reserved time-saving times) updated in step Sc6304 above can be said to be the remaining number of special game times that allow the reserved state to continue. After step Sc6306 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6303 (no reservation flags are set), there is no need to update the reserved time-saving area, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc6304 and beyond. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc6305 (no area has an updated value of "0"), the reserved sudden time-saving game state will continue to be reserved, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process in step Sc6306.

<First transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 279. This process is executed in step Sc511 of the special game play control process (Fig. 220), and is executed in place of the first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in Fig. 235. In Fig. 279, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Fig. 235, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc6401, it is determined whether any reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If no reservation flags have been set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved, it proceeds to step Sc1802, where it is determined whether a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation dictates a transition to a sudden time-saving game state, proceed to step Sc1803, and the support B flag corresponding to that type is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A, the support B1 flag is set.

In step Sc6402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the execution time reduction area 611 provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The execution time reduction area 611 is a counter area that allows the MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in the time-shortened gaming state during the current state. In step Sc1805, the sudden time-shortened start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc6401 (if any of the reservation flags is set), that is, if the sudden time-shortened game state is currently reserved, the second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed in step Sc6403. The second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is a process for transitioning from the sudden time-shortened game state that was set to the reserved state.

<Second transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition processing of the sudden time-saving gaming state in step Sc6403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 280 (a).

First, in step Sc6501, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed when the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved (YES in step Sc6401). Since such a reservation occurs while the player is in the time-shortened game state, the process of step Sc6501 essentially determines whether the current time-shortened game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current time-saving game state has ended, proceed to step Sc6502, where the sudden time-saving game state with the highest priority among the reserved sudden time-saving game states is identified. Specifically, among the first reserved time-saving area 612a through the third reserved time-saving area 612c provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314, the highest priority area is identified from among the areas whose counter value is not "0" (areas where the remaining number of plays is being counted), and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the identified area is identified as the sudden time-saving game state with the highest priority. For example, if the counter values are not "0" in the second reserved time-saving area 612b and the third reserved time-saving area 612c, sudden time-saving game state B corresponding to the second reserved time-saving area 612b, which has the highest priority, is identified as the sudden time-saving game state with the highest priority.

It is also possible to set priorities for reserved flags, and identify the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the highest priority based on those priorities. For example, by setting the same priority as the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c for reserved flags A to C, and identifying the reserved flag with the highest priority from among the reserved flags set in the various flag storage area 314e, it is possible to identify the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the highest priority.

In step Sc6503, the B flag corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state identified in step Sc6502 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the identified sudden time-saving game state is sudden time-saving game state B, the support B2 flag is set.

In step Sc6504, the counter value of the area with the highest priority is shifted to the execution time reduction area 611 for areas in the first reserved time reduction area 612a to the third reserved time reduction area 612c whose counter value is not "0". For example, as shown in FIG. 280(b), if the counter value is not "0" in the second reserved time reduction area 612b and the third reserved time reduction area 612c, the counter value of the second reserved time reduction area 612b is shifted to the execution time reduction area 611.

In this way, in this modified example, when the current time-shortened game state ends, the support B flag is set for the sudden time-shortened game state that is set to the highest priority among the sudden time-shortened game states reserved at that time, and the counter value in the reserved time-shortened area 612 that is set to the highest priority is set in the executed time-shortened area 611. In other words, when multiple sudden time-shortened game states are reserved, the order of transition is determined based on predetermined priorities.

Here, the counter value YC in the second reserved time-saving area 612ba is updated along with the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 611 during the current time-saving game state, and is decremented by one for each special game. Therefore, the counter value YC when the shift is made is the remaining number of times when a special miss result is won during the current time-saving game state, minus the original upper limit of the number of times for the sudden time-saving game state that is reserved as a result of that win. In other words, it is the same as the differential number of times in the third embodiment and variant 1, etc.

In step Sc6505, of the reserved flags set in the various flag storage area 314e, the reserved flag corresponding to the reserved time-saving mode identified in step Sc6502 is cleared. In the following step Sc6506, a sudden time-saving gaming state start command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143, and then the second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc6501 (if any support flag is set), that is, if the game is currently in the time-shortened game state, the transition for the reserved time-shortened game state will not be implemented, and the processing for the second transition to the time-shortened game state will suddenly end without executing the processing from step Sc6502 onwards.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figures 281 and 282. Here, an example is shown in which special miss results occur multiple times in the normal time-saving game state in the order of special miss result C, special miss result B, special miss result A, and special miss result B. For convenience, the explanation will be given assuming that the upper limit of the normal time-saving game state is 100 times.

When there is no reserved time-saving during normal time-saving play, if a special miss result C occurs, for example, on the 10th special symbol play (timing t1), a reservation flag C is set, and the sudden time-saving play state C is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 281 (b) and (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 282 (a), a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times the sudden time-saving play state C can be played (e.g., 100 times) is set in the third reserved time-saving area 612c of the time-saving play state counter area 610. The counter value in the third reserved time-saving area 612c is updated each time a special symbol play is played during the normal time-saving play state (Fig. 281 (d)). In other words, the counter value (the remaining number of reserved time-saving plays) is decremented in parallel with the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 611 (corresponding to the remaining number of times the normal time-saving play state is played during the current play).

In a special symbol game where the special miss result C is reached, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has occurred. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result C.

Furthermore, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is reserved.

After that, for example, if a special miss result B occurs on the 30th special symbol play (timing t2) in the above-mentioned normal time-saving play state, the reservation flag B is set and the sudden time-saving play state B is placed on hold (Fig. 281(b), (e)). Also, as shown in Fig. 282(b), a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times the sudden time-saving play state B has been played (e.g., 100 times) is set in the second reserved time-saving area 612b of the time-saving play state counter area 610. The counter value in the second reserved time-saving area 612b is also updated each time a special symbol play is played in the normal time-saving play state during the current state (Fig. 281(f)).

In the above case, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved in response to a win on the special miss result, but in the special symbol game turn in which the special miss result B is achieved, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect. In other words, the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult for them to recognize that a new reservation has occurred. Furthermore, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result B.

After that, for example, if a special miss result A occurs on the 60th special symbol play (timing t3) in the normal time-shortened play state, a reservation flag A is set and the sudden time-shortened play state A is placed on hold (Fig. 281 (b) and (g)). Also, as shown in Fig. 282 (c), a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times the sudden time-shortened play state A has been played (e.g., 100 times) is set in the first reserved time-shortened area 612a of the time-shortened play state counter area 610. The counter value in the first reserved time-shortened area 612a is updated, like the other areas, each time a special symbol play is played in the normal time-shortened play state (Fig. 281 (h)).

In the above case, in the special symbol game where the special miss result A is achieved, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect or a special reach miss effect B, and the fact that the special miss result has occurred will not be made clear. Furthermore, the special symbol display unit 43 will stop and display the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

After that, for example, suppose that special miss result B occurs on the 80th special play (timing t4) in the normal time-saving play state. This means that special miss result B occurs again while sudden time-saving play state B is already reserved. In this case, while the reserved state of sudden time-saving play state B continues (Figure 281 (e)), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is reset in the second reserved time-saving area 612b (Figure 278 (d)). In other words, the counter value in the second reserved time-saving area 612b is restored to the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times, and the remaining number of times in the reserved sudden time-saving play state B increases.

In a special symbol game in which the special miss result B is re-won, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred will not be made clear. The special symbol display unit 43 will also display a stop result corresponding to the special miss result B.

After that, on the 100th special chart play, the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display begins (timing t5), the support flag is cleared based on the value of the execution time-saving area 611 being "0," and the normal time-saving play state that was in effect ends. In this case, the reserved time-saving area 612 in the various counter areas 314d is referenced, and a transition is made to the sudden time-saving play state with the highest priority among the reserved sudden time-saving play states.

Specifically, the support B1 flag corresponding to the sudden time-shortened game state A is set, and the counter value in the first reserved time-shortened game state area 612a in the time-shortened game state counter area 610 (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-shortened game state A) is shifted to the executed time-shortened game state 611 (Fig. 282 (e)). In other words, although it is not the first to win the special miss result, the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state A, which has the highest priority, is carried out before other sudden time-shortened game states (Fig. 281 (i)).

After the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state A, at timing t6 before the end of state A, when the counter value in the third reserved time-shortened area 612c (corresponding to the remaining number of plays in the sudden time-shortened game state C) becomes "0," the reservation flag C is cleared (Fig. 281 (c), (d)). This ends the reserved state of the sudden time-shortened game state C. In this case, because the player is currently in the sudden time-shortened game state A, the player does not suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state C. In other words, the reserved state ends without the player transitioning to the sudden time-shortened game state C. At this time, no notification corresponding to the end of the reserved state is made, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to recognize the end.

When the sudden time-shortened game state A ends at timing t7, the reserved time-shortened game state area 612 in the various counter areas 314d is referenced, and a transition to the sudden time-shortened game state with the highest priority among the reserved sudden time-shortened game states is made. At this time, because sudden time-shortened game state B has the highest priority, a transition to sudden time-shortened game state B is made.

In other words, the support B2 flag corresponding to the sudden time-shortened game state B is set, and the counter value of the second reserved time-shortened area 612b in the time-shortened game state counter area 610 (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-shortened game state A) is shifted to the execution time-shortened area 611 (Fig. 282 (f)). The counter value of the second reserved time-shortened area 612b becomes the difference number B (20 times), which is the sum of the remaining number of times in the normal time-shortened game state at the time of re-winning the special miss result B (20 times) and the difference number A (60 times) above, subtracted from the upper limit number of times (100 times) for the sudden time-shortened game state B.

After the sudden transition to time-saving game state B, if the result of the special symbol lottery on the 20th special symbol game is a normal miss, and the timing at which the confirmation display begins (timing t8) arrives, time-saving game state B suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a time-saving game state ending effect.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

A priority is set in advance for each of the sudden time-saving game states A through C (multiple types of time-saving game states that can be reserved), and when multiple reservations are made, transitions occur in the order corresponding to the priority. In this case, regardless of the order of winning the special miss result, transitions can be made in the order corresponding to the type of sudden time-saving game state, making it possible to set the transition order based on the characteristics of each sudden time-saving game state. For example, as in this modified example, by increasing the priority of sudden time-saving game state A, which has a high expected value of winning at second operating port 63, it is possible to speed up the activation order of sudden time-saving game state A when there are multiple reserved time-saving states. This makes it possible to quickly reach a state where it is easier to win the special symbol lottery and minimize the loss of balls in your possession, resulting in a configuration that is easier for players to play.

It is also expected to have the effect of reducing the workload when designing gaming machines. In other words, if the transition order for every combination of time-saving play states that can be reserved were to be specified in the control program one by one, the greater the number of combinations, the more complex the control program would become, raising concerns that this would lead to an increased workload. In contrast, by using priorities to control the transition order, it is sufficient to set a priority for each time-saving play state, simplifying the control program. Furthermore, even if design changes are required after the fact, a complete overhaul of the control program is not required; simply changing the priority settings is sufficient. In other words, there is also the advantage that requests for design changes, such as changing the transition order or adding time-saving play states, can be easily accommodated.

If a special miss occurs during a time-shortened game state, a counter value corresponding to the maximum number of reserved time-shortened games based on that result is set in reserved time-shortened game area 612, and each time a game is played, the counter value in reserved time-shortened game area 612 is updated along with the counter value in executed time-shortened game area 611. In this case, the remaining number of games in the active time-shortened game state and the remaining number of games in the reserved time-shortened game state can be updated in parallel, making it possible to manage the remaining number of games in both time-shortened game states simultaneously.

In particular, in a configuration that controls the transition order based on priority, if a special miss result corresponding to a time-saving game state with a higher priority than the reserved time-saving game state is won, the transition order will change and the transition timing will fluctuate, which raises concerns that the process of deriving the differential number of times for each reserved time-saving state will become complicated. In this regard, this configuration makes it possible to easily derive the differential number of times for each reserved time-saving state.

The reserved time-saving areas 612a-612c are assigned to the types of sudden time-saving game states A-C, and priorities are set for these reserved time-saving areas 612a-612c. In this case, by shifting the update result of the highest-priority reserved time-saving area 612 in which the counter value is set at the end of the stay time-saving period to the execution time-saving area 611, transition control can be easily performed in order according to priority.

<Modification 6>
A sixth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 283 to 291. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned variant 5, priority is set for the sudden time-saving game state (a time-saving game state in which reserve is possible), but in this variant, priority is set to include other time-saving game states. Note that the maximum number of reserved sudden time-saving game states is set to the same number as the number of types of sudden time-saving game states, as in the above-mentioned variant 5. The configuration of this variant is explained in detail below.

<About time-saving game mode>
The time-shortening game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 283 and 284. As shown in Figure 283(a), in this modified example, the time-shortening game states are set to a normal time-shortening game state, a sudden time-shortening game state A, and a sudden time-shortening game state B. It is not essential to have one type of normal time-shortening game state or two types of sudden time-shortening game states; as in the above modified example 1, there may be two or more types of normal time-shortening game states, or three or more types of sudden time-shortening game states.

In each of the above time-saving game states, there is a difference in the expected value of winning through the second operating port 63. Specifically, the expected value of winning through the second operating port 63 in sudden time-saving game state A is configured to be higher than in the normal time-saving game state and sudden time-saving game state B. The configuration for achieving this relationship in the expected values of winning is not particularly limited, and can be achieved, for example, by configuring the normal game play and the opening and closing game of the device in each time-saving game state as shown in Figure 284.

As shown in Figure 284(a), the probability of winning a support prize is made equal in each time-shortened play state, and the variable display time for normal game play in sudden time-shortened play state A is made shorter than that in the normal time-shortened play state and sudden time-shortened play state B, so that the number of support prize wins per unit time (number of support lotteries executed) in sudden time-shortened play state A is greater than in the other time-shortened play states. Also, as shown in Figure 284(b), the opening period of the normal electric device 63a in sudden time-shortened play state A is made longer than that in the normal time-shortened play state and sudden time-shortened play state B, so that the period during which a prize can be won through the second operating port 63 when a device opening/closing game is performed in sudden time-shortened play state A is longer than in the other time-shortened play states.

The above configuration makes it most likely that sudden time-saving game state A will occur when a ball enters the second operating port 63. In this case, it becomes easier to receive prize balls more frequently when a ball enters the second operating port 63, so the player can take part in a lottery to determine whether they will win or lose the second special design corresponding to the second operating port 63 while optimally minimizing the loss of balls in their possession, resulting in the most advantageous time-saving game state (the most desirable time-saving game state) for the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 283(a), the upper limit number of times for the normal time-shortened game state is configured to be greater than that for the sudden time-shortened game state A and the sudden time-shortened game state B. For example, the upper limit number of times for the normal time-shortened game state is set to 150 times, and the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-shortened game state A and the sudden time-shortened game state B is set to 100 times. Note that it is not necessarily necessary to have different upper limits number of times, and the upper limit number of times for these time-shortened game states may be configured to be equal.

As shown in Figure 283 (b), priorities are set for each of the normal time-shortened game state, sudden time-shortened game state A, and sudden time-shortened game state B. In Figure 283 (b), the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority, and the priorities are set so that the ranking is highest in the order of sudden time-shortened game state B < normal time-shortened game state < sudden time-shortened game state A. The priority information indicating these priorities is stored in the priority information storage area 551 (Figure 256 (b)) of ROM 313 in association with the type of time-shortened game state.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 285. This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered in Fig. 276(a). In Fig. 285, the same process as in Fig. 276(a) is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If any support flag is set, i.e., if the current game state is a time-shortened game state, proceed to step Sc6801, where it is determined whether the time-shortened game state (corresponding time-shortened) corresponding to this special miss result is the same type as the current time-shortened game state (stay time-shortened). More specifically, the types of corresponding time-shortened and stay time-shortened are determined based on the special miss type flag and support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e, and it is determined whether these determined types match. For example, if special miss result A (a special miss result corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state A) occurs while the player is in the normal time-shortened game state, a negative judgment is made in this step; and if special miss result B (a special miss result corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state B) occurs while the player is in sudden time-shortened game state B, a positive judgment is made in this step.

If the corresponding time reduction is not the same type of time-reduced play state as the stay time reduction, the priority of the stay time reduction is determined in step Sc6802. Specifically, the priority information storage area 551 of RAM 314 is referenced, and the priority of the stay time reduction is determined based on the type of stay time reduction determined in step Sc6801 above.

In step Sc6803, the priority of the time reduction is determined. Specifically, the priority information storage area 551 is referenced, and the priority of the time reduction is determined based on the type of time reduction determined in step Sc6801.

In step Sc6804, the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6802 is compared with the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6803, and it is determined whether the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction. If the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, in step Sc1403 a flag for starting sudden time reduction is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the determination of whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated. The flag for starting sudden time reduction is used by MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the sudden time-shortened game state should be made, and in this case it indicates that a transition to the responsive time reduction should be implemented.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6804 (if the priority of the corresponding time reduction is not higher than the priority of the stay time reduction), the reservation process is executed in step Sc6101, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-shortened game state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc6801 (if the corresponding time reduction is the same type of time-shortened game state as the stay time reduction), proceed to step Sc6101 and execute the reservation processing. In other words, if a special miss result occurs that corresponds to the same type of time-shortened game state as the stay time reduction, control is performed so that the time-shortened game state (corresponding time reduction) corresponding to the special miss result is placed in a reservation state.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 286. This process is executed in step Sc712 of the variable start process (Fig. 222), and is executed in place of the variable display time setting process in Fig. 263. In Fig. 286, the same steps as in Fig. 263 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, step Sc6901 determines whether the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special loss result. If the result is a special loss result, proceed to step Sc602, and determine whether a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the current game state is a time-saving game state and the time-saving start flag is suddenly set, it means that the game should transition to a time-saving game state (corresponding time-saving) corresponding to a special miss result that was won during the time-saving state. In this case, proceed to step Sc6903, and obtain variable display time table A for special misses (Figure 232 (b)) as the variable display time table for this time. In this variable display time table A, only variable pattern Z1 (special reach miss A presentation) is set as a selectable variable pattern.

Therefore, if a special miss result corresponding to a time-saving game state with a higher priority than the current time-saving mode is won during the time-saving mode, a lottery process for the variable display time (step Sc1607) is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special reach miss A effect is selected. In other words, the special reach miss A effect is executed in the special game round in which the special miss result is won, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is controlled so that it is announced.

If step Sc6902 judges negative (the sudden time-saving start flag is not set), that is, if the priority of the time-saving game state (corresponding time saving) corresponding to the special miss result won during the time-saving play is the same as or lower than the time-saving play, proceed to step Sc6904, and obtain the variable display time table B for the special miss (Figure 232 (c)) as the variable display time table for this time. This variable display time table B has variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) or variable pattern Z2 (special reach miss B effect) set as selectable variable patterns, and if the priority of the corresponding time saving corresponding to this special miss result is lower than the priority of the time-saving play, a lottery process for the variable display time (step Sc1607) is executed to select the variable pattern corresponding to the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect. In other words, the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not made clear.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6901 (if the result is not a special miss), this means that the result is a jackpot or a normal miss. In this case, proceed to step Sc4505, and obtain the variable display time table for the corresponding time-saving game state. Specifically, if the result of this win/loss lottery is a jackpot, the variable display time table for the jackpot (Figure 232 (a)) is obtained, and if the result of this win/loss lottery is a normal miss, the variable display time table for the normal miss (Figure 232 (d)) is obtained.

After step Sc6903, step Sc6904, or step Sc4505 is executed, step Sc1607 uses the dynamic display time table obtained in each step to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variable pattern). Then, step Sc1608 and subsequent steps are executed.

<First transition process for sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 287. This process is executed in step Sc511 of the special game play control process (Fig. 220), and is executed in place of the first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in Fig. 279. In Fig. 287, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to those in Fig. 279, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc7101, it is determined whether a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the sudden time-saving start flag has been set, i.e., if the situation is such that a sudden transition to a time-saving game state is required, it is determined in step Sc7102 whether any support flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If any of the support flags is set, i.e., if the current game state is a time-shortened game state, this means that a special miss result corresponding to a time-shortened game state with a higher priority has been won in the time-shortened game state. In this case, proceed to step Sc7103, and clear the set support flag, i.e., the support flag for the time-shortened play. This ends the time-shortened play. In this way, if a special miss result corresponding to a corresponding time-shortened play with a higher priority is won in the middle of the time-shortened play, in other words, if the priority of the time-shortened play is lower than the corresponding time-shortened play that was won in the middle, the time-shortened play will be forcibly terminated.

After step Sc7103 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7102 (if no support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state), proceed to step Sc1803 and set the support B flag for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A, the support B1 flag is set.

If the current special miss result occurs in a situation where the time-saving game state is active (if a positive judgment is made in step Sc7102), the time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result will be immediately initiated after the time-saving game state is terminated. In other words, if a special miss result corresponding to a time-saving game state with a higher priority is won midway, the corresponding time-saving game state will be implemented by interrupting the time-saving game state.

In step Sc6402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the execution time reduction area 611 provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The execution time reduction area 611 is a counter area that allows the MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state during the current game. In step Sc1805, the sudden time-shortened game state start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-shortened game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

After step Sc1806 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7101 (the sudden time-saving start flag is not set), step Sc7104 determines whether any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the reservation flags is set, that is, if the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, step Sc6403 executes the second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is a process for implementing a transition from the sudden time-saving game state that was set to a reserved state.

After step Sc6403 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7104 (if no reservation flags are set), the first transition process for the time-saving game state is suddenly terminated.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The process that occurs when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game mode will be explained with reference to Figures 288 to 292.

First, we will explain what happens when special miss result A (corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state A) occurs in a normal time-shortened game state, with reference to Figures 288 and 289. For example, if special miss result A occurs during the 110th special game play (timing t1) in the normal time-shortened game state, the priority of the normal time-shortened game state, which is a stay time-shortened game state, is compared with the priority of sudden time-shortened game state A, which is an adaptive time-shortened game state. In this case, the priority of adaptive time-shortened game state is higher than the priority of stay time-shortened game state, so a transition to adaptive time-shortened game state takes priority. In other words, the normal time-shortened game state is terminated midway, and a transition to sudden time-shortened game state A is implemented.

In a special symbol game where the special miss result A is reached, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has been reached (Fig. 289 (a)). At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

In addition, in response to switching to a time-shortened game state (sudden time-shortened game state A) in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is higher than the previous time-shortened game state (normal time-shortened game state), an upgrade effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In this modified example, a level value of the time-shortened game state is set as an indicator of the expected value of winning or its level, and in the time-shortened game state, a level notification image 621 is displayed on the symbol display device 75 as a notification corresponding to the level value. Figure 289(a) shows, as an example, a case in which level 1 is associated with the normal time-shortened game state.

In the above promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 289(b), a promotion notification image 622, such as a text display of "Level Up," is displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the level value indicated by the level notification image 621 is changed from Level 1 to Level 2 (a higher level). This notifies the player that the time-saving game state has been upgraded.

The promotion effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special symbol game that resulted in special miss result A, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the promotion effect may be executed after erasing the image of the frozen symbol array Z1 to Z3, or the image of the symbol array Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and the promotion notification image 622 may be placed in front of the symbol array Z1 to Z3. When executing the promotion effect using the variable display time, it is recommended that the promotion effect start after the symbol array Z1 to Z3 are frozen and displayed in a combination that results in a special miss.

After the promotion effect is executed as described above, the level notification image 621 indicating level 2 will continue to be displayed in the next and subsequent special game rounds (Figure 289 (c)). The display of the level notification image 621 indicating level 2 will continue while the player is in the sudden time-saving game state A.

In the above case, the remaining number of times image 523, which indicates the remaining number of times in the time-shortened play state, is displayed to indicate a value that does not correspond to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-shortened play state A. In more detail, it is displayed to indicate a value that corresponds to the remaining number of times if the normal time-shortened play state had continued without being terminated, based on the maximum number of times in the normal time-shortened play state.

For example, if a sudden transition to time-saving game state A occurs on the 110th special symbol play (40 play times remaining) in the normal time-saving game state, the remaining number of play times image 523 will be displayed to notify "39 play times remaining" on the first special symbol play time in the sudden time-saving game state A (the 111th special symbol play time since the start of the normal time-saving game state). This gives the player the impression that the normal time-saving game state has leveled up midway through, and that this leveled-up state can continue within the upper limit of the number of play times for the normal time-saving game state.

After that, when the 150th special symbol play has been played since the start of the normal play mode (timing t2), the remaining play count image 523 will display "Last," and that special symbol play will be announced as if it were the final play of the time-saving play mode (Fig. 289 (d)). Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery for that play mode is a normal miss, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be displayed in a complete miss combination, and the normal miss result will be announced.

However, the above-mentioned special symbol play round is internally a play round during the sudden time-saving play state A (the 40th special symbol play round since the start of the sudden time-saving play state A), and the time-saving play state continues thereafter. Correspondingly, the symbol display device 75 displays the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 as a completely unsuccessful combination, and then executes a continuation effect. In the continuation effect, a continuation notification image 623, such as a display image of "Not yet!", is displayed on the symbol display device 75, thereby notifying the continuation of the time-saving play state (Fig. 289 (e)).

The continuation effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special symbol play, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the promotion effect may be executed after erasing the images of the frozen symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or the promotion notification image 622 may be placed in front of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 without erasing the images of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, in the next special game, the remaining number of times image 523 will be displayed as "How many times remaining?", making it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize the remaining number of times (Fig. 289 (f)). In other words, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A in which the player is currently playing is not notified, and the number of times in question is kept unclear. This state will continue in subsequent special game plays. This can heighten the player's sense of excitement by making it unclear when the time-saving game state will end, and can add to the fun of playing by predicting how long the time-saving game state will last.

When the remaining number of times in time-saving game state A is suddenly made invisible, the remaining number of times image 523 may not be displayed. In other words, after a special game in which the remaining number of times image 523 displays "Last," the remaining number of times image 523 may be erased in the next special game.

After that, for example, if special miss result A occurs during the 70th special symbol play (timing t3) in the sudden time-saving game state, reservation flag A is set, and the sudden time-saving game state A corresponding to the winning of special miss result A is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 288 (b), (c)). In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated. Note that the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to special miss result A.

After that, in the final play of the sudden time-saving game state A, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the timing for the confirmation display starts (timing t4), the sudden time-saving game state A currently in effect ends. Accordingly, the reserved state of the subsequent sudden time-saving game state A that had been reserved is released, and a transition to that time-saving game state is implemented. In other words, the sudden time-saving game state A essentially continues.

In the above case, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A before the transition is made will be the difference (70 times) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times (30 times) in the preceding sudden time-saving game state A from the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) of that sudden time-saving game state A. In this case, the remaining number of times image 523 continues to display "? times remaining," and the remaining number of times is not indicated.

After transitioning to the subsequent sudden time-saving game state A, when the remaining number of special game plays that can be played in that game state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 plays) (timing t5), a remaining number image 523 showing "10 plays remaining" is displayed, and the remaining number of times that the player can remain in the time-saving state is notified (Fig. 289 (g)). In this way, by switching to a state that clearly shows the remaining number of times that the player can remain in the time-saving state as the remaining number of times that the player can remain in the time-saving state falls below the predetermined number, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from being confused by the impression that the time-saving game state has suddenly ended.

Then, when the final round of play ends in the subsequent sudden time-saving game state A (timing t5), the sudden time-saving game state A ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a time-saving game state ending effect.

Note that while the above example shows a case where special miss result A occurs in a normal time-saving game state, the same process applies if special miss result A occurs suddenly in time-saving game state B. In other words, in the special game round where special miss result A occurs, time-saving game state B is suddenly terminated and a sudden transition to time-saving game state A is implemented.

Next, we will explain what happens when a special miss occurs in the sudden time-saving game state A (corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B) with reference to Figure 290.

In this example, the current time-saving game state is sudden time-saving game state A, so the symbol display device 75 displays a level 2 level notification image 621 (Fig. 290 (e)). Then, for example, if a special miss result B occurs during the 70th special symbol game turn (timing t1) in sudden time-saving game state A, the priority of sudden time-saving game state A, which is the time-saving state, is compared with the priority of sudden time-saving game state B, which is the adaptive time-saving state. In this case, the priority of adaptive time-saving is lower than the priority of time-saving game state B, so the continuation of time-saving game state A takes priority. In other words, sudden time-saving game state A continues, and sudden time-saving game state B is placed on hold (Figs. 290 (a)-(d)).

In a special symbol game where the special miss result B is achieved, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect (Figure 290 (f)). In other words, it will be announced as if a normal miss result has occurred, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred will not be clearly indicated. However, the special symbol display unit 43 will display a stop result corresponding to the special miss result B. Note that Figure 290 (f) shows the case where the special reach miss B effect has been executed.

After that, in the final play of sudden time-saving game state A, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the timing for the start of the confirmation display (timing t2) arrives, sudden time-saving game state A ends and the player transitions to sudden time-saving game state B, which had been reserved (Fig. 290 (a)-(d)). In this case, the remaining number of plays in sudden time-saving game state B is the difference (70 plays) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of plays in sudden time-saving game state A (30 plays) from the upper limit number of plays in sudden time-saving game state B (for example, 100 plays).

At this time, in response to the switch to a time-shortened game state (sudden time-shortened game state B) in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is lower than the previous time-shortened game state (sudden time-shortened game state A), a demotion effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In this demotion effect, as shown in FIG. 290(h), a demotion notification image 624, such as a text display of "Level Down," is displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the level value indicated by the level notification image 621 is changed from level 2 to level 1 (a lower level). This notifies the player that the time-shortened game state has been downgraded.

The demotion effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special symbol play that resulted in special miss result B, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the demotion effect may be executed after erasing the images of the frozen symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or the images of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and the demotion notification image 624 may be placed in front of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Note that when the demotion effect is executed using the variable display time, it is recommended that the demotion effect be initiated after the normal miss result is announced by the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After the demotion effect is executed as described above, the level notification image 621 will continue to be displayed indicating level 1 for the next and subsequent special game rounds (Fig. 290 (i)). Furthermore, the remaining number of times image 523 will be displayed as "? times remaining," and the number of times remaining in the sudden time-saving game state B will not be made clear. Then, when the number of times remaining in the sudden time-saving game state B reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of times remaining for the stay time-saving game will be displayed as the remaining number of times image 523 shows "10 times remaining," and the remaining number of times remaining for the stay time-saving game will be notified.

After that, in the final play of the sudden time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the timing for the start of the confirmation display (timing t3) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state B ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the time-saving game state ending effect.

Next, we will explain what happens when special miss result B (corresponding to sudden time-saving game state B) occurs during normal game state, with reference to Figure 291.

In this example, since the current time-shortened game state is sudden time-shortened game state B, the symbol display device 75 displays a level 1 notification image 621 (Fig. 291 (e)). Then, for example, if a special miss result B occurs during the 68th special symbol game turn (timing t1) in the normal time-shortened game state, the priority of the normal time-shortened game state, which is the time-shortened game state, is compared with the priority of sudden time-shortened game state B, which is the adaptive time-shortened game state. In this case, since the priority of the adaptive time-shortened game state and the priority of the time-shortened game state are the same, the continuation of the time-shortened game state takes priority. In other words, the normal time-shortened game state continues, and sudden time-shortened game state B is placed on hold (Figs. 291 (a)-(d)).

In a special symbol game where the special miss result B is achieved, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect (Figure 291 (f)). In other words, it will be announced as if a normal miss result has occurred, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred will not be clearly indicated. However, the special symbol display unit 43 will display a stop result corresponding to the special miss result B. Note that Figure 291 (f) shows the case where the special reach miss B effect has been executed.

After that, in the final play of the normal time-saving play state, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the timing for the start of the confirmation display (timing t2) arrives, the normal time-saving play state that the player has been in ends, and the player transitions to the reserved sudden time-saving play state B (Fig. 291 (a)-(d)). In this case, the remaining number of plays in the sudden time-saving play state B is the difference (18 plays) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of plays in the normal time-saving play state (82 plays) from the upper limit number of plays in the sudden time-saving play state B (for example, 100 plays).

During the next special game (the first game in sudden time-saving game state B), the remaining number of times image 523 will display "How many times remaining?", and the number of times remaining in sudden time-saving game state B will not be made clear. Then, when the number of times remaining in sudden time-saving game state B reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of times image 523 will display "10 times remaining," and the number of times remaining in the time-saving state will be notified.

After that, in the final play of the sudden time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal miss, and when the timing for the start of the confirmation display (timing t3) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state B ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the time-saving game state ending effect.

At this time, in response to the switch to a time-shortened game state (sudden time-shortened game state B) in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is lower than the previous time-shortened game state (sudden time-shortened game state A), a demotion effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In this demotion effect, as shown in FIG. 291(h), a demotion notification image 624, such as a text display of "Level Down," is displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the level value indicated by the level notification image 621 is changed from level 2 to level 1 (a lower level). This notifies the player that the time-shortened game state has been downgraded.

The demotion effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special symbol play that resulted in special miss result B, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the demotion effect may be executed after erasing the images of the frozen symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or the images of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and the demotion notification image 624 may be placed in front of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Note that when the demotion effect is executed using the variable display time, it is recommended that the demotion effect be initiated after the normal miss result is announced by the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After the demotion effect is executed as described above, the level notification image 621 will continue to be displayed indicating level 1 for the next and subsequent special game rounds (Figure 291 (i)). Furthermore, the remaining number of times image 523 will be displayed as "? times remaining," and the number of times remaining in time-saving game state B will suddenly become unclear.

After that, after a sudden transition to time-saving game state B, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the final play is a normal miss, and the timing at which the confirmation display begins (timing t3) arrives, time-saving game state B suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a time-saving game state ending effect.

Note that while the above example shows a case where special failure result B occurs in a normal time-saving game state, the same process applies when special failure result B occurs in a sudden time-saving game state B. In other words, the sudden time-saving game state B that was in effect during the special game turn that resulted in special failure result B continues, and the subsequent sudden time-saving game state B is placed on hold.

Here, the continuation and switching of the time-saving gaming state in the configuration of this modified example is summarized as shown in Figure 292.

If a special miss result A occurs during normal time-shortened play (event A), the priority of the sudden time-shortened play state A corresponding to special miss result A is higher than the priority of the normal time-shortened play state, so the normal time-shortened play state is terminated and a transition to the sudden time-shortened play state A is executed.

If a special miss result B occurs during normal time-shortened play (event B), the priority of the sudden time-shortened play state B corresponding to special miss result B is lower than the priority of the normal time-shortened play state, so the normal time-shortened play state continues and the sudden time-shortened play state B is placed on hold. In this case, after the normal time-shortened play state ends due to reaching the upper limit number of plays, a transition to the sudden time-shortened play state B is implemented.

If a special miss occurs in sudden time-saving game state A (event C), because the priority of sudden time-saving game state B is lower than the priority of sudden time-saving game state A, sudden time-saving game state A continues and sudden time-saving game state B is placed on hold. In this case, after sudden time-saving game state A ends due to reaching the upper limit, a transition to sudden time-saving game state B is implemented.

If a special miss result A occurs while in sudden time-saving game state B (event D), the priority of sudden time-saving game state A is higher than the priority of sudden time-saving game state B, so sudden time-saving game state B is terminated midway and a transition to sudden time-saving game state A is executed.

By the way, if a normal jackpot occurs while in sudden time-saving play state A or sudden time-saving play state B, a transition to the open/close execution mode will be executed regardless of the priority between the sudden time-saving play state and the normal time-saving play state, and after that mode ends, a transition to the normal time-saving play state will be executed.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The priority order is set so that sudden time-saving game state B < normal time-saving game state < sudden time-saving game state A. If special miss result B occurs while in normal game state, the transition to sudden time-saving game state B is reserved as a restriction on the transition. If special miss result A occurs while in normal time-saving game state, the transition to sudden time-saving game state A is immediately made without the above restriction. In other words, because the transition is either restricted or not depending on the combination of the type of time-saving stay and the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result won during the game, the subsequent development of the game can differ depending on the combination. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also which combination will result, increasing the game's enjoyment.

In the above case, by increasing the priority of sudden time-saving game state A, which has a high expected value of winning at second operating port 63, if the combination of the current time-saving game state and the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result that was won during the game increases the likelihood of winning at second operating port 63, it is possible to suddenly transition to time-saving game state A without any restrictions. In other words, it is possible to quickly reach a state where it is easier to win the special symbol lottery and to minimize the loss of balls in hand, resulting in a configuration that is easy for players to play.

If a special miss result A occurs during normal time-saving play and the game suddenly transitions to time-saving play state A, the remaining number of plays image 523 displays the number of plays remaining as if the normal time-saving play state had continued. This makes it appear as if the normal time-saving play state continues even after the sudden transition to time-saving play state A, giving the impression that the previous time-saving play state has been upgraded by winning the special miss result. Furthermore, by subsequently displaying "? plays remaining" as the remaining number of plays image 523, the player is made to feel a sense of excitement that this upgraded state may come to an end, which can favorably increase interest.

<Modification 7>
A sixth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 293 to 298. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned variants 5 and 6, the time-saving game states are set to a normal time-saving game state and a sudden time-saving game state, but in this variant, a ceiling time-saving game state is also set. The configuration of this variant is explained in detail below.

<About time-saving game mode>
The time-saving game state according to this modified example will be explained with reference to Fig. 293. As described above, this modified example has a ceiling time-saving game state as one type of time-saving game state. As shown in Fig. 293(a), this ceiling time-saving game state is entered when the cumulative number of times (so-called "stuck" times) of special game plays that have resulted in a losing lottery result (losing game plays) reaches a predetermined ceiling number (e.g., 800 times).

When counting missing plays, if a jackpot occurs before the maximum number of plays is reached, the remaining number of plays until the maximum number of plays is reset to the initial value (e.g., 800 plays), and the number of missing plays up to that point is discarded. Furthermore, missing plays during high probability play states are not counted. Therefore, to transition to the ceiling time-saving play state, the number of missing plays after the end of the open/close execution mode must reach the maximum number of plays. Furthermore, if the state transitions to high probability play states after the open/close execution mode, the number of missing plays after the end of the high probability play state must reach the maximum number of plays.

In the ceiling time-saving play state, like the sudden time-saving play state, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the second high frequency support mode. Note that because the trigger for transitioning to the ceiling time-saving play state is a miss result, the transition to the ceiling time-saving play state occurs without going through the open/close execution mode. In other words, when the number of miss play times reaches the ceiling number, the play state transitions to the ceiling time-saving play state as that special symbol play time ends. The ceiling time-saving play state continues until the number of special symbol play times executed since transitioning to the ceiling time-saving play state reaches the predetermined upper limit.

As shown in Figure 293 (b), there are differences in the expected value of winning into the second actuation port 63 between the ceiling time-shortened game state, the normal time-shortened game state, the sudden time-shortened game state A, and the sudden time-shortened game state B. Specifically, the expected value of winning into the second actuation port 63 in the sudden time-shortened game state A is configured to be higher than in the normal time-shortened game state, the ceiling time-shortened game state, and the sudden time-shortened game state B.

The configuration for establishing such a relationship between the expected winning values is not particularly limited, and the normal time-saving game state, sudden time-saving game state A, and sudden time-saving game state B can be configured, for example, to have the normal game number and device opening/closing game aspect (Fig. 284) described in Variation 6 above. Furthermore, the ceiling time-saving game state can also be configured, for example, to have the same normal game number and device opening/closing game aspect as sudden time-saving game state B.

The upper limit number of times for the ceiling time-shortened game state is configured to be higher than those for the normal time-shortened game state, sudden time-shortened game state A, and sudden time-shortened game state B. For example, the upper limit number of times for the ceiling time-shortened game state is set to 500 times, the upper limit number of times for the normal time-shortened game state is set to 150 times, and the upper limit number of times for sudden time-shortened game state A and sudden time-shortened game state B is set to 100 times. Note that it is not necessarily necessary to have different upper limits number of times, and the upper limit number of times may be the same in these time-shortened game states.

As shown in Figure 293 (c), priorities are set for each of the ceiling time-shortened game state, normal time-shortened game state, sudden time-shortened game state A, and sudden time-shortened game state B. In Figure 293 (c), the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority, and the priorities are set in the following order: sudden time-shortened game state B < normal time-shortened game state < sudden time-shortened game state A < ceiling time-shortened game state. The priority information indicating these priorities is stored in the priority information storage area 551 (Figure 256 (b)) of ROM 313 in association with the type of time-shortened game state.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 294 (a). This processing is executed in step Sc506 of the special game play control processing (Figure 220) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the fluctuation start processing in Figure 222. In Figure 294 (a), the same step numbers are used for processing similar to that in Figure 222, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sc710, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is executed in step Sc7401. The process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state determines whether the trigger for transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state has occurred. Here, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state in step Sc7401 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 295.

First, in step Sc7501, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sc7502, where it is determined whether the "reached" flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The "reached" flag is used by MPU 312 to determine whether the number of losing plays has reached the ceiling number of times.

If the reached flag is not set, step Sc7503 determines whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, proceed to step Sc7504 and update the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1. The miss count counter area HC is used by the MPU 312 to determine the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reached.

The number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is not directly notified to the player, but is indirectly notified by notifying the player of the number of losses up to that point. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296, a loss count image 651 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, and this loss count image 651 is configured to notify the player of the number of losses that have occurred after the open/close execution mode (after a jackpot).

The miss count image 651 remains displayed while the remaining number of times until the ceiling number of times is being counted, and the number of times notified is incremented and updated each time a miss play ends. Therefore, by looking at this image 651, the player can know the progress made until the ceiling is reached. Furthermore, if the player knows the ceiling number of times, they can determine the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times by referring to the cumulative number of misses indicated by the miss count image 651.

Incidentally, in this modified example, the update process for the miss count counter area HC (step Sc7504) is incorporated into the fluctuation start process, and the update of the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number is executed when the fluctuation of a miss game round begins, but the update of the miss count image 651 is performed after the miss result is notified by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (Fig. 296 (b)). This prevents the player from being able to determine the miss result from the update of the miss count image 651 before the result is notified by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The specific timing for updating the miss count image 651 can be at the end of a miss game round, such as when the confirmation display starts, during the confirmation display, or after the confirmation display time has elapsed, or at the start of the next game round.

In the above configuration, the cumulative number of losing plays up to that point is announced, but instead, the remaining number of plays up to the ceiling number of plays may be announced.

Returning to the explanation of the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state (Figure 295), after step Sc7504 is executed, step Sc7505 determines whether the value in the miss counter area HC is "0." If the value in the miss counter area HC is "0," that is, if the number of miss games has reached the ceiling number, proceed to step Sc7506, and set the reached flag in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sc7507, a ceiling time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The ceiling time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the ceiling time-saving game state should occur. After step Sc7507 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc7502 (if the reached flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc7503 (if the high probability flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-limited game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sc7504 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7505 (if the value of the miss counter area HC is not "0"), the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-limited game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sc7506 onwards.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc7501 (a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sc7508, where the value in the counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling count (e.g., 800). In step Sc7509, the process determines whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the reached flag is set, step Sc7510 executes a process to clear the reached flag. After step Sc7510 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7509 (if the reached flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (Fig. 294(a)), after execution of step Sc7401, processing for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state is executed in step Sc711. This processing is similar to the processing for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state in Variation 6 described above (Fig. 285).

To explain the process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-saving game state in step Sc711 using Figure 285, first, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special symbol win/loss lottery is a special loss result. If the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery is a special loss result, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If any of the support flags is set, that is, if the current game state is a time-shortened game state, proceed to step Sc6801, where it is determined whether the time-shortened game state corresponding to this special miss result (corresponding time-shortened) is the same type as the current time-shortened game state (stay time-shortened). If the corresponding time-shortened game state is not the same type as the stay time-shortened game state, the priority of the stay time-shortened game state is determined in step Sc6802, and then the priority of the corresponding time-shortened game state is determined in step Sc6803.

In step Sc6804, the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6802 is compared with the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6803, and it is determined whether the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction. If the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, in step Sc1403 a flag for sudden time reduction start is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time reduction start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state should occur, and in this case indicates that a transition to the responsive time reduction should be implemented.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6804 (if the priority of the corresponding time reduction is not higher than the priority of the stay time reduction), reservation processing is executed in step Sc6101. The reservation processing is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

Note that the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state (Fig. 295) does not compare the priority of each time-shortened game state and switch between transition and reservation based on the results. This is because the ceiling time-shortened game state has the highest priority. In other words, if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number while in another time-shortened game state, a transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state will always be made.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 294(a)), after step Sc711 is executed, the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step Sc712. This process is similar to the fluctuation display time setting process (Fig. 285) related to variant 6 above.

In the following step Sc713, a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display for a special game round is in progress.

<Special game play control processing>
The variable start processing according to this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 294 (b). This processing is executed in step Sc403 of the normal processing (Figure 219), and is executed in place of the special game play control in Figure 220. In Figure 294 (b), the same step numbers are used for processing similar to that in Figure 220, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc507 (the variable display time has elapsed), the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is cleared in step Sc509. In the following step Sc510, high frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high frequency support mode.

In step Sc7402, the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state is executed. The process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state is intended to transition the game state to the ceiling time-shortened game state. Here, the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state in step Sc7402 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 297.

First, in step Sc7601, it is determined whether the ceiling time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the ceiling time start flag is not set, the process for transitioning to the ceiling time reduction game state is terminated.

If the ceiling time-saving start flag is set, that is, if the situation calls for a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, step Sc7602 determines whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the support flags is set, that is, if the current game state is the time-saving game state, this means that the number of miss plays in the time-saving game state has reached the ceiling number.

In this case, the process proceeds to step Sc7603, where the set support flag, i.e., the support flag for time-saving play, is cleared. This ends the time-saving play. In this way, if the ceiling number of plays is reached during the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state will be forcibly terminated.

After step Sc7603 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7602 (if no support flags are set and the current gaming state is normal gaming state), the process proceeds to step Sc7604, where the support C flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The support C flag corresponds to the ceiling time-shortened gaming state, and setting this flag causes a transition to the ceiling time-shortened gaming state.

In step Sc7605, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 500 times) for the ceiling time-saving game state is set in the execution time-saving area 611 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. In step Sc7606, the ceiling time-saving start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared.

In step Sc7607, a ceiling time-shortened game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state is terminated. The ceiling time-shortened game state start command is used to notify the presentation control device 143 of the transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state.

<About the flow of play during time-saving play>
The following explains the process when the number of miss plays reaches the upper limit during the time-saving play state or when a special miss result occurs, with reference to Figure 298.

If special miss result A occurs while in the ceiling time-shortened game state (event A), the priority of sudden time-shortened game state A, which corresponds to special miss result A, is lower than the priority of the ceiling time-shortened game state, so the ceiling time-shortened game state continues and sudden time-shortened game state A is placed in a reserved state. In this case, after the ceiling time-shortened game state ends when the maximum number of plays is reached, a transition to sudden time-shortened game state A is implemented. At this time, the remaining number of plays in sudden time-shortened game state A is the difference number of plays obtained by subtracting the remaining number of plays in the ceiling time-shortened game state when sudden time-shortened game state A was placed in a reserved state from the original maximum number of plays in sudden time-shortened game state A (e.g., 100 plays).

If special miss result A occurs while in sudden time-shortened play state B (event B), because the priority of sudden time-shortened play state A is higher than the priority of sudden time-shortened play state B, sudden time-shortened play state B is terminated midway and a transition to sudden time-shortened play state A is executed. In other words, the transition to sudden time-shortened play state A is swiftly implemented without any restrictions (reservations) imposed as when the stay time is in the ceiling time-shortened play state. In this case, the remaining number of times in sudden time-shortened play state A becomes the original upper limit number of times for that state A (for example, 100 times).

If special miss result B occurs while in the ceiling time-shortened game state (event C), the priority of sudden time-shortened game state B, which corresponds to special miss result B, is lower than the priority of the ceiling time-shortened game state, so the ceiling time-shortened game state continues and sudden time-shortened game state B is placed in a reserved state. In this case, after the ceiling time-shortened game state ends when the maximum number of plays is reached, a transition to sudden time-shortened game state B is implemented. At this time, the remaining number of plays in sudden time-shortened game state B is set to the difference number of plays less than the original maximum number of plays (e.g., 100 plays).

If the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times while in sudden time-shortened game state A (event D), the priority of the ceiling time-shortened game state is higher than the priority of sudden time-shortened game state A, so sudden time-shortened game state A is terminated and a transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is executed.

If the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times while in sudden time-shortened game state B (event E), the priority of the ceiling time-shortened game state is higher than the priority of sudden time-shortened game state B, so sudden time-shortened game state B is terminated and a transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is executed.

In addition, because the ceiling number of times in the ceiling time-saving game state (e.g., 800 times) is set higher than the upper limit number of times in the normal time-saving game state (e.g., 150 times), the number of misses in the normal time-saving game state will never reach the ceiling number. In other words, there is no competition between the normal time-saving game state and the ceiling time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the flow when special miss result A or special miss result B occurs during normal time-saving gameplay is the same as in Variation 6 above, so explanation will be omitted.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The priority order is set so that sudden time-saving game state B < sudden time-saving game state A < ceiling time-saving game state. If special miss result A occurs while in the ceiling time-saving game state, the transition to sudden time-saving game state A is reserved as a restriction on the transition. If special miss result A occurs while in sudden time-saving game state B, the transition to sudden time-saving game state A is immediately made without imposing the above restriction. In other words, because the transition is either restricted or not depending on the combination of the type of time-saving stay and the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result won during the game, the subsequent development of the game can differ depending on the combination. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also which combination will result, increasing the game's enjoyment.

The priority of the time-limited ceiling game state is set higher than that of other time-limited game states, so that transition to the time-limited ceiling game state takes priority even if the ceiling number of times is reached in either the time-limited ceiling game state A or B. More specifically, even if the ceiling number of times is reached in the time-limited ceiling game state A, where the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is higher than in the time-limited ceiling game state, switching to the time-limited ceiling game state will occur.

The time-limited ceiling game state is entered based on the cumulative number of unsuccessful plays, meaning that players can predict the transition to the time-limited ceiling game state before the number of unsuccessful plays reaches the ceiling number (before the transition trigger is established). For this reason, if the transition to the time-limited ceiling game state is not made even though the number of unsuccessful plays has actually reached the ceiling number and the transition trigger is established, the player will likely notice that they have not entered the time-limited ceiling game state. In this case, there is a concern that the player will be confused about what happened when the ceiling was reached, which could lead to a decrease in motivation to play. In this regard, by suddenly prioritizing the transition to the time-limited ceiling game state over continuing in time-limited game state A, it is possible to avoid such confusion and prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

<Modification 8>
A sixth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 299 to 308. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, if a sudden time-saving game state is placed on hold due to a special miss during the time-saving game state, and a specified release condition is met before the transition timing, the release state is released. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below.

The sudden time-shortening game state in this modified example is the same as the sudden time-shortening game state in modified example 3 (Fig. 260(a)). Similarly to modified example 3, the upper limit on the number of reserved sudden time-shortening game states is set to the same number as the number of types of sudden time-shortening game states (for example, three). Also, RAM 314 is provided with a time-shortening game state counter area 560 and an occurrence order information storage area 565, and similar to modified example 3, transitions are made in the order corresponding to the occurrence of multiple reserved time-shortening games that occurred during the time-shortening game state.

<About the special chart win/loss table and special miss results for low probability mode>
The special winning/losing table and special losing results for the low probability mode in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figures 299 and 300.

As shown in Figure 299(a), the special symbol hit/miss table for the low probability mode in this modified example sets the possible results as a jackpot result, a special miss result, and a normal miss result. Of these, the proportion of special miss results is higher than in the special symbol hit/miss table for the low probability mode in the third embodiment (Figure 215(a)). Specifically, of the possible values of "0" to "2999" for the jackpot random number counter C1, a total of 40 values from "10" to "49" are assigned to special miss results, and the probability of a special miss result is set to 40/3000.

As shown in Figure 299 (b), in this modified example, six types of special failure results, A to F, are set as types of special failure results. Of these, three types, A to C, are the same as special failure results A to C in the third embodiment and modified example 1 above, and correspond to sudden transitions to time-saving game states A to C and the occurrence of reserves. However, the probability of winning one of special failure results A to C is higher than in the third embodiment and modified example 1 above (1/300), and is set to 1/100.

As shown in Figure 300(a), the respective rates of special failure results A to C increase in the order of special failure result C < special failure result A < special failure result B. In other words, of special failure results A to C, special failure result C is the most likely to be won, and when in the time-saving play state, it is the most likely to suddenly enter the time-saving play state B.

In Figure 299 (b), the remaining three special miss results D to F correspond to the cancellation (cancellation) of the reserved state. In other words, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss result D to F while the time-saving play state is reserved, the reserved state will be canceled without transitioning to the time-saving play state.

As shown in Figure 300 (c), special failure results D to F correspond to the types of sudden time-shortened game states; specifically, special failure result D corresponds to sudden time-shortened game state A, special failure result E corresponds to sudden time-shortened game state B, and special failure result F corresponds to sudden time-shortened game state C. In other words, when special failure result D occurs, the reservation of sudden time-shortened game state A is canceled, when special failure result E occurs, the reservation of sudden time-shortened game state B is canceled, and when special failure result F occurs, the reservation of sudden time-shortened game state C is canceled.

However, for example, if special miss result D occurs when time-saving game state A is not suddenly reserved, or if special miss results D-F occur when there is no corresponding reserved time-saving state, the reserved state will not be canceled. In other words, it will simply function as a lottery result that does not result in a transition to a jackpot game state, and will be equivalent to a normal miss result.

As shown in Figure 299(b), the probability of winning one of the special failure results D to F is lower than the probability of winning one of the special failure results A to C (1/100), and is specifically set at 1/300. In other words, cancellations are less likely to occur than reservations.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 300(b), the probability of special failure results D to F is different; specifically, the probability of special failure result D is lower than the probability of special failure results E and F. In other words, the probability of special failure result D is lower than the probability of special failure results E and F, and once sudden time-saving game state A is suspended, it is less likely to be canceled than the other sudden time-saving game states B and C.

Note that the numbers and values of the random numbers shown in Figures 299 and 300 are merely examples, and the probabilities of various results and the corresponding random numbers can be set arbitrarily, for example, the probability of winning one of the special losing results D to F is higher than the probability of winning one of the special losing results A to C.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 301. This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered in Fig. 261(a). In Fig. 301, the same process as in Fig. 261(a) is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special loss result. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special loss result, proceed to step Sc8101 to determine whether this special loss result is one of special loss results A to C, that is, whether it corresponds to a sudden transition to a time-saving game state or the occurrence of a reserve. This determination is made by referencing the special loss type flag (step Sc707) set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the current special miss result is one of special miss results A to C, step Sc1402 determines whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If no support flags are set, i.e., if the current game state is the normal game state, step Sc1403 sets a sudden time-saving start flag in the various flag storage area 314e.

If step Sc1402 returns a positive result (if one of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, the reservation process is executed in step Sc4301, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

If step Sc8101 makes a negative judgment (if the special miss result is not one of A to C), that is, if the current special miss result is one of D to F and corresponds to the cancellation (release) of the reserved state, proceed to step Sc8102 and execute the reservation release process. The reservation release process is intended to cancel the reserved state. After step Sc8102 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state ends.

<Reserved release process>
The reservation release process in step Sc8102 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc8201, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags have been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any of the reservation flags have been set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is in a reserved state, the process proceeds to step Sc8202, where the type of special loss result this time is determined. The reservation release process is executed if the special loss result this time is special loss result D to F, and in step Sc8202 it is determined which of special loss results D to F the special loss result this time is.

In step Sc8203, it is determined whether a corresponding reserved time-saving option exists. Specifically, it is determined whether the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of special miss result identified in step Sc8202 is on hold. For example, if the type of special miss result identified in step Sc8202 is special miss result D, it is determined whether the reservation flag A, which indicates that the sudden time-saving game state A is on hold, is set by referring to the various flag storage area 314e.

If a corresponding reserved time-saving state exists, proceed to step Sc8204, where the corresponding reserved flag is cleared in the various flag storage area 314e. This cancels (releases) the reserved sudden time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result.

In step Sc8205, a reservation release flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The reservation release flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the reservation status has been canceled.

In step Sc8206, a reservation release command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. The reservation release command notifies that the reservation state has been canceled, and includes information indicating the type of time-saving game state for which the reservation state has been canceled.

In step Sc8207, the order of occurrence stored in the order of occurrence information storage area 565 is updated. For example, if the order of occurrence is stored as sudden time-shortened game state C, sudden time-shortened game state B, and sudden time-shortened game state A, and the reservation of sudden time-shortened game state B is canceled, the contents stored in the order of occurrence information storage area 565 are changed so that the order of occurrence of sudden time-shortened game state A is moved up.

After step Sc8207 is executed, the reservation release process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8201 (if none of the reservation flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8203 (if there is no corresponding reserved time reduction), the reservation status is not canceled (cancelled) and the reservation release process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sc8204 onwards.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 303. This process is executed in step Sc712 of the variable start process (Fig. 222), and is executed in place of the variable display time setting process in Fig. 263. In Fig. 303, the same steps as in Fig. 263 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, step Sc8301 determines whether the result of this special drawing is a special miss result. If it is a special miss result, proceed to step Sc8302, where it is determined whether this special miss result is one of special miss results A to C, that is, whether it corresponds to a transition to a sudden time-saving game state or the occurrence of a reservation.

If the result of the special miss is one of A to C, step Sc8303 obtains variable display time table A for special misses (Fig. 232 (b)) as the variable display time table for this time. This variable display time table A has only variable pattern Z1 (special reach miss A effect) set as the selectable variable pattern. Therefore, if the result of the current special miss is one of special miss results A to C, a lottery process for the variable display time (step Sc1607) is executed to select the variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special reach miss A effect. In other words, if a special miss result occurs that corresponds to a sudden transition to a time-saving game state or the occurrence of a reserve, the symbol display device 75 will notify you of this lottery result each time.

If step Sc8302 returns a negative result, i.e., if the current special miss result is one of special miss results D to F, step Sc8304 determines whether a reservation release flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the reservation release flag has been set, i.e., if the reservation is to be canceled for the current play, proceed to step Sc8305 and obtain variable display time table C for special misses as the variable display time table for the current play.

As shown in Figure 304 (a), only variation pattern Z3 (20 seconds) is set as a selectable variation pattern in the variation display time table C. Variation pattern Z3 corresponds to the special reach miss C effect, and when a variation start command corresponding to variation pattern Z3 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss C effect as a game round effect. Here, the special reach miss C effect will be explained with reference to Figure 305.

In the special reach-miss C presentation, first, as shown in Figure 305(a), the upper and lower symbol columns Z1 and Z3 are displayed as a reach combination on one of the active lines L1-L5 on the display screen G, and the reach display is executed. After that, the middle symbol column Z2 (the final stopped symbol column) is switched from a high-speed change display to a slow-speed change display. At this time, as shown in Figure 305(b), a slow-speed change display is executed with a special symbol 721 labeled with, for example, "BAD" in place of a symbol other than the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. This allows the player to recognize the presence of the special symbol 721. Note that Figure 305(b) shows an example in which the special symbol 721 is positioned in the "5" symbol position, which is the symbol next to the "4" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Next, as shown in Figure 305(c), the slowly fluctuating special symbol 721 is displayed stopped on the reach line. In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination in which the special symbol 721 of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line corresponds to the special miss results D to F. Therefore, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in this symbol combination, it is announced that one of the special miss results D to F has occurred; in other words, the result corresponding to the cancellation of the reservation has been drawn as a result of the lottery.

Furthermore, variation pattern Z3 (20 seconds), which corresponds to the special reach miss C effect, has a longer display time than variation pattern Z1 (15 seconds), which corresponds to the special reach miss A effect, which is executed when the special miss result is one of A to C. This is to ensure the execution period for the release effect, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Figure 303), after step Sc8305 is executed, the reservation release flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared in step Sc8306.

If the judgment in step Sc8304 is negative (the reservation cancellation flag is not set), that is, if the current special miss result is one of special miss results D to F but the reservation is not to be canceled, proceed to step Sc8307 and obtain variable display time table D for special misses as the current variable display time table.

As shown in Figure 304 (b), the variable display time table D for special misses has variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) and variable pattern Z4 set as selectable variable patterns. Variable pattern Z4 corresponds to the special reach miss D effect, and when a variable start command corresponding to variable pattern Z4 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss D effect as a game-time effect. The special reach miss D effect is a so-called false effect that is paired with the special reach miss C effect, and it stirs up a sense of crisis about special misses D to F (cancellation of reservation), and then stops and displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination.

In the special reach-miss D effect, as shown in Figures 305(a) and (b), after a reach display is executed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed as a slow-moving display including the special pattern 721. In other words, the pattern change effect is executed up to the middle in the same manner as the special reach-miss C effect. After that, for example, the special pattern 721 passes over the reach line, and a pattern different from the special pattern 721 in the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line, as shown in Figure 305(d). In other words, while it appears as if the pattern combinations corresponding to the special miss results D to F are formed, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in such a way that the combinations are not ultimately formed.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 303), if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8301 (if the result is not a special miss), this means that the result is a jackpot or a normal miss. In this case, proceed to step Sc4505, and obtain a variable display time table for the corresponding time-limited game state. Specifically, if the result of this win/loss lottery is a jackpot, the variable display time table for a jackpot (Fig. 232 (a)) is obtained, and if the result of this win/loss lottery is a normal miss, the variable display time table for a normal miss (Fig. 304 (c)) is obtained. Note that the variable display time table for a normal miss includes variable pattern Z4 (special reach miss D presentation) as a selectable variable pattern.

After step Sc8303, step Sc8306, step Sc8307, or step Sc4505 is executed, step Sc1607 uses the dynamic display time table obtained in each step to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variable pattern). Then, step Sc1608 and subsequent steps are executed.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 306. This process is started by the effect control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the effect setting process in Fig. 242. In Fig. 306, the same processes as those in Fig. 242 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sc2506, it is determined whether a reservation command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a reservation command has been received, i.e., if a sudden time-shortened game state is to be reserved, in step Sc8401, the reserved time-shortened game state (reserved time-shortened state) is identified. In this step, the reservation command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and it is determined for which of the sudden time-shortened game states A to C the reservation has occurred.

In step Sc8402, display settings for the reservation display section 731 are made based on the results of step Sc8401. Here, the reservation display section 731 will be explained with reference to Figure 307.

As shown in Figure 307(a), in this modified example, a reservation display section 731 is set to be displayed on the display screen G during time-shortened gameplay. The reservation display section 731 functions as a notification section that notifies users of whether or not a reserved time-shortened game state is in effect, and which sudden time-shortened game state is in effect. This reservation display section 731 is displayed on the display screen G so as not to overlap with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and if reservation images showing the number of reserved games are displayed on the display screen G, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the display area of those reservation images. Note that while the reservation display section 731 is located in the lower right corner of the display screen G in Figure 307(a), it may also be located in other areas, such as the upper right corner or upper left corner.

As shown in Figure 307 (b1), the reservation display section 731 has a first reservation display area 731a corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state A, a second reservation display area 731b corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state B, and a third reservation display area 731c corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state C. Each of these display areas 731a to 731c displays a reservation image 732a to 732c indicating whether or not the corresponding sudden time-shortened game state is reserved.

Figure 307 (b1) shows an example in which each reservation image 732a-732c is constructed with an image indicating the type of time-saving game state using text, so that the player can easily recognize whether a game is reserved or not, as well as the corresponding sudden time-saving game state. However, the specific form of the reservation images 732a-732c is not limited to this, and any form can be used as long as the player can recognize whether a game is reserved or not, such as constructing the reservation images 732a-732c using predetermined picture images such as symbols or characters.

In the reservation display section 731, each reservation image 732a-732c is displayed semi-transparently when the corresponding sudden time-saving game state is not reserved.

In step Sc8402, the reservation images 732a-732c corresponding to the type identified in step Sc8401 are set to a display mode corresponding to the reserved state. For example, if the sudden time-shortened game state identified in step Sc8401 is sudden time-shortened game state A, the reservation image 732a is set to change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, as shown in FIG. 307(b2). This notifies the user that the sudden time-shortened game state A has been reserved. This opaque reservation image 732a continues to be displayed throughout the period during which the sudden time-shortened game state A is reserved in the time-shortened game state.

In addition, in step Sc8402, the effect that changes the display mode of each reserved image 732a-732c is set to be executed in the game that results in special miss results A-C. In this case, the effect may be executed during at least a portion of the variable display time of that game, or during at least a portion of the fixed display time, or may be executed across both the variable display time and the fixed display time. Note that when the variable display time is used, the effect is configured to start after the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are displayed in a static pattern combination corresponding to the special miss results D-F.

After step Sc8402 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2506 (no reservation command has been received), step Sc8403 determines whether a reservation release command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a reservation release command has been received, i.e., if the reservation is to be canceled (released), step Sc8404 determines the time-saving game state in which the reservation state will be released (released time-saving). In this step, the reservation release command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and it is determined which of the time-saving game states A to C has been suddenly released.

In step Sc8405, the display settings of the reservation display unit 731 are made based on the results of the determination in step Sc8404. Specifically, of the reservation images 732a-732c, those corresponding to the type determined in step Sc8404 are set to a display mode corresponding to a non-reserved state. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state determined in step Sc8404 is sudden time-saving game state C, the reservation image 732c is set to change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, as shown in Figures 307 (c1) and (c2). This notifies the user that the reservation of sudden time-saving game state C has been canceled.

The display settings for the reservation display section 731 are set so that the above-mentioned effect of changing the display mode of each reservation image 732a-732c is executed in the game in which the special miss results A-C are achieved. In this case, the effect is set to be executed during part of the variable display time of that game in the following manner to make the cancellation of the reservation more obvious.

As shown in Figure 308, at timing t3 within the variable display time, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in a symbol combination corresponding to the special miss results D to F, and then the reserved display section 731 is enlarged as shown in Figure 308(d). Next, the special symbol 721 displayed on the reach line is moved to the third reserved display area 731c (the area corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state in which the reserved state is released) and is displayed so as to pass in front of the reserved image 732c, which is displayed in an opaque state.

As the special symbol 721 passes, the reserved image 732c in the third reserved display area 731c is made semi-transparent, switching to a display mode corresponding to a non-reserved state (Figure 308(e)). The reserved display section 731 is then reduced to its original display size, and the symbols that make up the missed combination are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the reach line, indicating that the result is a miss (Figure 308(f)).

The above configuration gives the player the impression that the reservation has been canceled because the symbol sequence Z1-Z3 is statically displayed in a manner that includes the special symbol 721. This makes it easy to understand that the reservation has been canceled and that the statically displayed symbol combination corresponds to the cancellation of the reservation. Furthermore, the above configuration allows the player to strongly associate the special symbol 721 with the cancellation of the reservation, and when the symbol sequence Z2 is displayed in a slow-changing manner in which the special symbol 721 is visible, or when a special reach-miss D effect is executed as a false effect, this effectively heightens the player's sense of crisis, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. It is recommended that the effects of Figures 308(d) to 308(f) be performed during the remaining variable display time, i.e., the period until the confirmation display begins (timing t3 to timing t4).

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (Figure 306), after step Sc8405 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8403 (no hold release command has been received), the process proceeds to step Sc2508, where it is determined whether any game state termination command has been received.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The following describes the process when a special miss occurs during the time-saving gaming state. Here, we will explain the process by taking as an example a case where a special miss occurs suddenly when the time-saving gaming state C has already been reserved.

If a special miss result A occurs while the time-saving game state C is suddenly reserved during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A will be placed on hold. In this case, in the special symbol game turn that results in the special miss result A, the special reach miss A effect will be executed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be displayed stopped in a stop mode corresponding to the special miss result A (a reach miss symbol combination including the special symbol 511) (Fig. 233 (c)).

Furthermore, during that game session, the first reservation display area 731a corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A in the reservation display section 731 on the display screen G is displayed in a manner corresponding to the reserved state. Specifically, the reservation image 732a in the first reservation display area 731a is changed from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state. This notifies the player that the player has suddenly acquired the reservation for the time-saving game state A.

If a special miss result F occurs while both the sudden time-saving game state C and the sudden time-saving game state A are reserved, the reserved state of the sudden time-saving game state C will be canceled. In other words, the state where both the sudden time-saving game state C and the sudden time-saving game state A are reserved will change to a state where only the sudden time-saving game state A is reserved.

In this case, in the special symbol game round that results in a special miss result F, the special reach miss C effect is executed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in a stop mode corresponding to the special miss result F (a reach miss symbol combination including the special symbol 721) (Fig. 305 (c)). Also, in that game round, the third reservation display area 731c corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state C in the reservation display section 731 is changed to a mode corresponding to a non-reserved state. Specifically, the reservation image 732c in the third reservation display area 731c is changed from an opaque state to a translucent state. This notifies the player that the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state C has been canceled (disappeared).

Here, all of the special failure results D through F correspond to the cancellation of reserved points, and there is a difference in the probability of winning each of these results; specifically, the probability of special failure result D is lower than the probabilities of special failure results E and F. For this reason, sudden time-saving game state A is less likely to result in the cancellation of reserved points compared to other sudden time-saving game states, making it easier for players to anticipate a transition. By creating a difference in the likelihood of cancellation in this way, it is possible to create sudden time-saving game states in which players are particularly interested in acquiring reserved points, making it possible to increase the excitement of aiming to acquire reserved points.

In addition, if the special miss result F occurs and the time-saving game state C is not currently reserved, the reservation will not be canceled. In this case, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss effect D will be executed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be displayed frozen in the symbol combination of a normal miss result or a reach miss result. In other words, it will not be clearly indicated that the lottery result corresponds to the cancellation of the reservation.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If any of the special miss results D to F occurs while the time-saving game state is reserved, the reservation is canceled. In this case, even if the time-saving game state is reserved, the player cannot feel at ease, and can play while experiencing the thrill of the possibility that the reservation may be lost. Furthermore, by making the reservation cancelable after it has been executed, the probability of the reservation occurring in the first place can be set higher than if such a cancellation function is not provided. This increases the frequency of reservations, making it possible to effectively stimulate player motivation.

Special miss results D through F are set as special miss results corresponding to reservation cancellation, and each special miss result corresponds to a type of sudden time-saving game state in which the reservation is canceled. In this case, players can be kept on the edge of their seats not only as to whether or not the reservation will be canceled, but also as to which time-saving game state the reservation will be canceled for.

The condition for canceling a reservation is a win on special miss results D to F, and the decision on whether to cancel the reservation and the decision on whether to create a reservation are made through the same lottery process (special win/loss lottery). This prevents the reservation of the time-saving game state and the cancellation of the reservation from occurring at the same time, preventing the process from becoming complicated or difficult for players to understand. Furthermore, by combining multiple decisions into a single lottery process, the processing structure can be simplified compared to when each decision is made separately.

The probability of a reservation being suddenly cancelled varies depending on the type of time-saving game state. In this case, it is possible to create time-saving game states in which reservations are more likely to be cancelled and time-saving game states in which reservations are less likely to be cancelled. This allows the player's enjoyment to differ when a reservation is made not only depending on the degree of advantage of the reserved time-saving game state (for example, the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63), but also on the likelihood of cancellation, making it possible to increase interest.

When a special miss result is D-F, the special reach miss C effect is executed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed symbol strings Z1-Z3 notifies the player that the reserved bet will be cancelled. Because symbol strings Z1-Z3 are used to notify the player of whether or not a jackpot has been reached, they attract a lot of attention from players, and this configuration makes it possible to effectively prevent players from overlooking the cancellation notification. Furthermore, by adding combinations that correspond to the cancellation of reserved bets, the stopping patterns of symbol strings Z1-Z3, which are of great interest to players, are diversified, making the symbol game more interesting.

The special symbol 721 is moved and displayed in the reserved display section 731, and a portion of the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 that is displayed in a static state is used to execute the reserved cancellation effect (Fig. 308 (d)-(e)). In this case, the special symbol 721 and the cancellation of the reserved state are directly linked, which can intensify the sense of excitement when the special symbol 721 is seen in the variable display or when the special symbol 721 is about to be displayed in a static state. This makes it possible to appropriately enhance the game by avoiding the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 being displayed in a static state in a combination that corresponds to the cancellation of the reserved state.

<Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described third embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the third embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following to the third embodiment and each modified example. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the third embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

Furthermore, for ease of understanding, certain examples are specified as prerequisite configurations, such as "in Variation 1 of the third embodiment," but the following configurations are not limited to application to the specified prerequisite configurations (examples), and can also be applied to other embodiments and variations.

(1) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving play state is configured to end when the number of special game plays after transitioning to the time-saving play state reaches the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the time-saving play state may be configured to end when the number of small win results after transitioning to the time-saving play state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, five times).

In the above case, if a special miss occurs while in the time-shortened game state and the transition to the time-shortened game state corresponding to that special miss result is reserved, the actual number of remaining small wins (e.g., 3) for the reserved time-shortened game state can be determined by subtracting the number of remaining small wins for the stay time-shortened game state (e.g., 2) from the original number of remaining small wins for the reserved time-shortened game state (e.g., 5).

In addition, if both conditions are met, namely, the number of times the special symbol is played reaches the upper limit and the number of times the small jackpot is won reaches a specific number, the time-saving play state may be ended when one of these conditions is met, or the time-saving play state may be ended when both of these conditions are met.

(2) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, a transition to high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game mode) occurs, and when various support flags are cleared from the various flag storage area 314e, the high-frequency support mode ends. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs when information corresponding to a first value (e.g., a support flag) is stored in a specific memory area provided in the various flag storage area 314e, and the high-frequency support mode ends when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value (e.g., a non-support flag) is stored in the specific memory area. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which information corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to the high-frequency support mode not being in the high-frequency support mode are provided, and the transition to and termination of the high-frequency support mode are controlled depending on which information is stored (set).

Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. In other words, a storage area corresponding to the high-frequency support mode being in effect and a storage area corresponding to the high-frequency support mode not being in effect may be provided, and transition to or termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which storage area the information is stored (set) in.

(3) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time effects correspond one-to-one, but they may also correspond one-to-multiple. In this case, the effect control device 143 can acquire a random number for effect lottery, and use the acquired random number to select one game-time effect from among multiple game-time effects associated with one variation pattern.

(4) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, and the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is updated by subtracting one from that value each time a special game is played. However, instead of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, the number of times a special game has been played in the time-shortened game state may be updated by adding one to the value of the support counter area SC each time a special game is played. In this case, the time-shortened game state may be terminated when the updated counter value reaches the upper limit of the number of times.

(5) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving game state is reserved if a special miss occurs while in the time-saving game state. However, the time-saving game state may also be reserved if a special miss occurs while in the high-probability game state. Furthermore, if a special symbol win/loss lottery is executed during the opening/closing execution mode and a special miss occurs while in that mode, the transition to the time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss may be reserved. In this case, the transition to the reserved time-saving game state may be implemented after the opening/closing execution mode ends, or after another time-saving game state ends.

(6) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, a special miss result triggers the reservation or transition to a time-limited game state. However, a reservation or transition to a high-probability game state may also be performed. In this case, the support mode in the high-probability game state may be a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode.

In addition, instead of reserving or transitioning to a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state, it is also possible to reserve or transition to a specific presentation mode in which special presentations that cannot be seen in normal presentation modes or special characters, etc. are displayed. Also, it is possible to reserve or transition to a state in which a special lottery that is not performed in normal game mode is performed. In these cases, it is advantageous for the player in that they can see special presentations, etc. or take part in a special lottery. One example of a special lottery is a points lottery. A configuration in which a transition to a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or an opening/closing execution mode is possible depending on the points awarded in the point lottery or the total number of points awarded. Furthermore, special presentations (for example, character costumes, etc.) may be unlocked, or behind-the-scenes stories about the development of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed.

(7) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved if a special miss occurs while the game is in the time-saving game state. However, instead of or in addition to this, the time-saving game state may be reserved when the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number while the game is in the time-saving game state.

(8) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples above, a special losing result is set as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery. However, the special winning/losing lottery may draw a lottery to determine whether the result is a jackpot or a losing result, and if the result is a losing result, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of losing result) may be held to determine whether the result is a special losing result. In this case, the separate lottery may be held using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to drawing the type of losing result.

In addition, instead of the lottery for determining the type of losing result, a transition lottery may be held to determine whether or not the transition conditions to the third time-saving game state are met. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random number values, such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to determining whether or not the transition conditions are met.

In addition, the special drawing lottery may determine whether the result will be a jackpot, a special loss, or a normal loss, and if the result is a special loss, a separate drawing may be conducted to determine the type of special loss. In this case, the separate drawing may be conducted using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or variable type counter CS, or may be conducted using a random number dedicated to determining the type of special loss.

(9) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, a normal time-shortened game state is provided, which is transitioned to via an open/close execution mode, separate from the sudden time-shortened game state and the ceiling time-shortened game state. However, the configuration may not include a normal time-shortened game state. It may also be configured not to include a high-probability game state.

(10) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved or transitioned in response to a special miss result. However, the time-saving game state may be reserved or transitioned in response to another event. For example, the time-saving game state may be reserved or transitioned in response to a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passage section provided within the game area PE or a predetermined ball entry section. In this case, prize balls may or may not be paid out based on the ball entering or passing through.

Note that a specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism and may be a type that is always open, or it may be a variable type that has an opening/closing mechanism and can be switched between an open state in which game balls can or do enter or it is easier for the game ball to enter, and a closed state in which game balls cannot or it is harder for the game ball to enter than in the open state. This also applies to the above-mentioned predetermined ball entry sections.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific entry section or passing section is provided within a predetermined entry section, only the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section will always enter or pass through the specific entry section or passing section. Alternatively, one or more other entry sections or passing sections different from the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and gaming balls that enter the predetermined entry section may be distributed, resulting in a situation in which a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section does not enter a specific entry section or pass through a specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is established when a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters a specific entry section or passes through a specific passing section, while a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is not established even if a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters another entry section or passes through another passing section.

(11) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the sudden time-saving game state in the event of a special miss is configured to implement a second high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal map support lottery is the same as that in the normal game state. However, it may also be configured to implement a first high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal map support lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal map support lottery in the sudden time-saving game state may be the same as that in the normal time-saving game state that goes through the open/close execution mode, or it may be a different probability. For example, in order to ensure an advantage in the game state after the open/close execution mode, it is advisable to lower the winning probability of the support in the sudden time-saving game state compared to the normal time-saving game state.

Furthermore, a second high-frequency support mode may be implemented in the normal time-saving game state that passes through the open/close execution mode, in which the probability of winning the normal support lottery is the same as in the normal game state.

(12) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the type of sudden time-saving game state and the type of special loss result correspond one-to-one, but they may also correspond one-to-multiple. In this case, the number of special loss results corresponding to one sudden time-saving game state may be the same for each sudden time-saving game state, or may be different.

(13) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the corresponding time-saving state is reserved when the difference in the number of times obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the time-saving state from the upper limit number of times in the sudden time-saving game state (corresponding time-saving state) corresponding to the special missing result that was won midway is 1 or more. However, the corresponding time-saving state may be reserved when the difference in the number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined value greater than 1 (e.g., 10). For example, if a transition to the reserved time-saving state (corresponding time-saving state) is made after the end of the time-saving state, and the time-saving game state ends too soon, the impression of unsatisfaction may be emphasized, and there is a concern that this may have the opposite effect. In this regard, with the above configuration, if the remaining number of times (difference in the number of times) at the time of the transition is low, the reservation is not executed, thereby preventing the occurrence of an event in which the time-saving game state ends too early after the transition to the reserved time-saving state, and making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

(14) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the transition to the reserved time reduction is executed at the end of the stay time reduction, but the transition to the reserved time reduction may also be executed at a predetermined timing during the stay time reduction. For example, the transition may be executed after a predetermined number of play times (e.g., three special game times) have been played since the reservation occurred. In this case, the period of the reservation may be used to execute a continuous effect (a series of effects performed over multiple play times) to notify the player of whether or not a reservation has occurred.

The transition may also be executed when a predetermined execution condition is met before the end of the stay time reduction. Possible predetermined execution conditions include winning the same type of special miss result or a special miss result for the transition, or the game ball entering or passing through a specific entry section or specific passage section located inside the play area PE or the specified entry section. If the execution condition is not met before the end of the stay time reduction, the reserved state may be canceled (invalidated), or a transition to the reserved time reduction may occur upon the end of the stay time reduction.

The timing of transitioning to the reserved time reduction mode may also be determined by lottery. The lottery may be held when the reserved time is generated, or may be held after the reserved time is generated and during each play session during the reserved time reduction mode.

(15) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the remaining number of times when switching to reserved time reduction is set to the differential number of times (the number of times obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction when the special miss result is obtained from the original maximum number of times for reserved time reduction), but a predetermined number (reserved maximum number of times) less than the original maximum number of times may be set. For example, regardless of the timing of the special miss (the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction), a number less than the original maximum number of times (for example, 30 times if the original maximum number of times is 50 times) may be set. Also, a number of times less than the original maximum number of times may be selected from multiple numbers less than the original maximum number of times.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the original upper limit number of times may be set as the remaining number of times when switching to the reserved time reduction mode. Furthermore, the reserved upper limit number of times may be set to a number greater than the original upper limit number (for example, 80 times if the original upper limit number is 50 times).

(16) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, when deriving the remaining number of times when switching to reserved time reduction, the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction when the special non-result occurs is subtracted from the original upper limit number of times for reserved time reduction. However, the remaining number of times may also be added to the original upper limit number of times. Also, a part of the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction may be subtracted, or a part of the remaining number of times may be added.

(17) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a special miss occurs but a reservation is not executed, a longer variable display time is selected and a complete miss effect is executed. However, a variable display time of the same length as that in the case of a reservation may be selected and a complete miss effect is executed. Also, when a reservation is not executed, a variable display time of the same length as that in the case of a reservation is selected and a special reach miss B effect is executed. However, a variable display time of a different length than that in the case of a reservation (for example, a variable display time shorter than that in the case of a reservation) may be selected and a special reach miss B effect may be executed. Also, instead of the special reach miss B effect, an effect that does not correspond to the special reach miss A effect (for example, a specified effect that does not involve a reach) may be executed. Also, when a reservation is not executed, a special reach miss A effect (the same or similar effect as when a reservation is executed) may be executed. In this case, a variable display time of the same length as that in the case of a reservation may be selected, or a variable display time of a different length (for example, a variable display time shorter than that in the case of a reservation) may be selected.

(18) In the third embodiment and each modified example, the notification corresponding to a win in a special miss result is executed by the symbol display device 75, but it may also be executed by another notification unit. Furthermore, notifications are not limited to image displays, and may be issued using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or by operating decorative movable bodies (movable gadgets) for moving effects in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, each of the above notifications does not necessarily have to be visual notifications, and may be auditory notifications in the form of sound from the speaker unit 29. The same applies to notifications of the remaining number of times for time-saving, notifications of the occurrence of a reservation, notifications of the transition to a reserved time-saving mode, etc.

(19) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a special reach miss effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special miss result. However, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may also be made by a game-play effect that does not involve a reach effect. Furthermore, the notification does not have to be made using the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying a predetermined pattern, such as a predetermined character, on the symbol display device 75.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed on the pattern display device 75 is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display unit 43 and is displayed in a smaller size than the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying the fourth pattern in a specific manner that differs from the normal manner. Furthermore, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by combining the manner in which the fourth pattern is displayed in a stopped state with at least some of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that are displayed in a stopped state.

The notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made throughout the entire special game round, or may be made during a portion of the special game round. Incidentally, the special reach effects exemplified in the third embodiment and each variant example above are configured so that the player cannot tell whether or not a special miss result has occurred at the start of the special game round, but can tell that it is a special miss result at the end of the special game round. Therefore, it can be said that a notification corresponding to the special miss result is made during a portion of the special game round.

(20) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the player is only able to recognize that a special miss has occurred from the stopping state of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3, and is unable or difficult to recognize the type of special miss (the type of sudden time-saving game state). However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which the type is recognizable or easily recognizable from the stopping state of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. For example, when the sudden time-saving game state A is reserved, a configuration may be considered in which a 7 symbol is set as the reach symbol in the special reach miss A presentation, or in which a 7 symbol is more likely to be set than in other sudden time-saving game states (e.g., sudden time-saving game state B). Furthermore, when the sudden time-saving game state A is reserved, a configuration may be considered in which a double reach is set, or in which a double reach is more likely to be set than in other sudden time-saving game states (e.g., sudden time-saving game state B).

(21) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reservation effect (Fig. 248) is executed in the game in which the time-shortened game state is reserved, and the occurrence of the reservation is announced. However, instead of or in addition to this, the occurrence of the reservation may not be announced in the game in which the reservation is made, but may be announced in a game in which the reservation is made after that game in question (a game in which the special miss result is not obtained). In other words, the occurrence of the reservation may be announced immediately or with a delay. Note that the later game in question may be the final game in the time-shortened play, or it may be a game in the middle of the time-shortened play (a game in which the special miss result is not obtained).

(22) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the result of the special symbol winning/losing lottery is a special losing result, and a complete losing effect or a special reach losing effect B is executed to conceal the winning of the special losing result, the stop result corresponding to the special losing result is displayed on the special symbol display unit 43. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the stop result corresponding to a normal losing result is displayed. By using such a configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to tell that a special losing result has occurred.

(23) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples above, a release effect (Fig. 249(b)) is executed when a transition to the reserved time reduction is implemented. However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which an additional effect is executed to notify the addition of the remaining number of times. Note that the additional effect is not particularly limited as long as it can notify the addition of the remaining number of times, and for example, the additional effect of Fig. 274 in modified example 4 can be executed.

It is also possible to configure the presentation when transitioning to reserved time reduction to differ depending on the remaining number of times (difference in number of times) of reserved time reduction. For example, a release presentation can be executed when the remaining number of times is a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times) or more, and an additional presentation can be executed when the remaining number of times is less than the predetermined number, or a release presentation can be executed more easily when the remaining number of times is more than the predetermined number than when it is less than the predetermined number, and an additional presentation can be executed more easily when the remaining number of times is less than the predetermined number than when it is more than the predetermined number. If a release presentation is executed when there are only a few remaining times, there is a concern that the player may feel that the remaining number of times is insufficient compared to the impact of the presentation, but the above configuration can effectively eliminate such inconveniences.

(24) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the remaining number of reserved time-saving plays is announced at the time of the transition, but all or part of the remaining number of plays may be announced after the transition. For example, a part of the remaining number of plays (the difference in number of plays) may be announced at the time of the transition to reserved time-saving play, and the number of plays may be announced so that additional plays are added during the time-saving play state through an additional effect.

(25) In the third embodiment and each modified example described above, an upper limit is set on the number of reservable replays. However, such an upper limit may also be set. Specifically, if the upper limit on the number of replays in the time-shortened game state is 100, the number of reserved time-shortened areas 562, 612 may be set to correspond to the number of play times that can be performed in the time-shortened game state. For example, if the upper limit on the number of replays in the time-shortened game state is 100, there may be 100 reserved time-shortened areas 562, 612. In this case, even if a special miss occurs in each play time during the time-shortened game state, it is possible to reserve the time-shortened game state for all of those play times. Note that if the upper limit on the number of replays differs depending on the type of time-shortened game state, the number of reserved time-shortened areas 562, 612 set may correspond to the maximum number of replays among those play times.

(26) In the third embodiment and each modified example, the upper limit of the number of reservable balls is set to 1. However, multiple upper limits may be set. For example, the upper limit may differ depending on the type of time-saving state, such as 1 ball when the time-saving state is a normal time-saving state and 2 balls when the time-saving state is a sudden time-saving state A. Since the greater the number of times a player can stay in a time-saving state, the more likely it is that reserving balls will occur, when comparing a time-saving state with a relatively high upper limit of the number of reservable balls with a time-saving state with a relatively low upper limit, it is preferable to configure the upper limit of the number of reservable balls to be higher in the former.

(27) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, but it may also be configured to be executed after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state may be executed during the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special symbol game round.

(28) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sudden time-saving game state, which is triggered by a special miss during the time-saving game state, may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the sudden time-saving game state, which is triggered by a special miss during the normal game state. For example, if a special miss occurs during the normal game state, the game may transition to a sudden time-saving game state with a first predetermined number of plays with a relatively small upper limit, and if a special miss occurs again during the sudden time-saving game state, the game may transition to a sudden time-saving game state with a second predetermined number of plays with a relatively large upper limit (greater than the first predetermined number).

In this case, regardless of the type of special miss, if a special miss occurs while in the sudden time-shortened game state, the system may be configured to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state with the second predetermined number of plays as the upper limit. Alternatively, even if a special miss occurs during the sudden time-shortened game state, depending on the type of special miss, the system may transition to the sudden time-shortened game state with the second predetermined number of plays as the upper limit, or to the sudden time-shortened game state with a lower maximum number of plays (for example, the first predetermined number or a different third predetermined number). Furthermore, depending on the type of special miss during the normal game state, the system may transition to the sudden time-shortened game state with the second predetermined number of plays as the upper limit, without going through the sudden time-shortened game state with the first predetermined number of plays. Instead of or in addition to the upper limit of plays, the expected value of winning into the second operating port 63 may be varied to vary the degree of advantage of the sudden time-shortened game state.

(29) In Variant 1 of the third embodiment described above, the reserved time-saving play state is updated when the remaining number of times (number of differentials) in the time-saving play state corresponding to the special miss result that was won is greater than the remaining number of times (number of differentials) in the reserved time-saving play state. However, the reserved time-saving play state may be updated each time a special miss result is obtained, regardless of the remaining number of times. In this case, the sudden time-saving play state corresponding to the last special miss result that was won during the stay time-saving play state becomes the final reserved time-saving play state, and a transition to that time-saving play state is implemented.

(30) In Variation 1 of the third embodiment described above, when the reserved time reduction is updated, a special reach miss A effect is executed in the special symbol game round in which the update is performed, and a notification is made that a special miss result has occurred. However, a complete miss effect or a special reach B effect may be executed, and a notification is not made that a special miss result has occurred. In this case, the reserved image 529 may or may not be updated. Also, when the reserved time reduction is updated, a notification may or may not be made that a special miss result has occurred. In this case, it is preferable that the special miss reach A effect is less likely to be executed when the reserved time reduction is updated than when the special miss result is won for the first time during the stay time reduction.

(31) In Variation 1 of the third embodiment described above, when the reserved time-saving feature is updated, the remaining number of times in the reserved time-saving game state is replaced with the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result that was won. However, the added value (total value) of these may be configured to be the updated result of the remaining number of times. Also, when the reserved time-saving feature is updated, both the type of reserved time-saving feature and the remaining number of times are updated. However, only one of them may be updated. For example, only the type may be changed (only the number of normal game times or the mode of the feature opening/closing game is changed), and the remaining number of times may not be changed. The same applies to Variation 2.

(32) In Variation 1 of the third embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of reserved times was set to 1, but it may be set to 2 or more. If a special miss result occurs when there are two or more reserved time-saving times, the reserved time-saving time with the smaller difference in number of times is selected and compared with the difference in number of times for the sudden time-saving game state to which the current special miss result corresponds. If there are two or more reserved time-saving times, the transition order may be in the order of the special miss results as in Variation 3, or in order of priority as in Variation 5.

(33) In the second variant of the third embodiment described above, a time-shortened game state in which the expected value of winning at the second actuation port 63 is relatively high is set to a higher priority than a time-shortened game state in which the expected value of winning is relatively low. However, the relationship between the expected value of winning and the priority may be reversed, and a time-shortened game state in which the expected value of winning is relatively high may be set to a lower priority than a time-shortened game state in which the expected value of winning is relatively low.

(34) In the second variant of the third embodiment described above, the upper limit number of times for each sudden time-saving game state may be different, and a priority may be set according to the upper limit number. For example, a time-saving game state with a relatively high upper limit number may be set to a higher priority than a time-saving game state with a relatively low upper limit number. Also, a time-saving game state with a relatively high upper limit number may be set to a lower priority than a time-saving game state with a relatively low upper limit number.

(35) In Variation 2 of the third embodiment described above, a time-shortened game state of the same type as the current time-shortened game state may be configured to have a higher priority than a different time-shortened game state. In this case, it is possible to increase the opportunities to transition to the same type of time-shortened game state after the current time-shortened game state ends. In this case, if an additional effect is executed as in Variation 4, it is possible to increase the frequency with which this effect is executed, and it is possible to give the player the impression that the remaining number of times is likely to be increased.

(36) In Variation 2 of the third embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of reserved times was set to 1, but it may be set to 2 or more. If a special miss occurs when there are two or more reserved time-saving options, the reserved time-saving option with the lowest priority is compared with the priority of the sudden time-saving game state to which the current special miss result corresponds. If there are two or more reserved time-saving options, the transition order may be in the order of the special miss results as in Variation 3, or in the order of priority as in Variation 5.

(37) In Variant 3 of the third embodiment, the number of reserved time reductions may be notified. For example, a number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved time reductions may be displayed, or the number may be notified numerically. Alternatively, a number of reserved images may be displayed that does not correspond to the number of reserved time reductions (for example, a single reserved image may be displayed regardless of the number of reserved time reductions), and the appearance of the reserved image may be set based on the number of reserved time reductions. In this case, the number of reserved time reductions can be indicated by the appearance of the reserved image. In this case, the reserved image may have multiple appearances, including a first appearance (e.g., a blue appearance) and a second appearance (e.g., a green appearance), and the second appearance may be set when the number of reserved time reductions is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., two), and the first appearance may be set when the number of reserved time reductions is less than the predetermined number. Alternatively, the second appearance may be set more easily when the number of reserved time reductions is equal to or greater than the predetermined number than when it is less than the predetermined number, and the first appearance may be set more easily when the number is less than the predetermined number than when it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. These are also applicable to other variants.

(38) In variant 3 of the third embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs for the second or subsequent times while in the time-saving game mode, the player is not notified of the special miss. However, the player may be notified of the special miss each time a special miss occurs, regardless of the number of wins.

It may also be possible to determine whether or not the reserved time-saving feature will be activated (whether or not the transition will be made before the counter value set in the reserved time-saving feature area 562 reaches "0" and the reserved state is released), and then switch between whether or not to notify that a special miss result has occurred (that a reservation for the time-saving game state has occurred) based on that result. In other words, if the special miss result is activated, a notification of the special miss result will be made, and if the time-saving feature is not activated, the notification will not be made.

(39) In Variant 3 of the third embodiment described above, the transition order is not notified when there are multiple reserved time reductions, but this may also be notified. In this case, the notification may always be made during the stay time reduction, or it may be notified in a predetermined case. Examples of predetermined cases include when a predetermined operation is performed using an operation means that can be operated by the player, such as the performance operation unit 36, or when the result of a predetermined lottery based on winning at the start gate is a predetermined result.

(40) In the third variation of the third embodiment described above, when the time-shortened game state is reserved, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times the time-shortened game state can be played is set in the reserved time-shortening area 562, and the counter value set in this area is updated in parallel with the counter value in the execution time-shortening area 561, thereby deriving the remaining number of times (differential number of times) when the transition is made. However, it is also possible to calculate the differential number of times when the state is reserved, and set the remaining number of times when the transition is made based on the calculated differential number of times. In this case, it is preferable to set a reservation area 314f in RAM 314 as in the third embodiment, and store information on the calculated differential number of times in the reservation area 314f.

(41) In the third variation of the third embodiment, the counter value in the first reserved time-shortening area 562a is shifted to the execution time-shortening area 561 to set the remaining number of reserved time-shortening operations when a transition is implemented. However, the remaining number of operations may be set by shifting the referenced counter area. For example, if counter values are set in the first reserved time-shortening area 562a and the second reserved time-shortening area 562b, the first reserved time-shortening area 562a first functions as the execution time-shortening area 561, and the counter value in this area 562a is referenced to manage the remaining number of times for the stay time-shortening operation. Thereafter, the counter value in the first reserved time-shortening area 562a is updated to "0," thereby ending the stay time-shortening operation. Accordingly, the reference area is switched to the second reserved time-shortening area 562b to manage the remaining number of times for the next time-shortening game state.

(42) In the third variation of the third embodiment described above, when there are multiple reserved time-saving options, transitions are performed in the order corresponding to the special miss results. However, the transition order may be set based on the remaining number of times. For example, by configuring the transition to start with the option with the fewest remaining times, it is possible to reduce the number of time-saving game states in which the counter value in the reserved time-saving area 562 becomes "0" without a transition being performed, and to suppress the occurrence of invalidation.

(43) In variant 3 of the third embodiment described above, the order of transition when there are multiple reserved time reductions may be determined by lottery. In this case, the order of transition for multiple reserved time reductions may be determined by lottery, or the next reserved time reduction to transition to may be determined by lottery. In the latter case, for example, the order of transition to which of the multiple reserved time reductions to transition to at the end of the stay time reduction may be determined by lottery.

(44) In Variation 4 of the third embodiment described above, when transitioning to a reserved time reduction similar to the time reduction, an additional effect is executed at the end of the time reduction, but an additional effect may also be executed at some timing during the time reduction. Possible timings for executing an additional effect during the time reduction include, for example, when a special miss result is won, or a predetermined timing after the win and before the end of the time reduction. In this case, the likelihood of selecting each timing may differ depending on the number of times remaining in the time reduction when the special miss result is obtained. For example, if the timings for executing an additional effect include when a special miss result is won and a predetermined timing after the win, an additional effect may be more likely to be executed at the timing after the win when there are more times remaining in the time reduction.

(45) In variant 4 of the third embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a maximum number of reserved balls is set for each type of sudden time-saving game state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of balls (for example, three balls) are allowed to be reserved for each type of sudden time-saving game state. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the maximum number of reserved balls differs depending on the type of time-saving game state. For example, it is conceivable to set the maximum number of reserved balls for a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning the corresponding special miss result is relatively high to a larger number than the maximum number of reserved balls for a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning is relatively low.

(46) In the fifth variant of the third embodiment, the highest priority is set to the sudden time-shortened game state A, which has the highest expected value of winning at the second actuation port 63. However, the order of expected value of winning does not necessarily have to correspond to the order of priority. For example, the highest priority may be set to the sudden time-shortened game state B or the sudden time-shortened game state C, which have a lower expected value of winning than the sudden time-shortened game state A, or the lowest priority may be set to the sudden time-shortened game state A, which has the highest expected value of winning.

(47) In variant 5 of the third embodiment described above, the transition order of reserved time-saving modes may be determined by combining the order of priority with the order of winning special miss results. For example, for sudden time-saving game states B and C, the transition order may be adjusted based on the order of winning special miss results, and for sudden time-saving game state A, the highest priority may be set so that the transition occurs first, regardless of the order of winning special miss results.

(48) In Variation 5 of the third embodiment described above, priorities are set for reserved time-shortening areas 612a-612c, but priorities may also be set for the type of sudden time-shortening game state (or special miss result), and the reserved time-shortening areas may be configured to correspond to the transition order, as with reserved time-shortening areas 562a-562c in Variation 3. In this case, when the first special miss result is won during the time-shortening game, a counter value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of wins is set in first reserved time-shortening area 562a, and when the second win results in a special miss result with a higher priority than the first win, the counter value in first reserved time-shortening area 562a is shifted to second reserved time-shortening area 562b, while the counter value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of wins for the second win is shifted to first reserved time-shortening area 562a.

(49) In Variation 5 of the third embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that can be reserved is set to the same number as the number of types of time-shortened game states that can be reserved. However, it may also be set to a number that is multiple and less than the number of types (for example, two). In this case, the priority set for each sudden time-shortened game state may also be used to control whether to reserve it. Specifically, if a special miss occurs when there are two or more reserved time-shortened games, the reserved time-shortened game state with the lower priority may be compared with the priority of the corresponding time-shortened game state (the sudden time-shortened game state to which this special miss occurs), and if the priority of the corresponding time-shortened game state is higher, the reserved time-shortened game state may be swapped. In this case, the priority for the transition order may also be used as the priority for the reservation, or these priorities may be set separately.

(50) In Variation 6 of the third embodiment described above, if the priority of the time-shortened game state (corresponding time shortening) corresponding to the special missing result won midway is higher than the priority of the stay time shortening, the transition to the corresponding time shortening is immediately executed, and if the priority of the corresponding time shortening is lower than the priority of the stay time shortening, the transition to the corresponding time shortening is reserved. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the transition to the corresponding time shortening is reserved in the former case, and the transition to the corresponding time shortening is disabled in the latter case. Also, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the transition to the corresponding time shortening is immediately executed in the former case, and the transition to the corresponding time shortening is disabled in the latter case. This is also true for Variation 7.

(51) In variant 6 of the third embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which priority is not set. In other words, if special miss result A occurs in a situation where the game is in a normal time-saving game state, a transition to time-saving game state A is suddenly executed, and if special miss result B occurs, time-saving game state B is suddenly placed on hold. Such a response may be specified in the control program for each combination of time-saving game states. The same applies to variant 7.

(52) In Variation 6 of the third embodiment described above, when the priority of the response time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, the stay time reduction is stopped and a transition to the response time reduction is implemented. However, the stay time reduction may also be interrupted and a transition to the response time reduction is implemented. In other words, the stay time reduction may be resumed after the response time reduction is completed. This also applies to Variation 7.

(53) In Variation 6 of the third embodiment described above, when a transition to the adaptive time reduction is made in a situation where the priority of the adaptive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, the remaining number of times the adaptive time reduction will be used is not notified. However, the remaining number of times may also be notified. Alternatively, the remaining number of times the adaptive time reduction will be notified in principle, and then notified when a predetermined condition is met. The predetermined condition may be, for example, a predetermined operation being performed by an operating means that can be operated by the player, such as the operation unit 36 for effect.

(54) In Variation 6 of the third embodiment described above, the remaining number of times for the adaptive time reduction is hidden by displaying "? times remaining" as the remaining number of times image 523. However, the remaining number of times for the adaptive time reduction may also be hidden by not displaying the remaining number of times image 523. Also, another predetermined image may be displayed in front of the remaining number of times image 523, thereby obscuring at least a portion of the remaining number of times image 523 and making it invisible or difficult to see, thereby hiding the remaining number of times for the adaptive time reduction.

(55) In the sixth variant of the third embodiment described above, when a transition to the adaptive time reduction is made in a situation where the priority of the adaptive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, a notification corresponding to the remaining number of times if the stay time reduction were to continue is executed. However, the remaining number of times for the adaptive time reduction may not be displayed without such a notification being executed. For example, after a transition to the adaptive time reduction, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be immediately switched to "How many times remaining?".

(56) In Variation 7 of the third embodiment described above, only one type of ceiling number of times is set, but multiple types with different numbers may be set. Furthermore, multiple types of ceiling time-shortened game states with different upper limit numbers may also be set. In this case, multiple types of ceiling number of times may be set, and a type of ceiling time-shortened game state may be associated with each ceiling number, or a single ceiling number may be set, and when that ceiling number is reached, a lottery may be drawn to determine which ceiling time-shortened game state the game will transition to.

(57) In variant 8 of the third embodiment described above, the reserved state is released when a special miss result D to F occurs. However, the reserved state may also be released when triggered by another event. For example, the reserved state may be released when a game ball enters or passes through a specific ball entry section or a specific passage section located inside the play area PE or a predetermined ball entry section. In this case, it is preferable to provide multiple ball entry sections corresponding to the types of time-saving game states that can be reserved, and when a ball enters, the reservation of the corresponding type of time-saving game state is released. Note that prize balls may or may not be paid out based on the above-mentioned ball entry or passage.

(58) In variant 8 of the third embodiment described above, the reserved state can always be released when there is a reserved time reduction. However, the configuration may also include periods during which release can occur and periods during which it cannot occur. For example, if the remaining number of times the stay time reduction is in effect is a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) or less, the reserved state may not be released even if the special miss result is D to F. This allows the reserved state to be released just before the reserved time reduction transition is implemented, preventing the player from becoming overly disappointed.

(59) In Variation 8 of the third embodiment described above, the reserved states are released one by one. However, instead of or in addition to this, when there are multiple reserved time reductions and a release condition is met, the reserved states of all of those reserved time reductions may be released. Furthermore, even if not all reserved states are released, multiple reserved states may be released when one release condition is met.

(60) In Variant 8 of the third embodiment described above, the reservation display unit 731 is configured to display non-reserved sudden time-saving game states semi-transparently, but the display itself may not be displayed at all. However, by making the display semi-transparent, it becomes easier to see at a glance which sudden time-saving game state each display area 731a-731c corresponds to, and which time-saving game states are not reserved when reserved time-saving game states and non-reserved time-saving game states are mixed. From this perspective, the configuration of Variant 8 described above is preferable.

(61) In Variation 8 of the third embodiment described above, the reserved state is released when a special miss result D to F is achieved, but it may also be configured to end the stay time reduction at the same time. By using such a configuration, it is possible to increase the difference in impact when a special miss result D to F is achieved, making it possible to achieve even more thrilling gameplay.

(62) In variant 8 of the third embodiment described above, a longer variable display time is set for game times resulting in special failure results D to F than for game times resulting in special failure results A to C. However, a configuration in which a longer variable display time is more likely to be set is also possible. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a relatively long first variable display time and a relatively short second variable display time are provided, and the first variable display time is more likely to be selected for game times resulting in special failure results D to F than for game times resulting in special failure results A to C, and the second variable display time is more likely to be selected for game times resulting in special failure results A to C than for game times resulting in special failure results D to F.

(63) In Variation 8 of the third embodiment described above, the player can only recognize that one of the special failure results D to F has occurred from the stopped state of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, and it is difficult or impossible to recognize which type has occurred (which reserved time-saving state will be canceled) from the stopped state of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. However, instead of or in addition to this, the type may be recognizable or easily recognizable from the stopped state of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple modes of the special symbol 721 are set, and each mode corresponds to a type of special failure result (a type of time-saving game state in which the reserved state is canceled). In other words, the type of special failure result (a type of time-saving game state in which the reserved state is canceled) can be recognized by observing which mode of the special symbol 721 is stopped and displayed.

(64) In variant 8 of the third embodiment, the variable winning device 65 may have multiple opening/closing execution modes, including a first opening/closing execution mode and a second opening/closing execution mode, in which the opening/closing execution mode is selected, and the reserved state of the reserved time reduction may be released if the winning/losing lottery result corresponds to the first opening/closing execution mode when there is a reserved time reduction, and the reserved state of the reserved time reduction may not be released if the winning/losing lottery result corresponds to the second opening/closing execution mode when there is a reserved time reduction. This configuration not only creates a difference in the opening/closing execution mode to be transitioned to depending on whether the winning/losing lottery result corresponds to the first opening/closing execution mode or the second opening/closing execution mode, but also creates a difference in whether the reservation is released, making it possible to increase interest.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the second opening/closing execution mode may be configured to be an opening/closing execution mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the reservation is released when transitioning to the advantageous first opening/closing execution mode, but the reservation is not released when transitioning to the disadvantageous second opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the disadvantage of the opening/closing execution mode is compensated for by not releasing the reservation, making it possible to reduce the player's disappointment when transitioning to the second opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, a configuration in which the second opening and closing execution mode is less advantageous than the first opening and closing execution mode is one in which the expected total number of game balls paid out is less in the second opening and closing execution mode than in the first opening and closing execution mode. Such configurations include a configuration in which the second opening and closing execution mode has fewer rounds than the first opening and closing execution mode, a configuration in which the opening period of the variable winning device 65 per round is shorter in the second opening and closing execution mode than in the first opening and closing execution mode, or a configuration in which the upper limit of the number of winning balls that can be entered into the variable winning device 65 per round is lower in the second opening and closing execution mode than in the first opening and closing execution mode.

(65) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration is such that the transition to jackpot play (open/close execution mode) occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot result. However, like a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the configuration may also be such that the transition to jackpot play occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit result and the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during small hit play (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a miss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award determination is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, in this invention, "transitioning to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result" can be understood to also include the case where the result of a win/loss judgment is a small win result and transitioning to a big win game via a V win, as described above.

(66) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pachinko machine is a type in which game balls are paid out, but it may also be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such enclosed type pachinko machines, when prize balls are awarded as a bonus for winning a prize, for example, it is preferable to award the player a predetermined game value (virtual game medium such as credits) corresponding to the number of prize balls, and to notify the player of information indicating the number of prize balls.

(67) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but this may be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(68) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but this may not be the case. Furthermore, pending information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized over pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 in determining whether a prize has been won or lost, but this relationship may be reversed, or the winning/losing determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(69) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples above, only game balls flowing down the right route are configured to be able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63. However, it is also possible to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down the left route are able to pass through or win, or so that game balls can pass through or win from either the right or left route. However, to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right and left routes are able to win at the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right and left routes are able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(70) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variably displayed patterns on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll left and right, but the patterns may be displayed in a line on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction of the patterns and the scrolling direction are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more.

(71) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

<Fourth embodiment>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained using Figure 309.

During play, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform the jackpot lottery, set the display for the special symbol display unit 43, and set the display for the regular symbol display unit 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery to determine the jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type such as a special jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS that determines the variable display time for each special symbol display unit AS, BS in the special symbol display unit 43. Furthermore, it uses a regular symbol random number counter C3 used in the lottery to determine whether the regular symbol device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the support state (open state), and a regular symbol type counter C4 used to determine the type of support win result (regular symbol win result).

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a, which is set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special symbol reserved area Ra and a second special symbol reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of these areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history for the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first to fourth areas in the order of first area → second area → third area → fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b has a total reserved number storage area, and this total reserved number storage area stores information for specifying the number of winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

To go into more detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 2999, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314, and when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63, it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, and the random number value that results in a jackpot win is set in a win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 310, the win/lose table is set to a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes for the win/lose lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 310(a), the win/lose table for low probability mode has a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" set as jackpot values. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300.

The lottery result will be a losing result for any random number value other than the jackpot winning value, but in this embodiment, the losing results include special losing results and normal losing results. In the winning/losing table for the low probability mode, a total of 20 random number values from "10" to "29" are set as special losing results, and the probability of getting a special losing result is 1/150.

As shown in Figure 310 (b), the win/loss table for high probability mode has a total of 50 random number values between "0" and "49" set as jackpot winning values. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. The win/loss table for high probability mode does not have any special losing results, and all values other than the random number values that result in a jackpot winning result are normal losing results.

The probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot can be any. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result in the win/lose table for low probability mode is also not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, the probability of a special miss result does not necessarily have to be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and can be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result may be lower than the probability of winning a jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game results for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 311, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol are set as the jackpot type table. If a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in Figure 311(a), the jackpot type table for the first special design has a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results in four rounds of play being executed. Here, a round of play is when variable winning control is executed at least once, changing the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then returning it to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once per round of play.

A 4R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode for the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In other words, when a 4R probability variable jackpot result occurs, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high probability game state, probability variable game state). In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode begins). Incidentally, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

In the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode, the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared under conditions in which game balls are continuously being released into the play area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a is opened more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the open period for each opening is also longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in low-frequency support mode. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than that into the second actuation port 63, but in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than that into the first actuation port 62. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, allowing the player to play in high-frequency support mode while minimizing the loss of balls in their possession.

In this embodiment, the high frequency support modes are a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode. Of these, the first high frequency support mode is the mode that is entered when a 4R special jackpot result is achieved. The difference between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode will be explained later.

A 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to first high frequency support mode. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result occurs, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state).

When a 4R normal jackpot result is achieved, the time-saving play state continues until the number of special symbol play times (missing play times) resulting in a miss reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of missing play times is counted based on the special symbol play times after the opening and closing execution mode has ended. When the number of missing play times reaches the upper limit, the time-saving play state ends and the game transitions to the normal play state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result is achieved before the upper limit is reached, the time-saving play state ends with a transition to the opening and closing execution mode based on that jackpot result.

In this embodiment, a value of "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and a value of "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in Figure 311 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special chart sets the selectable jackpot types as a 10R special jackpot result and a 4R regular jackpot result.

A 10R probability jackpot result results in 10 rounds of play being executed, and is a jackpot result in which the game state after the open/close execution mode ends is a high probability game state. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs. A 4R normal jackpot result is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result in the jackpot type table for the first special chart.

In this embodiment, a value between "0" and "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 10R special jackpot result, and a value between "65" and "99" corresponds to a 4R regular jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result is set to 35%.

As such, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is the same regardless of whether the type table for the first special symbol display section or the type table for the second special symbol display section is selected. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table for the second special symbol display section is set to result in a 10R jackpot result, while the type table for the first special symbol display section is set to result in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the second actuation port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode will be greater than if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the first actuation port 62, and it is possible to expect a greater payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is awarded through the second actuation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is awarded through the first actuation port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, players will play in the hope of winning through the second actuation port 63, out of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, and as a result, players will pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning through the second actuation port 63.

In this embodiment, the type table of the first special symbol display unit and the type table of the second special symbol display unit have the same probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result, but they may also have different probabilities. Specifically, the type table of the second special symbol display unit may be configured to have a higher probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result than the type table of the first special symbol display unit. Even with this configuration, it is still more advantageous for the player to have the second actuation port 63 win than the first actuation port 62. In this case, it is not necessarily necessary to configure the second actuation port 63 to be more favorable than the first actuation port 62 in terms of both the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode and the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result; it may be configured so that only the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result is more favorable.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS when the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple pieces of data for the stop results in the event of a jackpot (the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS) that correspond to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data for the multiple stop results that corresponds to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Because the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine both the stop result and the jackpot type, the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state that is triggered by a normal jackpot result, there is also a time-saving game state that is triggered by a special miss result in the win/lose lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1. In this case, the time-saving game state is a state in which the lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a second high-frequency support mode.

Note that, because a special miss result is a type of miss result, the game will transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state without going through the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a special miss result occurs, the game state will transition to the time-saving game state as the special game round ends. In the following, when distinguishing between the time-saving game state triggered by a normal jackpot result and the time-saving game state triggered by a special miss result, the former will sometimes be referred to as the "normal time-saving game state" and the latter as the "sudden time-saving game state."

As shown in Figure 311 (c), the sudden time-saving game state, which is triggered by a special miss result, continues until the number of miss plays since the state was entered reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 100 plays). When the number of miss plays reaches the upper limit, the sudden time-saving game state ends and the game enters the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result occurs before the upper limit is reached, the sudden time-saving game state ends with a transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 309, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special symbol display section AS and second special symbol display section BS of the special symbol display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313. Details of the variable display time table will be described later.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The normal winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the normal winning holding area 314c of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used in the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not a normal winning (support winning) has occurred. If the result is a support winning, the normal power device 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a device opening/closing game is executed in which the opening/closing control to return it to the closed state is performed at least once.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in the support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 312, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, a support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode, and a support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode. When drawing the support lottery, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced; if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode is referenced; and if the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 312(a), the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode has 50 random number values between "0" and "49" set as support wins, and the probability of winning support is 1/2.

As shown in Figure 312(b), the support lottery table for the first high frequency support mode has a total of 90 numbers set, ranging from "0" to "89," and the probability of winning support is 9/10. In other words, when in the first high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is a high probability mode, making it easier to win support than in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in Figure 312 (c), in the support lottery table for the second high frequency support mode, a total of 50 random number values ranging from "0" to "49" are set as support winning values, and the probability of winning support is 1/2. In other words, in the second high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is set to a low probability mode, and the support lottery is held with a lower probability of winning support than in the first high frequency support mode.

In each support mode, if the random number value does not result in a support win, the lottery result will be a normal miss. In this case, the opening and closing of the device will not be performed.

The probability of winning a support ball in each support mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. For example, as long as the probability of winning a support ball is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a support ball win are arbitrary. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is the same as in the low-frequency support mode, but the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the low-frequency support mode. In that case, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode may be the same as the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be lower than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball is equal in the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode.

Incidentally, if the probability of winning support is set to be equal between the low-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, as in this embodiment, that is, if there is no variation in the probability of winning support between these modes, the support lottery table for each of these modes can be made common, and a single lottery table can be provided.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 309, the normal winning type counter C4 is used to assign the type when a support win occurs, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The normal winning type counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal winning type reserve area 314c of RAM 314 when a game ball enters the through gate 64.

The allocation destination of the game results for the normal winning type counter C4 is stored as a normal winning type table in the type table storage area 313b of ROM 313. As shown in Figure 313(a), in the normal winning type table, Support Win Result A and Support Win Result B are set as the selectable types of support winning.

In this embodiment, multiple types of device opening/closing games (opening/closing games of normal power device 63a) are set as the device opening/closing games that are triggered by a support win, and the type of support win corresponds to the type of device opening/closing game. However, the type of device opening/closing game that corresponds to each support win result differs depending on the type of support mode in which you are currently playing. Specifically, if support win result A or support win result B is obtained in a low-frequency support mode, a low-prize device opening/closing game is played; if support win result A is obtained in a first or second high-frequency support mode, a first high-prize device opening/closing game is played; and if support win result B is obtained in a first or second high-frequency support mode, a second high-prize device opening/closing game is played.

A low-prize opening/closing device game has a lower winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 than the first high-prize opening/closing device game and the second high-prize opening/closing device game described below, and is a device opening/closing device game in which the player is less likely to expect a win in the second operating port 63. The specific form of a low-prize opening/closing device game is not particularly limited, but for example, it can be set to a form having a relatively long opening and closing period and a relatively short opening period.

For example, as shown in Figure 313(b), the number of times the normal power device 63a opens (number of opening and closing controls) can be set to two, with a configuration that includes a 5-second opening, a 0.1-second first opening, a 1.5-second closing, a 0.1-second second opening, and a 5-second ending, in that order. In this case, because the opening period of the normal power device 63a each time is shorter than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds), it becomes difficult for a winning ball to be placed in the second operating port 63. Furthermore, because the opening and closing periods are long and the opening period accounts for a small proportion of the overall period of the device opening and closing game, it also becomes difficult for a winning ball to be placed in the second operating port 63.

The first high prize opening/closing device game has a higher winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 than the low prize opening/closing device game, making it easier for players to expect a win in the second operating port 63. However, the winning rate is lower than the second high prize opening/closing device game described below. The specific form of the first high prize opening/closing device game is not particularly limited, but for example, it can be set to a form having a relatively short opening and closing period and a relatively long opening period.

For example, as shown in Figure 314(a), the normal power device 63a can be set to open once, with a 0.1 sec opening, 1.5 sec opening, and 0.1 sec ending, in that order. In this case, because the opening period of the normal power device 63a is longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 sec), winning at the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur. Furthermore, because the opening and ending periods are short and the opening period accounts for a large proportion of the overall period of the device opening and closing game, winning at the second operating port 63 is also made easier.

The second high prize opening/closing device game is a device opening/closing game in which the winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 is even higher than in the first high prize opening/closing device game, making it easier for players to expect a win in the second operating port 63. The specific form of the second high prize opening/closing device game is not particularly limited, but for example, it can be set to a form having a relatively short opening and closing period and a relatively long opening period.

For example, as shown in Figure 314(b), the normal power device 63a can be set to open twice, with a 0.1 second opening, a 2 second first opening, a 0.3 second closing, a 2 second second opening, and a 0.1 second ending, in that order. In this case, because the opening period of the normal power device 63a is longer than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds), winning at the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur. Furthermore, because the opening and ending periods are short and the opening period accounts for a large proportion of the overall period of the device opening and closing game, winning at the second operating port 63 is also made easier.

As shown in Figure 313(a), in the normal winning type table, "0" to "49" on the normal winning type counter C4 corresponds to support winning result A, and "50" to "99" corresponds to support winning result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to support winning result A is set to 50%, and the probability of being assigned to support winning result B is set to 50%.

The allocation probability for each support win is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the probability of support win B may be higher than the probability of support win A, or vice versa. Furthermore, the number of types of support wins is not limited to two, and may be one, or three or more.

The regular winning type counter C4 is also used to determine the stop result of the pattern that will be displayed on the regular winning display unit 44 if the support lottery result is a support win. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple pieces of data for stop results in the event of a support win (regular winning patterns that will be displayed on the regular winning display unit 44) that correspond to the value of the regular winning type counter C4. When determining the stop result, the data for the multiple stop results that corresponds to the acquired regular winning type counter C4 is read out. Because the same regular winning type counter C4 is used to determine both the stop result and the type of support win, the regular winning pattern that is displayed on the regular winning type display unit 44 corresponds to the type of support win that is determined when that support win is won.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to progress the game by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but we will not explain these processes here.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 315. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sd101, the various winning sensors are read. That is, the status of the various winning sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, and the status of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If it is determined that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Furthermore, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

In step Sd102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sd103, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, normal random number counter C3, and normal type counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, normal random number counter C3, and normal type counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sd104, a through winning process is executed in response to a win at the through gate 64. In the through winning process, a determination is made as to whether a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If this flag is stored, the values of the regular winning random number counter C3 and regular winning type counter C4 updated in step Sd103 are stored in the regular winning area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role devices stored in the regular winning area 314c is less than four. Furthermore, if a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the through gate winning process is terminated.

In step Sd105, the winning process for the operating port 62, 63 is executed in response to a winning entry into the operating port 62, 63, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for operating port>
The winning processing for the operating port in step Sd105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 316.

First, in step Sd201, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sd202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three gaming balls.

In step Sd203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sd204, the value stored in the reserve number memory area of the first special symbol reserve area Ra is read, and the start reserve memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserve memory number RaN). Then, in step Sd205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd201 (no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sd206, where it is determined whether a gaming ball has won the second actuation port 63 (initial winning) based on the detection state of the second actuation port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that a gaming ball has won the second actuation port 63, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sd207 to pay out one gaming ball.

In step Sd208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sd209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Then, in step Sd205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sd202 or step Sd207 above is sent to the payout control device 181 through the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sd205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 317.

First, in step Sd301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sd204 or step Sd209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process ends. If it is less than the upper limit, in step Sd302, 1 is added to the start pending memory count N for the corresponding special chart hold area Ra, Rb. In step Sd303, 1 is added to the value stored in the total hold count memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold count CRN).

In step Sd304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the corresponding reserved area for the special chart display section, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number increased by 1 in step Sd302 above.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the first special symbol holding area Ra, i.e., the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol added by 1 in step Sd302 above.

In addition, if the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the reserve area Rb for the second special symbol, i.e., the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol added by 1 in step Sd302 above.

In step Sd305, a display update process is executed for the special symbol reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. The special symbol reserved number display section AM is capable of displaying the reserved number for the first special symbol and the reserved number for the second special symbol separately. In the display update process of step Sd305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special symbol is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special symbol is updated.

In step Sd306, a hold command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special symbol is the starting winning symbol, information indicating the number of symbols on hold, etc. After step Sd306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 318. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and in normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sd401 to Sd408 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sd409 to Sd411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, external signal output processing is first executed in step Sd401. In the external signal output processing in step Sd401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sd402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sd403, a special symbol play control process is executed to control play during each special symbol play. The special symbol play control process performs jackpot determination and display control of the special symbol display unit 43. In step Sd404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the special symbol play control process in step Sd403 and the game state transition process in step Sd404 will be described later.

In step Sd405, a normal game play control process is executed to control play during a normal game play. The normal game play control process involves the support lottery (regular game win/lose lottery) and display control of the normal game display unit 44. In step Sd406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal electric role device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Details of the normal game play control process in step Sd405 and the electric role support process in step Sd406 will be described later.

In step Sd407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), provided that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In step Sd408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage has not occurred), step Sd409 determines whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing, step Sd410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314.

In step Sd411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd409 (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), processing returns to step Sd401 and processing from step Sd401 onwards is executed.

In this way, after executing the processing of step Sd408, the remaining period until the timing for executing the next normal processing is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, the execution time of each processing of steps Sd401 to Sd408 changes depending on the state of the game, so the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can likewise be randomly updated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd408 (the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sd412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sd413, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Sd414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Sd415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sd416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after power is completely cut off, power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to maintain data storage in RAM 314, so the information stored in RAM 314 before power was cut off is retained in its original state for a predetermined period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special game play control processing>
The game play control processing of step Sd403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 319.

First, in step Sd501, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, step Sd502 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol. Specifically, it determines whether the fixed symbol display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The fixed symbol display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a fixed symbol.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed value, step Sd503 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable value. Specifically, it determines whether the variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a variable value.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, step Sd504 determines whether the common hold number CRN is "0." If the common hold number CRN is "0," this means that the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common hold number CRN is "0," there is no hold information to be executed, and the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserve number CRN is not "0", step Sd505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra or the second special symbol reserve area Rb for variable display, and then step Sd506 executes a variable start process to start variable display in the special symbol display unit 43, after which the game play control process is terminated.

The data setting process in step Sd505 and the fluctuation start process in step Sd506 are now explained in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 320.

First, in step Sd601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is "0." If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0," data setting processing for the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sd602 to Sd608. If the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0," data setting processing for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sd609 to Sd615.

As already explained, data setting processing is performed when the common reserve number CRN is 1 or greater. A situation in which data setting processing is performed means that at least one of the first start reserve memory number RaN and the second start reserve memory number RbN is 1 or greater. In this case, the data setting processing is configured to first determine whether the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," and then perform processing related to the reserve information for the first special symbol if the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," i.e., if there is no reserve information for the second special symbol. Therefore, if reserve information is stored in both the first special symbol reserve area Ra and the second special symbol reserve area Rb, the reserve information for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is processed first.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first in step Sd602, the first start hold memory number RaN in the first special symbol holding area Ra is decremented by 1. In step Sd603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sd604, the data stored in the first area of the first special symbol holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sd605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra. This process clears the data in the first area and sequentially moves the data in the second to fourth areas to the lower areas.

In step Sd606, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second special symbol flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If a second special symbol flag is stored, the second special symbol flag is cleared in step Sd607.

After step Sd607 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd606 (the second special symbol flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sd608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first special symbol reserved area Ra, i.e., information that it corresponds to the first actuation port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sd608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of normal processing (Fig. 318). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first pending display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of pending items.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step Sd609, the second start hold memory count RbN in the second special symbol holding area Rb is decremented by 1. In step Sd610, the common hold count CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sd611, the data stored in the first area of the second special symbol holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sd612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb. In step Sd613, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sd614.

After step Sd614 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sd613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sd615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information that causes the sub-control device, the performance control device 143, to recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second special symbol reserved area Rb, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second actuation port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sd615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of normal processing (Fig. 318). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second hold display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 321.

First, in step Sd701, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table corresponding to the current game state. Specifically, if the current lottery mode is low probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 310(a)), and if the current lottery mode is high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 310(b)). In this step, a determination is made as to whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the random number for a jackpot in the win/loss table being referenced.

In step Sd702, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sd701 is a hit or miss jackpot. If a hit or miss jackpot is determined, in step Sd703, the corresponding jackpot type table is referenced to determine the jackpot type (a lottery for the jackpot type). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the first special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Fig. 311(a)). If the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the second special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Fig. 311(b)). For example, if the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to a numerical range for a 4R special jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result.

In step Sd704, a jackpot type flag corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sd703 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result A, the 4R normal jackpot A flag is set.

In step Sd705, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd702 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sd706, where it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss judgment in step Sd701 is a special miss result. If it is a special miss result, a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sd707. The special miss flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the result of this hit/miss judgment is a special miss result.

In step Sd708, the stop result table is referenced to set the stop result for the special miss. The stop result table contains data on specific stop results corresponding to the special miss results, and in this step, this data is read and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd706 (if the result is not a special miss), the process proceeds to step Sd709, where the stop result for the current game is set as the stop result for a normal miss. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a normal miss is provided, and this stop result is set in step Sd709.

After step Sd705, step Sd708, or step Sd709 is executed, step Sd710 executes a high-frequency support mode update process to update the number of special game plays in high-frequency support mode. In step Sd711, a sudden time-saving game state transition determination process is executed to determine whether a transition trigger to the sudden time-saving game state has occurred. In step Sd712, a variable display time setting process is executed to draw a variation pattern and set the variable display time. Details of steps Sd710 to Sd712 will be described later.

In step Sd713, a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display for a special game is in progress.

In step Sd714, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The fluctuation start command contains information about the fluctuation pattern, and a different fluctuation pattern is set for each game state, and a different fluctuation pattern is also set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, the presentation control device 143 can grasp not only information about the fluctuation display time, but also whether or not there has been a jackpot and the current game state. Furthermore, the type command contains information about the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot.

In step Sd715, the display of the special symbol display section 43 begins to change. At that time, if the current special symbol game is based on a win in the first operating port 62, the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed in a changing manner, and if it is based on a win in the second operating port 63, the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed in a changing manner. After step Sd715 is executed, the change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol play count control process (Fig. 319), after step Sd506 is executed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sd501 (open/close execution mode is in progress), the special symbol play count control process is terminated without executing the processing from step Sd502 onwards. In other words, if the open/close execution mode is in progress, no variable display will be performed on the special symbol display unit 43 even if pending information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd503 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable value), the process proceeds to step Sd507, where it is determined whether the variable display time for the current special symbol game has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step Sd508. In the variable display processing, the display of the special symbol display unit for the current game is controlled (the illumination of each display segment is controlled) so that each display segment in the special symbol display unit for the current game is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After step Sd508 is executed, the special symbol game control processing ends.

If the variable display time has elapsed, proceed to step Sd509 and clear the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sd510, high-frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high-frequency support mode. In step Sd511, processing for transitioning to a sudden time-shortened game state is executed. The sudden time-shortened game state transition processing is intended to transition the game state to a sudden time-shortened game state. Details of steps Sd510 and Sd511 will be described later.

In step Sd512, the process for starting the final display is executed, and then the special symbol game count control process is terminated. In the process for starting the final display, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to display the image as stopped based on the stop result set in step Sd705, step Sd708, or step Sd709. In addition, in step Sd512, the final display time for continuing the above-mentioned stopped display is also set.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol), the process proceeds to step Sd513, where a process for terminating the fixed symbol display is executed. In the process for terminating the fixed symbol display, it is determined whether the fixed symbol display time set in step Sd512 has elapsed, and if so, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to terminate the static symbol display. Note that if there is no next pending information when the fixed symbol display time has elapsed, the static symbol display is controlled to continue as is until a winning entry occurs in the actuation port 62, 63. After step Sd513 is completed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

<Game status transition processing>
The game state transition processing of step Sd404 (Figure 318) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 322.

First, in step Sd901, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not currently in the open/close execution mode, the program proceeds to step Sd902, where it is determined whether or not the special symbol game has ended (whether or not the confirmation display on the special symbol display unit 43 has ended). If the special symbol game has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the end timing of the special symbol game round, step Sd903 determines whether the game result of this special symbol game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot type flag (step Sd704) is checked to see if it is stored in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the game result of this special symbol game round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, the game state transition process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd903 (if the game result of this special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sd904, where the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, an opening period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if the high probability flag or high frequency support flag described below is set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sd905, the process for starting the round display to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is executed. In this step, the type of jackpot that has occurred is determined based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sd906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R regular jackpot result, in step Sd907, the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sd908, the round counter area RC1 is set to "10".

After step Sd907 or step Sd908 is executed, in step Sd909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the opening. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of normal processing (Figure 318).

In step Sd910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to that management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sd911, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening/closing process is executed in step Sd912.

Here, the process for opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 323.

First, in step Sd1001, it is determined whether the special prize opening 65a is open. This determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 65d. If the special prize opening 65a is not open, in step Sd1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Sd1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T1 is "0," proceed to step Sd1004, where "15000" is set in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 315) is activated. In step Sd1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter area 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sd1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sd1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Figure 318).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1102 (the value in the round counter area RC1 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Sd1103 (the value in the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If step Sd1001 returns a positive result (the large prize opening 65a is currently open), the process proceeds to step Sd1008, where it is determined whether the value in timer area T1 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit opening time for the variable prize device 65 set in step Sd1004 has elapsed.

If the value in timer area T1 is not "0," proceed to step Sd1009, where a determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value in prize counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Sd1010, and then a determination is made as to whether or not the value in prize counter area PC1 is "0" in step Sd1011. If the value in prize counter area PC1 is not "0," the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1008 (if the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or if a positive judgment is made in step Sd1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sd1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sd1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Sd1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sd1015 and set "1000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the period (2 seconds) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sd1016, a close command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Figure 318).

If step Sd1014 returns a positive result (the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), i.e., if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sd1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed and awaits the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sd1018, an ending command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal process (Fig. 318).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 322), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sd912, step Sd913 determines whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," the game state transition process is terminated immediately to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", proceed to step Sd914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, proceed to step Sd915 to execute the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 324.

First, in step Sd1201, the jackpot type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot result. If it is a variable probability jackpot result, in step Sd1202, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to high probability mode.

In step Sd1203, the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The Support A flag corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode. By setting the Support A flag, the internal state corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd1204, a high probability game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability game state start command set in step Sd1204 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Fig. 318). By sending the high probability game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the high probability game state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd1201 (the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sd1205, where the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the support mode to the first high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd1206, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the current jackpot result is set. For example, if the current jackpot result is a 4R normal jackpot result, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The support counter area SC is used by MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of special symbol game times that can be played in high-frequency support mode), and is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol game is played in high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd1207, a time-shortened game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The time-shortened game state start command set in step Sd1207 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Fig. 318). By sending the time-shortened game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the time-shortened game state (low probability mode and first high-frequency support mode).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Fig. 322), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sd915 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Sd916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that it is turned off.

In step Sd917, the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, and then the game state transition process is terminated. The opening and closing execution mode termination process executes a process to erase the type flag and opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e.

Next, we will explain the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sd710 and the sudden transition to the time-saving game state determination process in step Sd711. These processes are executed during the fluctuation start process (Fig. 321), or in other words, when the fluctuation display starts during a special game round.

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The frequently supported mode update process in step Sd710 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sd1301, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, in step Sd1302 it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Specifically, it is determined whether either the Support A flag or the Support B flag is set. The Support B flag corresponds to the second high-frequency support mode (sudden time-saving game state).

If any of the support flags is set, i.e., if the high-frequency support mode is in effect, proceed to step Sd1303 and update the value of the support counter area SC in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times in the time-shortened play state (the remaining number of times the player can stay in the time-shortened play state).

In step Sd1304, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0." If the value of the support counter area SC is "0," that is, if the number of times play has been performed in the time-shortened game state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sd1305, where a time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The time-shortened end flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine when each time-shortened game state should be ended.

After step Sd1305 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1301 (if a jackpot result is obtained) or a negative judgment is made in step Sd1302 (if neither support flag is set), the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sd1303 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1304 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), the time-saving game state should not be ended, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process of step Sd1305.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state in step Sd711 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 326.

First, in step Sd1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special loss result. Specifically, it is determined whether a special loss flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special loss flag is set if the result of the win/loss determination in step Sd701 is determined to be a special loss result (step Sd707).

If the result of the special drawing lottery is not a special miss (the special miss flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving game state is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sd1402, where it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current game state is the normal game state, in step Sd1403, a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur. After step Sd1403 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

If step Sd1402 returns a positive result (if one of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sd1403. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation where the game is in the time-saving game state, in other words, if a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is established in a situation where the game is in the time-saving game state, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that result is invalidated. After step Sd1403 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

In this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode update process (Figure 325) is executed first, followed by the process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state (Figure 326). The remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state (support counter area SC) is updated, and then a determination is made as to whether or not to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state. Therefore, if a special miss occurs in a play round other than the final play round in the time-shortened game state while remaining in the time-shortened game state, a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state will not occur as described above, but if a special miss occurs in the final play round, a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is permitted.

In other words, in the final play, the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state becomes "0," and the time-saving play state is internally terminated (the support flag is cleared), after which the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving play state is performed. Therefore, in the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving play state, which is performed in the final play, it is determined in step Sd1402 that the support flag is not set, and if a special miss result occurs and the special miss flag is set, the sudden time-saving start flag is set in step Sd1403.

In this embodiment, if a special miss occurs in any play round other than the final play round, the transition to the time-saving play state is suddenly disabled. However, as in the third embodiment and its variations, the transition to the time-saving play state may be suspended by setting a reservation flag.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process of step Sd712 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 327.

First, in step Sd1601, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability flag, first high frequency support flag, or second high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and based on the result, the current game state is determined to be either the normal game state, the high probability game state, the normal time-shortened game state, or the sudden time-shortened game state. In this step, if the high probability flag and the first high frequency support mode are set, the state is determined to be the high probability game state; if only the first high frequency support mode is set, the state is determined to be the normal time-shortened game state; if only the second high frequency support mode is set, the state is determined to be the sudden time-shortened game state; and if none of the flags are set, the state is determined to be the normal game state.

In step Sd1602, it is determined whether the game state determined in step Sd1601 is a normal game state. If it is a normal game state, the process proceeds to step Sd1603, where a variable display time table for the normal game state is obtained. The variable display time table is used to select a variable display time (variation pattern) based on the value of the variable type counter CS.

Here, the variable display time table for the normal game state will be explained with reference to Figure 328. The variable display time table for the normal game state includes a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 328(a)), a variable display time table for a special miss (Figure 328(b)), and a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 328(c)). In each variable display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS is set in correspondence with fluctuation pattern information.

As shown in Figure 328 (a), the variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to normal game play has variable pattern 1A (15 seconds), variable pattern 2A (60 seconds), and variable pattern 3A (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern is set as the variable display time of the image in the first special symbol display section AS or the second special symbol display section BS.

In addition, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. The display control device 350 is then controlled so that the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is synchronized with the variation display of the patterns on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS, and is displayed on the symbol display device 75.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to game-round effects such as reach effects performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning effect, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning effect, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning effect. In other words, when the effect control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game-round effect corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects described above, after a reach-winning display is made, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, reach-winning display (reach state) refers to a display state intended to make the player believe that the state is likely to result in a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the changing display is a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of changing (or variable) displaying symbols (pictures), between the start of the changing (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, this is a display state in which symbols in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are displayed as still symbols, thereby displaying a reach symbol combination that has the potential to form a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the display of varying symbols is terminated, when the symbols in the final symbol row are displayed as varying symbols, a reach line is formed by displaying symbols in symbol rows other than the final symbol row as still symbols on an active line on the display screen G in a manner that forms a jackpot symbol combination.

A normal reach hit effect is one in which the above-mentioned reach display is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. An SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than a normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after the reach line is formed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols in a jackpot symbol combination are displayed. An SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than an SP reach effect, in which a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the items in the "Notes (Display Mode)" column in Figure 328(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in Figure 328 (b), in the variation display time table for special misses corresponding to the normal game state, variation pattern Z1 (15 seconds) is set as a selectable variation pattern. In other words, variation pattern Z1 is always selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS. As already explained, a special miss result suddenly triggers a transition to the time-saving game state.

Fluctuating pattern Z1 corresponds to the special reach miss A effect, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect as a play-time effect. Here, the special reach miss A effect will be explained with reference to Figure 329.

In the special reach miss A presentation, first, as shown in Figure 329(a), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed as a reach combination on one of the active lines L1-L5 on the display screen G, and the reach display is executed. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row that stops last) is switched from a high-speed changing display to a slow-speed changing display. At this time, as shown in Figure 329(b), a slow-speed changing display is executed with a special symbol 711 labeled, for example, "LUCKY," placed in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. This allows the player to recognize the presence of the special symbol 711. Note that Figure 329(b) shows an example in which the special symbol 711 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol that is next to the "3" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Next, as shown in Figure 329(c), the slowly fluctuating special symbol 711 is displayed stopped on the reach line. In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination in which the special symbol 711 of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line is a symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss result, and this notifies the player that a special miss result has occurred.

As shown in Figure 328 (c), the variable display time table for normal misses, which corresponds to the normal game state, has variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 seconds), variable pattern 3H (60 seconds), and variable pattern 4H (120 seconds) set as selectable variable patterns. Similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, a variable display time is set for each variable pattern, but the variable display time for variable pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special symbols at that time. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are two or fewer reserved symbols, the variable display time is 8 seconds, and if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are three or more reserved symbols, the variable display time is set to 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss effect on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss effect, variation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach miss effect, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to an SPSP reach miss effect.

A complete miss effect is one in which no reach display is made and symbols are displayed in a miss symbol combination. Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects is one in which, after a reach display is made, the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reach miss symbol combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot when combined with the reach symbols). Furthermore, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect similar to the SP reach hit effect is made, a conclusion video corresponding to a miss is displayed, and symbols are displayed in a reach miss symbol combination. Furthermore, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for normal misses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "98" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the win/loss lottery based on the entry into actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a regular miss, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a regular miss, and therefore functions as the highest level reach effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to higher-ranking reach effects are more likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and less likely to be selected in the event of a normal miss. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 328 (c), in the variation display time table for normal misses, which corresponds to the normal game state, variation pattern Z2 is set as a selectable variation pattern. Variation pattern Z2 is selected when the value of the variation type counter is "99".

Fluctuation pattern Z2 corresponds to the special reach miss B effect, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z2 is sent to the effect control device 143, the effect control device 143 controls the symbol display device 75 to execute the special reach miss B effect. The special reach miss B effect is a so-called false effect that is paired with the special reach miss A effect, and it builds up anticipation for a special miss and then stops and displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination.

In the special reach miss B effect, as shown in Figures 329(a) and (b), after a reach display is executed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed as a slow-moving display including the special pattern 711. In other words, the pattern change effect is executed up to the middle in the same manner as the special reach miss A effect. After that, for example, the special pattern 711 passes over the reach line, and a pattern different from the special pattern 711 in the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line, as shown in Figure 329(d). In other words, while it appears as if the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result is formed, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in such a way that the combination is ultimately not formed.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Figure 327), in step Sd1603, from the various variable display time tables for the normal game state, one that corresponds to the result of the current special symbol hit/miss determination (step Sd701) is obtained. Specifically, if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a jackpot result, the variable display time table for the jackpot is obtained; if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a special miss result, the variable display time table for the special miss is obtained; and if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a normal miss result, the variable display time table for the normal miss is obtained.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd1602 (not in the normal gaming state), proceed to step Sd1604, where it is determined whether the current gaming state determined in step Sd1601 is a high probability gaming state. If it is in the high probability gaming state, a variable display time table for the high probability gaming state is obtained in step Sd1605.

The variable display time table for the high probability game state will be explained with reference to Figure 330. The variable display time table for the high probability game state includes a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 330(a)) and a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 330(b)).

As shown in Figure 330(a), the variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to a high probability game state has variable pattern 11A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit and variable pattern 12A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

Also, as shown in Figure 330 (b), the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to high probability gameplay states has variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss set as selectable variable patterns. In the variable display time table for normal misses in high probability gameplay states, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete miss is wider than in the variable display time table for normal misses in normal gameplay states. In other words, reach miss effects are less likely to occur, allowing gameplay to progress more quickly.

In addition, the variable display time for variable pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is shortened earlier than the variable display time table for normal misses in normal gameplay. Specifically, it is configured to be 8 seconds when there is one or fewer reserved items, and 4 seconds when there are two or more reserved items.

In step Sd1605, the variable display time table for the high probability game state is selected from the various variable display time tables for the high probability game state, which corresponds to the result of this special symbol win/loss judgment. Note that, since the win/loss table for the high probability game state does not have a special loss result set (Figure 310 (b)), the variable display time table for the high probability game state does not have a setting corresponding to the special loss result set either.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd1604 (the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, a variable display time table for the time-saving game state is obtained in step Sd1606.

The variable display time table for the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figures 331 and 332. The variable display time table for the time-saving game state includes a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 331(a)), a variable display time table for a miss on the first special design (Figure 331(b)), a variable display time table for a special miss on the second special design (Figure 332(a)), and a variable display time table for a normal miss on the second special design (Figure 332(b)).

As shown in Figure 331 (a), the variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to the time-saving game mode has variable pattern 21A (15 seconds) corresponding to a normal reach hit, variable pattern 22A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit, and variable pattern 23A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

The variable display time table for misses on the first special symbol (for time-saving play mode) is referenced when the win/loss lottery for the first special symbol in time-saving play mode results in a special miss or a normal miss. In this table, as shown in Figure 331 (b), the selectable variable patterns are variable pattern W1 (15 seconds), which corresponds to a miss on a normal reach, and variable pattern W2 (60 seconds), which corresponds to a miss on an SP reach.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special symbol (for time-shortened play mode) is referenced when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol under time-shortened play mode is a special miss. As shown in Figure 332(a), this variable display time table is configured so that the variable pattern selection manner differs depending on the number of times the special symbol has been played since the transition to time-shortened play mode.

Specifically, if the number of times a special symbol game play has been played since the transition to the time-saving game state is between 1 and 99 and a special miss occurs, variation pattern X1 (e.g., 8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected; if the number of times a special symbol game play has been played since the transition to the time-saving game state is 100, i.e., if a special miss occurs on the final play in the time-saving game state, variation pattern X2 (e.g., 15 seconds) is selected. Variation pattern X1 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and variation pattern X2 corresponds to a special reach miss A effect.

In other words, if a special miss occurs on the first through 99th special symbol play after transitioning to the time-saving play state, a complete miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and no notification is given that a special miss has occurred. This is to accommodate the fact that even if a special miss occurs while in the time-saving play state, a sudden transition to the time-saving play state corresponding to that result will not occur.

On the other hand, if a special miss occurs on the 100th special symbol play, the symbol display device 75 will execute a special reach miss A effect, and the player will be notified that a special miss has occurred. As already explained, even in the time-saving play state, if the play round in which the special miss occurred is the final play round, the game is configured to transition suddenly to the time-saving play state corresponding to that result, and this is why the player is notified that a special miss has occurred.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special symbol (for time-shortened play mode) is referenced when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol under time-shortened play mode is a normal miss. This variable display time table is also configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special symbol has been played since the transition to the first time-shortened play mode, as shown in Figure 332 (b).

If the number of special symbol play times since the transition to the time-saving play state is between 1 and 99 and a normal miss occurs, the selectable variation patterns are variation pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, variation pattern 22H (15 seconds) corresponding to a normal reach miss, variation pattern 23H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variation pattern 24H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss. The rate of complete misses is lower than in the loss variation display time table for the normal play state; this is to prevent the time-saving play state from ending without a reach effect by increasing the frequency of reach effects. Note that the variation display time for variation pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss is configured to be 8 seconds if the number of reserved symbols is 1 or less, and 4 seconds if the number of reserved symbols is 2 or more, just like in the loss variation display time table for the high-probability play state.

In addition, if the final play in the time-saving mode results in a normal loss, variation pattern X3 (8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS. Variation pattern X3 corresponds to a complete loss effect.

As shown in Figures 332 (c) and (d), a variable display time table for reserved play after the time-shortened play state is set as the variable display time table that is referenced in the normal play state after the time-shortened play state has ended. The reserved play here corresponds to the special symbol play times that will be executed in the normal play state after the time-shortened play state has ended, based on the reserved information for the second special symbol that exists at the end of the time-shortened play state. Since the maximum number of reserved second special symbols is four, the reserved special symbol play times will be executed a maximum of four times.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special chart (normal play state for reserved special charts) is referenced when a special miss occurs during play of the reserved special chart. As shown in Figure 332 (c), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern X4 (15 seconds) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern X4 corresponds to the special reach miss A presentation.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special chart (normal play state for reserved special charts) is referenced when a normal miss occurs during play of the reserved special chart. As shown in Figure 332 (d), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern X5 (8 seconds) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern X5 corresponds to a complete miss effect.

Because each variable display time table is configured as described above, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a special miss during the final play round through the reserved play rounds, a reach effect will be executed, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a regular miss, the execution of the reach effect will be restricted. Therefore, if a reach effect is executed during the final play round through the reserved play rounds, a jackpot or special miss result will be confirmed, and the player will be able to predict that the result will not be a regular miss before the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 all stop. In other words, during these play rounds, players will play in strong anticipation of a reach effect occurring, which will greatly increase the level of attention paid to the behavior of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

As shown in Figures 332(a) and (b), if the win/loss lottery for the second special symbol during time-saving play results in a loss, a variation pattern corresponding to a complete loss effect with a relatively short variation display time is selected with a certain probability, whereas as shown in Figure 331(b), if the win/loss lottery for the first special symbol during time-saving play results in a loss, a variation pattern corresponding to a complete loss effect is not selected, and a variation pattern corresponding to a reach loss effect with a relatively long variation display time is selected. In other words, when a play round of the first special symbol is executed, a longer variation display time is more likely to be selected than when a play round of the second special symbol is executed.

With this configuration, if a round of play for the first special symbol is started in a time-saving play state with two or more reserved first special symbols and zero reserved second special symbols, a longer period can be secured to obtain reserved information for the second special symbol before the next round of play for the first special symbol is played. This makes it easier to avoid playing the next round of play for the first special symbol, and reduces the number of times a winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol (a winning/losing lottery that is unfavorable to the player) is played.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 327), in step Sd1606, the variable display time table for the time-saving game state that corresponds to the situation at that time is obtained from the various tables. Specifically, the result of the current special symbol hit/miss determination and whether or not there will be a sudden transition to the time-saving game state based on that result are referenced, and the table corresponding to these is obtained.

Note that the fluctuation display time tables shown in Figures 328 and 330 to 332 are merely examples, and the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be set arbitrarily.

After step Sd1603, step Sd1605, or step Sd1606 is executed, step Sd1607 uses the fluctuation display time table obtained in each of those steps to execute a lottery process for the fluctuation display time (fluctuation pattern). Specifically, from the group of fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation display time table, one fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Sd1608, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sd1607 above is set as the variable display time for the current special game. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area above as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 315) is started.

In step Sd1609, it is determined whether a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sd1610, where the process clears the flag. After step Sd1610 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step Sd1609 (if the special miss flag is not set), the process of setting the variable display time ends.

Next, we will explain the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step Sd510 (Fig. 319) and the process for suddenly transitioning to the time-saving game state in step Sd511. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed during a special game cycle; in other words, they are executed when the final display during a special game cycle begins.

<Processing for ending high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode termination process in step Sd510 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sd1701, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any support flags are set, that is, if the game is currently in either the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, it proceeds to step Sd1702, where it is determined whether a time-saving end flag is set. The time-saving end flag indicates that the current time-saving game state should be ended; in other words, it indicates that the current special symbol game round is the final special symbol game round in the current time-saving game state.

If the time-saving end flag is set, proceed to step Sd1703 and clear the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. This will result in an internal state corresponding to the end of high-frequency support mode. Note that the actual end of high-frequency support mode, i.e., the state in which the normal power device 63a is controlled to operate in a manner corresponding to low-frequency support mode, will occur after the execution of this step.

In step Sd1704, the time-saving end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sd1705, the corresponding time-saving game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. For example, if the normal time-saving game state is ended, the time-saving game state end command corresponding to the end of the normal game state is set.

After step Sd1705 is executed, the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1702 (if the time-saving termination flag is not set), the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sd1703 onwards.

<Processing for transitioning to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition processing of the sudden time-saving game state in step Sd511 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 334.

First, in step Sd1801, it is determined whether a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The sudden time-saving start flag is set during the transition determination process in step Sd711 at the start of fluctuation (step Sd1403), and indicates that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation dictates a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, proceed to step Sd1802 and set the Support B flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This transition causes a transition to an internal state corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state (second high-frequency support mode). Note that the actual transition to the second high-frequency support mode, i.e., the state in which the normal power device 63a is controlled to operate in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, occurs after the execution of this step.

In step Sd1803, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times the sudden time-saving game state can be played (e.g., 100 times) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times the high-frequency support mode (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state) can be played.

In step Sd1804, the sudden time-shortening start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sd1805, a sudden time-shortening game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The sudden time-shortening game state start command is used to notify the player of a sudden transition to a time-shortening game state, and this command includes information indicating the type of sudden time-shortening game state to transition to. The sudden time-shortening game state start command set in step Sd1805 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 of normal processing (Fig. 318).

After step Sd1805 is executed, the first transition process to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1801 (the sudden time-shortened start flag is not set), the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state is not executed, and the transition process to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processes from step Sd1802 onwards.

<Regular game play control processing>
The normal game play control processing of step Sd405 (Figure 318) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 335 (a).

First, in step Sd1901, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game using the normal power feature 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special feature opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a special feature opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a special feature opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel device is currently opening and closing, the normal game play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel device is not currently opening and closing, step Sd1902 determines whether a normal game play is being performed in the normal game display unit 44. In this case, a normal game play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal game display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal game display unit 44, and step Sd1902 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

Note that during special symbol game times in the special symbol display unit 43, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress, but during normal symbol game times, variable displays are permitted even during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, during normal symbol game times, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the device is being opened/closed using the normal electric device 63a, but during special symbol game times, variable displays are permitted even during the device is being opened/closed. Also, normal symbol game times can be started while special symbol game times are being executed, and special symbol game times can be started while normal symbol game times are being executed. In other words, these game times can be executed in parallel. However, because they are not linked and are executed and controlled independently of each other, normal symbol game times and special symbol game times are executed asynchronously.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd1902 (a normal game round is not currently being played), the process proceeds to step Sd1903, where it is determined whether the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0." If the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0," the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved normal map memories FN is not "0", step Sd1904 executes a normal map data setting process to set the data stored in the electric utility reserve area Rc for variable display. In the normal map data setting process, the number of reserved normal map memories FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric utility reserve area Rc is moved to the normal map execution area. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the electric utility reserve area Rc, and a normal map shift command is set, which is information that allows the performance control device 143 to recognize that a shift has been made in the data in the reserve area on the normal map side.

In step Sd1905, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the normal map game play control process is terminated. Here, the normal map fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 336.

First, in step Sd2001, the current game status is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, or second high-frequency support mode. This determination is made by checking whether the various flag storage area 314e in RAM 314 is set, and if so, by checking whether the support A flag or support B flag is set.

In step Sd2002, a support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table corresponding to the game status identified in step Sd2001. Specifically, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, a support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (Figure 312(a)); if the current support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, a support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode (Figure 312(b)); and if the current support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, a support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode (Figure 312(c)).

In step Sd2003, it is determined whether the result of the support lottery in step Sd2002 is a support winning result (regular winning result). If it is a support winning result, a regular winning type determination (regular winning type lottery) is performed in step Sd2004. In this step, the regular winning type table (Fig. 313(a)) is referenced to identify the regular winning type (type of support winning) corresponding to the regular winning type counter C4 for this regular game round.

In step Sd2005, a normal winning type flag corresponding to the normal winning type selected by the type determination in step Sd2004 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected normal winning type is support winning result A, the normal winning A flag is set.

In step Sd2006, the stop result for the normal winning round is set by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the normal winning type counter C4 for the current normal game round is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current normal game round.

In this case, a common stop result table is used for the low-frequency support mode (normal game state) and the first or second high-frequency support mode (time-saving game state or high-probability game state). For this reason, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the same stop result is set for the acquired value of the normal win type counter C4 in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the acquired normal win type counter C4 is a value within the range of 0 to 49, stop result A is set as the stop result for a normal win, regardless of whether it is low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode, and if the acquired normal win type counter C4 is a value within the range of 50 to 99, stop result B is set as the stop result for a normal win, regardless of whether it is low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode.

If the judgment in step Sd2003 is negative (if the result is not a support win), i.e., if the result is a normal miss, proceed to step Sd2007, and set the stop result for a normal miss by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Note that the same stop result is used for a normal miss in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

After step Sd2006 or step Sd2007 is executed, step Sd2008 executes a process for setting the normal map variable display time. In this setting process, the variable display time for the current normal map game round is set in the normal map display unit 44. In this embodiment, the variable display time that can be set in step Sd2008 is a plurality of variable display times of different lengths depending on the type of support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the longest variable display time (e.g., 30 seconds) is set for the low-frequency support mode, the shortest variable display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set for the second high-frequency support mode, and a variable display time (e.g., 2 seconds) that is shorter than the low-frequency support mode and longer than the second high-frequency support mode is set for the first high-frequency support mode. In step Sd2008, the variable display time corresponding to the support mode identified in step Sd2001 is set as the current variable display time.

In the above configuration, one variable display time is associated with each support mode, but multiple variable display times may be associated with at least one of the support modes. For example, if one time can be selected from multiple variable display times for each of the low-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the first high-frequency support mode, it is preferable that the expected value of the variable display time in each support mode (the sum of the variable display time x the probability of selecting that variable display time) satisfy the above-mentioned long/short relationship.

In step Sd2009, a normal map change start command and a normal map type command are set as targets for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map change start command includes information on the normal map change pattern (information indicating the normal map win/loss result and the change display time). The normal map type command also includes information on the type of support win. Note that the normal map type command is set only if the result of the support lottery is a support win. The set normal map change start command and normal map type command are sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Fig. 318).

In step Sd2010, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image on the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal map game round control processing (Fig. 335), if a positive judgment is made in step Sd1902 (if a normal map game round is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sd1906, where it is determined whether the variable display time set in step Sd1905 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sd1907, where variable display processing is executed. In the variable display processing, the display of the normal map display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal map display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order.

In step Sd1907, it is determined whether a transition from high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode) to low-frequency support mode has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a change has occurred from a set state to an unset state of the support flag. Examples of when such a change may occur include when the number of special symbol game plays executed since the transition to high-frequency support mode reaches the upper limit, and the support flag is cleared during the upper limit of special symbol game plays.

If a transition to low-frequency support mode occurs, proceed to step Sd1909 and set the low-support transition flag in the various flag storage area 314e. The low-support transition flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the support flag has changed to a non-set state.

After step Sd1909 is executed, the regular game play control process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1908 (a transition to low-frequency support mode has not occurred), the regular game play control process is terminated without executing the processing of step Sd1909.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1906 (the variable display time has elapsed), the process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Sd1910, and then the process for controlling the normal map play is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled so that the image is displayed as stopped according to the stop result set in step Sd2006 or step Sd2007.

At this time, the stop display period (determined display time) for the stop display is set. In this embodiment, multiple determined display times of different lengths are provided as determined display times that can be set in step Sd1910 depending on the type of support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 335(b), a relatively long determined display time (e.g., 2 seconds) is provided for the low-frequency support mode, and a relatively short determined display time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) is provided for the first or second high-frequency support mode. In step Sd1910, the determined display time corresponding to the support mode determined in step Sd2001 is set as the current determined display time. Furthermore, in the normal map determined display process, a normal map variation end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map variation end command includes information about the determined display time for the current normal map game.

In Figure 335(b), the confirmed display time for the first high-frequency support mode and the confirmed display time for the second high-frequency support mode are the same length, but they may be different lengths. For example, the confirmed display time for the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to be shorter than the confirmed display time for the first high-frequency support mode, in accordance with the relationship between the length of the variable display time (Figure 336(b)).

<Electrical support treatment>
The electric support processing of step Sd406 (Figure 318) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 338.

First, in step Sd2101, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the special feature opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel opening/closing game is not in progress, proceed to step Sd2102 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric reel support processing ends.

If it is the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Sd2103 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support win. If it is not a support win, the electric role support processing ends.

If the result is a support win, step Sd2104 executes the process to start the reel opening/closing game. During this start process, a reel opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In addition, an opening period is set during which the normal power reel 63a remains closed while waiting for the first opening of the reel 36a. At this time, the opening period is set to a period corresponding to the support mode at the time the support lottery that triggered the reel opening/closing game was executed. If the support mode at the time of the support lottery was the low-frequency support mode, for example, 5 seconds is set, and if it was the first or second high-frequency support mode, for example, 0.1 seconds is set (Figures 313(b) and 314).

In step Sd2105, the current game status is determined. Specifically, by checking whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e and, if so, by referencing its type, it is determined whether the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, or second high-frequency support mode. In the following step Sd2106, the type of normal win for this round is determined based on the normal win type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e.

As already explained, the normal winning type (type of support win) drawn by the normal winning type counter C4 corresponds to the normal winning stop result displayed on the normal winning display unit 44, so the processing of step Sd2106 can also be said to grasp the normal winning stop result for the current normal game round.

In step Sd2107, a process for setting the number of times the reels will be opened for this particular opening/closing game is executed. The process for setting the number of times the reels will be opened in step Sd2107 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 339(a).

First, in step Sd2201, it is determined whether the result of step Sd2105 is high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). Note that high-frequency support mode means that the support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the mode is high-frequency support mode, proceed to step Sd2202, and set the number of times the normal power device 63a will open in this device opening/closing game for high-frequency support mode. Here, step Sd2105 determines that the mode is high-frequency support mode if the mode was in high-frequency support mode before the start of the normal game that triggered this device opening/closing game, or if the mode switched from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode during the normal game that triggered this device opening/closing game. In this embodiment, in either case, the number of times the mode is set for high-frequency support mode is set as the number of times this device will open. In other words, if a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs during a normal game that started in low-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a will open the number of times corresponding to high-frequency support mode in the device opening/closing game that follows that normal game.

The number of times corresponding to the high frequency support mode is either 1 or 2 (Fig. 314), but the allocation is made based on the results of the normal winning type determination in step Sd2106. Specifically, if the determined normal winning type is support winning result A, the number of times it is opened is set to 1, and if it is support winning result B, the number of times it is opened is set to 1.

In this case, if a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs during the normal game that triggered the above, the results of determining the normal winning type in step Sd2106 will be used. In other words, the number of times the opening and closing device will be opened after the transition to high-frequency support mode is set based on the results of the type lottery conducted before the transition to high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd2202, a value corresponding to the number of openings is set in the opening count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the number of openings is two, the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "2". After step Sd2202 is executed, the opening count setting process ends.

If the determination in step Sd2201 is negative, i.e., if the result of determination in step Sd2105 is low-frequency support mode (if the support flag is not set in the various flags storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd2203 and determine whether the low-support transition flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e.

If the low support transition flag is not set, that is, if a transition from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode did not occur during the normal play that triggered this device opening/closing game (in other words, if the device was in low frequency support mode before the start of the normal play that triggered the above), proceed to step Sd2204 and set the number of openings for low frequency support mode as the number of openings of the normal power device 63a in this device opening/closing game. Specifically, it is set to 2 times (Figure 313 (b)). After step Sd2204 is executed, the opening number setting process ends.

If step Sd2203 judges positive (the low support transition flag is set), this means that a transition to low-frequency support mode occurred during the normal game that triggered the above. In this case, proceed to step Sd2202, and the number of times the normal power device 63a will be opened for the current device opening/closing game is set to the number of times for high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the support flag is switched from a set state to an unset state during the execution of a normal game, the normal power device 63a will be opened the number of times corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, even if the support flag is unset when the normal power device 63a is opened.

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support processing (Fig. 338), after executing the opening count setting processing in step Sd2107, a normal opening command is set in step Sd2108 to notify the performance control device 143 of the opening start and opening period. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Fig. 318).

In step Sd2109, external signal setting processing is executed, and then the electric support processing is terminated. In the external signal setting processing, the signal output state of the output terminal for the role-opening signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the open signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2101 (when the reel opening/closing game is in progress), a determination is made in step Sd2110 as to whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the electric reel support processing is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the reel opening/closing processing is executed in step Sd2111. The reel opening/closing processing will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 340.

First, in step Sd2301, it is determined whether the normal power device 63a is currently open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power device 63a is not currently open, it is determined in step Sd2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," proceed to step Sd2303, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between openings of the normal electric device 63a has elapsed when the device is opened multiple times during opening and closing play.

If the value of timer area T2 is "0", step Sd2304 executes an upper limit opening time setting process to set the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a for this opening. The upper limit opening time setting process of step Sd2304 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 339 (b).

First, in step Sd2211, it is determined whether the result of step Sd2105 is high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If it is high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd2212 and set the upper limit release time for high-frequency support mode as the upper limit release time for this release.

Here, step Sd2105 determines that the mode is high-frequency support mode if the mode was in high-frequency support mode before the start of the normal game that triggered the current feature opening/closing game, or if the mode switched from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode during the normal game that triggered the current feature opening/closing game. In this embodiment, in either case, the upper limit opening time for high-frequency support mode is set as the current upper limit opening time. In other words, if a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs during a normal game that started in low-frequency support mode, the feature opening/closing game that follows that normal game will open the normal feature 63a at the upper limit opening time corresponding to high-frequency support mode.

The upper limit release time corresponding to the high frequency support mode is either 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds (Figure 314), but the allocation is based on the results of the normal winning type determination in step Sd2106. If the normal winning type determined is support winning result A, the upper limit release time is set to 1.5 seconds, and if it is support winning result B, the upper limit release time is set to 2 seconds.

In this case, if a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs during the normal game play that triggered the above, the results of determining the normal winning type in step Sd2106 will be used. In other words, the upper limit opening time for the opening and closing of the reels after the transition to high-frequency support mode is set based on the results of the type lottery conducted before the transition to high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd2212, a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time is set in the timer area T2, and then the upper limit opening time setting process is terminated. Note that if the normal electric device 63a is opened twice during a device opening/closing game and the upper limit opening time is set to be different between the first and second openings, the number of times the current opening occurred is determined, and the upper limit opening time corresponding to this result is set.

If the determination in step Sd2211 is negative, i.e., if the result of determination in step Sd2105 is low-frequency support mode (if the support flag is not set in the various flags storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd2213 and determine whether the low-support transition flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e.

If the low support transition flag is not set, that is, if a transition from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode did not occur during the normal play that triggered this opening and closing of the reel (in other words, if the low frequency support mode was in effect before the start of the normal play that triggered the above), proceed to step Sd2214 and set the upper limit opening time for the low frequency support mode as the upper limit opening time for this opening. Specifically, the upper limit opening time is set to 0.1 seconds (Figure 313 (b)).

If the judgment in step Sd2213 is affirmative (the low support transition flag is set), it is determined whether the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is "1". In other words, it is determined whether the current opening is the final opening. If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is "1", proceed to step Sd2216 and clear the low support transition flag set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

After step Sd2216 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2215 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "1"), proceed to step Sd2212 and set the upper limit opening time for the high-frequency support mode as the upper limit opening time for this opening. In other words, if the support flag is switched from a set state to an unset state during the execution of a normal game round, the normal power device 63a will open at the upper limit opening time corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, even if the support flag is not set when the normal power device 63a opens.

Returning to the explanation of the reel opening/closing process (Fig. 340), after executing the upper limit opening time setting process in step Sd2304, in step Sd2305, "6" is set in the winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. This value corresponds to the upper limit number of winnings (6) for the normal electric reel 63a (second operating port 63) in the reel opening/closing game.

In step Sd2306, the drive unit 63b is set to the driven state to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Sd2307, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Figure 318). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Sd2307 is executed, the reel opening/closing process ends. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sd2302 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Sd2303 (the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process ends without executing the processing from step Sd2304 onwards.

If step Sd2301 returns a positive result (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sd2308, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit for the open time of the normal power device 63a set in step Sd2304 has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T2 is not "0," i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has not elapsed, step Sd2309 determines whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, step Sd2310 subtracts 1 from the value in the win counter area PC2. Step Sd2311 determines whether the value in the win counter area PC2 is "0," i.e., whether the number of wins into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd2309 (if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends immediately to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2308 (if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sd2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0"), the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state in step Sd2312 to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Sd2313, the process of updating the opening count counter area RC2 is executed. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Sd2314, it is determined whether the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is "0." If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power device 63a, in step Sd2315, the value of the interval time (waiting time) during which the normal power device 63a is kept in the closed state and awaits the next opening is set in the timer area T2.

At this time, an interval time value corresponding to the game status determined in step Sd2105 (Fig. 338) and the normal winning type determined in step Sd2106 (Fig. 338) is set. If the support mode is low frequency support mode, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set regardless of whether the normal winning type is support winning result A or B, and if the support mode is the first or second high frequency support mode and the support winning result is B, a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds is set (Fig. 313 (b), Fig. 314). Note that if the normal electric device 63a is opened three or more times in a device opening and closing game and the interval time between each opening is to be different, the number of times the current interval is determined and the interval time corresponding to that result is set.

In step Sd2316, a reel close command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The set reel close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Figure 318). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from the open state to the closed state.

If step Sd2314 returns a positive result (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0"), the ending start process is executed in step Sd2317. This start process sets an ending period during which the normal power device 63a remains closed and awaits the start of the next game (the first normal game after the device opening/closing game has ended).

At this time, the ending period value corresponding to the game status determined in step Sd2205 (Fig. 338) and the normal winning type determined in step Sd2206 (Fig. 338) is set. If the support mode is low frequency support mode, a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set regardless of whether the normal winning type is support winning result A or B. If the support mode is first or second high frequency support mode and the support winning result is B, a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set (Fig. 313 (b), Fig. 314).

In step Sd2318, a normal ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the ending, and then the reel opening and closing process is terminated. The set normal ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Fig. 318).

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support processing (Fig. 338), after executing the reel opening/closing processing in step Sd2111, step Sd2112 determines whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0." If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," the electric role support processing ends immediately to allow the reel opening/closing game to continue.

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", proceed to step Sd2113 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the electric support processing is terminated to continue the ending.

If the ending has finished, step Sd2114 executes the termination process for the reel opening/closing game, and then the electric reel support process ends. During the termination process for the reel opening/closing game, the normal winning type flag and the reel opening/closing flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e are cleared.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and display control device 350 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of Figure 341.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 contains a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 343 are executed, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control unit 162, it receives various commands, such as game play control commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, as well as opening and closing execution mode commands such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. Based on the detection information, the MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 equipped with an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 374 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 372. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device that serves as the LCD driver built into the pattern display device 75. Because VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its true nature is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 adjusts the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and so on.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc., separately. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 342. The effect setting process is initiated by the MPU 342 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sd2501, it is determined whether an ending command (step Sd1018) has been received from the main control unit 162. The ending command is sent when the ending is to begin in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the result of the win/loss determination for the special game round is a jackpot.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands in order from the previously stored command. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly.

When making the judgment in step Sd2501, it is determined whether an ending command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If an ending command is stored (if an ending command has been received), in step Sd2502, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state. Details of the first transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sd2502 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2501 (if an ending command has not been received), step Sd2503 executes special pattern change display processing to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display processing will be described later.

In step Sd2504, it is determined whether a sudden time-shortened game state start command (step Sd1805) has been received from the main control unit 162. The sudden time-shortened game state start command notifies the presentation control unit 143 of the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state, and is transmitted at the timing of the transition to the time-shortened game state. In this embodiment, the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round in which the special miss result was achieved, and therefore the sudden time-shortened game state start command is transmitted at that start timing.

If a sudden time-saving game state start command has been received, step Sd2505 executes a second transition effect setting process to set a transition effect corresponding to the sudden transition to the time-saving game state. Details of the second transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sd2505 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2504 (if a sudden time-saving game state start command has not been received), step Sd2506 determines whether any game state end command has been received. Specifically, it determines whether a high-probability game state end command or a time-saving game state end command (step Sd1705) has been received.

If any of these commands has been received, step Sd2507 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state or each time-limited game state. Details of the end effect setting process will be described later.

In step Sd2508, a process for displaying changes in the normal map display area P (Figure 349 (a)) set on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is executed. Details of the process for displaying changes in the normal map will be described later.

In step Sd2509, special light-emitting effect processing is executed to produce special light-emitting effects. Special light-emitting effects are effects produced using the light-emitting elements provided on the normal electric device 63a and its surrounding area. Details of the special light-emitting effect processing will be described later.

In step Sd2510, other processing is performed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Other processing includes displaying a demo screen if a starting winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time, and switching to a power-saving mode that stops video display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption.

<First transition effect setting process>
The first transition effect setting process of step Sd2502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 343. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the timing at which the ending of the opening/closing execution mode starts.

First, in step Sd2601, it is determined whether a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control unit 162.

If a transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state does not occur, the first transition effect setting process is terminated. Note that, as in this embodiment, if there are only jackpot types that always result in a transition to either the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is possible to omit the processing of step Sd2601.

If a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state occurs, step Sd2602 sets a start effect corresponding to each game state. Specifically, if a transition to a high probability game state occurs, the start effect for the high probability game state is set as the start effect, and if a transition to a normal time-saving game state occurs, the start effect for the normal time-saving game state is set as the start effect.

In the start presentation for the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 344(a), a title image 721 corresponding to the high probability game state, such as "Lucky Time," is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In addition, in the start presentation for the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 344(b), a title image 722 corresponding to the normal time-saving game state, such as "Chance Time," and a remaining number of times image 723 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 723 notifies the player of the remaining number of special symbol game times that the player can remain in the normal time-saving game state.

Note that Figure 344 (c) shows the time-saving effects that are executed while in the normal time-saving game state. The time-saving effects are performed after the start effect in Figure 344 (b) ends and until the normal time-saving game state ends. This time-saving effect is configured to be distinguishable from the normal time effects, for example, by having a different background image, etc., from the normal time effects during the normal game state.

In step Sd2602, the various start effects described above are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, these start effects may be configured to be displayed during the entire ending period, or for only part of the ending period.

In step Sd2603, it is determined whether the current transition is to the normal time-saving game state. If a positive determination is made in step Sd2603, in step Sd2604, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the remaining number of times counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344. The remaining number of times counter area is used by MPU 342 to keep track of the remaining number of special game times that can be played while in the normal time-saving game state, and is decremented by one each time a special game time is played in each of these game states.

In this embodiment, the presentation control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times for each game state separately from the main control device 162, but the presentation control device 143 may also be configured to determine the remaining number of times for each game state based on the update results from the main control device 162. For example, the main control device 162 may notify the presentation control device 143 of the update results of the support counter area SC (step Sd1303) by sending a specified command, and the presentation control device 143 may analyze the command and determine the update results. In this case, the specified command may be created by including information on the update results in an existing command such as the fluctuation start command (step Sd714), or the specified command may be configured using a dedicated command for notifying the update results.

In step Sd2605, the display of the remaining number of times image 723 is set to begin. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times image 723 may be set to begin during each start effect (effect performed using the ending period) set in step Sd2602, or the display of the remaining number of times image 723 may be set to begin after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sd2606, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and then the first transition effect setting process is terminated. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the remaining number of times image 723 is being displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd2603, i.e., if the current transition is to a high probability game state, the remaining number of times image 723 is not displayed, and the first transition effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sd2604 onwards.

<Special chart change display processing>
The processing for displaying special chart changes in step Sd2503 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 345.

First, in step Sd2701, it is determined whether a special symbol game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a first or second special symbol game is currently being played. If neither game is currently being played, it proceeds to step Sd2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information about the fluctuation pattern selected by lottery during the fluctuation display time setting process in the main control unit 162. By referencing this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to determine at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Furthermore, as already explained, because fluctuation patterns for jackpots and losses are set separately, the result of the win/loss judgment can also be determined from the fluctuation pattern.

If a fluctuation start command has not been received, the special chart fluctuation display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has been received, the processing proceeds to step Sd2703, where fluctuation start processing is executed to start the performance for the game round.

The fluctuation start process analyzes the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 and identifies the fluctuation pattern for the current special game. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game is determined based on the identified fluctuation pattern. The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern.

The variable display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the variable display time corresponding to each variation pattern (Fig. 328, Fig. 330 to Fig. 333) in the main control device 162, and a common variable display time is assigned to one variation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variable display time is 15 seconds in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start process, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is taken as the variable display time for the current special game.

The presentation pattern table also associates presentation patterns for each game round presentation with each variation pattern. These presentation patterns include the normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, SPSP reach miss, special reach miss A presentation, and special reach miss B presentation, which were mentioned in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between variation patterns and presentation patterns has already been explained with reference to Figures 328 and 330 to 333, so further explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the variable start process, if the result of the win/loss determination for the current special symbol game round is a jackpot, the jackpot type is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a probability jackpot, the stop result for the probability jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are determined randomly by lottery, etc.

Furthermore, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game turn is a normal miss result, the stopping symbols for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be determined randomly. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols will be determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result for this turn will be the one that results in a combination of miss reach symbols on at least one active line L1 to L5.

Also, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game turn is a special miss result, the stopping symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery, and the stopping symbols are also determined so that the special symbol 711 is displayed stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 on the reach line. In other words, the stopping result for this time is set to be the stopping result where a symbol combination for a special miss result is formed on at least one active line L1 to L5.

In the variation start process, after executing each of the above processes, a command containing information on the current stopped symbol and presentation pattern is set as the output target to the display control device 350. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 so that the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 stop according to the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or so that a game-round presentation is performed according to the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

After step Sd2703 is executed, processing to update the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sd2704, and then the processing for displaying the special pattern change is terminated. In the processing to update the remaining number of times display, it is determined whether the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and if the remaining number of times display flag is set (if the remaining number of times image 723 is being displayed), the value of the remaining number of times counter area is updated by subtracting 1. Furthermore, the display content of the remaining number of times image 723 is updated by referring to the update result of the remaining number of times counter area. As a result, the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 723 is subtracted by 1.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2701 (if a special symbol game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sd2705, where it is determined whether a change end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time for this special symbol game round has not yet elapsed. In this case, step Sd2706 executes a change in progress process. The change in progress process executes processes to continue the change display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2705 (if a variation end command has been received), variation end processing is executed in step Sd2707, and then the special pattern variation display processing is terminated. The variation end processing terminates the variation display of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 and the currently running effects. Additionally, step Sd2707 controls the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 to be fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

<Second transition effect setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sd2505 (FIG. 342) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 346(a). This process is executed when a sudden time-shortened gaming state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when a time-shortened gaming state is suddenly started.

First, in step Sd2801, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set. In the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 346(b), a title image 725 corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state, such as "Sudden Chance Time," and a remaining number of times image 723 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 723 notifies the player of the remaining number of special game times that the player can remain in the sudden time-saving game state.

In this step, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set so that it is executed at the fixed display time in the special game round. In this case, the entire start effect may be executed at the fixed display time, or only part of the start effect may be executed at the fixed display time. Note that if part of the start effect is executed within the fixed display time, the start effect will be executed across the fixed display time and the next special game round.

In step Sd2802, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times (e.g., 100 times) for the sudden time-saving game state is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM 344. In the following step Sd2803, a setting is made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 723. In this case, the setting may be made so that the display of the remaining number of times image 723 starts during the start effect set in step Sd2801, or the setting may be made so that the display of the remaining number of times image 723 starts after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sd2804, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and then the second transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending performance setting process>
The process for setting the effect for ending in step Sd2507 (Fig. 342) will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 347. This process is executed when an end command for each of the high probability game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the sudden time-saving game state is received, in other words, when each of these game states ends.

In step Sd2901, an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set. For example, if the normal time-limited game state is ending, the end effect for the normal time-limited game state is set to be executed.

In step Sd2902, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared (initialized). At this time, if the value of the remaining number counter is already 0 (initial value), it is left in that state.

In step Sd2903, the remaining number of times image 723 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is erased. In the following step Sd2904, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for displaying general map changes>
The processing for displaying normal map changes in step Sd2508 (Figure 342) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 348.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 349, a regular map display area P is set on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. This regular map display area P displays multiple (two) patterns F1 and F2, and changing the display color of each of these patterns makes it possible to display changes. The regular map change display process is a process for controlling the changing display of patterns in the regular map display area P.

The normal symbol display area P is set in an area (for example, the top of the display screen G) that does not overlap with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for special symbol play. Furthermore, the normal symbol display area P is smaller than the variable display areas for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and each symbol in the normal symbol display area P is smaller than each symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, we will explain the variable display of regular game times using pictures F1 and F2, with reference to Figure 350.

As mentioned above, the change in the normal game turn in the normal game turn display area P is displayed by switching the display color of the pictures F1 and F2. For example, as shown in Figure 350(a), when a normal game turn begins with the display colors of the pictures F1 and F2 displayed in a first display color (e.g., white), as shown in Figure 350(b), the display color of one of the pictures, picture F2, is switched to a second display color (e.g., blue), which is different from the previous color (in the figure, the difference in display colors is indicated by different hatching).

After that, as shown in Figure 350(c), the color of the symbol F2, which has been switched to the second display color, is switched back to the original first display color, and the color of the other symbol, symbol F1, is switched from the first display color to the second display color. Then, as shown in Figure 350(d), the colors of each symbol are switched again. The variable display of the normal game round is basically performed by repeating the above-mentioned display color switching (repeating Figure 350(b) → Figure 350(c) → Figure 350(d) → Figure 350(b)). This display color switching is set to complete one cycle in approximately 0.05 seconds, making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the displays before and after the switch.

When the variable display time for the normal game has elapsed, the symbols F1 and F2 are displayed as stopped symbols, and the result of the support lottery is announced. If the result of the support lottery is a support win (normal winning result), the symbols F1 and F2 are displayed as one of the first stop results (Fig. 350(e)), second stop results (Fig. 350(f)), or third stop results (Fig. 350(g)). The first stop result is a stop pattern in which the symbol F1 is the second display color and the symbol F2 is the first display color. The second stop result is a stop pattern in which the symbol F1 is the first display color and the symbol F2 is the second display color. The third stop result is a stop pattern in which the symbols F1 and F2 are the second display color. Furthermore, if the result of the support lottery is a losing result, the symbols F1 and F2 are displayed as the fourth stop result (Fig. 350(h)) in which the symbols F1 and F2 are the first display color.

As shown in FIG. 348, the normal map variation display process first determines in step Sd3101 whether a normal map game is currently being played. If a normal map game is not currently being played, the process proceeds to step Sd3102, where it determines whether a normal map variation start command has been received from the main control unit 162. The normal map variation start command includes information on the support lottery results performed by the main control unit 162 and information on the variation display time for the normal map game set by the main control unit 162.

If the normal map change start command has not been received, the normal map change display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal map change start command has been received, the normal map change start command is analyzed in step Sd3103, and the support lottery results and change display time for this normal map play are determined.

In step Sd3104, a stop result setting process is executed to set the stop results of the images F1 and F2 in the normal map display area P. The stop result setting process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 351.

In the stop result setting process, first in step Sd3201, it is determined whether the current support mode is high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). Note that if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, this means that the current game state is a normal time-saving game state, a sudden time-saving game state, or a high-probability game state.

If the current support mode is not high-frequency support mode, i.e., if it is low-frequency support mode (if the current gaming state is normal gaming state), step Sd3202 determines whether the result of this support lottery is a support winning result. This determination is made by referring to the results of step Sd3103.

If the result is a support win, proceed to step Sd3203, and the first stop result (Figure 350 (e)) is set as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. On the other hand, if the result of this support lottery is not a support win, i.e., if it is a losing result, proceed to step Sd3204, and the fourth stop result (Figure 350 (h)) is set as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. After step Sd3203 or step Sd3204 is executed, the stop result setting process ends.

If step Sd3201 returns a positive result (the current support mode is high-frequency support mode), step Sd3205 determines whether the result of this support lottery is a support win. If it is a support win, proceed to step Sd3206, where it determines whether the type of support win is support win result A. This determination is made based on the general type command sent from the main control unit 162.

If the type of support win is support win result A, proceed to step Sd3207 and set the second stop result (Fig. 350 (f)) as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. As already explained, the type of support win corresponds to the type (mode) of the device opening and closing game, and support win result A corresponds to the first high prize device opening and closing game (Fig. 313 (a)). Therefore, when the second stop result is displayed, the player can recognize that the device opening and closing game will be executed in the mode of the first high prize device opening and closing game (Fig. 314 (a)).

In addition, in low frequency support mode, the stop result corresponding to the support win result is set as the first stop result regardless of the type of support win. This corresponds to the fact that in low frequency support mode, the same type of reel opening/closing game (low prize reel opening/closing game) is executed for both support win results A and B (Figure 313 (a)).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd3206, that is, if the type of support win is support win result B, proceed to step Sd3208, and the third stop result (Fig. 350 (h)) is set as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. Since support win result B corresponds to the second high prize device open/close game (Fig. 313 (a)), the player can recognize that the device open/close game will be executed in the second high prize device open/close game mode (Fig. 314 (b)) when the third stop result is displayed.

Furthermore, if the result of this support lottery is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a losing result, the current stop result is set as the fourth stop result in step Sd3204. After step Sd3207, step Sd3208, or step Sd3204 is executed, the stop result setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the process for displaying normal map fluctuations (Fig. 348), after the execution of the stop result setting process in step Sd3104, a process is executed in step Sd3105 to start displaying fluctuations in the normal map display area P. Specifically, a command including information on the stop result set in step Sd3104 is output to the display control device 350, and the display of fluctuations in the images F1 and F2 is started. After execution of step Sd3105, the process for displaying normal map fluctuations ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd3101 (if a normal game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sd3106, where it is determined whether a variable display end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a variable display end command has not been received, this means that the variable display time has not yet elapsed in this normal game round. In this case, in step Sd3107, variable display processing is executed. In variable display processing, processing is performed to continue the variable display of images F1 and F2.

In step Sd3108, a process for changing the stop result is executed to change the stop result set in step Sd3104. The process for changing the stop result will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 352.

First, in step Sd3301, it is determined whether a transition from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a command to start the time-saving game state has been received from the main control unit 162 while the normal game number fluctuation display is in progress.

If a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs, proceed to step Sd3302 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for the current regular game is a support win. If it is a support win, then in step Sd3303, determine whether the type of support win is support win result A.

If the type of support win is support win result A, in step Sd3304, the current stop result in the normal map display area P is changed from the first stop result to the second stop result. In other words, if a switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode occurs during the variable display, the stop result setting process in step Sd3104 at the start of a normal map game round sets the current stop result in the normal map display area P to the first stop result, which is the stop result that corresponds to a support win result during low-frequency support mode. In step Sd3304, the stop result setting is rewritten so that the stop result thus set becomes the second stop result that corresponds to a support win result during high-frequency support mode and whose type is support win result A.

If step Sd3303 returns a negative result, i.e., if the type of support win is support win result B, step Sd3305 changes the current stop result in the normal map display area P from the first stop result to the third stop result. The third stop result is the stop result that corresponds to a support win during high-frequency support mode, when the type is support win result B.

After step Sd3304 or step Sd3305 is executed, the process for changing the stop result is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3301 (a transition to high-frequency support mode has not occurred) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3302 (the result of the support lottery is a losing result), the stop result setting is not changed and the process for changing the stop result is terminated without executing the processes from step Sd3303 onwards.

Returning to the explanation of the normal map fluctuation display process (Fig. 348), if a positive judgment is made in step Sd3106 (if a fluctuation end command has been received), fluctuation end process is executed in step Sd3109. In the fluctuation end process, control is performed so that the images F1 and F2 are displayed in a stopped state according to the stop result set in step Sd3104 or the stop result changed in step Sd3108. After step Sd3109 is executed, the normal map fluctuation display process is terminated.

<Special lighting effect processing>
The processing for special lighting effects in step Sd2509 (Figure 342) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 353.

The special light-emitting effect processing is an effect performed using the light-emitting elements located on the regular electric device 63a and its surrounding area. The light-emitting elements will now be explained with reference to Figure 354.

As shown in Figure 354 (a), the normal power device 63a has a front wall 751 that covers the second operating port 63 from the front side of the gaming machine. The front wall 751 protrudes forward from the front surface of the gaming board 60 (play area PE), and a space is formed behind it through which the gaming ball can pass. When the normal power device 63a is in the open state, the gaming ball is guided to the rear side of the front wall 751 by the left and right movable pieces, passes through the space, and enters the second operating port 63.

A first light-emitting unit 752 is provided on the front wall 751. Specifically, a light-emitting board on which a light-emitting element 753 is mounted is disposed inside the front wall 751, and a transparent transmission unit 754 is disposed to cover the light-emitting board from the front. The light-emitting element 753 (light-emitting board) is electrically connected to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 controls the light emission of the light-emitting element 753 (first light-emitting unit 752).

A second light-emitting unit 761 is also located above the normal power device 63a. The second light-emitting unit 761 is located on the rear side of the gaming board 60. In other words, a light-emitting board with a light-emitting element 762 mounted thereon is located behind the gaming board 60 above the normal power device 63a, and the area in front of the light-emitting board on the gaming board 60 is transparent, or the gaming board 60 is formed from a transparent gaming board, making it possible to see the light from the light-emitting element 762 through the gaming board from the front.

In terms of the flow of game balls, the second light-emitting unit 761 is located upstream of the normal electric device 63a, allowing game balls flowing down the game area PE toward the second operating port 63 to pass in front of the second light-emitting unit 761. The light-emitting element 762 (light-emitting board) is electrically connected to the performance control device 143, and the light emission of the light-emitting element 762 (second light-emitting unit 761) is controlled by the performance control device 143.

Next, we will explain the special light-emitting effects performed by the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 with reference to Figures 354 (b) and (c).

When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (when the game state is the normal game state), the first light-emitting element 752 and the second light-emitting element 761 are controlled to emit light in the normal light-emitting mode. The normal light-emitting mode is, for example, a mode in which each light-emitting element 752, 761 emits light in the first light-emitting color (e.g., white), as shown in Figure 354 (b).

Then, when the support mode switches to the high-frequency support mode (when the game state switches to the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state), the light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 is switched to the special light-emitting mode, and a special light-emitting effect is executed. The special light-emitting mode is a mode in which each light-emitting unit 752, 761 emits light in a second light-emitting color (e.g., blue) that is different from the first light-emitting color, as shown in Figure 354 (c), for example. This makes the normal power device 63a and its surrounding area stand out, and alerts the player to the fact that a win in the second operating port 63 is likely to occur.

The specific form of the special light-emitting mode is not limited to a different light color from the normal light-emitting mode, and is not particularly limited as long as it can be distinguished from the normal light-emitting mode. For example, the normal light-emitting mode may be continuous light, while the special light-emitting mode may be flashing light, and the light-emitting pattern may be different.

After the special light-emitting effect starts, it will continue to be executed for the period when the support mode is in high-frequency support mode. If a jackpot is won while in high-frequency support mode and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the special light-emitting effect will end in response to the transition to open/close execution mode. After the special light-emitting effect ends, the light-emitting mode will switch to the light-emitting mode for open/close execution mode, or switch to the normal light-emitting mode.

In addition, when the high-frequency support mode ends because the number of times the special symbol has been played reaches the upper limit, the special light-emitting effect ends accordingly. At this time, the special light-emitting effect may be configured to end immediately upon the end of the high-frequency support mode, or it may be configured to continue after the end of the high-frequency support mode while the remaining reserved play times for the second special symbol are being played, and to end upon the end of those play times. After the special light-emitting effect ends, the light-emitting mode switches back to the normal mode.

As shown in Figure 353, in the special light-emitting effect processing, first in step Sd3501 it is determined whether or not a special light-emitting effect (Figure 354 (c)) is being executed. If a special light-emitting effect is not being executed, in step Sd3502 it is determined whether or not a start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344. The start flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a special light-emitting effect should be executed.

If the start flag is not set, proceed to step Sd3503, where it is determined whether a transition from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a time-shortened game state start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

If a transition to high frequency support mode occurs, the start timing setting process is executed in step Sd3504. The start timing setting process is used to set the start timing of the special light-emitting effect. The start timing setting process will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 355.

First, in step Sd3601, it is determined whether a regular game is currently being played. If a regular game is not currently being played, the process proceeds to step Sd3602, where it is determined whether a special device opening/closing game is currently being played.

If step Sd3602 returns a negative result, it means that a transition to high-frequency support mode has occurred when neither a regular game round nor a special device opening/closing game is currently being played. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sd3603, where the start timing of the special light-emitting effect is set to the first timing. The first timing corresponds to the setting process of the support flag in the main control unit 162; in other words, it corresponds to the special game round (the end of a special game round or the opening/closing execution mode). Specifically, the first timing is when the support flag is set, and setting the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to the first timing specifies that the special light-emitting effect should be executed immediately. After step Sd3602 is executed, the start timing setting process ends.

If step Sd3602 returns a positive result, it means that a transition to high-frequency support mode has occurred while a special feature opening/closing game corresponding to low-frequency support mode is being played. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sd3604, where the remaining time for that special feature opening/closing game is determined. Specifically, the time until the ending of that special feature opening/closing game is determined.

In step Sd3605, it is determined whether the period determined in step Sd3604 is equal to or shorter than the first specific period. The first specific period is used to determine whether the period until the ongoing reel opening/closing game (reel opening/closing game in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) ends is relatively short. The specific length of the first specific period is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, it is set to, for example, 5 seconds.

If the remaining period for the reel opening/closing game is less than the first specified period, proceed to step Sd3603 and set the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to the first timing. In other words, if the period from the transition to high-frequency support mode until the end of the reel opening/closing game for low-frequency support mode and the start of the next regular game (regular game for high-frequency support mode) is expected to be relatively short, the special light-emitting effect is set to be executed immediately.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd3605 (if the remaining period of the reel opening/closing game is longer than the first specific period), the start timing is set to the second timing in step Sd3606. The second timing corresponds to the reel opening/closing game currently being played, in other words, the timing corresponding to the normal game. Specifically, the second timing is the end of the reel opening/closing game, and the second timing is later than the first timing.

In other words, if it is expected that the period from the transition to high frequency support mode to the start of the next regular game will be relatively long, the special light-emitting effect will be executed after the completion of the opening and closing of the special device, and the special light-emitting effect will be set to start later than when it is expected that the period will be relatively short. Note that the second timing is not limited to the completion of the opening and closing of the special device, but may be a predetermined period before the completion (for example, 1 second before). It may also be the start of the next regular game (regular game for high frequency support mode). After step Sd3606 is executed, the start timing setting process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd3601 (if a normal game round is currently being played), the process proceeds to step Sd3607, where it is determined whether the result of the support lottery for the currently playing game round is a support winning result. If the result is a support winning result, the process determines the period until the normal power device 63a is opened in step Sd3608. Specifically, the process determines the total period of the remaining period of the currently playing normal game round and the opening period of the device opening/closing game.

In step Sd3609, it is determined whether the period determined in step Sd3608 is equal to or shorter than the second specific period. The second specific period is used to determine whether the period until the timing of opening the normal power device 63a is relatively short. The specific length of the second specific period is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, it is set to, for example, 10 seconds.

If the period until release is less than the second specified period, step Sd3603 sets the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to the first timing, and sets the special light-emitting effect to be executed immediately. On the other hand, if the period until release is longer than the second specified period, proceed to step Sd3610, and set the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to the third timing.

The third timing corresponds to the opening of the normal power feature 63a, or in other words, the timing corresponding to normal play. Specifically, the third timing corresponds to the first opening of the normal power feature 63a, and is later than the first timing.

As already explained, in this embodiment, if a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs during a regular game in which the support lottery result is a win, the reel opening/closing game that is executed after the regular game is completed is configured to be executed in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (steps Sd2205 to Sd2207, step Sd2304). If the period until the first opening is expected to be relatively long, the special light-emitting effect is set to be executed after the start of the opening. Note that the third timing is not limited to the start of the first opening, but may be a predetermined period before the start (for example, 1 second before). In other words, the special light-emitting effect may be configured to start prior to the first opening. After step Sd3610 is executed, the start timing setting process ends.

If step Sd3607 returns a negative result, i.e., if the support lottery result for the current regular game is a loss, the process proceeds to step Sd3611, where the remaining time for that regular game is determined. In step Sd3612, it is determined whether the time determined in step Sd3611 is equal to or shorter than the third specific period. The third specific period is used to determine whether the time until the end of the current regular game (a regular game corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) is relatively short. The specific length of the third specific period is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, it is set to, for example, 5 seconds.

If the remaining period for regular gameplay is less than or equal to the third specified period, step Sd3603 sets the start timing for the special light-emitting effect to the first timing, and sets the special light-emitting effect to be executed immediately. On the other hand, if the remaining period for regular gameplay is longer than the third specified period, proceed to step Sd3613, and set the start timing for the special light-emitting effect to the fourth timing.

The fourth timing corresponds to the start of the next regular game round, or in other words, the timing corresponding to regular game play. Specifically, the fourth timing is the start of the next regular game round, and is later than the first timing.

In other words, if it is expected that there will be a relatively long period between the end of a regular game round in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode and the start of the next regular game round in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the special light-emitting effect will be set to execute after the start of the next regular game round. Note that the fourth timing is not limited to the start of the next regular game round, but may be a predetermined period before the start (for example, 1 second before). After step Sd3613 is executed, the start timing setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special light-emitting effect processing (Figure 353), after the start timing setting processing in step Sd3504 is executed, in step Sd3505, a start flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344. After step Sd3505 is executed, the special light-emitting effect processing ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd3502 (if the start flag is set), proceed to step Sd3506, where it is determined whether it is time to start the special light-emitting effect. In other words, it is determined whether the start timing set in step Sd3504 has arrived.

If it is time to start the special light-emitting effect, in step Sd3507, the start flag set in the various flag storage area 344c is cleared. In the following step Sd3508, the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 are controlled so that the special light-emitting effect is executed. As a result, the light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 is switched from the normal light-emitting mode to the special light-emitting mode, and the light-emitting color of each of the light-emitting units 752, 761 changes from the first light-emitting color to the second light-emitting color.

After step Sd3508 is executed, the processing for the special light-emitting effect is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3506 (it is not the timing to start the special light-emitting effect), the execution of the special light-emitting effect is put on hold, and the processing for the special light-emitting effect is terminated without executing the processing from step Sd3507 onwards.

If step Sd3501 results in a positive judgment (if the special light-emitting effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sd3509, where it is determined whether it is time to end the special light-emitting effect. If it is time to end the special light-emitting effect, the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 are controlled to end the special light-emitting effect in step Sd3510. At this time, if the special light-emitting effect ends due to a transition to the open/close execution mode based on a jackpot win during the high-frequency support mode, the light-emitting units 752, 761 are controlled to switch to the light-emitting mode for the open/close execution mode or to switch to the normal light-emitting mode. Furthermore, if the special light-emitting effect ends due to the end of the high-frequency support mode based on reaching the upper limit of the number of times, the light-emitting units 752, 761 are controlled to switch to the normal light-emitting mode.

After step Sd3510 is executed, the processing for the special light-emitting effect ends. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3509 (it is not the time to end the special light-emitting effect), the special light-emitting effect is continued, and the processing for the special light-emitting effect ends without executing the processing of step Sd3510.

<Regarding switching of the normal game mode due to changes in game status>
The flow of switching the operation mode accompanying a change in the game state for normal game rounds and normal game rounds including the opening and closing of special devices will be explained. First, the flow when the support flag is set when normal game rounds and special device opening and closing games are not being executed will be explained with reference to FIG. 356. Here, we will explain the example of a case where the special game round results in a special miss result and the game suddenly transitions to a time-saving game state.

If the special symbol win/loss lottery held during normal play at timing t1 results in a special loss, a support flag is set in RAM 314 of the main control device 162 at timing t2, when the confirmation display for the special symbol play round corresponding to that win/loss lottery begins (Fig. 356 (a) and (b)). At this time, it is assumed that neither a normal symbol play round nor a special symbol opening/closing play round has been executed in normal play.

After that, if a win occurs in through gate 64 at timing t3, a support lottery is held. In this case, the support lottery is held in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (more specifically, the second high-frequency support mode) based on the support flag being set (an internal state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode). However, in the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is held with the same winning probability as in the low-frequency support mode (Figures 312(a) and (c)), so the support lottery at timing t3 is held in the same manner as the support lottery in the low-frequency support mode. Note that if the high-frequency support mode to which the transition occurs is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is held with a higher winning probability than in the low-frequency support mode (Figure 312(b)).

Here, let's assume that the result of the support lottery above was a winning support result. If a winning support result is obtained, a lottery for the regular winning type will be held, and in this case, we will assume that the result selected is Support Winning Result A.

Furthermore, at timing t3, a regular game round is executed based on the support lottery. This regular game round is also executed in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, with a shorter variable display time and a shorter fixed display time than in the low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 0.5 seconds (Figure 337(b)), and the fixed display time is set to 0.2 seconds (Figure 335(b)).

When the confirmation display is made, the normal map display unit 44 displays stop result A as the stop result corresponding to the support win, based on the fact that support win result A has been drawn as the normal map winning type (Fig. 337 (a)). Also, in the normal map display area P of the pattern display device 75, the second stop result is displayed as the stop result of patterns F1 and F2 (Figs. 350 and 351). Note that the setting of each of these stop results is performed at the start of a normal map game.

When the normal game play ends at timing t4, a device opening/closing game is executed using the normal power device 63a based on the support win (Fig. 356 (d)-(f)). In this case, the device opening/closing game is executed in the form of a first high prize device opening/closing game based on the support flag being set and the support win result A being drawn (Fig. 313).

In the above-described device opening/closing game, the normal power device 63a is first closed and an opening is performed for, for example, 0.1 seconds, after which the normal power device 63a is switched from the closed state to the open state (timing t5). The upper limit opening time for this open state is set to a period (e.g., 1.5 seconds) longer than the period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in the low-frequency support mode. Since the launch cycle of game balls when the game ball launch handle 41 is continuously operated is 0.6 seconds, when the normal power device 63a is opened in the manner described above, a winning entry into the second operating port 63 can be achieved favorably.

When the opening time of the normal power device 63a reaches the upper limit opening time or when the number of game balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit winning number, the normal power device 63a is closed (timing t6). Accordingly, an ending is executed for, for example, 0.1 seconds.

As described above, if normal game play is not being executed when the support flag is set, a switch from the mode corresponding to low-frequency support mode to the mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode will occur in conjunction with the start of the next normal game play (Figure 356 (g)).

Next, we will explain the flow when the support flag is set while a regular game round resulting from a support win is being played, with reference to Figure 357.

When a support lottery is held at timing t1 during normal game play (low frequency support mode), a regular game round is executed based on that result (Fig. 357 (c)). Here, the result of the support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the regular win type lottery.

At this time, the support flag is not set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162, and the internal state corresponds to low-frequency support mode (Fig. 357(b)), so the normal game play is executed in a manner corresponding to low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds (Fig. 337(b)), and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 335(b)).

At the start of a normal game, the stop result is set in the normal game display section 44. Here, stop result B is set as the stop result based on the fact that support win result B is drawn as the normal winning type (Fig. 337 (b)). The stop result is also set in the normal game display area P of the symbol display device 75, but here, based on the fact that the support mode at that time is the low frequency support mode, the first stop result is set as the stop result for symbols F1 and F2 (Figs. 350 and 351).

After the normal game round starts (after the support lottery is executed), if the special game lottery results in a special miss at time t2 while the variable display is being executed (Fig. 357(a)), a support flag is set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round corresponding to the win/loss lottery (time t3), and the internal state changes to one corresponding to high-frequency support mode (Fig. 357(b)). At this time, the variable display for the normal game round being executed is in a mode corresponding to low-frequency support mode, and this mode is maintained even after the support flag is set. In other words, the variable display will continue until the variable display time set at time t1 has elapsed, even if the support flag is set during the variable display.

As described above, if the support flag is set during the variable display of a normal game play after the support lottery is executed, the setting of the stop result of the images F1 and F2 in the normal game display area P will be changed from that corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to that corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (Figures 348 and 352). At that time, based on the fact that support winning result B was selected in the normal game win type lottery executed at timing t1, the above change is made so that the third stop result is set among the stop results corresponding to the high-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, the stop results in the normal map display section 44 are not changed as in the normal map display area P, and the stop result setting executed at timing t1 (stop result B) is maintained as is. This is because the stop results corresponding to each value of the normal map type counter C4 are the same in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

When the variable display of the normal game play ends at timing t4, the final display is executed. At this point, the support flag is set, but the final display is executed for the final display time (e.g., 2 seconds) set at timing t1, before the support flag was set. In other words, the final display is executed in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode (e.g., a final display time of 2 seconds). At this time, stop result B is displayed as a stopped result in the normal display unit 44, and the third stop result is displayed as a stopped result in the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75.

When the confirmation display ends at timing t5 and the normal game play ends, a special feature opening/closing game is executed using the normal power feature 63a based on the support win (Fig. 357 (d)-(f)). At this time, the support flag is set, but the opening in the special feature opening/closing game is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the special feature opening/closing game was performed in the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the opening is executed for, for example, 5 seconds with the normal power feature 63a in a closed state.

When the opening ends at timing t6, the opening/closing mode of the normal power device 63a for this device opening/closing game is set. At that time, based on the fact that the support flag is set, the opening/closing mode is set to be performed in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round that results in a support win, a switch from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will occur in conjunction with the start of opening of the normal power device 63a in the device opening/closing game triggered by that support win (Figure 357 (g)).

There are multiple opening and closing modes corresponding to the high frequency support mode, including the first high prize feature opening and closing game and the second high prize feature opening and closing game. When setting the opening and closing mode of the regular power feature 63a, it is necessary to select which of these modes to use. At this time, the selection is made based on the results of the winning type lottery held before the support flag was set.

In this example, because support winning result B was selected in the winning type lottery held at timing t1, the opening and closing mode of the normal power device 63a is set to the second high prize device opening and closing mode. Specifically, the upper limit opening time is set to, for example, 2 seconds for the first opening, 0.3 seconds for closing, and 2 seconds for the second opening. As already explained, the game ball launch cycle is 0.6 seconds, so when the normal power device 63a is opened in this mode, it is possible to favorably achieve a prize in the second operating port 63.

When the second opening ends due to the upper limit opening time being reached, or when the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit winning number, the normal power device 63a is closed (timing t7). The ending for this device opening/closing game is then executed. This ending is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode and continues for, for example, 0.1 seconds. Between the start and end of the device opening/closing game, stop result B continues to be displayed on the normal map display section 44, and the third stop result continues to be displayed in the normal map display area P.

When the opening and closing of the reels ends at timing t8, if there is regular reels pending information, the next regular reels will be played. This regular reels will be played in a manner that corresponds to the high frequency support mode.

The above example shows a case where the support flag is set during a variable display during a normal game round, but if the support flag is set during a fixed display during a normal game round, or if the support flag is set during the opening of a special feature opening/closing game, the operation will switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode from the start of opening during the special feature opening/closing game, just as described above. However, in these cases, the stop results in the normal display area P will not be changed. In other words, the stop results displayed before the support flag was set will continue to be displayed even after the support flag is set.

It is also possible that the support flag may be set after the opening of a special feature opening/closing game has ended. In this case, the operation will switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode when the next normal game session begins after the opening/closing game has ended. In other words, if the support flag is set after the opening state has begun, the opening will be performed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

Also, while the example given above shows a case where the special lottery results in a special miss and the game suddenly transitions to a time-saving game state (second high-frequency support mode), the same operation is performed when the special lottery results in a jackpot and the game transitions through the opening and closing execution mode to a high-probability game state or a regular time-saving game state (first high-frequency support mode). In other words, since regular game rounds are also played during the opening and closing execution mode, if the opening and closing execution mode ends and the support flag is set during the execution of a regular game round that results in a support win, the game will switch from the start of opening the device opening and closing game corresponding to that regular game round to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode.

Next, we will explain the flow when a support flag is set while a regular game with a losing result is being played, with reference to Figure 358.

When a support lottery is drawn at timing t1 during normal game play (low-frequency support mode), a normal game round is executed based on that result (Figure 358 (c)). Here, we will assume that the result of that support lottery is a loss.

At this time, the support flag is not set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162, and the internal state corresponds to low-frequency support mode (Fig. 358(b)), so the normal game play is executed in a manner corresponding to low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds (Fig. 337(b)), and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 335(b)).

After the normal game round starts (after the support lottery is executed), if the special game lottery results in a special miss at timing t2 while the variable display is being executed (Fig. 358(a)), a support flag is set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round corresponding to the win/loss lottery (timing t3), and the internal state changes to one corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (Fig. 358(b)). At this time, the variable display being executed is in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and this mode is maintained even after the support flag is set.

After that, when the variable display of the normal game round ends at timing t4, the confirmation display is executed in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode. At this time, the stop result for a normal miss is displayed in the normal display section 44, and the fourth stop result is displayed in the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75 (Figures 350 and 351).

At timing t5, the confirmation display ends, and the normal game round ends, and the next normal game round is executed. In this case, the normal game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (more specifically, the second high-frequency support mode) based on the support flag being set.

In this way, if the support flag is set during a normal game turn resulting in a loss, a switch from the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will occur in time for the start of the next normal game turn (Fig. 358 (g)).

Next, we will explain the flow when the support flag is cleared while a regular game play resulting from a support win is being played, with reference to Figure 359. Here, we will explain the example of a situation where the number of times a special game play has been played in the time-saving game mode (high-frequency support mode) reaches the upper limit, causing a transition to the regular game mode (low-frequency support mode).

When a support lottery is held at timing t1 during the time-saving game state, a regular game round is executed based on that result (Fig. 359 (c)). Here, the result of the support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the regular win type lottery.

At this time, a support flag is set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162, and the internal state corresponds to high-frequency support mode (Fig. 359 (b)), so the normal game play is executed in a manner corresponding to high-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 0.5 seconds, and the fixed display time is set to 0.2 seconds.

After the regular game round starts (after the support lottery is executed), at timing t2 while the variable display is being executed, when the variable display for the special game round, which is the upper limit of the number of times, ends, the support flag is cleared and the internal state changes to low-frequency support mode. At this time, the variable display being executed is in a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode, and this mode is maintained even after the support flag is cleared. Furthermore, the final display after the variable display ends is also executed in a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode.

When the confirmation display ends at timing t3 and the normal game play ends, the normal power device 63a will open and close based on the support win (Fig. 359 (d)-(f)). At this time, the support flag is cleared, but the device open and close play is executed in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, an opening of, for example, 0.1 seconds, a first opening with an upper limit opening time of, for example, 2 seconds, a closing of, for example, 0.3 seconds, a second opening with an upper limit opening time of, for example, 2 seconds, and an ending of, for example, 0.1 seconds will be performed in this order.

When the ending ends at timing t4 and the opening and closing of the reels is completed, the next normal game round will be played. In this case, the normal game round will be played in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, since the support flag is not set.

In this way, if the support flag is cleared during a normal game round that results in a support win, the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will be applied until the opening and closing of the device corresponding to that support win is completed, and the switch to the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode will not occur until the start of the next normal game round. With this configuration, if the support flag is cleared during a normal game round that started in high-frequency support mode, the state in which a win is likely to occur in the second operating port 63 will continue until the opening and closing of the device corresponding to that normal game round is completed, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode for a longer period of time.

In addition, if the support flag is cleared during a reel opening/closing game or during a regular game that results in a loss, the mode will switch to the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode when the next regular game round begins. Also, if the support flag is cleared when a regular game round or reel opening/closing game round is not being played, the mode will switch to the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode when the next regular game round begins.

<Regarding the start timing of the special lighting effects>
The start timing of the special light emitting effect using the first light emitting unit 752 and the second light emitting unit 761 will be described with reference to Fig. 360. The special light emitting effect is an effect that makes the first light emitting unit 752 and the second light emitting unit 761 light up in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode, thereby making the normal electric device 63a (second operating port 63) and the winning route to the second operating port 63 stand out, and notifying the player that the mode is the high frequency support mode (a state in which winning to the second operating port 63 is likely to occur).

This special lighting effect is compatible with the high-frequency support mode, so it generally starts at the timing corresponding to the setting of the support flag, but it may start at a different timing depending on the status of the normal side operation when the flag is set. Below, we will explain how to use these different start timings.

As shown in Figure 360(a), the flag may be set when the support flag is set during a special feature opening/closing game that corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. In this case, the remaining time for the special feature opening/closing game is determined, and it is determined whether this time is relatively short. Specifically, it is determined whether the remaining time is equal to or shorter than a predetermined first specific time period (e.g., 5 seconds).

If the remaining period is less than the first specific period and is relatively short, a special light-emitting effect will begin when the support flag is set (first timing). This allows the player to be notified of the transition to high-frequency support mode by taking action in response to changes in the internal state. Note that the first timing does not necessarily have to be the timing when the support flag is set; for example, it may be the timing after a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) has passed since the support flag was set. In short, it is sufficient that the timing when the support flag was set is used as the reference.

On the other hand, if the remaining period is longer than the first specific period and is relatively long, the special light-emitting effect will begin at the end of the reel opening/closing game (second timing). In other words, the special light-emitting effect will begin at a later timing than when the remaining period of the reel opening/closing game is relatively short.

If there is a long period between the setting of the support flag and the opening of the regular power device 63a for the high-frequency support mode, and the special light-emitting effect starts when the flag is set, even though the player is being notified that they are in high-frequency support mode, it may be difficult for a winning combination to actually occur in the second actuation port 63, which could give the player an unnatural impression. In particular, because the regular power device 63a and the winning route to the second actuation port 63 are made to stand out, players are likely to pay attention to them, making them more likely to notice that a winning combination is not occurring in the second actuation port 63, which could have the opposite effect.

In this regard, by delaying the start timing of the special light-emitting effect as described above, it is possible to shorten the period from the start of the effect until the high-frequency support mode is opened. This effectively prevents the impression that winning at the second operating port 63 is taking a long time to occur, while effectively highlighting the regular electric device 63a and the winning route to the second operating port 63.

Also, as shown in Figure 360 (b), another situation in which the flag is set is when the support flag is set during a normal game turn (a normal game turn in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) that results from a support win. In this case, the period until the opening of the normal power device 63a begins in the device opening/closing game triggered by the support win is determined, and a determination is made as to whether this period is relatively short. Specifically, a determination is made as to whether the determined period is equal to or shorter than a predetermined second specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

If the remaining period is relatively short, less than the second specified period, the special light-emitting effect will begin when the support flag is set (first timing). On the other hand, if the remaining period is relatively long, longer than the second specified period, the special light-emitting effect will begin when the normal electric device 63a opens (third timing). In other words, the special light-emitting effect will begin at a later timing than when the period until opening is relatively short. By configuring it in this way, a winning entry into the second operating port 63 can be generated quickly after the special light-emitting effect begins, making it possible to achieve the same effect as above.

Also, as shown in Figure 360 (c), another situation in which the flag is set is when the support flag is set during a regular game turn that results in a loss (a regular game turn in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode). In this case, the remaining time for that regular game turn is determined, and a determination is made as to whether that time is relatively short. Specifically, a determination is made as to whether the remaining time is equal to or less than a predetermined third specific time period (e.g., 5 seconds).

If the remaining period is less than the third specified period and is relatively short, the special light-emitting effect will begin when the support flag is set (first timing). On the other hand, if the remaining period is longer than the third specified period and is relatively long, the special light-emitting effect will begin at the start of the next regular game round (a regular game round in a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode) (fourth timing). In other words, the special light-emitting effect will begin at a later timing than when the remaining period of the regular game round is relatively short. Since the next regular game round will be in a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode and is expected to end in a short time, the above configuration makes it possible to shorten the period from the start of the special light-emitting effect to the opening of high-frequency support mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 360 (d), if the support flag is set when neither a regular game nor a special device opening/closing game is in progress, a special light-emitting effect will begin when the support flag is set (first timing).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

In a pachinko machine in which the operation of the normal game, including the normal game round and the device opening/closing game, is switched to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the support flag is set and the internal state is set to correspond to the high-frequency support mode, the timing at which this switching can be performed is set multiple times within one normal game round (the game from the start of a normal game round to the end of the device opening/closing game corresponding to that normal game round).

With this configuration, if the support flag is set during a regular game round resulting from a support win that was started in low-frequency support mode, the mode can be switched to the mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode without waiting for the completion of the opening and closing of the device corresponding to that regular game round. This allows the opening and closing operation of the regular device 63a in the mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode to be activated quickly, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of high-frequency support mode sooner when the conditions for switching to high-frequency support mode are met.

The above configuration of this embodiment can also be seen as one that allows switching to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode to be executed at a specific timing during normal play when the support flag is set. In this case, the switching can be performed without waiting for the end of normal play, shortening the waiting period from when the support flag is set until the switching is executed, and enabling the opening and closing operation of the normal power device 63a in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode to be initiated more quickly.

The timing at which a switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed is set to be the timing corresponding to the start of a normal game (first timing), and the timing corresponding to the first opening of the normal power device 63a in a device opening/closing game (second timing). In this case, it is possible to select which of these timings to perform the switch, taking into account the timing at which the support flag is set and the status of the normal side operation. In other words, the switch can be performed by selecting the timing closest to the timing at which the support flag is set from among the above timings, making it possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the support flag is set.

The above-mentioned switch is made at the first timing when the support flag is set when a normal game round or a device opening/closing game round is not being played, or when the support flag is set during a normal game round that results in a loss, while the above-mentioned switch is made at the second timing when the support flag is set during a normal game round that results in a support win. This allows for optimized switch timing, making it possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the support flag is set.

In a pachinko machine that has a sudden time-saving game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) is configured to provide multiple timings for the above switch.

For the high-frequency support mode to function as a gaming state in which winning the second operating port 63 is more likely, the probability of winning the support lottery must be set to a certain value or higher, and the frequency with which the second operating port 63 (normal power device 63a) is opened must be ensured to a certain extent. In this case, because the probability of winning the support lottery is the same as the probability in the low-frequency support mode, the frequency with which the open state is reached also in the low-frequency support mode increases, making it difficult to create a clear difference in the ease with which the game ball will enter the second operating port 63 between the two modes. Therefore, by extending the period required for one normal game or one device opening/closing game in the low-frequency support mode, it is conceivable to reduce the frequency of support lotteries per unit time and make it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second operating port 63.

However, on the other hand, as these periods become longer, the waiting period after the support flag is set until the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is switched to also becomes longer, which raises the concern that even though the system is internally in a state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, it may take a long time for a state in which a winning entry into the second operating port 63 is likely to occur. By applying a configuration that diversifies the switching timing of this embodiment to this configuration, it is possible to effectively shorten the waiting period, and to more quickly arrive at a state in which a winning entry into the variable ball entry means is likely to occur.

When the support flag is set during a normal game play resulting from a support win, and the opening of the normal electric device 63a in the device opening/closing game is switched to the high-frequency support mode, the selection of whether to set the first high-prize device opening/closing game or the second high-prize device opening/closing game for the high-frequency support mode opening is made using the results of the normal win type lottery conducted before the support flag was set. In this case, there is no need to redo the normal win type lottery, which prevents the control process from becoming too complicated and cumbersome, and enables optimal control of the game state switching.

The stop results for the support winning results displayed on the normal game display unit 44 are configured so that the results (the state of the stop results) relative to the value of the normal game win type counter C4 are the same for the time-saving game state and the normal game state.

The results of the normal winning type lottery are used to select both the type of feature opening/closing game and the stop result for the support winning result. Therefore, the stop results displayed on the normal winning display unit 44 indicate not only the results of the support lottery, but also the type of feature opening/closing game. In this case, by making the results (stop result type) for the value of the normal winning type counter C4 common to the stop results for the time-saving game mode and the stop results for the normal game mode, even when the type of opening operation switched to the high-frequency support mode is set based on the results of the normal winning type lottery performed before the support flag is set, the stop results displayed (stop result for the normal game mode) can be consistent with the type of opening operation after switching (the type of opening operation for the time-saving game mode). This makes it possible to effectively prevent player confusion caused by inconsistencies between the stop results displayed and the type of opening operation.

If a support flag is set during a normal game, the stop result in the normal game display area P of the symbol display device 75 is changed. Specifically, the stop result of symbols F1 and F2 is switched from the first stop result to the second or third stop result. With this configuration, even if a support flag is set during a normal game for low-frequency support mode and the reel opening/closing game is switched to a high-frequency support mode and played, the stop result corresponding to the reel opening/closing game mode can be announced.

Incidentally, if the configuration does not clearly indicate that a special miss has occurred during the special symbol play of symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 performed on symbol display device 75, it will be difficult for the player to recognize that a special miss has occurred during that special symbol play, but by visually checking the stop results in normal symbol display area P, the player will be able to detect that a special miss has occurred (in other words, that the support flag has been set). In other words, the stop results of symbols F1 and F2 are displayed in a state that reflects not only the result of the support lottery, but also whether or not the support flag has been set, which increases the player's interest in the stop results and makes it possible to increase attention to the game.

When a special light-emitting effect corresponding to the time-saving game mode (light-emitting effect by the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761) is executed, its start timing is configured to differ depending on the status of normal game play. For example, if a special light-emitting effect corresponding to the time-saving game mode is executed but the game does not switch to a state where winning is more likely to occur in the second operating port 63, there is a concern that this may give the player an unnatural impression. In such a case, by configuring the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to vary depending on the status of normal game play, the special light-emitting effect can be started at the appropriate time depending on the status of normal game play, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The system is configured to determine the period from when the support flag is set until the normal power device 63a opens in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and if that period is longer than the second specified period, to start the special light-emitting effect at a third timing corresponding to the execution timing of that opening. In this case, the time lag from the start of the special light-emitting effect until the opening operation for the high-frequency support mode is performed can be kept short. This makes it possible to notify the player that a winning condition in the second operating port 63 is likely to occur at an appropriate timing corresponding to the switch to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode.

<Modification 1>
A first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 361 to 365. In these figures, the same components as those in the fourth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment described above, switching from a mode corresponding to low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode occurs at the start of a normal game round and the first opening of a special device opening/closing game, but in this modified example, switching can be performed at additional timing. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below.

The high-prize opening and closing feature game in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 361.

In the high-frequency support mode, the first high-prize feature opening/closing game and the second high-prize feature opening/closing game are provided. As shown in Figure 361(a), the first high-prize feature opening/closing game is configured so that the number of openings of the normal power feature 63a is set to two, and a 0.1-second opening, a 1.5-second first opening, a 0.3-second closing, a 1.5-second second opening, and a 0.1-second ending are played in that order. Also, as shown in Figure 361(b), the second high-prize feature opening/closing game is configured so that the number of openings of the normal power feature 63a is set to two, and a 0.1-second opening, a 2-second first opening, a 0.3-second closing, a 2-second second opening, and a 0.1-second ending are played in that order. In each of these opening and closing games, the number of times the normal electric device 63a opens is the same, but the upper limit of opening time for each opening is different.

<Opening and closing process of special features>
The opening and closing process of the role object according to this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 362. This process is executed in step Sd2111 of the electric role support process (Fig. 338) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the opening and closing process of the role object in Fig. 340. In Fig. 362, the same process as in Fig. 340 is assigned the same step number, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sd2301, it is determined whether the normal power device 63a is currently open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power device 63a is not currently open, it is determined in step Sd2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", proceed to step Sd2303, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0". If the value in the timer area T2 is "0", in step Sd4101, an upper limit opening time setting process is executed to set the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a for this opening. The upper limit opening time setting process in step Sd4101 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 363(a).

First, in step Sd4201, the current game status is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, or second high-frequency support mode by checking whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and if so, by referencing its type.

In step Sd4202, it is determined whether the result of step Sd4201 is high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If it is high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd4203 and set the upper limit release time for high-frequency support mode as the upper limit release time for this release.

The upper limit release time corresponding to the high frequency support mode is either 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds (Fig. 361), but the allocation is based on the results of the normal winning type determination in step Sd2106 of the electric role support processing (Fig. 338). Specifically, if the determined normal winning type is support winning result A, the upper limit release time is set to 1.5 seconds, and if it is support winning result B, the upper limit release time is set to 2 seconds. In step Sd4203, a value corresponding to the upper limit release time is set in timer area T2 provided in various counter area 344b of RAM 314. After step Sd4203 is executed, the upper limit release time setting process ends.

If the determination in step Sd4202 is negative, i.e., if the result of determination in step Sd4201 is low-frequency support mode (if the support flag is not set in the various flags storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd4204 and determine whether the low-support transition flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the low support transition flag is not set, proceed to step Sd4205 and set the upper limit opening time for low frequency support mode as the upper limit opening time for this opening. Specifically, the upper limit opening time is set to 0.1 seconds (Figure 313 (b)). After step Sd4205 is executed, the upper limit opening time setting process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd4204 (if the low support transition flag is set), it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "1." If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "1," the process proceeds to step Sd4207, where the low support transition flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared.

After step Sd4207 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd4206 (the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "1"), proceed to step Sd4203, where the upper limit opening time for the current opening is set to the upper limit opening time for the high-frequency support mode. Note that the processing in steps Sd4204 to Sd4207 is the same as steps Sd2213 to Sd2216 (Figure 339 (b)) in the fourth embodiment described above.

Returning to the explanation of the reel opening/closing process (Fig. 362), after executing the upper limit opening time setting process in step Sd4101, in step Sd2305, "6" is set in the prize counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. This value corresponds to the upper limit number of prizes (6) that can be won by the normal electric reel 63a (second operating port 63) during the reel opening/closing game.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2314 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0"), the closing time setting process is executed in step Sd4102. The closing time setting process is intended to set the interval time (waiting time) during which the normal power device 63a is kept in the closed state and waits for the next opening. The closing time setting process of step Sd4102 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 363 (b).

First, in step Sd4301, the current game status is determined. Specifically, whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e is determined, and if so, the type of flag is referenced to determine whether the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, first high-frequency support mode, or second high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd4302, it is determined whether the result of step Sd4301 indicates high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If it indicates high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd4303, and set the current closing time to the closing time for high-frequency support mode (e.g., 0.3 seconds). More specifically, a value corresponding to this closing time is set in timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314. After step Sd4303 is executed, the closing time setting process ends.

If the determination in step Sd4302 is negative, i.e., the result of step Sd4301 is low-frequency support mode (the support flag is not set in the various flags storage area 314e), step Sd4304 determines whether the low-support transition flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e. If the low-support transition flag is not set, proceed to step Sd4305, and set the current closing time to the closing time for low-frequency support mode (e.g., 1.5 seconds). After step Sd4305 is executed, the closing time setting process ends.

If step Sd4304 returns a positive result (the low support transition flag is set), step Sd4303 sets the current closing time to the closing time for high frequency support mode (e.g., 0.3 seconds), and then terminates the closing time setting process.

Returning to the explanation of the reel opening/closing process (Fig. 362), after executing the closing time setting process in step Sd4102, in step Sd2316, a reel closing command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the reel closing command, the performance control device 143 is notified that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state. The reel closing command includes information indicating the closing time set in step Sd4102.

<Regarding switching of the normal game mode due to changes in game status>
The flow of switching of the operation mode accompanying the change of the game state for the normal game including the normal game round and the hand-opening game will be explained. Note that the switching when the support flag is set when the normal game round and the hand-opening game are not being executed (Fig. 356) or when the support flag is set during the execution of the normal game round (Fig. 357) is the same as in the fourth embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

First, we will explain, with reference to Figure 364, what happens when the support flag is set during the interval (the closure between the first and second openings) of a special device opening/closing game that has been started in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. Here, we will explain the example of a case where the special device lottery results in a special miss, causing a sudden transition to a time-saving game state.

When a support lottery is held during normal play (low-frequency support mode), a regular game round is executed based on that lottery. Here, the result of the support lottery is a support win, and support win result A is selected in the regular win type lottery.

At this time, the support flag is not set in RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and the internal state is set to correspond to low-frequency support mode, so the above-mentioned normal game round is executed in a manner corresponding to low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds, and the final display time is set to 2 seconds (Figure 364 (c)). When the final display is displayed, the stop result corresponding to support winning result A is displayed in the normal display unit 44, and the first stop result is set as the stop result of patterns F1 and F2 in the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75.

When the normal game play ends at timing t1, a device opening/closing game is executed using the normal power device 63a based on the support win. The opening in the device opening/closing game is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the device opening/closing game was executed in the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 364 (d)). Specifically, the opening is executed for, for example, 5 seconds with the normal power device 63a in the closed state.

When the opening ends at timing t2, the opening mode for the first opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether or not the support flag is set. The opening mode for the first opening is then set based on the determination result. Because the support flag is not set at this point, a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is set as the opening mode. Specifically, the upper limit opening time for the first opening is set to, for example, 0.1 seconds.

When the first opening ends at timing t3, the interval (the closure between the first and second openings) for this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the support flag is set. The interval mode is then set based on the determination result. Because the support flag is not set at this point, the interval mode is set to a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the closure period is set to, for example, 1.5 seconds.

At timing t4 during the interval, when the result of the special drawing lottery results in a special miss and the confirmation display of the special drawing game round begins, a support flag is set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 (Fig. 364 (b)).

After that, when the interval ends at timing t5, the opening mode for the second opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the support flag is set. The opening mode for the second opening is then set based on the determination result. Because the support flag is set at this point, the opening mode is set to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode.

The modes corresponding to the high frequency support mode are the first high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 361(a)) and the second high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 361(b)). When setting the above, the result of the regular win type lottery held at the start of the regular game is referenced, and which of the above open/close games to set is selected based on that result. In this case, because support win result A was selected in the regular win type lottery, the upper limit opening time for this opening (second opening) is set to the upper limit opening time for the second opening in the first high prize feature open/close game (e.g., 1.5 seconds).

In this way, if the support flag is set during the interval after the first opening has ended, a switch from the mode corresponding to low-frequency support mode to the mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode will occur at the start of the second opening (Figure 364 (g)).

When the second opening of this device in the current opening and closing game is completed at timing t6, the ending is executed. This ending is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and continues for, for example, 0.1 seconds. Note that if the number of game balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit number of winning balls before the second opening is completed, the normal electric device 63a is closed at that point, and the above ending is executed.

The stop results displayed on the normal map display section 44 during the confirmation display period of the normal map game and the stop results displayed on the normal map display area P continue to be displayed even while the reel opening/closing game is being played. During the reel opening/closing game, the operation is switched to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, but these stop results do not change, and the stop results that were displayed before the switch continue to be displayed.

Next, we will explain, with reference to Figure 365, the flow that occurs when the support flag is set during the first opening of a device opening/closing game that has been started in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

When a support lottery is held during normal game play (low-frequency support mode), a regular game round is executed based on that result. Here, the result of the support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the regular win type lottery. At this time, since the support flag is not set in RAM 314 of the main control device 162, the regular game round is executed in a manner corresponding to low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds, and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 365 (c)).

When the normal game play ends at timing t1, a device opening/closing game is executed using the normal power device 63a based on the support win. The opening of the device opening/closing game is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the device opening/closing game was performed in the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 365 (d)).

When the opening ends at timing t2, the opening mode for the first opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, a reference is made to whether or not a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. However, since the support flag is not set at this point, a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, an upper limit opening time of 0.1 seconds) is set as the opening mode.

At timing t3, during the first opening, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss and the confirmation display of the special drawing game round begins, a support flag is set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 (Fig. 365 (b)).

After that, when the first opening is completed at timing t4, the interval for this game of opening and closing the reels is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the support flag is set. In this case, since the support flag is set, the interval mode is set to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (for example, a 0.3-second closing period).

If the support flag is set during the first release in this way, a switch from the mode corresponding to low-frequency support mode to the mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode will occur in time with the start of the interval (Figure 365 (g)). The subsequent flow is the same as from timing t5 onwards in Figure 364, so a description will be omitted.

By the way, if the support flag is set during the second opening or ending, the mode will switch from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode at the start of the next normal play, which will be played after the opening and closing of that device has ended.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

For normal game rounds and normal game rounds, including device opening/closing games, the timing at which a switch from a mode corresponding to low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode can be executed is set to the start timing of the second opening of the device opening/closing game. In this case, if the support flag is set during a device opening/closing game, the device opening/closing game can be switched to a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode without waiting for the start of the next normal game round. This makes it possible to quickly activate the opening operation of the normal device 63a, which is more likely to result in a win in the second operating port 63.

The timing at which the above-mentioned switching can be performed is set to the start of the interval immediately after the first opening. In this case, if the support flag is set during the first opening, switching to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed from the start of the interval, without waiting for the start of the second opening. In a device opening and closing game, if the interval for the high-frequency support mode (e.g., 0.3 seconds) is shorter than the interval for the low-frequency support mode (e.g., 1.5 seconds), this will lead to an earlier arrival of the second opening in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, making it possible to more quickly activate the opening operation of the normal electric device 63a, which is more likely to result in a win in the second operating port 63.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 366 to 369. In these figures, the same components as those in the fourth embodiment and modification 1 are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this modified version, if a support flag is set during the opening and closing of the device, the number of times the normal power device 63a opens can be changed. The configuration of this modified version is explained in detail below.

The high prize feature opening/closing game according to this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 366. In the second high prize feature opening/closing game according to this modified example, the normal electric feature 63a is set to open three times, and the following sequence is played: a 0.1 sec opening, a 2 sec first opening, a 0.3 sec first closing, a 2 sec second opening, a 0.3 sec second closing, a 2 sec third opening, and a 0.1 sec ending. The first high prize feature opening/closing game has the same configuration as the modified example 1 above.

<Opening and closing process of special features>
The opening and closing process of the role object according to this modified example will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 367. This process is executed in step Sd2111 of the electric role support process (Fig. 338) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the opening and closing process of the role object in Fig. 362. In Fig. 367, the same process as in Fig. 362 is assigned the same step number, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sd2301, it is determined whether the normal power device 63a is currently open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power device 63a is not currently open, it is determined in step Sd2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", proceed to step Sd2303, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0". If the value in the timer area T2 is "0", in step Sd5101, opening count change processing is executed to change the number of times the normal power device 63a opens. The opening count change processing in step Sd5101 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 368.

First, in step Sd5201, it is determined whether the current opening is the first opening. If it is not the first opening, the current game status is determined in step Sd5202. Specifically, it is determined whether the current support mode is low frequency support mode, first high frequency support mode, or second high frequency support mode by checking whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e and, if so, by referencing the type of flag.

In step Sd5203, it is determined whether the previous opening was performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. For example, if this opening is the second opening, it is determined whether the first opening in that opening and closing game was performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

If the previous opening was performed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, proceed to step Sd5204, where it is determined whether the result of step Sd5202 was the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If it is the high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e), this means that the support flag changed from an unset state to a set state between the start of the opening and closing game and the start of the current opening. In this case, proceed to step Sd5205, and execute processing to change the remaining number of openings.

In the processing of step Sd5205, the result of the normal map winning type drawn at the start of the normal map game that triggered this current opening and closing game is referenced. Then, if this opening is the second opening and the drawn normal map winning type is support winning result B, the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is changed to add 1 to the remaining number of openings. As a result, the number of times the normal electric device 63a has been opened in this opening and closing game is changed to 3, which corresponds to the second high winning device opening and closing game for the high frequency support mode.

In addition, if the selected normal winning type is Support Win Result A, the number of times the first high prize feature open/close game and the low prize feature open/close game have been opened is equal, so the process of adding up the remaining number of times the game has been opened will not be executed.

After step Sd5205 is executed, the opening count change process ends. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sd5201 (if this is the first opening), the first opening is performed based on the result set in step Sd2107 (Figure 338), and the opening count change process ends without executing the processes in steps Sd5202 and beyond. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd5203 (if the previous opening was not performed in a manner corresponding to low-frequency support mode) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd5204 (if the high-frequency support mode is not being used), it is determined that the support flag has not changed from an unset state to a set state, and the opening count change process ends without executing the process in step Sd5205.

After executing the opening count change process in step Sd5101, proceed to step Sd4101 and execute the upper limit opening time setting process.

<Regarding switching of the normal game mode due to changes in game status>
The flow of switching the operation mode according to the change of the game state will be explained for the normal game and the normal game including the opening and closing of the accessory. The flow when the support flag is set in the situation where the first opening of the accessory opening and closing game started in the mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode will be explained with reference to FIG.

When a support lottery is held during normal game play (low-frequency support mode), a regular game round is executed based on that result. Here, the result of the support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the regular win type lottery. At this time, since the support flag is not set in RAM 314 of the main control device 162, the regular game round is executed in a manner corresponding to low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds, and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 369 (c)).

When the normal game play ends at timing t1, a device opening/closing game is executed using the normal power device 63a based on the support win. The opening in the device opening/closing game is executed in a low-winning device opening/closing game (Fig. 313(b)) corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 369(d)), based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the device opening/closing game was held in the low-frequency support mode. At this time, the number of times the normal power device 63a is opened is set, but since the number of times it was opened in the low-winning device opening/closing game was two, the number of times it was opened in this device opening/closing game is set to two.

When the opening ends at timing t2, the opening mode for the first opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, a reference is made to whether or not a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. However, since the support flag is not set at this point, a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, an upper limit opening time of 0.1 seconds) is set as the opening mode.

At timing t3, during the first opening, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the confirmation display of the special drawing game round begins, and a support flag is set in RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 (Fig. 369 (b)).

After that, when the first opening is completed at timing t4, the interval for this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the support flag is set, so the interval is set to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (for example, a 0.3-second closing period).

After that, when the interval ends at timing t5, the opening mode for the second opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the support flag is set. The opening mode for the second opening is then set based on the determination result. Because the support flag is set at this point, the opening mode is set to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode.

The modes corresponding to the high frequency support mode are the first high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 361(a)) and the second high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 366). When setting the above, the result of the regular win type lottery held at the start of the regular game is referenced, and which of the above open/close games to set is selected based on that result. In this case, because support win result B was selected in the regular win type lottery, the upper limit opening time for this opening (second opening) is set to the upper limit opening time for the second opening in the second high prize feature open/close game (e.g., 2 seconds).

Furthermore, the number of times the second high prize feature is opened is three, which is more than the number of times it is opened for the low prize feature opening and closing game set at timing t1 (two), so the difference (one) is added to the remaining number of times it is opened. As a result, the number of times the normal electric feature 63a is opened in this feature opening and closing game is increased to three.

When the third opening of this device in the current opening and closing game is completed at timing t6, the ending is executed. This ending is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and continues for, for example, 0.1 seconds. Note that if the number of game balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit number of winning balls before the third opening is completed, the normal electric device 63a is closed at that point, and the above ending is executed.

The above explanation exemplified a case where the support flag was set during the first opening of a special feature opening/closing game, but even if the support flag was set during the interval between the first and second openings, if the result of the normal winning type lottery is support win result B, the remaining number of openings will be added. In this case, the above interval is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, 1.5 seconds).

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The remaining number of times a special feature 63a can be opened (maximum number of times it can be opened) can be changed during the game. With this configuration, if a support flag is set during the game and a switch is made from a mode corresponding to low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode during the game, and the number of times the special feature 63a can be opened is less than the number of times it can be opened for high-frequency support mode, the shortfall can be made up after the fact. This prevents the number of times the special feature 63a can be opened from remaining low after switching to a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode, allowing the player to quickly enjoy the benefits of high-frequency support mode in terms of the number of times it can be opened.

<Other Modifications>
The fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples are not limited to the above-described fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each of the configurations to be combined is ensured.

Furthermore, for ease of understanding, certain examples are specified as prerequisite configurations, such as "in Variation 1 of the Fourth Embodiment," but the following configurations are not limited to application to the specified prerequisite configurations (examples), and can also be applied to other embodiments and variations.

(1) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, a special loss result is set as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery. However, the special winning/losing lottery may draw a lottery to determine whether the result is a jackpot or a loss, and if the result is a loss, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of loss result) may be held to determine whether the result is a special loss. In this case, the separate lottery may be held using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to drawing the type of loss result.

Also, instead of the lottery for determining the type of losing result, a lottery for transitioning to a time-saving game state may be held to determine whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving game state will be met. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random number values, such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving game state will be met.

(2) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the notification corresponding to a win in a special miss result is executed by the pattern display device 75, but it may also be executed by another notification unit. Furthermore, notifications are not limited to image displays, and may be issued using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or by operating decorative movable bodies (movable gadgets) for moving effects in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, each of the above notifications does not necessarily have to be visual notifications, but may also be auditory notifications in the form of sound from the speaker unit 29. This also applies to notifications of the remaining number of times for time-saving, various stop results displayed in the regular display area P of the pattern display device 75, special light-emitting effects in the light-emitting units 752, 761, etc.

(3) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a special reach effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special failure result. However, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may also be made by a game-play effect that does not involve a reach effect. Furthermore, the notification does not have to be made using the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may be made by displaying a predetermined pattern, such as a predetermined character, on the symbol display device 75.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed on the pattern display device 75 is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display unit 43 and is displayed in a smaller size than the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying the fourth pattern in a specific manner that differs from the normal manner. Furthermore, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by combining the manner in which the fourth pattern is displayed in a stopped state with at least some of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that are displayed in a stopped state.

The notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made throughout the entire special game round, or may be made during a portion of the special game round. Incidentally, the special reach effects exemplified in the fourth embodiment and each variant example above are configured so that the player cannot tell whether or not a special miss result has occurred at the start of the special game round, but can tell that it is a special miss result at the end of the special game round. Therefore, it can be said that a notification corresponding to the special miss result is made during a portion of the special game round.

(4) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state (the support flag setting process) is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, but it may also be configured to be executed after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state may be executed during the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special symbol game round.

(5) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is triggered by a special miss result. However, the transition to the time-shortened game state may also be triggered by some other event. For example, the transition to the time-shortened game state may be triggered by a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passage section provided within the game area PE or the predetermined ball entry section.

In these cases, the support flag is set when a gaming ball enters a specific entry section or when a gaming ball passes through a specific passage section. Alternatively, instead of setting the support flag, a ball entry flag corresponding to the entry or a passage flag corresponding to the passage may be set. In this case, after the ball entry flag or passage flag is set, a switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode may be made based on the fact that these flags are set.

The specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism (opening/closing body, etc.) and may be a ball entry section that is always open, or it may be a variable type ball entry section that has an opening/closing mechanism and can switch between an open state in which game balls can or do enter or it is easier for the game ball to enter, and a closed state in which game balls cannot or it is harder for the game ball to enter than in the open state. The above-mentioned predetermined ball entry section may also not have an opening/closing mechanism and may be a ball entry section that is always open, or it may be a variable type ball entry section that has an opening/closing mechanism and can switch between an open state and a closed state. In these cases, the variable type ball entry section as the specific ball entry section or the predetermined ball entry section may be the electric device 63a, the variable winning device 65, or a separate ball entry section.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific entry section or passing section is provided within a predetermined entry section, only the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section will always enter or pass through the specific entry section or passing section. Alternatively, one or more other entry sections or passing sections different from the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and gaming balls that enter the predetermined entry section may be distributed, resulting in a situation in which a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section does not enter a specific entry section or pass through a specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is established when a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters a specific entry section or passes through a specific passing section, while a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is not established even if a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters another entry section or passes through another passing section.

(6) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a configuration is provided that includes both a sudden time-shortened game state and a normal time-shortened game state. However, a configuration may also be provided that includes a normal time-shortened game state without a sudden time-shortened game state, or a configuration may also be provided that includes a sudden time-shortened game state without a normal time-shortened game state. Furthermore, a configuration may also be provided that includes at least one of a sudden time-shortened game state and a normal time-shortened game state, but does not include a high-probability game state.

(7) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, a transition to high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game mode) occurs, and when various support flags are cleared from the various flag storage area 314e, the high-frequency support mode ends. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a transition to high-frequency support mode occurs when information corresponding to a first value (e.g., a support flag) is stored in a specific memory area provided in the various flag storage area 314e, and the high-frequency support mode ends when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value (e.g., a non-support flag) is stored in the specific memory area. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which information corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to the high-frequency support mode not being in the high-frequency support mode are provided, and the transition to and termination of the high-frequency support mode are controlled depending on which information is stored (set).

Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. In other words, a storage area corresponding to the high-frequency support mode being in effect and a storage area corresponding to the high-frequency support mode not being in effect may be provided, and transition to or termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which storage area the information is stored (set) in.

(8) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is ended (the support flag is cleared) at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round. However, it may be ended after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the time-saving game state may be ended during or at the end of the confirmation display of the final game round, or at the start of the next special game round.

(9) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving play state is ended (the support flag is cleared) when the number of times special symbol play has been performed since the transition to the time-saving play state reaches the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the time-saving play state may be ended when the number of times small jackpot results have been obtained in the special symbol win/lose lottery after the transition to the time-saving play state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, five times). Note that if both the number of times special symbol play has been performed reaching the upper limit and the number of small jackpot results has reached a specific number of times are met, the time-saving play state may be ended when one of these conditions is met, or the time-saving play state may be ended when both of these conditions are met.

By the way, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a small win, a small win game (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win result) is executed in which the variable winning device is opened and closed. This small win game is executed in a manner that is more disadvantageous to the player than a jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result). For example, the upper limit on the number of winning balls that can be entered into the variable winning device may be set lower than in a jackpot game, or the upper limit opening time per opening may be set shorter than the upper limit opening time per opening or one round of play in a jackpot game, so that the expected number of balls won is lower than in a jackpot game.

Also, instead of or in addition to the above, the time-saving game state may be configured to end when the number of normal game plays after switching to the time-saving game state reaches a predetermined specific number (e.g., 100 plays). In this case, the time-saving game state may end when the number of normal game plays resulting in a winning support lottery reaches a specific number, or when the number of normal game plays resulting in a losing support lottery reaches a specific number, or when the number of normal game plays reaches a specific number regardless of the result of the support lottery. Note that if the conditions for ending the time-saving game state include the number of normal game plays reaching a specific number, in addition to the number of special game plays reaching a maximum number or the number of small win results reaching a specific number, the time-saving game state may be configured to end when any one of these conditions is met, or when all of these conditions are met.

(10) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, and the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is updated by subtracting one from that value each time a special game is played. However, instead of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, the number of times a special game has been played in the time-shortened game state may be updated by adding one to the value of the support counter area SC each time a special game is played. In this case, the time-shortened game state may be terminated when the updated counter value reaches the upper limit of the number of times.

(11) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, if a support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round, a switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is performed at the start of the first opening of the reel opening/closing game performed in response to that normal game round. However, the switch may also be performed at the start of the opening of the reel opening/closing game. In other words, the opening may be performed in a short mode (e.g., 0.1 seconds) for the high-frequency support mode, and the opening may end earlier than in the low-frequency support mode. Note that if a support flag is set during the execution of an opening corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, a switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is performed at the start of the first opening.

Furthermore, if a support flag is set during the variable display of a normal game turn, the display may be configured to switch to a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode at the start of the confirmation display for that normal game turn. In other words, the confirmation display may be configured to be displayed in a short mode (0.2 seconds) for high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, if a support flag is set during the execution of the confirmation display, the display will switch to a mode corresponding to high-frequency support mode at the start of the opening or first opening.

Also, if the support flag is set during the final opening of the reel opening/closing game (the second opening if the upper limit of openings is two), the game may be configured to switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the start of the ending of that reel opening/closing game. In other words, the ending may be configured to be performed in a short mode (0.1 seconds) for the high-frequency support mode.

(12) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the timing for switching to the mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode is the start timing of the normal game round, but this may not be included. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the switching timing may be the start timing of the first opening only, and in modified example 1, the switching timing may be the start timing of the first opening, the start timing of the interval, and the start timing of the second opening.

(13) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, if the support flag is cleared during the execution of a normal game round, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode after the opening and closing of the reel that corresponds to that normal game round has ended. However, the above-mentioned switching may also be performed at the start of the first opening of the reel opening and closing game, the start of the opening, or the start of the confirmation display of the normal game round.

Also, if the support flag is set during a regular game, the system may be configured to switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing of the reels corresponding to that regular game has finished.

(14) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a transition to a time-shortened game state is triggered by a special miss result. However, a transition to a high-probability game state may also be configured. In this case, the support mode in the high-probability game state may be a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode.

(15) In the fourth embodiment and each modified example, a special lottery may be conducted separately from the win/lose lottery. In addition to the normal game state, a special game state may be entered upon winning a special loss result, and the special game state may be favored over the normal game state in terms of the probability of winning or execution of the special lottery. A possible trigger for executing the special lottery is, for example, a specific loss result (a loss result different from a special loss result). In such a configuration, the configuration of the fourth embodiment and each modified example may be applied to the timing of switching the mode of the special lottery when entering an internal state corresponding to the special game state (a state in which the special game state flag is set). In this case, the special game state corresponds to a "specific game state," and the special lottery corresponds to "specific control."

One example of a special lottery is a points lottery. Depending on the points awarded in the points lottery or the total number of points awarded, the game may transition to a time-saving game state, a high probability game state, an opening/closing execution mode, or a special device opening/closing game. Special effects (such as character costumes) may also be unlocked, or behind-the-scenes development stories about the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed. A points lottery may also be held based on a game ball entering or passing through a specific entry section or a specific passage section located inside the play area PE or a predetermined entry section.

(16) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a shorter variable display time (for example, 5 seconds) may be selected when a support win occurs in low-frequency support mode than when a loss occurs, or a shorter variable display time is more likely to be selected than when a loss occurs. By using such a configuration, the variable display time when a loss occurs is longer, which reduces the frequency of support lottery execution per unit time and ensures that a win in the second operating port 63 is unlikely to occur. However, by shortening the variable display time when a win occurs, if a support flag is set during normal play and the first opening for the high-frequency support mode is performed, the first opening can occur earlier. This makes it possible to activate the opening operation corresponding to the high-frequency support mode more quickly.

(17) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, one type of low-prize opening and closing game is provided as the device opening and closing game for the low-frequency support mode. However, the configuration may also include multiple types of low-prize opening and closing games with different aspects. For example, the configuration may include a low-prize opening and closing game that opens once and a low-prize opening and closing game that opens multiple times.

(18) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the mode of the reel opening/closing game and the type of stop result for the support winning result displayed on the normal display unit 44 correspond one-to-one, but a one-to-multiple correspondence is also possible. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple stop results correspond to one mode of the reel opening/closing game.

(19) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the mode of the reel opening/closing game is selected based on the lottery results for the normal winning type (the lottery results for the normal winning stop result). However, a specific lottery for selecting the mode of the reel opening/closing game may be conducted separately from the lottery for the normal winning type, and the mode of the reel opening/closing game may be selected based on the result. If the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round for the low-frequency support mode and the first opening for the high-frequency support mode is executed, the result of the specific lottery conducted before the support flag was set may be used to set the mode of the first opening for the high-frequency support mode.

(20) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round for the low-frequency support mode and the first opening for the high-frequency support mode is executed, a lottery for the normal winning type may be executed again, and the first opening mode may be set based on the result. The above-mentioned re-execution lottery may be executed at any time between the time the support flag is set and the time the first opening is executed. Furthermore, the re-execution lottery may be a lottery different from the lottery for the normal winning type (a lottery dedicated to selecting the first opening mode).

(21) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the stop results displayed in the normal map display area P are configured to display stop results in a manner corresponding to the time-saving game state when a support flag is set during normal map fluctuation display in normal game mode. However, instead of or in addition to this, when a support flag is set during normal map fluctuation display, a specific image that is not displayed when the flag is not set may be displayed. For example, a heart image may be displayed when a support flag is set in the normal map fluctuation display in normal game mode, but the image may not be displayed when the support flag is not set. In this case, the player can infer the state change based on the presence or absence of the image.

In the above case, it is preferable that the specific image be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, which also displays the stop results. This configuration concentrates the focus of attention, allowing the player to see both the stop results and the specific image without having to move their eyes significantly. In this sense, it is preferable that the specific image be displayed on the display screen G within the general symbol display area P or its periphery.

The specific image can be displayed at any time from when the support flag is set until the end of that regular game round. However, if it is displayed during a variable display, there is a concern that the player may mistake it for a preview effect (an effect that suggests the likelihood of a win in that game round), so it is preferable to display it after the display of the stop results has begun.

(22) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the types of stop results (first to third stop results of the pictures F1 and F2) displayed in the normal picture display area P correspond to the mode of the reel opening/closing game, but they may also correspond to the game state. In other words, regardless of the mode of the reel opening/closing game, a configuration may be provided in which a support winning stop result set for the normal game state (low frequency support mode) and a support winning stop result set for the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) are provided.

(23) In the fourth embodiment and each of the variations, the stop results for a losing result displayed in the normal game display area P may have a stop result for the normal game state (low frequency support mode) (fourth stop result) and a stop result for the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) (fifth stop result different from the fourth stop result), and may be configured to change from the fourth stop result to the fifth stop result if a support flag is set during the execution of a normal game turn that results in a losing result. Even with this configuration, it is possible to display stop results that reflect changes in the internal state.

(24) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the type of stop result displayed in the normal map display area P is set at the start of the variable display of the normal map game round, but it may also be set at the start of the final display. If the support flag is set during the variable display of the normal map game round for the low frequency support mode and the first opening for the high frequency support mode is performed, the second stop result or third stop result (the stop result for the high frequency support mode) will be set at the start of the final display of the normal map game round. In this case, the stop result change process is not executed.

(25) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the stop results displayed in the normal map display area P may be configured so that the stop results of the support wins set for the normal game state (low frequency support mode) and the stop results of the support wins set for the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) have the same pattern (type). In other words, the stop result pattern may be configured to be the same for each of these game states.

(26) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the light-emitting units 752 and 761 emit light in a normal light-emitting mode during normal game play. However, these light-emitting units 752 and 761 may be configured to be turned off. In other words, the light-emitting units 752 and 761 may emit light when a special light-emitting effect is executed.

(27) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration may be adopted in which, separate from the light-emitting units 752 and 761, a notification unit (e.g., lamp unit 26 provided on the front door frame 14) located farther from the normal power device 63a (second operating port 63) than the light-emitting units 752 and 761 performs a light-emitting effect corresponding to the time-saving game mode. In this case, if the period from when the support flag is set to when the first opening is executed is longer than the second specific period and the light-emitting effect of the light-emitting units 752 and 761 is initiated at a third timing corresponding to the opening of the normal power device 63a, the light-emitting effect of the farther notification unit may be initiated at a first timing corresponding to the setting of the support flag. Furthermore, instead of the first timing, the light-emitting effect may be initiated at a timing later than the first timing and earlier than the third timing.

Incidentally, if the period from when the support flag is set to when the first opening is executed is equal to or shorter than the second specific period, and the light-emitting effect in the light-emitting units 752 and 761 is executed at the first timing, the light-emitting effect in the notification unit located further away should also start at the first timing. Note that the light-emitting effect in the notification unit located further away does not necessarily have to be the same light-emitting pattern as the special light-emitting effect in the light-emitting units 752 and 761, and it is sufficient if it functions as a notification that the game is in a time-saving game mode.

(28) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, if a predetermined state change (a change to the time-saving flag being set) occurs during the execution of a device opening/closing game by the normal power device 63a, the state change is reflected in the device opening/closing game currently being executed. However, if a predetermined state change occurs during the execution of an opening/closing execution mode by the variable winning device 65, the state change may be reflected in the opening/closing execution mode currently being executed. In other words, the present invention may be applied not only to device opening/closing games, but also to opening/closing execution modes.

When applying this to the open/close execution mode, for example, a time-saving flag is set based on a ball entering a specific entry area, and the opening/closing modes of the variable entry device 65 in the open/close execution mode are set to a non-set mode corresponding to the non-set state of the time-saving flag, and a set mode corresponding to the set state of the time-saving flag.If a predetermined number of rounds of play during the open/close execution mode are being played in the non-set mode, and a game ball enters the specific entry area and the time-saving flag is set, the next round of play may be played in the set mode, or the closed period (round interval) between these two rounds may be played in the set mode.

As another example, in a simultaneous variation type gaming machine that allows the first and second special symbol game rounds to be executed in parallel, in other words, allows one of these special symbol game rounds to be executed while the other is being executed, if a jackpot result is achieved in one special symbol game round, and the other special symbol game round is executed while the open/close execution mode is being executed, a possible configuration is that if a jackpot result is also achieved in the other special symbol game round, the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode will be increased, thereby reflecting the latter jackpot result.

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to a configuration that increases the number of rounds of play, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage differs after the opening/closing execution mode. For example, when transitioning to the normal time-saving play state after the opening/closing execution mode, if a jackpot result is achieved in the other special game play, the maximum number of times the time-saving play state can be increased compared to when the jackpot does not occur, or the opening/closing game of the device can be implemented in a manner that increases the expected value of winning the second operating port 63.

(29) In the first variant of the fourth embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which switching to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of the second opening, but cannot be performed at the start of the interval. In this case, if the support flag is set during the first opening in a feature opening/closing game for the low-frequency support mode, an interval corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed, and then a second opening corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is executed.

Furthermore, in variant 1 of the fourth embodiment described above, it is also possible to configure the system so that switching to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of an interval, but not at the start of the second release.

(30) In the first variant of the fourth embodiment, the low prize feature opening/closing game and the high prize feature opening/closing game may be configured to have a three-time opening mode. In this case, the configuration may be such that switching to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode can be performed on each of the second and third openings, or the above switching can be performed on either the second or third opening. It may also be configured to have a mode in which four or more openings are performed.

(31) In Variant 1 of the fourth embodiment, the low-frequency support mode reel opening/closing game (low-winning reel opening/closing game) may be configured to have multiple modes with different required times from the start of the first opening to the end of the interval. In the mode with a longer required time, if the support flag is set during the reel opening/closing game, the support flag is more likely to be set before the start of the second opening than in the mode with a shorter required time, making it more likely that the second opening will be performed in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. In other words, the type of reel opening/closing game being performed when the support flag is set can make a difference in the likelihood of the second opening for the high-frequency support mode being performed.

Specific configurations with different required periods may include different lengths of first opening, different interval lengths, or both. However, in order to make it more difficult for a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 to occur, it is preferable that the interval length be longer in one mode than in the other.

(32) In Variant 2 of the fourth embodiment described above, the remaining number of times for the reel opening/closing game is increased by switching to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. However, instead of or in addition to this, the remaining number of times for the reel opening/closing game may be decreased. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a two-time opening mode is provided as a low-prize reel opening/closing game, and a two-time opening mode and a one-time opening mode are provided as a high-prize reel opening/closing game. If the support flag is set during the execution of an interval in the reel opening/closing game for the low-frequency support mode (low-prize reel opening/closing game), the lottery result for the normal winning type is referenced at the start of the second opening. At that time, if the lottery result corresponds to the one-time opening mode, the difference of one time is subtracted from the remaining number of openings, and the remaining number of openings is changed to zero. In other words, the execution of the second opening is canceled, and the number of times for the reel opening/closing game is reduced from two to one.

(33) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration is such that the transition to jackpot play (open/close execution mode) occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot result. However, as in a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the configuration may also be such that the transition to jackpot play occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit result and the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during small hit play (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a miss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award determination is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, "transitioning to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result" can be interpreted as including, as mentioned above, the case where the result of the win/loss judgment is a small win result and transitioning to a big win game via a V win.

(34) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pachinko machine is a type in which game balls are paid out, but it may also be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such enclosed type pachinko machines, when prize balls are awarded as a bonus for winning a prize or the like, it is preferable to award the player a predetermined game value (virtual game medium such as credits) corresponding to the number of prize balls, and to notify the player of information indicating the number of prize balls.

(35) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but this may be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(36) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but this may not be the case. Furthermore, pending information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized over pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 in determining whether a prize has been won or lost, but this relationship may be reversed, or the winning/losing determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(37) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, only game balls flowing down the right route are configured to be able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that only game balls flowing down the left route are able to pass through or win, or so that game balls can pass through or win from either the right or left route. However, to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the system so that only game balls flowing down one of the right and left routes are able to win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right and left routes are able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(38) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time effects correspond one-to-one, but they may also correspond one-to-multiple. In this case, the effect control device 143 can acquire a random number for effect lottery, and use the acquired random number to select one game-time effect from among multiple game-time effects associated with one variation pattern.

(39) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variably displayed patterns on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll left and right, but the patterns may be displayed in a line on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction and scrolling direction of the patterns are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more.

(40) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

Fifth Embodiment
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Configuration of special image display unit 43>
The configuration of the special symbol display unit 43 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 370. Fig. 370(a) is a front view of the special symbol display unit 43, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the area including the special symbol display unit 43 and its front side. The special symbol display unit 43 is provided with a first special symbol display unit AS and a second special symbol display unit BS, which have the same configuration, so the configuration will be described using the first special symbol display unit AS as an example.

As shown in Figure 370(a), the first special symbol display unit AS is provided with a segment display 801. A display area 805 is formed on the display surface of the segment display 801, and seven display segments SG1 to SG7 are provided in the display area 805. Each display segment SG1 to SG7 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or to light up multiple display segments in any combination. Note that, because all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the display by the display segments SG1 to SG7 is a single color.

Each display segment SG1 to SG7 is linear when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and in the display area 805, these display segments SG1 to SG7 are arranged in the shape of the number "8." By controlling which of these display segments SG1 to SG7 are lit and which are extinguished, it is possible to display multiple types of images with different display modes (appearances).

In the display area 805, each display segment SG1 to SG7 is repeatedly lit and extinguished in response to a winning entry into the first actuation port 62, and a varying display of the image (variable display or switching display) is performed. After the varying display is performed, the display segments SG1 to SG7 set to be lit remain lit for the static display period, and the image resulting from the stop is displayed statically. This notifies the result of the internal lottery conducted based on a winning entry into the first actuation port 62.

In addition, in the display area 805 of the second special symbol display section BS, when a winning combination is achieved in the second operating port 63, the display segments SG1 to SG7 are lit and extinguished to display a changing pattern, and then the pattern resulting from the stop is displayed as a static image.

In this way, the stopped patterns are displayed in the display area 805 of each special pattern display unit AS, BS, and this display area 805 is formed with a smaller surface area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 (or the area of the display screen G that is visible when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10). In other words, the patterns in the display area 805 are smaller in display size than the patterns displayed on the pattern display device 75, and are displayed in a manner that is less noticeable than the patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

As shown in Figure 370(b), the segment display 801 is mounted on a display board 802. The display board 802 is electrically connected to the main control unit 162 via electrical wiring, and when a drive signal is output from the main control unit 162 to the display board 802, each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 is illuminated. The display board 802 is positioned relative to the decorative member 39 on the game board 60, and is fixed from the back side of the decorative member 39, so that the entire display area 805 of the segment display 801 is exposed through the opening 39a provided in the decorative member 39.

A cover panel 803 is provided in front of the segment display 801, facing the display area 805. The cover panel 803 is positioned so as to cover the opening 39a of the decorative member 39 from behind, and is formed translucently so that the display in the display area 805 can be seen through the glass panel 23 and the cover panel 803 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the cover panel 803 is formed from a black translucent synthetic resin.

By making the cover panel 803 translucent in this way, the display on the first special symbol display area AS can be seen, while making the display on the first special symbol display area AS less noticeable than if the cover panel 803 were colorless and transparent. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the display on the pattern display device 75 rather than the display on the first special symbol display area AS. However, this is not limited to this, and the cover panel 803 may be formed colorless and transparent, or a configuration may be adopted in which the cover panel 803 is not provided.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained using Figure 371.

During play, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, set the display for the special symbol display unit 43, and set the display for the regular symbol display unit 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used to determine the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a special jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS which determines the variation display time for each special symbol display unit AS, BS in the special symbol display unit 43. Furthermore, it uses a regular symbol random number counter C3 used to perform the lottery for determining whether or not to place the regular symbol device 63a of the second operating port 63 in the support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a, which is set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special symbol reserved area Ra and a second special symbol reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of these areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history for the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first to fourth areas in the order of first area → second area → third area → fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b has a total reserved number storage area, and this total reserved number storage area stores information for specifying the number of winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

To go into more detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 2999, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314, and when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63, it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, and the random number value that results in a jackpot win is set in a win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in Figure 372, the win/lose table is set to a win/lose table for low probability mode (Figure 372(a)) and a win/lose table for high probability mode (Figure 372(b)). In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes for the win/lose lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 372(a), the win/lose table for low probability mode has a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" set as jackpot values. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300.

The lottery result will be a losing result for any random number value other than the jackpot winning value, but in this embodiment, the losing results include special losing results and normal losing results. In the winning/losing table for the low probability mode, a total of 20 random number values from "10" to "29" are set as special losing results, and the probability of getting a special losing result is 1/150.

As shown in Figure 372 (b), the hit/miss table for high probability mode has a total of 50 random number values between "0" and "49" set as jackpot winning values. In other words, the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. The hit/miss table for high probability mode does not have any special miss results, and all values other than the random number values that result in a jackpot winning result are normal miss results.

The probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot can be any. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result in the win/lose table for low probability mode is also not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, the probability of a special miss result does not necessarily have to be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and can be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result may be lower than the probability of winning a jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game results for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. As shown in Figure 373, the jackpot type table is a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Figure 373(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Figure 373(b)). If a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in Figure 373(a), the jackpot type table for the first special symbol has the following selectable jackpot types: 10R variable probability jackpot result, 7R variable probability jackpot result, 3R variable probability jackpot result, 7R normal jackpot result, and 3R normal jackpot result. These jackpot results result in 10, 7, 3, 7, and 3 rounds of play being executed, respectively. Here, a round of play refers to at least one execution of variable winning control, which changes the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state and then back to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once per round of play.

The 10R, 7R, and 3R probability variable jackpot results are jackpot results in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode for the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In other words, when a probability variable jackpot result occurs, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high probability game state, probability variable game state). In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode begins). Incidentally, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

In the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode, the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared under conditions in which game balls are continuously being released into the play area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a is opened more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the open period for each opening is also longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in low-frequency support mode. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than that into the second actuation port 63, but in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than that into the first actuation port 62. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, allowing the player to play in high-frequency support mode while minimizing the loss of balls in their possession.

In this embodiment, the high frequency support modes are a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode. Of these, the first high frequency support mode is the mode that is entered when a special jackpot result is achieved. The differences between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode will be explained later.

The 7R normal jackpot result and the 3R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to first high frequency support mode. In other words, when these normal jackpot results occur, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state).

When a 7R or 3R normal jackpot result is achieved, the time-saving play state continues until the number of special symbol play times (missing play times) resulting in a miss reaches, for example, 100. In this case, the number of missing play times is counted based on the special symbol play times after the opening and closing execution mode has ended. When the number of missing play times reaches the upper limit (100 times), the time-saving play state ends and the game transitions to the normal play state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result is achieved before the upper limit is reached, the time-saving play state ends with a transition to the opening and closing execution mode based on that jackpot result.

In the jackpot type table for the first special design, "0" through "4" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, "5" through "14" correspond to a 7R special jackpot result, "15" through "60" correspond to a 3R special jackpot result, "61" through "80" correspond to a 7R regular jackpot result, and "81" through "99" correspond to a 3R jackpot result. In other words, when a jackpot is awarded in a lottery based on winning through the first operating port 62, the probability of a 10R special jackpot result is set to 5%, the probability of a 7R special jackpot result is set to 10%, the probability of a 3R special jackpot result is set to 36%, the probability of a 7R regular jackpot result is set to 20%, and the probability of a 3R regular jackpot result is set to 19%.

As shown in Figure 373 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special design has the following selectable jackpot types: 10R special jackpot result, 7R special jackpot result, 3R special jackpot result, 10R regular jackpot results A-D, 7R regular jackpot results A-D, and 3R regular jackpot results A-D. The 10R special jackpot result, 7R special jackpot result, and 3R special jackpot result are the same as the 10R special jackpot result, 7R special jackpot result, and 3R special jackpot result in the jackpot type table for the first special design, so explanations will be omitted.

The normal jackpot results of 10R normal jackpot results A-D, 7R normal jackpot results A-D, and 3R normal jackpot results A-D are jackpot results in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to first high frequency support mode. In other words, when these normal jackpot results occur, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state).

10R normal jackpot results A to D result in 10 rounds of play being executed. The time-saving play state in the case of 10R normal jackpot result A continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 3,000, and the time-saving play state in the case of 10R normal jackpot result B continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 300. Furthermore, the time-saving play state in the case of 10R normal jackpot result C continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 200, and the time-saving play state in the case of 10R normal jackpot result D continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 100.

7R normal jackpot results A to D result in seven rounds of play being executed. The time-saving play state in the case of 7R normal jackpot result A continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 3,000, and the time-saving play state in the case of 7R normal jackpot result B continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 300. Furthermore, the time-saving play state in the case of 7R normal jackpot result C continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 200, and the time-saving play state in the case of 7R normal jackpot result D continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 100.

3R normal jackpot results A to D result in three rounds of play being executed. The time-saving play state in the case of 3R normal jackpot result A continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 3,000, and the time-saving play state in the case of 3R normal jackpot result B continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 300. Furthermore, the time-saving play state in the case of 3R normal jackpot result C continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 200, and the time-saving play state in the case of 3R normal jackpot result D continues until the number of miss plays reaches, for example, 100.

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "50" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, "51" to "55" correspond to a 7R special jackpot result, "56" to "60" correspond to a 3R special jackpot result, "61" corresponds to a 10R normal jackpot result A, and "62" to "65", "66" to "69", and "70" to "73" correspond to a 10R normal jackpot result B, a 10R normal jackpot result C, and a 10R normal jackpot result D, respectively. Furthermore, "74" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 7R normal jackpot result, "75" to "78," "79" to "82," and "83" to "86" correspond to a 7R normal jackpot result B, a 7R normal jackpot result C, and a 7R normal jackpot result D, respectively, "87" corresponds to a 3R normal jackpot result, and "88" to "91," "92" to "95," and "96" to "99" correspond to a 3R normal jackpot result B, a 3R normal jackpot result C, and a 3R normal jackpot result D, respectively. In other words, when a jackpot is won in a win/loss lottery based on winning through the second operating port 63, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is 51%, and the probability of being assigned to a 7R special jackpot result or a 3R special jackpot result is both 5%. Additionally, the probability of being assigned to a 10R normal jackpot result A, a 7R normal jackpot result A, or a 3R normal jackpot result A is all 1%, while the probability of being assigned to any other normal jackpot result is 4%.

Here, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is set to 61%, the same for both the type table of the first special symbol display section and the type table of the second special symbol display section. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special symbol display section sets the probability of a 10R jackpot result to 51%, which is higher than the 5% probability in the type table of the first special symbol display section. In other words, if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the second actuation port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode will be greater than if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the first actuation port 62, and it is possible to expect a greater payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is awarded through the second actuation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is awarded through the first actuation port 62.

In this way, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, players will play in the hope of winning through the second actuation port 63, out of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, and as a result, players will pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning through the second actuation port 63.

In this embodiment, the type table of the first special symbol display unit and the type table of the second special symbol display unit have the same probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result, but they may also have different probabilities. Specifically, the type table of the second special symbol display unit may be configured to have a higher probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result than the type table of the first special symbol display unit. Even with this configuration, it is still more advantageous for the player to have the second actuation port 63 win than the first actuation port 62. In this case, it is not necessarily necessary to configure the second actuation port 63 to be more favorable than the first actuation port 62 in terms of both the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode and the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result; it may be configured so that only the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result is more favorable.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS when the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple pieces of data for the stop results in the event of a jackpot (the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS) that correspond to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data for the multiple stop results that corresponds to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Because the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine both the stop result and the jackpot type, the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state that is triggered by a normal jackpot result, there is also a time-saving game state that is triggered by a special miss result in the win/lose lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1. In this case, the time-saving game state is a state in which the lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a second high-frequency support mode.

Note that, because a special miss result is a type of miss result, the game will transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state without going through the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a special miss result occurs, the game state will transition to the time-saving game state as the special game round ends. In the following, when distinguishing between the time-saving game state triggered by a normal jackpot result and the time-saving game state triggered by a special miss result, the former will sometimes be referred to as the "normal time-saving game state" and the latter as the "sudden time-saving game state."

As shown in Figure 374 (a), there are multiple types of special failure results. Specifically, there are three types of special failure results: special failure result A to special failure result C. Each of these special failure results is associated with a value of the jackpot random number counter C1. More specifically, of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in special failure results between "10" and "29," "10" to "13" correspond to special failure result A, "14" to "19" correspond to special failure result B, and "20" to "29" correspond to special failure result C. In other words, when a special failure result occurs, the probability of special failure result A is set to 20%, the probability of special failure result B is set to 30%, and the probability of special failure result C is set to 50%.

Note that the number and values of random numbers corresponding to the various special failure results are merely examples, and the probabilities of the various special failure results and the corresponding random numbers can be set arbitrarily.

As shown in Figure 374 (b), special miss result A is a special miss result that triggers a transition to sudden time-saving game state A (low probability mode and second high-frequency support mode). Sudden time-saving game state A continues until the number of misses since transitioning to sudden time-saving game state A reaches, for example, 200.

Special miss result B is a special miss result that triggers a transition to sudden time-saving game state B (low probability mode and second high-frequency support mode). Sudden time-saving game state B continues until the number of misses since the transition to sudden time-saving game state B reaches, for example, 100.

Special miss result C is a special miss result that triggers a transition to sudden time-saving game state C (low probability mode and second high-frequency support mode). Sudden time-saving game state C continues until the number of misses since transitioning to sudden time-saving game state C reaches, for example, 50.

If the number of misses in the sudden time-saving game modes A to C reaches the respective upper limit, the current sudden time-saving game mode will end and the game will transition to the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). If a jackpot result occurs before the respective upper limit is reached, the respective sudden time-saving game mode will end with a transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 374(c), in addition to the normal time-saving game state and the sudden time-saving game state, there is a time-saving game state which is entered when the cumulative number of times (so-called stuck times) in which the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (losing game state) reaches a predetermined ceiling number (for example, 990 times). Hereinafter, this time-saving game state may be referred to as the "ceiling time-saving game state" to distinguish it from other time-saving game states.

When counting missing plays, if a jackpot occurs before the maximum number of plays is reached, the remaining number of plays until the maximum number of plays is reset to the initial value (for example, 990 plays), and the number of missing plays up to that point is discarded. Furthermore, missing plays during high probability play states are not counted. Therefore, to transition to the ceiling time-saving play state, the number of missing plays after the end of the open/close execution mode must reach the maximum number of plays, and if transitioning to the high probability play state after the open/close execution mode, the number of missing plays after the end of the high probability play state must reach the maximum number of plays.

In the ceiling time-saving play state, like the sudden time-saving play state, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the second high-frequency support mode. Because the trigger for transitioning to the ceiling time-saving play state is a miss result, transition to the ceiling time-saving play state occurs without going through the open/close execution mode. In other words, when the number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number, the play state transitions to the ceiling time-saving play state as the special game play ends. The ceiling time-saving play state continues until the number of special game play plays since transitioning to the ceiling time-saving play state reaches, for example, 1,100. If a jackpot result occurs before the upper limit (1,100 plays) is reached, the ceiling time-saving play state ends with a transition to the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot result. When the ceiling time-saving play state ends, the game transitions to the normal play state.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 371, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special symbol display section AS and second special symbol display section BS of the special symbol display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313. Details of the variable display time table will be described later.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The normal winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the normal winning holding area 314c of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used in the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not a normal winning (support winning) has occurred. If the result is a support winning, the normal power device 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a device opening/closing game is executed in which the opening/closing control to return it to the closed state is performed at least once.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in the support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in Figure 375, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (Figure 375(a)), a support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode (Figure 375(b)), and a support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode (Figure 375(c)). When drawing the support lottery, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced; if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode is referenced; and if the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 375(a), the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode has 50 random number values between "0" and "49" set as support wins, and the probability of winning support is 1/2.

As shown in Figure 375 (b), the support lottery table for the first high frequency support mode has a total of 90 numbers set from "0" to "89," and the probability of winning support is 9/10. In other words, when in the first high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is a high probability mode, making it easier to win support than in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in Figure 375 (c), in the support lottery table for the second high frequency support mode, a total of 50 random number values ranging from "0" to "49" are set as support winning values, and the probability of winning support is 1/2. In other words, in the second high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is set to a low probability mode, and the support lottery is held with a lower probability of winning support than in the first high frequency support mode.

In each support mode, if the random number value does not result in a support win, the lottery result will be a normal miss. In this case, the opening and closing of the device will not be performed.

The probability of winning a support ball in each support mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. For example, as long as the probability of winning a support ball is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a support ball win are arbitrary. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is the same as in the low-frequency support mode, but the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the low-frequency support mode. In that case, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode may be the same as the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be lower than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball is equal in the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode.

Incidentally, if the probability of winning support is set to be equal between the low-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, as in this embodiment, that is, if there is no variation in the probability of winning support between these modes, the support lottery table for each of these modes can be made common, and a single lottery table can be provided.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to progress the game by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but we will not explain these processes here.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 376. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Se101, the various winning sensors are read. That is, the status of the various winning sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, and the status of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If it is determined that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Furthermore, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

In step Se102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Se103, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Se104, a winning process for through gate 64 is executed in response to a win. In the winning process for through gate 64, it is determined whether a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and if this flag is stored, the value of the normal winning random number counter C3 updated in step Se103 is stored in the normal map holding area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role devices stored in the normal map holding area 314c is less than four. Furthermore, if a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

In step Se105, the winning process for the operating port 62 or 63 is executed in response to a winning entry, and then the timer interrupt process ends.

<Winning process for operating port>
The winning processing for the operating port in step Se105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 377.

First, in step Se201, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Se202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three gaming balls.

In step Se203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Se204, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Then, in step Se205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Se201 (no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Se206, where it is determined whether a gaming ball has won (initial winning) in the second actuation port 63 based on the detection state of the second actuation port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that a gaming ball has won in the second actuation port 63, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Se207 to pay out one gaming ball.

In step Se208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Se209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Then, in step Se205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Se206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Se202 or step Se207 is sent to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Se205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 378.

First, in step Se301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Se204 or step Se209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated. If it is less than the upper limit, in step Se302, 1 is added to the start pending memory count N for the corresponding special chart hold area Ra, Rb. In step Se303, 1 is added to the value stored in the total hold count memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold count CRN).

In step Se304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the corresponding reserved area for the special chart display section, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number increased by 1 in step Se302 above.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the first special symbol holding area Ra, i.e., the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol added by 1 in step Se302 above.

In addition, if the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the reserve area Rb for the second special symbol, i.e., the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol added by 1 in step Se302 above.

In step Se305, a display update process is performed on the special symbol reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. The special symbol reserved number display section AM is capable of displaying the reserved number for the first special symbol and the reserved number for the second special symbol separately. In the display update process of step Se305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special symbol is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special symbol is updated.

In step Se306, a hold command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special symbol has been started, and information indicating the number of symbols on hold. After step Se306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 379. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and in normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Se401 to Se408 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Se409 to Se411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, external signal output processing is first executed in step Se401. In the external signal output processing in step Se401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Se402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Se403, a special symbol play control process is executed to control play during each special symbol play. The special symbol play control process performs jackpot determination and display control of the special symbol display unit 43. In step Se404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the special symbol play control process in step Se403 and the game state transition process in step Se404 will be described later.

In step Se405, a normal game play control process is executed to control play during a normal game play. The normal game play control process includes a support lottery (a normal game win/lose lottery) and display control of the normal game display unit 44. In step Se406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal electric role device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Details of the normal game play control process in step Se405 and the electric role support process in step Se406 will be described later.

In step Se407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In step Se408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage has not occurred), step Se409 determines whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing, step Se410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314.

In step Se411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se409 (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), processing returns to step Se401 and processing from step Se401 onwards is executed.

In this way, after executing the processing of step Se408, the remaining period until the timing for executing the next normal processing is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, the execution time of each processing of steps Se401 to Se408 changes depending on the state of the game, so the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can likewise be randomly updated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se408 (if the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Se412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Se413, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Se414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Se415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Se416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after power is completely cut off, power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to maintain data storage in RAM 314, so the information stored in RAM 314 before power was cut off is retained in its original state for a predetermined period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special game play control processing>
The special game play control processing of step Se403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 380.

First, in step Se501, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, step Se502 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol. Specifically, it determines whether the fixed symbol display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The fixed symbol display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a fixed symbol.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed value, step Se503 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable value. Specifically, it determines whether a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display is being performed on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, step Se504 determines whether the common hold count CRN is "0." If the common hold count CRN is "0," this means that the start hold memory counts RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common hold count CRN is "0," there is no hold information to be executed, and the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserve number CRN is not "0", step Se505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra or the second special symbol reserve area Rb for variable display, and then step Se506 executes a variable start process to start variable display in the special symbol display unit 43, after which the game play control process ends.

The data setting process in step Se505 and the fluctuation start process in step Se506 are now described in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 381.

First, in step Se601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is "0." If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0," data setting processing for the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Se602 to Se608. If the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0," data setting processing for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Se609 to Se615.

As already explained, data setting processing is performed when the common reserve number CRN is 1 or greater. A situation in which data setting processing is performed means that at least one of the first start reserve memory number RaN and the second start reserve memory number RbN is 1 or greater. In this case, the data setting processing is configured to first determine whether the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," and then perform processing related to the reserve information for the first special symbol if the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," i.e., if there is no reserve information for the second special symbol. Therefore, if reserve information is stored in both the first special symbol reserve area Ra and the second special symbol reserve area Rb, the reserve information for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is processed first.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first in step Se602, the first start hold memory number RaN in the first special symbol holding area Ra is decremented by 1. In step Se603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Se604, the data stored in the first area of the first special symbol holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Se605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra. This process clears the data in the first area and sequentially moves the data in the second to fourth areas to the lower areas.

In step Se606, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second special symbol flag is used by MPU 312 to determine whether there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If a second special symbol flag is stored, the second special symbol flag is cleared in step Se607.

After step Se607 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Se606 (the second special symbol flag is not stored), proceed to step Se608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first special symbol reserved area Ra, i.e., information that it corresponds to the first actuation port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Se608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of normal processing (Fig. 379). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first pending display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of pending items.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step Se609, the second start hold memory number RbN in the second special symbol holding area Rb is decremented by 1. In step Se610, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Se611, the data stored in the first area of the second special symbol holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Se612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb. In step Se613, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Se614.

After step Se614 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Se613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), proceed to step Se615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information that causes the sub-control device, the performance control device 143, to recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that was the target of this data shift corresponds to the second special symbol reserved area Rb, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second actuation port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Se615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of normal processing (Fig. 379). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second hold display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 382.

First, in step Se701, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table corresponding to the current game state. Specifically, if the current lottery mode is low probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for low probability mode (Figure 372 (a)), and if the current lottery mode is high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referencing the win/loss table for high probability mode (Figure 372 (b)). In this step, a determination is made as to whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the random number for a jackpot in the win/loss table being referenced.

In step Se702, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Se701 is a hit or miss jackpot. If a hit or miss jackpot is determined, in step Se703, the corresponding jackpot type table is referenced to determine the jackpot type (a lottery for the jackpot type). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the first special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Fig. 373(a)). If the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the second special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Fig. 373(b)). For example, if the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to one of the numerical ranges: a 10R special symbol jackpot result, a 7R special symbol jackpot result, a 3R special symbol jackpot result, a 7R regular jackpot result, or a 3R regular jackpot result.

In step Se704, a jackpot type flag corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Se703 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected jackpot type is a 10R special jackpot result, the 10R special jackpot flag is set.

In step Se705, the stop result for a jackpot (jackpot pattern) is set by referencing the stop result table for a jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Here, the stop result table for a jackpot will be explained with reference to Figures 383 and 384(a).

The stop result tables for jackpots include a first special symbol stop result table for jackpots (Fig. 384(a)) and a second special symbol stop result table for jackpots (Fig. 383). The first special symbol stop result table for jackpots is referenced when a jackpot is determined by a win/lose lottery based on winning the first operating port 62, and corresponds to the first special symbol. On the other hand, the second special symbol stop result table for jackpots is referenced when a jackpot is determined by a win/lose lottery based on winning the second operating port 63, and corresponds to the second special symbol.

First, we will explain the second special symbol stop result table for jackpots. As shown in Figure 383, the second special symbol stop result table for jackpots stores multiple stop result data as the stop results of the second special symbol for jackpot results. Specifically, it stores 15 types of stop result data consisting of stop results SD0 to SD14. Each of these stop results SD0 to SD14 is associated with a value of the jackpot type counter C2. For example, stop result SD0 is assigned a value of "0" to "50" on the jackpot type counter C2.

Here, in the jackpot type table for the second special symbol used in the lottery for the jackpot type (Fig. 373 (b)), a 10R variable probability jackpot result is assigned to the jackpot type counter C2 values "0" to "50." The same jackpot type counter C2 (obtained random number) obtained at the same time is used for the lottery for the jackpot symbol using the stop result table and the lottery for the jackpot type using the jackpot type table. Therefore, when a 10R variable probability jackpot result is selected as the jackpot type, stop result SD0 will be selected as the jackpot symbol. Therefore, stop result SD0 can function as a stop result corresponding to the 10R variable probability jackpot result.

As shown in Figure 383, in the second special chart stop result table for jackpots, the values of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated so that stop results SD1 to SD14 other than stop result SD0 also result in stop results corresponding to a 7R special jackpot result, a 3R special jackpot result, a 10R regular jackpot result A-D, a 7R regular jackpot result A-D, and a 3R regular jackpot result A-D, respectively.

As already mentioned, the second special symbol display unit BS is provided with multiple display segments SG1 to SG7 as a means for displaying stop results, and the stop result data is information indicating which of these display segments SG1 to SG7 should be lit and which should be extinguished. The images shown in the "Result Display" column of Figure 383 indicate the images displayed based on the respective stop result data.

For example, when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "0," the stop result data corresponding to the stop result SD0 will light up the display segments SG1, SG6, and SG7, while turning off the display segments SG2 to SG5. Therefore, when the stop result SD0 is set as the stop result, a picture similar to the number "7" is displayed in the second special symbol display section BS.

Each stop result data corresponding to stop results SD0-SD14 has a different combination of lit and unlit display segments, which results in a unique pattern being displayed for each stop result. All jackpot stop results SD0-SD14 are set up so that two or more of the seven display segments SG1-SG7 arranged on the segment display 801 are lit to display a pattern (jackpot pattern).

In Figure 383, the items "Result Display" and "Jackpot Type" are listed to make it easier to understand what image is displayed for each stop result and which jackpot type each stop result (each jackpot pattern) is paired with, but these are not stored in the stop result table.

As shown in Figure 384 (a), the first special symbol stop result table for jackpots stores multiple stop result data as the stop results of the first special symbol for jackpot results. Specifically, five types of stop result data consisting of stop results SD0-SD2, SD10, and SD14 are stored. For these, too, the values of the jackpot type counter C2 are assigned to correspond to the 10R special symbol jackpot result, 7R special symbol jackpot result, 3R special symbol jackpot result, 7R normal jackpot result, and 3R normal jackpot result, respectively, set in the jackpot type table for first special symbols (Figure 373 (a)).

In this embodiment, the stop result data is shared between the jackpot pattern for the first special symbol and the jackpot pattern for the second special symbol. For example, when a 10R probability jackpot result is selected as the jackpot type, stop result SD0 is selected for both the first and second special symbols, and a symbol resembling the number "7" is displayed. However, this is not limited to this, and different stop results may be set, for example, when a 10R probability jackpot result is selected as the jackpot type, the symbols displayed on the first and second special symbols may be different.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 382), in step Se705, it is determined whether the current jackpot was the result of a lottery on the first or second special design, and the stop result table corresponding to this determination result is referenced. Then, in the referenced stop result table, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se702 (if the jackpot has not been won), proceed to step Se706, where it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment in step Se701 is a special loss result. If it is a special loss result, in step Se707, a special loss type flag corresponding to the type of special loss result is set in the various flags storage area 314e. For example, if the type of special loss result is special loss result A, the special loss A flag is set.

In step Se708, the stop result for a special miss (special miss pattern) is set by referring to the stop result table for special misses stored in the stop result table storage area 313d. Here, the stop result table for special misses will be explained with reference to Figure 384 (b).

The stop result table for special misses stores multiple stop result data as stop results for special misses. Specifically, it stores three types of stop result data: stop results SD15 to SD17. Each of these stop results SD15 to SD17 is associated with a value of the jackpot random number counter C1; for example, stop result SD15 is assigned a value of "10" to "13" on the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the special loss type table (Fig. 374(a)) used for the lottery for special loss types, special loss result A is assigned to jackpot random numbers C1 "10" to "13". Therefore, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a special loss result and special loss result A is obtained, stop result SD15 will be selected as the special loss pattern, and stop result SD15 can function as the stop result corresponding to special loss result A.

As shown in Figure 384 (b), in the stop result table for special misses, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 are associated with the other stop results SD16 and SD17 so that they correspond to special miss results B and special miss results C, respectively.

The stop result data corresponding to stop results SD15-SD17 not only differs in the combinations of lit and unlit display segments between those stop results, but also differs from each other for all jackpot stop results SD0-SD14. As a result, stop results SD15-SD17 have different appearances (patterns) when displayed, and the patterns do not overlap with those of jackpot stop results SD0-SD14. All special miss stop results SD15-SD17 are set up so that two or more of the seven display segments SG1-SG7 arranged on the segment display 801 are lit to display a pattern (special miss pattern).

In this embodiment, a special loss result is possible in both the first special symbol winning/losing lottery and the second special symbol winning/losing lottery, but the same stop result table is used in the case of a special loss result in the former lottery and in the case of a special loss result in the latter lottery. In other words, the same special loss symbol is displayed in the case of a special loss result due to a win in the first operating port 62 and the case of a special loss result due to a win in the second operating port 63.

However, this is not limited to this, and a stop result table for a special miss result corresponding to the first special symbol and a stop result table for a special miss result corresponding to the second special symbol may be provided separately, and different stop result tables may be referenced when a special miss result occurs due to a win in the first actuation port 62 and when a special miss result occurs due to a win in the second actuation port 63. In this case, the same special miss symbol may be displayed in both cases, or different special miss symbols may be displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Figure 382), in step Se708, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table for special misses and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se706 (if the result is not a special miss), it means that the result of this win/loss judgment is a normal miss result. In this case, proceed to step Se709, and set the stop result for a normal miss (normal miss pattern) by referring to the stop result table for a normal miss stored in the stop result table memory area 313d. Here, the stop result table for a normal miss will be explained with reference to Figure 385.

The stop result tables for normal misses are the first special symbol stop result table for normal misses (Fig. 385(b)) and the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses (Fig. 385(a)). The first special symbol stop result table for normal misses is referenced when the win/loss lottery based on winning the first operating port 62 results in a normal miss, and the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses is referenced when the win/loss lottery based on winning the second operating port 63 results in a normal miss.

First, we will explain the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses. As shown in Figure 385 (a), the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses stores multiple stop result data as stop results for normal misses. Specifically, two types of stop result data consisting of stop results SD18 and SD19 are stored.

The stop result data corresponding to stop results SD18 and SD19 not only differ in the combinations of lit and unlit display segments between those stop results, but also differ in these combinations for all of the stop results SD0-SD17 for jackpots and special misses. For this reason, stop results SD18 and SD19 have different appearances (images) when displayed, and the images do not overlap with those of the other stop results SD0-SD17.

Stop result SD18 is one in which only the central display segment SG3 of the multiple display segments SG1 to SG7 is lit. In other words, the image displayed is a simple one, with one lit display segment. This makes it easy to distinguish from stop results SD0 to SD14 for jackpots, which have more than one lit display segment and a more complex appearance, and stop results SD15 to SD17 for special misses. On the other hand, stop result SD19 is one in which more than one lit display segment displays an image, making it difficult to distinguish from the above stop results. In other words, stop result SD18 is easy to identify as a normal miss, while stop result SD19 is difficult to identify as a normal miss.

Here, stop result SD19 is set so that at least one of the lit display segments overlaps with stop result SD17, which has the highest selection probability among stop results SD15-SD17 corresponding to the special miss result. In other words, while stop result SD17 lits display segments SG2, SG3, and SG4 and extinguishes the other display segments (Fig. 384(b)), stop result SD19 sets the stop result data so that display segments SG1, SG2, and SG4 are lit and the other display segments are extinguished.

In other words, the display segments SG2 and SG4 that are lit are the same for stop result SD19, which corresponds to a normal miss, and stop result SD17, which corresponds to a special miss. Therefore, the image in stop result SD19 resembles the image that is most likely to be displayed among the three types of images that correspond to special misses.

In the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 are associated with each of the stop results SD18 and SD19. Specifically, "30" to "2977" of the jackpot random number counter C1 correspond to stop result SD18, and "2978" to "2999" of the jackpot random number counter C1 correspond to stop result SD19. In other words, the range of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to stop result SD19 is narrower than the range of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to stop result SD18, and the probability of selecting stop result SD19 is lower than the probability of selecting stop result SD18.

As shown in Figure 385 (b), the first special symbol stop result table for normal misses stores one type of stop result data consisting of stop result SD18 as the stop result for normal misses. In other words, if the first special symbol win/loss lottery results in a normal miss, stop result SD18 is set to be selected regardless of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time.

Returning to the explanation of the variation start process (Fig. 382), in step Se709, it is determined whether the current normal miss result was the result of the lottery for the first or second special design, and the stop result table corresponding to this determination result is referenced. Then, in the referenced stop result table, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is read and set as the stop result for the current game round.

After execution of step Se705, step Se708, or step Se709, step Se710 executes high-frequency support mode update processing to update the number of special symbol game times in high-frequency support mode. Step Se711 executes ceiling time-shortened game state transition determination processing to determine whether a trigger for transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state has occurred. Step Se712 executes sudden time-shortened game state transition determination processing to determine whether a trigger for transition to the sudden time-shortened game state has occurred. Step Se713 executes variable display time setting processing to draw a variable pattern and set the variable display time. Details of steps Se710 to Se713 will be described later.

In step Se714, a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display for a special game play is in progress.

In step Se715, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The fluctuation start command contains information about the fluctuation pattern, and a different fluctuation pattern is set for each game state, and a different fluctuation pattern is also set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, the presentation control device 143 can grasp not only information about the fluctuation display time, but also whether or not there is a jackpot and the current game state. Furthermore, the type command contains information about the jackpot type and the special miss type. The type command is set when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot or a special miss.

In step Se716, the display of the special symbol display unit 43 begins to change. At that time, if the current special symbol game is based on a win in the first operating port 62, the image in the first special symbol display unit AS is displayed in a changing manner, and if it is based on a win in the second operating port 63, the image in the second special symbol display unit BS is displayed in a changing manner. After step Se716 is executed, the change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol play count control process (Fig. 380), after step Se506 is executed, the special symbol play count control process ends. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Se501 (open/close execution mode is in progress), the special symbol play count control process ends without executing the processes from step Se502 onwards. In other words, if the open/close execution mode is in progress, no variable display will be performed on the special symbol display unit 43 even if pending information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se503 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable symbol), the process proceeds to step Se507, where it is determined whether the variable display time for the current special symbol game has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step Se508. In the variable display processing, the display of the special symbol display unit for the current game is controlled (the illumination of each display segment is controlled) so that each display segment in the special symbol display unit for the current game is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After step Se508 is executed, the special symbol game control processing ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se507 (if the variable display time has elapsed), the process proceeds to step Se509, where the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Se510, high frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high frequency support mode. In step Se511, time-shortened game state transition processing is executed. Time-shortened game state transition processing is intended to suddenly transition the game state to a time-shortened game state or a ceiling time-shortened game state. Details of steps Se510 and Se511 will be described later.

In step Se512, the process for starting the final display is executed, and then the special symbol game count control process is terminated. In the process for starting the final display, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to display the image in a stopped state based on the stop result set in step Se705, step Se708, or step Se709. In addition, in step Se512, the final display time for continuing the stopped display is also set.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol), the process proceeds to step Se513, where a process for terminating the fixed symbol display is executed. In the process for terminating the fixed symbol display, it is determined whether the fixed symbol display time set in step Se512 has elapsed, and if so, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to terminate the static symbol display. Note that if there is no next pending information when the fixed symbol display time has elapsed, the static symbol display is controlled to continue as is until a winning entry occurs in the actuation port 62, 63. After step Se513 is completed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

<Game status transition processing>
The game state transition processing of step Se404 (Figure 379) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 386.

First, in step Se901, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not currently in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step Se902, where it is determined whether or not the special symbol game has ended (whether or not the confirmation display on the special symbol display unit 43 has ended). If the special symbol game has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the end of the special symbol game, step Se903 determines whether the game result of this special symbol game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot type flag (step Se704) is stored in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314 to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. If the game result of this special symbol game does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, the game state transition process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se903 (if the result of this special game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Se904, where the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, an opening period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if the high probability flag or various support flags described below are set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Se905, the process for starting the round display to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is executed. In this step, the type of jackpot that has occurred is determined based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Se906, the corresponding number of rounds is set. Specifically, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step Se905 above is identified, and a value corresponding to that number of rounds is set in round counter area RC1 provided in various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the current jackpot type is a 10R special jackpot result, "10" is set in round counter area RC1, and if it is a 7R special jackpot result, "7" is set in round counter area RC1.

In step Se907, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the opening. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of normal processing (Figure 379).

In step Se908, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to that management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Se909, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening/closing process is executed in step Se910.

Here, the process for opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 387.

First, in step Se1001, it is determined whether the special prize opening 65a is open. This determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 65d. If the special prize opening 65a is not open, in step Se1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Se1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process determines whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value in timer area T1 is "0," proceed to step Se1004, where "15000" is set in timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 376) is activated. In step Se1005, "10" is set in winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter area 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Se1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Se1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Figure 379).

If a positive judgment is made in step Se1002 (the value in the round counter area RC1 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Se1003 (the value in the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Se1008, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T1 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Se1004 has elapsed.

If the value in timer area T1 is not "0," proceed to step Se1009, where a determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value in prize counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Se1010, and then a determination is made as to whether or not the value in prize counter area PC1 is "0" in step Se1011. If the value in prize counter area PC1 is not "0," the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se1008 (if the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or if a positive judgment is made in step Se1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Se1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Se1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Se1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Se1015 and set "1000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the period (2 seconds) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Se1016, a close command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Figure 379).

If step Se1014 returns a positive result (the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), i.e., if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Se1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed and awaits the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Se1018, an ending command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal process (Fig. 379).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 386), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Se910, step Se911 determines whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," the game state transition process is terminated immediately to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", proceed to step Se912 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, proceed to step Se913 to execute the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 388.

First, in step Se1101, the jackpot type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot result. If it is a variable probability jackpot result, in step Se1102, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to high probability mode.

In step Se1103, the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The Support A flag corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode. By setting the Support A flag, the internal state corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode.

In step Se1104, a high probability start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability start command set in step Se1104 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Fig. 379). By sending the high probability start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the transition to a high probability game state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

If a negative judgment is made in step Se1101 (the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Se1105, where the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes the game to transition to the normal time-saving game state.

In addition, there are 17 types of Support A flags set as normal jackpot results: two types corresponding to the 7R normal jackpot result and the 3R normal jackpot result corresponding to the first special design, and 15 types of 10R normal jackpot result A to 3R normal jackpot result D corresponding to the second special design. In response to this, 17 types of flags, Support A1 flag to Support A17 flag, are set. For example, if the normal jackpot result this time is a 7R normal jackpot result on the first special design, the Support A1 flag will be set as the Support A flag.

In step Se1106, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the current jackpot result is set. For example, if the current jackpot result is 10R normal jackpot result A, the support counter area SC in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to, for example, "3000." If the current jackpot result is 10R normal jackpot result B, the support counter area SC is set to, for example, "300." If the current jackpot result is 10R normal jackpot result C, the support counter area SC is set to, for example, "200." If the current jackpot result is 10R normal jackpot result D, the support counter area SC is set to, for example, "100." The support counter area SC is used by MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of special symbol game times that can be played in high-frequency support mode), and is decremented by one each time a special symbol game is played in high-frequency support mode.

In step Se1107, a normal time-saving start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The normal time-saving start command set in step Se1107 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Fig. 379). By sending the normal time-saving start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the transition to the normal time-saving game state (low probability mode and first high-frequency support mode). Note that the normal time-saving start command includes information indicating the type of normal time-saving game state to be transitioned to, as well as information indicating its upper limit number of times.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Fig. 386), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Se913 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Se914. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Se915, the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, and then the game state transition process is terminated. The opening and closing execution mode termination process executes a process to erase the type flag and opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e.

Next, we will explain the high-frequency support mode update process in step Se710, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state in step Se711, and the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state in step Se712. These processes are executed during the fluctuation start process (Fig. 382), or in other words, when the fluctuation display starts during a special game round.

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The frequently supported mode update process of step Se710 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Se1201, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the Support A flag, Support B flag, and Support C flag are set. The Support A flag corresponds to the normal time-shortened game state, the Support B flag corresponds to the ceiling time-shortened game state, and the Support C flag corresponds to the sudden time-shortened game state.

If any support flag is set, i.e., if the high-frequency support mode is in effect, proceed to step Se1202, where it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, in step Se1203, the value of the support counter area SC in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state (the remaining number of times that the player can stay in the time-saving play state).

In step Se1204, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0." If the value of the support counter area SC is "0," that is, if the number of times play has been performed in the time-shortened game state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Se1205, where a time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The time-shortened end flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine when each time-shortened game state should be ended.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Se1202 (the result of this special drawing is a jackpot), the processing of steps Se1203 and Se1204 is skipped and the processing of step Se1205 is executed. In other words, if a jackpot result is reached during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is ended regardless of the number of remaining plays.

After step Se1205 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step Se1201 (if none of the support flags are set), the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes from step Se1202 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Se1204 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), the time-saving play state should not be ended, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process of step Se1205.

<Processing for determining transition to ceiling time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining transition to the ceiling time-shortened gaming state in step Se711 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 390.

First, in step Se1301, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Se1302, where it is determined whether the "reached" flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The "reached" flag is used by MPU 312 to determine whether the number of losing plays has reached the ceiling number of times.

If the reached flag is not set, step Se1303 determines whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, proceed to step Se1304 and update the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1. The miss count counter area HC is used by the MPU 312 to determine the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reached.

In step Se1305, it is determined whether the value in the loss counter area HC is "0." If the value in the loss counter area HC is "0," i.e., if the number of loss plays has reached the ceiling, the process proceeds to step Se1306, where an "reached" flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Se1307, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. In other words, it is determined whether the game is currently in either the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state.

If none of the support flags are set and the current game state is not a time-saving game state, this means that the number of misses has reached the ceiling number in a normal game state. In this case, proceed to step Se1308 and set a ceiling time-saving start flag in the various flag storage area 314e. The ceiling time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to a ceiling time-saving game state is required.

If step Se1307 returns a negative result (if any support flag is set), this means that the number of misses has reached the ceiling while the player is in the time-saving game state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Se1309, where priority processing is executed to select whether the player is to take priority in the time-saving game state they are currently in or in the ceiling time-saving game state. Details of step Se1309 will be described later.

After step Se1308 or step Se1309 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is terminated. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Se1302 (if the reached flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Se1303 (if the high probability flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Se1304 onwards. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Se1305 (if the value of the miss counter area HC is not "0"), the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Se1306 onwards.

If step Se1301 returns a positive result (a jackpot), the process proceeds to step Se1310, where a value corresponding to the ceiling count (e.g., 990) is set in the counter area HC. In step Se1311, the process determines whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the reached flag is set, step Se1312 executes a process to clear the reached flag. After step Se1312 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Se1311 (if the reached flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling-limited time-saving gaming state is terminated.

<Priority Processing>
The priority processing in step Se1309 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Se1401, it is determined whether a time-saving end flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In other words, it is determined whether the current special game play is the final game play in the current time-saving game state (stay time-saving).

If the time-saving end flag is not set, this means that while in the time-saving play state, the number of loss plays in the special symbol play before the final play has reached the upper limit. In this case, proceed to step Se1402, and determine the remaining number of times during the time-saving stay (the remaining number of special symbol play plays during which the player can remain in the time-saving play state). This determination is made by referring to the value of the loss counter area HC in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314.

In step Se1403, the upper limit number of times in the ceiling time-saving game state (the current upper limit number of times) is determined. In this step, the upper limit number is determined to be 990 times.

In step Se1404, the remaining number of times for time-saving play determined in step Se1402 is compared with the current upper limit number of times determined in step Se1403, and it is determined whether the latter is greater than the former. If the current upper limit number of times (the upper limit number of times for the time-saving ceiling play state) is greater than the remaining number of times for time-saving play, that is, if transitioning to the time-saving ceiling play state would increase the remaining number of times for time-saving play state, it is recognized that transitioning to the time-saving ceiling play state should be prioritized over continuing the time-saving play state.

In this case, in step Se1405, a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e to end the current time-saving game state. In the following step Se1406, a ceiling time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state (the current time-saving game state), and then priority processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se1404 (the current upper limit is equal to or less than the remaining number of times for the time-saving mode), it is recognized that the continuation of the time-saving mode should be prioritized over transitioning to the ceiling time-saving mode. In this case, the priority processing ends without executing the processing of steps Se1405 and Se1406.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Se1401 (the time-saving end flag is set), this means that the current special symbol play round is the final play round of the time-saving stay round, and the end of this special symbol play round will mark the end of the time-saving stay round. In this case, steps Se1402 to Se1405 are skipped and the process proceeds to step Se1406, where the ceiling time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e to transition to the ceiling time-saving play state.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state in step Se712 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 392.

First, in step Se1501, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special loss result. Specifically, it is determined whether a special loss type flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special loss type flag is set (step Se707) if the result of the win/loss determination in step Se701 (Figure 382) is determined to be a special loss result.

If the result of the special drawing lottery is not a special miss (the special miss type flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving game state is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Se1502, where it is determined whether the ceiling time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the ceiling time-saving start flag is set, it means that the current special symbol play is the one that reached the ceiling number of times. In other words, it means that the number of miss plays reached the ceiling number of times and the special miss result was won in the same special symbol play. In this case, in order to prioritize the transition to the ceiling time-saving play state, the system will not suddenly transition to the time-saving play state and will simply end the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving play state.

In the event that there is a conflict between transitioning to the ceiling time-limited play state and transitioning to the sudden time-limited play state, the former will be given priority for the following reasons:

The ceiling-limit time-shortened game state is entered based on the cumulative number of losing game plays, so a characteristic of the state is that the player can predict the transition to the ceiling-limit time-shortened game state before the number of losing game plays reaches the ceiling number (before the transition trigger is established). On the other hand, the sudden time-shortened game state is entered when a special losing result is won, and the transition is based on conditions that are established within a single game play, so the player cannot predict the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state before the transition trigger is established. For these reasons, in cases where the transition trigger to the ceiling-limit time-shortened game state and the transition trigger to the sudden time-shortened game state are established simultaneously, leaving the player with no choice but to choose one of the time-shortened game states, the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state can be adjusted without the player noticing, by restricting the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state and prioritizing the transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se1502 (the ceiling time-saving start flag is not set), step Se1503 determines whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If no support flags are set, that is, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, step Se1504 sets a sudden time-saving start flag in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to the time-saving gaming state should occur. After step Se1504 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving gaming state is terminated.

If step Se1503 returns a positive result (if any support flag is set), it means that the current game state is a time-saving game state, and a special miss result occurred while the player was in the time-saving game state. In this case, step Se1505 executes a priority process to select whether to prioritize the current time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, and then terminates the process for determining whether the player is in the sudden time-saving game state.

The priority processing in step Se1505 is essentially the same as the priority processing (Fig. 391) in step Se1309 (Fig. 390). To explain with reference to Fig. 391, in step Se1401, it is determined whether a time-saving end flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the time-saving end flag has not been set, that is, if a special miss result occurred in the special symbol play round prior to the final play round while the player is in the time-saving play state, the process proceeds to step Se1402, where the remaining number of times the player can remain in the time-saving play state (the remaining number of special symbol play rounds during which the player can remain in the time-saving play state) is determined.

In step Se1403, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of the current special failure result (current upper limit number of times) is determined. This is determined by referring to the special failure type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e described above to identify the type of the current special failure result, and deriving the type of the current sudden time-saving game state based on that identification. For example, if the set special failure type flag corresponds to special failure result A, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state A (e.g., 200 times) is determined to be the current upper limit number of times.

In step Se1404, the remaining number of times for the time-saving mode determined in step Se1402 is compared with the current upper limit number of times determined in step Se1403, and it is determined whether the latter is greater than the former. If the current upper limit number of times (the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result) is greater than the remaining number of times for the time-saving mode, that is, if the sudden transition to the time-saving game state would increase the remaining number of times for the time-saving game state, it is recognized that the transition to the sudden time-saving game state should be prioritized over continuing the time-saving mode.

In this case, in step Se1405, a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e to end the current time-saving game state. In the following step Se1406, a time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e to suddenly transition to a time-saving game state (the current time-saving game state).

If a negative judgment is made in step Se1404 (the current upper limit is equal to or less than the remaining number of times for time-saving play), it is recognized that continuation of time-saving play should be prioritized over a sudden transition to time-saving play. In this case, the priority processing ends without executing the processing of steps Se1405 and Se1406.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process of step Se713 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 393.

First, in step Se1601, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability flag or the various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and based on the result, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability game state, the normal time-limited game state, the sudden time-limited game state, or the ceiling time-limited game state. In this step, if the high probability flag and the support A flag are set, it is determined to be the high probability game state; if only the support A flag is set, it is determined to be the normal time-limited game state; if the support B flag is set, it is determined to be the ceiling time-limited game state; and if the support C flag is set, it is determined to be the sudden time-limited game state.

In step Se1602, it is determined whether the game state determined in step Se1601 is a normal game state. If it is a normal game state, the process proceeds to step Se1603, where a variable display time table for the normal game state is obtained. The variable display time table is used to select a variable display time (variation pattern) based on the value of the variation type counter CS.

Here, the variable display time table for normal game mode will be explained with reference to Figure 394. The variable display time table for normal game mode includes a variable display time table for jackpots (Figure 394(a)), a variable display time table for special misses (Figure 394(b)), and a variable display time table for normal misses (Figure 394(c)). In each variable display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS is set in correspondence with fluctuation pattern information.

The variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to normal game mode is referenced when a jackpot occurs during a special symbol game during normal game mode. As shown in Figure 394(a), this variable display time table sets variable pattern 1A (15 seconds), variable pattern 2A (60 seconds), and variable pattern 3A (120 seconds) as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern is set as the variable display time of the image in the first special symbol display section AS or second special symbol display section BS.

In addition, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. The display control device 350 is then controlled so that the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is synchronized with the variation display of the patterns on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS, and is displayed on the symbol display device 75.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to game-round effects such as reach effects performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning effect, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning effect, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning effect. In other words, when the effect control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game-round effect corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects described above, after a reach-winning display is made, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, reach-winning display (reach state) refers to a display state intended to make the player believe that the state is likely to result in a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the changing display is a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of changing (or variable) displaying symbols (pictures), between the start of the changing (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, this is a display state in which symbols in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are displayed as still symbols, thereby displaying a reach symbol combination that has the potential to form a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the display of varying symbols is terminated, when the symbols in the final symbol row are displayed as varying symbols, a reach line is formed by displaying symbols in symbol rows other than the final symbol row as still symbols on an active line on the display screen G in a manner that forms a jackpot symbol combination.

A normal reach hit effect is one in which the above-mentioned reach display is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. An SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than a normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after the reach line is formed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols in a jackpot symbol combination are displayed. An SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than an SP reach effect, in which a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the items in the "Notes (Display Mode)" column in Figure 394 (a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

The variable display time table for special misses that corresponds to the normal game state is referenced when a special miss occurs during a special game play in the normal game state. As shown in Figure 394 (b), this variable display time table for special misses sets variable pattern Z1 (15 seconds) as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, variable pattern Z1 is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. As already explained, a special miss results in a sudden transition to the time-saving game state.

Fluctuating pattern Z1 corresponds to the special reach miss A effect, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect as a game-time effect. Here, the special reach miss A effect will be explained with reference to Figure 395.

In the special reach miss A presentation, first, as shown in Figure 395(a), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed as a reach combination on one of the active lines L1-L5 on the display screen G, and the reach display is executed. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row that stops last) is switched from a high-speed change display to a slow-speed change display. At this time, as shown in Figure 395(b), a slow-speed change display is executed with a special symbol 811 labeled, for example, "LUCKY," placed in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. This allows the player to recognize the presence of the special symbol 811. Note that Figure 395(b) shows an example in which the special symbol 811 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol that is next to the "3" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Next, as shown in Figure 395(c), the slowly fluctuating special symbol 811 is displayed stopped on the reach line. In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination where the special symbol 811 of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line is a symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss result, and this notifies the player that a special miss result has occurred.

The variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to normal game mode is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a special symbol game during normal game mode. As shown in Figure 394 (c), this variable display time table sets variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 seconds), variable pattern 3H (60 seconds), and variable pattern 4H (120 seconds) as selectable variable patterns. Similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, a variable display time is set for each variable pattern, but the variable display time for variable pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special symbols at that time. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are two or fewer reserved symbols, the variable display time is 8 seconds; if variable pattern 1H is selected when there are three or more reserved symbols, the variable display time is set to 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss effect on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss effect, variation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach miss effect, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to an SPSP reach miss effect.

A complete miss effect is one in which no reach display is made and symbols are displayed in a miss symbol combination. Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects is one in which, after a reach display is made, the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reach miss symbol combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot when combined with the reach symbols). Furthermore, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect similar to the SP reach hit effect is made, a conclusion video corresponding to a miss is displayed, and symbols are displayed in a reach miss symbol combination. Furthermore, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for normal misses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "98" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the win/loss lottery based on the entry into actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/loss lottery is a regular miss, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a regular miss, and therefore functions as the highest level reach effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to higher-ranking reach effects are more likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and less likely to be selected in the event of a normal miss. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 394 (c), in the variation display time table for normal misses, which corresponds to the normal game state, variation pattern Z2 is set as a selectable variation pattern. Variation pattern Z2 is selected when the value of the variation type counter is "99".

Fluctuation pattern Z2 corresponds to the special reach miss B effect, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z2 is sent to the effect control device 143, the effect control device 143 controls the symbol display device 75 to execute the special reach miss B effect. The special reach miss B effect is a so-called false effect that is paired with the special reach miss A effect, and it builds up anticipation for a special miss and then stops and displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination.

In the special reach miss B effect, as shown in Figures 395(a) and (b), after a reach display is executed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving state, including the special pattern 711. In other words, the pattern change effect is executed up to the middle in the same manner as the special reach miss A effect. After that, for example, the special pattern 711 passes over the reach line, and a pattern different from the special pattern 711 in the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line, as shown in Figure 395(d). In other words, while it appears as if the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result is formed, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in such a way that the combination is ultimately not formed.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 393), in step Se1603, from the various variable display time tables for the normal game state, one that corresponds to the result of the current special symbol hit/miss determination (step Se702) is obtained. Specifically, if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a jackpot result, the variable display time table for the jackpot is obtained; if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a special miss result, the variable display time table for the special miss is obtained; and if the result of this special symbol hit/miss determination is a normal miss result, the variable display time table for the normal miss is obtained.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se1602 (if the game is not in a normal game state), the process proceeds to step Se1604, where it is determined whether the current game state determined in step Se1601 is a high probability game state. If it is a high probability game state, the variable display time table for the high probability game state is obtained in step Se1605.

The variable display time table for the high probability game state will be explained with reference to Figure 396. The variable display time table for the high probability game state includes a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 396(a)) and a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 396(b)).

The variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to a high probability game state is referenced when a jackpot is achieved during a special game while in a high probability game state. As shown in Figure 396 (a), this variable display time table has variable pattern 11A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit and variable pattern 12A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

The variable display time table for normal misses that corresponds to high probability gameplay is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a special game play in high probability gameplay. As shown in Figure 396 (b), this variable display time table sets the following selectable variable patterns: variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss. In the variable display time table for normal misses in high probability gameplay, the range of the variable type counter CS that corresponds to a complete miss is wider than in the variable display time table for normal misses in normal gameplay. In other words, the reach miss effect is less likely to occur, allowing gameplay to progress more quickly.

In addition, the variable display time for variable pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is shortened earlier than the variable display time table for normal misses in normal gameplay. Specifically, it is configured to be 8 seconds when there is one or fewer reserved items, and 4 seconds when there are two or more reserved items.

In step Se1605, the variable display time table for the high probability game state is obtained from the various variable display time tables for the high probability game state that corresponds to the result of this special symbol win/loss judgment. Note that, since the win/loss table for the high probability game state does not have a special loss result set (Figure 372 (b)), the variable display time table for the high probability game state does not have a setting that corresponds to the special loss result set either.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, ceiling time-saving game state, or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, a variable display time table for the time-saving game state is obtained in step Se1606.

The variable display time table for the time-saving game mode will be explained with reference to Figure 397. The variable display time table for the time-saving game mode includes a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 397(a)), a variable display time table for a special miss (Figure 397(b)), a variable display time table A for a normal miss (Figure 397(c)), and a variable display time table B for a normal miss (Figure 397(d)).

The variable display time table for jackpots corresponding to the time-saving game mode is referenced when a jackpot results in a special game round during the time-saving game mode. As shown in Figure 397(a), this variable display time table has three selectable variable patterns: variable pattern 21A (15 seconds) corresponding to a normal reach hit, variable pattern 22A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit, and variable pattern 23A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit.

The variable display time table for special misses corresponding to the time-shortened game state is referenced when a special miss occurs during a special game turn in the time-shortened game state. As shown in Figure 397 (b), this variable display time table is configured so that the variable pattern selection manner differs depending on whether or not there is a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state. Specifically, if there is a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state, variable pattern W1 (15 sec) is selected, and if there is no sudden transition to the time-shortened game state, variable pattern W2 (15 sec) is selected.

Fluctuation pattern W1 corresponds to the special reach miss A effect, and fluctuation pattern W2 corresponds to the special reach miss A effect and the special reach miss B effect. When a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern W2 is sent, the effect control device 143 selects and executes either the special reach miss A effect or the special reach miss B effect. The configuration for selecting and executing the special reach miss A effect or the special reach miss B effect will be explained in detail later.

The variable display time table A for normal misses corresponding to the time-saving game state is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a special symbol game turn during the time-saving game state, and stop result SD18 (Fig. 385 (a)) is selected as the stop result on the special symbol display unit 43. As shown in Fig. 397 (c), this variable display time table A has set as selectable variable patterns variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 22H (15 sec) corresponding to a normal reach miss, variable pattern 23H (60 sec) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 24H (120 sec) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss.

In variable display time table A for normal misses in the time-saving game state, the rate of complete misses is lower than in the variable display time table for normal misses in the normal game state. This is because increasing the frequency of reach effects prevents the time-saving game state from ending without a reach effect occurring. Note that the variable display time for variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss is configured to be 8 seconds when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, and 4 seconds when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, just like in the variable display time table for normal misses in the high-probability game state.

The variable display time table B for normal misses corresponding to the time-saving game state is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a special symbol game turn during the time-saving game state and stop result SD19 (Fig. 385(a)) is selected as the stop result on the special symbol display unit 43. As shown in Fig. 397(d), variable pattern W3 (15 sec) corresponding to special reach miss A effect, special reach miss B effect, and normal reach miss is set as a selectable variable pattern. Variable pattern W3 corresponds to three types of reach miss effects: special reach miss A effect, special reach miss B effect, and normal reach miss. When variable pattern W3 is transmitted, the effect control device 143 selects and executes one of the special reach miss A effect, special reach miss B effect, and normal reach miss. The configuration for selecting and executing each of these reach miss effects will be explained in detail later.

In this embodiment, a common variable display time table is set for the normal time-saving game state, ceiling time-saving game state, and sudden time-saving game state, but a configuration in which a separate variable display time table is set for each of these time-saving game states is also possible. Furthermore, the variable display time tables shown in Figures 394, 396, and 397 are merely examples, and the number of types of variable patterns and the numerical range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to each variable pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 393), in step Se1606, the variable display time table for the time-saving game state that corresponds to the situation at that time is obtained from the various tables. Specifically, the result of the current special symbol hit/miss determination and whether or not there will be a sudden transition to the time-saving game state based on that result are referenced, and the table corresponding to these is obtained.

After step Se1603, step Se1605, or step Se1606 is executed, step Se1607 uses the fluctuation display time table obtained in each of those steps to execute a lottery process for the fluctuation display time (fluctuation pattern). Specifically, from the group of fluctuation patterns set in the fluctuation display time table, one fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Se1608, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Se1607 above is set as the variable display time for the current special game. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area above as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 376) is started.

In step Se1609, it is determined whether a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, the process proceeds to step Se1610, where the process clears the flag. After step Se1610 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step Se1609 (the special miss flag is not set), the process of setting the variable display time is terminated.

Next, we will explain the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step Se510 (Fig. 380) and the process for transitioning to the time-saving game state in step Se511. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed during a special game round; in other words, they are executed when the final display during a special game round begins.

<Processing for ending high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode termination process in step Se510 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Se1701, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any support flags are set, that is, if the player is currently in the normal time-shortened game state, the ceiling time-shortened game state, or the sudden time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step Se1702, where it is determined whether a time-shortened game end flag is set. The time-shortened game end flag indicates that the time-shortened game state should be ended, and is set in cases such as when the current special game play is the upper limit number of times (final game play) in the time-shortened game state, or when it is determined during priority processing (step Se1309, step Se1505) that the time-shortened game state should be ended and a transition to the sudden time-shortened game state should be executed.

If the time-saving end flag is set, proceed to step Sec1703 and clear the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. This ends the current time-saving game state. In other words, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state is terminated at the start of the confirmation display of the special game round for which the conditions for terminating the time-saving game state have been met.

In step Se1704, the time-saving end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Se1705, a corresponding time-saving game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. For example, if the normal time-saving game state is ended, a time-saving game state end command corresponding to the end of the normal game state is set.

After step Se1705 is executed, the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Se1701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Se1702 (if the time-saving termination flag is not set), the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Se1703 onwards.

<Processing for transition to time-limited gaming state>
The process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state in step Se511 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 399.

First, in step Se1801, it is determined whether a ceiling time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The ceiling time-saving start flag is set during the transition determination process of step Se711 at the start of fluctuation (step Se1308, step Se1406), and indicates that a transition to the ceiling time-saving game state should be made.

If the ceiling time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation calls for transitioning to the ceiling time-saving game state, proceed to step Se1802 and set the Support B flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to the ceiling time-saving game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se1801 (the ceiling time-saving start flag is not set), proceed to step Se1803, where it is determined whether or not a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is set in the transition judgment process of step Se712 at the start of fluctuation (step Se1504, step Se1406), and indicates that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should be made.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, that is, if the situation dictates a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, proceed to step Se1804 and set the support C flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes a sudden transition to the time-saving game state. Note that the support C flag has three types of flags set, the support C1 flag to the support C3 flag, corresponding to the three types of sudden time-saving game states set, sudden time-saving game state A to sudden time-saving game state C. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A (if the type of special miss result this time is special miss result A), the support C1 flag is set as the support C flag.

After execution of step Se1802 or step Se1804, in step Se1805, the upper limit number of plays corresponding to the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of plays is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is a ceiling time-shortened game state, 1100 is set as the value corresponding to the upper limit number of plays, and if the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-shortened game state A, 200 is set as the value corresponding to the upper limit number of plays. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of plays in the time-shortened game state.

In step Se1806, the time-saving start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Se1807, a time-saving start command corresponding to the time-saving game state to be transitioned to is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. For example, if the time-saving game state to be transitioned to is a ceiling time-saving game state, a ceiling time-saving start command is set, and if the time-saving game state to be transitioned to is a sudden time-saving game state, a sudden time-saving start command is set.

Each time-saving start command set in step Se1807 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Se401 during normal processing (Fig. 379). By sending these time-saving start commands, a transition to a ceiling time-saving game state or a sudden time-saving game state is notified. Each time-saving start command includes information indicating the type of time-saving game state to transition to, as well as information indicating the maximum number of times it can be played.

After step Se1807 is executed, the process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Se1803 (the sudden time-shortened start flag is not set), the transition to the time-shortened game state is not executed, and the process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is terminated.

<Regular game play control processing>
The normal game play control processing of step Se405 (Figure 379) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 400.

First, in step Se2001, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game using the normal power feature 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special feature opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a special feature opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a special feature opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel device is currently opening and closing, the normal game play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel device is not currently opening and closing, step Se2002 determines whether a normal game play is being performed in the normal game display unit 44. In this case, a normal game play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal game display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal game display unit 44, and step Se2002 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

Note that during special symbol game times in the special symbol display unit 43, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress, but during normal symbol game times, variable displays are permitted even during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, during normal symbol game times, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the device is being opened/closed using the normal electric device 63a, but during special symbol game times, variable displays are permitted even during the device is being opened/closed. Also, normal symbol game times can be started while special symbol game times are being executed, and special symbol game times can be started while normal symbol game times are being executed. In other words, these game times can be executed in parallel. However, because they are not linked and are executed and controlled independently of each other, normal symbol game times and special symbol game times are executed asynchronously.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se2002 (a normal game round is not currently being played), the process proceeds to step Se2003, where it is determined whether the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0." If the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0," the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved normal maps FN is not "0", step Se2004 executes a normal map data setting process to set the data stored in the electric utility reserve area Rc for variable display. In the normal map data setting process, the number of reserved normal maps FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric utility reserve area Rc is moved to the normal map execution area. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the electric utility reserve area Rc, and a normal map shift command is set, which is information that allows the performance control device 143 to recognize that a shift has been made in the data in the reserve area on the normal map side.

In step Se2005, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the normal map game play control process is terminated. Here, the normal map fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 401 (a).

First, in step Se2101, a support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table corresponding to the current support mode. Specifically, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (Figure 375(a)); if the current support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode (Figure 375(b)); and if the current support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode (Figure 375(c)).

In step Se2102, it is determined whether the result of the support lottery in step Se2101 is a support winning result (a normal winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Se2103, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal winning result. If it is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a normal losing result, the process proceeds to step Se2104, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal losing result.

After step Se2103 or step Se2104 is executed, step Se2105 executes a process for setting the normal map variable display time. This setting process sets the variable display time for the current normal map game in the normal map display unit 44.

In this embodiment, the variable display time that can be set in step Se2105 is a plurality of variable display times of different lengths depending on the type of game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 401(b), the longest first variable display time (e.g., 100 seconds) is set for the normal game state (low frequency support mode), a second variable display time (e.g., 2 seconds) that is shorter than the first variable display time is set for the normal time-saving game state, a third variable display time (e.g., 1 second) that is shorter than the second variable display time is set for the ceiling time-saving game state, and a fourth variable display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) that is shorter than the third variable display time is set for the sudden time-saving game state. In step Se2105, the variable display time corresponding to the current game state is set as the current variable display time.

In the above configuration, one variable display time is associated with each game state, but multiple variable display times may be associated with at least one of the game states. In this case, if the order of length of the variable display time between game states is determined as described above, the length of the variable display time and the selection probability can be set so that the expected value of the variable display time in each game state (the sum of the variable display time x the selection probability of that variable display time) satisfies the above-mentioned length relationship.

In step Se2106, a normal map change start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map change start command includes information on the normal map change pattern (information indicating the normal map pass/fail result and the change display time). The set normal map change start command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 in normal processing (Figure 379).

In step Se2107, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image on the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal game play control process (Fig. 400), if a positive judgment is made in step Se2002 (if a normal game play is being executed), the process proceeds to step Se2006, where it is determined whether the variable display time set in step Se2105 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Se2007, where the variable display process is executed. In the variable display process, the display of the normal game display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal game display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. The normal game play control process then ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se2006 (the variable display time has elapsed), the process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Se2008, and then the process for controlling the normal map game is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled so that the image is displayed as a stopped image based on the stop result set in step Se2103 or step Se2104. At that time, the confirmed display time is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In addition, in the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, a normal map variable end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map variable end command includes information about the confirmed display time for this normal map game.

In this embodiment, the same fixed display time is set regardless of the current game state, but it is also possible to set a fixed display time of different lengths depending on the game state. For example, the fixed display time in the normal game state may be set to be longer than the fixed display time in each time-saving game state.

<Electrical support treatment>
The electric role support process of step Se406 (Fig. 379) will be explained. The electric role support process is a process for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 63a. In this embodiment, multiple types of role opening and closing games are set as the role opening and closing games. First, these role opening and closing games will be explained with reference to Fig. 402.

The available opening and closing feature games are a low prize feature opening and closing game (Fig. 402(a)), a first high prize feature opening and closing game (Fig. 402(b)), a second high prize feature opening and closing game (Fig. 402(c)), and a third high prize feature opening and closing game (Fig. 402(d)).

A low-prize opening/closing device game is executed when the result of the support lottery during normal game play results in a support win. In a low-prize opening/closing device game, the opening period of the normal electric device 63a is shorter than in other device opening/closing devices, and the winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 is lower than in other device opening/closing devices.

The specific form of the low-prize opening and closing feature game is not particularly limited, but it can be set, for example, to have a relatively long opening and ending period, and a relatively short opening period. The opening is the period after the start of the feature opening and closing game in which the normal power feature 63a is closed and the player waits for the first opening of the normal power feature 63a. The ending is the period after the final opening of the normal power feature 63a in which the player waits for the feature opening and closing game to end in which the normal power feature 63a is closed.

For example, as shown in Figure 402(a), a low-prize opening/closing game is configured such that the number of times the normal power device 63a is opened (number of opening/closing controls) is set to one, and a 5-second opening, a 0.1-second opening, and a 5-second ending are performed in that order. In this case, because the opening period of the normal power device 63a is shorter than the game ball launch cycle (0.6 seconds), it is difficult for a ball to win at the second operating port 63. Furthermore, because the opening and ending periods are long and the opening period accounts for a small proportion of the overall period of the device opening/closing game, it is also difficult to win at the second operating port 63.

The first high-prize feature opening/closing game is executed when the support lottery results in a support win while in a high-probability game state or a normal time-saving game state. In the first high-prize feature opening/closing game, the opening period of the normal electric feature 63a is longer than in the low-prize feature opening/closing game, and the winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 is higher than in the low-prize feature opening/closing game.

The specific form of the first high-prize device opening/closing game is not particularly limited, but it can be set, for example, to a form having a relatively short opening and ending period and a relatively long opening period. For example, as shown in Figure 402 (b), the normal power device 63a is set to open once, and is configured to have a 0.5-second opening, a 2-second opening, and a 0.5-second ending, in that order. In this case, because the opening period of the normal power device 63a is longer than the game ball launch cycle, winning at the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur. Furthermore, because the opening and ending periods are short and the opening period accounts for a large proportion of the overall period of the device opening/closing game, winning at the second operating port 63 is also made easier.

The second high prize device opening/closing game is executed when the result of the support lottery is a support win during the ceiling time-saving game state. Like the first high prize device opening/closing game, the second high prize device opening/closing game has a longer opening period for the normal electric device 63a than the low prize device opening/closing game, allowing the player to expect a win in the second operating port 63.

However, compared to the first high-prize opening and closing feature game, the opening period, opening period, and ending period of the regular power feature 63a are different, and it is different from the feature opening and closing game that is executed in the high-probability game state or the normal time-limited game state. The specific form of the second high-prize opening and closing feature game is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in Figure 402 (c), the regular power feature 63a is set to open once, and it is configured to have a 0.1-second opening, a 2-second opening, and a 0.1-second ending, in that order.

The third high prize device opening/closing game is executed when the result of the support lottery is a support win during a sudden time-saving game state. Like the first and second high prize device opening/closing games, the third high prize device opening/closing game has a longer opening period for the normal electric device 63a than the low prize device opening/closing game, allowing the player to expect a win in the second operating port 63.

However, compared to the first and second high-prize opening and closing games, the number of times the normal power device 63a opens is different, and the type of opening and closing game performed in the high-probability game state, normal time-limited game state, and ceiling time-limited game state is different. For example, as shown in FIG. 402(d), the normal power device 63a is set to open twice, and is configured to have a 0.1-second opening, a 0.2-second first opening, a 0.3-second closing, a 2-second second opening, and a 0.1-second ending, in that order. In this case, the opening period for the first opening is shorter than the game ball launch cycle, making it unlikely that the ball will enter the second operating port 63 during that opening. However, the opening period for the second opening is longer than the game ball launch cycle, making it possible to expect the ball to enter the second operating port 63 during that opening.

Next, the flow of the electric support process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 403.

First, in step Se2201, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel opening/closing game is not in progress, proceed to step Se2202 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric reel support processing ends.

If it is the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Se2203 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support win. If it is not a support win, the electric role support processing ends.

If the result is a support win, step Se2204 executes the process to start the reel opening/closing game. During this start process, a reel opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In addition, an opening period is set during which the normal power reel 63a remains closed while waiting for the first opening of the reel 36a.

In this case, the opening period is set to a period corresponding to the game state at the time the support lottery that triggered the opening and closing of the reel is executed. If the game state at the time of the support lottery is a normal game state, for example, 5 seconds is set; if it is a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state, for example, 0.5 seconds is set; and if it is a ceiling time-limited game state or a sudden time-limited game state, for example, 0.1 seconds is set.

The opening period may be set to a period corresponding to the game state at the time of setting. For example, if the game state when the support lottery is executed is the normal time-saving game state, and the game state when the opening period is set is the sudden time-saving game state, a period corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state (e.g., 0.1 sec) may be set.

In step Se2205, the number of times the normal electric device 63a will be opened in this device opening/closing game is set. At this time, the number of times the device will be opened is set to a number corresponding to the game state at the time the support lottery that triggered the device opening/closing game was executed. If the game state at the time of the support lottery was the normal game state, high probability game state, normal time-limited game state, or ceiling time-limited game state, for example, the number is set to 1, and if it was the sudden time-limited game state, for example, the number is set to 2. In this step, a value corresponding to these opening numbers is set in the opening number counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the number of openings is 2, the corresponding value of "2" is set in the opening number counter area RC2.

The number of times the game is opened may be set to a number corresponding to the game state at the time of setting. For example, if the game state when the support lottery is executed is the normal time-saving game state, and the game state when the number of times the game is opened is the sudden time-saving game state, the number of times corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state (for example, 2 times) may be set.

In step Se2206, a normal opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the opening. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Figure 379).

In step Se2207, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the reel open signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the open signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se2201 (when the reel opening/closing game is in progress), a determination is made in step Se2208 as to whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the electric reel support processing is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the reel opening/closing processing is executed in step Se2209. The reel opening/closing processing will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 404.

First, in step Se2301, it is determined whether the normal power device 63a is currently open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power device 63a is not currently open, it is determined in step Se2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," proceed to step Se2303, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between openings of the normal electric device 63a has elapsed when the device is opened multiple times during a device opening/closing game.

If the value of timer area T2 is "0", step Se2304 sets the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a for this opening. In this case, the upper limit opening time is set to a period corresponding to the game state at the time the support lottery that triggered the device opening/closing game was executed. If the game state at the time of the support lottery was a normal game state, for example, 0.1 seconds is set; if it was a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state, for example, 1.5 seconds is set; and if it was a ceiling time-limited game state, for example, 2 seconds is set. Furthermore, if it was a sudden time-limited game state and the first opening was made, for example, 0.2 seconds is set; and if it was a second opening, for example, 2 seconds is set.

In this step, a value corresponding to the upper limit release time is set in the timer area T2. For example, if the upper limit release time is 0.1 seconds, the corresponding value is set to "100." The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 376) is started.

The upper limit release time may be set to a period corresponding to the game state at the time of setting. For example, if the game state when the support lottery is executed is the normal time-saving game state, and the game state when the number of releases is set is the sudden time-saving game state, the upper limit release time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) may be set to correspond to the sudden time-saving game state.

In step Se2305, the winning counter area PC2 in the various counter area 344b is set to "6." This value corresponds to the maximum number of winnings (6) that can be won by the normal electric device 63a (second operating port 63) in the device opening and closing game.

In step Se2306, the drive unit 63b is set to the driven state to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Se2307, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Figure 379). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Se2307 is executed, the reel opening/closing process is terminated. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Se2302 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Se2303 (the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process is terminated without executing the processing from step Se2304 onwards.

If step Se2301 returns a positive result (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Se2308, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit for the open time of the normal power device 63a set in step Se2304 has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T2 is not "0", i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has not elapsed, step Se2309 determines whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, step Se2310 subtracts 1 from the value in the win counter area PC2. Step Se2311 determines whether the value in the win counter area PC2 is "0", i.e., whether the number of wins into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of wins.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se2309 (no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Se2311 (the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends immediately to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se2308 (if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Se2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0"), in step Se2312, the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Se2313, the process of updating the opening count counter area RC2 is executed. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Se2314, it is determined whether the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is "0." If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power device 63a, in step Se2315, the value of the interval time (waiting time) during which the normal power device 63a is kept in the closed state and awaits the next opening is set in the timer area T2.

In step Se2316, a reel close command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The set reel close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Figure 379). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state.

If step Se2314 returns a positive result (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0"), the ending start process is executed in step Se2317. This start process sets an ending period during which the normal power device 63a remains closed and awaits the start of the next play (the first normal play after the device opening/closing play has ended).

In this case, the ending period is set to a period corresponding to the game state at the time the support lottery that triggered the opening and closing of the reel is executed. If the game state at the time of the support lottery is a normal game state, for example, 5 seconds is set; if it is a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state, for example, 0.5 seconds is set; and if it is a ceiling time-limited game state or a sudden time-limited game state, for example, 0.1 seconds is set.

The ending period may be set to a period corresponding to the game state at the time of setting. For example, if the game state when the support lottery is executed is the normal time-saving game state, and the game state when the ending period is set is the sudden time-saving game state, a period corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state (e.g., 0.1 sec) may be set.

In step Se2318, a normal ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the ending, and then the reel opening and closing process is terminated. The set normal ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Se401 of the normal processing (Figure 379).

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support processing (Fig. 403), after executing the reel opening/closing processing in step Se2209, step Se2210 determines whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0." If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," the electric role support processing is terminated so that the reel opening/closing game can continue.

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", proceed to step Se2211 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the electric support processing is terminated to continue the ending.

If the ending has finished, step Se2212 executes the termination process for the reel opening/closing game, and then the electric reel support process ends. The termination process for the reel opening/closing game executes processes such as clearing the reel opening/closing flag set in the various flag storage area 314e.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and display control device 350 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of Figure 405.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 contains a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 343 are executed, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control unit 162, it receives various commands, such as game play control commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, as well as opening and closing execution mode commands such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. Based on the detection information, the MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 equipped with an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 374 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 372. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device that serves as the LCD driver built into the pattern display device 75. Because VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its true nature is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 adjusts the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and so on.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc., separately. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 406. The effect setting process is initiated by the MPU 342 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Se2501, it is determined whether an ending command (step Se1018) has been received from the main control unit 162. The ending command is sent when the ending is to begin in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the result of the win/loss determination for the special game round is a jackpot.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands in order from the previously stored command. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly.

When making the judgment in step Se2501, it is determined whether an ending command is stored in the area of command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If such a command is stored (if an ending command has been received), in step Se2502, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to a high probability gaming state or a normal time-limited gaming state. Details of the first transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Se2502 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Se2501 (an ending command has not been received), in step Se2503, a special pattern change display process is executed to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display process will be described later.

In step Se2504, it is determined whether a sudden time-saving start command (step Se1807) has been received from the main control unit 162. The sudden time-saving start command notifies the presentation control unit 143 of a sudden transition to a time-saving game state, and is transmitted at the timing of the sudden transition to the time-saving game state. Note that in this embodiment, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in a special game round that resulted in a special miss, and therefore the sudden time-saving start command is transmitted at the start of the confirmation display.

If a sudden time-saving start command has been received, step Se2505 executes a second transition effect setting process to set a transition effect corresponding to the sudden transition to the time-saving game state. Details of the second transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Se2505 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Se2504 (if the sudden time-shortening start command has not been received), step Se2506 determines whether a ceiling time-shortening start command (step Se1807) has been received from the main control unit 162. The ceiling time-shortening start command notifies the presentation control unit 143 of the transition to the ceiling time-shortening game state, and is transmitted at the timing of the transition to the ceiling time-shortening game state. Note that in this embodiment, the transition to the ceiling time-shortening game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the special game where the number of losing games has reached the ceiling number, and therefore the ceiling time-shortening start command is transmitted at the start of the confirmation display.

If a ceiling time-saving start command has been received, step Se2507 executes a third transition effect setting process to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the ceiling time-saving game state. Details of the third transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Se2507 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Se2506 (if the ceiling time-saving start command has not been received), step Se2508 determines whether any game state end command has been received. Specifically, it determines whether either the high-probability game state end command or the time-saving game state end command (step Se1705) has been received.

If any of these commands has been received, step Se2509 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state or each time-limited game state. Details of the end effect setting process will be described later.

In step Se2510, other processing is performed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Other processing includes displaying a demo screen if a starting winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time, and switching to a power-saving mode that stops video display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption.

<First transition effect setting process>
The first transition effect setting process of step Se2502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 407. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the timing at which the ending of the opening/closing execution mode starts.

First, in step Se2601, it is determined whether a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state. This determination is made based on whether a high probability start command (step Se1104) or a normal time-saving start command (step Se1107) has been received from the main control unit 162.

If a transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state does not occur, the first transition effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if a transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state occurs, in step Se2602, a start effect corresponding to the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state is set.

In the start presentation for the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 408(a), a title image 821 corresponding to the high probability game state, such as "Lucky Time," is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Also, in the start presentation for the normal time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 408(b), a title image 822 corresponding to the normal time-saving game state, such as "Chance Time," and a remaining number of times image 823 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 823 notifies the player of the remaining number of special symbol game times that the player can remain in the normal time-saving game state.

Note that Figure 408(c) shows the time-saving effects that are executed while in the normal time-saving game state. The time-saving effects are performed after the start effect in Figure 408(b) ends and until the normal time-saving game state ends. During this time-saving effect, a display effect that differs from the normal effect, for example, a background image that is different from the normal effect during the normal game state, is implemented.

In step Se2602, the various start effects described above are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, these start effects may be configured to be displayed throughout the entire ending period, or for only part of the ending period.

In step Se2603, it is determined whether the current transition is to the normal time-saving game state. If a positive determination is made in step Se2603, the remaining number of times process is executed in step Se2604. The remaining number of times process is used to set various counter values related to the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. Here, the remaining number of times process in step Se2604 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 409.

First, in step Se2701, the upper limit number of times for the time-saving game state to be transitioned to (time-saving transition) is determined. For example, if the time-saving transition state is a normal time-saving game state corresponding to 10R normal jackpot result B, the upper limit number is determined to be 300 times (Figure 373 (b)). This determination is performed by analyzing the normal time-saving start command sent from the main control unit 162.

In step Se2702, the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times determined in step Se2701 is set in the actual remaining number of times counter area SS1 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344. For example, if the transition time reduction is in the normal time-saving game state corresponding to 10R normal jackpot result B, "300" is set in the actual remaining number of times counter area SS1 as the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times. The actual remaining number of times counter area SS1 is used by MPU 342 to determine the actual remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, and is decremented by one each time a special game is played.

In step Se2703, a lottery process is executed to determine the number of initial notifications. The initial number of notifications is the remaining number of notifications at the start of the time-saving game state, and is determined by lottery within the range of the actual upper limit number determined in step Se2701. For example, if the actual upper limit number is 300, the number of notifications is determined by lottery so that the initial number of notifications is 300 or less.

In step Se2704, a value corresponding to the initial number of notifications selected in step Se2703 is set in the remaining notification counter area SS2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. For example, if 50 notifications are selected as the initial number of notifications, the corresponding value of "50" is set in the remaining notification counter area SS2. The remaining notification counter area SS2 is used by the MPU 342 to keep track of the remaining number of notifications, and like the actual remaining number counter area SS1, it is decremented by one each time a special game is played.

In step Se2705, the number of times not yet notified is determined. The number of times not yet notified is the number of times that has not been notified to the player out of the actual remaining number of times (maximum number of times), and is calculated by subtracting the initial number of times notified from the maximum number of times for the time-saving game state to be transitioned to. For example, if the maximum number of times determined in step Se2701 is 300 times and the initial number of times notified drawn in step Se2703 is 50 times, the number of times not yet notified is calculated as 250 times.

In step Se2706, the value corresponding to the number of unalarmed notifications determined in step Se2705 is set in the unalarmed notification count counter area SS3 provided in the various counter areas 344b. In the above example, "250" is set in the unalarmed notification count counter area SS3 as the value corresponding to the number of unalarmed notifications. The unalarmed notification count counter area SS3 is used by the MPU 342 to determine how many of the actual remaining notifications have not been notified, and whether or not there are any notifications that have not been notified.

In step Se2707, the display of the remaining number of times image 823 is set to begin. At that time, the remaining number of times image 823 is set to display the initial number of times to be notified drawn in step Se2703. Here, if the initial number of times to be notified drawn in step Se2703 is fewer than the actual number of times remaining, the remaining number of times notified to the player via the remaining number of times image 823 will be fewer than the actual number of times remaining. Note that the display of the remaining number of times image 823 may be started during the start effect (an effect performed using the ending period) set in step Se2602, or may be started after the start effect has ended and the game has transitioned to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Se2708, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and then the remaining number of times processing is terminated. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the remaining number of times image 823 is being displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the first transition effect setting process (Fig. 407), after executing the remaining number of times process in step Se2604, step Se2605 is set to start displaying the miss count image 824. The miss count image 824 notifies the number of times a game has failed, and is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 (Fig. 408 (c)). The initial display of the miss count image 824 is "0 times," and continues until the ceiling number of times for the miss count image 824 is reached. Note that the display of the miss count image 824 may start with the start effect set in step Se2602, or may start after the start effect has ended and the game has transitioned to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Se2606, the miss count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c, and then the first transition effect setting process is terminated. The miss count display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the miss count image 824 is being displayed.

<Special chart change display processing>
The processing for displaying special chart changes in step Se2503 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 410.

First, in step Se2801, it is determined whether a special symbol game round is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a first or second special symbol game round is currently being played. If neither game round is currently being played, it proceeds to step Se2802, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information about the fluctuation pattern selected by lottery during the fluctuation display time setting process in the main control unit 162. By referencing this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to determine at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Furthermore, as already explained, because fluctuation patterns for jackpots and losses are set separately, the result of the win/loss judgment can also be determined from the fluctuation pattern.

If a fluctuation start command has not been received, the special chart fluctuation display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Se2803, where the value of the actual remaining number of times counter area SS1 in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344 is updated. Specifically, the value of the actual remaining number of times counter area SS1 is decremented by 1. As a result, the actual remaining number of times in the time-saving game state as determined by the MPU 342 (presentation control device 143) is decremented by 1.

In this embodiment, the presentation control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state separately from the main control device 162, but the presentation control device 143 may also be configured to determine the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state based on the update results from the main control device 162. For example, the main control device 162 may notify the presentation control device 143 of the update results of the support counter area SC (step Se1203) by sending a specified command, and the presentation control device 143 may analyze the command and determine the update results. In this case, the specified command may be created by including information on each of the update results in an existing command such as a fluctuation start command, or the specified command may be configured using a dedicated command for notifying each of the update results.

In step Se2804, the value in the remaining notification counter area SS2 of the various counter areas 344b is updated. Specifically, the value in the remaining notification counter area SS2 is decremented by 1. As a result, the remaining number of notifications as determined by the MPU 342 is decremented by 1.

In step Se2805, a fluctuation start process is executed to start the presentation for the game round. In the fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed and the fluctuation pattern for the current special game round is identified. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game round is determined based on the identified fluctuation pattern. A presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343.

The variable display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the variable display time corresponding to each variation pattern (Fig. 394, Fig. 396, Fig. 397) in the main control device 162, and a common variable display time is assigned to one variation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variable display time is 15 seconds in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start process, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is taken as the variable display time for the current special game.

The presentation pattern table also associates presentation patterns for game play presentations with each variation pattern. These presentation patterns include the normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, SPSP reach miss, special reach miss A presentation, and special reach miss B presentation, which were mentioned in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between variation patterns and presentation patterns has already been explained with reference to Figures 394, 396, and 397, so further explanation will be omitted.

Details regarding the setting of the game number effects in the fluctuation start processing of step Se2805 will be provided later.

In step Se2806, processing to update the remaining number of times display is executed, and then processing to display the special chart variation is terminated. In processing to update the remaining number of times display, it is determined whether the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and if the remaining number of times display flag is set (if the remaining number of times image 823 is being displayed), the value of the remaining number of times notification counter area SS2 updated in step Se2804 is referenced and the display content of the remaining number of times image 823 is updated. As a result, the remaining number of times notified by the remaining number of times image 823 is decremented by 1.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se2801 (if a special symbol game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Se2807, where it is determined whether a change end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time for this special symbol game round has not yet elapsed. In this case, step Se2808 executes a change in progress process. The change in progress process executes processes to continue the change display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se2807 (if a variation end command has been received), variation end processing is executed in step Se2809. In the variation end processing, the variable display of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 and the currently running effects are terminated. In addition, in step Se2809, control is performed to stop the fixed display of the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

In step Se2810, processing is performed to update the display of the number of misses image 824, and then the processing for displaying the special chart variation is terminated. Details of step Se2810 will be described later.

<Processing for starting fluctuations>
The fluctuation start processing of step Se2805 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 411.

In step Se2901, the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern for the current special game is identified. In step Se2902, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern identified in step Se2901 is fluctuation pattern W1. Fluctuation pattern W1 is selected when a special miss occurs in a time-saving game state, and a sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs based on that result (Figure 397 (b)).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern W1, proceed to step Se2903 and execute the first setting process for the game-run effects. In the first setting process for the game-run effects, a special reach miss A effect is executed as the effect for the current game run, and settings are made so that part or all of the upper limit number of times the sudden time-saving game state can be played corresponding to the current special miss result is notified by an additional effect. Here, the first setting process for the game-run effects will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 412.

First, in step Se3101, the special reach miss A effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 as the effect for this game round. The special reach miss A effect is a game round effect that notifies the player that a special miss has occurred. As shown in Figures 395(a)-(c), after a reach display is made on a predetermined reach line, a special symbol 811 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle symbol column Z2 on that reach line. In step Se3101, the stopped symbols in the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 are determined so that a reach is formed on one of the activated lines L1-L5 determined by lottery, and the stopped symbols are further determined so that the special symbol 811 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle symbol column Z2 on the reach line. In this way, if a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state and the game suddenly transitions to a time-saving game state during the time-saving play state, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 notifies the player that a special miss has occurred.

In step Se3102, the type of this special failure result is determined. This determination is performed based on the type command (step Se715) sent from the main control unit 162. In the following step Se3103, the upper limit number K of times to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is determined based on the type of special failure result determined in step Se3102. For example, if the type of the determined special failure result is special failure result A and the sudden time-saving game state to transition to is sudden time-saving game state A, the upper limit number K is determined to be 200 times (Figure 374 (b)).

In step Se3104, the value corresponding to the upper limit number K determined in step Se3103 is overwritten in the actual remaining number counter area SS1 in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344. As a result, the value in the actual remaining number counter area SS1 is changed from the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode to a value corresponding to the upper limit number K, and the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode determined by MPU 342 is replaced with the upper limit number (remaining number of times) of the sudden time-saving mode corresponding to this special miss result.

In step Se3105, the value in the unannounced count counter area SS3 in the various counter areas 344b is updated. Specifically, the value in the remaining count counter area SS2 in the various counter areas 344b is subtracted from the upper limit count K determined in step Se3103, and the result of this subtraction is overwritten in the unannounced count counter area SS3. As a result, the unannounced count determined by the MPU 342 is replaced with the upper limit count for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result minus the current remaining count notified by the remaining count image 823.

In step Se3106, a lottery process is executed to determine the number of additional notifications M. In this embodiment, if the game suddenly transitions to a time-saving game state during the time-saving mode, an additional effect is performed as described below to make it appear as if the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state has been added. The number of additional notifications M is the additional remaining number of times that is notified during this additional effect. In this step, the value of the unannounced number counter area SS3 updated in step Se3105 is referenced, and the number of additional notifications M is determined by lottery within that range. For example, if the number of unannounced times after the update is 150, the number of additional notifications M is determined by lottery so that the number of additional notifications M is 150 or less.

In step Se3107, the value in the remaining notification count counter area SS2 is updated. Specifically, a value corresponding to the additional notification count M drawn in step Se3106 is added to the value in the remaining notification count counter area SS2 at that time. As a result, the remaining notification count grasped by MPU342 is changed to the total of the remaining count at that time and the additional remaining count to be notified by the additional effect.

In step Se3108, the value in the unalarmed count counter area SS3 is updated again. Specifically, the value corresponding to the additional notification count M selected in step Se3106 is subtracted from the value in the unalarmed count counter area SS3 updated in step Se3105.

In step Se3109, the first additional effect (remaining number of times additional effect) is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In the first additional effect, as shown in Figures 413(a) and (b), after each symbol in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a symbol combination corresponding to the special miss result, an additional image 826 is displayed in text or the like to notify the number of additional notification times M drawn in step Se3106 during that special symbol play round. This notifies the player of the additional number of times remaining in the time-saving play state.

The added image 826 may be displayed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be displayed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the images of the statically displayed symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be erased before the added image 826 is displayed, or the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and the added image 826 may be displayed in front of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After the overlay image 826 is displayed, the value of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 updated in step Se3107 is referenced, and a remaining count image 823 reflecting the additional remaining count notified by the overlay image 826 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 413(c).

In step Se3110, an additional notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and then the first setting process for the game-time effect is terminated. The additional notification flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that the first additional effect has been executed.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 411), if a negative judgment is made in step Se2902 (if the grasped fluctuation pattern is not fluctuation pattern W1), proceed to step Se2904 to determine whether the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern W2. Fluctuation pattern W2 is selected when a special miss occurs in a time-saving game state, but a sudden transition to the time-saving game state does not occur (Fig. 397 (b)).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern W2, proceed to step Se2905 and execute the second setting process for the game-run effects. In the second setting process for the game-run effects, it is set so that either the special reach miss A effect or the special reach miss B effect is executed as the effect for the current game run. Here, the second setting process for the game-run effects will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 414.

First, in step Se3201, it is determined whether the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is greater than a first predetermined number. The unannounced count counter area SS3 is used to determine how many of the actual remaining counts in the time-saving game state in which the player is currently playing have not yet been notified. Therefore, the determination process in this step determines whether there is a certain number or more of remaining counts that have not yet been notified to the player.

In this embodiment, the first predetermined number is set to 0, and step Se3201 determines whether there are any remaining unannounced notifications. However, this is not limited to this, and the first predetermined number may be set to a number greater than 0, such as 10, for example.

If the value in the unannounced count counter area SS3 is greater than the first predetermined number (if there are unannounced remaining counts), proceed to step Se3202, and set the special reach miss A effect to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 as the effect for this game round. The special reach miss A effect is an effect for this game round that notifies you that a special miss result has occurred. The processing of this step is the same as that of step Se3101 (Fig. 412) already explained.

In step Se3203, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of additional notifications M. As mentioned above, the number of additional notifications M is the remaining number of times to be notified during the additional notification performance. In this step, the value of the unnotified number counter area SS3 is referenced, and the number of additional notifications M is determined within that range. For example, if the number of unnotified notifications at that time is 50, the number M is determined so that the number of additional notifications M is 50 or less.

In step Se3204, the value in the remaining notification count counter area SS2 in the various counter areas 344b is updated. Specifically, the value in the remaining notification count counter area SS2 at that time is added with a value corresponding to the additional notification count M drawn in step Se3203.

In step Se3205, the value in the unalarmed count counter area SS3 is updated. Specifically, the number of additional notifications M selected in step Se3203 is subtracted from the value in the unalarmed count counter area SS3 at that time.

In step Se3206, the first additional effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In this case, the first additional effect is set to display an additional image 826 corresponding to the notification additional number M drawn in step Se3203.

In this way, if a special miss occurs while the game is in the time-saving play state and the game does not suddenly transition to the time-saving play state, and there are still remaining rounds that have not been announced, an additional presentation is executed to announce additional rounds within that range. This gives the impression that the game has suddenly transitioned to the time-saving play state and the remaining rounds have increased, even if the game is actually in a state where the game is restricted from suddenly transitioning to the time-saving play state and the remaining rounds have not increased.

After step Se3206 is executed, the second setting process for the game-run effects is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step Se3201 (the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 is equal to or less than the first predetermined number), the process proceeds to step Se3207, where the special reach miss B effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 as the current game run effect. The special reach miss B effect is a so-called false effect that is paired with the special reach miss A effect, and it builds up anticipation for a special miss and then displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a different symbol combination. In step Se3207, the stopped symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are determined so that a reach is formed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery, and further a symbol different from the special symbol 811 is determined to be displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on that reach line.

After step Se3207 is executed, the second setting process for the game-time effects is terminated. In other words, the second setting process for the game-time effects is terminated without setting up the execution of the first additional effect. In this way, if a special miss occurs while the game is in the time-saving game state and there is no sudden transition to the time-saving game state, and there are insufficient remaining unannounced counts (or no remaining counts), a game-time effect different from the special reach miss A effect is executed, the special miss result is not announced, and no additional effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (Fig. 411), if a negative judgment is made in step Se2904 (if the grasped fluctuation pattern is not fluctuation pattern W1), proceed to step Se2906 to determine whether the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern W3. Fluctuation pattern W3 is selected when a normal miss occurs in a time-saving gaming state and stop result SD19 (Fig. 385 (a)) is determined as the stop result on the special chart display unit 43 (Fig. 397 (d)). Fluctuation pattern W3 is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special reach miss A effect, the special reach miss B effect, and the normal reach miss.

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern W3, proceed to step Se2907 and execute the third setting process for the game-run effects. In the third setting process for the game-run effects, the effect for the current game run is set to be either a special reach miss A effect, a special reach miss B effect, or a normal reach miss effect. Here, the third setting process for the game-run effects will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 415.

First, in step Se3301, it is determined whether the value in the unalarmed count counter area SS3 in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is greater than a first predetermined number. This process is similar to step Se3201 already described.

If the value in the unannounced count counter area SS3 is greater than the first predetermined number (if the remaining number of unannounced times is equal to or greater than a certain number, or if there is one), proceed to step Se3302 and set the special reach miss A effect to be executed as the effect for this game round. The special reach miss A effect is an effect for this game round that notifies you that a special miss result has occurred. The processing of this step is the same as that of step Se3101 (Fig. 412) already explained.

In step Se3303, the value of the unalarmed count counter area SS3 is referenced, and the number of additional alarms M is selected by lottery within that range. For example, if the number of unalarmed counts at that time is 50, the number M is selected by lottery so that the number of additional alarms M is 50 or less.

In step Se3304, the number of additional notifications M drawn in step Se3303 is added to the value in the remaining notification counter area SS2, updating the remaining number of notifications tracked by MPU 342. In the following step Se3305, the number of additional notifications M drawn in step Se3303 is subtracted from the value in the unaltered notification counter area SS3, updating the remaining number of unaltered notifications tracked by MPU 342 (in other words, the margin that can be used to announce additional notifications through the added effect).

In step Se3306, the first additional effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, and then the third setting process for the game effect is terminated. In the first additional effect in step Se3306, the additional effect image 826 corresponding to the notification additional number M drawn in step Se3304 is set to be displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se3301 (the value in the unalarmed count counter area SS3 is equal to or less than the first predetermined number), the process proceeds to step Se3307, where a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the special reach-miss B effect. In step Se3307, a lottery is performed to execute the special reach-miss B effect based on the execution lottery table stored in ROM 343 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from the various counter area 344b.

In step Se3308, it is determined whether the execution lottery of step Se3307 was won. If the lottery was won, the process proceeds to step Se3309, where the special reach miss B effect is set to be executed as the effect for this game round. The processing of this step is the same as that of step Se3207.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se3308 (if the execution lottery is lost), the process proceeds to step Se3310, where a normal reach-miss effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 as the effect for this game. In step Se3310, the stopping symbols for the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are determined so that a reach is formed on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 determined by the lottery, and the stopping symbols for the middle symbol row Z2 are determined so that a symbol different from the stopping symbols is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the reach line.

After step Se3309 or step Se3310 is executed, the third setting process for the game-time effects is terminated without setting the execution of the first additional effect.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 411), if a negative judgment is made in step Se2906 (if the grasped fluctuation pattern is not fluctuation pattern W3), proceed to step Se2908 to determine whether the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 21H. Fluctuation pattern 21H is a fluctuation pattern associated with the fluctuation display time for a complete miss effect, out of multiple types of fluctuation patterns 21H to 24H that can be selected when a normal miss occurs in a time-saving gaming state and stop result SD18 (Fig. 385 (a)) is determined as the stop result on the special symbol display unit 43 (Fig. 397 (c)).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 21H, proceed to step Se2909 and execute the fourth setting process for the game round effect. In the fourth setting process for the game round effect, a complete miss effect is set to be executed as the effect for the current game round. Here, the fourth setting process for the game round effect will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 416.

In step Se3401, it is determined whether the value in the unalarmed count counter area SS3 in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is greater than a first predetermined number. This process is similar to step Se3201 already described.

If the value in the unannounced number counter area SS3 is greater than the first predetermined number (if the remaining number of unannounced times is equal to or greater than a certain number, or if there is a certain number), proceed to step Se3402, where it is determined whether the value in the remaining number of announcements counter area SS2 in the various counter areas 344b is equal to or less than a second predetermined number. The remaining number of announcements counter area SS2 is used by the MPU 342 to grasp the remaining number of times to be notified by the remaining number image 823 (Figure 408 (c)). Therefore, the determination process in this step determines whether the remaining number of times notified to the player has fallen below a certain number.

In this embodiment, the second predetermined number is set to 5, and step Se3402 is configured to determine whether the remaining number of times indicated by the notification is 5 or less. This determines whether the remaining number of times indicated by the notification is low. Note that the second predetermined number is not limited to the above; for example, the second predetermined number may be set to 0, and a determination may be made as to whether the current special symbol play is the final play time indicated by the notification.

If the remaining notification count counter area SS2 is equal to or less than the second predetermined number, proceed to step Se3403, where a lottery is conducted to determine the number of additional notifications M. In the following step Se3404, the number of additional notifications M determined in step Se3403 is added to the value of the remaining notification count counter area SS2, and in step Se3405, the number of additional notifications M determined in step Se3403 is subtracted from the value of the number of unaltered notifications counter area SS3. The processing in steps Se3403 to Se3405 is the same as that in steps Se3106 to Se3108.

In step Se3406, the second additional effect A is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. The second additional effect A notifies the user of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state without executing the special reach miss A effect (notification of a special miss result).

In the second additional effect A, as shown in Figures 417(a) and (b), after the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a completely miss combination, an operation instruction image 831 consisting of text such as "Press!" and a button image 832 modeled after the effect operation unit 36 are displayed, instructing the player to press the effect operation unit 36. In addition, an operation period image 833 indicating the valid operation period (remaining operation period) of the effect operation unit 36 is displayed.

If the effect operation unit 36 is pressed within the valid operation period, an additional image 826 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 417(c), announcing the additional notification count M drawn in step Se3403 using text or other means. This notifies the player of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state.

If no pressing operation is performed within the valid operation period, the above-mentioned overlay image 826 will be displayed when the valid operation period has elapsed, or the overlay image 826 will not be displayed and the operation instruction image 831, button image 832, etc. will be erased.

The second additional effect A may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the image of the statically displayed symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be erased before the second additional effect A is executed, or the image of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and an operation instruction image 831, button image 832, etc. may be displayed in front of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In this way, by configuring the system so that an additional effect can be executed even when a variation pattern for a complete miss is selected, when the remaining number of times displayed in the notification falls below the third predetermined number, the second additional effect A can be executed to increase the remaining number of times displayed by the additional image 826. This makes it possible to align the remaining number of times displayed in the notification with the continuation status of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to effectively prevent the time-saving game state from continuing even after the remaining number of times displayed in the notification reaches 0, giving the player an unnatural impression.

After step Se3406 is executed, step Se3407 is performed to set the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 to display a complete miss effect as the effect for this game. In step Se3407, the stopping symbols for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are determined so that symbol combinations of jackpot, reach miss, and special reach miss are not formed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5.

When the second additional effect A is executed using part of the variable display time, the variable display of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is set to end earlier than when the second additional effect A is not executed. This ensures that the player has an appropriate period of time to visually confirm the stopping results of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 before the second additional effect is executed.

In this way, if the remaining number of times displayed on the notification falls below the second predetermined number, resulting in a normal miss and the variation pattern for a complete miss being selected, the second additional effect A is executed to add to the remaining number of times displayed on the notification. This makes it possible to align the remaining number of times displayed on the notification with the continuation of the time-saving game state, and prevents the time-saving game state from continuing even after the remaining number of times displayed on the notification reaches 0, giving the player an unnatural impression.

After step Se3407 is executed, the fourth setting process for the game effect is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step Se3402 (if the remaining number of notifications counter area SS2 is greater than the second predetermined number), the process proceeds to step Se3408, where a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute second additional effect A. In step Se3408, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not second additional effect A will be executed based on the execution lottery table stored in ROM 343 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from the various counter area 344b. Note that the probability of winning in the execution lottery in step Se3408 is not particularly limited, but it can be set, for example, so that the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning.

In step Se3409, it is determined whether the execution lottery in step Se3408 was won. If the lottery was won, the process proceeds to step Se3403, and the second additional effect A is set to be executed. In addition, in step Se3407, the process is set to execute a complete miss effect as the effect for this game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Se3409 (if the execution lottery is lost), the process proceeds to step Se3410, where a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute second added effect B. Second added effect B is a so-called false effect that is paired with second added effect A. In second added effect B, as shown in FIG. 417(b), after the operation instruction image 831 and button image 832 are displayed, if the effect operation unit 36 is pressed within the valid operation period, as shown in FIG. 417(d), the added image 826 is not displayed and the operation instruction image 831 and button image 832 are erased. Note that even if the press operation is not performed within the valid operation period, the same display mode as above will be used when the valid operation period has elapsed.

In step Se3410, a lottery is conducted to determine whether to execute the second additional effect B based on the execution lottery table stored in ROM 343 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from the various counter area 344b.

In step Se3411, it is determined whether the execution lottery of step Se3410 has been won. If the execution lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step Se3412, where the second additional effect B is set to be executed. Then, the process proceeds to step Se3407, where the complete miss effect is set to be executed as the effect for this game round. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step Se3411 (the execution lottery has been lost), the process proceeds directly to step Se3407, where the complete miss effect is set to be executed.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (Fig. 411), if a negative judgment is made in step Se2908 (if the grasped fluctuation pattern is not fluctuation pattern 21H), proceed to step Se2910, and set up so that the game number effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Se2901 is executed. For example, if the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 3A (Fig. 394 (a)), set up so that the SPSP reach winning effect is executed.

After steps Se2903, Se2905, Se2907, Se2909, and Se2910 are executed, in step Se2911 a stop result command and a pattern command are sent to the display control device 350 as output targets. The stop result command is a command that specifies the stop result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the pattern command is a presentation pattern command that specifies the presentation for the game round to be executed. In accordance with the received commands, the display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 so that the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 stop with the specified stop result, or so that the presentation for the game round is executed with the specified presentation pattern. After step Se2911 is executed, the variation start processing ends.

<Processing for updating the display of the number of misses>
The process for updating the display of the number of misses in step Se2310 (Fig. 410) will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 418. This process is executed when a variation end command is received from the main control device 162, and is executed at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special game round.

First, in step Se3601, it is determined whether the miss count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, i.e., whether the miss count image 824 (Figure 408 (c)) is being displayed. If the miss count display flag is set, it is determined in step Se3602 whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a miss (normal miss result or special miss result).

If the result is a miss, proceed to step Se3603 and update the value in the miss counter area provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344. Specifically, the value in the miss counter area is incremented by 1. The miss counter area is used by MPU 342 to keep track of the number of attempts remaining until the ceiling number of attempts is reached.

In step Se3604, the display content of the miss count image 824 is updated by referring to the update result of step Se3603. As a result, the number of misses notified by the miss count image 824 is incremented by 1.

The process of updating the miss count counter in step Se3603 is executed at the start of the confirmation display, but in step Se3604, the miss count image 824 is set to be updated after the confirmation display time has elapsed. In this case, the timing for updating the miss count image 824 may be the end of the confirmation display, or it may be after the start of the next special game.

The display of the loss count image 824 is updated at the end of each loss play, allowing the player to know their progress towards reaching the ceiling. Specifically, the player can see the current number of loss plays, and if the player knows the ceiling limit, they can see how many plays remain until the ceiling limit is reached.

After step Se3604 is executed, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Se3601 (if the flag for displaying the number of misses is not set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Se3602 (if the result of this special game is a jackpot), the process for updating the display of the number of misses is terminated without executing the processes from step Se3603 onwards.

<Second transition effect setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Se2505 (FIG. 406) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 419(a). This process is executed when a sudden time-saving start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when a time-saving game state is suddenly started.

First, in step Se3701, it is determined whether the additional notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344. If the additional notification flag is not set, that is, if the first additional notification effect A was not executed in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, proceed to step Se3702 and set the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state. In the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 419(b), a title image 835 corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state, such as "Sudden Chance Time," and a remaining number of times image 823 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 823 notifies the player of the remaining number of special symbol game rounds that can be played in the sudden time-saving game state.

In this step, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set so that it is executed at the fixed display time in the special game round. In this case, the entire start effect may be executed at the fixed display time, or only part of the start effect may be executed at the fixed display time. Note that if part of the start effect is executed within the fixed display time, the start effect will be executed across the fixed display time and the next special game round.

In step Se3703, remaining number processing is executed. The remaining number processing is used to set various counter values related to the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. This processing is similar to the remaining number processing in Figure 409 related to the first transition effect setting processing (Figure 407).

Using Figure 409 to explain the remaining number of times processing in step Se3703, first, in step Se2701, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to (transition time-saving) is determined. For example, if the transition time-saving state is sudden time-saving game state A, the upper limit number is determined to be 200 times (Figure 374 (b)). This determination is performed by analyzing the sudden time-saving start command sent from the main control unit 162.

In step Se2702, a value corresponding to the upper limit number determined in step Se2701 is set in the actual remaining number counter area SS1 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step Se2703, a lottery process for the initial notification number is executed. The initial notification number is the remaining number of times to be notified at the start of the time-saving game state, and is determined by lottery within the range of the actual upper limit number determined in step Se2701.

In step Se2704, a value corresponding to the number of initial notifications selected in step Se2703 is set in the remaining notification count counter area SS2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. In step Se2705, the number of initial notifications selected in step Se2703 is subtracted from the actual upper limit determined in step Se2701 to determine the number of notifications yet to be made.

In step Se2706, the value corresponding to the number of unalarmed notifications determined in step Se2705 is set in the unalarmed notification count counter area SS3 provided in the various counter area 344b. In step Se2707, a setting is made to start displaying the remaining number of notifications image 823. At that time, a setting is made to display the remaining number of notifications image 823 of the initial number of notifications selected in step Se2703. In step Se2708, a remaining number of notifications display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and then the remaining number of notifications processing is terminated. The remaining number of notifications display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the remaining number of notifications image 823 is being displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the second transition effect setting process (Fig. 419), if a positive judgment is made in step Se3701 (if the additional notification flag is set), the process proceeds to step Se3704, the additional notification flag set in the various flag storage area 344c is cleared, and then the second transition effect setting process ends. In other words, if the first additional effect is executed in a special game round that results in a special miss, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is not executed.

<Third transition effect setting process>
The third transition effect setting process of step Se2507 (FIG. 406) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 420(a). This process is executed when a ceiling time-saving start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when the ceiling time-saving game state is started.

In step Se3801, the start effect for the ceiling time-shortened game state is set. In the start effect for the ceiling time-shortened game state, a title image 822 corresponding to the ceiling time-shortened game state, such as "Chance Time," and a remaining number of plays image 823 are displayed, similar to the start effect for the normal time-shortened game state (Figure 408 (b)).

In this step, the start effect for the ceiling time-saving game state is set so that it is executed at the fixed display time in the special game round. In this case, the entire start effect may be executed at the fixed display time, or only part of the start effect may be executed at the fixed display time. Note that if part of the start effect is executed within the fixed display time, the start effect will be executed across the fixed display time and the next special game round.

In step Se3802, remaining number processing is executed to set various counter values related to the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. This processing is similar to the remaining number of times processing in FIG. 409 related to the first transition effect setting processing (FIG. 407), so a description thereof will be omitted.

In step Se3803, the value of the miss count counter area provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared. The miss count counter area counts the number of times the special symbol has been played as a miss, and is referenced when displaying the miss count image 824.

In step Se3804, a process is executed to erase the miss count image 824 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In the following step Se3805, the miss count display flag set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344 is cleared, and then the third transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Ending performance setting process>
The process for setting the effect for ending in step Se2509 (FIG. 406) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 420(b). This process is executed when a time-saving game state end command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when each time-saving game state ends.

In step Se3901, it is determined whether the additional notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344. If the additional notification flag is not set, in step Se3902, an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set. For example, if the normal time-limited game state is ending, the end effect for the normal time-limited game state is set to be executed.

In step Se3903, the remaining number of times image 823 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is erased. In the following step Se3904, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Se3901 (if the additional notification flag is set), that is, if an additional effect is executed in the special game turn when the time-saving game state ends, the end effect setting process ends without executing the processes from step Se3902 onwards. For example, if a special miss occurs during the time-saving play, ending the time-saving play state and suddenly transitioning to the time-saving play state, an additional effect is executed in the special game turn when the time-saving play state ends, but in such a case, the end effect of the time-saving game state is not executed.

The time-saving game mode also ends when a jackpot is won during the time-saving game mode and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode. In this case, after the processing of steps Se3902 to Se3904 is executed, the values of the actual remaining number counter area SS1, the remaining number of notifications counter area SS2, and the number of unnotified notifications counter area SS3, which are provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344, are cleared.

<About the flow of play during time-saving play>
The flow of play during the time-shortened game state will be explained. First, referring to FIG. 421, the basic flow when a special miss occurs during the time-shortened game state will be explained. Here, an example will be given of a case where the current game state is the normal time-shortened game state, a normal jackpot result occurs during a right-hand hit aimed at the second actuation port 63, and then a special miss occurs while remaining in the normal time-shortened game state corresponding to that normal jackpot result.

At timing t1, if the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot result and 7R normal jackpot result C (Fig. 373 (b)) is selected as the jackpot type, then in the special symbol play round corresponding to that win/loss lottery, the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 75 will be stopped and displayed in a pattern combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result (Fig. 421 (f)). Additionally, the special symbol display unit 43 will stop and display the stop result SD9 (Fig. 383) corresponding to the 7R normal jackpot result C during the period of the confirmed display in the special symbol play round.

When the special game play ends at timing t2, an open/close execution mode begins in which the variable winning device 65 opens and closes (Figure 421 (b)). In this case, in the open/close execution mode, seven rounds of play are played based on the fact that the current jackpot result is a 7R regular jackpot result C.

When the opening/closing execution mode ends at timing t3, a transition to the normal time-limited play state occurs (Figure 421 (c)). The symbol display device 75 executes a start effect corresponding to the transition to the normal time-limited play state (Figure 421 (g)).

At that time, the main control device 162 determines the upper limit number of times (e.g., 200 times, Figure 373) corresponding to the type of jackpot result this time, which is 7R normal jackpot result C, and sets the value corresponding to this determined upper limit number of times in the support counter area SC of RAM 314. As a result, the number of times (remaining times) that special gameplay can be played while in normal time-saving game mode is set to 200 times.

In addition, the effect control device 143 determines the number of remaining plays in the current normal time-saving game state based on the normal time-saving start command from the main control device 162, and performs a lottery for the initial notification number. The initial notification number is the remaining number of plays to be notified at the start of the time-saving game state, and is notified by the remaining number image 823 in the above-mentioned start effect. The lottery for the initial notification number is performed within the range of the actual remaining number, and is so that the initial notification number is equal to or less than the actual remaining number.

Here, for example, 100 times is selected as the initial number of times to be notified. Therefore, at the start of the normal time-saving game mode, only 100 times, a portion of the actual remaining number of times (200 times), will be notified, and the remaining 100 times will be the remaining number of times that have not yet been notified.

In the effect control device 143, a value corresponding to the actual remaining number of times (200 times), a value corresponding to the initial number of times notified (100 times), and a value corresponding to the remaining number of times not yet notified (100 times) are set in the actual remaining number of times counter area SS1, the notified remaining number of times counter area SS2, and the notified remaining number of times counter area SS3 of RAM 344, respectively. Of these, the values in the actual remaining number of times counter area SS1 and the notified remaining number of times counter area SS2 are decremented by 1 each time a special game play is executed. In this way, the effect control device 143 updates and manages the actual remaining number of times and the notified remaining number of times (the remaining number of times recognized by the player through the remaining number of times image 823).

Let us assume that a special miss occurs on the 80th special symbol play (timing t4) after transitioning to the normal time-saving play state, and the type of miss is special miss result A (Fig. 374 (b)). Based on the special miss result A, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result SD15 (Fig. 384 (b)) during the confirmation display period for that special symbol play.

The main control unit 162 also determines whether to continue the normal time-saving game state (time-saving game state) during the current stay, or to transition to a sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result. When making this determination, the maximum number of times the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result can be entered is first determined. As mentioned above, since the current special miss result is special miss result A, the corresponding maximum number of times is determined to be 200.

The current remaining number of times in the time-saving mode (120 times) is then compared with the maximum number of times (200 times) corresponding to this special miss result, and the allocation is performed so that the time-saving mode with the greater number of times is prioritized. In this case, since the maximum number of times corresponding to this special miss result is greater than the current remaining number of times in the time-saving mode, a sudden transition to the time-saving mode is decided.

In a special symbol game turn that results in a special miss, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game turn effect (Figure 421 (h)). As a result, the effect display on the symbol display device 75 notifies the player that a special miss has occurred.

Furthermore, at the start of the confirmation display for that special game round (timing t5), the normal time-saving game state currently in effect is terminated, and a transition to a sudden time-saving game state (sudden time-saving game state A) corresponding to the current special miss result is performed (Fig. 421 (c) and (e)). At that time, the value in the support counter area SC of RAM 314 is rewritten from the value corresponding to the current time-saving game state to the value corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state to which the transition is made, and the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state is changed from 120 to 200.

In response to a fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162, the effect control unit 143 suddenly transitions to the time-saving game state and determines the maximum number of times K (200 times), and changes the value of the actual remaining number of times counter area SS1 in RAM 344 to a value corresponding to the maximum number of times K. In addition, the value of the unannounced number of times counter area SS3 in RAM 344 is changed to the subtracted value (180) obtained by subtracting the value (20) of the remaining number of times to be announced counter area SS2 at that time from the maximum number of times K.

Furthermore, the effect control device 143 executes a lottery for the number of notification additions M. The number of notification additions M is notified to the player as the remaining number of additional times through the addition effect. The lottery for the number of notification additions M is executed within the range of the value (180) of the unannounced number counter area SS3 changed as described above. For example, if 150 times is drawn as the number of notification additions M, after the special reach miss A effect is executed in the special symbol game play that results in a special miss, the first addition effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 to notify the player of the addition of 150 remaining times (Fig. 421 (i)).

Note that while Figure 421 shows the first additional effect being executed during the fixed display time, this effect may not be limited to the fixed display time, but may be executed during part of the variable display time, or may be executed across both the variable display time and the fixed display time.

In addition, the effect control device 143 updates the value of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 in RAM 344 based on the lottery result for the number of notification additions M. Specifically, the value (20) of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 during the time reduction mode plus the number of notification additions M (150) is added to obtain a new value (170) and set in the remaining notification count counter area SS2. As a result, the remaining count image 823 is displayed, reflecting the number of additions notified in the first addition effect.

Furthermore, the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 in RAM 344 is updated based on the lottery result for the number of additional notifications M. Specifically, the value (30) obtained by subtracting the number of additional notifications M (150) from the value (180) of the unannounced count counter area SS3 during the time reduction is set as the new value in the unannounced count counter area SS3. As a result, the remaining number of unannounced times as determined by the effect control device 143 is changed to the number reduced by the amount notified in the first additional effect.

The values in the remaining notification counter area SS2 and the unannounced notification counter area SS3 are updated at the start of the change in the special symbol gameplay that resulted in a special miss. However, this is not limited to this, and may be performed, for example, at the timing corresponding to a sudden transition to a time-saving gameplay state (the start of the confirmation display). In other words, as long as the processing is completed within the special symbol gameplay that resulted in a special miss, it may be performed at any time.

Next, we will explain other flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state, with reference to Figure 422. Note that the flow from timing t1 to timing t3 is the same as in Figure 421 above, so its explanation will be omitted.

Let's say that a special miss occurs on the 80th special symbol play (timing t4) after transitioning to the normal time-saving play mode, and the type of miss is special miss result C (Figure 374 (b)). Based on the special miss result C, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result SD17 during the confirmation display period for that special symbol play (Figure 422 (g)).

In addition, to determine whether to continue the normal time-saving game state (time-saving stay) during the stay or transition to a sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result, the upper limit number of times (50 times) corresponding to the current special miss result is determined, and this determined upper limit number is compared with the current remaining number of times in the time-saving stay (120 times). Here, because the current remaining number of times in the time-saving stay is greater than the upper limit number corresponding to the current special miss result, it is decided to restrict (disable) the transition to the sudden time-saving game state and continue the time-saving stay.

Based on the variation start command from the main control unit 162, the effect control device 143 determines that a sudden transition to time-saving game mode will not occur upon winning a special miss result. Then, on the condition that the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 at that time (the value corresponding to 100 remaining unannounced counts) is greater than a first predetermined number (e.g., 0), the special reach miss A effect is set to be executed in the current special chart play round that resulted in a special miss result (Fig. 422 (g)).

The effect control device 143 also draws the number of notification additions M. The drawing of the number of notification additions M is performed within the range of the value (100) of the unannounced count counter area SS3 at that time. For example, if 50 times is drawn as the number of notification additions M, after the special reach miss A effect is executed in the special symbol game play that results in a special miss, the first addition effect A is executed on the symbol display device 75 to announce the remaining 50 additions (Fig. 422 (h)).

Here, when a special miss occurs while in the time-shortened play state, the decision to suddenly transition to the time-shortened play state or continue the time-shortened play state is a measure to prevent multiple time-shortened play states from overlapping. However, if a sudden transition to the time-shortened play state is not implemented despite a special miss, the player will not receive the benefit of the special miss. Therefore, it is possible to conceal the fact that a special miss has occurred, for example, by executing a complete miss effect in that special play round. However, because the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss, even if the special miss result is concealed in the effect on the symbol display device 75, there is a risk that the player will realize that a special miss has occurred if they view the stop result on the special symbol display unit 43. As a result, the player will realize that the transition to the time-shortened play state has been suddenly restricted internally, and there is a concern that the player will be upset that they will not receive the benefit of the special miss result despite having drawn it.

In this regard, in this embodiment, if a special miss occurs but a sudden transition to the time-limited play state does not occur, a special miss A effect and a first additional effect are executed, and a notification effect is executed, including the same type of notification as when a sudden transition to the time-limited play state occurs (e.g., special symbol 811, additional image 826, etc.). Therefore, even if a win to the special miss result is detected from the stop result displayed on the special symbol display unit 43, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the content of the effect whether or not a sudden transition to the time-limited play state has occurred. In particular, the symbol display device 75 executes a special miss A effect to notify the player of a special miss result, and then executes a first additional effect to notify the player that the number of times remaining in the time-limited play state has increased. This gives the player the impression that an increase in the number of times remaining in the time-limited play state has actually occurred, even when the number of times remaining in the time-limited play state has not actually increased. This prevents the player from feeling bad even when a sudden transition to the time-limited play state is restricted, and makes it possible to effectively prevent a decrease in motivation to play.

What's more, by announcing a number of times less than the actual remaining number of times, the unannounced number of times is secured, and this is used to execute the first additional effect A (pseudo additional effect) in the event that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state does not occur, so that this effect can be executed while being consistent with the actual remaining number of times. In this case, even if the first additional effect A is executed in a situation where a transition does not occur, the time-saving game state will actually continue for at least the number of times announced by that effect, making it difficult for the player to determine whether the additional number of times by that effect is genuine, and giving the player a better impression that they have won an increase in the remaining number of times.

In the effect control device 143, the value of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 in RAM 344 is updated based on the result of the lottery for the number of notification additions M. Specifically, the value (20) of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 during the time reduction plus the number of notification additions M (50) is added to obtain a new value (70) and set in the remaining notification count counter area SS2. As a result, the remaining count image 823 is displayed, reflecting the number of additions notified in the first addition effect.

In addition, the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 in RAM 344 is updated based on the lottery result for the number of additional notifications M. Specifically, the value (50) obtained by subtracting the number of additional notifications M (50) from the value (100) of the unannounced count counter area SS3 during the time reduction is set as the new value in the unannounced count counter area SS3. As a result, the remaining number of unannounced times, as determined by the effect control device 143, is changed to the number reduced by the amount notified in the first additional effect.

In addition, if the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 at that time is equal to or less than the first predetermined number during a special game round that results in a special miss, the special reach miss B effect corresponding to the fact that the special miss result has not been achieved will be executed as the effect for that game round. In this case, the first additional effect will not be executed.

In this embodiment, the length of the variable display time during normal play and the manner in which the device opens and closes differ between the normal time-saving play state and the sudden time-saving play state. Specifically, in the sudden time-saving play state, the variable display time during normal play is shorter than in the normal time-saving play state (Figure 401 (b)), and the number of times the normal electric device 63a opens during the device open and close play is greater (Figures 402 (b), (d)). Furthermore, the probability of winning the support lottery in the normal time-saving play state is higher than in the sudden time-saving play state (Figures 375 (b), (c)). For this reason, if the behavior of the normal electric device 63a during device opening and closing play or the duration of the normal game cycle changes with the special game cycle resulting in a special miss as the boundary, the player will be able to notice that they have suddenly transitioned to the time-shortened game state in the middle of the normal time-shortened game state. Conversely, if there is no change in these behaviors before and after the special game cycle resulting in a special miss, the player will be able to notice that they have not suddenly transitioned to the time-shortened game state and that the normal time-shortened game state has continued.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a special miss occurs while in the time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is compared with the upper limit number of times corresponding to the current special miss result, and the time-shortened game state with the higher number of times is adopted. Therefore, if the player notices that the transition to the time-shortened game state has not suddenly occurred and that the normal time-shortened game state has continued, it can be predicted that the remaining number of times in the normal time-shortened game state, in which the player is in the time-shortened game state, is greater than the upper limit number of times corresponding to the current special miss result.

In such a situation, if the player remembers the display format of stop results SD15-SD17 corresponding to the special miss result and can derive the corresponding upper limit number of times from the image stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 43, it becomes possible to predict how many times the time-saving feature will remain. For example, if stop result SD16 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 and 100 times can be derived as the corresponding upper limit number of times, it is possible to predict that the remaining number of times in the time-saving feature will be at least 100 times. With this configuration, the benefit of a player remembering each stop result corresponding to a special miss result is that a game of predicting the remaining number of times in the time-saving feature can be added when a special miss result occurs, which can increase the player's interest.

Furthermore, the remaining number of times displayed through the remaining number image 823 during time-saving play differs from the actual remaining number of times, making it difficult to determine the actual remaining number of times during time-saving play. This encourages players to remember each stop result corresponding to a special miss and attempt to predict the remaining number of times during time-saving play, making it possible to appropriately enhance the gameplay by making such predictions.

In this embodiment, there is no difference in the presentation (e.g., background image, etc.) on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 during the normal time-saving game state and the sudden time-saving game state, making it difficult for a player to tell whether they are in the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state by looking only at the display screen G. In other words, by carefully observing the execution period of the normal game round and the behavior of the normal electric device 63a during the device opening and closing game, it becomes possible to determine whether the normal time-saving game state has suddenly switched to the time-saving game state, or whether such a switch has not occurred and the normal time-saving game state has remained unchanged, thereby increasing the difficulty of this determination to a certain extent. As a result, if a special miss result occurs but a sudden transition to the time-saving game state does not occur, the special reach miss A presentation and the first additional presentation are executed, preventing excessive impairment of the effect of making it difficult for the player to notice the restriction on transition to the sudden time-saving game state, and achieving an optimal balance with this configuration.

Figures 421 and 422 show an example of a special miss in a normal time-saving game state, but even if a special miss occurs in a ceiling time-saving game state or a sudden time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving state is compared with the current upper limit, and depending on which number is greater, the system determines whether to continue the time-saving state or transition to a sudden time-saving game state. Similarly to the above, if the system transitions to a sudden time-saving game state, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect and the first additional effect A in the special symbol play count that resulted in the special miss, and if the time-saving state is continued, the system determines whether to execute the special reach miss A effect and the first additional effect A based on the value of the unannounced number counter area SS3 (the status of the remaining number of unannounced times).

In addition, if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times (990 times) while in the normal time-saving game state, the ceiling number of times can only be reached during the normal time-saving game state, where the ceiling number of times is 3000 times. In this case, the remaining number of times (2010 times) in the current time-saving game state will be greater than the ceiling number of times (1100 times) in the time-saving game state. For this reason, transition to the time-saving game state with the ceiling number of times is restricted, and the current time-saving game state will continue.

In addition, if the number of unsuccessful plays reaches the upper limit while the game is in the sudden time-saving play state, the magnitude of the remaining number of plays in the time-saving play state and the upper limit of the time-saving play state will change depending on the timing and type of transition to the sudden time-saving play state. Therefore, depending on the results of each comparison, it is determined whether the sudden time-saving play state will continue or a transition to the time-saving play state will occur.

Next, we will explain the flow of how to perform an additional effect when there is no special miss result in the time-saving game mode, with reference to Figures 423 and 424. Here, we will explain the example of a situation where a right-hand hit aimed at the second operating port 63 results in a 3R normal jackpot result B (Figure 373), and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game transitions to the normal time-saving game mode, which has a maximum number of plays of 300.

When a transition to the normal time-saving game state, in which the upper limit is 300 times, occurs at timing t1, the effect control device 143 sets a value (300) corresponding to the upper limit in the actual remaining number counter area SS1 of RAM 344. The effect control device 143 also performs a lottery to determine the initial number of times to be notified. Here, it is assumed that 70 times is selected as the initial number of times to be notified.

In response to this, a value (70) corresponding to the initial number of notifications is set in the remaining notification counter area SS2 of RAM 344, and a subtraction value (230) obtained by subtracting the initial number of notifications from the upper limit number is set in the unnotified notification counter area SS3 of RAM 344. Of these, the values in the actual remaining number counter area SS1 and the remaining notification number counter area SS2 are subtracted by 1 each time a special game is played.

The 40th special symbol game play (timing t2) after the transition to the normal time-saving game state results in a normal miss, and stop result SD19 (Fig. 385(a)) is selected as the corresponding stop result. In this case, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the selected stop result SD19 in a stopped state during the confirmation display period for that special symbol game play (Fig. 424(a)). Furthermore, the main control unit 162 selects variation pattern W3 (Fig. 397(d)) as the variation pattern for that special symbol game play.

The effect control device 143 determines the selection of variation pattern W3 based on the variation start command from the main control device 162. In this case, the special reach miss A effect is set to be executed in the current special game round, provided that the value of the unannounced number counter area SS3 at that time (the value corresponding to 190 remaining unannounced times) is greater than the first predetermined number (Fig. 424 (a)).

The effect control device 143 also draws the number of notification additions M. For example, if 50 is drawn as the number of notification additions M, after the special reach miss A effect is executed in the special symbol game play that results in a special miss, the first addition effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 to announce the remaining 50 additions (Figure 424 (b)).

In this way, the special reach miss A effect and the first added effect are executed not only when a special miss occurs, but also when a normal miss occurs, making the player feel that the probability of a special miss is higher than the actual probability. This gives the player the impression that the remaining number of plays is more likely to be added during the time-saving game mode, making it possible to favorably increase motivation to play.

In this case, when a normal miss occurs and stop result SD19 is displayed as the stop result announcing a normal miss, the special miss A effect and the first additional effect are executed. Here, stop result SD19 has multiple lit display segments among display segments SG1-SG8, making it more difficult to distinguish from SD15-SD17, which correspond to a special miss, compared to stop result SD18 (Fig. 385(a)), which has only one lit display segment. Therefore, even if a player is looking at the special symbol display unit 43, it is difficult for them to realize that the result of the win/lose lottery for that special symbol play round is not a special miss, but actually a normal miss, and the special miss A effect and the first additional effect are executed in this state. This makes it easier for players to believe that an additional number of remaining plays has been announced in a situation where a special miss occurs, making it possible to more appropriately give the impression that an additional play is likely to occur.

In the effect control device 143, during the special game round in which the stop result SD19 is displayed, the value of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 in RAM 344 is updated based on the lottery result for the number of notification additions M. Specifically, the value (30) of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 during the time-saving mode plus the number of notification additions M (50) is added to obtain a new value (80) and set in the remaining notification count counter area SS2. As a result, the remaining count image 823 is displayed, reflecting the number of additions notified in the first addition effect.

In addition, the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 in RAM 344 is updated based on the lottery result for the number of additional notifications M. Specifically, the value (180) obtained by subtracting the number of additional notifications M (50) from the value (230) of the unannounced count counter area SS3 during time reduction is set as the new value in the unannounced count counter area SS3. As a result, the remaining number of unannounced times, as determined by the effect control device 143, is changed to the number reduced by the amount notified in the first additional effect.

The remaining notification counter area SS2 and the unannounced notification counter area SS3 are updated when the special game play cycle begins to change. However, this is not limited to this, and may be performed, for example, when the confirmation display begins. In other words, as long as the processing is completed within the special game play cycle, it may be performed at any time.

In addition, if the value of the unannounced count counter area SS3 at that time during the above-mentioned special game round is less than or equal to the first predetermined number, a special reach miss B effect or a normal reach miss effect will be executed as the effect for that game round. The special reach miss B effect is a false effect that is paired with the special reach miss A effect, and is an effect for a game round that corresponds to a non-special miss result. When these reach miss effects are executed, the first additional effect will not be executed.

When the 75th special game round starts at time t2, when the number of additional notifications M is reflected and the value of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 is updated to 80 (time t3), the value of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 becomes a second predetermined number (for example, 5) or less. In other words, the remaining number of times notified to the player via the remaining count image 823 becomes a fixed value close to 0 or less. Here, the result of the win/loss lottery in the 75th special game round is a normal loss, and variation pattern 21H, which corresponds to the complete loss effect, is selected as the variation pattern.

In this case, the effect control device 143 is set to execute a complete miss effect as the effect for that special symbol game round (Fig. 424 (c)). Also, on the condition that the value of the unannounced number counter area SS3 at that time (the value corresponding to 190 remaining unannounced times) is greater than the first predetermined number, the effect control device 143 is set to execute a second additional effect A during that special symbol game round (Fig. 417 (b)).

When the second additional effect A is executed, the value (180) of the unannounced count counter area SS3 at that time is referenced, and the number of additional notifications M is drawn within that range. For example, if 100 is drawn as the number of additional notifications M, then after the button operation instruction image in Figure 417 (b), a notification image is displayed announcing that 100 more notifications will be added to the remaining number of times.

In this way, when the remaining number of times displayed on the notification falls below the second predetermined number, the second additional effect A is executed, increasing the remaining number of times displayed on the notification, preventing the remaining number of times from becoming zero. For example, if the time-saving game state continues even after the remaining number of times recognized by the player through the remaining number of times image 823 has run out, it may give an unnatural impression, and there is a concern that the player may become aware that the remaining number of times being displayed is different from the actual remaining number of times. In this regard, this configuration prevents the remaining number of times displayed on the notification from becoming zero while the time-saving game state continues, making it difficult for the player to realize that the notification is being made while some of the actual remaining number of times is being concealed.

During a special game in which the second additional effect A is executed, the effect control device 143 updates the remaining notification count counter area SS2 and the unannounced count counter area SS3. That is, the value (5) of the remaining notification count counter area SS2 during the time reduction plus the number of additional notification counts M (100) is added to the new value (105) and set in the remaining notification count counter area SS2, and the value (180) of the unannounced count counter area SS3 during the time reduction minus the number of additional notification counts M (100) is added to the new value (80) and set in the unannounced count counter area SS3.

If a variation pattern other than variation pattern 21H is selected during the special game, the second additional effect A will not be executed.

After that, in the 55th special symbol game (timing t4), the result of the lottery is a normal miss, and variation pattern 21H, which corresponds to the complete miss effect, is selected as the variation pattern. Also, in this special symbol game, the execution lottery for the second additional effect A in the effect control device 143 is won.

In this case, the effect control device 143 is set to execute a complete miss effect as the effect for that special play round, and also to execute the second added effect A. As a result, the second added effect A can occur even if the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 823 is greater than the second predetermined number, preventing an unnatural impression. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the addition of the remaining number of times due to this effect is artificial, making it possible to appropriately enhance the effect of the effect.

<Regarding the stop result on the special image display unit 43>
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, by memorizing each stop result corresponding to a special miss result, the player can predict the remaining number of times of the stay time reduction when a special miss result occurs. Based on this, the configuration of the stop results displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 has been devised, and such devise will be explained below with reference to Figures 383 to 385.

As shown in Figures 383 and 384(b), there are a relatively large number of stop results corresponding to normal jackpot results (stop results SD3 to SD14), and a relatively small number of stop results corresponding to special miss results (stop results SD15 to SD17). This makes it difficult for players to remember the display modes of each stop result corresponding to a normal jackpot result, and makes it easier for players to remember the display modes of each stop result corresponding to a special miss result. Therefore, in a situation where a transition to the normal time-saving game state occurs and then a special miss occurs midway through, the upper limit (remaining number of times) of the normal time-saving game state to which the player transitions first is difficult to identify from the stop results on the special symbol display unit 43, while the upper limit of the number of times of the sudden time-saving game state upon winning the later special miss result is easy to identify from the stop results on the special symbol display unit 43, making it possible to more effectively enjoy a game in which the player uses a special miss result as an opportunity to predict the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode.

However, if the display is configured so that a player can easily identify a stop result corresponding to a special miss result, it becomes too easy to predict the number of times remaining for the time-saving feature. As a result, it becomes easy to determine that the actual number of times remaining is greater than the number of times indicated, which raises concerns that the effect of the additional effects may be diminished. Therefore, this embodiment also incorporates a feature to prevent a stop result corresponding to a special miss result from being too easily identified when it is displayed. These features are explained below.

As shown in Figures 384(b) and 385(a), multiple types of stop results are set for stop results corresponding to special misses and stop results corresponding to normal misses. In this case, since there are multiple display modes for each, the burden on the player to remember each display mode for stop results corresponding to special misses and stop results corresponding to normal misses increases. This makes it more difficult to distinguish between them, and increases the difficulty of identifying that a special miss has occurred.

Stop results corresponding to special misses and stop results corresponding to normal misses are each set to include stop results with multiple lit display segments. The more lit display segments there are, the more complex the display pattern becomes and the more difficult it is to remember. However, because stop results with such display patterns exist for both special misses and normal misses, it is possible to increase the difficulty of distinguishing whether the stop result displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 during a special symbol game play with a miss corresponds to a special miss or a normal miss.

However, even in this case, the number of stop results with multiple lit display segments is three for stop results corresponding to special misses, while it is one for stop results corresponding to normal misses, with the latter being kept lower than the former. As a result, when a stop result with multiple lit display segments is displayed during a special play cycle with a miss, the player can predict that it is likely to correspond to a special miss, preventing the difficulty of identification from becoming excessively high.

As shown in Figure 385(a), multiple stop results, including stop results SD18 and SD19, are provided as stop results corresponding to normal miss results, with stop result SD18 having one lit display segment and stop result SD19 having multiple lit display segments. In this case, by having different numbers of lit display segments for stop results SD18 and SD19, it becomes difficult to tell that stop results SD18 and SD19 correspond to the same type of miss result (normal miss result). This makes it easier to tell whether the displayed stop result corresponds to a normal miss result, and ultimately makes it easier to tell that a special miss result has occurred.

As shown in Figures 384(b) and 385(a), stop results SD15-SD17 corresponding to special misses are set to include stop result SD17, which has the same number of lit display segments (3) as stop result SD19 corresponding to a normal miss. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the result corresponds to a special miss or a normal miss from the number of lit display segments, making it easier to identify that a special miss has occurred.

As shown in Figures 384(b) and 385(a), the display segments that are lit for stop result SD19, which corresponds to a normal miss result, and stop result SD17, which corresponds to a special miss result, are set to overlap. Specifically, display segments SG2 and SG4 are lit for both stop results SD19 and SD17. This makes it possible to make the stop results SD19 and SD17 look similar, making them difficult to distinguish.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

If a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state and transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly restricted, the special reach miss A effect or first added effect A will be executed, just as in the case of a sudden transition to the time-saving game state.

In pachinko gaming machines, notifications corresponding to the results of the win/lose lottery must be made on the special symbol display unit 43. However, if a special loss occurs and the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly restricted, the player may be able to see the special symbol display unit 43 and realize that a special loss has occurred, which could lead to the player noticing that the transition restriction is being implemented. If the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly restricted, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the special loss result, even though they have won. Therefore, if the player notices the implementation of this restriction, there is a concern that this will give the impression that they have lost out, which could upset the player.

In this regard, with this configuration, when a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted, a special reach miss A effect or a first added effect A is executed in response to the transition, making it difficult to notice that a restriction has been implemented and preventing the player from feeling upset. Furthermore, by giving the impression that a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state has occurred (in terms of the effect, the remaining number of plays is added), it is possible to lift the player's spirits and increase their interest in the game.

As a response to the sudden transition to time-saving play mode, an additional effect is implemented to notify players of the additional number of plays remaining in time-saving play mode.

The above configuration allows the player to recognize that the number of remaining plays in the time-saving play state has increased or been added. As a result, even though internally there is a sudden restriction on transitioning to the time-saving play state, from the player's perspective it appears as if they have hit a special miss result and won an extension of the time-saving play state, preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play even while the above-mentioned transition restriction is in place.

Furthermore, by implementing additional effects, it is possible to create the impression that the time-shortened game state is continuing, reducing the unnaturalness that can occur when transition restrictions are implemented. For example, when a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state occurs, if an effect for ending the time-shortened play state is implemented and then an effect for starting the time-shortened play state is suddenly implemented, the boundary between the previous and next time-shortened game states becomes clear in terms of the presentation. If this were implemented in the same way when the transition is restricted, there is a concern that it could create an unnatural impression, as no transition actually occurs. In this regard, by using additional effects to connect the end and start states without clearly indicating them, it is possible to blur the boundary between time-shortened game states, making it possible to prevent an unnatural impression even when no transition actually occurs and the time-shortened play state is simply continuing.

If the result of the special drawing lottery is a normal miss, the special reach miss A effect or the first added effect A can be executed.

With the above configuration, the special reach miss A effect and first added effect A are executed not only when the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly restricted, but also when a special miss result has not occurred. This makes it less noticeable when the transition is restricted, preventing an unnatural impression. This makes it even more difficult to notice that the transition is restricted.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, the special reach miss A effect and the first additional effect A are executed in both the case of a special miss result and a normal miss result, so the number of times these effects appear is greater than the number of times the special miss result occurs. This gives the impression that it is easy to hit a special miss result (in other words, it is easy for the remaining number of times to be added), making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A remaining number image 823 is displayed to indicate the number of times remaining in the time-saving game state, and the remaining number image 823 indicates a number that is less than the actual number of times remaining.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times for the time-saving game state during the player's stay is reported as less than the actual remaining number, so a portion of the actual remaining number can be reserved as the unreported remaining number. By using this unreported remaining number to implement additional effects when a sudden transition to the time-saving game state is restricted or when a normal miss occurs, these additional effects can be implemented while aligning with the actual remaining number of times. In other words, from the player's perspective, it appears as if the time-saving game state is continuing for the number of times reported in the additional effect, giving the impression that the remaining number of times has actually been increased. This makes it difficult to tell that the notification is a false notification, making it difficult to notice that the transition restriction is being implemented.

The system determines whether the remaining number of times indicated by the notification is less than a predetermined number (second predetermined number), and executes an additional effect based on the result.

If the system notifies a player of a number less than the actual number remaining during the time-saving play state, there is a possibility that the remaining number of times indicated will be exhausted before the time-saving play state ends. In this regard, when the remaining number of times indicated becomes low, an additional effect is executed regardless of the result of the lottery or whether or not there is a transition limit, so the remaining number of times indicated can be replenished each time the remaining number of times indicated becomes low. This prevents the remaining number of times indicated from being exhausted in the middle of the time-saving play state, making it possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural.

In this case, the additional effects are configured to have a first additional effect and a second additional effect with different durations. With this configuration, the additional effects can be executed not only when a variation pattern (variable display time) for a reach miss effect is selected, but also when a variation pattern for a complete miss effect is selected, making it possible to appropriately replenish the remaining number of times.

The normal time-saving game state and the sudden time-saving game state have different aspects, such as the length of the variable display time during normal game turns, the behavior of the normal electric device 63a during device opening and closing play, and the probability of winning in the support lottery.If a special miss occurs during normal time-saving game mode, the remaining number of turns in the normal time-saving game state at that time is compared with the upper limit of the number of turns in the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss, and the time-saving game state with the greater number of turns is prioritized.

With the above configuration, if a special miss occurs during normal time-saving play, the player can determine whether changes occur in the length of the variable display time during normal play, the behavior of the normal electric device 63a during device opening/closing play, the probability of winning in the support lottery, and other aspects, allowing the player to enjoy guessing whether continuation of the normal time-saving play state or a transition to a sudden time-saving play state has been selected. In this case, the time-saving play state with the most remaining plays is selected. For example, if the player guesses that continuation of the normal time-saving play state has been selected, they can infer that the number of remaining plays in the normal time-saving play state at the time of the special miss exceeds the upper limit for the sudden time-saving play state. This enhances the excitement of guessing which time-saving play state has been selected based on whether or not there is a change in the play state.

In addition, sudden time-saving game states A through C, each with a different maximum number of plays, are provided as sudden time-saving game states, and stop results SD15 through SD17 are provided corresponding to these sudden time-saving game states A through C. By memorizing the display of stop results SD15 through SD17, players can identify the type of sudden time-saving game state and the maximum number of plays from the stop results displayed when a special miss occurs. By using these identification results to predict the selected time-saving game state, the remaining number of plays in the normal time-saving game state can be more specifically predicted. For example, if the maximum number of plays identified from the stop results is 200, it can be predicted that the remaining number of plays in the normal time-saving game state is at least 200. This can further enhance the excitement of games in which players must guess which time-saving game state has been selected based on whether or not there is a change in the state.

The number of stop results corresponding to special misses (stop results SD15-SD17) is configured to be fewer than the number of stop results corresponding to regular jackpots (stop results SD3-SD14).

The above configuration makes it difficult for players to remember the display modes of each stop result corresponding to a normal jackpot result, and makes it easier for players to remember the display modes of each stop result corresponding to a special miss result. Therefore, in a situation where a transition to the normal time-saving game state occurs and then a special miss result occurs midway through, the upper limit (remaining number of times) of the normal time-saving game state to which the transition occurs first is difficult to identify from the stop results on the special symbol display unit 43, while the upper limit of the number of times of the sudden time-saving game state upon winning the later special miss result can be easily identified from the stop results on the special symbol display unit 43, making it possible to more effectively enjoy a game in which the remaining number of times to stay in the time-saving state is predicted when a special miss result occurs.

<Modification 1>
A first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 425 to 427. In these figures, the same components as those in the fifth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the presentation during the time-saving game state differs from that in the fifth embodiment. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below.

The background image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 differs between the sudden time-saving play state, the normal time-saving play state, and the ceiling time-saving play state. Specifically, the background color during the time-saving effect implemented during the time-saving play state differs for each time-saving play state. That is, as shown in FIG. 425, the background color during the time-saving effect in the sudden time-saving play state is the first display color (e.g., purple), the background color during the time-saving effect in the normal time-saving play state is the second display color (e.g., reddish purple), and the background color during the time-saving effect in the ceiling time-saving play state is the third display color (e.g., blue-purple).

The presentation style when a special miss occurs during the time-shortened game state also differs from that of the fifth embodiment. Below, we will explain the flow of presentation when a special miss occurs during the time-shortened game state in this modified example. First, we will explain the case where a special miss occurs during a normal time-shortened game state and the game suddenly transitions to the time-shortened game state, with reference to Figure 426.

As shown in Figure 425 (b), during the time-saving effect in the normal time-saving play state, the background color is the second display color (for example, reddish purple). Then, suppose a special miss occurs during a specified special play while in the normal time-saving play state, and the number of times remaining in the normal time-saving play state during that time is 120, and the upper limit number of times corresponding to this special miss result is 200. In this case, because the upper limit number of times corresponding to this special miss result is greater than the current number of times remaining in the time-saving play state, a decision is made to suddenly transition to the time-saving play state.

In a special symbol game round that results in a special miss, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 (Fig. 426 (a)), and the fact that a special miss has occurred is announced. At the start of the confirmation display for that special symbol game round, the normal time-limited game state that was in effect during that round is terminated, and a transition to a sudden time-limited game state corresponding to the current special miss result is performed.

Furthermore, in a special game play that results in a special miss, after the execution of the special reach miss A effect, a change effect is executed that suggests a change in the time-saving game state or a change in the number of remaining plays. In this change effect, first, the entire display screen G is turned black 861 and goes dark (blacked out) (Figure 426 (b)). This blackout display may occur before or after the start of the confirmation display.

Then, a count notification screen 862 is displayed to notify the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. At this time, the background color of the count notification screen 862 is changed to the background color for the time-saving game state (first display color) in response to the sudden transition to the time-saving game state (Figure 426 (c)).

The remaining number of times notified by the number of times notification image 863 does not necessarily match the actual remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state to which the player has transitioned. That is, a portion of the actual remaining number of times may be notified, or the entire number may be notified. In such cases, even when only a portion of the remaining number of times is notified, the remaining number of times notified by the number of times notification image 863 is set to be greater than the previous remaining number notified by the remaining number image 823 (40 times in the case of Figure 426), in order to give the player the impression that the remaining number of times has increased.

After that, when the next special game (the first special game after the sudden transition to the time-saving game state) begins, a time-saving effect begins, with the background color (first display color) corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state (Fig. 426 (d)). During this time-saving effect, a remaining count image 823 corresponding to the count notified by the count notification image 863 is displayed in the corner of the display screen G.

Next, we will explain, with reference to Figure 427, what happens when a special miss occurs while in the normal time-saving game mode, but the normal time-saving game mode continues.

Let's say a special miss occurs during a specified special play while in normal time-saving play mode, and the number of times remaining in normal time-saving play mode at that time is 120, and the upper limit for the special miss result is 50. In this case, because the current number of times remaining in the time-saving play mode is greater than the upper limit for the special miss result, it is decided to limit (disable) the transition to the time-saving play mode and continue the time-saving play mode.

In a special symbol game round that results in a special miss, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 (Fig. 426 (a)), and the fact that a special miss has occurred is announced. Furthermore, in that special symbol game round, a change effect is executed after the special reach miss A effect is executed, just as in the case where a sudden transition to a time-saving game state occurs.

In the change effect, the entire display screen G is turned black 861, and then a count notification screen 862 is displayed to notify the number of times remaining in the time-shortened play state. At this time, the background color of the count notification screen 862 display screen is set to the background color for the normal time-shortened play state (second display color), in accordance with the continuation of the normal time-shortened play state (Figure 427(a)). Note that Figure 427(a) shows a case in which the entire actual remaining number of times is notified using the count notification image 863.

After the above change effect is executed, when the next special game play (the first special game play after it is decided to continue the normal time-saving game state) begins, a time-saving effect begins with a background color (second display color) corresponding to the normal time-saving game state (Fig. 427 (b)). During this time-saving effect, a remaining number image 823 corresponding to the number of times notified by the number of times notification image 863 is displayed in a corner of the display screen G.

As described above, in this modified example, the background color on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is different in the normal time-saving play state, ceiling time-saving play state, and sudden time-saving play state, and the display mode during the time-saving performance differs depending on the type of time-saving play state.

With this configuration, the player can determine whether or not there has been a change in state while viewing the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, and can therefore guess which time-saving game state was selected when a special miss occurs. In other words, by concentrating the focus of attention, the player can enjoy the guessing game while preventing oversight of the game presentation on the display screen G.

In this variation, the first display color for the sudden time-saving game state is used as the base color, while the second display color for the normal time-saving game state and the third display color for the ceiling time-saving game state are obtained by adding other hues to the above base color. Specifically, the second display color is a reddish-purple color that is slightly reddish compared to the purple of the first display color, and the third display color is a blue-purple color that is slightly bluish compared to the purple of the first display color. When comparing the three, the difference (degree of difference) between the first display color and the second display color, and between the first display color and the third display color is smaller than the difference between the second display color and the third display color. This is because, in the configuration of the fifth embodiment described above, which is the premise of this modified example, it is possible for a game to suddenly transition to a time-shortened game state in the middle of a normal time-shortened game state, or to suddenly transition to a ceiling-limit time-shortened game state in the middle of a time-shortened game state (changing from the second display color to the first display color, or from the first display color to the third display color), but it is not possible for a game to suddenly transition to a ceiling-limit time-shortened game state in the middle of a normal time-shortened game state (changing from the second display color to the third display color).

For example, if the game suddenly transitions to a time-saving game state in the middle of a normal time-saving game state, a large change in the background color could overemphasize the impression that the type of time-saving game state has changed, which could hinder the player's perception that the number of remaining plays has increased. In this regard, by keeping the degree of background color change relatively small between time-saving game states where a transition is expected, the change in the type of time-saving game state will not be too noticeable, making it easier to give the impression that the number of remaining plays has increased.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 428 to 432. In these figures, the same components as those in the fifth embodiment and modification 1 are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

In this modified example, the setting for when a special miss occurs for the image displayed in a stopped state on the special image display unit 43 differs from that in the fifth embodiment and modified example 1. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below.

<Fluctuation start processing>
The fluctuation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 428. This processing is executed in step Se506 of the special game play control processing (Fig. 380) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the fluctuation start processing of Fig. 382. In Fig. 428, the same step numbers are used for processing similar to that of Fig. 382, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Se4101, a jackpot determination (win/lose determination) is made to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. In this determination, the win/lose table corresponding to the current game state (lottery mode) is referenced, and it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the random number for a jackpot in the referenced win/lose table. For example, if the current game state is the normal game state (low probability mode), the above determination is made by reference to the win/lose table for low probability mode (Figure 372 (a)).

In step Se710, high-frequency support mode update processing is executed to update the remaining number of special game rounds that can be played in high-frequency support mode, and in the following step Se711, ceiling time-shortened game state transition determination processing is executed to determine whether a trigger for transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state has occurred. In step Se712, sudden time-shortened game state transition determination processing is executed to determine whether a trigger for transition to the sudden time-shortened game state has occurred. Details of steps Se710 to Se712 are as described with reference to Figures 389 to 392.

Here, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state in step Se711 and the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state in step Se712 include priority processing (step Se1309, step Se1505) that is executed when a transition trigger to the ceiling time-shortened game state or the sudden time-shortened game state is established while the player is in the time-shortened game state. The priority processing determines which time-shortened game state should be prioritized based on the remaining number of times the player is in the time-shortened game state during the current stay (remaining number of times during time-shortened play) and the upper limit number of times the player can enter the time-shortened game state corresponding to the established transition trigger (current upper limit number of times).

Specifically, the remaining number of times for time-saving stay is compared with the current maximum number of times, and if the remaining number of times for time-saving stay is greater than the current maximum number of times, a decision is made to prioritize time-saving stay and not to transition to the time-saving play state corresponding to the trigger, and to continue time-saving stay. Conversely, if the current maximum number of times for time-saving stay is greater than the remaining number of times for time-saving stay, a decision is made to terminate time-saving stay and transition to the time-saving play state corresponding to the trigger, and to prioritize the time-saving play state corresponding to the trigger. If a decision is made to transition to the time-saving play state corresponding to the trigger, a time-saving start flag for the time-saving play state in which the transition trigger was established is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 to record this fact (YES in step Se1404, step Se1406). For example, if the time-saving play state in which the transition trigger was established is a sudden time-saving play state, a sudden time-saving start flag is set.

In step Se4102, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot determination in step Se4101 is a winning jackpot. If a winning jackpot is determined, in step Se4103 the corresponding jackpot type table is referenced to determine the jackpot type (lottery for the jackpot type). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a jackpot result based on a win/lose lottery for the first special design, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special design (Figure 373 (a)), and if the current jackpot result is a jackpot result based on a win/lose lottery for the second special design, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the second special design (Figure 373 (b)).

In step Se4104, a jackpot type flag corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Se4103 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In the following step Se4105, the jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the jackpot stop result (jackpot pattern). Details of the jackpot stop result table are as described with reference to Figures 383 and 384(a).

If a negative judgment is made in step Se4102 (if the jackpot is not won), proceed to step Se4106, where it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment in step Se4101 is a special loss result. If it is a special loss result, in step Se4107, a special loss type flag corresponding to the type of special loss result is set in the various flags storage area 314e. For example, if the type of special loss result is special loss result A, the special loss A flag is set.

In step Se4108, a special miss stop result setting process is executed to set the special miss stop result (special miss pattern) to be displayed on the special symbol display unit 43. Here, the special miss stop result setting process in step Se4108 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 429.

In the process for setting the stop result for a special miss, first in step Se4201 it is determined whether the sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the sudden time-saving start flag has been set, it means that the result of the win/loss judgment is a special miss result, and that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state will occur based on that. Examples of such situations include when a special miss result occurs during normal game mode, resulting in a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, or when a special miss result occurs during time-saving game mode, and the priority process determines that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state will occur.

If step Se4201 returns a positive result (the sudden time-saving start flag is set), the process proceeds to step Se4202, where the first stop result table for special misses is obtained. This first stop result table is stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 for reference when transitioning to the sudden time-saving game state, and is similar to the stop result table for special misses (Figure 384 (b)) in the fifth embodiment described above. In the first stop result table for special misses, as shown in Figure 430 (a), stop results SD15 to SD17 are set as selectable stop results. These stop results SD15 to SD17 are similar to the stop results SD15 to SD17 in the fifth embodiment described above, and a pattern (special miss pattern) is displayed by lighting up two or more of the seven display segments SG1 to SG7 arranged on the segment display 801.

In step Se4203, the first stop result table for special misses obtained in step Se4202 is referenced, and the stop result to be displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 is set. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is read from the first stop result table, and set as the stop result for the current game round. For example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is "23," stop result SD17 is set as the stop result for the current game round. After step Se4203 is executed, the stop result setting process for special misses is terminated.

If step Se4201 returns a negative result, i.e., the sudden time-saving start flag is not set, this means that the result of the win/loss judgment is a special miss result, but the situation does not result in a sudden transition to the time-saving game state. This situation applies when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state, and the priority processing determines that the time-saving stay state should continue.

In such a case, the process proceeds to step Se4204, where the second stop result table for special misses is obtained. This second stop result table is stored in the various table storage area 313a, and is used as a reference when restricting a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state. The second stop result table for special misses will now be explained with reference to Figure 430(b).

The second stop result table stores one type of stop result data consisting of stop result SD20 as a stop result for a special miss. Of the multiple display segments SG1 to SG7, only the bottom-left display segment SG4 is lit for stop result data SD20. In other words, the image displayed is a single lit display segment, and the display format is similar to that of a stop result for a normal miss.

In the second stop result table for special misses, stop result SD20 is associated with "10" to "29" of the jackpot random number counter C1. In other words, when the second stop result table is referenced in a situation where the win/loss determination results in a special miss, stop result SD20 is always selected.

Returning to the explanation of the stop result setting process for special misses (Fig. 429), after executing the processing of step Se4204, the stop result is set in step Se4203. Here, the stop result SD20 read from the second stop result table for special misses is set as the stop result for the current game round.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 428), if a negative judgment is made in step Se4106 (if the result is not a special miss), it means that the result of this win/loss judgment is a normal miss result. In this case, proceed to step Se4109, and set the stop result for a normal miss (normal miss pattern) by referring to the stop result table for a normal miss stored in the stop result table memory area 313d. Here, the stop result table for a normal miss will be explained with reference to Fig. 430 (c).

As stop result tables for normal misses, a first special symbol stop result table for normal misses and a second special symbol stop result table for normal misses are set. The first special symbol stop result table for normal misses is referenced when the win/lose lottery based on winning the first operating port 62 results in a normal miss, and the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses is referenced when the win/lose lottery based on winning the second operating port 63 results in a normal miss. The first special symbol stop result table for normal misses is the same as the table in the fifth embodiment above (Figure 385 (b)), so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 430 (c), the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses stores multiple stop result data as stop results for normal misses. Specifically, two types of stop result data consisting of stop results SD18 and SD21 are stored. Stop result SD18 is when only the central display segment SG3 of the multiple display segments SG1 to SG7 is lit, and stop result SD21 is when only the upper right display segment SG7 is lit. In other words, each of these stop results SD18 and SD21 is a picture displayed by lighting up a single display segment, resulting in a simple display format.

In the second special symbol stop result table for normal misses, stop result SD18 is associated with "30" to "1977" of the jackpot random number counter C1, and stop result SD21 is associated with "1978" to "2999." In other words, stop result SD18 has a higher selection probability and is more likely to be selected than stop result SD21. However, this is not limited to this; for example, the selection probabilities of both may be equal, or stop result SD21 may be more likely to be selected than stop result SD18.

Returning to the explanation of the variation start process (Fig. 428), in step Se4109, it is determined whether the current normal miss result was due to the lottery for the first or second special design, and the stop result table corresponding to this determination result is referenced. Then, in the referenced stop result table, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is read and set as the stop result for the current game round.

After step Se4105, step Se4108, or step Se4109 is executed, step Se713 executes the variable display time setting process. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display pattern for the current game round is selected and set.

The variable display time setting process performed by the main control unit 162 is the same as in the fifth embodiment (Fig. 393) described above, but as described above, this modified example is configured so that when a special miss result is determined in the win/loss determination, a different stop result is set depending on whether or not a sudden transition restriction to a time-shortened game state is executed. In line with this, the configuration of the variable display time table for special miss results is different from that in the fifth embodiment described above. The variable display time table will now be explained with reference to Fig. 431.

The variable display time table for special misses (for time-shortened game mode) in Figure 431 is referenced when a special miss occurs during a special game turn in time-shortened game mode. This variable display time table is stored in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313 in place of the variable display time table for special misses (for time-shortened game mode) in Figure 397(b).

In the variable display time table for special misses in this modified example shown in Figure 431, the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on whether or not there is a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state; more specifically, it is configured so that a different variable pattern is selected depending on whether or not there is such a transition. Specifically, if there is a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state, variable pattern W1 (15 seconds) is selected, and if there is no sudden transition to a time-shortened game state, variable pattern W4 (8 seconds or 4 seconds) is selected. Variable pattern W1 corresponds to the special reach miss A effect, and variable pattern W4 corresponds to the complete miss effect. Therefore, if variable pattern W4 is selected in a situation where the result of the win/loss lottery is a special miss result, the effect control device 143 selects and executes the complete miss effect corresponding to the normal miss result as the effect for that special game round.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Figure 428), after executing the fluctuation display time setting process in step Se713, proceed to step Se714, where a fluctuation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Then, execute the processes from step Se715 onwards.

<About the flow of play during time-saving play>
The flow of the game during the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Fig. 432. Here, the case where the current game state is the normal time-saving game state (the situation of right-hand play aimed at the second actuation port 63) will be explained as an example.

If a special miss occurs during a special symbol play round during normal time-saving play mode, and a sudden transition to time-saving play mode is executed based on this, one of stop results SD15 to SD17 will be displayed on the special symbol display unit 43, as shown in Figure 432 (a). This stop result corresponds to the special miss result, and is selected by referring to the first stop result table for special misses (Figure 430 (a)). The stop result is displayed during the confirmed display period of the special symbol play round. Figure 432 (a) shows a case where the type of special miss result is special miss result C, and stop result SD17 is displayed.

In addition, during the special game cycle, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the pattern display device 75 as a game cycle effect. As a result, the effect display on the pattern display device 75 notifies the player that a special miss result has occurred. After the special reach miss A effect is executed, the first additional effect is executed, and the player is notified of the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state.

If a normal miss occurs during a special symbol play in the normal time-saving play state, either stop result SD18 or SD21 will be displayed on the special symbol display unit 43, as shown in Figure 432 (b). This stop result corresponds to a normal miss result, and is selected by referring to the stop result table for normal misses corresponding to the second special symbol (Figure 430 (c)). Figure 432 (b) shows a case where stop result SD18 is selected and displayed out of stop results SD18 and SD21.

Furthermore, if variation pattern 21H is selected in the special game round, a complete miss effect is executed on the pattern display device 75 as the game round effect. As a result, the effect display on the pattern display device 75 notifies the player that a normal miss has occurred. Note that if any of variation patterns 22H to 24H is selected, the various reach miss effects corresponding to each variation pattern are executed.

If a special miss occurs during a special symbol play in the normal time-saving play state, but transition to the sudden time-saving play state based on that result is restricted, the stop result SD20 is displayed as stopped on the special symbol display unit 43, as shown in Figure 432 (c). This stop result SD20 is selected by referring to the second stop result table for special misses (Figure 430 (b)).

Stop result SD20 corresponds to a special miss result, but only one display segment is lit, making it easy to confuse with stop results SD18 and SD21, which correspond to normal miss results. For this reason, even if a player is looking at the special symbol display section 43, it is difficult for them to realize that a special miss result has occurred, and it is easier for them to recognize that a normal miss result has occurred.

Furthermore, in the special game round, a complete miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a game round effect. In other words, the effect display on the symbol display device 75 also notifies the player of a normal miss result, making it even more difficult to notice that the result of this win/loss determination is a special miss result. In this case, the first additional effect is not executed.

In this way, if a special miss occurs but the game does not suddenly transition to the time-saving game state, a stop result similar to the stop result displayed when a normal miss occurs is displayed, preventing the player from recognizing that a special miss has occurred from the content displayed on the special symbol display unit 43. Therefore, even if the game does not suddenly transition to the time-saving game state, it does not seem unnatural, and prevents the player from noticing the restriction on the transition.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When a special miss occurs, the stop result displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 is determined taking into account the results of a determination of whether or not a sudden transition to a time-saving game state will occur.

This configuration allows the stop results on the special symbol display unit 43 to be adjusted based on whether or not there is a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, and if the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly restricted, it is possible to select and set a stop result display mode that makes it difficult for players to associate with a special failure result. This prevents players from understanding a special failure result from the display content on the special symbol display unit 43, making it difficult for players to notice that a transition restriction has been implemented.

In a game that results in a special miss, a process is executed to determine whether or not to transition to a time-saving game state, and then a process is executed to determine the stop result of the special symbol display unit 43. With this configuration, when determining the stop result corresponding to a special miss, it is possible to make a decision that appropriately reflects the result of the transition determination.

As a stop result for a special miss result, a stop result (stop result SD20) is provided in which the number of lit display segments (illuminated display sections) is the same as the stop result for a normal miss result (stop results SD18, SD21).

In the above configuration, when a special failure occurs and transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly restricted, the stop result SD20, which has the same number of lit display parts as the stop results SD18, SD21 for a normal failure, is displayed in the special symbol display unit 43, so that the stop display corresponding to the special failure can be made to resemble the stop display corresponding to a normal failure. This makes it possible to make the player believe that a normal failure has occurred, and prevents the special failure result from being easily identified from the display content of the special symbol display unit 43.

Multiple types of stop results are provided as stop results for special miss results. In addition to the stop result SD20 mentioned above, stop results SD15 to SD17 are provided, which have more lit display sections than stop results SD18 and SD21 for normal miss results.

In the above configuration, when a special miss occurs and a sudden transition to the time-saving game mode occurs, stop results SD15 to SD17, which have a greater number of lit display sections than stop results SD18 and SD21 for normal misses, are displayed, making it possible to display stop results corresponding to the special miss in a manner that is easy to distinguish from normal misses. In other words, some of the stop displays for a special miss can be configured to be difficult to distinguish from normal misses, while others are easy to distinguish. This prevents excessive impairment of the function of notifying the result of a special miss, while also preventing the special miss from being easily ascertained from the display content of the special symbol display section 43.

Several types of stop results (stop results SD18, SD21) are provided as stop results for normal miss results.

In the above configuration, the number of similar stop results, including the stop result SD20 for the special miss result, increases, increasing the burden on the player to distinguish and remember them. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to confuse the stop result SD20 for the special miss result with the stop results SD18, SD21 for the normal miss result, making it easier for the player to believe that a normal miss result has occurred when the stop result SD20 for the special miss result is displayed on the special symbol display unit 43. This prevents the special miss result from being identified from the display content of the special symbol display unit 43, making it more difficult for the player to notice that the transition restriction has been implemented.

If a special miss occurs and a sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs, a complete miss effect corresponding to a normal miss result is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. This configuration makes it more likely that the player has experienced a normal miss result, making it even more difficult for the player to notice that the transition restriction has been implemented.

<Other Modifications>
The fifth embodiment and each modified example are not limited to the above-described fifth embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the fifth embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the configurations to the fifth embodiment and each modified example. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the fifth embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

Furthermore, for ease of understanding, certain examples are specified as prerequisite configurations, such as "in Variation 1 of the fifth embodiment," but the following configurations are not limited to application to the specified prerequisite configurations (examples), and can also be applied to other embodiments and variations.

(1) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, a special losing result is set as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery. However, the special winning/losing lottery may draw a lottery to determine whether the result is a jackpot or a losing result, and if the result is a losing result, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of losing result) may be held to determine whether the result is a special losing result. In this case, the separate lottery may be held using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to drawing the type of losing result.

Also, instead of the lottery for determining the type of losing result, a lottery for transitioning to a time-saving game state may be held to determine whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving game state will be met. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random number values, such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving game state will be met.

In addition, the special drawing lottery may determine whether the result will be a jackpot, a special loss, or a normal loss, and if the result is a special loss, a separate drawing may be conducted to determine the type of special loss. In this case, the separate drawing may be conducted using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or variable type counter CS, or may be conducted using a random number dedicated to determining the type of special loss.

(2) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state (the support flag setting process) is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, but it may also be configured to be executed after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state may be executed during the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special symbol game round.

(3) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the transition to the time-shortened game state is triggered by a special miss result. However, the transition to the time-shortened game state may also be triggered by some other event. For example, the transition to the time-shortened game state may be triggered by a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passage section provided within the game area PE or the predetermined ball entry section.

In these cases, the support flag is set when a gaming ball enters a specific entry section or when a gaming ball passes through a specific passage section. Alternatively, instead of setting the support flag, a ball entry flag corresponding to the entry or a passage flag corresponding to the passage may be set. In this case, after the ball entry flag or passage flag is set, a switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode may be made based on the fact that these flags are set.

Note that a specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism and may be a type that is always open, or it may be a variable type that has an opening/closing mechanism and can be switched between an open state in which game balls can or do enter or it is easier for the game ball to enter, and a closed state in which game balls cannot or it is harder for the game ball to enter than in the open state. This also applies to the above-mentioned predetermined ball entry sections.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific entry section or passing section is provided within a predetermined entry section, only the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section will always enter or pass through the specific entry section or passing section. Alternatively, one or more other entry sections or passing sections different from the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and gaming balls that enter the predetermined entry section may be distributed, resulting in a situation in which a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section does not enter a specific entry section or pass through a specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is established when a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters a specific entry section or passes through a specific passing section, while a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is not established even if a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters another entry section or passes through another passing section.

(4) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sudden time-saving game state when a special miss occurs or the ceiling time-saving game state when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is configured to implement a second high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal support lottery is the same as in the normal game state. However, a first high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal support lottery is higher than in the normal game state may also be implemented. In this case, the winning probability of the normal support lottery in the sudden time-saving game state, etc. may be the same as in the normal time-saving game state that goes through the open/close execution mode, or it may be a different probability. For example, in order to ensure an advantage in the game state after the open/close execution mode, it is advisable to lower the winning probability of the support in the sudden time-saving game state, etc., than in the normal time-saving game state.

Furthermore, a second high-frequency support mode may be implemented in the normal time-saving game state that passes through the open/close execution mode, in which the probability of winning the normal support lottery is the same as in the normal game state.

(5) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the type of sudden time-saving game state and the type of special failure result correspond one-to-one, but they may also correspond one-to-multiple. In this case, the number of special failure results corresponding to one sudden time-saving game state may be the same for each sudden time-saving game state, or may be different.

(6) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration includes a normal time-shortened game state, a ceiling time-shortened game state, and a sudden time-shortened game state. However, the configuration may not include one or two of these. For example, the configuration may include a ceiling time-shortened game state and a sudden time-shortened game state without a normal time-shortened game state, or a configuration may include a sudden time-shortened game state without a normal time-shortened game state and a ceiling time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, while the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above are configured to have multiple types of sudden time-shortened game states, it is also possible to have a configuration that has only one type of sudden time-shortened game state. The same applies to the normal time-shortened game state, which may be configured to have only one type of normal time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, while the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above include a high probability game state, the configuration may also be such that the high probability game state is not included.

(7) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is ended (the support flag is cleared) at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round. However, it may be ended after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the time-saving game state may be ended during the confirmation display of the final game round, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special game round.

(8) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving play state is ended (the support flag is cleared) when the number of times special symbol play has been performed since the transition to the time-saving play state reaches the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the time-saving play state may be ended when the number of times a small win has been achieved in the special symbol win/loss lottery after the transition to the time-saving play state reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, five times).

In this configuration, if the conditions for transitioning to the time-shortened game state are met while the game is in the time-shortened game state, the remaining number of small wins during the time-shortened game state is compared with the maximum number of small wins in the time-shortened game state corresponding to the establishment of the transition condition, and the time-shortened game state with the higher number is adopted.

In addition, if both conditions are met, that is, the number of times the special symbol is played reaches the upper limit, and the number of times the small jackpot is achieved reaches the upper limit, the time-saving play state may be ended when one of these conditions is met, or the time-saving play state may be ended when both of these conditions are met.

By the way, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a small win, a small win game (one round of opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small win result) in which the variable winning device is opened and closed is executed. This small win game can be executed in a manner that is more disadvantageous to the player than a jackpot game (opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result). For example, the upper limit on the number of winning balls in the variable winning device may be set lower than in a jackpot game, or the upper limit opening time per opening may be set shorter than one round of play or the upper limit opening time per opening in a jackpot game, so that the expected number of balls won is lower than in a jackpot game.

Also, instead of or in addition to the above, the time-saving play state may be configured to end when the number of regular play times after switching to the time-saving play state reaches the upper limit. In this case, the time-saving play state may be configured to end for all regular play times regardless of the result of the support lottery, and when the number of such play times reaches the upper limit, or the time-saving play state may be configured to end for regular play times that result in a winning support lottery, and when the number of such play times reaches the upper limit, or the time-saving play state may be configured to end for regular play times that result in a losing support lottery, and when the number of such play times reaches the upper limit.

For example, if both the number of special game plays reaching the upper limit and the number of regular game plays reaching the upper limit are met, the time-saving game state may be ended when one of these conditions is met, or the time-saving game state may be ended when both of these conditions are met.

Also, instead of or in addition to the above, the time-shortened play state may be configured to end when the period since transitioning to the time-shortened play state reaches a predetermined upper limit. In such a configuration, if the conditions for transitioning to the time-shortened play state are met while the player is in the time-shortened play state, the remaining period of the time-shortened play state and the upper limit of the time-shortened play state corresponding to the establishment of the transition condition are compared, and the longer time-shortened play state is adopted.

(9) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, and the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is updated by subtracting one from that value each time a special game is played. However, instead of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, the number of times a special game has been played in the time-shortened game state may be updated by adding one to the value of the support counter area SC each time a special game is played. In this case, the time-shortened game state may be terminated when the updated counter value reaches the upper limit of the number of times.

(10) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a transition to a time-shortened game state is triggered by a special miss result. However, a transition to a high-probability game state may also be performed. In this case, the support mode in the high-probability game state may be a high-frequency support mode or a low-frequency support mode.

Instead of transitioning to a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state, a transition to a specific presentation mode may be made in which special presentations not seen in the normal presentation mode are performed or special characters appear. A transition to a state in which a special lottery not performed in the normal game state is performed may also be made. In these cases, the player is advantageous in that they can see special presentations or participate in special lotteries. One example of a special lottery is a points lottery. A transition to a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or an opening/closing execution mode may be made depending on the points awarded in the point lottery or the total number of points awarded. Special presentations (for example, character costumes) may also be unlocked, or behind-the-scenes development stories about the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed. A points lottery may also be performed based on a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry or specific passing section located within the play area PE or the designated ball entry section.

(11) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, notifications corresponding to winning special miss results are executed by the special symbol display unit 43 or the symbol display device 75, but they may also be executed by other notification units. Notifications are not limited to image displays, and may be made using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or by operating decorative movable bodies (movable gadgets) for moving effects in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, the notifications do not necessarily have to be visual notifications, but may also be auditory notifications in the form of sound from the speaker unit 29. The same applies to notifications of the remaining number of time-saving turns and additional effects, etc.

(12) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a special reach effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special failure result. However, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may also be made by a game-time effect that does not involve a reach effect. Furthermore, the notification does not have to be made using the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may be made by displaying a predetermined pattern, such as a predetermined character, on the symbol display device 75.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed on the pattern display device 75 is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display unit 43 and is displayed in a smaller size than the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying the fourth pattern in a specific manner that differs from the normal manner. Furthermore, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by combining the manner in which the fourth pattern is displayed in a stopped state with at least some of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that are displayed in a stopped state.

The notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made throughout the entire special game round, or may be made during a portion of the special game round. Incidentally, the special reach effects exemplified in the fifth embodiment and each variant example above are configured so that the player cannot tell whether or not a special miss result has occurred at the start of the special game round, but can tell that it is a special miss result at the end of the special game round. Therefore, it can be said that a notification corresponding to the special miss result is made during a portion of the special game round.

(13) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the player is only able to recognize that a special miss has occurred from the stopping state of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3, and is unable or difficult to recognize the type of special miss (the type of sudden time-saving game state). However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which the type is recognizable or easily recognizable from the stopping state of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. For example, when a sudden transition to time-saving game state A occurs, a configuration may be considered in which a 7 symbol is set as the reach symbol in the special reach miss A presentation, or in which a 7 symbol is more likely to be set than in other sudden time-saving game states (e.g., sudden time-saving game state B). Furthermore, when a sudden transition to time-saving game state A occurs, a configuration may be considered in which a double reach is set, or in which a double reach is more likely to be set than in other sudden time-saving game states (e.g., sudden time-saving game state B).

(14) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the type of lottery result includes a special losing result in both the win/lose lottery based on winning through the first actuation port 62 and the win/lose lottery based on winning through the second actuation port 63. However, the configuration may also be such that the special losing result is included only in the result of the win/lose lottery based on winning through either actuation port 62, 63. For example, the result of the win/lose lottery based on winning through the second actuation port 63 may include a special losing result, while the result of the win/lose lottery based on winning through the first actuation port 62 may not include a special losing result.

(15) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the results of the win/loss lottery conducted during the high probability game state are configured not to include special loss results, but they may also be configured to include special loss results. In other words, they may be configured so that a special loss result occurs during a high probability game state, causing a sudden transition to a time-saving game state.

(16) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, if a special miss occurs during a time-shortened game state, priority processing is executed, resulting in a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state and a restriction on such a transition. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is uniformly restricted in all cases where a special miss occurs during a time-shortened game state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment and each of the variants described above, priority processing is executed even when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number while in the time-saving game state, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which this processing is not executed and transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is uniformly restricted.

(17) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a special miss occurs in a time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times the player can stay in the time-shortened game state is compared with the current upper limit (the upper limit for the number of times the player can enter the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the type of specific miss result), and the result is used to determine whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state or to continue the time-shortened game state. However, instead of performing the above comparison, it is also possible to predetermine whether to adopt the time-shortened game state during the stay or the sudden time-shortened game state based on the current special miss result. For example, a unique priority can be set for each type of time-shortened game state, and when a condition for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is met in a time-shortened game state, the priority of each time-shortened game state can be compared, and the time-shortened game state with the higher priority can be adopted.

Even with the above configuration, by configuring the normal time-saving game state and the sudden time-saving game state to have different behaviors, the player can determine whether a change in behavior has occurred during the process of playing the normal time-saving game state, and can be given the opportunity to guess whether the player has chosen to continue in the normal time-saving game state or transition to the sudden time-saving game state when a special miss occurs.

(18) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the system is configured to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state when the current maximum number of times is greater than the remaining number of times in the time-shortened mode. However, the system may also be configured to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state when the current maximum number of times is greater than or equal to the remaining number of times in the time-shortened mode. In other words, the system may be configured to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state when the current maximum number of times and the remaining number of times in the time-shortened mode are the same.

(19) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, if a condition for transitioning to the time-shortened game state is met while the game is in the time-shortened game state, the transition to the time-shortened game state based on the condition may always occur without any restrictions.

(20) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the special symbol display unit 43 is configured to display a stop result corresponding to a special miss result regardless of whether or not a sudden transition to a time-saving game state is executed in the event of a special miss result. However, the stop result corresponding to a special miss result may not be displayed when a sudden transition to a time-saving game state is restricted. For example, in such a case, the stop result corresponding to a normal miss result may be displayed.

(21) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, examples of configurations in which the time-saving game state during a stay and the time-saving game state to which a transition occurs midway through that stay are different include the length of the variable display time during a normal game round, the behavior of the normal electric device 63a during device opening and closing play, the winning probability in the support lottery, and the background color during the time-saving performance performed by the pattern display device 75. However, it is not necessary for all of these to be different; it is sufficient that at least one is different.

(22) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a transition condition to the time-shortened game state is met while the game is in the time-shortened game state, the time-shortened game state to be adopted is determined by comparing the remaining number of times that the player can remain in each of the time-shortened game states. However, other factors may also be taken into consideration when making this determination. For example, in a configuration in which the number of times the reel device opens in the opening/closing game performed in the predetermined sudden time-shortened game state is one, while the number of times the reel device opens in the predetermined normal time-shortened game state is two, and the expected value of winning the second actuation port 63 is twice that in the normal time-shortened game state, a weighting corresponding to the number of times the reel device opens or the expected value of winning may be applied to the comparison when the transition condition to the predetermined sudden time-shortened game state is met while the game is in the predetermined normal time-shortened game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times the game device is currently in the predetermined normal time-shortened game state may be multiplied by 2 as the weighting, and the result of this multiplication may be compared with the upper limit of the number of times the game device can remain in the predetermined sudden time-shortened game state.

(23) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is indicated by the remaining number of times image 823. However, the remaining number of times image 823 may not be displayed, and the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state may not be indicated. In other words, the actual remaining number of times may not be displayed at all.

In this case, the remaining number of plays may not be announced in all time-saving play states, or may not be announced in some time-saving play states. For example, the remaining number of plays may be announced in the sudden time-saving play state, but not announced in the normal time-saving play state.

Furthermore, when transitioning to a time-shortened game state in the middle of a time-shortened game state, the remaining number of plays may be announced in either the earlier or later time-shortened game state, but the remaining number of plays may not be announced in the other of those time-shortened game states. In this case, the earlier and later time-shortened game states do not necessarily have to be different types of time-shortened game states, but may be the same type of time-shortened game states. For example, if a special miss result suddenly occurs in the middle of a time-shortened game state, and a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state occurs based on that result, the remaining number of plays may be announced in one of those states, but not in the other.

(24) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the maximum upper limit number of times in the normal time-shortened game state is set to a number (3000 times) that is greater than the sum (2090 times) of the ceiling number of times (e.g., 990 times) and the ceiling number of times in the ceiling time-shortened game state (1100 times), and transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is restricted if the number of times of misses reaches the ceiling number during the normal time-shortened game state. However, the maximum upper limit number may be set to a number (e.g., 1000 times) that is less than the total value, and transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state may occur if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number during the normal time-shortened game state.

(25) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the maximum upper limit of the number of times that the sudden time-shortened game state can be entered is set to be less than the upper limit of the number of times that the ceiling time-shortened game state can be entered (1,100 times), and the game is switched to the ceiling time-shortened game state when the number of times that a game fails during the sudden time-shortened game state reaches the ceiling number of times. However, the maximum upper limit of the number of times may be set to be greater than the upper limit of the number of times that a game fails during the sudden time-shortened game state (for example, 1,500 times), and the game may be restricted from being switched to the ceiling time-shortened game state when the number of times that a game fails during the sudden time-shortened game state reaches the ceiling number of times.

(26) In the fifth embodiment and each of the variants described above, if the number of unsuccessful plays reaches the ceiling number while the game is in the time-shortened game state, a configuration may be adopted in which transition to the time-shortened game state takes priority over continuing the time-shortened game state, regardless of the number of remaining plays in the time-shortened game state. The time-shortened game state is transitioned to based on the cumulative number of unsuccessful plays, and therefore has the characteristic that a player can predict the transition to the time-shortened game state before the number of unsuccessful plays reaches the ceiling number (before the transition trigger is established). Therefore, if the transition to the time-shortened game state is not established even though the number of unsuccessful plays actually reaches the ceiling number and the transition trigger is established, the player is likely to notice that the transition to the time-shortened game state has not occurred. In this case, the player may be confused about what happened when the ceiling was reached, which could lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Taking these characteristics into consideration, the transition to the time-limited ceiling game state is prioritized over the continuation of the time-limited stay state, and by configuring the game so that a transition to the time-limited ceiling game state always occurs when the ceiling number of plays is reached while in the time-limited game state, the time-limited game state can be switched as expected by the player, and inconveniences that may confuse the player can be reduced.

(27) In the fifth embodiment and each modified example, the special symbol display unit 43 is configured with a display area 805 in which seven display segments SG1 to SG7 are arranged in the shape of the number 8. However, the configuration of the special symbol display unit 43 is not limited to this, as long as the stop result is displayed in a stopped state using multiple display areas. For example, as shown in FIG. 433(a), the special symbol display unit 43 may be configured with a display area that further includes an eighth display segment SG8 as a dot. Also, as shown in FIG. 433(b), the special symbol display unit 43 may be configured with a display area 866 in which eight LEDs (display units) 865 are arranged in a linear manner, or as shown in FIG. 433, the special symbol display unit 43 may be configured with a display area 868 in which eight LEDs (display units) 867 are arranged in multiple rows. Also, a configuration in which multiple display areas of the above types are arranged and a single stop result is displayed in a stopped state using these multiple display areas may be used.

(28) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, various stop results are displayed in a stopped state on the special symbol display unit 43. However, they may also be displayed in a stopped state on a display device other than the special symbol display unit 43, such as the display screen G of the symbol display device 75.

(29) In the fifth embodiment and each of the variations described above, the stop result is displayed as a stop by combining a display unit (display segment) that is lit with a display unit that is turned off, but this is not limited to this. For example, the stop result may be displayed as a stop by combining a display unit whose display color (emission color) is a first display color with a display unit whose display color (emission color) is a second display color different from the first display color, or the stop result may be displayed as a stop by combining a display unit that is in a flashing state with a display unit that continuously emits light.

(30) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the number of lit display parts for stop results SD15-SD17 corresponding to a special miss result may be configured to correspond to the degree of advantage of the sudden time-shortened game state. For example, the stop result SD15 corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state A, which has the highest degree of advantage, may have the most lit display parts, the stop result SD17 corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state C, which has the lowest degree of advantage, may have the fewest lit display parts, and the stop result SD16 corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state B may have an intermediate number of lit display parts. With this configuration, even if a player does not remember the details of each stop result when distinguishing between stop results corresponding to special miss results, they can intuitively grasp the degree of advantage based on the number of lit display parts.

(31) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, two types of stop results, consisting of stop results SD18 and SD19, are provided as stop results for normal misses, but a configuration having only one of these may also be used. In other words, there may be only one type of stop result for normal misses. Furthermore, three or more types of stop results may be provided as stop results for normal misses.

(32) In the fifth embodiment and each modified example, one stop result (jackpot symbol) is associated with one jackpot type, but multiple stop results may be associated with one jackpot type. Also, in the fifth embodiment and each modified example, one stop result (special miss symbol) is associated with one special miss type, but multiple stop results may be associated with one special miss type.

In such cases, to establish a relationship in which the number of types of stop results corresponding to special miss results is fewer than the number of types of stop results corresponding to normal jackpot results, the total number of stop results corresponding to special miss results may be fewer than the total number of stop results corresponding to normal jackpot results, or the average number of stop results for one special miss result may be fewer than the average number of stop results for one normal jackpot result. Also, the number of stop results corresponding to a predetermined special miss result may be fewer than the number of stop results corresponding to a predetermined normal jackpot result.

(33) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the number of types of stop results corresponding to a special miss result is smaller than the number of types of stop results corresponding to a normal jackpot result, but this is not limited to this. The number of types of the former stop results may be greater than the number of types of the latter stop results, or the number of types of both stop results may be the same.

(34) In the fifth embodiment and each of the variations described above, the stop display period of a predetermined stop result corresponding to a special miss result may be configured to be shorter than the stop display period of a predetermined stop result corresponding to a normal jackpot result. For example, the stop display period of stop result SD15 may be shorter than the stop display period of stop result SD3. In this case, when a stop result corresponding to a special miss result is displayed, the period during which the player can see that stop result is kept short, thereby increasing the difficulty of identifying that a special miss result to some extent. This allows for a configuration that makes it easy for players to remember stop results corresponding to special miss results, while preventing them from being too easy to identify.

In addition, all stop results SD15-SD17 corresponding to special miss results may be configured to have a shorter stop display period than any of stop results SD3-SD14 corresponding to normal jackpot results, or any of stop results SD3-SD14.

(35) In the fifth embodiment and each modified example, the first additional effect as a specific notification is executed after the start of the confirmation display, and the specific notification is executed when a transition to a time-limited game state is suddenly restricted. However, the first additional effect may be executed before the start of the confirmation display, and the specific notification may be executed when a transition to a time-limited game state is suddenly restricted. Note that in the fifth embodiment and each modified example, the first additional effect is always executed in the special symbol game round that results in a special miss result, but the first additional effect may be executed after that special symbol game round (after the start of the next special symbol game round).

(36) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a special miss occurs and a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs, or when a special miss occurs but the transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly restricted, a first additional effect is executed as a specific notification to notify the player that the remaining number of plays has increased or been added. However, a specific notification may also be executed to notify the player that a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state has occurred. For example, a start effect for the time-shortened game state may be executed instead of the first additional effect.

In addition, instead of the first bonus effect, a specific notification that does not include a notification regarding the remaining number of times may be executed. For example, the bonus image 826 may not be displayed, and text such as "Stock" or "Still going on" may be displayed.

(37) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, when a special miss occurs and a sudden transition to a time-saving game state occurs, a special reach miss A effect (a game round effect corresponding to the special miss result) is always executed in the special symbol game round that resulted in the special miss result. However, a game round effect that does not correspond to the special miss result, such as a special reach miss B effect or a normal reach miss effect, may also be executed. In this case, a lottery is held in the special symbol game round that resulted in the special miss result to determine whether or not to execute a special reach miss A effect, and if the lottery is won, a special reach miss A effect is executed, and if the lottery is lost, a special reach miss B effect or a normal reach effect is executed. In this case, the first additional effect is not executed.

By configuring as described above, it is possible to create a case where a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs even when the special miss A effect is not executed when the stop result corresponding to the special miss result is displayed on the special symbol display unit 43. This makes it possible to arouse the player's anticipation that the remaining number of times has been increased (a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state) even when the unannounced remaining number of times is insufficient and the special miss B effect is executed instead of the special miss A effect when the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted.

(38) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a variation pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss effect is selected, a second additional effect is executed by lottery. However, this may not be executed. In other words, the additional effect may not be executed in a special symbol game where the variation display time for a complete miss effect is set, and the additional effect may be executed only in a special symbol game where a specific variation display time (variation display time for a normal reach miss) is set.

(39) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the second additional effect can be executed when variation pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss effect is selected. However, the second additional effect may also be executed when another variation pattern is selected. Specifically, the second additional effect may also be executed when a variation pattern other than variation patterns W1 to W3 is selected, that is, when not only variation pattern 21H but also other variation patterns 22H to 24H corresponding to a miss result are selected.

(40) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the button image 832 may be displayed in the first additional effect, and the additional image 826 may be displayed by pressing the effect operation unit 36. By operating the effect operation unit 36, attention can be diverted from the special symbol display unit 43, making it difficult to know from the display content of the special symbol display unit 43 that a special miss has occurred.

In addition, the first additional effect may be executed during at least part of the period during which the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stopped symbols (determined display period), and the determined display period and the execution period of the first additional effect may overlap. In this case, by directing the player's attention to the first additional effect (symbol display device 75) during the period during which the stopped symbol corresponding to the special missing symbol result is displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to know from the display content of the special symbol display unit 43 that a special missing symbol result has occurred.

The second additional effect may also be executed during at least part of the confirmed display period, with the confirmed display period and the execution period of the second additional effect overlapping. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a stop result corresponding to a normal miss result is being displayed as a stopped result, making it difficult for the player to realize that the second additional effect is a fake.

(41) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the corresponding display times for variation pattern W1, in which a special miss occurs and a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is made equal; variation pattern W2, in which a special miss occurs but the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted; and variation pattern W3, in which a normal miss occurs and the stop result SD19 is stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 43, are made equal; however, the length of the display time for each variation pattern may be different as long as the execution period for the special reach miss A effect and the first additional effect is ensured.

(42) In the fifth embodiment and variant 1 described above, the number of lit display units (lit display units) is one for the stop result SD18 and two or more for the other stop results, but this is not limited to this. For example, the number of lit display units may be two for the stop result SD18 and three or more for the other stop results.

(43) In the fifth embodiment and variant 1 described above, each of the stop results SD15 to SD17 corresponding to a special miss result has multiple lit display units. However, one or two of these stop results may have only one lit display unit. However, for these stop results, a different display unit is lit than for the stop result SD18 corresponding to a normal miss result.

(44) In the fifth embodiment and variant 1 described above, among the stop results SD15 to SD17 corresponding to special miss results, the stop results SD15 and SD17 have their illuminated display parts overlapping with the stop result SD19 corresponding to a normal miss result, and the stop result SD16 has its illuminated display part not overlapping with the stop result SD19 corresponding to a normal miss result. However, the stop results SD19 may be configured to have their illuminated display parts overlapping with the stop result SD19 for all of the stop results SD15 to SD17. Alternatively, the stop result SD19 may be configured to have its illuminated display part overlapping with only one of the stop results SD15 to SD17.

(45) In Variation 1 of the fifth embodiment described above, the background color of the background image displayed on the symbol display device 75 is different in each time-shortened game state. However, instead of or in addition to this, a specific image that notifies or suggests each time-shortened game state may be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. For example, as shown in FIG. 434, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple black dot images 871 are displayed in the corners of the display screen G, and the display positions of these black dot images 871 differ depending on the time-shortened game state. Specifically, the display position in the sudden time-shortened game state (FIG. 434 (b1)) is set as the reference position, and in the normal time-shortened game state, the display position is shifted to the left of the reference position (FIG. 434 (b2)), and in the ceiling time-shortened game state, the display position is shifted to the right of the reference position (FIG. 434 (b3)). In this configuration, the type of time-saving game state is indicated by the display position of the black dot image 871, and the player can determine whether the time-saving game state has continued or whether a sudden transition to the time-saving game state has occurred based on whether the display position of the black dot image 871 changes at the boundary of the special game play that resulted in the special miss.

(46) In the above-mentioned variant 2 of the fifth embodiment, the number of stop results corresponding to a normal loss result was set to multiple, but it may also be set to one. However, from the perspective that the more stop results corresponding to a normal loss result, the more difficult it becomes for the player to remember those stop results and they are more likely to be confused with the stop results SD20 corresponding to a special loss result, it is preferable to set it to multiple, as in the above-mentioned variant 2. In this case, the number of stop results corresponding to a normal loss result is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(47) In the second variant of the fifth embodiment described above, the stop results SD18 and SD21 corresponding to a normal miss result and the stop result SD20 corresponding to a special miss result have the same number of lit display parts. However, for example, the number of lit display parts for stop results SD18, SD21, or either of them may be two, and the number of lit display parts for stop result SD20 may be fewer than the number of lit display parts for stop results SD18, SD21, or either of them.

(48) In the second variant of the fifth embodiment described above, only one type of stop result is provided for the special miss result when the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly restricted. However, multiple types may be provided. In this case, the number of lit display parts for these stop results is set to be equal to or less than the number of lit display parts for stop results SD18 and SD21.

In the above case, a predetermined number of stop results when the transition to the time-saving game state is restricted may be set in correspondence with each of the stop results SD15 to SD17 when a sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs, or multiple stop results when the transition to the time-saving game state is restricted may exist regardless of the stop results SD15 to SD17.

(49) In the above-mentioned variant 2 of the fifth embodiment, stop result SD20 is always selected when a transition to a time-shortened gaming state is suddenly restricted, but it may also be configured so that stop result SD20 is more likely to be selected than stop results SD15 to SD17. Also, in the above-mentioned variant 2 of the fifth embodiment, stop results SD15 to SD17 are always selected when a transition to a time-shortened gaming state is suddenly restricted, but it may also be configured so that stop results SD15 to SD17 are more likely to be selected than stop result SD20.

(50) In the second variant of the fifth embodiment described above, the display mode of the stop result SD20 corresponding to the special miss result is configured to be different from the display mode of the normal miss results SD18 and SD21, but these display modes may also be configured to be the same. For example, the display mode may be such that the display segment SG3 is lit and the other display segments are unlit for both the stop result SD20 and the stop result SD18.

(51) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration is such that the transition to jackpot play (open/close execution mode) occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot result. However, like a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the configuration may also be such that the transition to jackpot play occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit result and the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during small hit play (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a miss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award determination is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, "transitioning to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the result of a specific judgment being a specific result," "granting a predetermined bonus based on the result of a specific judgment being a predetermined first result," etc. can be interpreted as including, as mentioned above, cases where the result of a win/loss judgment is a small win result and a transition to a big win game is made via a V win.

(52) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pachinko machine is a type in which game balls are paid out, but it may also be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such enclosed type pachinko machines, when prize balls are awarded as a bonus for winning a prize or the like, it is preferable to award the player a predetermined game value (virtual game medium such as credits) corresponding to the number of prize balls, and to notify the player of information indicating the number of prize balls.

(53) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but this may be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(54) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but this may not be the case. Furthermore, pending information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized over pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 in determining whether a win or loss has occurred, but this relationship may be reversed, or the winning/loss determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(55) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition is made from one of a high-probability gaming state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, or high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) to the other of a low-probability gaming state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, or low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) based on the result of a predetermined lottery executed in response to a predetermined trigger. In this case, a transition from one of the states to the other may occur if the result of the predetermined lottery is a first predetermined result, and a transition from the other of the states to one may occur if the result of the predetermined lottery is a second predetermined result different from the first predetermined result, or a transition from one of the states to the other may occur if the result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined result, and a transition from the other of the states to one may occur if the result of a specific lottery different from the predetermined lottery is a specific result.

In these cases, the configuration may be such that transitions from one of the above states to the other can be restricted even if the transition conditions are met. In this case, if the stop result corresponding to the fulfillment of the transition conditions is displayed as a stop on the special image display unit 43, the stop result corresponding to the fulfillment of the transition conditions can be displayed as a stop even when the above restrictions are imposed. Furthermore, the above transitions may or may not be performed via the opening/closing execution mode.

(56) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, only game balls flowing down the right route are configured to be able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63. However, it is also possible to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down the left route are able to pass through or win, or so that game balls can pass through or win from either the right or left route. However, to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right and left routes are able to win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right and left routes are able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(57) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the result of the special winning/losing lottery may include a small winning result. In this case, the small winning result may be included in both the winning/losing lottery based on winning through the first operating port 62 and the winning/losing lottery based on winning through the second operating port 63, or the small winning result may be included in either one of them. The small winning result can be considered a type of winning result in that it corresponds to the awarding of a bonus (transition to the opening/closing execution mode), or it can be considered a type of losing result in that it does not provide as much of a bonus as a big winning result.

(58) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time effects correspond one-to-one, but they may also correspond one-to-multiple. In this case, the effect control device 143 can acquire a random number for effect lottery, and use the acquired random number to select one game-time effect from among multiple game-time effects associated with one variation pattern.

(59) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variably displayed patterns on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll left and right, but the patterns may be displayed in a line on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction and scrolling direction of the patterns are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more.

(60) In the fifth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a game round is started in the special symbol display unit 43 based on a win/loss determination made by the main control unit 162. However, a game round may be started before the actual win/loss determination is made when the conditions for the win/loss determination are met in the main control unit 162, and the subsequent variable display pattern, variable display time, and stop result for that game round may be determined based on the win/loss determination thereafter. In this case, the main control unit 162 may be configured to first send a variable command when the start timing of a game round arrives, and then send a variable start command and a type command after making a win/loss determination, determining the variable display time, and determining the type. The timing of sending these variable start commands and type commands may also be staggered. In this case, the timing for sending the variable start command and type command may be set to the timing until the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 75 is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

(61) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

Sixth Embodiment
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the gaming board 60 and the like described with reference to Figures 1 to 6 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<Configuration for discharging game balls that have flowed down the game area>
The configuration for discharging game balls that have flowed down the game area PA will be explained with reference to Figure 435.

A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 61, variable winning device 65, first operating opening 62, second operating opening 63, and outlet 68 is guided to the back side of the game board 60 and discharged from the game area PA. In other words, a game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism and enters the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 61, variable winning device 65, first operating opening 62, second operating opening 63, and outlet 68.

Discharge passages 91-96 are formed on the back of the gaming board 60, corresponding to the general winning opening 61, variable winning device 65, first operating opening 62, second operating opening 63, and outlet 68, respectively. Gaming balls that flow into the discharge passages 91-96 flow down the discharge passages 91-96, and are guided to the lower end of the gaming board 60 on the back side of the gaming board 60, where they are collected by a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The gaming balls collected by the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device in the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall.

Each discharge passage section 91-96 is equipped with various detection sensors 91a-96a for detecting game balls. These discharge passage sections 91-96 and detection sensors 91a-96a are described below.

There are three general winning openings 61, and therefore there is a discharge passage section 91, 92 corresponding to each of the three. In this case, one detection sensor 91a is provided in the first discharge passage section 91 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 61. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 91a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the first discharge passage section 91, and a game ball that enters the leftmost general winning opening 61 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 91a as it passes through the first discharge passage section 91.

A second discharge passage 92 is provided that is formed to merge midway with the two general winning openings 61 on the right side. The second discharge passage 92 has entrance areas corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 61, and these entrance areas merge midway to form a single exit area. A second winning opening detection sensor 92a is provided so that a detection range is located midway in the exit area of the second discharge passage 92. A gaming ball that enters either of the two general winning openings 61 on the right side is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 92a as it passes through the second discharge passage 92.

A third discharge passage section 93 exists corresponding to the first actuation port 62. A first actuation port detection sensor 93a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the third discharge passage section 93, and a gaming ball that enters the first actuation port 62 is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 93a as it passes through the third discharge passage section 93. A fourth discharge passage section 94 exists corresponding to the second actuation port 63. A second actuation port detection sensor 94a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the fourth discharge passage section 94, and a gaming ball that enters the second actuation port 63 is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 94a as it passes through the fourth discharge passage section 94.

A fifth discharge passage 95 exists in correspondence with the variable winning device 65. A large prize opening detection sensor 95a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the fifth discharge passage 95, and a gaming ball that enters the variable winning device 65 is detected by the large prize opening detection sensor 95a as it passes through the fifth discharge passage 95. A sixth discharge passage 96 exists in correspondence with the outlet 68. An outlet detection sensor 96a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the sixth discharge passage 96, and a gaming ball that enters the outlet 68 is detected by the outlet detection sensor 96a as it passes through the sixth discharge passage 96.

A gaming ball that is detected by one of the various detection sensors 91a-96a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 91a-96a. A gate detection sensor 97a is also provided for the through gate 64, and a gaming ball that passes through the through gate 64 on its way down the play area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 97a.

The various detection sensors 91a-97a are all electromagnetic induction proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 91a-97a are electrically connected to the main control device 162, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 91a-97a are output to the main control device 162. Specifically, the various detection sensors 91a-97a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to this, and the HI and LOW relationship may be reversed.

<Configuration of main control device 162>
Next, the configuration of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to Fig. 436. Fig. 436 is a front view of the main control device 162.

As shown in Figure 436, the main control device 162 comprises a main control board 311 housed in a board box 163a. An MPU 312 is mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 311, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 163a is transparent so that the MPU 312 housed within the board box 163a can be seen from outside the board box 163a. Note that although the board box 163a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may also be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 312 housed within the board box 163a can be seen from outside the board box 163a.

The main control unit 162 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 50 so that the opposing wall portion 163b of the board box 163a, which faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 311, faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and exposing the rear surface of the resin base 50, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 163b of the board box 163a and the MPU 312 through the opposing wall portion 163b.

The board box 163a is formed by combining multiple case bodies 163c front and rear, and these multiple case bodies 163c are provided with connecting portions 163e that prevent the case bodies 163c from separating and leave traces of the separation of the case bodies 163c. Multiple connecting portions 163e are arranged side by side on one side of the roughly rectangular board box 163a. This makes it possible to prevent the separation of the case bodies 163c again by subsequently connecting other connecting portions 163e, even if some connecting portions 163e are used to prevent the separation of the case bodies 163c and the case bodies 163c are separated by destroying those connecting portions 163e. Furthermore, because the connecting portions 163e are destroyed when the case bodies 163c are separated, leaving traces, it is possible to visually check the connecting portions 163e to determine whether the case bodies 163c have been separated fraudulently.

In addition, a sealing sticker 163f is affixed to the side of the substrate box 163a opposite the side on which the connecting portions 163e are arranged, spanning the boundary between the case bodies 163c. When the sealing sticker 163f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 163c. This makes it possible to leave a trace when the sealing sticker 163f is peeled off when the case bodies 163c are separated.

In the main control device 162 configured as described above, the main control board 311 is provided with a setting key insertion section 166a into which a setting key owned by the amusement hall manager is inserted and turned ON to trigger an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 within the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," an update button 166b that is operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion section 166a is turned ON, a reset button 166c that is operated to clear data in the main RAM 314 (Fig. 437) provided in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162, and first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e that notify the results of game history management. The MPU 312 mounted on the main control board 311 is also provided with a read terminal 166d for connecting to an external device so that the external device can read the game history management results or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 313. Note that the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to six levels from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" and can be any number of levels.

The setting key insertion portion 166a, update button 166b, reset button 166c, reading terminal 166d (i.e., MPU 312), and first to fifth alarm display devices 169a to 169d are all provided on the device mounting surface of the main control board 311. As already explained, the device mounting surface of the main control board 311 faces the opposing wall portion 163b of the board box 163a, but the setting key insertion portion 166a, update button 166b, reset button 166c, and reading terminal 166d are not covered by the opposing wall portion 163b. In other words, the areas of the opposing wall portion 163b facing the setting key insertion portion 166a, update button 166b, reset button 166c, and reading terminal 166d are each provided as separate openings. This makes it possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion section 166a, press the update button 166b, press the reset button 166c, and connect an external device connection terminal to the reading terminal 166d, without having to open the circuit board box 163a.

By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion section 166a and rotating it in a specified direction, the setting key insertion section 166a is turned on. In this state, by starting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 166c (i.e., by starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162), the pachinko machine 10 enters a changeable state in which its setting can be changed. In this state, each time the update button 166b is pressed, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 changes by one step in ascending order within the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." Note that if the update button 166b is operated when the setting is "Setting 6," it will be updated to "Setting 1."

Furthermore, when the setting key insertion section 166a is turned ON, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 can be started without pressing the reset button 166c, resulting in a confirmation state in which the current setting status can be confirmed. In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in the confirmation state, the current setting status is displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169d.

Furthermore, by rotating the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion portion 166a from the ON operation position in the direction opposite to the specified direction and returning it to its initial position, the setting key insertion portion 166a is turned OFF. When the setting key insertion portion 166a is turned OFF, the above-mentioned changeable state and checkable state end.

The ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 166a is only valid when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 begins). Therefore, even if the setting key insertion unit 166a is turned ON after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 has finished, the setting value cannot be changed or confirmed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time for that pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer between "1" and "6") (i.e., the higher the setting value), the higher the degree of advantage. As will be described in more detail below, the win/lose lottery mode that determines the probability of winning a jackpot outcome has two modes: a low probability mode with a relatively low probability of winning, and a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of winning, and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot outcome in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

As described above, the reset button 166c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 314, but in order to clear this data, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 must be started while the reset button 166c is pressed (i.e., the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 must be started). The ON operation of the reset button 166c is only valid when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 begins). Therefore, even if the reset button 166c is pressed after the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 has completed processing at the start of the supply of operating power, the data in the main RAM 314 cannot be cleared.

As already explained, the read terminal 166d is connected to the connection terminal of an external device so that the external device can read the game history management results or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 313. However, in order to output data to the external device, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 must be started while the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the read terminal 166d (i.e., the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 must be started). Connection of an external device to the read terminal 166d is only valid when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 begins). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the read terminal 166d after the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 has completed processing to start the supply of operating power, no external output will be made to the external device.

The first through fifth alarm display devices 169a through 169e are all segment displays with an arrangement of seven LED display segments, but are not limited to this and may be a single light-emitting element with multi-color emission, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first through fifth alarm display devices 169a through 169e are all installed so that their display surfaces face in the direction of the element mounting surface of the main control board 311, and are covered by the opposing wall portion 163b of the board box 163a.

In this case, because the board box 163a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fifth alarm display devices 169a to 169e housed within the board box 163a can be viewed from outside the board box 163a. Furthermore, as already explained, the main control device 162 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 50 with the opposing wall portion 163b, which faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 311 in the board box 163a, facing toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 50 is exposed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, the display surfaces of the first to fifth alarm display devices 169a to 169e can be viewed through the opposing wall portion 163b.

The display surfaces of the first to fifth alarm display devices 169a to 169e are capable of displaying not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters, including alphabetic characters. The first to fifth alarm display devices 169a to 169e are used to display the base values, etc., which will be described later, and the display format will be explained in detail later.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a changeable state where the setting status can be changed or in a checkable state where the current setting status can be checked, the value corresponding to the setting value is displayed on the fourth alert display device 169d. Note that the value corresponding to the setting value may also be displayed on either the first to third alert display devices 169a to 169c or the fifth alert display device 169e. Alternatively, the setting value before entering the changeable state may be displayed on one of the first to fifth alert display devices 169a to 169e, and the current setting value may be displayed on another of the first to fifth alert display devices 169a to 169e.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of Figure 437.

The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board 311 that is responsible for the main control of the game, and the main control board 311 is equipped with an MPU 312. The MPU 312 has built-in main ROM 313 and main RAM 314, as well as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and various counter circuits such as a random number generator.

The main ROM 313 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The main ROM 313 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 312.

The main RAM 314 is a type of memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 314 is randomly accessible and takes less time to read data than the main ROM 313 when compared for the same data capacity. The main RAM 314 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control programs stored in the main ROM 313.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. Also connected to the input side of the MPU 312 are various sensors, such as the ball entry detection sensors 91a-97a. As already explained, the ball entry detection sensors 91a-97a include the first prize entry detection sensor 91a, the second prize entry detection sensor 92a, the first actuation port detection sensor 93a, the second actuation port detection sensor 94a, the large prize entry port detection sensor 95a, the outlet detection sensor 96a, and the gate detection sensor 97a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 91a-97a, the MPU 312 determines whether a ball has entered each entry area. The MPU 312 also conducts various lotteries based on the winnings at the first actuation port 62, the second actuation port 63, and the through gate 64.

The input side of the MPU 312 is provided with a setting key insertion section 166a, an update button 166b, and a reset button 166c, which are provided on the main control board 311. A sensor (not shown) is provided in the setting key insertion section 166a, which detects whether the setting key insertion section 166a is positioned for the ON operation or the OFF operation. The MPU 312 then determines whether the setting key insertion section 166a is positioned for the ON operation or the OFF operation based on the detection results from the sensor. A sensor (not shown) is provided in the update button 166b, which detects whether the update button 166b has been pressed. The MPU 312 then determines whether the update button 166b has been pressed based on the detection results from the sensor. A sensor (not shown) is provided in the reset button 166c, which detects whether the reset button 166c has been pressed. The MPU 312 then determines whether the reset button 166c has been pressed based on the detection results from the sensor.

The output side of the MPU 312 is connected to the payout control device 181, the presentation control device 143, and the like. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 when a game ball enters a prize ball entry section among the above-mentioned entry sections, where the occurrence of the ball entry corresponds to the payout of a game ball (prize ball). Various commands, such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command, are output to the presentation control device 143.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 312 are the special power drive unit 65d, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65, the normal power drive unit 63b, which opens and closes the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63, the special symbol display unit 43, and the normal symbol display unit 44. The main control board 311 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 312 controls the drive of the various drive units and display units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 312 controls the drive of the special power drive unit 65d so that the variable winning device 65 opens and closes. Also, if the open state of the normal power device 63a is selected, the MPU 312 controls the drive of the normal power drive unit 63b so that the normal power device 63a opens and closes.

During each game, the MPU 312 controls the display of the special symbol display unit 43. When the result of the lottery on whether the regular symbol device 63a will be opened is displayed, the MPU 312 controls the display of the regular symbol display unit 44. When a win occurs in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, or when a variable display begins in the special symbol display unit 43, the MPU 312 controls the display of the special symbol reserve number display unit AM, and when a win occurs in the through gate 64, or when a variable display begins in the regular symbol display unit 44, the MPU 312 controls the display of the regular symbol reserve number display unit FM.

An external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312. Information on balls entering various entry areas and information on lottery results such as jackpots is output to the hall computer HC via this external output terminal 213. This allows the hall computer HC to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The first to fourth notification display devices 169a to 169d are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. Gaming history management results and setting value information are reported through these first to fourth notification display devices 169a to 169d.

The MPU 312 is provided with a read terminal 166d. A sensor (not shown) is provided on the read terminal 166d, and this sensor detects whether or not an external device connection terminal is connected to the read terminal 166d. The MPU 312 then determines whether or not an external device connection terminal is connected to the read terminal 166d based on the detection results from the sensor. Furthermore, if an external device is connected to the read terminal 166d, the results of game history management by the MPU 312 and information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 313 are output to the external device.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) at, for example, an amusement facility. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 311, payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power.

The power supply and firing control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring unit 315, which monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage output from the power supply and firing control device 191. When the output voltage from the power supply and firing control device 191 falls below 22 volts, the power outage monitoring unit 315 determines that a power outage (power shutdown) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) provided on the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. This causes the main control device 162 to recognize the occurrence of a power outage and immediately execute NMI interrupt processing, and then execute power outage processing based on this. Incidentally, the power supply and firing control device 191 is provided with a power outage power supply unit, such as a backup capacitor, and in the event of a power outage or when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, backup power (power for memory retention) is supplied from the power outage power supply unit to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. The power supply and launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met. The payout mechanism 202 is also provided with a power switch; turning the power switch ON starts the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and turning the power switch OFF stops the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 162.

The performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, and controls the display control device 350, based on various commands received from the main control device 162. The display control device 350 controls the display of the pattern display device 75 based on commands received from the performance control device 143. In this case, the performance control device 143 determines the time for which the patterns will be displayed on the pattern display device 75 and the type of pattern combination that will ultimately be displayed stationary, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, as well as whether or not a reach will occur and the content of the reach performance.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 75 will be explained based on Figures 438 to 440.

As shown in Figures 438(a)-(j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in Figure 438(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 has three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 set up on the upper, middle, and lower rows. Each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is composed of main and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper pattern column Z1 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. The lower pattern column Z3 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern column Z1 and the lower pattern column Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a "4" main symbol additionally arranged between the "9" main symbol and the "1" main symbol, with one sub-symbol arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle symbol column Z2 alone has 10 main symbols arranged, for a total of 20 symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of these symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclical manner, scrolling in a predetermined direction. Also, as shown in FIG. 439(b), on the display screen G, three symbols are displayed in a static fashion for each symbol column, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3 x 3 format.

Five active lines are set on the display screen G: left line L1, middle line L2, right line L3, downward right line L4, and upward right line L5. The display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1, lower symbol row Z3, and middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all symbol rows Z1-Z3 ends with a combination of symbols with the same number on any active line, a jackpot animation will be displayed, indicating the occurrence of a regular 4R jackpot result or a 10R special jackpot result, as described below.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols," and when a 10R special jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols is displayed. Furthermore, main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols," and when a regular 4R special jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is displayed.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the variable display of each symbol column with reference to Figure 440. When a game round begins, high-speed variable display begins for all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is impossible or difficult to recognize which symbol column is being displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 440(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol column Z1 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display, which allows the player to recognize the variable displayed symbol. Then, as shown in Figure 440(b), the variable display mode of the lower symbol column Z3 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display as the variable display of the upper symbol column Z1 ends. Then, as shown in Figure 440(c), the variable display of the lower symbol column Z3 ends. After the variable display of all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 has ended, a static display period is set up in which the static display is maintained and the player waits for a predetermined period of time.

In gaming machines, when symbols are displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device 75, it is common to stop the symbols in the final stop row (middle symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) gradually while slowing down the speed of the variable display, rather than stopping them suddenly. In this case, if the symbols in middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are configured to start stopping in time with the start of the stopped display on the special symbol display unit 43, the time required for the symbols to decelerate to stop on the symbol display device 75 is shortened, resulting in a reduction in the effective stopped display time.

Therefore, before the special symbol display unit 43 starts displaying the symbols, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, including the final symbol sequence, are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the temporarily stopped symbols are permanently stopped (determined display) in accordance with the timing when the special symbol display unit 43 starts displaying the symbols. The display mode of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop state is different from that in the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 may move gently back and forth slightly, or at least part of the characters (Figure 438) such as an octopus that make up the main symbol and sub-symbol may move. In other words, while the temporary stop may appear to be stationary at first glance, it is performed so that the symbols remain in an incompletely stopped state (stationary display). In contrast, the final display is performed so that the symbols do not move back and forth slightly or the characters do not move, resulting in a completely stopped state.

The provisional stop display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may begin with a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then transition directly to a final display. Alternatively, the display may temporarily stop with a stop result that does not correspond to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then the display may change again to a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery, etc., after which the display may transition to a final display.

By the way, in special symbol game times executed by the special symbol display unit 43, the symbols are not temporarily displayed as still symbols, but the variable symbols are suddenly stopped as the variable display time elapses, and this state (the symbol is displayed as still symbols) is maintained until the fixed display time elapses. In other words, the symbol's still display on the special symbol display unit 43 becomes a fixed display. This is also true for regular symbol game times executed by the regular symbol display unit 44.

The manner in which the pattern display device 75 displays the changing patterns is not limited to the above and can be arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction in which the changing patterns are displayed in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, and the combinations of patterns corresponding to jackpots and misses can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in Figure 439 (b), a hold display section 200 is provided at the bottom of the display screen G for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of holds in the previous game, and the player can recognize the number of holds by visually checking the hold display section 200. The hold display section 200 has a first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first special symbol and a second hold display area Gb corresponding to the second special symbol.

In the first hold display area Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, the same number as the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62, are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, and corresponding to this, the first hold display area Ga1, second unit hold display area Ga2, third unit hold display area Ga3, and fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set in the first hold display area Ga.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is one, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Ga1, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

In addition, the second hold display area Gb is partitioned so that unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4, the same number as the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the second actuation port 63, are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the second actuation port 63 is four, and corresponding to this, the second hold display area Gb is set with a first unit hold display area Gb1, a second unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is one, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Gb1, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is four, a predetermined reserved image will be displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Gb4.

In addition, an execution display area D is set up so that it is sandwiched between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. A hold image corresponding to the game turn to be executed (currently being executed) is displayed in the execution display area D. For example, when a game turn ends and the next game turn begins, the hold image that was displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This allows the player to recognize that the game turn that was on hold will be executed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained using FIG.

During play, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, set the display on the special symbol display unit 43, set the symbol display on the symbol display device 75, and set the display on the normal symbol display unit 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 441, it uses a hit random number counter C1 used to determine the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, a reach random number counter C3 used to determine whether a reach occurs when the symbol display device 75 misses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS which determines the display duration on the special symbol display unit 43 and symbol display device 75. Furthermore, it uses a normal electric device release counter C4 used to determine whether or not to put the normal electric device 63a of the second operating port 63 into the normal electric release state. The above counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are stored in the various counter area 314b of the main RAM 314.

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, big win type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 314a provided as acquired information storage means in the main RAM 314 when a win occurs in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

The reserve storage area 314a comprises a reserve area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE comprises a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3, and a fourth reserve area RE4. Combinations of numerical information from the win random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored as reserve information in one of the reserve areas RE1 to RE4, according to the winning history of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the numerical information is stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 in chronological order: first hold area RE1 → second hold area RE2 → third hold area RE3 → fourth hold area RE4. By providing four hold areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning ball entries in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or even a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the numerical information stored in the first reserve area RE1 of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

We will explain each of the above counters in detail below.

First, we will explain the normal power feature release counter C4. The normal power feature release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The normal power feature release counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal power reserve area 314c of the main RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 64. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the normal power feature 63a to an open state based on the value of the stored normal power feature release counter C4.

This pachinko machine 10 has multiple support modes that differ from one another in the manner of support provided by the normal power device 63a. In detail, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared to a situation in which game balls are continuously being released in the same manner into the play area PA.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery using the normal power device release counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 in both), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power device 63a will be in the open state when the normal power release state is won is set to be more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer. In this case, if the normal power release state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the normal power device 63a is in the open state multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time ensured between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery (i.e., the duration of one display on the normal power display unit 44) is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than in the second actuation port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the first actuation port 62. Furthermore, when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of normal power release per unit time in the high-frequency support mode compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be configured, for example, to increase the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery. Furthermore, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time are available between one normal power release lottery and the next (for example, the time of the variable display executed on the normal power display unit 44 based on winning the through gate 64), the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of the following conditions: increasing the number of releases, lengthening the open time, shortening the reserved time between one normal power release lottery and the next, shortening the average reserved time, and increasing the probability of winning.

As previously explained, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states "Setting 1" through "Setting 6." The opening frequency and opening mode of the normal power device 63a in the low-frequency support mode are the same regardless of the setting value, and the opening frequency and opening mode of the normal power device 63a in the high-frequency support mode are also the same regardless of the setting value. However, this is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and opening mode of the normal power device 63a for at least one of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode may be configured to vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the opening frequency of the normal power device 63a in the low-frequency support mode. Alternatively, the probability of a game ball entering the second operating port 63 when the normal power device 63a is opened once in the low-frequency support mode may be increased. Additionally, the higher the set value, the more frequently the normal power device 63a opens in the high frequency support mode, and the higher the probability of a game ball entering the second operating port 63 when the normal power device 63a opens once in the high frequency support mode.

Next, we will explain the winning random number counter C1. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved storage area 314a of the main RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the main ROM 313 as a win/lose table. Figure 442 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various tables stored in the main ROM 313. The main ROM 313 has an area for setting 1 411, an area for setting 2 412, an area for setting 3 413, an area for setting 4 414, an area for setting 5 415, and an area for setting 6 416.

The area for setting 1 411 stores a low-probability win/loss table 411a for setting 1 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 1" and the win/loss lottery mode is low-probability mode, and a high-probability win/loss table 411b for setting 1 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 1" and the win/loss lottery mode is high-probability mode. The area for setting 2 412 stores a low-probability win/loss table 412a for setting 2 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 2" and the win/loss lottery mode is low-probability mode, and a high-probability win/loss table 412b for setting 2 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 2" and the win/loss lottery mode is high-probability mode. The setting 3 area 413 stores a low probability win/lose table 413a for setting 3 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3" and the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability win/lose table 413b for setting 3 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3" and the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode.

The area for setting 4 414 stores a low-probability win/loss table 414a for setting 4 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 4" and the win/loss lottery mode is low-probability mode, and a high-probability win/loss table 414b for setting 4 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 4" and the win/loss lottery mode is high-probability mode. The area for setting 5 415 stores a low-probability win/loss table 415a for setting 5 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 5" and the win/loss lottery mode is low-probability mode, and a high-probability win/loss table 415b for setting 5 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "Setting 5" and the win/loss lottery mode is high-probability mode. The setting 6 area 416 stores a low probability win/lose table 416a for setting 6 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a high probability win/lose table 416b for setting 6 that is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot result set in each of the low probability hit/miss tables 411a to 416a are different from each other. For example, when the low probability hit/miss table 411a for setting 1 to the low probability hit/miss table 416a for setting 6 are referenced, the winning probabilities of the jackpot are approximately 1/320, approximately 1/310, approximately 1/300, approximately 1/290, approximately 1/280, and approximately 1/270, respectively.

In addition, the winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the high probability hit/miss tables 411b to 416b are also different. For example, when each of the high probability hit/miss tables 411b for setting 1 to the high probability hit/miss table 416b for setting 6 is referenced, the winning probabilities of the jackpot are approximately 1/45, approximately 1/40, approximately 1/35, approximately 1/30, approximately 1/25, and approximately 1/20, respectively.

In other words, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot in both low probability mode and high probability mode. Therefore, the higher the setting value in both low probability mode and high probability mode, the more likely a jackpot will occur, and the advantage to players of having a high setting value is suitably increased.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 314a when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

This pachinko machine 10 has multiple jackpot results. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: (1) the manner in which the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and (3) the support mode in the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the open/close execution mode, the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open and close in a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 65 is relatively high and low between the start and end of the open/close execution mode. Specifically, in either the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode, a predetermined number of rounds of play are played up to the upper limit.

A round of play is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 65. Furthermore, the number of rounds of play in the open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is the same fixed number of rounds, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, regardless of the jackpot result, the maximum number of rounds of play is set to 15.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the variable winning device 65 can be opened in multiple different modes, with different durations of opening from when the variable winning device 65 is opened until when it is closed. Specifically, there is a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a long period of 29 seconds, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a short period of 0.06 seconds, which is shorter than the long-time mode.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the game ball launching handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 110 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area PA every 0.6 seconds. The upper limit for the number of balls required to complete a round is set to nine. In this case, the long-time mode, one of the above-mentioned release modes, sets the release duration to a time longer than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round of play. On the other hand, the short-time mode sets the release duration to a time shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round of play, or more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when a single release is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the variable winning device 65 will win the maximum number of balls in one round of play. When a single release is performed in the short-time mode, it is expected that the variable winning device 65 will not win, or that, if any, it will win only one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 65 is opened once in a long-term mode during each round of play. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 65 is opened once in a short-term mode during each round of play.

In addition, the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed in the high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode, the number of rounds of play, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of rounds of play are not limited to the above values and can be any value, as long as the frequency of winnings in the variable winning device 65 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

As shown in FIG. 441, the allocation destinations of jackpot results for jackpot type counter C2 are stored in main ROM 313 as allocation table 387. In addition, allocation table 387 sets the allocation destinations of jackpot results in the event of a jackpot result as a low-probability jackpot result, a low-winning high-probability jackpot result, and a high-winning jackpot result.

A low-probability jackpot result is one in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes low-probability mode, and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode will transition to low-frequency support mode if the number of plays reaches the termination threshold number (specifically, 100 plays) after the transition.

A low-prize, high-probability jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes low-frequency win mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes high-probability mode and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue until the lottery result in a win in the win/lose lottery and the game transitions to the jackpot state.

A high-prize jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes high-frequency win mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes high-probability mode and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in a win in the win/lose lottery and the game transitions to the jackpot state.

In relation to the above game states, the normal game state refers to a state in which the win/lose lottery mode is not the open/close execution mode, and the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Also, a low-winning, high-probability jackpot result may not be set as a game result. Furthermore, in the open/close execution mode with a low-winning, high-probability jackpot result, the number of rounds of play may be fewer than in the case of a low-probability jackpot result and a high-winning jackpot result.

In allocation table 387, of the jackpot type counter C2 values "0-29," "0-9" corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, "10-14" corresponds to a low-prize, high-probability jackpot result, and "15-29" corresponds to a high-prize jackpot result.

Only one type of allocation table 387 is provided so that it is common to all settings, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." This makes it possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage in the allocation pattern of jackpot results from arising depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and also makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to pre-store the allocation table 387 in the main ROM 313.

The allocation of jackpot results may be configured to differ depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to a high-prize jackpot result, or the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to a high-prize jackpot result or a low-prize high-probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of entering the high-probability mode after a jackpot result. Also, the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being allocated to a low-prize high-probability jackpot result, or a high setting value may not allocate to a low-prize high-probability jackpot result, while a low setting value may allocate to a low-prize high-probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of the high-frequency opening/closing execution mode occurring.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. This pachinko machine 10 has an expectation effect set as one type of display effect on the symbol display device 75. In a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of displaying varying symbols, where the final stop result in a game round resulting in a predetermined jackpot result is a prize-related result, the expectation effect refers to a display state that makes the player believe that the variable display state is likely to result in the prize-related result between the start of the display of varying symbols on the symbol display device 75 and the stage at which the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, the prize-related result is the display of a combination of symbols with the same number stopped on one of the pay lines.

There are two types of expected effects: a reach display and a warning display that is set before a reach display occurs, to anticipate the occurrence of a reach display or a corresponding result.

The reach display includes a display state in which a reach pattern combination is displayed by stopping the display of symbols in some of the multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, and in this state, the remaining pattern columns are displayed with varying patterns. It also includes a reach display in which, while a reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern columns are displayed with varying patterns, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, thereby creating a reach effect; and a reach display in which the reach pattern combination is displayed in a reduced size or is not displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image across substantially the entire display screen G, thereby creating a reach effect.

Pre-announcement displays include a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns when symbols are displayed in all symbol columns Z1-Z3 after the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 starts changing symbols, or when symbols are displayed in multiple symbol columns for some symbol columns. They also include a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined mode different from its previous mode, or a mode in which the symbols on the symbol columns are displayed in a predetermined mode different from their previous mode. Such pre-announcement displays can occur in both gameplays when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game in which the same symbol combination is ultimately displayed. Furthermore, in a game in which a jackpot result occurs in which the same symbol combination is not displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Furthermore, in a game in which a miss result occurs, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referencing the reach table stored in the main ROM 313 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision on whether to display a preview is not made by the main control device 162, but by the presentation control device 143. In this case, the presentation control device 143 executes a lottery process for preview displays so that a game turn corresponding to a jackpot result is more likely to produce a preview display, and/or a preview display with a low occurrence rate is more likely to occur, compared to a game turn corresponding to a loss result. Incidentally, the result of this lottery is reflected when the presentation for the game turn is executed by the symbol display device 75.

Here, the probability of a reach display occurring in a game that results in a losing outcome is the same regardless of the setting state, "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." This makes it possible to ensure that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 does not create an advantage or disadvantage in terms of the probability of a reach display occurring in a game that results in a losing outcome. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a reach display occurring in a game that results in a losing outcome.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the display duration in the special symbol display unit 43 and the display duration of the symbol in the symbol display device 75.
The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the timer interrupt process described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation display on the special symbol display unit 43 starts and when the variation pattern is determined when the symbol display device 75 starts to vary the symbol.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, processing related to the base value is executed. The base value referred to in this processing does not apply to all game states, but rather is the ratio of the total number of game balls dispensed to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA), calculated for a period excluding the period during the open/close execution mode resulting from a jackpot result and the period during the high-frequency support mode. In other words, it is the base value during normal play (left-handed play).

In processing related to the base value, the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 calculates and measures the base value. At that time, the measurement interval is defined as the period until the total number of outs (total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls), and the current base value in the most recent measurement interval and the base value in the past measurement period are displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e.

As shown in Figure 443 (a), when displaying the base value, of the first to fifth alarm display devices 169a to 169e, the first alarm display device 169a and the second alarm display device 169b are used as identification displays, and the third alarm display device 169c and the fourth alarm display device 169d are used as ratio (base value) displays. The identification displays are used to indicate whether the base value displayed in the ratio display device is a real-time base value or a past base value. Note that the fifth alarm display device 169e is not used when displaying the base value.

Figure 443 (b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display mode of the base values on the first to fourth alert display devices 169a to 169d. The first to fourth alert display devices 169a to 169d alternate between displaying the current base value, which is the real-time base value for the most recent measurement interval; the previous base value, which is the base value for the previous measurement interval (the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60,000 in the previous measurement interval); the previous-previous base value, which is the base value for the measurement interval before last; and the previous-previous base value, which is the base value for the measurement interval before last, every predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds).

When displaying the current base value, "bL." is displayed on the identification display unit (first alarm display unit 169a and second alarm display unit 169b), and the current base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio display unit (third alarm display unit 169c and fourth alarm display unit 169d). Furthermore, when displaying the previous base value, the base value before last, or the base value before last, "b1.", "b2.", or "b3." is displayed on the identification display unit, respectively, and the base value for each measurement period (past base value) is displayed on the ratio display unit. By displaying the base value in this way together with the identification display unit, when an amusement hall manager or the like checks the base value, they can properly understand what point in time the base value is.

In this way, the base value display not only shows the current base value, but also shows base values from multiple past games. Generally, in gaming halls, approximately 10,000 to 20,000 game balls are fired into a single pachinko machine 10 per day, so the base value for every 60,000 total balls out corresponds to the base value over several days, approximately 3 to 6 days. By comparing the current base value with these past base values, it is possible to appropriately determine the appropriateness of the current base value. Therefore, for example, if fraudulent activity has been committed to increase the winning rate at the first operating port 62 or the general winning port 61, the possibility of such fraudulent activity can be discovered.

In such cases, for example, if only the previous base value is displayed as the past value, and the base value at that time happens to be low, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity by comparing it with the current base value. In this regard, by also displaying the base value before last and the value before last, it becomes possible to compare it with multiple past base values, making it easier to determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity.

In the above configuration, base values are displayed for the past three measurement intervals, but base values for two intervals may also be displayed, or base values for four or more intervals may also be displayed. In other words, when displaying past base values for multiple measurement intervals, the number of measurement intervals to be displayed can be determined arbitrarily.

In addition to the processing related to the base value, this embodiment also executes processing related to the difference in balls. The difference in balls referred to in this processing is the total number of game balls paid out minus the total number of outs (total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA), regardless of the game status. In other words, it is the total difference in balls during the game period. In the processing related to the difference in balls, the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 calculates and measures the difference in balls, and executes processing to limit the progress of the game if the measured value exceeds a specific number (for example, 100,000 balls). Furthermore, the difference in balls each time is displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e. These processes will be explained in detail later.

As described above, in this embodiment, control processing for progressing the game based on the player's gaming operations is performed, as well as processing related to the base value and processing related to the difference in balls. However, the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 distinguishes between specific control and non-specific control when executing these processes. Specifically, processing related to the base value and part of the processing related to the difference in balls is considered non-specific control, and control other than non-specific control, including control processing for progressing the game based on the player's gaming operations and another part of the processing related to the difference in balls, is considered specific control.

Figure 444 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how programs and data are set in the main ROM 313. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control in the control executed by the MPU 312, as shown in Figure 444, the addresses of the areas in the main ROM 313 where programs and data for specific control are stored are clearly distinguished from those where programs and data for non-specific control are stored.

Specifically, specific control programs are stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses X(1) to X(k+2). Furthermore, addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5), which are consecutive to addresses X(1) to X(k+2), are unused addresses in which no data is stored, and specific control data is stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2).

Furthermore, addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) consecutive to addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control programs are collectively stored in the consecutive address areas within the range of addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2). Furthermore, addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) consecutive to addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control data are collectively stored in the consecutive address areas within the range of addresses X(n+6) to X(p+2).

The relationship between the above programs and data and addresses is set both in physical addresses in the main ROM 313 and in logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the MPU 312.

As described above, programs and data for specific control and programs and data for non-specific control are stored in different address ranges, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. Therefore, for example, when checking only programs and data for specific control, it is sufficient to check only the address range area where these programs and data for specific control are stored. Similarly, when checking only programs and data for non-specific control, it is sufficient to check only the address range area where these programs and data for non-specific control are stored. This makes it possible to efficiently check programs and data for specific and non-specific control separately. This also makes it possible to efficiently modify programs and data for specific and non-specific control separately.

By setting an address range for an unused area where no data is stored between the address range of the area where specific control programs and specific control data are stored and the address range of the area where non-specific control programs and non-specific control data are stored, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control when checking.

In the address ranges for specific control and the address ranges for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in different address ranges, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls. This allows for efficient work when checking programs and data separately. Furthermore, an address range for an unused area where no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where programs are stored and the address range of the area where data is stored, making it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range of the program and the address range of the data when checking.

Figure 445 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting of each area in the main RAM 314. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control executed by the MPU 312, as shown in Figure 445, the address ranges of the work area 391 for specific control and the stack area 392 for specific control are clearly distinguished from the address ranges of the work area 393 for non-specific control and the stack area 394 for non-specific control in the main RAM 314.

Specifically, the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) is set as a work area 391 for specific control. Furthermore, addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5), which are consecutive to addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2), are unused addresses, and the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) is set as a stack area 392 for specific control.

Furthermore, addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5) consecutive to addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) are unused area addresses, and the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) thereafter is set as a work area 393 for non-specific control. Further, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) consecutive to addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are unused area addresses, and the area of each consecutive address within the range of addresses Y(t+6) to Y(u+2) thereafter is set as a stack area 394 for non-specific control.

The relationship between each area and address as described above is set both as a physical address in the main RAM 314 and as a logical address on the memory map recognized by the MPU 312.

As described above, by separately setting the work area 391 for specific control and the work area 393 for non-specific control, different areas of the main RAM 314 are used when performing various calculations, etc., when the MPU 312 executes specific control and when it executes non-specific control. This makes it less likely that information in the main RAM 314 required for specific control or non-specific control will be erased when the other is executed. Incidentally, the MPU 312 issues a load command when writing information to each work area 391, 393 and reading information from each work area 391, 393.

By separately defining the stack area 392 for specific control and the stack area 394 for non-specific control, different areas of the main RAM 314 are used when saving information stored in the MPU 312's registers and when storing program return address information, depending on whether the MPU 312 is executing specific control or non-specific control. This makes it less likely that information used in the other control will be erased when saving information stored in the MPU 312's registers or storing program return address information while one of the specific and non-specific controls is being executed. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 392, 394, the MPU 312 issues a push command, and when reading information from each stack area 392, 394, the MPU 312 issues a pop command. Furthermore, when reading information from each stack area 392, 394, the order in which information is written to the stack area 392, 394 is such that the last information is read first.

Here, when MPU 312 executes processing corresponding to specific control, MPU 312 can write information to specific control work area 391 and specific control stack area 392, and can read information from specific control work area 391 and specific control stack area 392. On the other hand, when MPU 312 executes processing corresponding to specific control, MPU 312 can read information from non-specific control work area 393 and non-specific control stack area 394, but cannot write information to non-specific control work area 393 and non-specific control stack area 394. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

Furthermore, when MPU 312 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, MPU 312 can write information to non-specific control work area 393 and non-specific control stack area 394, and can read information from non-specific control work area 393 and non-specific control stack area 394. On the other hand, when MPU 312 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, MPU 312 can read information from specific control work area 391 and specific control stack area 392, but cannot write information to specific control work area 391 and specific control stack area 392. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed.

Note that backup power will continue to be supplied to the main RAM 314 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and this backup power will be supplied to all of the specific control work area 391, the specific control stack area 392, the non-specific control work area 393, and the non-specific control stack area 394. As a result, the information stored in the specific control work area 391, the specific control stack area 392, the non-specific control work area 393, and the non-specific control stack area 394 will be retained as long as backup power is being supplied, even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 312>
Next, we will explain each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. The processes of the MPU 312 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 446. The main processing is started under the condition that timer interrupt processing is prohibited. The main processing is basically executed by a program for specific control, but some processing (step Sf115) is executed by a program for non-specific control.

First, in step Sf101, the power-on initialization process is executed. During the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started and a predetermined waiting time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed before proceeding to the next process. During this predetermined waiting period, the symbol display device 75 starts operating and the initial settings are completed. Access to the main RAM 314 is also permitted.

In step Sf102, internal function register setting processing is executed. In this internal function register setting processing, the interrupt period of the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 449), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main processing and is started, is set to a predetermined period (e.g., 4 msec). In addition to setting the interrupt period of the timer interrupt processing, the internal function register setting processing also executes processing to set the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1.

In step Sf103, it is determined whether the reset button 166c has been pressed. In other words, it is determined whether the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on while the reset button 166c has been pressed, and whether the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 has begun.

If the reset button 166c has been pressed, the process proceeds to step Sf104, where a first initialization process is performed on the specific control area. In the first initialization process, the specific control work area 391 of the main RAM 314 is cleared to "0," except for the area (setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is set.

In addition, in the first initialization process, the work area 393 for non-specific control and the stack area 394 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0." This makes it possible to prevent the work area 393 for non-specific control and the stack area 394 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by a clearing operation by an amusement hall employee or the like.

In step Sf105, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 166a has been turned ON using the setting key. If the setting key insertion unit 166a has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step Sf106, where the setting value update process is executed.

Here, the setting value update process of step Sf106 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 447. Note that steps Sf201 to Sf207 in the setting value update process are executed by a specific control program.

The setting value update process begins in step Sf201 by setting the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 391 to "1." The setting update display flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated.

In step Sf202, it is determined whether the value of the setting value counter provided in the specific control work area 391 is greater than or equal to 1, corresponding to "Setting 1," and less than or equal to 6, corresponding to "Setting 6." If the value of the setting value counter is "0" or greater than or equal to 7, the process proceeds to step Sf203, where the setting value counter is set to "1." This causes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to become "Setting 1."

After step Sf203 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sf202 (if the setting value is within the range of setting 1 to setting 6), step Sf204 determines whether the setting key insertion unit 166a has been turned OFF using the setting key. In this case, the configuration may determine whether the setting key insertion unit 166a has switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or whether the setting key insertion unit 166a is in the OFF state.

If the setting key insertion section 166a has not been turned OFF, step Sf205 determines whether the update button 166b has been pressed. If the update button 166b has been pressed, the process proceeds to step Sf206, where the value of the setting value counter in the specific control work area 391 is incremented by 1. This updates the setting value to the next higher level.

After step Sf206 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf205 (the update button 166b has not been pressed), the process returns to step Sf202. Thereafter, steps Sf202 to Sf206 are repeated until a positive judgment is made in step Sf204. Note that if it is determined in step Sf202 that the value of the setting value counter is 7 or greater, the setting value counter is set to "1" in step Sf203. As a result, if the update button 166b is pressed once when the setting is "6," the setting will return to "1."

If the determination in step Sf204 is affirmative (the setting key insertion section 166a has been turned OFF), the process proceeds to step Sf207, where the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 391 is cleared to "0." After step Sf207 is executed, the setting value update process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (Fig. 446), if a negative judgment is made in step Sf103 (the reset button 166c has not been pressed), the process proceeds to step Sf107, where it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 391 for specific control is set to "1". The power outage flag is set to "1" when power outage processing is executed in the power outage information storage processing (step Sf401) of the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 449) described below, and is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to determine whether power outage processing was performed appropriately the previous time the power was shut off.

If the power outage flag is set to "1", in step Sf108, a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392. In the following step Sf109, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was shut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data.

If a negative judgment is made in either step Sf107 or step Sf109, an operation prohibition process is executed. During the operation prohibition process, an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or other person that an error has occurred (step Sf110), and then an infinite loop is entered. This operation prohibition process is released when the initialization process of step Sf104 is executed.

If the determination in step Sf109 is affirmative (the checksum is normal), step Sf111 determines whether the setting key insertion unit 166a has been turned on. If the setting key insertion unit 166a has been turned on, the process proceeds to step Sf112, where setting confirmation processing is executed.

The setting confirmation process of step Sf112 will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 448. Note that steps Sf301 to Sf303 in the setting confirmation process are executed by a specific control program.

In the setting confirmation process, first in step Sf301, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1". The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed. The current setting values are displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e. The process for this display will be described later.

In step Sf302, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 166a has been turned off. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 166a has switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or it may be configured to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 166a is in an OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 166a has not been turned off, the processing of step Sf302 is repeated.

If the setting key insertion section 166a is turned OFF, the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 391 is cleared to "0", and then the setting confirmation process ends. This cancels the setting value confirmation state (the display state of the setting value on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e).

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (Fig. 446), after the setting confirmation processing in step Sf112 is executed and the setting value update processing in step Sf106 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step Sf111 (when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 166c and the setting key insertion unit 166a is not turned on) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf105 (when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the reset button 166c and the setting key insertion unit 166a is not turned on), the power-on setting processing is executed in step Sf113. The power-on setting processing initializes predetermined areas of the main RAM 314, such as initializing the power outage flag, and sends a command corresponding to the current game status to the presentation control device 143. The power-on setting processing also determines whether game play is currently stopped, and if so, cancels the stoppage. In other words, if the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1", it is cleared to "0" and initialized.

In step Sf114, the overtime startup process is executed, and in the following step Sf115, the partial clear process is executed. These processes relate to game play restrictions using the difference in ball count, and details of these will be explained later.

In step Sf116, an operation check process is executed for the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e. In this operation check process, all segments on the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e are lit, and this state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds). If any segments on the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e are not lit due to a fault such as a broken wire, the base value and other information may not be displayed correctly, which may hinder the determination of fraudulent activity. In this regard, by executing the operation check process, it is possible to check whether the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e are lit normally each time the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, preventing gameplay from proceeding with the base value and other information not being displayed correctly.

In step Sf117, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Then, the process proceeds to the remaining processing in steps Sf118 to Sf121. In other words, the MPU 312 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing in steps Sf118 to Sf121. In this respect, the remaining processing in steps Sf118 to Sf121 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining processing, first, in step Sf118, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step Sf119, random number initial value update processing is performed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step Sf120, fluctuation counter update processing is performed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. These update processing operations read the current numerical information from the corresponding counter in the specific control work area 391, add 1 to the read numerical information, and then overwrite the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, in step Sf121, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing in step Sf121, the system returns to step Sf118 and repeats the processing in steps Sf118 to Sf121.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 449. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt process is set in the program for specific control.

First, in step Sf401, power outage information storage processing is executed. In the power outage information storage processing, it is monitored whether a power outage signal corresponding to a power outage has been received from the power outage monitoring unit 315, and if a power outage is identified, power outage processing is executed and then an infinite loop is entered. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1", and checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392, and the calculated checksums are saved.

In step Sf402, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal power feature release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal power feature release counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then overwritten onto the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0." Thereafter, in step Sf403, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step Sf119, and in step Sf404, a variable counter update process is executed as in step Sf120.

In step Sf405, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether a specific event set as a target for fraudulent activity has occurred. The pachinko machine 10 is equipped with anomaly detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors, magnet detection sensors, and radio wave detection sensors, and the fraud detection process determines whether various abnormalities have occurred based on the output of these detection sensors.

In step Sf406, a notification display process is executed to control the display of the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e. In the following step Sf407, a game stop determination process is executed to determine whether or not to enter a game stop state. Details of these processes will be described later.

In step Sf408, it is determined whether the game progress has been stopped by determining whether the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1." If the game progress has not been stopped, the process proceeds to step Sf409, where port output processing is executed.

In the port output process, if output information was set in the previous timer interrupt process, processing is executed to provide output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 63b, 65d. For example, if information is set to switch the variable winning device 65 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 65d is initiated, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, the output of that drive signal is stopped. Also, if information is set to switch the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 63b is initiated, and if information is set to switch it to a closed state, the output of that drive signal is stopped.

In step Sf410, a read process is performed. During the read process, signals other than the power outage signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

In step Sf411, the ball entry detection process is executed. In this ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 91a-97a are read, and based on the read results, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the outlet 68, general entry port 61, variable entry device 65, first operating port 62, second operating port 63, and through gate 64. Details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

In step Sf412, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters stored in the main RAM 314. In this case, the timer counters in which the stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled collectively, but it is also possible to configure the system to collectively update both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters.

In step Sf413, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of game balls. While the launch operation to the game ball launch handle 41 is continuing, one game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds, which is the predetermined launch cycle. In the following step Sf414, a special chart special electric control process is executed to control the execution of game rounds and the execution of the open/close execution mode. The special chart special electric control process will be explained in detail later.

In step Sf415, normal map normal power control processing is executed. In normal map normal power control processing, if a win has occurred in the through gate 64, processing is executed to obtain hold information on the normal map side, and if hold information on the normal map side is stored, an opening judgment is made for that hold information, and processing is executed to perform a normal map performance in response to that opening judgment. Also, based on the result of the opening judgment, processing is executed to open and close the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63. In this case, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, corresponding processing is executed, and if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, corresponding processing is executed. Also, if the opening/closing execution mode is selected, the support mode immediately before will be low-frequency support mode even if it was high-frequency support mode.

In step Sf416, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps Sf414 and Sf415, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved items related to the special item display unit 43 in the special item reserved item number display unit AM, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved items related to the regular item display unit 44 in the regular item reserved item number display unit FM. Also, in step Sf416, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps Sf414 and Sf415, output information is set to update the display content of the special item display unit 43, and output information is set to update the display content of the regular item display unit 44.

In step Sf417, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 181 are confirmed, and a payout status reception process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation results. In the following step Sf418, a payout output process is executed to set the prize ball command as the output target. In addition, in step Sf419, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process.

In step Sf420, base value and ball difference processing is performed to calculate the base value and ball difference. Details of the base value and ball difference processing will be explained later. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sf408 (if game play is stopped), step Sf421 determines whether the excess flag is set to "1". If the excess flag is set to "1", the payout status reception processing of step Sf417 is executed without executing the various processes from step Sf409 to step Sf416. If the excess flag is not set to "1", the base value and ball difference processing of step Sf420 is executed without executing the various processes from step Sf409 to step Sf419. In this way, the processing that is not executed while game play is stopped is controlled depending on the value of the excess flag, and details of the excess flag will be explained later.

<Special diagram special power control processing>
The special picture special power control processing of step Sf414 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 450.

The special chart special power control process first executes a process to obtain reserved information in step Sf501. This process determines whether a win has occurred in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, and if a win has occurred, determines whether the number of reserved balls in the reserved ball storage area 314a is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, the number of reserved balls is incremented by 1, and the numerical information for the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step Sf402 is stored in the first of the available reserved ball areas RE1 to RE4 in the reserved ball area RE.

If winnings occur simultaneously in the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, the process to acquire the pending information is executed multiple times within the scope of a single execution of the pending information acquisition process. Furthermore, when new pending information is acquired, a corresponding acquisition command is sent to the performance control device 143. When the performance control device 143 receives this command, it updates the image displayed on the pattern display device 75, which indicates the number of pending information items, to display content corresponding to the increase in pending information.

In step Sf502, the information of the special pattern special power counter provided in the specific control work area 391 is read, and in step Sf503, the special pattern special power address table provided in the main ROM 313 is read. In the following step Sf504, the start address corresponding to the information of the special pattern special power counter is obtained from the special pattern special power address table, and in step Sf505, a jump is made to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps Sf506 to Sf512. The special pattern special power counter is a counter that allows the MPU 312 to determine which of the various processes of steps Sf506 to Sf512 should be executed, and the start address of the program for executing the processes of steps Sf506 to Sf512 is set in the special pattern special power address table in correspondence with the numerical information of the special pattern special power counter.

In step Sf506, the special chart change start process is executed. The special chart change start process is explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 451.

The special chart change start process first determines in step Sf501 whether the number of reserved information items stored in the reserved area RE is 1 or more. If the number of reserved information items is 1 or more, the data setting process is executed in step Sf602.

The data setting process first subtracts one from the number of reserved items and moves the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 of the reserved area RE to the execution area AE. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 in order toward the lower areas. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted from the second reserved area RE2 to the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 to the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 to the third reserved area RE3, and then the fourth reserved area RE4 is cleared to "0." At this time, a shift command is sent to the performance control device 143 to acknowledge that the data in the reserved areas has been shifted. When this command is received, the performance control device 143 updates the image displayed on the pattern display device 75 indicating the number of reserved items to display content corresponding to the decrease in reserved information.

In step Sf603, a win/loss table is read from the main ROM 313. Specifically, the value of the setting value counter provided in the specific control work area 391 is first read to determine the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the current win/loss lottery mode is determined, and if it is the high probability mode, the high probability win/loss table corresponding to the determined setting state is read, and if it is the low probability mode, the low probability win/loss table corresponding to the determined setting state is read.

In step Sf604, the hit/miss table read in step Sf603 is referenced to execute a hit/miss determination process. In the hit/miss determination process, it is determined whether the information for hit/miss determination stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information set in the hit/miss table read in step Sf603.

If the result of the hit/miss determination process is a jackpot win (step Sf605: YES), the allocation determination process is executed in step Sf606. In the allocation determination process, the allocation determination information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read. Then, by referencing the allocation table 387 provided in the main ROM 313, it is determined which jackpot result the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 read out corresponds to. Specifically, it is determined which jackpot result it corresponds to: a low-probability jackpot result, a low-prize high-probability jackpot result, or a high-prize high-probability jackpot result.

In step Sf607, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the current variation is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 313, and the identified information is written to the specific control work area 391 in the main RAM 314. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

In step Sf608, a flag set process corresponding to the allocation determination result is executed. Specifically, flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result are provided in the specific control work area 391, and in step Sf608, the flag corresponding to the result of the allocation determination process in step Sf606 is set to "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sf605 that the result is not a jackpot, the process for setting the stop result for a losing result is executed in step Sf609. Specifically, information on the pattern type to be finally displayed on the special symbol display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the current variation is identified from the stop result table for losing results pre-stored in the main ROM 313, and the identified information is written to the work area 391 for identification control. The information on the pattern type selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing either step Sf608 or step Sf609, step Sf610 executes a process to determine the duration of the game round. In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. It is also determined whether a reach display will occur on the pattern display device 75 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation results in a low-probability jackpot result or a high-prize, high-probability jackpot result, it is determined that a reach display will occur. Furthermore, if neither of these jackpot results is obtained, and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach display will occur.

If it is determined that a reach display will occur, the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 313 is referenced to obtain the duration of play times corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach display will not occur, the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 313 is referenced to obtain the duration of play times corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. Incidentally, the duration of play times that can be obtained by reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table differs from the duration of play times that can be obtained by reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

The duration of play times when a reach does not occur is set so that the greater the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE, the shorter the duration of play times. Furthermore, the non-reach duration table is set so that a shorter duration of play times is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when it is low-frequency support mode, when the number of reserved information is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the duration of play times may not change depending on the number of reserved information or support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of play times when a reach occurs. Separate duration tables may also be set for various jackpot results, miss reach results, and miss results without a reach. In this case, the duration of play times will be allocated according to each play result.

In step Sf611, the information on the duration of the game round obtained in step Sf610 is set in the special symbol special power timer counter provided in the specific control work area 391. The numerical information set in the special symbol special power timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step Sf412). Incidentally, as part of the performance for a game round, the special symbol display unit 43 displays changing patterns, and the pattern display device 75 displays changing patterns. When each of these changing displays ends, the stop result of that game round is displayed (the pattern display device 75 displays a state in which a specified pattern combination is waiting on the active line) and the final stop is displayed for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the duration of the game round obtained in step Sf610 is the total time for one game round.

In step Sf612, the variation command and type command are sent to the presentation control device 143. The variation command includes information on the duration of the game round. As described above, the duration of the game round obtained by referencing the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game round obtained by referencing the reach duration table. Therefore, even if the variation command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the presentation control device 143 can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game round. In this regard, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variation command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the effect control device 143 receives a variation command and a type command from the MPU 312, it causes the lamp units 26-28, speaker unit 29, and symbol display device 75 to execute the effect for that game round. In this case, the effect for that game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the content of the variation command and type command. In addition, the symbol display device 75 displays a variation of symbols as the effect for that game round, and when the effect for that game round ends, a combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the win/loss determination process and the allocation determination process is displayed frozen.

In step Sf613, the display of the changing image on the special image display unit 43 is started. In the following step Sf614, the special image special power counter is incremented by 1. In this case, since the numerical information of the special image special power counter is "0" when the special image change start process is executed, the numerical information of the special image special power counter becomes "1."

Returning to the explanation of the special chart special power control processing (Fig. 450), in step Sf507, special chart change processing is executed. In special chart change processing, it is determined whether the timing is within the duration of the game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, processing is executed to regularly change the display mode of the image on the special chart display unit 43. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special chart change processing to that corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing. Note that in this embodiment, a final stop command is not sent from the MPU 312 to the performance control device 143.

In step Sf508, special chart determination processing is executed. In special chart determination processing, the display mode of the image on the special chart display unit 43 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in special chart determination processing, it is determined whether the final stop period has elapsed, and if that period has elapsed, it is determined whether a transition to opening and closing execution mode will occur. If a transition to opening and closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is cleared to "0". If a transition to opening and closing execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special chart determination processing to that corresponding to the special power start processing.

In step Sf509, special power start processing is executed. During the special power start processing, if the processing to start the opening period in the current open/close execution mode has not yet been executed, the processing to set the opening period is executed. An opening command is also sent to the performance control device 143. Upon receiving the opening command, the performance control device 143 causes the lamp units 26-28, speaker unit 29, and symbol display device 75 to execute an opening performance. If the opening period has elapsed, start processing is executed to start the first round of play. In this start processing, the variable winning device 65 is set to an open state and the end condition for the round of play is set. When setting this end condition, the upper limit of the duration for which the variable winning device 65 is to remain open during this first round of play is set, and the upper limit of the number of game balls that can win the variable winning device 65 during this first round of play is set in the winning number counter provided in the specific control work area 391.

In step Sf510, special line open processing is executed. In special line open processing, it is determined whether the conditions for ending the round of play have been met. If the conditions for ending the round of play have been met, the variable winning device 65 is closed. If the round of play that has just ended is not the last round of play executed, the numerical information of the special chart special line counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line open processing to that corresponding to the special line closed processing. If the round of play that has just ended is the last round of play executed, the numerical information of the special chart special line counter is incremented by 2, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line open processing to that corresponding to the special line end processing.

In step Sf511, special line closed processing is executed. In special line closed processing, it is determined whether the interval period between rounds of play has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round of play ends. If the interval period has elapsed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state and the end conditions for the round of play are set. Then, the numerical information of the special chart special line counter is subtracted by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line closed processing to that corresponding to the special line open processing.

In step Sf512, special call termination processing is executed. In the special call termination processing, if the processing to start the ending period for this opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed, the ending period (e.g., 5 seconds) is set and an ending command is sent to the performance control device 143. Upon receiving the ending command, the performance control device 143 causes the lamp units 26-28, speaker unit 29, and pattern display device 75 to execute an ending performance. When the ending period has elapsed, the win/lose lottery mode and support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode are set to the modes corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the start of this opening/closing execution mode.

Next, we will explain the configuration used by the MPU 312 to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the variable winning device 65, the outlet opening 68, and the through gate 64 based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 91a-97a. Figure 452 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 91a-97a are input to the MPU 312.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port 312a. The input port 312a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area storing information of "0" or "1" depending on the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, these areas include the 0th bit D0 through the 7th bit D7. However, in this pachinko machine 10, the 7th bit D7 is not used, and the device is configured to handle seven types of signals simultaneously. Although more than eight types of signals can be input to the input port 312a, the group of signals to be input to the input port 312a is switched through switching control by a driver IC to limit the number of signals that can be input simultaneously to eight.

During the ball entry detection process (step Sf411) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 449), the signal group to be input to input port 312a is set to the signal group from each ball entry detection sensor 91a-97a. When this setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first prize entry detection sensor 91a, the first bit D1 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second prize entry detection sensor 92a, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operation port detection sensor 93a, the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operation port detection sensor 94a, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the large prize entry detection sensor 95a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 96a, and the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 97a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 91a-97a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not currently detecting a passing game ball as a detection signal when it has not detected the passing of a game ball, and outputs a HIGH level signal indicating that it is currently detecting a passing game ball as a detection signal when it has detected the passing of a game ball. Input port 312a stores a "0" in the corresponding bit when it receives a LOW level signal, and stores a "1" in the corresponding bit when it receives a HIGH level signal. In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 91a-97a have not detected the passing of a game ball, a "0" corresponding to the information indicating that it is not currently detecting is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it has detected the passing of a game ball, a "1" corresponding to the information indicating that it is currently detecting is stored in the corresponding bit.

Figure 453 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step Sf411 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 449).

If it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 or the 1st bit D1 has switched from storing "0" to storing "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 91a or the second prize opening detection sensor 92a (step Sf801: YES). In this case, in step Sf802, the general prize opening sensor flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1," and in step Sf803, the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the work area 391 is incremented by 1.

The general winning sensor flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that a win has occurred in the general winning port 61, and the 10 prize ball counter is a counter that determines the number of times the MPU 312 should pay out 10 game balls. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 in the payout output process of step Sf418 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 181 receives a 10 prize ball command, it controls the payout device 222 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 93a (step Sf804: YES). In this case, in step Sf805, the first actuation winning flag provided in the work area 391 is set to "1", and in step Sf806, the value of the three prize ball counter provided in the work area 391 is incremented by one. The first actuation winning flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that a win has occurred at the first actuation port 62, and the three prize ball counter is a counter that determines the number of times the MPU 312 should pay out three game balls.

The special chart special power control process (step Sf414) of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449) confirms that the first activation winning flag is set to "1" and then executes a process to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 314a is less than the upper limit of four. The special chart special power control process (step Sf414) confirms that the first activation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the first activation winning flag is cleared to "0".

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 94a (step Sf807: YES). In this case, in step Sf808, the second actuation winning flag provided in the work area 391 is set to "1", and in step Sf809, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the work area 391 is incremented by 1. The second actuation winning flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that a win has occurred at the second actuation port 63, and the one prize ball counter is a counter that determines the number of times the MPU 312 should pay out one game ball.

The special chart special power control process (step Sf414) of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449) confirms that the second activation winning flag is set to "1", and then executes a process to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 314a is less than the upper limit of four. The special chart special power control process (step Sf414) confirms that the second activation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the first activation winning flag is cleared to "0".

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the large prize opening detection sensor 95a (step Sf810: YES). In this case, in step Sf811, the special electric prize flag provided in the work area 391 is set to "1", and in step Sf812, the value of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the work area 391 is incremented by 1. The special electric prize flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that a prize has been won in the variable prize device 65, and the 15 prize ball counter is a counter that determines the number of times the MPU 312 should pay out 15 game balls.

The special chart special electric control process (step Sf414) of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449) confirms that the special electric winning flag is set to "1", thereby determining that one game ball has entered the variable winning device 65 and subtracting one from the remaining number of balls that can enter the variable winning device 65 in a round of play. When the process of subtracting one from the number of balls that can enter is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0".

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 96a (step Sf813: YES). In this case, the out flag provided in the work area 391 is set to "1". The out flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that a game ball has entered the outlet 68.

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one gaming ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 97a (step Sf815: YES). In this case, in step Sf816, the gate winning flag provided in the work area 391 is set to "1". The gate winning flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that one gaming ball has entered the through gate 64.

The normal map normal power control process (step Sf415) of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and then executes a process to store the current numerical information of the normal power device release counter C4 as normal map side pending information in the normal power pending area 314c, provided that the number of normal map side pending information stored in the normal power pending area 314c is less than the upper limit of four. The normal map normal power control process (step Sf415) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the dispensing control device 181. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the dispensing control device 181 and the various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device 181, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 454.

The dispensing control device 181 is equipped with an MPU 382. The MPU 382 contains a dispensing side ROM 383, a dispensing side RAM 384, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The dispensing-side ROM 383 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The dispensing-side ROM 383 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the dispensing-side MPU 382.

Dispenser-side RAM 384 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. Dispenser-side RAM 384 is randomly accessible and takes less time to read data than dispensing-side ROM 383 when compared for the same data capacity. Dispenser-side RAM 384 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in dispensing-side ROM 383.

The payout side MPU 382 is capable of two-way communication with the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162. By receiving a prize ball command from the MPU 312, the payout side MPU 382 drives and controls the payout device 222 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. The payout side MPU 382 also monitors whether the state is such that game balls can be paid out normally, and if it determines that the state is such that normal payout is not possible, it stops the payout device 222 even if information on the number of prize balls that have not been paid out is stored in the payout side RAM 384. The payout side MPU 382 also sends a payout restriction command to the MPU 312 indicating that normal payout is not possible.

When the MPU 312 receives the payout restriction command, it sends a notification command to the presentation control device 143 so that a notification indicating that normal payout of game balls is not possible is displayed on the symbol display device 75, lamp units 26-28, and speaker unit 29. States in which normal payout of game balls is not possible include a full state in which the lower tray 34 is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 221 has not been replenished with game balls, an abnormal payout state in which the payout device 222 is not operating normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is open from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball passageway leading from the payout device 222 to the lower tray 34, and the detection results of this full tank detection sensor are input to the payout side MPU 382. The payout side MPU 382 determines that the tank is full when game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and determines that the full tank state has been released when the state in which game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released.

A no-ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball passageway leading from the tank 221 to the payout device 222, and the detection results of the no-ball detection sensor are input to the payout side MPU 382. The payout side MPU 382 determines that a no-ball state exists when the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball, and determines that the no-ball state has been lifted when the state in which the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball is lifted.

The payout device 222 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 222, and the detection results of the payout detection sensor are input to the payout side MPU 382. The payout side MPU 382 determines that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 222 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Furthermore, the payout side MPU 382 determines that an abnormal payout state has occurred when the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball even though the payout device 222 is being driven and controlled so that a game ball is paid out, and determines that the abnormal payout state has been resolved when the state in which the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball is resolved.

A front door open sensor 232 is provided on the front of the inner frame 13, and the detection result of the front door open sensor 232 is input to the dispensing side MPU 382. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 232 sends a closed detection signal to the dispensing side MPU 382, and when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 232 sends an open detection signal to the dispensing side MPU 382.

The dispensing side MPU 382 determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when it receives a closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 232, and determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when it receives an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 232. The dispensing side MPU 382 also sends a front door open command to the MPU 312 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and sends a front door close command to the MPU 312 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The MPU 312 determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when it receives a front door open command, and determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when it receives a front door close command.

A main body open sensor 233 is provided on the front of the back pack unit 15, and the detection result of the main body open sensor 233 is input to the payout side MPU 382. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 233 sends a closed detection signal to the payout side MPU 382, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 233 sends an open detection signal to the payout side MPU 382.

The payout side MPU 382 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 233, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 233. The payout side MPU 382 also sends a main body open command to the MPU 312 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and sends a main body close command to the MPU 312 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The MPU 312 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed to an open state when it receives an open main body command, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed to a closed state when it receives a close main body command.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the dispensing side MPU 382 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 455. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly initiated at a predetermined interval (e.g., every 2 msec).

First, in step Sf901, full tank processing is executed. In full tank processing, whether the tank is full or not is determined based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, processing is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a command indicating the full tank is sent to MPU 312. Furthermore, if the full tank state is released, processing is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a command indicating the full tank state has been released is sent to MPU 312.

In step Sf902, no-ball processing is executed. In no-ball processing, it is determined whether or not the state is a no-ball state based on the detection results of the no-ball detection sensor, and if the state is a no-ball state, it executes processing to stop the payout of game balls and sends a command to MPU 312 indicating that the no-ball state is in effect. Furthermore, if the no-ball state is released, it executes processing to enable the payout of game balls and sends a command to MPU 312 indicating that the no-ball state has been released.

In step Sf903, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed. In the payout abnormality monitoring process, whether or not a payout abnormality state exists is determined based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if a payout abnormality state exists, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a command indicating that a payout abnormality state exists is sent to MPU 312. Furthermore, if the payout abnormality state is resolved, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a command indicating that the payout abnormality state has been resolved is sent to MPU 312.

In step Sf904, a front door open monitoring process is executed. In the front door open monitoring process, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open or not based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 232, and if the front door frame 14 is open, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a front door open command is sent to the MPU 312. Furthermore, if the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a front door close command is sent to the MPU 312.

In step Sf905, a main body open monitoring process is executed. In the main body open monitoring process, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 233, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, a process is executed to stop the payout of gaming balls and a main body open command is sent to the MPU 312. Furthermore, if the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of gaming balls and a main body close command is sent to the MPU 312.

In step Sf906, a command reading process is executed. In this command reading process, the prize ball command sent by the MPU 312 is read and stored in the payout RAM 384. Then, a prize ball setting process is executed to add the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball count information in the payout RAM 384 (step Sf907), and then a payout control process is executed to control the execution of the payout of game balls by the payout device 222 (step Sf908).

In the payout control process, if the unpaid prize ball count information stored in the payout side RAM 384 is a value of 1 or greater, the payout device 222 is controlled and the value of the prize ball count information is decremented by 1 when the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. If the value of the prize ball count information becomes "0," the payout device 222 is stopped. After that, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step Sf909).

<Base value and difference in pitch count processing>
The base value and ball difference processing in step Sf420 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 456. Note that the processing in steps Sf1001 to Sf1005 in the base value and ball difference processing is executed by the MPU 312 using a program for specific control.

In the base value and ball difference processing, first in step Sf1001, an interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the timer interrupt processing (Figure 449) from occurring. In the following step Sf1002, a push command is used to write and save the information stored in the flag register, one of the multiple registers provided in the MPU 312, to a specified area in the work area 391 for specific control. The flag register contains a zero flag, a sign flag, and other flags, and this information changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving this flag register information before the program for the subroutine corresponding to the base value and ball difference processing (step Sf1003) is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in its state before it changes after the subroutine is called or started in the work area 391 for specific control.

In step Sf1003, a call command is used to read the subroutine program corresponding to the execution process for the base value and difference in pitches set in the program for non-specific control, and the execution process is started. At this time, information for specifying the return address after the execution process is executed is written to the stack area 392 for specific control. Then, when the execution process for the base value and difference in pitches is completed, the information for specifying the return address written to the stack area 392 is read, and the program returns to the base value and difference in pitches processing program indicated by the return address.

After step Sf1003 is executed, in step Sf1004, the saved flag register information is restored using a pop command. Specifically, the flag register information saved in the specific control stack area 392 in step Sf1002 is read and stored in the flag register of the MPU 312. This restores the information in the flag register of the MPU 312 to the information at the time step Sf1002 was executed.

In step Sf1005, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing (Figure 449) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

Next, the execution process for base values and ball difference numbers, which is executed by reading the non-specific control program in step Sf1103, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 457.

In step Sf1101, a load command is used to set the address information of the start position in the non-specific control stack area 394 (specifically, address Y(u+2) in Figure 445) in the stack pointer of the MPU 312. This switches the stack area to be used to the non-specific control stack area 394.

In step Sf1102, information stored in registers used in the base value calculation process (step Sf1103), excess determination process (step Sf1104), and display setting process (step Sf1105), which are described below, among the multiple registers provided in the MPU 312, is written to a specified area in the work area 393 for non-specific control and saved.

After step Sf1102 is executed, a call command is used to read and sequentially execute the subroutine programs of steps Sf1103 to Sf1105 set in the program for non-specific control. Prior to these processes, information about registers in use is saved in step Sf1102. Even if these registers are overwritten during the execution of steps Sf1103 to Sf1105, the information saved in the work area 393 for non-specific control can be written back into these registers to restore them to their pre-overwrite state. In other words, the information in the registers used during specific control can be protected.

When steps Sf1103 to Sf1105 are executed, information for identifying the return address after each process is executed is written to the non-specific control stack area 394. When steps Sf1103 to Sf1105 are completed, the information for identifying the return address written to area 394 is read, and the program returns to the execution process for the base value and difference in balls indicated by that return address.

After executing the processing of steps Sf1103 to Sf1105, in step Sf1106, a load command is used to set the stack pointer of the MPU 312 to a fixed address in the specific control stack area 392. This switches the stack area to be used to the specific control stack area 392.

The base value and ball difference processing in step Sf420, which includes the base value and ball difference execution processing, is executed after the control processing for progressing the game based on the player's game operations in the timer interrupt processing has finished. Therefore, the information stored in the stack area 39 for specific control is always constant immediately before the processing of steps Sf1103 to Sf1105 is executed. Therefore, by determining the above-mentioned fixed address based on this constant amount of information, the state of the stack pointer in the MPU 312 can be restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, even if the stack pointer information has not been saved in advance. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and eliminates the need to reserve an area for saving this information in the main RAM 314.

In step Sf1107, the values of each register that were saved in the non-specific control work area 393 in step Sf1102 are read using a load command, and these values are stored in each register of the MPU 312. This restores the information in each register of the MPU 312 to the information at the time step Sf1102 was executed.

Next, we will explain the base value calculation process in step Sf1103, the excess determination process in step Sf1104, and the display setting process in step Sf1105, which are executed when the subroutine program is read. These processes calculate information related to the game history regarding the base value and the difference in ball count, set display data to display the results on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e, and determine whether the calculated difference in ball count is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 100,000).

<Base value calculation process>
First, the base value calculation process in step Sf1103 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the base value calculation process, first in step Sf1201, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the variable winning device 65, or the outlet opening 68. That is, the above determination is made based on the outputs of the first winning opening detection sensor 91a, the second winning opening detection sensor 92a, the first operating opening detection sensor 93a, the second operating opening detection sensor 94a, the special winning opening detection sensor 95a, and the outlet opening detection sensor 96a.

If a ball has entered the net, step Sf1202 executes an update process for the out counter 501d for the measurement section. As shown in FIG. 459, the work area 393 for non-specific control includes a base value counter area 501 as an area corresponding to the calculation of the base value, and this base value counter area 501 includes the out counter 501d for the measurement section.

The out counter 501d for the measurement section is a counter for counting the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. In this embodiment, the out port detection sensor 96a is configured to detect only game balls that enter the out port 68 (Figure 435). Therefore, the out counter 501d for the measurement section is updated by incrementing by 1 not only when a ball enters the out port 68, but also when a ball enters the general winning port 61, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, or the variable winning device 65. The value of the out counter 501d for the measurement section is used to grasp the measurement section for each predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls).

In step Sf1203, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). If it is the normal gaming state, proceed to step Sf1204, where update processing is performed on the normal general winning counter 501a, the normal first operation counter 501b, and the normal out counter 501c in the base value counter area 501. These counters 501a to 501c are used to measure the number of gaming balls that enter the general winning opening 61, the number of gaming balls that enter the first operation opening 62, and the number of gaming balls that are ejected from the gaming area PA, respectively, in the normal gaming state. In step Sf1204, if a ball enters the general winning opening 61 or the first operation opening 62, the value of the corresponding counter, either the general winning counter 501a or the first operation counter 501b, is incremented by 1. Furthermore, regardless of the type of ball entry point, if a ball has entered, the value of the out counter 501c is incremented by 1.

After step Sf1204 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1203 (the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state), a base value calculation process is executed in step Sf1205. In the base value calculation process, the base value in the normal gaming state is calculated using the values of the normal counters 501a to 501c. When the values of the normal general winning counter 501a, the normal first operation counter 501b, and the normal out counter 501c are K1 to K3, the base value is as follows:
- Base value: The ratio of the total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 61" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 62") to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K3).

In step Sf1206, the base value information calculated in step Sf1205 is overwritten in the current status area 504a provided in the non-specific control work area 393. As shown in FIG. 459, the non-specific control work area 393 includes a calculation result area 504 for storing calculation results. In addition to the current status area 504a, the calculation result area 504 also includes a previous area 504b for storing information on the previous base value, a second-to-last area 504c for storing information on the base value before last, and a second-to-last area 504d for storing information on the base value before last.

After step Sf1206 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1201 (no ball has been scored), step Sf1207 determines whether the management start flag in the various flags area 507 (Figure 459) provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1." The management start flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify a situation in which the calculated base value should be reported.

If the management start flag is not set to "1", proceed to step Sf1208, where it is determined whether the value of the Out counter 501d for the measurement section is equal to or greater than a value corresponding to a predetermined management start reference value (e.g., 300). If the value of the Out counter 501d is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the management start reference value, proceed to step Sf1209, where the management start flag is set to "1". This causes the calculated base value to be reported.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured so that the management start flag is cleared to "0." When the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, its operation may be checked before shipment, during which time game balls are tampered with in each ball entry section and the subsequent operation is checked. Under these circumstances, during the period from the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10 until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA reaches the management start reference value, the calculated base value is excluded from notification, thereby preventing the base value affected by the above-mentioned tampering from being notified.

In step Sf1210, all counters 501a-501d in the base value counter area 501 are cleared to "0." As a result, the next base value calculation process begins with the values of each counter 501a-501d initialized, and in step Sf1205, the base value is calculated excluding the period before the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA reaches the management start reference value. After step Sf1210 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1208 (if the value of the out counter 501d for the measurement section is less than the management start reference value), the base value calculation process ends.

If step Sf1207 returns a positive result (the management start flag is "1"), the process proceeds to step Sf1211, where it is determined whether the value of the out counter 501d for the measurement section is equal to or greater than a value corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., 60,000) that defines the measurement section.

If the value of the out counter 501d is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the predetermined number, data shift processing is executed in step Sf1212. In the data shift processing, the base value information stored in the current area 504a, previous area 504b, second-to-last area 504c, and second-to-last area 504d in the calculation result area 504 of the non-specific control work area 393 is shifted in the following order: second-to-last area 504c → second-to-last area 504d, previous area 504b → second-to-last area 504c, current area 504a → previous area 504b. As a result, the final base value for the calculation period two periods ago (measurement interval) is stored in the area two periods ago as the final base value for the calculation period three periods ago in the area 504d for the calculation period two periods ago, the final base value for the calculation period one period ago is stored in the area two periods ago as the final base value for the calculation period two periods ago in the area 504c for the calculation period two periods ago, and the base value last calculated for the current calculation period is stored in the previous area 504b as the final base value for the calculation period one period ago.

In step Sf1213, all counters 501a to 501d in the base value counter area 501 are cleared to "0." After step Sf1213 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1211 (if the value of the out counter 501d for the measurement section is less than the predetermined number), the base value calculation process is terminated.

<Excess determination processing>
Although it is believed that the winning probability in actual play of a pachinko machine will eventually converge to an internally set winning probability, the current situation is that there is a large variation in the winning probability in actual play, for example, when viewed based on a single game by a player or a single business day of an amusement hall.As a result, it is possible that the so-called winning amount from the player's perspective may increase to a level that the gaming machine designer did not anticipate.In such cases, not only the player playing the pachinko machine but also those around watching the game may be stimulated to become overly gambling-minded.

In light of these circumstances, the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment refers to the game history and monitors whether the positive amount seen from the player's perspective is within a predetermined range, and restricts the progress of the game if the positive amount exceeds that range. The excess determination process of step Sf1104 is executed as part of this process, and this process will be explained below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 460.

In the excess determination process, first in step Sf1301, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the variable winning device 65, or the outlet opening 68. Note that this determination is made using the result of the determination in step Sf1201 in the base value calculation process (Figure 458).

If a ball has been scored, step Sf1302 updates the values of the various counters in the ball difference counter area 502. As shown in FIG. 459, the non-specific control work area 393 includes a ball difference counter area 502 as an area corresponding to the calculation of the ball difference. This ball difference counter area 502 includes a regular general winning counter 502a, a regular first operating counter 502b, a regular second operating counter 502c, a regular special power counter 502d, and a regular out counter 502e.

Of these counters, the general winning counter 502a, the first operation counter 502b, the second operation counter 502c, and the special power counter 502d are counters for counting the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening 61, the first operation opening 62, the second operation opening 63, and the variable winning device 65. Additionally, the out counter 502e is a counter for counting the total number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA. These counters 502a-502e count each ball that has entered from a predetermined measurement start trigger, regardless of the game state. In this embodiment, the game states include the normal game state, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the open/close execution mode. Therefore, the counters 502a-502e count the total number of balls that have entered across all of these game states.

In step Sf1302, the value of the counter 502a to 502e corresponding to the ball entry section determined to have been a ball entry in step Sf1301 is updated. For example, if it is determined that a ball has entered the first actuation port 62, the value of the first actuation counter 502b is incremented by 1. Note that for the out counter 502e, the value is incremented by 1 if a ball has entered, regardless of the type of ball entry section into which the ball entered.

In the next step Sf1303, a process for calculating the difference in balls is executed. In the process for calculating the difference in balls, the difference in balls is calculated using the values of the counters 502a to 502e in the difference in balls counter area 502. When the values of the regular winning counter 502a, the regular first operation counter 502b, the regular second operation counter 502c, the regular special power counter 502d, and the regular out counter 502e are K4 to K8, the difference in balls is as follows:
- Difference in number of balls: total number of game balls paid out (K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 61" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 62" + K6 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 63" + K7 x "number of prize balls for winning at the variable winning device 65") - total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K8).

The above-mentioned difference in ball count is derived as an index for measuring the above-mentioned plus amount (winning amount). Note that, while the base value calculation process (Fig. 458) calculates the base value in normal game mode, the calculation of the difference in ball count in the overage determination process calculates the total difference in ball count across all game modes.

In step Sf1304, a process is executed in which the difference in pitches calculated in step Sf1303 is overwritten in the difference in pitches area 504e (Figure 459) provided in the non-specific control work area 393. The excess determination process is started every 4 msec corresponding to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt cycle (Figure 449), so the difference in pitches information is updated every 4 msec and stored in the difference in pitches area 504e.

In step Sf1305, it is determined whether the difference in balls overwritten in the difference in balls area 504e in step Sf1304 (the difference in balls calculated in step Sf1303) is greater than or equal to a specific number (e.g., 100,000). This determines whether the above-mentioned plus amount is within a certain range.

If the difference in balls is equal to or greater than the specified number, proceed to step Sf1306, where the excess flag in the various flags area 507 provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1." The excess flag is a flag that the MPU 312 uses to determine that the difference in balls has reached a specified number or greater. After step Sf1306 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1305 (if the difference in balls is less than the specified number) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1301 (if no ball has been scored), the excess judgment process is terminated.

<Display setting process>
Next, the display setting process of step Sf1105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 461(a). This process performs setting process for displaying the base value derived in the base value calculation process of step Sf1103 and the difference in balls derived in the overshoot determination process of step Sf1104.

The display setting process first determines in step Sf1401 whether game play is currently stopped. Specifically, the specific control work area 391 in the main RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the game stop flag is set to "1."

If game play is not stopped, proceed to step Sf1402 and determine whether it is time to switch the display content on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e. In this embodiment, the base value derived in the base value calculation process of step Sf1103 and the base value derived in the base value calculation process of step Sf1103 are both displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e. Furthermore, when displaying these values, as already explained with reference to FIG. 443, with regard to the base value, the current base value, the past base value from one game before, the base value from the game before two games before, and the base value from the game before three games before are displayed in sequence every predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds). With regard to the ball difference, the ball difference (current ball difference) is displayed after the display of the base value from the game before last has finished. The processing in step Sf1402 determines whether the timing for switching the above displays has arrived.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sf1402 (if it is time to switch), step Sf1403 executes an update process for the display type counter 505 (Fig. 459) provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control. The display type counter 505 is a counter that allows the MPU 312 to identify which of the game history items, such as the various base values and ball difference numbers, is currently being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 461(b), when the value of the display type counter 505 is "0," the current base value is displayed; when the value of the display type counter 505 is "1," the previous base value is displayed; when the value of the display type counter 505 is "2," the base value two games ago is displayed; and when the display type counter 505 is "3," the base value two games ago is displayed. Furthermore, when the display type counter 505 is "4," the number of balls difference is displayed. In the update process for the display type counter 505, the value of the display type counter 505 is incremented by 1, and if the value after increment exceeds "4," the value of the display type counter 505 is set to "0." As a result, the display of the current base value, previous base value, two games ago base value, two games ago base value, and number of balls difference is sequentially changed at each of the above-mentioned switching timings on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e.

In this embodiment, the display of each of the above values is switched at regular intervals, but this is not limited to this. For example, the display period for some of the base values (e.g., the current base value) may be made different (e.g., longer) from the display period for other base values, and the display period for the ball difference may be made different (e.g., shorter) from the display period for each base value.

After step Sf1403 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1402 (if it is not the timing to switch), step Sf1404 executes a process to set display type data indicating the current display target. As shown in FIG. 459, the non-specific control work area 393 has a display target area 506 corresponding to the current display target. The display target area 506 has a type area 506a in which type data indicating the type of game history to be displayed is stored, and a history area 506b in which history data indicating the value of the game history to be displayed is stored. In the display type data setting process of step Sf1404, the type data of the game history corresponding to the value of the display type counter 505 is set in the type area 506a of the display target area 506. For example, if the value of the display type counter 505 is "2," a process is executed to overwrite the type area 506a with type data corresponding to the base value two times before last.

In step Sf1405, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1." If the management start flag is set to "1" and various base values and ball difference numbers should be reported, step Sf1406 executes a process to set history value data. In the process of setting history value data, information on the base value or ball difference number is read from each of areas 504a to 504e in the calculation result area 504 that corresponds to the value of the display type counter 505, and the history data is set in the history area 506b in the display target area 506. For example, if the value of the display type counter 505 is "2," the process executes a process to read the history data of the base value from the second-previous area 504c and overwrite it in the history area 506b.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sf1405 (the management start flag is not set to "1"), initial display data is set in the history area 506b of the display target area 506 in step Sf1407. The initial display data indicates the display content from the time the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA reaches the management start reference value (e.g., 300). The initial display data is set, for example, so that a flashing "-" is displayed on the third alarm display device 169c and the fourth alarm display device 169d.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sf1401 (if game play is stopped), the process proceeds to step Sf1408, where display type data corresponding to the difference in balls is set in the type area 506a of the display target area 506. In the following step Sf1409, history data corresponding to the difference in balls is set in the history area 506b of the display target area 506. In other words, if game play is stopped, the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e are set to display the difference in balls.

<Notification display processing>
Next, the notification display process of step Sf406 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 462. The notification display process is performed to output display information to the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e, and is executed as part of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449). This process is executed by a specific control program in the MPU 312.

In the notification display process, first in step Sf1501, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1". The setting update display flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify a situation in which the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated, i.e., a situation in which the setting value update process (Fig. 447) is being executed.

If the setting update display flag is set to "1", step Sf1502 executes the setting process for display data for updating the setting value. The specific control work area 391 is provided with a specific display data buffer that stores display data for causing the first through fifth alarm display devices 169a through 169e to display a specific display. The first through fifth alarm display devices 169a through 169e control the lighting/extinguishing of each display segment on each alarm display device 169a through 169e based on the display data stored in the specific display data buffer.

In step Sf1502, display data is stored in the specific display data buffer to enable the first to fifth alert display devices 169a to 169e to display an indication that the setting values are being updated and an indication of the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 463(a), the center display segments of the first alert display device 169a and the second alert display device 169b are lit to display "-", the third alert display device 169c displays "H", indicating that the setting values are being updated, and the fourth alert display device 169d displays a numerical value indicating the setting value. Note that all display segments of the fifth alert display device 169e are turned off, and no display is being displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sf1501 (the setting update display flag is not set to "1"), the process proceeds to step Sf1503, where it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1". The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that allows the MPU 312 to identify that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, i.e., that the setting confirmation process (Fig. 448) is being executed.

If the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1," step Sf1504 executes a setting confirmation display data setup process. In the setting confirmation display data setup process, display data is stored in the specific display data buffer in the specific control work area 391 to enable the first through fifth alert display devices 169a-169e to display the current setting values being checked and the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, for example, the first alert display device 169a and the second alert display device 169b display "-" as in the setting value update state, the third alert display device 169c displays "C," indicating that the setting value is being confirmed, and the fourth alert display device 169d displays a numeric value indicating the setting value. In this case, all display segments of the fifth alert display device 169e are turned off, resulting in no display.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sf1503 (the confirmation display flag is not set to "1"), this means that the setting value is neither being updated nor being confirmed. In this case, steps Sf1505 and Sf1506 are executed to display the various base values and ball difference numbers on the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e.

In step Sf1505, the display target area 506 provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is referenced to determine the type data and history data of the game history that is currently being displayed from among the various base values and ball difference numbers. Then, in step Sf1506, display data for displaying the type and calculated value of the game history that is being displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e is stored in the specific display data buffer in the work area 391 for specific control.

In this case, when the current base value is the display target, for example, as shown in FIG. 463(b), the identification display unit consisting of the first alarm display device 169a and the second alarm display device 169b displays "bL." corresponding to the current base value, and the ratio display unit consisting of the third alarm display device 169c and the fourth alarm display device 169d displays a two-digit number indicating the current base value. Of these, the display on the identification display unit is based on the reference result of the type area 506a in the display target area 506 of the non-specific control work area 393, and the display on the ratio display unit is based on the reference result of the history area 506b in the display target area 506.

Furthermore, in situations where the pitch difference is the display target, a five-digit numerical value indicating the pitch difference is displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e, as shown in FIG. 463(c), for example. Furthermore, to indicate that the display corresponds to the pitch difference, the display segment corresponding to the dot portion 197 on each notification display device 169a to 169e is lit. Of these, the numerical display on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e is based on the reference results of the history area 506b in the display target area 506, and the display of the dot portion 197 on each notification display device 169a to 169e is based on the reference results of the type area 506a in the display target area 506.

At that time, if the difference in balls at that time is a negative value, that is, if the total number of game balls paid out since the calculation of the difference in balls began is less than the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA, the display data is set so that "00000" is displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e, as shown in FIG. 463 (d). However, internally, the calculated difference in balls is stored and managed as a negative value.

Note that if the situation is after the manufacture of the pachinko machine 10 and before the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA reaches the management start reference value, and the initial display data is the display target, then, for example, as shown in FIG. 463(e), the identification display unit consisting of the first and second alert display devices 169a and 169b will display a display based on the reference result of the type area 506a, and the ratio display unit consisting of the third and fourth alert display devices 169c and 169d will light up the center display segment and display "--". Also, if the base value is the display target after the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA has reached the management start reference value, the display on the identification display unit will be continuously lit, but if the initial display data is the display target, the display on the identification display unit will be flashing, indicating that the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA has not yet reached the management start reference value.

<Game stop determination processing>
Next, the game stop determination process of step Sf407 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 464. The game stop determination process determines whether or not to enter a game stop state, and transitions to the game stop state based on the result, and is executed as part of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449). Note that this process is executed by a specific control program in the MPU 312.

The game stop determination process first determines in step Sf1601 whether the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1." The game stop flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that game play has been stopped.

If the game stop flag is set to "1", the game stop determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is not set to "1", i.e., if game play is not currently stopped, in step Sf1602, the ball difference area 504e provided in the non-specific control work area 393 is referenced to determine the current ball difference. In the following step Sf1603, a ball difference command is sent to the presentation control device 143 to notify the ball difference determined in step Sf1602.

When the effect control device 143 receives this command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a specified notification image for notifying the player of the current difference in number of coins is displayed on the symbol display device 75. In this case, the notification image should be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the symbols displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device 75, such as in a corner or near a corner of the display section of the symbol display device 75 (the area of the display screen G that is visible when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). This prevents the notification image for the difference in number of coins from impairing the visibility of each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

The symbol display device 75 may always notify the difference in number of coins regardless of the size of the difference, or may only notify when the difference in number of coins reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 95,000 coins) that is less than the specified number. Alternatively, instead of the difference in number of coins, the number of coins remaining up to the specified number may be notified. In this case, too, the notification may always be made regardless of the difference in number at that time, or the notification may only start once the difference in number of coins reaches the predetermined number or more.

Note that the location where the difference in number of coins is not limited to the symbol display device 75, and the notification may be made by a notification unit separate from the symbol display device 75. In this case, the separate notification unit may be a notification unit dedicated to notifying the difference in number of coins, or may be a notification unit that is also used for other notifications.

After step Sf1603 is executed, step Sf1604 determines whether or not fraud has been detected by the fraud detection process of step Sf405 (Fig. 449). If fraud has been detected, proceed to step Sf1605, where the game stop flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1." As a result, in subsequent timer interrupt processing (Fig. 449), the processing for controlling the progress of the game in steps Sf409 to Sf419 is not executed (step Sf408: NO), and the progress of the game is restricted.

In step Sf1606, a closing control process is executed to close the variable winning device 65 and the normal power device 63a. As a result, if the variable winning device 65 or the normal power device 63a is currently open, it is forcibly closed.

In step Sf1607, a launch stop process is executed, which switches the launch permission signal to the power supply and launch control device 191 to a LOW level. This restricts the launch of game balls, and game balls will not be launched even if the player operates the game ball launch handle 41.

In step Sf1608, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 181, causing the payout device 222 to stop paying out game balls. As a result, if any illegal payout of game balls is being performed, further payout of game balls is immediately restricted, preventing the expansion of losses to the gaming hall. In addition, in step Sf1608, a game stop command is also output to the effect control device 143, causing the effect display on the pattern display device 75 to stop, and causing visual and audio notifications to be issued indicating that game play has been stopped.

In step Sf1609, external information setting processing is executed to output a predetermined external signal from the external output terminal 213 corresponding to the detection of fraud or the transition to a game stop state. This causes the predetermined external signal to be output to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side, notifying the pachinko machine 10 that an abnormality has occurred. After step Sf1609 is executed, the game stop determination processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sf1604 (if no fraud is detected), the process proceeds to step Sf1610, where it is determined whether the excess flag provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1." If the excess flag is set to "1," that is, if the calculated difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, the game stop flag provided in the work area 391 for specific control is set to "1" in step Sf1611. This process is the same as step Sf1605, and as a result, the game is stopped. In other words, in this embodiment, if the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, the game is stopped and the progress of the game is restricted thereafter.

In step Sf1612, a closing control process is executed to close the variable winning device 65 and the normal electric device 63a, and in step Sf1613, a firing stop process is executed to switch the firing permission signal to the power supply and firing control device 191 to a LOW level. These processes are similar to those in steps Sf1606 and Sf1607.

In the following step Sf1614, an excess command is output to the presentation control device 143. The excess command is intended to notify the presentation control device 143 that the number of balls difference has reached a specific number or more and that the game has transitioned to a stopped state. When the presentation control device 143 receives this command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a notification image corresponding to the number of balls difference reaching a specific number or a notification image corresponding to the game being stopped is displayed on the pattern display device 75. It also controls so that an audio notification corresponding to the number of balls difference reaching a specific number or the game being stopped is output from the speaker unit 29.

In addition, when a game is stopped in response to the detection of fraud, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 181 to restrict the payout of game balls from the payout device 222 (step Sf1608).However, when a game is stopped in response to the difference in the number of balls reaching a specific number or more, a game stop command or excess command is not output to the payout control device 181, and the payout of game balls from the payout device 222 is not restricted. Also, in the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 449), when a transition to a game stop state occurs in response to the detection of fraud, that is, when the game stop flag is set to "1" in the work area 391 for specific control and the excess flag is not set to "1", the processing of steps Sf409 to Sf419, including the processing for paying out game balls in steps Sf417 and Sf418, is controlled not to be executed (step Sf421: NO), but when a transition to a game stop state occurs in response to the number of difference balls becoming a specific number or more, that is, when both the game stop flag and the excess flag are set to "1" in the work area 391 for specific control, the range of processing not to be executed is limited to steps Sf409 to Sf416, and the processing for paying out game balls in steps Sf417 and Sf418 is executed. In this way, in this embodiment, when a game is stopped because the difference in the number of balls exceeds a specific number, the payout of game balls is permitted, unlike when a game is stopped because fraud is detected.

When many prize balls are generated, such as during the open/close execution mode, if the lower tray 34 is left full with game balls while the machine is playing, the full state prevents the payout device 222 from paying out game balls, and the number of unpaid prize balls increases. In such a situation, if the difference in the number of balls exceeds a specific number and the machine transitions to a game stop state, and the payout of game balls is restricted, even if the player removes game balls from the lower tray 34 during the game stop state to resolve the full state, the payout of game balls will not resume and the player may not be able to obtain any prize balls. In this regard, since the payout of game balls is permitted during a game stop state, once the full state is resolved and the payout device 222 is able to pay out game balls corresponding to the unpaid prize balls, the machine can pay out game balls corresponding to the unpaid prize balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game transitions to a game stop state in response to the difference in the number of balls reaching a specific number or more, not only are the processes for paying out game balls in steps Sf417 and Sf418 performed, but the external information setting process in step Sf419 for outputting an external signal to the outside of the gaming machine is also executed. In this case, when game balls are paid out in a game stop state, a corresponding external signal (prize ball signal) can be output, allowing the hall computer HC to properly grasp the number of game balls paid out in a game stop state.

After step Sf1614 is executed, in step Sf1615, an external information setting process is executed to output a predetermined external signal from the external output terminal 213 corresponding to the difference in the number of balls being equal to or greater than a specific number. This causes the predetermined external signal to be output to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side, notifying the hall that the difference in the number of balls has become equal to or greater than a specific number.

In this case, it is advisable to use the same external signal as when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number as when a transition to a game stop state occurs in response to the detection of cheating. Specifically, it is advisable to configure external output terminal 213 so that the external signal when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number is output from the same output terminal that outputs the external signal when cheating is detected. This makes it possible to output an external signal when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number without having to add a new output terminal or install a new external output terminal 213, thereby simplifying the configuration.

In the above case, there is a risk that the hall computer HC at the gaming hall may not be able to determine from the external signal whether cheating has been detected or whether the difference in the number of balls has exceeded a certain number. However, even in such a case, the external signal is output to the hall computer HC, and an employee of the gaming hall can rush to the pachinko machine 10 and determine which of the above cases has occurred, so this is not considered to pose any operational problems.

After step Sf1615 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1610 (the excess flag is not set to "1"), the game stop judgment process is terminated.

<Excess startup process, partial clear process>
Next, we will explain the excess startup process of step Sf114 and the partial clear process of step Sf115. These processes are executed as part of the main process (Fig. 446), and are executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 begins.

First, the overrun startup process of step Sf114 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 465 (a). This process is executed by a specific control program in the MPU 312.

In the overage startup process, first in step Sf1801, it is determined whether the overage flag provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1." If the overage flag is set to "1," this means that the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 was stopped while the overage flag was set to "1," and then the supply of operating power was resumed. An example of such a situation would be when the number of balls difference exceeds a specific number, an external signal is output, and an amusement hall employee rushes to the pachinko machine 10, turns the power off to the pachinko machine 10, and then turns the power on again.

In the above case, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 314 of the MPU 312 from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in the main RAM 314 is retained. For this reason, for example, if the winning/losing lottery mode is in high probability mode and the difference in the number of balls exceeds a specific number, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF and then ON in that situation, the area in the main RAM 314 indicating high probability mode will be set to "1."

Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 314 of the main control device 162, but backup power is not supplied to the payout RAM 384 of the payout control device 181. For this reason, the information stored in the main RAM 314 is retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, whereas the information written in the payout RAM 384 is erased when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sf1801 (if the excess flag is set to "1"), the process proceeds to step Sf1802, where a second initialization process is performed for the specific control area. In the second initialization process, the specific control work area 391 of the main RAM 314 is cleared to "0" except for the area (setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is set and the area in which prize ball information (information regarding at least the number of unpaid prize balls) for causing the payout control device 181 (payout device 222) to pay out prize balls is stored.

In this way, the work area 391 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the area for set values and the area for prize ball information. Therefore, for example, the area indicating whether the win/lose lottery mode is high probability mode is cleared to "0," and the win/lose lottery mode becomes low probability mode regardless of the win/lose lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped. Furthermore, a situation occurs in which no game rounds are being played, the open/close execution mode is not being executed, the normal map display unit 44 is not displaying a variable value, and the normal power device 63a is in a closed state. Furthermore, the reserve storage area 314a and normal power reserve area 314c provided in the work area 391 for specific control are also cleared to "0," so the special map reserve information and normal map reserve information are erased.

On the other hand, the prize ball information is retained from the state immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped. Therefore, even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while there are still prize balls that have not been paid out, when the power is subsequently turned on, a prize ball command can be output to the payout control device 181 based on the stored information on the unpaid prize balls.

Therefore, if the difference in the number of balls becomes equal to or exceeds a specific number in high-probability mode, and an employee of the gaming hall or the like turns off the power to the pachinko machine 10 while there are still unpaid prize balls, the lottery mode after the power-on operation will be set to low-probability mode, and the unpaid prize balls can be paid out sequentially after the power-on operation. This makes it possible to appropriately prevent further increases in the difference in the number of balls, while properly paying out the prize balls that the player should have received.

In the second initialization process, as with the first initialization process of step Sf104 (Fig. 446), the work area 393 for non-specific control and the stack area 394 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0." This makes it possible to prevent the work area 393 for non-specific control and the stack area 394 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by a clearing operation by an amusement hall employee or the like.

After step Sf1802 is executed, the excess startup process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sf1801 (the excess flag is not set to "1"), the excess startup process is terminated without executing step Sf1802.

Next, the partial clearing process of step Sf115 will be described. The partial clearing process is a process for clearing some of the information stored in the non-specific control work area 393 to "0". The partial clearing process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in Figure 465 (b). Note that the processes of steps Sf1901 to Sf1903 in the partial clearing process are executed by the specific control program in the MPU 312.

In the partial clear process, first in step Sf1901, the information stored in the flag register, one of the multiple registers provided in the MPU 312, is written to a specified area in the specific control work area 391 and saved. This process is similar to step Sf1002 in the base value and ball difference calculation process (Figure 456).

In step Sf1902, a call command is used to read the subroutine program corresponding to the partial clear execution process set in the non-specific control program, and the execution process is started. At this time, information for specifying the return address after the execution process is executed is written to the specific control stack area 392. Then, when the partial clear execution process is completed, the information for specifying the return address written in the stack area 392 is read, and the process returns to the partial clear processing program indicated by the return address.

In step Sf1903, the saved flag register information is restored, and then the partial clear process ends. This process is similar to step Sf1004 in the base value and ball difference calculation process (Figure 456).

Here, we will explain the partial clear execution process that is executed by reading the non-specific control program in step Sf1902, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 466.

In step Sf2101, the stack area to be used is switched from the stack area 392 for specific control to the stack area 394 for non-specific control. This process is similar to step Sf1101 in the execution process for base value and ball difference (Figure 457).

In step Sf2102, information stored in some of the multiple registers provided in the MPU 312 is saved to the non-specific control work area 393. In subsequent steps Sf2103 to Sf2106, processing is performed using those registers where the information has been saved.

After step Sf2102 is executed, a call command is used to read out the subroutine programs of steps Sf2103 to Sf2106 set in the program for non-specific control, and these are executed sequentially. To carry out these processes, first, in step Sf2103, the information on the difference in ball count is cleared. Specifically, the area 504e (Fig. 459) for the difference in ball count in the calculation result area 504 provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is cleared to "0". This erases the information on the difference in ball count stored in the area 504e for the difference in ball count at the time the power to the pachinko machine 10 was turned off.

After step Sf2103 is executed, in step Sf2104, all counters 502a-502e (Fig. 459) in the ball difference counter area 502 provided in the non-specific control work area 393 are cleared to "0". This changes the count values of the regular general winning counter 502a, regular first operation counter 502b, regular second operation counter 502c, regular special power counter 502d, and regular out counter 502e, which are used to calculate the ball difference, to their initial values ("0").

In step Sf2105, it is determined whether the excess flag provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1", and if it is set to "1", the excess flag is cleared to "0" (step Sf2106).

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the power-on operation for the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the information on the difference in ball count stored in the work area 393 for non-specific control, the collected values of the game history used to calculate this information (measured values of the number of balls entering each entry area), and information corresponding to the difference in ball count exceeding a specific number are erased. Therefore, a player who plays after the power-on operation will begin playing without inheriting the information on the difference in ball count that was in the state before the power-on operation.

Even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, areas of the non-specific control work area 393 other than the ball difference area 504e and the ball difference counter area 502 are not cleared to "0." Therefore, the information on the current base value and base value for each inning stored in each of the areas 504a-504d of the calculation result area 504, and the information on each of the counters 501a-501c in the base value counter area 501, are not erased and remain stored. Therefore, a player who plays after the power is turned on will start playing with the information on base values in the state it was in before the power was turned on.

After executing the processes of steps Sf2103 to Sf2106, in step Sf2107, the stack area to be used is switched from the stack area 394 for non-specific control to the stack area 392 for specific control. In the following step Sf2108, the values of each register saved in the work area 393 for non-specific control in step Sf2102 are restored to each register of the MPU 312.

<About the game limit using the difference in balls>
Next, the flow of game restrictions using the difference in ball count will be explained with reference to Figures 467 and 468.

When a player is playing, the pachinko machine 10 uses the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 to perform ball entry determinations for the general entry opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the variable entry device 65, and the exit opening 68 (Fig. 467(a)). Specifically, it references the outputs of the ball entry detection sensors 91a-96 installed in the discharge passages 91-96 (Fig. 435) that communicate with each of the entry sections 61-63, 65, and 68, and determines whether a ball has entered each of those entry sections 61-63, 65, and 68.

If a ball is determined to have entered any of the above-mentioned entry sections 61-63, 65, and 68, the values of the regular general entry counter 502a, first operation counter 502b, second operation counter 502c, special power counter 502d, and out counter 502e, which are provided in the non-specific control work area 393 of the main RAM 314, are updated. Of these counters 502a-502e, counters 502a-502d correspond to the general entry section 61, first operation section 62, second operation section 63, and variable entry device 65, respectively, and if a ball has entered any of these entry sections 61-63 and 65, the value of the corresponding counter is incremented by one. Additionally, the out counter 502e serves to measure the total number (total) of game balls discharged from the game area PA, and if a ball enters any of the above-mentioned ball entry areas 61-63, 65, 68, including the outlet 68, the value of the out counter 502e is incremented by 1.

Then, the MPU 312 calculates the difference in balls using the updated results of each of the counters 502a-502e. To calculate the difference in balls, the MPU 312 first calculates the total number of game balls paid out based on the values of each counter 502a-502d (the number of balls that entered each of the ball entry sections 61-63, 65) and the information on the number of winning balls in each of the ball entry sections 61-63, 65. Then, the MPU 312 subtracts the value of the out counter 502e (the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA) from the total number of paid out balls to derive the difference in balls.

The MPU 312 stores the calculated difference in ball count information in the difference in ball count area 504e provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control, and then performs an excess determination to determine whether the calculated difference in ball count is equal to or greater than a specific number (e.g., 100,000) set as a trigger for activating game restrictions. If the difference in ball count is equal to or greater than the specific number, the excess flag provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1."

Here, the main RAM 314 is provided with a work area 391 and stack area 392 for specific control, and a work area 393 and stack area 394 for non-specific control. When the MPU 312 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, it is possible to both write and read information from the work area 393 and stack area 394 for non-specific control, while it is possible to read information from the work area 391 and stack area 392 for specific control, but not to write information to them. The processing for controlling the progress of the game is included in the processing corresponding to specific control, and the processing from the above-mentioned ball-scoring determination to the overrun determination is included in the processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, by executing the above-mentioned processing from the ball-scoring determination to the overrun determination, it is possible to prevent information used in the processing for controlling the progress of the game from being overwritten or accidentally erased.

Furthermore, when processing corresponding to specific control is executed by MPU 312 using a program and data for specific control, information can be both written to and read from the work area 391 and stack area 392 for specific control, while information can be read from but not written to the work area 393 and stack area 394 for non-specific control. Therefore, when executing processing to control the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the values of the counters 502a to 502e and information on the calculated ball difference from being rewritten or accidentally erased.

The MPU 312 executes each process from the above-mentioned ball scoring determination to the overshoot determination as part of a timer interrupt process (Figure 449) that is initiated every 4 msec. Therefore, the difference in balls is calculated periodically at the above-mentioned cycle, and each time it is determined whether the difference in balls has reached a certain number or more.

At that time, the difference in balls for each round is displayed on the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e provided on the main control device 162. Therefore, if an amusement hall employee needs to check the difference in balls managed by the pachinko machine 10, they can do so by unlocking the locking device 55 and rotating the inner frame 13 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. The first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e also display the base value calculated and managed by the pachinko machine 10, and the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e are used to display both the base value and the difference in balls. This eliminates the need to provide separate display devices for each of these displays, simplifying the configuration and enabling more effective use of the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e.

The difference in balls each time is notified to the presentation control device 143 via a difference in balls command output from the main control device 162. The presentation control device 143 controls the display device 75 to display a notification image of the difference in balls at all times, or when the difference in balls reaches a certain number or more, thereby notifying the player of the difference in balls.

For example, in normal game mode, when the total number of game balls paid out is kept low and the total number of game balls dispensed exceeds the total number of game balls paid out, the number of difference balls decreases. In open/close execution mode, when a large number of game balls are paid out and the total number of game balls paid out exceeds the total number of game balls dispensed, the number of difference balls increases. However, if jackpots are hit more times than expected, and the number of difference balls increases significantly and reaches the specified number (timing t1 in Figure 467 (b)), the MPU 312 sets the excess flag to "1" as described above, and transitions to a game stop state in which game progress is disabled.

Although the probability of winning a jackpot is uniquely determined for each setting value, there is variation in the probability of winning during actual play, which can result in the number of balls dispensed exceeding the expectations of the gaming machine designer, raising concerns about increased gambling. In this regard, this embodiment monitors the difference in the number of balls each time, and when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more, the game transitions to a stopped state and play cannot continue, thereby preventing further balls from entering each of the ball entry sections 61-63, 65 that result in prize balls. This prevents the increase in the number of game balls acquired by the player and makes it possible to curb excessive gambling.

When play is stopped, the system executes a closing control process for the variable winning device 65 and the regular device 63a to forcibly close them, and executes a launch stop process to prevent the game ball launch mechanism 110 from launching game balls. Furthermore, if a game round is currently being played on the special game display unit 43 or the regular game display unit 44, the process for controlling the progress of that round is interrupted, thereby causing each game round to be stopped.

The MPU 312 also outputs an excess command to the presentation control device 143, notifying it that the number of balls difference has reached a specific number or more. Control is performed so that a notification image corresponding to the number of balls difference reaching a specific number or a notification image requesting a call, such as "Please call an attendant," is displayed on the symbol display device 75. The excess command not only corresponds to the number of balls difference reaching a specific number or more, but also to a transition to a game suspension state, so the presentation control device 143 stops presentation displays on the symbol display device 75, and issues a visual or audio notification that game suspension has occurred.

Furthermore, the MPU 312 outputs a predetermined external signal to the hall computer HC at the amusement hall via the external output terminal 213. At this time, the external signal is output from the same terminal of the external output terminal 213 that outputs an external signal when fraud is detected. In this case, the external signal functions as a signal notifying that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, prompting a hall employee to rush to the pachinko machine 10. In this way, by outputting an external signal using the same external output terminal both when the number of balls difference exceeds a certain number and when fraud is detected, an external signal can be output when the number of balls difference exceeds a certain number without adding a new output terminal. Furthermore, the external signal can be received at the amusement hall using existing equipment (external signal receiving devices such as data counters).

When the game transitions to a game stop state because the difference in ball count exceeds a specific number, a game stop command is not output to the payout control device 181. In other words, the control process for driving the payout device 222 to pay out game balls continues, allowing game balls to be paid out while the game is stopped. As a result, even if the game transitions to a game stop state during a payout, the payout process continues until the payout of game balls is complete, allowing the player to properly pay out the prize balls they should have received.

In addition, if the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more, a transition to a game-stopped state is made while allowing the output of an external signal while game play is stopped, and an external signal (prize ball signal) can be output when game balls are paid out while game play is stopped. This allows the hall computer HC to be notified of the occurrence and number of payouts while game play is stopped, and even in a configuration where payouts can be executed while game play is stopped, it is possible to appropriately match the number of payouts managed by the hall computer HC with the number of balls actually paid out.

Incidentally, the game will be stopped when the difference in the number of balls exceeds a specific number, or when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected (Fig. 468 (a)). In this case, a game stop command is output to the payout control device 181, and the payout of game balls by the payout device 222 is stopped. As a result, if any illegal payout of game balls is being performed, further payout of game balls is immediately restricted, preventing further damage to the game hall.

In addition, if an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the output of external signals will also be restricted. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the configuration may allow the output of external signals even when gameplay is stopped.

After the difference in ball count reaches a specific number or more and the specified external signal is output, a hall employee rushes to the pachinko machine 10 and turns off the power to the pachinko machine 10, stopping the supply of operating power to the MPU 312. The MPU 312 then sets the power outage flag in the specific control work area 391 to "1" and calculates and saves checksums for the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392. While the supply of operating power is stopped, backup power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to the main RAM 314, and the information stored in the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392, and the information stored in the non-specific control work area 393 and the non-specific control stack area 394, are retained.

Then, when a hall employee turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10 without pressing the reset button 166c and the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 begins, the MPU 312 calculates a checksum for the specific control work area 391 and specific control stack area 392 in the main RAM 314 and determines whether this matches the checksum saved when the power was shut off.

If they match, the stored information is recognized as valid, and then a determination is made as to whether the excess flag provided in the non-specific control work area 393 is set to "1." If the excess flag is set to "1," this means that the pachinko machine 10 was powered off when the difference in the number of balls was equal to or greater than a specific number. In this case, a second initialization process is executed for the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392. In the second initialization process, the specific control work area 391 is cleared to "0," except for the area storing information on the current settings of the pachinko machine 10 and the area storing prize ball information for causing the payout control device 181 (payout device 222) to pay out prize balls (Fig. 468 (b)).

By clearing the information in the specific control work area 391 through the above clearing process, the game stop flag set in the specific control work area 391 is cleared to "0" and the game stop state is canceled. The lottery mode is also set to low probability mode, the open/close execution mode and game rounds are not being executed, and the special and regular pattern reserve information are erased. Therefore, for example, if the number of balls difference reaches a specific number or more during a series of jackpots in high probability mode, the series is canceled, the win/lose lottery mode is changed to low probability mode, and gameplay is resumed.

In addition, in the second initialization process, prize ball information is not cleared, and the state of the prize ball information at the time of power-off is retained even after power-on. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while there are still prize balls that have not been paid out, subsequent payouts can be performed by turning the power on.

After the second initialization process, the MPU 312 executes a partial clear process for the non-specific control work area 393. The partial clear process erases the ball difference information stored in the ball difference area 504e in the non-specific control work area 393, and also initializes the values of the counters 502a-502e in the work area 393 that are provided to collect the history of game balls entering each of the ball entry sections 61-63, 65, and 68. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 is restarted by a hall employee when the ball difference exceeds the specified number, the excess ball difference state is canceled and the pachinko machine 10 starts up with the ball difference measurement starting from the initial state.

In addition, if the difference in the number of balls is less than the specific number, the excess flag is not set to "1", and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 166c, the second initialization process described above will not be executed, and the information stored in the work area 391 for specific control and the stack area 392 for specific control when the supply of operating power was stopped will be retained.

Meanwhile, a partial clear process is performed on the non-specific control work area 393 and stack area 394, erasing the ball difference information and initializing the values of each counter 502a-502e and the status of the overage flag. This allows the values of each counter 502a-502e updated by the previous day's play to be initialized and the ball difference information erased simply by turning the power off to the pachinko machine 10 when the amusement hall closes and turning it on when the amusement hall opens the next day. For example, if a reset operation requiring pressing the reset button 166c while turning on the pachinko machine 10 was required to initialize each counter 502a-502e or erase the ball difference information, the reset operation would have to be performed on each pachinko machine installed in the amusement hall one by one, which could significantly increase the workload of hall employees preparing for opening. The above configuration eliminates this hassle and reduces the workload of hall employees. In particular, in amusement halls, multiple pachinko machines 10 are installed on an island facility, and by turning on the power to the island facility, it is possible to turn on the power to multiple pachinko machines 10 installed on that island facility all at once. Therefore, by turning on the power to the island facility, it is possible to erase information on the number of balls difference and the like for multiple pachinko machines 10 all at once, which makes it possible to effectively reduce the effort required to prepare for opening at the amusement hall.

When the power is turned on as described above, if the setting key insertion section 166a is in the on position, the device will enter a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values are displayed on the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e.

Furthermore, when the difference in ball count is less than the specific number and the excess flag is not set to "1," and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 166c is pressed, the first initialization process described above is executed. In the first initialization process, the work area 391 for specific control is cleared to "0," except for the area storing information about the current settings of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a partial clear process is executed for the work area 393 and stack area 394 for non-specific control, erasing the information about the difference in ball count stored as the specific number, and initializing the values of each counter 502a-502e and the state of the excess flag.

In the above case, if the power is turned on with the setting key insertion section 166a in the on position, the first initialization process is executed, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a setting update state in which the setting state can be changed. In the setting update state, the setting value can be changed within the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" by pressing the update button 166b. At this time, the setting value is displayed on the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e. Note that the update button 166b may not be provided, and the setting value may be changed by operating the reset button 166c.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a ball enters the general winning slot 61, the first operating slot 62, the second operating slot 63, the variable winning device 65, or the outlet slot 68, the counters 502a-502e corresponding to each of these winning slots 61-63, 65, and 68 are updated, and the difference in balls is calculated based on this information. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to collect a history of balls entering each of the winning slots 61-63, 65, and 68, and to monitor the difference in balls each time. If the calculated difference in balls reaches or exceeds a specific number, the machine transitions to a game stop state. This limits the increase in prize balls won by the player, making it possible to operate the pachinko machine 10 in a way that curbs excessive gambling.

The main RAM 314 is provided with a work area 391 and stack area 392 for specific control, which are areas for reading and writing information when processing is executed by a specific control program, and a work area 393 and stack area 394 for specific control, which are areas for reading and writing information when processing is executed by a non-specific control program.When processing is executed by a specific control program, information can be read from the work area 393 and stack area 394 for non-specific control, but information cannot be written to them.When processing is executed by a non-specific control program, information can be read from the work area 391 and stack area 392 for specific control, but information cannot be written to them. The processing executed by the specific control program includes steps Sf409 to Sf419 for controlling the progress of the game, and counters 502a to 502e for collecting the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 61 to 63, 65, and 68, and a ball difference area 504e for storing information on the derived ball difference, are provided within the non-specific control work area 393.

This configuration prevents the information on each counter 502a-502e and the ball difference information stored in the ball difference area 504e from being overwritten or erased by the process for controlling the progress of the game. This allows for proper monitoring of whether the ball difference has reached a specific number or more, and ultimately allows for proper control of the transition to a game stop state based on the results of this monitoring.

The external information for transitioning to a game stop state when the difference in ball count exceeds a specific number is output using the same external output terminal as the external information output when transitioning to a game stop state based on fraud detection (abnormality detection). This eliminates the need to add a new external output terminal to the pachinko machine 10, and allows gaming halls to use existing configurations for information receiving units such as data counters and management devices such as hall computers HC, reducing costs on both sides.

In this case, the signal format (output period, etc.) of the external signal when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number is made common to the signal format of the external information when cheating is detected, and the same signal is output in both the former and latter cases. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 does not need to add a processing program to output a signal with a dedicated format corresponding to when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number, and the gaming hall can analyze the external information when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number using the existing hall computer HC, eliminating the need for improvements or additional functions in the hall computer HC. However, since it is expected that it will be impossible or difficult for the hall computer HC to distinguish and recognize the external information when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number and the external information when cheating is detected, it is preferable to have the signal function as a signal to request the summons of a hall employee.

When the game transitions to a game stop state because the difference in ball count exceeds a specific number, the payout of game balls is permitted in that game stop state. For example, if the difference in ball count exceeds a specific number while game balls are being paid out, there is a risk that the payout of game balls will be prematurely terminated when the game transitions to a game stop state. In this regard, with this configuration, game balls can be paid out to the end even if the game transitions to a game stop state in the middle of a payout.

A situation in which the difference in ball count exceeds a specific number is particularly likely to occur during the open/close execution mode, in which many prize balls are generated in a short period of time. At this time, if a full tank occurs and ball payouts are halted for a prolonged period, many unpaid prize balls will accumulate internally. In this case, for example, if payouts are restricted upon transition to a game-stopped state, even if a player removes game balls from the lower tray 34 to resolve the full tank state, ball payouts will not resume, and the player may be unable to recover the large number of unpaid prize balls accumulated internally. In this regard, since payouts of game balls are permitted during a game-stopped state, once the full tank state is resolved and payouts from the payout device 222 become possible, balls corresponding to the unpaid prize balls can be paid out, making it possible to appropriately pay out the prize balls the player should have received.

The system is configured to allow the output of external information corresponding to the payout of game balls when game play is stopped if the difference in the number of balls exceeds a specific number. In this case, even if game balls are paid out while game play is stopped, the occurrence of the payout is properly notified to the hall computer HC on the gaming parlor side through the output of the above external information. This makes it possible to prevent discrepancies between the number of game balls actually paid out in the pachinko machine 10 and the number recognized by the hall computer HC, which may occur when game balls are paid out while game play is stopped.

When the supply of operating power to MPU 312 is stopped when the difference in ball count exceeds a specific number, and then when the supply of operating power to MPU 312 is restarted, a second initialization process is executed to erase information stored in the specific control work area 391. As a result, for example, if a player wins a special jackpot while the win/lose lottery mode is in high-probability mode and the difference in ball count exceeds a specific number during the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to that special jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is started after initializing flag information corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode and information corresponding to a transition to high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot type information indicating a jackpot of a type corresponding to a transition to high-probability mode). As a result, the win/lose lottery mode is changed to low-probability mode and the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and gameplay is played, thereby limiting further acquisition of prize balls. This limits the increase in prize balls acquired by the player, enabling the pachinko machine 10 to be operated in a manner that suppresses excessive gambling. Furthermore, because the pachinko machine 10 itself automatically makes such changes, it reduces the work required of hall staff when the difference in the number of balls exceeds a certain number. Furthermore, because the hall staff does not have the discretion to decide whether or not to make such changes, it also ensures fairness in the game.

In the second initialization process, the prize ball information used to cause the payout control device 181 (payout device 222) to pay out prize balls is excluded from initialization. As a result, even if the game stops when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while there are still unpaid prize balls in that game-stopped state, the game balls corresponding to the unpaid prize balls can be paid out sequentially after the power is turned on. In other words, by initializing information such as the win/lose lottery mode, further acquisition of prize balls is restricted, but for unpaid prize balls, the corresponding information is stored and retained, allowing the player to appropriately pay out the prize balls they should have received.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 314 of the main control device 162 is provided with a backup function for information stored in RAM in the event of a power outage, but the payout RAM 384 of the payout control device 181 is not provided with this function. Instead, when power is cut off, the prize ball information used to pay out prize balls is stored and held in the main RAM 314. Based on this, the main RAM 314 is configured so that the prize ball information is not erased during the second initialization process when power is restored. However, if a backup function is provided for the payout RAM 384 and prize ball information is stored and held in the payout RAM 384 when power is cut off, it is preferable to prevent the stored prize ball information from being erased.

Regardless of whether the difference in ball count is equal to or greater than a specific number, the supply of operating power to MPU 312 is stopped. When the supply of operating power to MPU 312 is subsequently started, a partial clear process is executed, and the difference in ball count information and the values of each counter 502a-502e are initialized. In this case, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off when the gaming hall closes, and then turned on when the pachinko machine 10 opens the next day, in that order, so that the difference in ball count information and other information can be naturally erased. This prevents games from being played with the difference in ball count and other information based on the previous day's gaming results carried over, and prevents a transition to a gaming suspension state caused by the influence of the previous day's gaming results.

Furthermore, because the partial clear process requires no operations other than powering off and on, the work required by hall employees when the amusement hall opens can be significantly reduced. For example, if information such as the number of balls in a game is erased on the condition that the reset button 166c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 is started, such an operation would have to be performed for each pachinko machine installed in the amusement hall, which could be a very time-consuming task for hall employees. In this regard, with this configuration, information such as the number of balls in a game is automatically erased when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, significantly reducing the work required for this erasure. In particular, in amusement halls, turning on the power to an island facility can turn on the power to multiple pachinko machines installed on that island facility all at once, so the erasure process can be performed for multiple pachinko machines at once with a single operation, enabling the efficient erasure of information such as the number of balls in a game.

In addition, since information such as the difference in ball count is stored in the work area 393 for non-specific control, when this information is erased using the partial clearing process, information such as setting values stored in the work area 391 for specific control can be prevented from being overwritten or erased.

The partial clear process is executed during the main process (Fig. 446), which starts when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In this case, the partial clear process can erase information such as the previous day's ball difference, and then the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449), which controls the progress of the game, can be executed. This reliably prevents the game from progressing while information such as the previous day's ball difference remains.

The first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e, which display the base value, are used to display the difference in pitches. The display is configured to alternate between the base value and the difference in pitches. This makes it possible to effectively use the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e to optimally display the base value and the difference in pitches.

Furthermore, when the difference in the number of balls displayed on the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e reaches or exceeds a specific number, the display is fixed to the display corresponding to the difference in the number of balls. As a result, when a hall employee rushes to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where play has stopped due to the difference in the number of balls reaching or exceeding a specific number, they can immediately grasp the difference in the number of balls at that time by visually checking the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e. This allows for smooth confirmation that play has stopped, improving convenience for the gaming hall.

<Modification 1>
Modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 469 to 471. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

This modified example differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the number of balls difference used to compare with a specific number in the excess judgment. Specifically, in the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the number of balls difference is initialized to 0, and the calculation starts with this as the starting reference value (the total number of balls difference since power-on), and is compared with the specific number. However, in this modified example, the change point CP (Fig. 469) when the number of balls difference changes from a decreasing state to an increasing state is determined, and a judgment difference number SA is calculated using this change point CP as the starting reference value, and this is compared with the specific number. The configuration for this purpose is explained in detail below.

Figure 470 (a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting mode of the work area 393 for non-specific control. In this modified example, the work area 393 for non-specific control has an area 601 for the difference in pitches. The area 601 for the difference in pitches is an area for storing information on the difference in pitches, and is provided in place of the area 504e for the difference in pitches (Figure 459) in the first embodiment described above.

This modified example is configured to handle multiple pieces of information for the difference in pitches, and the difference in pitches area 601 has multiple storage areas corresponding to these multiple pieces of information. Specifically, there is a current difference in pitches area 601a for storing the current difference in pitches (the same difference in pitches as in the first embodiment) based on 0, a previous difference in pitches area 601b for storing the previous difference in pitches based on 0, a start reference area 601c for storing the start reference value corresponding to the change point CP, and a judgment difference in pitches area 601d for storing the judgment difference in pitches SA.

<Excess determination processing>
The overrun determination process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 471. This process is executed in step Sf1104 of the execution process for base value and ball difference (Fig. 457), and is executed in place of the overrun determination process in Fig. 460. In Fig. 471, the same steps as those in Fig. 460 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified. Note that this process is executed by a program for non-specific control.

First, in step Sf1301, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the variable winning device 65, or the outlet opening 68. If a ball has entered, the process proceeds to step Sf1302, and the values of each ball entry detection counter 502a to 502e provided in the non-specific control work area 393 are updated based on the determination result in step Sf1301.

In step Sf2301, data shift processing is executed. In the data shift processing, the information on the difference in balls stored in the current difference in balls area 601a in the difference in balls area 601 is shifted to the previous difference in balls area 601b. As a result, the information on the difference in balls calculated in the previous processing round is stored in the previous difference in balls area 601b.

In step Sf2302, a calculation process is performed to calculate the difference in balls. In this case, the difference in balls is the total difference in balls since power was turned on, with 0 as the base number. In the calculation process of this step, the difference in balls is calculated by performing the same calculation process as in step Sf1303 (Fig. 460) in the first embodiment described above. In other words, using the values of each counter 502a to 502e at that time, the difference in balls is calculated by subtracting the total number of game balls dispensed from the game area PA.

In step Sf2303, a process is executed to overwrite the current ball difference number calculated in step Sf2302 in the current ball difference area 601a. As a result, the current ball difference number information is stored in the current ball difference area 601a. In the following step Sf2304, a nadir determination process is executed. The nadir determination process is a process for determining the change point CP in Figure 469. Here, the nadir determination process will be explained with reference to Figure 470 (b).

The nadir determination process first determines whether the previous ball difference count S2 stored in the previous ball difference area 601b is smaller than the start reference value stored in the start reference area 601c. The start reference value in the start reference area 601c is the smallest value of the ball difference counts calculated for each round from when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the ball difference count information is initialized to the end of the previous processing round; in other words, it is the latest nadir for that period. If the previous ball difference count S2 is smaller than the start reference value at that time, it determines whether the current ball difference count S1 is greater than the previous ball difference count S2 and whether the ball difference count has increased in the current processing round. If it is determined that the ball difference count has increased in the current processing round, the previous ball difference count S2 is recognized as the new nadir.

Returning to the explanation of the exceedance determination process (FIG. 471), after the lowest point determination process in step Sf2304 is executed, the start reference value update process is executed in step Sf2305. In the start reference value update process, if the previous ball difference count S2 is recognized as the new lowest point in the lowest point determination process in step Sf2304, the information stored in the previous ball difference area 601b is overwritten in the start reference area 601c. This updates the start reference value.

In step Sf2306, a calculation process is executed to calculate the difference in pitches for judgment SA. The difference in pitches for judgment SA is the difference in pitches from the starting reference value, and in this calculation process, the difference in pitches for judgment SA is derived by subtracting the starting reference value from the difference in pitches for this time S1. In the following step Sf2307, a process is executed to overwrite the difference in pitches for judgment SA calculated in step Sf2306 in the difference in pitches for judgment area 601d.

In step Sf2308, it is determined whether the judgment ball difference number SA (the judgment ball difference number SA calculated in step Sf2306) overwritten in the judgment ball difference area 601d in step Sf2307 is greater than or equal to a specific number (e.g., 100,000). If the judgment ball difference number SA is greater than or equal to the specific number, the process proceeds to step Sf2309, where the excess flag in the various flags area 507 provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1."

When the excess flag is set to "1" in this way, the game stop determination process (Fig. 464) of step Sf407 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449) executes the transition process to the game stop state (steps Sf1610 to Sf1615). As a result, if the open/close execution mode is in progress, the open/close execution mode is terminated, and the variable winning device 65 and the normal electric device 63a are closed, and the launch of game balls into the game area PA is restricted, restricting the progress of the game thereafter.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The lowest point CP of the difference in ball count is identified and used as the starting reference value, and the difference in ball count for judgment SA, which is the increase in the difference in ball count from that starting reference value, is calculated. This is then compared with a specific number to control the transition to a game stop state.

For example, when comparing the number of difference balls calculated based on 0 with a specific number, the upper limit of the actual number of difference balls will fluctuate depending on the negative amount (so-called lost balls) that occurs during play. For example, as shown in Figure 469, if the number of difference balls during play drops to -25,000, and a player starts playing from that point, the increase in the number of difference balls allowed for that player, SB, will be 1,250,000, and the upper limit of the actual number of difference balls will be greater than 100,000. This range of fluctuation in the upper limit will differ for each pachinko machine 10 due to variations in the negative amount, and this can be a factor that undermines the fairness of play.

In this regard, according to this modified example, the increase in the number of differential balls is calculated for the period TP starting from the point when the negative amount ends, so the upper limit on the effective number of differential balls can be fixed at 100,000 regardless of the negative amount. This increases fairness between players and makes it possible to create a configuration that makes it easier to play.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 472 to 474. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

In the first embodiment described above, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 was started, the information on the difference in balls was erased and the counters 502a to 502e in the difference in balls counter area 502 were initialized. However, in this modified example, this is performed when the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 is stopped. The configuration for this purpose is described in detail below.

<Power outage information storage processing>
The power outage information storage process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 472. This process is executed in step Sf401 of the timer interrupt process (Fig. 449). This process is executed by the MPU 312 using a program for specific control.

In the power outage information storage process, first in step Sf3101, the repetition counter provided in the specific control work area 391 is set to "10", which is the repetition count information for the power outage signal. In the following step Sf3102, the power outage detection counter provided in the specific control work area 391 is cleared to "0".

In step Sf3103, the MPU 312 executes a process to read information about the power outage signal received at its input port. In this case, if a power outage signal corresponding to no power outage (a LOW level power outage signal) is received, the input port stores "0" as non-power outage information; if a power outage signal corresponding to a power outage (a HI level power outage signal) is received, the input port stores "1" as power outage information. In step Sf3103, the MPU 312 executes a process to read the power outage signal information into its register.

If the power outage signal information read in step Sf3103 corresponds to the occurrence of a power outage (power interruption) (step Sf3104: YES), the value of the power outage detection counter is incremented by 1 in step Sf3105. If a negative judgment is made in step Sf3104 or the processing of step Sf3105 is executed, the value of the repetition counter is decremented by 1 in step Sf3106.

In step Sf3107, it is determined whether the value of the repetition counter after decrementing by 1 is "0". If the value of the repetition counter is not "0", the process returns to step Sf3103 and repeats the processing of steps Sf3103 to Sf3106. On the other hand, if the value of the repetition counter is "0", the process proceeds to step Sf3108 and determines whether the value of the power outage detection counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage. If it is less than the trigger reference number, the power outage information storage process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the power outage processing of steps Sf3109 to Sf3113 is executed.

Specifically, first, in step Sf3109, the power outage flag in the specific control work area 391 is set to "1." As a result, if power outage processing is executed normally and information is stored and maintained normally in the main RAM 314, the power outage flag in the specific control work area 391 will be set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 is resumed again.

In step Sf3110, a power outage clearing process is executed to erase the difference in number of coins and other data stored in the non-specific control work area 393. Details of the power outage clearing process will be described later.

After execution of step Sf3110, in step Sf3111, a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392. In this case, the storage areas in the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392 that are the objects of calculation when calculating the checksum are the same as the storage areas in the specific control work area 391 and the specific control stack area 392 that are the objects of calculation of the checksum in step Sf106 of the main processing (Fig. 446). Furthermore, the storage areas that are the objects of calculation when calculating this checksum include an area in the specific control work area 391 where setting value information indicating the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, a setting value counter). The calculated checksum is then stored in a storage area in the specific control work area 391 for storing the checksum, which is excluded from the objects of calculation of the checksum.

In step Sf3112, all output port information in the MPU 312 register is set to "0", and in the following step Sf3113, access to the main RAM 314 is prohibited. An infinite loop then continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

Furthermore, by executing the power outage information storage process as the first process in the timer interrupt process, there is no need to start the timer interrupt process partway through after power is restored. This eliminates the need to store the address of the process that was being executed when the power outage occurred as stack information in the main RAM 314, making it possible to reduce the processing load when a power outage occurs.

<Clearing process when power is cut off>
The power interruption clearing process of step Sf3110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 473. Note that the processes of steps Sf3201 to Sf3205 in the power interruption clearing process are executed by a program for specific control.

In the power outage clearing process, first in step Sf3201, an interrupt prohibition setting is made to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (Fig. 449). In the following step Sf3202, the information stored in the flag register, one of the multiple registers provided in the MPU 312, is written to a specified area in the specific control work area 391 and saved. This process is similar to step Sf1002 in the base value and ball difference calculation process (Fig. 456).

In step Sf3203, a call command is used to read the subroutine program corresponding to the execution process for clearing power when it is interrupted, which is set in the program for non-specific control, and the execution process is started. At this time, information for specifying the return address after the execution process is executed is written to the stack area 392 for specific control. Then, when the execution process for clearing power when it is interrupted is completed, the information for specifying the return address written to the stack area 392 is read, and the program for clearing power when it is interrupted, which is indicated by the return address, is returned to.

In step Sf3204, the saved flag register information is restored, and then the partial clear process ends. The process in step Sf3204 is the same as step Sf1004 in the base value and ball difference calculation process (Figure 456).

In step Sf3205, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing (Figure 449) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

Here, we will explain the execution process for clearing during power outage, which is executed by reading the non-specific control program in step Sf3203, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 474.

In step Sf3301, the stack area to be used is switched from the stack area 392 for specific control to the stack area 394 for non-specific control. This process is similar to step Sf1101 in the execution process for base value and ball difference (Figure 457).

In step Sf3302, information stored in some of the multiple registers provided in the MPU 312 is saved to the non-specific control work area 393. In subsequent steps Sf3303 to Sf3306, processing is performed using those registers where the information has been saved.

After step Sf3302 is executed, a call command is used to read out the subroutine programs of steps Sf3303 to Sf3306 set in the program for non-specific control, and these are executed sequentially. To carry out these processes, first, in step Sf3303, the information on the difference in ball count is cleared. Specifically, the area 504e (Fig. 459) for the difference in ball count in the calculation result area 504 provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is cleared to "0". This erases the information on the difference in ball count stored in the area 504e for the difference in ball count at the time the power to the pachinko machine 10 was turned off.

When the configuration of this modified example is applied to the above modified example 1, in step Sf3303, all areas 601a to 601d of the ball difference area 601 (Fig. 470) provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control are cleared to "0." This initializes the ball difference for judgment SA, which is used to determine whether the ball difference is equal to or greater than a specific number, and also initializes the starting reference value, etc., used to calculate the ball difference for judgment SA.

After step Sf3303 is executed, in step Sf3304, all counters 502a to 502e (Fig. 459) in the ball difference counter area 502 provided in the non-specific control work area 393 are cleared to "0". This changes the count values of the regular general winning counter 502a, regular first operation counter 502b, regular second operation counter 502c, regular special power counter 502d, and regular out counter 502e, which are used to calculate the ball difference, to their initial values ("0").

In step Sf3305, it is determined whether the excess flag provided in the work area 393 for non-specific control is set to "1", and if it is set to "1", the excess flag is cleared to "0" (step Sf3306).

In step Sf3307, the stack area to be used is switched from the non-specific control stack area 394 to the specific control stack area 392. In the following step Sf3308, the values of each register saved in the non-specific control work area 393 in step Sf3302 are restored to each register of the MPU 312.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the supply of operating power to MPU 312 is stopped, regardless of whether the number of differential balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, a power-off clear process is executed, and the differential ball information and the values of each counter 502a-502e are initialized. In this case, when power is cut off to pachinko machine 10 as the amusement hall closes, the differential ball information and other information is automatically erased. Therefore, when pachinko machine 10 is powered on the following day, the supply of operating power begins with the differential ball information and other information erased. This prevents gameplay from being played with the differential ball number and other information based on the previous day's gaming results carried over, and prevents a transition to a gaming suspension state due to the previous day's gaming results. Because the power-off clear process requires no operations other than cutting off the power, it significantly reduces the workload of hall employees when the amusement hall closes.

<Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described first embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the first embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following to the first embodiment and each modified example. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the first embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each of the configurations to be combined is ensured.

Furthermore, for ease of understanding, certain examples are specified as prerequisite configurations, such as "in the first embodiment," but the following configurations are not limited to the specified prerequisite configurations (examples) and can also be applied to other examples.

(1) In the first embodiment and each modified example described above, the difference in balls was calculated by subtracting the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA from the total number of game balls paid out. However, the difference in balls may also be calculated by subtracting the total number of game balls launched into the game area PA from the total number of game balls paid out. In this case, game balls that were launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 but did not reach the game area PA and were instead collected in the foul ball passage 46 may be excluded from the calculation of the difference in balls. Specifically, a game ball detection sensor may be placed in the area through which game balls launched with a launch strength sufficient to reach the game area PA pass, and the number of game balls detected by the sensor may be counted to determine the total number of game balls launched. Note that the area through which game balls launched with a launch strength sufficient to reach the game area PA pass may be, for example, the area where the backflow prevention member 106 is placed or its surrounding area.

Incidentally, in the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the remaining number of balls up to the specific number can be calculated by subtracting the difference in balls from the specific number, and the excess determination can be made based on this remaining number. In this case, if the remaining number becomes 0 or less, a transition to a game stop state will be made.

(2) In the first embodiment and each modified example, the counters 502a-502e are updated based on the occurrence of a ball entering each of the ball entry sections 61-63, 65, and 68, thereby deriving the difference in the number of balls relative to the time of the ball entry. However, for the ball entry sections 61-63 and 65 that award prize balls, when game balls are paid out, the number of paid out balls can be counted and the total value can be used as the "total number of paid out game balls," thereby deriving the difference in the number of balls relative to the time of the payout. In this case, for example, when the payout of game balls is suspended because the tank is full, the difference in the number of balls can be prevented from exceeding a specific number, and it is possible to prevent the game from transitioning to a game stop state when there are many unpaid game balls remaining.

However, there is a concern that intentionally creating a full tank and preventing the payout of game balls could delay the timing when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number, effectively extending the duration of play. In that sense, it is better to either derive the difference in the number of balls based on the time when a ball enters, as in the first embodiment and each of the modified examples above, or to derive the difference in the number of balls based on the time of payout without incorporating a function that allows the payout of game balls when play is stopped.

(3) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the difference in balls may be calculated by subtracting the total number of game balls dispensed from the total number of game balls dispensed from the game area PA. In this case, since the positive value on the player's side in the difference in balls dispensed is indicated by a negative value, a negative value is used as the specific number. In other words, if the calculated difference in balls becomes equal to or less than the specific number of -100,000 balls, the game will be stopped.

(4) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, ball entry history information was collected for all ball entry sections 61-63, 65, and 68. However, ball entry history information may also be collected for only some of the ball entry sections. For example, if ball entry history information is collected for only the variable entry device 65, it is possible to configure the game to transition to a game stop state when the number of balls difference increases during the open/close execution mode.

(5) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples above, information on the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 61-63, 65, and 68 was collected for all game states. However, information on the history of balls entering may also be collected for some game states. For example, information on the history of balls entering may be collected during the open/close execution mode. In this case, the system may be configured to transition to a game stop state if the number of balls in the open/close execution mode increases.

In addition, in the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, information on the ball entry history for each ball entry section 61-63, 65, and 68 was collected for the entire period from when the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. However, information on the ball entry history may also be collected for a partial period. For example, information on the ball entry history may be collected for a so-called consecutive winning period. Note that the consecutive winning period may be, for example, the period from when the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to a jackpot is started until the transition to the normal game state, when the game transitions to a high-probability game state (high probability mode, or high probability mode and high frequency support mode) or a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot ends.

(6) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e are provided and the difference in pitches is displayed using a five-digit numerical display. However, six notification display devices may be provided, and if the difference in pitches is a negative value, the leftmost notification display device may display "- (minus)." Alternatively, four notification display devices may be provided to match the display of the set value and base value, and the difference in pitches may be displayed in its entirety by flowing from right to left.

(7) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e are shared by the set value, base value, and difference in pitches, but they may also be shared by the set value and difference in pitches, or by the base value and difference in pitches. Furthermore, the difference in pitches may be displayed on a display device separate from the display device that displays the set value and base value.

(8) In the first embodiment and each of the variations described above, the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e are configured to alternate between displaying the base value and the difference in balls in a row. However, an operating means for switching the display (such as a switch button) may be provided, and the display may be switched by operating the operating means. In this case, each time the operating means is operated, the display may alternate in the following order: current base value → previous base value → base value before last → base value before last → difference in balls in a row. Alternatively, each time the operating means is operated, the display may alternate between displaying the base value and displaying the difference in balls in a row. In this case, the display contents of the first through fifth notification display devices 169a through 169e can be quickly switched, which is useful when hall staff want to quickly see the difference in balls in a row.

(9) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, a second timer interrupt process having a shorter interrupt cycle than the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 449 may be provided separately, and the display of the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e may be controlled by the second timer interrupt process. In this case, the display state of the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e can be updated at a shorter cycle than when various processes related to the progress of the game are executed, thereby preventing flickering and other issues from occurring.

(10) In the first embodiment and each modified example described above, the excess determination was made by comparing the difference in the number of balls with a specific number. However, the excess determination may also be made by comparing the total number of game balls dispensed with a specific number. In other words, the system may be configured to transition to a game stop state when the total number of game balls dispensed reaches or exceeds a specific number. In this case, because the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is not included in the determination parameters, the influence of so-called "stuck" can be eliminated, making it possible to make an excess determination with a high degree of fairness.

(11) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the process of determining whether the difference in ball count is equal to or greater than a specific number (step Sf1305) is executed by a program for non-specific control. However, since this process merely references the information on the difference in ball count stored in the difference in ball count area 504e in the work area 393 for non-specific control, this process may also be configured to be executed by a program for specific control. In this case, an excess flag indicating whether the difference in ball count is equal to or greater than a specific number may be provided in the work area 391 for specific control.

(12) In the first embodiment and each of the variations described above, the excess determination process of step Sf1104 (FIG. 460) and the partial clear execution process of step Sf1902 (FIG. 466) may be executed by a program for specific control. In this case, the counters 502a-502e, the ball difference area 504e, and the excess flag may be provided in the work area 391 for specific control.

(13) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more, the game is stopped. However, the game may not be stopped. In this case, for example, when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more in the opening and closing execution mode based on a jackpot during the high probability mode, the information on the jackpot type and high probability mode stored in the main RAM 314 may be initialized, and the win/loss lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode may be set to the low probability mode regardless of the type of jackpot.

(14) In the first embodiment and each modified example described above, if the number of differential balls reaches a specific number or more, the game immediately transitions to a game stop state regardless of the game state at that time. However, the timing of the transition to the game stop state may be controlled by referring to the game state at that time. For example, if the number of differential balls reaches a specific number or more when not in the opening and closing execution mode, the game immediately transitions to a game stop state. On the other hand, if the number of differential balls reaches a specific number or more during the opening and closing execution mode, the game may wait for the opening and closing execution mode to end, and transition to the game stop state when or after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, if the number of differential balls reaches a specific number or more during the consecutive winning period described in (5) above, the game may transition to a game stop state when or after the consecutive winning period ends.

(15) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the payout of game balls is permitted in the game stop state entered when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more. However, this may not be permitted.

However, in this case, there is a risk that the payout of game balls will suddenly stop when the difference in the number of balls exceeds a specific number, and any unpaid prize balls will not be paid out. To prevent such inconveniences from occurring, it is a good idea to issue a predetermined warning in advance on the symbol display device 75, etc. to alert the player. For example, when the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 99,000 balls) that is less than the specific number, it is a good idea to issue a visual or audio warning such as, "We will soon reach the payout limit and will stop. Please be careful."

In addition, when the payout of game balls has stopped, such as when the tank is full, the notification method may differ depending on whether the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the specified number. For example, if the difference in the number of balls is less than the specified number when the tank is full, a visual or audio notification such as "Please remove the balls" may be issued, and if the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the specified number when the tank is full, a visual or audio notification such as "Please remove the balls immediately. There is a risk that the unpaid balls will not be paid out." may be issued.

(16) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples above, when a transition to a game stop state occurs because the number of balls difference exceeds a specific number, external information is output using the same external output terminal as when a transition to a game stop state occurs because fraud is detected. However, external information may also be output using an external output terminal different from that used when a transition to a game stop state occurs because fraud is detected. It may also be output as a dedicated signal corresponding to when the number of balls difference exceeds a specific number. In this case, the hall computer HC of the gaming hall can identify whether the number of balls difference exceeds a specific number or whether fraud has been detected based on the received external information.

In addition, while using the same external output terminal, the signal format (for example, the output period) may be different from when transitioning to a game stop state based on fraud detection, making it possible to output external information as a dedicated signal corresponding to when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more.

In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, external information is output when the game transitions to a stopped state if the difference in ball count is equal to or greater than a specific number, but external information may also be output when the difference in ball count is equal to or greater than a specific number. Furthermore, in the case of a transition to a stopped state based on fraud detection, external information is output when the game transitions to a stopped state in the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, but external information may also be output when fraud is detected.

(17) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a game is stopped based on the detection of fraud, a warning audio notification may be output from the speaker unit 29. However, when a game is stopped based on the difference in the number of balls between the balls being equal to or greater than a specific number, the warning audio notification may not be output, or an audio notification such as a congratulatory notification for the difference in the number of balls between the balls being equal to or greater than the specific number may be output instead of the warning audio notification. Furthermore, the light-emitting modes of the various lamp units 26-28 provided on the front door frame 14 may be different between a game stopped based on the detection of fraud and a game stopped based on the difference in the number of balls between the balls being equal to or greater than the specific number. For example, when a game is stopped based on the detection of fraud, the error indicator lamp unit 27 may be used to control the light emission in a warning mode (e.g., red light or flashing light), while when a game is stopped based on the difference in the number of balls between the balls being equal to or greater than the specific number, the error indicator lamp unit 27 may not be turned on, and the other lamp units 26, 28 may be controlled to emit light in a mode different from the warning mode.

(18) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a game-stop state is entered because the number of balls difference is equal to or greater than a specific number, the pachinko machine 10 is powered off and then powered on in sequence to restart the pachinko machine 10, thereby canceling the game-stop state. However, a configuration may be adopted in which restarting the pachinko machine 10 is not required to cancel the game-stop state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a game-stop state is temporarily entered because the number of balls difference is equal to or greater than a specific number. Specifically, the system may transition to a game stop state when the number of balls difference reaches a specific number or more, perform initialization processing similar to the second initialization processing (step Sf1801) or the first initialization processing (step Sf104) on the main RAM 314, and cancel the game stop state after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby transitioning to a state where game play can continue. Alternatively, the system may transition to a game stop state when the number of balls difference reaches a specific number or more, and automatically restart the pachinko machine 10 after a predetermined period of time has passed, cancel the game stop state when power is cut off or restored, and perform initialization processing similar to the second initialization processing (step Sf1801) or the first initialization processing (step Sf104) on the main RAM 314 when power is cut off or restored during restart, thereby transitioning to a state where game play can continue. In this case, it is preferable to use at least a portion of the period during which game play is stopped to make a predetermined notification corresponding to the number of balls difference reaching a specific number or more.

In the above cases, in order to carefully release the game suspension state based on the detection of fraud, it is preferable that the game suspension state be released under different conditions (conditions) than when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more. For example, to ensure an opportunity for a hall employee to be present, the game suspension state may be released by sequentially turning the pachinko machine 10 OFF and ON, as in the first embodiment and each of the modified examples above, or by turning the pachinko machine 10 OFF and then turning ON the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 166c.

The automatic release of the game suspension state that has been entered when the difference in the number of balls has reached a specific number or more is not limited to being conditional upon the passage of a period of time, but may also be conditional upon the execution of a predetermined process that is provided as a process to be performed after the transition to the game suspension state. Furthermore, when the game suspension state has been entered when the difference in the number of balls has reached a specific number or more, the game suspension state may be released by a predetermined signal being output to the pachinko machine 10 from outside the pachinko machine 10.

(19) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the game stop state can be canceled by restarting the pachinko machine 10 in both cases where the game has been stopped because the difference in balls has reached a specific number or more, and where the game has been stopped because fraud has been detected. The cancellation operation is the same, but different operations may be used. For example, if the game has been stopped because the difference in balls has reached a specific number or more, the game stop state can be canceled by restarting the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the game has been stopped because fraud has been detected, the game stop state can be canceled by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF and then turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 ON while pressing the reset button 166c. In this way, by increasing the effort required to cancel the game stop state when fraud is detected, it is possible to prevent the game stop state from being cancelled fraudulently and subsequent fraudulent activity from occurring.

(20) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a game is stopped because the difference in balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, the game may be released by referencing date and time information. More specifically, when a game is stopped because the difference in balls is equal to or greater than a specific number and an operation corresponding to the release is performed, the date and time information may be referenced to determine whether or not to allow the release.

A specific configuration is conceivable in which the pachinko machine 10 (more specifically, the main control unit 162) is equipped with a clock means (e.g., an RTC: real-time clock) that outputs time information and date information, and the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 references the time information and date information output from the clock means to control whether or not to release the game suspension state. That is, when the MPU 312 transitions to the game suspension state based on the number of balls difference exceeding a specific number, it references the time information and date information from the clock means to determine the transition date and time, and stores this information in information storage means such as the main RAM 314. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off and then powered on as a release operation, the MPU 312 references the time information and date information output from the clock means to determine the release date and time at the time of the power-on operation. If the release date and time is the day after the transition date and time, the release is validated and the game suspension state is released. However, if the release date and time is the same day as the transition date and time, the release is invalid and the game suspension state is not released.

With this configuration, if the difference in balls exceeds a specific number and gameplay is suspended, gameplay cannot be resumed until the next day. Therefore, the specific number can function as the upper limit for the difference in balls per business day at the gaming hall, making it possible to effectively curb excessive gambling.

In the above configuration, if it is possible to determine that midnight has passed, it is possible to recognize that it is the next day or later. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine the date, and the clock means may simply output time information.

The above configuration may also be applied to a partial clear process that erases information on the difference in ball count, information on each counter 502a-502e, and information on the excess flag. For example, the MPU 312 can determine and store the execution date and time of the partial clear process based on time information from the clock means, and when the pachinko machine 10 is subsequently powered on, compare that date and time with the stored execution date and time. If the power-on date and time falls on the following day or later, the partial clear process is executed; if not, the partial clear process is not executed.

(21) In the first embodiment and each of the variants described above, a so-called hold read-ahead process may be performed on the acquired hold information, and if the hold read-ahead process yields a predetermined result (for example, a read-ahead result corresponding to a jackpot or a reach display), a predetermined hold preview effect may be displayed on the symbol display device 75, etc., in a game play prior to the game play that was the subject of the hold read-ahead process. In this case, the hold read-ahead process may be performed by the main control device 162, and the process of controlling the execution of the predetermined hold preview effect on the symbol display device 75, etc. may be performed by the effect control device 143.

That is, "information acquisition means (a function for executing pending information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions; acquired information storage means (a pending area RE) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means; grant determination means (a function for executing a success/failure determination processing in the main control device 162) for making a grant determination as to whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a bonus to the player; bonus granting means (a function for executing a special call start process to a special call end process in the main control device 162) for granting a bonus to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becoming the grant correspondence result; and a game use operation is initiated based on the grant determination made by the grant determination means, and the game use operation is terminated with a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. The system may also include a game round control means (a function for executing processing from the start of special chart variation to processing during special chart determination in the main control device 162) that controls the predetermined notification means so that the game round operation is performed, with each game round being considered as one game round; a destination specification means (a function for executing reserve advance read processing in the main control device 162) that executes a destination specification process for specifying information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the award determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the award determination; and a specific notification means (a function for controlling the execution of a reserve notice presentation in the presentation control device 143) that, when the result of specification by the destination specification means is a predetermined result, issues a specific notification (a reserve notice presentation) corresponding to the result of specification by the destination specification means, in a game round that occurs before the game round related to the special information that became the subject of specification by the destination specification means."

Furthermore, the above configuration may include multiple modes for the hold preview effect, and a configuration may be provided in which which of the multiple modes to use for the hold preview effect is set based on (taking into account) the derived number of balls difference. For example, if the display color of the hold image is used as the hold preview effect to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, and the display colors for the hold image are set to normal colors (e.g., white), blue, yellow, green, and red (normal colors < blue < green < red, in order of increasing likelihood of a jackpot), and if the number of balls difference is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 95,000), and the predetermined result is identified by the hold preview process, one of four colors from blue to red can be set as the display color for the hold image in the hold preview effect; and if the number of balls difference is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the higher-order colors, green and red, are restricted, and one of the lower-order colors, blue and yellow, can be set. Additionally, when the number of balls difference is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the system may be configured to restrict the execution of the hold notification effect regardless of the results of the hold advance read process, or to lower the frequency (probability) of the hold notification effect execution compared to when the number of balls difference is less than the predetermined number. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations when the time is approaching when the number of balls difference will be equal to or greater than the specified number and the game will transition to a stopped state.

In the above case, if the presentation control device 143 can grasp the difference in balls at each time based on a difference in balls command from the main control device 162, as in the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the presentation control device 143 can determine whether the difference in balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and control the execution mode of the hold notice presentation based on the result.On the other hand, if the presentation control device 143 cannot grasp the difference in balls at each time, the main control device 162 can determine whether the difference in balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and if it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, output a predetermined command, and the presentation control device 143 can control the execution mode of the hold notice presentation based on the predetermined command.

(22) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the difference in balls exceeds a specific number, the main control device 162 outputs an excess command to the performance control device 143, and in response to receiving the command, the performance control device 143 displays, on the pattern display device 75 or the like, a notification image or the like corresponding to the difference in balls exceeding the specific number. However, the performance control device 143 may also determine whether the difference in balls exceeds the specific number and display the notification image or the like based on the result of the determination. Note that the performance control device 143 can grasp the difference in balls each time based on the difference in balls command output from the main control device 162.

In the above case, the presentation control device 143 may be configured to determine whether the difference in the number of balls has reached a predetermined number (for example, 99,000) that is less than a specific number, and to issue an advance notification such as, "We will soon reach the ball output limit and will stop. Please be careful." The presentation control device 143 may also be configured to determine whether the increase in the difference in the number of balls has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10,000), and to issue a notification such as, "10,000 balls have been reached," or "20,000 balls have been reached." With this configuration, there is no need to output a command from the main control device 162 each time such a notification occurs, making it possible to enhance notifications regarding the difference in the number of balls while suppressing an increase in the processing load on the main control device 162.

(23) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and then turned on while the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, a second initialization process is executed to clear the work area 391 for specific control to "0" except for the setting value and prize ball information. However, the second initialization process may not be executed in the above case. In other words, when the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, the work area 391 for specific control may not be automatically initialized, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the same manner as when the difference in the number of balls is less than the specific number.

(24) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, all information stored in the specific control work area 391 was erased in the second initialization process except for the setting value and prize ball information. However, a configuration may be adopted in which some information other than the setting value and prize ball information is erased. For example, (a) among information other than the setting value and prize ball information, information corresponding to a jackpot win and information corresponding to the open/close execution mode being executed is erased; (b) among information other than the setting value and prize ball information, information corresponding to a jackpot win, information regarding the open/close execution mode being executed, information corresponding to being in high probability mode, and information corresponding to the jackpot type (information stored when a special jackpot is won and information corresponding to the need to transition to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode has ended) is erased; or (c) among information other than the setting value and prize ball information, information corresponding to being in high probability mode and information corresponding to the jackpot type is erased.

According to the configuration (a) above, if the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more during the open/close execution mode, the game can be resumed without continuing the open/close execution mode. According to the configurations (b) and (c) above, if the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific number or more during a consecutive win period, the game can be resumed with the consecutive win period ended.

(25) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, and then the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 166c is pressed, a first initialization process is executed in which the prize ball information is erased. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a second initialization process is executed in which the prize ball information is not erased. In other words, when the pachinko machine 10 is restarted while the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, the second initialization process may be executed regardless of whether the reset button 166c is pressed or not.

(26) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the information on the difference in ball count, the information on each of the counters 502a to 502e, and the excess flag information were erased in the partial clearing process. However, a configuration may be adopted in which only some of these are erased. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the excess flag information is erased. In this case, the information on the difference in ball count and the information on each of the counters 502a to 502e may be erased when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 166c is pressed.

(27) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on after the power is turned off, a partial clear process is executed to erase the information on the difference in the number of balls stored in the work area 393 for non-specific control, regardless of whether the reset button 166c is pressed. However, the partial clear process may also be executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 166c is pressed after the power is turned off. In other words, the presence or absence of the partial clear process may be switched depending on the operation mode when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

(28) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the partial clear process was executed during the main process, but it may also be executed during the timer interrupt process. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the partial clear process may be executed before the processes of steps Sf409 to Sf419 for controlling the progress of the game are executed.

(29) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a predetermined operation is performed, a process of clearing the work area 393 for non-specific control and the stack area 394 for non-specific control to "0" (initialization process) may be executed. For example, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 166c is pressed, a process of clearing the work area 393 and stack area 394 to "0" may be executed.

(30) In the second modification of the first embodiment described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number, a second initialization process (step Sf1802) may be executed to clear the work area 391 for specific control to "0" except for the setting value and prize ball information. In this case, the power outage flag information is not subject to initialization.

(31) In the second modification of the first embodiment described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the power interruption clearing process (step Sf3110) is executed to erase the information on the ball difference, the information on each counter 502a-502e, and the excess flag information. However, this information may be configured not to be backed up when the power is interrupted. In other words, this information may be automatically erased when the supply of operating power to the MPU 312 is stopped.

(32) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but this may be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(33) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but this may not be the case. Furthermore, the pending information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized over the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 in determining whether a win has occurred, but this relationship may be reversed, or the winning/losing determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(34) In the first embodiment and each modified example described above, only game balls flowing down the right route are configured to be able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63. However, it is also possible to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down the left route are able to pass through or win, or so that game balls can pass through or win from either the right or left route. However, to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right and left routes are able to win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right and left routes are able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(35) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration is such that the transition to jackpot play (open/close execution mode) occurs when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot result. However, as in a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the configuration may also be such that the transition to jackpot play occurs when the result of the win/loss determination is a small win result and the game ball passes through the V entry port (V entry sensor) during small win play (a game state in which a variable entry device having a V entry port or a V entry port and a loss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award determination is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

(36) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variably displayed patterns on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll left and right, but the patterns may be displayed in a line on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction and scrolling direction of the patterns are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more.

(37) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to managed gaming machines (enclosed gaming machines, enclosed pachinko machines) that contain a predetermined number of gaming balls and circulate them within the machine. These machines do not have a conventional payout device and do not directly lend or pay out gaming balls to players. Instead, they quantify the player's balls and treat them as ball-holding information (game value). In these gaming machines, the ball-holding information can be stored in information storage means installed in the gaming machine or ball lending device. Based on the stored ball-holding information, a numerical value indicating the number of balls the player has is displayed on a predetermined display unit. When a ball is lent, a numerical value corresponding to the number of lent balls is added to the ball-holding information. When a gaming ball (circulating ball) is launched by the gaming ball launching mechanism, a numerical value corresponding to the number of launched balls is subtracted from the ball-holding information. When a gaming ball enters a predetermined winning slot installed in the gaming area, a numerical value corresponding to the number of prize balls is added to the ball-holding information. Furthermore, by operating a specific operating means (for example, a return button) provided on the gaming machine, the ball information is written to a specific card-type storage medium (portable storage medium), and the card-type storage medium can be removed from the gaming machine or ball lending device, making it possible to take gaming value equivalent to the balls outside the gaming machine.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines that have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and that start the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and that award the player a bonus such as a medal payout if a specific symbol or combination of specific symbols appears on a pay line visible through a display window after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed. In this case, the system can be configured to derive the number of medals difference instead of the number of balls difference, compare this number with a predetermined number (e.g., 20,000), and determine whether the number of medals difference is equal to or exceeds the specified number. In this case, the number of medals difference can be derived by subtracting the total number of medals bet (number of bets) from the total number of medals paid out.

The present invention can also be applied to medal-less slot machines, which do not require players to use actual medals (in other words, allow players to play without using actual medals), and instead allow players to play based on electronic information based on the number of medals stored in the credits.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

Seventh Embodiment
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries using the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained using Figure 475.

During play, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, set the display for the special symbol display unit 43, and set the display for the regular symbol display unit 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 475, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used to determine the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a special jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS which determines the variation display time for each special symbol display unit AS, BS in the special symbol display unit 43. Furthermore, it uses a regular symbol random number counter C3 used to perform the lottery for determining whether or not to place the regular symbol device 63a of the second operating port 63 in the support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a, which is set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special symbol reserved area Ra and a second special symbol reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information for the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of these areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history for the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the numerical information is stored in chronological order in the first to fourth areas in the order of first area → second area → third area → fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b has a total reserved number storage area, and this total reserved number storage area stores information for specifying the number of winning ball entries through the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

For more details on each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1999, and then return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 1999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314, and when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63, it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and the random number value that results in a jackpot is set in a win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in Figure 476, the win/lose tables include a win/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to the first special symbol (Figure 476(a)), a win/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to the second special symbol (Figure 476(b)), a win/lose table for the high probability mode corresponding to the first special symbol (Figure 476(c)), and a win/lose table for the high probability mode corresponding to the second special symbol (Figure 476(d)).

This pachinko machine 10 has two lottery modes for the win/loss lottery: a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. The win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the first special design is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on a win in the first operating port 62 when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this win/loss table, as shown in FIG. 476(a), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values for a jackpot (values of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/200. Other random numbers are normally assigned to loss results, and the probability of a loss result is 199/200.

The win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the second special design is referenced when a win/loss lottery is held based on winning the second operating port 63 when the lottery mode is low probability mode. In this win/loss table, as shown in Figure 476 (b), a total of 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" are set as the jackpot values, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/200, the same as in the case of the first special design.

All random number values other than those that result in a jackpot win will result in a losing result, but the winning/losing lottery for the second special design includes both special losing results and normal losing results as losing results. In the winning/losing table for the low probability mode corresponding to the second special design, a total of 400 random number values ranging from "10" to "409" are set as special losing results, and the probability of a special losing result is 1/5. Note that a special losing result is a lottery result that triggers a transition to the sudden time-saving game state described below. Other random number values are assigned to normal losing results, and the probability of a normal losing result is 159/200.

The win/loss table for the high probability mode corresponding to the first special design is referenced when a win/loss lottery is held based on winning the first operating port 62 when the lottery mode is high probability mode. In this win/loss table, as shown in Figure 476 (c), a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" are set as jackpot results, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/40. Other random number values are assigned to normal loss results, and the probability of a normal loss result is 39/40.

The win/loss table for the high probability mode corresponding to the second special design is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted based on winning the second operating port 63 when the lottery mode is high probability mode. In this win/loss table, as shown in Figure 476 (d), a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" are set as jackpot results, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/40, the same as in the case of the first special design. In addition, a total of 400 random number values from "50" to "449" are set as special miss results, and the probability of a special miss result is 1/5, the same as in the low probability mode. Other random number values are assigned to normal miss results, and the probability of a normal miss result is set to 155/200.

The probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in high probability mode than in low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot can be any. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result in the win/lose table for the second special chart is also not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, the probability of a special miss result does not necessarily have to be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and can be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result may be lower than the probability of winning a jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game results for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. As shown in Figure 477, the jackpot type table is a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Figure 477(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Figure 477(b)). If a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if a jackpot is achieved based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in Figure 477(a), the jackpot type table for the first special symbol has the 4R variable jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result A set as selectable jackpot types. Each of these jackpot results in four rounds of play being executed. Here, a round of play is when the variable winning control is executed at least once, changing the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then returning it to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is executed once per round of play.

A 4R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode continues until the number of times special symbol play is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 50 times), and the high frequency support mode continues until the number of times special symbol play is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a second upper limit (e.g., 51 times), which is greater than the first upper limit. After the second upper limit is reached, the game transitions to low probability mode and low frequency support mode (normal game state).

In other words, if a 4R probability variable jackpot result is achieved, the first 50 special game turns after the opening and closing execution mode will be played in high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high probability game turn, probability variable game turn), and the 51st game turn will be played in low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game turn). Furthermore, if a jackpot result is achieved before the number of special game turns after the opening and closing execution mode reaches 50, the high probability game turn will end with a transition to the opening and closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

Here, we will explain the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared in a situation where game balls are continuously being released into the play area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a is opened more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the open period for each opening is also longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

For this reason, in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in low-frequency support mode. In other words, in low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than that into the second actuation port 63, but in high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than that into the first actuation port 62. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, allowing the player to play in high-frequency support mode while minimizing the loss of balls in their possession.

In this embodiment, the high frequency support modes are a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode. Of these, the first high frequency support mode is the mode that is entered when a 4R special jackpot result is achieved. The difference between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode will be explained later.

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode. In other words, if 4R normal jackpot result A occurs, the game will transition to normal play mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Incidentally, while the opening and closing execution mode is running, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, "0" to "84" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, and "85" to "99" correspond to a 4R regular jackpot result A. In other words, when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on winning the first operating port 62, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 85%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R regular jackpot result A is set to 15%.

As shown in Figure 477 (b), the jackpot type table for the second special symbol sets the selectable jackpot types as a 10R probability variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result B. A 10R probability variable jackpot result results in 10 rounds of play being executed. A 10R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode is set to first high-frequency support mode. In this case, the high-probability mode continues, as in the case of a 4R probability variable jackpot result, until the number of special symbol game rounds executed after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit (e.g., 50 rounds), and the first high-frequency support mode continues until the number of special symbol game rounds executed after the open/close execution mode reaches the second upper limit (e.g., 51 rounds). In other words, if a 10R probability jackpot result occurs, the first 50 special game turns after the open/close execution mode will be played in a high probability state, and the 51st game turn will be played in a time-saving state.

A 4R normal jackpot result B results in four rounds of play being executed. Furthermore, a 4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode and the support mode is set to first high frequency support mode. In this case, the first high frequency support mode continues after the opening and closing execution mode ends until the number of times the special symbol play has been executed reaches a predetermined third upper limit (for example, one time). After the third upper limit is reached, the game transitions to normal play mode. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result B is obtained, the first special symbol play after the opening and closing execution mode will be played in time-saving play mode.

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "84" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, and "85" to "99" correspond to a 4R regular jackpot result B. In other words, when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on winning the second operating port 63, the probability of being assigned a 10R special jackpot result is set to 85%, and the probability of being assigned a 4R regular jackpot result B is set to 15%.

Here, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is set to 85%, regardless of whether the jackpot type table for the first special symbol or the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is used. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol results in a 10R jackpot result, while the jackpot type table for the first special symbol results in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the second actuation port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode will be greater than if a special jackpot result is achieved based on a win through the first actuation port 62, and it is possible to expect a greater payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is awarded through the second actuation port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is awarded through the first actuation port 62.

In this way, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, players will play in the hope of winning through the second actuation port 63, out of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, and as a result, players will pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of winning through the second actuation port 63.

In this embodiment, the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result is the same for the jackpot type table for the first special symbol and the jackpot type table for the second special symbol, but the probabilities may be different. Specifically, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol may be configured to have a higher probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result than the jackpot type table for the first special symbol. Even with this configuration, it is still more advantageous for the player to have the ball enter the second actuation port 63 than the first actuation port 62. In this case, it is not necessary to configure the second actuation port 63 to be more favorable than the first actuation port 62 in terms of both the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode and the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result; it may be configured so that only the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result is more favorable.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS when the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referencing the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of ROM 313. The stop result table contains multiple pieces of data for the stop results in the event of a jackpot (the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS) that correspond to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. When determining the stop result, the data for the multiple stop results that corresponds to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Because the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine both the stop result and the jackpot type, the jackpot image that stops and is displayed on each special symbol display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state that is triggered by a normal jackpot result, there is also a time-saving game state that is triggered by a special miss result in the win/lose lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1. In this case, the time-saving game state is a state in which the lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a second high-frequency support mode.

Incidentally, because a special miss result is a type of miss result, the game state will transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state without going through the open/close execution mode. In other words, if a special miss result occurs, the game state will transition to the time-saving game state as the special game round ends. In the following, when distinguishing between a time-saving game state that is transitioned to after the end of a high-probability game state or triggered by a 4R normal jackpot result B, and a time-saving game state triggered by a special miss result, the former will be referred to as the "normal time-saving game state" and the latter as the "sudden time-saving game state."

As shown in Figure 477 (c), the sudden time-saving game state, which is triggered by a special miss result, continues until the number of miss plays since the state was entered reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 700 plays). When the number of miss plays reaches the fourth upper limit, the sudden time-saving game state ends and the game enters the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result occurs before the fourth upper limit is reached, the sudden time-saving game state ends with a transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 476, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special symbol display section AS and second special symbol display section BS of the special symbol display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time within that normal processing. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of ROM 313. Details of the variable display time table will be described later.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The normal winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the normal winning holding area 314c of RAM 314 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used in the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not a normal winning (support winning) has occurred. If the result is a support winning, the normal power device 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a device opening/closing game is executed in which the opening/closing control to return it to the closed state is performed at least once.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in the support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of ROM 313. As shown in Figure 478, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (Figure 478(a)), a support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode (Figure 478(b)), and a support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode (Figure 478(c)). When drawing the support lottery, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced; if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode is referenced; and if the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in Figure 478(a), the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode has 50 random number values between "0" and "49" set as support wins, and the probability of winning support is 1/2.

As shown in Figure 478 (b), the support lottery table for the first high frequency support mode has a total of 90 numbers set, ranging from "0" to "89," and the probability of winning support is 9/10. In other words, when in the first high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is a high probability mode, making it easier to win support than in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in Figure 478 (c), in the support lottery table for the second high frequency support mode, a total of 50 random number values ranging from "0" to "49" are set as support winning values, and the probability of winning support is 1/2. In other words, in the second high frequency support mode, the lottery mode for the support lottery is set to a low probability mode, and the support lottery is held with a lower probability of winning support than in the first high frequency support mode.

In each support mode, if the random number value does not result in a support win, the lottery result will be a normal miss. In this case, the opening and closing of the device will not be performed.

The probability of winning a support ball in each support mode is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. For example, as long as the probability of winning a support ball is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a support ball win are arbitrary. Furthermore, in the above configuration, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is the same as in the low-frequency support mode, but the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode is higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the low-frequency support mode. In that case, the probability of winning a support ball in the second high-frequency support mode may be the same as the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be lower than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode, or it may be higher than the probability of winning a support ball in the first high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the configuration may also be such that the probability of winning a support ball is equal in the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode.

Incidentally, if the probability of winning support is set to be equal between the low-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, as in this embodiment, that is, if there is no variation in the probability of winning support between these modes, the support lottery table for each of these modes can be made common, and a single lottery table can be provided.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to progress the game by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but we will not explain these processes here.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 479. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sg101, the various winning sensors are read. That is, the status of the various winning sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, and the status of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If it is determined that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Furthermore, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

In step Sg102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sg103, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sg104, a through winning process is executed in response to a win at the through gate 64. In the through winning process, it is determined whether a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and if this flag is stored, the value of the normal winning random number counter C3 updated in step Sg103 is stored in the normal map holding area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role objects stored in the normal map holding area 314c is less than four. Furthermore, if a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the through gate winning process is terminated.

In step Sg105, the winning process for the operating port 62 or 63 is executed in response to a winning entry into the operating port 62 or 63, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for operating port>
The winning processing for the operating port in step Sg105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 480.

First, in step Sg201, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sg202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three gaming balls.

In step Sg203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the gaming hall's management control device that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sg204, the value stored in the reserve number memory area of the first special symbol reserve area Ra is read, and the start reserve memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserve memory number RaN). Then, in step Sg205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg201 (no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sg206, where it is determined whether a gaming ball has won (initial winning) in the second actuation port 63 based on the detection state of the second actuation port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that a gaming ball has won in the second actuation port 63, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sg207 to pay out one gaming ball.

In step Sg208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sg209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Then, in step Sg205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sg202 or step Sg207 above is sent to the payout control device 181 via the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sg205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 481.

First, in step Sg301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sg204 or step Sg209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated. If it is less than the upper limit, in step Sg302, 1 is added to the start pending memory count N for the corresponding special chart hold area Ra, Rb. In step Sg303, 1 is added to the value stored in the total hold count memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common hold count CRN).

In step Sg304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the corresponding reserved area for the special chart display section, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number increased by 1 in step Sg302 above.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the first special symbol holding area Ra, i.e., the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol added by 1 in step Sg302 above.

In addition, if the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the reserve area Rb for the second special symbol, i.e., the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory count RbN for the second special symbol added by 1 in step Sg302 above.

In step Sg305, a display update process is executed for the special symbol reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. The special symbol reserved number display section AM is capable of displaying the reserved number for the first special symbol and the reserved number for the second special symbol separately. In the display update process of step Sg305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special symbol is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special symbol is updated.

In step Sg306, a hold command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special symbol is the starting winning symbol, and information indicating the number of symbols on hold. After step Sg306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 482. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing, which is started when the power is turned on, is executed, and in normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sg401 to Sg408 is executed as periodic processing at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sg409 to Sg411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, external signal output processing is first executed in step Sg401. In the external signal output processing in step Sg401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub-side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sg402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sg403, a special symbol play control process is executed to control play during each special symbol play. The special symbol play control process performs jackpot determination and display control of the special symbol display unit 43. In step Sg404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, high probability mode, high frequency support mode, etc. Details of the special symbol play control process in step Sg403 and the game state transition process in step Sg404 will be described later.

In step Sg405, a normal game play control process is executed to control play during a normal game play. The normal game play control process involves the support lottery (regular game win/lose lottery) and display control of the normal game display unit 44. In step Sg406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal electric role device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Details of the normal game play control process in step Sg405 and the electric role support process in step Sg406 will be described later.

In step Sg407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In step Sg408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage has not occurred), step Sg409 determines whether the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal processing, step Sg410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the appropriate area of RAM 314.

In step Sg411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg409 (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), processing returns to step Sg401 and processing from step Sg401 onwards is executed.

In this way, after executing the processing of step Sg408, the remaining time until the next timing for executing normal processing is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, the execution time of each processing of steps Sg401 to Sg408 changes depending on the state of the game, so the remaining time until the next timing for executing normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly using this remaining time to update the random number initial value counter CINI, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and similarly, it is possible to randomly update the variation type counter CS.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg408 (the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sg412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sg413, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Sg414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Sg415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sg416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after power is completely cut off, power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to maintain data storage in RAM 314, so the information stored in RAM 314 before power was cut off is retained in its original state for a predetermined period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special game play control processing>
The special chart play count control processing of step Sg403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 483.

First, in step Sg501, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, step Sg502 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol. Specifically, it determines whether the fixed symbol display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The fixed symbol display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS is displaying a fixed symbol.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed value, step Sg503 determines whether the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable value. Specifically, it determines whether a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display is being performed on the first special symbol display unit AS or the second special symbol display unit BS.

If the special symbol display unit 43 is not displaying a variable symbol, step Sg504 determines whether the common hold number CRN is "0." If the common hold number CRN is "0," this means that the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common hold number CRN is "0," there is no hold information to be executed, and the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserve number CRN is not "0", step Sg505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special symbol reserve area Ra or the second special symbol reserve area Rb for variable display, and then step Sg506 executes a variable start process to start variable display in the special symbol display unit 43, after which the game play control process is terminated.

The data setting process in step Sg505 and the fluctuation start process in step Sg506 are now explained in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 484.

First, in step Sg601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is "0." If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0," data setting processing for the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sg602 to Sg608. If the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0," data setting processing for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sg609 to Sg615.

As already explained, data setting processing is performed when the common reserve number CRN is 1 or greater. A situation in which data setting processing is performed means that at least one of the first start reserve memory number RaN and the second start reserve memory number RbN is 1 or greater. In this case, the data setting processing is configured to first determine whether the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," and then perform processing related to the reserve information for the first special symbol if the second start reserve memory number RbN is "0," i.e., if there is no reserve information for the second special symbol. Therefore, if reserve information is stored in both the first special symbol reserve area Ra and the second special symbol reserve area Rb, the reserve information for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserve area Rb is processed first.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first in step Sg602, the first start hold memory number RaN in the first special symbol holding area Ra is decremented by 1. In step Sg603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sg604, the data stored in the first area of the first special symbol holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sg605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra. This process clears the data in the first area and sequentially moves the data in the second to fourth areas to the lower areas.

In step Sg606, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second special symbol flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether pending information exists for the second operating port 63. If a second special symbol flag is stored, the second special symbol flag is cleared in step Sg607.

After step Sg607 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg606 (the second special symbol flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sg608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the first special symbol reserved area Ra, i.e., information that it corresponds to the first actuation port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sg608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 of normal processing (Fig. 482). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first pending display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of pending items.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step Sg609, the second start hold memory count RbN in the second special symbol holding area Rb is decremented by 1. In step Sg610, the common hold count CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sg611, the data stored in the first area of the second special symbol holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sg612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb. In step Sg613, it is determined whether a second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If a second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sg614.

After step Sg614 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sg613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sg615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information that causes the sub-control device, the performance control device 143, to recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of ROM 313, containing information that the reserved area that was the target of this data shift corresponds to the second special symbol reserved area Rb, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second actuation port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This data setting process then terminates.

The shift command set in step Sg615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 of normal processing (Fig. 482). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second hold display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 485.

First, in step Sg701, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table corresponding to the current game state and the winning side's actuation port 62, 63. Specifically, if the current lottery mode is low probability mode and the current special symbol play is based on a win in the first actuation port 62, the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the first special symbol (Figure 476 (a)) is referred to, and if the current special symbol play is based on a win in the second actuation port 63, the win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the second special symbol (Figure 476 (b)). Furthermore, if the current lottery mode is the high probability mode and the current special symbol game is based on winning the first operating port 62, the win/loss table for the high probability mode corresponding to the first special symbol (Fig. 476 (c)) is referenced, and if the current special symbol game is based on winning the second operating port 63, the win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode corresponding to the second special symbol (Fig. 476 (d)). In this step, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the random number for a jackpot or the value set as the random number for a special miss result in the win/loss table being referenced.

In step Sg702, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sg701 is a hit or miss jackpot. If a hit or miss jackpot is determined, in step Sg703 the corresponding jackpot type table is referenced to determine the jackpot type (lottery for the jackpot type). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the first special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Fig. 477(a)). If the current jackpot result is a hit/miss jackpot result for the second special symbol, the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Fig. 477(b)). For example, if the type is determined by reference to the jackpot type table for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to a numerical range for a 4R special jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result A.

In step Sg704, a jackpot type flag corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sg703 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected jackpot type is a 4R probability variable jackpot result, the 4R probability variable jackpot flag is set.

In step Sg705, the stop result for the jackpot (jackpot pattern) is set by referencing the stop result table for the jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sg702 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sg706, where it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment in step Sg701 is a special loss result. If it is a special loss result, a special loss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sg707. The special loss flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special loss result.

In step Sg708, the stop result table for special misses stored in the stop result table storage area 313d is referenced to set the stop result for special misses (special miss pattern). Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sg706 (if the result is not a special miss), it means that the result of this pass/fail judgment is a normal miss. In this case, proceed to step Sg709 and set the stop result for a normal miss. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a miss is provided, and that stop result is set in step Sg709.

After execution of step Sg705, step Sg708, or step Sg709, step Sg710 executes high probability mode update processing to update the number of times special symbol play has been performed in high probability mode, and then step Sg711 executes high frequency support mode update processing to update the number of times special symbol play has been performed in high frequency support mode. In step Sg712, sudden time-saving game state transition determination processing is executed to determine whether a transition trigger to the sudden time-saving game state has occurred. In step Sg713, variable display time setting processing is executed to draw a variation pattern and set the variable display time. Details of steps Sg710 to Sg713 will be described later.

In step Sg714, a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display for a special game play is in progress.

In step Sg715, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The fluctuation start command contains information about the fluctuation pattern, and a different fluctuation pattern is set for each game state, and a different fluctuation pattern is also set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, the presentation control device 143 can grasp not only information about the fluctuation display time, but also whether or not there is a jackpot and the current game state. Furthermore, the type command contains information about the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot.

In step Sg716, the display of the special symbol display section 43 begins to change. At that time, if the current special symbol game is based on a win in the first operating port 62, the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed in a changing manner, and if it is based on a win in the second operating port 63, the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed in a changing manner. After step Sg716 is executed, the change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol play count control process (Fig. 483), after step Sg506 is executed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sg501 (open/close execution mode is in progress), the special symbol play count control process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sg502 onwards. In other words, if the open/close execution mode is in progress, no variable display will be performed on the special symbol display unit 43 even if pending information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg503 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a variable symbol), the process proceeds to step Sg507, where it is determined whether the variable display time for the current special symbol game has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step Sg508. In the variable display processing, the display of the special symbol display unit for the current game is controlled (the illumination of each display segment is controlled) so that each display segment in the special symbol display unit for the current game is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After step Sg508 is executed, the special symbol game control processing ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg507 (the variable display time has elapsed), the process proceeds to step Sg509, where the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sg510, high probability mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high probability mode. In step Sg511, high frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high frequency support mode. In step Sg512, sudden time-saving game state transition processing is executed to suddenly transition the game state to a time-saving game state. Details of steps Sg510 to Sg512 will be described later.

In step Sg513, the process for starting the final display is executed, and then the special symbol game count control process is terminated. In the process for starting the final display, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to display the image as stopped based on the stop result set in step Sg705, step Sg708, or step Sg709. In addition, in step Sg513, the final display time for continuing the stopped display is also set.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol), the process proceeds to step Sg514, where a process for terminating the fixed symbol display is executed. In the process for terminating the fixed symbol display, it is determined whether the fixed symbol display time set in step Sg513 has elapsed, and if so, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to terminate the static symbol display. Note that if there is no next pending information when the fixed symbol display time has elapsed, the static symbol display is controlled to continue as is until a winning entry occurs in the actuation port 62, 63. After step Sg514 is completed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

<Game status transition processing>
The game state transition processing of step Sg404 (Figure 482) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 486.

First, in step Sg901, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not currently in the open/close execution mode, the program proceeds to step Sg902, where it is determined whether or not the special game play has ended (whether or not the confirmation display on the special game display unit 43 has ended). If the special game play has not yet ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the end of the special symbol game, step Sg903 determines whether the game result of this special symbol game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot type flag (step Sg704) is checked to see if it is stored in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the game result of this special symbol game does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, the game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg903 (if the result of this special game corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sg904, where the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. An opening period is also set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if the high probability flag or various support flags described below are set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sg905, the process for starting the round display to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is executed. In this step, the type of jackpot that has occurred is determined based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sg906, the corresponding number of rounds is set. Specifically, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step Sg905 above is identified, and a value corresponding to that number of rounds is set in round counter area RC1 provided in various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the jackpot type this time is a 10R special jackpot result, "10" is set in round counter area RC1.

In step Sg907, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start and duration of the opening. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 of normal processing (Figure 482).

In step Sg908, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to that management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred on the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sg909, where it is determined whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening/closing process is executed in step Sg910.

Here, the process for opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 487.

First, in step Sg1001, it is determined whether the special prize opening 65a is open. This determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 65d. If the special prize opening 65a is not open, in step Sg1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Sg1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T1 is "0," proceed to step Sg1004, where "15000" is set in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 479) is initiated. In step Sg1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of winnings (10) that can be won by the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sg1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sg1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 of the normal processing (Figure 482).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg1002 (the value in the round counter area RC1 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Sg1003 (the value in the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sg1008, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T1 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sg1004 has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T1 is not "0," proceed to step Sg1009, where a determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been won in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value in the prize counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Sg1010, and then a determination is made as to whether or not the value in the prize counter area PC1 is "0" in step Sg1011. If the value in the prize counter area PC1 is not "0," the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg1008 (if the value in the timer area T1 is "0") or if a positive judgment is made in step Sg1011 (if the value in the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sg1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sg1013, the value in the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Sg1014, it is determined whether the value in the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sg1015 and set "1000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the period (2 seconds) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sg1016, a close command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sg401 of the normal processing (Figure 482).

If step Sg1014 returns a positive result (the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), i.e., if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sg1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains closed and awaits the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sg1018, an ending command is set to notify the presentation control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sg401 of the normal processing (Fig. 482).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Figure 486), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sg910, step Sg911 determines whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," the game state transition process is terminated immediately to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", proceed to step Sg912 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends immediately to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, proceed to step Sg913 to execute the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 488.

First, in step Sg1101, the jackpot type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot result. If it is a variable probability jackpot result, in step Sg1102, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to high probability mode.

In step Sg1103, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 50) is set in the probability variation counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The probability variation counter area KC is used by MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high probability mode (the remaining number of special game times that can be played in high probability mode), and is decremented by 1 each time a special game is played in high probability mode.

In step Sg1104, the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The Support A flag corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode. By setting the Support A flag, the system transitions to an internal state corresponding to the first high-frequency support mode (high-probability game state or normal time-saving game state).

In step Sg1105, a value corresponding to the second upper limit (e.g., 51) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of special game times that can be played in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode), and is decremented by 1 each time a special game is played in high-frequency support mode.

In step Sg1106, a high probability start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability start command set in step Sg1106 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sg401 of the normal processing (Fig. 482). By sending the high probability start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the transition to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode). Note that the high probability start command includes information indicating the transition to the high probability gaming state, as well as information indicating the upper limit of the number of times in the high probability mode and the upper limit of the number of times in the first high frequency support mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sg1101 (the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sg1107, where it is determined whether the current normal jackpot result is a 4R normal jackpot result B. This judgment is made by referring to the jackpot type flag set in the various flags storage area 314e.

If the current normal jackpot result is 4R normal jackpot result B, in step Sg1108, the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sg1109, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter area 314d.

In step Sg1110, a normal time-shortening start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The normal time-shortening start command set in step Sg1110 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sg401 of the normal processing (Fig. 482). By sending the normal time-shortening start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the transition to the normal time-shortening game state (low probability mode and first high-frequency support mode). Note that the normal time-shortening start command includes information indicating the transition to the normal time-shortening game state, as well as information indicating the upper limit on the number of times that normal time-shortening game state can be played.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sg1107 (if the 4R normal jackpot result is not B), this means that the current normal jackpot result is 4R normal jackpot result A. In this case, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sg1108 to Sg1110. In other words, the game state is set to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Fig. 486), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sg913 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step Sg914. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sg915, the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, and then the game state transition process is terminated. During the opening and closing execution mode termination process, the type flag and opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e are cleared.

Next, we will explain the high-probability mode update process in step Sg710, the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sg711, and the sudden transition to the time-saving game state determination process in step Sg712. These processes are executed during the fluctuation start process (Fig. 485), or in other words, when the fluctuation display starts during a special game round.

<High Probability Mode Update Process>
The high-probability mode update processing of step Sg710 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 489.

First, in step Sg1201, it is determined whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The high probability flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the current lottery mode is a high probability mode.

If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in high probability mode, step Sg1202 determines whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, the program proceeds to step Sg1203, where the value of the probability variable counter area KC in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability variable counter area KC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times in high probability mode (the remaining number of times the game can be played in high probability mode).

In step Sg1204, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter area KC is "0." If the value of the probability variable counter area KC is "0," that is, if the number of times play has been performed in high probability mode has reached the first upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sg1205, where a high probability termination flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The high probability termination flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that high probability mode should be terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg1202 (the result of this special drawing is a jackpot), the value of the probability change counter area KC is cleared to "0" in step Sg1206, and then a high probability end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sg1205. In other words, if a jackpot result occurs during high probability mode, the high probability mode is recognized as ending, regardless of the number of remaining turns.

After step Sg1205 is executed, the high probability mode update processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step Sg1201 (the high probability flag is not set), the remaining number of times in high probability mode will not be updated, and the high probability mode update processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sg1202 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1204 (the value of the probability change counter area KC is not "0"), it is determined that the high probability mode should not be terminated, and the high probability mode update processing is terminated without executing the processing of step Sg1205.

<High frequency support mode update processing>
The frequently supported mode update process of step Sg711 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sg1301, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Specifically, it is determined whether either the Support A flag or the Support B flag is set. The Support A flag corresponds to the normal time-saving game state (first high-frequency support mode), and the Support B flag corresponds to the sudden time-saving game state (second high-frequency support mode).

If any of the support flags is set, i.e., if the first or second high-frequency support mode is in progress, proceed to step Sg1302 to determine whether the result of this special chart lottery is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot, in step Sg1303, the value of the support counter area SC in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of times play can be performed in high-frequency support mode).

In step Sg1304, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "1". If the value of the support counter area SC is "1", the process proceeds to step Sg1305, where it is determined whether the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is the support A flag. If the update result of the support counter area SC is "1" and the support A flag is set, this means that the high probability gaming state has ended and the game has transitioned to the normal time-saving gaming state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sg1306, where a normal time-saving start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

After executing step Sg1306, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1304 (the value of the support counter area SC is not "1") or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1305 (the support A flag is not set), the process proceeds to step Sg1307, where it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0." If the value of the support counter area SC is "0," that is, if the number of times play has been performed in high-frequency support mode has reached the second or third upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sg1308, where a high-support end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The high-support end flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that high-frequency support mode should be ended.

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sg1302 (the result of this special drawing is a jackpot), the value of the support counter area SC is cleared to "0" in step Sg1309, and then a high support end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sg1308. In other words, if a jackpot result occurs during high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is recognized as ending, regardless of the number of times remaining.

After step Sg1308 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step Sg1301 (none of the support flags are set), the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sg1302 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1307 (the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is determined that high-frequency support mode should not be terminated, and the high-frequency support mode update processing is terminated without executing the processing of step Sg1308.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state in step Sg712 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 491 (a).

First, in step Sg1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special loss result. Specifically, it is determined whether a special loss flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special loss flag is set (step Sg707) if the result of the win/loss determination in step Sg701 (Fig. 485) is a special loss result.

If the special miss flag is not set (the result of the special chart win/loss lottery is not a special miss), the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly terminated. On the other hand, if the special miss flag is set (the result of the special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss), proceed to step Sg1402 and determine whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The high probability flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the high probability mode is in effect.

If the high probability flag is not set (if the game is not in high probability mode), step Sg1403 determines whether the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The Support A flag allows the MPU 312 to determine that the game is in the first high frequency support mode.

If the Support A flag is set (if the first high-frequency support mode is in progress), proceed to step Sg1404 and set a sudden time-saving start flag in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur. When the sudden time-saving start flag is set in this way, a sudden transition to the time-saving game state is made in the sudden time-saving game state transition process (step Sg512), which is carried out at the start of the confirmation display of that special game round. Details of this process will be described later.

After step Sg1404 is executed, the process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-shortened game state is terminated. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sg1402 (the high probability flag is set and the game is in high probability mode), the sudden time-shortened game state transition determination flag is not set, and the process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing of step Sg1403 and subsequent steps. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1403 (the support A flag is not set and the game is not in the first high-frequency support mode), the sudden time-shortened game state transition determination flag is not set, and the process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing of step Sg1404.

As mentioned above, a sudden transition to the time-saving game state is made when the time-saving start flag is set. Here, we will explain the relationship between the game state when a special miss occurs and whether or not a sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs, with reference to Figure 491 (b).

If the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e and the lottery mode is in the high probability mode (high probability game state), a positive judgment is made in step Sg1402, and the sudden time-saving start flag is not set. Therefore, if a special miss occurs in a high probability game state, the game will not transition to the sudden time-saving game state, and the high probability game state will be maintained.

In this embodiment, if the first special design lottery results in a 4R probability variable jackpot, or the second special design lottery results in a 10R probability variable jackpot, the game will transition to a high probability game state after the open/close execution mode ends. This high probability game state will continue until the number of special design game plays since the transition to the high probability game state reaches 50, and if a special design game play during this period results in a special miss, this result will not be reflected in the transition to the game state, and the win for the special miss result will be invalidated.

Furthermore, if the Support A flag is set when the high probability flag is not set, the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode (when the game is in normal time-saving mode), a negative judgment is made in step Sg1402, followed by a positive judgment in step Sg1403, and the sudden time-saving start flag is set. Therefore, if a special miss occurs in normal time-saving mode, a transition to the sudden time-saving mode will occur.

In this embodiment, after the high-probability game state ends, the lottery mode is switched to the low-probability mode while the support mode remains in the first high-frequency support mode, resulting in a transition to the normal time-saving game state. In other words, rather than immediately transitioning to the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) after the high-probability game state ends, the game transitions to a chance state in which a sudden transition to the time-saving game state becomes possible. Also, if the 4R normal jackpot result B is obtained in the win/loss lottery for the second special chart, a transition to the normal time-saving game state will occur, and in this case, a special miss result will also result in a sudden transition to the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, if neither the high-probability flag nor the support A flag is set, the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode (normal game mode), a negative judgment is made in steps Sg1402 and Sg1403, and the sudden time-saving start flag is not set. Here, special game turns based on the reserved second special symbols that exist at the end of the normal time-saving game mode are played with the support A flag cleared (the normal time-saving game mode has ended internally), so these special game turns are played in normal game mode. In this embodiment, the upper limit on the number of reserved second special symbols is set to four, so these reserved special symbol game turns include the 52nd to 55th special symbol game turns since the transition to the high-probability game mode. If a special miss occurs in these special symbol game turns, the result is not reflected in the transition to the game mode, and the winning combination for the special miss result is invalidated.

Thus, while a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is permitted in the normal time-saving play state, a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is restricted for subsequent reserved plays of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the number of special symbol plays that can be executed in the normal time-saving play state is set to one, so a transition to the normal time-saving play state grants a chance to suddenly transition to the time-saving play state in one special symbol play. This is also true if the 4R normal jackpot result B is obtained in the second special symbol lottery and the game transitions to the normal time-saving play state after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Note that the state where neither the high probability flag nor the support A flag is set applies not only to the normal game state, but also to the sudden time-saving game state in low probability mode and second high frequency support mode. Therefore, even if a special miss occurs while in the sudden time-saving game state, the game will not transition to the sudden time-saving game state (the remaining number of special game plays that can be played in the sudden time-saving game state will not be increased).

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process of step Sg713 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 492.

First, in step Sg1601, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability flag or the various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and based on the results, the current game state is determined to be either the normal game state, the high probability game state, the normal time-limited game state, or the sudden time-limited game state. In this step, if the high probability flag and the support A flag are set, the state is determined to be the high probability game state; if only the support A flag is set, the state is determined to be the normal time-limited game state; if the support B flag is set, the state is determined to be the sudden time-limited game state; and if none of the high probability flag, support A flag, or support B flag is set, the state is determined to be the normal game state.

In step Sg1602, a variable display time table corresponding to the game status, etc., determined in step Sg1601 is obtained. The variable display time table is used to select the variable display time (variation pattern) based on the value of the variable type counter CS. In the variable display time table, the numerical range of the variable type counter CS is set in correspondence with information on the variation pattern.

Here, the variable display time table obtained in step Sg1602 will be explained with reference to Figure 493.

If the current game state is the normal game state and the current special symbol game round is the first special symbol game round, the variable display time table for the normal game state corresponding to the first special symbol is obtained. As the variable display time table for the normal game state corresponding to the first special symbol, a variable display time table for a jackpot and a variable display time table for a normal miss are set.

The variable display time tables for the normal game mode corresponding to these first special symbols will be explained with reference to Figure 494. The variable display time table for the jackpot shown in Figure 494(a) is referenced when a jackpot result occurs during the first special symbol play in the normal game mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern 1A (15 seconds), variable pattern 2A (60 seconds), and variable pattern 3A (120 seconds) are set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern is set as the variable display time of the image on the special symbol display unit 43.

In addition, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. The display control device 350 is then controlled so that the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is synchronized with the variation display of the symbols on the special symbol display unit 43, and is displayed on the symbol display device 75.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to game-round effects such as reach effects performed by the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning effect, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning effect, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning effect. In other words, when the effect control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game-round effect corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the symbol display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects described above, after a reach-winning display is made, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, reach-winning display (reach state) refers to a display state intended to make the player believe that the state is likely to result in a special game state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the changing display is a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of changing (or variable) displaying symbols (pictures), between the start of the changing (or variable) display of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, this is a display state in which symbols in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are displayed as still symbols, thereby displaying a reach symbol combination that has the potential to form a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed as varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the display of varying symbols is terminated, when the symbols in the final symbol row are displayed as varying symbols, a reach line is formed by displaying symbols in symbol rows other than the final symbol row as still symbols on an active line on the display screen G in a manner that forms a jackpot symbol combination.

A normal reach hit effect is one in which the above-mentioned reach display is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. An SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than a normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after the reach line is formed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols in a jackpot symbol combination are displayed. An SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than an SP reach effect, in which a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed, followed by the display of symbols in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the items in the "Notes (Display Mode)" column in Figure 494 (a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

The variable display time table for normal misses shown in Figure 494 (b) is referenced when a normal miss occurs during the first special symbol play in normal play mode. This variable display time table sets variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 seconds), variable pattern 3H (60 seconds), and variable pattern 4H (120 seconds) as selectable variable patterns. Similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, a variable display time is set for each variable pattern, but the variable display time for variable pattern 1H is set by referencing the number of reserved special symbols at that time (the number of reserved first special symbols when referencing the variable display time table for the first special symbol). Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected when the number of reserved symbols is two or less, the variable display time is set to 8 seconds; if variable pattern 1H is selected when the number of reserved symbols is three or more, the variable display time is set to 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss effect on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss effect, variation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach miss effect, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to an SPSP reach miss effect.

A complete miss effect is one in which no reach display is made and symbols are displayed in a miss symbol combination. Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects is one in which, after a reach display is made, the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reach miss symbol combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot when combined with the reach symbols). Furthermore, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect similar to the SP reach hit effect is made, a conclusion video corresponding to a miss is displayed, and symbols are displayed in a reach miss symbol combination. Furthermore, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpots, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for normal misses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "98" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the first operating port 62 is a jackpot, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/lose lottery is a normal miss, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a normal miss, and therefore functions as the highest level reach effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the fluctuation patterns corresponding to higher-ranking reach effects are more likely to be selected in the event of a jackpot and less likely to be selected in the event of a normal miss. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 493, if the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state, a variable display time table for the high probability gaming state is obtained. If a high probability jackpot result is achieved, the first through 50 special symbol gaming rounds that take place after the opening/closing execution mode ends will be gaming rounds played under the high probability gaming state. In the high probability gaming state, it is possible to win through the second operating port 63, so these special symbol gaming rounds will basically be gaming rounds for the second special symbol.

The variable display time tables for high probability game states include a variable display time table for jackpots, a variable display time table for normal misses, and a variable display time table for special misses. Each of these variable display time tables for high probability game states will be explained with reference to Figure 495.

The variable display time table for jackpots shown in Figure 495(a) is referenced when a jackpot is achieved during a special game in a high probability game state. This variable display time table has variable pattern 11A (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach hit and variable pattern 12A (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit set as selectable variable patterns.

The variable display time table for normal misses shown in Figure 495 (b) is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a special game in a high probability game state. In this variable display time table, the selectable variable patterns are variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 seconds) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 seconds) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss. In the variable display time table for normal misses in a high probability game state, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete miss is wider than in the variable display time table for normal misses in a normal game state. In other words, the reach miss effect is less likely to occur, allowing the game to proceed more quickly.

The variable display time for variable pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is set by referring to the number of reserved special symbols at that time. The variable display time shortening function is activated earlier than the variable display time table for normal misses in normal game mode. Specifically, the variable display time is set to 8 seconds when there is one or fewer reserved symbols, and 4 seconds when there are two or more reserved symbols.

The variable display time table for special misses shown in Figure 495 (c) is referenced when a special miss occurs during a special symbol game round in a high-probability game state. Variable pattern 14H is set as a selectable variable pattern. That is, variable pattern 14H is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. As already explained, if a special miss occurs during a high-probability game state, the result is not reflected in the game state, and there is no sudden transition to a time-saving game state. Correspondingly, variable pattern 14H corresponds to a complete miss effect. In other words, if a special miss occurs during a high-probability game state, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect as a game round effect. As a result, the result of this win/loss lottery is notified to the player on the symbol display device 75 as if it were a normal miss, making it difficult for the player to grasp that the win for the special miss result has been invalidated. Note that a picture corresponding to the special miss result is displayed frozen on the special symbol display unit 43.

As with variation pattern 11H, the length of the variation display time for variation pattern 14H is set by referring to the number of reserved special drawings at that time. Specifically, the variation display time is set to 8 seconds if the number of reserved drawings is 1 or less, and 4 seconds if the number of reserved drawings is 2 or more.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 493, if the current game state is the normal time-saving game state, a variable display time table for the normal time-saving game state is obtained. The special symbol game round played under the normal time-saving game state is the 51st special symbol game round played after the high probability game state ends. Furthermore, in the event of a 4R normal jackpot result, the first special symbol game round played after the open/close execution mode ends is also a game round played under the normal time-saving game state. In the normal time-saving game state, it is possible to win through the second operating port 63, so these special symbol game rounds are basically second special symbol game rounds.

The variable display time tables for the normal time-saving game state include a variable display time table for special misses, a variable display time table for normal misses, and a variable display time table for jackpots. Each of these variable display time tables for the normal time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figure 496.

The variable display time table for special misses shown in Figure 496 (a) is referenced when a special miss occurs during a special game turn in normal time-saving play mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern W1 is set as the selectable variable pattern. In other words, variable pattern W1 is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. As already explained, if a special miss occurs during normal time-saving play mode, a sudden transition to time-saving play mode occurs. With this in mind, variable pattern W1 corresponds to special effect A, which notifies (suggests or explicitly states) that a sudden transition to time-saving play mode will occur.

Here, special effect A, which is performed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen G), will be explained with reference to Figures 497 and 498. In special effect A, after the variable display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 begins, as shown in Figure 497(a), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed in a stopped state on one of the active lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G in a reach combination, and a reach display is executed. Next, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row that is the final stopped column) is switched from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display. At this time, as shown in Figure 497(b), a low-speed variable display is performed with a special symbol 901 labeled, for example, "LUCKY," positioned in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. This allows the player to recognize the presence of the special symbol 901. Figure 497(b) shows an example in which a special symbol 901 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol, which is the symbol next to the "3" symbol that forms a jackpot combination.

After that, as shown in FIG. 497(c), a title image 902 such as "Transform Challenge" or an explanatory image 903 such as "If you can transform into a wizard, you will get the time-saving stage" is displayed, and an introductory effect is executed to suggest that the challenge to obtain the time-saving game mode (time-saving stage) will suddenly begin. At that time, the display color of each image 902, 903 indicates the likelihood of success. For example, the likelihood of success is higher when the image is displayed in a special color (e.g., red) than when it is displayed in a normal color (e.g., white).

Next, as shown in Figure 498(a), a girl character 904 appears, and an animation is displayed in which the girl character 904 recites a spell to transform. After that, as shown in Figure 498(b), an animation is displayed in which the girl character 904 is surrounded by a dazzling light while the spell is recited. Then, as shown in Figure 498(c), the light subsides, and a success animation is displayed in which a wizard character 905 appears who has successfully transformed. As a result, a text image 906 such as "Challenge Successful" is displayed in the video, and it is suddenly made clear that the challenge to acquire the time-saving play state has been successful.

The wizard character 905 and text image 906 are then erased, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed with the special symbol 901 in the middle symbol row Z2 stopped and displayed on the reach line (Figure 498 (d)). In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination in which the special symbol 901 in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed on the reach line is the symbol combination that corresponds to the special miss result. As a result, the fact that the special miss result has been achieved is notified by the stopping pattern of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In the variable display time table for special misses shown in Figure 496(a), variable display pattern W1 is associated with a variable display time of 150 seconds, which is longer than variable display patterns 11A, 12A, and 11H-14H that can be selected in the previous high-probability game state. This variable display time is set without reference to the number of special symbols reserved at that time, and the length of the variable display time in the second special symbol game round played in the normal time-saving game state is a fixed length regardless of the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display time table for normal misses shown in Figure 496 (b) is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a special game turn in normal time-saving play mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern W2 is set as a selectable variable pattern. Note that if a normal miss occurs during normal time-saving play mode, there will be no sudden transition to time-saving play mode. With this in mind, variable pattern W2 corresponds to special effect B, which notifies (suggests or explicitly states) that there will be no sudden transition to time-saving play mode.

Special effect B will now be explained with reference to Figure 499. Note that the process leading up to the image of girl character 904 being surrounded by dazzling light along with the incantation (Figure 498(b)) is the same as that of special effect A, and therefore will not be explained further. As shown in Figure 499(a), an image of girl character 904 being surrounded by dazzling light along with the incantation is displayed, and then, as shown in Figure 499(b), the light subsides and a failure video is displayed in which girl character 904 fails to transform. In this failure video, a text image 907 such as "Failed..." is displayed, suddenly indicating that the challenge to acquire the time-saving play state has failed.

Then, the girl character 904 and the text image 907 are erased, and the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are displayed with a symbol different from the special symbol 901 in the middle symbol string Z2 displayed stopped on the reach line (Fig. 499 (c)). As a result, the stopped state of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 indicates that the special miss result was not achieved.

In the variable display time table for normal misses shown in Figure 496 (b), variable pattern W2 is associated with a variable display time of 150 seconds, just like variable pattern W1 in the case of a special miss result. In this case, the variable display time is also set without reference to the number of special drawings reserved at that time.

The variable display time table for jackpots shown in Figure 496 (c) is referenced when a jackpot is achieved during a special game in normal time-saving play mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern W3 is set as a selectable variable pattern. This variable pattern W3 corresponds to special effect C, which notifies players that a jackpot has been achieved.

Special effect C will now be explained with reference to Figure 500. Note that the process up to the image (Figure 498(b)) of girl character 904 being surrounded by dazzling light while a spell is being cast is the same as in the case of special effect A, and therefore will not be explained further. As shown in Figure 500(a), an image of girl character 904 being surrounded by dazzling light while a spell is being cast is displayed, and then, as shown in Figure 500(b), the light subsides and a success video is displayed in which wizard character 905, who has successfully transformed, appears. At this time, unlike in the case of special effect A, a text image 908 such as "Jackpot!" is displayed to clearly indicate that a jackpot has been achieved.

The wizard character 905 and text image 908 then disappear, and the symbol in middle symbol column Z2 (the "3" symbol) that forms the jackpot combination is displayed frozen on the reach line, while symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed (Figure 500(c)). This indicates that a jackpot has been won by the way symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are frozen.

In the variable display time table for jackpots shown in Figure 496 (c), variable display pattern W3 is associated with a variable display time of 150 seconds, just like variable display pattern W1 in the case of a special miss result. In this case, the variable display time is also set without reference to the number of special reserved symbols at that time, and is a fixed length.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 493, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state and the current special symbol play round is a play round of the second special symbol, the variable display time table for the normal gaming state corresponding to the second special symbol is obtained. The play round of the second special symbol played under the normal gaming state corresponds to the special symbol play round played after the normal time-saving gaming state has ended, based on the reserved second special symbol that exists at the time of the end of the normal time-saving gaming state. A maximum of four special symbol play rounds based on this reserved symbol can be played.

These special symbol play times are executed after a normal miss occurs in a special symbol play time in the normal time-saving play state, but as already explained, unlike special symbol play times in the normal time-saving play state, these special symbol play times are designed so that sudden transition to the time-saving play state is restricted even if a special miss occurs. For this reason, it is expected that players will be less interested in special symbol play times that are executed based on the reserved second special symbol, compared to special symbol play times in the normal time-saving play state, where the opportunity to suddenly transition to the time-saving play state is granted. With this in mind, the variable display time table for the normal play state corresponding to the second special symbol has a variable pattern (variable display time) set so that these special symbol play times are consumed in a short period of time.

The variable display time table for the normal game state corresponding to the second special symbol is a variable display time table for a miss and a variable display time table for a jackpot. These variable display time tables for the normal game state will be explained with reference to Figure 501.

The variable display time table for losses shown in Figure 501 (a) is referenced when a normal or special loss occurs during a play of the second special symbol during normal play. In this variable display time table, variable pattern Z1 is set as the selectable variable pattern. In other words, when a normal or special loss occurs during a play of the second special symbol during normal play, variable pattern Z1 is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS.

In the above-mentioned variable display time table, variable display pattern Z1 is associated with a variable display time of 1 second, which is shorter than the variable display times 11H and 14H (4 seconds) when a complete miss effect is performed in the immediately preceding high-probability game state. This variable display time is set without reference to the number of reserved special symbols at that time. Therefore, if the result of the win/loss lottery is a normal miss or special miss, a variable display time of 1 second is set not only for the first play based on the reserved amount (a play of the second special symbol played when there are three reserved symbols), but also for the final play (a play of the second special symbol played when there are zero reserved symbols). Therefore, after the normal time-saving game state ends, the play of the second special symbol based on the reserved amount can be completed in a short time. This shortens the player's wait time until the end of these play rounds, which tend to attract less interest, and enables the player to quickly switch to the next game (a left-handed play in which a win/loss lottery is held upon a start-up win at the first operating port 62).

As shown in Figure 501(a), variable pattern Z1 corresponds to achievement effect A, which is a game play effect performed by the symbol display device 75. Achievement effect A will now be described with reference to Figure 502. In achievement effect A, for example, a count image 911 corresponding to the number of jackpots and a ball payout number image 912 corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out are displayed, and achievements are displayed. The number of jackpots displayed by the count image 911 is not particularly limited, but it can display, for example, the number of jackpots (the so-called number of consecutive wins) during the period in which play can be played after the second special symbol win/loss lottery, including high-probability play states and time-saving play states, and the total number of payouts during that period can also be displayed as the ball payout number image 912.

In addition, in achievement effect A, a symbol display section 913 is set in a predetermined section of the display screen G (for example, the upper right corner). This symbol display section 913 displays a variable pattern sequence Z1 to Z3. In achievement effect A, the variable pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 displayed in the symbol display section 913 is displayed stationary in a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss, thereby informing the player that a miss has occurred.

At this time, the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not displayed in order, but all three rows are stopped and displayed simultaneously. Furthermore, the stop pattern at this time is such that different numerical symbols are lined up on each of the active lines L1 to L5, and the symbols are stopped and displayed so that no symbol combinations that result in a miss are formed. In other words, if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved symbols is a miss, no reach display or reach performance is performed, and the miss result is always announced in a complete miss mode.

In addition, since the display size of each symbol in the symbol display section 913 is smaller than when the symbol display section 913 is not set and symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, each symbol may be displayed in a different manner than when the symbol display section 913 is not set. Specifically, each symbol may be displayed in a manner that changes the manner in which the numbers are easier to see; for example, each symbol may be displayed without a character image such as an octopus, and with only the number images "1" to "9" displayed.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 501, the variable display time table for jackpots shown in Figure 501(b) is referenced when a jackpot result is achieved in the second special symbol play round during normal play. In this variable display time table, variable pattern Z2 is set as a selectable variable pattern. Variable pattern Z2 corresponds to achievement effect B, which is a play round effect performed by the symbol display device 75. Achievement effect B is similar to achievement effect A in that a count image 911 and a payout ball number image 912 are displayed to display achievements, but the symbols on the symbol display section 913 are displayed in a stopped jackpot combination. This notifies the player that a jackpot result has been achieved. At this time, no reach display or reach effect is performed, and the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are simultaneously displayed in a stopped combination corresponding to a jackpot.

Fluctuation pattern Z2 is associated with a fluctuation display time of 3 seconds, which is longer than fluctuation pattern Z1. Correspondingly, the fluctuation display time of each symbol on the symbol display unit 913 is longer than when the result of the win/lose lottery is a normal miss or a special miss. In other words, the length of the fluctuation display time of each symbol suggests the result of the win/lose lottery, and a long fluctuation display time allows the player to predict that the result will be a jackpot. In this case, as with fluctuation pattern Z1, the fluctuation display time is set without reference to the number of special symbols on hold at that time, and is a fixed length.

In performance effects A and B, if the second special symbol is played multiple times based on the reserved portion, the performance display will be displayed continuously across those multiple play times. In contrast, the symbol display unit 913 will repeatedly display the changing and stationary symbols for each play time. This will result in the winning/losing lottery results for each play time being announced separately.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 493, if the current gaming state is a sudden time-saving gaming state, a variable display time table for the sudden time-saving gaming state is obtained. As the variable display time table for the sudden time-saving gaming state, a variable display time table for a jackpot, a variable display time table for a normal miss, and a variable display time table for a special miss are set. Note that each of these variable display time tables is the same as the variable display time table for a jackpot, the variable display time table for a normal miss, and the variable display time table for a special miss that correspond to the high-probability gaming state, so explanations will be omitted.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 492), after the process of acquiring the variable display time table in step Sg1602 is executed, in step Sg1603, a lottery process for the variable display time (variation pattern) is executed using the acquired variable display time table. Specifically, from the group of variation patterns set in the variable display time table, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Sg1604, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sg1603 above is set as the variable display time for the current special game. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area above as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 479) is started.

In step Sg1605, it is determined whether a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sg1606, where the process clears the flag. After step Sg1606 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step Sg1605 (the special miss flag is not set), the process of setting the variable display time is terminated.

Next, we will explain the processing for ending the high probability mode in step Sg510 (Fig. 483), the processing for ending the high frequency support mode in step Sg511, and the processing for suddenly transitioning to the time-saving game state in step Sg512. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed during a special game cycle; in other words, they are executed when the final display during a special game cycle begins.

<High probability mode termination process>
The processing for ending the high probability mode in step Sg510 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 503.

First, in step Sg1701, it is determined whether a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if high probability mode is in effect, the process proceeds to step Sg1702, where it is determined whether a high probability termination flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The high probability termination flag indicates that high probability mode should be terminated.

If the high probability termination flag is set, proceed to step Sg1703 and execute the process of clearing the high probability flag. The high probability flag is used by MPU312 to determine that the current lottery mode is high probability mode, and clearing the high probability flag ends the high probability mode and transitions to low probability mode.

In step Sg1704, the high probability end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sg1705, a high probability end command indicating the end of the high probability mode is set to be sent to the performance control device 143. The high probability end command set in step Sg1705 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 in normal processing (Figure 482).

After step Sg1705 is executed, the high probability mode termination processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1701 (the high probability flag is not set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1702 (the high probability termination flag is not set), the high probability mode termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sg1703 onwards.

<Processing for ending high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode termination process in step Sg511 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sg1801, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any support flag is set, i.e., if the player is currently in either the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step Sg1802, where it is determined whether the high-support end flag is set. The high-support end flag indicates that the high-frequency support mode should be ended.

If the high support end flag is set, proceed to step Sg1803 and clear the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. This ends the first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode and transitions to low frequency support mode.

In step Sg1804, the high support end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sg1805, the corresponding time-saving end command is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. For example, if the normal time-saving game state is ended, the time-saving end command corresponding to the end of the normal game state is set.

After step Sg1805 is executed, the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1801 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1802 (if the high-support termination flag is not set), the high-frequency support mode termination processing is terminated without executing the processing from step Sg1803 onwards.

<Processing for transitioning to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for transitioning to the sudden time-saving game state in step Sg512 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 505.

First, in step Sg1901, it is determined whether a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The sudden time-saving start flag is set during the transition determination process of step Sg711 at the start of fluctuation (step Sg1404), and indicates that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation dictates a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, proceed to step Sg1902 and set the support B flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to an internal state corresponding to the second high-frequency support mode (sudden time-saving game state).

In step Sg1903, a value corresponding to the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 700 times, which is the upper limit number of times in the sudden time-saving game state) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. The support counter area SC is used by MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of special game times that can be played in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode), and is decremented by one each time a special game is played in high-frequency support mode.

In step Sg1904, the sudden time-saving start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sg1905, a sudden time-saving start command indicating a transition to a sudden time-saving game state is set as the target for transmission to the effect control device 143. The sudden time-saving start command set in step Sg1905 is sent to the effect control device 143 in step Sg401 during normal processing (Fig. 482).

After step Sg1905 is executed, the process for transitioning to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg1901 (the sudden time-shortened start flag is not set), the process for transitioning to the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processes from step Sg1902 onwards, as it is determined that transition to the sudden time-shortened game state will not be executed.

<Regular game play control processing>
The regular game play control processing of step Sg405 (Figure 482) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 506.

First, in step Sg2001, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game using the normal power feature 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special feature opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a special feature opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a special feature opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel device is currently opening and closing, the normal game play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel device is not currently opening and closing, step Sg2002 determines whether a normal game play is being performed in the normal game display unit 44. In this case, a normal game play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal game display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal game display unit 44, and step Sg2002 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

In addition, during special symbol gameplay in the special symbol display unit 43, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the opening/closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is being executed, but during normal symbol gameplay, variable displays are permitted even during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, during normal symbol gameplay, the execution of variable displays is restricted if the device is being opened/closed using the normal electric device 63a, but during special symbol gameplay, variable displays are permitted even during the device is being opened/closed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sg2002 (a normal game round is not currently being played), the process proceeds to step Sg2003, where it is determined whether the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0." If the normal game round reserve memory count FN is "0," the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved normal map memories FN is not "0", step Sg2004 executes a normal map data setting process to set the data stored in the electric utility reserve area Rc for variable display. In the normal map data setting process, the number of reserved normal map memories FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric utility reserve area Rc is moved to the normal map execution area. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the electric utility reserve area Rc, and a normal map shift command is set, which is information that allows the performance control device 143 to recognize that a shift has been made in the data in the reserve area on the normal map side.

In step Sg2005, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the normal map game play control process is terminated. Here, the normal map fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 507 (a).

First, in step Sg2101, a support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table corresponding to the current support mode. Specifically, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (Figure 478(a)); if the current support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode (Figure 478(b)); and if the current support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is performed by referencing the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode (Figure 478(c)).

In step Sg2102, it is determined whether the result of the support lottery in step Sg2101 is a support winning result (a normal winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sg2103, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal winning result. If it is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a normal losing result, the process proceeds to step Sg2104, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal losing result.

After execution of step Sg2103 or step Sg2104, step Sg2105 executes a process for setting the normal map variable display time. In this setting process, the variable display time for the current normal map game round is set in the normal map display unit 44. In this embodiment, the variable display time that can be set in step Sg2105 is a plurality of variable display times of different lengths depending on the type of support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 478(b), the longest variable display time (e.g., 100 seconds) is set for the low-frequency support mode, the shortest variable display time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set for the second high-frequency support mode, and a variable display time (e.g., 2 seconds) that is shorter than the low-frequency support mode and longer than the second high-frequency support mode is set for the first high-frequency support mode. In step Sg2105, the variable display time corresponding to the current support mode is set as the current variable display time.

In the above configuration, one variable display time is associated with each support mode, but multiple variable display times may be associated with at least one of the support modes. For example, if one time can be selected from multiple variable display times for each of the low-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the first high-frequency support mode, it is preferable that the expected value of the variable display time in each support mode (the sum of the variable display time x the probability of selecting that variable display time) satisfy the above-mentioned long/short relationship.

In step Sg2106, a normal map change start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map change start command includes information on the normal map change pattern (information indicating the normal map pass/fail result and the change display time). The set normal map change start command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 in normal processing (Figure 482).

In step Sg2107, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image on the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal game play control process (Fig. 506), if a positive judgment is made in step Sg2002 (if a normal game play is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sg2006, where it is determined whether the variable display time set in step Sg2105 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sg2007, where the variable display process is executed. In the variable display process, the display of the normal game display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal game display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. The normal game play control process then ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg2006 (the variable display time has elapsed), the process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Sg2008, and then the process for controlling the normal map game is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled so that the image is displayed as a stopped image based on the stop result set in step Sg2103 or step Sg2104. In this case, the confirmed display time is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In addition, in the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, a normal map variable end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map variable end command includes information about the confirmed display time for this normal map game.

<Electrical support treatment>
The electric support processing of step Sg406 (Figure 482) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 508 (a).

First, in step Sg2201, it is determined whether a special feature opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the special feature opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel opening/closing game is not in progress, proceed to step Sg2202 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric reel support processing ends.

If it is the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Sg2203 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support win. If it is not a support win, the electric role support processing ends.

If the support result is a winning result, in step Sg2204, the number of openings corresponding to the type of support mode is set in the opening count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, as shown in FIG. 508(b), if the current support mode is low frequency support mode, 1 is set, and if the current support mode is first high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode, 2 is set.

In step Sg2205, a special device opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. In the following step Sg2206, an external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric device support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special device opening signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the open signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg2201 (if the reel opening/closing game is in progress), reel opening/closing processing is executed in step Sg2207. Here, the reel opening/closing processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 509.

First, in step Sg2301, it is determined whether the normal power device 63a is currently open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive status of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power device 63a is not currently open, it is determined in step Sg2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value in the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0," proceed to step Sg2303, where it is determined whether the value in the timer area T2 in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0." This process determines whether the waiting period between openings of the normal electric device 63a has elapsed when the device is opened multiple times during a device opening/closing game.

If the value in timer area T2 is "0," in step Sg2304, the upper limit opening time corresponding to the current support mode is set in timer area T2. For example, as shown in FIG. 508(b), if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode, the shortest opening time (e.g., 0.1 sec) is set; if the current support mode is first high-frequency support mode, the longest opening time (e.g., 2 sec) is set; and if the current support mode is second high-frequency support mode, the intermediate opening time (e.g., 1 sec) is set. Note that the value set in step Sg2304 corresponds to the upper limit opening time per opening in a reel opening/closing game.

In step Sg2305, the winning counter area PC2 in the various counter area 344b is set to "6." This value corresponds to the maximum number of winnings (6) that can be won by the normal electric device 63a (second operating port 63) in the device opening and closing game.

In step Sg2306, the drive unit 63b is set to the driven state to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Sg2307, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 of the normal processing (Figure 482). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Sg2307 is executed, the reel opening/closing process ends. Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sg2302 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Sg2303 (the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process ends without executing the processing from step Sg2304 onwards.

If step Sg2301 returns a positive result (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sg2308, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0." This process determines whether the upper limit for the open time of the normal power device 63a set in step Sg2304 has elapsed.

If the value in the timer area T2 is not "0", i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has not elapsed, step Sg2309 determines whether a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, step Sg2310 subtracts 1 from the value in the win counter area PC2. Step Sg2311 determines whether the value in the win counter area PC2 is "0", i.e., whether the number of wins into the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sg2309 (if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends immediately to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg2308 (if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sg2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0"), the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state in step Sg2312 to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Sg2313, a reel close command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sg401 of normal processing (Figure 482). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state.

In step Sg2314, the opening count counter area RC2 is updated. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winnings through the second actuation port 63 has reached the upper limit of winnings), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Sg2315, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", the reel opening/closing process is terminated. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power reel 63a, in step Sg2316, an interval time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) is set in the timer area T2, and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The value set in step Sg2316 corresponds to the waiting time for the normal power reel 63a to be closed and wait for the next opening.

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support processing (Fig. 508(a)), after executing the reel opening/closing processing in step Sg2207, step Sg2208 determines whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", the electric role support processing ends. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", that is, if the reel opening/closing game has ended, step Sg2209 clears the reel opening/closing flag set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the electric role support processing ends.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and display control device 350 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of Figure 510.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 contains a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 343 are executed, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control unit 162, it receives various commands, such as game play control commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, as well as opening and closing execution mode commands such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, as well as the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. Based on the detection information, the MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 equipped with an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs predetermined calculations based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

Work RAM 374 is memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when various programs are executed by MPU 372. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the image processing device that serves as the LCD driver built into the pattern display device 75. Because VDP375 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its true nature is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 adjusts the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc. to mediate the reading and writing of data, and reads image data stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and so on.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc., separately. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 can be changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 511. The effect setting process is initiated by the MPU 342 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sg2501, it is determined whether a high probability start command (step Sg1106) has been received from the main control unit 162. The high probability start command notifies the presentation control unit 143 of a transition to a high probability game state, and is sent when a transition to a high probability game state occurs at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands in order from the previously stored command. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly.

When making the judgment in step Sg2501, it is determined whether a high probability start command is stored in the area of command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If a high probability start command is stored (if a high probability start command has been received), in step Sg2502, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to a high probability game state. Details of the first transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sg2502 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg2501 (if the high probability start command has not been received), step Sg2503 executes special pattern change display processing to display changes in the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display processing will be described later.

In step Sg2504, it is determined whether a sudden time-saving start command (step Sg1905) has been received from the main control unit 162. The sudden time-saving start command notifies the presentation control unit 143 of a sudden transition to a time-saving game state, and is sent when a sudden transition to a time-saving game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display during a special game round.

If a sudden time-saving start command has been received, step Sg2505 executes a second transition effect setting process to set a transition effect corresponding to the sudden transition to the time-saving game state. Details of the second transition effect setting process will be described later.

After step Sg2505 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg2504 (if a sudden time-saving start command has not been received), step Sg2506 determines whether any game state end command has been received. Specifically, it determines whether a high-probability end command (step Sg1705) or a time-saving end command (step Sg1805) has been received.

If any of these commands has been received, step Sg2507 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of each game state. Details of the end effect setting process will be described later.

In step Sg2508, other processing is performed, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. Other processing includes displaying a demo screen if no starting winning occurs for a predetermined period of time, and switching to a power-saving mode that stops video display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption.

<First transition effect setting process>
The first transition effect setting process of step Sg2502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 512. This process is executed when a high probability start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the start timing of the high probability gaming state.

First, in step Sg2601, a start effect corresponding to the high probability game state is set. In the start effect for the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 513(a), a title image 921 corresponding to the high probability game state, such as the "high probability stage," and a remaining number of times image 922 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. The remaining number of times image 922 notifies the player of the remaining number of special symbol game times that the player can remain in the high probability game state.

Note that Figure 513(b) shows the high probability mid-game effects that are executed while in the high probability gaming state. The high probability mid-game effects are performed after the start effect in Figure 513(a) ends and until the high probability gaming state ends. In these high probability mid-game effects, the game round effects are performed in a different manner than the game round effects in the normal gaming state, and for example, a background image or the like that is different from the game round effects in the normal gaming state is displayed.

In step Sg2601, the above start effect is set to be displayed on display screen G during the first special game in the high probability game state.

In the following step Sg2602, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times in the high probability game state (for example, 50 times) is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344. In this case, the remaining number counter area functions as a means for MPU 342 to grasp the remaining number of special game times that can be played while in the high probability game state, and the value of the remaining number counter area is decremented by one each time a special game time is played in the high probability game state.

In this embodiment, the presentation control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times in the high probability game state separately from the main control device 162, but the presentation control device 143 may also be configured to determine the remaining number of times in the high probability game state based on the update results in the main control device 162. For example, the main control device 162 may notify the presentation control device 143 of the update results of the probability change counter area KC (step Sg1203) by sending a specified command, and the presentation control device 143 may analyze the command and determine the update results. In this case, the specified command may be created by including information on the update results in an existing command such as the fluctuation start command (step Sg715), or the specified command may be configured using a dedicated command for notifying the update results.

In step Sg2603, the display of the remaining number of times image 922 is set to begin. Note that although Figure 513(a) shows the remaining number of times image 922 being displayed from the start of the performance, the display of the remaining number of times image 922 does not have to be performed during the start of the performance, but may be performed after the start of the performance has ended.

In step Sg2604, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the first transition effect setting process is terminated. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the remaining number of times image 922 is being displayed.

<Special chart change display processing>
The processing for displaying special chart changes in step Sg2503 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 514.

First, in step Sg2701, it is determined whether a special symbol game round is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a first or second special symbol game round is currently being played. If neither game round is currently being played, it proceeds to step Sg2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information about the fluctuation pattern selected by lottery during the fluctuation display time setting process in the main control unit 162. By referencing this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to determine at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Furthermore, as already explained, because fluctuation patterns for jackpots and losses are set separately, the result of the win/loss judgment can also be determined from the fluctuation pattern.

If a fluctuation start command has not been received, the special pattern fluctuation display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sg2703, where fluctuation start processing is executed to start the game-round performance on the pattern display device 75. The fluctuation start processing will now be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 515(a).

First, in step Sg2801, the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern for the current special game round is identified. In step Sg2802, the game round presentation corresponding to the identified fluctuation pattern is set to be executed. The correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the game round presentation is explained with reference to Figure 515 (b).

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 14H, a complete miss effect is set to be executed. Fluctuation pattern 14H is set when a special miss result occurs in a high probability game state (a situation in which a special miss result is invalidated), and by executing a complete miss effect as a game-cycle effect, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish that a special miss result has occurred.

If the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern W1 to W3, special effects A to C are set to be executed. Fluctuation patterns W1 to W3 are set for the cases when a special miss occurs, a normal miss occurs, and a jackpot occurs in a normal time-saving game state (a state in which a special miss occurs). Special effect A is displayed when a success effect is suddenly displayed to indicate a successful challenge to acquire the time-saving game state, followed by the stopped display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a combination corresponding to a special miss. Special effect B is displayed when a failure effect is displayed to indicate a failed challenge to acquire the time-saving game state, followed by the stopped display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a combination corresponding to a reach miss. Special effect C is displayed when the success effect is displayed, followed by the stopped display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a combination corresponding to a jackpot result.

When the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Z1 or Z2, it is set so that achievement effects A and B are executed. Fluctuation patterns Z1 and Z2 are set when a special miss result, a normal miss result, or a jackpot result occurs in a situation where the second special symbol is played under normal game conditions (a situation where a special miss result is invalidated). Achievement effect A is displayed in the pattern display unit 913 with each symbol sequence stopped in a combination corresponding to a complete miss while the achievement is displayed, and achievement effect B is displayed in the pattern display unit 913 with each symbol sequence stopped in a jackpot combination while the achievement is displayed.

If the identified fluctuation pattern is any other fluctuation pattern, the game play effect corresponding to the identified fluctuation pattern is set to be executed. For example, if the identified fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 3A (Figure 494 (a)), the SPSP reach winning effect is set to be executed.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing (Fig. 515(a)), after execution of step Sg2802, in step Sg2803, a stop result command and a pattern command are sent to the display control device 350 as transmission targets. The pattern command is a presentation pattern command that specifies the game round presentation to be executed. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the pattern display device 75 so that the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 stop with the specified stop result, or so that the game round presentation is executed with the specified presentation pattern. After execution of step Sg2803, the fluctuation start processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (Fig. 514), after executing the change start process in step Sg2703, step Sg2704 determines whether the current game state is a high probability game state or a sudden time-saving game state. If it is a high probability game state or a sudden time-saving game state, step Sg2705 executes a process to update the remaining number of plays display. The remaining number of plays display update process updates (subtracts) the remaining number of plays in the high probability game state or the sudden time-saving game state, and updates the display content of the remaining number of plays image 922 according to the update result of the remaining number of plays. As a result, the remaining number of plays notified by the remaining number of plays image 922 is subtracted by 1. After executing step Sg2705 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sg2704 (the game is not in a high probability game state or a sudden time-saving game state), the special chart change display process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg2701 (if a special symbol game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sg2706, where it is determined whether a change end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time for this special symbol game round has not yet elapsed. In this case, step Sg2707 executes a change in progress process. The change in progress process executes processes to continue the change display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg2706 (if a variation end command has been received), variation end processing is executed in step Sg2708, and then the special pattern variation display processing is terminated. The variation end processing terminates the variation display of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 and the currently running effects. Additionally, step Sg2708 controls the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 to be fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

<Second transition effect setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sg2505 (Fig. 511) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 516. This process is executed when a sudden time-saving start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when a time-saving gaming state is suddenly started.

First, in step Sg3001, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set. In the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 517(a), a title image 925 corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state, such as the "time-saving stage," and a remaining number of times image 922 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 922 indicates the remaining number of special game times that can be played while in the sudden time-saving game state.

Note that Figure 517(b) shows the time-saving effects that are executed while the player is in the sudden time-saving game state. The time-saving effects are performed after the start effect in Figure 517(a) ends, until the sudden time-saving game state ends. In these time-saving effects, the game-round effects are performed in a different manner than the game-round effects in the normal game state or the high-probability game state, and for example, a background image that is different from the game-round effects in the normal game state or the high-probability game state is displayed.

In this step, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set so that it is executed at the fixed display time in the special game round. In this case, the entire start effect may be executed at the fixed display time, or only part of the start effect may be executed at the fixed display time. Note that if part of the start effect is executed within the fixed display time, the start effect will be executed across the fixed display time and the next special game round.

In step Sg3002, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times (e.g., 700 times) for the sudden time-saving game state is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344. In this case, the remaining number counter area functions as a means for MPU 342 to grasp the remaining number of special game times that can be played while in the sudden time-saving game state, and the value of the remaining number counter area is decremented by one each time a special game time is played in the sudden time-saving game state.

In step Sg3003, a setting is made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 922. Note that although Figure 517(a) shows the remaining number of times image 922 being displayed from the time of the start performance, the display of the remaining number of times image 922 does not have to be performed during the start performance, but may be performed after the start performance has ended.

In step Sg3004, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and then the second transition effect setting process is terminated. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the remaining number of times image 922 is being displayed.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end effect setting process of step Sg2507 (Fig. 511) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 518. This process is executed when a high probability end command or a high support end command is received, in other words, when the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode ends.

In step Sg3101, an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set. For example, if the high probability mode ends and the high probability game state ends, an end effect for the high probability game state is set to be executed, and if the second high frequency support mode ends and the time-saving game state suddenly ends, an end effect for the time-saving game state is set to be executed. Note that if the normal time-saving game state ends, an achievement effect is executed in the special game play corresponding to the reserved portion of the second special game, and this effect notifies the end of the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sg3102, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared (initialized). At this time, if the value of the remaining number counter is already 0 (initial value), it is left in that state.

In step Sg3103, the remaining number of times image 922 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is erased. In the following step Sg3104, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is terminated.

<About the game flow>
The flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 519 to 521. Here, after the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is performed, the game is transitioned to a high probability game state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode) with 50 remaining times.

At timing t1 in Figure 519, if the result of the lottery on the third special symbol play (second special symbol play) after the transition to the high probability play state is a normal loss, the high probability play state will be maintained as is (Figures 519 (b) and (c)), and there will be no sudden transition to the time-saving play state (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode) (Figure 519 (e)). As shown in Figure 520, during that special symbol play, a complete loss effect will be executed on the symbol display device 75, and the player will be notified of the normal loss result.

At timing t2 in Figure 519, if the result of the win/loss lottery on the 10th special symbol play after transitioning to the high probability play state is a special loss result, for example, transition to the time-saving play state will be suddenly restricted based on the fact that the high probability mode is in effect (Figures 519 (d) and (e)), and the win for the special loss result will be invalidated (timing t3, Figure 519 (e)). As shown in Figure 520, in that special symbol play, a complete loss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. The complete loss effect in this case is the same as when the win/loss lottery results in a normal loss result, and the effect duration (variable display time) is also the same. For this reason, as long as you are looking at the symbol display device 75, it is indistinguishable from a normal loss result, making it difficult for the player to tell that a special loss result has occurred.

The special symbol display unit 43 displays a static image corresponding to the special miss result. Therefore, if an amusement hall employee wants to confirm that a special miss result has occurred, they can do so by visually checking the special symbol display unit 43. This prevents fraudulent activity from being misused, as the display of the variable symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 is concealed when a special miss result occurs.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the special miss result is set relatively low (1/5), so it is expected that the special miss result will be won multiple times while playing in the high probability game state (timing t4). In this case, too, winning the special miss result will not be reflected in the change of game state, and the sudden transition to the time-saving game state will be disabled (timing t5). In addition, the symbol display device 75 will execute a complete miss effect, and a game-repeated effect will be executed without clearly indicating that a special miss result has been reached.

At timing t6, if the result of the lottery on the 50th special symbol play (the final play in the high probability play state) since the transition to the high probability play state is a normal miss, the lottery mode will switch from high probability mode to low probability mode at the start of the confirmation display for that special symbol play (timing t7). Meanwhile, because the upper limit for the number of times the first high frequency support mode can be played is set to 51, the support mode will remain in first high frequency support mode. This will cause the play state to transition to the normal time-saving play state (low probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

In addition, for the first through 50 special symbol game times after transitioning to high probability game mode (special symbol game times in high probability game mode), the variable display time for each game is set by referring to the number of reserved symbols each time. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a normal miss or a special miss, and the number of reserved symbols at that time is one or less, the variable display time is set to a relatively long 8 seconds, and if the number of reserved symbols is two or more, the variable display time is set to a relatively short 4 seconds (Fig. 495 (b), (c)).

In this way, by lengthening the variable display time when the number of reserved special symbols is low, it is possible to ensure time for a winning combination to occur in the second operating port 63 and increase the number of reserved special symbols before the start of the next special symbol game. This reduces the occurrence of an event where the current special symbol game ends with zero reserved special symbols, making it less likely for players to get the impression that a winning combination in the second operating port 63 is unlikely. On the other hand, by shortening the variable display time when the number of reserved special symbols is high, the waiting time until the next winning combination is performed is shortened, and the frequency of winning combinations per unit time (per 10 minutes, for example) can be increased. This improves time efficiency in gameplay, allowing players to play efficiently.

The reserved number to be referenced when setting the variable display time should preferably be the reserved number for the second special symbol. This allows the length of the variable display time to be changed depending on the reserved number for the second special symbol in a high probability game state where right-hand play primarily causes an initial winning entry into the second operating port 63 and a win/loss lottery is held.

Note that if the number of reserved second special symbols becomes 0 and the play round for the second special symbol has ended, but there are still reserved first special symbols, the play round for the first special symbol will be executed, so the play round will not be completely interrupted. With this in mind, the number of reserved symbols referenced when setting the variable display time may be the sum of the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols (total number of reserved symbols).

At timing t8 in Figure 519, if the result of the lottery on the 51st special symbol play round (special symbol play round in normal time-limited play state) after the transition to the high-probability play state is a special miss, the support mode will be switched from the first high-frequency support mode to the second high-frequency support mode at the start of the confirmation display for that special symbol play round (timing t9) (Figure 519 (c) and (e)). In other words, if the result is a special miss on the 51st special symbol play round, which is a special symbol play round in normal time-limited play state, the result will be validated based on the fact that the lottery mode at that time is not the high-probability mode and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode (steps Sg1402 to Sg1404 in Figure 490 (a)), and a sudden switch will occur from the normal time-limited play state to the time-limited play state.

If a special miss occurs during the 51st special symbol game play, special effect A is executed on the symbol display device 75, as shown in Figure 520. This special effect A is a game play effect that corresponds to the sudden transition to a time-saving game state, and in this effect, after a successful animation is displayed in which the girl character 904 transforms into the wizard character 905, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination that corresponds to the special miss result (Figures 497 and 498). This notifies the player that the challenge to suddenly acquire the time-saving game state has been successful and that a special miss result has occurred. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 also displays a pattern that corresponds to the special miss result.

When a sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs, the upper limit on the number of special game plays that can be played in that state is set to 700. The lottery mode in the sudden time-saving game state is a low-probability mode, with a jackpot winning probability of 1/200, resulting in an expected value of winning a jackpot before the sudden time-saving game state ends at approximately 97%. In the sudden time-saving game state, the support mode is set to the second high-frequency support mode, making it easier for a ball to enter the second operating port 63, thereby providing a high chance of winning a jackpot while minimizing the loss of balls. In other words, even if a high-probability game state in which a jackpot can be won while minimizing the loss of balls ends, by achieving a special miss result in the normal time-saving game state, which is set as the state after the end of the high-probability game state, a transition to the sudden time-saving game state in which a jackpot can be won while minimizing the loss of balls is possible, effectively extending or returning to an advantageous state for the player.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 521 what happens when the result of the lottery on the 51st special symbol game turn (special symbol game turn in normal time-limited game mode) after the transition to the high probability game mode is a normal loss. Note that in this case, the flow from timing t1 to timing t7 is the same as in Figure 519, so the explanation will be omitted or simplified.

If the result of the lottery on the 50th special symbol play (the final play in the high probability play state) after transitioning to the high probability play state is a normal loss, the lottery mode will switch from high probability mode to reduced rate mode at the start of the confirmation display for that special symbol play (timing t7), and the play state will transition from the high probability play state to the normal time-saving play state.

At timing t11, if the result of the win/lose lottery on the 51st special symbol play round (special symbol play round in normal time-limited play state) since the transition to the high probability play state results in a normal loss, the normal time-limited play state ends. Specifically, based on the number of times special symbol play rounds have been executed in the normal time-limited play state reaching the upper limit, the support mode is switched from the first high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the confirmation display for that special symbol play round (timing 12), and the play state transitions to the normal play state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode).

If a normal miss occurs during the 51st special symbol game turn, special effect B is executed on the symbol display device 75, as shown in Figure 520. This special effect B is a game turn effect that corresponds to the absence of a sudden transition to the time-saving game state, and is paired with special effect A, which is executed when a special miss occurs. In special effect B, a failure video is displayed in which the girl character 904 is unable to transform into a wizard, and then the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination corresponding to a reach miss (Figure 499). This notifies the player that the challenge to suddenly obtain the time-saving game state has failed and that a normal miss has occurred. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 also displays a pattern corresponding to a normal miss.

After the normal time-saving game state ends as described above, special game turns will be played based on the reserved second special game turns that existed at the time the normal time-saving game state ended. For example, if four reserved pieces of information are stored as the reserved amount, the 52nd to 55th special game turns will be played based on the reserved information under normal game state.

For example, if the result of the win/loss lottery on the 52nd special symbol game round (timing t13) is a special loss, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state will be restricted based on the fact that the first high-frequency support mode is not in effect (Figure 521 (e)), and the winning of the special loss result will be invalidated (timing t14). Also, for example, if the result of the win/loss lottery on the 53rd special symbol game round (timing t14) is a normal loss, there will be no sudden transition to the time-saving game state, and the normal game state will be maintained (timing t15, Figure 521 (e)). The same applies to the remaining 54th and 55th special symbol game rounds, and no sudden transition to the time-saving game state will occur regardless of the result of the win/loss lottery on these special symbol game rounds.

In this way, while the states in which play on the second special symbol is possible are the high probability play state → normal time-saving play state → execution of a special symbol play round based on remaining reserves, the configuration restricts a sudden transition to the time-saving play state during a special symbol play round based on remaining reserves. This increases the excitement of the end of the normal time-saving play state, which allows a transition to the normal time-saving play state, and effectively highlights the existence of the normal time-saving play state, which is entered after the high probability play state has ended.

In addition, for the 52nd to 55th special symbol game rounds based on the remaining reserved numbers, the variable display time for each game round is set without reference to the reserved number for each round. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a normal miss or a special miss, the variable display time is set to 1 second regardless of the reserved number (Fig. 501 (a)). This variable display time is shorter than the 4 seconds that is the variable display time when there are two or more reserved numbers in the first to 50th special symbol game rounds after transitioning to the high probability game state. With this configuration, not only the 52nd and 53rd special symbol game rounds, but also the 54th special symbol game round, which is executed when there is one reserved number, and the 55th special symbol game round, which is executed when there are zero reserved numbers, can be completed in a short time.

During the remaining reserved special symbol play rounds, the probability of winning a jackpot is low due to the low probability lottery mode. Furthermore, even if a special miss occurs, there is no sudden transition to the time-saving play state. Therefore, it is expected that players will be less interested in these rounds than in special symbol play rounds in the high probability play state or the normal time-saving play state. However, by setting the variable display time as described above, such special symbol play rounds with low interest can be quickly completed. In particular, if the number of reserved first special symbols reaches its maximum value while the remaining reserved special symbol play rounds are being played, the player will not be able to play with the aim of winning the first operating port 62, and will be forced to wait for the remaining reserved special symbol play rounds to end without launching any game balls. In this regard, the configuration of this embodiment makes it possible to shorten such waiting times and prevent a decline in player motivation.

During the 52nd to 55th special symbol game rounds based on the remaining reserved balls, a performance effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In the performance effect, a count image 911 corresponding to the number of jackpots and a ball payout number image 912 corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out are displayed (Fig. 502). If the win/loss lottery result in these special symbol game rounds is a normal loss, the symbol display unit 913 on the display screen G will display each symbol row in a complete loss combination. Also, if the win/loss lottery result is a special loss, the symbol display unit 913 will display each symbol row in a complete loss combination, and the player will be notified of the normal loss result, but the special symbol display unit 43 will display a picture corresponding to the special loss result.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The game state is a sudden time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and is configured so that a transition to this sudden time-saving game state can be triggered by a special miss result in the win/lose lottery. After the open/close execution mode ends, the game enters a predetermined state (first specific game) in which a game round is played without a sudden transition to the time-saving game state even if a special miss result is obtained. After that, the game switches to a specific state (second specific game) in which a sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs if a special miss result is obtained. In this case, the transition to the specific state after the predetermined state ends can make the player excited about whether or not a special miss result will occur, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined state is a high-probability game state, which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state, and after the high-probability game state ends, the game transitions to the specific state, which allows a sudden transition to a time-saving game state.

In this case, if a high-probability game state with favorable jackpot odds is played, but unfortunately the jackpot result is not drawn and the high-probability game state ends, instead of being demoted to the normal game state, the player will transition to a specific state, providing an opportunity to transition to a sudden time-saving game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. This reduces the player's disappointment at the end of the high-probability game state, while creating a new game goal and effectively encouraging them to continue playing. Furthermore, in the high-probability game state where a win/loss lottery is conducted in the high-probability mode, even if a special loss result occurs, a sudden transition to the time-saving game state will not occur, allowing the player to concentrate on drawing a jackpot result during the high-probability game state and transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

After the high probability game state as a predetermined state (first predetermined state) ends, the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state as a specific state. If the normal time-saving game state ends without a special miss, the remaining reserved special game turns (second predetermined state, third specific game) are played, and a sudden transition to the time-saving game state does not occur even if a special miss occurs.

For example, one possible configuration for providing the opportunity to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state is to have a configuration in which, after the high-probability game state ends, play counts are played based on the remaining reserved balls, and a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs when a special miss occurs during the period in which play counts based on the remaining reserved balls are played. In this case, although the opportunity to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state can be limited to certain states, the number of allowable play counts that allow the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is determined by the upper limit of the reserved memory (upper limit reserved number). For example, if a starting win does not occur in the second actuation port 63 after the high-probability game state ends, and the number of play counts based on the remaining reserved balls becomes the reserved number at the end of the high-probability game state, the maximum number of allowable play counts that can be executed will be the same as the upper limit reserved number. In other words, the number of allowable play counts will be restricted by the upper limit reserved number, and there is a concern that attempts to increase or decrease the number of allowable play counts may even require changes to the upper limit reserved number.

In this regard, a normal time-saving play state is inserted between the high-probability play state and the period during which play counts are played based on the remaining reserved balls, and a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is permitted in this normal time-saving play state. This allows the number of allowable play counts to be set independently of the upper limit of reserved balls. For example, the maximum number of allowable play counts that can be executed can be set to a number less than the upper limit of reserved balls, allowing for an advantageous increase in the degree of freedom in designing the number of allowable play counts.

The above configuration can also be seen as allowing a sudden transition to the time-saving play state only during the normal time-saving play state, which is an intermediate state in the series of steps that occur when playing following a lottery to determine whether the second special symbol will be selected, in which the high-probability play state, the normal time-saving play state, and play rounds based on the remaining reserved balls are played in that order. In this case, the permissible period during which a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is permitted is sandwiched between non-permissible periods during which a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is not permitted, effectively highlighting the permissible period (normal time-saving play state). This increases the excitement of playing with the goal of achieving a special miss result during the permissible period (normal time-saving play state), making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The number of times that players can play special patterns while in the normal time-saving play state is set to one, which is less than the 50 times that players can play special patterns while in the high-probability play state, and the 4 times that special patterns are played based on the remaining reserved balls.

In this case, in a situation where the chance to suddenly transition to the time-limited play state only arises during the normal time-limited play state midway through the flow from the high-probability play state to the play count based on the remaining reserved balls, this chance is given within a small number of times. This can heighten the player's anxiety over the possibility that the normal time-limited play state will end without them being able to hit the special miss result, and conversely, it can also increase the player's joy and sense of accomplishment when they hit the special miss result during the normal time-limited play state.

When playing special patterns in a high probability game state, the length of the variable display time is set by referring to the number of reserved memories at each time, and when playing special patterns based on the remaining reserved number, the length of the variable display time is set without referring to the number of reserved memories.

In a special symbol game based on remaining reserved balls, even if a special miss occurs, the game does not suddenly transition to a time-saving game state, and because the lottery mode is a low-probability mode, there is not much hope of winning a jackpot. It is expected that players will tend to be less interested in such game rounds. By setting the length of the variable display time for such game rounds regardless of the number of reserved balls, the variable display time can be prevented from becoming too long, even in game rounds played with a small number of reserved balls, making it possible to quickly complete such game rounds. In particular, when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol has reached its upper limit, the player cannot play a game aiming for a start-up win in the first operating port 62. As a result, the player is forced to stop firing game balls and wait for the special symbol game round based on remaining reserved balls (the game round for the second special symbol) to finish. However, with this configuration, such waiting time can be kept short.

When a reach effect is not performed in a high probability game state (when a complete miss effect is executed), the variable display time can be a long 8 seconds or a short 4 seconds. The variable display time for a special game based on the remaining reserved amount is set to 1 second, which is shorter than the short 4 seconds. In this case, the special game based on the remaining reserved amount can be completed more quickly, making it possible to effectively shorten the waiting time.

The system is designed so that reach effects are not executed during special symbol gameplay based on remaining reserved symbols. In this case, the long display time required for special symbol gameplay based on remaining reserved symbols is avoided, making it possible to effectively shorten the display time.

<Modification 1>
Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 522 to 524. Only the differences from the seventh embodiment will be described here. In Figures 522 to 524, the same components as those in the seventh embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment described above, there was only one number of special symbol game times in the normal time-saving game state, in which a sudden transition to the time-saving game state was permitted. However, in this modified example, multiple numbers can be set as the number of special symbol game times. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below.

<Jackpot type table for the second special chart>
The jackpot type table for the second special symbol according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 522. Note that the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is the same as that in the seventh embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as 10R special jackpot result A, 10R special jackpot result B, 10R special jackpot result C, and 4R normal jackpot result B. Note that 4R normal jackpot result B is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result B (Fig. 477(b)) in the seventh embodiment described above.

All of the 10R probability jackpot results A to C result in 10 rounds of play being executed. Furthermore, these jackpot results are such that, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode and the support mode for the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to first high frequency support mode.

When a 10R jackpot result is A to C, the high probability mode continues until the number of special game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit (e.g., 50 plays). In other words, regardless of whether the 10R jackpot result is A to C, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode for the same number of special game plays.

Meanwhile, the support mode for the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 has different continuation times depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a 10R special jackpot result A, after the open/close execution mode ends, the first high-frequency support mode continues until the number of special game turns reaches the second upper limit (for example, 51 turns). Therefore, in the case of a 10R special jackpot result A, the first through 50 turns after the open/close execution mode are played in the high-probability game state (high probability mode and first high-frequency support mode), and the 51st turn is played in the regular time-saving game state (low probability mode and first high-frequency support mode). In other words, the number of special game turns that can be played in the regular time-saving game state is one.

In the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot result B, after the end of the open/close execution mode, the number of times the special symbol game play is executed will continue until it reaches the fifth upper limit (for example, 53 times), which is higher than the second upper limit mentioned above. Therefore, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot result B, the first through 50th play times after the open/close execution mode will be played in the high probability game state, and the 51st through 53rd play times will be played in the normal time-limited game state. In other words, the number of special symbol game times that can be executed in the normal time-limited game state will be three, which is more than in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot result A.

In the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot result C, after the end of the open/close execution mode, the number of times the special symbol game play is executed will continue until it reaches a sixth upper limit (for example, 55 times), which is higher than the fifth upper limit mentioned above. Therefore, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot result C, the first through 50th play times after the open/close execution mode will be played in the high probability game state, and the 51st through 55th play times will be played in the normal time-limited game state. In other words, the number of special symbol game times that can be executed in the normal time-limited game state will be five, which is more than in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot result B.

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "49" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to 10R jackpot result A, "50" to "74" corresponds to 10R jackpot result B, "75" to "84" corresponds to 10R jackpot result C, and "85" to "99" corresponds to 4R regular jackpot result B. In other words, when a jackpot is awarded in a win/loss lottery based on winning through the second operating port 63, the probability of being assigned to 10R special jackpot result A is 50%, the probability of being assigned to 10R special jackpot result B is 25%, the probability of being assigned to 10R special jackpot result C is 10%, and the probability of being assigned to 4R regular jackpot result B is 15%.

<Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends>
The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 523. This process is executed in step Sg913 of the game state transition process by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in Fig. 488. In Fig. 523, the same processes as those in Fig. 488 are assigned the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sg1101, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot result, and if it is, in step Sg1102, a high probability flag is set in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. This transitions the lottery mode to high probability mode. In step Sg1103, a value (50) corresponding to the first upper limit number of times is set in the probability variable counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. The probability variable counter area KC is used by MPU 312 to keep track of the remaining number of times in high probability mode (the remaining number of special symbol game times that can be played in high probability mode), and is decremented by one each time a special symbol game is played in high probability mode.

In step Sg1104, the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the support mode to the first high-frequency support mode. In step Sg3501, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the support counter area SC in the various counter area 314d. Specifically, if the current jackpot type is a 4R special jackpot result or a 10R special jackpot result A, a value (51) corresponding to the second upper limit is set; if the 10R special jackpot result B is set, a value (53) corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set; and if the 10R special jackpot result C is set, a value (55) corresponding to the sixth upper limit is set. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to track the remaining number of times in high-frequency support mode (the remaining number of special game times that can be played in the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode), and is decremented by one each time a special game is played in high-frequency support mode.

In step Sg1106, a high probability start command is set as the command to be sent to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability start command set in step Sg1106 is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sg401 of the normal processing (Fig. 482). By sending the high probability start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the transition to a high probability gaming state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode). Note that the high probability start command includes information indicating the transition to the high probability gaming state, as well as information indicating the upper limit of the number of times in the high probability mode and the upper limit of the number of times in the first high frequency support mode.

<About the game flow>
The flow of the game according to this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 524. Here, the flow of the game after the opening and closing execution mode when the 10R probability variable jackpot result A to C is obtained in the winning or losing lottery of the second special chart will be explained.

If the 10R jackpot result is A, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a high probability mode with a maximum number of times of 50, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the first high frequency support mode with a maximum number of times of 51. As a result, play times 1 through 50 after the opening/closing execution mode are played in a high probability play state, and the 51st play is played in a normal time-saving play state. Furthermore, after the normal time-saving play state ends, play times 52 through 55 are played based on the reserved amount of the second special chart, but these play times are played in a normal play state.

As explained in the seventh embodiment above, even if a special miss occurs during a play in the high-probability play state or the normal play state, a sudden transition to the time-shortened play state is restricted, and a sudden transition to the time-shortened play state is only permitted when a special miss occurs during a play in the normal time-shortened play state. Therefore, if a 10R jackpot result is A, no jackpot is won on the 1st to 50th special play rounds, and after the high-probability play state ends, one play round in the normal time-shortened play state will be played, which will grant a chance to suddenly transition to the time-shortened play state.

Furthermore, if a 10R jackpot result is B, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a high-probability mode with a maximum number of times of 50, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a first high-frequency support mode with a maximum number of times of 53. As a result, the first through 50th play after the opening/closing execution mode are played in a high-probability play state, and the 51st through 53rd play are played in a normal time-saving play state. Furthermore, after the normal time-saving play state ends, the 54th through 57th play are played under a normal play state. In other words, if a 10R jackpot result is B, after the high-probability play state ends, three play times are played in a normal time-saving play state, which suddenly gives you the chance to transition to the time-saving play state.

Furthermore, if the 10R jackpot result is C, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a high-probability mode with a maximum number of times of 50, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a first high-frequency support mode with a maximum number of times of 55. As a result, the first through 50th play after the opening/closing execution mode are played in a high-probability play state, and the 51st through 55th play are played in a normal time-saving play state. Furthermore, after the normal time-saving play state ends, the 56th through 59th play are played under a normal play state. In other words, if the 10R jackpot result is C, after the high-probability play state ends, five play rounds are played in a normal time-saving play state, which suddenly gives you the chance to transition to the time-saving play state.

In this way, in this modified example, the number of play attempts available for a sudden transition to the time-saving play state differs depending on the type of jackpot in the winning play (the special play in which the lottery result was a jackpot) that triggered the transition to the normal time-saving play state. Here, the probability of a special miss result in each play attempt in the normal time-saving play state is the same at 1/5 for all 10R special jackpot results A to C (Figure 476). Therefore, the more play attempts permitted for a sudden transition to the time-saving play state, the higher the expected value of the sudden transition to the time-saving play state. Specifically, if the number of play attempts permitted for a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is one, the expected value of the sudden transition to the time-saving play state is 20%; if the number of play attempts is three, the expected value is approximately 49%; and if the number of play attempts is five, the expected value is approximately 67%. This configuration allows players to enjoy not only hitting a special losing result in the normal time-saving game mode, but also how many times they will be assigned to the normal time-saving game mode, making it possible to appropriately increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the number of play times in the normal time-saving play mode is three or five, special effects A, B, or C will be executed depending on whether the result of the lottery is a special miss, a normal miss, or a jackpot. Details of each of these effects were explained in the seventh embodiment above, so explanation will be omitted here.

<Modification 2>
Variation 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 525 to 530. Here, only the differences from the seventh embodiment will be described. Also, in Figures 525 to 530, the same components as those in the seventh embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted. Note that the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is provided with the table shown in Figure 477 (b), and is configured so that the number of special symbol games that can be executed in the normal time-saving game state is set to one.

In the seventh embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs in a play count of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserved amount, the sudden transition to the time-saving play state is restricted. However, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs in these play counts, the sudden transition to the time-saving play state is permitted. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 525. This process is executed in step Sg712 of the fluctuation start process by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state has been entered in Fig. 491(a). In Fig. 525, the same process as in Fig. 491(a) is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sg1401, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag has been set and the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sg3601, where it is determined whether or not a high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. The high probability flag is used by MPU 312 to determine that high probability mode is in effect.

If the high probability flag is not set (if the game is not in high probability mode), step Sg3602 determines whether the Support B flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The Support B flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the game is in the second high frequency support mode (sudden time-shortened game mode).

If the Support B flag is not set, this means that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode or the first high-frequency support mode. In this case, proceed to step Sg1404, and set the sudden time-saving start flag in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg3601 (if the high probability flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sg3602 (if the support B flag is set), it is determined that a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state should not occur, and the process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sg1404.

<Special chart game time variable display time table>
The special symbol game count control processing and variable start processing performed by the main control device 162 are the same as those in the seventh embodiment (Figs. 483 and 485). However, as described above, this modified example is configured to allow a sudden transition to a time-saving game state if a special miss occurs in the second special symbol game count based on the remaining reserved amount, and the variable display time table is set accordingly. The variable display time table for this modified example will be explained below with reference to Figs. 526 to 529. Here, only differences from the variable display time table explained with reference to Figs. 493 to 496 and 501 in the seventh embodiment will be explained.

The variable display time table for the normal time-saving game state in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 526. The variable display time table for the normal time-saving game state includes a variable display time table for a special miss (Figure 526(a)), a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 526(b)), and a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 526(c)). Of these, the variable display time table for a special miss (Figure 526(a)) and the variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 526(c)) are similar to the variable display time table for a special miss (Figure 496(a)) and the variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 496(c)) in the seventh embodiment, and therefore will not be explained here.

The variable display time table for normal misses shown in Figure 526 (b) is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a special symbol play round in normal time-saving play mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern W4 is set as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, variable pattern W4 is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern W4 is associated with a variable display time of 160 seconds, which is longer than the 150 seconds corresponding to variable pattern W1 when a special miss occurs or variable pattern W3 when a jackpot occurs. This variable display time is set without reference to the number of special symbols reserved at that time, and is a fixed length regardless of the number of special symbols reserved.

When a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern W4 is output from the main control unit 162, the effect control unit 143 controls the display control unit 350 so that special effect B and guide effect are executed on the symbol display device 75. If a normal miss occurs during normal time-saving play, a sudden transition to the time-saving play state does not occur. However, special effect B notifies the player that a sudden transition to the time-saving play state will not occur. Meanwhile, the guide effect is a notification that prompts the player to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by firing a game ball aimed at the second actuation port 63.

Here, the guide effect execution process executed by the MPU 342 of the effect control device 143 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 527. The guide effect execution process is included in the special chart variation display process (Figure 514), and is executed during the special chart game round in which the variation start command corresponding to variation pattern W4 is output from the main control device 162.

First, in step Sg3701, it is determined whether a guide effect flag has been set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The guide effect flag will be explained later.

If the guide effect flag is not set, proceed to step Sg3702 and determine whether it is time to execute the guide effect. In this modified example, the guide effect is executed after the symbols in symbol row Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a missed reach in special effect B. In step Sg3702, the timing for executing the guide effect is determined to be the timing when the period for stopping and displaying the symbols in a combination corresponding to a missed reach has elapsed. Note that in this modified example, special effect B and the guide effect are performed within the variable display time, so in step Sg3702, it is determined whether the timing for executing the guide effect has arrived before the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is time to execute the guide effect, proceed to step Sg3703, where the number of reserved second special symbols at that time is determined. In step Sg3704, it is determined whether the number of reserved symbols determined in step Sg3703 is the maximum number of reserved symbols. In other words, it is determined whether the maximum number of reserved second special symbols, which is four, has been reached.

If the number of reserved balls is not the maximum number, step Sg3705 is set to execute the first guide effect as the guide effect. When this setting is performed, the symbol display device 75 displays each symbol in symbol rows Z1 through Z3 in a combination corresponding to a missed reach, as shown in FIG. 528(a), and then displays a text image 927, such as "Aim for the electric chute and accumulate reserved balls!", as shown in FIG. 528(b). This guides the launch of a game ball in a manner that will result in a winning entry into the second operating port 63 (right-hit mode) when the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol has not reached the upper limit. Note that "electric chute" is an abbreviation for electric tulip, or in other words, a colloquial term for the second operating port 63 and the normal electric device 63a. By providing this notification during the variable display time of a special symbol play in the normal time-saving play mode, it is possible to prompt the player to add reserved information for the second special symbol before the normal time-saving play mode (first high-frequency support mode) ends.

After step Sg3705 is executed, in step Sg3706, a guide effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the guide effect execution process is terminated. The guide effect flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a guide effect is being executed. Furthermore, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg3702 (when it is not the timing to execute a guide effect) or a positive judgment is made in step Sg3704 (when the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum number), the guide effect will not be executed, and the guide effect execution process is terminated without executing the process of step Sg3705.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg3701 (if the guide effect flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sg3707, where it is determined whether the variable display time for the current special symbol play round (a play round in normal time-saving play mode) has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the number of reserved second special symbols at that time is determined in step Sg3708, and in the following step Sg3709 it is determined whether the number of reserved second special symbols thus determined is the maximum number of reserved symbols.

If the number of reserved symbols reaches the maximum number, proceed to step Sg3710 and set the second guide symbol to be executed as the guide symbol. When this setting is made, the symbol display device 75 displays a text image 928 such as "Ready," as shown in FIG. 528(c). This notifies the player that the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol has reached the maximum number. The second guide symbol continues for a predetermined period (for example, the remaining variable display time). When the second guide symbol ends, the guide symbol flag set in the various flag storage area 344d is cleared.

After step Sg3710 is executed, the guide effect execution process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sg3709 (the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum number), the first guide effect is continued and the guide effect execution process is terminated without executing the process of step Sg3710.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sg3707 (the variable display time has elapsed), the guide performance is terminated in step Sg3711 to end the first guide performance currently being executed. In the guide performance termination setting, the first guide performance is set to end, and the guide performance flag set in the various flag storage area 344d is cleared. After step Sg3711 is executed, the guide performance execution process is terminated.

Next, the variable display time table for the normal game state corresponding to the second special symbol in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 529. This variable display time table is referenced when a game round of the second special symbol is played in the normal game state, and this game round corresponds to a special symbol game round played after the normal time-saving game state has ended, based on the reserved second special symbol that exists at the time of the end of the normal time-saving game state. A maximum of four special symbol game rounds based on this reserved symbol can be played. In this modified example, if a special miss occurs in one of these game rounds, a sudden transition to the time-saving game state will occur.

The variable display time table for the normal game state corresponding to the second special symbol includes a variable display time table for a special miss (Figure 529(a)), a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 529(b)), and a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 529(c)).

The variable display time table for special misses shown in Figure 529 (a) is referenced when a special miss occurs during the second special symbol play in normal play mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern Y1 is set as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, when a special miss occurs during the second special symbol play in normal play mode, variable pattern Y1 is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS.

When a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Y1 is output from the main control unit 162, the effect control unit 143 controls the display control unit 350 so that the girl character 904 successfully transforms into a wizard, and then special effect A, in which the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 stop and display in a combination corresponding to a special failure result, is executed on the symbol display device 75. This notifies the player that a special failure result has occurred and that the challenge to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state has been successful (that the transition has occurred).

The variable display time table for normal misses shown in Figure 529 (b) is referenced when a normal miss occurs during a play of the second special symbol during normal play mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern Y2 is set as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, when a normal miss occurs during a play of the second special symbol during normal play mode, variable pattern Y2 is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS.

When a variation start command corresponding to variation pattern Y2 is output from the main control unit 162, the effect control unit 143 controls the display control unit 350 so that the girl character 904 fails to transform into a wizard, and then special effect B, in which the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 stop and display in a combination corresponding to a reach miss, is executed on the symbol display device 75. This notifies the player that a normal miss result has occurred (a special miss result has not occurred) and that the challenge to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state has failed (the transition does not occur).

The variable display time table for jackpots shown in Figure 529 (c) is referenced when a jackpot result is achieved in the second special symbol play round during normal game mode. In this variable display time table, variable pattern Y3 is set as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, when a jackpot result is achieved in the second special symbol play round during normal game mode, variable pattern Y3 is always selected regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS.

When a variation start command corresponding to variation pattern Y3 is output from the main control unit 162, the effect control unit 143 controls the display control unit 350 so that the girl character 904 successfully transforms into a wizard, and then special effect C, in which the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 stop and display in a combination corresponding to the jackpot result, is executed on the symbol display device 75. This notifies the player that they have won the jackpot.

A variable display time of 150 seconds is associated with the variable patterns Y1 to Y3 in Figures 529 (a) to (c). This variable display time is set without reference to the number of reserved special drawings at that time, and is a fixed length regardless of the number of reserved special drawings.

<About the game flow>
The flow of the game in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 530. Here, the flow of the game after the opening and closing execution mode when the winning or losing lottery for the first special chart results in a 4R probability variable jackpot (Figure 477 (a)) will be described.

If a 4R jackpot result occurs, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to a high-probability mode with a maximum number of times of 50, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the first high-frequency support mode with a maximum number of times of 51. As a result, play times 1 through 50 after the opening/closing execution mode are played in a high-probability play state, and the 51st play time is played in a normal time-saving play state. Furthermore, after the normal time-saving play state ends, play times 52 through 55 are played based on the reserved amount of the second special chart, but these play times are played in a normal play state.

As explained in the process for determining whether to enter the time-shortened game state (Figure 525), if a special miss occurs when the high-probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, or if a special miss occurs when the support B flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, the time-shortened game state flag will not be set, and the transition to the time-shortened game state will be restricted. However, if a special miss occurs in any other state, the time-shortened game state flag will be set, and the transition to the time-shortened game state will be permitted. For this reason, a special miss will cause a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state not only on the 51st play in the normal time-shortened game state, but also on the 52nd to 55th play in the normal game state.

As a result, even after the end of a game in the normal time-saving game state (the 51st game), players can continue to enjoy the challenge of suddenly transitioning to the time-saving game state by using game turns based on the remaining reserved balls. In this case, a longer variable display time (150 seconds) is set for the 52nd through 55th game turns based on the remaining reserved balls, regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time. Therefore, even for the 52nd and 53rd game turns, which are played when the number of reserved balls on the second special chart is two or more, a sufficient presentation period is ensured, allowing players to enjoy the game by carefully watching whether or not the challenge to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state is successful.

Furthermore, if a normal miss occurs during a play in the normal time-saving mode (the 51st play), meaning that the game does not transition to the time-saving mode suddenly and the next play is based on the remaining reserved balls, a guide effect (Fig. 528) is executed to guide the player toward a starting prize entry into the second operating port 63, with a predetermined period remaining before the end of the time-saving mode (the clearing of the Support A flag). During a play in the normal time-saving mode, the player may be so focused on the effect (Special Effect B) of whether or not the transition challenge to the time-saving mode will be successful that the player does not launch the game ball. However, with the above configuration, the player is prompted to add reserved information for the second special symbol before the start of a play based on the remaining reserved balls, preventing the start of a play based on the remaining reserved balls when the number of reserved second special symbols is less than the upper limit (four). This makes it possible to start a play based on the remaining reserved balls with the maximum number of attempts (four) available to transition to the time-saving mode suddenly secured.

In this case, the variable display time for a normal miss result (160 seconds) is made longer than the variable display time for a special miss result (150 seconds), and this difference in time is used to perform the guide effect. In this case, the duration of special effect B for a normal miss result (a result in which the transition challenge fails) and special effect A for a special miss result (a result in which the transition challenge is successful) can be aligned, and the guide effect can be performed in the case of a normal miss result. This makes it possible to provide guidance about adding pending information for the second special chart and secure the necessary time for this, while preventing the success or failure of the result from being guessed from the difference in the length of the effect period.

<Other Modifications>
The seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples are not limited to the above-described seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exhibited) of each of the configurations to be combined is ensured.

Furthermore, for ease of understanding, certain examples are specified as prerequisite configurations, such as "in Variation 1 of the Seventh Embodiment," but the following configurations are not limited to application to the specified prerequisite configurations (examples), and can also be applied to other embodiments and variations.

(1) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples above, a special losing result is set as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery. However, the special winning/losing lottery may draw a lottery to determine whether the result is a jackpot or a losing result, and if the result is a losing result, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of losing result) may be held to determine whether the result is a special losing result. In this case, the separate lottery may be held using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to drawing the type of losing result.

Also, instead of the lottery for determining the type of losing result, a lottery for transitioning to a time-saving game state may be held to determine whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving game state will be met. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random number values, such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a random number dedicated to determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the time-saving game state will be met.

(2) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the losing results are configured to have two types of losing results: a normal losing result and a special losing result. However, for example, the losing results may be configured to have three or more types of losing results, including a normal losing result, a first special losing result, and a second special losing result. In this case, for example, if the first special losing result occurs, a sudden transition to a time-saving game state may be granted as a first benefit, while if the second special losing result occurs, a second benefit other than a sudden transition to a time-saving game state may be granted. An example of the second benefit may be a transition to a small winning game. This small winning game is a game state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, just like a big winning game (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a big winning result), but it may be executed in a manner that is more disadvantageous to the player than a big winning game. For example, the upper limit on the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 may be set to be less than that in a jackpot game, or the upper limit opening time per opening may be set to be shorter than that for one round of play or the upper limit opening time per opening in a jackpot game, resulting in an expected number of winning balls being less than that in a jackpot game.

Alternatively, the system may be configured to transition to high probability mode instead of small win game. In this case, the system may transition to high probability mode and high frequency support mode, or to high probability mode and low frequency support mode.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a first special miss results in a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state, while a second special miss results in a sudden transition to the normal time-shortened game state (a specific state in which a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is permitted) ends. In this case, there may be no upper limit on the number of times the normal time-shortened game state can be entered, and if the second special miss results in the normal time-shortened game state occur earlier than the first special miss result, the normal time-shortened game state may end without a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state.

When a second special failure result is provided as in each of the above configurations, the probability of the second special failure result may be the same as the probability of the first special failure result, may be higher than the probability of the first special failure result, or may be lower than the probability of the first special failure result.

(3) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the special symbol display unit 43 is configured to display a stop result corresponding to a special miss result regardless of whether or not a sudden transition to a time-saving game state is executed in the event of a special miss result. However, the stop result corresponding to a special miss result may not be displayed when a sudden transition to a time-saving game state is restricted. For example, in such a case, the stop result corresponding to a normal miss result may be displayed.

(4) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, a transition to a time-saving game state (a state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is triggered by a special miss result. However, a transition to a high probability mode may also be configured. In this case, a transition to a state of high probability mode and high frequency support mode may be made, or a transition to a state of high probability mode and low frequency support mode may also be made.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which a transition to a time-saving game state or a high-probability mode is made, a transition to a specific presentation mode in which special presentations that cannot be seen in the normal presentation mode or special characters appear may be made. Also, a transition to a state in which a special lottery that is not performed in the normal game state is made may be made. In these cases, the player is in an advantageous state in that they can see special presentations or take part in a special lottery. One example of a special lottery is a points lottery. A configuration in which a transition to a time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, an opening/closing execution mode, etc. is made depending on the points awarded in the point lottery or the total number of points awarded may also be made. Also, a special presentation (for example, a character's costume, etc.) may be unlocked, or behind-the-scenes stories about the development of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed.

(5) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a special miss occurs, the game transitions to the time-saving game state without going through the opening and closing execution mode. However, the game may also be configured to transition to the time-saving game state via the opening and closing execution mode. For example, the game may be configured to transition to the time-saving game state via a small win game.

(6) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the sudden time-saving game state in the event of a special miss is configured to implement a second high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal map support lottery is the same as in the normal game state. However, it may also be configured to implement a first high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal map support lottery is higher than in the normal game state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal map support lottery in the sudden time-saving game state, etc. may be the same as in the normal time-saving game state that goes through the opening and closing execution mode, or it may be a different probability. For example, in order to ensure an advantage in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, it is advisable to lower the winning probability of the support in the sudden time-saving game state, etc., compared to the normal time-saving game state.

Furthermore, a second high-frequency support mode may be implemented in the normal time-saving game state that passes through the open/close execution mode, in which the probability of winning the normal support lottery is the same as in the normal game state.

(7) In the seventh embodiment and each modified example, the sudden time-shortening game state is configured to have one type, but it may also be configured to have multiple types of sudden time-shortening game states. The multiple types of sudden time-shortening game states may be configured to have sudden time-shortening game states with different upper limit numbers. For example, a sudden time-shortening game state A with an upper limit number of times of 100, a sudden time-shortening game state B with an upper limit number of times of 300, and a sudden time-shortening game state C with an upper limit number of times of 700 may be configured, with the degree of advantage increasing in the order of sudden time-shortening game state A < sudden time-shortening game state B < sudden time-shortening game state C.

In this case, one of the sudden time-saving game states A to C will be selected and a transition to the sudden time-saving game state will occur, but this selection may be made at the time of the transition to the sudden time-saving game state (when the confirmation display begins), or it may be made prior to the transition to the sudden time-saving game state. In the latter case, for example, multiple types of special failure results may be provided, and the type of sudden time-saving game state to transition to may be selected depending on which special failure result occurs. In this case, the type of special failure result and the type of sudden time-saving game state may correspond one-to-one, or they may correspond multiple-to-one.

(8) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the transition to the time-shortened game state is triggered by a special miss result. However, the transition to the time-shortened game state may also be triggered by some other event. For example, the transition to the time-shortened game state may be triggered by a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passage section provided within the game area PE or the predetermined ball entry section.

In these cases, the support flag is set when a gaming ball enters a specific entry section or when a gaming ball passes through a specific passage section. Alternatively, instead of setting the support flag, a ball entry flag corresponding to the entry or a passage flag corresponding to the passage may be set. In this case, after the ball entry flag or passage flag is set, a switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode may be made based on the fact that these flags are set.

Note that a specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism and may be a type that is always open, or it may be a variable type that has an opening/closing mechanism and can be switched between an open state in which game balls can or do enter or it is easier for the game ball to enter, and a closed state in which game balls cannot or it is harder for the game ball to enter than in the open state. This also applies to the above-mentioned predetermined ball entry sections.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific entry section or passing section is provided within a predetermined entry section, only the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section will always enter or pass through the specific entry section or passing section. Alternatively, one or more other entry sections or passing sections different from the specific entry section or passing section may be provided within the predetermined entry section, and gaming balls that enter the predetermined entry section may be distributed, resulting in a situation in which a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section does not enter a specific entry section or pass through a specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is established when a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters a specific entry section or passes through a specific passing section, while a trigger for transition to the time-shortened game state is not established even if a gaming ball that enters the predetermined entry section enters another entry section or passes through another passing section.

(9) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state (the support flag setting process) is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result was achieved, but it may also be configured to be executed after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state may be executed during the confirmation display in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result was achieved, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special symbol game round.

(10) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, notifications corresponding to winning special miss results are executed by the special symbol display unit 43 or the symbol display device 75, but they may also be executed by other notification units. Notifications are not limited to image displays, and may be made using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or by operating decorative movable bodies (movable gadgets) for moving effects in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, the notifications do not necessarily have to be visual notifications, but may also be auditory notifications in the form of sounds from the speaker unit 29. The same applies to notifications of the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode, etc.

(11) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a reach effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special miss result. However, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may also be made by a game-time effect that does not involve a reach effect. Furthermore, the notification does not have to be made using the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying a predetermined pattern, such as a predetermined character, on the symbol display device 75.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed on the pattern display device 75 is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display unit 43 and is displayed in a smaller size than the patterns in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying the fourth pattern in a specific manner that differs from the normal manner. Furthermore, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by combining the manner in which the fourth pattern is displayed in a stopped state with at least some of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that are displayed in a stopped state.

(12) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a special miss occurs in a situation where the game is in a high probability game state, that is, when a special miss occurs but the transition to a time-saving game state is suddenly restricted, a complete miss effect is displayed as a game cycle effect on the symbol display device 75. However, instead of or in addition to this, a reach miss effect (a reach miss other than the combination corresponding to the special miss result) may also be displayed.

(13) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the results of the win/lose lottery conducted in a high-probability game state include a special loss result, but this may not be included. Specifically, the win/lose table for the high-probability mode corresponding to the second special symbol may be configured so that the allocation results do not include a special loss result. In this case, since the result of the win/lose lottery will not be a special loss result in a high-probability game state, a sudden transition to a time-saving game state will not occur.

(14) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the result of the support lottery (regular win/lose lottery) in the low-frequency support mode is configured to include a winning result, but this may not be included. In other words, the regular power device 63a may never be in an open state in the low-frequency support mode, and winning into the second operating port 63 may not occur.

(15) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the high-frequency support mode, and that value is decremented by one each time a special symbol game is played, thereby updating the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode. However, instead of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of times in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the high-frequency support mode, the number of times a special symbol game has been played in the high-frequency support mode may be updated by incrementing the value of the support counter area SC by one each time a special symbol game is played. In this case, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the updated counter value reaches the upper limit of the number of times.

The same applies to the probability variation counter area KC; instead of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times to the probability variation counter area KC when switching to high probability mode, the number of times special gameplay has been performed in high probability mode can be updated by adding 1 to the value of the probability variation counter area KC each time a special gameplay has been performed.

(16) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the number of times a special symbol is played in the high probability mode or high frequency support mode is counted without distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the number of times a special symbol is played may be counted separately. Specifically, the number of times a special symbol is played in the high probability mode, etc. may be counted with the second special symbol being the target (excluding the first special symbol being the target).

(17) In the seventh embodiment and each modified example, the configuration includes a normal time-shortened game state and a sudden time-shortened game state, but it is also possible for the configuration to include one of these. For example, it is also possible for the configuration to include a sudden time-shortened game state without including a normal time-shortened game state. Furthermore, while the seventh embodiment and each modified example include a high-probability game state, it is also possible for the configuration to not include a high-probability game state.

(18) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the high-frequency support mode is ended (the support flag is cleared) at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round. However, the high-frequency support mode may be ended after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the high-frequency support mode may be ended during the confirmation display of the final game round, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special game round.

(19) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the high-frequency support mode is ended (the support flag is cleared) when the number of times the special symbol is played after switching to the high-frequency support mode reaches the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the high-frequency support mode may be ended when a small win occurs in the special symbol win/loss lottery after switching to the high-frequency support mode, or when the number of times a small win occurs reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, five times).

In addition, if both conditions are met - the number of times the special symbol is played reaches the upper limit, and a small win occurs or the number of small wins reaches the upper limit - the high frequency support mode may be ended when one of these conditions is met, or the high frequency support mode may be ended when both of these conditions are met.

Also, instead of or in addition to the above, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end when the number of regular game plays since switching to high-frequency support mode reaches the upper limit. In this case, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end for all regular game plays regardless of the result of the support lottery, and when the number reaches the upper limit, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end for regular game plays that result in a winning support lottery, and when the number of such play plays reaches the upper limit, or the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end for regular game plays that result in a losing support lottery, and when the number of such play plays reaches the upper limit.

For example, if both the number of times the special symbol gameplay has been played reaches the upper limit and the number of times the regular symbol gameplay has been played reaches the upper limit, the high frequency support mode may be configured to end when one of these conditions is met, or the high frequency support mode may be configured to end when both of these conditions are met.

Also, instead of or in addition to the above, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to end when the period since transitioning to the high-frequency support mode reaches a predetermined upper limit period.

(20) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples above, the variable display time is set by referring to the number of reserved memories when a variable pattern corresponding to a complete miss effect is selected in a high-probability game state. However, the variable display time may also be set by referring to the number of reserved memories when a variable pattern that does not correspond to a complete miss effect is selected. For example, a longer variable display time of 15 seconds and a shorter variable display time of 8 seconds may be set when a normal reach miss effect is performed, and when a variable pattern corresponding to a normal reach miss effect is selected, one of these variable display times corresponding to the number of reserved memories may be selected and set. Specifically, if the number of reserved memories is less than a reference number (for example, 2), the longer variable display time of 15 seconds may be set, and if it is equal to or greater than the reference number, the shorter variable display time of 8 seconds may be set.

(21) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, allocation results A and B may be assigned before the transition to the normal time-shortened play state, and the transition to the normal time-shortened play state may occur when allocation result A is assigned, and if a special miss occurs in that normal time-shortened play state, a sudden transition to the time-shortened play state may occur. Alternatively, the transition to the normal time-shortened play state may occur when allocation result B is assigned, and if a special miss occurs in that normal time-shortened play state, a sudden transition to the time-shortened play state may not occur. In other words, the result of the allocation performed before the transition to the normal time-shortened play state may affect whether or not a sudden transition to the time-shortened play state is possible. In this case, the player can be entertained not only by hitting a special miss result in the normal time-shortened play state, but also by knowing which result is assigned. Furthermore, by increasing the number of steps leading up to the sudden transition to the time-shortened play state, monotony in play can be prevented and the player's enjoyment when a sudden transition to the time-shortened play state occurs can be increased.

In the above case, the allocation of allocation result A and allocation result B may be performed by internal lottery, or may be performed using the movement of the gaming balls. In the latter case, for example, multiple passing sections, including a specific passing section, may be provided within the game area PE or a predetermined device, and an allocation means may be provided to allocate gaming balls to one of these multiple passing sections. Prior to the transition to the normal time-saving game state, the allocation means may allocate gaming balls to a specific passing section, resulting in allocation result A if the ball passes through that passing section, or allocation result B if the allocation means allocates gaming balls to another passing section and the ball does not pass through the specific passing section. In this case, the number of other passing sections may be the same as or greater than the specific passing sections.

In addition, when allocation is performed by the former internal lottery, it is conceivable that the lottery will be held in the winning game round (the game round that resulted in a jackpot) that triggered the transition to the normal time-saving game mode. For example, the allocation can be performed by a lottery for the type of jackpot held in the winning game round.

Whether an internal lottery or the movement of the gaming balls is used, it is preferable to issue a predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize the allocation result. In this case, a notification may be issued for both allocation result A and allocation result B, or for just one of them. In the latter case, it is preferable to issue a notification for allocation result A, which is more advantageous to the player. The predetermined notification corresponding to the allocation result may be issued by the pattern display device 75 using text images, character images, etc., or by a dedicated notification unit (a notification unit other than the pattern display device 75) such as a light-emitting unit for making such notifications.

When executing the above-mentioned predetermined notification, the notification may be configured to be made during a game in the normal time-shortened game state after transitioning to the normal time-shortened game state, or may be configured to be made before transitioning to the normal time-shortened game state. It may also be configured to be made both before and after transitioning to the normal time-shortened game state. In this case, the predetermined notification may be made both before and after transitioning to the normal time-shortened game state, or may be made continuously from before to after the transition. In the latter case, the execution period of the predetermined notification can be secured longer, making it easier for players to recognize the allocation results.

(22) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the second special symbol played after the normal time-saving game mode ends is configured to be played the same number of times as the number of reserved memories at the end of the normal time-saving game mode. However, the second special symbol may be played a greater number of times than the number of reserved memories. For example, if the support A flag is cleared during the opening and closing of the device by the normal power device 63a (when the normal time-saving game mode ends internally), the remaining opening and closing of the device can be continued even after the flag is cleared. In this case, a win can be generated in the second operating port 63 during the period in which special symbol game modes based on the remaining reserved memories are played, and therefore, reserved memories for the second special symbol can be added, making it possible to play more second special symbol game modes than the number of reserved memories at the end of the normal time-saving game mode.

Furthermore, by applying this configuration to variant 2 (a configuration in which a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is permitted in special game play rounds based on the remaining reserved number of rounds), players can increase the number of times they are given the chance to suddenly transition to the time-saving play state, thereby increasing attention to the game through participation in the game.

(23) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, a re-transition to the sudden time-shortened game state is restricted if a special miss occurs while the player is in the sudden time-shortened game state. However, such a re-transition may also occur. In this case, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-shortened game state may be rewritten to the upper limit of the number of times for the sudden time-shortened game state that is the target of the re-transition. Specifically, the support counter area SC may be overwritten with a value corresponding to the upper limit. For example, if the remaining number of special symbol play times in the sudden time-shortened game state during the current state is 30, and the player transitions to a sudden time-shortened game state with an upper limit of 50, the remaining number of times will be 50. In this case, the symbol display device 65 may notify the player that the remaining number of times has been increased. Specifically, the difference (20 times) between the current remaining number of times (30 times) and the changed remaining number of times (50 times) may be notified as if it has been added to the current remaining number. This creates the impression that the remaining number of times in the sudden time-shortened game state has increased, which can suitably arouse the player's enjoyment.

(24) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, a drop lottery may be conducted to determine whether to transition to a low-probability mode when the player is in a high-probability game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode). If the drop lottery is won, the player transitions to a normal time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode). If a special miss occurs in the normal time-saving game state, the player suddenly transitions to the time-saving game state. In this case, if the special game play number resulting in a drop win in the high-probability game state is early rather than late, the number of special game play times that the player can stay in the normal time-saving game state increases, thereby realizing gameplay that makes it easier to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state. In this case, by keeping the difference between the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode and the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode small (for example, setting the former to 1/199.9 and the latter to 1/200), the earlier the player is in a high-probability game state, the more advantageous it is for the player. The drop lottery may be conducted at the start of a special game play, just like the win/lose lottery. In this case, the lottery for determining whether a player has been eliminated may be held first, followed by the lottery for determining whether the player has been successful, or the lottery for determining whether the player has been successful may be held first, followed by the lottery for determining whether the player has been eliminated.

(25) In the seventh embodiment and variant example 1 described above, the system transitions from a high-probability game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) to a normal time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), and then from the normal time-saving game state to a state in which special game rounds are played based on the remaining reserved balls (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), thereby transitioning from a first predetermined state (first specific game) in which transition to the time-saving game state is restricted to a specific state (second specific game) in which transition to the time-saving game state is permitted, and then transitioning from the specific state to a second predetermined state (third specific game) in which transition to the time-saving game state is restricted. However, these transitions from the first predetermined state to the second predetermined state, from the first predetermined state to the specific state, and from the specific state to the second predetermined state are not limited to those involving changes in the lottery mode or support mode.

For example, the above switching may be configured to occur based on the number of times the special symbol is played, without changing the lottery mode or support mode. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode ends or ends, or when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or after it is turned on, the cumulative number of times that the game misses a predetermined reference timing (the number of times that the special symbol is played and the result of the win/lose lottery is a loser) reaches a first number (e.g., 350 times), causing the game to change from the first predetermined state to the specific state. Then, when the cumulative number of times that the game misses the reference timing reaches a second number (e.g., 400 times), causing the game to change from the specific state to the second predetermined state, the flow from the first predetermined state → specific state → second predetermined state can all be configured to occur within the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

Furthermore, the conditions for switching from the first predetermined state to the specific state and from the specific state to the second predetermined state are not limited to the number of times the special symbol is played. For example, the above switching may be performed by lottery. Specifically, a first transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the specific state under the first predetermined state, and if the first transition lottery is won, the first predetermined state will become the specific state. Thereafter, a second transition lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the second predetermined state under the specific state, and if the second transition lottery is won, the specific state will become the second predetermined state. Note that the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery can be held for each play.

The above switching may also be configured to occur based on an elapsed period of time. For example, the first predetermined state may change to a specific state when the elapsed period from the reference timing reaches a first period (e.g., two hours), and then the specific state may change to a second predetermined state when the elapsed period from the reference timing reaches a second period (e.g., two hours and ten minutes).

The above-mentioned switching may also be configured to occur based on the behavior of the gaming ball. For example, within the gaming area PE or a predetermined device, multiple passing sections, including a specific passing section, and a distribution means for distributing gaming balls to one of these multiple passing sections may be provided, and the gaming balls may be distributed to a specific passing section by the distribution means and pass through that passing section, thereby switching from a first predetermined state to a specific state or from a specific state to a second predetermined state.

The above-mentioned switching may also be performed based on a change in round play in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific condition can be met during round play in the opening/closing execution mode, and transition to the time-shortened play state is restricted even if the specific condition is met during a first predetermined round play (the first predetermined state), transition to the time-shortened play state is permitted when the specific condition is met during a second predetermined round play (the second predetermined state), and transition to the time-shortened play state is restricted even if the specific condition is met during a third predetermined round play (the second predetermined state). The transition to the time-shortened play state when the specific condition is met during the second predetermined round play may occur after the opening/closing execution mode has ended.

The specific condition can be, for example, a predetermined number of game balls entering the variable prize-winning device during a round of play, or a game ball passing through a specific passage provided within the variable prize-winning device. In the former case, for example, by setting the predetermined number to a number greater than the maximum number of balls that can enter the variable prize-winning device, a so-called overflow prize can be generated, thereby realizing a configuration in which the specific condition is met.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the same variable winning device may be opened in each of the first through third predetermined rounds of play, or multiple variable winning devices may be provided and different variable winning devices may be opened in each of the first through third predetermined rounds of play. In the latter case, it is preferable to provide a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device as the multiple variable winning devices, and to open the first variable winning device in the first and third predetermined rounds of play, and the second variable winning device in the variable winning device. In this case, the type of variable winning device that is opened corresponds to whether or not the round allows a transition to a time-saving play state, making the configuration easy for players to understand.

In this case, if the specific condition is established when the game ball passes through a specific passage provided within the variable winning device, the second variable winning device that opens in the second predetermined round of play may have the specific passage provided within it, and the first variable winning device that opens in the first predetermined round of play and the third predetermined round of play may not have the specific passage provided within it. In this case, the specific condition cannot be established even if a win is made in the variable winning device (first variable winning device) in the first predetermined round of play and the third predetermined round of play, but the specific condition can be established by a win in the variable winning device (second variable winning device) in the second predetermined round of play.

In addition, the above configurations may be combined. For example, a switch from the first predetermined state to the specific state may occur when a winning entry is made in the first transition lottery, and then a switch from the specific state to the second predetermined state may occur when the cumulative number of losing plays in the specific state reaches a predetermined number.

When the state switches from the first predetermined state to the second predetermined state based on the lottery results, the elapsed time, or the behavior of the game ball, the switch between states may or may not involve a change in lottery mode or support mode.

(26) In the seventh embodiment and each of the variations described above, the state is switched in the following order: from a state in which transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly restricted to a state in which transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly permitted, and then from that state to a state in which transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly restricted. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the state may be switched in the following order: from a state in which transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly permitted to a state in which transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly restricted, and then from that state to a state in which transition to the time-shortened game state is suddenly permitted.

(27) In the seventh embodiment and variant example 1 described above, the first number, which is the number of times special symbol games can be played while in the normal time-saving game state (specific state), is configured to be less than the second number, which is the number of times special symbol games can be played while in the high-probability game state (first predetermined state), or the third number, which is the number of times special symbol games can be played in the state where special symbol games are played based on the remaining reserved number (second predetermined state). However, these numbers may also be the same. Furthermore, the first number may be less than the second number and more than the third number, or the first number may be more than the second number and less than the third number (in this case, the third number is more than the second number).

(28) In the seventh embodiment and variant 1 described above, the results of the win/loss lottery conducted in the special symbol game round based on the remaining reserved portion include a special loss result, but this may also be omitted. Specifically, a win/loss table can be provided for the special symbol game round based on the remaining reserved portion, and the win/loss table can be configured so that the allocation results do not include a special loss result. In this case, since the result of the win/loss lottery in the special symbol game round based on the remaining reserved portion does not result in a special loss result, a sudden transition to a time-saving game state will not occur.

(29) In the seventh embodiment and variant 1 described above, the variable display time for all special game rounds based on the remaining reserved amount is set to the same length (for example, 1 second), but a variable display time of a different length may be set for some game rounds. For example, the variable display time for the final game round (the 55th special game round) may be set to a longer length (for example, 3 seconds) than the variable display time for the other game rounds (the 52nd to 54th special game rounds).

(30) In the seventh embodiment and variant example 1 described above, the variable display time for special game turns based on the remaining reserved amount is set to a time shorter than the shortest variable display time in a high probability game state (e.g., 4 seconds), but the same time may also be set.

In addition, the variable display time for the special symbol game based on the remaining reserved amount may be longer than the shortest variable display time. In this case, the system may be configured to execute a reach effect during the special symbol game based on the remaining reserved amount.

In addition, if the variable display time for a special symbol game based on the remaining reserved portion is longer than the above-mentioned shortest variable display time, the variable display time when no reach effect is executed in a special symbol game based on the remaining reserved portion (variable display time corresponding to a complete miss) may be longer than the shorter variable display time (e.g., 4 seconds) of the variable display time when no reach effect is executed in a special symbol game in a high-probability game state (variable display time corresponding to a complete miss). In this case, the variable display time corresponding to a complete miss in a special symbol game based on the remaining reserved portion may be shorter or longer than the longer variable display time (e.g., 8 seconds) of the variable display times corresponding to a complete miss in a high-probability game state.

(31) In the seventh embodiment and variant 1 described above, the state in which the special chart variable display time is set by referring to the reserved number ends, and then a transition is made to a state in which the special chart variable display time is set without referring to the reserved number. However, the order may be reversed. In other words, the state in which the special chart variable display time is set without referring to the reserved number ends, and then a transition is made to a state in which the special chart variable display time is set by referring to the reserved number. In this case, if the former state is more disadvantageous to the player than the latter state, the same effect as in the seventh embodiment and variant 1 described above can be achieved by shortening the special chart variable display time in the former state.

(32) In the seventh embodiment and variant example 1 described above, when a special symbol game round is played based on the remaining reserved balls, a performance effect is executed in which the count image 911 and the payout ball count image 912 are displayed. However, a performance effect other than a performance effect may also be executed. For example, an ending effect corresponding to the end of a high probability game state or a normal time-limited game state can be executed. In the ending effect, for example, a video (animated image) in which a predetermined character or the like appears is displayed along with a text image announcing the end of the high probability game state or the normal time-limited game state. In this case, even if the variable display time for each special symbol game round is short, by performing the ending effect across multiple special symbol game rounds, a sufficient performance period can be ensured, making it possible to perform an impressive ending effect.

(33) In the seventh embodiment and variant 1 described above, when a performance effect is executed, the effect is executed across all of the special symbol game times based on the remaining reserved amount. However, the performance effect may also be executed across some of the special symbol game times. For example, the performance effect may be executed across the 54th and 55th special symbol game times. In this case, in the 52nd and 53rd special symbol game times, an effect other than the performance effect (for example, a symbol change effect to notify the result of the win) can be executed without spanning across game times.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment and variant 1 described above, when a special game round is played based on the remaining reserved amount, the game round effects may be performed in each game round without spanning over to other game rounds.

(34) In the seventh embodiment and variant example 1 described above, the variable display time table (Figure 501) corresponding to the special game rounds based on the remaining reserved amount does not have a variable pattern corresponding to the reach effect, so that the reach effect is not performed in those game rounds. However, it is also possible to have a variable pattern corresponding to the reach effect, and then restrict the execution of the reach effect based on the fact that the special game round is based on the remaining reserved amount, regardless of whether that variable pattern is selected.

(35) In the seventh embodiment and variant example 1 described above, a reach effect is not executed during a special game based on the remaining reserved amount. However, a reach effect may be executed. In this case, given that the variable display time tends to be extended when a reach effect is executed, it is preferable to set the probability of executing a reach effect lower than the probability of executing a complete miss effect in order to prevent the consumption period of a special game based on the remaining reserved amount from becoming excessively long.

In addition, in cases where there is a first reach effect with a relatively long variable display time (performance period) and a second reach effect with a relatively short variable display time (performance period), the second reach effect may be executed in a special game based on the remaining reserved amount, but the first reach effect may not be executed.

Also, a reach effect may be executed when the result of the lottery for the special game based on the remaining reserved amount is a jackpot. In this case, the reach effect occurs in each game based on the remaining reserved amount, making the game essentially a guaranteed jackpot, and players can enjoy the excitement of wondering whether or not a reach effect will occur in play after the normal time-saving game state has ended without a special miss result.

(36) In the seventh embodiment and variant 1 described above, when a special game play based on the remaining reserved number is played, the variable display time for each game play is set regardless of the number of reserved memories. However, the variable display time for each game play may also be set according to the number of reserved memories. For example, a longer first variable display time (e.g., 3 seconds) and a shorter second variable display time (e.g., 1 second) may be provided as the variable display time for the special game play, and the first variable display time may be set when the number of reserved memories is less than a reference number (e.g., 2), and the second variable display time may be set when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the reference number.

(37) In Variation 1 of the seventh embodiment, a sudden transition to the time-saving game state does not occur when a special miss occurs in a special game round based on the remaining reserved amount. However, such a transition may occur as in Variation 2. In this case, the guide effect (Fig. 528) may be executed in the final game round in the normal time-saving game state.

(38) In Variation 2 of the seventh embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times for the high-frequency support mode was set higher than the upper limit of the number of times for the high-probability mode, and after the high-probability play state ended, a transition to the normal time-saving play state occurred, and after the normal time-saving play state ended, a special game play based on the remaining reserved number of times was played. However, the upper limit of the number of times for the high-frequency support mode may be set to the same number as the upper limit of the number of times for the high-probability mode, and after the high-probability play state ended, a special game play based on the remaining reserved number of times was played without transitioning to the normal time-saving play state. In this case, a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is restricted during the first through the fiftieth special game play in the high-probability play state, and a sudden transition to the time-saving play state is permitted during the fifty-first through fifty-fourth special game play, which are the remaining reserved special game play times. This realizes gameplay in which, if the high-probability play state ended without winning a jackpot, a chance to suddenly transition to the time-saving play state is provided during the remaining reserved special game play.

Furthermore, in cases where the normal time-saving game state is not intervened, a configuration may be adopted in which a chance to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state is granted not only for special game rounds based on the remaining reserved balls, but also for the final game round in the high-probability game state. One such configuration could involve, for example, performing an update process in one special game round, which updates the number of times that special game rounds have been executed in the high-probability game state, and then performing a high-probability game state termination determination process to determine whether to terminate the high-probability game state based on whether the number of times that special game rounds have been executed after the update has reached a maximum number of times. Then, a sudden transition to the time-saving game state is performed to determine whether to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state. In the final game round, if the termination determination executed first recognizes that the high-probability game state should be terminated, and the transition determination executed later determines that the result of the lottery for the final game round is a special miss, a sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs. In this case, a chance to suddenly transition to a time-saving game state can be granted over a total of five game turns, including the final game turn in the high-probability game state and the special game turn based on the remaining reserved balls.

In addition, in the above (38), the normal time-saving game state may be used instead of the high-probability game state. That is, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal time-saving game state is entered, and after the normal time-saving game state ends, a special game round based on the remaining reserved balls is played. In this configuration, sudden transition to the time-saving game state is restricted during special game rounds in the normal time-saving game state, and sudden transition to the time-saving game state is permitted during special game rounds based on the remaining reserved balls; or, sudden transition to the time-saving game state is restricted during special game rounds in the normal time-saving game state (excluding the final game round in the normal time-saving game state), and sudden transition to the time-saving game state is permitted during the final game round in the normal time-saving game state and the special game round based on the remaining reserved balls.

(39) In the second variant of the seventh embodiment, the special symbol game round based on the remaining reserved portion is executed in low probability mode, but it may also be executed in high probability mode. For example, the upper limit number of times in high probability mode may be set to 54, and the upper limit number of times in high frequency support mode may be set to a lower number of 50. In this case, during the special symbol game round based on the remaining reserved portion, the player can play not only in the event of a sudden transition to a time-saving game state, but also in the hope of winning a jackpot, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

(40) In Variation 2 of the seventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment and Variation 1, the variable display time for the special symbol game based on the remaining reserved amount may be set to a short time (for example, 1 second). In this case, in the special symbol game based on the remaining reserved amount, the performance presentation is executed as in the seventh embodiment, and if a special miss occurs, the variable displayed symbols on the symbol display unit 913 may be displayed in a stopped state corresponding to the special miss result.

(41) In the second variant of the seventh embodiment described above, if the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit at the time of execution of the guide effect (first guide effect), the guide effect is not executed (the flow when a negative judgment is made in step Sg3702). However, the second guide effect may also be executed. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit and that no further starting wins are required.

(42) In the second variant of the seventh embodiment, the second guide effect is executed when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit after the first guide effect is executed. However, the first guide effect may be ended without executing the second guide effect.

(43) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration is such that the transition to jackpot play (open/close execution mode) occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot result. However, as in a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the configuration may also be such that the transition to jackpot play occurs when the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit result and the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during small hit play (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a miss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award determination is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, phrases such as "transitioning from a first gaming state to a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of a specific judgment being a specific result," "granting a predetermined benefit to the player based on the result of a specific judgment being a specific result," and "granting a specific benefit to the player based on the result of a specific judgment being a specific result" can be interpreted as including, as mentioned above, cases where the result of a win/loss judgment is a small win result and a transition to a big win gaming state occurs via a V win.

(44) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pachinko machine is a type in which game balls are paid out, but it may also be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such enclosed type pachinko machines, when prize balls are awarded as a bonus for winning a prize or the like, it is preferable to award the player a predetermined game value (virtual game medium such as credits) corresponding to the number of prize balls, and to notify the player of information indicating the number of prize balls.

(45) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but this may be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (or even one), or may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(46) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but this may not be the case. Furthermore, pending information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized over pending information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 in determining whether a win has occurred, but this relationship may be reversed, or the winning/losing determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(47) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples above, only game balls flowing down the right route are configured to be able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that only game balls flowing down the left route are able to pass through or win, or so that game balls can pass through or win from either the right or left route. However, to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the system so that only game balls flowing down one of the right and left routes are able to win at the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right and left routes are able to pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(48) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time effects correspond one-to-one, but they may also correspond one-to-multiple. In this case, the effect control device 143 can acquire a random number for effect lottery, and use the acquired random number to select one game-time effect from among multiple game-time effects associated with one variation pattern.

(49) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variably displayed patterns on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll left and right, but the patterns may be displayed in a line on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction and scrolling direction of the patterns are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, but may be two, or four or more.

(50) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, a game round is started in the special symbol display unit 43 based on a win/loss determination made by the main control unit 162. However, a game round may be started before the actual win/loss determination is made when the conditions for the win/loss determination are met in the main control unit 162, and the subsequent variable display pattern, variable display time, and stop result for that game round may be determined based on the win/loss determination thereafter. In this case, the main control unit 162 may be configured to first send a variable command when the start timing of a game round arrives, and then send a variable start command and a type command after making a win/loss determination, determining the variable display time, and determining the type. The timing of sending these variable start commands and type commands may also be staggered. In this case, the timing for sending the variable start command and type command may be set to the timing until the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 75 is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

(51) In the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, a special symbol game round is not performed when the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, but a special symbol game round may also be performed. Also, in the seventh embodiment and each of the modified examples, if a winning entry into the operating ports 62, 63 occurs while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, all reserved information corresponding to that winning entry is stored on hold. However, in the case of a configuration in which a special symbol game round is executed during the opening/closing execution mode, if a winning entry into the operating ports 62, 63 occurs while a special symbol game round is being executed during the opening/closing execution mode, the reserved information corresponding to that winning entry may be stored on hold.

(52) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the following will appropriately indicate corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments in parentheses, etc. However, the invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features aA group to feature aI group>
The inventions described in the following feature group aA to feature group aI are a group of inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the above-mentioned first embodiment and its modifications. The inventions described in these feature groups have been made with the problem that the invention aims to solve in the background art, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a predetermined benefit is awarded to the player (for example, JP 2004-81853 A).""Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of game presentation."

<Features aA group>
The feature aA group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned first embodiment and variations 1 to 6 of the first embodiment.

Feature aA1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game number control means (a function for executing game number control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game number operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game number operation is counted as one game number as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game number operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that issues a hold notification (hold image) using the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of reserved game turns before execution;
a destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination (a function for executing a hold look-ahead process by the main control unit 162 in the first embodiment, variants 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, and variants 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing a hold command setting process by the main control unit 162 and a first hold look-ahead process by the performance control unit 143 in variant 4 of the first embodiment);
A specific mode means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice and a first execution process for a hold notice by the performance control device 143 in the first embodiment and the first to sixth variants of the first embodiment) that can set the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specific process;
Equipped with
The specific mode includes a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
When a predetermined event occurs while the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (when the presentation mode is switched in the first embodiment, and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode is performed in variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, or when a power outage occurs in variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment), at least the hold notification set to the specific mode is set to a specific mode or a specific state in which the hold notification is not executed (a configuration in which the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching the presentation mode in the first embodiment, and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, a configuration in which the hold image is not displayed by executing the opening/closing execution mode in variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, and a configuration in which the hold image is disappeared when a power outage occurs in variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specification means (a function to execute setting processing for the return of a notice by the presentation control device 143, second execution processing of the hold notice, and third execution processing of the hold notice in variant 5 by the presentation control device 143, and a function to execute processing for the return of a notice by the presentation control device 143 and fourth execution processing of the hold notice in variant 6) that can change the notification mode of the hold notice that is the subject of the specific state after the specific state ends to a specified first mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode before the specified event occurred, or a specified second mode (higher specific display mode, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of a higher level than the notification mode before the specified event occurred.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the results of so-called reserved prediction, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation for a grant response result even before the start of a game. Furthermore, multiple types of specific modes are set with different expected levels of the grant response result, allowing for indication of high and low expectations, making this a configuration advantageous for stimulating the player's anticipation. In this configuration, if a predetermined event occurs while the reserved notification is set to a specific mode, the system transitions to a specific state in which the specific mode or reserved notification is not executed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may misunderstand or feel anxious that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode has disappeared due to the non-execution of the specific mode, etc. In this regard, in this configuration, after the specific state ends, the reserved notification is executed as a first mode, which is equivalent to the notification mode before the predetermined event occurred, or a second mode, which is higher than that. This allows for a new indication of expectation and maintains anticipation for a grant response result.

Feature aA2: The device is configured to be able to store information corresponding to at least the specific notification mode of the hold notification in a predetermined storage unit (the return area 344f of the RAM 344),
The gaming machine described in feature aA1 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode of the pending notification that is the subject of the specific state to the specified first mode based on information stored in the specified memory unit (a function for executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143 in the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing setting processing for the display mode in variant 5).

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the specific state ends, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode of the hold notification to the same mode as before the specific state (before the specified event occurred) after the specific state ends.

Feature aA3. An execution notification unit (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a pending image in the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of a pending game round,
The gaming machine described in feature aA1 or feature aA2 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with identification means (a function of executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function of executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in variants 5 to 6) that can set the mode of the specified notification made by the execution notification unit to the specified first mode or the specified second mode during a game round of special information corresponding to the hold notice that is the subject of the specified state.

In the above configuration, when processing is performed after the end of a specific state to change the notification mode to a first mode of the same level as the notification mode before the occurrence of a specified event, or a second mode of a higher level, the implementation period can include the play count of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state. This ensures a long processing period for restoring the notification mode to a mode of the same level, etc. For example, even if a specified event occurs immediately before the start of a play count of a pending notification that has been set to a specific mode, the restoration process can be performed using the execution period of the play count after the end of the specific state. This makes it possible to appropriately suggest the level of expectation after the end of a specific state.

Feature aA4. When a game is played, the game performance setting means (function of executing the special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) sets the game performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game based on the special information (reserved information) that was the subject of the grant judgment that triggered the game or the specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information,
The gaming machine described in feature aA3 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode of the specified notification to the specified second mode based on the special information or the identification information referenced by the game round presentation setting means when the notification mode of the specified notification is set to the specified second mode (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notification by the presentation control device 143 in the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing a fourth execution process of the hold notification in variants 5 to 6).

For example, simply returning the notification mode to the same level after the specific state ends would fail to suggest a higher level of expectation than was indicated before the specified event occurred. However, unnecessarily setting the notification mode to a higher level could result in a mismatch with the game round presentation that actually occurs in that game round, potentially damaging the player's trust. In this regard, this configuration promotes the notification mode of the specified notification corresponding to the hold notification to a higher level than before the specified event occurred, based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round presentation in the game round for the hold notification that was the target of the specific state. This makes it possible to promote the notification mode of the specified notification while preventing the notification mode of the specified notification from becoming inconsistent with the game round presentation that actually occurs in that game round.

Feature aA5. The gaming machine described in Feature aA4 is characterized in that the identification means includes a determination means (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the effect control device 143 in the first embodiment and variations 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in variations 5 and 6) that determines whether the notification mode of the predetermined notification should be the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the identification information referenced by the game play presentation setting means, and that if the determination means determines that the notification mode should be the predetermined second mode, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether a higher level of presentation is to be used based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round presentation, and if that determination indicates that promotion to a higher level of presentation is permitted, the promotion process is carried out. This allows the notification mode of the specified notification to be promoted after the specific state ends, within a range that does not exceed the expected level of the game round presentation that will actually be performed.

Feature aA6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aA1 to aA5, wherein the specifying means includes means for changing the notification mode of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state from the predetermined first mode to the predetermined second mode after the specific state ends.

When changing the notification mode of a pending notification to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of a specific state, if the higher mode is suddenly set, it may be difficult for the player to understand the correspondence with the specific mode that was in place before the specified event occurred, which could lead to confusion. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode is first set to the same level and then changed to the higher level notification mode, making it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned and reducing the above-mentioned confusion.

Feature aA7: The specific mode means includes a first scenario setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) that sets a notification scenario (performance scenario) for setting the notification mode of the hold notice to the specific mode when the notification mode of the hold notice is set to the specific mode;
A gaming machine described in any of features aA1 to aA6, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a second scenario setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a notice return in the presentation control device 143) that sets a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state to the specified first mode or the specified second mode after the end of the specific state, so that the notification mode of the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state is changed to the specified first mode or the specified second mode.

For example, in a configuration where play is possible in a specific state, play counts are consumed during the specific state, so it is expected that the execution period (remaining period) after the specific state for a hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the occurrence of a specified event will vary depending on the length of time spent in the specific state. In this regard, in this configuration, in addition to the notification scenario set before the occurrence of the specified event, a notification scenario is reset after the specific state ends to set the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state to a mode of the same level, etc. Therefore, even if the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state varies, the notification mode of the hold notification can be suitably changed to a mode of the same level, etc.

Feature aA8. After the end of the specific state, a reserved number grasping means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa2103) is provided to grasp the reserved number of game times before or before the special information corresponding to the reserved notification that became the target of the specific state;
The gaming machine described in feature aA7 is characterized in that the second scenario setting means sets a notification scenario to cause the specified first mode or the specified second mode to occur based on the number of reserved items grasped by the number of reserved items grasped means.

In the above configuration, when a specific state ends, the number of pending calls is determined, and the notification scenario is reset to a similar level, taking the results into account. Therefore, regardless of the duration of the specific state, the notification mode for pending calls can be appropriately changed to a similar level.

Feature aA9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aA1 to aA8, wherein the specific state is such that, for at least a specific mode of a hold notification, the notification mode is the normal mode.

If the notification mode of the pending notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode following a transition to a specific state, it is easy for the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the above features aA1 to aA8 to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

In addition, if the hold notification is set to the normal mode in a specific state, a process is required to change (upgrade) from the normal mode to a mode of the same rank after the specific state ends. However, by applying this feature to feature aA7 or feature aA8, it is possible to conveniently change from the normal mode to a mode of the same rank even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state changes.

Feature aA10. The gaming machine described in Feature aA9 is characterized by including means for restricting the execution of a specific mode in a specific state for a hold notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state (a function for restricting the execution of a hold notice effect triggered by hold information acquired in effect mode B).

For example, if a hold notification that was previously in a specific mode were configured to be in a normal mode in a specific state, while special information acquired during the specific state were changed to the specific mode, there is a concern that processing would become more complicated because it would be necessary to distinguish between special information acquired before the specific state and special information acquired during the specific state. Furthermore, if a hold notification that was changed from a specific mode to a normal mode exists, and a hold notification for special information acquired later is set to the specific mode, this could further incite anxiety that the expectation for the previous hold notification to be changed to the normal mode has disappeared. In this regard, this configuration restricts the change to the specific mode in a specific state for hold notifications corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature aA11. A gaming machine as described in Feature aA10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for causing the specific mode means to perform processing for a hold notification in which execution of the specific mode is restricted after the specific state ends (a function for executing the second setting processing for hold notice in Variation 1 of the first embodiment).

As described in the effect of feature aA10 above, by restricting the change to a specific form for special information acquired during a specific state, it is possible to prevent anxiety that the expectation level for the change to the normal form in the previous hold notification has been lost. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the opportunity to suggest the expectation level for special information acquired during a specific state will be lost. In this regard, the above configuration allows hold notifications that have imposed such restrictions to be changed to a specific form after the specific state ends, thereby ensuring the opportunity to suggest the expectation level.

Feature aA12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aA1 to aA8, wherein the specific state is such that, for at least a specific mode of hold notification, the hold notification is not executed.

If the notification mode of the pending notification is not executed upon transition to a specific state, it is easy for the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the above features aA1 to aA8 to such a configuration, each feature can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aA13: After the specific state ends, the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state is executed in the normal manner,
The gaming machine described in feature aA12 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which is set to the normal mode, to the specified first mode or the specified second mode.

If the notification mode for the hold notification is disabled following a transition to a specific state, and then the hold notification resumes in the normal mode, this may further incite anxiety that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the above features aA1 to aA8 to such a configuration, each feature can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

In addition, in a configuration in which the hold notification is not executed in a specific state and the hold notification returns to the normal state after the specific state ends, processing is required to change (upgrade) from the normal state to a state of the same rank after the specific state ends. However, by applying this feature to feature aA7 or feature aA8, it is possible to preferably change from the normal state to a state of the same rank even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state changes.

This feature can also be expressed as "the specifying means includes means (a function for executing setting processing for the preview return in the performance control device 143) for changing the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state to the specified first mode or the specified second mode after the specific state ends and the notification is executed in the normal mode."

Feature aA14. A specific effect means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher notification mode;
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the hold notification that became the target of the specific state is set to the predetermined first mode, a means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect);
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA13, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the special effect suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher-level notification mode, creating anticipation for the change to a higher-level mode and increasing the player's attention to the hold notification. In this configuration, for example, if a special effect is performed when the same-level mode is achieved after the end of a specific state, it is possible that the player will associate the higher-level notification mode with the notification mode they remember (the mode before the specified event occurred), even though the same-level mode is actually achieved. In this case, the actual notification mode will no longer match the mode associated with the player, which could undermine the player's trust in the special effect. In this regard, in the present configuration, when the same-level mode is achieved after the end of a specific state, the execution of the special effect is restricted, preventing the player from associating the mode with a higher-level mode than the actual notification mode, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the respective technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features aB group>
The feature group aB is a group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the first embodiment.

Feature aB1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A specific notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that causes a specific notification (hold advance notice performance) to be performed by a specific notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on a predetermined execution trigger (a result of a pre-reading),
Equipped with
The specific notification means is provided with first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means,
When a predetermined transition condition is met (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (a function of executing a performance mode switching process in the performance control device 143) transitions from one of a plurality of types of performance states (performance mode A, performance mode B) including a predetermined performance state to another performance state;
a second notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for the return of the notification by the performance control device 143 in the first embodiment) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined performance state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state when the specific notification (the hold notification performance by the hold image HW) is being executed and then transitions from the predetermined performance state to another performance state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, multiple types of presentation states are provided, and the presentation states are switched when specific transition conditions are met. This allows players to change their mood during play and prevents them from becoming bored with the game. In this configuration, for example, if the execution of a specific notification is canceled when the presentation state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, there is a concern that this could cause the player to mistakenly believe or feel anxious that the chance that was notified or suggested by the specific notification has also been lost. In such a case, it could be considered to limit the switching of presentation states while the specific notification is being executed, but this could lead to a situation where the frequency of switching presentation states decreases, and the purpose of providing multiple types of presentation states could be lost.

In this regard, with this feature, if a specific notification transitions from a predetermined presentation state to another presentation state while a specific notification is being executed, and then transitions back to the predetermined presentation state, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set based on the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state, so that the specific notification can be restored to its original notification mode by returning the presentation state to its original state. This notifies the player that the chance has not been lost, and the specific notification can be executed without imposing any restrictions on switching presentation states. In other words, it is possible to optimally achieve both the execution of the specific notification and the switching of presentation states.

Feature aB2. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination. A game control means (a function of executing game control processing in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game operation to be performed;
The gaming machine described in feature aB1 is characterized in that the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, making it more likely that the presentation state will change while the specific notification is being performed. By applying the configuration of feature aB1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively, and the above-mentioned effect can be optimally achieved.

Note that this characteristic may also include a feature where "the presentation state transition means includes means for switching the presentation state in accordance with the execution of a game round." In a configuration in which a specific notification is performed across game rounds and the presentation state is switched in accordance with the end of a game round, events in which the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed are particularly likely to occur, making it possible to more effectively demonstrate the above-mentioned effect of feature aB1.

Feature aB3: The information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (the return area 344f of the RAM 344),
A gaming machine described in feature aB1 or feature aB2, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of a specific notification in a subsequent specified presentation state based on information stored in the specified memory unit.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and when a transition to a later predetermined presentation state occurs, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on that stored information. This allows the specific notification in the later predetermined presentation state to be suitably restored to the original notification mode that was executed in the previous predetermined presentation state.

Feature aB4. A game control means (a function for executing a game control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game operation to be performed based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting the end of the game operation as one game;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process to specify information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification based on a result of the destination specification process before the special information that has been the subject of the destination specification process becomes the subject of the grant determination,
A gaming machine described in any of features aB1 to aB3, characterized in that the specific notification means transitions from a previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of a specific notification triggered by specific special information (hold information of the target hold image HW), and then, if it transitions to a later predetermined presentation state before the game round of the specific special information ends or before the specific special information becomes the subject of the grant determination means, it is equipped with a specific means (a function to execute setting processing for the return of the notice in the presentation control device 143, processing for the second execution of the hold notice, and processing for the third execution of the hold notice) that executes a specific notification corresponding to the specific special information in the later predetermined presentation state.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed based on the results of so-called reserve pre-read, so the notification mode of the specific notification suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the award determination will be the award response result, and can effectively arouse the player's anticipation that the award response result will be achieved before the award determination is made. In such cases, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the presentation state is switched as described above, there is a concern that the player may mistakenly believe that the award response result has disappeared or that its expectation has decreased.

In this regard, with this configuration, if the original presentation state is restored before the end of the play round of the special information that triggered the specific notification or before that special information becomes the subject of a grant determination, the notification mode of the specific notification is set to correspond to the original notification mode. This not only notifies the player that the grant response result has not been lost, but also suggests the degree of expectation for the special information before the grant determination result for the special information that triggered the specific notification is notified. This makes it possible to appropriately address the above concerns and optimally achieve both the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state.

Feature aB5. A gaming machine as described in Feature aB4, wherein the second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of a specific notification in a subsequent predetermined presentation state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state, regardless of the result of the previous specific processing in the previous predetermined presentation state.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification in a later predetermined presentation state is set based on the results of a hold look-ahead performed in a previous predetermined presentation state, it is expected that a different mode will be set than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state. Furthermore, if the notification mode of a specific notification is changed in stages (ranked up), even with the same look-ahead result, the notification mode of the specific notification at the time of switching can differ depending on the timing of the switch in the presentation state. Therefore, if the notification mode in a later predetermined presentation state is set based on the results of a hold look-ahead, it is likely that a different mode will be set than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state.

In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined presentation state is set based on the notification mode of the specific notification when switching from that presentation state to another presentation state, rather than the result of the hold-ahead read performed in the earlier predetermined presentation state. Therefore, when the presentation state returns to the original state, the notification mode can be set to the same as the specific notification that was actually notified. This allows for optimal alignment between the notification mode in the earlier predetermined presentation state and the notification mode in the later predetermined presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification mode has returned.

Feature aB6. The specific notification means is
When a specific notification is made in the predetermined presentation state triggered by the specific special information, a first scenario setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice) for setting a notification scenario (presentation scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification;
When a specific notification is made in correspondence with the specific special information in a later predetermined performance state, a second scenario setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a notice return) for resetting a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification;
The gaming machine according to Feature aB4 or Feature aB5, characterized in that it is provided with:

When a specific notification is made in a later predetermined presentation state, the period from when the system switches to the later predetermined presentation state until the game round corresponding to the special information begins or ends, i.e., the period during which the specific notification can be made, is expected to vary depending on the length of time spent in the other presentation state. In this regard, with this configuration, when a specific notification is made in a later predetermined presentation state, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset, so the notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed back to the original mode even when the above-mentioned period varies.

Feature aB7. When transitioning to a later predetermined performance state, a reserved number grasping means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa2103) is provided to grasp the reserved number of games before or before the specific special information;
The gaming machine described in feature aB6 is characterized in that the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of reserved items grasped by the number of reserved items grasping means.

With the above configuration, when switching to a later specified presentation state, the number of pending notifications is determined and the notification scenario for the specific notification is reset taking the results into account, so the notification mode for the specific notification can be suitably changed back to the original mode regardless of the duration of stay in another presentation state.

Feature aB8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aB1 to aB7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for limiting the continuation of a specific notification (a function for changing the display mode of the pending image HW to the normal display mode HMa) if a transition occurs from the previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of the specific notification.

In the above configuration, the continuation of the specific notification that had been running until then is restricted (regulated) when the presentation state is switched, which can easily give the player the misconception that their chance has been lost. By applying any of the features aB1 to aB7 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aB9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aB1 to aB8, wherein the predetermined presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific notification being executed differs from the other presentation states.

In a configuration where the likelihood of a specific notification being executed varies depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in the expectation level, etc., suggested by the specific notification differing before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, by canceling the execution of the specific notification when the presentation state is switched, it is possible to prevent such inconsistencies in expectation level, etc. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that this may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any of the above features aB1 to aB8 to such a configuration, each feature can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that in this feature, "the predetermined presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific notification being executed differs from the other presentation states" can be interpreted as including not only a configuration in which the other presentation states are set as states in which the specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the other presentation states are set as states in which the specific notification will not be executed.

Feature aB10. The plurality of notification modes in the specific notification are set so as to have different expectations for the grant response result,
A gaming machine described in any of features aB1 to aB9, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means is equipped with a first means (setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode of a specific notification in a later predetermined presentation state to a predetermined first mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode of a specific notification in a previous predetermined presentation state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set to a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize that the specific notification has returned.

Feature aB11. A gaming machine as described in Feature aB10, wherein the second notification mode setting means includes second means (setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode of a specific notification to the predetermined first mode in a later predetermined presentation state, and then setting it to a predetermined second mode (such as a higher specific display mode) that the player can recognize as being higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state.

With the above configuration, the notification mode of a specific notification in a later predetermined presentation state can be set to a higher-level notification mode than the notification mode in the earlier predetermined presentation state, preventing the notification mode in the later predetermined presentation state from being limited to the notification mode in the earlier predetermined presentation state, thereby preventing the range of possible expectations from becoming narrower. In this case, if a higher-level notification mode is suddenly set, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the notification mode in the earlier predetermined presentation state, and the presentation may become difficult to understand. In this regard, with this configuration, a notification mode of the same level is first set and then changed to a higher-level notification mode, making it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and reducing player confusion.

Feature aB12. A specific effect means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the specific notification will change to a higher notification mode;
When the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the predetermined first mode in the later predetermined performance state, a means for restricting the execution of the specific performance (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion performance);
The gaming machine according to Feature aB10 or Feature aB11, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the special effect suggests that the notification mode of the special notification will change to a higher-level notification mode, creating anticipation for the change to the higher-level mode and increasing the player's attention to the special notification. In this configuration, for example, if the notification mode of the special notification is set to a mode of the same level and a special effect is performed, it is possible that the player will associate the higher-level notification mode with the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state that they remember, even though the actual notification mode will be the same level. In this case, the actual notification mode will no longer match the mode associated with the player, which could undermine the player's trust in the special effect. In this regard, in this configuration, even if a change to a higher-level notification mode occurs, the execution of the special effect is restricted if the notification mode simply reverts to the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state. This prevents the player from associating the higher-level notification mode with the actual notification mode, thereby effectively preventing the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

Feature aB13. A game control means (a function for executing a game control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game operation so that the game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result is counted as one game, and
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that issues a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved game turns before execution;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features aB1 to aB12, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it more likely that the presentation state will change while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates, such as the degree of expectation, it is expected that there will be a significant impact if the execution of the specific notification is canceled due to a change in presentation state. By applying any of the above features aB1 to aB12 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aB14. A gaming machine as described in Feature aB13, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to specific special information (hold information of the hold image HW) to the normal mode when transitioning from the previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state while the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the specific special information (hold information of the hold image HW) is set to the specific mode (a function for setting the display mode of the hold image HW to the normal display mode HMa).

In the above configuration, when the presentation state is switched, the hold notification, which had previously been in a specific mode, is changed to a normal mode, which can easily give the player the impression that the notification has been downgraded and can easily give the player the mistaken impression that their expectations have decreased. By applying any of the above features aB1 to aB12 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features aB1 to aB14 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature a C group>
The feature aC group is a feature of the invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variation 1 of the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Feature aC1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game number control means (a function for executing a game number control process in the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a symbol display device 75) so that a game number operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game number operation is counted as one game number as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game number operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) using the predetermined notification means or a notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of reserved game turns before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process to specify information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
A specific mode means (a function that executes a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice in the first modified example of the first embodiment) that can execute a specific mode process that sets the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specific process;
Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is met (when the presentation mode is switched from the presentation mode A to the presentation mode B), the specific mode or the hold notification is switched to a restricted state in which the execution of the hold notification is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized by having a setting means (a function of executing a second setting process for hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in variant example 1 of the first embodiment) that sets the notification mode after the restricted state for the hold notification corresponding to the special information obtained during the restricted state based on the result of the destination identification process executed during the restricted state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the results of so-called hold pre-read, which can arouse player anticipation for a corresponding award result even before the start of a game. With this configuration, a restricted state may be set for hold notifications that are already set to a specific mode, restricting the execution of the specific mode or hold notification. However, if new special information is acquired in this restricted state, and such special information is not changed to the specific mode, there is a concern that player anticipation for the special information acquired during the restricted state may not be aroused.

In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode of the pending notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific mode after the restricted state ends, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation for the special information acquired during the restricted state. In this case, the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the results of the future specification process (pending pre-read process) executed during the restricted state, so the future specification process can be performed in the same way as when the restricted state is not in effect. In other words, because there is no need to change the configuration of the future specification process, it is possible to change the notification mode of the pending notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while minimizing the complexity of the configuration.

Feature aC2. A gaming machine as described in Feature aC1, wherein the destination determination means is configured to perform the destination determination process for the acquired special information in accordance with the timing of acquisition of the special information, regardless of whether the restricted state is in effect.

With the above configuration, the destination identification process can be performed in accordance with the timing of special information acquisition whether the device is in a restricted state or not, eliminating the need to distinguish between the former and latter cases. This makes it possible to change the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the device enters the restricted state, while minimizing the complexity of the configuration.

Feature aC3. The gaming machine described in Feature aC1 or Feature aC2, wherein the setting means executes the setting when or after the restricted state ends.

For example, if the notification mode after the restricted state is set based on the results of a destination-specific process executed during the restricted state, and that setting is performed during the restricted state, if a play of special information corresponding to the pending notification for which the notification mode was set is executed during the restricted state, the pending notification may end without the notification mode setting being reflected, resulting in the setting being wasted. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode is set at or after the end of the restricted state, preventing such waste and enabling efficient processing.

Feature aC4. The restricted state restricts execution of the specific mode;
A gaming machine described in any of features aC1 to aC3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode during the restricted state to the normal mode or a predetermined mode (black display mode) different from both the normal mode and the specific mode for the pending notification corresponding to special information obtained during the restricted state (a function for forcibly setting the display mode of the pending images HB1, HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode).

In the above configuration, when the execution of a specific mode is restricted, the hold notification is performed in the normal mode or in a predetermined mode that is different from both the normal mode and the specific mode. This makes it possible to prevent the specific mode from being executed while still allowing the player to recognize the number of reserved plays. By applying any of the above features aC1 to aC3 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aC5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aC1 to aC4, wherein if special information is acquired during the restricted state, predetermined information (information indicating that the special information was acquired during the restricted state) can be stored in a predetermined memory unit (reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344) so that it can be determined after the restricted state that the special information was acquired during the restricted state.

With the above configuration, even if special information acquired before the restricted state ended and special information acquired during the restricted state are mixed, the special information acquired during the restricted state can be identified based on the specified information stored in the specified storage unit. This makes it possible for the setting means related to feature aC1 to distinguish between special information acquired during the restricted state and other special information, and to process only the special information acquired during the restricted state.

Feature aC6. A plurality of presentation states including a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) are set as presentation states,
When a predetermined transition condition is met (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (a function of executing a performance mode switching process in the performance control device 143) is provided to transition from one of the multiple types of performance states to another performance state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features aC1 to aC5, characterized in that when transitioning from the first presentation state to the second presentation state, transitioning to the restricted state occurs.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is triggered when the presentation state is switched. In this case, it is expected that the player will play in the presentation state after the switch, and therefore special information will be acquired during the restricted state. By applying any of the features aC1 to aC5 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aC7. The gaming machine described in Feature aC6, wherein the second presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific mode processing being executed differs from the first presentation state.

In configurations where the likelihood of changing to a specific mode differs depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while maintaining the specific mode may result in a discrepancy in the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before and after the switch. In this case, restricting the execution of the specific mode or hold notification when transitioning from the first presentation state to the second presentation state can prevent such discrepancies in expectation. However, even if the above restrictions are applied to hold notifications that were in the specific mode before transitioning to the second presentation state, concerns arise as to how to handle new hold notifications that are issued when special information is acquired in the second presentation state. By applying any of the above features aC1 to aC6 to such a configuration, each feature can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific mode processing being executed differs from the first presentation state" means that a specific notification can be executed in both the first presentation state and the second presentation state, and can be interpreted as including not only cases where the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification differs in each presentation state, but also configurations in which the specific notification is not executed in either the first presentation state or the second presentation state.

Feature aC8. A gaming machine as described in Feature aC6 or Feature aC7, configured to end the restricted state when the second presentation state ends.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is released when the second presentation state ends, so for hold notifications of special information acquired during the second presentation state, execution of the specific mode or hold notification is restricted during the second presentation state, and then the specific mode can be implemented upon the end of the second presentation state.

Feature aC9. An execution notification unit (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a pending image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the pending game round;
A gaming machine described in any of features aC1 to aC8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sa2901 to Sa2903) for setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, which is performed by the execution notification unit, to a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the advance specification processing performed during the restricted state, when a game round of special information acquired during the restricted state is performed during the restricted state.

With the above configuration, for pending notifications whose notification mode change is restricted by transitioning to a restricted state, a change to a specific mode is permitted as play progresses up to the play count for that pending notification. Therefore, even if the play count for special information acquired during the restricted state is played during the restricted state, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for that special information.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features aC1 to aC9 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature aD group>
The feature aD group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the modifications, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned modification 2 of the first embodiment.

Feature aD1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game number control means (a function of executing a game number control process in the main control unit 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (a symbol display device 75) so that a game number operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game number operation is counted as one game number as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means, and the game number operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) using the predetermined notification means or a notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of reserved game turns before execution;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that can execute a specific mode process to change the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on a predetermined execution trigger (pre-read result);
Equipped with
The specific mode includes a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
A plurality of types of states are set, including a first state (presentation mode A) and a second state (presentation mode B) which is different from the first state in the ease with which the specific mode processing is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a mode determination means (a function for executing a processing for switching presentation modes by the presentation control device 143 in variant example 2 of the first embodiment) which determines whether, when the specific mode processing is executed in the first state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to one of a plurality of modes and then transitions to the second state, the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode in the first state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the pending notification is a specific mode, and multiple types of specific modes are set to vary the degree of expectation for the award result. Therefore, by setting the pending notification to one of the specific modes, the degree of expectation can be suggested, and the player's sense of anticipation for the award result can be suitably aroused. Furthermore, in this configuration, multiple types of states are set, including a first state and a second state that differs from the first state in the ease with which it can be changed to the specific mode. Switching between these states allows the player to change their mood during play and prevents them from becoming bored with the game.

Under such a configuration, if a transition from the first state to the second state occurs while a specific mode of pending notification is being made, maintaining the specific mode may, depending on its type, result in the corresponding expectation level being significantly different from that before the transition to the second state, which could lead to misunderstandings by the player. In this regard, with this configuration, when such a transition occurs, a determination is made as to whether the notification mode of the pending notification after the transition to the second state will be one that the player will recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode in the first state. This prevents inconsistencies in expectation levels from occurring, making it possible to optimally issue pending notifications after the transition to the second state.

Note that the "second state in which the likelihood of executing the specific mode processing differs from the first state" in this feature can be interpreted as including not only a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification can be changed to a specific mode, but also a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification cannot be changed to a specific mode.

Feature aD2. A gaming machine as described in Feature aD1, wherein the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state.

In the above configuration, the second state makes it less likely that the hold notification will be in a specific mode than the first state. Therefore, when comparing the expectation level for the response outcome when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to a specific mode, it is expected that the second state will be higher than the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state involves a transition from a low state to a high state of expectation for the response outcome for the specific mode. However, by applying the configuration of feature aD1 described above to such a transition, it is possible to suppress inconsistencies in expectation levels and ensure that the hold notification is delivered appropriately after the transition to the second state.

In addition, in this feature, "the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state" can be interpreted as including a configuration in which the probability of the hold notification being set to a specific mode in the second state is set lower than in the first state, as well as a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification is not changed to a specific mode.

Feature aD3. The gaming machine described in Feature aD1 or Feature aD2, wherein the mode determination means determines that the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state is higher than a predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode), and determines that the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state is lower than the predetermined notification mode, and determines that the notification mode of the hold notification is allowed to be the predetermined mode.

In the above configuration, the notification mode upon transition to the second state is compared with a predetermined notification mode set for the second state to determine whether the notification mode in the first state should be set to a mode of the same rank. This allows the determination of whether or not to set the notification mode to a mode of the same rank in the second state based on the expected degree of expectation associated with each mode, making it possible to optimally perform hold notifications after transitioning to the second state.

In this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "a predetermined notification mode set in response to the second state."

Feature aD4: A destination specification means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) is provided that executes a destination specification process to specify information (such as a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the target of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the grant determination;
the specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on a result of the previous specific process,
A gaming machine described in any of features aD1 to aD3, characterized in that the mode determination means makes the determination based on the results of the destination identification processing for the special information corresponding to the hold notification that is the subject of determination by the mode determination means.

In the above configuration, the change to a specific mode is made based on the results of the advance specification process (so-called look-ahead results). When the mode determination means determines whether to set a mode of the same rank, the determination is made based on the look-ahead results of the hold notification that is the subject of that determination. This makes it possible to determine whether to set a mode of the same rank based on the look-ahead results of the hold notification, that is, the notification results for the game round that is executed when the special information of the hold notification becomes the subject of determination by the grant determination means, and the game round presentation for that game round.

Feature aD5: A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set in accordance with the results of the destination specification process (return determination table),
The mode determination means
A grasping means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3105) for grasping the result of the destination specification process for the special information corresponding to the hold notification to be determined by the mode determining means;
A means for making the determination based on an upper limit state corresponding to the result grasped by the grasping means among the plurality of types of states (a function for executing the process of step Sa3106);
The gaming machine described in feature aD4 is characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, multiple types of upper limit modes are set corresponding to the look-ahead results, and when the mode determination means determines whether to use the same mode, the upper limit mode corresponding to the look-ahead result of the hold notification being determined is applied and the above determination is made. This makes it possible to determine whether to use the same mode without ensuring that the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state exceeds the expectation corresponding to the first state.

Feature aD6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aD1 to aD5, characterized in that the specific mode means, when executing the specific mode processing, executes the hold notification in a first specific mode (blue display mode HMb), which is one of the multiple modes, and then includes means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification to a second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) that is higher than the first specific mode (function for executing hold notification setting processing in the presentation control device 143).

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode, the notification mode is gradually changed to a higher mode. In this configuration, when the process of setting the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode is performed in the first state, if a transition to the second state occurs early after the specific mode is set, the specific mode at that time is expected to be a relatively lower mode (a mode with low expectations). Conversely, if the transition occurs late, the specific mode at that time is expected to be a relatively higher mode (a mode with high expectations). In other words, the timing of the transition to the second state determines which specific mode the hold notification is set to. By applying any of features aD1 to aD5 to this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to set a mode of the same rank depending on the notification mode at each time, making it possible to optimally provide hold notifications after a transition to the second state.

Note that this feature may further include the feature that "the mode determination means includes means for determining whether the notification mode in the first mode immediately before transitioning to the second state is a predetermined mode that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode is of the same rank as the notification mode in the first mode immediately before transitioning to the second state."

Feature aD7: The second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than the first state,
A gaming machine described in any of features aD1 to aD6, characterized in that when the specific mode processing is executed in the second state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to one of multiple modes and then transitions to the first state, it is equipped with a means for not executing the judgment by the mode judgment means (a function for skipping the processing of steps Sa3105 to Sa3107 if a negative judgment is made in step Sa3104).

In the above configuration, when a hold notification transitions from the second state, in which it is relatively unlikely to be in a specific mode, to the first state, in which it is relatively likely to be in a specific mode, i.e., when the expectation for the grant response result for the specific mode switches from a high state to a low state, the system does not determine whether the mode will be of the same level. This prevents excessive restrictions on the opportunities for maintaining the notification mode of the hold notification, and also reduces the processing load.

Feature aD8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aD1 to aD7, characterized in that it is equipped with a change means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3110) that, when the mode determination means determines that the predetermined mode should be used, changes the notification mode of the hold notification that is the subject of that determination from the normal mode to the predetermined mode.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to an equal-rank mode, it is first set to the normal mode and then changed to the equal-rank mode. In this case, whether the notification mode is set to an equal-rank mode or not, the notification mode of the hold notification can be configured to switch to the normal mode when switching from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness that occurs when the specific mode is changed to the normal mode due to a determination that the mode should not be set to an equal-rank mode. Furthermore, by configuring the mode to switch to the normal mode and then to the specific mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the hold notification, which was set to the normal mode, will change to the specific mode after switching to the second state, including when it is determined that the mode should not be set to an equal-rank mode, and it is possible to maintain anticipation for the hold notification.

Feature aD9. A specific effect means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher notification mode;
When the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the change means, a means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect);
The gaming machine described in feature aD8 is characterized by being equipped with:

In the above configuration, the special effect suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher-level notification mode, creating anticipation for the change to the higher-level notification mode and increasing the player's attention to the hold notification. In this configuration, for example, if a special effect is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, it is expected that the player will use the notification mode in the first state that they remember as a reference and associate it with a higher-level notification mode. In this case, there is a concern that even though a special effect has been performed, it may give the unnatural impression that the mode has simply returned to the original state. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher-level notification mode, the execution of the special effect is restricted when changing from the normal state to a mode of the same rank, making it possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature aD10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aD1 to aD9, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3108) for, when the mode determination means determines that the predetermined mode should not be used, changing the notification mode of the pending notification that was the subject of that determination to the normal mode or to a notification mode lower than the predetermined mode.

In the above configuration, if it is determined that the same level of notification should not be used, the notification mode of the hold notification that was the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or a lower level of notification mode. This prevents the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state from exceeding the expected level corresponding to the first state, making it possible to provide hold notifications in an appropriate manner after transitioning to the second state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features aD1 to aD10 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features a E group>
The feature group aE is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variation 3 of the first embodiment.

Feature aE1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A special game state means (a function of executing a large prize opening/closing process in the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
A game number control means (a function for executing a game number control process in the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a symbol display device 75) so that a game number operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game number operation is counted as one game number as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game number operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) using the predetermined notification means or a notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of reserved game turns before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process to specify information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
A specific mode means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that can set the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the first specific process,
In addition to the special game state, multiple game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means is the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) that transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
A specifying means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return by the presentation control device 143 in the third modified example of the first embodiment) for making the notification mode after the special game state different from the notification mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, for the notification mode for the hold notification that was made a specific mode before the special game state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the results of so-called hold pre-reading, which can suggest the degree of expectation for a bonus result and effectively arouse the player's anticipation. Furthermore, in this configuration, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and if the determination result of the award determination means is a bonus result and a special game state is executed, the game state will be transitioned to one of these multiple game states. In a configuration with multiple game states like this, even if the special information used for the award determination is the same, differences may occur in the result of the award determination and the game round presentation performed in a game round depending on the game state. In this regard, with this configuration, if the game state before and after the special game state is different, the notification mode after the special game state will be different from the notification mode before the special game state, for a hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state is executed. Therefore, even if the award determination results or game number presentation change due to differences in the game state, the hold notification will not mislead the player, and it will be possible to appropriately execute the hold notification in the game state after the transition.

Feature aE2. A gaming machine according to Feature aE1, characterized in that the specification means includes means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode for the hold notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3417 after making a negative judgment in step Sa3504).

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and a hold notification is issued. This effectively prevents a hold notification that does not match the actual expectation level from being issued after the special game state, which can lead to misunderstandings by the player. Furthermore, by uniformly setting the mode to the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the notification mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature aE3. The specifying means
a first means for setting the normal mode;
After the first means sets the notification mode to the normal mode, the second means determines whether or not to set the notification mode of the hold notification set to the normal mode to a specific mode, and sets the notification mode of the hold notification based on the result of the determination (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice);
The gaming machine described in feature aE2 is characterized by being equipped with:

By changing the notification mode of a hold notification that was in a specific mode before the special game state to a normal mode after the special game state, based on the fact that the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award determination results and game number presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may become impossible to notify or suggest the expected level of special information corresponding to the hold notification. In this regard, with this configuration, a hold notification that was in a normal mode is given the opportunity to change to a specific mode afterwards, so it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expected level, etc.

Feature aE4: An execution notification unit (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a pending image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the pending game round;
The identification means
a first means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the hold notice, which is set to a normal mode by the first means, is to be set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the result of the determination;
A gaming machine according to feature aE2 or aE3, characterized in that it is provided with:

By changing the notification mode of a hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award determination results and game round presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may become impossible to notify or suggest the expected level of special information corresponding to the hold notification. In this regard, with this configuration, an opportunity is given to change a hold notification that was set to a normal mode to a specific mode as play progresses up to the game round of that hold notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expected level, etc.

Feature aE5. When a game is played, the game performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game is set based on the special information (reserved information) that was the subject of the grant judgment that triggered the game or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. A game performance setting means (a function for executing the special chart variation display process in the performance control device 143) is provided.
The gaming machine described in feature aE4 is characterized in that the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the specified notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game play presentation setting means.

In the above configuration, the game play effect setting means determines whether the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game play effect. This makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode while adapting it to the game play effect actually performed in the game play after the special game state, when the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature aE2 above, "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game-time presentation setting means" can be expressed as "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game-time presentation setting means, regardless of the information stored in the specified memory unit."

Feature aE6. The specific mode is set with a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (a return area 344f of the RAM 344),
A gaming machine described in any of features aE1 to aE5, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same.

For example, if the notification mode after a special game state is set based on the results of a reserve read performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different mode from the notification mode before the special game state. In this regard, with this configuration, when a special game state is executed in a situation where a specific mode of reserve notification exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on that stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state" can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state, regardless of the result of the advance specification process."

Feature aE7: The specific mode is set with a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
A gaming machine described in any of features aE1 to aE6, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is one that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state. Therefore, the pending notification that aroused the player's anticipation by changing to a specific mode before the special game state can arouse the same anticipation even after the special game state.

Feature aE8. The specific mode is set with a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
The identification means
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, a first means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to the normal mode;
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, a second means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) sets the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same display mode of the same rank, the same character, etc.) that allows a player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features aE1 to aE7, characterized in that the second means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa3507) that can set the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode and then to the specified mode.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is set to a mode equivalent to the notification mode before the special game state, the notification mode is first set to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the hold notification is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode as the special game state is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness that occurs when the notification mode is changed to the normal mode due to a difference in game state. Furthermore, by configuring the notification mode to change to the normal mode after changing to the specific mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the hold notification, which was set to the normal mode, will change to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including when the game state is different, and it is possible to maintain anticipation for the hold notification.

Feature aE9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aE1 to aE8, wherein the identification means includes game state determination means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3416) that determines whether the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same during the special game state or when the special game state ends.

In the above configuration, a determination of whether the game state is the same is made while the special game state is in progress or when the special game state ends. This allows for quick response after the special game state to determine what mode the notification mode of the hold notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, should be after the special game state. Therefore, even if the number of holds prior to the hold notification is small after the special game state, the notification mode of the hold notification can be appropriately adjusted.

Feature aE10. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 65) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A switching control means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) that switches the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then switches it to the second state;
Equipped with
The special game state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once,
A gaming machine described in feature aE9, characterized in that the game state determination means makes the determination during the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state during a special game mode, it is expected that the processing load will be relatively high, as it is necessary to perform effects based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. If a match determination is made during such a period, there is a concern that this will result in an even higher load. In this regard, with this configuration, the match determination is made during the period when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature aE11. The award determination means performs the award determination based on first information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) included in the special information,
A game round performance setting means (a function of executing a special chart variation display process in the performance control device 143) is provided for setting a game round performance (reach performance) to be performed in the game round based on second information (value of the variation type counter CS) included in the special information or specific information (variation pattern) derived from the second information,
The destination specification process specifies the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specification information corresponding to the second information at a timing before the first information included in the predetermined special information becomes a target of the grant determination,
A gaming machine described in any one of features aE1 to aE9, characterized in that the multiple types of gaming states include a first gaming state (either a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state) and a second gaming state (either a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state, and a gaming state different from the first gaming state) in which the gaming round presentation or specific information corresponding to predetermined second information (a variable type counter CS with a value of 80) is different from the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, the game cycle presentation is set based on the second information included in the special information, and the corresponding game cycle presentation is configured to differ between the first game state and the second game state even if the value of the second information is the same. Therefore, if the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, and the presentation mode of the hold notification after the special game state is made the same as the presentation mode before the special game state, there is a risk that the game cycle presentation suggested by the hold notification before and after the special game state will not be consistent. By applying any of the above features aE1 to aE9 to this configuration, each feature can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aE12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aE1 to aE10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for not executing the hold notification in the special game state (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3411).

When changing the notification mode of a hold notification upon the end of a special game state, there is a concern that if the notification mode of the hold notification that had been active until then is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state, the player may feel unnatural. For example, downgrading the notification mode of a hold notification to a normal mode or a lower-level notification mode is likely to be noticeable to the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, with this configuration, because hold notifications are not executed in the special game state, when changing the notification mode, a period can be inserted during which the hold notification itself, including other hold notifications, is not executed. This prevents the change in notification mode from being too noticeable, making it possible to mitigate the unnatural feeling. Another advantage is that not executing specific notifications makes it easier for players to focus on the special game state effects.

Feature aE13. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) that acquires special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A special game state means (a function of executing a large prize opening/closing process in the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
A game number control means (a function for executing a game number control process in the main control unit 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a symbol display device 75) so that a game number operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game number operation is counted as one game number as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game number operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) using the predetermined notification means or a notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of reserved game turns before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process to specify information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
A specific mode means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that can set the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the first specific process,
In addition to the special game state, multiple game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means is the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) that transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
A specifying means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return by the performance control device 143 in the third modified example of the first embodiment) for changing the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, depending on whether the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same or not, for the hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode based on the results of so-called hold pre-reading, which can suggest the degree of expectation for a bonus result and effectively arouse the player's anticipation. Furthermore, in this configuration, multiple game states are set as the game state, and if the determination result of the award determination means is a bonus result and a special game state is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of these multiple game states. In a configuration with multiple game states like this, even if the special information used for the award determination is the same, differences in the award determination results and the game round presentation performed in a game round may occur depending on the game state. In this regard, in this configuration, for hold notifications that were set to a specific mode before the special game state was executed, the notification mode in the game state after the special game state is executed differs depending on whether the game state before and after the execution of the special game state is the same. This allows the notification mode to be set taking into account changes in the award determination results, game round presentation, etc. due to differences in the game state, making it possible to optimally execute hold notifications in the game state after the transition.

Feature aE14. The specific mode is set with a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (a return area 344f of the RAM 344),
The gaming machine described in feature aE13 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same.

For example, if the notification mode after a special game state is set based on the results of a reserve read performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different mode from the notification mode before the special game state. In this regard, with this configuration, when a special game state is executed in a situation where a specific mode of reserve notification exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on that stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state" can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state, regardless of the result of the advance specification process."

Feature aE15. The specific mode is set with a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
The gaming machine described in feature aE13 or feature aE14 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is one that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state. Therefore, the pending notification that aroused the player's anticipation by changing to a specific mode before the special game state can arouse the same anticipation even after the special game state.

Feature aE16. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aE13 to aE15, wherein the specification means includes means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode for the hold notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different (a function for executing the processing of Step Sa3417 after making a negative judgment in Step Sa3504).

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and a hold notification is issued. This effectively prevents a hold notification that does not match the actual expectation level from being issued after the special game state, which can lead to misunderstandings by the player. Furthermore, by uniformly setting the mode to the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the notification mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature aE17. An execution notification unit (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a pending image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the pending game round,
The identification means
a first means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the hold notice, which is set to a normal mode by the first means, is to be set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the result of the determination;
The gaming machine described in feature aE16 is characterized by comprising:

By changing the notification mode of a hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award determination results and game round presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may become impossible to notify or suggest the expected level of special information corresponding to the hold notification. In this regard, with this configuration, an opportunity is given to change a hold notification that was set to a normal mode to a specific mode as play progresses up to the game round of that hold notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expected level, etc.

Feature aE18. When a game is played, the game is performed based on the special information (reserved information) that was the subject of the award judgment that triggered the game, or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. A game performance setting means (a function for executing the special chart variation display process in the performance control device 143) is provided.
The gaming machine described in feature aE17 is characterized in that the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the specified notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game play presentation setting means.

In the above configuration, the game play effect setting means determines whether the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game play effect. This makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode while adapting it to the game play effect actually performed in the game play after the special game state, when the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature aE2 above, "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game-time presentation setting means" can be expressed as "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game-time presentation setting means, regardless of the information stored in the specified memory unit."

Feature aE19. The specific mode includes a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
The identification means
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same, a first means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) sets the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same display mode of the same rank, the same character, etc.) that allows a player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state;
When the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different, a second means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa3504) for setting the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode for the hold notification that was set to the specific mode before the special game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features aE13 to aE18, characterized in that the first means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa3507) that can set the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode and then to the specified mode.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is set to a mode equivalent to the notification mode before the special game state, the notification mode is first set to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the hold notification is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode as the special game state is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness that occurs when the notification mode is changed to the normal mode due to a difference in game state. Furthermore, by configuring the notification mode to change to the normal mode after changing to the specific mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the hold notification, which was set to the normal mode, will change to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including when the game state is different, and it is possible to maintain anticipation for the hold notification.

It is possible to apply the configurations of features aE9 to aE12 to features aE13 to aE19. In this case, applying these configurations can provide additional benefits.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features aE1 to aE19 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature a F group>
The feature aF group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variation 4 of the first embodiment.

Feature aF1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information (reserved information) acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A specific notification means (a function of executing a first execution process of the hold notice in the performance control device 143) that executes a specific notification (display of a hold image) corresponding to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
Equipped with
A first destination specifying means (a function of executing a first reserved advance reading process by the performance control device 143 in the fourth modified example of the first embodiment) for specifying information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment at a predetermined timing (retrieval timing of reserved information) before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
When a predetermined event (such as an opening/closing execution mode) occurs during the execution of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information, a second destination specifying means (a function of executing a second reserved advance reading process by the performance control device 143 in the fourth modified example of the first embodiment) specifies information (such as a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment for the predetermined special information at a specific timing (such as the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode) after the predetermined event;
Equipped with
The specific notification means
A first means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information before the predetermined event based on the identification result of the first destination identification means;
A second means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information after the predetermined event based on the identification result of the second destination identification means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made based on the results of so-called look-ahead processing, which can suggest the degree of expectation for a specific notification to result in a prize-granting outcome, thereby effectively stimulating the player's sense of anticipation. In such a configuration, the state changes as a specified event occurs, and even if the value of the special information used to determine whether a prize will be awarded remains the same, there may be differences in the results of the award determination before and after the specified event. In this regard, in this configuration, if a specified event occurs while a specific notification is being made, look-ahead processing is again performed after the specified event, targeting the special information that triggered the specific notification, and the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the results. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification made before the specified event can be adjusted to be appropriate for after the specified event, making it possible to make the specific notification after the specified event more appropriate.

Feature aF2. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination. A game control means (a function of executing game control processing in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game operation to be performed;
The gaming machine described in feature aF1 is characterized in that the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made over a relatively long period of time, which makes it easy for a specific event to occur while the specific notification is being made. By applying the configuration of feature aF1 to such a configuration, this feature can be made to function effectively, and the above-mentioned effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aF3. A gaming machine described in Feature aF1 or Feature aF2, characterized in that the award information (random number value corresponding to a jackpot) or the determination conditions (probability of winning) used by the award determination means can be different before and after the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, differences may occur in the results of the award determination before and after the specified event. For this reason, if a specific notification after a specified event is made using the notification mode before the specified event, there is a concern that this may suggest a different result from the notification result actually given in the game round (the result of the award determination). By applying the configuration of feature aF1 or feature aF2 above to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode to match the actual notification result in the game round and make a notification after the specified event, making it possible to make a specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature aF4. The gaming machine described in Feature aF3, wherein the second destination determination means performs the determination by applying the additional information or the judgment condition corresponding to the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after a specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the pre-reading process is performed by applying the additional information and judgment conditions corresponding to the state after the specified event. This allows the notification mode for the specific notification that was performed before the specified event to be adjusted to match the actual notification result in the game, making it possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an optimal manner.

Feature aF5. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, with a game control means (a function of executing game control processing in the main control device 162) so that the game operation is performed.
A game time performance setting means (a function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) for setting a game time performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in a game time based on special information (hold information) or specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features aF1 to aF4, characterized in that the game presentation corresponding to predetermined special information or predetermined specific information derived from the predetermined special information (a fluctuation pattern with a value of 80) is configured to be different before and after the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information or specific information is the same, differences may occur in the game round presentation set by the game round setting means before and after the specified event. For this reason, there is a concern that if a specific notification after a specified event is made using the notification mode before the specified event, it may suggest a different presentation from the game round presentation actually performed in that game round. By applying the configuration described in any of Features aF1 to aF4 above to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode for the specific notification made before the specified event to match the actual game round presentation, and to perform a notification after the specified event, making it possible to perform the specific notification preferably after the specified event.

Feature aF6. The first destination specifying means and the second destination specifying means are provided with means for specifying, as information corresponding to the judgment result, a game play effect corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information;
The gaming machine described in feature aF5 is characterized in that the second destination identification means identifies a game presentation corresponding to the specified special information or specific information corresponding to the specified special information in response to the specified event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after a specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the game presentation and specific information are pre-read to correspond to the state after the specified event. This allows the notification mode for the specific notification that was performed before the specified event to be adjusted to match the actual game presentation, making it possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature aF7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aF1 to aF6, wherein the second means sets the notification mode after the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second destination identification means.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification is configured to change frequently following the occurrence of a predetermined event, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode after a predetermined event is set taking into account not only the identification result of the second destination identification means, but also the notification mode before the predetermined event. Therefore, for example, if the notification mode before the predetermined event is compared with the identification result of the second destination identification means and there is no problem with maintaining the same mode after the predetermined event, the notification mode before the predetermined event can be continued and the specific notification can be carried out. This makes it possible to prevent excessive changes in the notification mode following a predetermined event, and makes it possible to execute the specific notification after the predetermined event in a natural manner.

Feature aF8. The specific notification is set to a plurality of types of modes (a normal display mode HMa, a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that vary in the degree of expectation that the result of the grant determination will be a grant determination result that corresponds to the grant information,
The gaming machine described in feature aF7 is characterized in that the second means is equipped with a mode determination means (function to execute processing of steps Sa4703 to Sa4705) that determines whether the notification mode after the specified event will be a specified mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the specified event, based on the notification mode before the specified event and the determination result of the second destination determination means.

In the above configuration, multiple types of notification modes for the specific notification are set, each with different expectations for a corresponding award result. In a configuration in which expectations are set in stages like this and multiple notification modes are provided, the range of expectations corresponding to one notification mode is narrow, so if a specific notification after a specified event is made using a notification mode before a specified event, there is a high likelihood of a difference in the expected level suggested before and after the specified event. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the notification mode before the specified event and the identification result of the second identification means, it is determined whether the notification mode after the specified event is a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode before the specified event. Therefore, even in a situation in which multiple notification modes are set, it is possible to match the expected levels and appropriately issue a specific notification after a specified event.

Feature aF9. The gaming machine described in Feature aF8, wherein the second means includes means for setting the notification mode after the predetermined event to a normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or a notification mode lower than the notification mode before the predetermined event if the mode determination means determines not to set the predetermined mode (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3417 after making a negative determination in step Sa4706).

In the above configuration, if it is determined that the notification mode should not be of the same rank, the notification mode of the specific notification that was the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or a lower-rank notification mode. This prevents the notification mode after a specified event from exceeding the corresponding expectation level before the specified event, making it possible to perform specific notifications after a specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature aF10. A game operation control means (a function for executing a game operation control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game operation to be performed based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting it as one game operation;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that issues a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved game turns before execution;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features aF1 to aF9, wherein the specific notification is the hold notification.

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it more likely that a specified event will occur while the specific notification is being made. In addition, because it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates is the target of the expectation level, it is expected that the impact of differences in expectation levels before and after a specified event will be significant. By applying any of the above features aF1 to aF9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aF11. A special game state (a function of executing the opening and closing process of the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
In addition to the special game state, multiple game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means is the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process when the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162 ends) that transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features aF1 to aF10, wherein the predetermined event is the special gaming state.

Some gaming machines transition to a standard gaming state, high probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state, or other gaming states upon transitioning to a special gaming state. In such gaming machines, even if the value of the special information used to determine whether a bonus is awarded is the same in the gaming state before and after the special gaming state, differences may occur in the results of the determination before and after the special gaming state. By applying any of the above features aF1 to aF10 to such a configuration, each feature can function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aF12. A gaming machine as described in Feature aF11, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3411) for not executing the specific notification in the special game state when the machine transitions to the special game state while the specific notification is being executed.

When changing the notification mode of a specific notification upon the end of a special game state, there is a concern that if the specific notification that had been in effect until then is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state, the player may feel unnatural. For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower-level notification mode, this is likely to be noticeable to the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific notification is not executed in the special game state, so a period in which the specific notification itself is not executed can be inserted when changing the notification mode. This prevents the change in notification mode from being too noticeable, making it possible to mitigate the unnatural feeling. Another advantage is that not executing the specific notification makes it easier for the player to focus on the special game state effects.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the respective technical ideas. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they may be combined across feature groups.

<Feature aG group>
The feature aG group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 5 and 6 of the first embodiment.

Feature aG1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process to specify information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
A first specific notification means (a function of executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that causes a specific notification (hold notice performance) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) based on the result of the above-mentioned destination specific processing;
Equipped with
The first specific notification means is provided with a first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) that sets the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means,
If a predetermined abnormality (power interruption state) occurs during the execution of the specific notification, a second specific notification means (a function of executing a process for restoring the hold notice by the performance control device 143 in the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, and a function of executing a performance setting process by the performance control device 143 in the modified example 6 of the first embodiment) is provided to re-execute the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second specific notification means is equipped with a second notification mode setting means (a function of executing display mode setting processing by the presentation control device 143 in variants 5 to 6 of the first embodiment) that sets the notification mode of the specific notification that is re-executed after the specified abnormality is resolved based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the specified abnormality occurred, the result of the advance specific processing executed before the specified abnormality occurred, or the result of the advance specific processing executed after the specified abnormality is resolved.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued based on the results of so-called pre-read processing, which can suggest the degree of expectation for a corresponding result to be achieved through the specific notification, thereby ideally stimulating the player's sense of anticipation. Since multiple notification modes are set for the specific notification, setting one of these modes to execute the specific notification can suggest a higher or lower level of expectation. Under this configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs while a specific notification is being issued and the abnormality is subsequently resolved, the specific notification that was being issued before the abnormality occurred will be re-executed. This allows the specific notification to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, preventing the specific notification from being erased due to the occurrence of an abnormality. In this case, the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification is set based on the notification mode before the abnormality occurred, the pre-existence result performed before the abnormality occurred, or the pre-existence result performed again after the abnormality occurred, making it possible to ideally restore the specific notification that was being issued before the abnormality occurred.

Feature aG2. A gaming machine as described in Feature aG1, characterized in that if the specified abnormality occurs while a specific notification is being made, the specific notification is not made.

In a configuration where a specific notification is not executed due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is easy for players to feel anxious that not only has the specific notification been lost, but the expectation associated with that notification has also been lost. By applying the configuration of feature aG1 described above to such a configuration, this feature can be made to function effectively, and the above-mentioned effect can be optimally achieved.

Feature aG3. A gaming machine as described in Feature aG1 or Feature aG2, wherein the second notification mode setting means performs the setting at a predetermined timing during the period from when the predetermined abnormality is resolved to when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the notification determination means.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification is set during the period from when the abnormality is resolved to when the play cycle of the special information that triggered the specific notification begins. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification can be restored to the mode before the abnormality occurred before the play cycle of the special information begins, making it possible to suggest the degree of expectation before that play cycle.

Feature aG4: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality,
The information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification (information about the hold image) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345),
A gaming machine described in any of Features aG1 to aG3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to retain information stored in the specified memory unit when the specified abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in a specified memory unit, and the information stored in the memory unit is retained and not lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the memory unit, making it possible to perform the specific notification appropriately after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature aG5: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality,
The specific notification is set in the plurality of notification modes so that the degree of expectation of the grant corresponding result is different,
A gaming machine described in any of features aG1 to aG4, characterized in that if the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a specified abnormality is a notification mode higher than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), it is equipped with a specification means that sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification to a notification mode lower than the predetermined mode (function of executing processing of step Sa5407), or does not execute the specific notification (function of not executing the hold preview performance after the abnormality is resolved).

For example, if an abnormality causes a change in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, an inconsistency will arise between the results of the look-ahead performed before the abnormality occurred and the results of the award determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. In such a case, if a specific notification suggested a high level of expectation before the abnormality occurred and is re-executed as is after the abnormality is resolved, the result of the notification for that game round (the result of the award determination) and the game round presentation performed in that game round may not match the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification, raising the concern that this may leave an unpleasant impression on the player. In this regard, with the above configuration, if the notification mode of the specific notification being performed when the abnormality occurred was at or above a predetermined level and suggested a certain level of expectation, the specific notification is re-executed with a lower notification mode, or the specific notification is not executed at all. This prevents the specific notification from suggesting a level of expectation that does not match the notification results for the game round, making it possible to effectively prevent the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring.

Feature aG6: When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained,
A gaming machine described in feature aG5, characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means (a function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode of a specific notification that has been set by the identification means to a notification mode below the specified mode or a specific notification that has been set not to be executed based on the judgment result of the award judgment means when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the award judgment by the award judgment means after the specified abnormality has been resolved.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed or not executed after the predetermined condition is resolved and limited to a lower notification mode, the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of a grant determination, and the notification mode of the specific notification is reset or the not-executed specific notification is executed. This prevents the suggested expectation from remaining low or the specific notification from disappearing completely. In this case, the notification mode is reset based on the results of the grant determination, so the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode that is consistent with the notification results for the game round.

Feature aG7: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification based on a result of the prior specific processing executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result of the destination specification process can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344),
A gaming machine described in any of Features aG1 to aG6, characterized in that it is configured to be able to retain information stored in the specified memory unit when the specified abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the look-ahead results is stored in a specified memory unit, and the information stored in the memory unit is retained and not lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode for the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the memory unit, making it possible to optimally issue the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature aG8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification based on a result of the prior specific processing executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The specific notification is set in the plurality of notification modes so that the degree of expectation of the grant corresponding result is different,
If the specified result of the destination specifying means becomes a specified result (winning result) before the occurrence of the specified abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is allowed to be a notification mode (red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) higher than the specified mode (green display mode HMc),
A gaming machine described in any of features aG1 to aG7, characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means that either limits and sets the notification mode of the specific notification to a notification mode that is equal to or lower than the specified mode (a function that executes the processing of step Sa6303), or does not execute the specific notification if the result of the previous specific processing executed before the specified abnormality occurs is a specified result (a function that does not execute the hold notice presentation after the abnormality is resolved).

For example, if an abnormality causes a change in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, an inconsistency will arise between the results of the look-ahead performed before the abnormality occurred and the results of the award determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. In such a case, if a specific notification suggested a high level of expectation before the abnormality occurred and is then executed again after the abnormality is resolved, the result of the notification for that game round (the result of the award determination) and the game round presentation performed in that game round may not match the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification, raising the concern that this may leave the player with an unpleasant impression. In this regard, with the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is executed in a manner that is limited to or below a predetermined level, or if the look-ahead result before the abnormality occurred was a predetermined result, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not executed. This prevents the specific notification from suggesting a level of expectation that does not match the result of the notification for that game round, making it possible to effectively prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

Feature aG9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained,
The gaming machine described in feature aG8 is characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means (a function of executing the fourth execution process of the hold notice in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode of the specific notification set by the identification means to a notification mode lower than the specified mode or the specific notification that has been set not to be executed based on the judgment result of the award judgment means when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the award judgment by the award judgment means after the specified abnormality has been resolved.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed or not executed after the predetermined condition is resolved and limited to a lower notification mode, the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of a grant determination, and the notification mode of the specific notification is reset or the not-executed specific notification is executed. This prevents the suggested expectation from remaining low or the specific notification from disappearing completely. In this case, the notification mode is reset based on the results of the grant determination, so the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode that is consistent with the notification results for the game round.

Feature aG10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aG1 to aG9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for restricting the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved if, in the event that a specified abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, the result of the specific processing performed before the abnormality occurred cannot be determined after the specified abnormality is resolved (a function for proceeding to step Sa6311 if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6308).

With the above configuration, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of a specific notification, and the look-ahead result on which the notification was based cannot be identified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is restricted, thereby preventing an erroneous expectation level from being suggested.

Feature aG11. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification based on a result of the prior specific processing performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved,
A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a game operation control means (a function of executing game operation control processing in the main control device 162) is provided which controls the game operation so that the game operation is performed when a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination is given and the game operation is completed, and the game operation is performed when the notification result corresponds to the determination result of the award determination and the game operation is completed,
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to perform a hold notification (hold image) corresponding to the number of games whose execution is on hold,
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode), as the specific notification,
The device is configured to be able to store specific information (change location information) that allows the user to understand the specific hold notification being issued in a situation where multiple hold notifications are being issued, in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup RAM 345),
A gaming machine described in any of Features aG1 to aG10, characterized in that it is configured to be able to retain information stored in the specified memory unit when the specified abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, which hold notification is issuing the specific notification is stored in a specified memory unit, and this information is backed up when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, it is possible to conveniently determine which hold notification was issuing the specific notification before the abnormality occurred.

Feature aG12. The gaming machine described in Feature aG11 is characterized in that, after a specified abnormality is resolved, the hold notification that was issued before the specified abnormality occurred is identified based on the specific information stored in the specified memory unit, and the specific processing is performed on the identified hold notification.

With the above configuration, the next specific processing after the abnormality is resolved is performed on hold notifications for which a specific notification was issued before the abnormality occurred, preventing the player from feeling unnatural when a specific notification is issued after the abnormality is resolved for hold notifications for which a specific notification was not issued before the abnormality occurred. Furthermore, compared to when the next specific processing is executed on all hold notifications issued after the abnormality is resolved, the number of times the next specific processing is executed can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load when returning to the normal state.

Feature aG13. A gaming machine as described in Feature aG11 or Feature aG12, characterized in that it is equipped with means for, after a predetermined abnormality has been resolved, identifying a hold notification that was not issued before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality based on the specific information stored in the predetermined memory unit, and setting the notification mode of the identified hold notification to the normal mode.

This configuration prevents specific notifications from being issued after the abnormality is resolved for hold notifications that were not issued before the abnormality occurred, making it possible to ensure consistency in notification behavior before and after the abnormality occurred.

Feature aG14. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aG1 to aG13, wherein the specified abnormality is a power outage.

If a power outage occurs while a specific notification is being executed, the power supply to the gaming machine will be cut off, causing the specific notification that had been executed up until that point to suddenly disappear. In this case, it is expected that the player will become anxious about whether the expected level of expectation indicated before the power outage will still remain after power is restored. By applying any of the above features aG1 to aG113 to such a configuration, the specific notification can be re-executed appropriately after power is restored, allowing each of these features to function effectively.

Note that this "power outage state" can also be expressed as "a power outage state in which no power is being supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)."

Feature aG15. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination. A game operation control means (a function of executing game operation control processing in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game operation to be performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to give a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold times before execution,
The specific notification sets the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode),
A gaming machine according to any one of features aG1 to aG14, characterized in that the specific mode is set to the plurality of types of notification modes.

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it more likely that an abnormality will occur while the specific notification is being made. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification is targeting, such as the level of expectation, it is expected that the impact will be significant if the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality. By applying any of the above features aG1 to aG14 to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features aG1 to aG15 above. It is also possible to apply some or all of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature aH group>
The feature aH group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the modifications, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the seventh modification of the first embodiment.

Feature aH1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process to specify information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that can execute a specific notification (hold notice performance) using a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on the result of the first specific processing;
When a predetermined condition is met (when the first mode switching lottery is won in the seventh modified example), a presentation state switching means (a function of executing the presentation mode switching process by the presentation control device 143 in the seventh modified example of the first embodiment) executes a process to switch from one of the multiple presentation states (presentation mode A, presentation mode B) to another presentation state;
A switching restriction means (a function for executing a mode switching determination process by the performance control device 143 in the seventh modified example of the first embodiment) that can restrict the switching of the performance state by the performance state switching means when a specific notification is being executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made based on the results of so-called pre-read processing, which can suggest the degree of expectation for a corresponding award result and effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation. Furthermore, multiple types of presentation states are provided and switching between these presentation states allows the player to change their mood during play and prevents them from becoming bored with the game. In this configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being made, there is a concern that the player may become distracted by the change in presentation state and lose focus on the specific notification, or conversely, if the player is so focused on the specific notification that the presentation state changes without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, this configuration restricts the switching of presentation states when a specific notification is being executed, thereby preventing the overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of presentation states. This allows the execution of the specific notification and the switching of presentation states to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for players to notice, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation state after the switch is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation. However, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden on the design team.

Feature aH2. The plurality of types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) that differs from the first presentation state in the likelihood of a specific notification being executed,
The gaming machine described in feature aH1 is characterized in that the switching restriction means is provided with a means for restricting switching to the second presentation state when a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state.

In a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed varies depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in the expectation level suggested by the specific notification differing before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the specific notification in the presentation state after the switch and the result of the award determination that is actually notified may differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the configuration of feature aH1 above to such a configuration, the occurrence of this discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from feeling an unpleasant impression.

Note that the "second presentation state in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the second state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aH3. A gaming machine described in Feature aH2, wherein the second presentation state is a presentation state set to make it less likely that a specific notification will be executed than in the first presentation state.

If the likelihood of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is lower than in the first presentation state, switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed raises concerns that the apparent level of expectation may be higher than it actually is, presenting the player with a higher level of expectation than it actually is. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from the first presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is relatively high (the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low), to the second presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is low (the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the switch is restricted if the specific notification is being executed, thereby making it possible to effectively prevent the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than it actually is.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state" can be interpreted as including a configuration in which the probability of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is set lower than in the first presentation state, as well as a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aH4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aH1 to aH3, wherein the switching restriction means includes means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa7207) for restricting switching of the presentation state based on the result of the prior specific processing that triggered the specific notification.

In the above configuration, the switching of the presentation state is restricted based on the results of the pre-read process that triggered the specific notification. For example, if there is a high possibility of a specific notification being issued, such as when a jackpot is predicted, the configuration can be such that the switching of the presentation state is restricted based on the pre-reading until the end of the play round for the special information for which the pre-reading was made. In this case, the switching can be restricted quickly, and overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state can be effectively prevented. This configuration can also be expected to have the following effect: If the pre-reading result is a jackpot, etc., it is expected that a teasing effect, such as a preview effect, will be performed to build up the player's anticipation even before the special information is determined to be awarded. If the presentation state is switched during the execution of this teasing effect, there is a risk that the teasing effect will be difficult for the player to understand. In this case, by restricting the switching of the presentation state based on the pre-reading of a jackpot, etc., it is possible to prevent the presentation state from switching in the middle of the teasing effect, and effectively prevent the effect from becoming difficult to understand.

Also, for example, it is possible to configure the system so that switching of presentation states is not generally permitted while a specific notification is being executed, but that switching of presentation states is permitted in special cases, such as when a jackpot is predicted. In this case, even though a switching of presentation states would not normally occur, the occurrence of such a switch may violate the rules from the player's perspective, suggesting a jackpot or the like. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize switching of presentation states as one of the presentations that indicates the degree of expectation.

Note that the "means for restricting switching" in this feature can also be expressed as "means for determining whether or not switching is restricted."

Feature aH5. A gaming machine according to Feature aH4, characterized in that the switching restriction means includes means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa7207) for restricting switching of the presentation state based on whether the result of the advance specification process that triggered the specific notification was a predetermined first result (a jackpot prediction result) corresponding to the award corresponding result or a predetermined second result (a SPSP reach presentation prediction result) corresponding to a predetermined expectation level as the expectation level of the award corresponding result.

By restricting or allowing the change in presentation state when the predicted result is a jackpot result (first result) or a result with high expectations (second result), it is possible to optimally demonstrate the above-mentioned effects of feature aH4.

Feature aH6. The specific notification is set with a plurality of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) that vary in the degree of expectation of the grant corresponding result,
A gaming machine described in any of features aH1 to aH5, characterized in that the switching restriction means is provided with a means (step Sa7211) for restricting the switching of the presentation state based on the notification mode of a specific notification.

For example, if a configuration were adopted that uniformly restricted the switching of presentation states while a specific notification was being executed, there was a risk that switching of presentation states would be excessively restricted or the frequency of specific notifications would be reduced, which could undermine the significance of providing multiple types of presentation states or the significance of having a function to execute specific notifications. In this regard, the above configuration restricts switching of presentation states based on the notification mode of the specific notification currently being executed, making it possible to operate in a way that does not restrict switching of presentation states but allows such switching in the case of a specific notification that corresponds to an expectation level below a certain level. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching of presentation states or the execution of specific notifications, and to optimally secure these opportunities.

Feature aH7. A gaming machine according to Feature aH6, wherein the restricting means restricts the switching of the presentation state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a notification mode higher than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and allows the switching of the presentation state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a mode lower than the predetermined mode.

With the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the switching of presentation states only when a specific notification of a predetermined type or higher is being executed. This prevents excessive restrictions on switching presentation states and the execution of specific notifications, making it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

Feature aH8. The plurality of types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) set so that the frequency of execution of the specific notification is lower than that of the first presentation state;
The specific notification is set with a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) that have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
The switching restriction means
When a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state, a first means (a function for executing processing when a positive determination is made in step Sa7206) for restricting switching to the second presentation state regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification;
When a specific notification is being executed in the second presentation state, a second means (a function of determining negative in step Sa7206 and executing processing in step Sa7211) restricts switching to the first presentation state based on the notification mode of the specific notification;
A gaming machine according to any one of Features aH1 to aH7, characterized in that it comprises:

In the above configuration, when switching from a presentation state (first presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low to a presentation state (second presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high, the switching of presentation states is uniformly restricted, thereby preferably preventing a higher expectation level from being suggested than actually exists. Conversely, when switching from a presentation state (second presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high to a presentation state (first presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low, the switching of presentation states is restricted only to certain notification patterns, thereby preventing excessive restrictions on switching of presentation states and making it possible to preferably ensure opportunities for such switching.

Feature aH9. The presentation state switching means
A switching determination means (a function for executing the process of step Sa7102) for determining whether or not to switch the presentation state based on a predetermined trigger (a timing for switching the presentation state);
A switching execution means (a function for executing the process of step Sa7106) for switching the performance state when the switching determination means determines that the performance state should be switched;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of Features aH1 to aH8, wherein the switching restriction means restricts at least one of the determination by the switching determination means and the execution by the switching execution means.

In the above configuration, when restricting the switching of presentation states, at least one of the switching decision of whether to switch presentation states or not and the execution process of whether to execute the switch is restricted, making it possible to appropriately restrict the switching of presentation states.

Feature aH10. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination. A game operation control means (a function of executing game operation control processing in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game operation to be performed;
A gaming machine according to any one of features aH1 to aH9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, making it more likely that the presentation state will change while the specific notification is being performed. By applying any of the features aH1 to aH9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aH11. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination. A game operation control means (a function of executing game operation control processing in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game operation to be performed,
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to give a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold times before execution,
A gaming machine described in any of features aH1 to aH10, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it more likely that the presentation state will change while the specific notification is being made. In addition, because it becomes clear which special information the specific notification is targeting, such as the degree of expectation, it is expected that there will be a significant impact if the degree of expectation suggested by the change in presentation state changes. By applying any of the above features aH1 to aH10 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features aH1 to aH11 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature group I>
The feature group aI is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variation 8 of the first embodiment.

Feature aI1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process to specify information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that can execute a specific notification (hold notice performance) using a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on the result of the first specific processing;
A presentation state switching means (a function of executing the presentation mode switching process by the presentation control device 143 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment) for switching from one of a plurality of presentation states (presentation mode A, presentation mode B) to another presentation state;
Equipped with
The performance state switching means
When a predetermined first condition is met (when a positive determination is made in the determination process of step Sa8109 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment), a first means (a function of executing the process of step Sa8111 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment) for setting the specific state (standby state) in which it is understood that the presentation state will be switched thereafter;
When a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific state (when a positive determination is made in the determination process of step Sa8115 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment), a second means for switching the presentation state (a function for executing the process of step Sa8117 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment) is provided.
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a restriction means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa8203 in variant example 8 of the first embodiment) that can restrict the execution of a specific notification when the specific state is in place.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made based on the results of so-called look-ahead processing, so the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation for a corresponding award result, effectively stimulating the player's sense of anticipation. Furthermore, multiple types of presentation states are provided, and switching between these presentation states allows the player to change their mood during play and prevents them from becoming bored with the game. In this configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being made, there is a concern that the player may be distracted by the change in presentation state and lose attention to the specific notification, or conversely, if the player is so focused on the specific notification that the presentation state changes without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted under a specific state where it is known that the presentation state will subsequently change, thereby preventing the presentation state from changing while the specific notification is being executed. This allows the execution of the specific notification and the change in presentation state to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for the player to notice, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation state after the change is not suitable for the specific notification currently being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation. However, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden on the design process.

Feature aI2. A gaming machine as described in Feature aI1, wherein the restriction means is equipped with a means (a function for executing pending command response processing in the presentation control device 143) that can restrict the execution of a specific notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state.

With the above configuration, the execution of specific notifications can be restricted for special information acquired during a specific state in which the switching of the presentation state is awaited. This broadens the scope of special information that is subject to the restriction of specific notifications, preventing excessive restrictions on the opportunities to execute specific notifications.

Feature aI3. A gaming machine as described in Feature aI1 or Feature aI2, wherein the restriction means is capable of restricting the execution of a specific notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state, regardless of the result of the prior specific processing for that special information.

With the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of specific notifications regardless of the results of the look-ahead processing. This makes it possible to effectively prevent the presentation state from switching while a specific notification is being executed. Furthermore, because the restriction on the execution of specific notifications is not affected by the results of the look-ahead processing, the look-ahead processing can proceed in the same way as in a non-specific state, even in a specific state (during the waiting period for a specific notification). In other words, because there is no need to change the configuration of the look-ahead processing (look-ahead specific processing), it is possible to restrict specific notifications in a specific state while preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

Feature aI4. The multiple types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) that differs from the first presentation state in the likelihood of a specific notification being executed,
A gaming machine described in any of features aI1 to aI3, characterized in that the restriction means is capable of restricting the execution of a specific notification when the specific state is present at least when switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state.

In a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed varies depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in the expectation level suggested by the specific notification differing before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the specific notification in the presentation state after the switch and the result of the award determination that is actually notified may differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying any of the above features aI1 to aI3 to such a configuration, the occurrence of this discrepancy can be avoided, making it possible to effectively prevent the player from feeling an unpleasant impression.

Note that the "second presentation state in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aI5. A gaming machine described in Feature aI4, wherein the second presentation state is a presentation state set to make it less likely that a specific notification will be executed than in the first presentation state.

If the likelihood of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed raises concerns that this will increase the apparent level of expectation, giving the player a higher level of expectation than actually exists. In this regard, this configuration restricts the execution of a specific notification when the specific state is for switching from the first presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is relatively high (the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low), to the second presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is low (the expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high). This prevents switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is being executed, making it possible to effectively prevent the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than actually exists.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state" can be interpreted as including a configuration in which the probability of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is set lower than in the first presentation state, as well as a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aI6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aI1 to aI5, characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means (a function for executing a second setting process for a hold notice in the presentation control device 143 and a first execution process for a hold notice) that, if a specific notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the restriction means, executes the specific notification corresponding to the special information after the specific state or after the presentation state changes.

In the above configuration, a specific notification whose execution was restricted due to a specific state is executed after the specific state has been entered or after the presentation state has been switched, thereby preventing the execution of the specific notification from remaining restricted for special information acquired during the specific state, making it impossible to suggest the level of expectation.

Feature aI7. A gaming machine according to Feature aI6, characterized in that the specification means includes means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa8302) for executing a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state for special information for which the execution of the specific notification has been restricted by the restriction means, based on the results of the prior specification processing performed during the specific state.

With the above configuration, specific notifications after a change in presentation state are made based on the results of look-ahead processing performed during the specific state, so specific notifications can be made without having to perform look-ahead processing again after a change in presentation state. This allows existing configuration for look-ahead processing (predetermined processing) to be used as is, preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

Feature aI8. The specification means is provided with specification determination means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa8307) for determining whether or not to execute a specific notification after the specific state or after a change in the presentation state based on the result of the previous specification processing performed during the specific state, for special information for which execution of a specific notification has been restricted by the restriction means, and is configured to execute the specific notification when it is determined by the specification determination means to execute the specific notification;
The gaming machine described in feature aI6 or feature aI7 is characterized in that the specific judgment means makes the judgment by applying a judgment condition (execution winning probability) set in accordance with the presentation state after the switch.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a specific notification after a specific state or a change in presentation state, and if it is determined that the notification should be executed, the specific notification is executed. In this case, the determination is made using the determination conditions set for the presentation state after the change, rather than the determination conditions used when the special information was acquired (determination conditions set for the presentation state before the change). This makes it possible to appropriately execute a specific notification after a specific state or a change in presentation state, even if the likelihood of the specific notification being executed differs between the presentation state before the change and the presentation state after the change.

Feature aI9. The notification mode of the specific notification is set to a plurality of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation of the grant corresponding result is different,
A gaming machine described in any of features aI6 to aI8, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sa8310 to Sa8313) for applying lottery conditions (such as a scenario lottery table) set in accordance with the presentation state after the switch to select one of the multiple types of presentation states when executing a specific notification after a specific state or after a switch in presentation state.

In the above configuration, multiple types of notification modes are set for specific notifications, allowing expectations to be assigned and indicated, more effectively stimulating the player's sense of anticipation. With this configuration, when a specific notification is executed after a specific state or a change in presentation state, the notification mode is selected by applying the selection conditions set in accordance with the presentation state after the change. Therefore, even if the expectations corresponding to each notification mode differ between the presentation state before the change and the presentation state after the change, the specific notification can be executed appropriately after a specific state or a change in presentation state.

Feature aI10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features aI6 to aI9, wherein if special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (information generated during standby) is stored in a predetermined memory unit (holding memory area 344c of RAM 344) so that it can be determined after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state.

With the above configuration, even if special information acquired before the specific state is entered and special information acquired during the specific state are mixed after the specific state is entered or the presentation state is switched, the special information acquired during the specific state can be identified based on the specified information stored in a specified memory unit. This makes it possible to distinguish between special information acquired during the specific state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the specific state.

Feature aI11. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination. A game control means (a function of executing game operation control processing in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game operation to be performed,
A gaming machine according to any one of features aI1 to aI10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, which makes it more likely that the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state will overlap. By applying any of the features aI1 to aI10 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aI12. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination. A game operation control means (a function of executing game operation control processing in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game operation to be performed,
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to give a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of hold times before execution,
A gaming machine described in any of features aI1 to aI11, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the change in presentation state are likely to overlap. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates is the target of expectation, etc., it is expected that there will be a significant impact if the indicated expectation changes as the presentation state changes. By applying any of the above features aI1 to aI11 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features aI1 to aI12: Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12. It is also possible to apply some or all of the technical ideas in combination to each of the configurations of Features aI1 to aI12. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

In addition, to each of the features of the feature aA group through feature aI group described above, the technical ideas shown in each feature of the other feature groups can be applied individually, or the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine (ball-operated reel-type gaming machine): A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as it finally stops; the pattern fluctuation begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern fluctuation is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses game balls into the ball receiving tray; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Feature b Group A to Feature b Group N>
The inventions described in the following Feature bA group to Feature bN group are a group of inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the above-mentioned second embodiment and its variations.

<Feature b Group A>
The feature bA group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bA group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific outcome, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bA1. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state (a function for executing a process for transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transition to the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function for executing a process for transition determination to the second time-shortened game state and a process for transition determination to the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
a specific game state transition means capable of transitioning to the specific game state without passing through a special game state when the result of the transition determination is a transition response result corresponding to a transition to the specific game state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
Equipped with
The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
a number update means for updating the number of times the game has been played since the game was switched to the specific game state or the remaining number of times the game has been played in the specific game state (a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination processing by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, a function for executing high frequency support mode update processing by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after the update is performed by the number update means, the transition determination means performs the transition determination.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player transitions when the result of a special judgment is a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. This specific game state ends when the number of play times since transitioning to the specific game state reaches the upper limit, so the control performed during the play time period involves processing to update the number of play times since transitioning to the specific game state and the remaining number of play times in the specific game state.

The above configuration also has a specific game state that can be transitioned to without passing through a special game state. Conventionally, specific game states were transitioned through a special game state, so the transition decision on whether to transition to the specific game state could be made within the special game state. In other words, the transition decision could be made separately from the game round, but when transitioning to a specific game state without passing through a special game state, the state immediately before transitioning to the specific game state is a game round, so the transition decision process must be incorporated into the control performed during the execution period of a game round.

In other words, in the control performed during the execution period of a game, it is necessary to both update the number of plays to end the specific game state and determine whether to transition to the specific game state. However, depending on the order in which these processes are performed, there is a concern that the specific game state may not be controlled appropriately. In this regard, with this configuration, the order is to perform the number of plays update before the transition determination, which prevents the number of plays from being updated during a game immediately after transitioning to the specific game state in the same game. In other words, if a transition to the specific game state occurs in a game, the number of plays update can be controlled to start from the next game, which makes it possible to appropriately secure the number of plays remaining after transitioning to the specific game state and enable appropriate control of the game state.

Feature bA2: The transition determination means is configured to execute the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (such as reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, or scoring in a specific scoring area) is met, and when the transition condition is met, the result of the transition determination is the transition result;
A gaming machine according to feature bA1, characterized in that the transition condition can be established during a game in a specific gaming state.

In this configuration, a transition trigger to a specific gaming state can occur while the player is in the specific gaming state. In such a case, by executing the count update before executing the transition determination, it is possible to appropriately ensure the remaining number of times after transitioning to the specific gaming state as described in feature bA1 above. In addition, if the game turn in which the transition trigger is established is the final game turn of the preceding specific gaming state (the game turn in which the upper limit of the number of turns has been reached), it is possible to end the preceding specific gaming state and then transition to the subsequent specific gaming state based on the establishment of the transition trigger.

Furthermore, because the end of the preceding specific game state and the transition to the subsequent specific game state can be achieved within the same game turn, a seamless transition from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state can be achieved without an intervening game turn in the normal game state. This creates a state equivalent to adding more turns to the remaining number of plays in the specific game state, making it possible to appropriately arouse the player's joy when they successfully transition to the subsequent specific game state.

Feature bA3: The configuration is such that predetermined information (first support flag, second support flag, third support flag, etc.) corresponding to a specific game state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314),
The specific game state is entered when the predetermined information is set to a first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is set in the various flag storage area 314e), and the specific game state is ended when the predetermined information set to the first state is set to a second state different from the first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is not set in the various flag storage area 314e),
A termination determination means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied (such as a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination processing by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, or a function for executing high frequency support mode update processing by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10),
a termination process execution means for setting the predetermined information to the second state or recognizing that the predetermined information should be set to the second state based on the determination result of the termination determination means (such as a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, or a function for executing high frequency support mode update process by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature bA1 or feature bA2, characterized in that the processing by the termination processing execution means is configured to be performed after the update by the number of times update means and before the transition determination by the transition determination means.

In the above configuration, after the number of plays is updated, the specific game state is internally terminated or recognized as having to be terminated based on the result, and then a transition determination is made as to whether to transition to the specific game state. As a result, if the game round in which the transition trigger is met is the final game round of the preceding specific game state, the preceding specific game state can be terminated and then a transition to the subsequent specific game state can be made within the same game round.

In addition, even if the game turn in which the transition trigger is established is not the final game turn of the preceding specific game state, if the configuration allows transition to the subsequent specific game state during the preceding specific game state, the preceding specific game state can be internally terminated before transition to the subsequent specific game state. This allows for a smooth switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state.

Feature bA4: The configuration is such that predetermined information (first support flag, second support flag, third support flag) corresponding to a specific game state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314),
The specific game state is entered when the predetermined information is set to a first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is set in the various flag storage area 314e), and the specific game state is ended when the predetermined information set to the first state is set to a second state different from the first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is not set in the various flag storage area 314e),
a termination process execution means for setting the predetermined information to the second state or recognizing that the predetermined information should be set to the second state based on the establishment of the termination condition (such as a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, or a function for executing high frequency support mode update process by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
A gaming machine described in any one of features bA1 to bA3, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means for restricting the transition by the specific gaming state transition means when the specified information is set to the first state (such as a function for restricting transition to the second time-shortened gaming state or the third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 in the second embodiment, variant 1 of the second embodiment, variant 3, variant 6, variants 8 to 10).

In the above configuration, transitioning to a subsequent specific game state while in a preceding specific game state is restricted. This allows priority to be given to continuing the preceding specific game state, preventing frequent transitions between game states from complicating gameplay and reducing ease of play. However, on the other hand, there is a risk that opportunities to transition to a specific game state will be limited. In this regard, by executing the count update before executing the transition determination, transition to the subsequent specific game state can be permitted for the final play count of the preceding specific game state (the play count that has reached the upper limit). This makes it possible to increase the opportunities to transition to a specific game state compared to when transition to a subsequent specific game state is restricted throughout the specific game state.

Feature bA5: The transition determination means is configured to execute the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (such as reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, or scoring in a specific scoring area) is met, and if the transition condition is met, the result of the transition determination is the transition result;
The transition condition includes that the number of times that the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state becomes a specific number of times (ceiling number of times),
A gaming machine described in any one of features bA1 to bA4, characterized in that it includes a predetermined specific gaming state (such as a high probability gaming state to which a transition is made in response to a 4R special jackpot result A in the second embodiment, or a first time-saving gaming state to which a transition is made in response to a 4R normal jackpot result A) that is set so that the number of games that reaches the upper limit number of games can be the same as the number of games that reaches the specific number of games.

The above configuration includes a specific gaming state to which a transition is made when the cumulative number of times a non-specific result (a so-called "missing result") that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state in a special judgment reaches a specific number, and a predetermined specific gaming state is set so that the number of times the upper limit is reached can be the same as the number of times the specific number is reached. In this case, if a predetermined specific gaming state is implemented as the preceding specific gaming state, the cumulative number of times the non-specific result has reached the specific number in the final game run, allowing a transition from the predetermined specific gaming state to a specific gaming state triggered by reaching the specific number. In other words, even if the predetermined specific gaming state ends without a specific result being achieved, the transition to the specific gaming state triggered by reaching the specific number of times increases the number of times remaining in the specific gaming state, significantly increasing the player's chances of achieving a specific result in the specific gaming state compared to when such an increase in the remaining number of times is not achieved. This not only provides the player with the enjoyment of anticipating that a specific game state will be selected as the specific game state, but also increases the appeal of the specific game state (its appeal to players), making it possible to effectively stimulate players' desire to play.

Feature bA6. A gaming machine described in Feature bA5, in which the predetermined specific gaming state is a specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) to which transition is made via a special gaming state.

With this configuration, when a special game state ends and a transition to a predetermined specific game state occurs, even if the predetermined specific game state ends without a specific result being achieved, the remaining number of times in the specific game state can be increased by transitioning to the specific game state when the specific number of times is reached. This increases the chance of achieving a specific result and transitioning to the special game state again while maintaining the advantageous specific game state after the special game state ends, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature bA7: The transition determination means is configured to execute the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (such as reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, or scoring in a specific scoring area) is met, and if the transition condition is met, the result of the transition determination is the transition result;
A gaming machine described in any of features bA1 to bA4, characterized in that the transition conditions include the result of the special judgment being a predetermined result (special missing result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (miss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state being a predetermined result (special missing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

The above configuration has a specific game state that is entered based on a special judgment resulting in a predetermined result different from the specific result (a so-called jackpot result), or based on a specific judgment made in a game round that resulted in a non-specific result (a so-called miss result) in the special judgment resulting in a predetermined result. In this case, if the game round that resulted in the predetermined result in the special or specific judgment is the final game round of the specific game state, a transition to the specific game state is permitted when the predetermined result is won. In other words, if the predetermined result is achieved in the special or specific judgment in the final game round of the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state can be increased. Generally, during the final game round of the specific game state, players tend to feel anxious about the end of the specific game state and feel disappointed. However, with this configuration, the final game round of the specific game state can function as a chance game round, effectively stimulating their desire to play. This allows players to enjoy the game until the end of the specific game state, increasing its enjoyment.

Feature bA8. The transition determination means is configured to execute the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (such as reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, or scoring in a specific scoring area) is met, and if the transition condition is met, the result of the transition determination is the transition result;
A means for setting the upper limit number of times when the state is shifted to a specific game state (a function for executing a shift process when the opening/closing execution mode is ended by the main control device 162 according to the second to tenth variations of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any one of features bA1 to bA7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is met in a situation where a specific gaming state is in effect (a function for executing processing for transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 in variant 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing processing for transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 in variants 4 and 5, and a function for executing processing for transition determination to the second time-shortened gaming state, processing for transition determination to the third time-shortened gaming state, and processing for transition to a time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 in variant 7).

In the above configuration, if a transition condition is met during a specific game state, the upper limit on the number of times the specific game state can be played is reset. In other words, if a transition condition is met during a preceding specific game state, transition to a subsequent specific game state is permitted. However, by performing a count update before making a transition determination, as in feature bA1 above, it is possible to appropriately ensure the remaining number of times after transitioning to the subsequent specific game state.

Feature bA9. The game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle.
A gaming machine described in any one of features bA1 to bA8, characterized in that the update by the number update means and the transition determination by the transition determination means can be executed in one processing cycle of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the count update and transition determination are performed within the same processing cycle. This effectively prevents gameplay in the normal game state from intervening when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state.

Feature bA10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second actuation port 63) through which a game ball can enter,
The specific gaming state is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in a normal gaming state,
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA9, wherein the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on a ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

In the above configuration, when the game transitions to the special game state, it becomes easier for the ball to score into the specified scoring means than in the normal game state, making it easier to receive a special judgment. By applying any of the features bA1 to bA9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature bA11. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state (a function for executing a process for transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transition to the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function for executing a process for transition determination to the second time-shortened game state and a process for transition determination to the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
a specific game state transition means capable of transitioning to the specific game state without passing through a special game state when the result of the transition determination is a transition response result corresponding to a transition to the specific game state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
Termination process execution means for terminating the specific game state or recognizing that the specific game state should be terminated when a predetermined termination condition (reaching the upper limit number of times) is met (a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, a function for executing high frequency support mode update process by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after processing is performed by the end processing execution means, the transition determination means makes the transition determination.

In the above configuration, the specific game state includes a specific game state to which a transition is made without passing through a special game state. Conventionally, specific game states were transitioned through a special game state, so the transition decision on whether to transition to a specific game state could be made within the special game state. In other words, the transition decision could be made separately from the game round, but when transitioning to a specific game state without passing through a special game state, the state immediately before the transition to the specific game state is a game round, so the transition decision process must be incorporated into the control performed during the execution period of a game round.

In addition, the control performed during the execution period of a game round also requires determining whether predetermined termination conditions corresponding to the end of the specific game state have been met, and performing termination processing to terminate the specific game state or recognize that it should be terminated. In other words, the control performed during the execution period of a game round requires both a transition determination as to whether to transition to the specific game state and termination processing to terminate the specific game state, but there is a concern that the control of the specific game state may not be carried out appropriately depending on the order in which these processes are performed.

In this regard, with this configuration, the termination process is executed first, followed by the transition determination. Therefore, if a transition trigger to a subsequent specific game state occurs during a specific game state, the preceding specific game state can be terminated before transitioning to the subsequent specific game state. This prevents multiple specific game states from overlapping, enabling optimal control of game states. Moreover, because the termination of the preceding specific game state and the transition to the subsequent specific game state can be processed within the same game round, switching from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state can be performed without an intervening transition to the normal game state. This allows the specific game state, which is advantageous to the player, to be maintained even in situations where the above-mentioned transition occurs, making it possible to realize a configuration that is excellent in playability.

Feature bA12: The transition determination means is configured to execute the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (such as reaching a ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, or scoring in a specific scoring area) is met, and if the transition condition is met, the result of the transition determination is the transition result;
The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
A means for setting the upper limit number of times when the state is shifted to a specific game state (a function for executing a shift process when the opening/closing execution mode is ended by the main control device 162 according to the second to tenth variations of the second embodiment);
means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is met in a specific gaming state (a function for executing a process for transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modifications 4 and 5, and a function for executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened gaming state, a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened gaming state, and a process for transition to a time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 7);
The gaming machine described in feature bA11 is characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, if a transition condition is met during a specific game state, the upper limit on the number of times the specific game state can be played is reset. In other words, because transition to a subsequent specific game state is permitted when a transition condition is met during a preceding specific game state, processing is required to switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state. In this configuration, by executing the termination processing before executing the transition determination, as in feature bA11 above, it is possible to smoothly switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state.

It is possible to apply any of the configurations of features bA1 to bA10 to feature bA11 or feature bA12. In this case, applying these configurations can provide additional benefits.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bA1 to bA12 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bB group>
The feature bB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bB group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bB1. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A first determination means (a function of executing a special drawing hit determination in the main control device 162) that executes a first determination (a special drawing hit determination) based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
A bonus granting means (such as a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can grant a predetermined bonus (such as an open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the first determination being a specific result (such as a jackpot result);
A second determination means (a function of the main control device 162 to perform a normal winning/losing determination) that performs a second determination (a normal winning/losing determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (the passing of the game ball through the through gate 64);
Based on the result of the second judgment being a predetermined result (support winning result), the variable ball entry control means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the switching control to the second mode is performed at least once. A variable ball entry control means (function of executing processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) executes variable ball entry control (opening and closing game of the role),
A game time control means (a function of executing a normal game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time so that a game time operation is started based on the second determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the second determination is counted as one game time (normal game time), and
Equipped with
The game state has a plurality of game states including a first game state (normal game state, etc.) and a second game state (second time-saving game state, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising specific ending means (such as a function of executing the processes of steps Sb1311 to Sb1315, step Sb3509, step Sb4107, and step Sb5811 by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and variants 1 to 10 of the second embodiment) that can end a game round currently being executed in a situation in which a first game state changes to a second game state (a situation in which a normal game state changes to a second time-shortened game state, a situation in which a normal game state changes to a third time-shortened game state, a situation in which a second time-shortened game state changes to a normal game state, a situation in which a third time-shortened game state changes to a normal game state, a situation in which a first time-shortened game state changes to a normal game state, a situation in which a second time-shortened game state or a third time-shortened game state changes to the other of the time-shortened game state, etc.).

In the above configuration, a first determination is made based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means, and if the result is a specific result, a predetermined bonus is awarded. A second determination is made separately from the first determination, and a game round is executed to notify the result. If the result of the second determination is a specific result, variable ball entry control is executed, in which the variable ball entry means enters the first mode. In gaming machines with such a configuration, the game rounds and variable ball entry control modes vary depending on the type of gaming state. For example, some gaming rounds in the changed gaming state are executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than in the gaming state before the change. In such cases, for example, if the second determination is made immediately before the gaming state changes, the determination is initiated under the gaming state before the change, and the game rounds based on the result of the determination are executed in a manner disadvantageous to the player. In this regard, in this configuration, if a game round is being executed when the first gaming state changes to the second gaming state, the game round is forcibly terminated, allowing the second determination in the second gaming state to be executed promptly. This allows for faster start timing of game rounds corresponding to the second game state, making it possible to optimally control the game state.

Note that the phrase "when a game turn is currently being played in a situation where the first game state is changing to the second game state" in this feature can also be expressed as "when a game turn that was started in the first game state is currently being played in a situation where the first game state is changing to the second game state."

Feature bB2: The bonus granting means includes a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the first determination being a specific result,
The gaming machine described in feature bB1 is characterized in that the specific ending means is capable of ending a game round currently being played when the game round is being played in a situation where the game state changes from a first game state to a second game state without going through a special game state.

For example, if the game state changes via special game states, such as first game state → special game state → second game state, the game rounds and variable ball entry control started in the first game state can be ended within the special game state, preventing their impact on the second game state. However, if the game state changes from the first game state to the second game state without going through the special game state, there is a concern that the game rounds corresponding to the first game state will be more likely to continue in the second game state, as there is no time period to absorb the game rounds started in the first game state. In such cases, applying the configuration of feature bB1 above makes it possible to optimally achieve the above effect.

Feature bB3. A gaming machine as described in Feature bB1 or Feature bB2, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb1313 by the main control unit 162) for changing the result of the second judgment in the game round to be terminated to a result different from the predetermined result (a normal miss result) when the termination is performed by the specific termination means.

In the above configuration, when a game round is forcibly terminated due to a change in the game state, if the result of the second judgment that triggered that game round is a predetermined result corresponding to the execution of variable ball entry control, it is changed to another result that does not execute variable ball entry control. This allows the next game round to start without variable ball entry control after the forced termination of the game round. As a result, the start timing of the game round corresponding to the second game state (the game state after the change) can be advanced, making it possible to respond more quickly to changes in the game state.

Feature bB4. The game control means controls the game so that, after the game operation is performed, a specific notification (a stop display of a normal figure) is made as a notification result corresponding to the result of the second judgment,
A gaming machine described in any of features bB1 to bB3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to restrict the termination by the specific termination means when a specific notification is being executed in a situation where the game state is changing.

For example, forcibly terminating a specific notification (notification of the result of a specific judgment) while that notification is being executed would shorten the notification period. As a result, there is a concern that the visibility of the specific notification will decrease, making it difficult to understand the results of the second judgment. In this regard, with this configuration, forced termination due to changes in the game state is limited when a specific notification is being executed. This ensures an appropriate notification period and prevents the visibility of the specific notification from being impaired.

When this feature is applied to feature bB3, the following effect can be achieved. For example, in a configuration in which forced termination is performed due to a change in the game state even while a specific notification is being made, if the result of the second judgment is changed from the predetermined result to a result different from the predetermined result, a specific notification corresponding to the result before the change (a notification that the predetermined result has been reached) is made, and then the notification is terminated by forced termination. In other words, the predetermined result (the result before the change) is announced until the timing of forced termination, and then the game round itself ends due to the forced termination, so the changed result is not announced. This could lead to a situation in which variable ball entry control is not performed even though the predetermined result is announced, which could reduce players' trust in the gaming machine and the gaming hall. In contrast, feature bB4, by exceptionally not performing forced termination when a specific notification is being made, can prevent inconsistencies between the result indicated by the specific notification and the result of the changed second judgment. This ultimately makes it possible to prevent events in which variable ball entry control is not performed even when the predetermined result is announced.

Feature bB5. A first game control means (a function for executing the special game control process in the main control device 162) that controls the first game to be performed so that the first game action is started based on the first determination, and a predetermined notification (stop display of the special game) corresponding to the result of the first determination is performed after the first game action is completed, and the first game is performed as one of the first game actions (special game actions);
A second game round control means for controlling the second game round to be played as the game round;
transition means for transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific ball entry area, reaching the upper limit number of times, etc.) is met (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function for executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state, a process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features bB1 to bB4, characterized in that the transition means is configured to transition to a specific gaming state at a predetermined timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the middle timing of the confirmation display, the start timing of the variable display, or the timing during the variable display) before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the predetermined transition condition is met.

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met, the next first game round begins, the first first game round since the transition to the second game state. In this case, with the above configuration, the transition to the second game state occurs before the predetermined notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met. This ensures a grace period (a period in which the game state has transitioned to the second game state, but the first game round since the transition to the second game state has not yet been played) between the transition to the second game state and the first first game round is played. If the second game round ends in response to the transition to the second game state, and the next second game round is started during that grace period, the second game round can be started before the first game round after the transition to the second game state. As a result, the start timing of the variable ball entry control is advanced, making it possible to create a situation in which balls are more likely to enter the variable ball entry means sooner after the transition to the second game state.

Feature bB6. The second game control means controls the second game to be performed by starting the second game operation based on the second determination, and after the second game operation is completed, the second notification (display of the stop of the normal game) corresponding to the result of the second determination is performed, counting this as one second game (normal game),
A gaming machine described in feature bB5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (such as a function for executing a process for starting a final display by the main control unit 162 in the second embodiment and variants 1 to 10 of the second embodiment) that enables the period from the specified timing to the start of the first first game round after the transition to the second game state to be longer than the period of the second notification in the second game round that is the target of the termination by the specific termination means.

In the above configuration, the period (grace period) from when the transition to the second game state is made at a predetermined timing to when the first first game round begins after the transition to the second game state is set to be longer than the execution period of the second notification for the second game round that is subject to termination by the specific termination means. In this case, the second notification for the second game round that is subject to termination ends partway through the grace period, so the next second game round begins before the end of the grace period. Because the next second game round is played in the second game state, the second game round corresponding to the second game state can be started prior to the initial first game round. This makes it possible to advance the start timing of the variable ball entry control after the transition to the second game state and to create a situation in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means at an earlier stage.

When applying this feature to feature bB5 above, the "predetermined notification" in feature bB5 above can be read as "first notification."

Feature bB7. A gaming machine as described in Feature bB5 or Feature bB6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for making the duration of the first notification in a first game in which the predetermined transition condition is met longer than the duration of the first notification in a predetermined first game in which the predetermined transition condition is not met (such as a function for setting a specific confirmation display time in the main control device 162 in the second embodiment and Variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment).

With the above configuration, the period of the first notification in the first game round in which the condition for transitioning to the second game state is met is made longer than the period of the first notification in other first game rounds, thereby enabling the grace period to be extended.

In addition, when this feature is applied to feature bB6, an additional effect can be expected: "When realizing the configuration of feature bB6, which makes the grace period longer than the period of the second notification, it becomes possible to avoid unreasonably shortening the period of the second notification. This makes it possible to realize the configuration of feature bB6 while suppressing the occurrence of inconveniences that make it difficult to visually recognize the results of specific judgments due to shortening the notification period."

Feature bB8. The bonus granting means includes a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the first determination being a specific result,
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bB1 to bB7, characterized in that one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the other of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, a game round is forcibly terminated when the game state changes between the normal game state and the specific game state. In other words, the termination is executed by the specific termination means in response to changes in the game round or the state of variable ball entry control, making it possible to optimally achieve the effects of features bB1 to bB7.

Feature bB9: The bonus granting means includes a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the first determination being a specific result,
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
A gaming machine according to any one of features bB1 to bB7, wherein the first gaming state is a normal gaming state and the second gaming state is a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the specific termination means terminates a game round when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the specific game state. In other words, the specific termination means terminates the game round when the game round or variable ball entry control switches from an unfavorable state to an advantageous state, thereby enabling the effects of features bB1 to bB7 to be optimally achieved.

In addition, the above feature bB8 or feature bB9, "The game state has a specific game state (such as a high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and is different from the special game state," can also be expressed as "The game state has a specific game state (such as a high-frequency support mode) in which at least one of the game times and variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal game state."

Feature bB10. The specific gaming state has a plurality of specific gaming states (a first time-shortened gaming state, a second time-shortened gaming state, a third time-shortened gaming state, etc.),
A gaming machine according to feature bB8 or feature bB9, characterized in that the termination by the specific termination means is restricted when a game turn is being executed in a situation where a change occurs from a predetermined specific game state to another specific game state different from the predetermined specific game state.

When a specific game state changes from one to another, the game round and variable ball entry control have already been executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state before the change. Ending a game round midway in such a situation could actually delay the start of a game round corresponding to the new game state. In this regard, this configuration limits the end of a game round by the specific ending means when switching from one specific game state to another, thereby preventing such inconveniences from occurring.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bB1 to bB10 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature b Group C>
The feature bC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bC group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific outcome, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bC1. A ball entry means (first operating port 62) through which a game ball can enter;
A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the game ball entering the ball entering means or the variable ball entering means;
A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A first game round control means (a function of executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special game round variable display process in the performance control device 143) controls the first game round so that a first game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is made as one of the first game rounds (special game rounds), and
A specific judgment means (a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (the passage of the game ball through the through gate 64);
Based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (support winning result), the variable ball entry control means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the switching control to the second mode is performed at least once. A variable ball entry control means (function of executing processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) executes variable ball entry control (opening and closing game of the role),
A second game round control means (a function of executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162) controls the second game round so that a second game round operation is started based on the specific judgment being made, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is considered as one second game round (normal game round), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which at least one of the second gaming round and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
specific game state transition means that can transition to the specific game state without passing through the special game state when a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met (a function of executing a process for transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modifications 1 and 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transition to the third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modifications 3 to 5, a function of executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state, and a process for transition to the time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modifications 6 to 10);
A specifying means that, when a transition to a specific game state occurs, enables the first second game round after the transition to the specific game state to be performed before the first first game round after the transition to the specific game state (a function that executes the processes of steps Sb1311 to Sb1315, step Sb3509, step Sb4107, and step Sb5811, and the process for starting the confirmation display by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 10 of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The above configuration has a specific game state in which at least one of the game rounds and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Therefore, when the game state transitions to the specific game state, balls are more likely to enter the variable ball entry means, making the player more likely to receive special judgments and allowing the game to proceed advantageously. Furthermore, the above configuration transitions to the specific game state without passing through the special game state. That is, if the transition condition is met in a first game round, the next game round begins immediately after the end of that game round, as the first game round since the transition to the specific game state. Under this premise, the above configuration is configured so that, when the specific game state is transitioned to, the first second game round since the transition to the specific game state is executed before the first game round since the transition to the specific game state. This accelerates the start timing of the variable ball entry control after the transition to the specific game state, making it possible to create a situation in which balls are more likely to enter the variable ball entry means at an earlier stage.

Feature bC2. The first game control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of a special chart) is made as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment,
The gaming machine described in feature bC1 is characterized in that the transition means for the specific game state is configured to transition to the specific game state at a predetermined timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in the special game round, the middle timing of the confirmation display, the start timing of the variable display, the timing during the variable display, etc.) before the specified notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met.

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met, the next first game round, the first game round since the transition to the specific game state, begins. In this case, with the above configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs before the predetermined notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met, so a grace period (a period during which the game state has transitioned to the specific game state, but the first game round since the transition to the specific game state has not yet been played) can be secured after the transition to the specific game state until the first game round is played. If this grace period is used to start the second game round, the second game round can be started before the first game round after the transition to the specific game state, which can be a preferable aspect of implementing the configuration of feature bC1.

Feature bC3. A gaming machine as described in Feature bC1 or Feature bC2, which is configured to provide a player with an advantage when the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means rather than the ball entry means (a configuration in which the jackpot type determination for the second special symbol is given higher priority than the jackpot type determination for the first special symbol).

In the above configuration, since it is more advantageous for the player to have the ball enter the variable ball entry means than to have the ball enter the entry means, the benefit of the specific game state for the player is not limited to an increased frequency of special judgments, but also to the increased likelihood of advantageous gameplay based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means. In this case, the player will want to minimize the occurrence of disadvantageous gameplay based on the ball entering the entry means after transitioning to the specific game state, but by speeding up the timing of the ball entering the advantageous variable ball entry means, it is possible to reduce the number and likelihood of gameplay based on the ball entering the entry means. This makes it possible to ideally realize a configuration in which gameplay after transitioning to the specific game state is played in a manner that meets the player's needs.

Feature bC4. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the game ball entering the ball entering means or the variable ball entering means;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
the special determination means makes the special determination based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any of features bC1 to bC3, characterized in that it is equipped with a priority means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control unit 162) that enables the special judgment to be made preferentially for the special information obtained based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means when the special information obtained based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means and the special information obtained based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means are stored in the obtained information storage means.

In the above configuration, a special judgment is made by the special judgment means based on special information acquired when a ball enters the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means. By applying feature bC1 or feature bC2 to this configuration, it becomes easier to acquire special information corresponding to a ball entering the variable ball entry means early after transitioning to the special game state. In addition, in the above configuration, when both special information based on a ball entering the ball entry means and special information based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means are acquired, the special judgment for the latter special information is executed first. Therefore, even if special information corresponding to a ball entering the variable ball entry means remains in the acquired information storage means when special information corresponding to a ball entering the variable ball entry means is acquired, a special judgment based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means is executed. In other words, this configuration makes it possible to accelerate the timing of the execution of a special judgment based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means after transitioning to the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature bC3 above, it is possible to advance the timing of games based on balls entering the variable ball entry means, which are advantageous to the player, and to reduce the number and likelihood of games based on balls entering the ball entry means, which are disadvantageous to the player.

Feature bC5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bC1 to bC4, wherein the specification means is capable of completing the second game run action in the first second game run before the first first game run is performed when the machine transitions to a specific game state (a function of setting a specific confirmation display time by the main control device 162 according to Variation 1 of the second embodiment).

With the above configuration, the game run operation for the first second game run is completed before the first first game run is played after transitioning to the specific game state, making it easier to execute variable ball entry control after the end of the first second game run before the start of the first first game run. This makes it easier to execute a game run based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means as the first first game run after transitioning to the specific game state.

Feature bC6. The second game control means controls so that a specific notification (a stop display of a normal map) is made as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment,
A gaming machine described in any of features bC1 to bC5, characterized in that the identification means is capable of, when transitioning to a specific gaming state, ending the specific notification in the first second gaming round before the first first gaming round is played (a function of setting a specific confirmation display time by the main control unit 162 relating to variant example 1 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, the specific notification (notification of the specific judgment result) for the first second game round ends before the first first game round is played after transitioning to the specific game state, making it possible to execute variable ball entry control after the end of the first second game round before the start of the first first game round. This makes it possible to execute a game round based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means as the first first game round after transitioning to the specific game state.

Feature bC7. The first game control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of a special symbol) is made as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment,
The specific game state transition means is configured to transition to the specific game state at a predetermined timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in the special game round, the midway timing of the confirmation display, the start timing of the variable display, or the timing during the variable display) before the predetermined notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is established,
a specific notification execution means for executing a specific notification (displaying a right-hand hit notification image 477a or a target guide image 477b) to encourage a ball to be scored into the variable scoring means;
A gaming machine described in any of features bC1 to bC6, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification at a specific timing during the period from the predetermined timing until the first first game round is played (such as the timing after transition to the second time-shortened game state and before the opening and closing of the device starts, or any timing during the period from transition to the second time-shortened game state until the fixed display time has elapsed).

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met, the next first game round, the first game round after the transition to the specific game state, begins. In this case, with the above configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs before the predetermined notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is met, so a grace period (a period during which the game state has transitioned to the specific game state, but the first game round since the transition to the specific game state has not yet been played) can be secured between the transition to the specific game state and the first game round. In cases where the first second game round after the transition to the specific game state is played before the first game round after the transition to the specific game state, by issuing a specific notification during the grace period to encourage the ball to score into the variable ball scoring means, it is possible to more effectively encourage the ball to score into the variable ball scoring means quickly.

Feature bC8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bC1 to bC7, wherein the specification means is capable of causing the first second game round to be played before the first first game round when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state.

In the above configuration, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state, processing is executed so that the first second game round after transitioning to the specific game state is executed before the first first game round after transitioning to the specific game state. In other words, the above processing is executed in response to the switch from a situation in which the game rounds or variable ball entry control are performed in an unfavorable manner to a situation in which they are performed in an advantageous manner, making it possible to optimally demonstrate the effects of features bC1 to bC7.

Feature bC9. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the game ball entering the ball entering means or the variable ball entering means;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
the special determination means makes the special determination based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bC1 to bC8, characterized in that when a transition to a specific gaming state occurs while special information corresponding to the next first gaming round is stored in the acquired information storage means, the first second gaming round can be made to occur before the first first gaming round.

If special information corresponding to the next first game round for a first game round in which the transition conditions are met is stored in the acquired information storage means, the first first game round (the next first game round) after the transition to the specific game state will begin immediately after the end of the first game round in which the transition conditions are met, even if no new balls enter the variable ball entry means. However, with this configuration, even in such cases, the first second game round is played before the first first game round is played. This allows each of the configurations of features bC1 to bC9 above to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bC1 to bC9 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bD group>
The feature bD group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bD group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bD1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A picture display means (special picture display unit 43, pattern display device 75) capable of variably displaying a picture;
A game time control means (a function of executing a special pattern game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special pattern variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time so that the variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display means based on the special judgment, and the stop display of the stop result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game time, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
specific game state transition means that can transition to the specific game state without passing through the special game state when a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met (a function of executing a process for transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transition to the third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state, and a process for transition to the time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
A period setting means (a function of setting a specific fixed display time by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 10 of the second embodiment) that can set a stop display period for performing the stop display in a game round in which the transition condition is satisfied to a period different from the stop display period for a predetermined game round in which the transition condition is not satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific outcome, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The above configuration also includes a game state to which a transition is made without passing through a special game state. This specific game state is entered when a predetermined transition condition is met, but to ensure a smooth start to play in the specific game state, it is desirable to notify the player of the transition to the specific game state before the start of the first game turn after transition to the specific game state. In this case, if the transition is made via a special game state, as in conventional specific game states, it is possible to use the period of the special game state (e.g., the period of the special game state's end-of-game presentation) to provide a notification corresponding to the transition to the specific game state. However, in the case of a specific game state to which a transition is made without passing through a special game state, the first game turn after transition to the specific game state is immediately played after the game turn in which the transition condition was met has ended, making it difficult to ensure the period for implementing such a notification. In this regard, with this configuration, the stop display period during which the image is displayed in a game round where the transition condition is met is different from the stop display period for other game rounds where the transition condition is not met. Therefore, when a transition to a specific game state occurs, by utilizing that special stop display period, it is possible to optimally ensure the period for executing the notification.

Feature bD2. The gaming machine described in Feature bD1, wherein the period setting means is capable of setting the stop display period for a game in which the transition condition is met to a period longer than the stop display period for a predetermined game in which the transition condition is not met.

With the above configuration, the stop display period for a game in which the transition condition is met is longer than the stop display period for other game in which the transition condition is not met, making it possible to ensure an optimal period for the notification.

Feature bD3. A gaming machine as described in Feature bD2, wherein the period setting means is capable of setting the stop display period for a game in which the transition condition is met, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state, to a period longer than the stop display period for a predetermined game in which the transition condition is not met.

With the above configuration, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state, the stop display period for the game turn in which the transition condition is met is made longer than the stop display period for other game turns in which the transition condition is not met. In this case, the longer stop display period for the game turn in which the transition condition is met ensures the player has time to prepare for the switch to the specific game state. This configuration is particularly effective when the player's operating style differs between the normal game state and the specific game state, for example, when the recommended game ball launch strength differs between the normal game state and the specific game state.

Feature bD4. A specific notification execution means (a function for executing a second transition effect setting process, a special chart change display process, etc. by the effect control device 143) is provided to execute a specific notification (a start effect of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, a ceiling reach effect, etc.) corresponding to the establishment of the transition condition or the transition to a specific game state,
A gaming machine according to feature bD2 or feature bD3, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is provided with a means for executing the specific notification during at least a portion of the stop display period of the game in which the transition condition is met.

To notify players of a transition to a specific game state in advance, it is possible to use the variable display period of the image during a game in which the transition conditions are met to make a notification corresponding to the transition to the specific game state. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that the player's attention will tend to shift to the transition to the specific game state midway through the game, causing a loss of attention to the game in question. In this regard, with this configuration, the stop display period for a game in which the transition conditions are met is made longer than the stop display period for other game in which the transition conditions are not met, and the notification is made using at least a portion of that period, making it possible to optimally achieve both attention to the game in question and the period for the notification.

Feature bD5. The gaming machine described in Feature bD4, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification after the stop display begins during the stop display period of the game in which the transition condition is met.

With the above configuration, the result of the special determination can be notified by the static display of the symbols, and then the transition to the specific game state can be notified, making it preferable for the player to understand both the result of the special determination and the transition to the specific game state.

Feature bD6. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second actuation port 63) through which a game ball can enter,
The specific gaming state is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in a normal gaming state,
The special determination means is capable of executing the special determination based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
a predetermined notification execution means for executing a predetermined notification (displaying a right-hand hit notification image 477a or a target guide image 477b) to encourage a ball to be shot into the predetermined shot means;
A gaming machine described in any of features bD2 to bD5, characterized in that the specified notification execution means is equipped with a means for executing the specified notification during at least a portion of the stop display period of the game in which the transition condition is met.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a game state in which a ball is likely to score into the specified scoring means, and the specified notification encouraging the ball to score into the specified scoring means is made using at least a portion of the longer stop display period in the game round in which the transition condition is met. This makes it possible to encourage the ball to score into the specified scoring means before the start of the first game round after the transition to the specific game state, allowing the player to begin playing in the specific game state smoothly and conveniently.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bD1 to bD6 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature b E group>
The feature group bE is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variation 3 of the above-mentioned second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bE group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention was made with the problem that the invention aims to solve: "There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the enjoyment of gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bE1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specific means (such as a function to execute processing for transitioning to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 relating to variant example 3 of the second embodiment) that can execute specific processing to re-transition to a specific gaming state after the specific gaming state ends or to increase the remaining number of gaming times in the specific gaming state when a predetermined specific condition (winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific ball entry area, etc.) is met in a specific gaming round (a gaming round other than the final gaming round, the allowable gaming round, the limited gaming round, etc.) in a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a player transitions when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. This specific gaming state ends when the number of play times since transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a maximum number of play times. Under this premise, the above configuration is configured so that if a specific condition is met in a specific play time during the specific gaming state, the game will either transition back to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state ends, or the remaining number of play times in the specific gaming state will be increased. Therefore, by meeting a specific condition in a specific play time, the period during which the specific gaming state can be played is extended, increasing the chances of achieving a specific result and transitioning to the special gaming state while maintaining the advantageous specific gaming state. This allows for the addition of a game in which the player aims to not only achieve a specific result in the specific gaming state, but also to achieve a specific condition in a specific play time, thereby expanding the range of ways to enjoy the game and increasing its enjoyment.

Feature bE2: The specifying means is capable of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state ends when a specific condition is met in a specific gaming round in the specific gaming state,
A gaming machine described in feature bE1, characterized in that it is configured so that the end of a previous specific gaming state and the transition to a subsequent specific gaming state can be executed in the same gaming session.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met during a specific game turn, the specific game state ends and the game re-enters the specific game state within the same game turn. This allows the game to switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state without an intervening game turn in the normal game state, making it possible to achieve a state equivalent to having the remaining number of plays in the specific game state increased.

Feature bE3: The player is unable to recognize the end of the previous specific gaming state, or it is more difficult to recognize the end of the specific gaming state when the re-transition is not performed,
A gaming machine described in feature bE2, characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing processing for displaying special chart changes in the presentation control device 143) that executes a predetermined notification (additional presentation) that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of play times in a specific game state has increased during the same play time or the next play time.

In the above configuration, after the player is unable or unable to recognize the end of the preceding specific game state, a predetermined notification is made in the game turn in which the transition to the subsequent specific game state occurs or in the next game turn, as if the number of remaining times in the specific game state has increased. This makes it easier for the player to sense that the number of remaining times has increased.

Feature bE4. A gaming machine as set forth in any one of Features bE1 to bE3, wherein the specifying means includes means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state or increasing the remaining number of plays without going through the special gaming state when a specific condition is met during a specific game play in the specific gaming state (such as a function for executing processing for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Variation 3 of the second embodiment).

The above configuration makes it possible to re-transition to the specific game state or increase the remaining number of plays (addition) without going through the special game state. In other words, because a specific result is not required to re-transition to the specific game state, the probability of the re-transition (probability of a specific condition being met) can be set independently from the probability of transitioning to the special game state (probability of winning a specific result). This allows for greater freedom in game design, such as making the probability of the former higher than the probability of the latter. Furthermore, by re-transitioning to the specific game state without going through the special game state, it is possible to prevent a significant separation between the specific game state before the specific condition is met and the specific game state after the specific condition is met. This makes it easier for the player to perceive a sense of unity between the two specific game states, making it easier to give the impression that the specific game state has been extended.

Feature bE5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bE1 to bE4, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means (such as a function to execute a process for transitioning to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Variation 3 of the second embodiment) that restricts the execution of the specific process when a specific condition is met in a game turn other than the specific game turn in the specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, re-transition to a specific game state occurs only when a specific condition is met in a specific game session. In other words, achieving this re-transition requires not only the specific condition to be met, but also the timing. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the difficulty of the re-transition, thereby optimally eliciting the player's joy and sense of accomplishment when it is achieved. Furthermore, this configuration can effectively increase attention to a specific game session.

Feature bE6. A gaming machine according to Feature bE5, wherein the specific game play is a game play in the latter half of a specific game state.

As the number of remaining play times in the specific game state decreases, the expected value of achieving a specific result in the specific game state decreases, raising concerns that the player's sense of anticipation may become less pronounced as the specific game state approaches its end. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific play times are set in the latter half of the specific game state, providing the player with an opportunity to transition back to the specific game state even if their expectations of a specific result are low. This can liven up the latter half of the specific game state and maintain anticipation.

Feature bE7. A gaming machine according to Feature bE5 or Feature bE6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing a specific notification (chance notification image 478) during a specific game session (a function for executing the processing of step Sb3802 by the presentation control device 143).

With the above configuration, a specific notification is made on a specific game round that is not made on other game rounds, allowing the player to understand that it is a specific game round through the specific notification. This allows the player to play with enthusiasm when it is a specific game round, making it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

This feature can also be expressed as "having means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb3802 by the presentation control device 143) for executing a specific notification (chance notification image 478) in a specific game round that is not executed in the other game rounds," and this feature may further have the configuration that "the specific notification is configured not to be executed in the other game rounds."

Feature bE8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bE1 to bE7, wherein the specific condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special missing result) different from the specific result, or that the result of a specific judgment (missing type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state is a predetermined judgment result (special missing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific condition is met when the result of a special judgment is a predetermined judgment result that differs from the specific result, or when the result of a specific judgment made when the result of a special judgment is a non-specific result is a predetermined judgment result. Therefore, a determination of whether or not the result of a special judgment will be a specific result and a determination of whether or not the specific condition is met can be made within a single game round. This allows a specific game round to function as a chance game round (a game round that is more advantageous than other game rounds) in which both of these determinations can be made, making it possible to appropriately increase anticipation and attention for that game round.

Feature bE9. A gaming machine as described in Feature bE8, wherein the probability of the special judgment in a specific gaming state or the specific judgment resulting in the predetermined judgment result is set higher than the probability of the specific result in the special judgment in a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the probability of a predetermined judgment result being achieved is set higher than the probability of a specific result being achieved, which increases anticipation for a specific condition being met and makes it possible to increase attention to a specific game session.

Feature bE10. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A specifying means (such as a function for executing a process for transitioning to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to variant 3 of the second embodiment) that can make it more advantageous for the player when the result of the special judgment in a first predetermined situation (the final game round in the first time-shortened game state) is a predetermined result (special miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state, compared to when the result of the special judgment in a second predetermined situation (a special game round other than the final game round in the first time-shortened game state) that is different from the first predetermined situation is the predetermined result;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In conventional gaming machines, the gameplay was limited to a choice between achieving a specific result or not, which meant that players could only feel a sense of anticipation for the specific result when playing, raising concerns that the game could become monotonous. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the result of a special determination is a predetermined result that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state (a so-called losing result), it is possible to be advantageous, thereby arousing anticipation even if the specific result is not achieved, and diversifying the game. In this case, the advantage of a losing result is limited to when the situation at that time is the first predetermined situation, preventing the advantage of achieving a specific result from being excessively diminished. In other words, while ensuring the fun of aiming for a specific result, it is possible to achieve a gameplay that does not end in disappointment even if the specific result is not achieved, thereby increasing the game's enjoyment.

The configurations of features bE1 to bE9 above can be applied to this feature. In this case, applying these configurations can provide additional benefits.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bE1 to bE10 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature b F group>
The feature bF group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variations 3, 6, and 8 to 12 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bF group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bF1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a judgment process such as a win/loss judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
A specific game state transition means (such as a function of executing a process for transitioning to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10) that can transition to a specific game state without passing through a special game state when a predetermined condition (such as a special miss result or reaching the ceiling number of times) is met;
When the predetermined condition is met, when the transition is made by the specific game state transition means, or when the transition is made, an external output means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment's variants 3, 6, 8 to 10, a function of outputting the first external signal in variant 11, a function of outputting the first external signal A in variant 12, etc.) capable of outputting a specific signal (an external signal corresponding to a special miss result such as variant 3, the first external signal in variant 11, the first external signal A in variant 12, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The above configuration also makes it possible to transition to a specific game state without passing through a special game state. If a transition is made via a special game state, as with conventional specific game states, the occurrence of that state can be detected by the gaming hall. However, there is a concern that the occurrence of a specific game state that is transitioned to without passing through a special game state cannot be detected by the gaming hall. In this regard, this feature outputs a specific signal to the gaming machine in response to the establishment of a transition trigger (predetermined condition) to such a specific game state or the transition to that specific game state, allowing the gaming hall to conveniently perform this detection.

Feature bF2: A transition restriction means (a function of executing a process for transition to the third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6, 8 to 10) capable of restricting transition to a specific gaming state when the predetermined condition is met in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the first time-shortened gaming state is in progress, a situation in which the second time-shortened gaming state is in progress, a situation in which the limited number of gaming rounds is in progress, etc.) is provided,
The gaming machine described in feature bF1 is configured so that when the specified condition is met in the specified situation and the transition restriction means imposes the restriction, the specific signal can be output by the external output means (a configuration in which the processing of step Sb3511 is executed by the main control unit 162 in variants 3, 6, and 8 to 10 of the second embodiment, thereby outputting an external signal corresponding to a special miss result).

In the above configuration, even if a predetermined condition is met, transition to a specific gaming state is restricted under certain circumstances. When such restrictions are imposed, it is conceivable to cease outputting the specific signal in response to the absence of transition to a specific gaming state. From the perspective of ensuring consistency with the subsequent gaming state, it would be more logical not to output a specific signal than to do so.

However, with such a configuration, the amusement hall will not be able to grasp the actual number of times a predetermined condition has been met during play, raising concerns that it may be difficult to determine whether the probability of that condition being met is generally in line with the design probability. In particular, as the number of times notified to the amusement hall is thinned out by ceasing the output of the specific signal, the number of times grasped by the amusement hall will be less than the actual number, which could mean that, for example, there may be a delay in discovering any fraudulent activity that causes the transition condition to be met.

In this regard, this configuration intentionally outputs a specific signal even when transition to a specific game state is restricted when a predetermined condition is met, allowing the gaming hall to properly grasp the actual number of times that condition is met. This makes it easier to detect cases where the probability of a transition condition being met has been fraudulently increased, and can enhance fraud prevention.

Feature bF3. The external output means is
a means for outputting a specific signal of a first mode when the predetermined condition is established in a specific situation different from the predetermined situation (such as a situation other than the first time-shortened gaming state);
means for outputting a specific signal of a second mode different from the first mode when the predetermined condition is met in the predetermined situation;
A gaming machine according to feature bF2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

With the above configuration, different specific signals are output depending on whether transition to a specific game state is permitted or restricted. This allows the gaming hall to determine from a single specific signal not only that a predetermined condition has been met, but also whether or not a transition to a specific game state is appropriate. This makes it possible to immediately determine that a failure to transition to a specific game state despite the fulfillment of a predetermined condition is not due to an abnormality in the gaming machine.

Feature bF4. The predetermined condition is established in relation to the result of the special judgment (the result of the win/loss lottery or the loss type judgment is a special loss result, and the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is established),
a specific external signal output means (a function of causing the main control device 162 to execute the processing of step Sb3511) capable of outputting a specific external signal (lottery result signal) corresponding to the result of the special judgment to the outside of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine described in any of features bF1 to bF3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific signal using the specific external signal (configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to a special losing result using a lottery result signal).

With the above configuration, the specific signal can be output using existing terminals and wiring for notifying the results of special judgments, which reduces the number of output terminals, etc. on the gaming machine compared to when a dedicated signal is output as a specific signal. Furthermore, if the gaming hall's management control device already has an input terminal, etc. for receiving notifications about the results of special judgments, it can use that to receive the specific signal.

Note that the feature "configured to be capable of outputting the specific signal using the specific external signal" can also be expressed as "the specific external signal output means comprises first means (a function of outputting a lottery result signal for a jackpot or a normal miss) capable of outputting a specific external signal of a first mode when outputting a specific external signal in a situation where the specified condition is not met, and second means as the external output means (a function of outputting a lottery result signal for a special miss) capable of outputting a specific external signal of a second mode different from the first mode as the specific signal when outputting a specific external signal in a situation where the specified condition is met."

Feature bF5. The predetermined condition is established in relation to the result of the special judgment (the result of the win/loss lottery or the loss type judgment is a special loss result, and the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is established),
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
A predetermined external signal output means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162 according to the third, sixth, eighth to tenth variants of the second embodiment) capable of outputting predetermined external signals (such as a game round execution signal and a game round start signal) to the outside of the gaming machine in response to each game round;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features bF1 to bF3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific signal using the specified external signal (configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to a special losing result using a lottery result signal).

The above configuration makes it possible to output a specific signal using a predetermined external signal that is output externally to the gaming machine in response to each game. This simplifies the configuration by eliminating signal terminals and signal wiring for the specific signal, and also avoids the need to add input terminals to the management and control device on the amusement hall side. In addition, because the specific signal can be output simultaneously with the predetermined external signal, it is possible to reduce the number of signal outputs from the gaming machine, making it possible to reduce the processing load required for signal exchange on both the gaming machine and the management and control device on the amusement hall side.

Note that the feature "configured to be capable of outputting the specific signal using the predetermined external signal" can also be expressed as "the predetermined external signal output means comprises first means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal of a first mode when outputting a predetermined external signal in a situation where the predetermined condition is not met, and second means as the external output means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal of a second mode different from the first mode as the specific signal when outputting a predetermined external signal in a situation where the predetermined condition is met."

Feature bF6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bF2 to bF5, characterized in that it is equipped with means capable of outputting a predetermined output signal (time-saving status signal, high-frequency support signal, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine when the predetermined situation is met.

In the above configuration, a predetermined output signal is output externally to the gaming machine when a predetermined situation exists that restricts transition to a specific gaming state. As a result, if a specific signal indicating that a predetermined condition has been met is output but the machine does not transition to a specific gaming state, the gaming hall's management control device can easily determine whether the cause is a predetermined situation by referencing the predetermined output signal. In other words, by also referencing the predetermined output signal, the gaming hall can easily determine whether a failure to transition to a specific gaming state despite the output of a specific signal is due to an abnormality in the gaming machine.

Feature bF7. The game operation is started based on the special judgment being made, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and a game round control means (a function for executing the special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing the special game round variable display process in the performance control device 143) is provided to control the game round to be played;
The predetermined situation is configured to end based on the establishment of a predetermined ending condition (such as reaching an upper limit of the number of times),
The gaming machine described in feature bF6 is characterized in that the external output means is configured to be able to output the specific signal at the end timing of the specified situation or at a specified timing after the end timing when the specified condition is met in a game round in which the end condition is met.

For example, it is conceivable to restrict transition to a specific gaming state even if a predetermined condition is met under a specific situation, while allowing transition to the specific gaming state if the predetermined condition is met during the final game round under that specific situation. In such a case, if a specific signal is output before the end of the specific situation, there is a concern that the gaming hall's management control device may recognize a transition to the specific gaming state despite the predetermined condition being met under the specific situation. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific signal is output at the end of the specific situation or at a predetermined timing after that end. This allows the management control device to recognize that the predetermined situation has ended before it recognizes that the predetermined condition has been met, making it possible to prevent a subsequent transition to the specific gaming state from being recognized as unnatural behavior.

Feature bF8. The external output means is
a first means for outputting a signal from a predetermined output terminal (an output terminal for a first external signal) to the outside of the gaming machine in response to a transition to a special gaming state or during execution of the special gaming state (a function for outputting a first external signal when a normal jackpot result is obtained);
When the predetermined condition is met, when the transition is made by the specific game state transition means or when the transition is made, a second means (a function of outputting a first external signal when a special miss result occurs) capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature bF1, wherein the second means is capable of outputting a specific signal from the predetermined output terminal.

In the above configuration, the same output terminal that outputs an external signal when a special game state is being entered or when that state is in progress is used to output a specific signal corresponding to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition or a transition to a specific game state. This makes it possible to recognize specific game states that are transitioned to without passing through a special game state, even in hall machines that only support specific game states that are transitioned to via a special game state.

Feature bF9. The first means can output a signal of a predetermined type (a first external signal that is turned on during the opening/closing execution mode),
The gaming machine described in feature bF8 is characterized in that the second means is capable of outputting a signal of a different mode from the specified mode as the specific signal (a first external signal that is in an on state for a specified period shorter than the period of the opening/closing execution mode).

In the above configuration, different signal types are output from a specified output terminal when a special game state is entered, or when a specified condition is met. This makes it possible to distinguish between the two external signals, even when they are output from the same output terminal.

Feature bF10. A gaming machine as described in Feature bF8 or Feature bF9, wherein the external output means is equipped with third means (a function of outputting a second external signal) capable of outputting a signal (second external signal) to the outside of the gaming machine from an output terminal different from the predetermined output terminal at least when transitioning to a specific gaming state or when the specific gaming state is in effect.

In the above configuration, a signal is output from an output terminal other than the predetermined output terminal that outputs a signal when a special game state is in effect or when a predetermined condition is met, in response to a transition to a specific game state or while that state is being executed. This makes it possible for the hall machine to recognize a transition to a specific game state or the existence of a specific game state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bF1 to bF10 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bG group>
The feature group bG is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned modification 4 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bG group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific outcome, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in gaming machines such as those exemplified above in terms of increasing the enjoyment of the game."

Feature bG1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a judgment of whether a special drawing is a winning combination) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning combination in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (first time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made via a special game state when a predetermined first condition is met (such as when a 4R normal jackpot result is achieved in variant 4 of the second embodiment), and a second specific game state (third time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made without going through the special game state when a predetermined second condition different from the first condition is met (such as when a special miss result is achieved, when the ball enters a specific ball entry section, etc.).
The second condition can be established in a first specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specification means (a function of executing processing for transitioning to a third time-shortened gaming state by a main control unit 162 relating to variant example 4 of the second embodiment) that can make the situation more disadvantageous to the player when the second condition is met in the first specific gaming state than when the second condition is not met.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a transition is made when the result of a special judgment is a specific result, there is also a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. These specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state to which a transition is made via the special gaming state, and a second specific gaming state to which a transition is made without passing through the special gaming state. Furthermore, a second condition that triggers a transition to the second specific gaming state can be established while in the first specific gaming state, and if such a condition is established and a transition to the second specific gaming state occurs, the player is at a disadvantage compared to if a transition to the second specific gaming state does not occur.

This configuration allows players to experience the thrill of possibly being demoted to a disadvantageous state depending on how the game progresses after passing through the special game state and transitioning to the first specific game state, adding excitement beyond simply aiming to win a specific result. However, while this thrill can be provided, there is a concern that if the player's disappointment at being demoted to a disadvantageous state is too great, it could dampen their motivation to continue playing, which could have the opposite effect. In this regard, with this configuration, when the second condition is met, the game transitions to the second specific game state, which is more advantageous than the normal game state, thereby reducing the player's disappointment compared to transitioning to the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that allows players to experience the above-mentioned thrill while preventing a significant loss of motivation to play.

Feature bG2. A game control means (a function for executing the special game control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing the special game change display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game so that the game operation is started based on the special judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game.
The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The upper limit number of times of the second specific game state is set to a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) that is less than the upper limit number of times of the first specific game state (e.g., 1000 times),
The gaming machine described in feature bG1 is characterized in that the specifying means transitions to a second specific gaming state when the second condition is met in the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if the second condition is met during the first specific gaming state, the specific gaming state switches to a second specific gaming state in which the number of times that can be played is reduced. In this case, even when transitioning to the second specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be continued up to the upper limit of the number of times, leaving the player with a chance to achieve a specific result within the specific gaming state. This allows the player to experience the thrill of potentially falling into a disadvantageous position when the second condition is met, while also reducing disappointment when the second condition is met.

Feature bG3. An upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number in response to the transition to the specific gaming state (a function for executing the processing for transition to the third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the fourth modified example of the second embodiment) is provided,
The gaming machine described in feature bG2 is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb4108 in the main control unit 162) for setting the predetermined number as the upper limit number of times when transitioning to the second specific gaming state when the second condition is met in the first specific gaming state, regardless of the remaining number of times of play in the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times the specific game state can be played when the second condition is met is uniformly set to the upper limit number of times for the second specific game state, regardless of the number of times played up to that point in the first specific game state (the remaining number of times in the first specific game state). Therefore, the later the timing for meeting the second condition in the first specific game state, the greater the total number of times the specific game state can be played, which is advantageous for the player. This increases the fun of avoiding the meeting of the second condition when playing in the first specific game state, making the game more enjoyable.

Feature bG4. A gaming machine as described in Feature bG2 or Feature bG3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for concealing the number of times remaining in the first specific gaming state when the machine is in the first specific gaming state or when the number of times remaining up to the upper limit in the first specific gaming state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (a function for displaying a status notification image 450 instead of a remaining number image 472).

For example, if the configuration clearly indicates the number of times remaining in the first specific game state, the player can know how many times there were before the second condition was met. Therefore, when the second condition is met and the remaining number of times in the second specific game state is set as the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the player can easily determine how many times the number of times has decreased as a result. In this regard, by not clearly indicating the number of times remaining in the first specific game state, the configuration described above makes it impossible or difficult for the player to determine the number of times remaining before the second condition was met. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the decrease in the remaining number of times when the game state transitions to the second specific game state, and even if the decrease is large, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disappointed and losing their motivation to play.

Feature bG5. A gaming machine as described in Feature bG4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb4403 in the presentation control device 143) for executing a predetermined notification (remaining number of times image 472) that allows the player to recognize the number of times remaining in the second specific gaming state when the second condition is met in the first specific gaming state and the state transitions to the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of plays is not displayed while the player is in the first specific game state, but is displayed when the player transitions to the second specific game state. This allows the player to easily understand that the second condition has been met and the player has transitioned to the second specific game state, as well as the number of plays remaining in the specific game state since the transition to the second specific game state.

Feature bG6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bG1 to bG5, wherein the second condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special missing result) different from the specific result, or that the result of a specific judgment (missing type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state is a predetermined judgment result (special missing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

In the above configuration, if the result of a special judgment is a predetermined judgment result that differs from the specific result, or if the result of a specific judgment made when the result of a special judgment is a non-specific result is a predetermined judgment result, a specific condition is met, and whether or not the player will be demoted to a disadvantageous state can be determined for each game. This allows the player to experience the thrill of the possibility of such a demotion occurring in each game, making it possible to enhance the enjoyment of such thrills in the game.

Feature bG7. The second condition can be established in the normal game state.
A gaming machine described in any of features bG1 to bG6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function in the main control unit 162 to transition to a third time-shortened gaming state A) that can transition to a second specific gaming state when the second condition is met in the normal gaming state.

In the above configuration, the second condition can be realized not only during the first specific gaming state, but also during the normal gaming state, and if the second condition is realized during the normal gaming state, the game transitions to the second specific gaming state. Because the second specific gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the normal gaming state, it is possible to realize a configuration in which realizing the second condition during the first specific gaming state is disadvantageous, while realizing the second condition during the normal gaming state is advantageous. In other words, even if the same second condition is realized, the advantage or disadvantage can be reversed depending on the gaming state when it is realized, preventing the game from becoming fixed on simply avoiding the realization of the second condition, and making it possible to diversify the game.

Feature bG8. The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
An upper limit number setting means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the fourth modified example of the second embodiment) is provided to set the upper limit number of times in response to transition to a specific gaming state,
The gaming machine described in feature bG7 is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb4106 in the main control unit 162) that can set an upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) that is greater when the second condition is met in the normal gaming state than when the second condition is met in the first specific gaming state.

The second specific gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the normal gaming state, so simply transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. However, the above configuration goes beyond that; if the second condition is met during the normal gaming state, a higher upper limit is set than if the second condition were met during the first specific gaming state. This highlights the advantage and increases the excitement of aiming to meet the second condition during the normal gaming state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bG1 to bG8 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bH group>
The feature group bH is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, each of the modifications, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the modification 5 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bH group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific one, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in gaming machines such as those exemplified above in terms of increasing attention to the game."

Feature bH1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a judgment of whether or not a special drawing is won) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special game time control process in the main control device 162) is provided, which controls the game time so that a game time operation is started based on the special judgment being made, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game time,
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times,
The device is provided with a means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the fifth modified example of the second embodiment) that can increase the number of remaining game times in the specific game state when a specific condition is met (when a special miss occurs, when the ball enters the specific ball entry area, etc.) in a situation where the specific game state is in an allowable state (when the number of game times in the third time-shortened game state is greater than the number of remaining game times in the first time-shortened game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that it has, as specific gaming states, a plurality of types of specific gaming states (first time-shortening gaming state A, first time-shortening gaming state B) that differ in the number of gaming rounds, range of gaming rounds, or period corresponding to the allowable state.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player enters when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. If a specific condition is met in a situation where this specific game state is permissible, the number of remaining times in the specific game state is increased (added on), allowing the player to play more advantageously.

In such a configuration, for example, if the number of remaining play times that increases when a specific condition is met is fixed, the player would know in advance when the specific condition needs to be met to increase the remaining play times, which could cause the player to lose interest in other play times. In this regard, the above configuration provides multiple specific play states with different play times, ranges of play times, or periods in which an increase in the remaining play times is permitted, so it is no longer possible to uniformly determine when the specific condition needs to be met to increase the remaining play times. This prevents the player's attention from concentrating on the same play time in each specific play state, making it possible to increase the level of attention to the game throughout the entire specific play state.

Feature bH2. A gaming machine as described in Feature bH1, characterized in that the game turn, range of game turns, or period corresponding to the permissible state in each specific game state is configured to be impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish (configuration that makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between first time-saving game state A and first time-saving game state B).

For example, in a configuration in which the game times that will be allowed are clearly defined, even if multiple specific game states with different game times that will be allowed are set, the game times that should be noted in each specific game state will be clear, raising concerns that the effect of preventing players from focusing their attention on specific game times will not be effectively achieved. In this regard, with the above configuration, the game times that will be allowed are indistinguishable or difficult for players to identify, allowing players to enjoy playing while predicting which game times will be allowed in each specific game state, making it possible to increase attention to the game throughout the entire specific game state.

Feature bH3. The specific gaming state includes a first type specific gaming state (first time-shortened gaming state A) in which the upper limit number of times is a first number of times (e.g., 70 times), and a second type specific gaming state (first time-shortened gaming state B) in which the upper limit number of times is a second number of times (e.g., 100 times) that is greater than the first number of times, and
A gaming machine according to feature bH1 or feature bH2, characterized in that the number of games, range of game games, or period corresponding to the permissible state differs at least between the first type specific gaming state and the second type specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, specific gaming states with different permissible play counts are provided: a first type specific gaming state in which the upper limit is set to a first number of times, and a second type specific gaming state in which the upper limit is set to a higher second number of times. This allows for diversification not only in terms of when specific conditions should be met, but also in terms of when specific conditions should be met, for each specific gaming state, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature bH4. A gaming machine according to Feature bH3, characterized in that in the second type specific gaming state, a gaming turn, range of gaming turns, or period corresponding to the permissible state is included in a gaming turn (e.g., the 71st to 100th gaming turn) subsequent to the first gaming turn (e.g., the 70th special symbol gaming turn) corresponding to the first number of times.

In the above configuration, the number of play times that become permissible in the second type specific game state are included in the number of play times after the upper limit (first number) of the first type specific game state. In this case, assuming that the specific game state to which the player has transitioned is the first type specific game state, the specific game state will end when the first number of play times is reached. On the other hand, if the specific game state to which the player has transitioned is the second type specific game state, the remaining number of play times in the specific game state can be increased by fulfilling a specific condition during play after the first number of play times has been reached, which is desirable for the player. Therefore, when the number of play times approaches the first number upon transition to the specific game state, the player can play while balancing anxiety about the end of the specific game state with anticipation that the remaining number of play times will be efficiently increased by fulfilling a specific condition after the first number of play times has been reached, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature bH5. When a specific condition is met in a situation where the specific gaming state is in a non-permissible state (where the number of times played in the third time-saving gaming state is less than the number of times remaining in the first time-saving gaming state), the increase in the number of remaining times in the specific gaming state is limited.
The gaming machine according to feature bH3 or feature bH4 is configured such that in the first type specific gaming state and the second type specific gaming state, a common number of games, a range of number of games, or a period corresponding to the non-allowable state (1st to 20th game play), is included.

In the above configuration, a common number of play times, range of play times, or period is set for each specific game state as a non-permissible state in which the remaining number of play times will not be increased even if a specific condition is met. In this common number of play times, the remaining number of play times will not be increased regardless of which specific game state the player transitions to, so it is possible to ensure a period in which the player can concentrate on playing with the aim of achieving a specific result, without worrying about the type of specific game state or the fulfillment of a specific condition.

Feature bH6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bH3 to bH5, characterized in that it is configured so that the player cannot or has difficulty distinguishing between the first type specific game state and the second type specific game state (a configuration that makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between first time-shortened game state A and first time-shortened game state B).

This configuration allows the player to predict whether the specific game state to which they have transitioned is a type 1 specific game state or a type 2 specific game state, making it possible to optimally exert the effects of features bH3 to bH5.

Feature bH7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bH1 to bH6, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb4801 by the main control unit 162) capable of limiting the increase in the remaining number of play times if a specific condition is met in the permissible state of a specific game state and the remaining number of play times is increased, and if a specific condition is met again in that specific game state.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of plays can be increased only once during the specific game state to which the player transitions, so the timing at which the specific condition is met has a significant impact on subsequent gameplay, making it possible to optimally utilize the effects of features bH1 to bH6.

Feature bH8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bH1 to bH7, wherein the specific condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special missing result) different from the specific result, or that the result of a specific judgment (missing type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (missing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state is a predetermined judgment result (special missing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific condition is met when the result of a special judgment is a predetermined judgment result that differs from the specific result, or when the result of a specific judgment made when the result of a special judgment is a non-specific result is a predetermined judgment result. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the result of a special judgment will be a specific result and whether the specific condition is met within a single game session. Therefore, when the specific game state is permissible, the player can play by both challenging themselves to achieve a specific result and challenging themselves to increase the number of times the specific game state remains active, allowing them to play under more advantageous conditions than if they were limited to the latter. This makes it possible to favorably increase motivation to play in the specific game state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bH1 to bH8 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature bI group>
The feature group bI is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variations 6, 8, and 9 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bI group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bI1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
An update means (such as a function to execute the processing of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth, eighth, and ninth variants of the second embodiment) that can update predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has been played without a win, internal point information, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as a loss in the result of the win/loss lottery, or a win in the point lottery, etc.);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the update result of the update means being a predetermined result (such as the ceiling number of times or the predetermined number of points), and a second specific game state (third time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the result of the special judgment being a predetermined judgment result (such as a special failure result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (such as a failure type judgment or a transition lottery) made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (such as a failure result) that does not correspond to a transition to the special game state being a predetermined judgment result (such as a special failure result or a winning result in the transition lottery),
a first transition determination means for making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means (such as a function for executing a process for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, or a function for executing a process A for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 8);
a second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific game state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, or a function of executing a process A for determining transition to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 8);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that, in one game round, after the first transition determination is made by the first transition determination means, the second transition determination is made by the second transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb5303 after executing the processing of step Sb5302 in variant 6 of the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step Sb6503 and then executing the processing of step Sb6504 if a negative determination is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8, a function of executing the processing of step Sb7201 and then executing the processing of step Sb7203 in variant 9, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. These specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state to which a transition is made based on the results of update information updated at a specified update trigger, and a second specific gaming state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific judgment result different from the specific result, or when a specific judgment made in a gaming round in which a special judgment results in a non-specific result results in a specific judgment result. In such a gaming machine, the transition conditions to the first specific gaming state and the transition conditions to the second specific gaming state may be met in the same gaming round. In this regard, the above configuration makes a first transition determination as to whether to transition to the first specific gaming state and then a second transition determination as to whether to transition to the second specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether to adopt the result of the second transition determination based on the result of the first transition determination, thereby enabling optimal control of the gaming state.

Feature bI2. A gaming machine according to Feature bI1, characterized in that it is equipped with means for restricting transition to the second specific gaming state when the result of the first transition determination corresponds to transition to the first specific gaming state, even if the result of the second transition determination corresponds to transition to the second specific gaming state, or for restricting the execution of the second transition determination (a function for executing the processing of step Sb5605 by the main control unit 162 in Modifications 6 and 8 of the second embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step Sb7202 by the main control unit 162 in Modification 9).

In the above configuration, if a transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the first transition determination performed earlier, even if a transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the second transition determination performed thereafter, that determination is invalidated or the execution of the second transition determination itself is restricted. This allows priority to be given to the transition to the first specific gaming state when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state are met in the same game round.

Feature bI3. A gaming machine according to Feature bI2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination has resulted in the non-specific result.

The first specific game state is entered based on the updated result of the number of times a special judgment has resulted in a non-specific result (the cumulative number of losing game plays), allowing the player to predict the transition to the first specific game state even before the updated result becomes a predetermined result. Therefore, if the transition to the first specific game state is not made even though the updated result becomes a predetermined result, the player will likely notice that the transition to the first specific game state has not occurred. On the other hand, the second specific game state is entered based on the results of a special judgment or a specific judgment, making it impossible for the player to predict the transition to the second specific game state in advance. Taking these characteristics into account, by prioritizing the transition to the first specific game state when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game play, it becomes possible to adjust the specific game state to which the player will transition without noticing.

Feature bI4. A gaming machine described in Feature bI2 or Feature bI3, characterized in that the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, if the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game, priority is given to transitioning to the first specific game state, making it possible to transition to the more advantageous specific game state.

Feature bI5. A gaming machine as described in Feature bI1, characterized in that it is equipped with means for transitioning to the second specific gaming state when the result of the second transition determination corresponds to transitioning to the second specific gaming state, even if the result of the first transition determination corresponds to transitioning to the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if a subsequent second transition determination determines a transition to the second specific game state, the result of the previous first transition determination is invalidated, even if a transition to the first specific game state was determined. This allows priority to be given to the transition to the second specific game state when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game round.

Feature bI6. A gaming machine described in Feature bI5, characterized in that the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, if the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game, priority is given to transitioning to the second specific game state, making it possible to transition to the more advantageous specific game state.

Feature bI7. A first means (a function of executing a ceiling reaching effect by the effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined first notification (a ceiling reaching effect) when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when the game state shifts to a first specific game state;
A second means (a function of executing a special reach miss effect by the effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (a special reach miss effect) when the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when a transition to a second specific game state occurs;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features bI2 to bI6, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, while fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification.

In the above configuration, the first notification is executed when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when a transition to the first specific game state occurs, and the second notification is executed when the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when a transition to the second specific game state occurs. Therefore, the player can be notified of the transition to the first specific game state or the transition to the second specific game state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made before the timing of the execution of the first and second notifications, if the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state are met in the same game round, the above notifications can be executed based on the adjustment results of the specific game state to be transitioned to. This makes it possible to prevent notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to.

Feature bI8. The game control means controls the game so that after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is made within a predetermined notification period (determined display time),
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the sixth, eighth, and ninth variants of the second embodiment) is provided, which can transition the game state to a first specific game state or a second specific game state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means;
A gaming machine described in any of features bI1 to bI7, characterized in that the transition means for the specific game state is configured to be able to execute the transition at any specific timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the middle timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

When the game state transitions to a specific game state, it is expected that the player will realize that they are in the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, if the transition to the specific game state occurs at the start or middle of a game round, for example, there is a concern that the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs after the game round operation has ended, so the player can be made aware of the transition to the specific game state only after the result of the special judgment is announced. This makes it possible to prevent a loss of attention to the game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bI3 above, the following effect can be achieved: "The conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are both met in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called losing result). In such a configuration, if the transition to the specific game state based on the satisfaction of each of these transition conditions is made at the start of a game round or in the middle of a game round operation, there is a concern that the player may be able to predict the losing result before the result of the special judgment is announced, without realizing that the specific game state has been entered, and the role of the game round may not be properly fulfilled. By applying this feature to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the losing result from being predicted in advance."

Furthermore, when this feature is applied to feature bI7 above, the following effect can be achieved: "In a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification, each of these transition determinations is made at a relatively early stage in the game round. In this case, if the transition to the specific game state were to be made immediately when each of these transition determinations was made, there is a concern that the player's attention would be shifted to the transition to the specific game state, even before the result of the special determination was not notified, and the role of the game round would not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, even if each transition determination is made before the result of the special determination is not notified, the transition to the specific game state based on the result of each transition determination is not made until the start of the result notification. As a result, even if the player notices the specific game round from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to have the player focus their attention on the game round until the result is notified, and then shift their attention to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature bI7 above while preventing a loss of attention to the game round."

Feature bI9. The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
a number update means for updating the number of times the game has been played since the game was switched to the specific game state or the remaining number of times the game has been played in the specific game state (such as a function for executing the processing of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth, eighth, and ninth variants of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any of features bI1 to bI8, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number of times update means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means.

With the above configuration, the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made after updating the number of plays in the specific game state and the remaining number of times the specific game state can be played. Therefore, for example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended during that final play and then a transition to the second specific game state can be made. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, creating a state equivalent to an increase in the remaining number of times in the specific game state.

Feature bI10. The game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at predetermined intervals.
The gaming machine described in feature bI9 is configured to be able to execute the update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means in one processing cycle of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the count update and each transition determination are performed within the same processing cycle. This effectively prevents gameplay in the normal game state from intervening when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state.

Feature bI11. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state B) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (such as reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, or winning a special failure result, winning a transition lottery, etc.), and a second specific game state (the third time-shortened game state A or the second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (such as winning a special failure result, winning a transition lottery, or reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.),
a first transition determination means for making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, or a function of executing a process A for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 8);
a second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific game state (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, or a function of executing a process A for determining transition to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 8);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that, in one game round, after the first transition determination is made by the first transition determination means, the second transition determination is made by the second transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb5303 after executing the processing of step Sb5302 in variant 6 of the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step Sb6503 and then executing the processing of step Sb6504 if a negative determination is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8, a function of executing the processing of step Sb7201 and then executing the processing of step Sb7203 in variant 9, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a transition is made when the result of a special judgment is a specific result, there is also a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. These specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state to which a transition is made when a first transition condition is met, and a second specific gaming state to which a transition is made when a second transition condition is met. In this way, in a gaming machine that has multiple specific gaming states to which a transition is made based on different transition conditions, it is possible for each of these transition conditions to be met in the same game round. In this regard, the above configuration makes a first transition determination as to whether to transition to the first specific gaming state before making a second transition determination as to whether to transition to the second specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether to adopt the result of the second transition determination based on the result of the first transition determination, thereby enabling optimal control of the gaming state.

The configurations of features bI2 to bI10 above can be applied to this feature. In this case, applying these configurations can provide additional benefits.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bI1 to bI11 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics bJ group>
The feature bJ group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variations 7, 8, and 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bJ group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bJ1. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
An update means (such as a function to execute the processing of step Sb5504 by the main control unit 162 according to modified example 7 and modified example 8 of the second embodiment, or a function to execute the processing of step Sb7604 by the main control unit 162 according to modified example 10) that can update predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has been played without a win or loss, or winning a points lottery) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as a loss in the result of the win/loss lottery, or winning a points lottery, etc.);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the update result of the update means being a predetermined result (such as the number of times the ceiling is reached, or the number of predetermined points), and a second specific game state (third time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the result of the special determination being a predetermined determination result (such as a special failure result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific determination (such as a failure type determination or a transition lottery) made in a game round in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (such as a failure result) that does not correspond to a transition to the special game state being a predetermined determination result (such as a special failure result or winning the transition lottery),
a first transition determination means for making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means (such as a function for executing a process for determining transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modifications 7 and 10 of the second embodiment, or a function for executing a process B for determining transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 8);
a second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific game state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modifications 7 and 10 of the second embodiment, or a function of executing a process B for determining transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 8);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that, in one game round, after the second transition determination is made by the second transition determination means, the first transition determination is made by the first transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb6102 after executing the processing of step Sb6101 in variant 7 of the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step Sb6505 and then executing the processing of step Sb6506 if a positive determination is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8, a function of executing the processing of step Sb7501 and then executing the processing of step Sb7502 in variant 10, etc.).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. These specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state to which a transition is made based on the results of update information updated at a predetermined update trigger, and a second specific gaming state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific judgment result different from the specific result, or when a specific judgment made in a gaming round in which a special judgment results in a non-specific result results in a specific judgment result. In such a gaming machine, the transition conditions to the first specific gaming state and the transition conditions to the second specific gaming state may be met in the same gaming round. In this regard, in the above configuration, a second transition determination is made as to whether to transition to the second specific gaming state before a first transition determination is made as to whether to transition to the first specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether to adopt the result of the first transition determination based on the result of the second transition determination, enabling optimal control of the gaming state.

Feature bJ2. A gaming machine according to Feature bJ1, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb6601 by the main control unit 162 according to Variation 8 of the second embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step Sb7601 by the main control unit 162 according to Variation 10) that can restrict the transition to the first specific gaming state or restrict the execution of the first transition determination when the result of the second transition determination corresponds to a transition to the second specific gaming state, even if the result of the first transition determination corresponds to a transition to the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if a transition to the second specific gaming state is determined in the first transition determination that is performed first, even if a transition to the first specific gaming state is determined in the subsequent first transition determination, that determination is invalidated, or the execution of the first transition determination itself is restricted. This allows priority to be given to the transition to the second specific gaming state when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state can be met in the same game round.

Feature bJ3. A gaming machine as described in Feature bJ2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb7601 by the main control unit 162 according to Variation 10) capable of restricting the update by the update means when the result of the second transition determination corresponds to transitioning to a second specific gaming state.

For example, if a configuration were to invalidate the transition to the first specific game state and transition to the second specific game state based on the satisfaction of both the transition condition to the first specific game state and the transition condition to the second specific game state in the same game round, there would be a concern that the player would not be able to enjoy the benefits of the first specific game state. In this regard, the above configuration restricts the execution of updates by the update means when the second transition determination determines that a transition to the second specific game state will occur. This restricts the update result of the update means from becoming a predetermined result in a game round in which the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, and ultimately prevents the transition condition to the first specific game state and the transition condition to the second specific game state from being satisfied in the same game round. This makes it possible to prioritize transition to the second specific game state while preventing the player from being unable to enjoy the benefits of the first specific game state.

Feature bJ4. A gaming machine as described in Feature bJ3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means capable of restricting the update by the update means when in the second specific gaming state (a function for executing the processing of steps Sb7602 and Sb7603 by the main control unit 162 according to Variation 10).

In the above configuration, if updating by the update means is restricted based on the second transition determination determining a transition to the second specific game state, the restriction continues even after transition to the second specific game state. This allows updates by the update means to resume after the second specific game state ends, preventing the transition condition to the first specific game state from being met in the middle of the second specific game state.

Feature bJ5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bJ2 to bJ4, wherein the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, if the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game, priority is given to transitioning to the second specific game state, making it possible to transition to the more advantageous specific game state.

Feature bJ6. A gaming machine according to Feature bJ1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sb6303 and Sb6304 by the main control unit 162 according to Variation 7) that can transition to the first specific gaming state when the result of the first transition determination corresponds to a transition to the first specific gaming state, even if the result of the second transition determination corresponds to a transition to the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if a subsequent first transition determination determines a transition to the first specific gaming state, the result of the previous second transition determination is invalidated, even if a transition to the second specific gaming state was determined. This allows priority to be given to transitioning to the first specific gaming state when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific gaming state can be met in the same game round.

Feature bJ7. A gaming machine according to Feature bJ6, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination has resulted in the non-specific result.

The first specific game state is entered based on the updated result of the number of times a special judgment has resulted in a non-specific result (the cumulative number of losing game plays), allowing the player to predict the transition to the first specific game state even before the updated result becomes a predetermined result. Therefore, if the transition to the first specific game state is not made even though the updated result becomes a predetermined result, the player will likely notice that the transition to the first specific game state has not occurred. On the other hand, the second specific game state is entered based on the results of a special judgment or a specific judgment, making it impossible for the player to predict the transition to the second specific game state in advance. Taking these characteristics into account, by prioritizing the transition to the first specific game state when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game play, it becomes possible to adjust the specific game state to which the player will transition without noticing.

Feature bJ8. A first means (a function of executing a ceiling reaching effect by the effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined first notification (a ceiling reaching effect) when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when the game state shifts to a first specific game state;
A second means (a function of executing a special reach miss effect by the effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (a special reach miss effect) when the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when a transition to a second specific game state occurs;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features bJ2 to bJ7, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the fluctuation, while the fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification.

In the above configuration, the first notification is executed when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when a transition to the first specific game state occurs, and the second notification is executed when the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when a transition to the second specific game state occurs. Therefore, the player can be notified of the transition to the first specific game state or the transition to the second specific game state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made before the timing of the execution of the first and second notifications, if the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state can be met in the same game round, the above notifications can be executed based on the adjustment results of the specific game state to be transitioned to. This makes it possible to prevent notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to.

Feature bJ9. The specific gaming state termination condition includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
a number update means for updating the number of times the game has been played since the game was switched to the specific game state or the remaining number of times the game has been played in the specific game state (such as a function for executing the processing of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the seventh, eighth, and tenth variants of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any of features bJ1 to bJ8, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number update means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means.

With the above configuration, the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made after updating the number of plays in the specific game state and the remaining number of times the specific game state can be played. Therefore, for example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended during that final play and then a transition to the second specific game state can be made. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, creating a state equivalent to an increase in the remaining number of times in the specific game state.

Feature bJ10. The game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle.
The gaming machine described in feature bJ9 is configured to be able to execute the update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means in the same processing round of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the count update and each transition determination are performed within the same processing cycle. This effectively prevents gameplay in the normal game state from intervening when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bJ1 to bJ10 above. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bK group>
The feature bK group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 6 and 8 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bK group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bK1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state B) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc., or winning a special miss result, winning a transition lottery, etc.), and a second specific game state (the third time-shortened game state A or the second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special miss result, winning a transition lottery, etc., or reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific game state and different from the first transition condition,
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to restrict transition to a second specific gaming state when the second transition condition is met while in a first specific gaming state (e.g., the flow when a positive judgment is made in step Sb5603 and a negative judgment is made in step Sb5604).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a player enters when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. These specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state to which a player enters when a first transition condition is met, and a second specific gaming state that is less advantageous than the first specific gaming state and to which a second transition condition is met. In such a case, if the second transition condition is met while the player is in the first specific gaming state, transition to the second specific gaming state is restricted, thereby preventing the player from being treated disadvantageously and enabling optimal control of the gaming state.

Feature bK2. A game control means (a function for executing the special game control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing the special game change display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game so that the game operation is started based on the special judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game.
a first transition determination means for making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state (a function for executing the process for determining transition to a second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5302 or step Sb6503 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth and eighth variants of the second embodiment, or a function for executing the process for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6505 by the main control device 162 according to the eighth variant of the second embodiment);
a second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific gaming state (such as a function of executing the process for determining transition to the third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5303 or step Sb6504 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth and eighth variants of the second embodiment, or a function of executing the process for determining transition to the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6506 by the main control device 162 according to the eighth variant of the second embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature bK1, which is configured so that in one game round, after the first transition determination is made by the first transition determination means, the second transition determination is made by the second transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb5302 and then executing the processing of step Sb5303 in variant 6 of the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step Sb6503 and then executing the processing of step Sb6504 if a negative determination is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8, a function of executing the processing of step Sb6505 and then executing the processing of step Sb6506 if a positive determination is made in step Sb6502, etc.).

In gaming machines with multiple specific game states that transition based on different transition conditions, it is possible that each of these transition conditions may be met in the same game round. In consideration of such situations, this feature is configured to restrict transition to the second specific game state when a second transition condition is met in a first specific game state, and then to make a first transition determination as to whether to transition to the first specific game state and then a second transition determination as to whether to transition to the second specific game state. With this configuration, if both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met in the same game round, even if the first transition determination determines that a transition to the first specific game state should be made and the second transition determination determines that the second transition condition is met, transition to the second specific game state is prevented by the above restriction. This allows transition to the more advantageous first specific game state, enabling optimal control of the game state.

Feature bK3. A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing a game-round performance by the performance control device 143) is provided that can execute a predetermined notification (a ceiling-reaching performance, a special reach-miss performance) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific game state in a game round,
A gaming machine described in feature bK2, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, while fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the timing of execution of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by issuing a predetermined notification during a game round, it is possible to notify the player that the first transition condition has been met or that a transition to the first specific game state has occurred. In this case, because the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made prior to the timing of the execution of the predetermined notification, in a game round in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition have been met, it is possible to determine whether or not to issue a predetermined notification based on the results of each transition determination. In other words, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met during the same game round and a transition to the first specific game state is made, it is possible to appropriately issue the predetermined notification.

Feature bK4. A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a game round performance based on a variation pattern from the main control device 162 in the performance control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (a special reach miss performance, a ceiling reach performance) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state in a game round,
A gaming machine described in feature bK2 or feature bK3, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, while fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the timing of execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by issuing a specific notification during a game, it is possible to notify the player that the second transition condition has been met or that a transition to the second specific game state has occurred. In this case, because the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made before the timing of the specific notification, in a game in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition have been met, it is possible to determine whether or not to issue a specific notification based on the results of each transition determination. As a result, even if the second transition condition has been met, if the first transition condition has also been met at the same time, restricting transition to the second specific game state, the implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met during the same game, it is possible to prevent a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to.

Feature bK5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bK2 to bK4, wherein the first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed when a game round starts.

In the above configuration, the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed at the start of a game round. Therefore, when a notification corresponding to the fulfillment of the first transition condition or the fulfillment of the second transition condition is made during a game round, it is possible to control whether or not to make each notification based on the results of each transition determination. This prevents a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are fulfilled during the same game round. This is also effective when a notification of the fulfillment of the first transition condition or the second transition condition is made based on the results of a game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bK3 or feature bK4, it can effectively deal with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are executed in the middle of a game round, as well as cases where these notifications are executed at the beginning of a game round. Furthermore, in a gaming machine that is configured to set the game round presentation to be executed in a game round at the start of the game round, it can flexibly deal with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are incorporated into the game round presentation that is set.

Feature bK6. The game control means controls the game so that, after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is made within a predetermined notification period (determined display time),
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 6 and 8 of the second embodiment) is provided, which can transition the game state to a first specific game state or a second specific game state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means;
A gaming machine described in any of features bK2 to bK5, characterized in that the transition means for a specific game state is configured to be able to execute the transition at any specific timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the middle timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

When the game state transitions to a specific game state, it is expected that the player will realize that they are in the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, if the transition to the specific game state occurs at the start or middle of a game round, for example, there is a concern that the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs after the game round operation has ended, so the player can be made aware of the transition to the specific game state only after the result of the special judgment is announced. This makes it possible to prevent a loss of attention to the game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bK3 or feature bK4, "in a configuration in which the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made before the timing of the execution of the predetermined notification or the specific notification, each of these transition judgments may be made at a relatively early stage in the game round. For example, in a configuration in which the setting for executing the predetermined notification is made at the start of the game round, each of the above transition judgments also needs to be made at the start of the game round. In such a case, if the configuration is such that the transition to the specific game state occurs immediately upon the execution of each of these transition judgments, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced." There is a concern that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, even if each transition determination is completed before the result of the special determination is notified, the transition to the specific game state based on the results of each transition determination is not performed until the result notification begins. As a result, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to have the player focus on the game round until the result notification is notified, and then shift their attention to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effects of feature bK3 or feature bK4 while preventing the player's attention from being lost to the game round.

Furthermore, when this feature is applied to feature bK5 above, "Once the first transition determination and the second transition determination are completed, all that remains is to transition to the specific game state. Therefore, in a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made at the start of a game round, it is natural that the transition to the specific game state also be made at the start of the game round. However, if the transition to the specific game state is made at the start of a game round, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special determination is announced, and there is a concern that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled." In this regard, with this configuration, even if each of the transition determinations above is made at the start of a game round, the transition to the specific game state based on the results of each transition determination is not made until the result notification begins. As a result, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to have the player focus on the game round until the result notification is received, and then shift their attention to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature bK5 above while preventing the player's attention from being lost to the game round.

Feature bK7. A gaming machine as described in Feature bK6, wherein the first transition condition and the second transition condition can be met in a game in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (a losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state.

In the above configuration, the first and second transition conditions are met in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called losing result). However, in this configuration, if the transition to a specific game state based on the satisfaction of each transition condition occurs at the start of a game round or during the game round's operation, there is a concern that the player may be able to predict the losing result before the result of the special judgment is announced, without realizing that the specific game state has been reached, and the role of the game round may not be properly fulfilled. By applying feature bK6 to this configuration, it is possible to achieve the effects of features bK2 to bK5 while preventing the player from predicting the losing result.

Feature bK8. The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A number update means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) is provided for updating the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state or the remaining number of times of play in the specific game state.
A gaming machine described in any of features bK2 to bK7, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number of times update means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means.

With the above configuration, the remaining number of times that the specific game state can be played is updated before the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made. Therefore, for example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended during that final play and then transitioned to the second specific game state. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, effectively increasing the remaining number of times in the specific game state.

Feature bK9: The game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at predetermined intervals.
The gaming machine described in feature bK8 is configured to be able to execute the update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means in one processing cycle of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the count update and each transition determination are performed within the same processing cycle. This effectively prevents gameplay in the normal game state from intervening when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state.

Feature bK10. The specific gaming state termination condition includes that the number of games played since transitioning to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A gaming machine according to any one of features bK1 to bK9, characterized in that the upper limit number of times of the first specific gaming state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the upper limit (remaining number of times) for the first specific game state is greater than the upper limit for the second specific game state, making the first specific game state more advantageous for the player than the second specific game state. By applying any of the features bK1 to bK9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bK1 to bK10 above. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature b L group>
The feature group bL is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the modifications, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the modification 7 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bL group addresses the background technology of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bL1. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.), and a second specific game state (third time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special miss result, winning a transition lottery, etc.) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific game state and different from the first transition condition,
A first transition determination means (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162) that performs a first transition determination of whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state;
A second transition determination means (such as a function of executing a process for determining whether to transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162) performs a second transition determination as to whether to transition to a second specific gaming state;
Equipped with
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to allow the transition to the first specific gaming state (the flow when a positive determination is made in step Sb6301),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, the second transition determination means makes the second transition determination, and then the first transition determination is made by the first transition determination means (such as a function of executing the processing of step Sb6102 after executing the processing of step Sb6101 in a main control device 162 relating to variant example 7 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a player transitions when a special judgment results in a specific result, there are also specific gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. These specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state to which a player transitions when a first transition condition is met, and a second specific gaming state that is less advantageous than the first specific gaming state and to which a second transition condition is met. In this way, in a gaming machine that has multiple specific gaming states to which a player transitions based on different transition conditions, it is possible for each of these transition conditions to be met in the same game.

In consideration of such situations, the above configuration allows transition to the first specific gaming state when the first transition condition is met while the game is in the second specific gaming state, and then makes a second transition determination as to whether to transition to the second specific gaming state before making a first transition determination as to whether to transition to the first specific gaming state. With this configuration, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met in the same game round, even if the second transition determination determines to transition to the second specific gaming state, the subsequent first transition determination determines to transition to the first specific gaming state, thereby canceling the result of the previous second transition determination. This allows for a transition to the more advantageous first specific gaming state, enabling optimal control of the gaming state.

Feature bL2. A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing a game-time performance by the performance control device 143) is provided that can execute a predetermined notification (a ceiling-reaching performance, a special reach-miss performance) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific game state in a game,
A gaming machine described in feature bL1, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, while fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the timing of execution of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by issuing a predetermined notification during a game round, it is possible to notify the player that the first transition condition has been met or that a transition to the first specific game state has occurred. In this case, because the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made prior to the timing of the execution of the predetermined notification, in a game round in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition have been met, it is possible to determine whether or not to issue a predetermined notification based on the results of each transition determination. In other words, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met during the same game round and a transition to the first specific game state is made, it is possible to appropriately issue the predetermined notification.

Feature bL3. A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a game round performance based on a variation pattern from the main control device 162 in the performance control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (a special reach miss performance, a ceiling reach performance) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state in a game round,
A gaming machine described in feature bL1 or feature bL2, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, while fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the timing of execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by issuing a specific notification during a game, it is possible to notify the player that the second transition condition has been met or that a transition to the second specific game state has occurred. In this case, because the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made before the timing of the specific notification, in a game in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition have been met, it is possible to determine whether or not to issue a specific notification based on the results of each transition determination. As a result, even if the second transition condition has been met, if the first transition condition has also been met at the same time, restricting transition to the second specific game state, the implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met during the same game, it is possible to prevent a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to.

Feature bL4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bL1 to bL3, wherein the first transition determination and the second transition determination are configured to be performed when a game round starts.

In the above configuration, the first transition determination and the second transition determination are performed at the start of a game round. Therefore, when a notification corresponding to the fulfillment of the first transition condition or the fulfillment of the second transition condition is made during a game round, it is possible to control whether or not to make each notification based on the results of each transition determination. This prevents a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are fulfilled during the same game round. This is also effective when a notification of the fulfillment of the first transition condition or the second transition condition is made based on the results of a game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bL2 or feature bL3, it can effectively deal with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are executed in the middle of a game round, as well as cases where these notifications are executed at the beginning of a game round. Furthermore, in a gaming machine that is configured to set the game round presentation to be executed in a game round at the start of the game round, it can flexibly deal with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are incorporated into the game round presentation that is set.

Feature bL5. The game control means controls the game so that, after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is made within a predetermined notification period (determined display time),
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the seventh modified example of the second embodiment) is provided, which can transition the game state to a first specific game state or a second specific game state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features bL1 to bL4, characterized in that the transition means for the specific game state is configured to be able to execute the transition at any specific timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the middle timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

When the game state transitions to a specific game state, it is expected that the player will realize that they are in the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, if the transition to the specific game state occurs at the start or middle of a game round, for example, there is a concern that the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs after the game round operation has ended, so the player can be made aware of the transition to the specific game state only after the result of the special judgment is announced. This makes it possible to prevent a loss of attention to the game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bL2 or feature bL3, "in a configuration in which the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made before the timing of the execution of the predetermined notification or the specific notification, each of these transition judgments is made at a relatively early stage in the game round. In this case, if the configuration is such that the transition to the specific game state is made immediately at the time each of these transition judgments is made, there is a concern that the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, Even if each transition determination is completed before the result of the special determination is announced, the transition to the specific game state based on the results of each transition determination is not performed until the result announcement begins. This allows the player to focus on the game round until the result announcement is announced, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, and then shifts their attention to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effects of feature bL2 or feature bL3 while preventing the player's attention from being lost to the game round.

Furthermore, when this feature is applied to feature bL4 above, "Once the first transition determination and the second transition determination are completed, all that remains is to transition to the specific game state. Therefore, in a configuration in which the first transition determination and the second transition determination are made at the start of a game round, it is natural that the transition to the specific game state also be made at the start of the game round. However, if the transition to the specific game state is made at the start of a game round, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special determination is announced, and there is a concern that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled." In this regard, with this configuration, even if each of the above transition determinations is made at the start of a game round, the transition to the specific game state based on the results of each transition determination is not made until the result notification begins. As a result, even if the player notices a specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to have the player focus on the game round until the result notification is received, and then shift their attention to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve each of the above effects of feature bL4 while preventing the player's attention from being lost to the game round.

Feature bL6. A gaming machine as described in Feature bL5, wherein the first transition condition and the second transition condition can be met in a game in which the result of the special determination is a non-specific result (a losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state.

In the above configuration, the first and second transition conditions are met in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called losing result). However, in this configuration, if the transition to a specific game state based on the satisfaction of each transition condition occurs at the start of a game round or during a game round's operation, there is a concern that the player may be able to predict the losing result before the result of the special judgment is announced, without realizing that the specific game state has been entered, and the role of the game round may not be properly fulfilled. By applying feature bL5 to this configuration, it is possible to achieve the effects of features bL1 to bL4 while preventing the player from predicting the losing result.

Feature bL7. The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A number update means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) is provided for updating the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state or the remaining number of times of play in the specific game state.
A gaming machine described in any of features bL1 to bL6, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number of times update means, the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means, and then the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means.

With the above configuration, the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made after updating the number of plays in the specific game state and the remaining number of times the specific game state can be played. Therefore, for example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended during that final play and then a transition to the second specific game state can be made. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, creating a state equivalent to an increase in the remaining number of times in the specific game state.

Feature bL8. The game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle.
The gaming machine described in feature bL7 is configured to be able to execute the update by the number of times update means, the first transition determination by the first transition determination means, and the second transition determination by the second transition determination means in one processing cycle of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the count update and each transition determination are performed within the same processing cycle. This effectively prevents gameplay in the normal game state from intervening when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state.

Feature bL9. The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A gaming machine according to any one of features bL1 to bL8, characterized in that the upper limit number of times of the first specific gaming state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the upper limit (remaining number of times) for the first specific game state is greater than the upper limit for the second specific game state, making the first specific game state more advantageous for the player than the second specific game state. By applying any of the features bL1 to bL8 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features bL1 to bL9 above. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature b M group>
The group of features bM is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on modification 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bM group addresses the background technology of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bM1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As game states, there are a first game state (second time-shortened game state) and a second game state (third time-shortened game state, first time-shortened game state) which are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state,
An update means (such as a function to execute the processing of step Sb7604 by the main control unit 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment) that can update predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has been played without a win or the number of points) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as a loss in the result of the winning/losing lottery, or a win in the points lottery);
A transition means (such as a function of executing a process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162, a process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state, etc.) that can transition to the first game state based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (such as a ceiling number of times, a predetermined number of points, etc.);
An update limiting means (such as a function of executing the processing of steps Sb7602 and Sb7603 by the main control device 162 according to the tenth modified example of the second embodiment) capable of limiting the update by the update means when in the second gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a transition is made when the result of a special judgment is a specific result, there are also the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Of these, the first gaming state is transitioned to when the result of the update information, which is updated at a specified update trigger, is a specified result.

Depending on the timing of the transition to the second gaming state, the update result of the update means may become a predetermined result while the game is in the second gaming state. In this case, it is possible to invalidate the achievement of the predetermined result under such circumstances in order to avoid overlapping execution of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. However, there is a concern that the repeated play aimed at achieving the predetermined result will be for naught, leaving the player feeling uncomfortable. In this regard, with this configuration, updates by the update means are limited when the game is in the second gaming state, preventing the update result of the update means from becoming a predetermined result while the game is in the second gaming state. This prevents the achievement of the predetermined result from being invalidated, making it possible to control the gaming state in an appropriate manner.

Feature bM2. A gaming machine according to Feature bM1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (such as a function for executing the processing of step Sb7602 by the main control device 162 according to Variation 10 of the second embodiment) that can release the restriction imposed by the update restriction means when the second gaming state ends.

With the above configuration, when the second gaming state ends, the update means resumes updating. This allows the player to resume playing, aiming for a predetermined result, from the continuation of the updated result before the transition to the second gaming state.

Feature bM3. A game control means (a function for executing the special game control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing the special game change display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game so that the game operation is started based on the special judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game.
A second game state transition means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162, a process for transition to the time-saving game state, etc.) that can transition to the second game state when a predetermined transition opportunity (a special miss result) is established;
A means capable of restricting the update by the update means in a predetermined game in which the predetermined transition opportunity (a special miss result) is established (such as a function of executing the processing of step Sb7601 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature bM1 or feature bM2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the execution of updates by the update means is restricted in a game round in which the condition for transitioning to the second game state is met. As a result, when a situation arises in which both a trigger for transitioning to the second game state and the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (a trigger for transitioning to the first game state) can be achieved in the same game round, the transition to the second game state is prioritized, while the achievement of the predetermined result (transition to the first game state) can be postponed. This makes it possible to avoid transitioning to the first game state and transition to the second game state, thereby preventing the two game states from overlapping.

In addition, with the above configuration, when the second gaming state ends, the update information resumes updating, and the update result becomes the predetermined result, so the game can transition to the first gaming state after the second gaming state ends. In other words, if the trigger for transitioning between these gaming states occurs in the same game round, the game can transition to the second gaming state and the first gaming state sequentially, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of both gaming states.

Feature bM4. Equipped with a transition determination means for determining whether to transition to the second gaming state (such as a function of executing a transition determination process for the third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment),
A gaming machine described in feature bM3, characterized in that in one game round, the update is performed by the update means after the transition determination means makes the transition determination (a configuration in which the processing of step Sb7604 is performed after the processing of step Sb7501 is performed).

In the above configuration, the update information update process is executed after a transition to the second gaming state is determined. Therefore, when a situation arises in which both a transition to the second gaming state and the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (a transition to the first gaming state) can occur in the same game round, it is possible to switch between updating the update information and not updating it based on the result of the transition to the second gaming state determination. This makes it a preferable configuration for restricting the updating of the update information in a game round in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is met, as in feature bM3 above.

Feature bM5. The game operation is started based on the special judgment being made, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and a game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round variable display process in the performance control device 143) is provided to control the game round to be played;
A gaming machine described in any of features bM1 to bM4, characterized in that it is equipped with a second gaming state transition means (a function for executing a process for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162, a process for transition to a time-shortened gaming state, etc.) that can transition to a second gaming state based on the result of the special judgment being a predetermined judgment result (special miss result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (miss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made in a gaming round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state being a predetermined judgment result (special miss result).

In the above configuration, a transition to the second gaming state is made when the result of a special judgment is a predetermined judgment result that differs from the specific result, or when the result of a specific judgment made in a gaming round in which the result of a special judgment is a non-specific result is a predetermined judgment result. In such a configuration in which the trigger for transition to the second gaming state is established by the special judgment itself or a specific judgment linked to the result of the special judgment, the timing of the transition to the second gaming state is random, and an event may occur in which the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result during the second gaming state. In such cases, applying the configuration of feature bM1 above suppresses the occurrence of the above event, making it possible to control the gaming state appropriately.

Feature bM6. The game has a third gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state;
The second gaming state can be transitioned to without passing through a special gaming state, and the third gaming state can be transitioned to via a special gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bM1 to bM5, characterized in that the update by the update means is permitted when in the third gaming state.

For the third gaming state, which is reached via a special gaming state, it is possible to adjust the gaming machine during its design stage so that the update result of the update means does not result in a predetermined result during the third gaming state. Taking this characteristic into consideration, the above configuration restricts the updating of update information in the second gaming state, but does not impose such restrictions in the third gaming state. This prevents excessive stagnation in the updating of update information and prevents significant delays in the transition to the first gaming state.

This feature can also be expressed as "a gaming machine according to any one of Features bM1 to bM5, characterized in that it has a third gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state, and that it transitions to the third gaming state with the predetermined update information set to a predetermined initial value (a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times) or that it is configured so that the predetermined update information is set to the predetermined initial value in response to the transition to the third gaming state, and that it is configured so that the update by the update means is permitted when in the third gaming state."

Feature bM7. The condition for ending the third gaming state includes that the number of games played since transitioning to the third gaming state reaches a specific number (a sixth upper limit number or a seventh upper limit number),
A gaming machine described in feature bM6, characterized in that the first gaming state can be transitioned to based on the result of the update by the update means performed on the game after the special gaming state has ended being a predetermined result.

In the above configuration, the third gaming state ends when the number of plays since transitioning to the third gaming state reaches a specific number, and the update means updates the update information for games played after the special gaming state ends. In this case, by setting the specific number, which is the upper limit of the number of plays for the third gaming state, to a number less than the number of plays required for the update result of the update information to reach a specific result, the update result can be configured to reach the specific result after the third gaming state ends. In other words, this can prevent the update result of the update means from reaching a specific result in the middle of the third gaming state, making this a preferable aspect of realizing the configuration of feature bM6 above.

Feature bM8. A specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the miss count image 475 by the performance control device 143) is provided that can execute a specific notification (displaying the miss count image 475) corresponding to the update result of the update means,
A gaming machine described in any of features bM1 to bM7, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a means for retaining the notification content of the specific notification in the state immediately before the update by the update means is restricted.

In the above configuration, a specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means is issued, allowing the player to understand the progress of the update information and the amount remaining until a predetermined result is achieved, which can be used as useful information for continuing the game. In this case, if updates are restricted due to the second game state, the specific notification is issued in a manner that maintains the state immediately before the restriction was imposed. This makes it easy for the player to understand that no updates have been made, as well as how much remains to be done if updates are resumed due to the lifting of the restriction, thereby making it possible to effectively reduce player confusion.

Feature bM9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bM1 to bM8, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination results in a non-specific result (a losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state.

The first gaming state is transitioned to based on the updated number of times that a special judgment has resulted in a non-specific result (the cumulative number of losing games), allowing the player to predict the transition to the first gaming state even before the updated result becomes the specified result. Therefore, if the transition to the first gaming state is not made when the updated result becomes the specified result midway through the second gaming state, there is a concern that the player may easily notice that the transition to the first gaming state has not occurred. Applying the configuration of feature bM1 above to such a configuration and avoiding the occurrence of the event in which the updated result becomes the specified result midway through the second gaming state, which is the original cause, can prevent the arousal of distrust regarding the failure to transition to the first gaming state, and enable the above-mentioned effect of feature bM1 to be optimally exerted.

Feature bM10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second actuation port 63) through which a game ball can enter,
In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in the normal gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bM1 to bM9, wherein the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on a ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

In the above configuration, when transitioning to the first or second game state, it is more likely that a ball will enter the predetermined ball entry means than in the normal game state, making it easier to receive a special judgment. By applying any of the features bM1 to bM9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7, respectively, to each of Features bM1 to bM10. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature bN group>
The feature bN group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variations 6 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bN group addresses the background art of "gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, which execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that the invention seeks to solve: "There is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bN1. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
An update means (such as a function to execute the process of step Sb5504 by the main control unit 162 according to Modifications 7 to 9 of the second embodiment, or a function to execute the process of step Sb7604 by the main control unit 162 according to Modification 10) that can update predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has lost, the number of points, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as the result of the win/lose lottery being a loser, or winning the points lottery, etc.);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the update result of the update means being a predetermined result (such as the ceiling number of times or the predetermined number of points), and a second specific game state (third time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the result of the special judgment being a predetermined judgment result (such as a special failure result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (such as a failure type judgment or a transition lottery) made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (such as a failure result) that does not correspond to a transition to the special game state being a predetermined judgment result (such as a special failure result or a winning result in the transition lottery),
Notification setting means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb3313 by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, a function for setting a game presentation by the presentation control device 143) for setting a predetermined notification (such as a special reach miss presentation) when the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result, or when the game state is shifted to or shifted to a second specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, the update is performed by the update means before the setting is performed by the notification setting means (a configuration in which the processing of step Sb3313 is performed after the processing of step Sb5504 is performed in variants 6 to 9 of the second embodiment, and a configuration in which the processing of step Sb3313 is performed after the processing of step Sb7604 is performed in variant 10 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special gaming state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific gaming state that is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. These specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state to which a transition is made based on the results of update information updated at a specific update trigger, and a second specific gaming state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific judgment result that is different from the specific result, or when a specific judgment made in a gaming round in which a special judgment results in a non-specific result results in a specific judgment result. In this case, both the result of a special judgment or specific judgment being the specific judgment result and the update result of the update means being the specific result may occur in the same gaming round. In order to avoid overlapping of multiple specific gaming states, it is possible to adjust the specific gaming state to be transitioned to the first specific gaming state.

In this case, for example, if a predetermined notification corresponding to a transition to the second specific game state or the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state is set prior to updating the update information, there is a risk that the predetermined notification corresponding to a transition to the second specific game state, etc., will be issued in a game round, even though the adjustment of the transition destination will actually result in a transition to the first specific game state. In this regard, with the above configuration, the update information is updated prior to the setting process of the predetermined notification, so the gaming machine can determine that the update result has become a predetermined result before setting the execution of the predetermined notification, and can cancel the execution of the predetermined notification based on the adjustment result of the transition destination. This makes it possible to adjust the specific game state to be transitioned to while preventing notifications that do not match the type of specific game state to be actually transitioned to from being issued in a game round, making it possible to control the game state appropriately.

In addition, if the result of a special judgment or specific judgment becomes the specified judgment result in a game round in which the update result of the update means does not become the specified result, the execution of a specified notification is set after the update information is updated. In other words, if only the condition for transitioning to the second specific game state is met, a corresponding notification can be appropriately made.

Feature bN2. A gaming machine as described in Feature bN1, characterized in that it is equipped with means for transitioning to a first specific gaming state when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result and the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to a second time-shortened gaming state and a process for determining whether to transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Variations 6, 8, and 9 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, if the result of a special or specific judgment is a predetermined judgment result and the update result of the update means is a predetermined result, transition to the first specific gaming state is prioritized. In such a case, applying feature bN1 above can avoid a notification corresponding to the second specific gaming state.

Feature bN3. A gaming machine as described in Feature bN1 or Feature bN2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination has resulted in the non-specific result.

The first specific game state is entered based on the updated number of times that a special judgment has resulted in a non-specific result (the cumulative number of losing game times). This characteristic allows the player to predict the transition to the first specific game state even before the updated result becomes the specified result. Therefore, if the transition to the first specific game state is not made when the updated result becomes the specified result during the second specific game state, there is a concern that the player may easily notice that the transition to the first specific game state has not occurred. Taking these circumstances into consideration, it is preferable to prioritize the transition to the first specific game state when both the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes the specified judgment result and the update result of the update means becomes the specified result in the same game round. Applying the configuration of feature bN1 in such cases makes it possible to prioritize the transition to the first specific game state while preventing notifications in the game round that are inconsistent with the type of specific game state to which the player will actually transition.

Feature bN4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bN1 to bN3, characterized in that the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, if a situation arises in which both the result of a special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result and the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result in the same game round, it is possible to transition to the more advantageous specific game state by prioritizing transition to the first specific game state. By applying the configuration of feature bN1 in such cases, it is possible to prioritize transition to the first specific game state while preventing notifications in the game round that are inconsistent with the type of specific game state to which the player will actually transition.

Feature bN5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bN1 to bN4, wherein the update is performed by the update means when a game round is started.

With the above configuration, the update information is updated at the start of a game round, so the execution setting for the specified notification can also be set at the start of the game round. This makes it possible to handle cases where the specified notification is performed at the beginning of a game round or throughout the game round, allowing for greater flexibility in the design of the specified notification.

Feature bN6. A specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the miss count image 475 by the performance control device 143) is provided that can execute a specific notification (miss count image 475) corresponding to the update result of the update means,
The specific notification execution means includes a notification update means (a function of updating the display content of the miss count image 475 by the performance control device 143) that updates the notification content of the specific notification based on the predetermined update information being updated by the update means,
The game control means controls the game so that, after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is made within a predetermined notification period (determined display time),
A gaming machine described in any of features bN1 to bN5, characterized in that the notification update means is equipped with a means capable of updating the notification content at any predetermined timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the middle timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation for the game round in which the update is performed by the update means to the start of the next game round.

In the above configuration, a specific notification corresponding to the update results of the update means is executed, allowing the player to grasp the progress of the update information and the remaining time until the predetermined result is achieved, and this information can be utilized as useful information in the subsequent game. In this case, in a configuration in which the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated, as in feature bN1 above—in other words, in a configuration in which the update information is updated before a determination is made as to whether the transition condition to the second specific game state required for setting the predetermined notification has been met—the update process for the update information may be performed relatively early in a game round. In such a case, if the content of the specific notification is updated immediately in response to the update information being updated, there is a concern that the player's attention will be shifted to the update result even before the result of the special judgment is announced, preventing the game round from functioning properly. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the specific notification is not updated until the announcement of the result of the special judgment begins, allowing the player to focus on the game round until the result of the special judgment is announced. This makes it possible to achieve the effects of feature bN1 while preventing a loss of attention to the game.

This feature may further include a configuration in which "the specified update information is the number of times the special judgment has resulted in the non-specific result." In this case, "the update process for the update information may be performed relatively early in a game. In such a case, if the content of the specific notification is updated immediately in response to the update of the update information, there is a concern that the player may be able to determine that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called losing result) even before the result of the special judgment is announced. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the specific notification is not updated until the announcement of the special judgment result begins, thereby preventing the player from being able to determine in advance that the result is a losing result, while still achieving the effect of feature bN1."

Feature bN7. The game control means controls the game so that, after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is made within a predetermined notification period (determined display time),
A gaming machine described in any one of features bN1 to bN6, characterized in that when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result, the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed at any specific timing (the start timing of the confirmation display in the special game round, the mid-point timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

In a configuration where the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated, as in feature bN1 above—in other words, where the update information is updated before a determination is made as to whether the transition condition to the second specific game state required for setting the predetermined notification has been met—the update process for the update information may be performed relatively early in a game round. In such a case, if the game were to transition to the first specific game state immediately based on the update result being a predetermined result, the player may realize from the behavior of the gaming machine that they are in the first specific game state, even before the result of the special determination is not notified, and their attention may be diverted, resulting in the game round not being properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the transition to the first specific game state is not performed until the result of the special determination is notified, thereby allowing the player to focus their attention on the game round until the result of the special determination is notified. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned effect of feature bN1 above while preventing a loss of attention to the game round.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features bA1 to bA12, Features bB1 to bB10, Features bC1 to bC9, Features bD1 to bD6, Features bE1 to bE10, Features bF1 to bF10, Features bG1 to bG8, Features bH1 to bH8, Features bI1 to bI11, Features bJ1 to bJ10, Features bK1 to bK10, Features bL1 to bL9, Features bM1 to bM10, and Features bN1 to bN7 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other groups bA to bN can be applied individually to each of the configurations of the above-described groups bA to bN, or the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state; the symbol change is initiated by operation of a start operating means, and the symbol change is stopped by operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed; and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine (ball-operated reel-type gaming machine): A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as it finally stops; the pattern fluctuation begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern fluctuation is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated, provided that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a feed process to collect game balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving device; a gaming machine configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the feed device.

<Features cA group to feature cI group>
The inventions described in the following Feature cA group to Feature cI group are a group of inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the above-mentioned third embodiment and its modifications.

<Feature c Group A>
The feature cA group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned third embodiment and variations 1 to 8 of the third embodiment.

Feature cA group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a system in which a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player are provided, and the gaming state is switched based on the results of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cA1. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A first transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state) based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A second transition means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-saving game state in the main control device 162 according to the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8, and a first transition process for suddenly entering the time-saving game state) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times the ceiling is reached, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met;
A specifying means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-shortened game state in the main control device 162 of the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8, a function for executing a second process for suddenly entering the time-shortened game state) that can reserve a transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the game is in a time-shortened game state, a situation in a high probability game state, a situation in an opening/closing execution mode, etc.), and then execute a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition is established (an end of the time-shortened game state, a predetermined number of game rounds, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. A transition to this specific game state is possible when a specific condition is met. Under this configuration, when a specific condition is met under specified circumstances, the transition to the specific game state is reserved, and then when the specified condition is met again, a transition to the reserved specific game state is made. In other words, not only is a transition to the specific game state immediate upon the fulfillment of a specific condition, but there are also cases in which a transition to the specific game state occurs after a delay from the fulfillment of a specific condition. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not a transition to the specific game state occurs, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature cA2. A gaming machine as described in Feature cA1, wherein the specification means is capable of reserving the specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when that condition is established in a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while the player is in a specific game state, the transition to the corresponding specific game state is reserved, and the reserved specific game state is transitioned to when a predetermined condition is subsequently met. In other words, since it is possible to acquire multiple specific game states, the player can have fun challenging themselves to acquire additional specific game states, greatly increasing the player's interest.

Feature cA3. A game control means (a function for executing the special game control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing the special game change display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game so that the game operation is started based on the special judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game.
A number setting means for setting the number of times that a player can stay in a specific game state (a function for setting a counter value corresponding to the upper limit number of times and the difference number of times in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2, a function for setting a counter value in the execution time reduction areas 561, 611 in modified examples 3 to 8, etc.);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature cA1 or feature cA2 is characterized in that the number setting means is equipped with a means (a function of setting a value corresponding to a differential number of times, a reserved upper limit number of times that is less than the original upper limit number of times, or a reserved upper limit number of times that is greater than the original upper limit number of times) that can make the number of times of play when transitioning to a predetermined specific gaming state via the reservation different from the number of times of play when transitioning without via the reservation (the original upper limit number of times)

In the above configuration, the number of times a player can stay in a specific gaming state differs depending on whether or not they transition via a reservation. Therefore, even in the same specific gaming state, the degree of advantage can differ depending on whether or not there is a reservation, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cA4. The specifying means is capable of making the reservation for a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when the specific gaming state is established,
The gaming machine described in feature cA3 is characterized in that the number setting means is equipped with a means (a function to set a differential number of times as a counter value, a reservation upper limit number of times that is lower than the original upper limit number of times) that can make the number of times of play when transitioning to a predetermined specific gaming state via the reservation lower than the number of times of play when transitioning without going through the reservation for the predetermined specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while in a specific gaming state, it is possible to reserve the specific gaming state corresponding to that fulfillment, allowing the player to acquire the specific gaming state multiple times, greatly increasing the player's enjoyment. In this case, if the reservation is made (in the case of multiple acquisition), the number of times the player can stay in the specific gaming state is reduced compared to if the reservation is not made (in the case of single acquisition), preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

Feature cA5. A game control means (a function for executing the special game control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing the special game change display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game so that the game operation is started based on the special judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game.
A number setting means for setting the number of times that a player can stay in a specific game state (a function for setting a counter value corresponding to the upper limit number of times and the difference number of times in the main control device 162 of the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2, a function for setting a counter value in the execution time reduction areas 561, 611 by the main control device 162 of modified examples 3 to 8, etc.);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features cA1 to cA4, characterized in that when the reservation of a predetermined specific gaming state is performed in response to the fulfillment of a specific condition while the player is in a specific specific gaming state, and then the transition to the predetermined specific gaming state is made, the number of times setting means can set the number of times that the player can stay in the predetermined specific gaming state by taking into account the remaining number of times that the player will be in the specific specific gaming state when the specific condition is fulfilled (such as a function to set the difference number of times obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction from the original maximum number of times for the reserved time reduction).

In the above configuration, when a transition is made to a specific game state (a predetermined specific game state) after a reservation has been made, the number of times that can be played in that specific game state is set taking into account the number of times remaining in the previous specific game state (a specific specific game state) in which the specific condition was met. In this case, the number of times that can be played in the subsequent specific game state changes depending on the number of times remaining when the specific condition is met, so it is possible to create differences in the degree of advantage depending on the timing of the fulfillment of the specific condition. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not a reservation occurs, but also the timing of its occurrence, making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature cA6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cA1 to cA5, configured to be capable of making multiple reservations (configurations of Variations 3 to 8 of the third embodiment).

With the above configuration, it is possible to reserve multiple specific game states, and transitions are made sequentially between the reserved specific game states, so the more reserved states there are, the more advantageous it is for the player. This allows players to enjoy not only whether a reservation will occur, but also how many they can reserve, thereby ideally increasing interest.

Feature cA7. A predetermined order means is provided for making the execution order of the transitions for the plurality of specific game states for which the reservation is made a predetermined order (a process for storing type information in the first area 565a to the third area 565b and the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j set in the occurrence order information storage area 565 in accordance with the winning order of the special miss results in the first to the third area 565a to the tenth area 565j in the variations 3 to 4; a process for grasping the reserved time reduction with the highest priority and making the grasped reserved time reduction the transition target in the variations 5 to 7; a function for executing a process for determining the transition order of the reserved time reduction by lottery, etc.),
A gaming machine described in feature cA6, characterized in that when the specified condition is met in a situation where multiple reservations are made, a transition is executed based on the execution order determined by the specified order means.

In the above configuration, when multiple specific game states are reserved, the execution order of transitions for the reserved specific game states is determined, and the transition order is controlled according to that execution order. Therefore, in situations where conflicts between specific game states may arise, transitions can be made in the preferred order while avoiding overlapping execution of specific game states.

Feature cA8. The specific game states that can be reserved include multiple specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, ceiling time-saving game states, etc.),
Priorities are set in advance for the plurality of specific gaming states,
The gaming machine described in feature cA7 is characterized in that the predetermined order means is equipped with a means for ensuring that the execution order corresponds to the priority (a function for executing the second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variants 5 to 7).

In the above configuration, when transitions are made between multiple reserved specific game states, the transitions are controlled to occur in an order corresponding to the priority set for each specific game state. This makes it possible to transition in an order corresponding to the type of specific game state, regardless of the order in which specific conditions are met. It is also expected to have the effect of reducing the workload when designing a gaming machine. In other words, if the transition order for every combination of specific game states were to be specified in the control program, there is a concern that the control program would become complicated and lead to an increased workload. In contrast, by controlling the transition order using priority, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each specific game state, simplifying the control program. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete overhaul of the control program is not required; simply changing the priority setting is sufficient. In other words, there is also the advantage that design changes can be made easily.

Feature cA9. The specific condition may be satisfied multiple times in the predetermined situation,
A gaming machine described in any of features cA1 to cA8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means capable of limiting the number of specific gaming states in which the reservation is made to a predetermined number or less (a function for executing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-shortened gaming state in the main control unit 162 of the third embodiment, variants 1 and 2, the reserved time-shortened area 562 of variants 3 and 4, the reserved time-shortened area 612 of variant 5, etc.).

If the number of reserved specific game states becomes too large, there is a concern that their management and control will become more complicated, increasing the processing load. In this regard, the above configuration limits the number of reserved specific game states to a predetermined number or less, making it possible to suppress an increase in processing load. Furthermore, to temporarily reserve a specific game state and then transition to it, information about the specific game state in question at the time of reservation is stored, and this information is used at the time of transition. Therefore, it is necessary to secure memory space for this purpose, but this feature also makes it possible to keep the amount of space required to store information about reserved specific game states to a minimum.

Feature cA10. A game control means (a function for executing a special game control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game change display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game so that the game operation is started based on the special judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game.
A termination means (a function of executing a high frequency support mode termination process in the main control device 162) that can terminate the specific gaming state based on the number of games played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaching a predetermined upper limit number of games;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features cA1 to cA9, characterized in that the specifying means is capable of reserving a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when the specific gaming state is in a specific gaming state, and is capable of executing a transition to the reserved specific gaming state when the specific gaming state in which the player is currently in is terminated by the termination means.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while in a specific game state, the current specific game state is completed and then the transition to the reserved specific game state is executed. This prevents the current specific game state from ending midway, giving the player an unnatural impression. Also, while the current specific game state may notify the player of the remaining number of play times available in that state, by completing the current specific game state to the end, even if a specific condition is met midway through the specific game state, it is sufficient to continue notifying the remaining number of play times, making it unnecessary to adjust the notification.

Feature cA11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cA1 to cA10, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing a reservation effect setting process in the effect control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (such as displaying a reservation image 529) using a predetermined notification means (pattern display device 75) when the reservation is made.

With the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when a specific game state is reserved, allowing the player to easily understand that a reservation has occurred.

Feature cA12. A number of times specification means (a function of executing the processing of step Sc2901 by the effect control device 143) is provided for specifying the number of times of play that can be stayed when the transition is executed for the specific game state in which the reservation has been made;
The gaming machine described in feature cA11 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function that executes the processing of step Sc2902 by the presentation control device 143) that sets the mode of the specific notification taking into account the number of times identified by the number of times identification means, and is capable of executing the specific notification in the mode set by the mode setting means.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times (number of times a player can remain in the reserved specific game state) when a transition is made to the reserved specific game state is determined, and the manner of the specific notification is determined taking this result into consideration. As a result, the specific notification not only notifies the player that a reservation has occurred, but also serves to notify or suggest the remaining number of times. This increases the player's interest in the specific notification and makes it possible to increase the player's focus on the game.

Feature cA13. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry section (second actuation port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
The specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry portion than a predetermined game state,
A gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA12, wherein the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry area.

In the above configuration, when the game transitions to a specific game state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter a specific ball entry area than in a predetermined game state, making it easier for a special judgment to be made. By applying any of the features cA1 to cA12 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11 described above. It is also possible to apply some or all of the technical ideas in combination to each of the configurations of Features cA1 to cA13. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature cB group>
The feature cB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned third embodiment and variations 1 to 8 of the third embodiment.

Feature cB group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve, which is based on the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is known in which the gaming state is switched based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cB1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times reaches the ceiling, a ball is hit in a specific ball-hitting area, etc.) is met;
A specific means (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8) that can reserve a transition to a specific gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in a time-shortened gaming state, a situation in a high probability gaming state, a situation in an open/close execution mode, etc.),
Equipped with
A situation in which the specific condition is met multiple times may occur in the predetermined situation,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a means capable of ensuring that the number of specific game states reserved by the identification means is equal to or less than a predetermined number (a function for executing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state in the main control unit 162 of the third embodiment, variants 1 and 2, the reserved time-shortened area 562 of variants 3 and 4, the reserved time-shortened area 612 of variants 5 to 8, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and this specific game state can be entered when a specific condition is met. Therefore, players can enjoy playing with the aim of fulfilling the specific condition and entering the specific game state. Under this configuration, not only is a transition to the specific game state immediately initiated when a specific condition is met, but if a specific condition is met under a predetermined circumstance, the transition to the specific game state corresponding to that establishment is reserved. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not to enter a specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved, thereby increasing the player's interest. However, if the number of reserved specific game states becomes too large, there is a concern that their management and control will become complicated and the processing load will increase. In this regard, reservations are limited to keep the number of reserved specific game states below a predetermined number, so specific game states can be reserved while suppressing an increase in processing load, enabling optimal control of game states.

Note that this feature, "including means capable of setting the number of specific game states for which the specification means reserves a predetermined number or less," can also be expressed as "the specification means is capable of executing the reservation with a predetermined number as the upper limit."

Feature cB2. The specific gaming states that can be reserved include multiple specific gaming states (such as sudden time-saving gaming states A to C),
A gaming machine described in feature cB1, characterized in that the predetermined number is a specific number (such as "1" in the third embodiment and variants 1 and 2) that is less than the number of types of specific gaming states.

In the above configuration, the upper limit of the number of specific game states that can be reserved is set to a specific number that is less than the number of types of specific game states, making it possible to keep the upper limit low and effectively reduce the processing load. Furthermore, if the specific number is set to a number less than the number of types, it will not be possible to reserve all specific game states at the same time, and only a limited number will be reserved. This allows players to enjoy which specific game states will be reserved, increasing the player's interest.

Feature cB3. The specific game state that can be reserved includes multiple specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine according to feature cB1 or feature cB2, characterized in that the predetermined number is the number of types of specific gaming states for which the reservation is possible (such as "3" in variant 3 and variant 5).

In the above configuration, the upper limit of the number of reserved slots is set to the number of types of specific gaming states, making it possible to reserve all types of specific gaming states simultaneously while preventing the number of reserved slots from becoming too large and reducing the processing load.

Feature cB4: The specific game state that can be reserved includes multiple specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine described in any of features cB1 to cB3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 relating to the third embodiment and variants 1 and 2) to restrict the execution of the reservation for a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when the number of reservations has reached the predetermined number.

In the above configuration, only specific game states in which a specific condition is met before the reserved number reaches the upper limit are eligible for reservation. Therefore, for example, by varying the degree of advantage for each specific game state, players can be more interested not only in whether or not a specific game state can be reserved, but also in its type. In other words, players can be highly entertained by seeing whether or not the specific condition corresponding to a favorable specific game state can be met earlier than the specific condition corresponding to an unfavorable specific game state, which can increase interest.

Feature cB5. A first means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2) for executing a predetermined first notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) when a specific condition is met in a situation where the number of reserved items has not reached the predetermined number;
A second means (a function for executing a process for setting a variable display time in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2) for executing a predetermined second notification (a complete miss effect, a special reach miss B effect, etc.) different from the first notification when a specific condition is met in a situation where the number of reserved items has reached the predetermined number;
A gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB4, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met, the notification differs depending on whether the reserved number has reached the upper limit, allowing the player to recognize or guess whether the specific condition was met before or after the upper limit was reached.

Feature cB6. The first notification allows the player to recognize that a specific condition has been met,
The gaming machine described in feature cB5 is characterized in that the second notification is not recognizable by the player or is more difficult to recognize than the first notification that a specific condition has been met.

In the above configuration, the second notification that is issued when a specific condition is met when the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit is either indistinguishable from the player or is more difficult to recognize than the first notification, making it difficult for the player to notice that a specific condition has been met. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed that no reservation has been made despite the specific condition being met.

Feature cB7: A first means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162 of the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2) for executing a specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) when a specific condition is met in a situation where the number of reserved items has not reached the predetermined number;
A second means for preventing the specific notification from being executed when a specific condition is met in a situation where the number of reserved items has reached the predetermined number (a function for not executing the special reach miss A effect and executing a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect in a situation where the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2 and a special miss result occurs);
A gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB6, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, when the number of reserved items has not reached the upper limit, a specific notification is executed in response to the fulfillment of a specific condition, thereby informing the player that the specific condition has been fulfilled and ultimately making the player aware that a reservation has been made. On the other hand, when the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit, the execution of the specific notification is restricted even if the specific condition is fulfilled, making it difficult for the player to notice that the specific condition has been fulfilled, and preventing the player from feeling annoyed that no reservation has been made despite the fulfillment of the specific condition.

Feature cB8. The specific game state that can be reserved includes multiple specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine described in any one of features cB1 to cB7, characterized in that when a specific condition is met when the number of reservations has reached the predetermined number, a means (a function of executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variants 1 and 2) is provided to change the reservation so that the reservation is made for the specific game state corresponding to the establishment of the specific game state instead of either the specific game state being reserved or the specific game state being reserved.

With the above configuration, if a specific condition is met when the reserved number has reached the upper limit, the reserved specific game state is replaced with the specific game state corresponding to that condition, so that the fulfillment of a specific condition that occurs after the upper limit is reached can be reflected in the reserved specific game state. This allows players to play in the hope of the specific condition being fulfilled not only before the upper limit is reached but also after it is reached, making it possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for that fulfillment for a long time.

Feature cB9. The gaming machine described in Feature cB8 is equipped with a change determination means (a function that executes reservation update processing in the main control unit 162 of Variations 1 and 2) that determines whether to execute the change when a specific condition is met when the number of reserved items has reached the predetermined number, and executes the change when the change determination means determines that the change should be executed.

Depending on the combination of a reserved specific game state and a specific game state corresponding to a specific condition that occurs after the upper limit is reached, there is a concern that changing the reserved specific game state may actually put the player in a disadvantageous situation. In this regard, this feature determines whether or not to execute the change, and only executes the change if it is determined to do so. This prevents unnecessary changes from being made, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Feature cB10. A gaming machine according to Feature cB9, wherein the change determination means makes the determination based on the type of specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the decision on whether to change the reserved specific game state is made based on the type of specific game state. In other words, the presence or absence of a change is determined by comparing the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of a specific condition with the reserved specific game state, making it possible to determine whether a change should be made taking into account the differences in characteristics between the two specific game states.

Feature cB11. Priorities are set in advance for the plurality of specific gaming states,
The gaming machine according to Feature cB9 or Feature cB10, wherein the change determination means makes the determination based on the priority.

In the above configuration, the decision on whether to change the reserved specific game state is made based on a preset priority for each specific game state, allowing for an efficient determination of whether a change is necessary. This also has the expected effect of reducing the workload involved in designing a gaming machine. If the control program were to consider all combinations of reserved specific game states and specific game states corresponding to specific conditions established after the upper limit has been reached, and incorporate a change or no change for each combination, there is a concern that the control program would become more complex and the workload would increase. In contrast, by using priorities to determine whether a change is necessary, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each specific game state, simplifying the control program. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete overhaul of the control program is not required; simply changing the priority setting is sufficient. This also has the advantage of allowing for easier design changes.

Feature cB12. The specific game state that can be reserved includes multiple specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine described in any of features cB1 to cB11, characterized in that when a specific condition is met while the reservation is in progress, and if a specific game state of the same type as the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment is included in the specific game states being reserved, the reservation can be restricted for the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment (a function of executing reservation processing in the main control unit 162 of variant example 3).

In the above configuration, if a specific game state of the same type as the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of a specific condition is already reserved, the execution of the reservation corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is restricted. This allows specific game states of a different type to be reserved preferentially, preventing the reserved specific game states from being biased toward the same type.

Feature cB13. The specific game state that can be reserved includes multiple specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine described in feature cB1, characterized in that the predetermined number is a specific number ("10" in variant 4 of the third embodiment) greater than the number of types of specific gaming states for which the reservation is possible.

In the above configuration, the maximum number of reserved specific game states is set to a number greater than the number of types of specific game states, making it possible to reserve all types of specific game states simultaneously, while also making it possible to reserve multiple specific game states of the same type.

Feature cB14. The specific gaming states that can be reserved include a first specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A) and a second specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state B), and multiple types of specific gaming states (sudden time-saving gaming states A to C, etc.) are included;
A gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB13, wherein a maximum reserved number for the first specific gaming state and a maximum reserved number for the second specific gaming state are set respectively.

In the above configuration, the upper limit for the number of reserved balls is set for each type of specific gaming state. For example, if a specific condition corresponding to a first specific gaming state is met, even if the overall number of reserved balls has not reached the upper limit, as long as the upper limit for the first specific gaming state has been reached, the first specific gaming state corresponding to that condition will not be reserved. This ensures that there is a surplus for reserving the second specific gaming state, and prevents bias in the types of specific gaming states that are reserved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features cB1 to cB14 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature c Group C>
The feature cC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned third embodiment and variations 3 to 8 of the third embodiment.

Feature cC group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve, which is based on the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is known in which the gaming state is switched based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cC1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
The device is provided with a means for storing predetermined information (maximum number of times, type information, etc.) relating to a specific game state in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314) when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times reaches the ceiling, a ball is scored in a specific scoring area, etc.) is met (such as a function for executing a process for determining whether to suddenly enter a time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the third to eighth variants),
The predetermined information is referenced when controlling at least one of a transition to a specific game state and a progress of the specific game state,
In the predetermined storage unit, a plurality of areas (an area for execution time reduction 561, an area for reserved time reduction 562, an area for generation order information storage 565 of the counter area for time-shortened game state 560 according to Modifications 3 to 4, an area for execution time reduction 611, an area for reserved time reduction 612 of the counter area for time-shortened game state 610 according to Modifications 5 to 8, etc.) are set as storage areas for storing the predetermined information,
A gaming machine characterized by having a means (a function of executing reservation processing in the main control unit 162 of variants 3 to 8) for storing the predetermined information of a specific game state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition in another area of the multiple areas (for example, the second reserved time-shortening area 562b) different from the predetermined area when the predetermined information is stored in a predetermined area of the multiple areas (for example, the first reserved time-shortening area 562a) and a specific condition is established.

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. When a specific condition is met, predetermined information related to the specific game state is stored, and transition to the specific game state and progress of the specific game state are controlled based on the stored predetermined state. In this configuration, multiple areas are provided as storage areas for the predetermined information. If a specific condition is met when predetermined information is stored in one of these areas, other free areas are used to store the predetermined information for the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of that specific condition. This makes it possible to manage multiple specific game states simultaneously, and to appropriately control those game states when a conflict arises between specific game states, such as when a specific condition is fulfilled while the player is in a specific game state.

Feature cC2. A gaming machine as described in Feature cC1, wherein the predetermined information stored in the predetermined area corresponds to a specific game state currently being played.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met while information about a specific game state currently in progress is stored in a predetermined area, information about the specific game state corresponding to that condition is stored in an area separate from the predetermined area. This makes it possible to store information about a specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of a specific condition that occurs during the specific game state, independently of information about the specific game state currently in progress, and to validate the specific game state that occurs during the execution.

Feature cC3. A means for suspending transition to a specific game state corresponding to predetermined information when the predetermined information is stored in the other area (a function for executing a suspension process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8);
A means for executing a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met (a function for executing a second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8);
A gaming machine according to feature cC1 or feature cC2, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, a specific game state whose information is stored in another area is placed on hold, thereby effectively avoiding conflict with an active specific game state. Furthermore, a transition to a reserved specific game state is implemented when a predetermined condition is subsequently met, so it is possible to implement both the active specific game state and a specific game state in which a specific condition is met during that state. In other words, by meeting a specific condition during a specific game state, it is possible to provide a game that can effectively extend the specific game state or subsequently transition to another specific game state, thereby increasing the game's enjoyment.

Feature cC4. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features cC1 to cC3, wherein the predetermined information is information corresponding to the remaining number of games in a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined area and another area is information corresponding to the remaining number of play times for a specific game state. Therefore, when a specific condition is met in a specific game state, the remaining number of play times for the specific game state corresponding to the meting of the specific condition that occurred during the game can be stored separately from the remaining number of play times for the specific game state currently being executed, making it possible to simultaneously manage the remaining number of play times for both specific game states.

Feature cC5. The predetermined information stored in the predetermined area corresponds to a specific game state being executed,
A means for updating the predetermined information in the predetermined area based on a predetermined update trigger (execution of a game, a small win result, etc.) (a function for executing a high frequency support mode update process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8);
A means for ending the specific game state being executed when the update result of the predetermined information in the predetermined area becomes a predetermined result (0) (a function for executing a high frequency support mode ending process by the main control device 162 according to the third embodiment of the modified examples 3 to 8);
A means for updating the predetermined information in the other area based on a predetermined update trigger (a function for executing a high frequency support mode update process in the main control device 162 in the third to eighth modified examples);
A gaming machine according to any one of features cC1 to cC4, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the specified information in the specified area and the specified information in the other area are updated based on a specified update trigger, so the remaining number of times for the specific game state currently being played and the remaining number of times for the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of a specific condition that occurs during the game can be updated in parallel. This makes it possible to simultaneously manage the remaining number of times for both specific game states.

Feature cC6. A gaming machine as described in Feature cC5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for writing the updated results of the specified information in the other area to the specified area when a transition to a specific gaming state corresponding to the specified information in the other area is made (a function for executing the second transition process to the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of Variations 3 to 8).

In the above configuration, when a specific game state corresponding to the specific information in another area is transitioned to, the update results of the specific information in that other area are written to the specific area and used as information corresponding to the remaining number of times in the specific game state currently being executed. As a result, for a specific game state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition that occurs during the transition, the remaining number of times after the transition can be set to the differential number of times (the original upper limit number of times for the specific game state minus the remaining number of times when the specific condition was established in the previous specific game state currently being executed). In this case, the remaining number of times after the transition to the specific game state can be changed depending on the timing of the establishment of the specific condition. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not a specific condition is established, but also the timing of its establishment, thereby increasing the player's interest. Furthermore, because the remaining number of times after the transition to the specific game state can be kept lower than the original upper limit number of times for that specific game state, it is possible to prevent players from gaining an excessive advantage in a configuration in which a player can acquire multiple specific game states at the same time.

Feature cC7. When predetermined information is stored in the other area, a means for reserving transition to the specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information, and then, when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met, for executing a transition to the specific game state for which the reserving was performed (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8, a second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state);
A means for terminating the reservation when the update result of the predetermined information updated in the other area becomes a predetermined result without the transition being made for the specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the other area (a function for executing a high frequency support mode update process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8);
The gaming machine according to Feature cC5 or Feature cC6, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the specific game state whose information is stored in another area is placed in a reserved state, and a transition is then made when a predetermined condition is met. This allows for both the currently active specific game state and a specific game state in which a specific condition is met during that state to be implemented. In other words, by meeting a specific condition while in a specific game state, it is possible to provide a game that can effectively extend the specific game state or subsequently transition to another specific game state, thereby increasing the game's enjoyment.

In addition, when the update result in a predetermined area reaches a predetermined result, the currently running specific game state ends, and when the update result in another area reaches a predetermined result for a reserved specific game state, that reserved state ends. In this case, if the remaining number of times (the original upper limit) for a specific game state after a specific condition is met midway is fewer than the remaining number of times for the previous specific game state currently being executed, the reserved state can be automatically released without transitioning to the subsequent specific game state. Therefore, when a specific condition is met midway through a previous specific game state, the specified information can be stored in another area without the need to compare the remaining number of times for the previous specific game state with the remaining number of times for the subsequent specific game state or to determine whether to store information in another area based on that result, which simplifies the processing configuration.

Feature cC8. The plurality of areas includes a first area (e.g., a first reserved time-saving area 562a) as the predetermined area and a second area (e.g., a second reserved time-saving area 562b to a third reserved time-saving area 562c) as the other area,
The predetermined information stored in the first area corresponds to a specific game state currently being executed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features cC1 to cC7, characterized in that multiple second areas are set.

In the above configuration, multiple second areas are set, making it possible to reserve multiple specific game states. This allows players to enjoy not only whether a reserve will occur, but also how many can be reserved, thereby ideally increasing interest.

Feature cC9. A gaming machine described in Feature cC8, characterized in that the multiple second areas are set in accordance with the order in which specific conditions are met (in variants 3 and 4, the order in which special miss results are won is associated with each area of the reserved time-saving area 562).

In the above configuration, multiple second areas are associated with the order in which specific conditions are met. Therefore, if a specific condition is met multiple times, the specified information can be stored while being organized in the order in which they occurred. This makes it possible to optimally control the transitions between multiple reserved specific game states when transitions are to be implemented in the order in which specific conditions are met.

Feature cC10. When a specific condition is established in a situation where specific information is stored in a specific area (for example, the first reserved time-shortening area 562a) among the plurality of second areas, the specific information of the specific game state corresponding to the establishment is stored in a specific area (for example, the second reserved time-shortening area 562b) among the plurality of second areas that corresponds to an order subsequent to the specific area (a function for executing reservation processing in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 and 4);
A means for transitioning to a specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the specific area after transitioning to the specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the specific area (a function for executing a second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 and 4);
A gaming machine according to feature cC8 or feature cC9, characterized in that it is provided with:

With the above configuration, if a specific condition is met multiple times and multiple specific game states are reserved, it becomes possible to transition to those reserved specific game states sequentially in the order in which the specific conditions were met.

Feature cC11. There are multiple types of specific gaming states (sudden time-saving gaming states A to C, etc.) as specific gaming states,
The gaming machine described in feature cC8 is characterized in that the multiple second areas are set to correspond to the type of specific game state (in variant example 5, each area of the reserved time-saving area 612 is assigned a type of sudden time-saving game state).

In the above configuration, multiple second areas are associated with specific game state types. Therefore, if a specific condition is met multiple times, the specified information can be stored while being organized by specific game state type. This makes it possible to optimally control the transitions between multiple reserved specific game states when transitions are to be made in the order corresponding to their types.

Feature cC12. A gaming machine as described in Feature cC11, comprising a means for executing a transition to a plurality of specific game states corresponding to the predetermined information in a predetermined order (priority) determined according to the type of specific game state when the predetermined information is stored in a plurality of the second areas (a function for executing a second transition process to a sudden time-saving game state in the main control unit 162 of Variation 5).

With the above configuration, if a specific condition is met multiple times and multiple specific game states are reserved, it becomes possible to transition to those reserved specific game states sequentially in a predetermined order determined according to the type of specific game state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features cC1 to cC12 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features cD group>
The feature cD group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 3 to 8 of the third embodiment.

Features c and D were developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve, which is based on the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control the gaming state by switching based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cD1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A specific game state transition means (a function for executing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times reaches the ceiling, a ball is hit in a specific ball-hitting area, etc.) is met;
A specifying means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to suddenly transition to a time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of variants 3 to 8) that can reserve a transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the game is in a time-saving game state, a situation in a high probability game state, a situation in an opening/closing execution mode, etc.), and then execute a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition is established (such as the end of the time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or the ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.);
Equipped with
It is configured to be able to reserve multiple specific game states,
A predetermined order means is provided for making the order of transitions for the plurality of specific game states for which the reservation is made a predetermined order (a process for storing type information in the first area 565a to the third area 565b and the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j set in the generation order information storage area 565 in accordance with the winning order of the special miss results in the first to the third area 565b and the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j in the modification examples 3 and 4, a process for grasping the reserved time reduction with the highest priority and making the grasped reserved time reduction the target for transition, a process for determining the transition order of the reserved time reduction by lottery, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified condition is met in a situation where multiple reservations are made, a transition is executed based on the execution order determined by the specified order means.

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and this specific game state is entered when a specific condition is met. Therefore, players can enjoy playing with the aim of fulfilling the specific condition and entering the specific game state. Under this configuration, not only is a transition to the specific game state immediately initiated upon the fulfillment of a specific condition, but if a specific condition is fulfilled under a predetermined circumstance, the transition to the specific game state corresponding to that fulfillment is reserved. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not a transition to a specific game state occurs, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved, thereby enhancing the game's entertainment value. In addition, since such reservations can be made multiple times, if a specific condition is fulfilled while a specific game state is reserved, the specific game state can be reserved again. This further enhances the entertainment value. Furthermore, when such multiple reservations are made, a transition execution order is determined for the reserved specific game states, and the transition order is controlled according to that execution order. Therefore, in situations where conflicts between specific game states may occur, transitions can be made in the most appropriate order while avoiding overlapping specific game states.

Feature cD2. The specific gaming states that can be reserved include multiple specific gaming states (such as sudden time-saving gaming states A to C),
Priorities are set in advance for the plurality of specific gaming states,
The gaming machine described in feature cD1 is characterized in that the predetermined order means ensures that the order in which the transitions are executed is a predetermined order corresponding to the priority (such as a function to execute a second transition process for a sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variant example 5).

In the above configuration, when transitions are made between multiple reserved specific game states, the transitions are controlled to occur in an order corresponding to the priority set for each specific game state. This makes it possible to transition in an order corresponding to the type of specific game state, regardless of the order in which specific conditions are met. It is also expected to have the effect of reducing the workload when designing a gaming machine. In other words, if the transition order for every combination of specific game states were to be specified in the control program, there is a concern that the control program would become complicated and lead to an increased workload. In contrast, by controlling the transition order using priority, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each specific game state, simplifying the control program. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete overhaul of the control program is not required; simply changing the priority setting is sufficient. In other words, there is also the advantage that design changes can be made easily.

Feature cD3. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (sudden time-shortening game state C) and a second specific game state (sudden time-shortening game state A) in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry portion than in the first specific game state,
A gaming machine according to feature cD2, characterized in that a higher priority is set for the second specific gaming state than for the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the second specific game state, in which balls are more likely to land in the designated ball entry area, is given a higher priority than the first specific game state, in which such balls are less likely to land. Therefore, if both of these specific game states are reserved, the transition to the second specific game state can be made first. This allows for a state in which it is easier to prevent the loss of balls to be reduced to arrive sooner, making it possible to create a configuration that makes it easier for players to play advantageously.

Feature cD4. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion;
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A gaming machine described in feature cD3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the predetermined ball entry area serves as the starting point for a special judgment, and when both the first and second specific game states are reserved, the transition to the second specific game state, in which a ball is more likely to enter the starting point, can be prioritized. This allows for a state in which a special judgment is more likely to be made and balls are less likely to be lost, making it possible to create a configuration that makes it easier for players to play advantageously.

Feature cD5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cD1 to cD4, characterized in that the predetermined order means includes means for ensuring that the execution order corresponds to the order in which specific conditions are met (a function for executing reservation processing in the main control unit 162 of Variations 3 and 4).

In the above configuration, when multiple reservations are made, transitions are made in the order corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific conditions. In other words, the order of reservations is directly reflected in the order of transitions, so if there are different degrees of advantage among multiple specific game states, it is advantageous for the player to fulfill the specific condition corresponding to the advantageous specific game state earlier. In other words, the order in which the specific game states are reserved affects the subsequent development of the game, so the player can also pay attention to the order in which the reservations occur, which can increase interest.

Feature cD6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
A gaming machine described in feature cD5, characterized in that the multiple types of specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state C) and a second specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A) in which a ball is more likely to enter the designated ball entry section than in the first specific gaming state.

The above configuration has a first specific game state and a second specific game state that differ in the likelihood of a ball scoring in a predetermined scoring area, and different degrees of advantage are provided for the multiple specific game states. By applying the configuration of feature cD5 to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the order of the reserved specific game states, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature cD7. When a specific condition is met in a specific situation, a specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) can be executed by a specific notification means (such as a symbol display device 75) (a function for executing the processing of steps Sc4502 and Sc4503 in Modification Example 3, etc.),
The specific game state that can be reserved includes a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.),
A gaming machine described in any one of features cD1 to cD6, characterized in that the specific notification is one in which the type of reserved specific game state cannot be recognized or is difficult for the player to recognize (for example, a configuration in which the player can recognize that a special miss result has been won from the stopped combination of pattern rows Z1 to Z3, but cannot recognize the type of the special miss result).

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when a specific condition is met, allowing the player to recognize that a reservation has occurred by referring to the notification. In such cases, the type of reserved specific game state cannot be deduced unambiguously, so even if the player knows the regularity of the transition order (for example, priority order, order of fulfillment of specific conditions), the actual transition order can be made difficult to understand. This allows the player to enjoy predicting which specific game state they will transition to, increasing the player's interest.

Feature cD8. A first means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sc4502 and Sc4503 in Modification 3, etc.) that can execute a specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) by a specific notification means (such as a symbol display device 75) when a specific condition is met in a specific situation;
A second means (a function of executing the processes of step Sc4502 and step Sc4504 in the third modification, etc.) that limits the execution of the specific notification by the first means when a specific condition is met while the reservation is being made;
A gaming machine according to any one of features cD1 to cD7, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when a specific condition is met, allowing the player to recognize the occurrence of a reservation by referring to the notification. However, even if a specific condition is met, the specific notification is not issued if the specific game state is reserved. In other words, while a notification is issued for the first reservation, no notification is issued for the second or subsequent reservation occurrences. This prevents the player from realizing that multiple reservations have occurred, allowing the player to enjoy predicting the number of reservations and the order in which they will transition.

Feature cD9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cD1 to cD8, characterized in that in the predetermined cases where multiple reservations are made and transitions are executed based on the execution order determined by the predetermined order means, the execution order is configured to be indistinguishable or difficult for the player to recognize (such as in Variation 3, where the player is unable to recognize the transition order of each sudden time-saving game state while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved).

With the above configuration, when multiple reservations are made, the transition order for the multiple reserved specific game states is made impossible or difficult for the player to recognize, allowing the player to predict the transition order and enjoy the game.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features cD1 to cD9 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature c E group>
The feature cE group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variations 2, 5, and 7 of the third embodiment.

Feature cE group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve, which is based on the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is known in which the gaming state is switched based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cE1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A first transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state) based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A second transition means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to a specific game state in the main control device 162 of the second modification and the fifth to seventh modifications, and a first transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state) is provided, which can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times reaches the ceiling, a ball is struck in a specific ball-striking section, etc.) is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a plurality of specific gaming states (sudden time-shortening gaming states A to C, normal time-shortening gaming state, ceiling time-shortening gaming state, etc.) as specific gaming states, and priorities are set for these specific gaming states (in variants 2 and 5, priorities are set for sudden time-shortening gaming states A to C; in variant 6, priorities are set for the normal time-shortening gaming state and sudden time-shortening gaming states A and B; in variant 7, priorities are set for the ceiling time-shortening gaming state and sudden time-shortening gaming states A and B).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made when a special judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. A transition to this specific game state can be triggered by the fulfillment of specific conditions. Furthermore, because multiple specific game states are provided as specific game states, players can enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also which specific game state to transition to, thereby increasing excitement. However, when multiple specific game states are provided in this way, there is a concern that specific game states may overlap, such as when a specific condition corresponding to another specific game state is fulfilled while in one specific game state. In this regard, because a priority is assigned to each specific game state, switching between specific game states and determining the order of transitions in the event of an overlap can be done based on the priority, allowing for optimal game state control.

Feature cE2. The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (a normal time-saving game state in Modification 6, a sudden time-saving game state B, a sudden time-saving game state A, B in Modification 7, etc.) and a second specific game state (a sudden time-saving game state A in Modification 6, a ceiling time-saving game state in Modification 7, etc.),
A gaming machine described in feature cE1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling whether or not to switch to the second specific gaming state based on the priority set for each specific gaming state when a specific condition corresponding to the second specific gaming state is met while the first specific gaming state is in effect (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to a sudden time-shortened gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variants 6 to 7, and a function for executing a process for the first transition to the sudden time-shortened gaming state).

With the above configuration, if a specific condition corresponding to a second specific game state is met during a first specific game state, the priorities of those specific game states are compared to control whether to switch to the second specific game state. Therefore, simply by assigning appropriate priorities to each specific game state in advance, it is possible to appropriately control whether to switch to the second specific game state or continue the first specific game state.

Feature cE3. The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (such as the normal time-shortened game state in Modification 6, the sudden time-shortened game state B, and the sudden time-shortened game state B in Modification 7) and a second specific game state (such as the sudden time-shortened game state A in Modification 6 and the ceiling time-shortened game state in Modification 7) that has a higher priority than the first specific game state,
A gaming machine described in feature cE1 or feature cE2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for transitioning from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state when a specific condition corresponding to the second specific gaming state is met while the first specific gaming state is in effect (a function for executing a process for determining transition to a sudden time-shortened gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variants 6 and 7, and a first transition process for the sudden time-shortened gaming state).

In the above configuration, if a specific condition corresponding to a second specific game state with a higher priority is met during the first specific game state, a switch from the first specific game state to the second specific game state is executed. For example, if the second specific game state is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game state, a switch from an unfavorable state to an advantageous state can be made, making it possible to appropriately control when a specific condition is met during the game.

Feature cE4. A gaming machine as described in Feature cE3, wherein the transition means cancels or suspends the first specific gaming state and transitions to the second specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, it is possible to interrupt the first specific game state and transition to the second specific game state. For example, if the second specific game state is more advantageous than the first specific game state, this advantageous state can be reached earlier, making it possible to create a configuration that makes it easier for players to play advantageously.

Feature cE5. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
A gaming machine described in any of features cE2 to cE4, characterized in that the second specific gaming state (such as the sudden time-saving gaming state A in variants 6 to 7) is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the designated ball entry section than the first specific gaming state (such as the sudden time-saving gaming state B in variants 6 to 7).

In the above configuration, the second specific game state makes it easier for balls to land in the designated ball entry area than the first specific game state, and allows for a more advantageous gameplay with fewer balls lost than in the first specific game state. By applying features cE2 to cE4 to this configuration, it is possible to optimally utilize the above-mentioned effects of those configurations.

Feature cE6. The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state A in Modifications 6 and 7) and a third specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state B in Modifications 6 and 7) that has a lower priority than the first specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any of features cE1 to cE5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a reservation process in the main control unit 162 of variants 6 to 7, a function to suddenly execute the second transition process to the time-shortened gaming state) that reserves transition to the third specific gaming state when a specific condition corresponding to the third specific gaming state is met while the machine is in the first specific gaming state, and then executes transition to the reserved third specific gaming state when a predetermined condition (end of a time-shortened gaming state, etc., execution of a predetermined number of games, ball entry into a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition corresponding to a third specific game state with a lower priority is met while the first specific game state is in progress, the first specific game state is continued, and then a transition to the third specific game state is executed in response to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. In other words, the continuation of the specific game state with a higher priority is given priority, and the transition to the specific game state with a lower priority can be postponed.

Feature cE7. A means (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of the second modification example, a second transition process for the time-saving game state) that can reserve the transition to the specific game state and then execute the transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition (such as the end of the time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met,
The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C), and priorities are set for these specific game states.
A gaming machine described in any of features cE1 to cE6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling, based on priority, whether or not to execute the reservation for a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when that condition is established (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variant example 2).

With the above configuration, not only can a transition to a specific game state be made immediately upon the establishment of a specific condition, but it is also possible to reserve the transition to the specific game state and then execute the transition when a predetermined condition is met. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved. In this case, a priority is set for each specific game state, and whether or not reservation is executed is controlled based on that priority. Therefore, if a specific condition is met multiple times, the specific game state with the highest priority can be given priority for reservation execution.

Feature cE8. The plurality of specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state (such as the sudden time-saving gaming state B in Modification 2) and a second specific gaming state (such as the sudden time-saving gaming state A in Modification 2),
A gaming machine described in feature cE7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling whether or not to execute the reservation for the second specific gaming state based on the priority set for each of those specific gaming states when a specific condition corresponding to the second specific gaming state is met while the reservation is being made for the first specific gaming state (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variant example 2).

In the above configuration, whether or not to reserve the second specific game state is controlled by comparing the priority of the already reserved first specific game state with the second specific game state for which a new specific condition has been met. This makes it possible to appropriately control whether or not to reserve the second specific game state for each time a specific condition is met multiple times.

Feature cE9. The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state B in Modification 2) and a second specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state A in Modification 2) that has a higher priority than the first specific game state,
A gaming machine described in feature cE7 or feature cE8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variant example 2) for changing the execution target of the reservation from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state when a specific condition corresponding to the second specific gaming state is met while the reservation is being made for the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition corresponding to a second specific game state with a higher priority is met while a first specific game state is reserved, the reserved execution target is changed from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. In other words, the reservation is updated to swap the reserved specific game state. Therefore, in a configuration with an upper limit on the number of reserves that can be made, if a specific condition is met multiple times, the specific game state with the higher priority can be reserved first.

Feature cE10. A means for reserving transition to a specific game state and then executing a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of Variation 5, a second transition process for the time-saving game state) is provided,
The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C), and priorities are set for these specific game states.
A gaming machine described in any of features cE1 to cE9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling, based on priority, which specific gaming state to transition to when a predetermined condition is met in a situation where multiple reservations are made (a function for executing the second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variant example 5).

With the above configuration, it is possible not only to immediately transition to a specific game state when a specific condition is met, but also to reserve the transition to the specific game state and then execute the transition when a predetermined condition is met. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved. In this case, a priority is set for each specific game state, and if multiple reservations are made, the specific game state to transition to is controlled based on the priority. This makes it possible to optimally control the transition order for multiple reserved specific game states.

Feature cE11. The plurality of specific game states includes a first specific game state (such as the sudden time-shortened game state B in Modification 5) and a second specific game state (such as the sudden time-shortened game state A in Modification 5) having a higher priority than the first specific game state,
A gaming machine described in feature cE10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a second transition process for a sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variant example 5) for causing the transition to the second specific gaming state to precede the transition to the first specific gaming state when the reservation is made for the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, when multiple specific game states are reserved, the transition order can be made earlier to specific game states with higher priority, regardless of the order in which the specific conditions are met (the order in which the reservations occur). For example, by giving a higher priority to specific game states with a higher degree of advantage, such advantageous states can be reached earlier, making it possible to create a configuration that makes it easier for players to play advantageously.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features cE1 to cE11 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature cF group>
The feature cF group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the third embodiment and variations 1 to 8 of the third embodiment.

Feature cF group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a system in which there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is switched based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cF1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (a first actuation port 62, a second actuation port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
A specific judgment means (a function that executes a special game number control process and a sudden time-saving game state transition judgment process by the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (a judgment of whether or not a special miss result has been won) when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section;
When the result of the specific judgment is a specific result (a special miss result), in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the game is in a time-shortened game state, a situation in a high probability game state, a situation in an open/close execution mode, etc.), a bonus granting means (such as a function to execute a reserved process in the main control device 162 of the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8) that can grant a predetermined bonus (execution of reserved time-shortened game) as a result of the specific judgment.
A means for varying the degree of advantage of the specified benefit (the number of times remaining when a transition to a time-saving reservation is implemented) depending on the timing when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result in the specified situation (such as a function for setting the number of times remaining when a transition to a time-saving reservation is implemented in the third embodiment and variants 1 to 8 to the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of times remaining for the time-saving reservation from the upper limit number for the time-saving reservation);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific judgment is made when a gaming ball enters a specific entry point, and if the judgment result is a specific result under specific circumstances, a specific bonus is awarded. The degree of advantage of the bonus is configured to change depending on the timing of the specific result under the specific circumstances. This not only ensures that the result of the specific judgment will be a specific result corresponding to the award of a bonus, but also entertains the player with the timing of that result, making it possible to increase the game's interest.

Feature cF2. A gaming machine as described in Feature cF1, characterized in that it is possible to award a more advantageous bonus as the predetermined bonus when the specific judgment results in a specific result at a second timing (e.g., the 40th special symbol game in the normal time-limited play state) that comes after the first timing in the predetermined situation (e.g., the 29th special symbol game in the normal time-limited play state) compared to when the specific judgment results in a specific result at the first timing in the predetermined situation (e.g., the 29th special symbol game in the normal time-limited play state).

In the above configuration, the later the timing of a specific result in a predetermined situation, the more advantageous the predetermined benefit will be. For this reason, the later the timing of a specific result, the more desirable it is for the player, but at the same time, it also increases the risk that the predetermined situation will end without the specific result being achieved. This allows players to play in the hope of achieving the specific result amid the thrill of knowing that the predetermined situation may end, making it possible to increase excitement.

Feature cF3. A gaming machine as described in Feature cF1 or Feature cF2, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing reservation update processing in the main control unit 162 in Variation 1, a function for executing reservation processing in the main control unit 162 in Variation 5) for granting a bonus corresponding to the second timing as the predetermined bonus granted by the bonus granting means when the result of the specific judgment is a specific result at a first timing in the predetermined situation (for example, the 29th special symbol game in normal time-limited play mode), and the result of the specific judgment is a specific result at a second timing later than the first timing (for example, the 40th special symbol game in normal time-limited play mode).

In the above configuration, if a specific result is achieved at both the first timing and the later second timing under a predetermined situation, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is awarded. For example, if the configuration is such that the later the specific result is achieved, the more advantageous the bonus, even if the specific result is achieved at the first timing, the bonus can be upgraded by achieving the specific result at the subsequent second timing, thereby maintaining anticipation for the specific result until the end of the predetermined situation. Conversely, if the configuration is such that the later the specific result is achieved, the less advantageous the bonus, the more exciting it becomes to enjoy the thrill of seeing if the specific result can be avoided in a subsequent specific determination if the specific result is achieved at the first timing.

Feature cF4. The bonus granting means grants a predetermined bonus when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or the ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met after the result of the specific determination becomes a specific result,
A gaming machine according to feature cF1 or feature cF2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variant 1, a function for executing a reservation process in the main control unit 162 of variant 5) for granting a bonus corresponding to the second timing as a predetermined bonus granted in response to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a first timing in the predetermined situation (for example, the 29th special symbol game in the normal time-shortened game state), and the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a second timing later than the first timing (for example, the 40th special symbol game in the normal time-shortened game state) before the predetermined condition is fulfilled.

In the above configuration, where a specific bonus is awarded when a specific result is achieved and a specific condition is met, if the specific result is achieved at a first timing and then at a second timing before the specific condition is met, the bonus corresponding to the second timing is awarded when the specific condition is met. In other words, since the bonus content is updated each time a specific result is achieved, if, for example, the later the specific result is achieved, the more advantageous the bonus, even if the specific result is achieved early, the player can continue playing with the aim of achieving the specific result again. This allows the player to maintain anticipation for the specific result until the end of the specified situation, allowing the player to enjoy the game until the end.

Feature cF5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cF1 to cF4, characterized in that it is equipped with specific notification execution means (a function for executing variable display time setting processing in the main control device 162, and a function for executing special chart variable display processing in the presentation control device 143) that is capable of executing a specific notification (special reach miss A presentation) when the result of the specific judgment in the predetermined situation is a specific result.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when a specific judgment results in a specific result under a specified circumstance during the period for which a bonus is awarded, allowing the player to easily grasp the timing at which the specific result was reached.

Feature cF6. After the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a first timing in the predetermined situation (for example, the 29th special symbol game in the normal time-saving game state), when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a second timing (for example, the 40th special symbol game in the normal time-saving game state) after the first timing, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is granted as a predetermined bonus granted by the bonus granting means (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of the first modified example, a function for executing a reservation process in the main control unit 162 of the fifth modified example);
means for preventing a specific notification corresponding to the second timing from being executed when the result of the specific determination at the first timing becomes a specific result and then the result of the specific determination at the second timing becomes a specific result, or making it more difficult to execute a specific notification corresponding to the second timing than at the first timing (a function for preventing a special reach miss A presentation from being executed in a game in which a special miss result is re-won, or a function for making it more difficult to execute a special reach miss A presentation);
A gaming machine according to feature cF5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, in which a special result is achieved at a first timing, and then a special result is achieved at a second timing, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is awarded, the special notification corresponding to the special result achieved at the second timing is not executed or is made difficult to execute. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the special result was achieved at the second timing, and makes the player believe that a bonus corresponding to the first timing will be awarded. Therefore, when a bonus corresponding to the second timing is awarded as a predetermined bonus, the player can be surprised, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cF7: A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing a reserved performance setting process in the performance control device 143) is provided that is capable of executing a predetermined notification (displaying reserved images 528, 529) when the result of the specific determination in the predetermined situation becomes a specific result,
A gaming machine described in any of features cF1 to cF6, characterized in that the specified notification execution means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing a reserved performance setting process in the performance control device 143) that sets the mode of the specified notification based on the specified benefit granted by the benefit granting means.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification is issued when a specific result is achieved under a predetermined situation, and the manner of the predetermined notification is set based on the specific benefit to be awarded. In this case, the execution of the predetermined notification can notify the player that a specific result has been achieved, and the manner of the notification can suggest the content of the benefit. This allows the player to play a game in which they can guess the benefit by referring to the predetermined notification, making it possible to increase the game's enjoyment.

Feature cF8. After the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a first timing in the predetermined situation (for example, the 29th special symbol game in the normal time-saving game state), when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a second timing (for example, the 40th special symbol game in the normal time-saving game state) after the first timing, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is granted as a predetermined bonus granted by the bonus granting means (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of the first modified example, a function for executing a reservation process in the main control unit 162 of the fifth modified example);
A predetermined notification execution means (a function for executing a reserved performance setting process in the performance control device 143) capable of executing a predetermined notification (displaying reserved images 528, 529) when the result of the specific determination in the predetermined situation becomes a specific result;
Equipped with
The predetermined notification execution means is configured to execute the predetermined notification before the predetermined benefit is granted by the benefit granting means (a function of displaying reservation images 528, 529 prior to implementing the transition to the reservation time reduction),
A gaming machine described in any of features cF1 to cF7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for changing the manner of the specified notification when the result of the specific judgment at the second timing becomes a specific result while the specified notification is being executed (a function for executing an update process for the reserved image in the presentation control device 143 of variant example 1).

In the above configuration, if a specific result is obtained at a first timing and then at a second timing, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is awarded. If a specific result is obtained at the second timing while a predetermined notification is being executed, the mode of the predetermined notification is changed. In other words, the content of the bonus corresponding to the second timing is suggested by the changed mode, which adds to the fun of guessing the bonus that will actually be awarded from the change in the predetermined notification.

Feature cF9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cF1 to cF8, which is configured so that if the specific judgment results in a specific result in a specific situation different from the specified situation (such as a situation in normal gaming mode), the granting of a specified bonus is not executed (a configuration in which the time-saving gaming mode is not suddenly reserved even if a special miss result occurs in a situation in normal gaming mode).

In the above configuration, even if a specific result is achieved in a specific situation that differs from the predetermined situation, the predetermined benefit will not be awarded, and the benefit can only be obtained in the predetermined situation. This allows the predetermined situation to be enjoyed as a special game period, increasing the player's interest.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB12, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features cF1 to cF9 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature cG group>
The feature cG group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned modification 8 of the third embodiment.

The feature group cG was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a system in which there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is switched based on the results of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cG1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing the first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a win of special miss results A to C, reaching the ceiling number of times, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met;
a first means (a function for executing reservation processing in the main control device 162 of variant 8, a second transition processing for sudden time-shortened game state) that can reserve transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the game is in a time-shortened game state, a situation in a high probability game state, a situation in an open/close execution mode, etc.), and then execute transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined execution condition is established (an end of the time-shortened game state, etc., a predetermined number of game rounds, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.);
When a reservation is made by the first means, if a predetermined condition (a win of special miss results D to F, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met before the predetermined execution condition is met, the reserved state is released without executing a transition to the reserved specific game state (a function of executing a reservation release process in the main control device 162 of variant 8);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

The above configuration provides a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, and transition to this specific gaming state is possible when a specific condition is met. Under this configuration, not only is transition to the specific gaming state immediately initiated upon the establishment of a specific condition, but transition to the corresponding specific gaming state is also reserved if the specific condition is met under a predetermined circumstance. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to the specific gaming state, but also whether or not the specific gaming state is reserved. Furthermore, if a predetermined condition is met before the execution condition for the reserved specific gaming state is met, the reservation is canceled. This allows the player to play with a sense of uncertainty, even if the specific gaming state is reserved, and allows them to experience the thrill of potentially losing the reservation. Furthermore, by allowing the reservation to be canceled after it has been executed, it is possible to prevent a disproportionate advantage from being given to the player, even if the probability of the reservation being triggered is set high. In other words, compared to when there is no reserve cancellation function, the probability of reserves occurring can be set higher in the first place, making it possible to increase the frequency of reserves occurring. This increases players' expectations for reserves occurring, and effectively stimulates their desire to play.

Feature cG2. The specific gaming states that can be reserved include a first specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A) and a second specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state B),
The gaming machine described in feature cG1 is characterized in that the predetermined conditions are set to include a first predetermined condition corresponding to the release of the reservation for the first specific game state (winning special miss result D, the ball entering the ball entry area corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A, etc.), and a second predetermined condition corresponding to the release of the reservation for the second specific game state (winning special miss result E, the ball entering the ball entry area corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B, etc.).

The above configuration has multiple types of specific game states, and separate release conditions are set for each of these specific game states. This makes it possible for players to be excited not only about whether or not the reservation will be released, but also about which specific game state reservation will be released. In particular, if the degree of advantage varies depending on the type of specific game state, this can arouse anticipation that the release of the reservation of an advantageous specific game state will be avoided, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

This feature can also be expressed as "the specific game states for which the reservation is possible include multiple types of specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C), multiple types of conditions corresponding to each specific game state (such as winning special miss results D to F) are set as the predetermined conditions, and the second means includes means for canceling the reservation of the specific game state corresponding to the condition that has been established when the predetermined condition is established (a function for executing a reservation cancellation process in the main control unit 162 of variant 8)."

Feature cG3. Equipped with a lottery means (such as a function to execute a special drawing lottery in the main control device 162) that executes a predetermined drawing (such as a special drawing lottery) when a predetermined drawing opportunity (such as winning the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) is established,
As a result of the predetermined lottery, a plurality of results can be obtained, including a first predetermined result (special losing results A to C) and a second predetermined result (special losing results D to F) different from the first predetermined result,
A gaming machine described in feature cG1 or feature cG2, characterized in that the specific condition is met when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, and the predetermined condition is met when the result is the second predetermined result.

In the above configuration, the first predetermined result of the predetermined lottery corresponds to the fulfillment of a specific condition, and the second predetermined result corresponds to the fulfillment of a specific condition. In other words, the determination of whether a specific condition that triggers the reservation of a specific game state has been fulfilled and the determination of whether a specific condition that triggers the release of the reservation has been fulfilled are performed by the same lottery process. This prevents the reservation and release of a specific game state from occurring simultaneously, preventing the process from becoming complicated or difficult for players to understand. Furthermore, by combining multiple determinations into a single lottery process, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to when each determination is made separately.

Feature cG4. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a result of the special determination, a plurality of results can be obtained, including the specific result and a predetermined result (special miss results D to F) different from the specific result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features cG1 to cG3, characterized in that the specified condition is met when the result of the special judgment becomes the specified result.

In the above configuration, certain possible outcomes of the special determination (win/lose lottery) correspond to a transition to a special game state, and predetermined outcomes correspond to the fulfillment of predetermined conditions (reservation release). This allows players to simultaneously enjoy games aimed at achieving the special game state and games aimed at avoiding the release of the reservation, increasing entertainment value.

Feature cG5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cG1 to cG4, characterized in that the probability of the specific condition being met (the probability of winning one of the special failure results A to C) is different from the probability of the predetermined condition being met (the probability of winning one of the special failure results D to F).

With the above configuration, the likelihood of a specific game state being reserved and the likelihood of the reservation being released can be set separately.

Feature cG6. A gaming machine as described in Feature cG5, wherein the probability of the specific condition being met (e.g., 1/100) is set to be higher than the probability of the predetermined condition being met (e.g., 1/300).

With the above configuration, the probability of a reservation occurring is higher than the probability of a reservation being released, so the occurrence of a reservation leaves a stronger impression on the player than the release of a reservation, effectively stimulating their desire to play.

Feature cG7. The specific gaming states that can be reserved include a first specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A) and a second specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state B),
A gaming machine described in any of features cG1 to cG6, characterized in that the first specific gaming state is configured to be less likely to be released by the second means than the second specific gaming state (in variant example 8, the probability of suddenly releasing the reservation in the time-saving gaming state A is lower than the probability of suddenly releasing the reservation in the time-saving gaming state B).

With the above configuration, the ease with which a reservation can be released varies depending on the type of specific game state, making it possible to create a specific game state in which a reservation is less likely to be released than other specific game states. When a reservation occurs in such a specific game state that is less likely to be released, the player can be delighted, and interest can be enhanced.

Feature cG8. A first means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 162 according to the eighth modification) for executing a first specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) when the specific condition is met or when the reservation is made;
A second means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 162 according to the eighth modification) for executing a second specific notification (such as a special reach miss C presentation) different from the first specific notification when the predetermined condition is met or when the cancellation is performed;
A gaming machine according to any one of features cG1 to cG7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

With the above configuration, different specific notifications are issued when a specific condition is reserved and when the reservation is released, allowing the player to clearly distinguish whether a reservation has occurred or whether the reservation has been released.

Feature cG9. A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3),
A display control means for controlling the display of a plurality of variably displayed symbols on the symbol display means so that the symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination when the predetermined condition is met or when the cancellation is performed (a function for stopping and displaying the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 in a combination that is not a reach and includes the special symbol 721);
A gaming machine according to any one of features cG1 to cG8, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the release of the reservation is notified by the stopping result of the variably displayed symbols. Therefore, by watching what combination the symbols will stop in, the player can recognize whether the reservation will be released at the same time as the result of winning or losing, which effectively prevents oversights. Furthermore, by adding combinations that correspond to the release of the reservation, the stopping patterns of symbols that interest players will be diversified, making it possible to increase the fun of symbol games.

Feature cG10. A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing display settings of the reservation display unit 731 by the performance control device 143 according to the eighth modification) is provided that executes a predetermined notification (such as a display performance using the reservation display unit 731) corresponding to the release of the reservation by the picture display means,
The gaming machine described in feature cG9 is configured so that the predetermined notification is executed using at least a portion of the multiple images (such as special pattern 721) that are stopped and displayed in the specific combination.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification corresponding to the release of the reservation is executed using the symbols that are statically displayed in the second symbol combination, so the player can strongly associate the second symbol combination with the release of the reservation. This creates an intense sense of excitement when symbols in the second symbol combination are about to be statically displayed, and can effectively add excitement to the game by avoiding that combination.

Feature cG11. A gaming machine as described in Feature cG9 or Feature cG10, characterized in that it is equipped with a display control means for controlling the display of multiple symbols variably displayed by the symbol display means so that they are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination different from the specific combination when the specific condition is met or the reservation is made (a function for stopping and displaying symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a combination that is not a reach and includes special symbol 511).

In the above configuration, the occurrence and release of a reserved state in a specific game state is notified using the results of the stopped symbols that are variably displayed. Therefore, by watching what combination of symbols stops, the player can recognize not only the result of winning or losing, but also the occurrence and release of a reserved state. In other words, because the points that require attention are concentrated, it is possible to effectively prevent oversights. Furthermore, by adding at least the occurrence and release of a reserved state, it is possible to increase the number of stopping combinations of symbols that interest players, making the game of symbols even more interesting.

Feature cG12. A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game time control means (a function of executing a special symbol game time control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special symbol variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time operation to be started based on the special symbol determination, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special symbol determination is counted as one game time, and
A means for making the operation period of the game turn action in the game turn in which the predetermined condition is satisfied or the game turn in which the cancellation is performed longer or more likely to be longer than the operation period of the game turn action in the game turn in which the specific condition is satisfied or the game turn in which the reservation is performed (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 162 according to the eighth modified example);
A gaming machine according to any one of features cG1 to cG11, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the game turn operation period for the game turn in which the reservation is released is longer, or is likely to be longer, than the game turn operation period for the game turn in which the reservation is made. Therefore, a sufficient period can be secured to notify the player that the reservation has been released, and the game turn presentation can be executed, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player that the release has occurred.

Feature cG13. The game system has a first game state (first opening/closing execution mode) and a second game state (second opening/closing execution mode) that are more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state;
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) that executes variable ball entry control to open the variable ball entry means (variable prize entry device 65) in the first game state and the second game state;
means for canceling the reserved state by the second means when a predetermined game result corresponding to the transition to the first game state (a winning/losing lottery result corresponding to the first opening/closing execution mode) is reached, and for not canceling the reserved state by the second means when a specific game result corresponding to the transition to the second game state (a winning/losing lottery result corresponding to the second opening/closing execution mode) is reached;
A gaming machine according to any one of features cG1 to cG12, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, in a configuration with multiple game states in which the variable ball entry means is opened and closed, not only can the game state to which the player transitions differ depending on whether the game result corresponds to a transition to the first game state or a transition to the second game state, but it can also differ in whether the reservation is released, thereby increasing the game's enjoyment.

Feature cG14. A gaming machine described in Feature cG13, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, the reservation is released when transitioning to the relatively advantageous first gaming state, but the reservation is avoided when transitioning to the relatively disadvantageous second gaming state. In other words, the disadvantage of the gaming state is compensated for by not releasing the reservation, which makes it possible to reduce the player's disappointment when transitioning to the second gaming state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features cG1 to cG14 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature cH group>
The feature cH group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 6 to 7 of the third embodiment.

Feature cH group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a system in which there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is switched based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cH1. The game state includes a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A specific game state transition means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to a sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of Examples 6 and 7, and a first transition process for the sudden time-saving game state) is provided, which can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times the ball reaches the ceiling is reached, a ball is struck in a specific ball-striking area, etc.) is satisfied.
There are multiple types of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, ceiling time-saving game state, normal time-saving game state, etc.) as specific game states,
a first means (such as a function of executing a process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state in the main control device 162 of the sixth and seventh variants) for imposing a predetermined restriction (such as a reservation or invalidation of transition) on the implementation of a predetermined second specific game state when a specific condition corresponding to the predetermined second specific game state (such as a normal time-shortened game state in the sixth variant and a sudden time-shortened game state A in the seventh variant) is met in a situation in which the predetermined first specific game state (such as a normal time-shortened game state in the sixth variant and a sudden time-shortened game state A in the seventh variant) is met;
a second means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state in the main control device 162 of Modification 6, a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state in the main control device 162 of Modification 7, a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state, a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state, etc.) for permitting the implementation of a predetermined fourth specific game state (a normal game state in Modification 6, a sudden time-shortened game state A in Modification 7) without imposing a predetermined restriction on the implementation of the predetermined fourth specific game state when a specific condition corresponding to the fourth specific game state (a sudden time-shortened game state A in Modification 6, a sudden time-shortened game state A in Modification 7) is met;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and this specific game state can be entered by fulfilling specific conditions. Therefore, players can enjoy playing with the aim of fulfilling specific conditions and transitioning to the specific game state. Furthermore, multiple types of specific game states are provided as specific game states, and if the conditions for transitioning to the specific game state are fulfilled while the player is in a specific game state, restrictions on transition are imposed or not imposed depending on the combination, which can lead to differences in the subsequent development of the game depending on the combination. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not a transition to a specific game state occurs, but also which combination results, making it possible to more effectively enhance the player's interest.

Feature cH2. The transition to a specific game state is reserved, and then, when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met, the transition to the reserved specific game state can be executed.
A gaming machine described in feature cH1, characterized in that the specified restriction is the reservation.

In the above configuration, because a specified restriction reserves the transition, depending on the combination of the current specific game state and the specific game state corresponding to a specific condition that is met along the way, it is possible to switch between delaying the transition to the latter specific game state and continuing the former specific game state, or immediately transitioning to the latter specific game state. This increases the player's interest in the above combination and makes it possible to increase the level of attention paid to the game.

Feature cH3. A gaming machine according to Feature cH2, characterized in that it is equipped with means for executing a transition to a predetermined second specific gaming state after the predetermined first specific gaming state ends when the transition to the predetermined second specific gaming state is reserved by the first means (a function for executing a second transition process to a sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control device 162 of Variations 6 and 7).

With the above configuration, the transition to the second specific gaming state occurs after the preceding first specific gaming state has ended, making it possible to play the first specific gaming state to the end. This makes it possible to enjoy playing in the first specific gaming state to the end before enjoying playing in the second specific gaming state.

Feature cH4. A gaming machine as described in Feature cH1, wherein the predetermined restriction regulates transition to a specific game state (such as a function that disables winning a special losing result and transitioning to a corresponding time-saving game state).

In the above configuration, the specified restrictions regulate the transition to a specific gaming state, so depending on the combination of the specific gaming state currently in play and the specific gaming state corresponding to a specific condition that occurs during the game, it is possible to either disable the latter specific gaming state or transition to the latter specific gaming state and allow that gaming state to be played. This increases the player's interest in the combination and makes it possible to increase attention to the game.

Feature cH5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cH1 to cH4, wherein the predetermined limit reduces the number of times a player can play in a specific gaming state compared to when the predetermined limit is not imposed (the difference in the number of times a player can play is set as the remaining number of times a player can play when the game transitions to the reserved time-saving mode).

Since the specified limit reduces the number of times a player can stay in a specific gaming state, the number of times the player can play the latter specific gaming state can be changed by combining the specific gaming state currently in play with a specific gaming state corresponding to a specific condition that is met during the game. This increases the player's interest in the combination and makes it possible to increase attention to the game.

Feature cH6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
A gaming machine described in any of features cH1 to cH5, characterized in that the predetermined fourth specific gaming state is one in which the ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry section than the predetermined third specific gaming state when compared with a state in which the gaming ball is launched with a predetermined launch strength.

In the above configuration, if the combination of the specific game state currently in play and the specific game state corresponding to the specific condition that is met during the game increases the likelihood of the ball scoring in the designated scoring area, the latter specific game state will be implemented without any restrictions. This allows for a state in which it is easier to prevent the loss of balls to be reduced to arrive sooner, making it possible to create a configuration that allows the player to play advantageously.

Feature cH7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cH1 to cH6, wherein the predetermined first specific gaming state (normal time-shortened gaming state in Modification 6) and the predetermined third specific gaming state (normal time-shortened gaming state in Modification 6) are the same type of specific gaming state, and the predetermined second specific gaming state (sudden time-shortened gaming state B in Modification 6) and the predetermined fourth specific gaming state (sudden time-shortened gaming state A in Modification 6) are different types of specific gaming states.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific game state, restrictions on the execution of the specific game state corresponding to that condition are switched on or off depending on the type of condition. This allows the player to focus on which specific game state corresponding to the specific condition is met while in the specific game state, making it possible to appropriately liven up play in the specific game state.

Feature cH8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cH1 to cH5, characterized in that the predetermined first specific gaming state (the ceiling time-saving gaming state in Variant 7) and the predetermined third specific gaming state (the sudden time-saving gaming state B in Variant 7) are different types of specific gaming states.

In the above configuration, the presence or absence of restrictions when specific conditions are met can be switched depending on which specific game state the player is currently in. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay during specific game states and increase the player's interest.

Feature cH9. A gaming machine described in Feature cH8, characterized in that the predetermined second specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A in Variant 7) and the predetermined fourth specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A in Variant 7) are the same type of specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific game state, restrictions on the execution of the specific game state corresponding to that condition are switched on or off depending on which specific game state the player is currently in. This makes it possible to diversify play during specific game states and increase entertainment value.

Feature cH10. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features cH1 to cH9, characterized in that at least a predetermined second specific gaming state and a predetermined fourth specific gaming state are specific gaming states to which transition can be made without passing through a special gaming state.

In the above configuration, the second specific game state and the fourth specific game state can be transitioned to without passing through a special game state. By applying any of the features cH1 to cH9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features cH1 to cH10 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature group C1>
The feature group cI is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the modifications, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the sixth modification of the third embodiment.

Feature cI group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a system in which there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is switched based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature cI1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A specific game state transition means (a function of suddenly executing a first transition process for the time-saving game state by the main control device 162) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times reaches the ceiling, a ball is hit in a specific ball-hitting area, etc.) is met;
A specific game state termination means (a function of executing a high frequency support mode termination process by the main control device 162) that can terminate the specific game state based on the number of times of play after transitioning to the specific game state reaching a predetermined upper limit number of times;
Equipped with
When a specific condition is met in a previous specific game state (for example, a normal time-saving game state), it is possible to transition to a later specific game state (for example, a sudden time-saving game state A) as a result of the condition being met.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specifying means that can make the remaining number of times that can be played in the subsequent specific gaming state invisible under certain circumstances while the player is in the subsequent specific gaming state (in variant example 6, a function to display as the remaining number of times image 523 the number of times that would be remaining if the normal time-saving gaming state had not ended midway, a function to suddenly change the display of the remaining number of times image 523 to "? times remaining" from the middle of time-saving gaming state A, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, and this specific gaming state can be entered when specific conditions are met. Therefore, players can enjoy playing with the aim of fulfilling specific conditions and transitioning to the specific gaming state. Under this configuration, when specific conditions are met in a previous specific gaming state, a transition to a subsequent specific gaming state occurs based on that fulfillment, and the remaining number of play times in that subsequent specific gaming state is not displayed. This makes it appear as if the previous specific gaming state continues even after the transition to the subsequent specific gaming state, entertaining the player as to how long that state will continue, and making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature cI2. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
A gaming machine described in feature cI1, characterized in that the later specific gaming state is one in which the ball is more likely to enter the specified ball entry section than the earlier specific gaming state when compared with a state in which the gaming ball is launched with a specified launch strength.

In the above configuration, because the later specific game state is more likely to result in a ball entering the predetermined ball entry area than the earlier specific game state, the later specific game state can be made to function as a higher-level specific game state. In this case, by not disclosing the remaining number of play times in the later specific game state, it is possible to make it difficult to tell how long the promoted higher-level specific game state (later specific game state) will last, thereby increasing interest.

Feature cI3. A gaming machine as described in Feature cI1 or Feature cI2, which is configured to be able to transition to the subsequent specific gaming state in the middle of the previous specific gaming state if a specific condition is met in the previous specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a previous specific gaming state, that specific gaming state is terminated and a transition to a subsequent specific gaming state is made, giving the impression that the player has been promoted in the middle of the specific gaming state, which can increase the player's interest.

Feature cI4. It has a means (a function of setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that can be played in the specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features cI1 to cI3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing a specific notification corresponding to a number different from the number of times that can be played while in the subsequent specific gaming state under a predetermined situation while in the subsequent specific gaming state (a function for displaying a remaining number image 523 corresponding to the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving gaming state after a sudden transition to time-saving gaming state A).

In the above configuration, a specific notification is executed in the subsequent specific game state corresponding to a number different from the number of times that the player can remain in that subsequent specific game state. For example, if a specific notification is issued for a number that is less than the actual number of times remaining, the player can be led to believe that the subsequent specific game state is about to end before continuing that specific game state, which can satisfactorily surprise and delight the player.

Feature cI5. A gaming machine as described in Feature cI4, wherein the specific notification corresponds to the number of remaining play times if the previous specific game state had not been terminated in a situation where a transition to the subsequent specific game state has occurred midway through the previous specific game state.

With the above configuration, in the subsequent specific game state, a notification is made corresponding to the number of remaining plays if the previous specific game state had not been terminated midway, making it possible to present the previous and subsequent specific game states as a series of specific game states.

Feature cI6. The device has a means for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that can be played in the specific game state (a function for setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the performance control device 143),
A gaming machine described in any of features cI1 to cI5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for setting the display of a remaining number image 523 in the presentation control device 143) for executing a specific notification (display of remaining number of times) in a specific manner that is impossible or difficult for the player to recognize as a notification corresponding to the specified notification, in a specific situation while the player is in the subsequent specific gaming state, in which the number of times the player can remain in the subsequent specific gaming state is recognized.

In the above configuration, a notification corresponding to a predetermined notification in a subsequent specific game state is issued in a specific manner that prevents the player from knowing the number of times the player can play in the subsequent specific game state. This makes it possible to make it appear as if a predetermined notification has been issued, while keeping the remaining number of times the player can play in the subsequent specific game state hidden.

Feature cI7. The device has a means for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that can be played in the specific game state (a function for setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the effect control device 143),
A gaming machine described in any of features cI1 to cI5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function to erase the display of the remaining number of times image 523) to not execute the specified notification under specified circumstances while remaining in the subsequent specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, by not issuing a predetermined notification in a subsequent specific game state, the remaining number of times in that subsequent specific game state can be kept hidden.

Feature cI8. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features cI1 to cI7, characterized in that if a specific condition is met in the previous specific gaming state, it is possible to transition to the subsequent specific gaming state without going through a special gaming state.

With the above configuration, switching from an earlier specific game state to a later specific game state can be performed without the need for a special game state, making it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the two specific game states. By applying any of the features cI1 to cI7 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature cI9. The device has a means for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that can be played in the specific game state (a function for setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the performance control device 143),
A gaming machine described in any one of features cI1 to cI8, characterized in that after the subsequent specific gaming state is put into the non-express state by the identification means, in a predetermined case (such as when the remaining number of times in time-saving gaming state A suddenly becomes 10 or less, or when a predetermined operation is performed using an operating means such as a performance button), it is possible to execute a predetermined notification corresponding to the remaining number of times of gaming in the subsequent specific gaming state.

This configuration prevents a specific game state from ending without revealing the remaining number of play times in the subsequent specific game state. This prevents the player from being confused by the impression that the specific game state has suddenly ended.

Feature cI10. A gaming machine as described in Feature cI9, characterized in that after the subsequent specific gaming state is switched to the non-indicated state by the specifying means, when the remaining number of times that the player can remain in the subsequent specific gaming state falls below a predetermined number, the predetermined notification corresponding to the remaining number of times can be executed.

In the above configuration, the non-disclosed state is switched to the disclosed state when the number of remaining play times in the later specific game state falls below a predetermined number. This allows the player to be informed of the number of remaining play times at the end of the later specific game state, preventing the player from feeling as if the specific game state has suddenly ended.

Feature cI11. Equipped with operation means (effect buttons, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine described in feature cI9 or feature cI10, characterized in that when a predetermined operation is performed by the operating means in the subsequent specific gaming state, a predetermined notification corresponding to the remaining number of games in the subsequent specific gaming state can be executed.

In the above configuration, the player can perform a specific operation to switch the remaining number of play turns in the subsequent specific game state from a hidden state to a clearly displayed state. This leaves it up to the player to decide whether or not to make the remaining number of turns visible, making it possible to accommodate both players who want to know as soon as possible how long the specific game state will last and players who don't want to know until the very end.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other groups cA to cI can be applied individually to each of the configurations of the above-described groups cA to cI, or the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine (ball-operated reel-type gaming machine): A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as it finally stops; the pattern fluctuation begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern fluctuation is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses game balls into the ball receiving tray; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Feature dA group to feature dF group>
The inventions described in the following Feature dA group to Feature dF group are a group of inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and its variations.

<Feature dA group>
The feature dA group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature group dA was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and perform control such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, thereby performing various changes in game progress (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dA1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (normal game round, etc.), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing an electric role support process in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result),
Equipped with
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a win resulting from a special miss, a big win, a ball entering a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, or a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a switching means (such as a function to execute a normal game change start process and a special opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) for switching the mode of the predetermined game operation (normal game play and a special game including a special opening/closing game) including the game round and the specific control to a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are multiple timings in the specified game operation at which the switching by the switching means can be performed (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuations in normal game times and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, and in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and when a specific condition is met, a predetermined internal state is entered. When such a predetermined internal state is entered, a switch is executed so that the operating mode of the predetermined gaming operation, which includes a gaming round for notifying the result of the specific judgment and specific control performed based on the result of the specific judgment, becomes a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state. In this case, this feature provides multiple timing points in the predetermined gaming operation at which the switch can be executed. Therefore, if a transition to the predetermined internal state occurs during the predetermined gaming operation, the switch can be executed without waiting for the end of the predetermined gaming operation. In other words, the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state can be executed quickly, allowing the player to quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific gaming state when a specific condition is met. This enables optimal control of the switching of gaming states.

Note that the "means for establishing a predetermined internal state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition" in this feature can also be expressed as "means for establishing a predetermined internal state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied," "means for establishing a predetermined internal state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied," or "means for establishing a predetermined internal state after a predetermined specific condition is satisfied."

Feature dA2. A means for controlling the first game operation (special game including special game) to be performed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the actuation port 62, 63) (a function for executing special game control processing and game state transition processing in the main control device 162),
The predetermined internal state is set in response to the first game operation (such as a function to set a support flag in response to the confirmation display of a special game or the end of an opening/closing execution mode),
A second game action different from the first game action is performed as the predetermined game action,
A gaming machine described in feature dA1, characterized in that multiple timings at which the switching by the switching means can be performed are provided in the second gaming operation.

In the above configuration, the first game action is executed separately from the second game action as a predetermined game action. Because a transition to a predetermined internal state is executed in response to this first game action, this transition occurs asynchronously with the second game action. In this situation, multiple timing points are provided in the second game action at which processing can be executed to switch the mode of the second game action to a mode corresponding to a specific game state. Therefore, when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, an action in a mode corresponding to the specific game state can be quickly initiated.

Note that this feature may further include the feature that "if the determination condition is met during the execution of the first game action, the second game action can be executed in parallel with the first game action."

Feature dA3. A gaming machine as described in Feature dA1 or Feature dA2, characterized in that the switching can be performed at multiple timings, including a first timing corresponding to the number of play cycles (a timing corresponding to the start of fluctuation in the number of normal play cycles) and a second timing corresponding to the specific control (such as a timing corresponding to the first or second opening of the normal power device 63a in a device opening/closing game).

In the above configuration, at least a first timing corresponding to a game play and a second timing corresponding to a specific control are provided as timings at which switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be performed. In this case, it is possible to select which of these timings to perform the switching at, taking into account the timing at which the transition to the specified internal state occurs and the status of the specified game operation. In other words, the switching can be performed at the timing closest to the timing at which the transition to the specified internal state occurs, making it possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state when a transition to the specified internal state occurs.

Feature dA4. A gaming machine according to Feature dA3, characterized in that the switching means includes means for switching the mode of the predetermined gaming operation to a mode corresponding to a specific gaming state at the second timing when the predetermined internal state is achieved during execution of the gaming round (a function for executing upper limit opening time setting processing by the main control device 162 in the fourth embodiment).

In the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during a game, the mode corresponding to the specific game state is switched to at a second timing corresponding to the specific control. This allows the above switch to be performed without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the next game, making it possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "the switching means includes means for switching the mode of the predetermined game operation to a mode corresponding to the specific game state at the first timing when the predetermined internal state is reached in a situation where the game round and the specific control are not being executed (a function for executing a general game fluctuation start process by the main control unit 162 in the fourth embodiment described above)."

Feature dA5: The second timing is a timing corresponding to the start of the specific control (a timing corresponding to the opening) or a predetermined timing during the specific control (a timing corresponding to the first opening),
A gaming machine described in feature dA3 or feature dA4, characterized in that a third timing (second opening, timing corresponding to an interval, etc.) that is a timing during the specific control and that is later than the second timing is further provided as a timing at which the switching can be executed.

In the above configuration, a third timing, which is later than the second timing, is provided as a timing at which switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be executed during specific control. In this case, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs after the second timing while specific control is being executed, switching to a mode corresponding to the specific game state can be executed at the third timing. In other words, since the switching can be executed during specific control being executed without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the next game round, switching to a mode corresponding to the specific game state can be executed quickly when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs.

Feature dA6. The gaming machine described in Feature dA5 is characterized in that the switching means includes means for switching the mode of the predetermined gaming operation to a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state at the third timing if the predetermined internal state is achieved after the second timing during the specific control (a function for executing an upper limit opening time setting process and a closing time setting process by the main control unit 162 in Variation 1 of the fourth embodiment above).

With the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs after the second timing during execution of a specific control, it is possible to switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state during the specific control being executed, without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the next game round. Therefore, when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, it is possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state.

Feature dA7: A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than in the first state,
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to dA6, characterized in that the timing at which the switching by the switching means can be performed includes a first timing corresponding to the start of the game round (a timing corresponding to the start of fluctuation in the normal game round) and a second timing corresponding to the execution of the switching control in the specific control (a timing corresponding to the first opening and second opening of the normal electric device 63a in the device opening and closing game, etc.) (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuation in the normal game round and at the first opening of the device opening and closing game, in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed at the second opening and during the interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, the timings at which a switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be performed are at least a first timing corresponding to the start of a game round and a second timing corresponding to the execution of switching control in specific control (opening of the variable ball entry means). Of these timings, the above switch can be performed at the timing closest to the timing at which a transition to a specified internal state occurs, making it possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state when a transition to a specified internal state occurs.

Feature dA8. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than in the first state,
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once,
The specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times, including a first switching control (first opening) and a second switching control (second opening) performed after the first switching control,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to dA7, characterized in that the timing at which the switching by the switching means can be performed includes a first timing corresponding to the start of the game round (a timing corresponding to the start of fluctuation in the normal game round) and a second timing corresponding to the execution of the later switching control in the specific control in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times (a timing corresponding to the second opening) (in variant example 1, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuation in the normal game round and at the second opening of the device opening and closing game).

In the above configuration, the timings at which a switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be executed are at least a first timing corresponding to the start of a game round and a second timing corresponding to a later switching control in the specific control (the second or subsequent opening of the variable ball entry means). In this case, if a transition to a specified internal state occurs during the execution of specific control, the above switch can be executed at the second timing during the specific control being executed, without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the start of the next game round. Therefore, when a transition to a specified internal state occurs, it is possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state.

When this feature is applied to feature dA7, the "second timing" of feature dA7 can be expressed as "the second timing corresponding to the earlier switching," and the "second timing" of this feature can be expressed as "the third timing corresponding to the later switching."

Feature dA9: A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than in the first state,
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once,
The specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times, including a previous switching control (first opening) and a subsequent switching control (second opening) performed after the previous switching control,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to dA8, characterized in that the timing at which the switching by the switching means can be performed includes a first timing corresponding to the start of the game round (a timing corresponding to the start of fluctuation in the normal game round), and a second timing corresponding to the second state between the earlier switching control and the later switching control in the specific control in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times (a timing corresponding to the interval between the first opening and the second opening) (in variant example 1, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuation in the normal game round and during the interval between the opening and closing of the reel).

In the above configuration, the timings at which switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be performed include at least a first timing corresponding to the start of a game round and a second timing corresponding to a second state (interval) between each switching control in the specific control. In this case, if a transition to a specific internal state occurs during execution of a specific control, the above switching can be performed at the second timing during the specific control being executed, without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the start of the next game round. Therefore, when a transition to a specific internal state occurs, it is possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state.

Feature dA10. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than in the first state,
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once,
A gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA9, characterized in that a specific gaming state is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than a predetermined gaming state.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state. By applying any of the above features dA1 to dA9 to this configuration, it is possible to quickly reach a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, thereby enabling a configuration in which the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific game state when a specific condition is met.

Feature dA11. A gaming machine described in Feature dA10, characterized in that the specific gaming state includes a gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state) in which the probability of the specific result being achieved in the specific judgment is the same as that of the specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, since the specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state, to achieve this state, it is necessary to set the probability of winning the predetermined result in the specific game state at a certain value or above and ensure a certain frequency with which the variable ball entry means enters the first state (open state). In this case, since the probability of winning the predetermined result is the same in the predetermined game state, the frequency with which the variable ball entry means enters the first state increases even in the predetermined game state, making it difficult to create a clear difference in the ease with which a ball enters the variable ball entry means between the predetermined game state and the specific game state. Therefore, it is conceivable to reduce the frequency of specific judgments per unit time and make it more difficult for a ball to enter the variable ball entry means by lengthening the period required for one game or one specific control in the predetermined game state.

However, on the other hand, as these periods become longer, the waiting period after the transition to a specified internal state until the switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state also becomes longer, which raises the concern that even though the internal state corresponds to a specific game state, a state in which a ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means may not arrive soon. By applying the configuration of feature dA1 to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting period and more quickly arrive at a state in which a ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means.

Feature dA12. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (normal game round, etc.), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing an electric role support process in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result),
Equipped with
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a win resulting from a special miss, a big win, a ball entering a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, or a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a mode setting means (such as a function to execute a normal game change start process and a special opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) sets the predetermined game operation (normal game play and a special game including a special control) including the game round and the specific control to be executed in a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of timings at which the setting by the mode setting means can be executed in the predetermined gaming operation so that the predetermined gaming operation is executed in a mode corresponding to a specific gaming state are provided in the predetermined gaming operation (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to a low frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high frequency support mode can be executed at the start of fluctuation in normal game times and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and when a specific condition is met, a predetermined internal state is entered. When such a predetermined internal state is entered, the operating mode of the predetermined gaming operation, including the gaming round for notifying the result of the specific judgment and the specific control performed based on the result of the specific judgment, is set (switched) to a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state. In this case, this feature provides multiple timing points from the start to the end of the predetermined gaming operation at which the above switching can be performed. Therefore, if a transition to the predetermined internal state occurs during the predetermined gaming operation, the above switching can be performed without waiting for the end of the predetermined gaming operation. In other words, the switching to a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state can be performed quickly, allowing the player to quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific gaming state when a specific condition is met. This enables optimal control of the gaming state.

The configurations of features dA2 to dA11 above can be applied to this feature, and in this case, applying these configurations can provide additional benefits. When applying these configurations, "switching by the switching means" in features dA2 to dA11 above can be read as "setting by the mode setting means."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination to each of the configurations of Features dA1 to dA12 above. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature dB group>
The feature dB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature dB group was developed in response to the problem that the invention seeks to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and perform control such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, thereby performing various changes in game progress (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dB1. Equipped with a means for controlling (function to execute normal game control processing and electric role support processing in the main control device 162) so that a predetermined game operation (normal game round and normal game side game including opening and closing of role) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a win resulting from a special miss, a big win, a ball entering a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, or a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a switching means (such as a function to execute a normal game fluctuation start process and a special opening and closing process in the main control device 162) switches the predetermined game operation mode to a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
Equipped with
The switching means is capable of performing the switching at a specific timing during the specified game operation (timing corresponding to the first opening, the second or subsequent opening, the start of an interval, the start of an opening, the start of a confirmation display, etc.) after being placed in the specified internal state (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuations in normal game times and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game; in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and when specific conditions are met, a specific internal state is entered. When such a specific internal state is entered, a switch is executed so that the operating mode of the specific gaming action corresponds to the specific gaming state. In this case, this feature allows the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state at a specific timing during the specific gaming action. Therefore, for example, if a transition to the specific internal state occurs during the execution of a specific gaming action, the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state can be executed quickly. Therefore, when a specific condition is met, the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific gaming state, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the switching of gaming states.

Note that the "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition" in this feature can also be expressed as "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied," "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied," or "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed after a predetermined execution condition is satisfied." Furthermore, the "means for establishing a predetermined internal state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition" in this feature can also be expressed as "means for establishing a predetermined internal state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied," "means for establishing a predetermined internal state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied," or "means for establishing a predetermined internal state after a predetermined specific condition is satisfied."

Feature dB2. The gaming machine described in Feature dB1, wherein the switching means is capable of performing the switching at the specific timing during the predetermined gaming operation if the transition to the predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of the predetermined gaming operation.

With the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of a predetermined game action, a switch to a mode corresponding to the predetermined game action can be made at a specific timing during the predetermined game action, allowing the switch to be made without waiting for the completion of the predetermined game action. This shortens the waiting period between the transition to the predetermined internal state and the switch, making it possible to quickly activate the predetermined game action corresponding to the specific game action.

Feature dB3. A means for controlling the first game operation (special game operation including special game times) to be performed based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the actuation port 62, 63) (a function for executing special game time control processing and game state transition processing in the main control device 162),
The predetermined game action is controlled so that a second game action is performed based on the establishment of a second execution condition as the predetermined execution condition,
The predetermined internal state can be set in response to the first game operation (a configuration for setting a support flag in response to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a function for setting a support flag in response to the confirmation display of the special game),
A gaming machine described in feature dB1 or feature dB2, characterized in that the switching means is capable of performing the switching at a specific timing during the second gaming operation when the specified internal state is reached.

In the above configuration, the first game action is executed separately from the second game action as a predetermined game action. A transition to a predetermined internal state is executed in response to this first game action, so this transition occurs asynchronously with the second game action. In such a situation, switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be performed midway through the predetermined game action, so that when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, the predetermined game action corresponding to the specific game state can be activated quickly.

Note that this feature may further include the feature that "if the determination condition is met during the execution of the first game action, the second game action can be executed in parallel with the first game action."

Feature dB4: A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A specific judgment means (such as a function in the main control device 162 to execute a normal winning/losing judgment) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64);
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (normal game round, etc.), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as opening and closing a role) so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (support winning result), and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once.
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the game number and the specific control,
A gaming machine described in any of features dB1 to dB3, characterized in that when the result of the specific judgment is the specified internal state during the execution of a specified game round, which is a specified result, the specific timing is set so that at least the switching control in the specific control performed after the specified game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be executed at the start of fluctuation in a normal game round and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of a predetermined game round in which the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result, the timing of switching by the switching means is set so that the switching control (opening of the variable ball entry means) in the specific control performed after that game round can be performed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state. This allows the above switching to be performed without waiting for the specific control after the predetermined game round to end, making it possible to quickly switch to a manner corresponding to the specific game state when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs.

Feature dB5. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (normal game round, etc.), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing an electric role support process in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (a support winning result);
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the game number and the specific control,
the specific timing is set so that when the specific internal state is reached during the execution of a predetermined game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, the specific control to be performed after the predetermined game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state;
The specific control corresponding to the specific game state has a plurality of different types of specific control (first high prize device opening/closing game, second high prize device opening/closing game),
A means (such as a function for executing the processing of step Sd2004 in the main control unit 162) for executing a predetermined lottery (such as a normal winning type determination) before executing the specific control when the result of the specific determination is the predetermined result;
A means for setting the specific control mode after the predetermined number of games based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed in response to the predetermined number of games before the predetermined internal state is established (a function for executing the processing of steps Sd2206, Sd2207, and Sd2304 in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine according to any one of features dB1 to dB4, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of a predetermined game round in which the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result, the timing of switching by the switching means is set so that the specific control performed after that game round can be executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state. This allows the above switching to be performed without waiting for the specific control after the predetermined game round to end, making it possible to quickly switch to a manner corresponding to the specific game state when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs.

In addition, the results of the predetermined lottery conducted before the transition to the predetermined internal state are used to set the specific control mode to be performed after the transition to the predetermined internal state. In other words, because the results of the predetermined lottery are used across transitions to the predetermined internal state, there is no need to re-run the predetermined lottery, which helps prevent the control process from becoming more complicated and cumbersome.

Feature dB6. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A specific judgment means (such as a function in the main control device 162 to execute a normal winning/losing judgment) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64);
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as opening and closing a role) so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (support winning result), and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once.
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the specific control,
The specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode (second high winning device opening and closing game) in which switching control is executed multiple times,
A gaming machine described in any of features dB1 to dB5, characterized in that the specific timing is set so that a predetermined switching control, which is the second or subsequent switching control among the multiple switching controls, is executed in a manner corresponding to a specific game state (e.g., in variant example 1, a configuration in which switching from a manner corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a manner corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be executed at the second opening of a device opening/closing game).

In the above configuration, the specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode in which switching control (opening of the variable ball entry means) is performed multiple times, and the timing of switching by the switching means is set so that the second or subsequent predetermined switching control in the predetermined control mode can be performed in a mode corresponding to the specific game state. Therefore, if a transition to the specific internal state occurs during specific control, the above switching can be performed without waiting for the specific control to end, making it possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state when a transition to the specific internal state occurs.

Feature dB7. When the game state is a specific game state, a specific notification (special light-emitting effect) can be executed by a predetermined notification means (the first light-emitting unit 752, the second light-emitting unit 761, etc.) (a function of executing a process for special light-emitting effect in the effect control device 143),
A gaming machine described in any of features dB1 to dB6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling (a function for executing start timing setting processing in the presentation control device 143) so that the specific notification is executed at a predetermined timing corresponding to the specific timing (a third timing corresponding to the opening of the normal electric device 63a).

If a switch to a mode corresponding to a specific gaming state occurs at a specific timing during a predetermined gaming operation, there is a concern that the player may find it difficult to notice the switch. In this regard, with the above configuration, a specific notification corresponding to the specific gaming state is executed at a timing corresponding to the specific timing, making it easier for the player to notice the switch even when it occurs during a predetermined gaming operation.

Feature dB8. When the game state is a specific game state, a specific notification (special light-emitting effect) can be executed by a predetermined notification means (the first light-emitting unit 752, the second light-emitting unit 761, etc.) (a function of executing a process for special light-emitting effect in the effect control device 143),
A first means (a function of executing a start timing setting process in the performance control device 143) for controlling the specific notification to be executed at a first predetermined timing (a first timing corresponding to the setting of a support flag) corresponding to the transition to the predetermined internal state;
A second means (a function of executing a start timing setting process in the performance control device 143) for controlling the specific notification to be executed at a second predetermined timing (a third timing corresponding to the opening of the normal electric device 63a) corresponding to the specific timing;
A gaming machine according to any one of features dB1 to dB7, characterized in that it comprises:

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when a specific gaming state is reached, allowing the player to easily understand that the specific gaming state is reached. In this case, the timing at which the specific notification can be issued is set to be a first predetermined timing corresponding to the transition to a specific internal state, and a second predetermined timing corresponding to the specific timing at which a switch to a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state is made. In this case, by selecting the timing at which the specific notification is issued depending on the period from the transition to the specific internal state until the switch is made, it becomes possible to issue the specific notification at an appropriate timing.

Feature dB9. A grasping means (a function for executing the processing of step Sd3608 in the performance control device 143) for grasping the period from the transition to the predetermined internal state to the specific timing;
A setting means for setting whether the specific notification is to be executed at the first predetermined timing or the second predetermined timing based on the period grasped by the grasping means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sd3609, Sd3610, and Sd3603 in the performance control device 143);
The gaming machine described in feature dB8 is characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, the period from the transition to a predetermined internal state until the switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state is determined, and based on that determination, it is set whether to execute the specific notification at the first predetermined timing or the second predetermined timing. Therefore, depending on the length of the period from the transition to the switch, it is possible to selectively execute the specific notification in conjunction with the transition to a predetermined internal state or in conjunction with the switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state. For example, if the period is long and the specific notification is executed in conjunction with the transition, there is a risk that a situation will occur in which the operation corresponding to the specific game state is not implemented for a long time, even though the fact that the specific game state is being notified. In such a case, by executing the specific notification in conjunction with the switch, it is possible to quickly initiate the operation corresponding to the specific game state after the start of the specific notification, making it possible to notify the player that the specific game state is being entered at an appropriate timing.

Feature dB10. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A specific judgment means (such as a function in the main control device 162 to execute a normal winning/losing judgment) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64);
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as opening and closing a role) so that the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (support winning result), and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once.
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the specific control,
A gaming machine according to any one of features dB1 to dB9, characterized in that a specific gaming state is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than a predetermined gaming state.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state. By applying any of the above features dB1 to dB9 to this configuration, it is possible to quickly reach a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, thereby enabling a configuration in which a player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific game state when a specific condition is met.

Feature dB11. A gaming machine as described in Feature dB10, characterized in that the specific gaming state includes a gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state) in which the probability of the specific result being achieved in the specific judgment is the same as that of the specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, since the specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state, to achieve this state, it is necessary to set the probability of winning the predetermined result in the specific game state at a certain value or above and ensure a certain frequency with which the variable ball entry means enters the first state (open state). In this case, since the probability of winning the predetermined result is the same in the predetermined game state, the frequency with which the variable ball entry means enters the first state increases even in the predetermined game state, making it difficult to create a clear difference in the ease with which a ball enters the variable ball entry means between the predetermined game state and the specific game state. Therefore, it is conceivable to reduce the frequency of specific judgments per unit time and make it more difficult for a ball to enter the variable ball entry means by lengthening the period required for one game or one specific control in the predetermined game state.

However, on the other hand, as these periods become longer, the waiting period after the transition to a specified internal state until the switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state also becomes longer, which raises the concern that even though the internal state corresponds to a specific game state, a state in which a ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means may not arrive soon. By applying the configuration of feature dB1 to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting period and more quickly arrive at a state in which a ball is likely to enter the variable ball entry means.

Feature dB12. Equipped with a means for controlling (function to execute normal game round control processing and electric role support processing in the main control device 162) so that predetermined game operations (normal game rounds and normal game rounds including opening and closing of role-playing devices) are performed based on the establishment of predetermined execution conditions (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a win resulting from a special miss, a big win, a ball entering a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, or a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state);
After the predetermined internal state is established, a mode setting means (such as a function to execute a normal game fluctuation start process and a special opening and closing process in the main control device 162) performs a predetermined setting so that the predetermined game operation is executed in a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
Equipped with
The mode setting means is capable of making the predetermined setting at a specific timing during the predetermined game operation (timing corresponding to the first opening, the second or subsequent opening, the start of an interval, the start of an opening, the start of a confirmation display, etc.) when the predetermined internal state is reached (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuations in normal game times and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, and in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and when specific conditions are met, a specific internal state is entered. When such a specific internal state is entered, a specific setting is executed so that a specific gaming action is performed in a manner corresponding to the specific gaming state. In this case, this feature allows the specific setting to be executed at a specific timing during a specific gaming action. Therefore, for example, if a transition to a specific internal state occurs during the execution of a specific gaming action, the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state can be switched to quickly. Therefore, when a player meets specific conditions, the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific gaming state, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the switching of gaming states.

The configurations of Features dB2 to dB11 above can be applied to this feature, and in this case, applying these configurations can provide additional benefits. When applying these configurations, "switching by the switching means" in Features dB2 to dB11 above can be read as "setting by the mode setting means."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination to each of the configurations of Features dB1 to dB12 above. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature dC group>
The feature dC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature dC group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and perform control such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, thereby performing various changes in game progress (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dC1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing an electric role support process in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (a support winning result);
Equipped with
The gaming machine has a means (such as a function of executing the processing of step Sd2004 in the main control device 162) for executing a predetermined lottery (such as a determination of a winning type of a normal game) before executing the specific control when the result of the specific determination is a predetermined result, and is configured to set the mode of the specific control based on the result of the predetermined lottery,
The specific control execution means is capable of executing the specific control in a mode (such as an opening mode for a high-prize opening/closing device game) corresponding to the state after the change (such as a set state of the support flag, a state corresponding to a ball entering, etc.) when a predetermined state change (such as a change from a non-set state to a set state of the support flag, or a state corresponding to a ball entering, etc.) occurs during a predetermined period (such as during the execution of a normal game round, during the execution of the first opening of a device opening/closing game, during the execution of an interval, etc.) from the execution of the specific judgment that results in a predetermined result to the execution of the specific control corresponding to the predetermined result,
The specific control mode corresponding to the changed state has a plurality of modes (first and second high prize device opening and closing games),
A gaming machine characterized by having a mode setting means (such as a function to execute the processing of steps Sd2106, Sd2107, and Sd2304 in the main control unit 162) that sets which of the multiple modes will be used for the specific control after the specified state change based on the result of the specified lottery conducted before the specified state change.

In the above configuration, when the result of the specific judgment becomes a predetermined result, the specific control is executed. Furthermore, if the result of the specific judgment becomes a predetermined result, a predetermined lottery is executed, and the mode of the specific control is set based on the result of that lottery. Under such a configuration, if a predetermined state change occurs between the execution of the specific judgment and the execution of the specific control, the specific control is executed in a mode corresponding to the changed state. In this case, the specific judgment and the predetermined lottery are executed in the state before the change, while the specific control is executed in response to the changed state. In such cases, the mode of the specific control executed in response to the changed state is set using the result of the predetermined lottery executed before the state change. In this case, since there is no need to redo the predetermined lottery, the control process can be prevented from becoming complicated and cumbersome, and control related to switching of the game state can be performed appropriately.

Feature dC2. The game state has a plurality of game states including a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
A gaming machine described in feature dC1, characterized in that the specified state change is a change from a state corresponding to the first gaming state (support flag not set state) to a state corresponding to the second gaming state (support flag set state).

In the above configuration, the predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to the first gaming state to a state corresponding to a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. In this configuration, if a predetermined state change occurs between the execution of a specific determination and the execution of a specific control, the specific control is executed in a manner corresponding to the changed state. This allows the specific control corresponding to the second gaming state to be implemented quickly, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the second gaming state more quickly. In such a case, by setting the manner of the specific control executed in response to the changed state using the results of a specific lottery conducted before the state change, the specific control manner corresponding to the second gaming state can be set without having to re-execute the specific lottery, making it possible to optimally perform control associated with switching to the second gaming state.

Feature dC3. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state,
A gaming machine described in feature dC1 or feature dC2, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then back to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means, so a specific change in state changes the likelihood of a ball entering the variable ball entry means. In this configuration, if a specific change in state occurs between the execution of the specific judgment and the execution of the specific control, the specific control is executed in a manner corresponding to the changed state, thereby quickly bringing about a state in which it is easier for a ball to enter the variable ball entry means. In such cases, by setting the manner of the specific control executed in response to the changed state using the results of a specific lottery conducted before the state change, it is possible to set the manner of the specific control corresponding to the changed state without having to re-run the specific lottery.

Feature dC4: A period setting means (a function of executing an upper limit opening time setting process in the main control device 162) is provided that sets a period during which the first state can continue (an upper limit opening time) when the switching control is executed,
The gaming machine described in feature dC3 is characterized in that the mode setting means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sd2212 and Sd4203 in the main control unit 162) for setting the continuation period of the specific control after the specified state change based on the result of the specified lottery conducted before the specified state change.

In the above configuration, when setting the duration for the first state when executing specific control corresponding to the state after the change, the duration is set using the results of a predetermined lottery conducted before the state change. This allows the duration to be set without having to re-run the predetermined lottery, making it possible to prevent the control process from becoming too complicated and cumbersome.

Feature dC5. Equipped with a number setting means (a function for executing the opening and closing process of the main control unit 162) for setting the number of times (number of times of opening) of the switching control executed in the specific control,
The gaming machine described in Feature dC3 or Feature dC4 is characterized in that the mode setting means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sd5101 in the main control unit 162) for setting the number of times the specific control is performed after the specified state change based on the result of the specified lottery conducted before the specified state change.

In the above configuration, when setting the number of switching controls when executing specific control corresponding to the state after the change, the number is set using the results of a predetermined lottery that was conducted before the state change. This allows the number to be set without having to re-run the predetermined lottery, making it possible to prevent the control process from becoming too complicated and cumbersome.

Feature dC6. The game operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is counted as one game round (such as a regular game round), and a game round control means (a function of executing a regular game round control process in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game round to be played;
There are multiple modes (stop result A, stop result B) as notification results corresponding to the predetermined results,
The game control means is configured to, when the result of the specific judgment is the predetermined result, perform a notification result mode lottery to select a mode of the notification result corresponding to the predetermined result, and to notify the notification result of the mode selected by the notification result mode lottery;
A gaming machine described in any one of features dC1 to dC5, wherein the predetermined lottery is the notification result mode lottery.

In the above configuration, the predetermined lottery is comprised of a notification result mode lottery that selects the mode of the notification result to be notified in each game. In this case, by using the results of the notification result mode lottery conducted before the state change to set the mode of specific control to be executed in response to the state after the change, it is possible to set the mode of specific control corresponding to the state after the change without having to re-draw the notification result mode lottery.

Feature dC7: The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a support flag not set state) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a support flag set state),
A gaming machine described in feature dC6, characterized in that the notification result corresponding to the predetermined result when in the first gaming state (the stop result for a normal winning symbol when in low frequency support mode) and the notification result corresponding to the predetermined result when in the second gaming state (the stop result for a normal winning symbol when in high frequency support mode) have the same pattern for the result of the notification result pattern lottery (for example, stop result A).

When the specific control mode is set based on the results of the notification result mode lottery, the notification result notified in a play round will correspond to the specific control mode to be executed after that play round. In other words, the notification result will indicate not only the result of the specific judgment, but also the specific control mode. In this case, since the mode corresponding to the result of the notification result mode lottery is the same for the notification result for the first game state and the notification result for the second game state, even when the result of the notification result mode lottery conducted before the state change is used to set the specific control mode to be executed in response to the changed state, it is possible to align the notification result notified before the specific control is executed (the notification result corresponding to the first game state) with the specific control mode to be executed in response to the changed state (the specific control mode corresponding to the second specific game state).

Feature dC8: The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a support flag not set state) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a support flag set state),
The notification result type lottery is executed based on a predetermined lottery random number (general winning type counter C4),
A gaming machine described in feature dC6, characterized in that the notification result corresponding to the predetermined result when in the first gaming state (stop result for a normal winning symbol when in low frequency support mode) and the notification result corresponding to the predetermined result when in the second gaming state (stop result for a normal winning symbol when in high frequency support mode) have the same pattern (stop result A) for the predetermined lottery random number.

When the specific control mode is set based on the results of the notification result mode lottery, the notification result announced in a game turn will correspond to the specific control mode that will be executed after that game turn. In other words, the notification result will indicate not only the result of the specific judgment, but also the specific control mode. In this case, the result (notification result mode) for the value of the lottery random number used in the notification result mode lottery is the same for the notification result for the first game state and the notification result for the second game state. Therefore, even when the result of the notification result mode lottery conducted before a state change is used to set the specific control mode that will be executed in response to the changed state, the notification result announced before the specific control is executed (notification result corresponding to the first game state) can be consistent with the specific control mode that will be executed in response to the changed state (specific control mode corresponding to the second specific game state).

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9, or they can be applied in combination with some or all of the respective technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature dD group>
The feature dD group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature dB group was developed in response to the problem that the invention seeks to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and perform control such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, thereby performing various changes in game progress (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dD1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game time control means (such as a function for executing a normal map change display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game time so that a game time operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game time (normal map game time, etc.);
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing an electric role support process in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result),
Equipped with
When announcing a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment, it is possible to display a plurality of different types of notification displays (such as the first stop result, second stop result, third stop result, and fourth stop result of the patterns F1 and F2),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specification means (such as a function in a fourth embodiment that, when the result of the support lottery is a winning result, the first stop result is displayed if the support flag does not change from a non-set state to a set state during the normal game round, and the second or third stop result is displayed if the above change occurs during the normal game round) that can display the notification display in different forms when the result of the specific judgment is a specific result (a support winning result, a normal game losing result, etc.) depending on whether a specified state change occurs during the execution of the game round (a change of the support flag from a non-set state to a set state, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.).

In the above configuration, when the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result, specific control is executed, and the result of that specific judgment is announced as a notification result in the game round. Under this configuration, multiple types of notification displays are provided as notification displays when announcing the notification result, and different notification displays are displayed depending on whether or not a predetermined state change occurs during the execution of a game round action in the game round. In this case, the notification result (notification display) displayed in the game round reflects not only the result of the specific judgment, but also whether or not a state change has occurred, which increases the player's interest in the notification result and makes it possible to increase attention to the game.

Feature dD2. The specifying means is
When the result of the specific determination is the specific result and the predetermined state change does not occur during the execution of the game operation, a first means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sd3104 and Sd3108 in the performance control device 143) for performing a first type of notification display (first stop result) among the plurality of types of notification displays;
When the result of the specific determination is the specific result and the predetermined state change occurs during the execution of the game operation, a second means (a function of executing the processing of step Sd3108 in the performance control device 143) performs a second type of notification display (a second or third stop result) different from the first type of notification display among the plurality of types of notification displays;
A gaming machine according to feature dD1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, if the result of the specific judgment is a specific result, and no state change occurs during the game-use operation, the first type of notification display is executed, and if a state change occurs during the game-use operation, the second type of notification display is executed. In other words, even if the result of the specific judgment is the same, different notification displays are displayed depending on whether or not there was a state change. This allows the player to detect whether or not there was a state change from the notification result, making it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention paid to the notification result.

Feature dD3. The game state has a plurality of game states including a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) that have different advantageous degrees for the player,
A gaming machine described in feature dD1 or feature dD2, characterized in that the specified state change is a change from a state corresponding to the first gaming state (support flag not set state) to a state corresponding to the second gaming state (support flag set state).

The above configuration has a first game state and a second game state that have different degrees of advantage to the player, and different notification displays are used to display the notification results for each game round depending on whether a change from a state corresponding to the first game state to a state corresponding to the second game state occurs during the game round operation. This allows the player to detect changes in the game state from the notification results, making it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention paid to the notification results.

Feature dD4. The specified result is the predetermined result;
A gaming machine described in any of features dD1 to dD3, characterized in that it is possible to display multiple different types of notification displays (such as the first stop result, second stop result, and third stop result of patterns F1 and F2) when notifying of a notification result corresponding to the specified result.

In the above configuration, the specific result is a predetermined result (the result of executing a specific control), and the notification result corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed in a different notification display depending on whether or not a state change occurs. In this case, the notification result (notification display) indicates whether or not a specific control is being executed and whether or not a state change occurred during the game play operation, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the notification result.

Feature dD5: The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a support flag not set state) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a support flag set state),
A gaming machine described in feature dD4, characterized in that when the specified state change occurs during the execution of a specified game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a specified result, the specific control after the specified game round can be executed in a mode corresponding to the second game state (a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be executed at the start of fluctuation in a normal game round and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, if a change occurs from a state corresponding to the first gaming state to a state corresponding to the second gaming state during a gaming operation in which the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result, the specific control performed after that gaming operation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second gaming state. In this case, the player can tell in advance from the notification result (notification display) whether or not specific control corresponding to the second gaming state will be executed, making it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention paid to the notification result.

Feature dD6. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than in the first state,
A gaming machine described in any of features dD1 to dD5, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then back to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means, so a specific state change changes the likelihood of the ball entering the variable ball entry means. By applying any of the above features dD1 to dD5 to this configuration, the player can tell in advance from the notification result (notification display) whether the specific control will be performed in a manner that makes it easier for the ball to enter the variable ball entry means, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the notification result.

Feature dD7: The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a support flag not set state) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a support flag set state),
A gaming machine described in feature dD6, characterized in that when the specified state change occurs during the execution of a specified game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a specified result, at least the switching control (opening of the normal power device 63a) in the specific control performed after the specified game round can be executed in a mode corresponding to the second game state (first or second high winning device opening and closing game) (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode can be executed at the first opening of the device opening and closing game, in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening, etc.).

In the above configuration, if a change from a state corresponding to the first gaming state to a state corresponding to the second gaming state occurs during a gaming operation in which a specific judgment results in a predetermined result, the switching control (switching from the first state to the second state) in the specific control performed after that gaming operation is executed in a manner corresponding to the second gaming state. By applying any of the above features dD1 to dD5 to this configuration, the player can detect in advance from the notification result (notification display) whether or not switching control corresponding to the second gaming state will be performed, making it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention paid to the notification result.

Feature dD8. The game number control means
A setting means (a function of executing a stop result setting process in the performance control device 143) that sets the mode of the notification display corresponding to the specified result based on the execution of the specified determination;
A change means (a function of executing a process for changing a stop result in the performance control device 143) for changing the mode of the notification display to a mode different from the mode set by the setting means when the predetermined state change occurs after the setting by the setting means is executed;
A gaming machine according to any one of features dD1 to dD7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the notification display mode is set in response to the execution of a specific determination, and if a state change occurs during a game-play operation, a change process is subsequently executed to set the notification display mode different from the set mode. This configuration allows for good notification displays for both cases where a state change occurs during a game-play operation and where it does not, making it possible to optimally realize the configurations of features dD1 to dD7 above.

Feature dD9. A gaming machine as described in Feature dD8, wherein if the result of the specific determination is the specific result and the specified state change occurs during the execution of the notification display, the execution of the change by the change means is restricted.

The above configuration actively changes the notification display if a status change occurs during gameplay operation, but restricts changes to the notification display if a status change occurs while the notification display is being executed. This makes it possible to optimally achieve the effects of feature dD8 while preventing situations in which the notification display switches to another notification display while it is being executed, causing confusion for the player.

Feature dD10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features dD1 to dD9, characterized in that if the result of the specific determination is the specific result and the specified state change occurs while the notification display is being displayed, the gaming machine is equipped with means for maintaining the state of the notification display that was being displayed prior to the state change.

In the above configuration, if a state change occurs while the notification display is being displayed, the notification display mode that was being displayed before the state change is maintained. This makes it possible to optimally achieve the effects of features dD1 to dD9 while effectively preventing the occurrence of situations in which the notification display switches to a different mode while being displayed, causing confusion for the player.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features dD1 to dD10 above, or some or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature dE group>
The feature dE group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

Features dE were developed in response to the problem that the invention seeks to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and perform control such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, thereby performing various changes in game progress (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dE1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (normal game round, etc.), and
After the game in which the result of the specific judgment becomes a predetermined result (a support winning result, etc.), a specific control execution means (such as a function to execute processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) that can execute specific control (such as opening and closing a role game),
When the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, a first means for causing the mode of the specific control to become a first mode (a device opening/closing game in a mode corresponding to a high frequency support mode, a device opening/closing game in which the first opening corresponds to a low frequency support mode and the second opening corresponds to a high frequency support mode) when a predetermined condition (such as the setting of a support flag or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met in a predetermined situation after the execution of the specific judgment (during the execution of a normal game in the fourth embodiment, during the interval of the device opening/closing game in the first modification, during the first opening, etc.) (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to a low frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high frequency support mode can be performed during the first opening of the device opening/closing game, and in the first modification, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed during the second opening or the interval, etc.);
When the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, a second means (a function of executing the entire opening and closing game of the reel in a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode in the fourth embodiment and the first modified example) for causing the mode of the specific control when the predetermined condition is not established in the predetermined situation to be a second mode (a reel opening and closing game in a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode) different from the first mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, specific control is executed when the result of a specific judgment becomes a predetermined result. Furthermore, a game round is initiated when the specific judgment is executed, and the result of the specific judgment is announced during that game round. Under this configuration, when the result of a specific judgment becomes a predetermined result, different types of specific control are executed depending on whether predetermined conditions are met after the specific judgment is executed. This allows players to focus their attention on whether specific control is executed and what type of specific control is executed, not only on whether the result of a specific judgment becomes a predetermined result, but also on whether predetermined conditions are met after the game round corresponding to that specific judgment begins, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE2. A gaming machine according to Feature dE1, wherein the first mode is more advantageous to the player than the second mode.

With the above configuration, if a specific judgment results in a predetermined result, and a predetermined condition is met in a predetermined situation after the specific judgment is made, the specific control that is performed after the end of the game corresponding to that specific judgment can be made more advantageous to the player than if the predetermined condition is not met. This can arouse anticipation for the predetermined condition to be met, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE3: The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (low frequency support mode) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A gaming machine described in feature dE1 or feature dE2, characterized in that the specified condition is a change from a state corresponding to the specified gaming state (support flag not set state) to a state corresponding to the specific gaming state (support flag set state).

With the above configuration, if a specific judgment made under a predetermined gaming state results in a predetermined result, a change occurs in a predetermined situation after the specific judgment is made from a state corresponding to the predetermined gaming state to a state corresponding to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the specific control performed after the end of a game round can be made to correspond to the specific gaming state. This can arouse anticipation for the above change to occur, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Note that this feature may further include the feature that "the first mode is a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state, and the second mode is a mode corresponding to the predetermined gaming state."

Feature dE4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features dE1 to dE3, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing processing for changing the stop result and processing for a special light-emitting effect in the effect control device 143) that executes a specific notification (display of the second or third stop result in the general map display area P, and execution of a special light-emitting effect in the light-emitting units 752, 761) when the specified condition is met in the specified situation.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is executed if a predetermined condition is met in a predetermined situation after the result of a specific judgment becomes a predetermined result, allowing the player to easily recognize whether or not the predetermined condition has been met in that predetermined situation.

Feature dE5. The game number control means controls the game number to be played by a predetermined notification means (pattern display device 75),
A gaming machine described in feature dE4, characterized in that the specific notification execution means causes the specific notification to be executed by the predetermined notification means.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is met, a specific notification is made by the same notification means that notifies the player when a game turn is played, allowing a player who is focusing on the game turn to see the specific notification without having to move their eyes. This effectively prevents the player from losing focus on the game turn or missing the specific notification.

Feature dE6: A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than in the first state,
A gaming machine described in any of features dE1 to dE5, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then back to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means, so whether or not a specified condition is met in a specified situation after the specific judgment results in a specified result will make a difference in the likelihood of the ball entering the variable ball entry means under the specific control. This configuration can further increase the player's interest in whether or not the specified condition is met, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE7. The first means causes the switching control mode in the specific control when the predetermined condition is met in the predetermined situation to be the first mode (an upper limit release time of, for example, 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds),
The second means is configured to change the mode of the switching control in the specific control when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined situation to the second mode (opening of an upper limit release time of, for example, 0.1 sec),
A gaming machine described in feature dE6, characterized in that the switching control of the first aspect makes it easier for the ball to enter the variable ball entry means than the switching control of the second aspect.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is met in a predetermined situation after the result of a specific judgment becomes a predetermined result, switching control (opening of the variable ball entry means) is performed in a manner that makes it more likely that a ball will enter the variable ball entry means than when the predetermined condition is not met. In other words, the likelihood of a ball entering the variable ball entry means changes in conjunction with whether or not the predetermined condition is met, which further increases the player's interest in whether or not the predetermined condition is met, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE8: The predetermined situation is a specific situation after the start of the specific control (e.g., during the first opening in Modification 1, during the interval, etc.),
The first means is configured so that the specific control mode when the predetermined condition is met in the specific situation becomes the first mode (a role opening and closing game in which a first opening in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed and a second opening in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is executed) (such as a function in variant 1 to switch from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the time of the second opening or during an interval),
The second means causes the specific control mode to become the second mode (a device opening and closing game in which the first and second openings are executed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) when the specified condition is not met in the specific situation (a function of executing the entire device opening and closing game in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in variant example 1), a gaming machine described in any of features dE1 to dE7.

In the above configuration, after a specific control is initiated, if a predetermined condition is met in a specific situation, the mode of that specific control will change. This allows players to play the specific control without simply completing the specific control, but rather by paying attention to whether the mode of the specific control will change during the process. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature dE9. The specific control includes a first specific control (the first opening of the normal power device 63a corresponding to the low frequency support mode),
The first means executes a second specific control (a second opening in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition after the first specific control when the predetermined condition is established in response to the first specific control (when a change in the support flag from an unset state to a set state occurs during the first opening or during the interval in the first modified example), (a function of switching from a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the time of the second opening or during the interval in the first modified example),
A gaming machine described in any of features dE1 to dE8, characterized in that the second means does not execute the second specific control after the first specific control if the specified condition corresponding to the first specific control is not met (a function that executes the entire device opening and closing game in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode in variant example 1).

In the above configuration, the specific control is configured to include the first specific control, and whether or not a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the first specific control determines whether or not the second specific control is executed after the first specific control ends. This allows the player to play the specific control while paying attention to whether or not the second specific control is executed, rather than simply completing the specific control when it begins. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature dE10. A gaming machine as described in Feature dE9, characterized in that the specific determination results in the specific result when the specific condition is not met, and the first specific control is executed in response to the specific result (a configuration in which the first opening in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed in response to a support winning result in a situation in which the low-frequency support mode is active).

In the above configuration, the first specific control is executed in response to the specific judgment resulting in a predetermined result when the predetermined condition is not met, and the second specific control is executed if the predetermined condition is met while the first specific control is being executed. With this configuration, even when a specific judgment is made in a situation where the predetermined condition is not met, the player can expect the second specific control to be executed by the specific control, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE11. A gaming machine described in Feature dE9 or Feature dE10, wherein the second specific control is more advantageous to the player than the first specific control.

In the above configuration, the second specific control is more advantageous than the first specific control, which arouses the player's anticipation for the second specific control to be executed, thereby effectively increasing the player's attention to the game.

Feature dE12. The second specific control has a plurality of modes (first high prize opening/closing game, second high prize opening/closing game),
A means (such as a function for executing the processing of step Sd2004 in the main control unit 162) for executing a predetermined lottery (such as a normal winning type determination) before executing the specific control when the result of the specific determination is the predetermined result;
A gaming machine described in any of features dE9 to dE11, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (such as a function to execute processing of steps Sd2106, Sd2107, and Sd2304 in the main control unit 162) for setting the mode of the second specific control based on the result of the specified lottery conducted before the specified condition is met when the specified condition is met in response to the first specific control and the second specific control is executed by the first means.

In the above configuration, multiple types of second specific control modes are provided, and when a predetermined condition is met in the first specific control and the second specific control is performed, the mode is determined based on the results of a predetermined lottery held before the predetermined condition is met. This eliminates the need to re-hold the predetermined lottery, making it possible to prevent the control process from becoming too cumbersome and complicated.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9, or some or all of the technical ideas can be combined and applied to each of the configurations of Features dE1 to dE12 above. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature dF group>
The feature dF group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, variations 1 and 2.

The feature dF group was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and perform control such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, thereby performing various changes in game progress (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dF1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (normal game round, etc.), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing an electric role support process in the main control unit 162) that executes specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result),
Equipped with
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a win resulting from a special miss, a big win, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, or a transition process for a sudden time-saving game state);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a switching means (such as a function to execute a normal game change start process and a special opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) for switching the mode of the predetermined game operation (normal game play and a special game including a special opening/closing game) including the game round and the specific control to a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
a specific notification execution means (such as a function of executing a process for special light-emitting effects in the effect control device 143) that executes a specific notification (such as a special light-emitting effect) using a predetermined notification means (such as the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761) when the game state is a specific game state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a specification means (a function for executing start timing setting processing in the presentation control device 143) that can make the timing of executing the specific notification different depending on the status of the specified game operation when the specified internal state is reached (a situation in which the period until the opening of the normal electric device 63a is less than the second specific period, a situation in which it is not less than the second specific period, a situation in which the remaining period for the device opening and closing game is less than the first specific period, a situation in which it is not less than the first specific period, a situation in which the remaining period for the normal game round is less than the third specific period, a situation in which it is not less than the third specific period, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state advantageous to the player, and when specific conditions are met, a predetermined internal state is entered. When such a specific internal state is entered, a switch is executed so that the operating mode of the predetermined gaming operation, including the game round for notifying the result of the specific judgment and the specific control performed based on the result of the specific judgment, corresponds to the specific gaming state. Under this configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification executed when the specific gaming state is entered varies depending on the status of the predetermined gaming operation when the predetermined internal state is entered. With this configuration, the specific notification can be initiated at an appropriate timing in response to the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific gaming state, making it possible to appropriately execute the specific notification corresponding to the specific gaming state.

Feature dF2. The specifying means
When the predetermined internal state is reached, the state of the predetermined game operation is a first predetermined state (such as a state in which the period until the opening of the normal electric device 63a is equal to or shorter than a second specific period), and a first means (a function of executing the processing of step Sd3603 in the performance control device 143) for executing the specific notification at a first timing (such as a timing corresponding to the setting of a support flag);
When the predetermined internal state is reached, the state of the predetermined game operation is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state (such as a state in which the period until the opening of the normal power device 63a is not equal to or shorter than a second specific period), and a second means (a function of executing the processing of step Sd3610 in the performance control device 143) for executing the specific notification at a second timing (such as a timing corresponding to the opening of the normal power device 63a) different from the first timing;
A gaming machine according to feature dF1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

With the above configuration, the specific notification can be started at either the first or second timing, depending on whether the specific game operation status when the specific internal state is reached is the first or second specific status. This allows the specific notification to be started at the appropriate timing in response to switching to a mode corresponding to the specific game state, making it possible to optimally issue the specific notification corresponding to the specific game state.

Feature dF3. The second predetermined situation is a situation in which a period from the predetermined internal state to the switching by the switching means is longer than that of the first predetermined situation,
A gaming machine described in feature dF2, characterized in that the second timing is a timing later than the first timing.

For example, if a specific notification is issued but specific control corresponding to a specific game state is not implemented for a long time, there is a concern that this may give the player an unnatural impression. In this regard, by delaying the start timing of the specific notification when there is a long period of time between the specified internal state being established and switching to a state corresponding to the specific game state, it is possible to shorten the period between the start of the specific notification and the implementation of specific control corresponding to the specific game state. This makes it possible to notify the player that a specific game state is being reached at an appropriate timing in accordance with the switch to a state corresponding to that state.

Feature dF4. A gaming machine described in Feature dF2 or Feature dF3, wherein the second timing corresponds to the execution of the specific control (when the normal power device 63a opens or slightly before that opening).

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed at a second timing corresponding to the execution of the specific control. For example, if there is a long period of time between the specified internal state being established and the execution of the specific control corresponding to the specific game state, the specific notification can be initiated after the specific control is executed, thereby shortening the period between the start of the specific notification and the execution of the specific control.

Feature dF5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features dF2 to dF4, wherein the first timing corresponds to a transition to the predetermined internal state (when the support flag is set or slightly after the support flag is set).

In the above configuration, a specific notification is executed at a first timing corresponding to the transition to a predetermined internal state. For example, if the period between the transition to the predetermined internal state and the execution of specific control corresponding to the specific game state is short, the specific notification can be initiated in time with the transition to the predetermined internal state. This makes it possible to notify the player of the timing of the transition to the predetermined internal state.

Feature dF6: A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than in the first state,
A gaming machine described in any of features dF1 to dF5, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then back to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means. By applying the above features dF1 to dF5 to such a configuration, it is possible to initiate a specific notification at an appropriate timing depending on the period until the opening (switching control) of the mode corresponding to the specific game state is performed.

Feature dF7. A gaming machine described in Feature dF6, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided in at least one of the variable ball entry means and the periphery of the variable ball entry means.

In the above configuration, specific notifications are made by the variable ball entry means or its surrounding area, making it easier to draw the player's attention to the variable ball entry means, effectively promoting the specific game state and making the game more exciting. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that if an event occurs in which the switching control corresponding to the specific game state (opening control of the variable ball entry means) is not carried out despite the specific notification being made, this may raise concerns about the player's awareness. In this regard, this feature targets specific notifications that are likely to attract attention to the variable ball entry means and varies the execution timing depending on the status of the specific game operation when a specific internal state is reached, making it possible to appropriately promote the specific game state while minimizing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Feature dF8: As a notification means capable of executing a notification corresponding to the specific notification, a first notification means (first light-emitting unit 752, second light-emitting unit 761) on a side relatively close to the controlled object (normal electric device 63a) controlled by the specific control, and a second notification means (lamp unit 26) on a side relatively far from the controlled object,
A gaming machine described in any of features dF1 to dF7, characterized in that the identification means is capable of varying the execution timing of the notification executed by the first notification means depending on the status of the specified game operation when the specified internal state is reached.

The above configuration comprises first and second notification means for issuing specific notifications corresponding to specific game states, and of these notification means, the first notification means closest to the controlled object controlled by specific control is configured to vary its execution timing depending on the status of the specific game action when a specific internal state is reached. If a specific notification is issued near a controlled object, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to that controlled object, and there is a concern that if a specific notification is issued but specific control corresponding to the specific game state is not being carried out, the player may be more likely to notice this. However, this characteristic configuration makes it possible to effectively prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature dF9. A gaming machine as described in Feature dF8, further comprising means for controlling the notification executed by the second notification means so that the notification is executed at a predetermined timing (e.g., the first timing) regardless of the status of the predetermined game operation when the predetermined internal state is reached.

In the above configuration, unlike the first notification means closer to the controlled object, the second notification means farther from the controlled object is configured to issue a specific notification at a predetermined timing, regardless of the status of the specified game operation when the specified internal state is reached. For example, by setting the predetermined timing to correspond to the transition to a specified internal state, specific notifications that are likely to draw attention to the controlled object can be issued at a timing that corresponds to the above-mentioned status, while specific notifications that are less likely to draw attention to the controlled object can be issued at a timing that corresponds to the transition to the specified internal state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9, or some or all of the technical ideas can be combined and applied to each of the above configurations of Features dF1 to dF9. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group dA to Feature Group dF detailed above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups dA to dF individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine (ball-operated reel-type gaming machine): A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as it finally stops; the pattern fluctuation begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern fluctuation is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses game balls into the ball receiving tray; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Features eA group to Feature eG group>
The inventions described in the following feature group eA to feature group eG are a group of inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the above-mentioned fifth embodiment and its variations.

<Features eA group>
The feature eA group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fifth embodiment and variation 1 of the fifth embodiment.

Feature group eA was developed with the objective of resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature eA1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (time-saving game state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A first means (a function of executing a process for determining whether to transition to a ceiling time-saving game state in the main control device 162, a process for determining whether to transition to a sudden time-saving game state, and a process for transition to a time-saving game state) that can transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition (winning a special miss result, reaching the ceiling number of times, entering a specific ball entry area, etc.);
A second means (such as a function to execute priority processing in the main control device 162) that can restrict transition to a specific gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (such as a situation in which the game is in a time-shortened gaming state),
A specific means (a function of executing a second setting process for the game presentation in the presentation control device 143) that executes a specific notification (a first additional presentation, a special reach miss A presentation, a start presentation, etc.) when the transition to the specific game state is restricted by the second means or when the transition is restricted;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, and this specific gaming state can be entered when specific conditions are met. This allows players to enjoy playing with the aim of fulfilling the specific conditions and entering the specific gaming state. However, fulfilling the specific conditions does not always result in a transition to the specific gaming state; rather, if the specific conditions are met under certain circumstances, transition to the specific gaming state is restricted. When such a transition to the specific gaming state is restricted, a specific notification is issued, making it possible to reduce the impression that a transition restriction has been imposed.

Feature eA2. A gaming machine as described in Feature eA1, wherein the specific notification is a notification (such as a start effect or a first bonus effect) that allows the player to recognize a transition to a specific gaming state or the granting of a specific bonus (such as an increase in the number of remaining plays).

With the above configuration, when transition to a specific game state is restricted, the player is made aware of the transition to the specific game state or the granting of a specific benefit by the execution of a specific notification, making it seem as if the transition has actually occurred. This can lift the player's spirits and increase their interest in the game.

Feature eA3. When the transition is made by the first means, a predetermined notification (first added effect, special reach miss A effect, start effect, etc.) is executed (a function of executing the first setting process of the game effect in the effect control device 143),
A gaming machine described in feature eA1 or feature eA2, characterized in that the specific notification includes a notification of a type corresponding to a notification included in the predetermined notification (special pattern 811, added image 826, etc.).

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification is executed when a transition to a specific game state occurs, and when the transition to the specific game state is restricted, a specific notification is executed that includes a notification of a type corresponding to the notification included in the predetermined notification. This gives the impression that a transition has actually occurred even when a transition restriction is imposed.

Note that the feature "including a notification in a manner corresponding to the notification included in the predetermined notification" can also be expressed as "including a notification in the same manner as the notification included in the predetermined notification," "including a notification similar to the notification included in the predetermined notification," "a notification in a manner corresponding to the predetermined notification," "a notification in the same manner as the predetermined notification," etc.

Feature eA4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eA1 to eA3, characterized in that it is equipped with means (such as a function to execute special symbol game count control processing in the main control unit 162) for executing a predetermined notification corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition (such as the stopped display of a symbol corresponding to a special miss result on the special symbol display unit 43) when the specific condition is established, regardless of whether or not a transition to a specific game state occurs.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification is issued in response to the fulfillment of a specific condition both when a transition to a specific gaming state is made and when the transition is restricted. With this configuration, a player may recognize that a specific condition has been fulfilled by seeing the predetermined notification, which may lead to the player realizing that transition to a specific gaming state has been restricted. In this case, there is a concern that the player may feel upset because they will not be able to enjoy the benefits of having met the specific condition. In such cases, the execution of the specific notification can reduce the impression that a transition has been restricted, thereby preventing the player from feeling upset and making it possible to effectively prevent a decline in their desire to play.

This feature can also be expressed as "equipped with means (such as a function to execute special symbol game count control processing in the main control unit 162) for executing a predetermined notification corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition (such as the stopped display of a pattern corresponding to a special miss result on the special symbol display unit 43) when transition to a special game state is restricted if a specific condition is established under the predetermined circumstances."

Feature eA5. Update means (a function for executing high-frequency support mode update processing in the main control device 162) that updates predetermined numerical information (the number of remaining play times that can be stayed in the time-saving play state, the number of play times executed since transitioning to the time-saving play state, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (execution of special game times, winning of small prizes, etc.) in a specific game state,
A termination means (a function of executing a high frequency support mode termination process in the main control device 162) that terminates the specific game state when the predetermined numerical information updated by the update means becomes a predetermined value (0 times, upper limit number of times);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features eA1 to eA4, characterized in that the specific notification includes a notification (additional image 826) regarding remaining specified numerical information in a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the specified numerical information is updated in a specific gaming state at a specified update trigger, and the specific gaming state ends when the update result reaches a specified value. In such a case, a specific notification is issued regarding the remaining specified numerical information in the specific gaming state. For example, if a notification is issued that the remaining specified numerical information will be increased or added, it can give the impression that a transition to the specific gaming state is taking place, even if the transition is restricted.

Feature eA6. The predetermined situation is a specific gaming state,
A gaming machine described in feature eA5, wherein the specific notification is a notification that allows the player to recognize that the remaining predetermined numerical information has increased or been added.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made so that the player recognizes that the remaining predetermined numerical information has increased or been added. As a result, although internally, a transition restriction to the specific game state is being implemented, from the player's perspective, it appears as if the specific condition has been met and an extension of the specific game state has been achieved, preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play even while the transition restriction is in place.

Feature eA7. The predetermined situation is a specific gaming state,
A gaming machine described in feature eA5 or feature eA6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the first setting process for the game-play presentation in the presentation control device 143) that causes a notification regarding the remaining specified numerical information for the specific game state during the current stay to be made corresponding to a number that is smaller than the actual remaining amount.

In the above configuration, in which transition to a specific gaming state can be restricted if a specific condition is met while the player is in that state, the remaining predetermined numerical information for the specific gaming state is reduced to a value less than the actual remaining amount and notified. This allows a portion of the actual remaining amount to be set aside as an unnotified amount, and by using this unnotified amount to make a specific notification, it becomes possible to notify the player that the remaining predetermined numerical information will be increased or added within the actual remaining amount.

Feature eA8. A gaming machine as described in Feature eA7, wherein the specifying means includes means for executing the specific notification based on the difference between the actual remaining amount for the specific gaming state during the current state and the remaining amount reported by the notification regarding the remaining predetermined numerical information (a function for executing second setting processing for the gaming presentation in the presentation control device 143).

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made using the unannounced portion, which is part of the actual remaining amount for the specific gaming state currently in play. Therefore, even when a transition to the specific gaming state has not actually occurred and the remaining amount remains unchanged, the specific notification can be made as if the remaining predetermined numerical information has increased. In this case, the specific notification can be made in accordance with the actual remaining amount, making it possible to more effectively give the impression that a transition to the specific gaming state has occurred.

Feature eA9. A gaming machine as described in Feature eA8, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of steps Se3201 and Se3207 in the presentation control device 143) capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification when the transition to the specific gaming state is restricted by the second means, or when the difference is less than a specific number after the restriction is imposed.

In the above configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted when the remaining unannounced amount in the specific game state during the current state is less than a specific number. Therefore, even if transition to a specific game state is restricted, a specific notification will not be executed if the remaining unannounced amount is small. This prevents notifications from being issued that the remaining specified numerical information will be increased or added beyond the actual amount remaining, or notifications that an unnaturally small number will be increased or added.

Feature eA10. A gaming machine as described in Feature eA8 or Feature eA9, characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined means (a function for executing the processing of step Se3302, step Se3304 to step Se3307, step Se3402, and step Se3403 to step Se3406 in the presentation control device 143) that causes the specific notification to be executed when the remaining number corresponding to the remaining amount in the notification is less than a predetermined number when the specific condition is not met.

If a number less than the actual remaining number is notified for the specific game state currently in play, there is a possibility that the remaining number in the notification will run out before the specific game state ends. Taking this into consideration, the system is configured to issue a specific notification when the remaining number in the notification falls below a predetermined number, regardless of whether a specific condition is met or whether there is a restriction on transition to the specific game state. In this case, the remaining number can be replenished by the specific notification as the remaining number in the notification decreases, preventing the remaining number in the notification from running out in the middle of the specific game state and preventing the player from feeling unnatural.

Feature eA11. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize winning the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of granting a predetermined benefit (opening/closing execution mode) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined first result (jackpot result);
A game operation is started based on the specific determination, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific determination is counted as one game, and a game control means (a function of executing a special game control process in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game so that a game is played.
The game number control means includes a period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162) for setting a period of the game number operation, and controls the game number so that the game number operation is executed within the period set by the period setting means,
The predetermined means is configured to execute the specific notification during a game,
The gaming machine described in feature eA10 is characterized in that the specific notification by the specified means has multiple types of specific notifications (first additional effect, second additional effect, etc.) corresponding to the periods of the game-play operation of different lengths.

In the above configuration, multiple types of specific notifications are provided corresponding to the duration of game-use actions of different lengths, so that when a specific notification is executed, constraints imposed by the different durations of game-use actions can be alleviated. This increases the opportunities for specific notifications to be executed, making it possible to execute specific notifications successfully before the remaining notifications run out.

Feature eA12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eA1 to eA11, wherein the second means is capable of restricting transition to a specific gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific gaming state is met, or when a specific condition is met when the specific gaming state is met in a specific situation (such as when the current maximum number of plays is less than the remaining number of plays for the stay time reduction).

With the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while a specific game state is in progress, or in some of such cases, transition to the specific game state based on that condition is restricted. This effectively prevents the occurrence of inconveniences such as multiple specific game states overlapping, complicating control processing, or obscuring gameplay and causing player confusion. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that if a player realizes that transition to the specific game state has been restricted even though a specific condition has been met, this could upset the player. In such cases, applying any of the configurations described above as features eA1 to eA11 makes it difficult for the player to realize that transition has been restricted, making it possible to effectively prevent the player from feeling upset.

Feature eA13. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the specific determination being a specific result;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA12, characterized in that the specific gaming state to which the machine can be shifted based on the fulfillment of the specific condition can be shifted without passing through a special gaming state.

In the above configuration, specific game states that can be entered based on the fulfillment of specific conditions can be entered without passing through a special game state. Therefore, if a transition restriction is imposed on such specific game states, the player will be unable to receive any benefits for fulfilling the specific conditions. This raises the concern that players may become upset when they notice the transition restriction, significantly reducing their motivation to play. In such cases, applying any of the configurations described above in features eA1 to eA12 makes it difficult for players to realize that a transition restriction has been imposed, making it possible to effectively prevent players from becoming upset.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of Features eA1 to eA13, Features eB1 to eB13, Features eC1 to eC8, Features eD1 to eD11, Features eE1 to eE6, Features eF1 to eF11, and Features eG1 to eG10, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features eA1 to eA13 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature eB group>
The feature eB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fifth embodiment and variation 1 of the fifth embodiment.

Features eB are based on the background technology that states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that "there is still room for improvement in gaming machines such as those exemplified above in terms of increasing the enjoyment of the game."

Feature eB1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (time-saving game state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, a normal time-shortening gaming state) and a second specific gaming state (for example, a sudden time-shortening gaming state),
The second specific game state has at least one aspect different from the first specific game state (length of variable display time in normal game rounds, behavior of the normal electric device 63a in device opening and closing games, winning probability in support lottery, background color, etc.), and can be transitioned to based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (winning a special miss result, entering a specific ball entry section, etc.),
The elements that make up the specific game state include specific elements related to the player's advantage (the number of special game times that can be played in the time-saving game state, the number of small wins, the number of normal game times, the period during which the player can stay in the time-saving game state, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by having a setting means (such as a function to execute priority processing in the main control unit 162) that can set, when a specific condition is met in a situation in which the first specific gaming state is in effect, either a first element (remaining number of times for time reduction, remaining period, etc.) corresponding to the first specific gaming state or a second element (current maximum number of times, maximum period, etc.) corresponding to the second specific gaming state with respect to the specific element in the game after the condition is met.

In the above configuration, a specific gaming state is provided as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state, and multiple specific gaming states are provided as such specific gaming states, including a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state. The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state differ in at least one aspect, and when a specific condition corresponding to a transition to the second specific gaming state is met while in the first specific gaming state, either a first element corresponding to the first specific gaming state or a second element corresponding to the second specific gaming state is selected and adopted as a specific element related to the player's degree of advantage. This configuration allows the player to determine whether a change in aspect has occurred while playing the first specific gaming state, providing a game of guessing whether the first element or the second element has been selected, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this feature, "specific elements related to the player's degree of advantage" can also be expressed as "specific elements related to the player's degree of advantage," "specific elements that can change the player's degree of advantage," "specific elements that affect the player's degree of advantage," etc.

Feature eB2. A gaming machine as described in Feature eB1, characterized in that it is equipped with means for making the specific element or at least a portion of the specific element of at least one of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state invisible (a function for making the remaining number of times or a portion of the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state invisible).

In the above configuration, the specific elements in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, or at least some of them, are not revealed, which makes it possible to increase the excitement of the game by inferring the specific elements that will be adopted from the presence or absence of changes in their state.

Feature eB3. A gaming machine as described in Feature eB1 or Feature eB2, wherein the setting means is equipped with means (a function for executing priority processing in the main control unit 162) capable of setting, of the first element and the second element, an element corresponding to the specific game state that has a greater predetermined value related to the degree of advantage (such as the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state) between the remaining number of times in the first specific game state after a specific condition is met and the second specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while the player is in the first specific game state, a predetermined value related to the degree of advantage is compared between the remaining portion of the first specific game state and the second specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition, and the element with the larger predetermined value is adopted. In other words, because the more advantageous element of the first element or the second element is adopted, it is possible to increase the excitement of the game, in which the player infers which specific element will be adopted from the presence or absence of a change in state. For example, if the adoption of the first element is inferred from the presence or absence of a change in state in a situation where the player cannot or has difficulty in recognizing the degree of advantage of the first element but can recognize the degree of advantage of the second element, it becomes possible to infer that the degree of advantage of the adopted first element is more advantageous than the degree of advantage of the second element as perceived by the player.

Feature eB4. A gaming machine as described in any one of Features eB1 to eB3, wherein the setting means is equipped with means (a function for executing priority processing in the main control unit 162) that can set whether to continue the first specific gaming state or transition to the second specific gaming state when a specific condition is met while the first specific gaming state is in effect.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while the player is in the first specific game state, the player is selected to continue in the first specific game state or to transition to the second specific game state. For example, if the configuration does not clearly indicate to the player whether the player is in the first or second specific game state, the player can be given a chance to guess the type of specific game state they are in based on whether or not there is a change in behavior, which can increase the player's interest.

Note that the above feature eB4, "Whether to continue the first specific gaming state currently in progress or to transition to the second specific gaming state," can also be expressed as "Whether to continue the first specific gaming state currently in progress without transitioning to the second specific gaming state, or to end the first specific gaming state currently in progress and transition to the second specific gaming state."

Feature eB5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eB1 to eB4, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function that executes special symbol game count control processing in the main control unit 162) that causes a specific notification (stop display of stop results SD15 to SD17 corresponding to a special miss result) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (special symbol display unit 43) when a specific condition is met.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when a specific condition is met. Therefore, while the player is in the first specific gaming state, the specific notification can be used as an opportunity to begin determining whether there has been a change in state, allowing the player to conveniently play a game in which they can infer the type of specific gaming state they are in based on whether or not there has been a change in state.

Feature eB6. The second specific gaming state has a plurality of types of second specific gaming states (sudden time-saving gaming states A to C) having the second elements with different advantageous degrees,
The gaming machine described in feature eB5 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a means for executing multiple types of specific notifications corresponding to the type of second specific game state (a function for selecting and displaying any of the stop results SD15 to SD17 depending on the type of special miss result).

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued in a manner corresponding to the type of second specific game state. By visually recognizing the specific notification, the player can determine the second specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition, and can also determine the degree of advantage of the second specific element in that second specific game state. When this understanding is achieved, if the adoption of the first element is determined based on the presence or absence of a change in state, it becomes possible to infer that the first element is more advantageous than the degree of advantage of the second specific element identified above. This can more effectively enhance the game of inferring the type of specific game state the player will be in based on the presence or absence of a change in state.

Feature eB7. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of granting a predetermined benefit (opening/closing execution mode) based on the result of the specific determination being a first result (jackpot result);
A specific notification (stop display of the stop results SD0 to SD19) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is executed by a predetermined notification means (special chart display unit 43) (a function for executing the special chart game number control process in the main control device 162);
Equipped with
The specific condition is established in a specific case (a special miss result) when the result of the specific determination is a predetermined second result (a miss result) different from the first result,
A gaming machine described in any of features eB1 to eB6, characterized in that the notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the second result (stop result for a miss result) includes a notification mode corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition (stop results SD15 to SD17 corresponding to a special miss result).

In the above configuration, when the result of the specific judgment is the first result, a predetermined benefit is awarded, and a specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is executed. When a specific condition is met, a specific notification corresponding to the second result is executed in a notification mode corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes that a specific notification of a specific mode has been issued while remaining in the first specific game state, the player can understand that the specific condition has been fulfilled. By using this as an opportunity to determine a change in mode, it becomes possible to optimally play a game in which the specific element to be adopted is inferred from the presence or absence of a change in mode.

Feature eB8. The game state has a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and is different from the specific game state,
The provision of the predetermined benefit is a transition to a special game state,
The specific game states include a first game state (normal time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made via a special game state, and a second game state (sudden time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made without passing through the special game state,
The first gaming state may be transitioned to when the result of the specific determination is the first result or when a predetermined case (a normal jackpot result) occurs after the first result is reached,
The notification mode of the specific notification corresponding to the first result (stop result for the jackpot result) has a notification mode corresponding to the transition to the first gaming state (stop results SD3 to SD14 corresponding to the normal jackpot result),
A gaming machine described in feature eB7, characterized in that the number of types of notification modes corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is less than the number of types of notification modes corresponding to the transition to the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, the notification modes for specific notifications are configured so that there are a relatively large number of notification modes corresponding to a transition to the first gaming state, and a relatively small number of notification modes corresponding to the fulfillment of specific conditions. In this case, it is difficult for the player to remember the notification modes corresponding to a transition to the first gaming state, but it is easier for the player to remember the notification modes corresponding to the fulfillment of specific conditions. This makes it possible to optimally enjoy a game in which the specific element to be adopted is inferred from the presence or absence of a change in mode as specific conditions are fulfilled while the player is in the first gaming state.

Feature eB9. The specific gaming state can be terminated based on the fact that a specific number of times (number of games played, number of small wins, etc.) since the transition to the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined upper limit (a function of executing a high frequency support mode termination process in the main control device 162),
The second specific gaming state has a plurality of types of second specific gaming states (sudden time-saving gaming states A to C) having different upper limit numbers,
A gaming machine described in feature eB7 or feature eB8, characterized in that it has a plurality of notification modes (stop results SD15 to SD17 corresponding to special miss results) corresponding to the type of second specific game state as notification modes corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made in a manner corresponding to the type of second specific game state. By visually recognizing the specific notification, the player can determine the type of second specific game state corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition, and can also determine the degree of advantage of the second specific element in that second specific game state. When this understanding is achieved, if the adoption of the first element is determined based on the presence or absence of a change in state, it becomes possible to infer that the first element is more advantageous than the degree of advantage of the second specific element identified above. This can more effectively enhance the game of inferring the type of specific game state in which the player will remain based on the presence or absence of a change in state.

Feature eB10. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of granting a predetermined benefit (opening/closing execution mode) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined first result (jackpot result);
A specific notification (stop display of the stop results SD0 to SD19) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is executed by a predetermined notification means (special chart display unit 43) (a function for executing the special chart game number control process in the main control device 162);
Equipped with
The game has a plurality of results (missing results) different from the predetermined first result, including a predetermined second result (normal missing result) and a predetermined third result (special missing result),
The specific condition is satisfied when the predetermined third result is achieved,
There are a plurality of notification modes (stop results SD18, SD19) as notification modes of the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined second result (stop results for normal miss results),
A gaming machine described in any of features eB1 to eB9, characterized in that it has multiple types of notification modes (stop results SD15 to SD17) as notification modes of specific notifications corresponding to the specified third result (stop results for special miss results).

In the above configuration, the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined second result and the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined third result each have multiple notification mode types, making it more difficult to distinguish between the two specific notifications and more difficult to identify the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined third result than when either or both notifications have a single notification mode type. This increases the difficulty of the game, in which the specific element being adopted is inferred from the presence or absence of a change in mode, to a certain extent, making it possible to appropriately enhance the game.

Note that the "result different from the predetermined first result" in this feature can also be expressed as "a result that does not correspond to the granting of the predetermined benefit" or "a result in which the predetermined benefit is not granted."

Feature eB11. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of granting a predetermined benefit (opening/closing execution mode) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined first result (jackpot result);
A display means (special display unit 43) for displaying a specific display (stop result SD0 to SD19) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment;
Equipped with
the display means has a plurality of display sections (display segments SG1 to SG7) that can be switched between a first state (a lit state, a first display color, etc.) of a predetermined display state and a second state (a turned-off state, a second display color, etc.) that is different from the first state, and the specific display is performed by combining the first display section that is in the first state and the second display section that is in the second state in these display sections;
The game has a plurality of results (missing results) different from the predetermined first result, including a predetermined second result (normal missing result) and a predetermined third result (special missing result),
The specific condition is satisfied when the predetermined third result is achieved,
The display mode of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined second result (stop result for a normal miss result) includes a predetermined mode (stop result SD19) in which the number of the first display parts is plural,
A gaming machine described in any one of features eB1 to eB10, characterized in that the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result (stop result for a special miss result) includes a specific mode (stop results SD15 to SD17) in which the number of first display sections is multiple.

The more first display sections that are in the first state, the more complex the display mode of the specific display becomes, making it more difficult to remember. However, specific displays with such display modes exist for both the predetermined second result and the predetermined third result. This prevents the difficulty of identifying whether the actual specific display corresponds to the predetermined second result or the predetermined third result from becoming too low, ideally enhancing the excitement of the game, in which the specific element being adopted is guessed from the presence or absence of a change in mode.

Note that the "result different from the predetermined first result" in this feature can also be expressed as "a result that does not correspond to the granting of the predetermined benefit" or "a result in which the predetermined benefit is not granted."

Feature eB12. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means capable of granting a predetermined benefit (opening/closing execution mode) based on the result of the specific determination (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162);
A display means (special display unit 43) for displaying a specific display (stop result SD0 to SD19) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment;
Equipped with
the display means has a plurality of display sections (display segments SG1 to SG7) that can be switched between a first state (a lit state, a first display color, etc.) of a predetermined display state and a second state (a turned-off state, a second display color, etc.) that is different from the first state, and the specific display is performed by combining the first display section that is in the first state and the second display section that is in the second state in these display sections;
The losing result for which the predetermined benefit is not awarded in relation to the result of the specific determination includes a predetermined losing result (normal losing result) and a specific losing result (special losing result) different from the predetermined losing result,
The specific condition is satisfied when the specific result is not satisfied,
The display mode of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined miss result includes a first display mode (stop result SD18) and a second display mode (stop result SD19),
A gaming machine described in any one of features eB1 to eB10, characterized in that the number of first display sections in the first display mode is different from the number of first display sections in the second display mode.

In the above configuration, multiple display modes, including a first display mode and a second display mode, are provided as display modes for the specific display corresponding to a predetermined miss result, and the first display mode and the second display mode are configured so that the number of first display sections set to the first state differs. In this case, by having a different number of first display sections in the first display mode and the second display mode, it becomes difficult to tell that the display modes correspond to the same type of miss result (predetermined miss result). This increases the difficulty of identifying whether an actual specific display corresponds to a predetermined miss result, making it difficult to distinguish from specific displays corresponding to a specific miss result. This prevents the difficulty of identifying a specific miss result from becoming too low, and can ideally enhance a game in which the specific element being used is inferred from the presence or absence of a change in state.

Feature eB13. The number of the first display units in the first display mode is smaller than the number of the first display units in the second display mode,
The gaming machine described in feature eB12 is characterized in that the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the specific miss result is a third display mode (stop results SD15 to SD17) in which the number of first display sections is greater than the first display mode.

With the above configuration, when a specific display in the first display mode is displayed, it is easy to distinguish it from the third display mode, which emphasizes the difficulty of distinguishing it from the third display mode when a specific display in the second display mode is displayed, making it easier for players to believe that the specific display in the second display mode corresponds to a specific miss result. This prevents the difficulty of distinguishing whether an actual specific display corresponds to a specific miss result from becoming too low, and can ideally add excitement to a game in which the specific element to be adopted is inferred from the presence or absence of a change in mode.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features eA1 to eA13, Features eB1 to eB13, Features eC1 to eC8, Features eD1 to eD11, Features eE1 to eE6, Features eF1 to eF11, and Features eG1 to eG10, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features eB1 to eB13 above, or some or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature eC group>
The feature eC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fifth embodiment and variation 1 of the fifth embodiment.

Features eC are based on the background technology that states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The invention addresses the problem that "there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the enjoyment of gaming in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature eC1. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of granting a predetermined benefit (opening/closing execution mode) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined first result (jackpot result);
A display means (special display unit 43) for displaying a specific display (stop result SD0 to SD19) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment;
Equipped with
the display means has a plurality of display sections (display segments SG1 to SG7) that can be switched between a first state (a lit state, a first display color, etc.) of a predetermined display state and a second state (a turned-off state, a second display color, etc.) that is different from the first state, and the specific display is performed by combining the first display section that is in the first state and the second display section that is in the second state in these display sections;
The game has a plurality of results (missing results) different from the predetermined first result, including a predetermined second result (normal missing result) and a predetermined third result (special missing result),
The display mode of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined second result includes a predetermined mode (stop result SD19) in which the number of the first display units is plural,
A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result includes a specific mode (stop results SD15 to SD17) in which the number of first display sections is multiple.

In the above configuration, a predetermined first result corresponding to the award of a predetermined bonus is provided as a result of the specific judgment, and a predetermined second result and a predetermined third result are provided as results in which the predetermined bonus is not awarded. The gaming machine is forced to display specific displays corresponding to each of these results, but depending on the gameplay and presentation configuration provided, it may be undesirable if the player can easily determine that the predetermined third result has occurred based on the specific display displayed by the display means. In this regard, in the above configuration, the specific display corresponding to the predetermined second result and the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result each include a display mode in which multiple first display units are in the first state. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the two specific displays, and prevents them from easily distinguishing between cases in which the predetermined third result has occurred and cases in which it has not. This allows the gameplay and presentation configuration to be optimally utilized, ultimately increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the "result different from the predetermined first result" in this feature can also be expressed as "a result that does not correspond to the granting of the predetermined benefit" or "a result in which the predetermined benefit is not granted."

Feature eC2. The gaming machine described in Feature eC1, wherein the number of first display units in the specific mode is equal to or greater than the number of first display units in the predetermined mode.

In the above configuration, not only are there display modes in which the number of first display sections is multiple for the specific display corresponding to the predetermined second result and the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result, but the number of first display sections in the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result is large, making it difficult for players to remember the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result, thereby preventing players from easily distinguishing between cases in which the predetermined third result has occurred and cases in which it has not.

Feature eC3. A gaming machine described in Feature eC1 or Feature eC2, wherein the number of first display units in the specific mode (stop result SD17) is the same as the number of first display units in the predetermined mode.

In the above configuration, because the specific mode and the predetermined mode have the same number of first display sections, the player cannot distinguish between the two modes based on the number of first display sections, which prevents the player from easily distinguishing between cases where the predetermined third result has been achieved and cases where it has not, based on the content of the specific display.

Feature eC4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eC1 to eC3, wherein the number of specific modes is greater than the number of predetermined modes.

In the above configuration, because the number of specific modes is greater than the number of predetermined modes, when a specific display with multiple first display units is executed as corresponding to the second result, it is possible to create a state in which most of the specific displays are the predetermined third result, but some are specific displays corresponding to the predetermined second result. This makes it easier to believe that the specific display of the predetermined mode corresponding to the predetermined second result corresponds to the predetermined third result, and prevents easy discrimination from the content of the specific display between cases where the predetermined third result has been achieved and cases where it has not.

Feature eC5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eC1 to eC4, wherein the first display unit in the predetermined mode and the first display unit in the specific mode are configured so that there is at least one specific display unit (display segments SG2 and SG4 for stop results SD17 and SD19) among the plurality of display units that is in the first state in both the predetermined mode and the specific mode.

In the above configuration, the display section serving as the first display section overlaps the predetermined state and the specific state, making it difficult to distinguish between these states and preventing easy determination from the content of the specific display whether the predetermined third result has occurred or not.

Feature eC6. The gaming machine described in Feature eC5, characterized in that it has multiple specific display units in the predetermined mode and the specific mode.

In the above configuration, multiple overlapping first display sections are provided for the predetermined mode and the specific mode, making it possible to make the appearances of these modes similar and difficult to distinguish between them. This prevents the user from easily distinguishing between cases where the predetermined third result has occurred and cases where it has not, based on the content of the specific display.

Feature eC7. The specific mode includes a first specific mode (stop result SD15) and a second specific mode (stop result SD17),
When the predetermined third result is achieved, one of the display modes of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result, including the plurality of specific modes, is selected, and display is performed on the display means based on the selected result,
The selection probability of the second specific mode is higher than the selection probability of the first specific mode,
A gaming machine according to feature eC5 or feature eC6, characterized in that it has the specific display unit in at least the predetermined mode and the second specific mode.

In the above configuration, a first display section is provided that overlaps the second specific mode, which has a higher selection probability and display frequency, and the predetermined mode, making it easier to believe that the specific display in the predetermined mode corresponding to the predetermined second result corresponds to the predetermined third result. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the two modes, and prevents easy determination from the content of the specific display whether the predetermined third result has been achieved or not.

Feature eC8. A first display means (a symbol display device 75) that displays a predetermined effect (such as a game effect) based on the specific determination;
A second display means (special drawing display unit 43) formed smaller than the first display means,
A gaming machine according to any one of features eC1 to eC7, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, although the second display means on which the specific display is displayed is smaller than the first display means and the specific display is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable than the presentation display on the first display means, if a player were to visually recognize the specific display, it is expected that they would be able to tell from the specific display that the predetermined third result has occurred. However, depending on the gameplay and presentation configuration provided, it may not be desirable if this becomes too easy to understand. By applying any of the above features eC1 to eC7 to such a configuration, the effects of each of these features can be optimally exerted, and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from becoming too easily aware of the specific result.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features eA1 to eA13, Features eB1 to eB13, Features eC1 to eC8, Features eD1 to eD11, Features eE1 to eE6, Features eF1 to eF11, and Features eG1 to eG10, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features eC1 to eC8 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature eD group>
The feature eD group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fifth embodiment and variation 1 of the fifth embodiment.

Features eD were developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature eD1. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition from a predetermined game state (normal game state) to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the specific judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A means for transitioning to a specific game state based on the establishment of specific conditions (winning a special miss result, reaching the ceiling number of times, hitting a specific ball entry area, etc.) (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to a ceiling time-saving game state in the main control device 162, a process for determining whether to transition to a sudden time-saving game state, and a process for transitioning to a time-saving game state),
A notification execution means (a function for executing a performance setting process in the performance control device 143) capable of executing a notification by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75);
Equipped with
The notification execution means
A first means (a function of executing a first setting process for the game performance in the performance control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (a first additional performance, a special reach miss A performance, a start performance, etc.) when the specific condition is established;
A second means (a function for executing a third setting process for the game performance in the performance control device 143) that can execute the specific notification when a predetermined condition different from the specific condition is met (such as when a variation pattern for a reach miss is selected in a situation where a special miss result has not been achieved),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a player is transitioned when a specific judgment results in a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. This specific game state is transitioned to when a specific condition is met. Therefore, the player can play the game not only with the aim of a specific judgment resulting in a specific result, but also with the aim of the specific condition being met. In this configuration, a specific notification corresponding to the fulfillment of a specific condition can be executed not only when the specific condition is fulfilled, but also when a predetermined condition different from the specific condition is fulfilled. In this case, because the specific notification is executed more times than the number of times the specific condition is fulfilled, it is possible to give the impression that the specific condition is more likely to be fulfilled, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the "second means capable of executing the specific notification when a predetermined condition different from the specific condition is met" in this feature can also be expressed as "second means capable of executing the specific notification when the specific condition is not met."

Feature eD2. A gaming machine as described in Feature eD1, wherein the second means is capable of executing the specific notification when the predetermined condition is met in a specific gaming state.

For example, if a specific notification is issued based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and the game state does not change to a specific game state, there is a concern that the player will realize that the specific condition has not actually been fulfilled. In this regard, the above configuration is configured to execute a specific notification when a predetermined condition is fulfilled while the game state is in a specific game state. In this case, by utilizing the continuation of the specific game state that is currently in effect, it is possible to make the game state after the notification a specific game state, while still issuing a specific notification even when the specific condition has not been fulfilled. This makes it difficult to understand that the specific condition has not actually been fulfilled, and makes it easier to give the impression that the specific condition is likely to be fulfilled.

Feature eD3. The predetermined condition is established in a specific gaming state.
The elements that make up a specific game state include specific elements related to the player's advantage (the number of special game times that can be played in the time-saving game state, the number of small wins, the number of normal game times, the period that can be played in the time-saving game state, etc.),
A gaming machine described in feature eD1 or feature eD2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means capable of concealing information corresponding to the specific element or at least part of the specific element related to the specific gaming state during the stay (a function of executing processing such as step Se2703 and step Se3106 in the presentation control device 143, which function conceals information regarding the remaining number of times or part of the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction).

In the above configuration, the specific elements of the specific game state currently in play, or at least some of them, are hidden, so this hidden element can be used to issue a specific notification based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition. This makes it possible to issue the specific notification while optimally aligning it with the actual remaining amount of the specific game state currently in play.

Feature eD4. A gaming machine as described in Feature eD3, wherein the second means is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of steps Se3301 and Se3306 in the presentation control device 143) capable of executing the specific notification based on the specific element related to the specific gaming state or an implicit portion of information corresponding to at least a portion of the specific element when the predetermined condition is met in a situation where the specific gaming state is in effect.

With the above configuration, specific notifications are issued based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, utilizing the unspecified amount of specific elements in the specific gaming state currently in play. This makes it possible to issue the specific notifications while optimally aligning them with the actual remaining amount in the specific gaming state currently in play.

Feature eD5. A means for terminating the specific gaming state based on the fact that a specific number of times (number of games played, number of small wins, etc.) since transitioning to the specific gaming state has reached a predetermined upper limit (a function for executing processing for terminating the high frequency support mode in the main control device 162);
A non-disclosure means that can hide a part of the specific number of times remaining that can be stayed in the specific game state in the specific game state (a function that executes the processing of steps Se2703 and Se3106 in the performance control device 143, and displays the remaining number of times image 823 with a part of the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction hidden);
A gaming machine according to any one of features eD1 to eD4, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, where the specific game state ends when the specific number of times since transitioning to the specific game state reaches the upper limit, a portion of the remaining specific number of times for the specific game state is hidden. In this case, when a specific notification based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition is executed, the hidden portion can be used to keep the player in the specific game state after the notification, making it appear as if the player has transitioned to the specific game state. This makes it difficult to tell that the specific notification based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition is a pseudo notification, making it easier to give the impression that the specific condition is likely to be fulfilled.

Feature eD6. The specific notification is a notification that allows the player to recognize that the remaining specific number of times has increased or been added,
The gaming machine described in feature eD5 is characterized in that the second means is equipped with a means (a function to execute processing such as steps Se3301 and Se3306 in the presentation control device 143) that can execute the specific notification based on a portion of the remaining specific number of times that have been made non-disclosed by the non-discloser means.

In the above configuration, in a specific notification based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the unspecified remaining number of times can be used to notify that the remaining number of times has increased or been added. This makes it possible to make the player believe that a transition to a specific game state has occurred, in a situation where a transition to a specific game state has not occurred, while aligning with the actual remaining number. This makes it difficult to tell that the specific notification based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition is a false notification, making it easier to give the impression that the specific condition is likely to be fulfilled.

Feature eD7. The game operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is counted as one game round, and a game round control means (a function of executing the special game round control process in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game round to be played;
The first means is capable of executing the specific notification in a game in which the specific condition is established,
A gaming machine described in any one of features eD1 to eD6, characterized in that the second means is capable of executing the specific notification in a game session in which the specified condition is met.

In the above configuration, both specific notifications based on the fulfillment of specific conditions and specific notifications based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions are executed within a game round, and these notifications are made as part of the presentation for that game round. This allows the player to view the specific notifications while paying attention to the game round, making it possible to effectively prevent the player from overlooking the specific notifications.

Feature eD8. The game control means includes a period setting means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162) for setting the period of the game operation, and controls the game operation so that the game operation is executed within the period set by the period setting means;
The gaming machine described in feature eD7 is characterized in that the specified condition can be met in a gaming session where the period of the gaming operation is a specific period (variable display time for a miss), and the specified condition cannot be met in a gaming session where the period of the gaming operation is a specific period (variable display time for a complete miss) different from the specific period.

In the above configuration, the predetermined condition can be met if the period of the game-use operation is a specific period, and the predetermined condition cannot be met if the period is a different period from the specific period. In other words, a specific notification based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition is executed taking into account the length of the game-use operation period, making it possible to execute the notification appropriately within the game.

Feature eD9. A gaming machine as described in Feature eD8, wherein the specific period is longer than the execution period of the specific notification.

In the above configuration, the specific period is set to be longer than the execution period of the specific notification, so that in a game in which the period of the game-cycle operation falls within the specific period, the specific notification can be executed appropriately along with other game-cycle effects.

Feature eD10. The device is provided with a specific means (such as a function to execute priority processing in the main control device 162) that can restrict transition to a specific gaming state when the specific condition is met under a predetermined situation (such as a situation in which the device is in a time-saving gaming state),
A gaming machine described in any of features eD1 to eD9, characterized in that the notification execution means is equipped with a third means (a function of executing a second setting process for game-round presentation in the presentation control device 143) that can execute the specific notification when the transition to a specific game state is restricted or has been restricted by the identification means.

In the above configuration, transition to a specific game state is restricted when a specific condition is met under a predetermined circumstance. When such a restriction is imposed, the player is unable to enjoy the benefits of the specific condition despite having met it, which could be upsetting. In this regard, a specific notification is issued when a transition restriction is imposed, making it appear as if a transition to a specific game state is occurring even when the restriction is in place. In this case, the specific notification is issued not only when a transition restriction is imposed, but also when a specific condition is not met, making the specific notification when a transition restriction is imposed less noticeable and preventing it from appearing unnatural. This makes it more difficult for players to realize that a transition restriction has been imposed.

Feature eD11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eD1 to eD10, which is configured to transition to a specific gaming state without passing through a special gaming state when the specific condition is met.

The above configuration is designed to allow a transition to a specific game state without passing through a special game state. By applying any of the features eD1 to eD10 to this configuration, it is possible to give the impression that the transition conditions (specific conditions) to such a specific game state are easily met, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features eA1 to eA13, Features eB1 to eB13, Features eC1 to eC8, Features eD1 to eD11, Features eE1 to eE6, Features eF1 to eF11, and Features eG1 to eG10, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features eD1 to eD11 above, or some or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Features eE group>
The feature group eE is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the variations, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned fifth embodiment and variation 1 of the fifth embodiment.

Features eE are based on the background technology that states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." These features were developed with the aim of resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve: "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in providing specific notifications corresponding to the lottery results."

Feature eE1. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition from a predetermined game state (normal game state) to a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the specific judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (normal time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made via a special game state based on the establishment of a first predetermined condition (a normal big win result), and a second specific game state (sudden time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made without passing through the special game state based on the establishment of a second predetermined condition (a special miss result) different from the first predetermined condition,
When the first predetermined condition is met, a first specific notification (stop result SD3 to SD14) is executed by a predetermined notification means (special diagram display unit 43) (a function of executing the processing of step Se705 in the main control device 162);
A means for causing the predetermined notification means to issue a second specific notification (stop results SD15 to SD17) when the second predetermined condition is met (a function for executing the process of step Se708 in the main control device 162);
Equipped with
At least the first specific notification has a plurality of notification modes (stop results SD3 to SD),
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of types of the second specific notification is smaller than the number of types of the first specific notification.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made when the result of a specific judgment is a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. Furthermore, these specific game states include a first specific game state to which a transition is made via a special game state, and a second specific game state to which a transition is made without passing through a special game state. Furthermore, the system is configured so that a first specific notification is executed when a first predetermined condition, which is a condition for transitioning to the first specific game state, is met, and a second specific notification is executed when a second predetermined condition, which is a condition for transitioning to the second specific game state, is met. In this configuration, because the number of types of second specific notifications is fewer than the number of types of first specific notifications, it is easier for the player to remember the notification modes of the second specific notifications, making it possible to perform specific notifications in an appropriate manner.

Feature eE2. The first predetermined condition is at least one condition that the result of the specific determination is the specific result;
The second predetermined condition is at least one condition that the result of the specific determination is a predetermined result (a miss result) different from the specific result,
The gaming machine described in feature eE1 is characterized in that the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed as notifications corresponding to the results of the specific judgment (stopped display of a winning symbol or a losing symbol on the special symbol display unit 43).

In the above configuration, when a first specific notification and a second specific notification are issued as result notifications corresponding to the results of a specific judgment, the number of types of second specific notifications is fewer than the number of types of first specific notifications, making it easier for players to remember the notification format of the second specific notification issued as a result notification.

Feature eE3: The predetermined notification means includes a plurality of display units (display segments SG1 to SG7) that can be switched between a first state (e.g., a lit state, a first display color) of a predetermined display state and a second state (e.g., an unlit state, a second display color) that is different from the first state,
A gaming machine described in feature eE1 or feature eE2, characterized in that the first specific notification and the second specific notification can be executed by combining a first display unit that is set to the first state and a second display unit that is set to the second state among the multiple display units.

In the above configuration, the display means has multiple display units that can be switched between a first state and a second state, and the first and second specific notifications are executed by combining the first display unit in the first state with the second display unit in the second state. In such cases, the specific notifications are difficult to distinguish, making it difficult for players to remember the notification modes. However, the configuration of features eE1 and eE2 makes it easier for players to remember the notification mode of the second specific notification.

Feature eE4. The second specific gaming state includes a predetermined second specific gaming state (e.g., sudden time-shortening gaming state B) and a specific second specific gaming state (e.g., sudden time-shortening gaming state A) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined second specific gaming state,
The second specific notification includes a notification of a first display mode corresponding to the specific second specific game state (for example, a stop result corresponding to the sudden time-shortening game state A) and a notification of a second display mode corresponding to the predetermined second specific game state (for example, a stop result corresponding to the sudden time-shortening game state B),
A gaming machine described in feature eE3, characterized in that the number of first display sections in the first display mode is greater than the number of first display sections in the second display mode.

In the above configuration, there are multiple types of second specific game states with different degrees of advantage as second specific game states, and the second specific notifications are configured so that the more advantageous the second specific game state is for the player, the greater the number of first display sections. This allows the player to intuitively grasp the degree of advantage when distinguishing between second specific notifications, even if they do not remember the details of each notification.

Feature eE5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eE1 to eE4, characterized in that it is equipped with means for making the execution period of the second specific notification shorter than the execution period of the first specific notification (a function for making the stop display period of a stop result corresponding to a special miss result shorter than the stop display period of a stop result corresponding to a normal jackpot result).

When a second specific notification corresponding to a second specific game state is issued, it may be undesirable if the player can identify it too easily. In this regard, with the above configuration, the execution period of the second specific notification is made shorter than the execution period of the first specific notification. In other words, when the second specific notification is executed, the period during which the player can see the notification is kept short, which increases the difficulty of identifying that the second specific notification has been issued to a certain extent. This makes it easy for players to remember the notification mode of the second specific notification, while preventing it from becoming too easy to identify.

Feature eE6. The first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed as a result notification (stop display of a winning symbol or a losing symbol on the special symbol display unit 43) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment,
A game operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the result notification corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is counted as one game, and a game control means (a function of executing a special game control process in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game so that a game is played.
The game control means includes a period setting means (a function of setting a fixed display time in the main control device 162) for setting a notification period during which the result notification is performed,
A gaming machine described in any of features eE1 to eE5, characterized in that the period setting means is equipped with a means for setting the specified notification period when the second specific notification is executed to a period shorter than the specified notification period when the first specific notification is executed.

When a second specific notification corresponding to a second specific game state is issued, it may be undesirable for the player to identify it too easily. In this regard, with the above configuration, in each game in which the first and second predetermined conditions are met, the notification period when the second specific notification is executed is made shorter than the notification period when the first specific notification is executed. In other words, when the second specific notification is executed, the period during which the player can see the notification is kept short, thereby increasing the difficulty of identifying that the second specific notification has been issued to some extent. This allows the configuration to be easy for players to remember the notification mode of the second specific notification, while preventing it from becoming too easy to identify.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features eA1 to eA13, Features eB1 to eB13, Features eC1 to eC8, Features eD1 to eD11, Features eE1 to eE6, Features eF1 to eF11, and Features eG1 to eG10, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features eE1 to eE6 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature eF group>
The feature group eF is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the modifications, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

Feature group eF was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature eF1. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of granting a predetermined benefit (opening/closing execution mode) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined first result (jackpot result);
A display means (special display unit 43) for displaying a specific display (stop result SD0 to SD21) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment;
Equipped with
the display means has a plurality of display sections (display segments SG1 to SG7) that can be switched between a first state (a lit state, a first display color, etc.) of a predetermined display state and a second state (a turned-off state, a second display color, etc.) that is different from the first state, and the specific display is performed by combining the first display section that is in the first state and the second display section that is in the second state in these display sections;
The game has a plurality of results (missing results) different from the predetermined first result, including a predetermined second result (normal missing result) and a predetermined third result (special missing result),
A gaming machine characterized in that it includes, as a specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result, a specific display (stop result SD20) of a specific form in which the number of first display parts is equal to or less than the number of first display parts in a specific display (stop results SD18, SD21) corresponding to the predetermined second result.

In the above configuration, a predetermined first result corresponding to the award of a predetermined bonus is provided as a result of the specific judgment, and a predetermined second result and a predetermined third result are provided as results in which the predetermined bonus is not awarded. The gaming machine is forced to display specific displays corresponding to each of these results, but depending on the gameplay and presentation configuration provided, it may be undesirable if the player can easily determine that the predetermined third result has occurred based on the specific display displayed by the display means. In this regard, the above configuration has a specific display mode for the specific display for the predetermined third result in which the number of first display units in the first state is equal to or less than the number of first display units in the specific display for the predetermined second result. This allows the specific display for the predetermined third result to resemble the specific display for the predetermined second result, preventing the player from easily distinguishing between the case in which the predetermined third result has occurred and the case in which it has not. This allows the gameplay and presentation configuration to be optimally utilized, ultimately increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the "result different from the predetermined first result" in this feature can also be expressed as "a result that does not correspond to the granting of the predetermined benefit" or "a result in which the predetermined benefit is not granted."

Feature eF2. The gaming machine described in Feature eF1, characterized in that the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result includes a specific display in which the number of first display sections is the same as the number of first display sections in the specific display corresponding to the predetermined second result.

In the above configuration, because the number of first display sections in the specific display for the predetermined second result is the same as the number of first display sections in the specific display for the predetermined second result in the specific mode, the specific display for the predetermined third result can be made to resemble the specific display for the predetermined second result. Furthermore, because the predetermined second result and the predetermined third result cannot be distinguished based on the number of first display sections, it is possible to more effectively prevent the easy discrimination of whether the predetermined third result has been achieved or not from the content of the specific display.

Feature eF3. The specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result has a plurality of display modes (SD15 to SD17, SD20),
The gaming machine described in feature eF1 or feature eF2, characterized in that the multiple display modes include the specific mode and a predetermined mode (stop results SD15 to SD17) in which the number of first display units is greater than the number of first display units in a predetermined specific display (stop result SD18) corresponding to the predetermined second result.

In the above configuration, the display modes of the specific display that are displayed when the predetermined third result is achieved include a specific mode in which the number of first display sections is equal to or less than the specific display for the predetermined second result, and a specific mode in which the number of first display sections is greater than the specific display for the predetermined second result. This makes it possible to configure some of the specific displays for the predetermined third result to be difficult to distinguish from the specific display for the predetermined second result, while making other displays easier to distinguish. This prevents excessive impairment of the function of the specific display as a result notification when the predetermined third result is achieved, while also making it possible to prevent the content of the specific display from being easily distinguishable between cases where the predetermined third result is achieved and cases where it is not.

Feature eF4. The specific display corresponding to the predetermined second result has a plurality of display modes (SD18, SD21),
A gaming machine described in any of features eF1 to eF3, characterized in that the specific mode is one in which the number of first display units is less than or equal to the number of first display units in a predetermined display mode (SD18) among the multiple display modes.

In the above configuration, multiple display modes of the specific display corresponding to the predetermined second result are set, making it difficult for players to remember the specific display for the predetermined second result. As a result, it becomes easier for players to confuse the specific display of the specific mode that is displayed when the predetermined third result is achieved with the specific display for the predetermined second result, and it is possible to more effectively prevent players from easily distinguishing between cases where the predetermined third result is achieved and cases where it is not achieved from the content of the specific display.

Feature eF5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eF1 to eF4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing a complete miss effect when the effect control device 143 receives a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern W3) that can execute a predetermined notification (complete miss effect) corresponding to the predetermined second result in a predetermined effect means (symbol display device 75) when the predetermined third result occurs.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined third result is achieved, a predetermined notification corresponding to the predetermined second result is made by a predetermined presentation means, making the player believe that the predetermined second result has been achieved. This, combined with the difficulty of distinguishing between the specific display for the predetermined third result and the specific display for the predetermined second result, makes it possible to effectively prevent players from easily distinguishing between cases where the predetermined third result has been achieved and cases where it has not.

Feature eF6. A means capable of granting a specific benefit (such as a sudden transition to a time-saving game state) based on the occurrence of the predetermined third result (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to a ceiling time-saving game state, a process for determining whether to transition to a time-saving game state, and a process for determining whether to transition to a time-saving game state in the main control device 162);
A means (such as a function to execute priority processing in the main control device 162) capable of restricting the granting of the specific benefit when the predetermined third result occurs in a predetermined situation (such as a situation in which the game is in a time-saving game mode),
A gaming machine according to any one of features eF1 to eF5, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, a specific bonus is awarded based on the achievement of a predetermined third result, and the awarding of the bonus is restricted if the predetermined third result is achieved under certain circumstances. If such a restriction is implemented, there is a concern that the player will be offended because they will not be able to receive the benefit despite having achieved the predetermined third result. In such cases, by preventing the player from easily distinguishing between cases where the predetermined third result has been achieved and cases where it has not from the content of the specific display, it becomes difficult for the player to realize that the bonus awarding has been restricted.

Feature eF7. A gaming machine as described in Feature eF6, characterized in that it is equipped with means capable of executing a specific display of the specific mode when the specified third result occurs under the specified circumstances (a function for displaying the stop result SD20 in a stopped state when transition to a sudden time-saving gaming state is restricted).

In the above configuration, a specific display in a specific manner is executed in cases where the issuance of a specific benefit is restricted despite the predetermined third result being achieved, and the specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result is displayed in a manner similar to the specific display for the predetermined second result. This makes it difficult for players to notice that the predetermined third result has been achieved in such cases, and ultimately makes it difficult for them to realize that the issuance of a benefit has been restricted.

Feature eF8. A gaming machine as described in Feature eF6 or Feature eF7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing a complete miss effect when the effect control device 143 receives a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern W3) that enables a predetermined effect means (symbol display device 75) to execute a predetermined notification (complete miss effect) corresponding to the predetermined second result when the predetermined third result occurs under the predetermined circumstances.

In the above configuration, when the predetermined third result is achieved but the granting of a specific benefit is restricted, a predetermined notification corresponding to the predetermined second result is issued. This, combined with the difficulty in distinguishing between the specific display for the predetermined third result and the specific display for the predetermined second result, makes it even more difficult to notice that the predetermined third result has been achieved.

Feature eF9. The specific display corresponding to the predetermined third result has a plurality of display modes (SD15 to SD17, SD20),
the plurality of display modes include the specific mode and a predetermined mode (stop results SD15 to SD17) in which the number of the first display units is greater than the number of the first display units in a predetermined specific display (stop result SD18) corresponding to the predetermined second result,
A means for executing the specific display in the predetermined manner when the specific benefit is granted (a function for displaying the stop results SD15 to SD17 in a stopped state);
A means for executing a specific display of the specific mode when the granting of the specific benefit is restricted (a function for displaying the stop result SD20 in a stopped state);
A gaming machine according to any one of features eF6 to eF8, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, when a specific bonus is awarded in the event of a predetermined third result, a specific display with a greater number of first display sections than the specific display for the predetermined second result is displayed. Therefore, the player associates this specific display with the awarding of the specific bonus, which is expected to leave a strong impression as the specific display for the predetermined third result. Once this impression has been made, when a specific bonus is not awarded in the event of a predetermined third result, a specific display with different display characteristics from the above-mentioned specific display is displayed, making it difficult for players to associate and recognize the specific display with the predetermined third result. This makes it difficult for players to realize that the predetermined third result has occurred when the awarding of the specific bonus is restricted, and makes it difficult for players to realize that this restriction has been imposed.

Feature eF10. A first display means (a symbol display device 75) that displays a predetermined effect (such as a game effect) based on the specific determination;
A second display means (special drawing display unit 43) formed smaller than the first display means and serving as the display means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features eF1 to eF9, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, although the second display means on which the specific display is displayed is smaller than the first display means and the specific display is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable than the presentation display on the first display means, if a player were to view the specific display, it is expected that they would be able to tell from the specific display that the predetermined third result has occurred. However, depending on the gameplay and presentation configuration provided, it may not be desirable if this becomes too easy to understand. By applying any of the above features eF1 to eF9 to such a configuration, the above effects of each feature can be optimally exerted, and it is possible to effectively prevent the above understanding from becoming too easy.

Feature eF11. Based on the result of the specific determination being the first result, it is possible to transition from a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state) to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The granting of the predetermined benefit is a transition to a specific gaming state,
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features eF1 to eF10, characterized in that when the predetermined third result is achieved, the machine is configured to transition to a specific gaming state without passing through a special gaming state.

The above configuration is configured so that if a predetermined third result is achieved, the game can transition to a specific game state without passing through a special game state. By applying any of the features eF1 to eF10 to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fulfillment of the conditions for transitioning to such a specific game state from being easily ascertained from the specific display, making this configuration suitable for use when the transition restrictions are in place.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features eA1 to eA13, Features eB1 to eB13, Features eC1 to eC8, Features eD1 to eD11, Features eE1 to eE6, Features eF1 to eF11, and Features eG1 to eG10, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features eF1 to eF11 above, or some or all of the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Features eG group>
The feature group eG is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, each of the modifications, or a combination thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

Feature group eG was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature eG1. A means for executing a specific judgment (a special drawing hit/miss judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a special drawing hit/miss judgment in the main control device 162);
A specific control determination means (such as a function for executing the processing of step Se1404) that determines whether or not to execute specific control (such as a sudden transition to a time-saving game state) when the result of the specific determination is a predetermined result (a special miss result);
A specific control execution means (e.g., a function for executing the processes of steps Se1405 and Se1406 when a positive determination is made in step Se1404) for executing the specific control based on the determination result of the specific control determination means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific control;
A specific notification execution means (a function for executing a special game number control process in the main control device 162) that causes a specific notification (stop display of the stop results SD0 to SD21) corresponding to the result of the specific judgment to be executed by a predetermined notification means (special game number display unit 43);
Equipped with
The specific notification corresponding to the predetermined result has a plurality of notification modes (stop results SD15 to SD17, SD20), and when the result of the specific determination is the predetermined result, the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined result is executed by one of the plurality of notification modes.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a determination means (a function of executing a stop result setting process for special misses in the main control unit 162) that can determine the notification mode of the specific notification when the result of the specific judgment is the predetermined result by referring to the judgment result of the specific control judgment means.

In the above configuration, if the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute specific control, and specific control is executed based on that result. Furthermore, if a specific judgment is made, a specific notification is made by a predetermined notification means, and the result of the specific judgment is notified by the specific notification. With this configuration, multiple notification modes are provided as notification modes for specific notifications corresponding to predetermined results, and the result of the determination as to whether or not to execute specific control is referenced when determining which of these notification modes to use for the specific notification. In this case, different notification modes for specific notifications corresponding to predetermined results can be used depending on whether or not specific control is executed. Therefore, for example, if it is undesirable for the predetermined result to be understood from the specific notification when specific control is not being executed, the specific notification can be adjusted to a notification mode that makes it difficult to understand the predetermined result, making it possible to issue specific notifications in an appropriate manner.

Feature eG2. A gaming machine as described in Feature eG1, characterized in that, when the result of the specific judgment is the predetermined result, after the specific control judgment means makes a judgment, it is possible to determine one of the multiple notification modes.

In the above configuration, processing is performed in the following order: determine whether to execute specific control, then select and determine the notification mode for the specific notification. Therefore, when determining the notification mode for the specific notification corresponding to a predetermined result, it is possible to make a decision that reflects the results of the above determination.

Feature eG3: The plurality of notification modes include a first notification mode (stop result SD15 to SD17) and a second notification mode (stop result SD20) different from the first notification mode,
The gaming machine described in feature eG1 or feature eG2 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means for determining the second notification mode as the notification mode of the specific notification in the case of the specified result when the judgment result of the specific control judgment means corresponds to non-execution of the specific control, or a means for making it easier to determine the second notification mode than the first notification mode.

In the above configuration, multiple notification modes, including a first notification mode and a second notification mode, are used as notification modes for specific notifications corresponding to predetermined results. When the specific control determination means determines that specific control will not be executed, the second notification mode is determined as the notification mode for specific notifications corresponding to the predetermined result, or the second notification mode is likely to be determined. In this case, by setting the second notification mode to a mode that is difficult for players to associate with the predetermined result, it is possible to effectively prevent players from understanding the predetermined result in situations where specific control is not executed.

Note that the phrase "the identification means includes means for determining the second notification mode as the notification mode of the specific notification in the case of the predetermined result, when the determination result of the specific control determination means is a result corresponding to non-execution of the specific control, or means for making it easier to determine the second notification mode than the first notification mode, when the determination result of the specific control determination means is a result corresponding to execution of the specific control" can also be expressed as "the identification means includes first means for determining the first notification mode as the notification mode of the specific notification in the case of the predetermined result, or means for making it easier to determine the second notification mode than the second notification mode, when the determination result of the specific control determination means is a result corresponding to non-execution of the specific control."

Feature eG4. The specific determination may result in a specific result (a result that deviates from the normal result) that is different from the predetermined result,
The gaming machine described in feature eG3 is characterized in that the second notification mode is a mode in which the player is more likely to recognize the specific result than the predetermined result or in which the player can recognize the specific result (a mode similar to the stop results SD18, SD21 that normally correspond to a missing result).

With the above configuration, the second notification mode determined when specific control is not executed is a mode that makes it easier for a player to recognize the specific result than the predetermined result. Therefore, if a specific determination results in a predetermined result but it is determined that specific control will not be executed, the player will be able to easily grasp the specific result based on the specific notification, and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from understanding the predetermined result in a situation where specific control is not executed.

Feature eG5. A gaming machine as described in Feature eG4, wherein if the result of the specific determination is the specific result, the specific control is not executed without a determination being made by the specific control determination means.

In the above configuration, specific control is not uniformly executed when the result of a specific judgment is a specific result, so it is consistent in that specific control is not executed when the player recognizes the specific result from the specific notification of the second notification mode, which is executed when a predetermined result is achieved. This prevents an unnatural impression and makes it possible to effectively prevent the player from understanding the predetermined result in a situation where specific control is not executed.

Feature eG6. The specific determination may result in a specific result (a result that is out of the normal range) that is different from the predetermined result,
The specific display as the specific notification is performed by a display means as the predetermined notification means,
the display means has a plurality of display sections (display segments SG1 to SG7) that can be switched between a first state (a lit state, a first display color, etc.) of a predetermined display state and a second state (a turned-off state, a second display color, etc.) that is different from the first state, and the specific display is performed by combining the first display section that is in the first state and the second display section that is in the second state in these display sections;
A gaming machine described in any of features eG3 to eG5, characterized in that the number of first display parts in the specific display of the second notification mode is less than or equal to the number of first display parts in a predetermined specific display (stop results SD18, SD21) corresponding to the specific result.

In the above configuration, a specific display corresponding to the result of a specific judgment is made by combining the first display unit in the first state and the second display unit in the second state. Because the number of first display units in the specific display of the second notification mode is less than or equal to the number of first display units in the predetermined specific display corresponding to the specific result, the specific display made when the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result but specific control is not executed can be made to resemble the specific display for the specific result, making it possible to effectively prevent the predetermined result from being perceived in a situation where specific control is not executed.

Feature eG7. A gaming machine described in Feature eG6, wherein the number of first display sections in the specific display of the first notification mode is greater than the number of first display sections in a predetermined specific display corresponding to the specific result.

In the above configuration, the display mode of the specific display that is displayed when a predetermined result is achieved includes a second mode in which the number of first display sections is equal to or less than the specific display for the specific result, and a first mode in which the number of first display sections is greater than the specific display for the specific result. This makes it possible to configure some of the specific displays that are displayed when a predetermined result is achieved to be difficult to distinguish from the specific result, while making other displays easy to distinguish. This prevents excessive impairment of the function of the result notification when a predetermined result is achieved, while also making it possible to effectively prevent the predetermined result from being known in situations where specific control is not being executed.

Note that this feature may further include a configuration in which "the determination means, when the determination result of the specific control determination means corresponds to the execution of the specific control, determines the first notification mode as the notification mode of the specific notification in the case of the predetermined result, or includes means for more easily determining the first notification mode than the second notification mode."

Feature eG8. The specific determination may result in a specific result (a result that is out of the normal range) that is different from the predetermined result,
A gaming machine described in any of features eG1 to eG7, characterized in that when the judgment result of the specific control judgment means is a result corresponding to the non-execution of the specific control, a means (a function of executing a complete miss effect when the effect control device 143 receives a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern W3) is provided that can execute a predetermined notification (complete miss effect) corresponding to the specific result in a predetermined presentation means (pattern display device 75).

In the above configuration, if a specific judgment results in a predetermined result but it is determined that specific control will not be executed, a predetermined notification corresponding to the specific result is made by a predetermined presentation means, making the player believe that the specific result has been achieved and effectively preventing the player from understanding the predetermined result in a situation where specific control is not executed.

Feature eG9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features eG1 to eG8, characterized in that the specific control can grant the player a specific benefit (transition to a specific gaming state).

In the above configuration, a specific bonus is awarded to the player through specific control, but if the specific control is not executed, the bonus will not be awarded. This raises the concern that the player may feel upset because they will not receive the benefit despite having achieved a specific result through a specific judgment. In such cases, applying any of the configurations of Features eG1 to eG8 above will prevent the player from realizing the specific result when the specific control is not executed, thereby making it more difficult for the player to notice that the bonus has been restricted.

Feature eG10. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (time-saving game state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features eG1 to eG9, wherein the specific control is a transition to a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the game state includes a predetermined game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and the game state is configured to transition to the specific game state through specific control. In this configuration, if the specific control is not executed, the transition to the specific game state will not occur, which could upset the player because they will not receive the benefit of a predetermined result despite having achieved it through a specific judgment. In such a case, applying any of the above features eG1 to eG9 can prevent the player from understanding the predetermined result in a situation where the specific control is not executed, thereby making it more difficult for the player to notice that the transition to the specific game state has been restricted.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of Features eA1 to eA13, Features eB1 to eB13, Features eC1 to eC8, Features eD1 to eD11, Features eE1 to eE6, Features eF1 to eF11, and Features eG1 to eG10 can be applied individually to each of the features eG1 to eG10 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other groups eA to eG can be applied individually to each of the configurations of the above-described groups eA to eG, or the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine (ball-operated reel-type gaming machine): A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as it finally stops; the pattern fluctuation begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern fluctuation is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses game balls into the ball receiving tray; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Features fA group to feature fC group>
The inventions described in the following Feature fA group to Feature fC group are a group of inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the above-mentioned sixth embodiment and its modifications.

The inventions described in Feature Group fA to Feature Group fC below address the following problem: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in pachinko machines, gaming balls are fired toward a gaming area in response to a player's firing operation, and when a gaming ball lands in a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, gaming value such as a prize ball is awarded (e.g., JP 2004-81853 A). In slot machines, a lottery process is executed and the reels start spinning when a start lever is operated, and the reels stop spinning when a stop button is operated while the reels are spinning. Then, if the reels stop spinning and the result corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player." These inventions address the following background technology: "However, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of optimal operation of the gaming machines."

<Feature fA group>
Feature fA1. An information storage means (main RAM 314) that requires power supply to store and retain information;
A means for executing specific control based on predetermined information (information on the difference in ball count, the values of the counters 502a to 502e in the counter area 502 for the difference in ball count, an excess flag, information on the difference in number of sheets, etc.) stored in the information storage means (a function for executing processing for determining excess and processing for determining game stop in the main control device 162);
A means for supplying power (backup power) for storing and holding information to the information storage means when the supply of operating power (external power) is stopped, and enabling the information to be stored and held in the information storage means (a function for backing up information stored in the main RAM 314 using backup power from the power outage monitoring unit 315);
A specifying means (a function for executing partial clearing processing in the main control unit 162 in the first embodiment and modified example 1, and a function for executing clearing processing at the time of power interruption in the main control unit 162 in modified example 2) that can erase the predetermined information in the information storage means when the supply of operating power is started, or can start the supply of operating power in a state where the predetermined information is erased in the information storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped, retention power is supplied to the information storage means, thereby maintaining the information stored in the information storage means. Meanwhile, the specified information is erased from the information storage means when the supply of operating power is resumed, or the specified information is erased before the supply of operating power is resumed, so that the gaming machine starts up without the specified information stored in the information storage means. This specified information is used to execute specific control. For example, if you want to prevent specific control from being executed based on specified information stored during the previous day's play, you can conveniently achieve this by turning on the gaming machine's power before the amusement hall opens, thereby optimizing the operation of the gaming machine.

Note that in this feature, "the specified information is erased from the information storage means when the supply of operating power is initiated" does not necessarily mean that the specified information is erased simultaneously with or immediately after the supply of operating power is initiated; it may also mean that the specified information is erased a specified period of time after the start of the supply, as long as it is based on the start of the supply. In this sense, "when the supply of operating power is initiated" can be read as "after the start of the supply of operating power," and "when the supply of operating power is initiated" can be interpreted as including the concept of "after the start of the supply of operating power."

Feature fA2. A gaming machine as described in Feature fA1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing a partial clear process in the main control unit 162) that enables the identification means to erase the specified information when the supply of operating power is started, without requiring any operation to erase the specified information.

For example, if erasing the specified information requires a dedicated operation separate from powering on, the operation would have to be performed on each gaming machine installed in the amusement hall, which could be a very time-consuming task for hall employees. In this regard, with this feature, the specified information is automatically erased when the gaming machine is powered on, significantly reducing the effort required for this erasure. In particular, in amusement halls, turning on the power to an island of equipment can power on multiple gaming machines installed on that island at the same time, so the specified information can be erased for multiple gaming machines at once with a single operation, enabling efficient erasure of specified information.

Feature fA3. A gaming machine as described in Feature fA1 or Feature fA2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing excess determination processing in the main control unit 162) for deriving the predetermined information based on the occurrence of a predetermined event that can occur while a game is being played (such as a ball entering the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the variable winning device 65, or the out opening 68).

In the above configuration, the predetermined information is derived based on predetermined events that occur as a result of the game being played, so the game's performance is reflected in the predetermined information. Furthermore, because this predetermined information is erased when the gaming machine is powered on, it is possible to effectively prevent the previous day's performance from affecting the execution of specific control.

Feature fA4. Equipped with a control means (such as a function to execute steps Sf906 to Sf908 in the payout control device 181) for controlling the awarding of a predetermined game value when a predetermined awarding opportunity (such as a ball entering the general winning port 61, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, or the variable winning device 65) is realized,
The gaming machine described in feature fA3 is characterized in that the specified event is the awarding of the specified gaming value or the realization of the awarding trigger.

In the above configuration, the predetermined event is the awarding of gaming value or the establishment of an opportunity to execute such an event, so predetermined information reflecting the status of gaming value acquisition is derived. Furthermore, because this predetermined information is erased when the gaming machine is powered on, it is possible to effectively prevent the status of gaming value acquisition in the previous day's play from affecting the execution of specific control.

Feature fA5. The information storage means is provided with a history information area (ball difference area 504e, each counter 502a to 502e of ball difference counter area 502) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is played is stored,
A gaming machine described in any of features fA1 to fA4, characterized in that the specified information is the history information stored in the history information area or is derived based on the history information.

With the above configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding historical information is stored in the history storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event. Furthermore, the predetermined information is either historical information indicating the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event managed in this way, or information derived using that historical information. Since such predetermined information is deleted when the gaming machine is powered on, it is possible to effectively prevent the previous day's gaming results from affecting the execution of specific control.

Feature fA6. The specific control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined specific event (the difference in the number of balls being equal to or greater than a specific number),
A gaming machine described in any one of features fA1 to fA5, wherein the predetermined information is specific information (excess flag) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific trigger.

In the above configuration, the specified information indicates that specific control should be executed, and this specified information is erased when the gaming machine is powered on. Therefore, when specific control is executed, the gaming machine's power is turned off, and then the power is turned on again to cancel the execution of specific control. Therefore, the presence of a hall employee is essential for this cancellation, and it is possible to prevent the execution of specific control from being canceled by the player.

In this feature, "the predetermined information is specific information (excess flag) corresponding to the establishment of the specific trigger" can be read as "the predetermined information is specific information (excess flag) used by the gaming machine to determine the establishment of the specific trigger."

Feature fA7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features fA1 to fA6, wherein the specifying means includes means for erasing the specified information from the information storage means (a function for executing the partial clearing process of step Sf115 in the main process) before executing a progress response process for controlling the progress of the game (steps Sf409 to Sf419 of the timer interrupt process) when the supply of operating power is started.

With the above configuration, when the gaming machine is powered on, the process of erasing the specified information is executed first, followed by the progress response process, allowing the game to begin with the specified information from the previous day erased. This prevents specific control from being carried over from the previous day, before or immediately after the start of game progress, and prevents the specific control from affecting game progress in an improper manner.

Feature fA8: The device is provided with a means for executing a supply start process when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing a main process in the main control device 162),
A gaming machine described in any one of features fA1 to fA7, characterized in that the supply start processing includes a process of erasing the specified information by the identification means (a process for partial clearing in step Sf115).

In the above configuration, the specified information is erased during the supply start process that is executed in response to the start of the supply of operating power, which effectively prevents the progress response process from being executed while the specified information from the previous day remains. This prevents specific control from being performed before or early after the start of game progress by carrying over the specified information from the previous day, and prevents the specific control from affecting game progress in an inappropriate manner.

Feature fA9. Equipped with a means for executing interrupt processing that is periodically started (a function for executing timer interrupt processing in the main control unit 162),
The interrupt process includes a progress response process (steps Sf409 to Sf419 in the main control device 162) that is executed to control the progress of the game.
A gaming machine described in feature fA8, characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started and the supply start processing is executed, the interrupt processing is allowed to be interrupted after the erasure processing is executed (the processing of steps Sf101 to Sf116 is executed in a state where the timer interrupt processing interrupt is prohibited in the main processing).

In the above configuration, when the specified information erasure process is executed during the supply start process, the progress response process for controlling game progress is executed as an interrupt process that is periodically activated. Since the interrupt process is allowed to be interrupted after the above erasure process is executed during the supply start process, the specified information can be erased before the progress response process is activated. This reliably prevents the progress response process from being started with the specified information from the previous day carried over, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the game from being improperly progressed due to the influence of specific control.

Feature fA10. In a situation where the supply of operating power is stopped, the first predetermined information as the predetermined information and second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information (base value information, values of each counter 501a to 501c in the base value counter area 501, information used in processing to control the progress of the game, etc.) are stored in the information storage means, and the power for storage is supplied to the information storage means, and the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information are stored and stored in the information storage means (a function of backing up information stored in the main RAM 314 using backup power from the power outage monitoring unit 315),
A gaming machine described in any of features fA1 to fA9, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means (a function of executing a partial clear process in the main control unit 162 in the first embodiment and variant 1, a function of executing a clear process in the event of power outage in the main control unit 162 in variant 2) that, when the supply of operating power is started, erases the first specified information while leaving the second specified information stored and retained in the information storage means, or that starts the supply of operating power in a state where the second specified information is stored and retained in the information storage means and the specified information is erased.

In the above configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information are stored in the information storage means, and the supply of operating power is then started again, the gaming machine can be started with the second predetermined information remaining in the information storage means and the first predetermined information erased from the information storage means. This makes it possible to appropriately protect the second predetermined information from power interruptions, while effectively reducing the impact of the previous day's gaming results on the execution of specific control by erasing the first predetermined information.

Feature fA11. Equipped with a control unit (MPU 312) that executes various processes,
The control means
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps Sf401 to Sf419 in the main control device 162) that executes a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps Sf1103 to Sf1105, steps Sf2103 to Sf2106, and steps Sf3303 to Sf3306 in the main control device 162) that executes a second predetermined process among the various processes;
Equipped with
The information storage means is provided with a first predetermined storage area (a work area 391 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed, and a second predetermined storage area (a work area 393 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed,
The second predetermined storage area includes specific areas (a ball difference area 504e, a ball difference counter area 502, and a ball difference area 601) in which the predetermined information is stored,
A gaming machine described in any of features fA1 to fA10, characterized in that the second predetermined processing execution means, as the identification means, is provided with a means (a function of executing partial clear processing in the main control unit 162 of the first embodiment and variant 1, a function of executing clear processing in the event of power outage in the main control unit 162 of variant 2) that erases information from at least an area including the specified area in the second predetermined memory area when the supply of operating power is started, or that causes the supply of operating power to be started in a state in which information from at least an area including the specified area is erased from the second predetermined memory area.

According to the above configuration, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, with the first predetermined storage area being treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area being treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destinations of information in the information storage means for the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to prevent information used in the first predetermined process or the second predetermined process from being erased when the other process is executed.

In addition, processing is performed on the second specified storage area so that the information in the specified storage area, which stores the specified information used to execute specific control, is erased when the supply of operating power begins, or is in a state where the information in the specified storage area is erased before the supply of operating power begins. Therefore, for example, if you want to prevent specific control from being executed based on specified information stored during play on the previous day, you can conveniently achieve this by turning on the gaming machine's power before the gaming hall opens.

In this case, as described above, by avoiding the erasure of information used in one of the first and second predetermined processes when the other process is executed, it is possible to prevent the erasure of other information stored in the first predetermined area when erasing information in the specific area included in the second predetermined area. In other words, the specific information used to execute specific control can be erased in an appropriate manner while avoiding affecting the protection of other information that should be stored during the process from the stoppage to the start of the supply of operating power.

Feature fA12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features fA1 to fA11, wherein the processing executed by the specific control includes specific processing (step Sf407 in the main control device 162) corresponding to a transition to a specific state (game stop state) in which the progress of a specified game is restricted.

In the above configuration, the execution of specific control causes a transition to a restricted state in which subsequent game progress is restricted. By applying any of the above features fA1 to fA11 to this configuration, the previous day's game results can be used to influence the transition to the restricted state, preventing excessive restrictions on the game being played by the current player.

Feature fA13. A gaming machine as described in Feature fA1, wherein the identification means includes means for erasing the specified information when the supply of operating power is stopped while the specified information is stored in the information storage means (a function for executing a power interruption clear process in the main control device 162 of Variation 2).

In the above configuration, the specified information stored in the information storage means is erased when the supply of operating power is stopped, so the gaming machine can be started with the specified information erased when the supply of operating power is started again. Furthermore, because the specified information is erased when the supply of operating power is stopped, there is no need to perform the erasure process when the supply of operating power starts again, and the load of the gaming machine's startup process, which is executed in response to the start of the supply of operating power, can be reduced. This shortens the startup time of the gaming machine, allowing the player to resume play more quickly.

Feature fA14. A gaming machine as described in Feature fA13, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for enabling the identification means to erase the specified information when the supply of operating power is stopped, without requiring any operation to erase the specified information (a function for executing a power interruption clearing process in the main control unit 162 of Variation 2).

With the above configuration, erasing the specified information stored in the information storage means does not require a dedicated operation separate from shutting down the power, so the specified information is automatically erased when the power is shut down when the amusement hall closes, significantly reducing the effort required for said erasure. In particular, in amusement halls, multiple gaming machines are installed on an island, and by shutting down the power to the island, the power to all of the gaming machines installed on that island can be cut off at the same time. This means that the specified information for multiple gaming machines can be erased collectively with a single operation, enabling efficient erasure of specified information.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features fA1 to fA14, fB1 to fB11, and fC1 to fC7 may be applied individually to each of the features fA1 to fA14 above, or some or all of the technical ideas may be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they may be combined across feature groups.

<Feature fB group>
Feature fB1. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (main control device 162) that executes predetermined processing related to the progress of a game (steps Sf409 to Sf419 by the main control device 162),
an information storage means (main RAM 314) having predetermined areas (a work area 391 for specific control, a stack area 392 for specific control) in which information used in executing the predetermined processing is stored;
a first means (a function of transitioning to a game stop state by a game stop determination process in the main control unit 162) for restricting the progress of a game while at least the first state is being carried over when a first predetermined condition (the number of difference balls becomes a specific number or more, the number of difference balls for determination becomes a specific number or more) is met while the storage status of information in the specified area is a first state (a state in which various information used in steps Sf409 to Sf419 is stored);
a second means for allowing the game to continue in a state in which the first situation is continued or the storage status of the information in the predetermined area is set to a second situation (a situation in which a second initialization process has been performed) different from the first situation, when a second predetermined condition (the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed) different from the first predetermined condition is established after the restriction of the game progress by the first means (a function for canceling the game stop state by a power-on setting process in the main control device 162, and erasing information such as the difference in the number of balls by a partial clear process);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which control processing related to game progress is performed by writing information to a specified area of the information storage means and reading information from that specified area, when a first specified condition is met, game progress is restricted while the stored information status in the specified area is retained. This makes it possible to effectively prevent game play from continuing when the first specified condition is met. Furthermore, when a second specified condition is met while the machine is in such a restricted state, the restricted state is lifted, with the stored information status in the specified area retained or with a different stored status, and game play is allowed to continue. Therefore, if the second specified condition is met by the action of a hall employee, the restricted state entered when the first specified condition is met can be lifted in the presence of a hall employee, allowing game play to resume.

Feature fB2. A gaming machine described in Feature fB1, characterized in that the first predetermined condition can be met based on the occurrence of a predetermined event that can occur while a game is being played.

In the above configuration, the first predetermined condition is met based on a predetermined event that occurs when a game is played, and the transition to a state in which game progress is restricted is made according to the game's performance. Therefore, for example, if it is desired to restrict game progress when performance exceeds the expectations of the gaming machine designer, this can be conveniently achieved.

Feature fB3. Equipped with a control means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sf417 and Sf418 in the main control device 162, and a function for executing the processing of steps Sf906 to Sf908 in the payout control device 181) for controlling the awarding of a predetermined game value based on the establishment of a predetermined awarding trigger (such as a ball entering the general winning port 61, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, or the variable winning device 65),
The gaming machine according to feature fB2, wherein the predetermined event is the awarding of the predetermined gaming value or the realization of the awarding opportunity.

In the above configuration, the predetermined event is the awarding of game value or the establishment of an opportunity to execute such an event, and the first predetermined condition is established based on the occurrence of these events. Therefore, the transition to a state where game progress is restricted is made according to the amount of game value acquired. This makes it possible to ideally prevent excessive acquisition of game value in actual play.

Feature fB4: The information storage means is provided with a history information area (ball difference area 504e, each counter 502a to 502e of ball difference counter area 502) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when a game is played is stored,
A gaming machine according to any one of features fB1 to fB3, characterized in that the first predetermined condition is configured to be met based on the history information.

With the above configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, because the first predetermined condition is met based on the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event managed in this way, it is possible to transition to a state in which game progress is restricted depending on the game performance.

Feature fB5. A first predetermined processing execution means for executing a first predetermined processing (a function for executing the processing of steps Sf401 to Sf419 in the main control device 162);
A second predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sf1103 to Sf1105, steps Sf2103 to Sf2106, and steps Sf3303 to Sf3306 in the main control device 162) that executes a second predetermined processing different from the first predetermined processing;
Equipped with
The information storage means is provided with a first predetermined storage area (a work area 391 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed, and a second predetermined storage area (a work area 393 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed,
the first predetermined process includes the predetermined process,
the first predetermined storage area includes the predetermined area,
A gaming machine described in any of features fB1 to fB4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function to execute processing for determining excess in the main control unit 162) that enables the first predetermined condition to be met based on specific information (information on the difference in the number of balls, the values of each counter 502a to 502e in the counter area 502 for the difference in the number of balls, excess flag, information on the difference in the number of sheets, etc.) stored in the second predetermined memory area.

In the above configuration, the first predetermined condition is met based on the specific information stored in the information storage means. However, if the content of that specific information is erroneously rewritten when the process controlling the progress of the game is executed, there is a risk that the first predetermined condition will not be met properly. In this regard, in this feature, the information storage means is provided with a first predetermined memory area and a second predetermined memory area, and the first predetermined memory area is treated as a memory area dedicated to the first predetermined process controlling the progress of the game, while the second predetermined memory area in which the specific information is stored is treated as a memory area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This prevents the specific information from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed, which in turn makes it possible to properly meet the first predetermined condition and properly control the transition to the restricted state.

Feature fB6: The device is provided with an operable predetermined operation means (power switch, reset button 166c), and is configured such that the operation of the predetermined operation means is required for the second predetermined condition to be satisfied;
The gaming machine comprises a gaming machine component (inner frame 13) that can be opened and closed toward the front of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine described in any of features fB1 to fB5, characterized in that the specified operating means is arranged in a position where the specified operating means can be operated when the gaming machine structure is opened toward the front of the gaming machine.

In the above configuration, the second predetermined condition is not met unless the predetermined operating means is operated, and the predetermined operating means is located in a position where it cannot be operated unless the gaming machine components are opened to the front of the gaming machine. In this case, only hall employees can operate the predetermined operating means, making it necessary for a hall employee to be present when releasing the restricted state. This makes it possible to prevent the restricted state from being released by the player.

Feature fB7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features fB1 to fB6, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function for executing the processing of step Sf113 in the main control device 162) that enables the second predetermined condition to be satisfied when, after a first state in which the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, the second state in which the supply of operating power to the control means is started is reached.

In the above configuration, the second predetermined condition for releasing the restricted state is met by sequentially turning the gaming machine's power off and then on, meaning that only an amusement hall employee can satisfy the second predetermined condition. Therefore, the presence of an amusement hall employee is essential for releasing the restricted state, preventing the restricted state from being released by the player.

Feature fB8. The device is provided with a means (a function for executing excess determination processing in the main control device 162) for storing predetermined information (information on the difference in the number of balls, the values of the counters 502a to 502e in the counter area 502 for the difference in the number of balls, an excess flag, information on the difference in the number of sheets, etc.) in the information storage means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event that may occur when a game is being played, and is configured to determine whether the first predetermined condition is met or whether the first predetermined condition is met based on the predetermined information stored in the information storage means,
A gaming machine described in feature fB7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing partial clear processing in the main control unit 162 in the first embodiment and variant 1, a function of executing clear processing in the main control unit 162 when power is cut off in variant 2) that enables the specified information to be erased in the information storage means when the first state is reached and the second state is reached after the first state, or that enables the second state to be reached with the specified information erased in the information storage means.

In the above configuration, the first predetermined condition is met based on the predetermined information stored in the information storage means, causing a transition to the restricted state. Furthermore, if the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped while the predetermined information is stored in the information storage means, the predetermined information is erased when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, or the predetermined information is in a state where it was erased before the supply of operating power began. This allows the gaming machine to be powered on to simultaneously release the restricted state and initialize the state where the first predetermined condition is met, thereby effectively reducing the workload of hall staff.

Feature fB9. A control means (such as a function to execute steps Sf906 to Sf908 in the payout control device 181) for controlling the awarding of a predetermined game value when a predetermined awarding opportunity (such as a ball entering the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, the variable winning device 65, or the out opening 68) is realized,
A means for allowing the provision of the predetermined game value while the progress of the game is being restricted by the first means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sf1610 to Sf1615 in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine according to any one of features fB1 to fB8, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, when a transition to the restricted state occurs due to the fulfillment of the first predetermined condition, the awarding of game value is permitted within that restricted state. For example, if the first predetermined condition is fulfilled while game value is being awarded, there is a risk that the transition to the restricted state will cause the awarding of game value to be prematurely terminated. In this regard, this feature allows game value to be awarded to the end even if a transition to the restricted state occurs midway through the awarding process, making it possible to properly award the game value that the player should have received.

Feature fB10. Output means capable of outputting specific information (a prize ball signal) corresponding to the awarding of the predetermined gaming value to the outside of the gaming machine (a function for executing the processing of step Sf419 in the main control device 162, a function for executing the processing of step Sf909 in the payout control device 181);
A means for allowing the output of the specific information by the output means while the progress of the game is being restricted by the first means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sf1610 to Sf1615 in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine according to feature fB9, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since external output corresponding to the awarding of game value is permitted in the restricted state, when game value is awarded during the restricted state, the occurrence of the awarding is appropriately notified to the management device on the gaming hall side via the external output. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistencies between the actual value of the game value awarded and the value recognized by the management device as having been awarded, which may occur when game value is awarded during the restricted state.

Feature fB11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features fB1 to fB10, wherein the second means, when the second predetermined condition is met after the first means has restricted the progress of the game, allows the progress of the game to be allowed with the information stored in the predetermined area in the second state.

In the above configuration, when a second predetermined condition is met, the information stored in the predetermined area is changed to a second condition different from the first condition, and gameplay is allowed to continue. This prevents gameplay from being resumed under the same game conditions as when the first predetermined condition was met. When the second predetermined condition is met, both the restricted state itself and the state in which the transition condition to the restricted state is met are released. Therefore, a hall employee can simultaneously release both conditions by simply performing a single operation that causes the second predetermined condition to be met, thereby effectively reducing the effort required of the game hall when resuming gameplay.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features fA1 to fA14, fB1 to fB11, and fC1 to fC7 can be applied individually to each of the features fB1 to fB11 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature fC group>
Feature fC1. A means (such as a function to execute steps Sf906 to Sf908 in the payout control device 181) for awarding a predetermined game value based on the occurrence of a predetermined event that may occur during a game (such as a ball entering the general winning opening 61, the first operating opening 62, the second operating opening 63, or the variable winning device 65),
A means for deriving predetermined information for determination (information on the difference in the number of balls, the values of the counters 502a to 502e in the counter area 502 for the difference in the number of balls, an excess flag, information on the difference in the number of sheets, etc.) based on the occurrence of the predetermined event or the granting of the predetermined game value (a function for executing excess determination processing in the main control unit 162);
A means for executing specific control when the predetermined determination information becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined specific value (100,000 pieces) (a function for executing an excess determination process and a game stop determination process in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, predetermined judgment information is derived based on the awarding of game value or the occurrence of a predetermined event that triggers the awarding of game value, and a determination is made as to whether the derived judgment information exceeds a specific value. This allows the gaming machine to recognize the acquisition status of game value and monitor whether excessive acquisition has occurred. If the judgment information exceeds a specific value, corresponding specific control is performed. If this specific control is configured to perform processing to limit further acquisition of game value, it is possible to operate the gaming machine in a way that limits the increase in game value acquired by the player and prevents excessive gambling.

Feature fC2. A gaming machine described in Feature fC1, characterized in that the processing executed by the specific control includes specific processing (processing of steps Sf1610 to Sf1614 in the main control unit 162) that transitions to a state in which the progress of a specified game is restricted (a game stop state).

In the above configuration, when the determination information reaches or exceeds a specific value, the game's progress is restricted, thereby preventing further occurrence of a specified event. This limits further acquisition of gaming value, making it possible to operate the gaming machine in a way that prevents excessive gambling.

Feature fC3. A detection means (vibration detection sensor, magnet detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor) capable of detecting a predetermined abnormality factor;
A means for transitioning to a state in which the progress of a predetermined game is restricted (a game stop state) when detection is performed by the detection means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sf1604 to Sf1608 in the main control device 162);
a first output means (a function of executing the processing of step Sf1609 in the main control device 162) for outputting external information to the outside of the gaming machine through a predetermined external output terminal among a plurality of external output terminals when detection is performed by the detection means;
A second output means (a function of executing the process of step Sf1615 in the main control device 162) for outputting external information to the outside of the gaming machine through the predetermined external output terminal when the predetermined determination information becomes the specific value;
A gaming machine according to feature fC2, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when a transition to a game progress restriction state occurs because the predetermined judgment information exceeds a specific value, external information is output using the same external output terminal as when a transition to a game progress restriction state occurs because an abnormality is detected. This eliminates the need to add a new external output terminal to the gaming machine, and allows the gaming hall to use existing configurations for the information receiving unit, management device, etc., thereby reducing costs on both sides.

Feature fC4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features fC1 to fC3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of steps Sf1610 to Sf1615 in the main control unit 162) that allows the awarding of the predetermined gaming value even when the predetermined determination information is equal to or greater than the specific value.

In the above configuration, even if the predetermined determination information exceeds a specific value, causing specific control to be performed, the awarding of game value is permitted. Therefore, even if specific control is initiated during the awarding process, game value can be awarded to the end, ensuring that the game value that the player should receive is appropriately awarded.

When this feature is applied to feature fC2 above, it can be expressed as "equipped with a means for allowing the awarding of the specified game value when the progress of the specified game is restricted."

Feature fC5. The game state includes at least a first state (low probability mode, non-open/close execution mode) and a second state (high probability mode, open/close execution mode) in which the predetermined game value is more likely to be awarded than in the first state,
an information storage means (main RAM 314) for storing at least specific information (high probability flag, jackpot flag) corresponding to the second state when the state is the second state, and predetermined information (jackpot type information indicating that the jackpot is of the type corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode) corresponding to the predetermined state when the state is a predetermined state that will later become the second state (a state in which the transition to the high probability mode has not yet occurred after the opening/closing execution mode in the event of a jackpot of the type corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode);
A gaming machine described in any of features fC1 to fC4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function to execute start-up processing in the main control unit 162 when an excess occurs, a function to initialize information such as a high probability flag when the power is cut off) that enables the specific information or the predetermined information stored in the information storage means to be erased based on the judgment information becoming equal to or greater than the specific value.

In the above configuration, when the determination information reaches or exceeds a specific value while in the second state, in which game value is relatively likely to be awarded, the specific information corresponding to the second state and the predetermined information corresponding to a future transition to the second state are initialized. This changes the state to the first state, in which game value is relatively unlikely to be awarded, and game play is played, thereby limiting further acquisition of game value. This makes it possible to operate the gaming machine in a way that limits the increase in game value acquired by the player and prevents excessive increases in gambling. Furthermore, because the gaming machine itself makes such changes automatically, it reduces the workload of hall employees when the determination information reaches or exceeds a specific value. Furthermore, because the decision on whether to make such a change is not left to the discretion of hall employees, it is possible to ensure fairness in gaming.

Feature fC6. An information storage means (main RAM 314) in which the predetermined determination information is stored;
When the supply of operating power is stopped with the predetermined information for determination stored in the information storage means, a means for erasing the predetermined information for determination in the information storage means when the supply of operating power is started, or for starting the supply of operating power with the predetermined information for determination erased in the information storage means (a function for executing partial clear processing in the main control unit 162 in the first embodiment and modified example 1, and a function for executing clear processing at the time of power interruption in the main control unit 162 in modified example 2);
A gaming machine according to any one of features fC1 to fC5, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the supply of operating power is stopped while the predetermined judgment information is stored in the information storage means, and then the supply of operating power is started again, erasing the predetermined judgment information, or the supply of operating power is started again with the predetermined judgment information erased. In this case, the predetermined judgment information is automatically erased by the power being turned off to the gaming machines when the gaming hall closes and then turned on to the gaming machines when the hall opens the next day, thereby preventing the execution of specific control from being affected by the gaming value acquired in the previous day's play.

Feature fC7: A first display control means (a function of executing a display setting process and a notification display process in the main control device 162) that controls the display of the information display means (the first to fifth notification display devices 169a to 169e) so that a display corresponding to the predetermined determination information is performed;
a second display control means (a function of executing a display setting process and a notification display process in the main control device 162) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to information different from the predetermined determination information (information on a set value, information on a base value, etc.) is performed;
A gaming machine according to any one of features fC1 to fC6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the information display means displays information corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, making it possible to grasp the predetermined judgment information at each time. Furthermore, the information display means not only displays information corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, but also displays information corresponding to other information. This allows for effective use of the information display means.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of Features fA1 to fA14, Features fB1 to fB11, and Features fC1 to fC7 can be applied individually to each of the above Features fC1 to fC7, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group fA to Feature Group fC described above, the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups fA to fC can be applied individually, or the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a designated gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus (gaming value) to the player when the gaming ball passes through a designated passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine (ball-operated reel-type gaming machine): A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as it finally stops; the pattern fluctuation begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern fluctuation is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses game balls into the ball receiving tray; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Features gA group to Feature gC group>
The inventions described in the following Feature gA group to Feature gC group are a group of inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment and its modifications.

<Feature gA group>
The feature group gA is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned seventh embodiment and each of the modifications thereof.

The feature group gA was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature gA1. The game state includes a first game state (normal game state), a second game state (high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
A means for executing a specific judgment (a judgment as to whether the special drawing is a winning combination) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment event (a winning combination in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) (a function for executing a judgment as to whether the special drawing is a winning combination in the main control device 162);
A first means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) that enables a transition to the second gaming state based on the result of the specific determination being a specific result (a probability variable jackpot result);
a second means (a process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state by the main control device 162, a function for causing a transition to the time-shortened game state when a special miss occurs in the normal time-shortened game state in the process for transition to the time-shortened game state) that enables a transition to the third game state when a predetermined event (such as a special miss result, the number of miss games reaching the second number, or winning the second transition lottery) occurs in a specific state in the game (such as a normal time-shortened game state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the second game state to which a transition occurs when a specific judgment results in a specific outcome, there is also a third game state, which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A transition to the third game state occurs when a specific event occurs in a specific game state. Therefore, as the game state changes from another state to the specific state, the player can be excited about whether or not the specific event will occur, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature gA2. A gaming machine according to Feature gA1, characterized in that it is configured to be able to enter a predetermined state (such as a high probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and to enter the specific state after the predetermined state.

In the above configuration, a specific state is entered after the end of a predetermined state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and by realizing a predetermined event in that specific state, the game transitions to a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In this case, by realizing a predetermined event in the specific state following the advantageous state (predetermined state), the player is given the chance to return to the advantageous state (third gaming state) or to substantially extend the advantageous state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game after the advantageous state (predetermined state) has ended.

Feature gA3. A gaming machine according to Feature gA2, wherein the predetermined state is the second gaming state.

In the above configuration, a specific state is entered after the end of the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and by realizing a predetermined event in that specific state, the player transitions to a third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In this case, by realizing a predetermined event in the specific state following the advantageous state (second gaming state), the player is given the opportunity to return to the advantageous state (third gaming state) or to substantially extend the advantageous state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game after the end of the second gaming state, which was transitioned to based on the results of a specific judgment.

Feature gA4. The specific state can be entered after a predetermined state (high probability game state, etc.) in the game,
Even if the predetermined event occurs in the predetermined state, transition to the third gaming state is restricted, or the predetermined event is not occurred in the predetermined state.
A game time control means (a function of executing a special game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time so that a game time operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the game time operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment, and the game time is played.
A means for making it possible for the number of times that the specific state can be stayed in to be less than the number of times that the predetermined state can be stayed in (a function for executing the processing of steps Sg1102 to Sg1105 and steps Sg1102 to Sg3501 in the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 162 is ended);
A gaming machine according to any one of features gA1 to gA3, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, after the end of a predetermined state in which transition to the third gaming state is not permitted, the game enters a specific state in which transition to the third gaming state is permitted, and the number of times the game can be played in the specific state is reduced to less than the number of times the game can be played in the predetermined state. In other words, in a situation in which the specific state is entered upon the end of the predetermined state and a chance to transition to the third gaming state is granted, this chance is granted within a limited number of play times. This can heighten anxiety about the specific state ending without the predetermined event occurring, and can appropriately enhance the player's joy and sense of accomplishment when the predetermined event occurs.

Feature gA5. A game time control means (a function for executing a special game time control process in the main control device 162) is provided that controls the game time so that the game time operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the end of the game time operation is counted as one game time as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment,
A plurality of times (1 time, 3 times, 5 times) is set as the number of times of play in which the player can stay in the specific state,
A gaming machine described in any of features gA1 to gA4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for setting one of the multiple numbers of times as the number of times in the specific state to be transitioned to when a transition to the specific state occurs (a function for executing the processing of step Sg3501 in the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode by the main control unit 162 ends).

In the above configuration, multiple play times are set as the number of times a player can remain in a specific state, and one of these times is set when transitioning to a specific state. This allows for multiple specific states with different degrees of advantage in terms of the likelihood of a specific event occurring. This allows players to enjoy not only achieving a specific event in a specific state, but also which specific state they will enter.

Feature gA6. The plurality of times includes a first number of times (one time) and a second number of times (three times) that is greater than the first number of times;
The predetermined event is configured to occur in each game during the specific state,
A gaming machine described in feature gA5, characterized in that the probability of the specified event occurring in each game is the same for the first number of times of the specific state and the second number of times of the specific state.

In the above configuration, the probability of a predetermined event occurring in one play is the same in a specific state where the player can remain in a first number of play cycles and a specific state where the player can remain in a second number of play cycles, and therefore the greater the number of play cycles, the higher the expected value of a predetermined event occurring in the specific state. This stimulates the player's anticipation of entering the specific state with the greater number of play cycles, allowing the player to enjoy the specific state they will enter.

Feature gA7. When the specific state ends without the predetermined event being established, a predetermined state (such as a state in which the game of the second special chart based on the remaining reserved portion is executed) is established.
A gaming machine described in any of features gA1 to gA6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for restricting the transition to the third gaming state even if the specified event occurs in a situation where the specified state is met, or for preventing the specified event from occurring in the specified state (a function for preventing a sudden transition to the time-shortened gaming state even if a special miss occurs in the game round of the second special chart, which is performed based on the remaining reserved amount, in the process for determining a sudden transition to the time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162, and the process for the sudden transition to the time-shortened gaming state).

In the above configuration, once a specific state ends and a predetermined state is reached, transition to the third game state is no longer permitted, thereby highlighting the specific state in which transition to the third game state is permitted. This increases the excitement of the game, which aims to achieve a predetermined event in a specific state, and makes the game more enjoyable.

Feature gA8. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined judgment information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
Equipped with
The specific determination is performed based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means,
A game time control means (a function of executing a special game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time so that a game time operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the game time operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment, and the game time is played.
A reserved storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) capable of reserving and storing judgment information corresponding to a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry means during the execution of a game;
Equipped with
In the specific state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means or the game ball is more likely to enter than in the predetermined state,
A gaming machine described in feature gA7, characterized in that in the specified state, a gaming ball cannot enter the specified ball entry means or such entry is more difficult than in the specific state, and a gaming round corresponding to the judgment information reserved and stored in the specific state is executed.

In the above configuration, transition to the third game state is permitted in a specific state in which a game ball can or is likely to enter the specified ball entry means. Subsequently, transition to the third game state is not permitted when a specific state is reached in which the reserved memory play counts that exist at the end of the specific state are exhausted (a state in which a game ball cannot or is unlikely to enter the specified ball entry means). For example, a possible configuration for providing an opportunity to transition to the third game state is to not permit transition to the third game state in a state in which a game ball can or is likely to enter the specified ball entry means, and then permit transition to the third game state during the period in which the reserved memory play counts have been played. In other words, a transition to the third game state is granted in the remaining reserved play counts after the favorable state in which a game ball can or is likely to enter the specified ball entry means ends. In this case, although the opportunity to transition to the third game state can be limited to certain states, the number of allowable play counts for transition to the third game state is determined by the upper limit of the reserved memory (upper limit reserved number). As a result, the number of allowable play times is restricted by the upper limit of reserved play times, and any attempt to increase or decrease the number of allowable play times is forced to change the upper limit of reserved play times. In this regard, this feature provides a state (specific state) in which transition to the third play state is permitted before the state (predetermined state) in which the reserved number of play times is consumed, making it possible to set the number of allowable play times independently of the upper limit of reserved play times. For example, the allowable number of play times can be set to a number less than the upper limit of reserved play times, allowing for greater flexibility in designing the number of allowable play times.

Feature gA9. The specific state is entered after the first predetermined state in the game (high probability game state, etc.), and after the specific state, it is possible to enter a second predetermined state (a state in which the game of the second special chart based on the remaining reserved amount is executed, etc.),
means for restricting the transition to the third game state even if the predetermined event occurs in the first predetermined state, or for preventing the predetermined event from occurring in the first predetermined state (a function for preventing a transition to the time-shortened game state even if a special miss occurs in a high probability game state in the process for determining a transition to the time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 and the process for transition to the time-shortened game state);
A means for restricting the transition to the third game state even if the predetermined event occurs in the second predetermined state, or for preventing the predetermined event from occurring in the second predetermined state (a function for preventing a transition to the time-shortened game state even if a special miss occurs in the game of the second special symbol performed based on the remaining reserved amount in the process for determining a transition to the time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 and the process for transition to the time-shortened game state).
A gaming machine according to any one of features gA1 to gA8, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, a first predetermined state is entered in which transition to the third gaming state is not permitted, and after the first predetermined state ends, a specific state is entered in which transition to the third gaming state occurs upon the realization of a predetermined event, and after the specific state ends, a second predetermined state is entered in which transition to the third gaming state is not permitted. In this case, the specific state in which transition to the third gaming state is permitted is sandwiched between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state in which transition to the third specific state is not permitted, thereby favorably highlighting the specific state. This increases the excitement of the game, which aims to realize a predetermined event in the specific state, and makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature gA10. A gaming machine described in Feature gA9, wherein the first predetermined state is a state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, the first predetermined state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. By applying the configuration of feature gA9 to this configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event causes a transition to the third game state, returning to a state more advantageous than the first game state or effectively extending that advantageous state. This makes it possible to favorably highlight the specific state and increase the excitement of a game in which the player aims to cause a predetermined event to occur in the specific state.

Feature gA11. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined judgment information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
Equipped with
The specific determination is performed based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means,
A game time control means (a function of executing a special game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time so that a game time operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the game time operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment, and the game time is played.
A reserved storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) capable of reserving and storing judgment information acquired in response to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
Equipped with
In the first predetermined state and the specific state, a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means or the ball entry is more likely to occur than in the second predetermined state;
A gaming machine described in feature gA9 or feature gA10, characterized in that in the second predetermined state, a gaming ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry means or such entry is more difficult than in the specific state, and a gaming round corresponding to the judgment information reserved and stored in the specific state is executed.

In the above configuration, a state (specific state) is established in which transition to the third game state is permitted before the second predetermined state (a state in which game balls cannot or are unlikely to enter the predetermined ball entry means) in which the reserved number of play times has been consumed. Therefore, the allowable number of play times that permits transition to the third game state can be set independently of the maximum reserved number that can be reserved and stored in the reserve storage means. For example, the allowable number of play times can be set to a number that is less than the maximum reserved number, allowing for an advantageous increase in the degree of freedom in designing the number of allowable play times.

Feature gA12. A gaming machine as described in Feature gA11, wherein in the third gaming state, a gaming ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means or such entry is more likely to occur than in the second predetermined state.

In the above configuration, since the third gaming state is a state in which it is possible or likely that a gaming ball will enter the predetermined ball entry means, by causing a predetermined event to occur in a specific state and transitioning to the third gaming state, the state in which it is possible or likely that a gaming ball will enter the predetermined ball entry means can be effectively extended. In such cases, the number of allowable game plays at which an extension chance is granted can be set without being restricted by the upper limit of reserved numbers in the reserved memory means.

Feature gA13. The device is provided with a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can award a predetermined bonus (open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the specific determination being the specific result,
The first means enables a transition to the second gaming state after the awarding of the predetermined award by the award awarding means when the result of the specific determination becomes the specific result,
A gaming machine described in any of features gA1 to gA12, characterized in that the second means enables transition to the third gaming state without the bonus being awarded by the bonus awarding means when the specified event occurs in the specific state.

With the above configuration, it is possible to transition to the third gaming state without first receiving the specified bonus that is awarded when the result of the specific determination is a specific result (a so-called winning result). In other words, because a specific result does not need to be won to transition to the third specific state, the probability of transitioning to the third specific state (the probability of a specified event occurring) can be set independently of the probability of winning the specific result, allowing for greater flexibility in designing the ease of transitioning to the third specific state.

Feature gA14. The gaming machine described in Feature gA13 is configured so that the predetermined event can occur in response to the execution of the specific determination or the execution of a predetermined determination (such as a lottery for the type of losing result) made as a result of said specific determination.

In the above configuration, a predetermined event can occur in response to the execution of a specific determination or the execution of a predetermined determination that is made conditional on that determination. This allows the player to receive a determination of whether or not a specific result will be achieved and whether or not a predetermined event will occur within a single game session. This allows a game session in a specific state to function as a chance game session in which the player can attempt both the award of a predetermined bonus by winning a specific result and the transition to a third game state by the execution of a predetermined event, making the game more entertaining.

Feature gA15. A gaming machine as described in Feature gA13 or Feature gA14, wherein the predetermined event occurs in a specific case (a special miss result) among cases where the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result (a miss result) different from the specific result.

In the above configuration, when the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result (a so-called "missing result"), that is, when a specific result is not obtained, a predetermined event occurs in some cases. Therefore, when a determination to grant a predetermined bonus and a determination to determine whether a predetermined event has occurred are made within a single game, both determinations can be made simultaneously while avoiding interference between the determinations (simultaneous occurrence of a specific result and a predetermined event). Furthermore, because a single trigger (trigger for executing a specific judgment) causes a determination to grant a predetermined bonus and a determination to determine whether a predetermined event has occurred, a determination to determine whether a predetermined event has occurred can be made every time a game is played in a specific state.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features gA1 to gA15, gB1 to gB15, and gC1 to gC13 can be applied individually to each of the features gA1 to gA15 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature gB group>
The group of features gB is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment and each of the modifications thereof.

The feature group gB was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a special benefit is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The feature group gB was developed in response to the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which states, "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the enjoyment of the game."

Feature gB1. A specific judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (a special drawing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment event (a prize in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition from a first game state (normal game state) to a second game state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the specific judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a third gaming state (such as a time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and is different from the second gaming state,
a first means for enabling a second specific game (normal time-shortened game state) to be executed after a first specific game (high probability game state), and a third specific game (a specific game based on the remaining reserved number of times) to be executed after the second specific game (a function for setting the upper limit number of times for each of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 162 so as to transition to the normal time-shortened game state after the end of the high probability game state);
a second means for enabling a transition opportunity to a third game state to be established in the second specific game when a predetermined event (such as a special miss result, the number of miss games reaching the second number, or winning the second transition lottery) occurs in the second specific game (a function for suddenly setting a flag for suddenly starting time-saving game when a special miss result occurs in a normal time-saving game state in the process for determining a transition to the sudden time-saving game state by the main control device 162, thereby enabling a transition to the sudden time-saving game state);
a third means for preventing the transition opportunity from being established in the first specific game and the third specific game when a predetermined event occurs in the first specific game and the third specific game (a function for preventing a sudden transition to the time-saving game state by not setting a flag for suddenly starting the time-saving game when a special miss occurs in the high probability game state and the remaining reserved special pattern game times in the process for determining a sudden transition to the time-saving game state by the main control device 162);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the second gaming state to which a transition is made when a specific judgment results in a specific outcome, there is also a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. When the first, second, and third specific games are played in sequence, if a predetermined event occurs in the second specific game, a transition trigger to the third gaming state is established; however, the transition trigger is not established even if a predetermined event occurs in the first and third specific games. In this case, the permissible period (second specific game period) during which transition to the third gaming state is permitted is sandwiched between non-permissible periods (first specific game period, third specific game period) during which transition to the third gaming state is not permitted. This effectively highlights the game that causes a predetermined event to occur in the second specific game, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of games aiming to transition to the third gaming state.

Feature gB2. In the first specific game and the second specific game, a predetermined game (special game) that can cause the predetermined event is played,
A gaming machine described in feature gB1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for enabling the number of predetermined games that can be executed in the second specific game (the number of special game times that can be played while in the normal time-saving game state) to be less than the number of predetermined games that can be executed in the first specific game (the number of special game times that can be played while in the high probability game state) (a function for setting the upper limit number of times in the high probability mode to 50 times and the upper limit number of times in the first high frequency support mode to 51 times in the transition process by the main control unit 162 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode).

In a configuration in which a transition to the third gaming state occurs when a predetermined event occurs in the second specific game, predetermined games that can cause the predetermined event to occur are played in both the first and second specific games, and the number of predetermined games played in the second specific game is kept lower than in the first specific game. In other words, in a situation in which the opportunity to transition to the third gaming state occurs only in the second specific game, which is partway through the flow from the first specific game to the third specific game, that opportunity is given within a limited number of opportunities. This can heighten anxiety about the possibility that the second specific game will end without causing the predetermined event to occur, and conversely, it can effectively increase the player's joy and sense of accomplishment when they are able to cause the predetermined event to occur in the second specific game.

Feature gB3. In the second specific game and the third specific game, a predetermined game (special game) that can cause the predetermined event is played,
A gaming machine according to feature gB1 or feature gB2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for enabling the number of predetermined games that can be executed in the second specific game (the number of special symbol games that can be played while in the normal time-shortened game state) to be less than the number of predetermined games that can be executed in the third specific game (the number of special symbol games that are executed based on the reserved information of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored at the time the normal time-shortened game state ends) (a function for setting the upper limit number of times for each of the high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode during the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main control unit 162 so that the number of special symbol games that can be played while in the normal time-shortened game state is less than the maximum reserved number of the second special symbol).

In a configuration in which a transition to the third gaming state occurs when a predetermined event occurs in the second specific game, predetermined games that can cause the predetermined event to occur are played in both the second specific game and the third specific game, and the number of predetermined games in the second specific game is kept lower than in the third specific game. In other words, in a situation in which the opportunity to transition to the third gaming state occurs only in the second specific game, which is partway through the flow from the first specific game to the third specific game, that opportunity is given within a limited number of opportunities. This can heighten anxiety about the possibility that the second specific game will end without causing the predetermined event to occur, and conversely, it can effectively increase the player's joy and sense of accomplishment when they are able to cause the predetermined event to occur in the second specific game.

Feature gB4. In the second specific game, a predetermined game (special game) that can cause the predetermined event is played,
A plurality of times (1 time, 3 times, 5 times) are set as the number of times of the predetermined game that can be executed in the second specific game,
A gaming machine described in any of features gB1 to gB3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for setting one of the multiple numbers of times as the number of times for the second specific game to be executed when the second specific game is executed (a function for executing the processing of step Sg3501 in the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode by the main control unit 162 ends).

In a configuration in which a transition to a third game state occurs when a predetermined event occurs in a second specific game, a predetermined game that can cause the predetermined event to occur is played in the second specific game, and multiple predetermined games are set as the number of times that can be played in the second specific game. Since one of these multiple numbers is set for the second specific game, the number of chances for causing the predetermined event can be diversified, and multiple second specific games with different degrees of advantage in terms of the likelihood of the predetermined event occurring can be set. This makes it possible for players to enjoy not only the occurrence of a predetermined event in the second specific game, but also which second specific game will result.

Feature gB5. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
a variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can or easily enters the game ball, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
Equipped with
At least in the first specific game and the second specific game, a game ball can enter the variable ball entry means or the game ball is more likely to enter than in the first game state,
A gaming machine described in any of features gB1 to gB4, characterized in that in the third gaming state, a gaming ball can enter the variable ball entry means or such entry is more likely to occur than in the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, game balls can or are likely to enter the variable ball entry means in the first specific game and the second specific game, and game balls can or are likely to enter the variable ball entry means in the third game state. With this configuration, by causing a predetermined event to occur in the second specific game and transitioning to the third game state, the state in which game balls can or are likely to enter the variable ball entry means can be extended. In other words, by causing a predetermined event to occur during a portion of the period in which game balls can or are likely to enter the variable ball entry means, it is possible to add gameplay that allows gamers to play in that state for a longer period, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature gB6. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (first actuation port 62) through which a game ball can enter,
The specific determination means can execute the specific determination based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entering the variable ball entry means,
A gaming machine described in feature gB5 is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player when the specific judgment is made based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means than when the specific judgment is made based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (a configuration in which the jackpot type table corresponding to the second special symbol has a more advantageous allocation than the jackpot type table corresponding to the first special symbol).

In the above configuration, by having the gaming ball enter the variable ball entry means, it is possible to receive a specific judgment in a more advantageous manner than by having the gaming ball enter the predetermined ball entry means. Therefore, by causing a predetermined event to occur in the second specific game and transitioning to a third game state, it is possible to extend the state in which the specific judgment in the advantageous manner can be received. In other words, by causing a predetermined event to occur during a portion of the period in which the state in which the specific judgment in the advantageous manner can be received can be extended, providing gameplay that allows the state to be played for a longer period, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature gB7: The probability state of the specific result in the specific determination by the specific determination means includes a first probability state (low probability mode) in which the probability of the specific result being achieved is relatively low, and a second probability state (high probability mode) in which the probability is relatively high,
A gaming machine described in any of features gB1 to gB6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a fluctuation start process in the main control unit 162) that enables the specific judgment in the second probability state to be made in the first specific game.

In the above configuration, a specific determination is made in the second probability state in the first specific game, and after the specific determination does not result in a specific result and the first specific game ends, a second specific game is played in which a transition to a third game state is made by causing a predetermined event to occur. This provides an opportunity for the player to transition to a more advantageous third game state if a first specific game with a favorable probability of winning a specific result is played, but the player is unfortunately unable to achieve the specific result and the first specific game ends, thereby reducing the player's disappointment at the end of the first specific game and encouraging them to continue playing. Furthermore, in the first specific game in which a specific determination is made in the second probability state, even if a predetermined event occurs, a transition to the third game state does not occur, allowing the player to focus on achieving the specific result and attaining the second game state during the first specific game period.

Feature gB8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features gB1 to gB7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing processing for displaying special symbol variations in the effect control device 143) that enables a specific notification (special effects A and B) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) when the second specific game is being played.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made during the second specific game, so even if the player does not know which specific game each game falls into, they can be made aware that they are in the second specific game (a state in which a predetermined event can be triggered to transition to the third game state).

Note that this feature may further include the feature that "the specific notification is configured not to be executed in the first specific game and the third specific game."

Feature gB9. The second means enables a trigger for transition to a third game state to be established in the second specific game when the predetermined event occurs in the second specific game in a situation where the first predetermined state (a state allocated to allocation result A) is in effect,
A gaming machine described in any one of features gB1 to gB8, characterized in that it is equipped with a fourth means (a configuration in which a transition to a normal time-shortened game state occurs in a situation assigned to allocation result B, and a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state does not occur if a special miss result occurs in that normal time-shortened game state) that enables the transition trigger to not be established in the second specific game if the predetermined event occurs in the second specific game in a situation in which the game is in a second predetermined state (a state assigned to allocation result B) different from the first predetermined state.

With the above configuration, even if the second specific game is the same, if the second specific game is played in the first predetermined state and a predetermined event occurs in that second specific game, a transition to the third game state will occur. However, if the second specific game is played in the second predetermined state and a predetermined event occurs in that second specific game, a transition to the third game state will not occur. This configuration not only causes a predetermined event to occur in the second specific game, but also creates anticipation for the second specific game being played in the first predetermined state, entertaining the player.

Feature gB10. A gaming machine as described in Feature gB9, comprising means for enabling a predetermined notification corresponding to the first predetermined state (a notification corresponding to allocation result A) to be made in the second specific game when the first predetermined state is in effect (a function for making a notification corresponding to allocation result A in a game round in the normal time-saving game state).

With the above configuration, when a second specific game is played under the first predetermined state, a predetermined notification is issued during that second specific game to notify the player that the first predetermined state is in effect. This allows the player to play the second specific game after recognizing that the second specific game may result in a transition to the third game state. This allows the player to pay more attention to whether or not a predetermined event occurs, making the second specific game more interesting.

Feature gB11. A gaming machine as described in Feature gB9 or Feature gB10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for enabling, when the first predetermined state is in effect, a predetermined notification corresponding to the first predetermined state (a notification corresponding to allocation result A) to be made before the second specific game (a function for making a notification corresponding to allocation result A before transitioning to the normal time-saving game state).

With the above configuration, when a second specific game is played under the first predetermined state, a predetermined notification notifies the player that the first predetermined state is in effect before the second specific game begins, allowing the player to be aware in advance that a second specific game that may result in a transition to a third game state will be played. This allows the player to approach the second specific game with a strong sense of anticipation for a predetermined event to occur after the first specific game ends, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature gB12. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
Equipped with
The game machine has a first state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means or is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and a second state (low frequency support mode) in which a game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry means or is less likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in the first state,
A gaming machine described in any of features gB1 to gB11, characterized in that the first specific game and the second specific game, or the first specific game, the second specific game and the third specific game, are played in a situation where the first state is present.

In the above configuration, the first specific game and the second specific game, or the first specific game, the second specific game and the third specific game, are played in a first state in which a game ball can or is likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means. Therefore, a chance to transition to the third game state can be provided for a partial period (the period of the second specific game) during the period in which a game in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means is continuously played. This can add variety to the anticipation and attention for the game outcome as the game in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means is repeated, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Note that this feature states that "the system has a first state (high frequency support mode) in which game balls can or are more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and a second state (low frequency support mode) in which game balls cannot or are less likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in the first state, and the first specific game and the second specific game, or the first specific game, the second specific game, and the third specific game are played in the first state." This can also be expressed as "game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry means in the first specific game and the second specific game (a structure in which entry into the second actuation port 63 is possible in the high probability game state and the normal time-limited game state), or game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry means in the first specific game, the second specific game, and the third specific game (a structure in which entry into the second actuation port 63 is possible in the high probability game state, the normal time-limited game state, and during a period in which game rounds based on the remaining reserved balls are played)."

Feature gB13. A gaming machine described in any one of Features gB1 to gB12, characterized in that it is equipped with means (a function in the main control unit 162 to execute processing for suddenly transitioning to the time-saving gaming state) that enables transition to the third gaming state without passing through the second gaming state when the transition trigger is established in the second specific gaming state.

With the above configuration, if a predetermined event occurs in the second specific game, it is possible to transition to the third game state without passing through the second game state. In other words, because a specific result (a winning result) is not required to transition to the third game state, the probability of transitioning to the third game state (probability of a predetermined event occurring) can be set independently of the probability of winning the specific result, allowing for greater flexibility in designing the ease of transitioning to the third game state.

Feature gB14. The gaming machine described in Feature gB13 is configured so that the predetermined event can occur in response to the execution of the specific determination or the execution of a predetermined determination (such as a lottery for the type of losing result) made as a result of said specific determination.

In the above configuration, a predetermined event can occur in response to the execution of a specific determination or the execution of a predetermined determination that is made conditional on that determination, allowing the player to receive a determination of whether or not a specific result will be achieved and whether or not a predetermined event will occur within a single game session. This allows the second specific game to function as a chance game in which the player can attempt both a transition to the second game state upon winning a specific result and a transition to the third game state upon the occurrence of a predetermined event, making the game more entertaining.

Feature gB15: The device has a plurality of predetermined results including a first predetermined result (normal failure result) and a second predetermined result (special failure result) as results when the result of the specific determination is a predetermined result (failure result) different from the specific result,
A gaming machine as described in feature gB14, characterized in that the occurrence of the specified event results in the second specified result.

In the above configuration, a first predetermined result and a second predetermined result are provided as predetermined results (so-called losing results) that differ from the specific result when a specific judgment is made, and a transition to a third game state occurs when the second predetermined result is obtained in the second specific game. Therefore, when a transition determination to the second game state and a transition determination to the third game state are made within a single game round, both determinations can be made simultaneously while avoiding interference between these determinations (the simultaneous occurrence of a winning specific result and the occurrence of a predetermined event).

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of features gA1 to gA15, features gB1 to gB15, and features gC1 to gC13 can be applied individually to each of the features gB1 to gB15 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Characteristics gC group>
The feature group gC is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the above-mentioned seventh embodiment and each of the modifications thereof.

Feature gC group was developed with the aim of resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve in the background technology, which states, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a bonus is awarded, such as transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Furthermore, some machines execute a game round in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the execution of the lottery process, and in that game round, the symbols are displayed stationary in a manner that corresponds to the result of the lottery process (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature gC1. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry means (operation openings 62, 63) into which the game balls launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring predetermined judgment information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
A specific judgment means (a function of executing a winning/losing lottery in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (winning/losing lottery) based on the judgment information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game time control means (a function of executing a special game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time so that a game time operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the game time operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment, and the game time is played.
A reserved storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) capable of reserving and storing judgment information acquired in response to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
Equipped with
The game number control means includes a period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162) for setting a period of the game number operation, and controls the game number so that the game number operation is executed within the period set by the period setting means,
A first means for setting the period of the game replay operation by referring to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory means in a first predetermined state (high probability game state) (a function for acquiring the variable display time table of FIG. 495 when in a high probability game state in the variable display time setting process by the main control unit 162 and setting the variable display time to a length corresponding to the number of reserved memories);
A second means for enabling the period of the game operation to be set regardless of the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory means in a situation where a second predetermined state (a state where the remaining reserved special game times have been consumed) different from the first predetermined state is reached (a function for acquiring the variable display time table of FIG. 501 when the remaining reserved special game times have been consumed in the variable display time setting process by the main control unit 162, and setting the variable display time regardless of the number of reserved times);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, during a game in the first predetermined state, the duration of the game operation is set to a length that takes into account the number of reserved memories in the determination information, and during a game in a separate second predetermined state, the duration of the game operation is set to a length that is not affected by the number of reserved memories. With this configuration, for example, if the end of an advantageous state causes a switch from the first predetermined state to the second predetermined state, and a game in which the player has little interest is played in the second predetermined state, the game operation for that game can be completed in a short period of time, even if the game is played in the second predetermined state with a low number of reserved memories. Therefore, the duration of the game operation can be set to a length that suits the situation at each time, making it possible to play the game optimally.

Feature gC2. The first means enables the period of the game replay operation when the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result (miss result) to be set by referring to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory means,
The gaming machine described in feature gC1 is characterized in that the second means enables the period of the game replay operation when the result of the specific judgment is the predetermined result to be set regardless of the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory means.

The above configuration has the above feature gC1 as a method for determining the duration of the game-use action when the result of the specific judgment is also a predetermined result, making it possible to appropriately set the duration of the game-use action according to the situation.

Feature gC3. The period of the game operation that can be set in the first predetermined state has a relatively long first period (8 seconds) and a relatively short second period (4 seconds),
The first means enables the second period to be set as a period for the game operation in the first predetermined state when the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (two),
The gaming machine described in feature gC1 or feature gC2 is characterized in that the second means makes it possible to set a third period (1 sec) shorter than the second period as the period of the gaming operation when the second predetermined state is reached.

In the above configuration, in the first predetermined state, the period for the game play operation is set using two different periods, the first and second, based on whether the number of reserved memories in the determination information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. In the second predetermined state, a fixed third period, which is even shorter than the shorter second period, is set regardless of the number of reserved memories. This allows game play in the second predetermined state to be completed quickly, and shortens the waiting period until the second predetermined state ends.

Feature gC4. A gaming machine as described in Feature gC3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing a specific effect (achievement effect, ending effect, etc.) across multiple play times in a situation where the second predetermined state is in effect (a function that causes the effect control device 143 to execute achievement effect across the 52nd to 55th special game times).

In the above configuration, the effects are performed across multiple play times in the second predetermined state, where the duration of the play-time actions in each play time is short. This allows the effects to be performed while ensuring a sufficiently long duration even when the duration of the play-time actions is short.

Feature gC5. A means for executing a reach effect when a predetermined event (a variation pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect) is established in a game (a function for executing a special chart variation display process in the effect control device 143),
A means for preventing the reach effect from being executed regardless of whether the predetermined event is established or not in a game in the second predetermined state, or for preventing the predetermined event from being established in a game in the second predetermined state (such as a configuration in which a variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect is not set in a variable display time table for a miss in the second special chart);
A gaming machine according to any one of features gC1 to gC4, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the reach effect is not performed during a game in the second predetermined state, preventing the duration of the game-use action during that game in question from becoming too long. This allows the duration of a short game-use action in the second predetermined state to be set to a fixed length, making it possible to quickly consume game times in the second predetermined state.

This feature can also be expressed as comprising "means (a function for executing game state transition processing in the main control device 162) for granting a specific benefit (open/close execution mode) based on the result of the specific judgment being a specific result (jackpot result); means (a function for executing special symbol variable display processing in the effect control device 143) for executing a reach effect when a predetermined event (a variation pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect) is achieved in a game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a non-specific result (a loss result) different from the specific result (a function for executing special symbol variable display processing in the effect control device 143); and means for preventing the reach effect from being executed regardless of whether the predetermined event is achieved when the result of the specific judgment in a game round in the second predetermined state is the non-specific result, or means for preventing the predetermined event from being achieved when the result of the specific judgment in a game round in the second predetermined state is the non-specific result (e.g., a configuration in which a variation pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect is not set in the variable display time table for losses in the second special symbol)."

Feature gC6. The game state has a plurality of game states including a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
A means for enabling a game to be played in the second game state in a situation where the first predetermined state is in effect (a function for setting the support mode to a high frequency support mode in a transition process when the opening/closing execution mode is ended by the main control device 162);
A means for enabling a game to be played in the first game state in a situation where the second predetermined state is being established (a function for ending the high frequency support mode and switching to the low frequency support mode in the high frequency support mode ending process by the main control device 162);
A gaming machine according to any one of features gC1 to gC5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, advantageous game rounds are played in the first predetermined state, and unfavorable game rounds are played in the second predetermined state. In other words, the end of the advantageous state causes a switch from the first predetermined state to the second predetermined state. By applying the configuration of feature gC1 to this configuration, game rounds in the second predetermined state can be played quickly, shortening the waiting period until the second predetermined state ends.

Feature gC7. The system has a first state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means or is more likely to enter, and a second state (low frequency support mode) in which a game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry means or is less likely to enter than in the first state,
A game is played in the first predetermined state when the game is in the first state, and a game is played in the second predetermined state when the game is in the second state.
A gaming machine described in any one of features gC1 to gC6, characterized in that in the second predetermined state, a game corresponding to the judgment information reserved and stored in the first state is executed.

With the above configuration, it is possible to quickly consume the remaining reserved game turns that are played after the first state, in which a ball can or is likely to be scored into the specified ball scoring means, ends. This makes it possible to shorten the waiting period until the remaining reserved game turns end, even while incorporating a reserve memory function.

Feature gC8. The device is provided with a means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of granting a specific benefit (open/close execution mode) based on the result of the specific judgment being a specific result (jackpot result),
The probability states in which the specific result is obtained in the specific determination include a first probability state (low probability mode) in which the probability of the specific result is relatively low, and a second probability state (high probability mode) in which the probability of the specific result is relatively high,
A gaming machine described in any of features gC1 to gC7, characterized in that the specific judgment in the second probability state is made in the first predetermined state, and the specific judgment in the first probability state is made in the second predetermined state.

In the above configuration, game rounds in the second probability state, in which the probability of a specific result is increased by a specific judgment, are played in the first predetermined state, and game rounds in the first probability state, in which the probability of a specific result is decreased by a specific judgment, are played in the second predetermined state. In other words, the end of the high-probability state (second probability state) causes a switch from the first predetermined state to the second predetermined state. By applying the configuration of feature gC1 described above to this configuration, game rounds in the second predetermined state can be played quickly, and the waiting period until the end of the second predetermined state can be shortened.

Feature gC9. A means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-saving game state in the main control device 162, and a process for suddenly entering the time-saving game state) that can grant a predetermined benefit (such as transition to a high-frequency support mode) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific event (such as a special failure result, the number of failure games reaching the second number, or winning the second transition lottery), and
means for preventing the specified bonus from being awarded even if the specified event occurs in the second specified state, or preventing the specified event from occurring in the second specified state (a function for preventing a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state by not setting a flag for suddenly starting time-shortened game if a special miss result occurs in the remaining reserved special game rounds in the process for determining a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162, a configuration in which a special miss result is not included in the lottery results that can be obtained in the win/lose table referenced in the remaining reserved special game rounds);
A gaming machine according to any one of features gC1 to gC8, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, assuming that a specified bonus is awarded when a specific event occurs, the specified bonus is not awarded even if the specific event occurs in the second specified state, or the specific event does not occur in the second specified state. In this case, players tend to lose interest in the number of rounds played in the second specified state. However, by applying the configuration of feature gC1 to such a configuration, it is possible to quickly play the number of rounds played in the second specified state and shorten the waiting period until the second specified state ends.

Feature gC10. The game state has a plurality of game states including a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
A gaming machine described in feature gC9, wherein the predetermined benefit is a transition to the second gaming state.

In the above configuration, the occurrence of a specific event causes a transition to a second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. However, in the second predetermined state, where such a transition does not occur, game turns can be played quickly, thereby shortening the waiting period until the second predetermined state ends.

Feature gC11. The game state has a third game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and different from the second game state,
A means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to the third game state based on the result of the specific determination being a specific result (jackpot result);
A means for transitioning to the second gaming state without passing through the third gaming state when the specific event is established (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control device 162);
The gaming machine described in feature gC10 is characterized by comprising:

With the above configuration, if a specific event occurs, it is possible to transition to the second gaming state without passing through the third gaming state. In other words, because a specific result (a winning result) is not required to transition to the second gaming state, the probability of transitioning to the second gaming state (the probability of a specific event occurring) can be set independently of the probability of winning the specific result, allowing for greater flexibility in designing the ease of transitioning to the second gaming state.

Feature gC12. The gaming machine described in Feature gC11 is configured so that the specific event can occur in response to the execution of the specific determination or the execution of a predetermined determination (such as a lottery for the type of losing result) made as a result of the specific determination.

In the above configuration, a specific event can occur in response to the execution of a specific judgment or the execution of a predetermined judgment that is made conditional on that execution, allowing the player to receive a determination as to whether or not a specific result will be achieved and whether or not a specific event will occur within a single game round. This allows a game round in which a transition to the second game state is permitted to function as a chance game round in which the player can attempt both a transition to the third game state by winning a specific result and a transition to the third game state by the execution of a specific event, making the game more entertaining.

Feature gC13. A gaming machine as described in Feature gC11 or Feature gC12, wherein the specific event occurs in a specific case (a special miss result) when the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result (a miss result) different from the specific result.

In the above configuration, a specific event occurs in some cases where the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result (a so-called miss result) that differs from the specific result. Therefore, when a judgment to transition to the third gaming state and a judgment to transition to the second gaming state are made within a single game session, both judgments can be made simultaneously while avoiding interference between the judgments.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the features gA1 to gA15, gB1 to gB15, and gC1 to gC13 can be applied individually to each of the features gC1 to gC13 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other feature groups gA to gC can be applied individually to each of the configurations of feature groups gA to gC described above, or the respective technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, they can also be combined across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine (ball-operated reel-type gaming machine): A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as it finally stops; the pattern fluctuation begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern fluctuation is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses game balls into the ball receiving tray; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10...Pachinko machine, 143...Performance control device, 162...Main control device.

Claims (2)

an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
an attachment determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game operation is started based on the execution of the award determination by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, with a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination being given;
A reserve notification means for executing a reserve notification by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved games before execution;
a destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes a target of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes a target of the grant determination;
A specific mode means for making the notification mode of the hold notification a specific mode different from a normal mode based on the determination result of the destination determination means;
Equipped with
The specific mode is set to a plurality of types of modes with different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
a means for determining which of the plurality of types of notification modes should be used as the notification mode for the hold notification based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means;
a means for storing, in a predetermined storage area, predetermined information that can identify which of the plurality of types of notification modes the notification mode of the hold notification is, for the hold notification of the specific mode;
Equipped with
In a situation where the notification mode of a predetermined hold notification is set to the specific mode in the first performance state, a second performance state can be set in which the hold notification according to the specific mode or the hold notification is not executed for at least the predetermined hold notification,
an execution means for executing, after the second presentation state has ended, at least the predetermined hold notification in the same notification mode as the notification mode before the second presentation state was entered, among the plurality of types of modes, based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area, without executing the determination based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means;
The transition from the first presentation state to the second presentation state can be executed without the intervention of a player's operation,
The execution means can be configured to execute, after the second performance state ends, the predetermined hold notification in the normal mode without executing the hold notification in the normal mode, and to execute the hold notification in the same mode as the notification mode before the second performance state is entered,
The special information acquired in the second performance state is identified by the destination identification means in the second performance state,
a means for enabling a predetermined notification corresponding to the number of reserved calls to be executed, the predetermined notification being different from the reserved call notification;
With respect to the hold notification of the special information acquired in the second performance state, a means for making the hold notification or the hold notification according to the specific mode not be executed in the second performance state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising : an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
an acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
an attachment determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus to a player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game operation is started based on the execution of the award determination by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, with a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination being given;
a means for executing a hold display by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means, the hold display being capable of displaying a display that allows a player to recognize the number of reserved game turns before execution and a display that allows a player to recognize the execution of a reserved game turn;
a destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes a target of the grant determination, at a timing before the special information becomes a target of the grant determination;
A specific mode means that can change the display mode of the hold display to a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the identification result of the destination identification means;
Equipped with
The specific mode is set to a plurality of types of modes with different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
A means for determining which of the plurality of types of display modes the hold display should be based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means;
A means for storing, in a predetermined storage area, predetermined information that can identify which of the plurality of types of display modes the display mode of the hold display of the specific mode is;
Equipped with
In a situation where the display mode of a predetermined hold display is set to the specific mode in the first performance state, a second performance state can be set in which at least the predetermined hold display is set to the hold display according to the specific mode or the hold display is not executed,
After the second performance state ends, an execution means is provided for executing the hold display in the same display mode as the display mode before the second performance state is entered among the plurality of modes based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area without executing the determination based on the result of the determination by the destination determination means,
The transition from the first presentation state to the second presentation state can be executed without the intervention of a player's operation,
The execution means can be configured to execute, after the second performance state ends, the predetermined reserved display in the same display mode as the display mode before the second performance state is entered, without executing the reserved display in the normal mode,
The special information acquired in the second performance state is identified by the destination identification means in the second performance state,
A means for enabling a predetermined notification corresponding to the number of reservations to be executed, which is different from the reservation display;
With respect to the reserved display of the special information acquired in the second performance state, a means for making the reserved display or the reserved display according to the specific mode not be executed in the second performance state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising :